The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutDetention Center Phinizy Road Augusta Richmond GA DOCUMENT NAME: [).t:/en}--,'on Cef'7f.er PhlfJ/zy!?e;x;..C! . DOCUMENT TYPE: Cb()'~~ YEAR: r q g lo BOX NUMBER: I FILE NUMBER: / 2 G 71 NUMBER OF PAGES: I"?? 7'(. mop; /5 LARRY E. SCONYERS Chairman FREDDIE L. HANDY Vice-Chairman BOARD (Of C01~l}lKrrSSrrONERS HENRY H. BRIGHAM JERRY BRIGHAM Wm. .WllLlE' H. MAYS. III lEE NEEl. III J. B. POWEll MOSES TODD "\. ROOM 605 . CITY-COUNTY.~UNICIPAL BLDG. (11) AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30911 " Bus. (706) 821'2488 Fax No. (706) 722,5984 LINDA W. BEAZLEY County Administrator WALTER S. HORNSBY. III Asst. County Administrator " JAMES B. WAll County Attorney May 6, 1996 Reply To: P. O. BOX 2125 AU)lUe1e. GA 30903 "Ms. Lena Bonner Clerk, Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council ~~b~E19or, City-County Bldg. <AldgWs't:a: ,GA 30911 . ""'._,~.!;~.~;' .._:,'"r....~ .~:.~,. '10 : ~-'- : ':. Dear. LEma: ."':' . _.',h ,_,_~'_d._'.,.""'_"_' . . ,.- '-.,--- ~-~...._......_..- -'-~' . ,." .: \':<:' .,: I enclose herewith' the6riginal fully executed copy of . thEi'.:cd~tract with' Beers cor)!~tFdct'fon 'Company for the construction c5f:~)~h~' Phinizy Road Jail Facility.' Please place these' iri':'the' Commission Council's permanent 'records. Thanking you and with best personal regards, I am ~~~:h?~. P . t..~._A-' ;..- ",.', '~r:.:... 'A~ Enc'l'osure truly, / cc: .' Mrs. Lfn'daoqW:-' Beazle-y"'~' '~h~riff Charles B. Webs~er . ~,., - *' . '. .,_':." . ....j:.: '" c "'~:~ :)1 ~:;i; ~:~:2A:"~ . ':1 cf-~+/c2~79 a ,~' , ,. ~~ ; r , , CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS " . >.~. ~ I ~ ~~ ~ - .~~,;':., . i . :... 't ~, . s:. '-'f""_ I FOR THE AUGUSTA/RICHMOND COUNTY DETENTION CENTER PHINIZY ROAD '.. -- . ;~; - (~1 ~'~ ... ~ . ~ ", ~~:. . " . 1 :.. ,~ )c", .... ~< '. ' .. /.;.. '" l. T\ ~ RICHMOND COUNTY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA , .;.. <l .-, : ~ ' . .':; " U t~. l' 'i. ~ ._, . , T . . ;0 " :.;.. ~ ;1 t; ~ .l." \./ ~ - ' .' . QWNER Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government . ..., . '/ , .. ".~.~~ ';:, . ~ ,......, ..~.- <" .'- '" . 1'., ~ Sections: 00030 through 06402 Specification Book 1 of 2 '1 . . . . , -X!il~~ l[~~~'~~t t., :...... ~ .;...... ~~_ . ,I" .- ,', ll"~'!:>}~i 'li<4 ~'f~:""-:~-- : ~~~r , ~J" Prepared by: PRECISION PLANNING, INC. Planners, Engineers, Architects & Surveyors 400 Pike Boulevard P. O. Box 2210 Lawrenceville, Georgia 30246. (770) 338-8000 -'7'f!?" . /' --._~.- ""' ....; ';'<1 - "- { ~i" ...' " December, 1995 ~',~' ..' '-. / .' '" ';'," '\" . '-- ,. . . ~~ . ~;:'-.I,Y_t~~" ~ '-:l . , ".. r, ,,!;-'~ 't~:-_ ~"\~f~~~.'t...;-/;. ,. 3 U~ ~~ ~m ~. 00 m~ - 0 ~u ~~. ~ o } ,. CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND. EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BV THE POLICIES BELOW. lied Coverage Corp. o North Broadway Jericho, NV 11753 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE GA 30303 COMPANY A LEITER COMPANY B LETTER COMPANY C LEITER COMPANY D LEITER COMPANY E LE ITER Insurance Co. State of PA 516-733-9200 Beers Construction Company 70 Ellis Street, N.E. Atlanta L:;;>LJi:'1:,:A~":::m::'mm:::fdlm::t::rwttmillmr:m::m@::::::m:':'jt:W:::tm::M:J;m:t:r:::::::::::;:;:i::::::r:::::\:m:m:m::::::,::::m::::;d:mm::r':::tmmM:&::MLMMlliif::W;MllHl::m::l:m:MlfMil::tU:mm::mii:mtt:::m: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THA T THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICA lED.NOTWITHST ANDING ANY REOUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCWENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERlIFICA TE MAYBE ISSUED OR MA Y PERT AIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES, LMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAMS, 00 L TYPE 01' INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EffECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATlO DATE (MMlOO/YY) DATE (MM/OO/VY) LIMITS CClM>1ERCIAL GENERAL LIABIlITY CLAIMS MADE 0 OCCUR, OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PRO!. GENERAL AGGREGA IE PRODUCTS-CeMP/OP AGG. PERSONAL & AOV. INJURY EACH OCCURRENCE FIRE DAMAGE (An MED. EXPENSE (An CeMBINED SINGlE LIMIT $ $ $ $ one lire) $ one erson $ GENER AL LI ABIL IT Y AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO All OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON-OWNED AUTOS GARAGE lIABllI TY BODILY INJURY (Pe, person! BODILY INJURY (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE EXCESS LIABILITY A X UMBREllA FORM OTHER THAN UMBREllA FORM 4195-8504 8/31/95 8/31/96 EACH OCCURRENCE AGGREGA IE 10000000 10000000 j ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ j j ~ j ~ [~1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1! ~ ~ i i 1 i 1 ~ 1 ~ 1 ~ 1 i i i 1! 1 i!! j j ~ j j 1 f i; i i i j j j j j j j j 1 j 1 ~ j! 1 j j j j j j WORKER'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY STA TUTORY LIMITS EACH ACCIDENT DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT DlSEASE-EACH EMPLOYEE :: 1:/::: [:::!: ~:(!: n;:~::~' i.:: OTHER DESCRIPTION 01' OPEAATIONSlLOCATIONS'VEHICLESfSPECIAL ITEMS Re: Richmond County Detention Center is an Additional Insured, (if required by contract) on the above Umbrella Pol icy, but only with respect to liab. arisin out of the 0 erations of the Name~ Inrds. & if added to the GL Pol ic r:::: SHOULD ANY OF TH~ ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE if::::: EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF. THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO II MAIL 30 DAYSWRITTENNOTICETOTHECERTIFICATEHOLDERNAMEDTOTHE :::::::: LEFT. BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL MPOSE NO OBLlGA liON OR I::::::: L1ABlITYOF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY,ITSAGENTSORREPRESENT A TlVES. . ft AUTHORIZED REPRE Augusta/Richmond County Consol ida1ed Government 05 City/County Bui Iding Augusta, GA 30911 102880023 ::;l89:~P::~~MIX?!!g)::::":lm::;:I::::'IT'I':'::';::;:::::'::::::::::::::)::j:':;:::::::::::::::::)::;:;::m:':::'::):;:;':::]::;:::"':':":':'::::nm:::::']W:;:::]]n;,:::::,::,:",,:,,::::::,::..' . ":A9R~R':99T~r<<:"it!R~::J!!W]:' :\ THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR . ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE PRODUCER JOHNSON & HIGGINS OF GEORGIA, INC, 191 PEACHTREE STREET, N,E" SUITE 3400 ~NTA, GEORGIA 30303-1762 NO(404) 586-0000 FAX NO(404)586-8208 TN: BARBARA SMITH COMPANY A Argonaut Insurance Company INSURED Beers Construction Company 70 Ellis Street, N,E. Atlanta, GA 30303-2499 COMPANY B COMPANY C THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES, LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS, co TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS LTR DATE (MM/DDIYY) DATE (MM/DDIYY) GENERAL LIABILITY LC 70-565-017502 08/31/95 08/31/96 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 4.000,000 A COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 CLAIMS MADE ~ OCCUR PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 2,000,000 X OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 X BLANKET CONTRACTUAL lAB, FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire) $ 100,000 MED EXP (Anyone person) $ 5.000 A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY CA 70-565-017504 08/31/95 08/31/96 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 2.000,000 X ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ NON,OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT $ AGGREGATE $ EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND WC 70-565-017500 08/31/95 08/31/96 X STATUTORY LIMITS EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY 1,000,000 EACH ACCIDENT $ THE PROPRIETOR/ X INCL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000.000 PARTNERS/EXECUTIVE OFFICERS ARE: EXCL DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS (LIMITS MAY BE SUBJECT TO RETENTIONS) RE: Richmond County Detention Center The Certificate Holder is an Additional Insured, (If Required by Contract), on the above General Liability Policy, but only with respect to Liability arising out of the operations of the Named Insured. SE:~f!~15mf,g'pt;w:\\::::':\::mm/m{ """'::':@ANpgijP.\w@it::::':'::::: ,. :.:.;.:.;.;.:.;.;. .................. .................. . .................. d. .. ..... .......... Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Wemment City/County Building , _ ugusta, Georgia 30911 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL ~ DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT. BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY GENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES, A9:9::ffl!;t!?~~$.HM@)}:tt}tt:'t!tt:t::!::!t:::m't:tt::::::!:::::t:::mm .... .. .... ................... ....... . JOHNSON HIGGINS Johnson & Higgins of Georgia, Inc. 191 Peachtree Street NE, Suite 3400 Atlanta, Georgia 30303-1762 Phone: (404) 586-??oo Fax: (404) 586-8208 245 Certificate of Insurance r l Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government 605 City/County Building Augusta, Georgia 30911 L J We, the undersigned Insurance Brokers, hereby certify that the following described insurance is in force at this date, of which 100 percent is insured with: Westchester Fire Insurance Company (hereinafter called the Underwriters). COVER NOTE OR POLICY NO: IMA428909 PERIOD: From: April 1, 1996 To: April 1, 1997 NAME OF ASSURED: Beers Construction Company . ADDRESS OF ASSURED: 70 Ellis Street, NE, Atlanta, GA 30303-2499 PROPERTY: Richmond County Detention Center, Augusta, Georgia . LIMITS: $16,155,000 EARTHQUAKE AND FLOOD SUB-LIMITS: $5,000,000. PARTICULARS OF INSURANCE: "All Risks" of physical loss qr damage. This Certificate of Insurance is furnished as a convenience only. It provides infonnation about the issuance of the above mentioned policy and sets forth certain features of the. coverage as they are stated in the policy as it stands on the date of issue hereof. This certificate confers no rights on the holder(s). Said policy, which contains the full provisions of the contract and of the insurance granted thereby, is subject to endorsement, alteration, transfer, assignment, and cancellation without notice to the holder(s) of this certificate. DATED: April 1. 1996 JOHNSON & HIGGINS OF GEORGIA, INC. By:4~.~ /1 ~ ~ . . . [~ Addendum No. One (1) ADDENDUM Date: February 13. 1996 Architect's Project No. 95-052 Project: Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center - Phinizy Road Facility CLIENT: Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government Contract for: General Contracting This Addendum fonns a part of the Contract Documents and Construction Drawings and modifies the original Bid Documents for the above referenced project. CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SPECIFICATIONS 1. Section 00030 - Advertisement for Bids Revise the Advertisement to read: "Bids will be received by the Augusta/Richmond County Commission Council at the Purchasing Department Room 207, Municipal Building/530 Greene Street, Augusta, Georgia 30911 no later than 11:00 a.m. on Thursday, February 29, 1996. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at this location. Any bid received after 11 :00 a.m. on bid opening date will not be considered by OWNER. Bids will be evaluated by OWNER and the project award is anticipated u'pon completion of this evaluation. " 2. Pre-Bid Meeting Minutes from conference held Thursday, February 8, 1996 are attached (Pages 2 - 8). Page 1 .. . ' . . . ,i' Pre-Bid Conference Meeting Minutes AugustalRichmond County Detention Center Augusta, Georgia Thursday, February 8, 1996, 2:00 p.m. Transition Team Trailer Doug Shaw, Project Architect of Precision Planning, Inc. called the meeting to order. Doug Shaw introduced the attendees to the Richmond County Transition Team (Charles Toole, Bill Redd, and Julian Brown), and also to Keven Mack of Richmond County Economic Development, and Mr. G.W. Amerson, Chairman of the Citizens Advisory Committee. Joe Powell of Precision Planning, Inc. reminded the attendees about the scheduled mixer to be held that evening. Mr. Powell asked Keven Mack to explain the purpose of the mixer. Mr. Mack explained that,the mixer's basic purpose was for the introduction of general contractors to local minority sub-contractors in order to encourage the use of local minority businesses. Doug Shaw announced that three (3) addenda are anticipated to be issued next week to all plan holders regarding the following issues: 1. 2. 3. Drawing clarifications. Meeting minutes. Questions and other clarifications. Doug Shaw opened the 'floor for specific questions. . Question: An attendee asked for clarification of the bid phase with regard to construction price and time. Answer: 1. Award of the contract will go to the lowest qualified bidder with approved bond and references. The intention is, should all the bidders be equally qualified, the contract will be awarded to the lowest bidder. 2. Construction time is identified in the agreement section of fhe project manual. \ Question: \ An attendee asked to know what is required to be turned in at bid t~me? Answer: The following is required to be submitted at bid time: Page 2 o 9 . . . c 1. 2. 3. Completed Bid Form. Bid Bond. Qualification Statement. All other necessary items to be submitted, as stated in the specifications will be requested of the lowest bidder(s). Joe Powell clarified that the product substitution deadline for submittaLis 10 days prior to the bid deadline. This final date for submittal of product substitutions will be Monday, February 12, 1996. An addendum will be issued to all plan holders with a list of these "approved equals." Doug Shaw asked attendees for any questions regarding the instructions to bidders. There were no immediate questions. Joe Powell asked the attendees if they were all clear on the bid time, date and place. Mr. Powell reminded bidders of the importance of their familiarity with the bid time, date and place as no bids will be accepted if late. An attendee asked for the official time keeper. The response from the Richmond County Transition Team was that Ann Barker of Richmond County will be the official time keeper. Question: An attendee asked for site review. Answer: Joe Powell answered that there would be a trip out to the site following the conclusion of the pre- bid meeting. Mr. Powell clarified that all questions asked at the site should be addressed to the group as a whole out of fairness to all other contractors. Question: An attendee asked if other contractors not attending the site visit will get a copy of the meeting minutes? Answer: All plan holders will receive a copy of the complete meeting minutes including the visit to the site. Question: An attendee asked to receive a copy of the pran holders list. Answer: The list of plan holders will be submitted with one of the addenda issued next week. Doug Shaw discussed the topography of the site. Page 3 ~ :, . Question: An attendee asked if the site is secured? Answer: Doug Shaw answered that the si.te is not secured at present. Question: An attendee asked if it is required for the contractor to fence in or secure the site? Answer: Doug Shaw responded that the contractor should have insurance on all equipment. Joe Powell added that fencing is for the protectionof the contractor. This issue of fencing will be clarified in an addendum. Question: An attendee asked about the status of the building permit." Answer: Doug Shaw answered that the plans have been submitted to the State Fire Marshal for review. Question: An attendee asked about disadvantaged companies. . Answer: Joe Powell read item #6 from specification section 00101. Mr. Powell explained that the reason for the mixer being held that evening was to benefit the general contractors. They could meet available local minority, women and disadvantaged sub-contractors. Question: , An attendee asked if the site is within the city limits? Answer: Richmond County and Augusta now have a consolidated government, thereby eliminating any separation between city and county. The area is now divided into districts. The construction site is within the Suburban District and also falls under the jurisdiction of the State Fire Marshal. ~~oo: \ An attendee asked about the procedure for requesting inspection? \ i t . Page 4 ...... . . . " Answer: Joe Powell answered that all requests for inspection will be handled by the contractor. Doug Shaw added that the Official Fire Marshal set and documents will be kept at the construction site. Question: An attendee asked about working out coordination of construction between the elevator manufacturer and the Fire Marshal. Answer: Doug Shaw answered that this coordination is the responsibility of the contractor. Question: An attendee asked about the duct work in the chases of the cell areas with regard to blocking-out of the pre'-cast planking system. Answer: An addendum issued next week will address this issue with a detail showing how the plank system will pull back to allow the admittance of duct work into the mechanical chases at the cells. Question: An attendee asked if the bid date will hold? Answer: Doug Shaw responded that as of 2/8/96, the answer is "yes." Question: An attendee asked if there is access to electrical boxes in each mechanical chase for individual access including locking and lighting? Answer: The question will be discussed with the project electrical engineer and will be answered in an addendum. Question: An attendee asked if there were to be no receptacles in the cells? \ ; Answer: , Doug Shaw answered that there are not electrical receptacles in the: individual cells, only in the adjoining dayrooms. \ Question: An attendee asked about the last date for approving sub-contractors. Page 5 .i ~ -. . Answer: Joe Powell clarified that the pre-approval process is for 'approving product substitutions, not sub- contractors. The last day to submit for "As-Equal" approval is Monday, February 12, 1996. Joe Powell explained that the Citizens Advisory Chair, Mr. G. W. Amerson, will be acting as the Owner's Representative and working with the Transition Team.. Question: An attendee asked whether the contractor or the architect will be responsible for materials testing? Answer: This shall be the responsibility of the general contractor. Question: An attendee asked about the Owner's trailer on the construction site. Answer: The Transition Team will have a trailer on site which they will handle directly. Question: An attendee asked if Augusta has changed their building permit fees? . Answer: Keven Mack spoke with the Augusta/Richmond County Building Department and stated that the Augusta/Richmond County Building Department is currently unaware of any proposed change in fee. Question: An attendee asked about the location of rebar on the structural plans at roof penetrations of pre~ cast planks. Answer: Doug Shaw answered that any penetration through the roof planks shall have rebar. Question: i An attendee asked about the location of a roof framing steel plan. \ \ Answer: \ Doug indicated that this information could be found with the structural drawings and for the attendee to make sure he had all the necessary drawings. . Page 6 ,! )> Doug Shaw announced plans to now visit the site. . A T THE SITE Joe Powell noted that the nearby orange flags indicated the location of soil borings. Mr. Powell discussed the orientation of the building on the site and asked for any questions. Question: An attendee asked about the source of power to the site. Answer: Doug Shaw answered that the power will come from Phinizy Road. Also, the water line is on the same side of the road as the site, and the gas line is down the road. The power company will bring service to the transformer. Question: An attendee asked about tree removal. . Answer: Doug Shaw answered that the landscape plan "is a better indication of the tree line than is the civil plan. This issue will be clarified in an addendum. . Question: An attendee asked that if cut soil would not be acceptable as fill, how would this issue be addressed? Answer: This condition will be addressed and resolved if discovered. The Soils Report is provided in the specifications. Question: An attendee asked if burning would be allowed on site? Answer: This issue will need to be addressed by the general contractor wit~ local officials. Question: An attendee asked if there are any existing utilities on site? Answer: No. . Page 7 '" . . . l~ Question: An attendee asked about bid alternates. Answer: There are no alternates. Doug Shaw concluded the meeting by restating the anticipation of the three (3) addenda next week. Meeting ended at 3:30 p.m. Attendees: Julian Brown; R.C.S.D. - Charles Toole, R.C.S.D. - Chris Powell, Beers Construction Co. - Bill Lucas, A.K.E. Steel - Atlanta - Keith Glenn, A.K.E. Steel - Peter Menk, The Menk Company - Keven Mack, Richmond County - Rich Rutherford, Augusta Fire Protection - P.H.F. Smith, IV, The Menk Company - Gil Engeyer, Landis & GSR - Ken Cornwell, Doug Dailey Company - Steve Cole, Werts Site Preparation - Rick Lentz, Trafalgar House Construction, Inc'. - Ben Nash, William R. Nash, Inc. - Douglas Doyle, D D E - Tim Buck, Caddell Construction - Del Buck, Caddell Construction - Tom Key, Caddell Construction - Walter Woodall, Bill Harbert Construction - Fred Calloway, Southeastern Security Systems - Douglas Pender, PSI - Will McKnight, McKnight Construction Co. - Jimmy Long, Gold Mech, Inc. - Joseph Powell, Precision Planning, Inc. - Geri Sams, Economic Development - G.W. Amerson, Richmond County - Bill Redd, R.C.S.D. - Doug Shaw, Precision Planning, Inc. - Stephanie Voltolin, Precision Planning, Inc. END OF ADDENDUM NO. ONE (1) Page 8 . . . !. l' ~," .... Addendum No. Two (2) ADDENDUM Date: February 14. 1996 Architect's Project No. 95-052 Project: Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center - Phinizy Road Facility CLIENT: Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government Contract for: General Contracting This Addendumfonns a part of the Contract Documents and Construction Drawings and modifies the original Bid Documents for the above referenced project. CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SPECIFICATIONS 1. APPROVED PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURERS "As Equal" Requests The following manufacturers are acceptable suppliers (and/or installers) of the listed equipment p~nding full compliance with all items listed in the Specifications and Drawings. SECTION 11191 - SECURITY HOLLOW METAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. 6. Georgia Detention Window, Inc. (Frames Only) SECTION 11194 - DETENTION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 4. Doug Dailey Company. Inc. Page 1 . . . '~ (! PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE C. Other Manufacturers. 1. Bronze Craft Guardware 361 Series. 2.10 HINGES C. Manufacturers. 1. Stanley (IHTCBI90l/1961 & 853/854). 2. Bronze Craft Guardware 316 Series. SECTION 11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.03 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS F. The following fabricators are approved for this section. 5. Low-Temp Manufacturing Company. 2.04 EQUIPMENT LIST Item 39 - Deep Fat Fryer 5. c. Vulcan GRD85/MF85. Item 40 - Tilting Skillet 4. c. Vulcan E40TB. Item 42 - Hot Food Cabinet 4. c. Vulcan VELT-40. Item 47 - Four Burner Range _ 4. c. Vulcan GH45. 4. d. The Montaque Company. Item 48 - Convection Steamer 4. c. Vulcan VSX24E5. Item 50 - Trunion Kettle 4. c. Vulcan VEC-12. Item 59 - Dishwasher 4. c. Stero. Item 65 - Tray Delivery Cart 3. b. Crimsco. Item 68 - Hot Food Counter 4. c. Set-N-Serve - Cart Line 11. 4. d. Low-Temp Manufacturing Co. Item 69 - Cold Food Counter 4. c. Set-N-Serve - Cart Line 11. 4. d. Low-Temp Manufacturing Co. Page 2 I \ \ i " . . . ") .. Item 70 - Flat Top Counter 3. c. SetoN-Serve - Cart Line 11. 3. d. Low-Temp Manufact1,lring Co. Item 71 - Beverage Counter 3. c. SetoN-Serve - Cart Line 11. ,3. d. Low-Temp Manufacturing Co. Make the following additions or corrections as follows: Item 66 - Meal Delivery System 1. Furnish meal delivery system, Model Tivoli III, as manufactured by Aladdin Synergetics, Inc. 2. Furnish as follows: a. One piece molded tray, b. Seamless construction. c. Foam insulated, d. Components to include the following: 1). 600 servers, Model #L64C. a) Verify color. 2). 45 covers, Model #L63B. 3). 12 liners-full. 4). 45 belt/buckle assemblies. 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Seco. Item 67 - Tray Make-Up Conveyor 2. f. I>elete casters. Furnish on stainless steel adjustable bullet feet. I>elete 10' cord and twist-lock plug. Hard wire with 4' cord to allow for cleaning. 2. g. SECTION 11195 - SECURITY ACCESSORIES AND FURNITURE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS B. B. B. 8. 9. 10. Maximum Security Products. Dec- Tech, Inc. Cells Correctional Equipment, Inc. Page 3 . . . l' ~ SECTION 07810 - PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. 4. Plasteco. 2.04 PLASTIC SKYLIGHT UNITS B. Curb: Curbs shall be constructed using, minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel with fully mitered and welded comers, 3" integral cant (except style #3 & #5) integral base plates, internally reinforced with 1" xI" x 1/8" steel angle (curbs with any side longer than 3'- 0"), factory insulated with 1-1/2" thick three pound density fiberglass insulation and factory installed pressure treated wood nailers. SECTION 07527 - SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.02 MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET ROOFING SYSTEM A. Modified Bituminous Sheet, General: 2. d. Soprema 25, 43. SECTION 10170 - SOLID PHENOLIC PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 3. Other Manufacturers a. Columbia Partitions. b. Design Rite. SECTION 08110 - StEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: following: Subject to compliance with requiremepts, provide product by one of the \ \ Palmetto Metal Products, Inc. \ Florida Hollow Metal Products, Inc." American Steel Products, Inc. 1. j. 1. k. 1. l. Page 4 . . . 11 ~ SECTION 05810 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 3. Pawling Corporation. 4. Construction Specialties, Inc. SECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.03 ALUMINUM COPING A. Interlocking Multi-Part Coping System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of coping formed from aluminum sheet to profile and of thickness indicated, minimum nominal 0.0276-inch (0.7-mm) thick, zinc-coated steel anchor plate or cleat located at coping joint, and formed aluminum gutter chair or gutter/splice plate or compression pad/gutter; with prefabricated inside and outside comers, miters welded before finishing without exposed fasteners. 2. f. Snap-Tite Coping; Architectural Products, Inc. SECTION 09521 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.02 BACKMOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALLPANELS B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. i. Kinetics Noise Control. SECTION 15870 - POWER VENTILATORS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.02 ROOF EXHAUSTERS G. Other Manufacturers 1. 2. Cook Ace and VCR, AU, EU Series. Breidert Air Products. \ \ \ 2,03 WALL EXHAUSTERS E. Other Manufacturers 1. Cook Ace Wall Series. Page 5 '" 2. Breidert Air Products. . 2.04 CABINET EXHAUST FANS E. Other Manufacturers 1. Cook Gemini. 2. Breidert Air Products. SECTION 15242 - VIERA TION ISOLATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS E. Vibration Eliminator Company. F. A VNEC (SANSH, CIH, FSS, RS). SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2,04 LAVATORY (P-2) B. Trim . 2. g. Moen 8470. 2.05. LAVATORY (P-2H) B. Trim g. 2.07 SHOWER FITTING HANDICAP (P-4) 2. Moen 8470. A. Trim 3. Other Manufacturers: a. MCC Powers Process Controls Model #P902H-R-1-8-Y-W. b. Speakman VS-1970-CH-SS. c. . Moen - 8345 with 12894. 2.08 SINK (P-5) B. Trim 2. g. Moen 8957. . Page 6 2.09 SINK (P-6) . B. Trim g. 2.10 SERVICE SINK (P-7) 2. Moen 8133 with 5000 7. B. Trim 2. g. Moen 8124. 2.11 DRINKING FOUNTAIN (P-8) C. Additional Manufacturers 1. Willoughby Industries, Inc. Model #DF-1013-96-FA. 2.12 SECURITY WATER CLOSET/LAVATORY (PP-l) A. Unit 2. d. Willoughby Industries, Inc. Model #ECW-1846-L/R-OF. 2.13 HANDICAPPED SECURITY WALL HUNG CLOSET (PP-lH) . A. Unit 2. d. Willoughby Industries, Inc. Model #ETW-1490-0F-BS 2.14 HANDICAPPED SECURITY SINK (PP-2H) A. Unit 2. d. Willoughby Industries, Inc. Model #H5-1015-FA. 2.15 SECURITY SHOWER (PP-3) A. Unit 2. d. Willoughby Industries, Inc. . Model #WRS-MV-RD D. Other Manufacturer: Leonard #M-lO-E-RF mixing valve. . Page 7 . 2,16 HANDICAPPED SECURITY SHOWER (PP-3H) . A. Unit 2. d. Willoughby Industries, Inc. Model #WRS-MV-MV-RD-BF D. Other Manufacturer: Leonard M-I0-E-RF mixing valve. 2.17 RECESSED HOT AND COLD WATER HOSE BOX (RHB) A. Unit 2. d. Willoughby Industries, Inc. Model #WAV-8156. SECTION 15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (DWH) A. Manufacturers: 2. e. Teledyne Laars Model VW. 2.02 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMP .. B. Other Manufacturers 1. Grundfos Pump Company. Model UP. 2.03 SEWAGE EJECTOR (GP-I-GRINDER PUMP) 2. b. Barnes Pump, Inc. Model #SE41ISP Package System. SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING PIPING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.17 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturer: Precision Plumbing Products "SC" S~ies. \ --e Page 8 ~ SECTION 15936 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CEILING DIFFUSERS F. Nailor Industries Model #'s RNS, 49-240-0, 51EC, 61EC, 61DV-O, 61DH. G. Metal Aire Model #5700. 2.04 SECURITY GRILLES B. Other Manufacturers 1. Kees Inc. - Model #'s SEG-9, SG. 2.05 DOOR GRILLES - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS G. Metal Aire Model #H400 RRS. 2.06 LOUVERS B. Other Manufacturers . 1. Louvers & Dampers Model #El-43. American W mg & Vent Model #LE-23. 2. SECTION 07270 - FIRESTOPPING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL D, Other manufacturers of similar or comparable products. 1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI). SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.04 CURING MATERIAL 2. W.R. Meadows; Sealtight CS-309/30, . Page 9 2.06 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE MIXTURES . E. Bonding Agent: W.R. Meadows; Seal tight Intralok. F. Epoxy ASTM C 881: W.R. Meadows; Sealtight Rezi-Weld 1000. 3.09 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES E. Chemical hardener finish. 5. Manufacturer: W.R. Meadows; Sealtight Pena-Lith. SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS D. Hinges. 4. McKinney. SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS . A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide doors by one of the following: 1. f. Graham GPC Doors. SECTION 07527 - SBS - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.11 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM The installing roofing contractor shall provide a maintenance program designed to minimize roof problems and control leaks and shall adhere to the terms of the 'membrane manufacturer's warranty and/or technical specifications, as they relate to the maintenance and care of the roof system for a period of five years. The program shall be presented to owncrr prior to contract award. A full- time employee of the installing contractor shall provide bi-arlnual inspections (no less than five months between inspections) with written and photographic reRorts along with recommendations of the roof conditions. Repairs made to the roof system shall be per the membrane manufacturer's specifications and documented and reported to the membrane mapufacturer. Bi-annual inspection reports shall also be sent to membrane manufacturer. This program shall be in effect for the warranty period specified. The membrane manufacturer or a representative of the manufacturer shall also be available for additional inspections at the owner's request within ten (10) calendar days of the request. ., Page 10 . 2. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. . L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. . REJECTED PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURERS "As Equal" Requests HPG Roofing Systems Type Plus. Commercial Stainless Fabricators, Inc. (Custom Stainless Steel Kitchen Equipment). Norlake - Cooler/Freezer. Waste King Corp. - Disposer. Commercial Aire - Range Hood. Insinger Machine Company - Dishwasher. National Conveyor Corp. - Tray Make-up Conveyor. Sunroc NWCA-8 - Electric Water Cooler. Sterling - Gas Unit Heaters and Make-up Air Unit. Harbeton - Concrete Hardener. McQuay - Air Handling Equipment, Cooling Towers and Chillers. Envirotec - Air Handling Equipment. Slate Security - Detention Equipment Contractor, Security Hollow Metal. Cells Correctional Equipment, Inc. - Detention Equipment Contractor, Security Hollow Metal. Ridley Owens, Inc. - Detention Equipment Contractor. Thermo-Cool - Condensing Unit and Cooler/Freezer. Montaque - Double Convection Oven. American Steel Products - Security Hollow Metal. Reddi Therm - Domestic Water Heaters. Sargent Door Closers - 250 Series. Page 11 . . . ,,",,, CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS DRAWINGS "AS EQUAL" EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS: 1. Sheet M2.2 Gravity Hoods A. Cook VI &VR Series. 2. Sheet M2.4 Weather Cap A. Cook PR Series. 3. Sheet M2.4 Electric Duct Heaters A. Tutco. 4. Sheet M9.3 Unit Heater A. Berko-HUHAA Series. B. Markel - 5100. 5. Sheet M9.3 Wall Heater A. Berko - FRC Series. B. Markel - 3320. 6. Sheet M2.9 Roof Cap A. Greenheck - 6RS. 7. Sheet M2.9 Roof Hood A. Greenheck - FH. 8. Sheet AlO.14 Access Door A. Nystrom is an approved manufacturer. 9. Sheet E3.2 \ i The following manufacturers are acceptable suppliers of the listed equipn1ent pending complete compliance with plans and specifications. The responsibility of this compliance iies with the contractor using the pricing of these equipment suppliers. Any manufacturer not in the tollowing list or on the contract documents is not acceptable and will be rejected. Page 12 (~!. ~ 'i:io . . . Fixture types marked with an (*) have special beam spread configurations, or special fixture designs which must be met to comply with the specifications. Any fixture not meeting these criteria will not be acceptable and will be rejected at the shop drawing submittals. No contract increases will be allowed because of not meeting this criteria and an alternate fixture having to be supplied. PRIOR APPROVALS: TYPE A,B,F,K C D E G,L,P,U H M,N,Q,T V W X OA OB* OC* OD* OE OF* 10. Sheets 9.1 through 9.10 Floor Type Descriptions *FF Quarry Tile & Base MANUFACTURERS Columbia Edison Price, Halo, Prescolite Vista Dualite, Iota Halo, Prescolite Teron Mark McPhilben Williams Prescolite, Surelite CAX series Failsafe, Luminaire Kim/Hapco, McGraw/Greenlee, LSI/KW Kim/Hapco, McGraw/Greenlee, LSI/KW Kim/Hapco, McGraw/Greenlee, LSI/KW Kim/Hapco, McGraw/Greenlee, LSI/KW Kim/Hapco, McGraw/Greenlee, LSI/KW *As an alternate, general contractor may use Hubbellite Type 100 Sanigenic Flooring with Integral Base. END OF ADDENDUM NO. TWO (2) Page 13 " ' ~' .,tit . ., . . --- Addendum No. Three (3) ADDENDUM Date: Architect's Project No. 95-052 Project: CLIENT: February 19. 1996 Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center - Phinizy Road Facilitv Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government Contract for: General Contracting This AddendumfonTIS a pan of the Contract Documents and Construction Drawings and modifies the original Bid Documents for the above referenced project. CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Specifications IssuedlReissued as part of Addendum Number Three (3): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Section 15712 - Induced Draft Cooling Tower. Section 09511 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings, Page 8. Section 11110 - Commercial Laundry Equipment. Section 07111 - Composite Sheet Waterproofing, Page 3. Section 09680 - Carpet, Page 6. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. Section 15310 - Fire Protection Piping. Section 15325 - Sprinkler Systems. Section 15482 - Motor Controllers. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties. Section 15684 - Centrifugal Water Chillers. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping, Pages 2 and 3. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures, Pages 7 and 8. Section 03450 - Architectural Precast Concrete - Plant Cast. Section 11194 - Detention Equipment, Pages 18 - 22. Supplemental Drawings Issued as part of Addendum Number Three (3): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. SD-C1 - Cooling Tower Drain (New). SD-1 - Typical Access Door Detail 6/ A 10 .14 (Revised). SD-2 - Typical Section at Fence Post. SD-3 - Security Table - 4/AlO.13 (Revised). SD-4 - Cooling Tower Support Frame. SD-5 - Plan Detail at Enlarged Mechanical Chase. SD-6 - Plan Detail - 1/A1.1 (Revised). Page 1 ~ ' \0,.;. ..;~~ {}~ .~ ,- , .. . . 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5, 6. 7. 8. SD-7 - Food Pass- Thru Detail- 4/ Aio.14 (Revised). Door Type Elevations - 7/AIO.14 (Revised). SD-8 - Hollow Metal Elevation at Visitation - 6/ AIO.14 (Revised). SD-9 - Partial Reference Floor Plan. (Add door & frame for Door A043B, B043B and C043B). SD-10 - Partial Reference Floor Plan (Clarify door names/hardware). " SD-11 - Partial Reference Floor Plan (Add (2) compartment wash sink, eyewash and hand sink to laundry). SD-12 - Partial Reference Floor Plan. (Revise smoke barrier as indicated). SD-13 - Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan (Revised sprinkler shrouds). SD-14 - Partial Reference Floor Plan (Add 'smoke barrier as indicated). SD-15 - Hollow Metal Elevation - (Revise glazing type). SD-16 - Hollow Metal Elevation - (Added new elevation as indicated). SD-17 - Hollow Metal Elevation - (Revise glazing types and areas). SD-18 - Partial Reference Floor Plan (Revise glazing on door D003A as indicated). SD-19 - Partial Reference Floor Plan (Doors D003, D007, D008, D009, DOlO Make 44" wide). SD-20 - Laundry Enlarged Plan (Add 2 compartment wash sink, eyewash and hand sink to laundry). SD-21 - Laundry Elevation (Add 2 compartment wash sink). SD-22 - Partial Reference Floor Plan (Add doors D021B). SD-23 - Section Detail 5/A2.29 (Revised). SD-24 - Typical Section at Slider (New).. SD-25 - Typical Section at Slider (New). . SD-26 - Site Fencing (Revision). SD-27 - Elevation 7/AIO.18 (Revised). SD-M1 - Section at Duct in Slab. SD-M2 - Typical First Floor HV AC Detail (Revision). SD-M3 - Typical First Floor HV AC Detail. SD-M4 - First Floor HV AC Piping. SD-M5 - Building E (Revisions). SD-M6 - Building E (Revisions). SD-M7 - Building E (Revisions). SD-M8 - Second Floor HV AC Detail (Typical) (Revisions). SD-M9 - Building D (Revisions). SD-MIO - HV AC Schedules (Revised). SD-Mll - Cooling Tower Information/HVAC Schedules (Revised). SD-M12 - Chilled Water Flow Diagram - (Revised); SD-P1 - Typical First Floor Plumbing Detail (Revised). SD-P2 - Building D - First Floor Plan Plumbing (Revised). SD-P3 - Building D - First Floor Plan Water and Gas Pipe. SD-FPl - Building A - First Floor FIre Protection Plan (Revised). SD-FP2 - Building B - First Floor Fire Protection Plan (Revised). SD-FP3 -Building C - First Floor Fire Protection Plan (Revised). SD-FP4 - Typical Detail Pods A, B and C - Fire Protection (Revised). Drawings Issued/Reissued as part of Addendum Number Three (3): C-1 - Site Staking Plan. C-2 - Grading Plan. C-3 - Erosion Control Plan. C-4 - Erosion Control Notes and Details. C-5 - Utility Plan. C-6 - Storm Profiles. C-7 - Sanitary Profiles. Page 2 ~ .1 '~ -~, ~, (!"'? \. ~ . . . 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. C-8 - Construction Details. C-9 - Construction Details. C-lO - Landscape Plan. ~-11 - Irrigation Plan. A7.2 - Stair Details and Sections. M2.4 - Building D First Floor Plan - HVAC. M9.4 - HV AC Details. MP2.4 - Building D First Floor Plan - Plumbing. CLARIFICATIONS/CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Section 00030 - Advertisement for Bids Revise the Advertisement to read: "Bids will be received by the Augusta/Richmond County Commission Council at the Purchasing Deparonent Room 207, Municipal Building/530 Greene Street, Augusta, Georgia 30911 no later than 10:00 3.m. on Thursday, February 29, 1996. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at~ this location. Any bid received after 10:()() 3.m. on bid opening date will not be considered by OWNER. Bids will be evaluated by OWNER and the project award is anticipa~ed upon completion of this evaluation. " . . - . 2. APPROVED PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURERS "AS EQUAL" REQUESTS The following manufacturers are acceptable suppliers (and/or installers) of the listed equipment pending full compliance with all items listed in the Specifications and Drawings. SECTION 07810 - PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. 4. Wasco Thermalized Skydomes. SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product, by one of the following: . 1. Georgia Detention Windows (frames only). m. . Page 3 \- r!.-~' (~~-~ -. f- -r ~ I . . . SECTION 11195 - SECURITY ACCESSORIES AND FURNITURE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS B. Chief Industries, Inc. 11. SECTION 09521 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.02 BACK-MOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. j. Accutrack Systems. SECTION 11194 - DETENTION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 5. Taylor, Cotton, Ridley. SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.03 BRICK 7. Richtex: Utility 222. c. ARCIllTECTURAL 1. All areas are to receive 4" of crushed stone beneath all floor slabs as indicated by the architectural . drawings. Reference Detail 12/ A6.5: Extruded Polystyrene Insulation Board is required at all areas where concrete is poured to E.I.F.S. , Electrical conduit for cell light fixtures shall be located in the topping slab. Second floor light fixture conduit shall be run on the roof and be concealed by the lightweight concrete slurry. This project will not be exempt from any taxes. , This project does not require prevailing wage rates to be paid. _ Details l/A6.6, 4/A6.6, 1l/A6.6, lA6.5, 2/A6.5, 3/A6.5, 4/A6.5, 6/A6.5; l/A6.7, 4/A6.7, 5/A6.8, 6/A6.8, 9/A6.8, 10/A6.8, 13/A6.8 and ll/A3.3 should indicate a lightweight concrete slurry below the roof insulation. Additionally, any detail notes indicating 3/4" coverage of lightweight concrete should read 2" per the requirements of the specifications. Topping slab at cell areas shall use #89 stone. . Sheet E-18: Revise the lenses in fixture types M, M 1, N, P & Q to be .375 tempered glass outside and .125 textured polycarbonate inside. 2. 3. 4. 5.. 6. 7. 8. Page 4 (~, )~ , 9. . 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19, 20. 21. 22. 23. . 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30, 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36~ 37. 38. 39, 40. 41. 42. . Specification Sections 03300 and 03345: All exposed concrete not receiving a floor finish shall use the Ashford Formula with an applicatipn rlite consistent with the manufacturers' recommendations. Contractor shall submit Sub-contractor's list (AlA G805) and Non-collusion Affidavit forms for Prime and Sub-contractors prior to contract award. Only one (1) copy of the proposal formis required at Bid opening. No crushed stone is required beneath exterior concrete plaza and sidewalk paving. All concrete paving at the plaza sidewalks and the loading dock to be 4 n thick. Extent of wood and plywood framing to be over Office D038, Closet D039 and Toilet D040, At details of masonry pylon signs the notationsofAF.F. should read n A.F.G." (Above Finished Grade). Valtec shelving on furnishing schedule is not used.- Item n L" on furnishing schedule (Hook) indicates a stainless steel finish. Finish shall be manufacturers' standard steel with cadmium plating. It is the Contractor's choice whether to stub conduits for locking, lighting, etc. to a J-box in a chase or to direct pull. . Itemized Bid required in Specification Section 11400 is only required by lowest, qualified bidder prior to award, Ceiling Type "F" to be APC-3. See riew product data sheet this addendum. Specification Section 02200 Earthwork, ,Subsection 1.05 - Quality Assurance item "B" shall read as follows: "B. Testing and Inspection Service: CONTRACTOR will employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing ~gency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements anci to perform required field and laboratory testing." : Specification Section 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving, Subsection 2,07 - Concrete Mix - Delete item "A.1." Subsection 3.10 - Field Quality Control Testing item "A" shall read as follows: "A. The CONTRACTOR will employ a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include the following:" Specification Section 02511 Hot Mixed Asphalt Paving, Subsection 3 .06 - Field Quality Control item "A" shall read as follows: "A. General: Testing in-place hot-mixed asphalt courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness will be done by CONTRACTOR'S testing laboratory. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Engineer." Size of footing for Pylon sign "C" to be 3'-0" wide per structural detail 21/S3.1. Section 4/S3.4 refers to a low wall at Area "E" Day yard. Height of signage on employee parking and. visitor parking Pylon sign to be 8". per the specifications. Doors A014B, A023B, B014B.are not required to have glass. , Doors A014A, A023A, B014A, B023A, C014A, C023A to have G6 glass. Doors B064A to have G5 glass. Door C063 does not require glass. _ Glass in doors A043, B043, C043, D016A and D016B as well as sidelights shall be G3. Door EOl9A shall have G6 glazing; Provide smoke seals (130 SA) and (200 SA) at doors A061, A062 , A063, B061, B062, B063, C061, C062 , C063, and E081B. Door AOOl shall be hardware set $-3. Door A057B shall be relabeled A057. Door A057 shall be relabeled A037 A. Doors A014A, A023A, BOI4A, B023A, C014A and C023A to have hardware set S-IO. Door B021 shall have hardware set S-3. Door B060 shall be relabeled B037 A. Door C059A shall be relabeled C037 A. Local utility company will provide site gas Jines to the meter. Specification Section 07901 Product Data Sheet #2: This sealant shall be used in all areas where "security sealant/caulk" is indicated. .. Page 5 , JI ,r ." ;~ i'" . 46. 47. . 4S. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 5S. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. . 43. Specification Section 11194 1.05 Quality Assurance: Field Welding - Add the following: "4. Detention Equipment Contractors as defined by this section shall be responsible and perform all field welding of Security Hollow Metal." . Quantity and location of fencing for job site shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. The goal is to maintain a secure environment. General Contractor shall coordinate with Owner the placement of the Transition Team Trailer. Specification Section 01500 Construction , Facilities and Temporary Controls: Part 3 Execution; 3.03 Support Facilities Installation; Item "1" - Add the following: "3. Contractor shall erect two (2) signs at a prominent location as designated by Architect. Sign shall be constructed of 3/4" MOO exterior plywood, painted with "black" letters on "white" background. Sign shall be maintained in good condition and shall be removed upon completion of construction.. The outside dimensions of each sign shall be 4'-0" vertical by 16'-0" horizontal. The sign shall be supported by and bolted to four (4) 4" x 4" posts with bottom of the sign at a point approximately four (4) feet above the ground. The sign shall contain, the Jollowing information as a minimum: 1. Project Name and Address. 2. List of City/County Officials (15 to 20 names and titles). 3. List of Transition Team Members. 4. Name of Contractor (Logo, General Information). 5. Name of Architect (Logo, General Information). 6. Name of Funding Source. Signage shall be in place two (2) weeks after Notice to Proceed and before Ground Breaking ceremonies. Architect to coordinate with Contractor and Owner for exact text to be employed. Specification Section 11192 Security Glass and Glazing: Part I - General; 1.06 Extra Glazing Stock: Revise to read" 1. Provide twenty~five(25) cell windows and twenty-five (25) cell door glass panels as extra stock. Glazing type is G6. . Specification Section 11192 Security Glass and Glazing: Part 2 - Products; 2.03 Security Glazing: Type G12: Revise to read "Medium Secure Containment Glazing: 7/S" nominal, replaceable glass unit, 30 min. WMFL rated. Insulgard 375M or equal." All blocking concealed in walls shall be Fire Treated Blocking. All access doors shall have the following criteria: a. Hardware as specified in 5pec~fication Section 11194 Hardware Set S-6. b. Access panels shall be manufactured by the selected security furnishing manufacturer. Provide one (1) B-4112 soap dispenser, and one (1) B-2621 paper towel dispenser at the new hand sink in the laundry. Doors 0003, D007, DOOS, 0009, 0010 to be 44" wide. Doors D007, DOOS, 0009, 0010 to have hiU'dware set 5-2. Doors E031, E030, E029, E028, E027, ~231, E230, E229, E22S, E227 and E226 to have hardware set 5-4. Doors B204, B222 and C230 to havehardyvare set 5-4. Doors E242, E243, C247, C248, B247, 'B248, A247 and A248 to have hardware set BH-15. All overhead doors to have hardware lockset 5-15. All shower doors shall be security as defined by Sheet AlO.14. Doors A060A, B060A and C060A to have door closer/door position switch 221ODPS. Door EOS9B to have hardware set BH-l1. General Contractor to coordinate fence changes at vehicular sally ports with electrical drawings. (Reference Civil Drawings.) , General Contractor to provide transition boots (rubber) from downspouts to underground drainage. Height of flagpole to be 40 feet talL Reference Sheet AIO.14/Door Schedule Notes: Delete Item" 14." Detail 2/A2.2S references Detail 15/A2.2Swhich shall be label 5/A2.2S. Shrouds are required at the showers in Pods A, B & C, per the Architectural Drawings. (Reference SD- FP4.) 44. 45. Page 6 . . . I!% ,) I\~ 81. 82., 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 66. Reference Sheet A4.1 - Revise Note to read: "Note shaded elements indicate sprinkler shrouds, typical 9/A4.11" Sheets A4.7 and A4.8 incorrectly reference Detail 9/A4.11. Note that 15IA4.11 should be referenced on A4.7 between the cells. . Detail 51 A4.11 can be constructed with Soffi-Steelsystem at Contractor's option. Details 131 A4.11 and 2/S2.9 describe the same condition. Reference Detail 7/A6.5 - Rubberized Asphalt Composite Sheet shall extend 12" into floor slab; Vapor barrier shall overlap this membrane and be continuous at all at grade concrete floor slabs. Reference Detail 12/A6.5 - 6 MIL. Vapor barrier shall be continuous at all at grade concrete floor slabs. Doors A247, A248, B247, B248, C247, C248, E242 and E243 shall have Type G6 glazing. Doors A059, B059, C059 and E065 to have G6 glazing. Reference Hollow Metal Elevations:2/AlO.17 and 13/AI0.18 - Glass Type indicated as G3 and G4 shall be changed to G6. Reference Cover Sheet - Revise to read: M9.1 HV AC Details, M9.2 HV AC Schedules, M9.3 HV AC Schedules, E1.2 Plaza Plan - Electrical, Delete E3.4 Lock Control Panel Details, Door E070A to have Frame Type SV. Cells AOOl, A036, BOOl, B036, COOl, C036 to have grab bars per key Note #16. Door C064B shall be Door Type SF with SIV Frame. Door C064A shall have Glass Type G5 and"Door Type SF. Contractor shall locate control joints in slab according to Notes "L" and "M" on Sheet 51. L Architect to provide layout prior to slab construction. Contractor to coordinate floor drains on plumbing drawings with Structural Drawings (i,e" laundry area). Reference 1/S2.6 and 15/ A4.11 : Contractor shall coordinate location of this detail. Reference Sheets S2.15, S2.16andS2.17; Visitation booth area is incorrect. Layout shall be per Architectural and other Structural Drawings. Reference Sheets S2 .15, S2.16 and S2 .17; Opening in wall per detail 1/S2.15 is missing near stairs to inmate visitation area. Locate per Mechanical Drawings. Reference Sheet M2.4; 40 x 16 louver at warehouse area shall have rebar. Reference Sheet M2.5; Delete transfer grille shown at doors E070A and E070B. See Hollow Metal revisions for grillage. Closet E114 is not indicated on drawing. Reference Sheet FP2.9; Add one (1) sprinkler head from each mechanical space in comer to cover stair area on Mezzanines E233 and E234. Reference M2.6; Provide "eggcrate" lay in ceiling below all gas valves. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. ELECTRICAL 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. a. General: Contractor shall exercise extreme caution when coordinating systems. Suppliers of this equipment shall be completely familiar with all the required interfaces called for in the specifications. No contract incre~eswill be considered because of the lack of coordination or a failure of the supplier to understand completely these interfaces. b. Add one flow and one tamper switch to each pod and building section (additional 5 sets) in the sprinkler system for zone annunciation. Connect to the main fire alarm control panel. Sheet E3.2: Lighting Fixture Schedule - Fixture type "G" shall be Capri #KT-1839 with a 90 watt Par38FL lamp. Sheet E3.2: Fixture type "V" shall be a Hadco #RSC-2B-K5-IE. Sheet E3.2: Fixture type "W" shall be a Kenall 33143. Specification Section 16760: Provide all necessary piping, valves and connectors for a complete and working system between the Convault fuel tank and the emergency generator. Specification Section 16748: Delete all references to carbon monoxide detectors indicated in this section, Page 7 . . ,fit ) '" ~ Sheet E-2.3.2: Relocate door lock control connection from door to Multipurpose A059 from corridor A043 to slider door, A043B, added in this addendum in Corridor A043. Sheet E-2.4.2: Relocate door lock control connection from door to Multipurpose B059 from Corridor B043 to slider door, B043B, added in this 'addendum in Corridor B043. Sheet E-2.S.2: Relocate door lock control connection from door to Multipurpose C059 from corridor C043 to 'slider door, C043B, added in this addendum in Corridor. Sheet E-2.6.1: Add one GFCI receptacle with security coverplate to Medical Cells D007, D008, D009. DOlO at the head of ~ach bed. Connect receptacles to two spare 20 amp, I pole circuit breakers in Panel ELB (two receptacles per circuit) with 2/l1Z and 1#12 gnd-3/4 "c. Sheet E-2.6.1: Provide a connection to supply fan SF-18, added in this addendum in the central plant, to include a 30A/1P disconnect switch with 2#12 & 1#12 gnd-3/4"c extended and connected to a spare 20AIlP breaker in Panel D LA.. . . Sheet E-2.13: Provide a connection to a 2 HP (480 volt, 3 phase) air compressor, added in this addendum and located in the lower left comer of the central plant, this shall include a 30A/3P disconnect switch with 3#12 & 1#12 gnd- 3/4"c extended and connected to a 30A/3P/fused @ 20A switch, to be added to switchboard DSH. 13. Sheet E-2.13: Provide a connection to.cooling tower chemical supply pump, added in this addendum and located in the upper left hand comer of the central plant, this shall include a 30A/1 P disconnect switch with 2#12 & 1#12 gnd - 3/4"c extended and connected to a spare 20AIlP breaker in Panel DLA. 14. Sheet E-2.14: Provide a connection to a 3 HP (208 volt, 3 phase) air compressor, added in this addendum and located behind the washing machines in the laundry, this shall include a 30A/3P disconnect switch with 3#12 & 1#12 gnd - 3/4"c extended and connected to a 20A/3P breaker, to be added to panel LLS. 15. Sheet E-3.1.1: Panel board LLS shall become a 60 pole double section panel with the 20A/3P breaker added in this addendum above, and.leaving. the rest of the panel being "space only." 16. Sheet E3.2 - Fixture Type "E" is notused. END OF i\DDENDUM NO. THREE (3) Page 8 (#7 . . . ~ SECTION 15712 INDUCED DRAFT COOLING TOWER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 . SECTION INCLUDES A. Cooling tower. B. Controls, C, Ladder and handrails, 1,02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation, B, Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. C, Section 15540 - HV AC Pumps, D, Section 15684 - Centrifugal Water Chillers, E, Section 15975 - Direct Digital Control Systems, 1.03 REFERENCES . A. Cooling Tower Institute (CTI) . Certification Standard STD-20 1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 15010, Indicating structural steel supports including dimensions, sizes, and locations for mounting bolt holes, B, Submit product data under provisions 'of Section 15010, Indicating rated capacities, dimensions, weights and point loadings, accessories, required clearances, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams, and location and size of field connections, Submit schematic indicating capacity controls, C, Certify performance, based on CTI STD-20 I, and submit performance curve plotting ieaving water temperature against wet bulb temperature, D, Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010, ],05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation data under proyisions of Section ISO I 0, B, Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories, 95-052/12-95 INDUCED DRAFT COOLING TOWER 15712 - I ~.\ . . ~ A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010,0 B, Factory assemble ehtire unit For shipping, disassemble into as large as practical sub-assemblies so that minimum amount of field work i~ required for re-assembly, C, Store and' protect products under provisions of Section 15010. D, Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units, 1,07 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty under provisions of Section 15010, B, Warranty: Include coverage for cooling tower package, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. . Marley Series NC, B, Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 150 I 0, 2,02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Provide units for outdoor use, factory assembled, sectional, crossflow, vertical discharge, induced draft type, with sump,Jan, surface sections, drift eliminators, motor and structural support system, 2,03 COMPONENTS A. Framework and Casing: Heavy~gauge galvanized steel panels with overlapping vertical joints, B: Louvers & Fill: Vertical sheets of polyvinyl chloride plastic hung from galvanized steel supports, Louvers shall be formed as part of each fill sheet. Air inlet faces shell be spaced to minimize air resistance and splash out. ' C. Fan: Multi blade, cast aluminum, axial type with geared, right angle drive and drive shaft equipped with non-lubricated flexible couplings, D, Motor: Single speed mounted on welded steel frame in fan deck, E, Fan Cylinder: One piece, hot dipped galvanized fan assembly, F, Fan Guard: One piece, welded steel rod and wire guard, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. G, Access: Large access doors at both ends of tower to eliminators and air plenum, 95-052/12-95 INDUCED DRAFT COOLING TOWER 15712-2 ~~ . . . !, H, Safety: Safety railings, and la~der with safety cage from grade to fan deck. 1. Distribution Basin: Open, giavitytype distribution basin utilizing weirs and plastic metering orifices, . - J. Drift Eliminators: Two or three. pass polyvinyl chloride plastic to limit drift loss to 0,005 percent of total water circulated, . . K. Collection Basin: Self cleaning galvanized steel with depressed center section, designed to support tower, with cleanout and drain fitting;8 gage, 1/4 inch mesh strainer, side outlet sump & overflow. L. Float Valves: Brass or bronze make"' up valve with plastic or copper float. M, Hardware: Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be galvanized steel. N, Finish: Steel components shall be G21 0 hot dipped galvanized steel with edges protected with zinc rich compound, . O. Structural Steel Support System: Provide structural steel support system in accordance with Manufacturers instructions. Elevation of structural support system shall be sufficlent to prevent cavation of condenser water pumps, 2,04 ACCESSORlES A. Electric Immersion Heaters: In collection basin; suitable to maintain temperature of water in basin at 42 degrees F when outside temperature is 0 degrees F and wind velocity is 15 mph; iriunersion thermostat and float control to operate heaters on low temperature when basin is filled. B, Electric Temperature Controller: In collection basin; with sensor to cycle fans. C, Vibration Cut-Out Switch: De-energiiefan motors upon excessive vibration, D, Control Panel: Factory mounted and pre-wired, weather resistant, containing: I, Unfused disconnect switch. 2, Combination motor controllers, 3, Interlocks and relays, 4, Pilot lights and push buttons, 5, Contact closure for vibration cut-out. 6, Contact for each fan for start/stop, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install tower on structural steel beams as instructed by manufacturer, C, Elevate tower to maintain ma:rnnum positive suction head on condenser water pump, 95-052/12-95 INDUCED DRAFT COOLING TOWER 15712 - 3 {~ . . . J D, Install tower on vibration isolators, E, Connect condenser water piping with flanged connections to tower, Pitch condenser water supply to tower and condenser water suction away from tower, F, Connect make-up water piping with flanged or union connections to tower, Pitch to tower, G, Connect overflow, bleed,. and drain, to storm sewer. .3,03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Inspect tower after installation and submi~ report prior to start-up, verifying installation is in accordance with specifications and manufacturer's recommenda'tions, END OF SECTION 157 I 2 95-052/1 2-95 INDUCED DRAFT COOLING TOWER 1571274 'if . . . J PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - ACOUSTICAL.PANEL CEILING A. Acoustical Panel Ceiling Designation: APC-3 B. Acoustical Panel Characteristics: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for charact~ristics described below: I. Pattern: As specified by product designation below. 2. Type: Hard Core, with compounded granular textured surface, 3. Color: White. 4. Light Reflectance Coefficient: LR-I. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient: :55-.65, 6. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: 35-39. 7. Edge Detail: Square. 8. Thickness: 5/8 inch (19 mm). 9. Size: 24 by 48 inches: C. Suspension System Type: Provide suspension system that complies with requirements in Part 2 "Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated, Direct-Hung Suspension Systems" wide-face, capped, double-web, steel suspension system. D. Panel Products: I. Rock Face 90 by Armstrong, E. Accessories: I. Rock Face 90 Panel Retention Clip (Item #20428). One clip per panel. . . END OF SECTION 09511 95-052/12-95 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-8 \11 . . . 'J SECTION 11110 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT PART I - GENERAL i.Ol DESCRIPTION A. The extent of the Laundry Equipment is shown on the drawings, equipment schedule, and specification of this Section of Contract documents. B, The work included in this section consists of furnishing labor, materiais and services necessary for providing and completing all commercial laundry equipment. C, This typed Specification will be closely correlated with the Drawings and Schedule. Each complements the other and cross reference will be necessary to fulfill the requirements of the Specifications, all information shown on Drawings and listed in schedules shall be incorporated as part of the written Specifications. D, Conflict in plans and specifications where changes, alterations, additions, or deductions are necessary, or where exceptions are taken by the Contractor with regard to sizes, locations, and other details shown on plans, shall be reported for decision by the Architect. E, Contractor shall be responsible in seeing that the equipment can be entered through openings before doors and walls are finished. . F, Interface: 1, Building Contractor shall furnish all water lines and other necessary work as specified in Mecnanical Sections, including final connections to equipment. 2, Building Contractor shall furnish all electrical supply lines and other work as specified in Electrical Sections, as well as making final connections to equipment. 3, Building Contractor shall furnish all ducts to exhaust fan as specified in (HV AC) Mechanical Sections, including those specified in this section of Specifications. 4, Building Contractor shall furnish all faucets, special switches, valves, traps, labor and materials to make final connection to equipment. Q, Performance: 1, At the start of operation of equipment, Contractor shall devote a minimum of two (2) hours, showing authorized personnel the operation and adjusting of equipment supplied. Contractor shall supply the Architect with an affidavit, signed by the Owner's Representative and laundry manager, that this service was rendered and performed. 95-052112-95 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11110 -,1 ,1-, . .. . -\!'; 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Vendor shall maintain within 100 mile radius, a factory trained service representative and spare parts in inventory for equipment specified, B. Permits and Certificates: All laws, codes, ordinances and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn and specified shall be complied with by the Contractor and he shall give all notices required. Any work upon which an inspection certificate by local authorities, and/or any governing body is required, such inspection certificate or certificates shall be obtained by the Contractor and shall be paid by him. Certificates of acceptance or of completion as required arid issued by the State, Municipal, or other authorities shall be procured by the Contractor and delivered to the Owner. C. Safety devices required tocomply with the aforementioned regulations shall be furnished, regardless of whether or not specifically specified or called for in.the following technical divisions of the equipment list schedule. D, Coordinate with mechanical and electrical to insure proper size and locations of mechanical, plumbing and electrical services. E, Equipment must be listed' and approved when applicable for U.L., F.M., C.S.A., and A,G,A" and A,S.M.E. requirements and comply with codes and authorities having jurisdiction. F, Verify at the site all measurements indicated on the drawings and establish correctly all lines, levels and positions for all equipment. Verify rough-in locations before slabs are poured. G, Each piece of equipment shall be furnished with small metal permanent name plates giving manufacturer's name, address, model number and serial number. Electrical equipment shall have plates giving electrical characteristics. H, Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory operation of the assembled equipment. Tests of the installed equipment shall be required. Defects or deficiencies noted as a result of tests shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall consult the mechanical and electrical drawings and their accompanying specifications to determine additional requirements of the work, and shall cooperate with all traces to insure a completely satisfactory installa~ion, 1. The drawings indicate the desired basic arrangement of the equipment; minor deviation therefrom may be substituted for approval provided basic requirements are met and no major rearrangement of services to the equipment is required to affect the proposed alteration. Such deviations shall be made without expense to the Owner. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A, General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 of Contract Documents Specifications, B, Submit to Architect for review, the following: 95-052/12-95 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11110 - 2 Six (6) sets of drawings containing the equipment layout, plumbing, electrical and ventilation connection plans on a scale of not less than 1/4" - 1'0", These are to include the correct dimensional and physical requirements of each connection point for the commercial laundry equipment only. Six (6) sets of brochures which contain manufacturer's literature on each item along with a typewritten list of model numbers, specifications, accessories, sizes, mechanical and electrical connections. Materials contained in these brochures shaIl be arranged in order of ITEM NUMBER as specified herein and each brochure shaIl be complete and include all items. II), . 1. 2. C. Triplicate copies of all installation; operating and maintenance instructions to be submitted for closeout documents, 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Deliver products to the job site with protective covering or packaging with manufacturer and product names clearly designated, -8. Handle and store products according to manufacturer's recommendations and in a manner to prevent damage, deterioration and contamination. C. Equipment must be protected at all times against damage or injury, and shaIlbe thoroughly cleaned, tested, oiled; and.adjusted prior to Architect's final acceptance. All items of equipment shaIl be delivered and set in place in the building during normal working hours unless otherwise specified. Delivery and erection shaIl be complete in every detail in accordance with the drawings and specifications, ready to receive the final connections by applicable mechanical and electrical trades. Coordinate any power and wiring requirements with electrical drawings. D, . 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard and extended warranties against defects in materials, finished and workmanship, Include copy of warranty in "Maintenance Manual" as part of closeout documents, . PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.0 I WASHER A. Manufacturers: 1.* Milnor - Model #36026-Q4G (95 lb Washer) #42026-Q4G (135 lb Washer) 2, Uni Mac - (85 Ib and 125 lb models) 3, Architect approved equal. * Basis of Design . 95-052/12-95 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11110 - 3 //' (,i') . . . ~, B, Hard Mount Washer/Extractor equipped as follows: Microprocessor' contro). with pre-set automatic wash programs suited for correctional facilities. Automatic chemicalsupply injection system (flushing). 208/240V/60/3ph. I. 2, 3. C, Provide Manufacturer Standard Air Compressor with/for valve operation. 2,02 DRYER I. Dayton 7Z029: 3HP: 30 gal: mag. start: 208/60/3. A, Manufacturers 1. *Huebsch - Model #JTI20FG and #JTI70FG, 2. Speed Queen (120 an9 170 Ib models). 3, Uni Mac (120 and 170 Ib models). 4, Architect approved equal prior to bid. *Basis of Design . B, Dryer, 120 pound capacity, gas fired unit equipped as follows: 1. 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, Instant Electronic Ignition. Automatic Back Draft Damper, 900 cleanout Lint Trap. . Manual controls. . 208/240V /60/3ph. Variable Temperature Control. C, Quantity of Equipment 95-052!l2-95 . " 1. A total of Four (4) dryers are required. a. Three (3) 120 Ib dryers, b, One (I) 170 Ib dryer, 2, Four (4) washers are required. a. Three (3) 95 Ib washers. b, One (I) 135 Ib washer. ENDOE SECTION 11110 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11110 - 4 ~ . . . '.l' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Rubberized-Asphalt Composite Sheet: a. QSC 701; Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc. b. Bituthene; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. c. Mel-rol; Meadows: W,R, Meadows, Inc. 2.02 SELF-ADHERING COMPOSITE SHEET A. Rubberized-Asphalt Composite Sheet: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils (1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil (0,1 O-mm-) thick polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side. 1. Sheet Type: Manufacturer's standard composite sheet for use when ambient and substrate temperatures exceed 40 deg F (5 deg C), Physical Properties: Provide waterproofing complying with the following: a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi (1.7 MPa) minimum; ASTM 0412, Die C, modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM 0412, Die C, modified. c. Pliability: . No cracks when bent 180 degrees over a I-inch (25-mm) mandrel at minus 25 deg F (minus 32 deg C); ASTM 0 146. d, Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 118-inch (3.2-mm) movement; ASTM C 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (180 N) minimum; ASTM E 154, f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet (45 m) minimum; ASTM 05385, g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F (21 degC); ASTM 0 570, 2. 2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with waterproofing sheet membrane. I. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits. of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. for substrate. C. Sheet Flashing: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet of same material,.-construction, and thickness as waterproofing sheet membrane, O. Liquid Membrane: ' Elastomeric, 2-component, liquid, cold fluid-applied, trowel grade or low viscosity as recommended by ~aterproofing manufacturer for application. . E. Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, 2-component, asphalt-modified coating. F. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 95-052/12-95 COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111-3 .\\j . . . !' G. 95-052/12-95 Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick, predrilled at 9-inch (225-mm) centers. COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111-4 .f) G' PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - CARPET. . A, B, C, D. E. F. G. . . Carpet Designation: CD-I (Field carpet) Fiber Content: Shaw SUPRA Solution QBCF SD Cationic Nylon -6,6/Q,upont DSDN BCF SD Nylon-6,6. Face Construction: Level-loop pile. Gauge: Patterned 1/10,inch. Pile Height: .148 inch for finished carpet per ASTM D 418. Total Weight: 28 oz. for finished carpet. Performance Characteristics: As follows: l. Critical Radiant Flux. Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2. Tuft Bind: Not less than 10 Ibf (44.5 N) per ASTM D 1335. 3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 Ibf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646. 4. Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing: Not less than 2.5 Ibf/inch (Il.l N/25.4 mm) per ASTM D 3936. H. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for carpet specified, I. 95-052/12-95 Products: Shaw/Stratton - 'Sienna. CARPET 09680-6 . ..~\ . . . ~ SECTION 15260-1 PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping . 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ ASlM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation, B, ASlM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C, NFP A 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, D, UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specialiiing in piping insulation application with three years minimum experience, B, Materials: Flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating of 25/50/50 in accordance with ASlM E84, NFP A 255 or UL 723. 1.05 SUBMITIALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010, B, Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010, PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,0 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Armstrong. 2. Certainteed, 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf. 5. Owens Corning 6, Pittsburgh Corning B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010, 2,02 INSULATION A. Type A: Owens Corning- Heavy density Fiberglass pipe insulation with factory appli~d all-service jacket (AS]) and Doublesure (Trademark of Morgan Adhesives Company) two-component adhesive closure system; rated for a maximum service temperature of 850F. For large pipe sizes where SSL-II is not available, the single adhesive SSL closure may be substituted. Circumference joints shall be sealed by butt strips having a two-component sealing system. Stapling shall not be required to complete the closure, B, Type B: Armstrong AP Armaflex fleXible elastomeric pipe insulation, Seal joints and seams with Armstrong 520 adhesive, For outdoor installations, use Armstrong Armaflexfmish, C. Type C: Foamglass by Pittsburgh Corning. For undergroung installation provide Pittwrap jacketing (pittwrap CW will not be accepted), For above ground installation provide all-service jacket with kraft paper/aluminum foillvinyl coated construction by Lamtech Corp., Compac or Alpha Assoc, Provide aluminum jacket 0,016 inches thick by Childers Products or Premetco International in Mechanical Rooms within 6'-0" above finished floor (bands and seals shall be aluminum). Use PITICOTE mastic, PC fabric and PITISEAL sealant by Pittsburgh Corning. 95-052/11-95 PIPING INSULATION 15260-1 - 1 it <~ . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved. 3,02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, B, Continue insulation with vapor bamer through penetrations, C. Inexposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D, On insulated piping with vapor barrier, iitsulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, fleXIble connections, and expansion joints. E. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations, F, Provide an insert, not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the fmish jacket, on piping 2 inches diameter or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points, Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. G. Neatly fmish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 3.03 SCHEDULE INSULATION PIPING TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS INSULATION INCHES INCHES TYPE . . . . Domestic Hot Water Supply thru 1 1/2 A Domestic Hot Water Supply above 1 1 A Domestic Hot Water Recirc all 1/2' A Domestic Cold Water all 1/2 A Chilled Water in Mechanical Rooms all 1-1/2 C Chilled Water thru 1 1/2 A Chilled Water 1~1/4 thru 3 1 A Chilled Water above 3 1-1/2 A Chilled Water below ground all 1-1/2 C Cold Condensate Drains all 1/2 B Piping Exposed to Freezing all 1 A END OF SECTION . 95-052/11-95 PIPING INSULATION 15260-1 - 2 .-' 'b . . . ;i" SECTION 15310-1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler. 1.02 RELA1ED SECTIONS A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation. C. Section 15325 - Sprinkler Systems, 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25; 125,250, and 800, B. ANSI/ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300. C. ANSI/ASMEB16.4 -CastIron TI-rreadedFittings, Class 125 and 250. D. ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. E, ANSI/ASME B16,l1 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded. F. ANSI/ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe, G. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. H. ANSI/ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. 1. ANSI/ASTM A47 - Malleable Iron Castings. J. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal: K. ANSI/ A WW A C 11 0 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings. L. ANSI/A WW A CI51 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. M. ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. N. ASTM A 795 - Black and Hot-Dip~d Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use, 0, A WS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. , P, NFP A 13 - Installation or'Sprinkler Systems. Q. NFPA 14 - Standpipe and Hose Systems, R. NFP A 24 - Installation of Priva~e Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances, 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010, B, Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections, C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Maintenance Instructions: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs, 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sprinkler Systems: Perfonn work to NFPA 13, B, Welding Materials and I:'rocedures: Perfonn to ASME Code, C, Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body, 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING . A. Deliver, ~tore, protec~ and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1, 95-052/11-95 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING - 15310-1 - 1 J.~ . . . \, B, Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labelling in place, C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 0, Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place uritil installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLER PIPING, BURIED A. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI!AWWA CI51, 1. Fittings: ANSI! A WW A C 110, standard thickness. 2, Joints: ANSI!A WW A Cl1l, rubber gasket. 2.02 SP~ER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A. In all cells, Day Room, POD area and Mechanical Room. 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A795; Schedule 40 black. a, Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI B 16.3, Screwed type. b. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSI!ASME BI6.4, screwed fittings or ANSI!ASME BI6.1, flanges and fittings. . c. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers (in accordance with NFPA 13 2-5.3 Groove Joining Methods). B. In all administrative areas, 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A795; Schedule 10 black for pipe 2-1/2" and larger; schedule 40 black for pipe 2" and smaller. a Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI BI6.3, Screwed type. b. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME BI6.4, screwed fittings or ANSI!ASME B'16.1, flanges and fittings. c. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; (in accordance with NFP A 13 2-5.3 Groove Joining Methods), 2,03 GAlE VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, double wedge or disc, welded or threaded ends. - B, Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, double wedge, flanged or grooved ends. ' 2,04 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity, B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged .~ends, renewable seat and disc. 2,05 BALL VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffmg box ring, lever handle, and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends, B, Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffmgbox seals, lever handle, or gear drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged. 2,06 CHECK VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends, B, Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 2,07 DRAIN VALVES A. Bronze compression stop with hose thread nipple and cap, 95-052/11-95 FIRE PROlECTION PIPING 15310-1-2 ;1 . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends~ Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and foreign material, froth inside and outside, before assembly, C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions, . 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install piping in accordance with _NFP A 13 for sprinkler systems. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points, Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. G. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting, Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. H. Do not penetrate building structm:a1 members unless indicated. 1. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors and walls, Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. 1. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only, K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to installation. L. Provide gate valves for shut-off or isolating service. M. Provide drain valves at rriain shut-off.valves, low points of piping and apparatus, END OF SECTION . 95-052/11-95 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310-1-3 . SECTION 15325-1 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wet-pipe sprinkler systeIIl B. System design, installation, and certification. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation. B. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping, 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFP A 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1,04 SYSlEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete automatic sprinkler system that will provide coverage for the entire building. Provide all labor, material, engineering and services necessary for a fully functional automatic sprinkler system. B. Provide system to NFPA 13 coverage and occupancy requIrements, C. The fIre water flow data shown on drawing FP2,l was obtained by conducting a fIre flow test at the hydrant marked "Test Hydrant" on the Civil Enginering Drawings. The Contractor shall not use the fIre flow data shown on FP2,l for hydraulic calculations, Hydraulic calculations shall be performed with flow data obtained by the Contractor while performing a fIre flow teat at the hydrant marked "Test Hydrant". The Contractor shall determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply, D. Interface system with building fIre and smoke alarm systeIIl E. Provide trre department connections as indicated. . 1.05 APPROVAL A. BEFORE ANY WORK BEGINS TIlE SPRlNKLER CON1RACTOR SHALL SUBWT DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS TO TIlE FIRE MARSHALL FOR APPROVAL. TIIERE SHALL BE NO WORK DONE UNTIL TIlE FIRE MARSHALL APPROVES TIlE SHOP DRAWINGS, 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. preliminaIy Shop Drawings: Prior to detailed submission, submit preliminaIy layout of fInished ceiling areas indicating only head locations coordinated with ceiling installation. C. Shop Drawings: Certified hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe and head layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. Indicate system controls, D. Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. E, Submit shop drawings, product data and hydraulic calculations to Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect. 1,07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B, Record actual locations of sprinkler heads and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations, 1.08 OPERATION AND MAIN1ENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010, e 95-052/11-95 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325-1 - 1 ", r~ . B. Maintenance Data: Include components of system, , servicing requirements, Record Drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availabilitY, and location and numbers of service depot 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perfonn Work in accordance with NFP A 13, B, Equipment and Components: Bear UL label or marking. 1.10 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in perfonning work of this Section with minimum three years experience. B. Design sprinkler system under direct supervision.of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Georgia or equivalent contractor with fIre sprinkler certificate. 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS , A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of authority havIng jurisdiction, Fire Marshall and Owner's fIre insurance'undenvriter. 1.12 EX1RA MATERIALS A. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFP A 13. B. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type. . 1.13. PIPE ROUTING AND SPRINKLER HEAD COUNT A. PIPE ROUTING IS GENERAL AND IS'SHOWN FOR COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. SPRINKLER HEAD LAYOUT IS TO SHOW GENERAL HEAD LAYOUT, AND SHALL NOT BE USED TO.DETERNUNE THE QUANTITY OF BEADS REQUIRED. THE QUANTITY OF HEADS REQUIRED' SHALL BE BASED ON THE REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 13. . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,01 SPRINKLER HEADS - STANDARD A. Suspended Ceiling: 1. Type: Standard pendant type with matching escutcheon plate, . 2. Head Finish: White. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: White. 4. Fusible Linle Fusible link type temperature rated for specific area hazard, B,Exposed Area Type: . 1. Type: Standard upright type with guard. 2. Head Finish: Brass. 3, Fusible Link: Fusible link type temperature rated for specific area hazard, C. Sidewall Type: 1. Type: Standard horizontal sidewall type with matching screw on escutcheon plate and guard, 2. Head Finish: White. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: White, 4. Fusible Link: Fusible link type temperature rated for specific area hazard, D. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head. . 2.02 SPRINKLER HEADS - INSTITUTIONAL. . A. Provide Institutional type sprinkler heads in Day Room, Cell areas and all high security areas: 1. Institutional Sprinkler: Star model PH-2 style A or approved equal. 2, Horizontal)nstitutional Sprinkler: Star Model PH~5 or approved equal, . 3, Head Finish: Chrome plated, 4. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Stainless Steel. 95-052/11-95 SPRINKLER SYS1EMS 15325-1 - 2 (:4 'j) . . . ~t 5. Fusible Lir!k: Fusible link type temperature rated for specific area hazard, 6. Provide institutional sprinkler head wrench. 2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler AlarmValve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate electrically. and hydraulically operated alarms, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim. PART 3 EXECUTION 3,01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work. 3,02 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B, Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. C. Place piping in concealed spaces above fInished ceilings, D. Center heads in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements, E. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not receive fIeld paint fmish. F.Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. G. Hydrostatically test entire system. H. Require test be witnessed by Fire Mars>hall, END OF SECTION 95-052/11-95 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325-1-3 ~}~ . . . (\:- SECTION 15482 . MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work required under this section of the specifications consists of the installation of motor controllers for all integral or fractional horsepower motors not controlled by magnetic starters provided as an integral component of a specific piece of equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI/NEMA Standards Publication ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. B. ANSI/NEMA Standards Publication rcs 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. C. UL 508 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies - Industrial Control Equipment. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The products of Westinghouse, General Electric, Square D, Siemens, Allan Bradley or Cutler Hammer/Eaton conforming to these specifications are acceptable. PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC STARTERS A. Magnetic starters shall beacross-the-line non-combination type. B. Magnetic starters shall be sized for. motor nameplate HP for the motor being controlled. Enclosures shall be NEMA one unless otherwise shown on the drawing or. specified in this section of the specifications. Starters shall be for operation at voltage and phase as shown on the Electrical Drawings. C. Each magnetic starter shallhav~ three overload relays. Control voltage shall be 120 volts provided from a separate source. Provide fuse for control coil. Provide Hand-Off-Automatic switch in cover of starter unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Interlocks shall be provided for control sequences. D. Operating handle of disconnect device in combination starters shall be interlocked with door to prevent opening door when starter .is energized, however an inconspicuous means shall be provided to defeat this interlock. Operating handle must have provisions for not less that two padlocks. E. Overload heater elements shall be melting alloy or bi-metalic type and shall be selected from actual nameplate rating,of motor furnished. Heater schedule shall be placed on inside of door of each starter. 2.02 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. Manual motor starters shall 'be manually operated, trip free switching device with motor running protection overload elements in each ungrounded conductor of the motor circuit. Overload protection shall be melting alloy or bimetalic manual reset type. B. Manual starters installed in finished spaces shall be provided in flush mounted enclosures. Those exposed to the weather shall.be provided with NEMA 3R enclosures. All other shall be NEMA one type. 95-052/11-95 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 15482 - 1 ~\j . . . (;.; PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Secure wall mounted magnetic starten; to mounting surfaces with wood screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry and lead shields on solid masonry. B. Manual motor starters shall be provided for all fractional horsepower, single phase motors rated 1/6 HP or larger. .. . C. Overload elements shall be selected forthe full load nameplate rating of the motor served. A heater schedule shall be provided on th~ inside of all motor starters. END OF SECTION 95-052/11-95 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 15482 - 2 ./ /' " . . . 4' SECTION 15515-1 HYDRONIC SPECIAL TIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Expansion tanks. B. Airvents. C. Air separators. D. Strainers, E, Pump suction fittings. F. Flow Indicators. G. Flow Controls, H, Flow Meters. L Relief valves. 1. Flow controls. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSIJASME- Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSIJ ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of tanks, 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout 1.06 SUBMTIT ALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010, B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project C, Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions. D. Submit inspection certificate~for pressure vessels, E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010, 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and mainte~ce data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Include installation instruction, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Store and protect products tinderprovisions of Section 15010, PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION TANKS A. Construction: Closed, welded. steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSIJ ASME Code; 125 psi rating; cleaned, prime coated, and supplied with steel support saddles; with tappings for installation of accessories. B, Gage Glass Set: Brass compres~ion stops, guard, and 3/4 inch glass, maximum 24 inches length, long enough to cover tank for 2 inches above bottom to 2 inches below top, C. Quick Connect Air Inlet: Automotive tire valve type, manual air vent, tank drain, and pressure relief valve. 95-052/11-95 HYDRONIC SPECIAL TIES 15515-1 -1 <t: ',", . D, Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double check back flow preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass. 2.02 AlR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber, B, Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for sYstem operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve. 2,03 AlR SEPARATORS A. Dip Tube Fitting: For 125 psig operating pressure; to prevent free air collected from rising into system. B, In-line Air Separators: Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch and larger; tested and stamped in accordance with S~ction 8D of ANSI/ASME Code; for 125 psig operating pressure. C. Air Elimination Valve: Bronze, float operaied, for 125 psig operating pressure. D, Combination Air Separators/Strainers: Steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code, for 125 psig operating pressure, with ,galvanized steel integral strainer with 3/16 inch perforations, tangential inlet and ,outlet connections, and internal stainless steel air collector tube. . 2,04 S1RAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen, B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. . 2,05 PUMP SUCTION FITIINGS A. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 inch and larger, rated for 175 psig working pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings, disposable fme mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet located in flow stream and removable for cleaning. , B. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side. 2.06 FLOW INDICATORS A. Brass construction, threaded for insertion into piping system, packless, with paddle with removable segments, vapor proof electrical comPartment with switches, 2,07 FLOW CONTROLS A. Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet. ' B. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3,5 psig, C, Control Mechanism: Stainless steel or nickel plated brass piston or regulator cup, operating against stainless steel helical or wave formed spring. D. Accessories: In-line strainer on inlet and ball valve on outlet. 2,08 FLOW METERS A. Orifice principle by-pass circuit with direct reading gage, soldered or flanged piping connections for 125 psig working pressure, with shut off valves, and drain and vent connections. B,. Cast iron, wafer type, orifice insert flow me!erfor 250 psig working pressure, with read-out valves equipped with integral checkyalves with gasketed caps, . . 95-052/11-95 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515-1-2 " . . . -0; C. Calibrated, plug type balance valve with precision machined orifice, readout valves equipped with integral check valves and gasketed caps, calibrated nameplate and indicating pointer. D. Cast iron or bronze, globe style, balance valve with handwheel with vernier type ring setting and memo!)' stop. ' 2.09 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic,' direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to pennit intended performance. B, Support tanks inside building from building structure. C. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes, D. Provide manual air vents at syst~m high points and as indicated. E. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest drain. F. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank. G. Provide valved drain and hose.connection on strainer blow down connection, H. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps. Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems. I. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports. J. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and expansion tanks. K. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment. L. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest fl~or drain. M. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual vent areas. END OF SECTION 95-052/11-95 HYDRONIC SPECIAL TIES 15515-1-3 ~ . . . .~ SECTION 15684-1 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS PART 1.00 GENERAL . 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Chiller package. B, Charge of refrigerant and oil, C. Controls and control connections. . D. Chilled water connections. E. Condenser water connections, . F. Starte~. G. Electrical power connections, 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15252 - Vibration Isolation. B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. C, Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. D, Section 15540 - HVAC Pumps. E. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI!ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanica1 Refrigeration. B. ANSI! ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. C. ANSI!ASME SEC 8 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. D. ANSIJUL 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners. E. ARI 550 - Centrifugal orRotal)' Water - Chilling Packages. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loading, required clearances, and location and size of field. connections. Indicate equipment, piping and connections, valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves required for complete system. B. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. ., C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Submit performance data indicating energy input versus cooling load output from 10 to 100 percent of full load. . E. Submit stability data with constant entering condenser water temperature down to 10% load F. Submit product data indicating impeller speed (RPM) , number of bearings, type of bearings, high speed impeller shaft, low speed compressor shaft, sound level per ARI 575- 87 (dB), number of stages, number ofsetsofinlet guide vanes, amount of refrigerant charge (lbs.), and amount of oil required (lbs.). 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation data. B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, controls, and accessories. Include trouble- shooting guide. C. Submit maintenance data. . 95-052/11-95 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684-1 - 1 '" ... .~ . 1.06 VERIFICATION OF CAPACITY AND EFFICIENCY A. The chiller,(one of each size) shall be factory performance tested with the proposed alternative refrige\'ant under full load conditions in an ARI certified test facility. The manufacturer shall supply a certified test report to confirm performance as specified. Proper ARI certification documents for the test loop shall be made available upon request from the manufacturer for inspection. The performance test shall be conducted in accordance with ARI Standard 550-92 procedures and tolerances. Stable operation at a minimum load of 10% shall be demonstrated during the factory performance test. with constant entering condenser water temperature. The machine shall be modified to include hot gas bypass if the minimum load cannot be demonstrated. B. All proposals for chiller performance must include an ARI approved selection method for the specified refrigerants. Verification of date and version of computer program selection or catalog is available through the Vice President, Engineering, ARI (703) 524-8800. C. The performance test shall be run with clean tubes in accordance with ARI 550-92 to include the following: 1. A downward temperature adjustment per Section A7.3 shall be made to the design leaving evaporator water temperature to adjust from the design fouling to the clean tube condition. 2. An upward temperature adjustment per Section A 7.3 shall be made to the design entering condenser water temperature to adjust from the design fouling to the clean tube condition. 3. There shall be no exceptions to conducting the performance test with clean tubes and with temperature adjustments in (1) and (2). The manufacturer shall clean tubes, if necessary, prior to test to obtain a test fouling factor of .0000 hr. sq. ft. F /BTU. D. The factory test instrumentation shall be per ARI Standard 550, and the calibration of all instrumentation shall be traceable to .the National Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly NBS). E. The owner or his representative shall be notified 14 days in advance to witness the factory performance test. If the owner or his representative desires to witness the performance test, all travel expenses will be the owner's responsibility. F. A certified test report of all data shall be submitted to the Architect prior to completion of the project. The factory certified test report shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer's company. Preprinted certification will not be acceptable; certification shall be in the original. G. The equipment will be accepted if the test procedures and results are in conformance with ARI Standard 550-92. If the equipment . fails to perform within allowable tolerances, the manufacturer will be allowed to make necessary revisions to his equipment and retest as required. The manufacturer shall assum~ all expenses incurred by the owner or his representative to witness the retest. In the event that these revisions do not achieve submitted performance, the follo~ng penalties will be imposed: 1. CAPACITY TEST: For each ton below the allowable capacity as set forth in ARI 550- 92 of the design capacity, one: th()Usand dollars per ton will. be deducted from the contract price. . a. Allowable capacity = [ (1'-. tolerance) x design capacity]; tolerance per ARI 550-92, Section 5.4. 2. POWER CONSUMPTION TEST: The power consumption penalty for all load points shall be based upon the toleram;es set forth in ARI 550-92. The power consumption penalty (P.C.P.) will be calculated based upon the following formula: .' a. P.C.P. = [Measured KW - (Measured Tons x Allowable KW/Ton*)] x $2000/KW 95-052/11-95 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684..:1 - 2 .~ . . . ~ * Allowable KW/Ton = [(I + tolerance) x design KW/Ton]; tolerance per ARI 550-92, Section 5.4. 3. TOTAL PERFORMANCE PENALTY: The total performance penalty will be the sum , of CAPACITY PENALTY AND POWER CONSUMPTION PENALTY, times the number of typical chillers, regardless if tested~ H. Equipment manufacturer shall not invoice for the centrifugal chillers(s) until successful completion of the performance test or acceptance of penalty deduction from the contract. 1.07 REFRIGERANT 1. Refrigerants which are acceptable are those with an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) of 0.02 or less, and a Global Warming Potential (GWP based on C02 = 1) of 550 or less: a. HCFC-123, HFC-134a 2. An original copy of an ARI certified computerized selection shall also be provided to display the performance of the machine with the applicable alternative refrigerant. Capacity and efficiency are to meet the scheduled performance. 1.08 SOUND A. SOUND DATA - The Centrifugal Chiller Sound Pressure Level (SPL), in decibels (dB), with a reference pressure of 20 micropascals, shall not exceed the values listed in "a" below. All ratings shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 575-87, "Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within Equipment Rooms". 1. No reduction of entering condenser water or raising of leaving chilled water -temperatures will be allowed in the SPL's. Making such a temperature adjustments does not represent the loudest operating condition the chiller will experience while on the job, and could mask sound problems that would otherwise occur: A. minimum of 75 % of the sound data points along the length of the machine shall be taken, and established as the minimum percentage of total possible points used to determine sound levels. . a. Table % Load' 100 50 25 dB, AWeighted 80 82 84 B. Sound Pressure Test - The chiller (one of each size) shall have a sound test conducted at the factory prior to shipment to confirm the Sound Pressure Levels submitted in Section 3.01.A above. All data must be measured and presented in strict accordance with ARI Standard 575-87. I. The sound data points shall be measured simultaneously during the' verification of capacity and efficiency as outlined in Section 1.06. , 2. In the event that a chiller does not meet the submitted dBA sound pressure level, the manufacturer must,.at his expense, provide sufficient attenuation to the machine to meet the submitted value. This attenuation shall be applied in such a manner that it does not hinder the operation or routine maintenance procedures of the chiller. 3. If the unit cannot be modified to meet the submitted SPL levels, sufficient funds will be deducted from the purchase order to cover materials and labor for job site attenuation to bring the sound levels to an acceptable level. 4. The Owner or his repr~sentative must be present to witness the test. . 5. The Owner or his representative must witness the test after attenuation to confirm that the submitted values are met. The manufacturer will assume all expenses incurred by the Owner or hisrepres~ntative to witness the retest. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ARI Standard S?0-92 code for rating and testing of centrifugal and rotary chillers. 95-052/11-95 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684-1-3 (S .3 . B. Conform to ANSIIUL 465 for construction of Centrifugal chillers and provide UL label. C. Conform to ANSI/AS ME SECTION vrn Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for construction and testing of centrifugal chillers as applicable. D. Conform to BSR/ ASHRAE . STANDARD 15-1992 code for construction and operation of centrifugal chillers. E. -Unit shall bear the ARI Certification Label for Centrifugal/Rotary Water-Cooled Chillers as applicable. 1.10 HANDLING AND EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instailation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place until installation. C. Equipment Room Requirements . 1. Follow minimum standards. for refrigeration systems as required by BSR/ ASHRAE Standard 15-1992 paying special attention to requirements for air monitoring, ventilation, self-contained breathing apparatus, for leak detection and insuring the safety of chiller plant operating personnel. 2. Install local exhaust at relief valve discharge headers and purge units. Route exhaust to the outside of the building and away from all air intakes. 3. Install a refrigerant monitor that can be calibrated for appropriate refrigerant, capable of detecting concentrations of 10 ppm for low level leak detection and for insuring the safety of operators. , . 4. Install suitable alarms that activate well below the Acceptable Exposure Level (AEL) of the refrigerant and alert persons inside and outside of the equipment room that a leak condition exists. . 1.11 WARRANTY A. Compressor/Motor Warranty shall be provided based upon the RPM of the compressor as follows: 1. Compressor RPM Warranty Term a. 0-5000 - 1 year froni start-up b. 5001-10000 - 5 years from start-up c. 10,001 and above - 5 years from start-up plus annual oil analysis. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete chiller package as manufactured and delivered to site including materials and labor. . C. Refrigerant Warranty: For machines operating at pressures greater than 30 psig refrigerant side pressures shall include a 1 year refrigerant warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUMMARY A. The contractor shall furnish and install centrifugal water chillers as shown and scheduled in the plans. The units shall be installed in accordance with this specification and produce the specified tonnage per the scheduled data in accordance with ARI 550-92. The unit shall bear the ARI certification label as applicable. B. Approved manufacturers: 1. Carrier 2. Trane 3. York . 2.02 COMPRESSOR AND MOTOR A. The compressor shall be centrifugal. B. Low pressure refrigerant machines shall be provided when available. C. Manufacturers of single stage compressors shall indicate the percent load at which hot gas is required to flow into the evaporator while maintaining constant design water temperatures. 95-052/11-95 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684-1 - 4 (\';~ ~: . . . ~ D. Chiller should be able to unload to 10 % of design tonnage with constant entering water temperature. The machine shall be modified to include hot gas bypass if 10% load cannot be met. E. Compressor assembly shall be run-tested at the factory. Vibration shall not exceed 1.0 mil peak to peale. F. The motor shall be' air cooled or either suction or liquid refrigerant cooled. Hot gas motor cooling is not acceptable. 2.03 EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER A. The evaporator and condenser shall be built in accordance with BSR/ASHRAE 15-1992 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. The water piping connections shall be.victaulic. B. Evaporator and condenser tubes shall be internally enhanced. D. Adjustable or float, type refrigerant metering devices and thermal expansion valves shall be inspected and adjusted by the manufacturer at the end of each year for the first five years of operation to assure equivalent reliability and maintenance to a fixed orifice system. A written report shall be forwarded to .the owner each year to confirm completion. E. Units with multi-stage compressors shall incorporate an interstage flash vessel "economizer" in the refrigerant cycle. All units with single stage compressors shall have the condensers circuited I for a minimum of 10 degrees of liquid subcooling. F. Supply and return head waterboxes shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psig and shall be subjected to a factory hydrostatic pressure test of 225 psig. Provide drain and vent connections in water boxes. G. Factory insulation will be 3/4" insulation and cover all low temperature surfaces to include the evaporator, water boxes, and suction elbow. Economizer and motor cooling lines are insulated with 3/8" and 1/2" insulation respectively. ' 2.04 PURGE SYSTEM A. Approved manufacturers: 1. Trane - Purifier Purge 2. York - Sky Guard II B. The manufacturers of low pressure machines, must provide a separate compressor type purge system. C. The purge shall operate independently of the chiller and can be operated while the machine circulation water pump is shutdown. No external water cooling source is to be required. D. Any excess purge requirement will enable an alarm indication light at the chiller unit control panel, a contact closure at the purge shall be provided for remote alarm annunciation, and a diagnostic (with date and time of occurrence) shall be stored in the chiller unit control panel's diagnostic summary. E. The unit indication shall include: 1. Purge operating mode (ON, OFF, AUTO, AUTO ADAPTIVE) 2. Purge operating status (ON, OFF, AUTO, AUTO ADAPTIVE) 3. Elapsed time meterJor total pumpout time and total run time (monitors amount of leak rate). . 4. Indication of #1 and #2 as an integral part of the chiller control panel unit mounted Operator Interface Clear Language Display, and: a. PUrge suction temperature b. Purge liquid temperature c. Purge pumpout rate (minutes/24 hours) d. Time to next purge (minutes) e. 30 day purge pumpout average (minutes/day) f. Last 5 purge cycl~s pumpout average run time, interval from shutdown to 3 hours after shutdown(minutes/day) 5. Binary output to indicate purge shutdown due to excessive operation. 95-052/11-95 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684-1 - 5 ';5: 'il . F. At standard room operating conditions and~ with a condensing refrigerant temperature > 80 degrees F, the purge shall be rated for no more than .8 lb. of refrigerant per I lb. non- condensable. The purge efficiency. must not deteriorate over time. (This is for the standard Purifier Purge) 2.05 PUMP-OUT SYSTEM A. Units operating with refrigerant having positive pressure at 75 F (CFC-12, HCFC-22, CFC- 114, HFC-134a, CFC-500, etc.) shall have the capability of storing the entire refrigerant charge in the condenser or shall provide a pump-out system for each machine complete with transfer pump, condensing unit and tank constructed in accordance with ASME Code for imfired pressure vessels bearing the National Board stamp. B. Pump-out systems shall be supplied and warranted by the chiller manufacturer. . 2.06 REFRIGERANT MONITOR A. Acceptable Models: 1. Trane Model RMWC 2. Mine Safety Appliances, Model "Chillgard IR" B. Alternate Monitors: I. Alternate sensors shall be approved prior to bid and meet the following criteria: a. Monitor shall be compound specific with a measurement and display range 0- 1000 ppm. b. The monitor must bec!llibrated for the specified refrigerant. c. The display accuracy shallbe +/- I ppm. d. Three factory-set alarm levels shall be provided, each with. a front panel light and a latching binaiycontactclosure for the control of remote devices. e. An analog output corresponding to the unit display is required for connection to a BAS or other recording equipment. f. A means to automatically re-zero the instrument must be included. g. Regular maintenance of the. unit shall be limited to recalibration once' per year. and monthly confirmation of clean air source for recalibration. h. Ambient temperature operating range shall be 40 to 105 F. o . 2.07 CONTROLS . . .. A. The chiller(s) shall be controlled by a' stand-alone Direct Digital Control (DOC) System. A dedicated chiller control panel is to be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer. The panel shall be microprocessor-based, with factory packaging and testing of all required control components for reliable equipment operation. B. The chiller control panel shall provide control of chiller operation and monitoring of chiller modules, sensors, actuators, relays and switches. The panel shall be a complete system for stand-alone chiller control and includes controls to safely and efficiently operate the chiller. C. Safeties - The chiller control panel shall monitor such safeties as motor starting and running time between compressor/motor starts, low chilled water temperature, low evaporator refrigerant temperature, high condenser refrigerant pressure, evaporator and condenser water flow status, low oil pressure, low oil temperature, high oil temperature, high motor. winding temperatures, sensor faults, and proper operation of unit controls. . 1. To monitor bearing temperatures, all of die compressor motor bearings, (including high speed, low speed, and thrust bearings) shall have factory installed temperature sensors installed in the oil return lines of each motor bearing. If any oil temperature reaches or exceeds a set value, the chiller control panel shall shut down the chiller, display the diagnostic, and light the front panel alarm LED. 2. The chiller control panel shall incorporate advanced motor protection to safeguard the motor throughout the starting and running cycles from the adverse affects of: a. Phase Loss b. phase imbalance and severe phase imbalance c. phase reversal and loss of phase reversal d. protection 95-052/11-95 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684-1 - 6 @ . . . S' e. over/under voltage f. motor overload g. motor overload protection incorrectly set h. momentary power loss protection with auto restart consisting of three-phase current sensing devices that monitor the status of the current i. starter contactor fault protection j. starter transition failure 3. Alternately, the adv~ced motor protection system can be fuinished in the starter. D. The chiller control panel shall be capable of displaying system data in the following formats (and be capable of alternating between these modes on-line): . 1. English or Metric units 2. Numerical data as whole numbers or one digit right of decimal E. The chiller control panel is to be provided with a starts counter and running time counter. F. The front of the chiller control panel shall be capable of displaying the following in clear language, without the use of codes, look-up tables, or gauges: 1. Entering and leaving evaporator water temperature 2. Entering and leaving condenser water temperature 3. Compressor Motor Winding Temperature 1,2,3 4. SatUrated evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperature 5. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant pressure 6. Purge compressor suction temperature 7. Oil Temperature 8. Oil Tank pressUre. 9. Oil pump discharge pressure 10. Differential oil pressure 11. Compressor motor starts and running hours 12. Compressor motor current, by phase 13. Compressor motor percent RLA 14. Purge pumpout rate 15. Purge pumpout time last or current cycle 16. Total Purge pumpouttime 17. Total Purge run time 18. Chilled water set point and set point source 19. Electrical current Hmit set point and set point source 20. Current chiller operating mode 21. Not used 22. Chiller diagnostics including a time and date of occurrence (minimum 4 historical diagnostics stored in non-volatile chiller panel memory) 23. Bearing temperature by monitoring bearing oil temperature 24. Condensing pressure or Discharge Temperature (compressor) G. Not Used. H. The chiller control panel shall provide individual relay outputs to start/stop the chilled water pump and condenser water pump. The condenser water pump relay output can be used to enable the cooling tower temperature controls. I. The chiller control panel shall provide a relay output that shall energize whenever the compressor is running. J. The chiller control panel shall provide an alarm relay output that shall energize whenever a fault requiring manual reset is detected'by the panel. K. Not used. L. Not used. M. Not used. N. Not used. O. Not used. P. Not used. 95-052/11-95 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684-1-7 ~ 'i\ . Q. The chiller control panel shall provide condenser limit control to include a pressure tranSducer and interconnecting piping and wiring.. This' control shall be used to avoid high condenser refrigerant pressure tripouts during critical periods of chiller operation. The control shall take progressively more aggressive load limiting action in response to the severity of the rate of change.and actual value of the condenser refrigerant pressure. A clear language diagnostic message, reflecting the operating status, shall be automatically displayed at the front panel whenever this control is in effect, and if the condition exists for more than 20 minutes, a limit warning alarm relay shall energize to indicate that the condition has persisted. R. The chiller control panel shall receive the leaving chilled water temperature set point in the form of a 4- 20mA or 2-10 vdc signal from a remote source (Le. generic building automation system) . S. The chiller control panel shall receive the electrical current limit set point in the form of a 4- 20mA or 2-10 vdc signal from a remote source (Le. generic building automation system). T. Not used. U. The chiller control panel sIiaIl be capable of providing variable interval timers for short cycling protection. The variable timers shall adjust to the critical chiller operating parameters and the time between successive attempted starts of the compressor motor. Fixed start-to- start short cycling protection timers are not acceptable.. V. The chiller control panel shall be capable of password protection of the entire display and keypad. W. The above specified items are required as a minimum. The contractor may select which items are covered by the equipment supplier and which are covered by the controls contractor. A combined submittal will be required where the contractor will identify which items are covered by each supplier. . 2.08 STARTERS (LOW VOLTAGE) A. Motor starter shall be a unit mounted Stir-Delta Closed Transition or solid state and shall have a NEMA lA gasketed enclosure. Enclosure shall be constructed of 12 gauge steel minimum with the exception of doors which shall be 14 gauge steel minimum. Unit mounted enclosures shall have ventilating louvers. Gasketing shall be. 2" width minimum. Each door or enclosure more than 48" high shall have 3 point vault type latches with pad lockable handles. B. Motor starters shall include incoming line provisions for the number and size cables shown on the drawings. Incoming line lugs shall be copper mechanical type. Connection directly to the contactors is not permissible. All components shall be mounted to a removable steel panel of 14 gauge minimum. C. Contactors shall be sized properly to the chiller full load and locked rotor currents. Contactors shall have double break main contacts with weld resistant silver cadmium faces. Auxiliary interlocks that interface with the control panel shall be low resistance having palladium silver contacts. D. Each motor starter shall include a 2 KV A control power transformer with fused primary and secondary. Current transfo'rmers of the proper size, ratio and burden capacity shall be provided to provide a signal to the control panel and optional devices. Control relays shall be provided within the motor starter to interface with the control panel. E. Power wiring within the starter shall be type MTW copper stranded 90 degree C. Power wire . bends shall show no evidence of nicking or insulation degradation. Control wire shall be. type MTW copper stranded 90 degree C 14 gauge minimum. F. Starter shall include an advanced motor protection system incorporating electronic three phase overloads and current transformers. This electronic motor protection system shall monitor and protect against the following conditions: . 1. Three phase overload protection 2. Overload protection during start-up 3. Phase imbalance 4. Phase loss 5. Phase reversal . 95-052/11-95 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684-1 - 8 ~\ . . . ~< 6. Low voltage , 7. Distribution fault protection consisting of three- phase, current sensing devices that monitor the status of the current. Distribution faults of 1-1/2 electrical cycle duration shall be detected and the compressor 'motor shall be disconnected within six electrical cycles. G. Alternately the advanced motor protection system can be furnished in the chiller control panel.' , H. The starter shall be able to operate in temperatures'up to 120 degrees F. 1. All field supplied wires, bus bars"and fittings shall be copper only: J. The following optional starter options shall be provided: 1. Circuit Breaker - Unit mounted starter shall contain a circuit breaker capable of breaking currents up to its interruption capacity of 33,143 amperes. Operating handle and trip indicator shall be located in the door. This handle shall be capable of being padlocked (circuit breaker shall be provided with solid state starter). 2. Ammeters - Three ammeters shall be provided, one per phase. Ammeters shall be calibrated so the inrush current can be indicated. 3. Voltmeters - Three voltmeters shall be provided, each reading a phase to phase voltage. 4. U.L. approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide for connection to electrical service. Include for connection of oil pump to separately fused circuit. C. Provide for connection of electrical wiring between starter and chiller control panel, oil pump, and purge unit. D. Furnish and install necessary auxiliary water piping for oil cooling units and purge condensers. E. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning. F. Provide piping from chiller rupture disc to outdoors. Size as recommended by manufacturer. G. The chiller will be located on a concrete pad. Manufacturer shall provide vibration isolation in accordance with ASHRAEHandbook, 1987, HV AC Systems and Applications, Chapter 52 Table 27. 3 .02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD. SERVICES A. Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer without additional charge to start the unit(s). Representatives shall provide leak testing, evacuation, dehydration, and charging of the unit(s). Chiller manufacturers shall maintain service capabilities no more than 50 miles from the jobsite. B. A start-up log shall be furnished by the manufacturer to document the chiller's start-up date and shall be signed by the owner or his authorized representative prior to commissioning the chillers. C. The manufacturer shall furnish complete submittal wiring diagr~ of the centrifugal chiller(s) and starter(s). END OF SECTION 95-052/11-95 CENTRIF,UGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684-1 - 9 . . . s 2.02 CHilLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Contractor may use steel pipe or copper tubing. B, Steel Pipe: ASTM AS3 or A120, Schedule 40, black. 1. Fittings: ANSI!ASTM BI6.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type, 2. Joints: Screwed for pipe 2 inch and under; ANSI! A WS D 1,1 welded for pipe over 2 inch, C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSI! ASME B 16.23 cast brass or ANSI! ASME B 16.29 solder wrought copper. . 2. Joints: ANSI! A WS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. 2.03 CONDENSER WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND . A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40, (0.375 inch wall for sizes 12 inch and over,) black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: ANSI!A WS D1.l welded. 2,04 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSI!ASME B 16.23 cast ~rass, or ANSI! ASME B 16,29 solder wrought copper, 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Gmde 95TA. 2.05 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. . B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene bonded to asbestos, 2,06 GATE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, nori- rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, double wedge or disc. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, wedge., 2,07 GLOBE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, with backseating capacity, . B, Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. ' 2.08 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Iron body, bronze trim, stainIess steel' spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or flanged ends, 2.09 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actUated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs, B, Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly, C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions, D. After completion, ftIl, clean, and treat systems, 3,02 INSTALLATION A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work. C. Group piping whenever pmctical at common elevations. 95-052/11-95 HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-2 .\ . D. Install piping to allow for expansi.onand contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings. F. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. G. Slope piping and arrange,systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. . ,. H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich priiner to welding, - I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting, J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 3,03 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B, Install brass rnaJ.e adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe, C. Install gate valves for shut-offand to isolate equip,ment, part of systems, or vertical risers. D, Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services, E. Provide spring loaded ch~ck valves on discharge of condenser water pumps. F. Provide 3/4 inch gate drain valves at.main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment Pipe to nearest drain. END OF SECTION . . 95-052/11-95 HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-3 !' . . . S" c. Metcraft B. Handicapped wall shower panel shall be fabricated from seamless, 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Exposed surfaces shall have satin polished finish. Unit shall have a fLxed shower head, a hand shower with fleXIble metal hose, positive shut-off quick-disconnect and mOlUlting bracket Unit shall have two Air-Trol single temperature security valves, two 60 second metering valves and recessed soap dish. Provide J. R, Smith 201 O-U -B-6 cast iron floor drain with nickel bronze grate, sediment bucket and vandal proof securing screws, C. Tempering valve: Powers Model 420 or approved equal. 2.17 RECESSED HOT AND COLD WATER HOSE BOX (RHB), , A. Unit 1. 1.Manufacturer: Acorn Model 8156, 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a Acorn b. Bradley c. Metcraft 2,18 ELECTRlC WATER COOLER (EWC) A. Fountain 1. Manufacturer: Elkay Model LISE-8-G, 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products, a Halsey Taylor, b. Haws. c. Oasis. 3. ANSI! ARI 10 10; handicapped mounted electric water cooler with stainless steel top, vinyl on steel body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with flexible stream .guard, automatic stream regulator, mOlUlting bracket, refrigerated with integral air cooled condenser. 2,19 LAUNDRY SINK (P-9) A. Bowl 1. Manufacturer: Aqua Glass Model ALT-DAF. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Fiat 3. Two compartments, 22 x 21 x 13 inches each. B, Trim: 1. Manufacturer: Chicago Model 891. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products, a American Standard. b. Crane c. Chicago d. Speakman e. Symmons. f. T & SBrass 2,20 EYE WASH (P-10) A. Fountain 1. Manufacturer: Bradley Model S19-220. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Approved Equal . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floorfmishes are prepared and ready for installation offLxtures. B, Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics, 95-052/11-95 15440 - 7 _5- ~ . 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fIxture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fIxture rough- in schedule for particular fIxtures, 3,03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, B. Install each fIxture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. . Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fLxtureS with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. . D. Install components level and plumb. E. Install and secure fIxtures in place with wall supports and bolts. F. Seal IlXtures to wall and floor surfaces with non-hardening sealant, color to match fixture. G. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws; Lead flashing is not intended to hold fLxture in place. 3,04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fLxtureS without splashing, noise, or overflow, . 3,05 CLEANING A. At completion clean plumbing fIxtures!lld equipment. 3.06 FIXTURE HEIGHTS A. Install fIxtures to heights above fInished floor as indicated. B. Water-Closet ' 1. Standard 14 inches to top of bowl rim, . 2, Handicapped 18 inches to top of seat. . 3. Juvenile 10 inches to top of seat C, Lavatory 1. Standard 31 inches to top of basin rim. 2. Handicapped 32 inches to top of basin rim, 3, Juvenile 24 inches to top of basin rim, 3,07 FIXTURE ROUGH-IN SCHEDULE Hot Water Cold Water' Waste Lavatory: 1/2 inch 1/2 inch .. Service Sink: 1/2 inch 1/2 inch * Sink: 1/2 inch 1/2 inch .* Water Closet 1/2 inch * (Tank Type): Water Closet 1 inch . -* (Flush Valve):, Urinal 1 inch * (Flush Valve): . END OF SECTION 95-052/11-95 Vent * * * * * * 15440 - 8 ~, . . . [j SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings an4 general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes architectural precast concrete units, plant cast. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I, Division 4 Section "Unit Masomy" for masomy facing, pointing mortar, and anchorages, 2. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for flashing receivers and reglets. 3, Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings, 1,03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Engineering Responsi1?ility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for architectural precast concrete units, 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit e~ch item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, B, Product Data and instructions for manufactured materials and products, C, Shop Drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication anCl installation of architectural precast concrete units, Indicate member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Include locations and details of hoisting points and lifting devices for handling and erection, D, Design reference sample for initial selection, approximately 6 by 6 by 2'inches to illustrate quality of finishes, colors, and textures of exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, E, Design mixes for each concrete mix, F, Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance with requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing of current materials: 95-052/12-95 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450 - 1 b . . . iJ- 1. 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, Concrete materials, Reinforcing materials, Prestressing strands, ' Admixtures, Bearing pads, Water-absorption test reports,. G, Material certificates in lieu of agency test reports, when permitted by Architect, signed by fabricator certifying that each material item complies with requirements, },05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed architectural precast concrete work similar in matenal, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, B, Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in producing architectural precast concrete units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work, ..' . C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is' experienced in providing engineering services of the' kind indicated, Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of precast concrete units that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. D, PCI Design Standard: Comply with recommendations of PCl's MNL-120 "PCI Design Handbook--Precast and Prestressed Concrete" applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated, . E. PCI Quality-Control Standard: Comply with requirements of PCl's MNL-117 "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and PrOduction of Architectural Precast Concrete Products," including manufacturing. procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required. F. ACI Publications: Comply with applicable provisions of the follo~ing ACI publications: I, ACI 318 (ACI 318M) "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete," 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver precast concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking, distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are visible, B, Lift and support units only at desigriated lifting or supporting points shown on Shop Drawings, 95-052/12-95 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450 - 2 ~, . . . ~ 1,07 SEQUENCING A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2,0 I F ABRICA TORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide. products by one of the following: 2.02 MOLD MATERIALS A. Forms: Provide forms and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or another acceptable material that is nonreactive with concrete and will produce required finish surfaces, 2,03 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767 (ASTM A 767M), Class II, 2 oz./sq, ft, (610 glsq, m) zinc, hot-dip galvanized, 2,04 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III (color to be white), Use only one brand, type, and color of cement from the same mill throughout Project. Face-Mix Fine Aggregates: White masonry sand, 1. 2, B, Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330, C, Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color' stability, setting, or strength of concrete, D, Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures, 2,05 BEARING PADS A. Provide bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as follows: 1, Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, 50 to 70 shore A durometer, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15,5 MPa) per ASTMD 412, 95-052/12-95 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450 - 3 cb . . . ,of' 2,06 GROUT MATERIALS A. Cement Grout: Portlll11d cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimwn water required for placement and hydration, B, Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30-minute working time, 2,07 FABRICATION A. Accurately position cast-in anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other anchorage hardware for attachment of loose hardware and secure in place during precasting operations, Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect the position of the main reinforcement or the placing of concrete. B. Supply loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes not provided by other trades necessary for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent members, C, Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses, D. Mix concrete according to MNL-I17 and requirements of this Section. Following concrete batching, no additional water maybe added, E, Place concrete in a continuous. operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from developing in precast units. Comply with requirements of MNL-117 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete, . F, Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, Use equipment and procedures complying with MNL-117, G, Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings, Imprint casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in the finished structure, H, Cure concrete according to the requirements ofMNL-117 by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing, using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture, . 1. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true, 1, Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly radiused/square where indicated, 1. Discard architectural precast concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise defective unless repairs are permitted by Architect and meet requirements, 95-052/12-95 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450 - 4 ~..). . 2,08 F ABRICA rrOl'-i TOLERANCES A. Comply with the following overall height and width dimensional tolerances of finished units measured at face adjacent.to mold at time of casting: 1, 10 Feet' (3m) or Less: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3,2 nun). 2, 10 to 20 Feet (3 to 6 m): Plus 1/8 inch (3,2 nun), minus 3/16 inch (5 nun), 3, 20 to 40 Feet (6 to 12 m): Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 nun), 4. Each Additional 10 Feet (3 m): Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1,6 nun) per 10 feet (3 m), B, Angular Deviation of Plane of Side Mold: Plus or minus 1/32 inch (0,8 nun) per 3-inch (76- nun) depth or plus or minus 1/16-inch (1,6-nun) total, whichever is greater, C, Openings Within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 nun), except plus or minus 1/8 inch (3,2 nun) for windows and door frames, D, Out of Square: Difference in length of two diagonal measurements of 1/8 inch (3,2 nun) per 72 inches (1829 nun) or 1/2-inch (12-nun) total, whichever is greater, E, Thickness: Minus 1/8 inch (3,2 nun), plus 1/4 inch (6 nun), F, Locations of Reveals and Architectural Features: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3,2 nun). G, Other Dimensional Tolerances: Numerically the greater of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1,6 mm) per 10 feet (3 m), or plus or minus 1/8 inch (3,2 nun), 2,09 FINISHES . A. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units as follows to match Architect's design reference sample, 1, PCIand APA "Al-chitecturaI Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate numbers indicated, a. · Plate 158 Similar - No Coarse Aggregrate, 2. Smooth-surface fmish free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs, with uniform color and texture. B. Finish exposed-back surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface finish, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of architectural precast concrete units, Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, B, Do not install architectural precast units until supporting concrete has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength, . 95-052/12-95 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450 - 5 ~':J . . . ~. 3.02 INST ALLA TION A. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and back-up materials, B, Install architectural precast concrete units plumb, level, and in alignment. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being pennanentIy connected, 1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and unifonn joint width as erection progres~es, 2, Remove projecting hoisting devices and cement-grout fill recessed hoisting devices, C, Anchor architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated, Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring and grouting are completed. D. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated, Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled, Place grout to fmish smooth, plumb, and level with adjacent concrete surfaces, Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it hardens, 3,03 REPAIRS A. Repair exposed exterior surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match color, texture, and unifonnity of surrounding concrete when pennitted by Architect. B, Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not meet requirements, 3,04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units after erection to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains, 1. Wash and rinse according to architectural precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cl~aning operations, 2, Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed architectural precast concrete finishes, END OF SECTION 03450 95-052/J 2-95 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450 - 6 J~ . . . 3.06 . MAINTENANCE/SPARE PARTS A. Provide the quantities of extra maintenance/spare parts as specified in Part One of this section. B. Deliver to location(s) as directed by the Architect in properly packed cartons, and obtain receipt when delivered. 3.07 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MATERIALS A. Provide operating/maintenance manuals and instructions for detention equipment products provided; also comply with Division 1 requirements. Include complete listing of spare parts (with re-order part numbers and re-order procedures), a list of contact persons (including addresses, phone numbers) for both routine and emergency advice, and a schedule for all maintenance activities required for each appropriate item provided. B. Include graphic and narrative descriptions of all equipment defining parts and their assembly; function; trouble-shooting situations and repair options; repair, maintenance, replacement,. and adjustment instructions. 3.08 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The quantities of hardware listed in this schedule are correct, subject to the following: Prior to bidding, any discrepancies between the Drawings and Specifications requiring clarification or change shall be brought to the attention of the Arcliitect for appropriate action. . The Supplier-Erector shall compare and verify his hardware schedule while in preparation with the Contract Drawings and include other finish hardware items (suitable, and equivalent quality) necessary to complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. 2. B. Provide the following: PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY HEADING # $-1 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 1 1 1 2 HINGES LOCKSET PUSH PULL DOOR CLOSER/ POSITION SWITCH KICK PLATE WALL BUMPER THRESHOLD FOOD PASS LOCK FOOD PASS HINGES 95-052/12-95 FA 4Ih-ICS FA-126-E-I-0I-M i 96 FA-2 2210DPS 1000 402 950S (@ SALLY PORT DOORS) FA-17M-Ml X 17-4F (@FOOD PASS DOORS) FA-3P (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-18 :;.l, . . . 95-052/12-95 NOTES: DOORS @ SALLY PORTS INTERLOCK. HEADING # S-2 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 1 1 1 1 1 . HINGES LOCKSET PULL CLOSER . SHUTTER LOCK WALL BUMPER DPS HEADING # S-3 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HINGES LOCKSET 1 DOOR CLOSER/ POSITION SWITCH PULL (OUTSIDE) PULL (INSIDE) WALL BUMPER FOOD PASS LOCK FOOD PASS HINGES SHUTTER LOCK 1 1 1 1 2 1 HEADING # S-4 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HINGES LOCKSET 1 DOOR POSITION SWITCH PULL (OUTSIDE) PULL (INSIDE) WALL BUMPER FOOD PASS LOCK FOOD PASS HINGES SHUTTER LOCK 1 1 1 1 2 1 FA-4Ih ICS FA-66-HM X 60-4DB FA-2 (OUTSIDE ONLY) 4510 (4210 CUSH @ OUTSWING DOORS) FA-17-MI X 17-4F (@ OBSERVATION DOOR) FA534 (@ MEDIUM ISOLATION CELLS) FA-4lh ICS FA-122E-I-OI-MI (F A-122M-I-0 I-M 1 @ MAXIMUM SECURITY CELLS) 2210 DPS FA-2 FA-4 402 FA-17M-MI X 17-4F (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) FA-3P (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) FA-17-MI X 17-4F (@ OBSERVATION DOOR) FA-41/2 ICS FA-122E-I-OI-MI (FAI22M-I-OI-MI @ MAXIMUM SECURITY CELLS) 534 FA-2 FA-4 402 FA-17M-MI X 17-4F (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) FA-3P (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) . FA-17-MI X 17-4F (@ OBSERVATION DOOR) DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-19 z., . . . ~' 95-052/12-95 HEADING # S-5 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: ' 1 1 1 1 HINGES LOCKSET PULL (OUTSIDE) PULL (INSIDE) CLOSER/DOOR POSITION SWITCH WALL BUMPER FOOD PASS LOCK SHUTTER LOCK FOOD PASS HINGES 1 1 1 2 HEADING # S-6 EACH ACCESS DOOR TO HAVE: PAIR HINGES LOCKSET HEADING # S-7 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: 1 1 1 1 HINGES LOCKSET PUSH PULL CLOSER/DOOR POSITION SWITCH WALL BUMPER THRESHOLD SET DOOR SEALS 1 1 1 HEADING # S-8 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: FA-41f2 ICS FA-122E-I-0I-Ml FA-2 FA-2 2210DPS 402 FA-17M-Ml X 17-4F (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) FA~17M-Ml X 17-4F (@ OBSERVATION DOOR) FA-3P (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) FA-3FS FA-12 X P FA-4th ICS FA-126ED-3-04-Ml(X GALV 96 . FA-2 2210DPS . 402 950S 130SA 1 LOCKING DEVICE' FA-D5B X EXTENDED DOOR BOTTOMS 2 PULLS FA-4 1 THRESHOLD 426 (@ EXTERIOR DOORS & SMOKE BARRIERS) SET DOOR SEALS 6 A SERIES (@ EXTERIOR DOORS & SMOKE BARRIERS) DOOR BOTTOM SEAL 6 A SERIES (@ EXTERIOR DOORS & SMOKE BARRIERS) NOTE: SIZE DOOR SEALS AND DOOR BOTTOM SEALS TO DOOR MANUFACTURERS DETAILS. DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-20 c\_ . . . 95-052/12-95 DOORS INTERLOCK HEADING # S-9 EACH DOOR TOHA VE: HINGES FA-4V2 ICS LOCKSET FA-66-HM X 60-4DB (X GALV. @ EXTERIOR DOORS) 1 CLOSER 4510 (4210 CUSH @ OUTSWINGING DOORS) 1 WALL BUMPER 402 1 SET DOOR SEALS 130SA (@ EXTERIOR DOORS) 1 THRESHOLD 426 (@ EXTERIOR DOORS) 1 DOOR BOTTOM SEAL 202SA (@ EXTERIOR DOORS) HEADING # S-1O EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 1 1 1 HINGES LOCKSET PUSH PULL CLOSER/DOOR POSITION SWITCH THRESHOLD HEADING # S-II . EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 1 1 1 - CONTINUOUS HINGE ROLLER LATCH PULL SET WALL BUMPER HEADING #5-12 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 1 1 1 1 1 HINGES LOCKSET PUSH PULL CLOSER THRESHOLD SET DOOR SEALS FA-4112 ICS 126ED-3-04-MI 96 FA-2 2210DPS 950S SLIlHD 590 94P X 94L F A-4 112 ICS 126E-I-OI-MI X GALV. 96 FA-2 2210 DPS 950S 130SA DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-21 g . . . # 95-052/12-95 HEADING #S-13 EACH MAN GATE IN FENCING TO HAVE: LOCKSET CLOSER 126ED-3-04-Ml X GALV. 4210-CUSH X SRI x: SPECIAL PLATE NOTES: BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY GATE MANUFACTURER. HEADING #S-14 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: HINGES FAA Ijz ICS 1 ELECTRIC HINGE FAA 1/2 EH 1 SET HEAD & FOOT BOOTS FA 105AM X 105FBR X 105-4BL 1 LOCKSET FA66 X HM X 60-4BL 2 DOOR POSITION SWITCHES FA~534 1 CLOSER 4510 X ST 2 WALL BUMPERS 402 HEADING #S-15 EACH OVERHEAD DOOR TO HAVE: 1 LOCKSET FA 122 RUP-3-02 END OF SECTION 11194 DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-22 o . TE: /DI-* TO 6E GEORGIA DEFARTMENT OF TRANeFORTATION em. 1"'35. COOLING TOWER DRAIN SCALE: III = !;0' I DA IE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DA IT NO, DESCRIPllON' 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 SD-CI ..../' / / ~ .-- J- -'{ ". , " AUOUS1rA / mClHIMOND COUNlY DErnm10N CENrEJR PHINIZY ROAD FACillTY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA I) ~!~~~~~~eT:'~~t~~~&Gsu!~S . 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,Q. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LA'lmENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 .;g ;;\ a" CMU. LINTEL . 2' ,0' M.O, L 2 X 2 X 3/16" FRAME .. A TAMPER,~OOF ~INUE& WELD TO DOOR AND FRAME ,..---- '----- ----, ____J 3/16" T~ICK &TL DOOR WI CONT. L IXIXl/a" &TOP ~ ~ .. T AMPER-~OOF LOCK -&EE &PECS & C &TEEL &TRAP FRAME ANCI-IOR& - --, ____J ,..---- '----- . A FINI&~ FLOOR ~ DOOR' FRAME TO ElE GALVANIZED AT ALL WET LOCATIONS (l.E, S~OWER&) ELEVATION SECTION A.A Typical Access Door Detail 5CAl.E I' , 1'.0" 9505211 DA TE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : SD-I DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 DA TE NO, 2/16/96 3 AJUGUS1rA I mCCJHIMONJI) COUNlY DIE11ENTION CIEN1rJE~ PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA I) fz~~eSI~~~~eT:'~~~t~~SN&Gsu2~S; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,O, BOX 2210 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 FAX: (770) 822-5990 ,9 6 . I I I I IV I I TYPICAL FENCE POST (BEYOND) b'-0" ffi CONT INUOUS AT ALL FENCE LINES I I 1 I' I I I I I I I I " '~0f~' 'Y, ~~-0><<" v /~~~~;..:: ;..:: ;..:: ;..:: ;..:: ;..:: ;..:: ;"::';":: ;..:: ~~~/.' />;-Y)~'//>>>>y/;:y/;:y/;:y/;:'Y/)'>/.. ~~ ~~ ~ ~ A'1<'0.~Y/;:Y);:Y> , "'<'~'/;$!;%~'~ '\: ?'~>> ~~>~",-,<",<,~,/ . ',// I 1(<<,< :< ' . ""y / b" BED OF CRUSI-lED STONE b" MIL vAPOR BARRIER . Typical Section at Fence Post SCALE Ill' . I'.". DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 95052-11 SD-2 DATE NO, DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA I mCIHrJtVITOND COlUNTI{ DJEl1EN1I1ION[ CJEN11EIR PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA .(1 ~~~eS~~~~~eT;~~~I~)sN&G sul~S; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,O, BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 . . 2/16/96 3 ~~ ~ r. ~ r. @ ~ ;. ~ :. ~ ;" I I I I I --++---- --++---- I I I I I I I I SENT PLATE STIFFENERS 5W1NC:lINCI STOOL FINIS" FLOOR SASE PLATE 1/4"x 18"x 24" WIT" 2 In" DIAMETER "OLES FOR 3/8" SPIKE DRIVE/SECURITY 60LT Security Table SCALE V~. . 1',0" DATE: 15 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : SD-3 9505211 I) PRECISION PLANNING, INC. Planners, Engineers, Architects &: Surveyors DATE DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 NO, AJUGVSlfA I mC1HIMOND COUN1Y DJE1rlENTION CJEN11EIR. PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,O, BOX 2210 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 FAX: (770) 822- 5990 b I ii> b . la; ~, ::I 16'-<1 r L .J ,4" 4. IER WI H 4 I DOWELS TO FOOTING AND' 3 TIES AT 1-r o.e. FOOTING 4'-C"x4'-O"x1S" DEEP WITH 5 H 5 EACH WAY 80nOM w 10 O!O! O:rWW '-!::50! b Z3.-~ ~ 9Q\'JU ... U> W Z -<{ Z--LL W!!:-l::l r:O!OZ -wO-<{ Q>Ur: COOLING TOWER SUPPORT FRAME PLAN AlUCGlUSlrA I mCIHffiAIOND COUN1[Y ~IE11ENTION CIEN1I1EIR PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA GEORGIA .J r -, W10x33 I ---- L_..J____ r -, L_.J SCALE: l/S" - 1/4" STIFFENER PLATE EACH SIDE COORDINATE MOUNTING HOLE REQUIREMENiS WITH COOLING TOWER MANUFACTURER. W 1 Ox3J I:lI:ARING PLATE J/4xl0x10 ----- 1" GROUT (2) 3/4" OlA. ANCHOR 80l.TS 14" x 14" CONCRETE PIER WITH 4- H 6 VERTICAL DOWELS TO FOOTING AND '.3 TrES AT l~ o.c. ....--- FOOTING 4'-O"x4'-O"xl6" OEEP WITH ~ , 5 EACH WAY BOTTOM SECTION SCALE: 3/t!' ::: 1'-0" DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 SD-4 (I f~~5}~~~~er;~fc~I~~~2sul~S; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 ~ o Z I.W u < \.oJ Q. ~ 0 o ... o <.i J: 0 ....... J ~ "It" ..... 2'-0. b I N 8- x 8- CONC~ETE BEAM wITH 2 # 5)( 8'-0" TOP PlACE MONOLITHIC . WITH TOPPING NOTE, T1-415 CONDITION 15 TYPICAL IN POD5 A. B, C, D 4 E AT TI-4E 5ECOND FLOOR MECI-4ANICAL CI-4A5E5. Plan Detail at Enlarged Mechanical Chase 5CAl.E v.' , r ,(I' , DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : DA TE NO, DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AJUG1USTA I mCJHIM[(Q)NJ[) C(Q)lUN11{ ~JErJENTI(())N CCIEN1I1EJR PHINIZY'ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 9505211 SD-5 I) ~~~.sI~~~~er;~~~t~:~2sul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,O, BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 ~;;> e e " E . Lb :J J II LB 151-011 Plaza Plan SCALE I' . 10',~' I QA TEe 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER e 9505211 DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION . 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AVGVS)1fA I mCJHIMONJD COUNTI{ eDIElIENTION CJEN11EIP( PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA II 2 EQ 4 SPACE 151-0" SD-6 E (I f~~eSI~~~~er;'~~~t~:sN8cGsu2~S; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD p,o, BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822- 5990 ,-~ A. ::!: '" 12 GAUGsE FOOD PA5S CI-IANNELS PROJECTION WELDED TO FACE SI-IEET, EXTEND CI-IANNELS AT TOP AND BOTTOM FOR . ADDED RIGIDITY 5ECTION A.A 1'.4" ffi /4" o 0 3/4" . S ;0 " 10 GAUGsE 6ACK UP PLATE A' ::!: '" II" ELEvATION Food Pass- Thru Detail 5CALE I In' . I' 01/)' ~ ~ I ~ s ... . 065ERVATION DOOR r--., r--., L--~ L--~ ffi FOOD - i? FOOD. i? ;.. ;.. PA5S PA5S It/)" 8' ~@CD @ Door 'type Elevations NOT TO 5CALE DATE: 16 FEB. 96 II JOB NUMBER : DATE NO, DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 9505211 SD-7 2/16/96 :I AJIJGlUS1rA I mCJH[MIONlQ) COVNlY DIETIENTIO]N CCJEN11E~ PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA I) ~~~eS~~~~~eT;~~~t~!~hul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,O, BOX 2210 LAWRENCEVILLE. GEORGIA 30246 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 FAX: (no) 822-5990 ~ :!'"> . ~ 3' -2" :;'-:;" ~ ~ r... r... e e ff 1/ ~ I i<'I .~ ., -&) . & i<'I Hollow Metal. Elevation ~ Visitation SCAlE I' , I' .12)' I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211. SD-g DA TE ND. DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 2/16/96' :3 AUGUSTA I mCC1H[M[OND CCOlUNTI{ . DIE1l1ENTICON (cJENTIE~ PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA I) f~~eSI~~~~er;~~~t~)sN&Gsu2~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD p,o, BOX' 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 :!~ e Commissary IA06Jj & ( -X~ Offlce jA0621 . ill e ~ ~~ Dayroom IAOJ 71 , ',', ~,f /^~ I I I 8 I 9C.AI.E 1/8' . r-6 Partial ,Reference Floor Plan TYPICAL AT PODS A. B. 4 C DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER: 9505211 I SD-9 DATE NO, DESCRIPTION I 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA / mCCIH[M[OND CCOUNTIr. eDJET1ENTION CJEN1fIER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY " AUGUSTA, GEORGIA I. ~~~~~~~eT:.~~~!~&Gsul~S 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O, BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 ~\, . . Partial Reference Floor Plan 5CALE 1/8' . I',(/)" I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 9505211 ' SD-IO DA TE NO, DESCRIPTION AVGV~1fA I mCJHIDAIOND COlUNIT DIE1I1ENTIOW CCIEN11E~ PHlNIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA f) ~~~eS~ ~~~~er:' ~~~t~I~&G s~l~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,O: BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 .- ~} "" " Laundry 100211 . 1dry Storage 100291 6' ~.. I. Partial Reference Floor Plan 5CALE lIB' . 1'.0" PLAN KEY NOTES g WALL MOUNTED EYE WA51-l - 5EE PLUMBING DRAWING5 & LAUNDRY SINK - SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS DA TE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 95052 rj.'. . DATE NO. DESCRIPTION . ' 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 SD-ll AUGUSTA I mCCHM[ON]D COUNTY DIErnNTION CJENJfIEJR PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY ' AUGUSTA, GEORGIA II ~~~eS~~~~er;'~~~t~I~&Gsu!~S; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,O, BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 . tAX: (770) 822-5990 ~"; . . I Commissary IA0631 Office IA0621 . TYPICAL AT PODS A, 8, 4 C Partial Life Safety Plan SCALE 118' . I','" DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211'. DA TE . NO, DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 . SD-12 AUGUS)1fA I mCCIHIMOND CC(Q)UJNTI{ DJEl1ENTION C1ENTIER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA I) f~~eSI~~~~er~~~~t~~~&G sul~S; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD . P,O, BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 .) 1!l - / .: I I. LOPEN TO ~ ABOVE 7 - - - ~A I , -.r 11' 11' 11' 11' 11' 11' -. -. - - -. -. -. -. -. -. -. ~ ~ . ~ . ~ . . ~ ...... . ~ __. l- . ~ ~ommissary ./ :; ~ ~ . f'l P:/O" ~ . \..... ......:'.. ~ IAo631 . ~ yv . ~ !~ I) '~' -"" .. . . Janitor .h' ~ " L ,J IC0611 t (' . ~ 8'_(::11 . . ~ ,/ '-- . ~ In"" n"'~ . ~ ~ IVI" -- I ~ . I /' I '~' "" ~ f-- ,.... . L, m. ,) ,. ..... ~ Office ??:. . - - I- -. -. - -. - - -. . . . '~;;';j .' . ;f " ~ IAci'621 .. . ~ . \.... --...---- . . . . . . . . . ..~ . ~ . .. .~ . . ~ . . [(' I q' ,'-.'; . J~r~ . v '_... -:--'_' . . '" 8'....0" . " '---=-' :; . . ~~~ . '~I >"'~" . \_' 0... u ' ,; IC0631. .' . . .~ - . - - III - -. - . . " : Ie '\;' = . ... \. . . . , . porrido . . l806sl . ,~--------------------------~ TYPICAL AT TYPICAL AT -h\ PODS A 4 B POD C ONLY r:\ Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan \:::Y 5CALE 1/8' , 1'.11)' I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 I DATE NO, DESCRIPTION SD-13 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AVCGrV~1rA I I) ~~~eS~~~~~ern~~t~!sN&GS1Ll~S; mCCIHIJM[ONJO) CCOUNlY. . JDIE1JENTION CCIEN1I1E~ PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY .' 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P,O, BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 AUGUSTA, ,GEORGIA LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 :f \ . '\. , ILlVV/I . ~ LINE OF RO ABO" cute Checlc-tJ IE0821 Corridor IE0761 Exam . lEon I Exam IE0781 Exam IE0791 ~ Q ~~~~~I Life~afetY Plan I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DATE NO, DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 SD~14 AUGUSTA / ]P~JKCJHIM[OND COUNlY . DIE1I1ENTION CJEN11ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY . AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . f~~.s~~~~,,:.~~~~~hul~S 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O, BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 !J' 3'-<:l" 3'.el" . ~ CLOSURE EACI-l SIDE ~ I SL ID IN6 DOOR . H.M. Elevation Typ. SCALE 3/8" = I'-/Zl" I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DATE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 :3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 . SD-15 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr .DIE1rJENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA. . ~~~~~~~er:.~~~~~h1Ll~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 if ~ . 3'-el" SL ID ING pOOR L.S.O.S. . CLOSURE EACI-l SIDE H.M. Elev_ation Typ. SCALE 3/8" = I'-/Z)" . I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DATE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 :3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 . AUGUSTA / mCIHIM(Q)ND C(Q)UNTIr .DIE1rJENTION CJENrIER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA SD-16 . ~~~~~~~er:.~~~~~~&G S1Ll~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 ~~ . . 2' 2'-4" 3" 8'-el" V.lF. e e . ~ ../j e# e# 3" SCALE 3/8" = I'-/Zl" SLIDING DOOR . .O.S. H.M. Elevation Typ. 9505211... . .. I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 2/16/96 :3 DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIE1rJENTION'ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA SD-17 . ~~~~~~~er:'~~~t~~&G S1Ll~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE:. (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 [AX: (770) 822-5990 . ~ 'U '. ~ Exam ~E0791 ~ ~ . Partial Reference Floor Plan 5CAI. E 11&' . r.". DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 9505211. SD-18 I I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 2/16/96 :3 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIETlENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~.s~~~~~er:'~~~t~~~&G S1Ll~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 . . ~ ~ " Corridor" 100031 " Partial Reference Floor Plan 5CALE 11&' . ",ID' DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 SD-19. DATE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 :3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA I mCCIHIMOND CCOUNTIr DIEllENTION CCIENlfIER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~e~}~~~~er:' ~~~t~~SN&G s1Ll~S; 40Q PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (nO) 338-8000 LA WRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 ,! ., $ -; I I I I I DETERGENT UJASI-lER I I GAS TUMBL R . I I C I I I-HGI-lFOINT I t I I L 0, [ lundry storage 6'-el" 10029\ j 4" DRAIN \ ) ------ . < Q :~~.~~3ed Plan DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 :3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA I JRI[(CIHIMOND CCOllJNTI{ - '. DIE11ENTION CCIENlfIEIR. PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUST~ GEORGIA SD-20 . ~~~e~}~~~~er:'~~~t~!sN&GS1Ll~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE, (710) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 .. ,,~ . Q Laundry Elevation 5CAl.E 3IIl' . r.". I DATE: DA TE NO. 2/16/96 :3 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 95052.'.1 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 _ SD- 21 AUGUSTA I mCJHIMOND COUNTIr DIETlENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~~~~~er:.~~~~h1Ll~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 "J . '& . &4+ . - 't\ ~.TYF.OF3 .~ 5CAl.E 11&' . I' ,ID' Partial Reference Floor Plan AUGUSTA I mCJHIM[OND COUNTIr DIE1I1ENTION CCIEN1rIER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 95052,1..1 DATE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 :3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 . SD-22 . ~~~S~~~~~er:'~~~t~~SN&G sul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 .~ ",~ . e" 0'1J . ~ING I'1.AC;.l1NE 6EYOoaJ WA9I.HNG MAC~INE PAC FLOOR SLAe ~ BUILOlNC's PAPER: ecND Bl<EAK o 4 2'," 4 0 vAPOR ~RRJER . CR..J$1EO &TCiNE Q Section Detail 5CAl.E Ml" . I'.I!)" I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : .9505211 DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 :3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 SD-23 AUGUSTA I mCIHIM[OND C(Q)1UNTI{ DIEl1ENTION CClEN1I1EIft PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . . ~~~eSI~~~~er:'~~~t~~sN&GS1Ll~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 .', .., & I-lH. FRAME BEYOND STL. L DOOR GUIDE STL. DOOR GUIDE FIN. FLR. @SILL REMOVABLE STOF 2-II2"X3"X3/16" STL. ANGLE - UJe=LD TO SECURITY I-lOLLOUJ MET AL FRAME - SEE SFECS. SCf-JED. DOOR STL. L DOOR GUIDE STL. DOOR GUIDE FIN~ FLR. 4 '1 '1 '1 4 '1 4 d @SILL SCI-lEDULED GLAZING I-lH. FRAME BEYOND l/Zl GA. CONT. BENT FLA TE UJ/3/8"4> BOL TSSET IN EXF SI-lIELDS 1ii) 16" O.C. ''1 Typ. Sliding Door Dtls. SCALE 1-112" = 1'..;l2''' DA TE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER :' 9505211 2/16/96 :3 DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA I mCCWOND COUNlY DlElJENTION CCIENlfIER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA INTDOORl SD- 24 . ~~~eSI~~~~er:'~~~t~I~&Gsul~S; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: ' (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX:' (770) 822-5990 ',' <, SCI-lED. DOOR I-lM. FRAME BEYOND STL. L DOOR GUIDE STL. DOOR GUIDE FIN. FLR. @SILL REMOvABLE STOF 2-II2"X3"X3/16" STL. ANGLE - UJELD TO SECURITY I-lOLLOW MET AL FRAME - SEE SFECS. , SCI-lED. DOOR STL. L DOOR GUIDE STL. DOOR GUIDE FIN. FLR. " " @SILL l/Zl GA. CONT. BENT FLA TE W/3/8"4> BOLTS SET IN EXF SI-lIELDS 6 16" O.C. " SCI-lEDULED GLAZING I-lM. FRAME BEYOND " " " , .,. Sliding Door Otis. SCALE 1-112" = I'-el" NOTE: TYFICAL OF EXTERIOR AND SMOKE BARRIER DOORS. 9505211 DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : SD-25 2/16/96 :3 DA TE NO, DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 ~ AUGUSTA I mCIHIMONJ[J) COUNTIr DJE11ENTION CClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~.s~~~~~er:'~~~t~~SN&GS1L2~S 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVILLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 '0' ':i~ 20' GRAVEL it EMERGENCY ACCESS o I PROPOSED BLDG. B " Q 5CAl.E r . !6"" Site Staking Plan I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : DATE NO. DESCRIPTION 9505211 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM 63 ' AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND C(Q)UNTIr ~IE1rJENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FAClllTY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA "- , i ~ ! I i i ""-".. /~. " , ASPHA , ".' '" '" . ". ", ' , ' , '"", " " " " " ~ " " ;' , " \ ... ' ,:) SD-26 '. PRECISION PLANNING, INC. li~ Planners. Engineers. Archilecls & SurveyOrs 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 . PHONE: (nO) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: ,(nO) 822-5990 .>.~ ~ I (() ~ I ;,. / II 1/1 1/ 3' -/Zl" , -II ~;1 GJ. <8, ~. ~~ AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIErJENTION ClEN1I1EIP( PHINIZY ROAD FACILI1Y AUGUSTA, GEORGIA L.S.O.S. 5CAl.E 318' . 1'-4)" H.M. {I Corridor I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 950521.1 DATE NO. DESCRIPTION ' 2/16/96 :3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 l ' SD-27 I) t~~~~~~er:'~~~t~~sNh1Ll~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 [AWRENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 ) "0 . )- #3 @ 21-0. a.c. #3 @ 2-0. a.c, . . . . . . . . . .. ........ - . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . - . . ~ . . .:- . . . . . . . . .. ........... . .. . - -............... - . -.. . . . - . . . .. . . . .. . ~ . - -' . . .. . -. . - . - . : : ::: ::::::::::::::;:::::.~..:::::::::::::: ~ : : : ::: : ~ : ~ : ..... ........................................... ..... .' .. . - ... ~ . . . . . -, .. . - . . . ~ . - ... . ,.. . . . . ... ... .. .. .. ... . ..... ............................................ ..... .. ... ~ . . . . . . ~ .. . ~ . . . 3 - #4 CaNT. #4 @ 16. a.c. .......:~...,llo,.. Q Section (I, Duct. in Slab !OB1ATIC CM.Y I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 :3 REVISION - ADDENDUM f/3 9505211 SD-Ml AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr ' .DJETlENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ;ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~~~~~er:.~~~t~~~h2~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 'G . '( ,tIVn" '"'. \~05il " - 'tt-.. 'IV ,~ ~' \ NOTE: TYFICAL OF MECI-lANICAL CI-lASES AT CELLS Aelell, Ael36, Bl?)l?)l, Bel36, CI?)I?)I Cel36 NOT TO 5CAl.E Typical First Floor HV AC Detail H.C. Ceil iI,o~lI " NOTE: TYFICAL OF MECI-lANICAL CI-lASES AT CELLS Aell6, A021, 8016, 8021, C016 C021 NOT TO ec:Al.E Typical First Floor HV AC De~ail I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : DA TE NO. 2/16/96 J DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM 13 9505211 AUGUSTA / . mCIHIMOND COUNIT ~JETlENTI(Q)N ClEN'fIER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA SD-M2 . f~~~~~~.!.~~~~~SN&Gs1~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 .. ..': . . ~ -.!.IE' f'r I I I I I I I 'I. ..- .._----. -..- -- ~.._-_.~~ TiTUS gITORS 16X I 0 GRILLE-HIGH W/SMOKE DAMPER NOTE: TYFICAL AT FODS A.6.C Typical First 'Floor HV AC Detail SEF-9 ,----,--~-, -,-, ,-" --- -~----, -., . L TITUS 50F 20X20 GRILLE I TOP @ S. 111'f ,,~: Bao~ PlAN~_ : I ,I EDH@ IIi I m PLENUM "VI I i Comr,lissory TYPE SA GRILLE ! i I i II ~~~~ BOTH SlOES W1TH III I --', SMOKE DAMPER 'i: I \ I'jl ~ ii, I " ' --'----------------'! Ii! I" . - Iii I ro' I FD@FLOOR I Ii I . /' , . ' , II U___.." G~~~10 ';// I Ii I _ (j.~9./ II!I ~ -', <? II Jonl "'. h = ~" Multi-I=' pose ~I.J '~v/ ~ -40 /' ~ .\ .~ "'-.. -"", .. .., .-... -- NOT TO 5CAl.E I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DA TE NO. 2/16/96 :3 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUt.A 13 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMCON]D CCCOUNTIr ~1ETlENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA SD-M3 . PRECISION PLANNING, INC. li~ Planners, E"9ineers, Archilects & Surveyors 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 Q NOTE: TYFICAL AT FODS A. B. C J~ ~ii! II I!, First Floor'.HVAC Piping NOT TO I!CALE I DATE: 16 FEB 96 'II JOB NUMBER : DATE NO. DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM 1/3 9505211 SD-M4 2/16/96 :3 AUGUSTA / mCCIHIMOND COUNTIr .DIETlENTION ClEN1I1E~ PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~~~~~!~~t~~~&Gs2~S ,400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 ,PHONE; (no) 338-8000 LAYiRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 '-' . SURFACE MOUNT I II, I "11 'I, I II, 'II I!! ,_...._.. ,__.,,,.... Building E -- First. Ftoor HV AC C'I ~ Hearing Room ~ C-20 C-200 NOT TO 5CAl.E I I , . 24X24 PENN : AIRETTE W\M.O.p. , J . Building E -,First Floor HVAC NOT TO !CALE I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211. SD-M5 QA TE NO. 2/16/96 :3 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM 83 AlUGlUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr ~JETlENTI(Q)N CClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILI1Y AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~~~~~~er:'~~~t~~sNhul~S 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 .:--.. ~ -,l .' \ ~ 61lZl TO I . ~ ROOF CARli ~ '........:"... ,I "". )11' - p\Jrpo"'e ,'" '" ' , " 'I ~ i '\ _r-C WI GHILLt: JP I I I /--~ ~ "~>-~"" " ", " ", ", t~,ochanical ler1591 Building E - ~First. Floor HVAC NOT TO ecALE I DA TE: 16 FE8 96 II JOB NUMBER : DA TE NO. 2/16/96 :3 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM 1/3 9505211 SD-M6 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIETlENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILI1Y AUGUSTA, GEORGIA ... ~~~~~~~~er:'~~t~~~&Gs2~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 DA TE NO. 2/16/96 :3 i;, " ~ Janitor ~ 6.~ TO ROOF CAP - I ~. I SEE M-IO Mulli-Purpose FOR CONTINUA TION ~ ,-- .. 0-170 Building E -First Floor HVAC MOT 10 ecAl.E DA TE: - 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 SD-M7 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND C((J)UNTIr .DJE1rJENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . fla~~~~~~.!.~~~t~!sN&Gsul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 SEF-6A 6, ) 14X4 SLEEVE ABOVE CEILING W/REBAR ,,-'" I ' , J DA YR()(W. tiE . W - NOTE: Second Floor HVAC Detail TYPICAL AT PODS A. B. C NC7I TO IlCAl.E I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : OA TE NO. 2/16/96 .3 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 950521[ SD-M8 AUGUSTA / JRJKCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIET1EN110N ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA' . ~~~~~~~er:'~~t~~sNhul~S 400 PIKE, BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAYiRENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 cs MAU-2 SF-17D o I-J-.-- ~I~ 21~' ~I~ u u I- I- ~ I~ Aeov'e ~~- ~~ lpo'Z.1t 24XI2 LOUVER W/MOTOR OPERA TED DAMPER & REBAR BOTTOM @ 8' -8' AFF DUCTED TO TYPE E GRILLE NOT TO 5CAl.E Building D - SeGond Floor Plan HV AC I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 95052,11 DA TE NO. 2/16/96 :3 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM 13 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIETlENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA SD-M9 I I I . ~~~~~~~er:'~~t~~sN&Gsul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 3,0 1 3:0/1 3.0/1 o AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE ~) HEA TINQ ELECTRIC t- DUCT HEAT (KW/STAQES) 3.0/1 3.0/1 3,0/1 3.0/1 3,0/1 20.0/2 12,0/2 47,0/5 3,0/1 3,0/1 22,0 3 37,0/4 22.0/3 30,0/3 30.0/3 ' 3,0/1 16,0/2 3,0 1 NONE HVAC Schedules NOT TO ec:ALE DA TE NO. 2/16/96 :3 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211' DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 ' SD-MlO I DATE: AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIE11EN110N ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACll.l1Y AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~~~~~~er:'~~~~$N&G sul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 d' N@TE: COOLING TOWER INFORMATION FROM S~EET MS.3 TO READ AS FOLLOWS. . DA TE NO. 2/16/96 3 COOLING TOWER OT-1 1,200 95 85 78 2 1800 10 15 1,2 WATER FLOW fGPM) WATER INLET 'F) WATER OUTLE eF) DESIGN WET BULB eF) NUMBER OF CELLS MOTOR SPEED (RPM) FAN POWER PER CELL (HP) BASIN HEATER PER CELL (KW) NOTES NOTE: 1. COORDINATE ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF EACH EQUIP. WI VOLTAGE & PHASE AS SHOW.N ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 2, COOLING TOWER SHALL BE MARLEY NC 2112, TWO CELL TOWER OR APPROVED -EQUAL. - .._.~ -.. .-. .~;..._--,.,_.. Cooling Tower Information NO! TO 5CAl.E FANSOHEDULE CAPACITY SP TAQ ICFM) Un WQ) SF-18D 2,000 0.375 H P 80NES ,FAN TYPE 1/ 4 ' 7.1 ROOF' LOCA TION VENDOR IolODEL NOTE8 POD 0 PENN DX7B 1.2.3.4 . '- ......-..----.... NOTE: ADD TI-lIS FAN TO TI-lE FAN 5CI-lEDULE ON 51-lEET MS.2. HVAC Schedules NO! TO ecALE DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM 13 SD-Mll AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNlY ~IETlENTI(Q)N ClENTIER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~~~~~er:'~~t~~~&G sul~S 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 ' PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 " " AR SEPARATOR MAKE-U> WATER eXPANSION T~ NO! TO lICALE Chilled Water Flow Diagram I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION 9505211 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM 1J3 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND CCOUNTIr .DJE1rJENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA SD-M12 . ~~~.s~~~~er:.~~~!~~~&G sul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 . FAX: (no) 822-5990 ~ ... . 'Y' (,;u H.C ~ ....-...., " , f \ , I NOTE: TYPICAL OF SI-lOWERS AREAS Ael4S, Ael5el, Ael51. Ael52, Bel4S. Bel5el, Bel51, Bel52. Cel4<:l, Cel5el. CCZl51. CCZl52. Typical First Floor Plumbing Detail' HaT TO ec:ALE I DATE:, 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER: DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION 9505211 SD-Pl 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr .DlETlENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~~~~~~.!.~~~l~~~hul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O; BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 , .------.-------------------.-.----...--.-.--.---- .-.-..... (' (i" NOT TO 5CAl.E Building D -First Floor Plan Plumbing I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA / mCCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIE1rJENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . : ' SD-P2 - . ~~~~~~~er:.~~~~~&Gsul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 ~.~ '0' LQJr)dry StpraOEl :~ \" W AN;) HW . · CW AND H . 1./2' 0N 6 .., ~ND HW '--.. - -t-- \ \ 4" '.{:.W AND H . . . Office ~ .~. #-~ NOT TO SCALE Building D - First Floor Plan Water and Gas Pipe DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211. DA TE NO. 2/16/96 3 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA / mCCIHIMOND COUNTIr D1E1rJENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA SD-P3 ) . ~~~}~~~~er:'~~~t~~sN&Gsul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 .~ I i : ..-...-.......--.*..- ;' ~ T N.uiri :iO(Jr' '(cr (f ......_---\ ~Oe41 ..........-....1 . FIRE PIPE DOWN FROM ABOVE 2ND FLOOR CEILING ,fj . <~----_.~ / ....~::~ /'" "'~~>; /' ,/ v,,~ ./'./' '," . . "~:~, ,/// "'(:~::-. ~/ ~::;~:/ "(~ ~y ,$~V '.... '...., ,~::~. / A". ";;r'/ / ,;f ' '. ;~;Y " /,:-k. ' 4~/ ,/ ,:v.. "'. "-~/f' (' ,7;~ .....,-( ........ f.i;," "'P '(~""" i~7 . :~~~:~~~:,.. 'Ii %';:: '^. ..., , /r' ''-..,.. /;/ .,/ , "..., //;/ h. /'" -- /~<" //. . . '.. Building A - First Floor Fire Protection Plan NOT TO 5CAl.E I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/16/96 3 REVISION - ADDENDUM 113 9505211 - SD-FPl AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIETlENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUqUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~~~~~.!~~~~SN&Gsul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 ~\ i: ,~ FIRE PIPE DOWN FROM ABOVE 2ND FLOOR CEILING :~::::::\\\:-. C:;")rrid()[ :~Gr~~ i - ~--_..~--~-_._-~.~~.~--'-- --- r-' _._nn_:.._.~_..=: i 1.: --- '1 i i ! i i k::onariis~:;\:r,! i j ~:~b~il 1-.-.1. -', " \ m.._.....,\ ! j Wi :'11 I'!~ ui ti",PI ,#'.../ '<---_..<:::~.::. /< < ...;>.... ' , '"{~''' //</' "" "'...', / / "'>~'" "./ #,,' "~~~ ,,/// '~" ,/,/, ,'~ ", ,""{ , '\-'''''" ,..... <~{~~:~/ NOT TO 5CAl.E Building B - First Floor Fire Protection Plan I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DA TE NO. 2/16/96 3 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMONJ[J) COUNTIr DIE1rJENTION ClEN1I1EJP{ PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~~~~~er:'~~~~sN&G sul~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LA~ENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 SD-FP2 i-~-- ~c: L- !i i III ! ~ i II I Ii! ill if i it I :! i i i --- :;; --:' ,-__', ..:,::'=:::=:':=::=::_,:~:,,=___.._:~l!::::::;;!1:..::__=;;:::':::~=',l;,__:.~,,_______,_________. ________________________, _:~~==~~____ ~ ~~ ~ " "- "'-->-, '''<>~~, ""''': ,,y\t.Ji t:.-.Pur~)o= g~~~r "'-"""'-"=J ,- ...... ~'_. I: HOLD PIPING 1 TO DECK - Offi(,"? ~~~?! I j, .../,,1 Building C - First Floor Fire Protection Plan MOT TO 5CAl.E I DATE: 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : DA TE NO. 2/16/96 3 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM 1/3 9505211 SD-FP3 AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr DIE1rJENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILI1Y AUGUSTA, GEORGIA I) ~~~~~~~er:.~~~t~~~&G sul~S , 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (no) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (no) 822-5990 ~...............----..--................-........-.....--.................- ,~ ,.,,'" TYP. , '. , '-. .t.} " I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Cell 0:34 Cell ~ ~<l ] Cell I"-osol I __ I ,-.~.1L.-:__,___.. ,._,... .",,, ..-..,-..... NOTE: TYPICAL AT PODS A. B. C Pods -, Fire Protection Plans ~E 11&' . r.". DATE NO. 2/16/96 3 16 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM #3 SD-FP4 I DATE: AUGUSTA / mCIHIMOND COUNTIr ~JE1rJENTION ClEN1I1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILIlY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA (I PRECISION PLANNING, INC. li~ Planners, E"!Iimers. Architects & Surveyors 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (nO) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 " .P '< ~( . . . ~ ,1 Addendum No. Four (4) ADDENDUM 'if'. Date: February 26. 1996 Architect's Project No. 95-052 Project: Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center - Phinizy Road Facilitv CLIENT: Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government Contract for: General Contracting This Addendum forms a pan of the Contract Documents and Construction Drawings and modifies the original Bid DocumenTs for the above referenced project. CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SPECIFICATIONS Specifications Issued as part of Addendum Number Four (4): 1. Section 02441 - Underground Sprinkler System Supplemental Drawings Issued as part of Addendum Number Four (4): 1. 2. 3. SD-C2 SD-28 SD-29 Barscreen at manhole .. A .. Revised 22/S3.1 Detail 2/ Al O. 16 Revised CLARIFICATIONS/CHANGES TO THE COl'o'TRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. APPROVED PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURERS - SPECIFICATIONS .. As Equal" Requests The following manufacturers are acceptable suppliers (and/or installers) of the listed equipment pending full compliance with all items listed in the Specifications and Drawings. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page I ~ . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS B. 6. Sherwin Williams SECTION 16760 - EMERGENCY DIESEL GENER'ATOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS B. Kohler is an acceptable supplier of the listed equipment. SECTION 16915 - LOW VOLTAGE RELAY SYSTEM PART I - GENERAL 1.10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A4. General Electric is an acceptable supplier of the listed equipment. 2. APPROVED PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURERS - DRAWINGS SHEET E3.2 - LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE . TYPE A,B,F,G,K C,L,U,V,W H,N,Q,T X MANUFACTURERS American Lighting Infinity Eclipse Guth ARcmTECTURAL The intent of the Civil Drawings is for the earthwork to balance. The area of refuge is located at stairway E066. Location of food pass and observation shutters are referenced by the door types. Intercom locations on hollow metal frames shall be referenced by the Electrical Drawings. If an intercom station is located on the door jamb,' it shall be interpreted as being part of that hollow metal frame. All floor control joints in the security areas shall be filled with security sealant as described in the specifications. ' Paint coating on shower floors shall extend three (3) feet in front of shower areas/stalls into the dayroom areas. Reference Specification Section 11192- 2.03, Security Glazing Compositions, Item "G12" - Eliminate reference to "mirrored" requirement of glazing. Reference Section 3C/A7.2 - Delete intermediate rail. Posts at 5" o.C. shall extend below the bottom rail at 30" o.C. This section shall apply as a similar condition at stair stringers at Exterior Stair at Corridor 247 and Stairwell E066. Contractor to furnish four (4) aluminum signs with painted graphics reading "Fire Marshal allows a maximum capacity of 50 persons in this area." Signs shall be 2' x 3'. Install at all outdoor yards. Expanded metal over hollow metal frames is specified in Section 11191-7, Item .P". Metal may be installed with Torx. type screws in lieu of welding. It shall be the Contractor's option whether to include Page 2 ': . ll. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. . 23. . this work with the D.E.C., the hollow metal manufacturer, or the drywall contractor. All expanded metal shall be installed per the plans and specs. Reference Section 00800, Supplemental Conditions - By adding the Owner as "Additional Insured," this does satisfy requirements under paragraph 11.2.1 of the Supplemental Conditions regarding Owner's Protective Liability. All H.C. shower seats denoted by key-note 17 shall be Bobrick B-5181. Reference Detail 12/A4.11 - Joints smaller than 1/2" do not need any treatment. "Trusscore" by Trussbilt is acceptable for security hollow metal doors as long as all performance criteria can be satisfied. All fees for permits, reviews, and inspections shall be the Contractor's responsibility. (This includes, but is not limited to, local Building and Fire review, permit and inspection fees, and all utility tap fees. Contact local Inspection Department at (706) 796-5050 for further information on cost.) Reference Detail 6/A3.3. All mechanical/penetrations noted as having "rebar" shall have welded woven fabric similar to detail 6/A3.3. Use Stanley 854 hinges at food pass doors. Use Stanley IHTCB1901 hinges at exterior doors and IHTCB1961 at interior doors. Reference Sheet E-2.3.2 - Add ceiling speaker in the multi-purpose room connected to the security communicatioI).s system. Reference Sheet E-2.4.2 - Add ceiling speaker in the multi-purpose room connected to the security communications syste~. Reference Sheet E-2.5.2 - Add ceiling speaker in the multi-purpose room connected to the security communications system. Reference Sheet E-2.7.2 - Add ceiling speaker in the multi-purpose room connected to the security communications system. Reference Sheet E-2.9.2 - Add exterior wall speaker in the day yard connected to the security communications system. Reference Sheet E-2.1O.2 - Add exterior wall speaker in the day yard connected to the security communications system. END OF ADDENDUM NO, FOUR (4) Page 3 (: . . . SECTION 02441 - UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1,1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.1,1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section, 1,2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1,2,1 Extent of underground sprinkler system is shown on drawings, 1,2,2 Refer to Division 16 sections for electrical service for automatic control system, 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: , 1,3,1 , Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide underground sprinkler system as a complete unit produced by a single acceptable manufacturer, including heads, valves, piping circuits, controls, and accessories, 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4,1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data; installation instructions and maintenance data for underground sprin~ler system, 1.4,2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for landscape irrigation system including plan layout and details illustrating location and type of heads, valves, piping circuits, controls, and accessories, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2,1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 2,1,1 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Muellermist Irrigation Co, Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg, Corp, The TORO Co" ir'rigation Div, Weather-Matic Div,lTelsco, Industries 2,2 MATERIALS: 2,2,1 Pressure Pipe: Comply with following: UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM 95-052/12-95 02441-1 ~ . . . 2,2,1,1 3" and Larger, galvanized steel pipe, ANSI/ASTM A 120, Schedule 40, 2,2,1,2 Under 3", galvanized steel pipe, ANSI/ASTM A 120, Schedule 40, or 2,2,1,3 Under 3", seamless copper water tube; ASTM B 88, Type ilK", drawn temper, or 2,2,1,4 Under 3" PVC plastic pipe, ANSI/ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, 2,2,2 Circuit Pipe (downstream from circuit valves): Comply with following: 2,2,2,1 PVC plastic pipe, ANSI/ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, 2,2,3 Pipe Fittings: Comply with following: 2.2,3,1 For PVC plastic pipe, ANSI/ASTM D 2466 socket fittings with ASTM A 2564 solvent cement, 2,2,4 Valves: Manufacturer's standard, of type and size indicated, and as follows: 2.2.4,1 Furnish cast bronze bodies, unless otherwise indicated, 2,2,4,2 Manual Circuit Valves: Globe valves, 2,2.4.3 Key Operated Valves: Manual valves, fitted for key operation, 2,2,4,3,1 Furnish 2 valve keys,3-feet long with tee handles and key end to fit valves, 2,'2,4.4 Automatic Circuit Valves: Globe valves operated by low-power solenoid, normally closed, manual-flow adjustment, 2,2.4.5 Automatic Drain Valves: Designed to open for drainage when line pressure drops below 3 psi. 2,2,5 Backflow Preventer: Manufacturer's standard, to suit sprinkler system, 2,2,6 Sprinkler Heads: Manufacturer's standard unit designed to provide uniform coverage over entire area of spray shown on drawings at available water pressure, as follows: 2,2,6,1 Flush Surface: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. 95-052/12-95 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM 02441-2 . . . 2,2,6,2 2,2,6.3 2,2,6.4 2,2,6,5 2,2,6,6 2,2,6,7 2,2,7 2,2,8 2,2,9 2;3 2,3,1 2,3.2 2,3,3 2,3,4 2,3.5 2,3,6 2,3,6,1 95-052/12-95 Bubbler: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment, Shrubbery: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. Pop-Up Spray: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless steel retraction ,spring, Pop-Up Rotary Spray: Gear drive, full circle and adjustable part circle type, Pop-Up Rotary impact: Impact drive, full circle and part circle as indicated, Above-Ground Rotary impact: Impact drive, full circle and part circle as indicated, Valve Box: Precast concrete, Valve Cover and Frame: Cast iron with provision for locking, Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3" maximum to 3/4" minimum, AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM: General: Furnish low voltage system manufactured expressly for control of automatic circuit valves of underground sprinkler systems, Provide unit of capacity to suit number of circuits as indicated. Exterior Control Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof enclosure with locking cover, complying with NFPA 70 (National Electric Code), Interior Control Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard with locking cover, complying with NFPA 70, Transformer: To convert building service voltage to control voltage of 24 volts, Circuit Control: Each circuit variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes, Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each circuit, Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour and 7 or 14 day clocks to operate any time of day and skip any day in a 7 or 14 day period. Allow for manual or semi-automatic operation without disturbing preset automatic operation, UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM 02441-3 . . . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,1 3,1,1 3,1,2 3,1,3 3,1.3,1 3,1,3,2 3,1,3,3 3,2 3,2,1 3,2,1,1 3,2,2 3,2,3 3,2,3.1 3,2.3,2 3,2,3,3 3,2.4 3,2,5 95-052/12-95 SYSTEM DESIGN: Design Pressures: As indicated on drawings, at connection to building system and at last head in circuit, Location of Heads: Design location is approximate, Make minor adjustments as necessary to avoid plantings and other obstructions, Minimum Water Coverage: Turf areas, 95 %, Other planting areas, 85 %, Layout may be modified, if necessary to obtain coverage, to suit manufacturers standard heads, Do not decrease number of heads indicated unless otherwise acceptable to Architect/Engineer, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING: General: Excavate straight and true with bottom uniformly sloped to low points, Protect existing lawns and plantings, Remove and replant as necessary to complete installation. Replace damaged lawn areas and plants with new to match existing, Trench Depth: Excavate trenches to a depth of 3" below invert of pipe, unless otherwise indicated, Minimum Cover: Provide -the following minimum cover over top of installed piping: Steel piping, 12", Copper tubing, 12", PVC piping, 20", Backfill: Backfill with clean material from excavation, Remove organic material as well as rocks and debris larger than 1" diameter. Place acceptable backfill material in 6" lifts, compacting each lift. Existing Lawns: Where trenching is required across existing lawns, uniformly cut strips of sod 6" wider than trench, Remove sod in rolls of suitable size for handling and keep moistened until reolanted, UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM 02441-4 . . . 3,2,5,1 3,2,5.2 3,2,5,3 3,2,6 3,2,6,' 3,2,6,2 3,2,6,3 3,2,6.4 3,2,6,5 95-052/12-95 Backfill trench to within 6" of finished grade, Continue fill with acceptable topsoil and 'compact to bring sod even with existing lawn, Replant sod within 7 days after removal, roll and water generously. Reseed and restore to original condition any sod areas not in healthy condition equal to adjoining lawns 30 days after replanting, Pavements: Where existing pavements must be cut to install landscape irrigation system, cut smoothly to straight lines 6~ wider than trench, Excavate trench to required depth and width, Remove cut out pavement and excavated material from the site. At walkways, jack piping under paving material if possible, Backfill with dry sand fill material, placing in 6-inch lifts, Repair or replace pavement cuts with equivalent materials and finishes, UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEN 02441-5 . . .' 3,3 INSTALLATION: 3.3,1 3,3,2 3,3,2,1 3,3,2,2 3,3,2,3 3,3,2.4 3,3,3 3,3.4 3,3,5 3.3,5,1 3,3.5,2 3,3,6 3,3,6'.1 3,3,6,2 3,3,6,3 95-052/12-95 General: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with requirements of the Uniform Plumbing Code. Connection, to Main: Connect to existing building piping in location indicated, Install new tee, valve, and union, Connect to existing stub, Install new valve and union, Connect to existing stub with union, Maintain uninterrupted water service to building during normal working hours, Arrange for temporary water shut-off with Architect, Backflow preventer: 'Provide union on downstream side, Install minimum 6" above highest ground level sprinkler head, Water Hammer Arrester: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves, inside building or in valve box as indicated, Circuit Valves: Install in valve box, arranged for easy adjustment and removal, Provide union on downstream side, Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit, Piping: Lay pipe on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions, , ' For circuit piping, slope to drain valve at least 1/2" in 10' of run, At wall penetrations" pack the opening around pipe with non-shrink grout, At exterior face, leave a perimeter slot approximately 1/2" wide by 3/4" deep, Fill this slot with backer rod and an acceptable elastomeric sealant, Repair below grade waterproofing disturbed by the work and make penetration watertight, Install PVC pipe in dry weather when temperature is above 400 F in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 400 F before testing, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM Ol441-6 . . . 3,3,7 3,3,7,' 3.3,8 3,3,8,' 3,3,8,2 3,3,8,3 3,3,9 3.4 3,4,' 3.4.2 3.4,3 3.4,3.1 3,4,3,2 3.4,4 3,5 3,5,1 ~5-052/12-95 Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated, Backfill with acceptable drain material to 12" below grade, Cover drain materials with a sheet of 30-lb, asphalt saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated, material. Restore plantings disturbed by this work, Sprinkler Heads: Flush circuit lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is completed, Install lawn heads at manufacturer's recommended heights, Install shrubbery heads at heights indicated, Locate part-circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4" from walls and 2" from other: boundaries, unless otherwise indicated, , Dielectric Protection: Use dielectric fittings at connection where pipes or valves of dissimilar metal are joined, TESTING: General: Notify Architect/Engineer in writing when testing will be conducted, Conduct tests in presence of Architect/Engineer, Hydrostatic Test: Test water piping and valves, before backfilling trenches, to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psi. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work, Remove and repair piping, connections, valves which do not pass hydrostatic testing, Operational Testing: Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed, backfill is in place, and sprinkler heads adjusted to final position, Demonstrate to Architect/Engineer that system meets coverage requirements and that automatic controls function properly, Coverage requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time, After completion of grading, seeding or sodding, and rolling of grass areas, carefully adjust lawn sprinkler heads so they will be flush with or not more than 1/2" above finish grade, DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION: Demonstrate and instruct Owner's representative in operation, service and maintenance of units, Obtain receipt that this has been accomplished, END OF SECTION 02441 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM 02441-7 .. SEE ARCH'L. owes. rc=4000 PSI . .' ~ . ~ .. . . '.,,'. ~ . '~ ., ," . '. . . ' , ", . . '.. :- '~,', . , , .' ~' . b " . . ,. .' . 4 :'. ." . " . ,":." " . ',' . b. .:.' ' ..~ ":'4..: r ~ ,AT. Hi ~~~.. , , U... .. " ' ,.'.' . .' , . '-2" .. .'. ~ . .. , .' .... .. , . .. . . ,I' , ".. . . . 14 AT 1 Z' o.c. CONT, , ,... ~ '.. .. 4 .. ' ,d .. t SEE PlAN EL. VARIES "-9- TO 2'-(f 4-14 CONT. ~ ~, . '. t @Seclion : ec:.IU! ",.. . ,., I DATE: 26 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 SD-28 OATE NO. DESCRIPTION REVISION - ADDENDUM 14 2/26/96 4 . AUGUSTA / mawOND COUNTIr DlETEN110N CJENfJER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . PRECISION PLANNING, INC. li~ Planners. Engineers. Architects k SunJeyars 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAYtRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 7 . . .rrvv,-rvv">-rvv">-~ ( - > -.,.,-.. <. :. ~'IO__. - t ~T~~.a-cc: ; "~'-"...Joo...A-~V..J\..A....",-,~-,,-,,-#' n I I I I I I CIA::Uf ~ "LL_'~ ~ -,........ _10__ __TTfOW__.__ -- . .. cw:. II'J"~.IK>. _ ~""AL - ClClNTNICUt UIl.l) D.....CCHr~ _,. . T_I&.P ....... _ 10_,. _-.0__ ~ IKUIII1'r WCIl..l..lM....AL YOlCII "- __'10__' __. .... Ole. UTW IIT_~ ~ =-. c::8<fM ~ I1ElI. _,. . ~_AU._. s '-- ~~. _ 'I'n"ICAL 11'=__ _ allU:T. CID'Io. @ SectIon at VIsItation Widow ~ JIG" . r_ --- DATE: 26 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER: ,9505211 DA TE NO. DESCRIPTION 2/26/96 4 REVISION - ADDENDUM #4 SD-29 AUGUSTA / mCHMOND OOlL1N1Y DETENTION ClEN'fJER. PHINIZY ROAD FACJLI'IY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . If PRECISION PLANNING, INC. Iii' Planners. Engineers. An:hitects .t S1L!'lIeyors 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 LA~ENCEV1llE. GEORGIA 30246 PHONE: (no) 3.38-8000 FAX: (770) 822-5990 'i tJ ~ . - t~ i f ~o( ~ J~ ~ IIQK. ~: A,.:Z ~~ ::11: =~-. PLAN ~1'1..1. ec::Hl', 4" ~ L.4T1!11ll .., ~ ~~ SECTICN A ,..~alU.no~. . ~ IUO((QIUonGI ~ 2"la" 0LXle H IUoA. &..ciP'lI:D CIfOIGUl' _ CONT. 4" ~ J..4T1!11ll Ct' ~, ~ eToe SECTION 6 o ~. of Manhole "A" I DATE: 26 FEB 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9505211 DA n: NO. DESCRIPTION 2/26/96 4 REVISION - ADDENDUM 14 SD-C2 . AUGUSTA / IDCHMOND OOUN1Y DJE'fJENTJION ClENT1ER PHINIZY ROAD FACILI'IY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA .. PRECISION PLANNING, INC. I Pla.nneTS, Enginem, Architects &- Surveyors 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 ' LAYlRENCEVlLlE. GEORGIA 30246 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 FAX: (770) 822-5990 . AU1!usta/Richmond County Detention Center Phinizv Road AU1!usta, Geor1!ia PAGES BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: SECTION 00030 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS .................... 00030-] to 00030-2 SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 00]00-] to 00]00-7 SECTION 00]0] - SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ...... 00]01-1 to 00]01-2 SECTION 00200 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT (CSRA) .... 00200-] to 00200-29 SECTION 00300 - BID FORM .................................. 00300-] to 00300-2 SECTION 00310 - PARTNERSHIP CERTIFICATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 003]0-] SECTION 00320 - CORPORATE CERTIFICATE .............................. 00320-1 SECTION 00321 - INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATE .............................. 00321-] SECTION 00410 - BID BOND (AlA A31O) .......................... 004] 0-] to 00410-2 SECTION 00420 - CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATION STATEMENT (AlA A305) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 00420-] to 00420-7 SECTION 00430 - SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (G805) ................... 00430-1 to 00430-3 SECTION 00480 - NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00480-1 SECTION 0048] - NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR. . . . . . . . . . . 00481-1 . II, CONTRACT FORMS: SECTION 00500 - AGREEMENT (AIOl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00500-1 to 00500-7 SECTION 00520 - CERTIFICATE OF COUNTY AITORNEY ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00520-] SECTION 00530 - NOTICE OF A WARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 00530-1 to 00530-2 SECTION 00540 - NOTICE TO PROCEED ................................. 00540-1 SECTION 006]0 - PERFORMANCE BOND &PAYMENT BOND (A312) .... 006]0-] to 006]0-7 III, CONTRACT CONDITIONS: SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (AlA A20]) ............. 00700-1 to 00700-25 SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS ........ 00800-] to 00800-8 SECTION 00840 - ADMINISTRATIVE & PROCEDURAL ITEMS .... . . . . . . 00840-] to 00840-5 IV, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: DIVISION 1 SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01010-1 to 010]0-2 SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAyMENT..... . ... .. ........ 01027-1 to 0]027-4 SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01050-1 to 0]050-3 SECTION 01095 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS ........ 01095-1 to 01095-3 SECTION 01300 - SUBMIITALS ......................... . . . . . . . . 0]300-1 to 01300-8 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01400-1 to 0]400-3 SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ................... 01500-] to 01500-9 SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ................... 0]600-1 to 01600-4 SECTION 01631 - SUBSTITUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01631-1 to 0] 631-3 SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 01700-1 to 0]700-]3 SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES ................................ 01740-] to 01740-3 . 95-052/12-95 Table of Contents TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) . SECTION TITLES PAGES DIVISION 2 SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02110-1 to 02110-3 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 02200-1 to 02200-11 SECTION 02281 - TERMITE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02281-1 to 02281-2 SECTION 02480 - LANDSCAPE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 02480-1 to 02480-10 SECTION 02511 - HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING................... 02511-1 to 02511-5 SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING. . . . . . . . .. 02520-1 to 02520-13 SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS ............................ 02665-1 to 02665-21 SECTION 02700 - SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 02700-1 to 02700-23 SECTION 02711 - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS ............... 02711-1 to 02711-4 SECTION 02831 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02831-1 to 02831-6 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03011 - CONCRETE TESTING........................... 03011-1 to 03011-3 SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORM WORK ........................ 03100-1 to 03100-3 SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT ;.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03200-1 to 03200-3 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 03300-1 to 03300-14 SECTION 03345 - CONCRETE FINISHES~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03345-1 to 03345-5 SECTION 03430 - PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03430-1 to 03430-5 SECTION 03520 - INSULATING CONCRETE DECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03520-1 to 03520-5 DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 04200-1 to 04200-17 . DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05120-1 to 05120-5 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 05500-1 to 05500-10 SECTION 05810 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 05810-1 to 05810-5 DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY ........................... 06100-1 to 06100-6 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .......... 06402-1 to 06402-8 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07111 - COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING ............. 07111-1 to 07111-6 SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING ................... 07160-1 to 07160-3 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION ....................... 07210-1 to 07210-5 SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS (PB) .... 07241-1 to 07241-9 SECTION 07242 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS (PM) .... 07242-1 to 07242-9 SECTION 07251 - SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING .................... 07251-1 to 07251-8 SECTION 07270 - FlRESTOPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 07270-1 to 07270-10 SECTION 07527 - SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING ..... . . 07527-1 to 07527-9 SECTION 07620 -'SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM .............. 07620-1 to 07620-8 SECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07710-1 to 07710-4 SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES ........................... 07720-1 to 07720-5 95-052/12-95 II Table of Contents . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES SECTION 07810 - PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS ...................... 07810-1 to 07810-5 SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 07901-1 to 07901-10 DIVISION 8 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ................... 08110-1 to 08110-6 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS......................... 08211-1 to 08211-6 SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08331-1 to 08331-5 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS .......................... 08410-1 to 08410-8 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 08710-1 to 08710-11 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING ................................. 08800-1 to 08800-10 SECTION 08920 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS ............ 08920-1 to 08920-8 . DIVISION 9 SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ................. 09255-1 to 09255-14 SECTION 09300 - TILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .'. . . . 09300-1 to 09300-8 SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09511-1 to 09511-7 SECTION 09521 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09521-1 to 09521-4 SECTION 09660 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING .................... 09660-1 to 09660-6 SECTION 09678 - RESILIENT WALL BASE & ACCESSORIES ........... 09678-1 to 09678-4 SECTION 09680 - CARPET ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 09680- 1 to 09680-7 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING ........,........................ 09900-1 to 09900-16 SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS ............................ 09950-1 to 09950-4 DIVISION 10 SECTION 10170 - SOLID PHENOLIC PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS. . SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES .................................. SECTION 10425 - SIGNS . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES '.. SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ............... 10170-1 to 10170-4 10350-1 to 10350-3 10425-1 to 10425-6 10522-1 to 10522-4 10800-1 to 10800-6 DIVISION I I SECTION 11110 - COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT ............. 11110-1 to II J 10-4 SECTION 11160 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT ............;....... 11160-1 to 11160-3 SECTION 11191 - SECURITY HOLLOW METAL' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '. .. . .11191-1 to 11191-11 SECTION 11192 - SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING .. . . . . .. . . .. . . ; . . ... 11192-1 to 11192-7 SECTION 11194 - DETENTION EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11194-1 to 11194-22 SECTION 11195 - SECURITY ACCESSORIES AND FURNITURE ..;.. -. . . . _ 11195-1 to I 1195-4 , SECTION 11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT .................... 11400~1 to 11400-57 DIVISION 12 SECTION 12690 -FLOOR MATS & FRAMES 12690-1 to 12690-3 . DIVISION 13 SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122-1 to 13122-7 95-052/12-95 III Table of Contents TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) . SECTION TITLES PAGES DIVISION 14 SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS ....................... 14240-1 to 14240-9 DIVISION 15 SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ............ 15010-1 to 15010-6 SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS ..................... 15140-1 to 15140-3 SECTION 15242 - VIBRATION ISOLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15242-1 SECTION 15260 - PIPING INSULATION .......................... 15260-1 to 15260-2 SECTION 15290 - DUCTWORK INSULATION ..................... 15290-1 to 15290-2 SECTION 15310 - FIRE PROTECTION PIPING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15310-1 to 15310-3 SECTION 15325 - SPRINKLER SYSTEMS .......................... 15325-1 to 15325-3 SECTION 154 I 0 - PLUMBING PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 I 0-1 to 154 I 0-5 SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES ...................... 15430-1 to 15430-3 SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES ........................ 15440-1 to 15440-8 SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT ....................... 15450-1 to 15450-2 SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15510-1 to 15510-3 SECTION 15515 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15515-1 to 15515-3 SECTION 15540 - HV AC PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15540-1 to 15540-2 SECTION 15575 - BREACHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS ............ 15575-1 to 15575-2 SECTION 15650 - SECURITY COVER SYSTEM (SHROUD) FOR CONCEALMENT OF FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING . . .. 15650-1 to 15650-2 SECTION 15684 - CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15684-1 to 15684-10 SECTION 15835 - TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS ............... 15835-1 to 15835-2 SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS ............... 15855-1 to 15855-5 SECTION 15870 - POWER VENTILATORS ....................... 15870-1 to 15870-2 SECTION 15890 - DUCTWORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15890-1 to 15890-2 SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES ...................... 15910-1 to 15910-2 SECTION 15936 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ...................... 15936-1 to 15936-2 SECTION 15975 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS ............ 15975-1 to 15975-19 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING .......... 15990-1 to 15990-3 . DIVISION 16 SECTION 16050 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16050-1 to 16050-5 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS ................................. 16110-1 to 16110-7 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS .............................. 16120-1 to 16120-4 SECTION 16130 - BOXES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16130-1 to 16130-5 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES ............................ 16140-1 to 16140-4 SECTION 16170 - MOTOR & EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS ................... 16170-1 SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS .......................... 16195-1 SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16420-1 SECTION 16425 - SERVICE SWITCHES & SWITCHBOARDS. . . . . . . . . . .. 16425-1 to 16425-5 SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16440-1 to 16440-2 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING ................................. 16450-1 to 16450-4 SECTION 16460 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS ..................... 16460-1 to 16460-2 95-052/12-95 IV Table of Contents . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS .......................:....... 16470-1 to 16470-4 SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION .................... 16475-1 to 16475-4 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING ................................... 16500-1 to 16500-2 SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE/COMPUTER/CATV , RACEWAY SYSTEM ............................... 16740-1 SECTION 16744 - SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK ......... 16744-1 to 16744-13 SECTION 16745 - NURSE CALL SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16745-1 to 16745-4 SECTION 16747 - CLOSED~CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM. . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . .. 16747-1 to 16747-6 SECTION 16748 - LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... ... 16748-1 to 16748-8 SECTION 16749 - DOOR ANNUNCIATORS AND LOCK CONTROLS ..... 16749-1 to 19749-11 SECTION 16760 - EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16760-1 to 16760-11 SECTION 16915 - LOW VOLTAGE RELAY SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16915-1 to 16915-4 . .' 95-052/12-95 v Table of Contents . , SECTION 00030 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS PROJECT: Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center - Phinizv Road OWNER: Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government Sealed bids will be received by the Augu~ta/Richmond County Commiss.ion Council of Richmond County, Georgia for a General Contract to furnish and install all materials, labor and equipment, necessary for the new construction of the AugustafRichmond County Detention Center located on PhinizY Road, in Augusta, Georgia. 'Pre-Bid Conference: A pre-bid conference shall be held at 2:00 p.m. on Thursday, February 8, 1996, at the Transition Team Trailer located behind the existing jail at 401 4th Street. 'Mixer Conference: A mixer conference shall be held at 6:00 p.m. on Thursday; February 8, ,199~ after the pre-bid conference. Bids will be received by the AuglistafRichmond County Commission Council at the Purchasing Department, , ,Room 207, Municipal Building/530' Greene Street, Augusta, Georgia 30911 no later than 11 :00 a.m., on _Thursday, February 22, 1996. Bids will be publicly opened ~d read aloud at this location. Any bid received after 11:00 am. on bid opening date will not be considered by OWNER. Bids will be evaluated by OWNER and the project award is anticipated upon completion of this evaluation. BASE BID: Materials, labor, tools, equipment and all other miscellaneous and/or necessary items for the construction of a 137,940 s.f. Detention Facility. . Alternates: (If authorized by Owner) ,The required time of completion is Seven Hundred Thirty (730) consecutive calendar days (24 months) from the date of the written Notice to Proceed. Copies of Bidding Documents may be obtained at the office of Precision Planning, Inc., 400 Pike Boulevard, P. O. Box 2210, Lawrenceville,- Georgia 30246 upon payment of a non-refundable cost of Five Hundred dollars ($500.00). Checks shall be made payable to Precision Planning, Inc. Bid Documents may be examined at the following locations: Augusta/Richmond Co. Purchasing Dept. Rm. 207, Municipal Bldg. Augusta, GA 30911 (706) 821-2422 Precision Planning, Inc. 400 -Pike Boulevard P. O. Box 2210 La'YrencevilIe, GA 30246 (770) 338-8000 F. W. Dodge Room New South Bldg. Suite 110 360 Bay Street Augusta, GA 3090 I (706) 722-3939 F. W. Dodge Room , 4170 Ashford-Dunwoody Road Suite 200 Atlanta, GA 30319 (404) 255-2565 Construction Market Data 4126Pleasantdale Road Suite B-1 02 Atlanta, GA 30340 (404) 447-0601 F. W. Dodge Room Executive Park North, Suite 110 271 0 Sh~raton Drive Macon, Georgia 31204 (912) 746-3313 . 95-052/12-95 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00030-1 Atlanta Builders Exchange 1575 Northside Drive, Suite 120 Atlanta, Georgia 30318 (404) 355-1091 F. W. Dodge Room Atrium-Stoneridge Bldg. Suite 660 140 Stoneridge Dr. Columbia, SC 292] 0 (803) 771-6545 Construction Market Data 1101G Elmwood Ave. Columbia, SC 29201 (803) 252-2627 . Jail Transition Team 401 Walton Way Augusta, Georgia 30911 (706) 821-1086 Augusta Builders Exchange 304 14th Street Augusta, Georgia 30901 (706) 724-1846 OWNER requires a bid bond issued by a Surety listed on the Treasury as licensed in the State of Georgia, or a cashier's check in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the total bid to be enclosed with your bid at the time of bid opening to be made payable to OWNER. No other form of security will be acceptable. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope, addressed to OWNER. Each sealed envelope containing a Bid must be plainly marked on the outside as, "BID ITEM #96-2-AUGUST A/RICHMOND COUNTY DETENTION CENTER PROJECT". If bid is forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the Bid must be enclosed in another envelope to the attention of OWNER at the address previously given. All Bids must be made out on the bid form of the type bound in the Contract Documents, in accordance with the instructions in the Information for BIDDERS. No interlineations, additions, or deletions shall be made in the proposal form by BIDDER. No conditional Bids will be acceptable. Contract will be awarded on a stipulated sum to the most responsive BIDDER presenting the lowest acceptable Bid, based on the Lump Sum Base Bid plus any combination of Alternates (if appropriate) acceptable to Owner. . OWNER reserves the rights to waive any informalities or to reject any or all Bids, to evaluate Bids, and to accept any Bid which in its opinion may be in the best interest of OWNER. No Bid will be rejected without just cause. Any and all Bids received without the aforementioned criteria enclosed, will be returned to BIDDER. No BIDDER may withdraw his bid within the time limit specified in the Instructions to Bidders Section 00100. Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government 95-052/12-95 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00030-2 . .. Section 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AlA Document 701 . . 95-052/12-95 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100-1 . . . Instructions to Bidders AJ.P/jDS AlA Document A701 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. DEFINITIONS 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3. BIDDING POCUMENTS 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES 5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6. POST-BID INFORMATION 7. PERFORMANCE'BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS.ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA DOCUMEN-TD4Dl. Copyright 1970.1974, 1978, 1987 by The American Institute of,Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006-5292. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. ' license number 1195000402 a~d can be reproduced without violation until 11/22/95. AlA DOCUMENT A701 . INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. FOURTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W.. WASHINGTON. D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced under Electronic Document Service A 701-1987 00100-2 . INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms, The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1,2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A20 I, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids, 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1..7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: 2.1,1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents and the Bid is made in accordance therewith, 2.1.2 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents, 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. . ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 COPIES 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The depesit ....ill be refunded te Didders nhe s1:1bmit a bena fide Did and return the Didding Deeuments in geed eenditien ',vithin ten days after reeeipt ef Dids. The eest ef replaeement ef missing er damaged deeuments 'viill be dedueted frem the depesit. A Bidder reeei.ing a Centraet a.vard may retain the Didding Deeuments and the Didder's depe3it 'nill be refunded. 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders or oth~rs unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to- Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. . license number 1195000402 and can be reproduced without violllion until 11/2219S. AlA DOCUMENT A701 _ INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS _ FOURTH EDITION - AlA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1715 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W" WASHINGTON. D.C.. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws lnd is subject to leg11 prosecution. This document was electronically produced under Electronic Document Service A 70 1-1987 2 00100-3 . 3.1'.4 In making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents. 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION' OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS ' 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and co;npare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect e,rrors, inconsistencies-,or ambiguities discovered. ' 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make Ii written request which shall reach the Architect at least se\'eftfour days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. , 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in' any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. . 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitu~ion. ' 3.3,2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt. of Bids unless written request for approval has been ,received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall inClude the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of tp.e proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaiuation.' ~ ' A statement setting forth changes in other materials, ' equipment or other portions of the Work including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed subsHtution would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The" Architect's decision of approval or disapproval, of a proposed substitution shall be final. ' 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will b-e' ~etforth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. .." .,.,~~.."."", . 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. ' '"3.4,2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. ' 3.4.3 No Addenda will be issued later than fe.t:tfthree days prior to the date for receipt of Bids' except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received 'all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge 'their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS 4,1.1 Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the form included with the Bidding Documents. 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 4.1.3 Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed, in both words and figures, and in case of discrepaI,lcy between the two, the 'amount written in words shall govern. 4.1.4' Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the ~igner of the Bid. 4.1.5 All requested Alternates' shall be bid, If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids ,stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other !Ila~ner. ' ' ' 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid ,shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor, partnership, corporation or other legal entity, Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporati,~n shall further give the state of license number 1195000402 and Cln be reproduced without violation until1J/22/9~. AlA DOCUMENT A701 ' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, FOURTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987 ' THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1135 NEW YORK A VENUE. N,W" WASHINGTON. D.C.. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violllcs U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legll pr~scculion. Th.is document was electronically produced under Electronic Document Service A 701-1987 3 00100-4 incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. 4.2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 If so stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or supplementary instructions to bidders, each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required, pledging that the Bidder will enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Subparagraph 6.2.1, 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AlA Document A3l 0, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in- fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids have been rejected. 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and' address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 4.3,3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. . 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or cancel~d by th~ Bidder during the stipulated time period fo.llowlOg the tin:e and date designated for the receipt of BIds, and each BIdder so agrees in submitting a Bid, -4..4.2 Pri~r to theyme and date designated for receipt of BId.s, a BId submItted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for re~eipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the SIgnature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS . 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS 5.1.1 Unless stated otherwise in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud, An abstract of the Bids will be made available to Bidders. When it has been stated that Bids will be opened privately, an abstract of the same information may, at the discretion of the Owner, be made available to the Bidders within a reasonable time. 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS 5.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids, reject a Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 ACCEPTANCE'OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive . AlA DOCUMENT A701 ~INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. FOURTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHINGTON. D.C.. ..0006.5292. WARNING. Unltcenscd photocopYing VIolates U.S. copyught laws 2nd 1$ subJcct to legll prosecution. This-document was c1ccuonically produced under license number 1195000402 and can be reproduced without violation uOlill1/22/95. Electronic Document Service A 701-1987 4 00100-5 . . . informalities or irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 6,1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALlrlCATlON STATEMCNT' 6.1.1 Diddcr3 to ...hom' a ,yard of a Contract i3 liRaCr con3idcration 3hall 3ubmit to the t.rchiteet, upon"rcque3t; a properly eXeel:ltea AlA Docl:1ment A305, Centractor'3 Qualification Statement, 1:lIile33 3ueh a Statement ha3 been previotl3ly requirea and 3l:1bmitted a3 a prerequi3ite to the i33uance of Biading Doeument3. 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY 6;2,1 The Owner shall, at the request of the.Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unles~such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 6.3 SUBMITTALS 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder~s own forces; . .2 names of the manufacturers, products and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; , and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability. and responsibility of the persons or entities.pr.oposed to. furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. '.;~J- 6.3,3 Prior to-the award of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Archi tect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option, (1) withdraw the Bid, or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference jn cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable, objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. 7,1.2 If the furnishing of s.uch bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources, changes in cost ,will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. 7,2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS '7,,2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three ten days following the date of execution of the 'Contraet.issuance of the Notice of Award. If the Workis to be commenced prior thereto in ,response to a letter of intent, 'the, Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Subparagraph 7.2.1. license number 119500040'2 and can be reproduced without violation until 11/1.2/95. AlA DOCUMENT A701 -INSTRUCTIONS.TO BIDDERS. FOURTH EDITION: AlA - COPYRlGHT 1987 - THE AMERlCAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W" WASHINGTON. D.C.. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violatei U.S. copyright laws and is subject TO legal prosecution. This document was clc:clronicilly produced under Electronic Document Service A 70 1-1987 5 00100-6 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shal1 be written on AlA Document A3l2, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. 7.2,3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7,2.4 The Bidder shal1 require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR . 8.1 FORM TO BE USED 8.1.1 Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AlA Document AlOI, Standard Form of Agreement _Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. . . license: number 1195000402 and can be: reproduced without violation until 11/22/9.5. AlA DOCUMENT :"701 _ INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS _ FOURTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W" WASHINGTON. D.C.. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photo'copying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to Ic&al prosecution. This document was electronically produced under Electronic Document Service A 701-1987 6 00100-7 . Section 00101 SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. PREPARATION OF BID Documents required in'the Bid Package: A. Section 00300 - Bid Form and Bid Schedule B. Section 00410 - Bid Bond (AlA A31 0) C. Section 00420 : Contractors Qualification Statement (AlA A305) Each Bid must be submitted on the prescribed Bid Form and accompanied by the Bid Bond issued by a Surety listed on the most current Treasury list as licensed in the State of Georgia (or Cashier's Check), and include the Contractors Qualification Statement. All blank spaces for lump sum price and alternate prices (if any) must be filled in, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures (In , case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern), and the foregoing items must be fully completed and executed when submitted. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside, the name of the Bidder, his address, and the name, of the project for which the Bid is submitted. Prior to bid opening date and hour, errors may be stricken or revisions may be made and corrections entered on the Bid Form, provided that any such strike-over or revision is signed in ink by the person signing the bid or his agent. Anv revision made on the outside of the envelope will not be accepted. 2. SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION . A. B. Notice of Award is anticipated to be issued within 15 days of Bid opening. Notice to Proceed shall be issued upon receipt of Contractor's Performance and Payment Bonds. Contractor must commence work no later than 10 days after receipt of a Written Notice to Proceed. C. 3. MATERIALS TESTING The following materials shall. be tested according to the procedures outlined in their respective specification sections or as described on the drawings. All costs for the Testing shall be paid for by the General Contractor. A. Cast-in-place concrete (footings and slabs) B. Light weight concrete (roof areas) C. Coarse grout (for security filled cells) D. Soils bearing (for trenches, slabs, footings, utility trenches - etcJ E. Structural steel connections 4. GEOTECHNICAL REPORT General Contractor shall teviewall aspects of the geotechnical report contained herein. Special consideration shall be focused on the presence of any soils whose moisture content is generally greater than other soil classifications. General Contractor shall anticipate all means and methods required for proper handling of this soil classification. . 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS' 00 1 0 1-1 5. PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS General Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for all permits, fees and inspections required by state, federal and local laws, ordinances, etc. The permits and fees may include but are not limited to: Building permit, HV AC permit, electrical permit, plumbing permit, water "tap" fee, sewer "tap" fee, business licenses for Contractor and Sub-contractor. . 6. RESOLUTION ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF COMMISSIONERS ON DECEMBER 1. 1987 A. Minority and Economically Disadvantaged Business Support It is the intent of the AugustalRichmond County Consilidated Government to increase the involvement of qualified minority and economically disadvantaged business in the contracted work of County Government. In an effort to support this intention, this project is offered to all qualified firms. The bids will be evaluated based on qualifications, price and construction time. With all other items being considered equal, the contract, if awarded, will be awarded to a minority and economically disadvantaged firm that has included such firms as subcontractors on this project. The bidders shall include with their bid a statement of qualification for themselves and/or any qualified subcontractors explaining why they should be considered a minority or economically disadvantaged firm. If the firm does not fall into this category, no information is necessary. . END OF SECTION 00100 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00101-2 . Section 00200 . SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT (CSRA) . . 95-052/12-95 SUB SURF ACEINVESTIGA TION REPORT 00200-1 r I i , (' . i i i .... ) i, r 1. 0 I ~.. ~' ; -' i I >< . ~ , , ' ~ , / U l. < " ~ ; ..~ , , rJ'J '._40 ~ ~. . rJ'J RICHMOND COUNTY JAIL PHINIZY ROAD AUGUSTA, GEORGIA REPORT NO. B-11695 \ \ , Prepared by:, ~SRA Testing and Engineering COrl Jnc, ,1005 Emmett Street, Suite A Augusta, Georgia 30904 (706) 733-6960 . Fax (706) 737-0629 00200-2 ..'" i T . ) , , :...l J I I ,. I I ., 1 .J I J l J '- 1 I j csra TESTING AND ENGINEERING CO" INC, 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 , , (706) 733-6960 FAX (706) 737-0629 , November 9, 1995 Richmond County Board of Commissioners c/o Precision Planning, Inc, P,O; Box 2210 Lawrenceville, Georgia 30246 Attn: Mr, Doug Shaw, AIA ,Dear Doug: Re: Richmond County Jail Phinizy Road Augusta, Georgia (B-11695) ,As requested, this firm has performed a subsurface exploration at the ab.ove subject site. We are enclos41-g three (3) copies of the completed report. This report describes the methods of exploration and presents the results of our tests, If there are any changes llLthe plans or if we can be of further service, please do n'ot hesitate to contact us, JMP/dq Sincerely,' , () ~1rl. .y~ James M, Pope, P ,E, President 00200-3 1 :i ~ . INTRODUCTION 1 , j , , .i :.;,.i I I I .fj. I I ~ I I 1 i oJ . ! J This report presents the results of a foundation exploration for a proposed new Richmond County Jail Complex on Phinizy Road in Augusta, Georgia. It is our understanding that the planned construction is to (onsist of single story structures of conventional design. The scope of this exploration was to deterniine the character and composition of underlying soil strata and to define the soil profile, Field and laboratory analyses were made to assess engineering characteristics of , the foundation materials and to provide criteria for use by the 'design 'engineers and architects in preparing the foundation design, 1 00200-4, ,. ,,~ . 1 1 I ~ , j I I I I I I 1 i J I I .., I 1 .J I J 1 J FIELD INVESTIGATION . The field exploration to determine the engineering characteristics of the foundation materials included a reconnaissance of the project site, the making of the borings~: the performance of standard penetration tests and i the recovery of disturbed split spoon samples, The apparent ground water level was recorded in each boring after completion, A total of ten (10) test borings, numbered B-1 through B-IO, and six (6) auger borings, numbered SP-I through SP-6, have been made, and these were drilled to depths shown on the individual test boring records. The locations of these borings are shown on the attached Boring Location Plan. . In the test borings, soil sampling was performed in accordance with ASTM D-1586. The borings were made with continuous steel auger flights. At regular intervals, standard penetration tests were conducted ~th a two inch (2") split tube sampler. The sampler was first seated six inches (6") to penetrate any loose cuttings, then driven an additional foot with blows of a 140 pound hammer falling thirty inches (30"), A record was made of the number of hammer blows required to drive the sampler the final foot. This number is designated the penetration resistance and is an index of the soil strength and density, . 2 "n")('", E: ~ .., . ~ J 1 ',~ :..A I I I " I I , ..i J I '1 ! ~ Ie I 1 1 J In the auger bopngs, samples from the augers were continuously monitored during the drilling 'operation and the condition's reported on the field boring logs along with any observed changes in soil consistency and drilling resista~ce. 3 00200-6 " .~ ""!' ..J. I l 1 ! .J 1 ) J I I I ~ i J I I ~ j j I ! j SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS . Representative samples of the soils obtained by the standard penetration tests were visually examined in the field and returned to our I - ; \ laboratory for further ~alysis, In the laboratory, each sample was examined ; and classified by composition and texture according to the Unified Soil Classification System. The types of subsurface materials encountered in these test borings are described on the accompanying test boring records, The results of our standard penetration tests and water level observation at the time of this exploration are listed in numerical form on the test boring records. The soil conditions described in the test boring records represent our interpretation of the field boring logs, visual examination of the soil samples, and comparison to typical samples from past explorations in this geophysical . regton. Representative samples of the soil were placed in special sample jars and are now stored in our laboratory if further analysis is desired, Unless we are notified otherwise, all of the soil samples from this exploration will be disposed of after thirty (30) days, . 4 00200- 7 1I '~ ~ . -- SITE CONDITIONS J 1 l _.J ] I I " I I 1 ..; I I ~ ~ ~ ... Ie I ~ I .,j This property is located on Phinizy Road and slopes upward from the , . road toward the plann~d huilding area, The site is generally open with some I' . ' _ scattered small tree.s, No unusual topographic features were noted on the " . surface from our visual observations, The subsurface conditions underlying this site w~re found to vary somewhat in composition in the uppermost sUrface layers but were quite uniform in density at all of the boring locations. The results of our standard penetration tests indicate that there are moderate soil bearing qualities at reasonably shallow depths on this site with conditions suitable for normal spread foundations, Further discussions of soil bearillg values and foundation treatment are given in a following section of this report. 5 00200-8 '~ ,. I J 1 J j I I I I , 1 ..j I I '.. , ; , .J I ! 1 j WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS . Water level observations were made during the boring operations and are noted on the test boring records for each of the respective test boring locations. In relatively pervious or sandy soils, the indicated levels are , considered reliable ground water elevations. In relatively impervious soils, the accurate determination of the ground water elevation may not be possible even after several days of observation, Seasonal variations may influence the levels of the ground water table and volumes of water will depend on the permeability of the upper soils. If deep excavations or pits are planned, additional long-term studies of the ground water table would be advisable, This can be done with the installation of piezometers or perforated casing which extend below the bottom of proposed excavations. . No subsurface ground water table was encountered in these test -- borings to the depth drilled at the time of this exploration, . 6 00200-9 :; :::0 ~ . j 1 j ] J ] . ,I ) ! j J 'I ..., f .,j ~ J ~ , j STRUCTURAL FILL Due to variations in the surface elevation at this site, it appears that sonle site grading and.,filling will be required to achieve the proposed final i grade elevation for thi~ project. We have examined the on-site soils and compared them to sinular soils which have been the on-site soils and compared them to sinillar soils whic~have been encountete<;l on past construction projects. It ~s our opinion that the on-site soils are suitable for use as. leveling fill in the building area, Additional borrow material, if ne'eded, should have a clay cont~nt of from five to fifteen percent (5%-15%), a liquid llinit of less than twenty-five (25), and a pla~tidty index of not more than nine (9), When building loads' are placed within a soil fill condition, special care is necessary to assure that the soil is densely compacted, We recommend _ . pl~cement of all fill soils in thin six inch (6") layers with each lift compacted to 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM .D~698, In-place field density tests should be taken durin~ the grading operations to assure that property degree of compaction is. obtained as the fill is being placed, 7 00200-10 .1 .f , ' ,j j 1 i , ':oJ I I I I I I .., ! .... I I "' i .; I J 1 j SITE DRAINAGE . Consideration should be given to the proper planning of grading operations at this site in order to prevent delays caused by surface water conditions. Some problems with surface drainage may occur at this site during construction unless proper ditching and site gradients are provided. If construction is scheduled during a rainy period, temporary drainage will be necessary to prevent construction equipment from rutting and pumping of the subgrade soils and to allow footing excavations to be made in a dry condition. These provisions will be necessary until final grades are established to eliminate soft surface conditions caused by ponded water in low areas after rainfall. . Some' of the surface soils contains significant amounts of silt and clay size particles and will soften considerably if they become saturated. This condition may require aeration or removal of softened soils if grading operations are done in a rainy period, 8 . 00200-11 , ,"' ~ " . J i . . ~ I I I " I I '1 ) j ~ I I 1 -i Ie ! , j DISCUSSION It is our understanding that single story buildings of conventional design are to be co~structed at this site, The results of conditions ,encountered in these t,est borings indicate satisfactory soils for'support of this type of construction, A net uniform soil pressure of 2,500 psf can be used for foundations placed at depths of two to three feet (2'-3') below the present surface level. These upper soils are susceptible to softening from surface water and if precipitation occurs,after excavation to grade, all softened soils should be removed and footings ext~nded down to stiff conditions, No solid rock or refusal materials were encountered in these borings and no soils with expansive properties were found at these locations, , Based upon the subgrade'soils-at these boring locations, conditions are ~uitable for a flexible pavement system consisting of a crushed stone base and asphaltic concrete.surface course, When final cons1TI1:ction plans are complet~, we will be available for further consultation on these soil conditions upon request, 9 00200-12 ~~ .. J .i . J 1 . 'i J I I I ...... .,...-- I . I J ! , ! ~ ,\, _-..,'\.. " .-,-s , " '1/"'-. \. ( '\:, '.>, 0 ,'i, .,~ \.<......./ ~ '.> i J · /r,"-:2'\/~.'. =r--/ lor:' 7---:~/ --=~\\, 0 'M / I,' I 11'" - ' .... ''\::J " '-'" -".-'" , ~ ...--..... \ "'.', .' ...----- I '"j .-.' ........ r:~" '. / I [ .#~', ~ '" ',-/' Ir- ," .~-. '~lc:c~~'f?~G l;'~~= ,II! !.-'t~Z~~~~ " :! \.. r -F'~~ R. 'fr==-'tl ~q 5 I ' / s.:~. \ ( ....-..----------; !'r '" / I ( I r"'-----. .1 ..~--....... . .....'!!- ' " .:.a..j _ ....-"- _._--;=z::::.~" ,.' '"'--''' --.. ---.~- e ':Ii -....,- :~~-~ llIi"-:;__ -::k~ .~.- -.~..- '. ~I - - ".;. = - - '-.:. - -' = :. =. -::. \ """-=-. ~~:~KJ - PHINlZY ,....-- .r---.; ,/ , \" .--..--.... J ; .J I I , ! .,j I :: =. = ::'= I 5-6 :0\ .,.- k"" "==-=-~ .,~ ROAD 80' RI'''' '- - 1 j 00200-13 , . csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC. , AUGUST A, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A PROJECT Ridnnnd ('1)l1nry .1M; 1 lOCATION Auausta. Georgia ;. :i DEPTH FEET '::t . "!: i, -- I I I VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION - .~ 5' Stiff to Very Stiff, RE"C'Ir'l;~h-Brown, Fine Sandy Clay Firm, FPiir'li~h-Tan, Fine Clayey Sand 10' Stiff, Tan and White, Kaolinitic, Fine Silty Clay I J I I ; ...J 15' Finn, Tan and White, Fine Silty Sand Dense, , Tan, Fine to Coarse Sand BOring Tenn:inated at 20 feet. 25' 30' 35' 40' N Value is number of blc;>ws of 140 pound -.1 hammer required to drive 2" split-tube j sampler one foot after seated, .t BORING NO. B-1 DATE O:tober 30, 1995 PENETRATION , - VALUE (N) UNIFIED CLASS. 12 @ 2' 15 @ 4' 11 @ 7' 14 @ 9' 10 @ 14' 21 @ 19' None _ WATER TABLE PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-14 """ csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A Richrond County Jail PROJECT LOCATION Augusta, Georgia ''! i l DEPTH FEET 1 I I I I 1 10' 15' -' 25' j I 30' 35' I ! 40' VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION Finn, RPrln;~n-Brown, Fine Clayey Sand 5' Stiff to Very Stiff, Kaolinitic, Fine Silty Clay Finn to Dense, Tan and White, Fine Silty Boring Tenninated at 20 feet. N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube , sampler one foot after seated, .. BORING NO. DATE . October 30, 1995 B-2 PENETRATION VALUE eN) 13 @ 21 4 @ 41 16 @ 71 18 @ 91 16 @ 141 20 @ 191 UNIFIED CLASS. - None -===- WATER TABLE PERCENT MOISTURE . 00200-15 - ." csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A . PROJECT Richrrond County Jail LOCATION ,Augusta, Gebrgia i DEPTH FEET ~ 1 .J 'I I I 10' 15' I I - I ), : ~ 35' 40' VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPT!ON Finn, Renn;!';h-Brown, Fine Clayey Sand 5' Stiff to Very Stiff, FPi'!n; !';h-Gray, Kaoliniti , Fine Silty Clay Finn, Tan and White, Fine Silty Sand Stiff, Gray , Kaolinitic, Fine Silty Clay Boring Tenn:ina.ted at 25 feet. N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, BORING NO'. B-3 DATE October 30, 1995 PENETRATION' VAlUE (N) UNIFIED CLASS. 10 @ 2' 11 @ 4' 13 @ 7' 17 @9' 10 @ 14' 13 @ 19' 15 @ 24' -None ' - WATER TABLE - ' PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-1fi PROJECT csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC. AUGUSTA. GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET. SUITE A Richrond County Jail LOCATION Auqusta, Georqia ... 1 .1 DEPTH FEET .,. 1; 1 I I I I I I 10' 15' 25' -' j J 30' j , :& VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION Stiff, FPrln;!=;h-Tan, Fine Clayey Silt 5' Finn, Tan, Fine Silty Sand Very Stiff, Renn; !=;h-Gray, Kaolinitic, Fine Silty Clay Dense, Tan and Whi. te, Fine Silty Sand .,., Boring Tenninated at 20 feet. 35' 40' N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated. , .... BORING NO. B-4 DATE PENETRATION VALUE (N) 13 @ 2' 18 @ 4' 18 @ 7' 12 @ 91 22 @ 14' 20 @ 191 October 30. 1995 UNIFIED CLASS. None -===- WATER TABLE . PERCENT MOISTURE nn?nn-17 csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC. AUGUST A, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A . ,-- PROJECT Richrond County Jail B-5 BORING NO. October 30, 1995 - LOCATION Augusta. Georgia DATE '1 j UNIFIED CLASS. PERCENT MOISTURE PENETRATION VAlUE (N) VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION DEPTH FEET 1 Fi..J:m, Brown, Fine Sil Sand U @ 21 Stiff, Brownish-Tan, Fine Sandy Clay ~ :,:' oj 14 @ 4 1 5' 21 @ 71 24 @ 9' Dense, RPrlc'l;~h-Brown, Fine Clayey Sand Very Stiff, RPrlc'l;~h-Gray, Kaolinitic, Fine Silty Clay 20 @ 14' Stiff, Grayish-Brown, Kaolinitic, Fine Silty Clay I 1 .. 14 @ 19' Boring Tenninated at 20 feet. ... i 1 :a N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, None _ WATER TABLE t - 00200-:18 ::.. '.r, csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO" INC. AUGUST A, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 ~ 1005 EMMETT STREET. SUITE A PROJECT Richrrond County Jail - LOCATION Augusta, Georgia BORING NO. October 30, 1995 8-6 . DATE ] DEPTH FEET" VISUAL SOIL -DESCRIPTION PEN ET"RATI ON VALUE (N) UNIFIED CLASS. PERCENT MOISTURE , ~ ; Finn Brown Fine Sil Stiff, FPfini!=:h-Tan, Fine Silty Clay 14 @ 2' 5' Very Stiff, Grayish-Tan, Kaolinitic, Fine Silty Clay _ Very Stiff, Grayish-Brown, Fine Silty Clay 21 @ 4' Dense, Tan, Fine Silty Sand 26 @ 9' 1 I J I I 1 25 @ 7' 10' 22 @ 14' 15 @ 19 I 15' Stiff to Very Stiff, RPrlni !=:h-Gray, Kaoliniti , Fine Silty Clay Boring Te.nn:inated at 20 feet. 25' l ) 30' ~ , .. .. 40' -' 35' 1 N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, ..None.. WATER TABLE .i '* nn?nn-lq csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A . Richrrond County Jail PROJECT ...J LOCATION Augusta, Georgia BORING NO. B-7 Novanber 1, 1995 DATE 1 DEPTH FEET VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION PENETRATION VALUE (N) UNIFIED CLASS. PERCENT MOISTURE 1 Finn, Brown, Fine Silty Sand 13 @ 2' 5' Stiff to Very Stiff, RFrlr'li~h":'Tan, 'Fine Silty Clay 17 @ 4' 19 @ 7' 20 @ 9' 10' Very Stiff, FPrlr'li ~h-Gray, Kaolinitic, Fine Silty Clay 21 @ 141 15' Finn to Dense, Tan, Fine Sand I 1 15 @ 19' Boring Tenninated at 20 feet. 25' j J 30' 35' 40' N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, None -===- WATER TABLE . - ()()')()()-')() csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A BORING NO. B-8 Riclm:md County Jail PROJECT LOCATION Augusta, Georgia J DEPTH FEET ,. ! , " ~ I I ] ] I 10' 15' 1 j -- I ! I ~ 2 November 1, 1995 DATE VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION PENETRATION VALUE (N) UNIFIED CLASS. Finn, B:rown, Fine Silty Sand 12 @ 2' Finn, BI:u.m, Slightly Clayey, Fine Sand 15 @ 4' 5' Finn, Tan, Fine Silty Sand 14 @ 7' 22 @ 9' Dense, Renn;~h-Tan, Fine Clayey Sand Dense, Tan, Fine to Coarse Sand 24 @ 14' 22 @ 19' 20' Very Stiff, Gray, Kaolinitic, Fine Silty 19 @ 24' Boring Tenni.nated at 25 feet. 30' 35' 40' N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, None -===- WATER TABLE t . PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-21 ~ c sr, a TESTING'& ENGINEERfNG co", INC, AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET. SUITE A . 'Rich1ro. nd County Jail PROJECT - LOCATION ..Augusta, Georgia 1 DEPTH FEET 1 , .3 . 5' I I I 10' 15' , 1 oJ 25' j J 30' ~ 35' 40' , VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION. Finn, Tan, Fine to Medium, Slightly Clayey Sand Stiff, RPrlrli~h-Tan and Gray, Fine Sandy Clay Finn to Dense, Rerlrli~h-Tan, Fine Clayey Sand Very Stiff, Grayish-Tan, Fine Sandy Clay Dense, Tan and White, Fine to Medium Sand Boring Tenni.nated at 20 feet. N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, 1 ~ J BORING NO. B-9 DATE Nov~l, 1995 PENETRATION VALUE (N) 10 @ 2' 15 @ 4' 15 @ 7' 20 @ 9' 18 @ 14' 21 @ 19' UNIFIED CLASS. None , -===- WATER TABLE PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-22 ...... csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC, AUGUST A. GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET. SUITE A B-l0 PROJECT Ricblrond County Jail LOCATION Augusta, Georgia 1 DEPTH FEET "1 J J I I I I 1 J 1 -; j 1 ..; BORING NO. t-bvember 1, 1995 . DATE VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION PENETRATION VALUE (N) UNIFIED CLASS. Finn, Brown, Fine Silty Sand 12 @ 21 Stiff, FPrln;!=:h-Tan, Fine Sandy Clay 14 @ 41 5' 15 @ 91 10' Stiff, Grayish-Tan, Fine Sandy Clay 20 @ 141 15' Dense, Ferln;!=:h-Tan, Fine Clayey Sand Finn, Tan and White, Fine to Medium Sand 11 @ 19 1 Boring Tenninated at 20 feet. 25' 30' 35' 40' N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, None -===- WATER TABLE j PERCENT MOISTURE . ~ csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO" INC. AUGUSTA. GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A . '_, PROJECT Richrrond County Jail ,,j lOCA TlON Auausta. Georqia J , , DEPTH FEET ; , ~ -.. ) I I 10' 15' I 20' J i 25' ..; I 30' I ., , - 35' VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTION, Finn 'Finn BORING NO. DATE October 31. 1995 5B-1 PENETRATION VALUE (N) Sand 5' Finn, Tan, Slightly Clayey, Fine Sand Boring Tenninated at 8 feet. N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, i J UNIFIED CLASS. ~ WATER TABLE PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-24 csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A PROJECT Richrrond County Jail BORING NO. SB-2 LOCATION Auqusta, Georgia DATE October 31. 1995 ] 1 :~ 1 I J I I ] .J I I , .... I 1 . DEPTH FEET 10' 15' 20' VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPflON PENETRATION VALUE (N) UNIFIED CLASS. 25' Stiff, Grayish-Tan, Fine Sandy Clay 5' Dense, Tan, Fine to Medium Sand Boring Tenninated at 8 feet. N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, .. i 30' 35' 40' None -===- WATER TABLE . PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-25 csra TESTING & ENGINEERING- CO., INC. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A . PROJECT ,Richrrond County Jail BORING NO. SB-3 '. lOCATION' Auqusta, Georqia i DEPTH FEET l ~ DATE VISUAl SOiL DESCRIPTION PENETRATION VALUE (N) Finn 'B:I:"own Fine SiT FiJ:m, FPrln; ~h-'B:I:"own, Fine Clayey Sand 5' Stiff, Grayish-White, Fine Silty Clay 10' Boring Te.nni.nated at 8 feet. 15' I 20' t 25' ~ I 30' --- J ...;. N Value is number of blows cjf .140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated, October 31. 1995 UNIFIED CLASS. None -===- WATER TABLE PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-26 .., csra TESTING & ENGINEERING Co.., INC. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A BORING NO. SB-4 PROJECT Richrrond County Jail - LOCATION Augusta, Ceorgia 1 DEPTH FEET ., 1 , i :.i 5' ) I I I I 1 10' 15' 20' 25' J J 30' I 1 so '. October 31, 1995 DATE VISUAL splL DESCR I PTmN PENETRATION VALUE (N) UNIFIED CLASS. Stiff, Tan, Fine ~ Clay Dense, Brown, Slightly Clayey, Fine Sand Boring Temti.nated at 8 feet. 35' 40' N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated. None ~ WATER TABLE " I ~ . PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-27 .~ "7. '.~ ~ csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO.; INC. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A . - PROJECT Riclm:>nd Colinty Jail LOCATION Augusta, Georgia i DEPTH FEET ., .r, 10' 15' I 20' ) 25' - I 30' 1 .- 35' 40' BORr,NG NO. SB-5 DATE, October 31, 1995 , VISUAl SOIL DESCRIPTlON PENETRATION VAlUE (N) Stilf , Tan, Fine SiltY.Clay 5'. " Stiff, Grayish-Tan, Fine Silty Clay Boring Tenninated at8 feet. 'N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube ; sampler one foot after seated, - UNIFIED CLASS. None' , _ WATER TABLE PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-28 -': " csra TESTING & ENGINEERING CO" INC. AUGUST A, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960 (FAX) 737-0629 1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A BORING NO. SB-6 PROJECT Richm:>nd County Jail ..... LOCATION Augusta, Georgia 1 DEPTH FEET ., ...iJ J I I J I I 10' 15' 20' I I ~ I 1 .a October 31, 1995 DATE VISUAL SOIL DESCRIPTlON PENETRATION VALUE (N) UNIFIED CLASS. Finn, FE'rln; !=:h-Tan, Fine Clayey Sand 5' Stiff, Grayish-Tan, Fine Sandy Clay Boring Temri.nated at 8 feet. 25' 30' 35' 40' N Value is number of blows of 140 pound hammer required to drive 2" split-tube sampler one foot after seated. ;, ..i: None _ WATER TABLE . PERCENT MOISTURE 00200-29 . Section 00300 : BID FORM Proposal for General Contracting for the Au!!ustalRichmond Countv Detention Center - Phinizv Road Proposal submitted by Beers Construction Company (Name of Contractor) ,(hereinafter referred to as "BIDDER"). Au!!ustalRichmond County Consolidated Government (Hereinafter referred 10 as "OWNER") 605 City/County Bldg. Augusta Georgia 30911 Gentlemen: The' BIDDER by making a bid represents that the following have taken place: The BIDDER has read and understands the bidding documents and the bid is made in accordance therewith. . The BIDDER has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be perfonned, and has correlated the BIDDER'S personal observations with the requirements of the proposed contract documents. . The BID is based upon the materials, equipment, and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. . The BIDDER has studied and compared the bidding documents with each other and has reported to the architect any errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered. . The BIDDER hereby agrees to commence work under this contract on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of OWNER and to fully complete the project within the time frame as described in Section 00030 Advertisement for Bids. . The BIDDER acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: I ADDENDUM NO. I DATE RECEIVED I 1 /-11-Qh 2 L-14-96 3 2-20-96 4 2-26-96 The BIDDER understands that the OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any infonnalities in the bidding. . The BIDDER agrees that his bid shall be binding and may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. e 95-052/12-95 BID FORM 00300-1 , " . . .' . . The BDDER agrees that the bid security attached in the sum of ten (10%) percent of the total bid is to be:ome the property of the OWNER in the event the Contract and bonds are not executed within 6e time set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the OWNER caused thereby. . LUMP SUM 3ASE BID ) Respectfully Submined: Beers Construction By: Dwight Title: Business Address: 70 Ell is Street, NE Atlanta, GA 30303 Federal LD. or Social Security No.: 58-1481952 1:\ A~/JL Name: Chri stopher Wi 11 i ams (Please Type) NOTE: A11esrfor a corporaIion must be by the corporate secretary; for a partnership by another partner; for an individual by a Notary. 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 00300 BID FORM 00300-2 . Section 00310 PARTNERSHIP CERTIFICATE STATE OF ) )SS ) COUNTY OF On this _ day of , 19_, before me personally 'appeared' known to me to be the person who executed the above instrument, who, being by first duly sworn, did depose and say that he is a general partner in the finn of and that finn consists of himself and and that he executed the foregoing instrument on behalf of said finn for the uses and purposes stated therein, and that no one except the above named members of the finn have any financial interest whatsoever in said proposed contract. PARlNER PARTNER . PARTNER PARlNER Subscribed and sworn to before me, this _ day of ,19_. NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: , (Date) NOTE: If only one partner signs, a power of attorney executed by all other partners authorizing him to act in the name of the Company must be attached, otherwise, all partners must sign. END OF SECTION 00310 . 95-052/12-95 PAR lNERSHIP CER TIFICA TE 00310-1 Section 00320 ...'. . , CORPORA TE CERTIFICATE I, Chris Williams . certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation named as Contractor in the foregoing bid; that Dwight Morgan, Jr, . who signed said bid in behalf of the Contractor was then Group Pres ident of said Corporation; that said authority was duly signed for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its Board of Directors, and is within the scope of its corporate powers; that said Corporation is organized under the laws of the State of Georgia ,This 10th day of April .19~. ~I/JtJ CO RA TE SECRETARY (SEAL) ':-..... "'.' '.'. .. . .., END OF SECTION 00320 c;." ,~. 95-052/12-95 CORPORATE CERTIFICATE 00320-1 -'- -'- . Section 00321 INDIVIDUAL CER TIFICA TE STATE OF ) )SS ) CITY OF On this day of . 19-, before me personally came and appeared to me known, and known to me to the person described in and who executed the foregoing instrument and ackriowledged that he executed the same. . NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires (SEAL) END OF SECTION 00321 . 95-052/12-95 INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATE 00321-1 . Section 00410 BID BOND AlA Document A31 0 . . 95-052/12-95 BID BOND 00410-1 AIU Insurance Company :;.; ,:. '". American Home Assurance Company' Granite State Insurance Company The Insurance Company of the State of Pennsylvania eNational Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, P A New ~ampshire Insurance Company ~ ~(.., =Wt American International Companies Princip81 Bond Office 70 Pine Street. New York. N,Y. 10270 BID BOND (AIA310) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Beers Construction Company. 70 Ellis Street. Atlanta. GA 30303 American Home Assurance Company. 70 Pine Street. New York. N.Y. 10270 unto Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government Ten Percent (10%) of Attached Bid , as Principal, and , as Surety, are held and firmly bound , as Obligee, in the sum of Dollars $10% of Attached Bid), for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, the Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly aild severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, The Principal has submitted a bid for Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center. Phinzv Road. Richmond County. Augusta. Georgia NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with ~OOd and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in e prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the rincipal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed, sealed and dated February 20. 1996 Beers Construction Company , . . , , .' ,.:..~ '...-:'- d'~' (Witness) '{ ,_ (principal) ~;(Seal) v ~ "'. .......... ,,",, -...... -....,.- ....,..ljJ4~. l ",By:" ': ~ ,', (fitle) American Home Assurance Company Bond No. '"': By: Catherine,M. Lindsay,. Attorney-in-Fac!C:- " , , e " shell93: shell 17 23373 (3/84) 1 American Home Assurance C~..p-p~ny,. " National Union Fire Insurance Company of-Pittsburgh, Pa. Principal Bond Office: 70 Pine Street, New York, N.Y. 10270 POWER OF ATTORNEY No.07-B-08914 row ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Home Assurance Company, a New York corporation, and National Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, Pa., a Pennsylvania corporation, does each hereby appoint --Edward L. Mitchell, Sandra J. Mathis, C.A. Driver, Sandra Carter, Nicole Allen, Glen R Bailey, Catherine M. Lindsay: of Atlanta, Georgia- its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf bonds, undertakings, recognizances and other contracts of indemnity and writings obligatory in the nature thereof, issued in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company thereby. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, American Home Assurance Company and National Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, Pa. have each executed these presents fuis 23rd ~ 1995. 2</.P~ ~ Willi . ,Presi nt On this 23rd day of January 1922, before me came the above named officer of American Home Assurance Company and National Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, Pa., to me personally known to be the individual .d officer described herein, and acknowledged that he xecuted the foregoing instrument and affixed the seals of said corporations thereto by authority of his office. ~~wI~ JOSEPH B. NOZZOUO Notary Public. State 0' "'''',V Yorf: No. 01-NC4652754 .Qualified in We~lcho':er CO~;'l:y' iIMn E.xe;~ J,aIl" J), "/'.2...9.,j. . CERTIFICATE Excerpts of Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of American Home Assurance Company and National Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, Pa. on MaY 18, 1976: "RESOLVED, that the Chainnan of the Board, the President, or any Vice President be, and hereby is, authorized to appoint Attorneys-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company to execute bonds, Wldertakings, recognizances and other contracts of indemnity and writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and to attach thereto the corporate seal of the Company, in the transaction of its surety business; "RESOLVED, that the signatures and attestations of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company when so affixed with respect to any bond, Wldertaking, recognizance or other contract of indemnity or writing obligatory in the nature thereof; . "RESOLVED, that any such Attorney-in-Fact delivering a secretarial certification that the foregoing resolutions still be in effect may insert in such certification the date thereof, said date to be not later than the date of delivery thereof by such Attorney-in-Fact." I, Elizabeth M. Tuck, Secretary of American Home Assurance Company and of National Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, Pa. do hereby certify that the foregoing excerpts of Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of these corporations, and th~ Pow,ers of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the Resolutions and the Powers of Attorney arc in full force.a.rtdeffect.. , ^' , . IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereWlto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of each corporation '.-" . ~...... ~. . this 20th day of'February k .19 ~6. ./(~\ Elizabeth M. Tuck, Secretary ,. Section 00420 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT AlA Document A305 . . 95-052/12-95 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 00420-1 T ~. E e ,-e. ce A. MER I CAN INSTITUTE o F ARC H TEe T :-"I::II~I. , . AlA Document A305 Contractor's Qualification Statement 1986 EDITION Tbis fonn is approl'ed and recommended by Tbe American Institute of Architects (AlA) and The Associated General Contractors of America {AGC}for use in el.;aluat- ing the qualifications of contractors. No endorsement of the submitting party or l'erification of tbe illformatioll is made by tbe AlA or AGe. ." The Undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and suffi- ciently complete so as not to be misleading. SUBMITTED TO: Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government " ADDRESS: 605 City/County Bldg. Augusta, Georgia 30911 '::" SUBMITTED BY: Corporation rn: Partnership 0 Individual 0 joint Venture 0 Other 0 NAME: Beers Construction Company 70 Ellis Street, NE Atlanta, GA 30303 PRINCIPAL OFFICE: ADDRESS: NAME OF PROJECT (if applicable): Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center TYPE OF WORK (file separate form for each Classification of Work): x General Construction HVAC Plumbing Other Electrical (please specify) Cop.l"righl 1964. 1969, 19~9. @19R6 by The AmeriGn Institute of Architects. 1735 Ne"" York A"enue, N.\X'.. \X"a.~hinE:" ton, D.C. 20006. Reproduction of the m2teri:.ll.herein (lr subst2nli21 qU0l2tion (If its provisi()n.~ without wrillen permission of the AlA viol21CS the cOPl"right 12ws'of the Cniled St.2tCS :md will be: subject to lcg:ll prosecution. . AlA DOCUMENT A30S . CO:>''TRACTOR"S Qt:ALlFICATIO:- STATEME!l:T. 191<6 EDITIO:O;'. AlAI. . ([ 19I1(, TIlE ....~IERJCA:O; I:O;STlTl"TE OF ARCHITECTS, I~~~ "Ell;' YORK A"ESI"E. ",'oX'.. Il;"ASIIJ:-GTO=". n.Cl/K"". A305-1986 1 t\~~!~~;;!:'''/,,;,i~.:;''"' .1. . r. ORGANIZA TION 1.1 How m:lO)' yors h2S your org:lOiz.:nion been in business :1.5 :I Comr:lctOr? . 88 Y.~ar s ].2 How m:lO)' )'e:lrs has your organiution ocen in business under its prcscnt business name' 58,Years 1.2.1 Under wh:lt other or former fUmes h:1.5 your org:miz.:uion opcr;ued? BCB Company andBCB of Tennessee. Inc. Beers/Russell Beers/Russell/Holder " Davidson/Jones/Beers Patten/Beers Fowler/Jones/Beers Beers/Raines CWI/Beers Beers/Moody 1.3 If your org2niz2tion is :I corpor.ltion. ZlSwer the following: 1.3.1 O:ue of incorpor:uion: August 3. 1982 1.3.2 State of incorpor.ltion: Georgia "- 1.3.3 President's rume: L.L. Gellerstedt. III 1.3.4 Via:-presidem's m.rn<:(s): H. D. Edwards E.H. Hudgins 1.3.5 1.3.6 Secretary's rume: Trosura's mme: Christppher R. Williams Christopher R. Williams 1 A If your org:miz2tion is a ~ip. 2Il$9.'C1' the roll~ing: 104.1 02te oforgmiz::ltion: Not applicabl.e 104.2 Type ~f p:umaship ('af appliable): 104.3 N2mc(s) of gener2l panner(s): 1.5 If your orpniz:uion is indhidw.Uy ov..-ned., :msv..'Ct' the foUov..ing: 1.5.1 {hte of org:miution: 1.5.2 N2me of ov..ncr: Not applicable AlA OOCUMENT A30S . CO:>..l\ACTOll"l' Q\'AUrtCAno,: :..ATE!-lo.". I""', [DITIOS. AlA. · <.1YtC\ TlfE ~\Elltt:....S 1s:.,mlE OF AR(:HITECTl\. ,-~.. ~ ,"Ollt; A''E.'1."E. ~~_ ~":~Kl:I:GTOs. 0<:' .!c..t(, A305.1986 2 . . . 1.6 If the form of your organization is other than those listed above, describe it and name the principals: Beers Construction Company is a wholly owned subsidiary of Skanska (USA). 2. LICENSING 2.1 List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business, and indicate registration or license numbers, if applicable. Georgia Florida North Carolina South Carolina Alabama Tennessee Virginia General Contractor Not Applicable General Contractor OG C028860 General Contractor 15940 General Contractor G42013 General Contractor t3920 General Contractor 21484 General Contractor 038703A '- 2.2 List jurisdictions in which your organization's partnership or trade name is filed. Not Applicable. 3. EXPERIENCE 3.1 List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with its own forces. Earthwork Foundation Walks & Curbs' Reinforced Concrete Canent Finish Masonry Miscellaneous Metal Rough Carpentry Millwork Waterproofing Cauking Finish Hardware Drywall Toilet Partitions Toilet Accessories Hollow Metal 3.2 Claims and Suits, (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes, please attach details.) 3.2.1 Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? 3.3 No 3.2.2 Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your organization or its .officers? . No 3.2.3 Has your organization filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to construc- tion contracts within the lasl five years? No Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes, please attach details.) No AlA DOCUMENT A30S. CONTRACTOR'S QUAI.IFICATION STATEMENT. 19H6 EDITION. AIA<!J . @19H6 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 17~5 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W,. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A305-1986 3 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying vlolat~s ~U.S. copyright laws ,and Is sub~ to legal prosecution. ". .. .' . -. . . . 3.4 On :.l sep:.lr:.ltc sheet, list m:.ljor construction projeCtS your org:miz':llion h2S in progress, gh'ing the IUmc of project, owner, :.lrchilect. COnlr:lCI :.lmount, perccnt complcle :.l.od scheduled complelion d.:Itc. 3.4.1 Selic to~1 worth of work in progress :lOd undcr COnlr:dCl: See Attachment #1 3.5 . On :.l sep:.lr.l.te sheet, lisl thc m2jor projcCtS your org~tion h.:ls completcd in thc p2St (i\'c Ye:.J.rs, giving thc fUme of projcct, owncr. 2rchitcct, COntr.l.ct :unount, d.4te of completion :.lnd percen~gc of thc cost of the work performed with your own forces. 3.5.1 Sute 2\'er2ge :l.nnw\ :unount of consuuCtion work performed during the p2St fj,'c yo.rs: See Attachment #2 3.6 On :.l ~te sheet, list the construction experience :l.nd present commitments of the key individ- u:.lls of your organiZ2.tion. See Attachment #3 4. REFERENCES -4.1 Inglett & Stubbs, Inc. Post Office Box 93007 Atlanta, Georgia 30313 Mr. Ray Inglett, President " Tr:l.de References: Mallory & Evans, Inc. Post,effice Box 447 Decatur, Georgia 30031 Mr. ,J'ohn Dixon, President Art Plumbing 4448 Atlanta Road , Smyrna, 'Georgia: 30080 , Mr. ,uan',Lisenby. President 4.2 B2nk References: 'NationsBank . 600 Peachtree Street. 'NE Atlanta. . Georgia 30308 .Mr. KennethD. Lewis, President of General Bank Suntrust Bank Post Office Box 4418 Atlanta, Georgia 30302 Hr. Phillip Humann, Vice President 4.3 . Surety: 4.3.1 Nzne of bonding com pm)': AIC - American International Companies 5 Concourse Parkway P.O. Box 720594 Atlanta, Georgia 30358 N:.1.me 2nd 2ddress of :.lgent: Johnson & Higgins 191' Peachtree Street, NE Atlanta, Georgia 30303~1762 Mr. David Langman 4.3.2 AlA DOCu&.tENT A30s . Co:.TRACTOR"$ Qt:A.UFlCAT1cm STATE.'4E.'''. 19I16 EOtTIO~. AlAC . C'9116 Tnt ~CRICA." r..~'TTTt1t Of ARCHrTEas. I"~\ ~ ''OR'' A\'c..'t't.. K'r~ ~A.<H~ o.c. .!<<<ttl6 A30S.1986 4 . . . 5. FINANCING 5.1 Financial Statement. 5.1.1 Attach a financial statement, preferably audited, including your organization's latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items: Current Assets (e.g., receivable, accrued expenses); Net Fixed A<;sets; cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes income, deposits, materials inventory and prepaid Other Assets; The Chief Financial Officer for Beers Construction Company is available to discuss the details of Beers' fmanciaI statement including current assets, net fIxed assets, current liabilities and other liabilities. Current Liabilities (e.g., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, pro- vision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries and accrued payroll taxes); Other Liabilities (e.g., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus and retained earnings). 5.1.2 Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement, and c1ate thereof: Ernst & Young, 1800 Peachtree Center) Atlanta, GA, 30303 5.1.3 Is the attached financial statement for the identical organization named on page one? Yes 5,1.4 If not, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial statement is provided (e.g., parent-subsidiary). 5:2 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for con- struction? Yes AlA DOCUMENT A305. CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 19f16 EDITION. AlA!!> . @19fl6 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 17.~5 NEW YO.~K AVENliE. N,W,. WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006 A305-1986 5 WARNING:Urillcensed photocOpying violates U:S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. ..' . ~ . .: " . .' . . .. - '. .. . 6. .SIGNATURE 6.1 Dated at Atlanta, GA this 19 Name of Organization: Beers Construction Canpany lId~ .L. Gellerstedt, III Chairman & CEO By: Title: 6.2 day of Mr. L.L. Gellerstedt, III being , duly sworn deposes and says that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading, Sl!.!:>scrib.e(;L~nd sworn before me this ;;1f'v .........',..........' ~~_-. ~ -??...~~~~ 19Cf(tl ......... f ~ c:. ~ r.. ~ I 't' .:::' '- .~.,._~~<;'';;-r<.,..ilt/~...::t;,.r~ ~ ~.... ~ ' 0:0-.... ~'!>~:'~~ ~ . -'--"4M' ~\ 2~""":" ~ \" .:,N0taf,y Public: C..rv,-, J. ' , 1{i\,\J;. () .::-; .....-;:.::"..,; t '.~ -;: '.' , ~V,-I ~ ~ : ' ~-,.c:: ' -; ~ ' Notary Publlc,.Gwlnnett County, Georgia .; . ,~V'"'" My \~<;lT';..mJssion Expires: My Commission Expires Jan. 9.1999 Y'j~~~~;fJ~,~$ " day of rJtbt Wil-'(f AlA DOCUMENT A30S . CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 191;6 EDITION. AIAl!! . ;"'(f)I986 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YO~K AVENUE, N,W.. WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006 A305-1986 6 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. BEERS . Project Name/Description' Owner/Developer ATIACHMENT #1 PROJECTS IN PROGRESS % Construction Complete Amount 0% $18,000,000 100% $600,000 0% $39,000,000 0% $15,000,000 0% $10,000.000 34% $8,900,000 20% $169,000,000 0% $4,800,000 0% $11,300,000 30% $196,000,000 70% $180,000,000 99% $1,500,000 20% $2,700,000 0% $22,000,000 15% $40,000,000 c.., 30% $16,200,0~ 30% $1,000,00~ 0% $2,000,000 0% $10,000,000 15% $12,100,000 - 65% $3,300,000 -10% $2,200,000 4100/4300 Wildwood Two new office buildings 7 Stages New Second Level, Office Area. Cafe, Renovated Anderson Area Medical Center Outpatient Centefarid MOB AT&T . Global Olympic Village 95,000 SF of VIPI Athlete/Public Plaza and Temp. AT &T . Regional Construction Exclusive Regional Construction Mgt. for GA, FL, TX Atkins Middle School 125,000 SF , 3-story classroom and 2-story corridor Atlanta Braves Stadium 46,000 Seat Sports Stadium Atlanta Chamber of Commerce 25,000 SF addition to existing Chamber of Commerce Atlanta Committee for the OIYIJlpic ExistingYenue Adaptations for the Olympic Games Atlanta Federal .Center 1.3 million SF of Government Office Buildings . Atlanta Olympic Stadium 85,000 Seat Sports Stadium Auburn, Avenue Streetscapes 2 blocks of sidewalk & street renovations AUC/West Side Pedestrian Corridor Sidewalk and street improvements at Atlanta Univ. Baptist Memorial Hospital . Golden ERllCU Addition, MOB, Cancer Center and Parking BellSouth Telecommunications Fuel Tank Improvement Program Birmingham Highway Middle School New Middle School Brandon Wilde Roof Repair Brown & Williamson Stormwater lnstallalion of a stonnwater retention system pump Campbell High. School Addition and Renovation of two existing facilities Candler General Hospital 4 Story Medical Mall Candler General Hospital Central Energy Plant Expansion . Candler General Hospital Outpatient Surgery Cousins Properties 7 Stages Anderson Area Medical Center ad:vent.La AT&T Winston-Salem/Forsyth County School Atlanta Committee for the Olympic Games Atlanta Chamber of Com'!lerce Atlanta Committee for the Olympic Games Downtown Development Authority Atlanta Committee for the Olympic Games CODA CODA Baptist Memorial Hospital BellSouth Telecommunications Fulton County School System Augusta Resource Center on Aging Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corp. - Cobb County Public Schools Candler Hospital Candler Hospital Candler Hospital 2/1 9/96 Page I BEIERS . Project Name/Description Capitol A venue Streetscapes Renovations to Sidewalks Centennial Medical Center Physicians Park II Centennial Olympic Park 21 Acre Olympic Theme Park Centennial Park . Olympic Festival Fun Place During the Olympics Children's Medical Center / Medical 224,000 SF Hospital Additi?n City Plaza Multi-Use Building with Retail. Residential, and Clairmont Oaks Assisted Living Facility Expansion Clearwater City Services Two 3-story city services buildings Columbia Theological Seminary Campbell Library Addition Danville Regional Medical Center 164,000 SF of expansion and renovation to existing . Decatur Street Parking Deck Parking Deck, Daycare Center and Pedestrian Bridge Dun & Bradstreet Software Demolition and Rebuild of 9 Floors East Lake Elementary School New Building and Renovation to Existing Emory Uriiversity Center for the Arts Emory University Seretean Center Emory University . Woodruff Library Addition'and renovation to existing library Erlanger Medical Center . Women's 100.000 SF Professional Office Building Etris Road Elementary School Preconstruction for New Elementary School Etris Road Elementary School New Elementary School Fayette Community Hospital Preconstruction for New 100 Bed Hospital and MOB . Georgia Institute of Technology 2-story Pi Kappa Alpha - Chapter House Georgia International Maritime Trade Jnternational Convention!rrade Center 2/\9/96 Page 2 Owner/Developer CODA ColumbiafHCA Georgia World Congress Center Auth. Atlanta Committee for the Olympic Games Board of Regents Univ. System of GA Atlanta West Block Dev, Company Clairmont Oaks City of Clearwater Columbia Theological Seminary Danville Regional Medical Center GSFlC Dun & Bradstreet Corporation Atlanta Public Schools Emory University Emory University Emory University Erlanger Medical Center Fulton County Board of Education Fulton County Board of Education ; Fayette Community Hospital Alpha Delta Corporation Chatham County. Georgia ATIACHMENT#\ PROJECTS IN PROGRESS % Complete 0% 23% 0% 0% 25% 50% 20% 60% 15% 80% 80% 60% 75% 0% 0% 50% 1% 0% 0% 5% 5% Construction Amount $4,900,000 $4,300,000 $18,000,000 $5,000,000 $41.000,000 $13,900,000 $4,300,000 $15,875,000 $4.000,000 $22.000,000 $15,000,000 $4,800,000 $3,700,000 $32,000,000 $13,000,000 $13,500,000 $11,700,000 $0 $8,000,000 $45,000 $1,500,000 $50,000,000 BEERS . Project Name/Description Georgia International Plaza Elevated Plaza between Omni & Congress Center & Georgia Public Television 3-Story and Basement Production Facility Greenbrier at Savannah Harbor 307,000 SF 378 Room Hotel HADC Assisted Living Facility HADC Assisted Living Facility Highland Clinic Third Floor - Orthapaedics Addition Highland Hospital Parking Lot and Third Floor Addition Highsmith Rainey Memorial Hospital OB Addition Hillsborough Community College Student Services Building Home Depot Headquarters 21-story Corporate Headquarters . Hospice Atlanta Residential Care Facility Independence High School 3 story Addition with Renovations to Existing School Indian River Square Shopping Center International Boulevard Streetscapes 7 blocks of street & sidewalk renovation J ekyll Island Convention Center Convention Center Renovations Lawnwood Medical Center MRI Addition ,Lower Towaliga Dam Dam & Reservoir MARTA Perry Bus Facility Perry Blvd. Bus Facility Millennium Center 12-story 250,oooSF office building, 330,000 SF Parking Morningside Erementary School Renovations National Science Center Science Center . NationsBank - Charlotte 700,000 SF, Class A 29-story Office Building 2/19/96 Page 3 ATIACHMENT#1 PROJECfS IN PROGRESS Owner/Developer % Complete GSFlC 20% Georgia Public Television Commission 0% CSX Realty Development Corporation 0% HADC HADC ColumbialHCA Healthcare Corp. 70% Highland Hospital Medical Center ColumbialHCA Board of Trustees of HC College 50% The Home Depot 0% Visiting Nurse Health System 20% Fulton County Board of Education 5% Hatfield Properties 0% CODA 10% Jekylllsland Authority 20% Columbia/HCA Henry County Water & Sewerage 0% MART A 10% Prentiss Properties 0% Atlanta Board of Education 20% The National Science Center 0% NationsBank 0% Construction Amount $34,000,000 $21.000,000 $40,000,000 $3,500,000 $3,500,000 $2,038,000 $3,100,000 $1,250,000 $6.500,000 $38,000,000 $4,000,000 $3,500.000 :;;... q. $5,000,000 $4,300,000 $5,950,000 $900,000 $1,500,000 $14,200,000 $18,000,000 $2,700,000 $5,000,000 $57,000,000 BEERS, . Project Name/Description New Southside Elementary School #2 New Elementary School New Teague Middle School New Middle School North Carolina State Museum of Natural Museum North Carolina State University Engineering Graduate Research Center North Park 400 - Phase III Remedi\ll Waterproofing One Townpark Commons Parkway Oaks Guest Home Assisted Living Facility Peachtree Center Construction CM Services for 6 Buildings Peachtree Streetscape Improvements to 18 B locks of Peachtree Street Presbyterian Hospital Cancer Center and ERlOR Renovations and Additions . Print Pack Expansion Plant Expansion Promina - East Cobb 21,000 SF clinic building Promina Northwest Laundry Addition Putnam Community Hospital Emergency Room Addition Ragsdale Elementary School 33;500 SF renovation of existing school Ralph David Abernathy Streetscapes Renovations to Sidewalks Redmond Regional Hospital ERlOP/ICU Addition and Renovation River Road Pump Station River Intake Pump Station to New Reservoir Riverwood International Print Facility 138,000 SF bldg for printing operations plus 5~000 SF Roswell Road Center 22,800 SF MOB Sampson County Memorial Hospital Phase II Additions and Alterations . Sarasota High School ~ New Classrooms, 150.000 SF 2-story with baseball 2/l9/96 Page 4 ATIACHMENT#! PROJECT'S IN PROGRESS Owner/Developer % Complete Charlotte-Mecklenburg Board of Educ. 28% Seminole County Public Schools 5% NC State Construction 0% North Carolina State University 58% North Park Associates L.P. 31% Taylor & Mathis HADC 0% Equitable Real Estate ongoing CODA 50% Presbyterian Healthcare Services Corp 85% Villa Rica 0% Promina Northwest Physicians Group 0% Promina Northwest 90% Putnam Community Hospital, Inc. 40% The Atlanta Board of Education 90% CODA 0% ColumbialHCA Healthcare Corp. 22% Dalton Utilities 0% Riverwood International Corp. 10% Piedmont Medical Care Foundation 90% Sampson County Memorial Hospital 70% School Board of Sarasota County 0% Construction Amount $3,500,000 $13,900.000 $22,000,000 $23,600,000 $1,600,000 $4,600,000 $3,500,000 $8,000,000 $7,780,000 $24,000,000 $2,000,000 $2.600,000 $900,000 $2,616,000 $1,800,000 $3,100,000 $18,600,000+ $2,775,000 $8,000,000 $2,800,000 $7,200,000 $15,000,000 BEERS . Owner/Developer ATIACHMENT#l PROJECfS 1N PROGRESS % Construction Complete Amount 57% $24,000,000 90% $1,225,000 90% $1,100,000 $1,200,000 0% $3,900,000 0% $10,300,000 t- 0% $1,000,000 75% $10,300,000 50% $17,800,000 50% $16,300,000 90% $10,750,000 5% $13,000,000 0% $1,400,000 $4,500,000 98% $13,250,000 1% $4,800,000 0% $18,000,000 5% $4,250,000 0% $4,000,000 0% $2,200,000 5% $3,230,000 0% $2,100,000 . Project Name/Description Scott Road Site High School New High School ScoUishRite Children's Hospital 10,000 SF MOB Mansell Road Clinic Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Laboratory Renovation Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Medical Office Building Smyrna Muncipal Building A new 2-story municipal services building Spalding County Law, Enforcement New Detention Facility St. Joseph's Hospital & Northside Elevated Pedestrian Bridge Connecting the Two . St. Mary's Medical Center 2 Story Addition with Existing Renovation Stephenson Road High School New School Stephenson Road Junior High School New School . Sugar Creek WWTP Additions i Alterations Sumter Re.gional Hospital 75,000 SF new, 40,000 SF Renovation Swatch Pavilion at Centennial Olympic Pavilion for Olympic Games TCS Building . Maryland Farms Corporate Office Building The Wakefield 13-Story Apartment Building The Westminster Schools-Robinson New science building Tift County Schools New High School Tift General Hospital. Addition & Renovations Tift General Hospital 4-story MOB TRE Properties, Inc. 15,000 SF Gold Clinic TRE Properties, Inc, 23,000 Fuchsia Site Clinic . TRE Properties, Inc. ,15,000 SF Red Site Fulton County Board of Education Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Scottish Rite Children's Medical Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center City of Smyrna Spalding County SI. Joseph's and Northside Hospital SI. Mary's Medical Center DeKalb County Board of Education DeKalb County Board of Education Charlotte-Mecklenburg Utility Depi. Sumter Regional Hospital Swatch Eakin & Smith Wakefield Development Company The Westminster Schools Tift County Board of Education Tift General. Hospilal Tift General Hospital Egleston Children's Hospital TRE Properties, Inc. TRE Properties, Inc. 2/19/96 Page 5 BEERS . Project Name/Description Twin County Regional Hospital Additions and Renovations University of Florida 3-story, 280,000 SF Physics Lab Building University of Florida Three New Parking Decks University of Florida Gym Conversion University of Florida . Health Center 5-story precast parking garage University of Florida Rhines Hall Scien<;e and Engineering Renovation and Addition University of North Carolina Kenan Flagler School of Business 4-story,205,OOO-SF University of North Carolina Addition to School of Dentistry University of South Florida - 3-story new campus bookstore . Walker County High School New 158,000 SF High School Walt Disney Wild Animal Kingdom 24 Separate Animal SupportlHolding Facilities for Webb Bridge Road Middle School New Middle School Winston-Salem State University 107,000, 4-level Student Union Complex W oodr,uff Arts Center Pre-Olympic Renovations ,Wyeth Ayerst Laboratories Distribution. Center Zoo Atlanta Orangutan Holding . AITACHMENT#I PROJECfS IN PROGRESS Owner/Developer % Complete Construction Amount $10,000,000 $23,600,000 $11.250,000 $8,100,000 $4,600,000 $7,800,000 $18,300,000 $8,700,000 $6,000,000 $13,500.000 $21,500,000 $16,000,000 $9,400,000 $15,000,000 $1,000,000 2119/96 Page 6 Twin County Regional Hospital 1% State University System of Florida 0% State University System of Florida 70% State of FL Board of Regents 80% Board of Regents - Univ of Florida 70% Florida Board of Regents , 0% University of North Carolina 20% University of North Carolina 6% University of South Florida 0% Walker County Board of Education 0% Walt Disney Imagineering 0% Fulton County Board of Education 60% Winston-Salem State University 48% Robert Woodruff Arts Center 85% Zoo Atlanta 85% BEERS .owner/Developer Disney , Development Corporation Disney Development Corporation Alamance Health Services Alston & Bird City of Atlanta AutoZone Bayfront Medical Center Bayfront Medical Center Calvary Baptist Church Starr Sanders Johnson Candler Hospital . Candler Hospital Candler Hospital Columbus Regional Healthcare System Egleston Children's Hospital Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount 200 Celebration Place . g:Story Office Building and Tenant Builrlout 210 Celebration Place 4-Story Office Building and Tenant Buildout Alamance Regional Medical Center New Full Service Facility 1995 $14,250,000 1995 $6,120,000 1995 $7,900,000 Alston & Bird Office interiors at Atlantic Center 1995 $2,500,000 Atlanta Public Schools Program Management for 46 Sites AutoZone Corporate Headquarters Building Bayfront Life Services Medical Office Building Interior Buildout Bayfront Medical Center 2-Story West Hospital Expansion Calvary Baptist Church Adult Education Building Candler General Hospital Parking Deck ,Candler General Hospital 5-Story Heart Center Building Candler General Hospital -South Campus Sitework Candler General Hospital- Heart Center Interior Buildout 1995 $60,000,000 1995 $29,500,000 1995 $3,500,000 1995 $4,020,000 1995 $6,300,000 1995 $3.400,000 1995 $7,200,000 1995 $1,300,000 1995 $1,200,000 Columbus Regional Healthcare System Medical Office Building Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory Cystic Fibrosis Interior Buildout 1995 $4,500,000 1995 $1,650,000 State of Tennessee/Capital Project Mgt ,Ellington Agricultural Center Agricultural Center Lab 1995 $6,000,000 Emory University Emory University Emory University Ernst & Young First Assembly of God GSFIC . Eniory University Biochemistry Connector with Lab Space E~ory University . Hugh F. MacMillan Law Library Emory University South Clinic Vertical Addition, 1995 $4,200,000 1995 $8.368,000 1995 $9,591,000 Ernst & Young Renovation of 8 Floors at NationsBank Tower 1995 $1,200,000 First Assembly of God Family Life Center & Christian School Fourth Street Houses at Georgia Tech Olympic/Dormitory Housing 1995 $3,100,000 1995 $3,500,000 2/19/96 Page I BEERS Attachment 2 , S~HEDULE OF PROJECTS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract NamelDescription Complete Amount .owner/Developer Project Columbia/HCA Ft. Worth Medical Plaza - Phase A 60,000, 3-story MOB Georgia Dome Stadium Roof Repairs Georgia Institute of Technology Center Street Apartment (Dorms) GNB Battery Recycling Plant Battery Recycling Plant Grady Memorial Hospital Addition and Renovations . 1995 $7,100,000 Georgia World Congress Center 1995 $1,000,000 GSFIC 1995 $11,450,000 GNB, Inc. 1995 $52,000,000 Fulton-Dekalb Hospital Authority 1995 $102.000,000 Fulton-DeKalb Hospital Authority Grady Memorial Hospital Code Compliance Renovations 1995 $3,650,000 Meta Associates Greenbrier Valley Medical Center Emergency Addition and Renovations 1995 $2,200,000 Hewlett-Packard Company Hewlett-Packard Company Southeast Regional Headquarters Hewlett-Packard Company Interior Buildout of 21 Story Regional Headquarters Jefferson County Elementary Schools New Classroom and Facility Renovations 1995 $52,560,000 Hewlett-Packard Company 1995 $30,000,000 Jefferson County Board of Educ. 1995 $2,100,000 .JefferSon Gwinnett County Schools Jefferson County Schools New High School Joan Glancy Memorial Hospital Outpatient Services Building Kaiser Permanente - Alpharetta Medical Office Building Kaiser Permanente . Snapfinger 2-story Medical Office Building Kaplan School Supply Warehouse & Distribution Center/Phase I 1995 $8,400,000 Medical Center 1995 $6,000,000 Kaiser Permanente 1995 $3,500,000 Kaiser Permanente 1995 $4,600,000 Kaplan Partners 1995 $5,200,000 HealthTrust, Inc. Lakeview Medical Center Medical Office Building Medical Center of Piano ER & Outpatient Services Expansion Memorial Mission Hospital East Expansion Building 1995 $3,400,000 HSP of Texas, Inc. 1995 $30,600,000 Memorial Mission Hospital 1995 $12,000,000 Fulton County School System Milton' High School Stadium Renovations 1995 $1,700,000 Fulton County School' System Milton High School Major Additions and Renovations North Monroe Medical Center Rehabilitation Conversion 1995 $4,800,000 HCA Health Services of Louisiana 1995 $1,375,000 Cousins Real Estate Properties North' Pointe Center I 6-siory Office Building 1995 $6.300,000 . 2/19/96 Page 2 BEERS Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount .owner/Developer Fulton County School System Nor,th Springs High School Addition and Renovations Old Salem, Inc. Old Salem, Inc. Exhibition Center One Ravinia Drive Garage Addition Adding one level to an existing parking garage Piedmont Hospital Emergency Generator Replacement Piedmont Hospital BCC, Vascular Lab, and Air Handling Unit Piedmont Vinings Center 22,000 SF group practice clinic - radiology North Georgia Presbyterian Homes Presbyterian Village Center 2-Story Wellness Center Hines Interests Piedmont Hospital Piedmont Hospital Piedmont Hospital Promina Northwest Physicians Group Promina Northwest Physicians Group Medical Office Building at Towne Lake Reynolds Carolina Federal Credit Union Reynolds Carolina Federal Credit Union New Facility Fulton County Board of Education Ridgeview Middle School School Renovalion, add five new science labs, new .FUltOn County Scottish Rite Board of Education Riverwood High School Renovations and Additions Children's Hospital Scottish Rite Children's Hospital Outpatient Registration & Rehab Sears Homelife Furniture New 33,300 SF Retail Space St. Joseph's Hospital 2-Story Cancer Care MOB Sugar Land Surgery Center . Outpatient Ambulatory Surgery & Diagnostic Center Sears Roebuck and Company St. Joseph's Hospital Columbia/HCA Gables Residential Trust The -Gables Exterior skin renovation, plaza, parking deck ramp, TRE Properties, Inc. 20,000 SF Urgent I Primary Care Satellite Clinic TRE Properties, Inc. 29,000 SF Orange Site Clinic TRE Properties, Inc. 20.000 SF Blue Clinic Waffle House Headquarters Expansion Egleston Children's Hospital Egleston Children's Hospital Egleston Children's Hospital Waffle House, Inc. Wayne Memorial Hospital Wayne Memorial Hospital 25~000 SF Renovation & Expansion Wesley Woods Clinic Outpatient Clinic Wesley Woods, Inc. . 1995 $16.800,000 1995 $3,000,000 1995 $1,000,000 1995 $908,000 1995 $1,141,000 1995 $2,600.000 1995 $1,700,000 1995 $1.800,000 1995 $1,800,000 1995 $2,200,000 1995 $10,600,000 1995 $1,400,000 1995 $1,600,000 1995 $3.562,000 1995 $7,375,000 1995 $3,000,000 1995 $2,400,000 1995 $2,550,000 1995 $2,500,000 1995 $4,500,000 1995 $4,500,000 1995 $1,900,000 2/19/96 Page 3 BEERS Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Wes.ley Woods Towers Interior Renovations to Two Towen. 1995 $1,700,000 1995 $1,900,000 1995 $3,300,000 1995 $1,000,000 1994 $1,500,000 1994 $1,100,000 1994 $2,900,000 1994 $1,840,000 1994 $22,000,000 1994 $2,000,000 1994 $4,000,000 1994 $4,100,000 1994 $3,100,000 1994 $950,000 1994 $13,200,000 1994 $69,800,000 1994 $15,800,000 1994 $17,000,000 1994 $1,000,000 1994 $1,920,000 1994 $2,400,000 1994 $2,000,000 .owner/Developer Wesley Woods, Inc. The Atlanta Board of Education Whitefoord Elementary School School Renovations Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools Wiley Middle School Historical Renovations and Addition Fulton County Board od Education Woodland Middle School Mechanical Renovation Ardmore Baptist Church Ardmore Baptist Church Additions & Renovations HealthTrust, Inc. Ashley Valley Medical Office Building Addition Assembly Terrace 60 Unit Assisted Living Complex Asembly Terrace, Inc. AT&T AT&T Exterior Building Renovation Bayfront Medical Center Bayfront Medical Center 2 Medical Office Buildings & Parking Deck Bayfront Medical Center Employee Parking Deck Blount Memorial Hospital Surgery Addition Blount Memorial Hospital Medical Office Building Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Emergency Room Renovations Bayfront Medical Center .Blount Memorial Hospital Blount Memorial Hospital Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Main Floor Renovations City of Atlanta Dept. of Aviation Coffee County High School New High School Concourse "E" - Phase II International Concourse Coffee County School System Emory University Emory University I O-story School of Public Health Building Emory University 7 Story, West Wing Research Lab Space Addition Floyd Medical Center Bio Tech Home Health Emory University Floyd Medical Center CCL Associates HeaIthplace at Kennestone Holiday Inn Holiday Inn Vertical Expansion Tennessee Psychiatric Company, Inc. Indian Path Medical Center Medical Office Building . 2/19/96 Page 4 BEERS .owner/Developer Gwinnett Medical Center Kaiser Permanente Kaiser Permanente Main Street United Methodist Church Champion Partners HSP of Texas, Inc. HSP of Texas, Inc: Morehouse College Taylor & Mathis Fulton County Board of Education HCA Health Services of Florida . '. Glynn County Board of Education Phillips-Van Heusen Corporation Piedmont Hospital Piedmont Hospital The Presbyterian Homes Roadway Services, Inc. Metro Atlanta YMCA Bayfront Life Services, Inc. The Special Children's School Towers, Inc. United Parcel Service . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECTS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Joan Glancy Memorial Hospital Medical Office Building Kaiser Permanente 2-Story Medical Office Building at Town Park Kaiser Permanente MOB Computer Room Buildout Main Street United Methodist Church New <::hurch Facility Matsushita Electric Corporation Southern 'Regional Headquarters & Distribution Medical Center of Piano Ambuhitory Medical Center 1994 $3,800,000 1994 $3,500,000 1994 $1,300,000 1994 $1,900,000 1994 $13,2SS,0p0 1994 $1,450,000 Medical Center of Piano . Medical Office Building Moreh.ouse College John Hope Hall Science Research Building Municipal Gas Authority Headquarters Building New Prospect Elementary School New Elementary School Northwest Regional Hospital Medical Office Building Oglethorpe Point Elementary School New School 1994 $10,200,000 1994 $2,200,000 1994 $1,600,000 1994 $8,000,000 1994 $4,100,000 1994 $6,500,000 Phillips- V an Heusen Retail Distribution Center 1994 $10,100,000 Piedmont Hospital Operating Room Expansion 1994 $1,000,000 Piedmont Hospital Eye Consultants of Atlanta Interior Buildout 1994 $1,130,000 Presbyterian Village , Renovation of Retirement Facility Roadway Services, Inc. Phase II - Expansion & Alterations Southwest YMCA 2-story addition and interior renovations 1994 $4,950,000 1994 $8,300,000 1994 $3,500,000 Suncoast. Medical Office Building Medical pffice Building Interior Buildout The ,Special' Children's School School Building Towers Specialty Retail Shops United Parcel Service (UPS) World Headquarters 1994 $3,860,000 1994 $2,200,000 1994 $2,500,000 1994 $68,000,000 2/19/96 Page 5 BEERS . Owner/Developer University of Georgia Athletic Assoc. Wake Medical Center Wesley Woods, Inc. Hospital Corporation of America Hospital Corporation of America Allendale County Hospital Authority Hospital Corporation of America Cumberland County Hospital System CARE Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Cobb .Delta Hospital & Medical Center Airlines HealthTrust, Inc. Darlington School Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory Emory University Erlanger Medical Center Cobb County School District City of College, Park Glenaire GLG Center, Inc. . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECTS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Complete Amount Project Name/Description Uni.versity of Georgia Sanford Stadium Sky boxes Wake Medical Center Hospital Addition Wesley Woods /Budd Terrace Interior and Exterior Renovations to 7-Story Building Aiken Regional Medical Center 2-Story Hospital Expansion Aiken Regional Medical Center Women's Pavillion Allendale County Hospital Hospital additions and renovations Athens Community Hospital Emergency Room Expansion Cape Fear Valley Medical Center Patient Services Tower CARE International Headquarters Interior and Exterior Building Renovations Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Women's Center for Maternity and Diagnostic Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Cancer MOB / Adjoining Bridge Concourse "E" . Phase I Automated Guide-way Transit Extension System Coronado Hospital Medical Office Building Darlington School LibrarY & Dining Hall Expansion Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory Renovations Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory Parking Deck Infill . Emory University .Genetics & Molecular Medicine Renovation Erlanger Medical Center Ancillary East Addition / Pediatric Operating Room Ford Elementary School Classrooms, Music Room, Art Room, Dining Hall . Georgia. International Convention Expansion & Parking Deck Glenaire Retirement Retirement Home GLG Grand 54-Story multi-use/Hotel, Offices, Apartments, Retail 1994 $6,000,000 1994 $6,600,000 1994 $2,500,000 1993 $12,512,000 1993 $2,850,000 1993 $2.587,000 1993 $1,135,000 1993 $8,300,000 1993 $3,000,000 1993 $6,500,000 1993 $5,800,000 1993 $45,200,000 1993 $2,300,000 1993 $2,970,000 1993 $1.200,000 1993 $1,160,000 1993 $1,900,000 1993 $23,700,000 1993 $1,000,000 1993 $18,200,000 1993 $1,700,000 1993 $60,000,000 2/19/96 Page 6 Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECTS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Gotden Isles Elementary School Classroom Additions BEERS .Owner/Developer Glynn County Board of Education Fulton-DeKalb Hospital Authority Grady Infectious Disease Clinic Building Conversion / Renovation FuIton-DeKalb Hospital Authority Grady Memorial Hospital Emergency Room RenovationlExpansion Hospital Corporation of America GuIfCoast Hospital OB Renovations & Additions Atlanta Housing Authority MLK High-Rise Renovations to l2-Story Elderly Housing Facility NIKE ,Town - Atlanta 25,000 SF Retail Store and Warehouse One Fannin Sports Medicine Clinic NIKE, Inc. One Fannin Partners HCA Palmyra Park Hospital Inc. Palmyra Medical Center Outpatient Services Piedmont Hospital Piedmont Hospital Additions & Renovations PIano Park,ing Lot Parking Lot Expansion Clayton County Hospital Authority Riverwood Psychiatric Institute . Freeslanding Psychiatric Hospital Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools RJ. Reynolds High School Historical Renovations & Additions HPS of Texas Carilion Health Systems Roanoke Memorial Hospital ExpansionlRenovation Rockdale County Schools Rockdale County Schools Memorial Middle School Hospital Authority of Ware County . Satilla Regional Medical Center Additisms & Renovations Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Dietary Expansion & Renovation Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Scottish. Rite Children's Medical Center Nursing Addition & 4 story Vertical Expansion Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Patient Tower Addition Hospital Authority of Glynn Cnty Southeast Georgia Regional Medical Maternal Heallh Center GSFIC Southern College of Te'c~nology Student Center Addition & Renovation Clayton County Hospital Authority Clayton County Hospital Authority . 2/19/96 .Page 7 Southern Regional Medical Center ER RenovationlExpansion Southern Regional Medical Center Ambulatory. Surgery Center Additions 1993 $1,000,000 1993 $3,880,000 1993 $13,400,000 1993 $3,345,000 1993 $4,800,000 1993 $2,000,000 1993 $3,150,000 1993 $5,935,000 1993 $32.080,000 1993 $1,046,000 1993 $4,500,000 1993 ' $3,600,000 1993 $43.000,000 1993 $8,000,000 1993 $7.400,000 1993 $3,000,000 1993 $1,200.000 1993 $3,000,000 1993 $3,600,000 1993 $6,600,000 1993 $4,000,000 1993 $6,200,000 BEERS .Owner/Developer Clayton County Hospital Authority Hospital Corporation of America Trust Company Bank Wesley Woods, Inc. Hospital Corporation of America Paragon Group, Inc. Alston & Bird Peachtree Center Management A VIA Development Company Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Cobb County School District . Fernbank, Inc. Hospital Authority of Floyd County Hospital Authority of Floyd County Hospital Authority of Floyd County Georgia World Congress Center Georgia Tech Foundation Facilities, Georgia Power Company Board of Regents of the Univ. System JICA West Paces Ferry Hostipal Hamilton Medical Center, Inc. Hospital Corporation of America . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECTS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Con tract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Southern Regional Medical Center Administration Office and Morgue Renovations Spring Branch Memorial Hospital Cancer Treatment Center 1993 $1.500,000 1993 $1,550,000 Trust Company Plaza Plaza Renovations 1993 $1,000,000 Wesley Woods Geriatric Hospital Renovation of7-Story Nursing Home West Houston MRI & Outpatient Addition 100 North Tampa Street 44-Story High-rise office building & parking deck Alston & Bird Law Offices 1993 $1.800,000 1993 $1,550,000 1992 $44.569,000 1992 $1,230,000 Atlanta Gas Light Company 70,000 SF Interior Office Buildout Atlanta Perishables Airport Cargo Areas 1992 $2,600,000 1992 $5,100,000 Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Physical Therapy Davis Elementary School 13 Classroom addition 1992 $2,690,000 $950,000 1992 - , Fern bank Museum of Natural History Floyd. Medical Center 2-Story AdditionsfRenovations 1992 $19,500,000 1992 $9,400,000 Floyd Medical Center Psychiatric Hospital Floyd Medical Center Medical Office Building Georgia Dome Stadium Georgia Institute of Technology Knowles Stadium & Success Center Addition 1992 $3,600,000 1992 $4,800,000 1992 $175,000,000 1992 $10,300,000 Georgia Power Company Underground ductlines for the Georgia Dome Georgia State' University ~,cience Building Greater Atlanta Sports Medicine Sports Medicine Clinic, therapy areas, reception, Hamilton Medical Center, Inc. Emergency Room Expansion & Renovations 1992 $978,000 1992 $20,000,000 1992 $1,660,000 1992 $1,000,000 HCA Grant Center 1992 $928,000 2119/96 Page 8 Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount IBM-3200 Wildwood Tenant Office Space, Educational 1 Audio Visual Integon Corporation Parking Deck Johnson & Higgins Johnson & Higgins 32nd, 33rd, 34th Floors - Law Offices BEERS .Owner/DeveIoper Wildwood Associates c/o Cousins Integon Corporation Know1edgeWare KnowledgeWare Five and a half floors tenant office space Georgia World Congress Center MARTA Omni West Extension to Omni MART A Station \ Mayo Foundation for Medical Education Mayo Clinic Vertical Expansion/Renovation Moses H. Cone Memorial Hospital Moses H. Cone Memorial Hospital Phase V Renovations Cousins Real Estate Corporation NationsBank Plaza 55-Story High-rise Conference Center & Offices Nations Bank NationsBank Plaza West Wing, Cafeteria, and Conference Center NationsBank NationsBank Plaza Interior Offices for Floors 2 thru 22 NationsBank . Cobb Hospital NationsBank Plaza Interior Executive Floors & Medical Center Paulding County Medical Office Building Prime Bank Shares ,6-Story Office Building Red River Hospital Taylor & Mathis Hospital Corporation of America Rexham Industries, Inc, Rexham Industries, Inc. Expansion & Renovation Roadway Express Phase I - Earthwork Rome High School High School with 2 Gyms and Pool Rome City Schools Rome Middle School Middle School Roadway Services, Inc. Rome City Schools Hospital Authority of Ware County Satilla Park. Psychiatric Hospital Freestanding Hospital Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Patient Care Renovation South Fulton Medical Center South Fulton Medical Center MRI/CA T Scan Suite Renovation St. Mary's Hospital of Athens St. Mary's Hospital OR/SICI/Dietary/Parking Deck/Renovation . 1992 $8,386,000 1992 $5,800,000 1992 $2,589,000 1992 $2,120,000 1992 $1,250,000 1992 $22,500,000 1992 $5,100,000 1992 $118,000,000 1992 $3,300,000 1992 $17,000,000 1992 $3,500,000 1992 $1,625,000 1992 $8,400,000 1992 $990,000 1992 $2,500,000 1992 $1.500,000 1992 $11,000,000 1992 $5,000,000 1992 $3.700,000 1992 $1,000,000 1992 $900,000 1992 $9,000,000 2/19/96 Page 9 I' BEERS .owner/Developer Tift General Hospital Wesley Homes, Inc. Hospital Corporation of America One Ninety One Peachtree Associates, Cousins Properties Cousins Properties American Red Cross Underground Atlanta Baptist Sunday School Board Cobb County Board of Education Canterbury Court Retirement Home . Chastain park. Venture Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory Emanuel County Hospital Genuine Parts Company (NAPA) Portman. Properties Hospital Authority of Habersham City of High Point Jacobs, Visconsi & Jacobs Marriott Corporation Laing Properties Moses H. Cone Memorial Hospital . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project NamelDescription Complete Amount Tift General Hospital 3 Story Women's Pavilion We~ley Woods Health Center Renovation West Lake Hospital Powerhouse 191 Peachtree Tower 52-Story Office Tower & parking deck 3200 Wildwood Plaza Two 15-Story Twin Towers & parking deck for IBM 3200 Wildwood Plaza IBM Office Interiors American Red Cross Expansion & Renovation Atlanta Heritage Row Museum,Theater and Retail at Underground Atlanta Baptist Office Tower Offices Bryant Elementary School New Elementary School Canterbury Court Retirement Tower Chastain Park Park Renovation Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory 3-Story Vertical Expansion Emanuel County Hospital Expansion/Renovation to Nursery, Lobby, Dining Ge~uine Parts (NAPA) Headquarters .Annex Gift Mart 12-Story Atlanta Marketing Center Habersham County Medical Center Addition and Renovation High Point Public Library New Facility JCIJenney Store Cary Village Mall Marriott Courtyard 7-story hotel and courtyard Mayfair Phase IIA 5-Story RetaiVCommercial Moses H. Cone Memorial Hospital Neurosurgery Renovations 1992 $7,400,000 1992 $2,800,000 1992 $940,000 1991 $120,000,000 1991 $49,000,000 1991 $10,000,000 1991 $3,200,000 1991 $900,000 1991 $8,900,000 1991 $5,000,000 1991 $8,000,000 1991 $1,250,000 1991 $35,000,000 1991 $1,700,000 1991 $3,300,000 1991 $51,000,000 1991 $8,000,000 1991 $3,400,000 1991 $5,300,000 1991 $6,300,000 1991 $3,600,000 1991 $1,550,000 2J 19/96 Page 10 ,', BBD<- l..' ~ '-ll" . ,.~ .' ~l . , . 1:- .,,-., . . ""10;.' ~ ~'.,j ,;~l Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount . o~.., NG.~A4r.'ji.PtTniversity NC, A&T State University New Library Facility _ ~~'.1IaBofacturing Nissan Recreation Activity Building SportlRecreation Sl1:lftiiii\W;jElildreo's Medical Center Scottish Rite Children's Medical Center Acute Care and Mechanical Building 5t ~~:LP. St. Joseph Hospital Medical Office Building ~: ~dlilspjtal St. Joseph's Hospital A"dditionslRenovations St~ ~imlSpital St. Joseph's Hospital of Atlanta Center for Specialty Medicine St'...fjisqIBii'IbI,i,tal of Atlanta St: Joseph's Hospital of Atlanta South Expansion st;:,If:iI'j~Jliipta! St. Mary's Hospital Renovations ~~ai:l!Iimpany" S w is s 0 te I Luxury Hotel CziimII'.lIil1!c~ Hospital Authority Tanner Medical Center ExpansionIRenovation .' , GtJ:; of'i~alem Winston Salem Coliseum/Annex Multi-Purpose Building Brandon Wilde Retirement Community Multi-Building Residential Brunswick YWCA Administration Building & Recreation Facility ~;'.~_2),c-eDter on Aging ~_. t-, ' '.~,~! c.a.",~,&~c Medical Center Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Linear Accelerator EIiiil'.m;'fiia',,' Comdata Corporate Headquarters Equitable ASAHI Parking Deck/Tunnel Parking Deck First Baptist Church Additons and Renovations . 'EqD.iati~~'H'EState Investment , , Iird:: ~!€Iimch ,. GilaiR',~llOmpany (NAPA) -,- Genuine Parts (NAPA) Parking Deck Green Street Baptist Church Worship Center & Family Life Center Hanes _ Mall; Expansion' m-,.SUdJBij$iSt, - Church .I--r.. 'fiam;i'& Jacobs ~-&~h' Trust Hartsfield Centre 8"Story Office Building Mayfair Apartment Tower EZiD:.~ I\~, , '. - .. 1991 $7,400,000 1991 $2.100,000 1991 $13,100,000 1991 $3,600,000 1991 $6,500,000 1991 $24,500,000 1991 $13,600,000 1991 $2,800,000 1991 $30,000,000 1991 $1,500,000 1991 $6,100,000 1990 $18,000,000 1990 $1,200,000 1990 $1,700,000 1990 $9,700,000 1990 $3,500,000 1990 $1,500,000 1990 $2,100,000 1990 $3,500,000 1990 $12,700,000 1990 $9,500,000 1990 $26,000,000 !ll_~ '.lP: BEERS .owner/Developer Middle Tennessee Medical Center State of Tennessee, State Board of Piedmont Airlines Price Waterhouse Rock-Tenn 'Corporation Sossner Tap & Tool Corporation Hospital Authority of Glynn County Hospital Authority of Glynn County Clayton County Hospital Authority Randolph County Schools St. .St. Joseph's Hospital of Atlanta Joseph's Hospital of Atlanta St. Mary's Hospital Childress Klein Properties South Main Partners Methodists Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Moses H. Cone Memorial Hospital Piedmont Hospital Baptist Retirement Homes of NC Hospital Corporation of America Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Georgia, . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECTS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Middle Tennessee Medical Center Addition & Renovation Middle Tennessee State University Mass Communications Building 1990 $10,100,000 1990 $8,200,000 1990 $955,000 1990 $1,640,000 1990 $3,000,000 1990 $1,700,000 1990 $2,400,000 1990 $1,200,000 1990 $1,100,000 1990 $4,500,000 1990 $4,700,000 1990 $14,853,300 1990 $4,400,000 1990 $5,300,000 1990 $2,300,000 1990 $5,200,000 1990 $1,700,000 1990 $6,000,000 1989 $13,500,000 1989 $14,500,000 1989 $6,770,000 1989 $3,000,000 Piedmont Airlines Hangar Price Waterhouse Rock-Tenn Corporation Co'rporate Headquarters Additions Sossner Tap & Tool Corporation Plant Addition Southeast Georgia Re'gional Medical Emergency Room Renovations Southeast Georgia Regional Medical Oncology Center Southern Regional Medical Center Magnelic Resonance Imaging Southwestern Randolph Middle School New full service school St., Joseph's Hospital of Atlanta Additions & Renovations St. Joseph's Hospital of Atlanta Stella Maris Outpatient Service Building St. Mary's Hospital Renovations/OBlNursery Sutherland, Asbill & Brennan Law Offices Twin City Warehouse Warehouse United Methodist Distribution Center West' Cobb , Medical Office Building Women's Hospital of Greensboro Renovation & Addition 2001 Piedmont Medical Office BuildinglPro Health Facility Baptist Retirement Home Retirement Housing Bay town Medical Center Medical Office Building Blue Cross/Blue Shield of GA Headquarter Offices 2/19/96 Page 12 (' BEERS wner/DeveIoper Taylor & Mathis (Metropolitan Life Capital City Plaza Associates Cherokee Valley Bank Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Ackerman & Company NCNB Real Estate Fund Deere-Hitachi Construction Machinery DeKalb General Hospital Authority Delta Airlines, Inc. Georgia Department of Corrections Georgia Department of Corrections . Georgia Department of Corrections Georgia Department of Corrections Georgia Department of Corrections Digital Equipment Corp. Egleston Hospital for Children at Emory University Emory University Emory University Hospital Authority of Floyd County L.J. Hooker American Medical Buildings . Attachment 2 .!)CHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Building 303, Perimeter Center 8-Story HBO Headquarters & Deck _ Capital City Plaza 17-Story Office Tower Cherokee Valley Bank Headquarters Building Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Ancillary Building Crown Pointe IS-Story Office Tower De~pRiver Corporate Center Building One, Pegg Road Deere-Hitachi Construction Machinery Assembly Plant DeKalb General Hospital Diagnostic Imaging Center Delta Air Lines Ground Training and Residence Center Department of Correction0 Inmate Correctional Facility Department of Corrections Inmate Correctional Facility Department of Corrections Inmate Correctional Facility Department of Corrections Inmate Correctional Facility Department of Corrections I Inmate Correctional Facility ~ Digital Equipment Corp. Headquarters Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory AT AlSDS Additions & Alterations Emory University . Michael Street Parking Deck Emory University O. Wayne Rollins Research Center Emory University Woodruff Memorial Research Building Floyd Medical Center Vertical Expansion Gateway Development 17-Story CocaCola Administration Tower Georgia Baptist Medical Center Medical Office Building 1989 $12,500.000 1989 $28,000,000 1989 $3,800,000 1989 $2.500.000 1989 $15,000,000 1989 $2,200,000 1989 $3,100,000 1989 $2,100,000 1989 $21,000,000 1989 $10,000,000 1989 $2,000,000 1989 $2,000,000 1989 $4,000,000 1989 $2,000,000 1989 $28,120,000 1989 $1,500,000 1989 $4,100,000 1989 $36,000,000 1989 $2,600,000 1989 $15,200,000 1989 $26,400,000 1989 $10,400,000 2119/96 Page 13 BEERS wner/Developer Georgia Tech Foundation Facilities Georgia Tech Foundation Facilities Gospel Light Baptist Church Hamilton Medical Center, Inc. Hospital Authority of Henry County Greenwood Methodist Home Higgins County Hospital Authority Hospital Corporation of America Hospital Corporation of America Partnershi p Memorial Medical Center .The Idle wild Company Fulton County Hospital Authority Hospital Corporation of America Paper-Pak Products Hospital Corporation of America Partek Insulation Company John Portman & Associates Houston County Hospital Authority Hospital Corporation of America Printpack, Inc. Eakin and Smith . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Georgia Institute of Technology Alumni/Facility Garage, Student Center Garage Georgia Institute of Technology Wardlaw Center Gospel Light Baptist Church Sanctuary & Classrooms Hamilton Memorial Hospital Maternal, Infant Care, Ambulatory Surgery, Cancer Henry General Hospital Additions & Alterations Heritage Hills Congregate Living Facility Higgins General Hospital Renovations Lakeside Medical Building Medical Office Building Lakeside Parking Garage Maryland Manor Building Offices Memorial Medical Center Addition and Alternations Northchase Office Building #1 Northside Hospital LDR Suites Addition Northwest Tucson Medical Center Medical Office Building Paper-Pak Products Paper Products Pilot Manufacturing Plant Parkview Office Building . Medical Office Building Partek Insulation Company Rockwool Insulation Manufacturing Facility Peachtree Center Athletic Club In-Town Vertical Healthclub Perry Hospital Additions and Alterations Physicians Plaza Medical Office Building Printpack, Inc. VRCC Plant South place Office Park . Offices 1989 $4,300,000 1989 $9,000,000 1989 $2,600,000 1989 $11.300,000 1989 $5,000,000 1989 $4,200,000 1989 $1,500,000 1989 $6,650,000 1989 $3,270,753 1989 $1,700,000 1989 $5,200,000 1989 $1,800,000 1989 $5,000,000 1989 $2.430,000 1989 $2.400,000 1989 $8,834,000 1989 $50,000,000 1989 $5,800,000 1989 $1,300,000 1989 $3,260,000 1989 $2,200,000 1989 $5,800,000 2/19/96 Page 14 BEERS Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project NamelDescription Complete Amount &wner/DeveIoper Trammell Crow Company State Auto Insurance South Central Office 1989 $1,200,000 State Farm Insurance Company State Farm South Central Regional Office Building Tennessee Baptist Convention Executive Board Building The Mathews Company The Villages at Vanderbilt Mixed-Use Development 1989 $15,000,000 Tennessee Baptist Convention 1989 $3,500,000 1989 $ 14,000,000 Metropolitan Government of Nashville Tom Joy Elementary School School Taylor & Mathis Town Park Center Phase II - Office Tower 1989 $3,500,000 1989 $4,000,000 University of North Carolina University of North Carolina Weatherspoon Art Cenler Hospital Corporation of America West Side Medical Office Building Medical Office Building 1989 $4,500,000 1989 $11,100,000 Atlanta Zoological Society Zoo Atlanta (Grant Park) Redevelopment 1989 $20,000,000 Capital City Plaza Associates Blue Cross Blue Shield Of Georgia 1988 $3,400,000 Emory University Campanile - BellSouth Headquarters 20-Story Corporate Office Building Depot Plaza Plaza Entrance to the New Georgia Railroad Emory University Scarborough MOB Renovation & New Addition Emory University Yerkes Regional Primate Research Center Georgia Farm Bureau Georgia Farm Bureau Headquarters Headq uarter Offices 1988 $55,000,000 BeIlSouth . Georgia Building Authority 1988 $1.200,000 Emory University 1988 $8,300,000 1988 $1,700,000 1988 $11,000,000 Hospital Authority of Gwinnett County Gwinnett Medical Center Ambulatory Surgery Center and Misc. Renovations Northside Bank and Trust Northside Bank and Trust Banking Facility Peachtree Center Management Peachtree Center Lobby Renovtions 1988 $2.500,000 1988 $2,000,000 1988 $1,985,000 Hospital Corporation of America Piedmont Medical Center Katherine Riley Outpatient Center Piedmont Medical Center Parking Deck Expansion Portsmouth Medical Building Medical Office Building Printpack, Inc. Converting Plant 1988 $4,200,000 Piedmont Hospital Piedmont Hospital 1988 $3,200,000 1988 $5,740,000 Printpack, Inc. 1988 $3,300,000 . 2/19/96 Page 15 BEERS .Owner/Developer Printpack, Inc. Hospital Corporation of America Scitrek Hospital Authority of Screven County Hospital Corporation of America St. Mary's Hospital University of New Hampshire Sumter County Hospital Authority Hospital Corporation of America The Lovett .School The Peasants Restaurants . Georgia Rehabilitation Institute Hospital Corporation of America Metropolitan Foundation of Atlanta, Young Men's Christian Association Young Men's Christian Association Athens Regional Medical Center Atlanta Chamber of Commerce Bank South, Administrative Services 1155 Peachtree Associates Cobb Hospital & Medical Center . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Complete Amount Project Name/Description Printpack, Inc. Corporate Headquarters Reston Medical Center Medical Office Building Scitrek Science and Technology Museum, Exhibits & Retail 1988 $3,000,000 1988 $12,800,000 1988 $2,400,000 Screven, County Hospital 1988 $2,000,000 South Seminole Medical Center Medical Office Building St. Mary's. Hospital Outpatient Surgery Addition Student Health Center 1988 $5,300,000 1988 $1,400,000,. . 1988 $2,977,232 Sumter. Regional Hospital Obstetrical Suite Modifications 1988 $2,\ 00,000 Tamarac Medical Office Building Medical Office Building The Lovett School Library & Classroom Addition & Renovation, The Peasant Restaurant The City Grille Walton Rehabilitation Institute Rehabilitation Complex West Paces Building Medical Office Building 14th Street Theater Theater/Auditorium 1988 $5,800,000 1988 $1,340,000 1988 $945,000 1988 $2,800,000 1988 $10,530,000 1987 $3,100,000 Ashford Dunwoody YMCA Health Club Ashford Dunwoody YMCA Health Club 1987 $3,500,000 1987 $3,500,000 Athens Regional Medical Center Classroom and Teaching Facility 1987 $18,000,000 Atlanta Chamber of Commerce Offices 1987 $2,000,000 Bank South Buckhead Branch 1987 $2,350,000 . Campanile- Parking . Garage Campanile - BellSouth Headquarters Interior Buildout 1987 $4,300,000 1987 $14,000,000 Cobb Hospital & Medical Center Outpatient Diagnostic Center 1987 $1,200,000 2/ I 9/96 Page 16 -" BEERS .owner/Developer Emory University Emory University Emory University Emory University First Union Corporation of Georgfa Hospital Corporation of America Hospital Authority of Henry County Honda Carland Hospital Corporation of America Hospital Corporation of America MedCenter Inns of America . Memorial Medical Center C&S Georgia Corporation Hospital Corporation of America Fulton County Hospital Authority Hospital Corporation of America The Presbyterian Homes Georgia Building Authority Clayton County Hospital Authority The Commerce Club Taylor & Mathis Hospital Corporation of America . '. ',. Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECTS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Emory University Emory University Hospital SE Quadrant Addition Eniory University Lowergate South Parking Structure Emory University Boisfeuillet Jones Center 1987 $2,800.000 1987 $3,000,000 1987 $3,000,000 Emory University Uppergate ([nfill) Parking Deck First Union National Bank Corporate Office Build-out Henrico Doctors Building Medical Office Building Henry General Hospital Administrative Building Addition Honda Carland 1987 $1,300,000 1987 $3,000,000 1987 $6,640,000 1987 $2,200,000 1987 $2,200,000 Idaho Falls Medical Center Medical Office Building Mandeville Surgery Center Medical Office Building MedCenter Inn 1987 $4,800,000 1987 $1,650,000 1987 $2,600,000 Memorial Medical Center Medical Office Building & Parking Deck NationsBank Southside Center Computer Operations Center 1987 $8,400,000 1987 $13,100,000 . North Hills Building Medical Office Building Northside Hospital Oncology Wing & Linear Accelerator 1987 $4,480,000 1987 $34,500,000 Olympia Medical Center Medical Office Building Presb.yterian Village 1987 $2,620,000 1987 $4,700,000 Seven MLK, Jr. Drive Renovations 1987 $1,400,000 Southern Regional Medical Center Additions & Renovations 1987 $14,600,000 The Commerce Club 1987 $1,000,000 Town Park Center Phase 1 Chastain Walk 1987 $3,300,000 Village Oaks Medical Building Medical Office Building 1987 $4,000,000 2/19/96 Page 17 . ~ . \ ....... BEERS .own~r/Developer Wesley Services, Inc. Hospital Corporation of America Peachtree Hotel Company Carter Presidential Library Hospital Corporation of America Douglas General Hospital Emory University Gideons Houston County Hospital Authority Portman-Barry Investments Franklin Property Company .Piedmont Hospital Frank Royal, MD Taylor & Mathis Hospital Corporation of America Taylor & Mathis Tift General Hospital Hospital Corporation of America Hospital Corporation of America The Atlanta Botanical Garden GSTRF, Development Authority of Cobb Hospital & Medical Center . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECTS COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Coinplete Amount Wesley Woods Geriatric Hospital 1987 $9,900,000 West Houston Medical Center Medical Office Building Westin Peachtree Plaza 1987 $ 13,810,000 1987 $1,100,000 Carter Presidential Center MuseunilLibrary and Pavilion Renovalions , 1986 $18,000,000 Dogwood Acres 1986 $1,800,000 Douglas General Hospital Additions 1986 $4,700,000 Emory University Winship Cancer Clinic Gideons International Headquarters Offices Houston Medical Center 1986 $ I ,200,000 1986 $ 1.5 I 5,658 1986 $12,000,000 NYNEX . Computer Center 1986 $1,150,000 One Georgia Center Redevelopment Piedmont Medical Center Diagnostic Center and Walkway Connector Richmond Medical Building Office Building South'ern Company -ReCladdinglRenovation at Perimeter Center 1986 $4,100,000 1986 $3,700,000 1986 $2,700,000 1986 $6,500,000 Spring Branch Medical Building Medical Office Building Terraces (South) at Perimeter Center Office Complex & Deck Tift General Hospital 1986 $7,500,000 1986 $35,000,000 1986 $3,700,000 Tucson Medical Office Building Office Building West Houston Garage 1986 $4,016,691 1986 $2,300,000 1\tlanta Botanical Gardens Gardens and Nursery Centennial Research Center at Georgia 6 Story Centennial Research Center Cobb Hospital & Medical Center North Expansion & ER Renovations 1985 $2,300,000 1985 $12,200,000 1985 $2,700,000 2/19/96 Page 18 .' r BEERS .owner/Developer. Cooper Hall, Inc. Technology Park / Atlanta First American Corporation Archdiocese of Atlanta City of Highlands Atlantic Realty Company Kimberly-Clark Corporation Kimberly-Clark Corporation City of Winston Salem Northeast' Georgia Medical Center . Homart Development Company The Allen Morris Company, Piedmont Hospital Rock-Tenn Corporation Roswell Summit Hotel Associates Taylor &' Mathis St. Joseph Hospital St. Joseph's Hospital S1. Mary's Hospital of Athens Carroll City County Hospital Authority Carter & Associates Bank South . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECT'S COMPLETED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Cooper Hall, Inc. 1985 $6,000,000 Engineering Office Building 680 Offices Flager Nursing Center Nursing Home Georgia Institute of Technology Catholic Center 1985 $1,400,000 1985 $1,600,000 1985 $1,100,000 Highlands Civic Center 1985 $1,200,000 Hurt Building Redevelopment 1985 $20,000,000 Kimberly-Clark Health Facility Kimberly-Clark Corporation Science & Technology Building M.C. Benton Jr. Convention & Civic New Civic Center 1985 $3,000,000 1985 $ 10,300,000 1985 $13,000,000 Northeast Georgia Medical Center Outpatient Surgery Center O-ne Securities Centre Offices 1985 $4,500,000 1985 $15,100,000 Perimeter Center 400 Phase 11 Piedmont Medical Center Parking Deck, McDonald Surgical Center, Bridge, Rock-Tenn Corporation COiporate Headquarters Sheraton Inn at Roswell Summit Hotel 1985 $11,500,000 1985 $13,100,000 1985 $2,600,000 1985 $5,800,000 Southern.. Company Headq'-!arters St. Joseph Hospital - Additions & Alterations 1985 $26,000.000 1985 $1.100,000 S1. Joseph's Hospital Additions & Alterations to ER 1985 $9,100,000 St. Mary's Hospital A~dition & Alterations Outpatient Surgery Center Tanner Medical Center Additions & Alterations $3,000,000 1985 1985 $1,500,000 1275 Peachtree at the Circle Offices 1984 $10,300,000 Bank South 9th and 10th Floor Renovations 1984 $1,600,000 2119/96 Page 19 t " BEERS .Owner/Developer The Equitable Life Assurance Society of Hospital Authority of Bulloch County Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory Emory University Emory University Taylor & Mathis Kimberly-Clark Corporation Hospital Corporation of America Hospital Authority of Washington Hospital Authority of Newton County Realty Leasing Corporation of Georgia . Johnson Development Company Taylor & Mathis Plaza Associates . Attachment 2 SCHEDULE OF PROJECfS COMPLElED 1995 - 1984 Year Contract Project Name/Description Complete Amount Buil~ing "G" Peachtree Dunwoody Offices 1984 $5,500,000 Bulloch Memorial Hospital Additions & Renovations 1984 $4,400,000 Egleston Children's Hospital at Emory Cath Lab and Pharmacy Expansion Emory Hospital Magnetic Resonance Imaging Suite Emory University Turman Center 1984 $1,000,000 1984 $1,100,000 1984 $6,000,000 IBM Customer Support Center - Perimeter Center Kimberly-Clark Corporation Research & Development South Expansion Margate Medical Office Building Medical Office Building Memorial Hospital of Washington Additions & Alterations 1984 $1,000,000 1984 $2,200,000 1984 $3,240,000 1984 $4,200,000 Newton General Hospital Additions & Alterations 1984 $3,900,000 Perimeter Center 400 Phase [ 1984 $5,200,000 Roswell Summit Building 200 Terraces (North) at Perimeter Center Office Complex & Deck The Plaza Roswell 400 Shopping Center 1984 $1,800,000 1984 $29,000.000 1984 $4,500,000 2119/96 Page 20 . . . '. ..--~ BEERS ORGANIZATION OVERVIEW Attachment 3 Beers Construction Company is an 88 year old construction services firm, headquartered in Atlanta. Our specialized teams bring intensive experience in all types of construction with a focus on the principals oftotal quality management and complex computerized management systems. Beers Corporate Organizational Chart 8m Storey ChwfEstimatDr Chit. Wi.lli.1ms Chief FlNneial Officu ORGANIZATION D<lVid Simpson Croup President Affiliate Companw, To meet the specialized needs of clients, the Beers organization is dividedinto specialized groups which offer specialized experience and training to best meet project requirements. These specialized groups are: 1. Healthcare - Bill Millkey, AlA, Group President 2. Florida Region - Frank Fralick, Group President 3. Public Sector - Craig Mitchell, Group President 4. Corporate - EI Henry, Group President 5. Interiors and Specialized Construction - Joe Riedel, Group President 6. Industrial - Michael P. Holt, Group President 7. . Affiliate Companies- David Simpson, Group President PAGE 1 . The Beers management team has more than 200 years of combined construction experience. L.L. Gellerstedt, III - Chairman & CEO 23 years Experience Larry began his construction career in the early 1970's and worked for several years in the field, He gained additional experience as an estimator in the late 1970's and in 1982 he founded Beers Construction Builders (BCB). Under Larry's leadership, the division grew quickly, and in 1987 completed $90 million in construction contracts. William Millkey, AlA - Group President, Healthcare 18 years Experience Bill Millkey is a registered architect.and brings his expertise in design along with the practical experience of l6 years in the field; Bill chairs the company's Methods and Means Committee. This committee is comprised of the most senior field and office employees and reviews mandatory presentations by all project teams before construction begins. Frank Fralick- Group President, Florida Region 23 years Experience , A Florida native and General Contractor "Class A" license holder, Frank has extensive healthcare experience managing over $100 million of healthcare construction in 1993 alone. As the executive in charge of Beers' Tampa office, he is directly involved with preconstruction services, estimating, and management of all Florida work. . Elmon Henry - Group President, Corporate and Commercial 27 years Experience During his 27 years of construction experience, EI has accumulated extensive experience managing large projects and as. Grpup President, has primary responsibility for corporate accounts, Beers Interior division, and SunBelt Industrial. EI has significant expertise in preconstruction services and maintains close involvement in all projects throughout the construction .. phase. Craig Mitchell, P.E. - Group President, Public Sector 27 years Experience During his 25 years of construction experience, Craig has acted as Construction Manager, Project Director, Project Manager, Nuclear Project Coordinator and Superintendent. In addition, he has taught Civil Engineering, Construction Management at Georgia Tech, and he now chairs the Beers Quality Assurance Committee. Joe Riedel - Group President, Corporate Services 8 years Experience Joe Riedel directs Beers' Corporate Services unit, which is set up to provide construction expertise on specialized commercial projects, high-end interiors work for corporate and commercial interiors, and other service-or~ented construction packages. Ted Hudgins - Executive Vice President, 20 years Experience While completing law school, Ted began his career at Beers as a timekeeper and has gained valuable experience working at numerous types of projects in all phases. As ,Executive Vice President ofInternal Operations, Ted is in charge of all accounting, estimating, MIS, personnel, risk management, bonding, plant and equipment. It is company policy that he review all estimates before they are submitted to the Owner. . Beers is a fully staffed firm offering construction management and general contracting services. We have a staff of fully qualified project management personnel available for project management as determined by the Owner, project schedule and availability. PAGE 2 TEL: Mar 04 96 17:31 No.030 P.02 Poat~t- htand lax transmittal memo 7'671 1 ~el4--'" M.o Resume . ~ RUTH B. CRITTENDEN Project Ma1Wger Ruth Crittenden is particularly adept at completing projects with unusually tight and demanding schedules. She complcted the most schedule inlemlive projectc; in Beers history ~- one thal carries $1.8 miJlion in penalties if not completed in time - at the University of Georgia in Athens. Since completing hel' B.S. in Building Science from Auburn University in 1985 she haR taken on increasingly complex project!; and has emerged as one of Beers' strongest project managers ill the Beers public sector group. EDUCATION Bachelor of Science in Building Construction, 1985 Auburn University CONSTRUcnON EXPERIENCE 1989 - pre.'ient Project ManagerlProjcct Engineer Beers Construction Company field Engineerl Estimator RJ. Griffin Construction 1988 - 1986 . PROJECT EXPERIENCE Decll1ur Street Parking Peck - Atlanta . $14.5-million, 600,000 SF, 8-1cvc1 new parking deck, widl .u.tA~hQd 1 ] .OOOrSP dnycnrc center and podo:>trinn hridso . connector to existing stale parking deck. Located near state Capitol. Owner GSFIC. University of Georgia Sanford Stadium - Athens, Ga. $6 million Skybox addition. The fasllrack project with a 9- month schedule carried $1.8 million in liquidated dam.'ges if ~kyboxe8 and broadcast capabilities were not finished in . time for the first home game of the Georgia Bulldogs' football season. Ruth was Wisignedthi~ extrcmc.ly sensilh'c project due to her ability to motivate subcontractors ind keep work on schedule. The project was completed on time in early ~eptcmber. 1994. Georgia Institute of Technology. Atlanta . $11 millIon additions Bobby Dodd Stadium Additions and Success Center. This project completed in 1992 also had , high liquidated damages rr $260,000 for each game day missed-and a very tight~hedulc. When questions were. raised abou. use of'alumni funds, project start was delayed for 7 Wl..-cIC.,... Ruth helped forge and nnplcm('.f\l n strong .~ . TEL: Mar 04 96 17:32 No.030 P.03 . BEERS Resume RUTH CR/2TENDEN p PAGE 2 . j,artnering agreement that finished the project under the original 7.S-month schedule, despite the delays. Georgia State University - Atlanta $20 t11illion, lO5,DOO SF Seience Building. This was Ruth's first project with Been; and it went flawlessly.. She managed the project from mobili1.atlon through c.ompleLion of the complicated. structural system to iuterio~ huildoul. MRIlCf Paces Imaging - Atlanta Northside MOB & Parking Deck - Atlanta Wyndham Garden Hotel - Charlotte, NC Gwinneu Women's Center p Lawrcnccville, GA Holiday Inn Horel- Decatur, OA 330 West Ponce Office Building, Decatl'ir, GA Stone Mountain Festival Shopping Center ~ Stone Mt., G^ Shirley Blumenthal Park and The Max L. Kuniansky Family Building - Marietta, GA ~cr HospiUll of Aurora - Aurora, CO North Atlanta Church of Christ - Atlanla Spalding Triangle Phase IT . Atlanta Snapfingcr Woods Office Park - Atlanta REFERENCES Mr. Doug Padgett Project Manger GSflC 404-656-0383 Mr. lohn Butler Acting Director of Construction GSFlC 404-656-340 1 Georgia Tech Mr. Bill Ray, Associate V.P. for Facilities (404) 894-5513 ~ . TEL: Mar 0496 17:32 No.030 P.04 . .BEERS Resume RUTH CRrTTENDEN - PAGE 3 Smallwood Reynolds, Stewart & Stewart. Mr. Bill Reynolds. Principal Architect 404-233-5453 Univer!\ity of Georgia. Athens Tony Cushc;nbury. Athletic Dept. 706-542-9036 . ~~ . TEL: Mar 14 96 8:59 NO.D02 P.02 . BEERS Resume ".i.. .... THOMAS WRIGHT Superinrendent EDUCAll0N CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE . PROJECf EXPERIENCE Con8lmCtion Management - Southern Tech Bu.ClinesR Management - Oscar Rose College Upper and Middle Management - University of Oklahoma 1994- Present Superintendent Beers Construction Company 1988 -1994 Project Manager IT Flour Daniel Construction Company 1979 - 1988 Director Assistant Director of Architecture Engineering/Construction Division Department of Correction 1975 - 1979 Owner Wright Construction Company J961 - ]975 General Superintendent McDcviU & Street Construction Co. Sugar Creek Wa~te Water TrcaUncnt Plant - Charlotte. NC $] 8 million - additionli to cxi!;(ing Charlottc-Mccklcnburgh utility department facility Atlanta r"Cde;ral Center - Atlanta $6 million preconstruction/demo)ition phase $196 million. 24-story tower. 1 J-slOry building, 8-story connector building, 6-.!ltory inti)} building. 6500 Rpace parking deck Commonwealth of Virginia - Oakwood, V A $58 million maximom security prison. 516 cells State of Texas ~ Department of Correction - Palestine, TIC $65 million maximum llCCurity prison State of Oklahoma - Department of Correction . $200 million de.~ign and construction program for new prlRon McLe.wburgh Co. College. Charlotte, NC $~ million. .4-RtOry dentistry building Methodist Retirement Complex . AugU!~ta, GA , $25 million, 21-story high-rise apartment with cafeteria imd medical facilities . . ..a-.Conavucllon ComJlllllY- TEL: ,Mar 14 96 8:59 No.002 P.03 . BEERS. Resum~ ROBERT WRlGJif . pagt 2 PROJECT EXPERlRNCE (continued) Western Electric Company ~ Atlanl1l $8.5 million. 4~~tory engineering center Claflin College - Orangeburgh. Sc $~ million. 12~l;tnry high-rise donn University of South Carolina Coliseum - Columbia., SC $16 million athletic facility Simpson HighTower IIigh Scbool ~ Atlanta $12 million. 5-story twin gym with athletic field Kennestone College - Atlanta $20 million, 10 building complex Bankhead Hou~ing Complex - Atlanta $8 million multistory housing . ROHR Aircraft Company - WiDder, GA $6 liilllion .engine asRCmbly plant Georgia State Capital BuildiDg - Atlanta 519 million renovation Saint Philips Cathedral - Atlanta $8.5 million church . REFERENCES Mr. Phil'Stover VP Commercial Group Flour Daniel Construction Co. Greenvitlc, SC 803-281-4489 .B6MI CVnMtuotlQn COmpany- . . Section 00430 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST AlA Document G805 . . 95-052/12-95 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST 00430- I LIST OF ,SUBCONTRACTORS AlA DOCUMENT CaGS . PROJECT: . (Name, adaress) ARCHITECT: TO: (Contractor) - r ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: -, DATE: L -1 list Subcontractors and others proposed to be_ employed on the above Project as required by the bidding documents. (To be filled out by the Contractor and returned to the Architect.) Work Firm Address Phone Representative e. e (List continued on back of this sheet) AlA DOCUMENT GaDS . LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS . APRIL 1970 EDITION . AIA@ .' @, 1970 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 173S NEW YORK.AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 PAGE 1 OF 2 00430-2 Work Firm Address Phone Representative . . . AlA DOCUMENT G80S . LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS . APRIL 1970 EDITION . AIA@ . @ 1970 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., NW., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 PAGE 2 00430-3 Section 00480 . NONCOLLUSION AFFID:\ VIT OF PRIME BIDDER State of Geor!!ia ) ) County of Fulton) Dwight Morgan, Jr. , being duly sworn, deposes and says that: (I) H~ is Officer (Owner, Panner, Officer, Representative. or Agent) of Beers Cons t ruc t ion Company the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid. (2) He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached I?idand of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid. (3) Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusi....e or sham Bid. (4) Neither the said Bidder, nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives. employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner. directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person, to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the Bid price or the Bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any. . advantage against Owner (Local Public Agency) or any person interested in the proposed Contract. ~. (5) The price or prices quoted m the attached Bid are fair and proper and not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. Sign~~~~ Title roup Presl. ~ Subscribed and Sworn to before me this riQtt\ day of -I'f]o ~~-~ ,19$. Notary Signature ...... ..........-. 95c052/12-95 Notary Public, Cobb County J Georgia My Commission expires MyCommissiomExpjr~E: MarC!14, 2000 . ",...".~ ' , -''';;}, ,~ (SEAL) : .~ .c- -.....;r-.- '...,;:0 i :=:: . '-"'/: ~. : ~ ~ -? '.:''\.. Y ~- ;~, /Y' "'--"0: ~J ~- .......' ,.,. .... '. _....' ... ' ..... \r~~:,:,2.'?:V /~,-~~~: NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER ;~,-",~, -''''''~ ~004~6f(~'" .,,' . Section 00481 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR State of County of , being duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) of hereafter referred to as "Subcontractor" for the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid. (2) He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the Subcontractor's Proposal submitted by the Subcontractor to , the Contractor for certain work in connection with the Contract pertaining to the Project as described in the Advertisement for Bids, Section 00030 of these Contract Documents. (3) Such Subcontractor's Proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Proposal. (4) Neither the Subcontractor, nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Proposal in connection with the Contract or to refrain from submitting a Proposal in connection with such Contract or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by Unlawful agreement or connivance with and other Bidder, firm or person, to fix the price or prices in said Subcontractor's Proposal, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advan~ge against OWner (Local Public Agency) or any person interested . in the proposed Contrac.t.' . . - . (5) The price or prices quoted in the Subcontractor's Proposal are fair and proper and not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. Signature Title Subscribed and Sworn to before me this day of 19_ Notary Signature My Commission expires (SEAL) . 95-052/12-95 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR 00481-1 . Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN .. OWNER AND CONTRACTOR WHERE THE BASIS OF PAYMENT IS A STIPULA TED SUM AlA Document Al 0 1 . . 95-052/12"95 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 00500-1 . . . Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum AlA Document A101 - Electronic Format AGREEMENT made as of the /9 !J- day of (.) Pli' / ' in the year of Nineteen Hundred and Ninety Six BETWEEN the Owner: (Name and address) Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council 605 City-County Building Augusta. Georgia 30911 and .the Contractor: (Name and address) Beers Construction Company 70 Ellis Street NE Atlanta. Georgia 30303 The Project is: (Name and location) Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center Phinizy Road Facility Augusta. Georgia The Architect is: (Name and address) Precision Planning, Inc. 400 Pike Boulevard P.O. Box 2210 Lawrenceville, Georgia 30246 The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION., AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA DOCUMENT D401. The 1987 Edition of AlA Document A20 I, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do nol use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, copyright 1987 by the American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006-5292. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AlA DOCUMENT AIDI . OWNER.CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT. TWELFTH.EDlTlON. AlA - COPYRIGHT 1987. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006.5292. WARNINQ: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is liubject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced under license number 1196000402 and can be reproduced without violation untillll2Si96. Electronic Document Service Al 01-1987 . . . ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall execute the entire .Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others, or as follows: All Work as described and included within the base bid. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement is the date from which the Contract Time of Paragraph 3.2 is measured, and shall be the date of this Agreement, as first written above,. unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement, if it differs from the date of this Agreement, or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) The date of commencement shall be as stipulated by the Notice to Proceed. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. ' 3.2 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than (Insert the calendar date or number of calendar days after the date of commencement. Also insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work, ifnot stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.) Twenty-four (24) months or Seven Hundred Thirty (730) consecutive calendar days from the date of the written Notice to Proceed. , subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete 0;' time.) If the Work is not completed within the time stipulated. including any extensions of time for excusable delays. the Owner and the Contractor agree that the Contractor shall pay to the Owner the amount of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). per day for each working day of delay until the Work is completed and the Contractor and his sureties shall be liable to the Owner for the amount thereof. . ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of Sixteen Million One Hundred Fifty-five Thousand Dollars ($16.155.000.00 ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents, 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the alJlount for each and the date until which that amount is valid.) N/A AlA DOCUMENT AIOI ' OWNER, CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - TWELFTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK A VENUE, N. W" W ASHINOTON, D.C. 20006.5292. W ARNINO: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is lubjccl to leS,al prosecution. This document was electronic.11y produced under license number' 1196000402 and can be reproduced without vi~lllion until 11/28/96. Electronic Document Service AI0l-1987 2 . . . :Tc ,,-. '.., !-.. ..' ,,-,.._." .. 4.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: N/A ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month -ending on the, last day of the., . month, or as follows: 5.3 Provided an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the t we n t y f i f t h , ( 25 t h) day of a month, the Owner_shall m~ke payment to the Contractor not later than the 1 as t day of the follow i n g month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shalI be made by the Owner not later than for t y , ( 40) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment.This shall supersede any.and all provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act. O.C.G,A. Section B-1 I-I. et.sea. In the event any provision of this Agreement is inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay Act. the provision of this Agreement shall control. 5.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used' as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.Each Application for Payment shall be accompanied by an Affidavit and Waiver of Liens from all maior Sub-contractors for which previous Applications for Payments were received. 5.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract-Documents, the' amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: . 5.6.1. Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retain age of ten percent (10%) . Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute may be included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.7 of the Generlll Conditions even though the Contract Sum has not yet been adjusted by Change Order; 5.6.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon' in writing), less retainage of ten percent (10%); 5.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and 5.6.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of the General Conditions. 5.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Paragraph 5.6 shalf be further modified under the following circumstances: 5.7.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a'sum sufficient to increase the total payments to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled claims; and . 5.7.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is- thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. AlA DOCUMENT AIOI . OWNER. CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT. TWELFTH EDITION . AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., ,WASHINGTON. D.C. 10006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright law:, and is &ubject to legal prosecution. This document wu electronically produced under license number 1196000402 and can be reproduced without violation until 11/28/96. Electronic Document Service A 101-1987 3 . . . 5.8 Reduction or limitation of retain age, if any, shaH be as foHows: (If it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Subparagraphs 5.6.1 and 5.6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) . No amount shaH be retained on progress payment requests submitted after fifty percent (50%) of the work has been completed if in the opinion of the Owner. or Owner's authorized representative. such work is satisfactory and has been completed on schedule. Any additionalretainage to the aforementioned held for unsatisfactory workmanship or schedule performance. will not be released until substantial completion. This will not affect the retained amounts on the first fifty percent (50%) of the Work which wiH continue to be withheld to ensure satisfactory completion of the Work. If. after discontinuing the retainage. the Owner determines that the Work is unsatisfactory or has faHen behind schedule. retention may be resumed. at the previous level. ' ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT . final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shaH be made by the Owner to the Contractor when (1) the Contract has been fuHy performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; and (2) a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect; such, final payment shaH be made by the Owner not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as foHows: ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under-the-Gentraet shaH bear intcrest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereef;-ttt-the-leg-ttl rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate (}If bIte, at ag' UJd upon, if any;-} (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or mod,ifications, and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.) 7.3 Other provisions: AlA DOCUMENT AI 0 I - OWNER.CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT, TWELFTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987 . THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1 ns NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006..5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopyinsviolltcl U.S. copyrisht lawi Ind is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced under license number 1196000402 and can be reproduced withaUl violation until 11/28/96. Electronic Document Service AIOI-1987 4 . . . ARTICLE 8 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8.1 The Contract may be terminated by the. Owner or the Contractor as provided 10 Article 14 of the General Conditions. 8.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this. Agreement, are enumerated as follows: 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor"AIA Document A101, 1987 Edition. 9.1.2 The General Conditions are the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A201, 1987 Edition. 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated December. 1995 . and are as follows: Document Section 00800 Section 00840 Title Pages Supplementary General Conditions Administrative & Procedural Items 8 5 9.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 9.1.3, and are as follows: (Either list the Specifications here or.refer to an exhibit aI/ached to this Agreement.) Section Title Pages See Exhibit "A" 9.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated unless a different date is shown below: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit aI/ached to this Agreement.) Number Title Date See Attached Exhibit "B" 9.1.6 The addenda, if any, are as follows: Number Date Pages One (1) February 13. 1996 8 Two(2) February 14. 1996 13 Three (3) February 19.1996 104 plus 15 drawing sheets Four (4) February 26.1996 13 Portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements' are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9. 9.1.7 Other documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List here any additional documents which are intended to form part of the Contract Documents: The General Conditions pro~ide that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement.. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) AlA DOCUMENT AIOI ' OWNER.CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT. TWELFTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987 .'THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK A VENUE, N. W", W ASHINOTON. D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws Ind is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced under license nu~bcr J 196000402 Ind cln be reproduced without violation until 11/28/96. Electronic Document Service A 10 1-1987 5 . . .. This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies of which one is to be delivered to the.Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner. OWNER CONTRAC:TOR ~~~~ (Signature) Larry Sconyers. Mayor Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council Dwight Morgan. Jr. Group President Beers Construction Company 70 Ellis Street. NE Atlanta. Georgia 30303 (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) AlA DOCUMENT A10I . OWNER.CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT. TWELFTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987 . THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK A VENUE, N. W.. W ASHINOTON. D.C. 20006-5292. W ARNINO: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to Icgal prosecution. This -(locumcnt was electronically produced under license number 1196000402 and can be reproduced without violation until 11/28/96. Electronic Document Service A JO 1-1987 6 r . "EXHIBIT A" AUl!usta-Richmond County Detention Center Phinizv Road Aue:usta. Geore:ia BIDDING RE UIREME TS: SECTION 00030 - ADVER SEMENT FOR BIDS .......... SECTION 00 I 00 - INSTRUC IONS TO BIDDERS , . . . . . , , , , SECTION 00101 - SUPPLEM TAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BI DERS ....",..,........ 00101-1 to 00101-2 SECTION 00200 - SUBSURFAC INVESTIGATION REPORT (CSRA) . . . , . . , , . . , , , . , . . . . , ,. 00200-1 to 00200-29 SECTION 00300 - BID FORM .... ."................ 00300-1 to 00300-2 SECTION 00310 - PARTNERSHIP CE TIFICATE ............"......00310-1 SECTION 00320 - CORPORATE CER ICATE",.....,..,....",.. 00320-1 SECTION 00321 - INDIVIDUAL CERTIF ATE ",...,.,........,... 00321-1 SECTION 00410 - BID BOND (AlA A31O) .....,.."...",.00410-1 to 00410-2 SECTION 00420 - CONTRACTORS QUALI CATIO STATEMENT (AlA A305) . . . . . .. ... .....,.. 00420-1 to 00420-7 SECTION 00430 - SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (G 5 .......... 00430-1 to 00430-3 SECTION 00480 - NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT F PRIME BIDDER . . . . . 00480-1 SECTION 00481 - NONCOLLUSION AFFIDA VI SUBCONTRACTOR. . 00481-1 II. CONTRACT FORMS: SECTION 00500 - AGREEMENT (AlOl) , . . , , , , . . . . , . , . . . . . 00500-1 to 00500-7 SECTION 00520 - CERTIFICATE OF CO ATIORN Y .. . . . , , . , , . . 00520-1 SECTION 00530 - NOTICE OF AWARD . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. 00530-1 to 00530-2 SECTION 00540 - NOTICE TO PROCEE . . . . , , . . . . . .. ....,..... 00540-1 SECTION 00610 - PERFORMANCE BO & PAYMENT B NO (A312) .......... 00610-1 to 00610-7 III. CONTRACT CONDITION: SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CON ITIONS (AlA A20l) .". 007 0-1 to 00700-25 SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENT RY- GENE L CONDITIONS ,......... 0080 I to 00800-8 SECTION 00840 - ADMINIST TIVE & PROCEDURAL ITEMS ,00840- to 00840-5 T ABLE OF CONTENTS N TITLES . IV. DIVISION 1 SECTION 01010 - SUM RY OF WORK.........."...., ,01010-1 to 0101 -2 SECTION 01027 - APPLI ATIONS FOR PAYMENT. , . . . . . . . . 01027-1 to 01027- SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING ". . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . 01050-1 to 01050-3 SECTION 01095 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS, , , . . . . , , . . . . , . . . , . .01095-1 to 01095-3 . 95-052/12-95 DATE 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01108/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01108/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 Table of Contents . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) S PAGES SECTION 01300 - SUB ITALS..",.",.".,.,...,.... 01300-1 to 01300 SECTION 01400 - QUALI CONTROL. , , . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . .01400-1 to 014 -3 SECTION 01500 - CONSTR CTION FACILITIES AND TEM RARY CONTROLS ......,.,,01500-1 to 0 500-9 SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS NDEQUIPMENT ..,.......01600-1 to 1600-4 SECTION 01631 - SUBSTITUTIO . , . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . . . . 01631-1 t 01631-3 SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CL EOUT............... 01700-1 01700-13 SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES ,..""........".,....01740 to 01740-3 DIVISION 2 SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING . . ., .......""...", 0 10-1 to 02110-3 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK. , , , , " ........,...... 0 00-1 to 02200-11 SECTION 02281 - TERMITE CONTROL. .. ..,.,......,.. 02281-1 to 02281-2 SECTION 02480 - LANDSCAPE WORK . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . .. 02480~ 1 to 02480-10 SECTION 02511 - HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAV G....... ..02511-1 to 02511-5 SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONC TE P A VIN ,02520-1 to 02520-13 SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS ........, ..... ". 02665-1 to 02665-21 SECTION 02700 - SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE . . . . . , . . . . . 02700-1 to 02700-23 SECTION 02711 - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTE S ..,.,.02711-1 to 02711-4 SECTION 02831 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES . . . . . . . . 02831-1 to 02831-6 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03011 - CONCRETE TESTING ",... ....... ... 03011-1 to 03011-3, SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK .. .,.......... 03100-1 to 03100-3 SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEME T ,.....,.... 03200-1 to 03200-3 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRE 300-1 to 03300-14 SECTION 03345 - CONCRETE FINISHES . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .. 345-1 to 03345-5 SECTION 03430 - PRECAST PRESTRESSE CONCRETE...... 03 30-1 to 03430-5 ' SECTION 03450 - ARCHITECTURAL P CAST CONCRETE PLANT CAST ................... 0345 I to 03450-6 SECTION 03520 - INSULATING CON RETE DECKS . . . , . . . . . 03520- to 03520-5 DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASON DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTU L STEEL. . . . , , , , . . . . . . . . . .05120-1 to 0512 5 SECTION 05500 - METAL E BRICA TIONS , , , . . . . . . . , . . . . 05500-1 to 05500-1 SECTION 05810 - EXPAN ON JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES. . . 05810-1 to 05810-5 DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY ....,.............06100-1 to 06100-6 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK . 06402-1 to 06402-8 DATE 01108/96 01/08/96 01108/96 01/08/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01108/96 01/08/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 02/19/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 01108/96 95-052/12-95 II Table of Contents . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES DATE DIVISION 7 SECTION 07111 - COMPO TE SHEET WATERPROOFING".. 07111-1 to 07111-6 SECTION 07160 - BITUMIN S DAMPPROOFING ......"..07160-1 to 07160- SECTION 07210 - BUILDING SULATION ,......".... 07210-1 to 0721 -5 SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR I ULA TION & FINISH STEMS (PB) ,.,.,...,... 07241-1 to 0 41-9 SECTION 07242 - EXTERIOR INSU TION & FINISH SYS S (PM) ,.,.,....". 07242-1 07242-9 SECTION 07251 - SPRAYED-ON FIREP OFING...,...,.., 07251- to 07251-8 SECTION 07270 - FlRESTOPPING . . . . .. .....,......,.. 07270- to 07270- 10 SECTION 07527 - SBS-MODIFIED BlTUM US SHEET ROOFING. . , , . . , . . . . . , , . . . 01 27-1 to 07527-9 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING A D TRIM ..." 620-1 to 07620-8 SECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPEC LTIES.... 07710-1 to 07710-4 SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES ........ ,...... . 07720-1 to 07720-5 SECTION 07810 - PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS .... .,...", 07810-1 to 07810-5 SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS. . . . . , . , , , . . . . , , . .. 07901-1 to 07901-10 DIVISION 8 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS .,...."......, SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS , . . . . . , , , . . SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AN STOREFRONTS ..... .......... 0 410-1 to 08410-8 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE. . . .. ",....,.... 087 -I to 08710-11 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING ",..........,......",. 0880 1 to 08800-10 SECTION 08920 - GLAZED ALUMINUM C TAIN WALLS ...08920- to 08920-8 08110-1 to 08110-6 08211-1 to 08211-6 08331-1 to 08331-5 DIVISION 9 SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD A SEMBLIES ........ 09255-1 to 0 55-14 SECTION 09300 - TILE , . . . . . . . . . . . , , , , . . . . . . . , . . . . , . . 09300-1 to 0 00-8 SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL P EL CEILINGS. , . . . , , , . .09511-1 to 095 -7 SECTION 09521 - ACOUSTICAL ALL PANELS. . . , . . . , , , . . 09521-1 to 09521 4 SECTION 09660 - RESILIENT E FLOORING .....,.... 09660-1 to 09660- SECTION 09678 - RESILIENT ALL BASE & ACCESSORIES .. 09678-1 to 09678-4 SECTION 09680 - CARPET ..,....................... 09680-1 to 09680-7 SECTION 09900 - PAINTIN , , , . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . .. 09900-1 to 09900-16 SECTION 09950 - WALL OVERINGS ......,......,..... 09950-1 to 09950-4 DIVISION 10 SECTION 10170 - SO D PHENOLIC PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS, , . . . . . . . . 10170-1 to 10170-4 SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES ,........,.,..........,.. 10350-1 to 10350-3 SECTION 10425 - SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10425-1 to 10425-6 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 1/08/96 o /08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 95-052/12-95 III Table of Contents . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES DATE SECTION 10522 - EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES ...... SECTION 10800 - TOIL AND BATH ACCESSORIES ..... DIVISION 11 SECTION 11110 - COMMERC L LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT .,.. 11110-1 to 1 10-4 SECTION 11160 - LOADING DO K EQUIPMENT ...."",.. 11160-1 to 1160-3 SECTION 11191 - SECURITY HOL OW METAL ...",..... 11191-1 to 1191-11 SECTION 11192 - SECURITY GLAS GLAZING. . . , . . . . . . ,11192- to 11192-7 SECTION 11194 - DETENTION EQUIP NT.,............ 11194- to 11194-22 SECTION 11195 - SECURITY ACCESSO S AND FURNITURE III -1 to 11195-4 SECTION 11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIP NT."",..... 11 0-1 to 11400-57 DIVISION 12 SECTION 12690 -FLOOR MATS & FRAMES DIVISION 13 SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. . . . , . . . , . . .13122-1 to 13122-7 DIVISION 14 SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS DIVISION 15 SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL RE 1501 -I to 15010-6 SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCH S ...".,.... 15140- to 15140-3 SECTION 15242 - VIBRATION ISOLATI , , , , , . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . 15242-1 SECTION 15260 - PIPING INSULATIO . . . . . . , . , . , . . . . . 15260-1 to 5260-2 SECTION 15290 - DUCTWORK INS A TION ...,......" 15290-1 to 1 90-2 SECTION 15310 - FIRE PROTECTI PIPING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15310-1 to 15 0-3 SECTION 15325 - SPRINKLER S STEMS ,..............,. 15325-1 to 1532 3 SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING PING...............,.. 15410-1 to 15410- SECTION 15430 - PLUMB IN SPECIALTIES ........,... 15430-1 to 15430-3 SECTION 15440 - PLUMB G FIXTURES ...........,... 15440-1 to 15440-8 SECTION 15450 - PLUM G EQUIPMENT ....."...... 15450-1 to 15450-2 SECTION 15482 - MOT R CONTROLLERS . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . 15482-1 to 15482-2 SECTION 15510 - HY RONIC PIPING. . . . . . . , . , . . , . . . , . . . 15510-1 to 15510-3 SECTION 15515 - DRONIC SPECIALTIES. . . . . , , . . . . . . . , 15515-1 to 15515-3 SECTION 15540 - V AC PUMPS , , , ~ . . . . . , , , . . . . . . . . , , , . 15540-1 to 15540-2 SECTION 15575 - BREACHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS ... 15575-1 to 15575-2 SECTION 15 0 - SECURITY COVER SYSTEM (SHROUD) FOR CONCEALMENT OF FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . 15650-1 to 15650-2 SECTION 15684 - CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS. . . . , . . 15684-1 to 15684-10 SECTION 15712 - INDUCED DRAFT COOLING TOWER ...... 15712-1 to 15712-4 01/08/96 01/08/96 02/1 9/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 02/19/96 01/08/96 02/19/96 02/19/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 02/19/96 1/08/96 o 19/96 02/ /96 02/1 Y96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 02/19/96 02/1 9/96 95-052/12-95 iv Table of Contents . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES DATE SECTION 15835 - RMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS ...... 15835-1 to 15835-2 SECTION 15855 - AI HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS ...... 15855-1 to 15855-5 SECTION 15870 - PO VENTILATORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15870-1 to 1587 SECTION 15890 - DUC RK . . , . . . . . . , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15890-1 to 15 0-2 SECTION 15910 - DUCTWO ACCESSORIES. . , . . . . . , . , , , 15910-1 to 910-2 SECTION 15936 - AIR OUTLE AND INLETS ....,........ 15936-1 t 15936-2 SECTION 15975 - DIRECT DIG! L CONTROL SYSTEMS ... 15975-1 15975-19 SECTION 15990 -TESTING, AD ING AND BALANCING 15990 to 15990-3 DIVISION 16 SECTION 16050 - ELECTRICAL GENERA SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS ,..."".. ........,.., SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS .,........",....... 16120-1 to 16120-4 SECTION 16130 - BOXES, , , , , . . . . . , . , , . ,. ....,.,.". 16130-1 to 16130-5 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES .",...... ... ,.. I6140~1 to 16140-4 SECTION 16170 - MOTOR & EQUIPMENT CONNEC S, . , , , . . , , 16170-1 SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS . .,.........", 16195-1 SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE. . . . . . . . . . , , . , . . . . . . . . , , . . 16420-1 SECTION 16425 - SERVICE SWITCHES & SWITC BOARD ... 16425-1 to 16425-5 SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES .........,.. .. 16440-1 to 16440-2 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING ,..,...,. .,......,..... 16450-1 to 16450-4 SECTION 16460 - DRY TYPE TRANSFO S. . . . . , , . . . .. 6460-1 to 16460-2 SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS .,., ,.....,..,....... I 70-1 to 16470-4 SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PR ECTION.",.....,. 16 -I to 16475-4 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING .""".................,. 1650 1 to 16500-2 SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE/CO PUTERlCATV RACEW Y SYSTEM ....."......,........ 16740-1 SECTION 16744 - SECURITY OMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-1 to 1 744-13 SECTION 16745 - NURSE LL SYSTEM, . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . . 16745-1 to 1 45-4 SECTION 16747 - CLOS CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM. . . . . . . . 16747-1 to 167 7-6 SECTION 16748 - LIF AFETY SYSTEM. . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . 16748-1 to 1674 8 SECTION 16749 - D OR ANNUNCIATORS AND LOCK CONTROLS ............... 16749-1 to 19749-11 SECTION 16760 - EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR, . . . . . 16760-1 to 16760-11 SECTION 16915 - LOW VOLTAGE RELAY SYSTEM, , . . . . . . , 16915-1 to 16915-4 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 . '.~~~~~ 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 01/08/96 95-052/12-95 v Table'of Contents . "EXHIBIT B" AUGUST A-RICHMOND COUNTY DETENTION CENTER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA. GEORGIA DRAWING INDEX CS LIFE SAFETY . LS2.0 1 LIFE SAFETY MASTER FL 01/08/96 LS2.02 RATED WALL DETAILS - 1/08/9 LS2, I LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - FIR FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 LS2.2 LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 LS2.3 LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 LS2.4 LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 LS2.5 LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 LS2.6 LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 LS2.7 LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN- SECOND FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 LS2.8 LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 LS2.9 LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AREA D - 01/ /96 LS2.IO LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AREA E - 0 /08/96 CIVIL Cl SITE STAKING PLAN - 2/19/96 C2 GRADING PLAN - 02/ /96 C3 EROSION CONTROL LAN - 02/19/96 C4 EROSION CONTRO NOTES AND DETAILS - 02/19/9 C5 UTILITY PLAN - 2/1 9/96 C6 STORM PROFIL - 02/1 9/96 C7 SANITARY PR FILES - 02/19/96 C8 CONSTRUCT N DETAILS - 02/19/96 C9 CONSTRUC ON DETAILS - 02/19/96 C 1 0 LANDSC E PLAN - 02/1 9/96 Cl1 IRRlGA"L ON PLAN - 02/19/96 . Page I AU A 1.2 A2,l PL ZA PLAN - 01/08/96 P AZA DETAILS - 01/08/96 OOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN- FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - IRST FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 P RTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - FIR T FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 PAR L DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN- SECO FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 PARTIAL IMENSION FLOOR PLAN- SECOND F OOR POD B - 01/08/96 PARTIAL DI NSION FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLO POD C - 01/08/96 PARTIAL DIME SION FLOOR PLAN- SECOND FLOOR REA D - 01/08/96 PARTIAL DIMENSI N FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR A E - 01/08/96 ENLARGED PLANS - /08/96 NOT USED NOT USED PARTIAL REFERENCE FLO R PLAN- FIRST FLOOR POD A - 01/08 6 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR' PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 A2.8 A2.9 A2.10 A2.11 A2.12 A2.13 A2.14 A2.15 A2.16 A2.17 A2.18 A2.19 ARCIDTECTURAL (CONT.) ARCHITECTURAL (CO NT.) . ENLARGED ELEV A TI NS AND STOREFRONTS - 0 II /96 BUILDING SECTIO S AREAS A, B, C - 01108/96 BUILDING SECT ONS - 01108/96 BUILDING SE IONS - 01108/96 BUILDING S TIONS - 01108/96 SECTIONS DETAILS - 01/08/96 SECTIONS DETAILS - 01/08/96 SECTION & DETAILS - 01/08/96 SECTIO S & DETAILS - 01108/96 ENLA GED STAIR PLANS - 01/08/96 STA DETAILS AND SECTIONS - 02/ 9/96 TERIOR ELEVATIONS AND ET AILS - 01/08/96 CONTROL ROOM PLANS AND ELEVATIONS - 01/08/96 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS - 01108/96 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN- FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 ARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - RST FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 P~ TIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - FIR FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 PAR L FINISH FLOOR PLAN - SECON FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 PARTIAl.: INISH FLOOR PLAN- SECOND OOR POD B - 01/08/96 PARTIAL F SH FLOOR PLAN- SECOND FLO POD C - 01/08/96 PARTIAL FINIS FLOOR PLAN- SECOND FLOOR REA D - 01108/96 PARTIAL FINISH F OOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AR E - 01/08/96 PARTIAL SECURITY RNISHINGS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P D A - 01/08/96 PARTIAL SECURITY FURN HINGS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD B- 01/08/96 PARTIAL SECURITY FURNISHINGS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 A5.4 PAR REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN- FIRS LOOR AREA E - 01108/96 PAR~ REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN- SECOND LOOR POD A - 01108/96 PARTIAL FERENCE FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FL R POD B - 01108/96 PARTIAL REF CE FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR' OD C - 01/08/96 PARTIAL REFE CE FLOOR PLAN- SECOND FLOOR A A D - 01/08/96 PARTIAL REFEREN FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR ARE~ - 01/08/96 PLAN DETAILS - 01/08/9 PLAN DETAILS - 01/08/96 ENLARGED SHOWER PLANS DETAILS - 01/08/96 LAUNDRY PLAN AND DETAILS - 01/08/96 ROOF PLANS PODS A, B, C - 01/08/96 ROOF PLANS AREAS D & E - 01108/96 TYPICAL ROOF DETAILS - 01/08/96 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD B - 01108/96 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01108/96 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING P N' - FIRST FLOOR AREA D - 01108/9 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING LAN - FIRST FLOOR AREA E - 0 I/O /96 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEIL G PLAN - SECOND FLOOR POD A - 1/08/96 PARTIAL REFLECTED C LING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR POD - 01/08/96 PARTIAL REFLECTE CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P D C - 01/08/96 PARTIAL REFLEC D CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOO AREA D - 01/08/96 PARTIAL REFL CTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FL OR AREA E - 01108/96 REFLECTE CEILING PLAN DETAILS - 01/08/96 EXTERIO ELEVATIONS PODS A AND B - 01/08/96 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS POD C AND AREA D - 01/08/96 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AREA E - 01/08/96 A2.20 A6.I A2.2I A6.2 A6.3 A6.4 A6.5 A6,6 A6.7 A6.8 A7.I A7.2 A2,22 A2,23 A2.24 A2.25 A2.26 A2.27 A2.28 A8.1 A2.29 A3.1 A3.2 A3.3 A4.1 A4.2 . A4.3 A4.4 A9.5 A4.5 A9.6 A4.6 A9.7 A4.7 A9.8 A4.8 A9.9 A4.9 A9.10 A4.10 AIO.l A4.11 AIO.2 A5.1 A5.2 A 10.3 A5.3 . Page 2 ARCHITECTURAL (CO NT.) . A 10.4 AI0.5 A 10.6 AIO,7 AIO,8 AIO.9 AIO.IO A I 0.11 AIO.12 AJO.13 . AIO.14 AI0.15 AIO.16 A 10.17 AJO.18 AIO.19 PARTIAL SECURITY FURNISHINGS PLAN - FIRS FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 PARTIAL SECU TY FURNISHINGS PLAN - FIRST FL OR AREA E - 01/08/96 PARTIAL SECURI URNISHINGS PLAN - SECOND FLO 01/08/96 PARTIAL SECURITY FU ISHINGS PLAN - SECOND FLOOR PO B- 01/08/96 PARTIAL SECURITY FURNISH PLAN - SECOND FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 PARTIAL SECURITY FURNISHINGS PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 PARTIAL SECURITY FURNISHINGS PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 ENLARGED PLANS - 01/08/96 ENLARGED FURNITURE PLANS - 01/08/96 SECURITY FURNISHINGS DETAILS - 01/08/96 DOOR AND HOLLOW METAL F ELEVATIONS - 01/08/96 HOLLOW METAL DETAILS - 0 /08/96 HOLLOW METAL DETAILS - 1/08/96 HOLLOW METAL ELEVATI S- 01/08/96 HOLLO W METAL ELEV TIONS- 01/08/96 HOLLOW METAL EL 01/08/96 STRUCTURAL S1.1 GENERAL NO S, COLUMN & FOOTING SC DULE - 01/08/96' S2.1 PARTIAL F DATION & FIRST FLOOR PL AREA A - 01/08/96 S2.2 PARTIA OUNDATION & FIRST FLOOR LAN AREA B - 01/08/96 S2.3 PARTI~ FOUNDATION & FIRST FLOOR AN AREA C - 01/08/96 S2.4 PARTIAL FOUNDATION & FIRST FLOOR PLAN AREA D - 01/08/96 6 . Page 3 STRUCTURAL (CONT.) S2.5 PARTIAL FOUNDA ON & FIRST FLOOR PLAN A :1\ E - 01/08/9 S2.6 PARTIAL SECO FLOOR/LOW ROOF FRAMIN PLAN AREA A - 01/08/96 S2.7 PARTIAL S ROOF F 01/08/96 S2.8 PART SECOND FLOOR/LOW ROOF RAMING PLAN AREA C -' 01/0 '/96 S2.9 P TIAL SECOND FLOOR/LOW OF FRAMING PLAN AREA D - 1/08/96 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR/LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA E - 01/08/96 PARTIAL LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA A - 01/08/96 PARTIAL LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA B - 01/08/96 PARTIAL LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA C - 01/08/96 PARTIAL LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA E - 01/08/96 S2.15 RTIAL HIGH ROOF FRAMING PI.: N AREA A - 01/08/96 S2.16 PAR IAL HIGH ROOF FRAMING PLAN REA B - 01/08/96 S2.17 PARTIA HIGH ROOF FRAMING PLAN A C - 01/08/96 S2.18 PARTIAL H H ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA - 01/08/96 S2.19 PARTIAL HIGH OOF FRAMING PLAN AREA E - /08/96 S3.1 SECTIONS AND D AILS - 01/08/96 S3.2 SECTIONS AND DET LS - 01/08/96 S3.3 SECTIONS AND DETA S - 01/08/96 S3.4 SECTIONS AND DETAIL - 01/08/96 S3.5 SECTIONS AND DETAILS 01/08/96 S3.6 SECTIONS AND DETAILS - 1/08/96 MECHANICAL M2.1 BUILDING A FIRST FLOOR PLAN HV AC - 01/08/96 M2.2 BUILDING B FIRST FLOOR PLAN HV AC - 01/08/96 M2.3 BUILDING C FIRST FLOOR PLAN HV AC - 01/08/96 MECHANICAL (CO NT.) . M2.4 BUILDING D FIRST FLOOR PLAN YAC - 02/19/96 M2.5 B LDING E FIRST FLOOR PLAN HV 1\ - 01/08/96 M2.6 BUlL G A SECOND FLOOR PLAN HV AC - 1/08/96 M2.7 BUILDIN SECOND FLOOR PLAN HVAC - 01/0 96 M2.8 BUILDING C S COND FLOOR PLAN HV AC - 01/08/96 M2.9 BUILDING D SECO FLOOR PLAN HV AC - 01/08/96 M2.10 BUILDING E SECOND HV AC - 01/08/96 M9.1 HVAC DETAILS - 01/08/96 M9.2 HV AC SCHEDULES - 01/08/96 M9.3 HV AC SCHEDULES - 01/08/96 M9.4 HVAC DETAILS - 02/19/96 PLUMBING . P2,1 BUILDING A FIRST FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 P2.2 BUILDING B FIRST FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 P2.3 BUILDING C FIRST FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 P2.4 BUILDING D FIRST FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 02/1 9/96 P2.5 BUILDING E FIRST FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 P2.6 BUILDING A SECOND FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 P2,7 BUILDING B SECOND FLOOR PL PLUMBING - 01/08/96 P2.8 BUILDING C SECOND FLOOR P AN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 P2.9 BUILDING E SECOND FLOO PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 P2.10 BUILDING A FIRST FLOO PLAN WATER & GAS PIPE - 01/ 8/96 P2.11 BUILDING B FIRST FLO R PLAN WATER & GAS PIPE - 1/08/96 P2.12 BUILDING C FIRST F OOR PLAN WATER & GAS PIP - 01/08/96 P2.13 BUILDING D FIRS FLOOR PLAN WATER & GAS R E - 01/08/96 P2.14 BUILDING E F ST FLOOR PLAN WATER & GAS PIPE - 01/08/96 . Page 4 PLUMBING (CONT.) P2.15 BUILDING A SECOND FLO R PLAN WATER & GAS PIPE - 01/ 8/96 P2.16 BUILDING B SECOND F OOR PLAN WATER & GAS PIPE - 1/08/96 P2.17 BUILDING C SECON FLOOR PLAN WATER & GAS PIP - 01/08/96 P2,18 BUILDING E SEC D FLOOR PLAN WATER & GAS PE - 01/08/96 P9,I KITCHEN PLU BING, RISER DIAGRAM - 0 /08/96 FIRE PROTECTIO FP2,I BUILD G A FIRST FLOOR PLAN FIRE P OTECTION - 01/08/96 FP2.2 BUlL ING B FIRST FLOOR PLAN FI PROTECTION - 01/08/96 FP2.3 B LDING C FIRST FLOOR PLAN E PROTECTION - 01/08/96 UILDING D FIRST FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 BUILDING E FIRST FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 BUILDING A SECOND FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 BUILDING B SECOND FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 ILDING C SECOND FLOOR PLAN FI PROTECTION - 01/08/96 FP2.9 BUlL ING E SECOND FLOOR PLAN FIRE P TECTION- 01/08/96 ELECTRICAL E-l.l PLAZA PLAN - 01/08/96 E-1.2 PLAZA PLAN - ELE RICAL- 01/08/96 E-2.3.1 ELECTRICAL - POD "A" FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.3.2 SYSTEMS - POD "A" FIRST OOR - 01/08/96 E-2.4.1 ELECTRICAL - POD "B" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.4.2 SYSTEMS - POD "B" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.5.1 ELECTRICAL - POD "C" - FIRST FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-2.5.2 SYSTEMS - POD "C" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 ELECTRICAL (CONT.) . E-2.6.1 ELEC CAL - AREA 'D' FIRST FLOOR 01/08/96 E-2.6.2 SYSTEM - AREA "D" - FIRST FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-2.7.1 ELECTRICAL AREA "E" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/ E-2.7.2 SYSTEMS - AREA "E" - FIRST FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-2,8,1 ELECTRICAL - POD" "SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.8.2 SYSTEMS - POD "A" - SE FLOOR- 01/08/96 E-2.9.1 ELECTRICAL - POD "B" - SEC NO FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.9.2 SYSTEMS - POD "B" - SECOND FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-2.1O.1 ELECTRICAL - POD "C" - SECOND FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-2.10.2 SYSTEMS - POD "c" - SECOND FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 , E-2.11.1 ELECTRICAL - AREA "D" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2,ll.2 SYSTEMS - AREA "D" - SECOND FLOOR -,01/08/96 E-2.12.1 ELECTRICAL - AREA "E" - SECOND FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-2.12.2 SYSTEMS - AREA "E" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2,13 CENTRAL PLANT - PART PLAN - 01/08/96 E-2.14 1/4" SCALE KITCHEN - ELECT ICAL - 01/08/96 E-3.1 ELECTRICAL RISER DIAG 01/08/96 E-3.1.1 ELECTRICAL PANEL SC EDULES- 01/08/96 E-3,J.2 ELECTRICAL PANEL CHEDULES- 01/08/96 E-3.1.3 ELECTRICALPAN L SCHEDULES - 01/08/96 E-3.2 FIXTURE SCH LIGHTING, E 01/08/96 E-33 ELECTRI AL DETAILS - 01/08/96 E-3,4, I LOCK CONTROL PANEL DETAILS - 01/08/96 E-3,4,2 LOCK CONTROL PANEL DETAILS - 01/08/96 . . ELECTRICAL (CONT.) E-3AJ LOc:K CONTROL PAN 01/08/96 E-3.4,4 LOCK CONTROL P. NEL DETAILS - 01108/96 E-4.1 LIGHTING - P "A" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4.2 LIGHTING - OD "B" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4J LIGHT - POD "C" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08 6 E-4,4 LIG ING - AREA "D" - FIRST FL OR - 01108/96 E-4.5 L HTING - AREA "E" - FIRST LOOR - 01108/96 LIGHTING - POD "A" - SECOND FLOOR - 01108/96 LIGHTING - POD "B" - SECOND FLOOR - 01108/96 LIGHTING - pori"j,c" - SECOND FLOOR - 0 1108/96 LIGHTING - AREA "D" - SECOND FLOOR - 01108/96 LIGHTING - AREA "E" - SECOND FLOOR - 01108/96 REAS "D" & "E" LIGHTING AND ECHANICAL SCHEDULES - 01108/96 K2.1 KITCH 01/08/96 K2.2 ,PRELIMIN Y KITCHEN SCHEDULE - 01108/96 K2J ELECTRICAL ONNECTION PLAN - 01/08/96 K2.4 PLUMBlNGIMEC NICAL CONNECTION PLA - 01/08/96 K2.5 ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBlNG/MECH. SC 01108/96 K2.6 DETAILS AND ELEVATIO S- 01108/96 Page 5 "EXIflBIT A" Au!!usta-Richmond Countv Detention Center Phinizv Road Au!!usta. Geol1!ia r: T ABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLES PAGES . DATE BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: SECTION 00030 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS .,.", 00030-1 to 00030-2' . December 1995 SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS. TO BIDDERS, . . , " 00100-1 to 00100-7 December 1995 SECTION 00101 - SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ....,........, 00101-1 to 00101-2 SECTION 00200 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT (CSRA) , . , . . . . , . . . . . . . .. 00200-1 to 00200-29 SECTION 00300 - BID FORM ....,............... 00300-1 to 00300-2 SECTION 00310 - PARTNERSHIP CERTIFICATE. . . , , . . , , . . . . . , 00310-1 SECTION 00320 - CORPORATE CERTIFICATE ."",..,..,..., 00320-1 SECTION 00321 - INDIVIDUAL, CERTIFICATE , , , , . . . . . , , , . . , , 00321-1 SECTION 00410 -BID BOND (AIA A310) ,.....,..... 00410-1 to 00410-2 SECTION 00420 - CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATION STATEMENT (AlA A305) , ,. , . , . . . . . . . . .. 00420-1 to 00420-7 SECTION 00430 - SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (G805) ..... 00430-1 to 00430-3 SECTION 00480 - NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER 00480-1 SECTION 00481 - NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR ......,."........ 00481-1 :',. I ~ ;~ II. CONTRACT FORMS: , . SECTION 00500 - AGREEMENT (A1OI) . . , . , . , , . , , . . . 00500-1 to 00500-7 SECTION 00520 - CERTIFICATE OF COUNTY AITORNEY . . .'. , . . 00520-1 SECTION 00530 - NOTICE OF AWARD , . . . . . : . . . . .. 00530-1 to 00530-2 SECTION 00540 - NOTICE TO PROCEED ....,....,..,...... 00540-1 SECTION 00610 - PERFORMANCE BOND & PAYMENT BOND (AJI2) .,... 00610-1 to 00610-7 III. CONTRACT CONDITIONS: SECTION 00700 -GENERAL CONDITIONS (AlA A201) 00700-1 to 00700-25 SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS ",.. 00800-1 to 00800-8 SECTION 00840 - ADMINISTRATIVE & PROCEDURAL ITEMS ,...".............. 00840-1 to 00840-5 IV. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: DIVISION 1, ' SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK, . " , . . . . . . , , 01010-1 to 01010-2 SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ...., 01027-1 to 01027-4 SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING. . . . . . . . , . . . . 01050-1 to 01050-3 95-052/12-95 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 Table of Contents " .~ TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES DATE SECTION 01095 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01095-1 to 01095-3 SECTION .01300 - SUBMIITALS ..................., 01300-1 to 01300-8 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL:. . . . . .. . . , . . . 01400-1 to 01400-3 SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION 'FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ..... 01500-1 to 01500-9 SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS' AND EQUIPMENT ..... 01600-1 to 01600-4 SECTION 01631 - SUBSTITUTIONS. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . , 0163 I-I to 01631-3 SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. . . . . . . . . . 01700-1 to 01700-13 SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES ..,..,......."... 01740-1 to 01740-3 DIVISION 2 SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02110-1 to 02110-3 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK. . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02200-1 to 02200-1 I SECTION 02281 - TERMITE CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . , . . 02281-1 to 02281-2 SECTION 02480 - LANDSCAPE WORK. . , , , , . . . . . ., 02480-1 to 02480-10 SECTION 02511 - HOT-MIXED ASPHALTPA VING ..." 02511-1 to 02511-5 SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING ."",., 02520-1 to 02520-13 SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS .........,.... 02665-1 to 02665-21 SECTION 02700 - SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE . . , . . . 02700-1 to 02700-23 SECTION 02711 - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS . 02711-1 to 02711-4 SECTION 02831 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES . . . 02831-1 to 0283 1-6 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03011 - CONCRETE TESTING .....',."... 03011-1 to 03011-3 SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORM WORK .......... 03100-1 to 03100-3 SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT ....,. 03200-1 to 03200-3 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. . . . . . . 03300-1 to 03300-14 SECTION 03345 - CONCRETE FINISHES , . . . . . . . . . . . . 03345-1 to 03345-5 SECTION 03430 - PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE . 03430-1 to 03430-5 SECTION 03450 - ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PLANT CAST . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . 03450-1 to 03450-6 SECTION 03520 - INSULATING CONCRETE DECKS . . . , 03520-1 to 03520-5 DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .04200-1 to 04200-17 DIVISION 5 SE.CTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL. . . . . , , , , . . . , 05120-1 to 05120-5 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS, . . . . , , . . . 05500-1 to 05500-10 SECTION 05810 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES ,..........". 05810-1 to 05810-5 DIVISION 6 95-052112-95 ii December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 . December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 Table of Contents TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES DATE SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY. . . . . . . . . . . , . 06100-1 to 06100~6 December 1995 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK. .. , , . . . , . . . . . , 06402-1 to 06402-8 - . December-1995 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07111 - COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111-1 to 0711 1-6 ." 'SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING ..... 07160-1 to 07160-3 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION ........, 07210-1 to 07210-5 SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS (PB) ....... 07241-1 to 07241-9 SECTION 07242- EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS (PM) .,..,.. ' 07242- I to 07242-9 SECTION 07251 - SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING ...... 07251-1 to 07251-8 SECTION 07270 - FIRESTOPPING . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . 07270-1 to 07270-10 SECTION 07527 - SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING, . . . . . . , . , , , 07527-1 to 07527-9 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-1 to 07620-8 SECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710-1 to 07710-4 SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES ..""....... 07720- I to 07720-5 SECTION 07810 - PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS "".... 07810-1 to 07810-5 SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS. . . . , . . . . . . . ,. 07901-1 to 07901-10 DIVISION 8 SECTION 0811 0 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES .,.., 0811 0-1 to 08 110-6 SECTION 0821 I - FLUSH WOOD DOORS .,....,.." ,08211-1 to 08211-6 SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING' DOORS , . . . . . . 08331-1 to'08331-5 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND- STOREFRONTS ..,.",..... 08410-1 to 08410-8 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE. . . . . , , . . . . . . 08710-1 to 08710-1 I SECTION 08800 - GLAZING .................,. 08800-1 to 08800-10 SECTION 08920 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS ........'.. 08920-1 to 08920-8 DIVISION 9 SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ... 09255-1 to 09255-14 SECTION 09300 - TILE . , . . , . . .. , . . . , . . . . , , , . .'. . . 09300- I to 09300-8 , SECTION 0951 I - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, . . . . 09511-1 to 09511-7 SECTION 09521 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS. . . . . . , 09521-1 to 09521-4 SECTION 09660 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ...,.. 09660- I to 09660-6 SECTION 09678 - RESILIENT WALL BASE & ACCESSORIES .,........", 09678- I to 09678-4 SECTION 09680 - CARPET. . , . , ... . . . . . . . , , . . . . .. 09680-1 to 09680-7 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING ..-".,.."...,..... 09900-1 to 09900-16 SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS .,....,....... 09950-1 to 09950-4 95-052/12-95 111 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 , December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 Table of Contents TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES DATE DIVISION 10 SECTION 10170 - SOLID PHENOLIC PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS. . . .. 10170-1 to 10170-4 SECTION 10350 -FLAGPOLES ,...,...".,.., .'., ., 10350-1 to 10350-3 SECTION 10425 - SIGNS. . . . . . .'. . ,. . . , . . . . . . . . . . , 10425-1 to 10425-6 SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES .. 10522-1 to 10522-4 SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-1 to 10800-6 DIVISION 11 SECTION 11110 - COMMERCIAL LAUNPRY EQUIPMENT 11110-1 to 11110-4 SECTION 11160 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT ....,. 11160-1 to 11160~3 SECTION 11191 - SECURITY HOLLOW METAL .".,. 11 191-1 to 1 I 191-11 SECTION 11192 - SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING, , . . .. 11192-1 to 11192-7 SECTION 11194 - DETENTION EQUIPMENT. , , . . , . ,. 11194-1 to 11194-22 SECTION 11195 - SECURITY ACCESSORIES AND FURNITURE ,.,.,.'".. 11 195-1 to 11195-4 SECTION 11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT ".... 11400-1 to 11400-57 DIVISION 12 SECTION 12690-FLOOR MATS & FRAMES 12690-1 to 12690-3 DIVISION 13 SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122-1 to 13122-7 . December 1995 . December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 DIVISION 14 SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS ......,.. 14240-1 to 142~0-9. December 1995 DIVISION 15 SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQuiREMENTS 15010-1 to 15010-6 SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS .."... 15140-1 to 15140-3 SECTION 15242 - VIBRATION ISOLATION. . . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . , . 15242-1 SECTION 15260 - PIPING INSULATION. . , . . . . . , , .. 15260-1 to 15260-2 SECTION 15290 - DUCTWORK INSULATION. . . . . . . 15290-1 to 15290-2 SECTION 15310 - FIRE PROTECTION PIPING, , . . , . . .. 15310-1 to 15310-3 SECTION 15325 - SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ,',..."..... 15325-1 to 15325-3 SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING PIPING. ..'. . . . , , , . . . 15410-1 to 15410-5 SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES ."..... 15430-1 to 15430-3 SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES ....".... 15440-1 to 15440-8 SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT ....,.... 15450-1 to 15450-2 SECTION 15482 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS . . . , " . . . . .. 15482-1 to 15482-2 SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING, . , . , . , . . . . . . .. 15510-1 to 15510-3 SECTION 15515 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES, , . . . . . . ., 15515-1 to 15515-3 SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS. , , . . . . . , . . . . . . . . .. 15540-1 to 15540-2 95-052/12-95 iv December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 . Table of Contents TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES DATE SECTION 15575 -BREACHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS. . . . , , , . . . . . .. 15575-1 to 15575-2 SECTION 15650 - SECURITY COVER SYSTEM (SHROUD) FOR CONCEALMENT OF FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING , , . . .. 15650-1 to 15650-2 SECTION 15684 - CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS.. 15684-1 to 15684-10 SECTION 15712 - INDUCED DRAFT COOLING TOWER 15712-1 to 15712-4 SECTION 15835 - TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 15835-1 to 15835-2 SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS 15855-1 to 15855-5 SECTION 15870 - POWER VENTILATORS ....,..., 15870-1 to 15870-2 SECTION 15890 - DUCTWORK. . . . . , . . . . . . , , , . . . .. 15890-1 to 15890-2 SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES ........ 15910-1 to 15910-2 SECTION 15936 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS .....,., 15936-1 to 15936-2 SECTION 15975 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS "",... 15975-1 to 15975-19 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING ........, 15990-1 to 15990-3 DIVISION 16 SECTION 16050 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL, , , , . . . . .. 16050-1 to 16050-5 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS. . . . . . . . , , , . . . . . . ., 16110-1 to 16110-7 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS .,.............. 16120-1 to 16120-4 SECTION 16130 - BOXES ....,.......,.....,...,. 16130-1 to 16130-5 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES ........."". 16140-1 to 16140-4 SECTION 16170 - MOTOR & EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 16170-1 SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS :...,.. .., .. 16195-1 _ ,SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE. . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . .. 16420-1 SECTION 16425 - SERVICE -SWITCHES & SWITCHBOARDS ., . . , , . , .. 16425-1 to 16425-5 SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES ..,.,..... 16440-1 to 16440-2 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING ,.......,........., 16450-1 to 16450-4 SECTION 16460 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS ....... 16460-1 to 16460-2 SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS ......"......,.. 16470-1 to 16470-4 SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ...... 16475-1 to 16475-4 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING .,...,.. ... . . . . . . .. .. 16500-1 to 16500-2 SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE/CQMPUTER/CATV RACEWAY SYSTEM .,.."...,....,., 16740-1 SECTION 16744 - SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK. . . , . ; . . . . . , . . .. 16744-1 to 16744-13 SECTION 16745 - NURSE CALL SYSTEM . . . .. . . . . . . , 16745-1 to 16745-4 SECTION 16747 - CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO. SYSTEM . .. 16747-1 to 16747-6 SECTION 16748 - LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . .. 16748-1 to 16748-8 SECTION 16749 - DOOR ANNUNCIATORS AND LOCK CONTROLS, . . . . . . , ,. 16749-1 to 19749-11 SECTION 16760 - EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16760-1 to 16760-11 95-052/12-95 v December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 December 1995 Table of Contents TECHNICAL SPECIFIC A nONS (Continued) _ . SECTION TITLES DATE PAGES SECTION 16915 - LOW VOLTAGE RELAY SYSTEM. . .. 16915-1 to 16915-4 95-052/12-95 VI December 1995 Table of Contents "EXHIBIT B" AUGUST A-RICHMOND COUNTY DETENTION CENTER PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY AUGUSTA. GEORGIA DRA WING INDEX CS COVER SHEET 01/08/96 .. LIFE SAFETY ARCIDTECTURAL ". LS2.0 1 LIFE SAFElY MASTER FLOOR PLAN- ALl PLAZA PLAN - 01108/96 01/08/96 A 1.2 PLAZA DETAILS - 01108/96 LS2.02 RATED WALL DETAILS - 1108/96 A2.1 FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR - LS2,1 LIFE SAFElY FLOOR PLAN - FIRST 01108/96 FLOOR POD A - 01108/96 A2.2 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR - LS2.2 LIFE SAFElY FLOOR PLAN - FIRST 01108/96 FLOOR POD B - 01108/96 A2.3 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - LS2.3 LIFE SAFElY FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FIRST FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 FLOOR POD C - 01108/96 A2.4 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN- LS2.4 LIFE SAFElY FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FIRST FLOOR POD B - 01108/96 FLOOR AREA D - 01108/96 A2.5 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN- LS2.5 LIFE SAFElY FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01108/96 FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 . A2.6 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - LS2.6 LIFE SAFElY FLOOR PLAN- FIRST FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 SECOND FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 A2.7 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - LS2.7 LIFE SAFElY FLOOR PLAN- FIRST FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 SECOND FLOOR POD B - 01108/96 A2.8 pARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - LS2.8 LIFE SAFElY FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR POD A - 01108/96 SECOND FLOOR POD C"- 01/08/96 A2.9 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN- LS2.9 LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR POD B - 01108/96 SECOND FLOOR AREA D - 01108/96 A2,IO PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - LS2,10 LIFE SAFElY FLOOR PLAN ~. SECOND FLOOR POD C - 01108/96 SECOND FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 A2,ll PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 CIVIL A2.12 PARTIAL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 CI SITE STAKING PLAN - 02/16/96 . ' A2.I3 ENLARGED PLANS - 01/08/96 C2 GRADING PLAN - 02/16/96 A2.14 NOT USED C3 EROSION CONTROL PLAN -- 02/16/96 A2.15 NOT USED C4 EROSION CONTROL NOTES AND A2.I6 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN - DETAILS - 02/16/96 FIRST FLOOR POD A - 01108/96 C5 UTILIlY PLAN - 02/16/96 A2.l7 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN - C6 STORM PROFILES - 02/16/96 FIRST FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 C7 SANITARY PROFILES - 02/16/96 A2.18 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN- C8 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS - 02/16/96 FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 C9 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS - 02/16/96 A2.19 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN - CIO LANDSCAPE PLAN - 02/16/96 FIRST FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 Cll IRRIGATION PLAN - 02/16/96 Page 1 ARCHITECTURAL (CONT.) ARCHITECTURAL (CONT.) A2.20 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN- AS.4 ENLARGED ELEVATIONS AND FIRST FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 STOREFRONTS - 01/08/96 A2.21 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN - A6.l BUILDING SECTIONS AREAs A, B, C SECOND FLOOR POD A -01/08/96 - 01/08/96 A2.22 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN - A6.2 BUILDING SECTIONS - 01/08/96 SECOND FLOOR POD B -01/08/96 A6.3 BUILDING SECTIONS - 01/08/96 A2,23 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN- A6.4 . BUILDING SECTIONS - 01/08/96 SECOND FLOOR POD C .. 01/08/96 A6,S SECTIONS & DETAILS - 01/08/96 A2.24 PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN - A6,6 SECTIONS & DETAILS - 01/08/96 SECOND FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 A6,7 SECTIONS & DETAILS - 01/08/96 A2.2S PARTIAL REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN- A6.8 SECTIONS & DETAILS - 01/08/96 SECOND FLOOR AREA E .- 01/08/96 A7.1 ENLARGED STAIR PLANS - 01/08/96 A2.26 PLAN DETAILS - 01/08/96 A7,2 STAIR DETAILS AND SECTIONS - A2,27 PLAN DETAILS - 01/08/96 01/16/96 A2.28 ENLARGED SHOWER PLANS AND A8.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS - 01/08/96 DETAILS - 01/08/96 A2.29 LAUNDRY PLAN AND DETAILS - A8.2 CONTROL ROOM PLANS AND 01/08/96 ELEV A TIONS - 01/08/96 A3.l ROOF PLANS PODS A, B, C - 01/08/96 A8.3 . INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND A3.2 ROOFPLANS AREAS D & E ~ 01/08/96 DETAILS - 01/08/96 A3.3 TYPICAL ROOF DETAILS - 01/08/96 A9,I PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - A4.1 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIRST FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 - FIRST FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 A9.2 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN- A4.2 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIRST FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 - FIRST FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 A9.3 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN- A4.3 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 - FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 A9.4 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN- A4.4 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIRST FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 - FIRST FLOOR AREA D - 01/08/96 A9.5 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN- . A4.S PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIRST FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 - FIRST FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 A9.6 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN- A4.6 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SECOND FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 - SECOND FLOOR POD A - 01/08/96 A9.7 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN- A4,7 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SECOND FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 - SECOND FLOOR POD B - 01/08/96 A9.8 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - A4.8 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SECOND FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 - SECOND FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 A9.9 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - A4,9 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SECOND FLOOR AREA D - 0 I /08/96 - SECOND FLOOR AREA D ~ 01/08/96 A9.10 PARTIAL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - A4.10 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SECOND FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 - SECOND FLOOR AREA E - 01/08/96 AIO.I PARTIAL SECURITY FURNISHINGS A4.lI REFLECTED CEILING PLAN DETAILS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD A - - 01/08/96 01/08/96 . AS.I EXTERIOR' ELEVATIONS, PODS A AIO,2 PARTIAL SECURITY FURNISHINGS AND B - 01/08/96 PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD B - AS,2 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS POD C AND 01/08/96 ' AREA D - 01/08/96 AIO.3 PARTIAL SECURITY FURNISHINGS AS.3 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AREA E - PLAN - FIRST FLOOR POD C - 01/08/96 01/08/96 Page 2 MECHANICAL (CONT.) PLUMBING (CONT.) M2.4 BUILDING D FIRST FLOOR PLAN P2:15 BUILDING A SECOND FLOOR PLAN HVAC - 02/16/96 WATER & GAS PIPE - 01/08/96 M2.5 BUILDING E FIRST FLOOR PLAN P2.I6 BUILDING B SECOND FLOOR PLAN HVAC - 01/08/96 WATER & GAS PIPE - 01108/96 M2.6 BUILDING A SECOND FLOOR PLAN P2.I 7 BUILDING C SECOND FLOOR PLAN HVAC - 01/08/96 WATER & GAS PIPE - 01/08/96 M2.7 BUILDING B SECOND FLOOR PLAN P2.I8 BUILDING E SECOND FLOOR PLAN HVAC - 01108/96 WATER & GAS PIPE - 01/08/96 M2.8 BUILDING C SECOND FLOOR PLAN P9.1 KITCHEN PLUMBING, RISER HVAC - 01/08/96 DIAGRAM - 01/08/96 M2.I0 BUILDING E SECOND FLOOR PLAN HV AC - 01/08/96 FIRE PROTECTION. M9.I HVAC DETAILS - 01108/96 M9.2 HV AC SCHEDULES - 01/08/96 FP2.1 BUILDING A FIRST FLOOR PLAN M9.3 HV AC SCHEDULES - 01108/96 FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 M9.4 HVAC DETAILS - 02/16/96 FP2.2 BUILDING B FIRST FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 PLUMBING FP2.3 BUILDING CFIRST FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 P2.1 BUILDING A FIRST FLOOR PLAN FP2.4 BUILDING D FIRST FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 FIRE PROTECTION - 01108/96 P2.2 BUILDING B FIRST FLOOR PLAN FP2.5 BUILDING E FIRST FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 P2.3 BUILDING C FIRST FLOOR PLAN FP2.6 BUILDING A SECOND FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01108/96 FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 P2.4 BUILDING D FIRST FLOOR PLAN FP2.7 BUILDING B SECOND FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 02/16/96 FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 P2.5 BUILDING E FIRST FLOOR PLAN FP2.8 BUILDING C SECOND FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 P2.6 BUILDING A SECOND FLOOR PLAN FP2.9 BUILDING E SECOND FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01108/96, FIRE PROTECTION - 01/08/96 P2.7 BUILDING B SECOND FLOOR PLAN . PLUMBING - 01/08/96 ELE'CTRICAL P2.8 BUILDING C SECOND FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING - 01/08/96 E-l.l PLAZA PLAN - ELECTRICAL - P2.9 BUILDING E SECOND FLOOR PLAN 01/08/96 PLUMBING - 01/08/96 E-I,2 PLAZA PLAN - ELECTRICAL - P2.I0 BUILDING A FIRST FLOOR PLAN ' 01108/96 WATER & GAS PIPE - 01/08/96 E-2.3.I ELECTRICAL - POD "A" - FIRST P2.11 BUILDING B FIRST FLOOR PLAN FLOOR - 01/08/96 WATER & GAS PIPE - 01108/96 E-2.3,2 SYSTEMS - POD "A" FIRST FLOOR - P2.12 BUILDING C FIRST FLOOR PLAN 01108/96 WATER & GAS PIPE - 01/08/96 E-2.4.1 ELECTRICAL - POD "B" - FIRST P2.13 BUILDING D FIRST FLOOR PLAN FLOOR - 01108/96 WATER & GAS PIPE - 01108/96 E-2.4,2 SYSTEMS - POD "B" - FIRST FLOOR- P2.14 BUILDING E FIRST FLOOR PLAN 01/08/96 WATER & GAS PIPE - 01/08/96 E-2,5,1 ELECTRICAL - POD "C" - FIRST FLOOR - 0 1108/96 E-2.5,2 SYSTEMS - POD "C" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 Page 4 ELECTRICAL (CONT.) E-2.6.1 ELECTRICAL - AREA 'D' FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.6.2 SYSTEMS - AREA "D" - FIRST FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-2.7.1 ELECTRICAL - AREA "E" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.7.2 SYSTEMS - AREA "E" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.8.1 ELECTRICAL - POD "A" SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2,8.2 SYSTEMS - POD "A" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.9.1 ELECTRICAL - POD "B" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 ' E-2.9.2 SYSTEMS - POD "B" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.10.1 ELECTRICAL - POD "C" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.10.2 SYSTEMS - POD "C" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2. I 1,1 ELECTRICAL - AREA "D" - SECOND FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-2.11,2 SYSTEMS - AREA "0" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.12.1 ELECTRICAL - AREA "E" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-2.12.2 SYSTEMS - AREA "E" - SECOND FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-2.13 CENTRAL PLANT - PART PLAN - 01/08/96 E-2.14 1/4" SCALE KITCHEN - ELECTRICAL - 01/08/96 E-3.1 ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM., 01/08/96 E-3.1.1 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES - 01/08/96 . E-3.1.2 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES - 01/08/96 E-3.1.3 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES - 01/08/96 E-3.2 FIXTURE SCHEDULE AND LIGHTING, ELECTRICAL DETAILS - 01/08/96 E-3.3 ELECTRICAL DETAILS - 01/08/96 E-3.4.l LOCK CONTROL-PANEL DETAILS - 01/08/96 E-3.4.2 LOCK CONTROL PANEL DETAILS - 01/08/96 Page 5 ELECTRICAL (CONT.) E-3.4.3 LOCK CONTROL PANEL DETAILS - 01/08/96 E-3.4.4 LOCK CONTROL PANEL DETAILS - 01/08/96 E-4.l LIGHTING - POD "A" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4.2 LIGHTING - POD "B" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4.3 LIGHTING- POD "C" - FIRST FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-4.4 LIGHTING - AREA "0" -,FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4.5 LIGHTING - AREA "E" - FIRST FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4.6 LIGHTING - POD "A" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4.7 LIGHTING - POD "B" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4.8 LIGHTING - POD "C" - SECOND FLOOR - 0 1/08/96 E-4,9 . LIGHTING - AREA "D" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4.10 LIGHTING - AREA "E" - SECOND FLOOR - 01/08/96 E-4.11 AREAS "D" & "E" LIGHTING AND MECHANICAL SCHEDULES - 0 1/08/96 KITCHEN 1<2,1 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT PLAN- 01/08/96 1<2.2 PRELIMINARY KITCHEN SCHEDULE - 01/08/96 1<2.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PLAN - 01/08/96 1<2,4 PLUMBINGIMECHANICAL CONNECTION PLAN - 01/08/96 1<2.5 ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBINGIMECH. SCHEDULES - 01/08/96 1<2.6 DETAILS AND ELEVATIONS. 01/08/96 . Section 00520 CERTIFICATE OF COUNTY AITORNEY I, the undersigned James B. Wall, County Attorney, the duly authorized and acting legal representative of the Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government, Richmond County, Georgia, do hereby certify as , follows: "I have reviewed the bid, payment and perfonnance, labor and material sureties to ascertain that the same are sufficient and solvent to the extent that the same is required by any Georgia statute, and I have reviewed the bonds and powers of attomey offered to ascertain that the same have been taken in the proper fonn and manner. I have ascertained that the surety is authorized to do business'as a surety in the State of Georgia .. or is excused from satisfying this requirement." . Dated at ~l,.C.$;"', Georgia, this II, IJ day Of~, 19~. . 95-052/12-95 CERTIFICATE OF COUNTY AITORNEY 00520-1 , J tl :. ..., i-;P\'~' Section 00530 APPROVE:['~--'-"': MAR 1 9 1996 . NOTICE OF A WARD TO: Beers Construction Company 70 Ellis Street Atlanta. Georgia 30303 (AUGUSTA.RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISS Proiect DescriPtion The site of the proposed work is in Richmond County, Georgia. The project consists of the following: "':.., BASE BID: (As described in Section 00030 Advertisement for Bids) AL TERNA TES:' (As aUlhorizea by-Owner) Contractor agrees to commence work on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" from the Owner of the project. Contractor shall fully complete work within Seven hundred thirty (730) consecutive calendar days upon "Notice to Proceed". . Owner has considered the Bid submitted by you for the above described Work in response to its Advertisement for Bids. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded the Contract for the above desaibed project. You are hereby notified that your Bid has been accepted for the Total Contract Price of Sixteen Million One Hundred Fifty-five Thousand Dollars and no/IOO's ($16,155,000.00), which is based on the sum of the lump sum Base Bid price given as listed in the Bid Proposal Summary (Section 00300). You are required by the Infonnation for Bidders to execute the Agreement and furnish the required Contractor's Perfonnance and Payment Bonds, Certificates of Insurance, Project Schedule, List of Subcontractors and Non-Collusion Affidavits, within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you. If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said Bonds within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice, said Owner will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the Owner's acceptance of your Bid as abandoned and as a forfeiture as may be granted by law. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award to Owner. Dated this 1 q day of M" Y' (' h, I9~. nlCouncil BY: ~1A Y 0 R . 95-052/12-95 NOTICE OF AWARD 00530-1 -' ...1_ .~ ' ... , .. .,~,._~ . .. I. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged by QAJ\ ~\-\\ "^~~~ ~ ~ ~1~S Cor\~~\lct\~ ~ · this the l.b'M day of M~, 199-':l. ~. ~ V>> n. Bee~nstru~~any~ '.' BY: DN\ E\~\' MG:)f\.~ j'{\ ,~~f' t'lU:::'i\~1 END OF SECTION 00530 NOTICE OF A WARD 00530-2 95-052/12-95 . Section 00540 NOTICE TO PROCEED TO: Beers Construction Company 70 Ellis Street. NE Atlanta. GA 30303 Proiect Description The site of the proposed work is in Richmond County, Augusta, Georgia. The project consists of that described in Section 00030 Advertisement for Bids. .. "/h You are hereby notified to commence Work in accordance with the Agreement dated 11ft ,.ller , I99-L, on or before Itf1i I 1--9 . 19~, and you are to complete the Work on or before /Iff/I ').'1 ,,199 9 , /&~ day of +.'/ . 192.k-. Dated this Augusta-Richmond County Consolidated Government OWNER '. ~ Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged by ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF NOTICE Dears (~rucf;p;:) CO/V1llth '1 this the I q-fb day of ~, 19~. Beers Construction Company CONTRACTOR ~~~rr END OF SECTION 00540 . 95-052/12-95 NOTICE TO PROCEED 00540-1 . SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND & PAYMENT BOND AlA Document A312 . . 95-052/12-95 PERFORMANCE BOND & PAYMENT BOND 00610-1 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, '. . BOND NO. 15-04-33 AlA Document A312 Performance Bornd Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable, CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): American Home Assurance Company 70 Pine Street New York, NY 10270 Beers Construction Company 70 Ellis Street Atlanta, GA 30303 OWNER (Name and Address): . Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government 605 City/County Building Augusta, GA 30911 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: Sixteen Million, One Hundred Fifty-five Thousand Dollars ($16,155,000.00) Description (Name and Location): Construction of Detention Center, Richmond County, Augusta, GA BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: Sixteen Million, One Hundred Fifty-five Modificatjons to this Bond: !Xl None Thousand Dollars ($16~155,000.00) o See Page 3 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Corporate Seal) Beers Construction Company Signatu,e, t ~ ~f~ Name and Title: E. H. Hud ins Executive Vice President (Any additional signatures appear on page 3) SUR ETY Company: (Corpor~te Se.all American H:z:surance Co;zty. Signature: /' A,(~A_/?, ~~ Name and Title: Sandra S. Cart~r Attorney-in-F~ct /' , .... (FOR INFORMA TlON ONL Y-Name, Address and Telephone) /; ,. AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or Johnson & Higgins other party): .191 Peachtree Street Precision Planning, Inc., Architect. Suite 3400 400 Pike Boulevard Atlanta, GA 30303 Lawrenceville, GA 30246 ~. AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. . AlA @ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., NW., WASHINGTON. D,C. 20006 THIRD PRINTING' MARCH 1987 A312.1984 1 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, .successors and as~igns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferenc,es as provided in Subparagraph 3,1, 3 If there is no Owner Default, the, Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construc- tion Contract. If the Owner" the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reason- able time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Defaultand formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be de- clared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Sub- paragraph 3.1; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contractin accor- dance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. . 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Para- graph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the5..':lrety's ex- pense take one of the following actions: . 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; 6r 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construc- tion Contract itself, through its agents or through inde- pendent contractors; or . ' 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Con- struction Contract, arrange for a contract to be pre- pared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by' a qualified su rety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in ex-. cess of the Balanceof the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform andcomplete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new'contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation, determine the amount for . wHich it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is deter- mined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Sure- ty is obligated withoutduplication for: 6,1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correc- tion of defective work and completion of the Construc- tion Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and re- sulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual dam- ages caused by delayed performance or non-perfor- mance of the Contractor. 7 The Su rety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are un.related to the Con. struction Contract. and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, includ- ing changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obliga- tions. 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two vears after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever oc- curs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited bv law, the minimum period of limitation avail- AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1934 ED, . AlA ,11 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N,W,. WASHI,'!GTON. D,C. 20006 THIRD PRINTING. MARCH 1987 A312.1984 2 . . . able to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10 Notice to the Surety, the Ownerorthe Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the sig- nature page. 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions con- forming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond 'shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12 DEFINITIONS 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Con- MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOllOWS: tractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, re- duced by all valid and proper payments made, to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Con- tract. '12.2 C6"stfuction Contr~ct: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the sig- nature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contra<;tor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to per- form or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Corporate Seal) SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Signatu re: Name and Title: Address: Signatu re: i'\;rne and Title: Add ress: AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BO"'O . OECE.\\BER 1984 EO, . .0.1.-\ <iJ: THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. ,""W,. WASHI,",GTON, D,C COO06 THIRD PRINTING. MARCH 1987 . A312-1984 3 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS . BOND NO. 15-04-33 AlA Document A372 Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): American Home Assurance Company 70 Pine Street New York, NY 10270 Beers Construction Company ..70 Ellis. Street Atianta, GA 30303 . OWNER (Name and Address): Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government 605 City/County Building Augusta, GA 30911 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: Sixteen Million, One Hundred Fifty-five Thousand Dollars ($16,155,000.00) Description (Name and Location): Construction of Detention Center, Richmond County Augusta, GA BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: Sixteen Million, One Hundred Fifty-five Thousand Modifications to this Bond: ex None Dollars ($16,155,000.00) o See Page 6 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Corporate Seal) Beers Construction Company Signature:. f ?I :/;/uA't----' Name and Title: E. ,H. Hudgins. Executive Vice President (Any additional signatures appear on page 6) . SURETY Company: (Corporate Se~l) American Home Assurance Co~pany- Signature: ~/j{1A tV J;~:ft7AIR;- Name and Title: Sandra S. C}l.rter.~ Attorney-i~Fact ... /. -. '" , . (FOR INFORMA nON ONL Y-Name, Address and Telephone) / , , AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): Precision Planning,. Inc., Architect 400 Pike Boulevard Lawrenceville, GA 30246 Johnson & Higgins 191 Peachtree Street Suite 3400 Atlanta, GA 30303 AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. ; AlA @ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W" WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006 THIRD PRINTING. MARCH 1987 A312-1984 4 e. 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the perfor- mance of the Construction Contract, which is incorpo- rated herein by reference. 2, With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor; 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2 Oefends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any ,person or entity whose claim, demand, Ijen or suit js for the payment for labor, materials or equipment fur- nished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or sujts to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there js no Owner Default. 3 With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes pay- ment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4 The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have gjven notjce to the Surety (at the address descrjbed in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under thjs Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4,2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor; . . .1 Have furnished written notice to the Con- tractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and .2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above no- tice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or ind,irectly; and .3 Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy; or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor, 5 If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is suffi- cient compliance, 6 When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. 6.2 Payor arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credjted for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the perfor- mance of the Constructjon Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Constructjon Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor jn the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations ,of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's prior- ity to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelat- ed to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be -, liable for payment'of any costs or expenses of any Claim- ant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obli- gations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations, 11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent juris- diction in the locatjon jn which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last mate- rials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Con- struction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs, If the provisions of thjs Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page~ . 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions con- forming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein, The intent is that this AlA DOCUMENT A312. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. AlA' THE AMERICAN INSTITun OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE, N\\'. WASHINGTON. D,C 20006 A312-1984 5 ," . Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond, 14 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permita copy to be made, . 15 DEFINITIONS 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equjp- ment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limita- tion in the terms "labor, materjals or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the MODIfiCATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOllOWS: . Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other'items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdjction where the labor, materials or equipment were furn'ished. 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the sig- nature page, includjng all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the oth~r terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINClPf,L Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: .Name and Title: Address: SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Address: AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED, ' AlA @ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N,W" WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006 THIRD PRINTING. MARCH 1987 A312-1984 6 . Anierican Home Assurance Company POWER aIi' ATTORNEY National Union Fire Insunmce Company of Pittsburgh, Pa. Principal Bond Officc 70 Pinc Strcct. NcwYork, N,Y, 10270 No. 07-B-08<JI-l . KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Amcrican Home Assurance Company, a New York corporation, and National Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, Pa., a Pennsylvania corporation, does each hereby appoint ---Edward L, Mitchcll, Sandra J. Mathis, C. A. Drivcr, Sandra S. Carter, Nicole AlIcn, Glcn R. Bailcy, Cathcrinc 1\'I, Lindsay: of Atlanta, Gcorgia--- its true and lawful Attoflley(s)-in-f-"act, with full authority to execute on its behalf bonds, undertakings, recognizances amI other contracts of indemnity and writings obligato/)' in the nature thereof, issued in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company thereby. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, American I-Iome Assurance Company and National Union Fire Insurancc Compan)' of Pittsburgh, Pa, have each executed these presents this 2:lrd day of febnla/)', 19%. 1~- I-Cristian P. Moor, President STATE OF NEW YORK } COUNTY OF NEW YORK }ss. On this 2:lrd day of Februarv, I <J%, before me came the abovc named officer of American Home Assurance Company and National Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, Pa" to mc personally known to be the individual . and officer described herein, and acknowledged that he executed tlie foreg"oing instrument and :lffixed the seals of said corpor:ltions thereto by authority of his office, C/,ROL RAGAS Notary Public. SI<lIO of New York No. 01 RA50520 11 Oualifiod in Kings County; Q q "J- Commission Expires Nov. 13..LLl.. J CERTIFICATE Excerpts o\" Resolutions adopted by the Boards o\" Directors ot" American I"lome Assmance Company and National Union Fire Insurance Company o\" Pillsburgh, Pa. on May I R, 1 ')7(,: "RESOLVED, thallhe Chairman or the Board, the Presilknl, or any Vice Presilknt be, and hereby is, authorized to appoint/\tlomeys-in-Fact to represent aIllI act \"or and on behal\" o\" the Company to execute bonds, undertakings, recognizances <Ind,other contracts of indemnity and writings obligatnry in the nature thereof", and to attach thereto the corpor<lte: se:<I1 ot" the: Comp<lny, in the: tr<lnsaction ot" its surdy busine:ss", "RESOLVED, lhallhe: signatures and attestations of such officers and the seal ot"the Comp<lny may be anixed 10 allY such Power of Attorney or to any certilic<lte relating therdo by f"acsimilc, and <Iny such Power of" I\ttornev or certilicale bearing such t~lcsimilc signatures or 1~lcsimilc seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company when so allixed with respect to any bond, undertaking, recognizance or other contract of indemnity or wriling obligatory ill the Ilalure thereol: "RESOLVED, that any such AtloIlley-in-Fact delivering a secretarial certilication thatlhe foregoing resolutions still he in etTcclmay insert in such certiflcalionthe dale thereof, said dale to be not later thanlhe dale of delivery thereot"by such Attorney-in-Facl." I, Elizabeth M, Tuck, Secretary ot" American Home Assurance: Company and of National Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, Pa, do hereby certil)' thal the I()regoing excerpts of Resolutions adopted by the 1J0ards of Directors of these corporations, and the Powers of I\ttorney issued pursuant thereto, af\.:~"tl~IC-,~I;lI'i.;orrect, and that both the I\esolutiolls and the Powers of 1\ttornev are in fulll()rce and drecl. ',- '- "" :.'> ' , /, IN WITNESS WlIJ~'REOF, I have hcreulll<Lset my hand and artixed the t~lcsimile seal ot"each corporation . / this day of , I') k.0~ Elizabeth M. Tuck, Secretl/)' . . . 95-052/12-95 Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION AlA Document A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700-1 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE o F ARCHITECTS . ,AlA Document A201 General Conditions .of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN A 1TORNEY IS ENCo.URAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFlCA nON 1987 EDITION _ TABLE OF ARTICLES . 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 8. TIME 2. OWNER 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT --11.INSU:f{ANCE AND BONDS 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. UNCOVERING AND'CORRECTION OF WORK 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEI:'ARA TE CONTRACTORS 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT . . This document has been approved irid'enac5iSec1 by the Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1911, 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963. 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, @1987 by The American lnstitUle of 1\rChitecrs, 173; .New York-Avenue, N.W.. Washingwn, D.C., 20006. ReproducCl. 'on of the material herein or substantial qU<;U'.ltion ofirs provisions without wrillen permission of [he AtAviol:lles the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecutions, - . . ' - , AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA<!> . @1987THEAMERIcANINSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W,. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1987 1 00700-2 Acceptance of Nonconforming Wort< ' . . . . . ' ., 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 Acceptance of Work ,...'",..' 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10,1,9.10.3 AccesstoWort<.,......".."..",..."... 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 Accident Prevention. ' . . . . . . . ' . ' . ' . ' , , . . . . . . . . . . ,. 4.2.3. 10 Acts and Omissions ... 3.2,1,3.2.2,3.3.2.3,12.8.3.18,4.2.3,4.3.2. 4.3.9,8.3,1,10.1.4,10.2.;,13.4.2,13.7,14.1 Addenda . . . . ' . ' . . . . ' . . , . . . ' . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . , . .. 1.1.1 , 3.11 Additional Cost, Claims for. . . . . ' . .' 4.3.6,4.3.7,4,3.9,6,1.1, 10.3 Additional Inspections and Testing. ,.,... 4,2.6,9,8.2.12.2.1,13.; Additional Time, Claims for, . ' . . ' . ' . ' , .. 4.3.6,4.3.8.4.3.9,8.3.2 ADMINISTRATIONOFTHECONTRACT ,..,... 3.3.3,4,9.4.9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid ' .,.,.,........,.. 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect. . ' ' , . ' . . . ' . . . . ' , . ' . ' . . . . . . ' . .. 4.2.13,4.5.1 Allowances . , , . ' . . ' , . . . ' , . . . ' . . ' , . ' . . . . . ' . . . , . . . . .' 3.8 All-risk Insurance. . . . . . ' . ' . . ' , ' . . . ' , . . . . . , . . . . ' . .' 11.3.1.1 Applications for Payment " 4.2,5,7.3.7,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3, 9.8.3,9.10,1. 9.10.3, 9.10.4,11.1.3,14.2.4 Approvals. , .. 2.4,3.3.3,3.5.3,10,2,3.12.4 through 3.12.8, 3.18.3, 4.2.7.9,3.2,11.3.1.4, 13.4.2, 13,5 Arbitration. . . ' . . . . ' . . . ' , . . , , . .. 4.1.4,4.3.2.4.3,4,4.4.4.4.5, 8.3.1,10,\.2.11.3.9,11.3.10 Architect , , . ' , , , , . . . ' . . . ' , . . , ' . . . ' . ' , . ' . . , . . . ' . . ' .. 4.1 Architect, Detinition of, . . ' ' , , . . . . " 4.1,1 Architect, Extent of Authoritv, , .' '" 2.4,3.12.6.4,2,4.3.2.4,3,6, 4.4.5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7,2.1,7.3.6,7.4,9,2.9.3.1, 9.-1,9.5,9,6.3,9,8.2,9.8.3,9,10,1,9.10.3,12,1,12.2.1, 13.5.1,13.5.2,14,2.2,14.2.4 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility. 3,3.3,3.12,8, 3.12,11. 4,1.2, 4.2.1, 4,2.2, 4,2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2,7. 4,2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2,13.4.3.2,5.2.1,7.4,9.4,2,9.6.4.9,6.6 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses ' , ',' . ' . . " 2.4,9.8.2, 11.3,1.1,12.2.1,12,2.4,1"3.5,2. 13.5.3,14,2.4 Architect's Administration ofthe Contract. ' , . . . ' , .. 4.2,4.3,6, 4.3.7,4.4,9.4.9,5 Architect's Approvals 2.4,3.;.1,3,10,2.3.12.6,3.12.8,3.18.3,4.2.7 Architect's Authority to Ri:ject Work ,..' 3.5.1.4,2,6,.12,1.2,12.2,1 Architect's Copyright- , . ' . . ' ' , , , . ' . , ' . . ' . . ' . ' . , .' 1.3 Architect's Decisions, ..,..,.,. 4.2.6,4,2.7,4.2.11.4.2.12,4.2.13, 4,3.2.4.3.6,4.4,1,4.4,4.4.;.6.3,7,3,6.7,3.8,8,1.3,8.3.1, 9,2,9,4,9.5.1. 9.8.2, 9.9.1,10,1.2, 13,;.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 Architect's Inspections, . . ' , . . . ' .. 4.2.2,4.2,9.4,3.6,9.4.2,9,8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect's Instructions .' -i.2.6.-i.2,7,4.2.8,4,3.7, :.-t.!, 12.1, 13.5.2 Architect's Interpretations, . ' , . . . . ' , .- 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3,7 Architect's On-Site Observations. . ' , . . .' 4.2.2.4.2.;.4.3.6,9.4.2, 9.;.1,9.10,1,13.; Architect's Project Representative ' . ' . . . . . . , . . . . ' . . ,. 4.2.10 Architect's Relationship with Contractor, . . 1.1.2,3.2.1,3.2,2. 3.3,3.3,;.1. 3.7,3, 3.11, 3.12.8.3.12,11,3,16. :U8, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6,4.2,12, ;.2,6.2.2,7.3.4,9.8.2,11.3.7,12.1. 13.5 Architect's Relationship with SubcontrJccors ' ' ., 1.1,2,4.2.3,4,2.4, 4.2.6, 9,6,3, 9,6.4, 11.3,7 Architect's Representations, ' , ' . . ' , . ' , , ' , , .' 9.4.2.9.;.1. ';),10.1 Architect's Site Visits, 4,2.2.4.2.;,4.2,9.4,3.6.9,4,2.9.5.1. 9,8.2,9.9.2,9.10.1. I).; Ashestos ' , , ' . . ' , . ' . . . ' ' . . ' , ' . , , , " 10,1 Attorneys' Fees.. . .. .. .. .... .. ),18,1. 9,10,2. 10.1.4 A ward of Separate Contracts, , ' ' ' ' , , . . . ' . . . . . ' , , , . " 6.1.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for . ., ~-- :-..... Portions of the Work, ,. ,..',...., . . ' , . ' . .' 5.2 Basic Definitions. ' . . ' , . . ' . ' . . ' . ' . . ' . . ' , . ' . ' , . . . . ' , ,. 1,1 BiddingRequirements..,.,. 1.1.1,1.1.7,;.2,l.l1.4,1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance . ' ' ' , ' . . ' , " 11.3,2 Bonds. Lien ........ .. .. . .. .. , .. ..' 9.10,2 Bonds, Perform:lOce :lOd Payment, ' -;,3.6.4,9.10,3,11.3.9. 11.4 . INDEX BuildingPermit ,..",.".....,.."....,.....,...... 3.7.1 Capitalization. ' . , . . . , ' , . , . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . ' . , . . ' . . . . .. 1.4 Certificate of Substantial Completion, . . ' , . . . . . . . . . . ' , . " 9,8.2 Certificates for Payment. . ' . ' ,. 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3.9.4,9,;,9.6.1. 9.6.6,9,7.1,9.8.3.9.10.1,9.10.3,13.7,14,1.1.3,14.2.4 CenificatesofInspectiOn, Testing or Approval ..... 3.12.11,13.;.4 Cenific:lte5ofInsurance .,...., .........', 9.3.2,9,10.2,11.1.3 Change Orders. . ' . ., 1.1.1,2.4.1, 3,8.2.4, 3.11,4.2.8.4.3.3, 5.2.3, 7.1,7.2,7.3.2,8.3,1,9.3.1.1,9.10,3,11.3.\.2, 11.3.4, 11.3,9, 12.\.2 Change Orders, Definition of . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' , . .' 7,2.1 Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . ' . ' , . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . ' . .. 7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK .... 3.11,4.2,8,7,8,3.1,9.3.1.1,10.1.3 Claim, Definition of . . , . . ' . ' , . . . ' . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' " 4.3.1 Claims and Disputes. . . . ' . . . . ' . . . . .' 4.3,4.4,4.;,6.2.5,8.3.2, 9.3.1.2,9.3.3,9.10.4,10.1.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims ..'"...,....'" 4.5.6 Claims for Additional Cost, :. . ' . .' 4.3,6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6,1.1, 10.3 Claims for Additional Time. . . . . . . . . . ., 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 _ Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. . . . . . . . . ,. 4.3.6 Claims for Damages. . .3,18, 4.3.9, 6. l.l , 6.2.5, 8.3.2,9.;.\.2. 10.1.4 Claims Subject co Arbitration. ' . . . . . . . . ' . . . . ., 4.3,2.4.4,4,4.;,1 Cleaning Up ,.."."..,.,.,...."...,...,',.... 3.15,6.3 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period ' . . . . . . . " 13.7 CommencementoftheWork,ConditionsRe12tingtO,."... 2.1.2. 2.2.1,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.7,5.2.1. 6.2,2, 8.1.2,8.2.2, 9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Commencement of the Work. Definition of ' . . . ' , . . . . . ' , .' 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration ,."...............,..., 3.9.1,4.2.4,5,2.1 Completion, ConditiOns Relating to . . ' . ' .. 3,11,3,15, .U.2, 4.2,9, 4.3.2,9.4,2,9,8.9.9.1,9.10,11.3.5,12.2.2,13.7,1 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND. . ' . . . . . ,. . ' , . . . . ' , . . ' , .. 9 Completion, Substantial, , , ' . . . .' 4.2.9,4.3.5.2.8.1.1.8.1.3,8,2.3. 9.8, 9,9.1, 12.2.2, 13,7 Compliance with Laws., .. .. 1.3,3,6.3,7,3.13,4.1.1.10.2.2,11.1, 11.;,13.1,13,;.1. 13.5.2, 13,6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, , . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . .. 4,3.6 Conditions of the Contract . . . . . ' . ' . . . . . . . . ., 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 6.1.1 Consent, Written....,.,."..,...., 1.3.1,3.12.8,3,14.2.4,\.2, 4.3.4. 4.;.;, 9,3.2. 9,8.2, 9,9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3,10.1.2, 10.1.3, 11.3,1.11.3.1.4,11.3.11,13.2,13.4.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS . . ' . . . . . . . . ' . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.4,6 Construction Change..Directive. Definition of, . . ' . . ' , . . , , .. 7.3.1 Construction Change DIrectives. . .. 1.1.1,4.2.8,7,1,7.3,9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor's. . . . . . . . . . ' . . .. 3.10,6.1.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts ...,.."..."... 5.4 Continuing Contract Performance .,. ' . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Contract, Definition of . . . ' . . . . ' , . . ' . . . ' , . . . ' , . . ' ' , . " 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE' , .. . ....,..,. ,.... 4.3,7.5.4,1.1.14 Contract Administration. ,:. ' . ' . ' . ' , . ' . . . . ' ' " ;.3.3.4.9.4,9.:; Contract Award and Execution. Conditions Relating to ' . ' , ,. ;,7,1. 3.10, ;.2, 9.2,11.1.3,11.;.6.11.4.1 Contract Documents, The. ....,.." ,. ..' , .., .,.. 1.1,1.2.7 Contract Documents. Copies Furnished :1Od Use of. ,. 1.3.2,2.5. ;.; Contract Documents. Definition of ,....' . , . , . . ' , '. 1,1.1 Contract Performance During Arbitration. . ' . ' . . . . ' .. ..,3,4. -i. ;,) Contract Sum, . . . . ' . ' , . , . . ' ' . . ,. ;.8,4.;,6,4.3,;. ..,4,4. ;.2,). 6.1.;,7,2.7.;,9.1,9.7, 11.3.1, 12.2,4. 12.;. 1...2.4 Contract Sum, DetinitiOnof.' , . . , . . ' , . . . . ' , . . . ' . . ' . ' , . .. 9.1 Contract Time ," ' . . . ' . ' . ' ' " ,+.),6. 'd,S. 4.4,... -.2.1.;. -,), 8,2,1. 8,;,1. 1),7. 12,l.l Contract Time. Definition of ' , . . . ' , . ' 8.1.1 ~. . 2 A201.1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE;o.iERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRlCTION . FOL'RTEE:--:TH EDIT!O;\l .-\I.~'. .<9 I \Ill; THE .~MERIcAI' INSTlTt:TE OF ARCHITECTS. I ~); NEW YORK AVE:"U. N.W" W'ASHINGTO:O;. D,C. 20()()(, 00700-3 . CONTRACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3 ContractOr,Deflnitlonof ......................... 3.1,6.1.2 Contnctor's Bid. . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.1 Contractor's Construction Schedules. . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.10,6.1.3 Contnctor's Employees. . . . . .. 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18,4.2.3, 4.2.6,8.1.2,'10.2,10.3,11.1.1,14.2.1.1 COntractor'sUabllltylnsurance....,..........,....... 11.1 Contr:lctor's Re12tionship with Separate Contr:lctors and Owner's Forces. . . . ,. 2.2.6,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,'6, 12.2.5 Contr:lCtor's Re12tionship with Subcontr:lctors . . . . . .. 1.2.4,3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 ContractOr's Re12tionship with the Architect. . .. 1.1.2,3.2.1,3.2.2, 3.3.3,3.5.1,3.7:3,3.11,3.12.83.16,3.18,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6'- 4.2.12,5.2,6.2.2,7.3.4,9.8.2, 11".3.7,12.1, 13.5 ContnctOr's Representations.. 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3 Contnctor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work. . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3, 10 ContractOr's Review ofComnct Documents. . . . .. 1.2.2,3.2,3.7,3 ContnctOr'sRight to StOp the Work ....,...............'.. 9.7 Comnctor's Right toTerminate the COnlnct . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 14.1 Contnctor's Submittals. . . . . .. 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2,7,5.2.1,5.2.3, 7.3.6,9.2,9.3.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9..10.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 Contnctor'sSuperimendent ...,.................. 3.9,10.2.6 Contr:lctor's Supervision and Construction Procedures. . . . .. 1.2.4, . . . 3.3,3.4,4.2.3,8.2.2,8.2.3, 10 .0ntr:lctUal Lial?ility Insurance. . ' . , . . . ' . . . .' . . .. 11.1.1.7, ..11.2.1 oordination and Correlation . . ' , , . . . . . . . . .. 1.2.2, 1.2.4,3.3.1, 3.10,3.12.7,6.1.3,6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Dr:lwings and Specifications. .. .1.3,2.2.5,3.11 Correction of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " 2.3,2.4,4.2.1,9.8.2, , 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, l3.7.l.3" Cost, Definition of . . . . . , . , . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.3.6, 14.3.5 Costs..,. 2.4,3.2.1,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.8.1,5.2.3, 6.1.1,6.2.3,6.3,7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7,3.7,9.7,9.8.2, 9.10.2, 11.3:1.2, 11.3.1.3,11.3.4, 11.3.9,12.1,12.2.1,12.2.4,12.2.5,13.5,14, Cutting and Patching. ' . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.14,6.2.6 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contr:lctors 3.14.2, 6.2.4; 9.5.1.5,10.2.1.2,10.2.5,10.3,11.1,11.3,12.2.5 Damage to the Work ..,.' 3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2,10.2,5,10,3,11.3 Damages, Claims for. .3.18,4.3.9,6.1.1,6..2.5,8.3.2,9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Damages for De12y . ...., ... ,... ........ 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of. . . . . . . .. 8.1.2 Date ofSubstaruial Completion, Definition of. . . . . .'. . . . . . .: 8.1.3 D2y, Definition of. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.. .8.1:4 Decisions of the Architect. . . . .. 4.2.6,4,2.7,4.2.11,4:2,12,4.2.13, 4.3.2,4.3.6,4.4.1,4.4:4,4.;,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9,1, 10.1.2,.13.5.2, 14,2,2, 14.2.4 Decisions to Withhold Certification ..,....... 9.5, 9.7, 14.1. 1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, . Rejection and Correction of .,.......... 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.1, 4.2.6,4.3.5,9.;..2,9.8.2,9.9.1: 10.2.5: 12, 13.7,1.3 DefectiveWork,Definitionof ..................,."...3.5,1, Definitions....., 1.1,2.1.1,3.1".5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, 4.3.1, ;.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1. 7.3.1. 7.,.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9,8.1 Delays and Extensions ot Time. . . ' . . . . .. 4.3.1,4.3.8.1,4.3.8.2, 6.1.1. 6.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.4, 7.3.5,7,3.8, 7.3.9. 8.1.1, 8.3, 10:,. i :'14.'f.Pt" ' Disputes. . . . . . . . . . .. 4.1.4.4.3.4.4,4.;,6.2.;,6.3,7,3.8,9.3.1.2 .DocumentS and Samples atthe Site ....'",..,..........' 3.11 r:lwings, Definition of ' . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . ' . ' . . . . .' 1.1.5 Dr:lwings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of. . ' .. 1.1,1. 1.3, 2.2.;, 3.11, 5.3, DulY to Review COnlr:lct Documents and Field Conditions. ' . .. 3,2 Effective D:lte ofjnsurance . . , , , , . . . . . . , , . , . ' . . ,. 8.2'.2, 11.1.2 Emergencie!f . .. ' ., . .' ,. .... . . . . '.. . ... . ... . .'. 4.3.7,10.3 Employees, Contr:lctor's ....... . .. 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.1, 3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and. . . . . . . ... 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1, 3.8.2,3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11,3.13,3.15.1,4.2.7, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.4, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work .......,1.1.3,1.2.3,3.2,3.4.1, 3.;,1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.8, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.9,8.2,8.3,9,5,9.9.1, 10.2, 14.2, 14.3 execution, Correlation and Intent ,of the COnlr:lct Documents. . . . . . . . . . ... . .. .. . . . . . . . .. 1.2,3.7.1 Extensions of Time. ............ 4.3.1,4.3.8,7.2.1.3,8.3,10.3.1 Failure of Payment byContr:lctor .............. 9.5.1.3,14.2.1.2 Failure of Payment by Owner ..,..:.......... .4.3:7,9.7,14.1.3 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment ........ 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2, 4.3.5, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3:5, 12.3.1. 13.7 Financial Arrangements, Owner's. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .' 2.2.1 -Fire and Extended Cover:lgelnsurance . . . . . .'.. . . . . . . ' . ' , ,. 11.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS. ' . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1 GovemlngLaw ...................,.............'., 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties) Hazardous Materials ,........... . ............... 10.1,10.2.4 Identification of COnlnct Documents ..,...,.........,.. 1.2.1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers. . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.2.1 Indemnification. . ' . . .. 3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.1.4, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7 Information and Services Required of the Owner. . . .. 2.1.2,2.2, . 4.3.4,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.6,9,3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9,8.3,9.9.2, 9.10.3,10.1.4,11.2,11.3,13,;.1,13.5.2 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. . . . ' . . . . '. . . . . .. 4.3.9 Inspections..,............,..,...... 3.3.3,3.3.4,3.7.1;4.2.2, 4.2.6,4.2.9,4.3.6.9.4.2,9.8.2,9.9.2,9.10,1, 13.5 Instructions to Bidders. . . . . . . . . . . ' , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contr:lctor. . .. 3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7,12.1,13.5.2 lnsunnce . . . . . " 4.3.9.6.1.1, 7.3.6.4,9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2, 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery '................... 11.3.2 Insurance,Ccmtractor'sLlabillty ........ .......,.,.,... 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of .'. . . . . . . . .. .. . . . : . .. 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' , . , , . . . . . , ,. 11.3.3 Insurance, Owner's Liability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . .. 11.2 Insurance, Property....,.................,.... 10.2.;,11.3 Insurance, Scored Materials .... ... .. .. . . . .. . . .. 9.3.2,11.3.1.4 INSURANCE AND BONDS . . . . . ' , . . . . . . . . . ' , ,. . . ' , . . . .. 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy, .9.9,1, I I .3.11 Insurance Companies, Settlement with. . . . ' . . . . . ' . .: . .. 11.3.10 .Intent of the Contr:lCt Documents. . .. . . ' . : . . . .. ,. 1.2.3,3.12.4, " 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12.4.2.13,7.4 Interest............................... .0............ 13.6 Interpretation........ 1.2.5,1.4,1.5,4.1.1.4.3,1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 interpret2tions, Written ,................. 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.,.7 ]oinderand Consolidation of~laims Required, . . . . . . . . . . ., 4.5.6 Judgment on Final Award ...,.,.......... 4.5.1,4.5.4.1,4.5.7 Labor and Materials, Equipment. . .. 1.1.3, 1.1.6.3.4, 3. ;.1,3.8.2, 3.12.2. ,.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, .3.15.1, 4.2.7,6.2.1,7.3.6,9,3.2.9.3.3. 12.2.4, 14 Labor Disputes. . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .' 8.,.1 Laws and Regulations .....,. 1.3,3.6, ,.7, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.5.;, 4';,7, 9.9.1,10.2.2,11.1,11.3,13.1,13.4,13.;.1,13.5.2,13.6 Liens. . . . . . , . . . . . . . ' , , : ,,(1.2,4.3.2,4.3.5.1. 8.2.2, 9.3.3, 9,10.2 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder ..'.,....,...'.. 4.5.5 Limitations,Statutesof .."..',.........'. 4.5.4.2,12.2.6,13.:- Limitations of Authority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . ' , ., 3.3.1,4.1.2.4,2.1, 4.2.3.4.2.7.4.2.10, 5.2.2. 5.2.4, 7.4, 11.3.10 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA~ . @ 1987 THE AMERlc."N INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W" WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006 A201-1987 3 00700-4 LimitationsofLiability ... .' 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3,12.8,3,12.11, 3.17,3.18,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9,4.2,9.6.4,9.10.4, 10.1.4,10.2.5,11.1.2,11.2.1,11.3.7,13.4.2,13.5.2 Limitations of Time, General ...',...... 2.2.1,2.2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3, 3.8.2,3.10,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.3.2, 4.3.3,4.3.4,4.3.6,4.3.9,4.5.4.2,5.2.1,5.2.3,6.2.4, 7,3.4, 7,4, 8.2,9,5,9.6.2,9.8,9.9,9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.5, 11.3,6, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.5, 13,7 Limitations of Time, Specific ..,...... 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.11, 3,15.1,4.2.1,4.2.11,4,3,4.4,4.5,5.3,5.4,7.3.5, 7.3.9,8.2, 9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.8,2,9,10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 11.3.11, 12,2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Loss of Use Insurance. . . ' . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .' 11.3.3 Material Suppliers ....,..'...'.' 1.3.1,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1, 9,3.1,9.3.1.2,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.6.5,9.10.4 Materials, Hazardous.. .. ., .,.. ' , . ,. . .. "..,. . .. 10.1,10.2.4 Materials, Labor, Equipment and ..... 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2, 3.12.2,3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11,3.13,3.15.1,4.2.7,6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 Me:ms, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction ' , , , . . ' ... 3.3.1,4.2.3,4.2.7,9.4.2 MlnorChangesintheWork......".. 1.1.1,4.2.8,4.3.7,7.1,7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS . . ' . ' . . . . ' . . . ' , , . . . . . . ., 13 Modifications, Defmition of . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . .. 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract ,.,........ 1.1.1,1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11, 4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8,3.1,9.7 Mutual Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . ' . . . . ' . . . ' . . . . . .. 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of . . . ' . , .. 2.3.1, 4.3.5,9,5,2, 9.8.2, 12, 13,7.1.3 NOtice, . . . . ' , . ' . . .. 2.3,2.4,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.7.3,3.7.4,3.9,3.12.8, 3.12.9,3.17,4.3,4.4.4,4.5,5.2.1,5.3,5.4.1.1,8.2.2,9.4.1, 9.5.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.10,10.1.2,10.2.6,11.1.3,11.3,12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3,13.5.1,13.5.2, 14 Notice, Written ...,......,.... 2,3,2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9,4.3, 4.4.4,4.5,5,2.1,5.3,5.4.1.1,8.2.2,9.4.1,9.5.1,9.7,9.10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3. 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.2, 14 Notice of Testing and Inspections .,......,....... 13.5.1,13,5.2 NOtice to Proceed, , . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.2.2 Notices, Permits, Fees and ,.,... 2.2.3,3.7,3.13.7.3,6.4,10.2.2 Observations, Architect's On-Site ...,....,........ 4.2.2,4.2.5, 4.3.6,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Observations, Contractor's. . ' . ' . . . . . . ' . . . . . . ' . . .. 1.2.2,3.2.2 Occup:mcy....,.........,.......... 9.6.6,9.8.1,9.9,11.3.11 On-Site Inspections by the Architect .........' 4.2.2,4,2.9,4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9,8.2, 9.9.2. 9.10.1 On-Site Observations by the Architect. ' . , . . . ., 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.3.6, 9.4.2,9,5.1,9.10.1,13,5 Orders, Written..,.. . ' . ' ..' 2,3,3.9,4.3.7,7,8.2.2,11.3.9,12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 OWNER. . . . . . ' . . ~. . ' . . . . ' . . ' , , . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . .. 2 Owner, Definition of . . . . . . ' . . : . . . . . . ., . . . . . ' . . . ' . . . .. 2.1 Owner, Information and Services Required of the. . ' . . ' .. 2.1.2, 2.2,4.3.4,6,9,10.1.4, 11.2,11.3,13.5.1,14.1.1.5,14.1.3 Owner'sAuthoritv .....',.. 3.8.1,4.1.3,4.2.9,5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1. 7.3,1,8,2'.2,9,3.1,9.3.2,11.4.1,12.2.4, 13,5.2, 14.2,14,3.1 Owner's Financial Capability. ' . ' , . ' ' , , . . . . ' . ' .. 2.2:1': Pt7l:T:5 Owner's Uablllty Insurance . . ' . . . . . . . . . , . ' . . . . . . . . . .. 11.2 Owner's Loss of Use Insurance. . . . ' . . . , , . . . . . ' . . . . . . .. 11.3.3 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors. . . . . . ' , ' . ' . ' '. 1.1.2, 5,2.1,5.4.1,9.6.4 Owner's Right to Carry OuttheWork ,."..,. 2.4,12.2.4,14.2.2,2 Owner's Right to Clean Up . . ' . . . . ' . . . ' , , . ' . . . ' . . . ' , , .. 6.3 - '. Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts . ' . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' .. 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . ., 2.3, 4.3.7 Owner's Rightto Suspend the Work. . . . ' . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . .. 14.3 Owner's RighttO Terminate the Contract. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 14.2 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, SpeclfIcatlons and Other Documents '....,.......... 1.1.1,1.3,2.2.5,5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use . . . . ' , . , . . . . . . . .. 9.6.6,9.9, 11.3.11 Patching, Cutting and. . ' , . . . . . . . ' . . ' . . . . . , . . . .. 3.14,6.2.6 Patents, Royalties and . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . ' . . . . , . . . . . . . . .. 3.17 Payment, Applications for. . . . ' . . . . . ' , . . ., 4.2.5,9.2,9.3,9.4, 9.5.1,9,8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4,14.2.4 Payment, Certificates for. . . . . . . . . ,. 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3.9.4,9.5, 9.6.1,9.6,6,9.7.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment,Failureof.,."..........,.....,.... 4.3.7,9.5.1.3, 9.7,9.10.2,14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2 Payment, Final. . .. , . . ' ,. .. 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,4.3.5,9.10,11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.5, 12.3.1 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and . . . . . . . . ' , . . .. 7,3.6.4, 9.10.3,11.3.9,11.4 Payments, Progress ... . . , , . . . ' , . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.4,9.3,9.6, 9.8.3,9.10.3,13.6,14.2,3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, . . ' , . , . . . ' , , , . . . ' . , .. 9, 14 PaymentS to SubcontractOrs, , , , . ' . . ' , , . . ' . . ' . " 5.4.2,9.5,1.3, 9.6.2,9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 PCB. . . . . . . . ' . . . . ' , . . . . . . . ' . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond. . . . ' , , . . . . . , . ' .' 7.3.6.4, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Permits, Fees and Notices .' . .... 2.2.3,3.7,3.13,7.3,6.4,10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF . . . . ' . , . . ' " 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl. . . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . ' . . . ' . . . .' 10.1 Product Data, Defmition of. ' . . . . ' , , . ' , , . . . . . . . ' . , . . ,. 3.12.2 ProductDataandSamples,ShopDrawings.... 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Progress and Completion , . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . .. 4.2.2,4.3.4,8.2 Progress Payments ."...,....",...,........., 4.3.4,9,;, 9.6, 9.8.3, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Project, Definition of the. . . , . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . ' . . . .. 1.1.4 Project Manual, Definition of the ,............,........ 1.1.7 Project Manuals ..',...',..... . ' , . . . ' . , . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.2.5 Project Representatives .,."...,........,....,...... 4.2.10 Property Insurance, ' , , . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . ' , . . . . .. 10.2.5,11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. . . ' . . . . ' . . .' 10 Regui:ltionsandLaws..".....", 1.3,3.6,3.7,3.13,4.1.1,4.5,5, 4.5.7,10.2.2,11.1,11.3,13,1,13.4,13.5.1, 13.5.2,13.6,14 Rejection of Work .....' , . . ' . . ' ".. ' ,. .. ' .. 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.2 Releases of Waivers and Liens, , . . . ' , . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . .' 9.10.2 Representations......,... . .... ..'.,.'.,. 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7, 6.2.2,8,2.1,9,3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1,9,8.2,9.10.1 Representatives.. ..,. .,. . ~, , .. ....... ." .., 2,1.1,3.1.1,3.9, 4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2,13.2.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.4,4.5 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work. . . . . . . ' . . ., 3.3.2. - 4.2.3,6.1.3, 6.2, 10 Retainage . ' . . .... .., .. ' .9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.; Review of Contract Documents and FIeld Conditions by Contractor. . . , . . . . . ' ., 1.2.2,3.2, ;.7.3, 3,12.7 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect .,........... 3,10.1,3.10,2,3.11. 3.12, 4.2.7, 4,2.9, 5.2.1, 5,2,3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product O2ta andSamplesbyContractor,.."....,.....,.,....,.. 3.12,5 RIghts and Remedies . . . .,< . . . . ,. 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2, 4.2.6,4.3.6,4.5,5.3,6.1,6.3.7,3.1,8,3.1,9,5.1, 9,7,10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.4, 14 Royalties and Patents . ' . . . . . . . . . . ' . ' . . ' . . ' . . . ' . . ' , .. 3.17 . . 4 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA $ . @ 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 00700-5 . Rules and Notices for Arbitration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.5.2 Safety of Persons and Property '..".................. 10.2 Safety Precautions and Programs ........... 4.2.3, 4.2.7, 10.1 Samples, Definition of . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and '" 3 .11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples attheSlte, Documents and. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ., 3.11 Schedule of Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . ' . . . . . . . . . " 9.2,9.3.1 Schedules, Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Separ:lle COntl":lcts md Contractors. . . . . . . . .. 1.1.4,3.14.2,4.2.4, 4.55,6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 Shop Drawings, Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. . .. 3.11,3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . .. 3.13, 6. 1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections. . .1.2.2,3.3.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.6,9,8.2,9.10.1, 13.5 Site Visits, Architect's. . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . " 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.6, 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 Special /nspectionsmdTesting .............. 4.2.6,12.2.1,13.5 Specifications, Definition of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. '. " 1.1.6 Specifications, The,. .. ... .... 1.1.1,1.1.6,1.1.7,1.2.4.1.3,3./ I Statutes of Limitations ....,:.............. 4.5.4.2,12.2.6,13.7 Stopping the Work, . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.3,4.3.7,9.7,10.1.2,10.3; 14.1 StOred Materials. . . . . . . . . .' 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3.1.4, 12.2.4 Subcontl":lctor, Definition of. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . ' .. . . . . . .. 5 Subcontr:lctOrs, .Work by . . . . . . , . . . , . . . . . . .1.2.4,33:2,3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.3, 5.4 . Subcontractual Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.3, 5.4,9.3.1,2,9.6.2, 9.6.3,9.6.4, 10.2.1, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.2, 14.3.2 Submittals.. . . . .... 1.3,3.2.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9,2, 9.3./, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.1.3 Subrogation, Waivers of. ...............' 6.1:1,11.3;5,11.3.7 SubstantlaICOmpletlon............. 4.2.9,4.3.5.2,8.1.1,8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.7 Substantial Completion, Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.8.1 Substitution ofSubcontl":lctors ' . . . . . . . . ' . . .: . . . . " 5.2.3,5.2.4 Substitution of the Architect. . . , . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.1.3 Substitutions of Materials . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.5.1 Sub-subcontl":lctOr, Definition of . . . ',' . . . .- . . . . , . . , . . . . " 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions. , . . . , , ' . . .- . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . , . . 'c' 4.3.6 Successors and Assigns ....,.".,,'.'.. ...."....... 13.2 Superintendent. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . , . . . . . . .3.9; 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures . . . . " 1.2.4,3.3,3.4, 4.2.3,4.3.4,6.1.3,6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.4,8.2,8.3.1,10, 12, 14 Surety... .. . ' .. .,. ... 4.4.1,4.4.4,5.4.1.2,9.10.2,,9.10.3,-14.2.2 Surety, Consent of... .. . . . .., . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Surveys. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .- . . .. 2.2.2.3.18.3 . F:~ " Suspension by the Owner for Convenience ............. 14.3 Suspension of the Work .".,"..,... 4.3.7,5.4.2, 14,1.1.4, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract ...... 4.3.7,5.4.1.1,14 Taxes ................".................... 3.6, 7.3.6.4 Termination by the Contractor. . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . " 14.1 TenninatlonbytheOwnerforCause............. 5.4.1.1,14.2 Termination of the Architect .......................... 4.1.3 Termination of the Contl":lctor ........................ 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT ...... 14 Tests and Inspections ..... 3.3.3,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2, 12.2.1,13.5 TIME....,.,........."............................. 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.8,7.2.1,8.3 Time Limits, Specific ......... 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.11,3.15,1, 4.2.1,4.2.11,4.3,4.4,4.5,5.3,5.4,7.3.5,7.3.9,8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 11.3.11, 12.2.2,12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Time Limits on Claims. . . . . . . '. 4.3.2,4.3.3, 4.3.6,4.3.9,4.4,4.5 Title to Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . " 9.3.2,9.3.3 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK ............. 12 Uncovering of Wort< ..................,............. 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions ........,.:.......... 4.3.6,8.3,1,10.1 Unit Prices. . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . .. 7.1.4,7.3.3.2 Use of Documents ' . . . . . . . , . . . . , . .. 1.1.1,1.3,2.2.5,3.12.7,5.3 Use of Site . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . ' . . . . , . . . . . " .. 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of ............................ 9.2,9.3.1 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment.. .. . ...... 4.3.5,4.5.1,9.10.3 Waiver of Claims by the Architecl. ....'...........,'... 13.4.2 Waiver of Claims by theContl":lctor. ........ 9.10.4,11.3.7,13.4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Owner .........:,... 4.3.5,4.5.1,9.9.3, 9.10.3, 11.3.3, 11.3,5, 11.3.7, 13.4.2 Waiver of lienS. .........'......... ..'... -.......... 9.10.2 W2iversofSubrog:lIion....,............... 6.1.1,11.3.5,11.3.7 Warranty md Warranties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .. 3.5,4.2.9, 4.3.5.3,9.3.3,9.8.2,9.9.1, 12.2.2, 13.7.1.3 Weather Delays. . . . . . . . -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. . . .'. . .. 4.3.8.2 When Arbitration May Be Demanded ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 4.5.4 Work, Definition of . ' . . . . . , . . . . " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.3 Written Consent. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.3.1,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4, 4.5.5,9:3,2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,10.1.2,10.1.3, 11.3,1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11,13.2, 13.4.2 Written Interpretations .....,....,.:...... 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.7 Written Notice. . . . . . . . . .. 2.3,2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9,4.3,4.4.4, 4.5,5.2.1,5.3,5.4.1.1,8.2.2,9.4.1,9.5.1;9.7,9.10,10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 13.5.2, 14 . Written Orders . . , . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . , '. .. . . . . . . . .. 2.3,3'.9,4.3.7, 7,8.2.2, (1.3.9,12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF.THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITiON AlA'" . @19!l7THEAMERICANINSTITUTEOFARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON. D,C. 20006 A201-1987 5 00700-6 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The ContI-act Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and ContractOr (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, SpecifiCltions, addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modifi- cation is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the. Contract Documents do not include other documents such :J.S bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the ContractOr's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Con- tract may be amended or modified only by a ModifiCltion. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contrac- tual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Con- tractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub- subcontractOr or (3) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and ContractOr. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the ContractOr's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work per- formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings :ue the graphic and pictorial portions of the Con- tract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design. 10c:1tion and dimensions o(theWoik~ genera.lly including plans, elevations, sections, details. sched- ules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portiOn of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials. equip- ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and SpecifiCltions. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and ContractOr as provided in the. Agreement. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu- ments upon request. 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- sentation that the Contractor has visited the site, become famil- iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per- formed and correlated personal observations with require- - ments of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor, The Contract Documents are comple- mentary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the ContractOr shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu- ments and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. 1.2.4 Organization of the SpecifiCltiOns intO divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction indus- try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- ance with such recognized meanings. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 The Drawings, -SpecifiCltions and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Con- tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractOr or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, SpecifiCltions and other documents prepared by: the Architect, and unless otherwise indiClted the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights. in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the ContractOr's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, SpecificatiOns and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac- tOr, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the ContractOr or any Subcontractor. Sub- subcontractOr or material or equipment supplier on other proj- ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the 6 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRCCTION . FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA$ . @ 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTlTCTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1 "35 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W" WASHINGTON. D,C. 20006 00700-7 ~,*"". ."".: ~-.::. ~'. ....~ . . Work without the specific written consent of the 'Owner and Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors .d material or equipment suppliers are granted allinited cense to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw- ings, Specifications and other doCuments prepared by the , Architect appropriate to and for use in.the execution of their Work under the Contract DocuIilents. All copies made under' this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documentS prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet. official regulatOry requiremen~ or for other purposes in con- nection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved rights. 1.4 CAPITAUZATlON 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions in,c1ude those which are (I) specifically.defmed, (2) the titles of num- bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subpara- graphs and Clatises in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.5 INTERPRETATION 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity' the Contract Documents fre. quently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and ,ani- c1es such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or :in article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. ARTICLE 2 OWNER ..1 DEANITION . 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authoriZed representative. 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable' written request shall furnish to the Contractor in writing information which is necessary. and relevant for the ContractOr to evaluate, give: notice of 'or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the' property on which the Project is loc:lted, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution' of the Agreement and, within five days after any change, information of such change in title,- recorded or unrecor~ed. 2.2 'INFORMA TION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the O~ner' s . obligations under the Contract. [Note: Unless sucb reasonable" ez:idence were Jimlisbed on request prior to tbe e.wcution of _ tbe Agreem(>1lt. tbe prospectil'e contractor would not be required to execute tbe Agreement or to commence tbe Work.} 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surVeys describing physical charJcteristics. legal limitations and utility locations for the site .r the Project, and a legal description of the site. . .2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure :md p:J~'Jor necess:Jf)' approvals, easements, assess- ments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent st~ctures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. . 2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptnt:ss to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. 2.2.5 Unless Otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free 'of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. . 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon- sibilities of the Owner .enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate COntraCtors), Article 9 (Payments and Completion) and Article II (Insurance and Bonds). 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accorclai1ce with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph J2.20r persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, t~e Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contrac. -tor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the W ork.sha!I not give rise. to a duty on the part of the'Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- tractor or. any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the ContractOr defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in' accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, . the Owner may after such seven-d:1y period give the ContractOr a second written notice to cortect such deficiencies within a second seven-d:1y period. If the Contractor within such second seven- day period after receipt of such second notice fails to com- mence :l1)d continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change,Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the ContractOr'the cost of correcting such defi- dencies. including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure:.Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the ContrJctor are bOth subject to prior approval of the Archi- tect. If payments then or there-Jfter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the ContrJctor shall pav the difference to the Owner. \ . , i ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR . 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified :IS such in the Agreement and is' reterred to throughout the Contract Documents :IS if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contr:Jctor or the Contractor's authorized representative. AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION, AlA'" . @19H7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W.. WASHINGTON, D,C. 20m6 A201-1987 7 00100-8 ,--- 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDmONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents wim each orner and with information furnished by me Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsis- tencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor'recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to me Architect. If me Con. tractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents wimout such notice to me Architect, ttie Contrac- tor shall assume appropriate responsi~ility for such perfor- mance and shall bear an appropriate amount of me attributable costs for correction. 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditiOns and shall carefully com~e such field mea- surements and conditions and orner information known to me Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to me Architect at once. 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform me Work in accordance wim me,.Contract Documents and submittals approved pur- suant to Paragraph 3.12. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct me Work, using me Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construc- tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Con- tract, unless Contract Documents give orner specific instruc- tions concerning mese matters. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of me Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and meir agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of me Work under a contract with me Contractor.. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to per- form the Work in accordance wim me Contract Documents eimer by activities or duties of me Architect in me Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons orner than me, ContractOr. 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of por- tions of Work alre:ldy performed under mis Contract to deter- mine that such portions are in proper condition to receive sub- sequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless ome~ise provided in me Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equip- ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of me Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorpo- r:lted or to be incorporated in the Work. . ." ., .~-, .~...... 3.4.2 The ContractOr shall enforce strict discipline and good order among me Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out me Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to me Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under me Contract will be of good quality and new unless omerwise required or permit- ted by me Contract Documents, mat me Work will be free from defectS not inherent in me quality required or permitted, and that me Work will conform wim me requirements of me Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these require- ments, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by me Contractor, improper or ~ufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to me kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for me Work or portiOns mer~of provided by the Con- tractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go intO effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in me Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or nego- tiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply wim and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of me Work. 3.7.3 It is not the ContractOr's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance wim applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regu1a- tions. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance merewith, me Contractor shall promptly notify me Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If me Contractor performs Work knowing it to be con- trary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations wimout such notice to me Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear me attributable costs. ~ ;'. 3.8 ALLOWANCES' 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the ,Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such - persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in me Contract Documents: .1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in me Work; / .2 allowances shan cover the cost to the Contractor 'of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; . 8 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRt.:CTION . FOURTEE1'ITHEDI110N AlA'" . @1987THEAMERICANINSTITUTEOFARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 00700-9 . .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor; installation costs, overhead, profit 'and other "expenSes contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowances; .4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly" by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual COSts and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.2 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.3. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance ~t the Project site during perforinarice of the Work. The superinten- dent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to theCbn- tractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writ- ing. Other, communications shall be similarly confirmed-'on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Con- tract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practi- cabLe execution of the Work. -.10.2 The ContractOr shall prepare wd keep current, for the ~chitect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordi~ nated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The ContractOr. shall conform to the most, recent schedules: 3.11 DOCUMENTS ~ND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall m;tintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made duririg construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- uct Data, SampLes and similar required submittals. These' shall ' be availabLe to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Archi- tect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the WOlk 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and - Other data specially prepared for the Workby the Contractor o'i " a SubcontractOr, Sub-subcontractOr, manufacturer, supplier or ." distributor to illustrate' some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data- are illustrations, standard schedules; per- formance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished. by the ContractOr to" illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. .:_'-.""',~~."'''',' 3.12.3 SampLes are physical examples which" illustrate"" materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards .v which the Work will be judged. .12-.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and simUar sub- mittals are not Contr.lct Documents. The purpose of their sub- mittal is [() demonstrate for those portions of the Work tor which submittals are,r~quired th,e way the Contractor proposes to conform to the ..i}1formation given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review; approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product mta, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason- able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- tractors. Submittals made by the ContractOr which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned wirpout actioo. 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submitU! and review of Shop Drawings, i>roduct Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit- tal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 3.12.7 By approving andsubmitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,Jield measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product mta, Samples' or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall nOt be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw- ings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- tect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product mta, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. 3.12.10 Inforrriational submittals upon which the Architect is nOt expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract DocumentS. 3.12.11Wl1en professional'cenification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy' and completeness' of such calcUlations and cenifi- cations. 3.13 : USE OF SITE 3;13.1 The ContractOr sh;Ul confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, oroinances, permits and the Contract , Qocuments and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. \ . 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING . .3',14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting , . or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts , ~t together properly. 3.14.2 The Co~tractor shall nOt damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractOrs by cutting, patching or other- wise altering such construCtion, or by excav3tion. The Contrac- tor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. 'FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA'" . @('-)RiTHE ....MERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17~S NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W.. WASHINGTON. D,C, 201H)(, A201-1987 9 00700-10 Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unrea- sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials' or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract DocumentS, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suitS or claims for infringement of patent rightS and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall nOt be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or prod- uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract DocumentS. However, if the Contractor has rea- son to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Archi- tect's consultantS, and agentS and employees of any of them from and against claimS, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing but nOt limited to attorneys' fees. arising Out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, dam- age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness. disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop- erty (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent actS or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose actS they may be liable, regardless of whether or nOt such claim, damage, loss or expense is CJused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, Jbridge, or reduce other rights or obligJtions of indemni[)' v-rhich would Otherwise exist as to a par[)' or person described in tl1is Paragraph 3.18. 3.18.2 In claims against Jny person or entity indemnified under this PJragraph 3.18 by :m employee of the Contractor, J Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or :myone for whose acts they mJY be liable. the indemnificJ- tion oblig:ltion under this Paragraph 3.18 shall nOt be limited by a limitJtion on :unount or type of damages, compeilSati6rior benefitS paYJble by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit actS or other employee benefit acts, 3.18.3 The obligJtions of the Contractor under this PaC'..lgrJph 3,18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Archi- tect's consultantS,_~d agentS and employees of any of them arising out of (I) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or spedfica- tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultantS, and agentS and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. . ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4. f ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden- tified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract DocumentS as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authori[)' of the Architect as set forth in the Contract DocumentS shall nOt be restricted, modified or e.xtended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea- _ sonably withheld. 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con- tractor makes no re:lSOnable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 shall be subject to arbitration. . 4.2 ARCHITEcrS ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The ArchiteCt will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract DocumefltS, and will be the Owner's representative (1) during construCtion, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Para- graph 12,2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract DocumentS, unless Otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with Other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicat- ing that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract DocumentS. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on- site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and "rill endeavor to - guard the Owner against defectS and deficiencies in the Work. 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of:md will not be responsible for construction means. methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safe[)' precJutions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3.3, The Architect will norbe responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for JctS or omissions of the Con- ,;. . 10 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE;\ERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTR....CT fOR CONSTRL"CTION . FOCRTEENTH EDITION .~[....'" . @[<)H7THE....MERICA:>INSTITCTEOF ....RCHITECTS. 17~; NEW YORK AVENCE. ;.iW.. W....SHINGTON. D,C. .woo6 00700-11 '''''~:;''''l.'''.' tractor, Subcontra~tors, or their agents or employees, or of-any other persons p~rforming portions of the Work. ., ..2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administra-. tlon. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specia1ly autho- rized, the Owner. and Contractor shall endeavor to comn;lUni- cate through the Architect. Communications by and wiiJi the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Commu- nications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evalu:itionsof the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates. for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementa- tion of the intent of the Contract Documents, the AI:chitect'will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or nOt such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi- tect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons perform- ing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as .ShOP Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance withinforrnatiOll given and the design concept expressed in the Contmct Docu- ments: The Architect's action will be taken with such reaSon, able promptness as to cause no delay in the work or in th~ activities. of the Owner, Contractor or separat~ contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's. professkmaJ judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy ,and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities; or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of .the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submit- tals shall not relieve the Contractor of the:, obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Arc!1itect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless Otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific 'item shall not indicate approval of, an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construc-., tion Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragmph 7.4. . 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the c1ate of final. completion. will receive and forward to the OY"n.C:Fls..r;:~J:te Owner:s review and records written warranties. and. related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the . Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contmct Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect wi!! pro~ vide one or more project representatives to assist in c:mying \-,~, 't' out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties responsibilities arid-limitations of authority of such proje~ representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo- rated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern- ing performance ,,,}\t;ld~r and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac- tor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations. required of the Architect shall be fur- nisl}ed in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall nOt be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur- nish such interpretations until 15 clays after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contmctor, will not show partiality to either and will nOt be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. - 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating,to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpre- tation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in ques- tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat- ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect, shall be referred initially . to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4. A deci- sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4, shall be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation of a Claim between the Contractor- and Owner as to all such matters arising prior [0 the ctate ftrui1 payment is due, regardless of (1) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Work or (2) the extent to which the Work has been com- . pleted. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim shall not be a condition ,precedent to arbitration or litigation in' the event (1) the position of Architect is vacant, (2) the Architect has not received evidedce or has failed to render a decision . within agreed time limi~, (3) the Architect has failed to take action required-under Supparagraph 4.4.4 within 30 clays after the Claim is made, (4) 45'cI:1ys have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a mechanic's lien. ' 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be , made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 clays after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise.tO'the Claim, whichever is later. Clairns must be made by written notice. An additional Claim made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner. AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS'OF THE CONTRACT FOR CO:-iSTRCCTION . FOL"RTEENTH EDITION .\IAo!> . @ l'-)W' THE .\:-'\ERICAN INSTITCTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1-:';.; :>EWYORK A\"E:-JUE. NW.. WASHI;-';GTON. D.c. ~()()o6 A201-1987 11 00700-12 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Perfonnance. Pending final reso- lution of a Claim including arbitration, unless otherwise agreed in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor- mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances aris- ing out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If con- ditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materi- ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which dif- fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other parry promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Archi. tect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an incre:LSe or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjusunent in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the re:LSons. Claims by either parry in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjusunent in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjusunent shall be referred to the Architect for initial deter- mination, subject to further proceedings pursU2l1t to Paragraph 4.4. 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Para- graph 10.3. If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for re:LSons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stOp the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3)a writ- ten order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Archi- tect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other re:lSonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with the procedure established herein. 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an incre:lSe in the Contract Time, wrinen notice as provided he~ein.sR:Uloo given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. 4.3.8.2 If adverse wC::'.lther conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by clata substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and cOOld not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. c.';. ~ 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other parry, of any of the other parry's employees or agents, or of others for whose acts such parry is legally liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other parry within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first observance. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other parry to investigate the matter. If a Claim for addi- tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall be fIled as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.7 or 4.3.8. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of the following preliminary actions within ten clays of receipt of a Claim: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant, (2) submit a schedule co the parties indicating when the Archi- tect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in part, stating re:LSons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of the Claim by the other parry or (5) suggest a compromise. The Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Architect will prepare or obC2in appropriate documentation. 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the parry making the Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary response, take one or more of the following actions: (1) submit additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) modify the initial Claim or (3) notify the Architect that the initial Claim stands. '. 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parties in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within seven days, which decision shall be fInal and binding on the parties but subject to arbitration. Upon expiration of such time period, the Architect will render co the parties the Architect's written decision relative to the Qaim, including any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. If there is a surety and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. 4.5 ARBITRA nON 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor- dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of th-e American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered in any court having jurisdictiOn thereof, except controversies or Claims relating to aesthetiC effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraph 4.3.5. Such controversies or Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4 shall be subject to arbitration upon written d~mand of either party. Arbitration may be commenced when' 45 days have p:lSSed after a Claim has been referred to the Architect as provided in Paf'.lgf'.lph 4..3 and no decision has been rendered. . 12 A201-1987 AlA OOCtlMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRI;CTION . FOliRTEENTH EDITION ,...IA'" . @ 19H7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 173~ NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W.. WASHINGTON. D,C. 200lJ6 00700-13 4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration: Claims'between the Owner and Contractor riot resolved under Paragraph 4.4 shall, .if subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4.5.1, be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association cur- rently in effect, unless' the parties mutually agree otherwiSe. Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other p:lrty to the Agreement between the Owner ~d Con- tractor and with the American Arbitration Association',' and a copy shall ~ be filed with the Architect. 4.5.3 Contract Perfonnance During Arbitration. During arbi- tration proceedings, the. Owner and Contractor shall comply with Subparagraph 4.3.4. 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded. Demand for arbi- tration of any Claim may noc be made until the earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has' rendered a final written dee- sion on the Claim, (2) the tenth day 'after the parties have pre- sented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a final written decision by that date, or (3) any of the five events described iri Subparagraph 4.3.2. , 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is flnal but, subject to arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the p:lrty making the demand receives the final written decision, then fuilure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have. been initiated, such decision may . be entered as evidence, but shall noc supersede arbitration p~o- ceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. ' . . 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specifled in Subparagraphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 and ClaUse 4.5.4.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. . 4.5.5 Umitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall ~ include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, ' the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by. written consent containing speciflc reference - to the Agree- ment and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any ~ other person or entity SOl}ght to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation' or joinder or in any ocher manner; parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate~ contrac- tor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if corripk~te relief is to be accorded fn arbitration~. No . person or entity other than the Owner ,ContractOr or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an orig- inal third party or additional third p:lrty to an arbitralion~hose . interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to'arbitration involving an.additional person or entity.shall nOl,cOo.stUllte consent to arbitration ofa dispute not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein. The fore- going. agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consente.d to by parties ~ to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applF cable law in Jny court having jurisdiction thereof. . -;. ., .~.. ~/:~r~'~~ 4.5.6 Claims and Timely AssertIon.of Claims. A p:lrty who files a notice of -demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims chen known to that p:lrty on which arbitra- tion is permitted to be demanded. When a p:lrty fails to include a Claim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect, or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently, the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment. 4.5.7 JUdgment,on,Rnal Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. . ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEANmONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contracrwith the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon' tractor. The term "Subcontractor" .does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK '5.2.1 Unless otherwise scated in the C<?ntract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as prac- ticable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or enti- ties (including those, who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for eaCh principal por- tion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Con- tractor in. writing stating whether or noc the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to , any such proposed person or. entity. Failure of the Owner or . Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason- able objection. . 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed per- son or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made rea- . sonable and timely objection. The 'ContractOr shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has . made reasonable objecti~n. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity propo~d by the ~Contractor; the Contractor shall propose another to whom .the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall. be issued. However, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as requ~~ed. - 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not.change aSubcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such change. . . AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTit-\CT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH.EDITION AlA" . @ I <Jill THE A.\IERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17;5 NEW YORK f'.VENUE. N,W" WASHINGTON. D.C. 2DOO(\ A201-1987 13 00700-14 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the ContractOr shall require each SubcontractOr, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Docu- ments, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Docu- ments, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcon- tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter inw similar agreements with Sub-sub- contractors. The Contractor shall make available to each pro- posed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and condi- tions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. SubcontractOrs shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractOrs. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contnctor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Para- graph 14.2 and only for those subcontnct agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcon- tractor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. 5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contncts in connection with other por- tions of the project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contnct identic:1l or substantially similar to these including those portions related to, insur::tJ1ce and waiver of subrog:ltion. If the Contnctor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner. the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else- where in the Contnct Documents. "" ~-"-' 6.1.2 When separate contncts :J.re awarded for different por- tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "ContractOr"' in the Contnct Documents in each case shall mean the ContnctOr who executes each separ:lte Owner. ContractOr Agreement, 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi- ties of the Owner's oWn forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate con- tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched- ules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The coristruction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. f?.' , _. 6.1.4_ Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Condi- tions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBIUTY 6.2.1 The ContractOr shall afford the Owner and separate con- tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activi- Eies and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents, 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portiOn of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor SO to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the, Owner's or sepa- rate contractOrs' completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, e.xcept as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. ~'. 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the pany responsi- ble therefor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrong- fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com- pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be sub- ject to the provisions of Paragraph 4.3 provided the separate contractor has reciprocal obligations. 6.2.6 The Owner and eacil separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the ContractOr in Paragraph 3.14. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the ContractOr, separate con- tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround- ing area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in ParJgraph 3.15, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. . 14 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE"'ER....L COI"DITlONS Of THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRCCTION . FOl"RTEENTH EDITION ....1...." . @191;7 THE A~lERIC....N INST1Tl"TE OF ARCHITECTS. 1-3'; :-JEW YORK ,WENCE. N,W.. WASHINGTON. D,C. ,!()(lo6 00700-15 ARTICLE 7 . CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES 7.1.1 <;:hanges in the Work may be accomplished afr.er' execu- tion of the Contr::lct, and withour. invalid:ning the Contracr., by ~hange Order, Construcr.ion Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article i and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction' Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and mayor may'not be agreed to by the Contr::lctor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed underappli- cable provisions of ttle Contr::lct Documents, arid the Contrac- tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the COntr::lct Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally cone templ:lted are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- struction .change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to th~ Owner or Contr::lctor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. . 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed b'y the Owner, Contr::lctOr and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: . .1. a change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjusrment in the Contract Sum, if any; and . .3 the exteiu of r.he adjustment in the Contracr. Time, if any. . 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contr::lct Sum may include .those listed in Subpar::lgraph 7.3.3. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE:;.. 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre- , pared by .the Architect and signed by.rhe Owner and Architect, . directing a change in the Work and suting a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or . both. The Owner may.by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contr::lCt, order changes in the Work within the gene.ra1 scope of the Contract consisting. of add i- . tions, deletions or other revisions,. the Comract Sum and Con- mct Time being adjusted accordingly, 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7.3.3 If rhe Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contr::lct Sum. the adjustmem.sh~Jl~J;;p.ased on on_e of rhe follmving merhods:' .1 mutLlal acceprance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported hy sufficient substanri:lting data ro per- mit e\.:tluarion; .2 unir prices stated in the ContrJct Documents or sub-. sequenrly agreed upon: . .3 cost to-.b.e determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a murually accepuble ftxed or percent- age fee; or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.3.4 Upon rec;~pt.. of a Consr.ruction Change Directive, the Comractor shall promptly proceed v.:ith the change in. the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the pro- posed adjusrment in the Contract Sum or Comract Time. 7.~.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac- tor indicates the agreement of the ContractOr therewith, indud- ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec- tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If rhe Contractor does not-respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in rhe Comract Sum, the method and the adjusrmem shall be determined by the Archi- tect on the basis of reasonable e:'Cperiditures and savings of those performing the Work attribuuble ro the change, includ- ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and proftt. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3', the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, :l!\ itemized accounting tOgether with appropriate suppOrting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contr::lct Documents, costs for the purposes of this'Subpar::lgr::lph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, includ- ing ,COSt of transportation, wherher incorporated or conSumed; .3 remal costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, 'and sales. USe or similar' taxes related to [he Work; and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office person- nel directly attributable to [he change. , '7.3.7 Pending final'. determination _of cost to the Owner, ..amounts . not in dispute may. be included in Applications for . Pavment. The amount of creditro be allowed bv the Contr::lC- tor to the Owner for a deletion or change ~hich iesults in a net decrease in the COntq.ct Sum shall be accual net cost as con- firmed byrhe Architect. When, both addi!ions and credits . covering related Worl,< or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and proftt shall be ftgured on .the basis, of net incr~e, if any ~ with. respect to that change. '. 7.3.8 If the Owner and Contr::lctor do nor agree with the adjustment in Contr::lct Time or theme'thod for determining ir, rhe adjustment or rhe methodsh:iu be refer'red to the Architect for determination. . 7.3.9 When the Owner and ContractOr agree with the derer- . mination m:lde by rhe :\rchirecr concerning the adjustments in rhe Contr::lct Sum andCbntr::lct Time. or otherwise re-Jch agree- ment upon the adjustments, such :lgreement sh:rll be effective immediately and shall be recorded hy preparation and execu- . . rion of an appropriate Cl1:lnge Order. AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE:-':ER.-\L CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRL:CTION . FOL'RTEENTH EDITION .-\IA'~ . 'S; 19H-:- THE A.\lERICAN l:\STITt.:TE OF ARCHITECTS. 173S NEW YORK AVENt.:E. N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 21l01l6 A201-1987 15 00700-16 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work nor involving adjusrment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract DocumentS. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DERNmONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustmentS, allorted in the Con- tract DocumentS for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the ContractOr or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 The date of Subsr.antial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract DocumentS shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limitS stated in the Contract DocumentS are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con- rractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agree- ment or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely com- mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such irLsurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by a norice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall nocify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed' period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interestS. 8.2.3 The Contr::lctor shall proceed expeditiously with ade- quate forces and shan achieve Subsr.antial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of eirher, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual elelay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or ocher causes beyond the Contr::lctor's control, or by delay authorized by rhe Owner pending arbitr::ltion, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contr::lct Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as rhe Archirect may determine. . " ~- '.". 8.3.2 Claims relating ro time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Par::lgrJph 4.3. 8.3.3 This Par::lgr::lph 8.3 does nO[ preclude recovery of dam- ages for delay by eirher party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, includ- ing authorized adjusnnentS, is the tor.al amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract DocumentS. . 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall ~ubmit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup- ported by such data to subsr.antiate itS accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applica- tions for Payment. 9.3 APPUCATlONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date esublished for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values, Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data subsr.antiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting rerainage if provided for elsewhere in the Comract DocumentS. 9.3.1.1 Such applications may include requestS for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requestS for pay- ment of amountS the Contractor does nor intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 1. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract DocumentS, paymentS shall be made on account of materials and equipmem delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incor- pOr::ltion in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. paymem for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfaCtory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The ContrJctor warrantS that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The'. Contractor further warrantS that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and paymentS received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Comr.lctor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interestS or encumbrances in favor of the Contr::lctor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or ocher persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to rhe Work. . ../'" 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of rhe Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the 16 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. rCJURTt::ENTH EDITION ....IA", . @1987THEAMERICANINSTITUTEOF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.w., WASHINGTON. D,C. 2lJlJo6 00700-17 Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the'Sontrac- . tor, for such amount as the Architect determ, ines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. . . "J;.- 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will consorlite a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated arid that, to the best of the Architect's knowl- edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is inaccor~ dance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing repreSenta- tions are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Pay- ment will nor' be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaUstive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed consr.ruction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedureS, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from SubcontraCtors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the ComractOr's right to paymem or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac- tor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. . 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify' payment and may wiilihold a Certificate for Payment-in whole or ,in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contr::lctor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannOt agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Archi. tect may also .decide nOt to certify payment or, because of ' subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent obsery'atiol1S, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect'~ opinion to protect the Owner fromloss beca~ of: . .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims fUed or reasonable evidence indiCat- ing probable filing of such claims; , _ .3 failure, of the Contractor to make paymentS prop- erly to SubcontractOrs or for labor, materiaJ,s or', equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com- pleted for the unpaid balance of rhe Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractoG-.-. ,--' .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- pleted within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid 'balance would not be adequate to cover acruai or liquidated damages for the anticipated. del:ly; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contr::lct Documents. . 9.5.2 When the aQ9,ve reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Arch~tect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall:.make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor.on account of such Subcontractor's por- tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages acrually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The ContractOr shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontrac- tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por- tions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to payor to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9,6.5 Payment ro material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 9.6.6,A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner' shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If.the Architect does nor issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, wiiliin seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date esublished. in the Contract Documents the amount cer- tified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then me Con- tractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stOp the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be incre:lSed by the amount of the Contractor'Heasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which shall be accomplished as provided in Artide 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in tl1e progress of the Work when the Work.or designated portion thereof is suffi- ciently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupv or utilize the Work for its intended use. \' 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a por- tion thereof which the Owner agrees',to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- plete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter, the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the COntr::lct Docu- ments. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desig- AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA ~ . @ 1987 THE ....MERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A201.1987 17 00700-18 nated portion thereof is subsr.antially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance with the requirementS of the Contract Documents, the Contrac- tor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Subsr.antial Com- pletion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. The ContractOr shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Subsr.antial Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Subsr.antial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub- sr.antial Completion, shall esublish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for securiry, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the ContractOr shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Con- tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple- tion. The Certificate of Subsr.antial Completion shall be sub- mitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written accep- tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in reuinage, if any, for such Work or por- tion thereof as provided in the Contr::lct Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or par- tially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contrac- tor. provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Subpar::lgraph 11.3.11 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdictiOn over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is subsr.antially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, reuinage if any, secu- rity, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insur- ance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for cor- rection of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion subsr.antially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contr::lctor to partial occu- pancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The suge of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agree- ment between the Owner and ContractOr or, if no agreement is reached. by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contr::lctOr and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied'or portion of the Work to be used in order to , determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute accep- tance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. . ",~~,--' 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND ANAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work accept- able under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per- formed, the Architect will promptly issue a fmal Certificate for Payment sUting that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Docu- ments and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac- tOr and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certiftcate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditiOns listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the ContractOr's being entitled to flnal payment have been fulfilled. . 9.10.2 Neither flnal payment nor any remammg retained percentage shall become due until the Contr::lctor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfled, (2) a certiflcate evidenc- ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents' to remain in force after flnal payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the ContractOr knows of no subsr.antial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contr::lct Documents, (4) consent of surery, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, securiry interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcon- tractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the ContractOr may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that'the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all COSts and reasonable attorneys' fees. . '-. ''';'" 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final com- pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully com- pleted or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Con- tract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surery to payment of the balance due for that por- tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit- ted by the ContractOr to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment. except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Sub- paragraph 4,3.5. 9.10.4 Accepunce of final payment by the ContractOr, a Suh- contractOr or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee excepuhose previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of flnal Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to the waiver described in Subpar::lgraph 4.3.5. . 18 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITIO" AIA~ . @1987THEAMERICANINSTITuTEOFARCHITECTS. 173; :-.iEW YORK AVENUE. N,W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 007UO-19 . ARTICLE 10 . PROTECTION 'OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY . 10.1 ,SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contr::lctor shall be responsible for initiating, m:iin- t:iining and supervising all safety precautionS and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on, the' site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated' biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. 'The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written Jgreemeni of the Owner and Contr::lctor if in fact the material is asbestOS or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlori- nated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contr::lctor, or in accordance with final determination by the Architect on which arbitration has not been demanded. or by arbitr::ltion under Article 4. 10.1.3 The Contr::lctor shall not be required pursuant to Article 7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB). . 10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contr::lccor, Architect, Archi- tect's consultanr.s and agenr.s and employees of any of them from and against cJajrns, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing but nOt limited to attorneys' fees; arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected are'J if in fact the material is asb~stos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributaole co bodily injury, sickness, diSease or death, or to injury" to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use, resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or' indirectly employed by the Owner or,anyone for whose' acts - the Owner mJY be liable, regardless of whether or not such clainl, damage, loss or expense is caused in part. by a party indenmified hereunder, Such obligation shall nO[ be.construed to neg:ue, abridge. or reduce ocher ri~tS or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described. in this Subparagr::lph 10.1.4. . 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take re-JSonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable prOtection to prevent damage; injury or loss to: - . ' .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may' be affected thereby; . .2 the Work andmateriaJs and equipment'to be !ncorP~- med therein, whether in storage on or off~re site. . under care. custody or control of the CorucaaG,.or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontrac- tors; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees. shrubs. lawns, walks. pavements,' roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relo- cation or replacem.c::nr in the course of construction. ." 10.2.2 The Contr:lc.tor shall. give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reason- able, safeguards for safety and protection, including poSting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous ma1:erials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the, Work, th"e Contractor shall exercise urmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. ' 10.2.5 The Contr::lctor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documenr.s) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontr::lctor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acr.s they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to actS or omissions of the O~rner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acr.s either of them may be liable, :l!\d not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contr::lctor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. , ' 10.2.6 The Contr::lctor shall designate a responsible member of the Contr::lctor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contr::lCtor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contr::lctor in writing to the Owner and Architect. , 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permlr any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger ir.s safety. 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to pre- vent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensa- tion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph ,4:3 and Article 7. ' ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE'AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE " : '11.1.1 The Contr::lctOr Shall purchase from and m:iintain in a company or-companies la'Yfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which ./.he Project is!ocated such insurance as will protect the Contr::lctor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's oper::ltions . ,: under the Contr::lCt and for which the Contractor may be legally , liable, whether such oper::ltions be by the Contr::lctor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acr.s any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers' 'or workmen's compensation. c.lisJbility benefit' and other similar employee benefit acr.s which are applicable to the Work to be performed; AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS, OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRL'CTION . FOt.:RTEENTH'EDITlON AlA'" . @1\>8- THE .-I.~IERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK .-\.VENUE, NW.. WASHINGTON. D,C. 2()o06 A201-1987 19 00700-20 .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupa- tional sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Con- tractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by anOther person; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of r.angible prop- erty, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of owner- ship, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and .7 claims involving contractual liability insurance appli- cable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for nOt less than limits of liability specified in the Con- tract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of fInal payment and termination of any coverage required to be main- tained after fmal paymem. 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance accepuble to the Owner shall be fLIed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after fInal payment and are reason- ably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness 'in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usualliabiliry insurance. Optionally, the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self- protection against claims which may arise from operations under the Comract. The Comractor shall not be responsible for purchasing and mainra1ning this optional Owner's liability insurance unless specifIcally required by the Contract Documents. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Con- tract Sum as well as subsequent modifications ther<::tO JQ.UllC;:.. entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without vol- untary deductihles. Such property insurance shall be main- tained, unless Otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until fmal payment has been made as provided in Paragr:1ph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this P:lragraph 11.3. to be covered, whichever is earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work. 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all-risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false- work, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall nOt be required unless otherwise provided in the Comract Documents. 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does nOt intend to purchase such prop- erty insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount desCribed above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contr::lC- tor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur- chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so -nOtifying the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reason- able costs properly attributable thereto. 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deducti- bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. If the Owner or insurer increases the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc- tible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional COSts nOt covered because of such increased or voluntary deductibles. If deductibles are not identified in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles. 11.3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work - stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value esublished in the approval, and also portions of the Work in transit. f~' ". ~. 11.3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until fmal acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontracrors and Sub- subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as -will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or Other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or Other hazards however caused. 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or for Other special haz- ards be included in the pr9perty insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. . 20 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDlTlONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDlTlON AlA ~ . @ 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.w.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 00700-21 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner ~. ures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adja- t to the site by property insurance under policies separate om those insuring the Project, or if after final payment prop- erty insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the.:Proj- ect during the construction period, the Owner shall w3iVe all righr.s in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph '11.3.7 for darr'lages caused by fIre or other perils covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver ,of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall me with rhe Contractor a copy of each policy that includes' insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3. Each, policy shall conUin all generally applicable conditions, defmi- tions, exdusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall conUin a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed,ro expire until at least 30 days' prior writ- ten notice has been given to the Contractor. . 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all righr.s against (1) each other and any of their subcon- tractors, sub-subcontractors, agenr.s and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their sub- contractors, sub-subcontractors, agenr.s and employees, for darr'lages caused by fire or other perils ro the extent covered by property insurance obUined pursuant to this Paragraphl1.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as mey have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contracror, as appropriate, .hall require of the Ar, chitect, Architect's consultants, separate ontractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontrac- tors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validir.y, similar waiverS each in favor of other parties enum- erated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subro- gation by endorsement 'or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as.tO a person or entir.y even though that per- son or emity would otherwise have a dur.y of indemnification, contracr.ual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entir.y had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as' their interesr.s may appear, subject to requiremenr.s of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcomractors their just shares of insurance proc~ds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreemenr.s, written where legally required for validity, s~ require Subcontractors to make paymenr.s to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. . 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall,. upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The' cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate accounrpro- ceeds so receiyed, which the Owner shall distribute in accor- . dance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,' or in accordance with an arbitration award in which ,case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.5. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of dam- aged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order. 11.3.10 The OwneL~ fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this. power; if such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4.5. The Owner as fIduciary shall, in that case, make settlement wim insurers in accorcilince with directions of such arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitratOrs will direct such distribution. 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragr:1ph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com- panies providing property insur;mce have consented to such panlal occupancy or use by endorsement' or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obuin consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without muruai written consent, take no action with respect to partial occJJpancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4 ,PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contrac- tor to furnish bonds covering fajthfulperformance of the Con- tract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipu- lated in bidding requiremenr.s or specifically required in 'the Comract Documenr.s on the date of execution of the Contract. 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entir.y appearing to be a potemial benefIciary of bonds covering payment of obliga- tions arising under the Contract, the ContractOr shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING ,OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the, Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Qocumenr.s, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to ir.s being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and itshall be uncovered by the Conr.ractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documenr.s, cosr.s of uncover- ing and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documenr.s', the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separ::lte contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for , payment of such costs. \ 12.2 CORRECTION OF ;.vORK , 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected " by ,the Architect or failing to conJorm to the requiremenr.s of the Contract Documenr.s, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and 'whether or not fabricated, installed o~ completed. The Contr::lctor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspec- tions and, compensation " for the Architect's services and eXpenses made necessarY' thereby. 12.2.2 If, within one year after the date of Substantial Comple- tion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after'the d:1te AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE, CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDl110N AIA~ . @1987 THE A.MERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1987 21 00700-22 for commencement of warrantic::s established under Sub- paragraph 9.9. 1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Comract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the ContractOr shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the ContractOr a written accep- r.ance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work ftrst performed after Substantial Completion by the period of r.irne berween Substan- tial Completion and the acruai performance of the Work. This obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive accep- r.ance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after dis- covery of the condition. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accor- dance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reason- able time fIXed by written notice from the Architect, the Owner may remove it and stOre the salvable materials or equipmem at the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs of such removal and storage wimin ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Con- tractor, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do nOt cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contr::lctor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 12.2.5 The C-ontractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the ContractOr's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- tract Documents. 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be con- strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Con- tr::lct Documents. Esublishment of the r.irne period of one year as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationslJip to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con- tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work whictJ is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor- rection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ,--' ARTICLE 13 :f-.' 'f,... . .. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and ContractOr respectively bind them- selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representa- tives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigIlS and legal representatives of such ocher party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Con- tract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignmem without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it w.as intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu- ments and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law, 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver pf a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. . 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordi- nances. rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless other- wise provide9, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent test- ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- tions are to be made so the Architect may observe such proce- dures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Architect. Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval not included under Sub- paragraph 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. . 22 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA'" . @19A7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 00700-23 The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Sub- paragraph 13.5.3. .13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or,approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portiOns of the Work to comply with requirements esublished by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs' made necessary by such failure including those of rePeated procedures and compensation for the' Architect's services and expenses. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless Otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Comraccor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant co the Con- tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu- ments shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such, rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal r::lte prevailing from time co time at the place where the Project is located. .13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY UMIT A TION PERIOD 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contr::lctor: . .1 Before Substantial Completion. As co aceS or failures co act occurring prior to the relevant date Of Substan- tial Completion, any applicable statute of liriiitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed co have accrued in any and all events' not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certifi- cate for Payment. As to acts or failures ro act occur- ring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial , Completion and prior to issuance of the final .Certifi- _ cate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the ftnal Certificate for Payment; and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As co acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issu-, ance of the final Certificate for Payment, any appli- cable statute of limitations shall commence torun'and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events nO[ later than the date of anv Jet or failure to act bv the Contractor pursuant to any warranty provided under P:liJgraph '5.5:' tht:CG[~ of anv correction of the Work or failure to com:ct the Work bv the ContrJctor under Par:lgr:lph 12.2. or the date of ~ctual commission of :lny other :let or failure to perform :lny duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner. ~vhiche\'er occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Conffiidbr may terminate the Contract if the Work . is stopped for a period of30 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contraCt with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: . - .1 issuance of an order of a COurt or other public author- ity having jurisdiction; .2 an ,act of government,such as a decIaration of national emergency, making material unavailable; .3 because the Architect has nOt issued a Certificate for Payment and IUs not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certiflcate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; .4 if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by the Owner as described in Paragr::lph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num- ber of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less; or .5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Comractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect CO materials, equipment, cools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, proftt and damages. -' 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through no act or fault of the Contraccor or a Subcontr::lccor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contr::lct with, the Contr::lctor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matcers impor- 'tantra the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon , seven additional days' written nOtice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contr::lct and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The' O~mer may terminate the ContrJct if the ContrJctor: .1 persistently or., repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper m:uerials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for m:lterials or l:lbor in accordance with the respective :lgreemencs between the ContrJctor and the Subcontr::lctors: .3 persistently disregards laws. ort.linances. or rult:s, reg- ulations or orders of. a public authority h:lving juris- t.Iiction; or .4 orhenvise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the ContrJct,Documenrs. 14.2.2 When any of the ahove re-JSons exist, the Owner, upon certific:ltion by the Architc:ct th:it sufficient cause e'xis[s to jus- AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRlJCTlON . FOl'RTEENTH EOlTION ....IA'. . (S. Il)H~ THE A.\IERICAN INSTITLTE OF .~RCHITECTS. \7.~S NEW YORK ....vENL.E. ;'ol,W.. W....SHI:\GTON. O,c' 20006 A201-1987 23 00700-24 tify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, termi- nate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 rake possession of the site and of all materials, equip- ment, tools, and consr.ruction equipment and machin- ery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Para- graph 5.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever re1Sonable method the Owner may deem expediem. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is fInished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, induding compensation for the Archi- tect' 5 services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, sha1l1>e certified by the Architect, upon appli- cation, and this obligation for payment shall survive termina- tion of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in wrir.ing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of r.irne as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 An adjusrment shall be made for increases in the COSt of performance of the Contract, induding profit on the increased cost !;>f performance, caused by suspension, delay or interrup- tion. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is, was or would have been so sus- pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract. 14.3.3 Adjusrments made in the cost of performance may have a murually agreed fIXed or percentage fee. 24 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA\!> . @19R7THEAMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. NW., WASHINGTON. D,C. 20006 3/87 00700-25 .r. i~. .,.. . Section 00800 . SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART I GENERAL 1.0 I General Conditions A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AlA Document A21 0, Fourteenth Edition, 1987. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by' these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE I GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Basic Definitions Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.5: "Figured dimensions on drawings shall take precedence over measurements by scale, and detailed working drawings and shop drawings are to take precedence over general drawings aI1d shall be considered as explanatory of them and not as indicating extra work." 1.2 Execution, Correlation and Intent .. Add the followingtoSubparagra~h 1.2.3: ' "In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, int~rpretations will be based on the following priorities: ' A. The Agreement. B. Addenda, \Vith those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date. C. The Suppl~mentary C<?nditions. D. The GeneratConditions of the Contract for Construction. E. Drawings and Specifications. In the case of an inconsistency between Dnlwings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified , by addendum, the better quality 9r greater quantitY of Work shall' be provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation." 1.5 Interpretation Add new Subparagraph 1.5.2: "1.5.2 Whenever in these Contrac! .Documents the words "as ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as pennitted", "as allowed", or words or phrases of like import are used, it shall be understood and agreed that the order, direction, requirement, permission, or allowance of Owner or Architect is intended only to the extent of judging compliance with the tenn~ of these Contract Documents. None of these tenns shall imply that Owner or Architect has any- authority or responsibility for supervision of Contractor's forces or construction operations, such supervision and the sole responsibility therefore being strictly reserved for . 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-1 Contractor." Reference Section 01095 "Reference Standards and Definitions" for additional interpretation of items. . ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 and substitute the following: 2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished free of charge (5) copies of Drawirigs and Project Manuals. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost, of reproduction, postage and handling. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.5 Arbitration Add new Clause 4.5.1.1 to 4.5.1: 4.5.1.1 In addition and prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to settle disputes by mediation under the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Mediation shall commence, unless otherwise agreed, within the same time limits stipulated in Subparagraphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 and Clause 4.5.4.1 for the filing of a notice of a claim in arbitration. Such time limits shall then be extended for arbitration by ten days and the duration of the mediation process. Add the following to Subparagraph 4.5.2: "Parties may proceed to arbitration only upon written agreement by the other party. This arbitration procedure is supplementary and not exclusive or preexemptive. Nothing herein shall in any way compromise or dilute a party's rights to proceed at law or in equity to enforce all claims and/or rights as they exist under the laws of the State of Georgia." . ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 Changes Add new Subparagraph 7.1.5: "7.1.5 Owner may, at any time, without invalidating Contract or any of tenns or conditions of the Contract Documents and without notice to the Sureties, make alternations, deviations, additions to, or omissions from the Drawings and other Contract Documents, including an increase or decrease of the quantity of any item or portion of the Work or omit any item or portion of the Work, as may be deemed by Owner to be necessary or advisable and to require such extra work as may be detennined by Owner to be required for proper completion of Work as specified herein." 7.3 Construction Change Directives 7.3.6 In the first sentence, delete the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" and substitute "an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with Clause 7.3.10.1 below." 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-2 . . Add new Subparagraph 7.3.10: "7.3.10 In Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule: A. For the Contractor, for Work perfonned by the Contractor's own forces, 15 percent of the cost. B. For the Contractor, for Work perfonned by the Contractor's Subcontractor, 10 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor. C. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $1,000.00 be approved without such itemization. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.2 Progress and Completion Add new Subparagraph 8.2.4: . "8.2.4 No work past 5:00. p.m. or work on Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays requiring the presence of and/or Owner's Representative will be pennitted except in case of emergency and then only to such an extent as is absolutely necessary and with the written pennission of Architect. Should Contractor desire to perform overtime work on this Contract, such shall be done only after approval of Architect, and all resultant Project Representative costs must be reimbursed to Owner by Contractor at his own cost and expense." 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time Add new Subparagraphs 8.3.4 and 8.3.5: "8.3.4 Contractor is presumed to have taken all difficulties due to weather conditions into consideration in preparing his proposed Contract Price and in establishing his time for completion of the Work under this Contract. He .must be prepared and must take all precautions to protect Work from unfavorable weather and extremes of temperature, whether hot or cold. He shall provide approved fadlities for protecting against unfavorable weather at all times, to the entire satisfaction of Architect." "8.3.5 Completion time will not be extended for normal bad weather. Time for completion as stated in the Contract documents includes an allowance for working days on which work cannot be performed out-of- doors. The term "working day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean Mondays through Fridays, excluding weekends and legal holidays. For the pUrpose of this Contract, Contractor agrees that he may expect to lose working days due to weather in accordance with the following table: January 14 days February 14 days March 10 days April 7 days May 6 days June 3 days July 4 days August 2 days September 2 days October 3 days November 5 days December 9 days . 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-3 If the total accumulated number of working days lost to the weather from the start of work until the building is enclosed exceeds the total accumulated number to be expected for the same period from the table above, time for completion will be extended by the number of working days needed to include the excess number of working days lost. No extension will be made for days of bad weather occurring after the building is enclosed. No changes in the contract sum will be authorized because of adjustment of contract time due to weather. " . ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3 Applications for Payment 9.3.1 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 9.3.1: The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized AlA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AlA Document G703, Continuation Sheet. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property Add new Clause 10.2.4.1 to 10.2.4: "10.2.4.1 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice." ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance . 11.1.1 In the first line following the word "maintain" insert the words "in a company or companies licensed to do business in the State of Georgia. Add the following Clauses 11.1.1.8 and 11.1.1.9 to 11.1.1: "11.1.1.8 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: A. Premises Operations (including X, C and U coverages as applicable). B. Owner's and Contractors' Protective. C. Products and Completed Operations. D. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted. E. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under Paragraph 3.18. F. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles. G. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations. H. Blanket Contractual Liability. I. Fire Legal Liability. 11.1.1.9 If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-4 . . required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2." Add the following Clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2: 11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits, or greater if required by law: A. Worker's Compensation: a) b) c) State: Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoremen's): Employer's Liability: Statutory Statutory $100,000 per Accident $500,000 Disease, Policy Limit $100,000 Disease, Each Employee B. Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability (including Premises-Operations; Owners' and Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): a) Bodily Injury: $500,000 $2,000,000 Each Occurrence Aggregate b) Property Damage: . $500,000 $2,000,000 Each Occurrence Aggregate c) Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for one (I) year after final payment: $2,000,000 Aggregate d) Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C and U coverage. e) Broad Form Property Damage Coverage shall include Completed Operations. Co Contractual Liability: a) Bodily Injury: $500,000 Each Occurrence b) Property Damage: $500,000 Each Occurrence D. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted: $1,000,000 Aggregate . 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-5 E. Business Auto Liability (including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles): . a) Bodily Injury: $500,000 Each Occurrence b) Property Damage: $500,000 Each Occurrence F. If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial Liability policy, the: a) General Aggregate shall be not less than $2,000,000 and it shall apply, in total, to this Project only. b) Fire Damage Limit shall be not less than $300,000 on anyone Fire. c) Medical Expense $10,000 on anyone person. G. Umbrella Excess Liability: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence 11.1.3 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 11.1.3: If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AlA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD form 25S will be acceptable. 11.2 Owner's Liability Insurance . 11.2.1 Delete the last two sentences of Subparagraph 11.2.1 and substitute the following: The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance covering the Owner's contingent liability for claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. 11.3 Property Insurance 11.3.1 Modify the first sentence of Subparagraph 11.3.1 as follows: Delete "Unless otherwise provided, the Owner" and substitute "the Contractor." Add the following sentences: The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance, then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. Delete Clause 11.3.1.2 and substitute the following: 11.3 .1.2 The Contractor shall provide insurance coverage for portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also for portions of the Work in transit. 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-6 . . 11.3.1.3 Delete Clause 11.3.1.3. 11.3.1.4 Delete Clause 11.3.1.4. 11.304 Delete Subparagraph 11.304. Delete Subparagraph 11.3.6 and substitute the following: 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner two certified copies of the policy or policies providing this Property Insurance coverage, each containing those endorsements specifically related to the Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.3.7 Modify Subparagraph 11.3.7 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" at the end of the first sentence. 11.3.8 Modify Subparagraph 11.3.8 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" as fiduciary; except that at the first reference to "Owner" in the first sentence, the word "this" should be substituted for "Owner's." 11.3.9, Modify Subparagraph 11.3.9 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" each time the latter word appears. 11.3.10 Modify Subparagraph 11.3.10 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" each time the latter word appears. 1104 Performance Bond and Payment Bond . Delete Subparagraph 1104.1 and substitute the following: 1104.1 The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be obtained through the Contractor's usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum. The amount of each bond shall be equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. 11.4.1.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furI)ished. 11.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact'who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Add the following Paragraph 13.8 to Article 13: 13.8 Equal Opportunity 13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain pO,licies of employment as follows: . 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITiONS 00800- 7 13.8.1.1 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex or national origin. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regarc;l to their race, religion, color, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or tennination; rates of payor other fonns of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. . 13.8.1.2 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex or national origin. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Add the following Paragraph 14.4 to Article 14: 14.4 Tennination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4.1 The Owner may, at anytime, tenninate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such tennination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall: C. Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and Except for Work directed to be perfonned prior to the effective date of tennination stated in the notice, tenninate all existing Subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further Subcontracts and purchase orders. . A. B. 14.4.3 In case of such tennination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment from the Owner on the same basis provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. END OF SECTION 00800 95-052/12-95 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-8 . . SECTION 00840 ADMINISTRA TIVE AND PROCEDURAL ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 This section of the Contract Documents references the various fonns and other documents that will become a part of these Contract Documents during the course of the Work. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 FORMS AND DOCUMENTS A. Application for Payment (AlA G702/G703) B. Change Order (AlA G701) C. Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA G704) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Engineer/Architect shall provide Contractor with sufficient copies of the above listed fonns and/or documents where applicable for submittal by Contractor during course of the Work. (Examples of the listed fonns are included in this Section. Contractor may use these and/or xerox copies of same for submittal) . 3.02 Engineer/Architect shall use these fonns for administrative and procedural duties. (Examples of the listed fonns are included in this section) . 95-052/12-95 ADMINISTRA TIVE & PROCEDURAL ITEMS 00840-1 APpd.ION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMEIt AlA DOCUMENT G702 nSlflICllons ( reverse side) I'''li 11,\(;t:S - - - TO OWNEH PHOJECT: APPLICATION NO. Distrmuli 10: PEIUOD TO: o O\X'NEH I'I(O.lECT NOS.: [I Alll:lllTl'lT o CUNTHACTUH FIHllI ON ACTO I VIA AHCIIITECT: CON' ACT DATE 0 0 The undersigned Conlraclor cCrllnes I ) lIle hesl of Ihe ( raclor s kllO\Vlcdge, inli lr 1\I:lllon and belief Ihe Work covered hy IIIIS Applll':lIlol1 for Paymcnt has heClIl'IlIlIplcll'l In accordance with Ihe Contract DOCUl\lents, Ihal all allllllllllS have heen paid lIy I hI' Contraclor for Work for which previous Centflc:llcs for I'ayl\lcnl were issucd .lI\d pay- ments received from Ihe Owncr, lllthat currel lOlyl\lClI1 show lcrc is now duc. FO CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Application is l\Iilde for pa)'mcnt. as shown helow, In connccll!m with the Contract CIHllinuation Shcct, AlA Document G703, Is :lllached. AC ON' CONTRACTO . ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM . change by Ch~nge Orders Nel 1. );lIe ly Slate of: CounlY of: Subscrlhed and sworn \0 me Ihls day s . "{O DATE ! 2) '/ TOTAL COMPLETI,1D & STORED TO DATE (Colullln (j 1 (j7(~.~) (line SUM CONTRACT :'> hefore of Notary PUl>Ilc My Commission cxplres . . RETAINAGE a. _% ofColllplclCd Work (COIUIllIIS () + E on G 70~) I. _ % of SlOrcd Material (COIUIllII FOil (i703) 1;11 Ikl:lillagc (LIne 'ia + 5h or 'lillal ill Colul\Ill I of G7ll3 ') . ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT 1 accordance with the Conlract Documents, hascll ( n-she o()serV:1I10IlS ;lIllllhe d comprising this applicallon, Ihe Architect cenlfles 10 IIIC Owncr IhatlO the heslof 1Ill..' Archltecl's knowledge, Informal ion and hellef Ihe Worl< has progrcssClI as indicaled, the: quality of Ihe Work Is in accordance wllh Ihe COnlr;let I>OCUIIlCIllS, d the Contr:lctor Is entitled to payment of the AMOllNT CEHTlf ). AMOUNT CERTIFIED . . . TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAIN AGE nc .\ less Line 5 'lillal LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICAT.E~ FOR-PAYMENT (Lillc () fronl prior Ccrtlflcale) . CURRENT PAYMENT DUE () 7 H \> J (Attacb explanation if allIOllllt certified differs from tbe amollllt afJJllied fO/: IlIitiol aI/ flgllres 011 tbis AfJfJ/icatloll ami 011 tbe Cc)//Ii/ll/{/Iiol/ Sbeet /lwI are (hal/Reel I COliform to Ibe ellllO/II/1 certifieel.) AIlCIiITECT: he Con w Uy D:lIC This Certtncale Is not negotlahle. The AMOUNT CEIlTlflED is paranle lIy I traclor named herein, Issuance, p:lymenl and :lcCCplancc of paymcnl rc preJudice to any rlghls of the Owner or COnlr:lCIOr undcr. Is ColllrolCI 1.1 fANG E OIlDEn SUIIIIIIAHY ADDITIONS DEDUCTIONS 'Hllal dl:lllgCS approved In prcvious mOlllhs by Owner 'Ihlal approvcd this Month TOTAI.S NET CIIANGES hyCIJ;lngc Order BALANCE TO FINISH, .INCLUDING RETAINAGE nc 3 less l.ine 6) · . o o aJ .1-' o I tv G702-1992 whl'n document" Mp rl'produced Of AIICllITEcrs, 173S NEW YOUK Ihe ..,Iolalor to legal prosecution. not be obscured liS may occur AlA DOCUMENT 0702 . AI'I'I.ICATION AND CEIITlFICATf. fOR I'AYMENT · 1992 I!DITION · AlAe · @1992 · Till! AMl!lUo.N INSl'lTlJTI! AVENUE, N.W" WAsllING'lON, D.C. ,21KKl6-5292 . WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying vlolalell U.S. copyrlght'llIWS Bnd will l!ubJect AlA rlocument which hn'l this caution prlnl<.(t III red. An orlglnlll1l99urllslhal changes wi se an orlglna !lhOIlIc1 ~~~~: .~irl .'.". - CAUTION; VOl f'-,'::' V CONTINUATION SHEET I'S Ie CATION NO. CATION DATE D TO NO. IUO Ee E o rcvc rsc s A I' A lIlS nSlruc G703 DOCUMENT AlA PAYMENT, It elOllar. 'or IInc 1'0 ON AND CE CA'I Is :lll:lchcd Ihe neares rCI aAc CA'I Ccrllflcallon :HC slaled 10 crc varlahlc )OC CIIl (;70l, AI ining CllIllraclOr's signee lal " helow, amounlS I :OlllraCIS \V la AlA COil I I SC IlETAINM (IF VAIlIAII l(tHE) II 'AI.ANCI TO FINISII (t: - C;) c ." '" (j + 'S TOTAl. CO~IPI.ETE() AND STOIlED TO DATE (D+ E+ F) c A F MATElUAI.S PI(ESENTI.Y STOIUiD (NOT IN DOH E) 01) E ETED EI S T y. ~ I WORK COM 1l0M I'IU!VIOUS APPLICATION (D + E) )1) lay lCIllS C seIIEDUI.E\) VALlIE WOHK o II ON )ESC II A ~ NO, o o 00 t-' o I w G703-1992 reproduced. when docume. AlA DOCUMENT G703 . CONTINlIAncJN SIIEln' 1'011 (;7(\2 . 1\1')2 EIlITION . AlA- . @1')')2 · Till! AMI:IlICAN INSTITUTE (>I' AIICIIITECIS. 17H NEW YOIIK AVENI NW.. WASIIINGTON, l>,c' 2IMM}(,.5292 . WARNING; Unlicensed pholocopylng vlolelea U.S, copyrlghllllWl end will aubJecllha vlolalor 10 legal prosecullon. not be ob8cured 88 may occur h8t change8 w .,0Uld use 8n original AlA document which h88thl8 cBullon printed In red, A.lnel 886ure8 ~ft fI'.'" - CAUTION AlA DOCUMENT C70 I OWNER ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR FIELD OTHER o [j o o o CHANGE ORDER .JECT: (rume, :1ddress) CHA1'lGE ORDER NUMBER: DATE: ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: CONTRACT DATE: CONTR.-\.CT FOR: , TO CONTRACTOR: (rume, :1ddress) The Contoct is changed :1S follows: . Not valid until signed by the Owner, Architect and Contractor. The original (CanIDct Sum) (G~[ecd M:lximum Price:) W:IS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S Net dunge: by previously 2UthOri:zl:d C13nge Otders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . S The (CanIDct Sum)(Gu:U':uuc:ed Maximum Price) prior to this Change Order was. . . . . . . . . . S The (ContcCt Sum) (GU2r.U1teed ~wn Pricc) will be fmcrc::=d) (decr'c::lSed) , (unchanged) by this Ch2nge Order in the :unount of . c' .' . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . S 'The new (Contr.lct Sum) (GU2.t2I1cecd M2ximum Price) induding this Ounge Order will be .. S The Concr:zct T101e will be (incre:lSeCl) (decrc::ISed) (undunged) by The ~e of SubscnrW Completion as of the ~e of chis Qi2nge Order thc:n::fore is ) c!:iys. NOTE: This suinm2I'y ,doc:s not reflect ch:znges in the Contr:lCtSurn. Contr:lct Time or Gu:u:mteed ~"Cimurn Price which h:1ve been authorized by Consuuction Change Dirc:ctive"< ' O\~ER ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR Address Address .....ddress ' "-I'-~.._.' .y DATE BY BY AlA [)()CUMENT G7t11 . CHANGE ORDER . 198~ EDmON . .\J."'~ . ;g; 198:' . THE .-I..'1ERIC.-I..'1 INSTtTt.'TE OF .>.RCHrrEcrs. \:'?-5 :-fEW YORK ,WE.. :'<.'11:'. ';t'.-\:iHL"G70:'<, DC. 20<)('10 DATE DATE G701-1987 00840-4 ALA DOCUl\IENT G704 OW:"iER ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR FIELD OTHER [] Q [J o o CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ([n~tructions on reverse side) PROJECT: PROJECT NO.: . (SUint' anti address; CONTRACT FOR: CONTRACT DATE: TO OWNER: TO CONTR_-\CTOR: (SC.II1It! tlud """re....:'; rSal11t: 'II'" I.-u./(Irl"s....) DATE OF ISSCANCE: PROJECT OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL I:'-iCLL'DE: The Work performed under this Contract has be~n re\'iewed Jno found. to the ,.>"rchitect's best knowledge. information Jnd beliet'. to be substJ.nti:1lly complete. Subsuntial Completion is the sege in the progress of the \X'ork when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in Jccordance with the Contract Documenr.s so the Owner on occupy or utilize the 'Xbrk for its intended use. The date of Subsenti:l.l Completion of the Project or portion thereof designated Jbon: is hereby esublished as which is also the date of commencement of JpplicJble w:m:.tntks required by the Contr:lct Documents. e.,,<:cept as suted bdo~"': . A list of items to be completed or corrected is JttJ.ched hereto. The failure to indude :l.ny items on such list does nOt alter the respon- sibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accorcl:l.nce with the Contr:lct Documents. ARCHITECT BY DATE The Contractor will complete or correct me Work on the list of items JttJ.ched hereto wimin me Jbove cl:l.te of Subsunti:ll Completion. cl:l.ys from CONTRACTOR BY DATE The Owner accepr.s the Work or designated portion thereof as subsenrially complete and .will assume full possession thereof at (time) on (date). OWi'lER BY DATE The responsibilities of th~ Owner and the Cul1tr::lctor tor ~~curi{\'. m:.linren:mce. he-.lt. utilitks. d:lm:lge to th~ Work :.Ind insurJnc:: sh:lll be as follows: (.V(){t!-f)ll"J1~r 'j and CCJlltrac:or'j It!gCl/ '11'" iIlSlIrllltc..-r! L'{jilji;~.r\1j(;tdd- 1/t!(l!r11I11If/ aJId rel"lt!u' illSlIrCl1lCI! r(!'!llirf:!!flf1l1lS and c.:ot"f1ragf.'. J . me CAUTION: You should use an original AlA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. ~\JllIllh AlA DOCUMENT G7'Q,:. ,::.:~~'II'!,~\Tl': ,ll' 'I il,';-\:'-,'1.\;, ,:,',\II'!:::':,,\. :''''~ UJITl,'\' \1.\". ~i""~. ~;IE .~;~. ,\.\IER:(~\\ :\,;-:T::1' . 'I' ,\Rt:! 11'1'1-:\:'1". i-;~ 'I"X \', )"" \\ ':\1,' \\\', \X',\.'i 11\, ;;-0:'- Lll.. ~""'!".~~,,~ ~"'~': WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. =ocyrightl3WS Jnd WIll subjec: the violator :0 legal prosecution. 008~O-5 G704-1992 . SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division ] Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Project consists of a 137,940 s.f. new building. 1. Project Location: Phinizy Road, Augusta, Georgia. 2. Owner: August:alRichmond County Consilidated Government, Room 605, City- County Municipal Building, Augusta, Georgia 30911. B. Contract Documents, dated January 8, 1996 were prepared for the Project by Precision Planning, Inc., 400 Pike Boulevard, P. O. Box 2210, Lawrenceville, Georgia 30246. C. TIME FOR COMPLETION 1. It is a requirement under this Contract to provide sufficient manpower and supervision in order to begin Work and achieve completion of Project as described in Section 00100. Contractor must provide Certificate of Occupancy at date of completion. . D. EXISTING CONDITIONS 1. All reasonable efforts have been made to locate and indicate various existing and proposed utilities and other conditions at the site, however, accuracy and completeness of information is not guaranteed. 2. Prior to beginning actual Work, thoroughly examine Project site, including access storage, delivery facilities and any existing conditions that may affect Work. Inform Architect of discrepancies that affect completion of Work in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Contractor shall notify free underground utility locator service before any excavations are begun. 4. , Replace or repair new and existing site improvements, streets,and curbs which are damaged or disturbed incident to Work perfomed as part of Contract. Repair construction to be equivalent or superior to quality and appearance of original construction. 1.03 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Work will be conducted in one (1) phase. . 95-05211 2-95 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES . A. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. I. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 1.05 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. The Owner will furnish items as noted on the drawings. I. The Contractor is responsible for receiving, relocating, and handling Owner- furnished items at the site. 2. The Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage, including damage from exposure to the elements. The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of his operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) . END OF SECTION 01010 95-052/12-95 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 . . SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.0 I RELA lED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.' Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. I. Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals." 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES . A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets. c. List of subcontractors. d. Schedule of allowances. e. Schedule of alternates. f. List of products. g. 'List Qf principal suppliers and fabricators. h. Schedule of submittals. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. I. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. . 95-052/12-95 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - I b. Name of the Architect. c. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular fonn with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of Work. c. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing. 6. Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. . . 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the fmal Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment-Application Times: Each progress-payment date is indicated in the Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment-Application Fonns: Use AlA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the fonn for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the fonn. Include notarization and execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 95-052/12-95 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 2 . . 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. E. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. O~e copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect. F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit fmal or full waivers. 3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following: . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. List of subcontractors. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. , Schedule of Values. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). Schedule of principal products. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final). List of Contractor's staff assignments. List of Contractor's principal consultants. Copies of building permits. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work. Initial progress report. H. Application for Payment at'Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit ,an Application for Payment. . 95-052/12-95 1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previousiy for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include: , a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. c. TestJadjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Meter readings. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 3 I. Startup performance reports. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. Final cleaning. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. . f. o O' h. J. k. I. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: I. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay. 5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner. 6. Certified property survey. 7. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 8. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. 10. Change of door locks to Owner's access. J. Retainage Procedures: I. Retainage as required by the Agreement shall be administered in the following manner: a. Retainage amounts shall be calculated for each work category (line item) in the pay request. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01027 95-052/12-95 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 4 . . SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGfNEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field- engineering services including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Land survey work. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting fmal property survey with Project Record Documents and recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels. 1.03 SUBMITTALS . A. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the land surveyor or professional engineer certifying the location and elevation of improvements. B. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies of the final property survey. C. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work perfonned and record survey data as required under provisions of "Submittals" and "Project Closeout" Sections. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor registered in the state where the Project is located, to perfonn required land-surveying services. B. Engineer Qualifications: Engage an engineer of the discipline required, licensed in the state where the Project is located, to perfonn required engineering services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) . 95-052/12-95 FIELD ENGfNEERING 01050 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION . A. Identification: The Owner will identify existing control points and property line comer stakes. B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to layout the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. D. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. . 1. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping. 3.02 PERFORMANCE A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb. B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log available for reference. 1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. C. Site Improvements: Locate and layout site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. 95-052/12-95 FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 2 . D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and layout batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work. . E. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. F. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for the Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by the surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of the Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. END OF SECTION 01050 . . 95-052/12-95 FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 3 SECTION 01095 . REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited. C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "pennitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. D. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. . E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conv.entions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are requirt:d to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having a minimum of 5 'previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being . 95-052/12-95 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 1 2. familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Trades: Using tenns such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be perfonned by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. . J. "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for perfonning construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction, with others perfonning other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and mayor may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perfonn specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 1.03 SPECIFICA TION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Fonnat: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on CSI's 16-Division fonnat and MasterFonnat's numbering system. B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the intended meaning of certain tenns, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. Streamlined Language: The Specifications generally use the imperative mood and streamlined language. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be perfonned by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall be" are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. . 2. 1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or 95-052/12-95 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 2 . . quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer to the Architect before proceeding for a decision on requirements that are different but apparently equal, and where it is uncertain which requirement is the most stringent. D. Copies of Stahdards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perfonn a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to Gale Research Co.'s "Encyclopedia of Associations," available in most libraries. 1.05 SUBMIITALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01095 . 95-052/12-95 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 3 . SECTION 01300 SUBMITI ALS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submittal schedule. 3. Shop Drawings. 4. Product Data. 5. Samples. 6. Quality assurance submittals. B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division I Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the following: . 1. Permits. 2. Applications for Payment. 3. Performance and payment bonds. 4. Insurance certificates. 5. List of subcontractors. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" specifies requirements for submittal of the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents and warranties at project closeout. 1.03' DEFINITIONS A. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. B. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. . 95-052/12-95 SUBMITI ALS 01300 - I 1.04 SUBMIITAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. . 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. 3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. c. Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. . 1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of the Architect. d. Name and address of the Contractor. e. Name and address of the subcontractor. f. Name and address of the supplier. g. Name of the manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 1. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a transmittal form. The Architect will not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor. 1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, 95-052/12-95 SUBMIIT ALS 01300 - 2 . . -;or '" including vanatlOns and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction schedule. Submit within 30 days after the date established for "Commencement of the Work." . I. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values." Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Phasing: On the schedule, show how requirements for phased completion and partial occupancy by the Owner affect the sequence of Work. C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including submittal review, testing, and installation. D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be 'sequenced, or integrated with other activities. E. ,Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating . planned and actual costs. On .the line, show dollar volume of Workperfonned as of the dates used for preparation of payment requests. I. Refer to Division I Section "Applications for Payment" for cost reporting and payment procedures. F. Distribution: FollowiIlg resPonse to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties' required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. . 95-052/12-95 SUBMIIT ALS 01300 - 3 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. . G. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.06 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. I. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the list of products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information: a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples). d. Name of the subcontractor. e. Scheduled date for resubmittal. f. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval. B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office. . I. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.07 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at the site, and submit duplicate copies to the Architect as requested. 1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 4. Accidents and unusual events. 5. Meetings and significant decisions. 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 7. Meter readings and similar recordings. 8. Emergency procedures. 95-052/12-95 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 4 . . 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Orders and requests of governing authorities. Change Orders received, implemented. Services connected, disconnected. Equipm~nt or system tests and startups.. Partial Completions, occupancies. ' Substantial Completions authorized. 1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared infonnation drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard infonnation as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard infonnation prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and insta1lation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following infonnation: Dimensions. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8- 1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one blue- or black.line print for the Architect's review. The Architect will return the reproducible print. Final Submittal: Submit 3 blue- or black-line prints and additional prints where required for maintenance manuals, plus the number of prints needed by the Architect for distribution. The Architect will retain one (1) print and return the remainder. a. One of the prints returned shall be marked up and maintained as a "Record Document." 9. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken. 1.09 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data i~to a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed infonnation, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, 'and perfonnance curves. 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes infonnation on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable infOrmation. Include the following infonnation: a. , Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with trade association standards. c. Compliance with' recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. . 95-052/12-95 SUBMITI ALS 01300 - 5 1.1 0 SAMPLES 2. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of options is required or as required by the individual specification sections. Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit additional copies where required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one and will return the other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. . 3. 4. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. 95-052/12-95 1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following: a. Specification Section number and reference. b. Generic description of the Sample. c. Sample source. d. Product name or name of the manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. f. Availability and delivery time. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. The Architect will return one set marked with the action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. . 2. 3. 4. SUB MITT ALS 01300 - 6 . . a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. b. l.ll QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMIIT ALS A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. I. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies are specified in the individual specification sections. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals for the record or infonnation, where action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. . 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a unifonn, action stamp. The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows: I. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Reviewed,", the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Make Corrections as Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Amend and Resubmit, or Rejected, See Remarks" do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark: , a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Amend and Resubmit, or Rejected, See Remarks" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for infonnation or record purposes or special processing', or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required." . 95-052/12-95 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 7 c. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender without action. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01300 . 95-052/12-95 SUBMITI ALS 01300 - 8 . SECTION 01400 . QUALITY CONTROL PART I - GENERAL 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services. B. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include 'contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. . 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality- control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. E. Related Sections: The-following Section contains requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" specifies requirements for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities. 1.03 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated' as the responsibility of another identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specifiedelsewhere'in the Contract Documerits and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. . 95-052/12-95 QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - I 1. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality- control services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. . B. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility . 1. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's responsibility where required tests perfonned on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements. C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to pennit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. Provide access to the Work. Fumish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples. Deliver samples to testing laboratories. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site. . 4. 5. 6. 7. D. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. I. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. E. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 95-052/12-95 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 2 . . 1.04 SUBMIIT ALS A. The independent testing agency shaH submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect. I. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. 1. Test results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. \. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be perfonned. 1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction' and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements _for Division I Section "Cutting and Patching. " B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction.. C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. . END OF SECTION 01400 95-052/12-95 QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 3 . SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART I - GENERAL 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Water service and distribution. 2. Temporary electric power and light. 3. Temporary heat. 4. Ventilation. 5. Telephone service. 6. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. 7. Storm and sanitary sewer. . C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Field offices and storage sheds. 2. Temporary roads and paving. 3. Dewatering facilities and drains. 4. Temporary enclosures. 5. Hoists and temporary elevator use. 6. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards. 7. Waste disposal services. 8. Rodent and pest control. 9. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Temporary fire protection. 2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 3. Sidewalk bridge ,or enclosure fence for the site. 4. Environmental protection. 1.03 SUBMIIT ALS A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities if required by the Architect. . 95-052112-95 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - I 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: I. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. 6. Security procedures and requirements of the user. B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI AIO Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." I. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements In Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior-type, Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated. 2. For fences and vision barriers, provide minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick exterior plywood. 3. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8- inch- (16-mm-) thick exterior plywood. C. Paint: Comply with requirements of Division 9 Section "Painting." 95-052/12-95 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 2 . D. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-Iabeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon-reinforced, laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride, fire-retardant tarpaulins. . E. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. F. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) thick, galvanized 2-inch (50-mm) chainlink fabric fencing 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) I.D. for line posts and 2-l/2inches (64 mm) J.D. for corner posts. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge. C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit intenupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment. . D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single 'Iengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required ,for, adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. F. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. G. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction wi.th lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for nonnal.loading. H. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation" or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with Ii glass~fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. ' 1. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and siIn!lar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC,.. dry-chemical extinguishers ora combination of extinguishers of NFP A-recorrimended classes for the exposures. ' . 95-052/12-95 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 3 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with perfonnance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed pennanent facilities. 3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations. I. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders. . 2. 3. 4. B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until penn anent water service is in use. I. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use. C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transfonners, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear. 1. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where pennitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance. D. Temporary Lighting: When overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching. 95-052/12-95 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 4 . 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. . E. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. F. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide vented, self-contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. G. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period for all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install telephone on a separate line for each temporary office and first-aid station. 1. Separate Telephone Lines: Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Where an office has more than 2 occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a fax machine in the field office. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. . 2. H. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's needs. 1. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material. I. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit-type privies will not be permitted. 1. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. J. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel involved- in handling materials that require 'wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition. 1. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel. . 95-052/12-95 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 5 K. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Provide drinking-water fountains where indicated, including paper cup supply. . L. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. 3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner. B. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within the construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. C. Field Offices: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the Project Site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings. D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or elsewhere on-site. . E. Temporary Paving: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to support the indicated loading adequately and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction period. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free of water. G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. I. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load- bearing, wood-framed construction. 95-052112-95 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 6 . . 4. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. (9.2 sq. m) in area, use UL-Iabeled, fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing. H. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 1. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for elevators. J. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other signs of size indicated. Install signs where indicated toinfonn the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. Do not penn it installation of unauthorized signs. 1. Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics. Comply with details indicated. 2. Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional infonnation to construction personnel and visitors. K Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible when Work is being performed. L. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements ofNFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during nonnal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. . M. Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Employ this service to perfonn extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be free of pests.and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. N. Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished, pennanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at the time of acceptance. 3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary ~urity and protection facilities to pennanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or longer, as requested by the Architect. B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by pennanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 . 95-052/12-95 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 7 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations." . 1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire- protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete installation of the pennanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. E. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates. 1. Provide open-mesh, chainlink fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel and earth. . F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. 1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. A void use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. 3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 95-052/12-95 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 8 . . 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on' a 24~hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibiiity of damage. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. 2. B. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.' Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that, may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. . . 95-052/12-95 I. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs. Remove temporary paving not, intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or , subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might imp'air growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period including, but not limited to, the following: a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use. 2. 3. END OF SECTION 0 I 500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 9 . SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division I Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the applicability of industry standards to products specified. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Substitutions" specifies administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. . 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar tenns. Such tenns are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the tenns "material," "equipment," "system," and tenns of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refmed or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to fonn a part of the Work. 3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. 1.04' SUBMITf ALS A. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular fonn acceptable to the Architect. Include genericriames of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed. . 95-052/12-95 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1 1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals. Form: Prepare product list with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings: a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the completed product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list. No response within this period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action. . 2. 3. 4. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. B. c. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. . Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 95-052/12-95 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 . . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. PART 2 - PRODUCTS " 'f. Schedule delivery to minimize long-tenn storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. Store products subject to damage by the ,elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION A. . General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedtires: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following: . 95-052/12-95 I. Proprietary Spe~ification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single produq or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be pennitted. ' 2. Semipr?prietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or 'manufacturers, provide I of the products indicated. No substitutioris ,will be pennitted. a. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, ac~ompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal," comply wi~h the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 3. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 4. any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. Perfonnance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with perfonnance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the manufacturer's certification of perfonnance. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Docwnents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase ..... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures ..... or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected. . . 5. 6. 7. 8. 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 95-052/12-95 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 4 . SECTION 01631 . SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. B. Related Sections: -The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division: 1 Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the applicability of industry standards to products specified. 2. Divisionl 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" specifies requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options. . 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B.. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are consiqered to be requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to a}Vard of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subje~t to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. 2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specifiedoptiops of products and construction methods iilcluded in the Contract Documents. _ 4. TheCon1iactor's detennination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued, by governing authorities. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SubstitutionRequ~st Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 :daysafter commencement of the Work. ' Requests received more than 60 days after conuri.encement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. . . 95-052/12-95 SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the fonn and according to procedures required for change-order proposals. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in , each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following infonnation, as appropriate: a. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as perfonnance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. Samples, where applicable or requested. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. Cost infonnation, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution confonns to requirements in the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perfonn adequately. 1. 2. 3. 4. . b. c. d. e. f. a O' Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional infonnation or documentation, whichever is later. Acceptance will be in the fonn of a change order. a. Use the product specified if the Architect cannot make a decision on the use of a proposed substitute within the time allocated. . A. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or 95-052/12-95 SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 2 . . 5. method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. The request is directly related to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the specific specification section. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume. The Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner, and similar considerations. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval. . PART 3 - EXECUTION . 95-052/12-95 Not Used. END OF SECTION 01631 SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 3 . SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. . 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary PrOCedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. I. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. ' Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. b. : If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete ~ items, the value of incomplete construction; and reasons the Work is not : complete. 2. Advise tfie Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, . and similar documents. 4. Obtain and-submit releases enabling the Owner unrestriCted use of the Work and access to services and 'utilities. ' Include occupancy permits,' operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 6. Make firial changeover of peIinanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 7. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. . 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for substantial completion inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. . C. Should status of completion of Work require reinspection by ArchitectlEngineer due to failure of Work to comply with Contractor's claims on initial inspection, O\\11er will deduct the amount of ArchitectlEngineer compensation for reinspection services from final payment to Contractor. 1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and fmal payment, complete the following, List exceptions in the request. 1. Submit the fmal payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for fmal additional changes to the Contract Sum. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's fmal inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the O\\11er took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. Submit consent of surety to final payment. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. Submit evidence of fmal, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. Submit Record Documents in accordance with this section. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with this section. Submit Warranty Manual in accordance with section 01740. . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. Reinspection Procedure: Should status of completion of Work require reinspection by ArchitectlEngineer due to failure of Work to comply with Contractor's claims for final inspection, O\\11er will deduct the amount of Architect/engineer compensation for reinspection services from fmal payment to Contractor. 1.05 RECORD DOCUMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, Maintain at the site for O\\11er, two record copies of: 95-052/12-95 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Approved shop drawings, product data, and samples. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-2 . . ,~ -~. :.: . 6. 7. 8. Field test records. Inspection certificates. Manufacturer's certificates. B. Store Record Documents and samples in Field Office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and samples. C. Label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with Section number listings in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. D. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. i E. 'Keep Record Do:cuments and samples available for inspectio~ by Architect/Engineer. 1.06 RECORDING PROCEDURES FOR RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record in fonnati on on a set of blue line opaque drawings, and in a copy of a Project Manual. Label each sheet of the Project Record Drawings in the lower right comer with the neatly printed words "Project Record Drawings." . One (I) set of Contract Documents and Drawings will remain clean without mark-up for record purposes. Contract?r shall use the additional set for marking measurements, on-site changes, items of construction that are actually used, and other conditions as they are encountered during the course of the Work. This .1' . marked-tip set of Contract Documents and Drawings shall co~sist of red-lined copies of plans and shop drawings~ shall indicate actual field dimensions, shall represent: the work as actually constructed, and shall be recorded on a daily basis. Failure to produce these records . on request of Architect or ~ Owner shall constitute grounds to halt construction with no time extensio~ _ imtii !!teps are taken to See that these 'records are being, properly made. This marked up set may be qne (i) of the three (3) required as part of' Final Ins~ection procedures. B. Proyide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording infonnaiioll: ' i ' - ." :; ~ . . , 1. The Construction Manager shall provide colored pencils for marking record copies of ~ontract Drawings arid Specifications. Use a different colored pencil for eac~ .of-the following: a. Architectural Work Red b. 'Plumbing Work Green c. HV AC Work Blue . 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3 d. Electrical Work Orange e. Other written notations Brown Establish a color code denoting what trade will use what color, and show this on a schedule on the front sheet of the "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS." . 2. C. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. D. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: I. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed In construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by Modifications. 6. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 7. References to related shop drawings and Modifications. 1.07 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Prior to submittal of final three (3) copies of record drawings and show drawing manuals, General Contractor shall submit preliminary versions of each to the Architect for review. This submittal must occur ten (l0) days prior to Final Inspection. Contractor must receive coroments from Architect prior to assembling fmal copies of manual. . B. Prior or concurrent to final construction inspection. Contractor shall furnish to Architect three (3) neatly marked sets of construction plans three (3) copies of which accurately depict the conditions and records all changes made during construction. Architect shall promptly notify Contractor in writing if additional information is required. C. Shop Drawing Manuals: Organize shop drawing data into suitable sets of manageable size. Organize and divide shop drawings in sequential order as outlined by the project manual Table of Contents. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-rom), 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. 1.08 OPERA nON AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS - GENERAL A. Prior to final construction inspection. compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under work of this contract. Provide three (3) copies of this information to assemble into three (3) reference manuals. B. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; one inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 4 . . C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERA nON AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. D. Arrange content by systems under section nu~bers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold, larger drawings to size, of text pages. 1.09 SUBMITTALS: OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Submit, two (2) copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. ArchitectJEngineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. . B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Own~r, submit documents within ten (10) days after acceptance. C. Submit one (1) copy of completed volumes in fmal fonn fifteen (15) days prior to fmal ,inspection. Copy; will be returned after final inspection, with ArchitectJEngineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to fmal submittal. . D.' Submit two (2) copies of revised volumes of data in fmal form within ten (10) days after final inspection. 1.10 CONTENTS - OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, subconsultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. B. For Each Pr~dtict or System: List names, addresses' and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. D. Drawings.: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to sh6w control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance' crrawings. ' ' , E. Type Text: As required to slJpplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for e~ch procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. . I F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in additional copy of each as specified in Section 01740. . 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-5 1.11 SECTIONS FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES . A As part of O&M manual, provide tabbed sections for materials and fmishes. Organize sections according to project manual Table of Contents. B. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. C. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. D. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. E. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification Sections. 1.12 SECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. As part of O&M manual, provide individually tabbed sections for equipment and systems. Organize sections according to project manual Table of Contents. B. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. . C. Panel board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications. D. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. E. Written Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. F. Written Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. G. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. H. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. I. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 1. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 6 . . K. L. M. N. O. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Maintenance manuals. Record documents. Spare parts and materials. Tools. Lubricants. Fuels. Identification systems. Control sequences. Hazards. Cleaning. Warranties and bonds. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments, B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Startup. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." . 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 7 B. 95-052/12-95 Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for fmal cleaning. Clean each stuface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. . 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compmmds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-stufaced fmishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. d. Wipe stufaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, liner, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured stuface, f. Prior to Substantial Completion of Work, or some designated portion thereof acceptable to Owner, perform cleaning of visually exposed materials, fixtures, equipment and finished surfaces. g. Remove labels, tags, stickers and unauthorized identification markings from finished surfaces. 1. Do not remove permanently affixed nameplates, instructions, markings, Underwriters Laboratories labels and approval stickers, Factory Mutual approved stickers and other identifying markings required by federal, state and local codes, ordinances and regulations. h. Remove broken, chipped and defective glass; remove stains, spots, marks, paint smears; dirt and foreign materials; clean and polish exterior and interior glass; clean and polish mirrors. 1. Remove temporary protective coatings, tapes and films from finished aluminum surfaces and ornamental metal surfaces, clean and polish aluminum and ornamental metal in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Remove paint smears, spots, marks, dirt, mud and dust from exposed interior and exterior fmished surfaces. k. Clean and polish finished hardware; remove marks, stains, scratches and blemishes. 1. Clean and polish ceramic floor and wall tile; clean and polish toilet fixtures and trim, toilet accessories and toilet compartments. . m. Sweep concrete floors not less than broom clean; vacuum where necessary to remove excessive dust; thoroughly clean other hard surfaced floors. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 8 . n, :1. Remove mortar aTop pings, joint compound, plaster and cementitious material droppings from floors prior to fmal cleaning. Sweep exterior paved surfaces broom clean; rake clean unpaved , surfaces. . Thoroughly clean all items' of mechanical and electrical equipment; remove excess oils and grease from exposed surfaces. , 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if ventilating units were operated during construction. 2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. ; Vacuum clean carpeted and similar soft surfaces. . , Clean, machine buff, three (3) coats of wax and pol!sh all resilient and . hard-surfaced floors as specified by manufacturer's recommendations. . o. p. q. C. Pest Control: E~gage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a [mal inspection and rid the Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. D. Removal ofProt~tion: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work duriJig construction. E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not bwn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property'. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site'and dispose oflawfully. . 1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner. . 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 9 PROJECT CLOSE OUT CHECK-OFF LIST . PROJECT NAME Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center - Phinizv Road PROJECT NUMBER 95-052 DOCUMENT* * Contractors Warranty Statutory Affidavit Non-Influence Affidavit INSPECTION REPORTS County Building Inspector County Plumbing Inspector County Electrical Inspector State Fire Marshal-Occupancy Certificates Consent of Surety to Final Payment Contractors Affidavit - Release of Liens Other as specified - (Fill in): NO. OF COPIES MAINTENANCE MANUALS & EQUIPMENT BROCHURES** Air Conditioning Equipment Boilers Water Heaters Plumbing Fixtures Electrical Equipment Food Service Equipment Cold Storage Equipment Test and Balance Reports Wiring and Controls Diagrams for Equipment Other as specified - (Fill in): KEYS Schedule by Door Locations Certificate of Receipt of Keys Schedule of Value tags, Location & Function **Where Applicable by Specification 95-052/1 2-95 DA TE RECEIVED . CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 10 . . Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center - Phinizv Road Augusta, Georgia ", Contractor for the above referenced project, and the Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government, Owner, hereby certify that "as-built" drawings for the above-referenced project have been prepared by the contractor and provided to the owner. The owner and contractor further certify that the contractor has provided the owner with all maintenance and operation instructions, and product warranties, and that the owner, or owner's representative has been trained in the maintenance and operations of the systems installed. The owner and the contractor understand that the contractor's warranty for the project begins on the date of substantial completion and remains in effect for a period of 1 year. The owner understands that he/she shalI direct warranty concerns to the contractor, during this warranty period and to the product manufacturers for warranties beyond this time period. . Contractor Date Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government Date Precision Planning, Inc. Date . 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 11 NON-INFLUENCE AFFIDAVIT . COUNTY OF STATE OF I do solemnly swear on my oath that as to the contract dated , 19, between and the I have no knowledge of the exertion of any influence or the attempted exertion of any influence on the firm on behalf of which this affidavit is made in any way, manner, or form in the purchase of materials, equipment, or other items involved in construction, manufacturer, or employment of labor under the aforesaid contract by any employee, officer, or agent of or any person connected with the State Government of Georgia in any way whatsoever. This day of ,19_. (L.S.) Signature Title . Firm COUNTY OF STATE OF Personally before me, the undersigned authority, appeared who is known to me to be an official of the firm of , who, after being duly sworn, stated on his oath that he had read the above statement and that the same is true and correct. Notary Public My commission expires This day of 19_ 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 12 . . STATUTORY AFFIDAVIT COUNTY OF: STATE OF: FROM: (Contractor) To: (Owner) Re: Contract entered into the parties for the construction of a at day of . 19-, between the above-mentioned KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: 1. The undersigned hereby certifies that all work required under the above contract has been performed in accordance with the terms thereof, that all materialmen, subcontractors, mechanics, and laborers have been paid and satisfied in full, and that there are no outstanding claims of any character [including disputed claims or any claims to which the contractor has or will assert any defense] arising out of the performance of the contract which have not been paid and satisfied in full except as listed hereinbelow: 2. The undersigned further certifies that to the best of his knowledge and belief there are no unsatisfied claims for damages resulting from injury or death to any employees, subcontractors, or the public at large arising out of the performance of the contract, or any suits or claims for any other damage of any kind, nature, or description which might constitute a lien upon the property of the owner. . 3. The undersigned makes this affidavit as provided by law and for the purpose of receiving final payment in full settlement of all claims against the owner arising under or by virtue of the contract, and acceptance of such payment is acknowledged as a release of the owner from any and all claims arising under or by virtue of the contract. This day of ,19_. (L.S.) Signature Title Firm COUNTY OF STATE OF Personally before me, the undersigned authority, appeared who is known to me to be an official of the finn of , who, after being duly sworn, stated on his oath that he had read the above statement and that the same it true and correct. Notary Public My conunission expires This day of .19._ . END OF SECTION 01700 95-052/12-95 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 13 SECTION 01740 . WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for tenns of the Contractor's period for correction of the Work. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: .., ~. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies procedures for submitting warranties. Division I Section "Contract Closeout" specifies contract closeout procedures. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1. 2. . 4. C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. . 95-052/12-95 WARRANTIES 01740 - 1 B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. . C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. I. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.05 SUBMITIALS . A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. I. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. C. Forms for special warranties are included at the end of this Section. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. 95-052/12-95 WARRANTIES 01740 - 2 . .. I. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. D. Form of Su~mittal: At Final Completion compile 2 copies of each required warranty properly executed by the Contractor, or by tne Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl- covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-II-inch (115-by-280-mm) paper. I. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of the Contractor. 3. ,When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.01 LIST OF WARRANTIES A. Provide warranties on products and installations as specified by each Section: END OF SECTION 01740 . 95-052/12-95 WARRANTIES 01740 - 3 SECTION 02110 . SITE CLEARING PART I - GENERAL 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protection of existing trees indicated to remain. 2. ,Removal of trees and other vegetation. 3. Topsoil ,stripping. 4. Clearing and grubbing. 5. Removing above-grade improvements. 6. Removing below-grade improvements. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS. A. Traffic: Conduct site-clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, ~d other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities' without pennission from authorities having jurisdictio.n. . B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. 1. Protect i~provements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. -2. Restore ~amaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. j . , C. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to rema~in place against unnecessary' cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruismg of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials wiiliin drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within 'drip line., Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. 1. Water tr~esand other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to 'maintain their health during course of construction operations. 2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in diameter that are cut duringcohstruction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other acceptable' coating fonnulated to use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover expOsed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. . 95-052/12-95 SITE CLEARING 02110 - 1 3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Landscape Architect. . 4. 1.04 EXISTING SERVICES A. General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before commencing Work. B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services. Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting this Work. C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots. . 1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches (IOO mm). Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. a. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. 2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. I. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 95-052/12-95 SITE CLEARING 02110 - 2 . . 2. 3. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. a. Place fill material in horizontaIlayers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) loose depth, and thoroughly compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 Sections. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction is included under this Section. 3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning will be permitted only at designated areas and times directed by Owner. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until fires are extinguished. B. Removal to Owner's Spoil Area: Transport noncombustible waste materials and unsuitable topsoil materials to designated spoil areas on Owner's property and dispose of as directed. END OF SECTION 02110 . . 95-052/12-95 SITE CLEARING 02110 - 3 . SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing and grading sub grades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, and landscaping. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage and moisture-control fill course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for walks and pavements. 5. Subswface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. 7. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and appurtenances. . B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Division:2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, topsoil removal, and tree protection. 2. Division:2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for footings, underslab, and wall drainage. 3. Division, 2 Section "Landscape Work" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and planting. 1.03 DEFINITIONS , A. Excavation consists of the removal of material enCountered to sub grade elevations and the reuse or disposal of materials removed. . ' B. Sub grade: The uppermost sulface of an excavation or the top sulface of a fill or backfill inunediately below! subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. C. Borrow: Soil m~teria1 obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available fro~ exc~vations. D. Subbase Course:1}1e layer placed between the sub grade and base course in a paving system or the layer placed between tl:!e sub grade and sulface. of a pavement or walk. E. . Base Course: Th~ layer placed between the subbase and sulface pavement in a paving system. . 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - I . F. Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut off upward capillary flow of pore water. . G, Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated sub grade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense, H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appwtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground swface. 1. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within building lines. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for the following: 1, Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Filter fabric. C. Samples of the following: 1. 20 lb (9 kg) samples, sealed in air-tight containers, of each proposed fill and backfill soil material from on-site or borrow sources. 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) sample offJlter fabric. . 2. D, Photographs of existing adjacent structures and site improvements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1. Before commencing earthwork, meet with representatives of the governing authorities, Owner, Engineer, consultants, Geotechnical Engineer, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection procedures and requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days prior to convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant. 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 2 . . 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not intenupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others. except :when permitted in writing by the Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility ~rvices have been provided. 1. Provide a minimmn 72-hours' notice to the Engineer and receive written notice to proceed before intenupting any utility. , B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing WldergroWld utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide;approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory So~l Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PI. . D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Subbase and Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (75 micrometer) sieve.: F. Engineered Fill: Subbase or base materials. G. Bedding Material:: Subbase or base materials with 100 percent passing a 1 inch (25 mm) sieve and not m.ore :than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (75 micrometer) sieve. H. Drainage Fill: W~shed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or Wlcrushed gravel, AS TM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sieve:and not more than 5 percent passing a No.8 (2.36 mm) sieve. . ' I. Filtering Material: EvenlY graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural sand, with 100 percent passmga 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 (300 micrometer) sieve. J. Impervious Fill: Cl~yey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape:, Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape man~actured for m~king and identifying WldergroWld utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and . 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 3 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick minimum, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep. . I. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows: a. Red: Electric. b. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. c. Orange: Telephone and other communications. d. Blue: Water systems. e. Green: Sewer systems. B. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven peIVlous geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon or polyester fibers, or a combination. I. Provide filter fabrics that meet or exceed the listed minimum physical properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and the referenced standard test method in parentheses: a. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D 4632): 100 Ib (45 kg). b. Apparent Opening Size (ASTM D 4751): #100 U.S. Standard (150 micrometer) sieve, c. Permeability (ASTM D 4491): 150 gallons per minute per sq. ft. (102 Lis per sq. m). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. . B. Protect sub grades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. D. Tree protection is specified in the Division 2 Section "Site Clearing." 3.02 DEWATERING A. Prevent swface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared sub grades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect sub grades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Explosives: Obtain written pennission from authorities having jurisdiction before bringing explosives to the site or using explosives on the site. 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 4 . . 1. Do nottdamage adjacent structures, property, or site improvements or weaken the bearing capacity of rock sub grade when using explosives. B. Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified and includes excavation to required sub grade elevatio~. Exc~vation will be classified as earth ~xcavation or rock excavation as follows: . 1. Earth eXcavation includes excavation of pavements and other obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be demolished and removed; together with soil and 9ther materials encountered that are not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. . ' Intermittent drilling, blasting, or ripping to increase production and not : necessary to permit excavation of material encountered will be classified ~ as earth excavation. . Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock material and obstructions encountered that cannot be removed by the following heavy-duty rock excavating equipmep.t without systematic drilling, blasting, or ripping. a. ;Rock material includes boulders 1/2 cu. yd. (0.38 cu. m) or more in ,volwne and rock in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits. Rock excavating equipment for fqotings, trenches, and pits shall be equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 2l5D LC track-mounted hydraulic excavator, equipped with a 42 inc~ (1050 nun) wide short-tip radius rock bucket, rated at not less than 120 hp(89 KW) flywheel power with bucket-curling for<:e of not less than 25,000 lb (11 1 kN)-'and stick-crowd force of not less than18,700 Ib (83 kN), measured according to SAE Standard 11179. ' Rock-excavating equipment for open excavations shall be equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 973, heavy-duty, track-mounted loader, rated at not less than 210 hp (157 kW) fl}Wheel power and developing minimwn of 45,000 Ib (200 kN) breakout force,me~sured according to SAE Standard J732c-69. a. :Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet ,(9 in) in either lengtll or width are defined as open excavations. Rock excavation will be paid by unit prices included in the Contract Docwnents. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by Engineer. 2. 3. 4. 5: 6. 3.04 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS ! A. Comply with local. codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations. 3.05 ,EXCAVATIONFORSTRQCTURES A. Excavate to indic~ted elevations and dimensions Within, a tolerance of plus or minus 1.2 inches (30 nun). ~xtendexcavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concreteformwork, ~stalling services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. ~xcavate~y hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim - bottoms to,required lines and grades to leave solid base, to receive other work. 3.06 EXCAVATION FOR WALK,:SANDPAyt:MENTS , . ~ :. -,' . A. Excavate si.ufac~s Under, walks' and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. . , . 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 5 3.07 EXCA VA nON FOR UTll..ITY TRENCHES . A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations. B. Excavate trenches to unifonn widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mrn) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mrn) each side of pipe or conduit. 2. Clearance: As indicated C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide unifonn bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape sub grade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. 1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches (150 mrn) in nominal diameter and flat- bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. F or pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mrn) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 6 inches (150 mrn) below invert elevation to receive bedding course, 3.08 APPROVAL OF SUB GRADE A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. . B. When Geotechnical Engineer determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the Contract provisions for changes in Work. C. Reconstruct sub grades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. 3.09 UNAUTHORIZED EXCA V AnON A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures, as required by the Engineer. 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 6 . .. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borro',\' materials. Stockpile soil m!lterials without intennixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles't6 drain swface water. Cover't6 prevent wind-blown dust. I 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofmg, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. SurveyiDg locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities. 4. Concrete fonnwork removal. 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7; Installrng pennanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. ' 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels:of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. . I B. Concrete backfill~trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches (450 mm) of footings. . Place concrete to level of bottom of footings. . C. Provide 4 inch (l00 mm) thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm). below surface of roadways. After installation and testing, completely encase, piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. D. Place and compaCt initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles larger th~ I inch (25 rom), to a height of 12.inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. ' Carefully: compact material wider pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility. piping <?r conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. . E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bra~ing, and sheeting is removed. 1 . G. Place and compact fmal backfill of satisfactory soil material to fmal subgrade. .! . 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 7 H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below ftnished grade, except 6 inches (I 50 mm) below sub grade tUlder pavements and slabs. . 3.13 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE BACKFILL A. Subswface Drain: Place a layer of ftlter fabric arotUld perimeter of drainage trench or at footing, as indicated. Place a 6 inch (I50 mm) compacted course of ftltering material on ftlter fabric to support drainage pipe. After installing and testing, encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 6 inches (I50 mm) of compacted ftltering material and wrap in ftlter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches (150 mm). B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact drainage backfill of ftltering material over subswface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 rom) of final sub grade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer offtlter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches (I 50 rom). C. Impervious Fill: Place and compact impervious ftll material over drainage backfill to ftnal sub grade. 3,14 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from grotUld swface prior to placing ftlls. 1. Plow strip, or break up sloped swfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing surface. B. When sub grade or existing grotUld swface to receive ftll has a density less than that required for ftll, break up grotUld surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact to required density. . C. Place ftll material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below. 1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 3, Under steps and ramps, use subbase material. 4. Under building slabs, use drainage ftll material. 5. Under footings and fotUldations, use engineered ftll. 3,15 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate sub grade and each subsequent ftll or backfill layer before compaction to within 3 percent of optimwn moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or ftll material on swfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to specified density. a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 8 . . 3.16 COMPACTION A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 nun) in loose depth for material compact~ by heavy compaction equipment, aild not more than 4 inches (l00 nun) in loose depth fo~ inaterial compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the I following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557: j I. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, compact the top 12 inches (300 nun) below sub grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry'density. . 2. Under walkWays, compact the top 6 inches (150 nun) below sub grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density. ' 3.17 GRADING A. General: UnifonPIY grade areas to a smooth surface, free ',from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. 2. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades. I Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface , tolerances. . B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water 'away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish sub grades to required elevations within the following tolerances: I 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1.2 inches (30 nun); 2. Walks: Plus or' minus 1.2 inches (30 nun). 3. Pavemen\S: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 nun). L C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish sub grade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 nun) when tested with a 10 foot (3 m) straightedge. 3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. . Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared sub grades. Place base course material over subbases to pavementS, as uidicated on typical sections. 1. Compact shbbaSe' and base courses at optimum moisture c~ntent to required grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent 'of ASTM D 4254 relative density.. , . 2. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. '3.' When thickness Of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 nun) or less, 'place matenals m a single layer. 4. When thickness of C9mpacted subbase or base c~urse cexceeds 6 inches (150 nun), place materials in 'equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 nun) thick or less than 3;inclies (75 nun) thick when compacted. . 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 9 B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders at least 5.0 feet (I.5m) wide of acceptable soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer. . 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each sub grade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. 1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 293 7 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTMD 1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017. b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, perform at least one test of each soil stratum to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of each sub grade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At sub grade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2000 sq. ft. (I86 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 100 feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and fmal backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 150 feet (45 m) or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests. . 2. 3. 4. 5. B. When testing agency reports that sub grades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained. 3.20 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 10 . . 1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape and recompact at optimwn moisture content to the required density. C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on the Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Engineer. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it on the Owner's property in areas designated by Engineer. END OF SECTION 02200 . . 95-052/12-95 EARTHWORK 02200 - 11 . SECTION 02281 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Soil treatment below slabs-on-grade for subterranean insects. B. Soil treatment at interior and exterior foundation perimeter, for subterranean insects. 1.02 REFERENCES A. EP A - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in soil treatment for termite control with five years documented experience and shall be a state licensed pest control operator. B. Materials: Provide certification that toxicants confonn to requirements of authority having jurisdiction. . C. Material Packagipg: Manufacturer's labels and seals identifying content. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.04 A. Confonn to Federal, State and Local requirements for application licensing and authority to use toxicant chemicals. 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit product data indicating toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate, and manufacturers installation instructions. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide five year:warranty for material and installation. B. Warranty: Cover 'against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites, damage to building or building contents caused by termites; repairs to building or building contents so caused. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chemical shall be' applied in a water solution. . 95-052/12-95 TERMITE CONTROL 02281-1 B. Acceptable Products: Toxicants shall be registered by the Environmental Protection Agency for their intended use and shall be accepted by the U.S. Department of Agriculture for use in controlling termite infestation of buildings, without being injurious to plant life. . C. Mixtures of chemicals are prohibited, except as premixed from manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive treatment. B. Beginning of application means acceptance of soil conditions. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply toxicant under concrete slabs and along both sides of foundation walls in accordance with label instructions and EP A requirements for subterranean or surface treatment. B. Apply subterranean treatments by means of injection or trenching. C. Perform no treatment when soil is wet or after rains. Avoid flow of toxicant from treated surfaces. D. Coordinate soil treatment at foundation perimeter with finish grading and landscaping work to avoid disturbance of treated soil. Retreat disturbed treated soil. . 3.03 RETREATMENT A. If inspection identifies the presence of termites, retreat soil and retest. B. Use same toxicant as for original treatment. END OF SECTION 02281 95-052/12-95 TERMITE CONTROL 02281-2 . . PART I - GENERAL SECTION 02480 LANDSCAPE WORK 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and' general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of landscape development work is shown on drawings and in schedules. B. Subgrade Elevations: Excavation, filling and grading required to establish elevations shown on drawings are not specified in this section. Refer to earthwork sections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontract landscape work to a single finn specializing in landscape work. 'B. Source Quality Control . . 95-052/12-95 1. General:, Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. Do not make substitutions: If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit to!. Architect proof of non-availability and proposal for use of equivalent material.: When authorized, adjustment of contract ,amount will be made. Analysis fmd Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. :For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordanc,e with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists; wherever applicable. , Trees and Shrubs: Provide trees and shrubs grown in a recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice. Provide healthy, vigorous stock free ofdiseas~, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sim-scald, injuries, . abrasions; or'disfigurement. a. ~izeS:Provide trees and shrubs of sizes shown or specified. Trees and shrubs of larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, and if sizes of roots or balls are increased proportionately.' Inspection: Architect reserves the right to inspect trees and shrubs either at place . of growth:or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size and quality. 2. 3. 4. 5. LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - I 1.04 SUBMITIALS A. Certification: Submit certificates of inspection as Required by governmental authorities, and manufacturer's or vendors certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. Submit other data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. . 1. Submit seed vendor's certified statement for each grass seed mixture required, stating botanical and common name, percentage by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed species. B. Planting Schedule: Submit planting schedule showing scheduled dates for each type of planting in each area of site. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of required maintenance period(s). 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. B. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within 24 hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking of rolled strips. c. Trees and Shrubs: Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. . D. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. E. Do not remove container grown stock from containers until planting time. F. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Proceed with complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required. B. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. C. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before planting. 95-052/12-95 LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - 2 . . D. Planting Time: Plant or install materials during nonnal planting seasons for each type of landscape work required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. ' E. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting 9f lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations. 1.07 SPECIAL PROJECT W A,RRANTY A. Warranty lawns through specified maintenance period, and until final acceptance. B. Warranty trees and shrubs, for a period of one year after date of substantial completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond Landscape Installer's control. C. Remove and replace trees, shrubs, or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty perioci Replace trees and shrubs which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period; unless, in the opinion of the Architect, it is advisable to extend warranty period for a full growing season. I. Another inspection will be conducted at end of extended warranty period, if any, to determine acceptance or rejection. ,Only one replacement will be required ~t end of warranty period, except for losses or replacementS due to failure to comply with specified requirements. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil has (or will be) stockpiled for re-use in landscape work. If quantity of stockpiled topsoil in insufficient, provide additional topsoil as required to complete landscape work. B. Provide new topsoil which is fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps; brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2" in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. I. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil. characteristics to that found at project site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 "; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. 2.02 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: Natural limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates, ground so that not less than 90% passes a 10-mesh sieve and not less than 50% passes a 100-mesh sieve. B. , Peat Humus: FS Q-P-166 and with texture and ph range suitable for intended use. . 95-052/12-95 LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - 3 C. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; 4% nitrogen and 20% phosphoric acid. D. Superphosphate: Soluble mixture of treated minerals; 20% available phosphoric acid. . E. Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources and containing following percentages of available plant nutrients: 1. For trees and shrubs, provide fertilizer with not less than 10% available phosphoric acid and from 3% to 5% total nitrogen and from 3% to 5% soluble potash. 2. For lawns, provide fertilizer with not less than 4% phosphoric acid and not less than 2% potassium, and percentage of nitrogen required to provide not less than 1 lb. of actual nitrogen per 1000 sq. ft. of lawn area. Provide nitrogen in a form that will be available to lawn during initial period of growth. 2.03 PLANT MATERIALS A. Quality: Provide trees, shrubs and other plants, complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "Standard for Nursery Stock" and as specified. B. Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper listed or shown and with branching configuration recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Provide single stem trees except where special forms are shown or listed. 1. 2. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous trees. Container grown deciduous trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous trees subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z60.1 for container stock. . C. Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the height shown or listed and with not less than minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and height of shrub required. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous shrubs. 2. Container grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. D. Coniferous and Broad-leafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed. Dimensions indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi-spreading type evergreens and height for other types, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidal, broad up-right, and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well-balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens. 2. Container grown evergreens will be acceptable subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. 2.04 GRASS MA TERlALS A. Grass Seed: Provide fresh, clean, new-crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America. Provide seed of . 95-052/12-95 LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - 4 . grass species, proportions and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed, as specified. I. Schedule of Grass Seed Requirements i~ scheduled on the drawings. B. Sod: Provide strongly rooted sod, not less than 2 years old and free of weeds and undesirable native grasses. Provide only sod capable of growth and development when planted (viable, not dormant). Provide sod composed principally of the following: 1. Kentucky Bluegrass (Poa prantensis). 2.05 GROUND COVER A. Provide plants established and well-rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots and with not less than minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size shown or listed. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS A. Steel Edging: Commercial edging of size shown on drawings fabricated in sections with loops pressed from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes. Provide tapered steel stakes 16" long. Finish edging sections and stakes with manufacturer's standard green- black paint. B. Anti-Erosion Mulch: Provide clean, seed-free salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats or barley. . C. Planting Mulch: Shredded bark mulch. D. Plastic Sheet: Black, weather-resistant polyethylene sheeting complying with FS L-P-512, Type III, 0.008" (8-mils) thick. E. Wrapping: Tree-wrap tape not less than 4" wide, designed to prevent bore damage during winter freezing. F. Stakes and Guys: Provide stakes and deadmen of sound, new hardwood, treated softwood, or redwood, free of knot holes and other defects. Provide wire ties and guys of 2-strand, twisted, pliable galvanized iron wire not lighter than 12 ga. with zinc-coated turnbuckles. Provide not less than 1/2" hose, cut to required lengths to protect tree trunks from damage by wires. 2.07 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL A. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful !.>r toxic to pleint growth. B. Mix specified soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates specified. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. "Schedule of Plantfng Soil Mixture Requirements" is scheduled on the drawings. C. For pit and trench type baddill, mix planting soil prior to backfilling, and stockpile at site. . 95-052/12-95 LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - 5 D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION For planting beds, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting. . I. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing of fertilizer. 2. Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid-loving plants. 3. Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer (other than that constituting a portion of complete fertilizers) directly to subgrade before applying planting soil and tilling. A. Preparation for Planting Lawns: B. Planters: 95-052/12-95 1. Loosen subgrade of lawn areas to a minimum depth of 4". Remove stones over 1-1/2" in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish and other extraneous matter. Limit preparation to areas which wilI be planted promptly after preparation. a. Spread planting soil mixture to minimum depth of 2 inches required to meet lines, grades and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. b. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of planting soil required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil. c. Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded. Grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake and remove ridges and filI depressions, as required to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted immediately after grading. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. Restore lawn areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting. Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas that have not been altered or disturbed by excavating, grading, or stripping operations, prepare soil for lawn planting as follows: TilI to a depth of not less than 6"; apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers as specified; remove high areas and fill in depressions; tilI soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture, free of lumps, clods, stones, roots and other extraneous matter. a. Prior to preparation of unchanged areas, remove existing grass, vegetation and turf. Dispose of such material outside of Owner's property; do not turn into soil being prepared for lawns. . 2. 3. 4. 5. I. Place not less than 4" layer of gravel in bottom of planters and fill with planting soil mixture. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation 1-1/2" below top of planter alIowing for natural settlement. . LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - 6 . C. 3.02 PLANTING Excavation for Trees and Shrubs: 1. Excavate pits, beds and trenches ,with vertical sides and with bottom of excavaii6n slightly raised at center to provide proper drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation. a. For balled and burlapped (B&B trees and shrubs), make excavations at least half again as wide as the ball diameter and equal to the ball depth, plus following alIowance for setting of ball on a layer of compacted backfilI: b. Al10w for 3" setting layer of planting soil mixture. c. For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled 14 and burlapped stock, adjusted to size of container width and depth. 2. Disposei of subsoil removed from landscape excavations. Do not mix with planting: soil or use as backfill. 3. Fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and al10w to percolate out before planting, A. Planting Trees and Shrubs: . . 95-052/12-95 1. Set bal1ed and burlapped (B&B) stock on layer of compacted planting soil mixture, plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of balI at same elevation as adjacent fmished landscape grades. Remove burlap from sides of balls; retain on bottoms. When set, place additional backfil1 around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfilI and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing I final layer of backfill. Set container grown stock as specified for balled and burlapped stock, except cut cans on 2 sides with an approved can cutter; remove bottoms of wooden boxes after partial backfilling so as not to damage roots bal1s. Dish top:of backfill to alIow for mulching. Mulch pits, trenches and planted areas. Provide not less than folIowing thickness of mulc~ and work into top of backfilI and finish level with adjacent finish grades. . a.' Provide 3" thickness of mulch. Prune,. thin out and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise'directed by Architect, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured j. . or deacl ~ranches from flowering trees, if any. Prune shrubs to retain natural character 'and accomplish their use in the landscape design. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper ,pruning. Wrap tree trunks of 2" caliper and larger. start at ground and cover trunk to height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper; pruning -.and insect infestation and take corrective measures before wrapping. Guy and stake trees immediately after planting, as indicated. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - 7 B. Seeding New Lawns: . 1. Do not use wet seed or seed which is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. Sow seed using a spreader or seeding machine. Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mi. per hr. Distribute seed evenly over entire area by sowing equal quantity in 2 directions at right angles to each other. Sow not less than the quantity of seed specified or scheduled. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8" of soil, rolI lightly, and water with a fine spray. Protect seeded slopes against erosion with erosion netting or other methods acceptable to the Architect. Protect seeded areas against erosion by spreading specified lawn mulch after completion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly to form a continuous blanket not less than 1-1/2" loose measurement over seeded areas. a. Anchor mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at the rate of 10 to 13 galIons per 1000 sq. ft. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of construction or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C. Sodding New Lawns: 1. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod if ground is frozen. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. a. Anchor sod on slopes with wood pegs to prevent slippage. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting. . 2. 3. D. Reconditioning Existing Lawns: 95-052/12-95 I. Reconditioning existing lawn areas damaged by Contractor's operations including storage of materials and equipment and movement of vehicles. Also recondition existing lawn areas where minor regrading is required. 2. Provide fertilizer, seed or sod and soil amendments as specified for new lawns and as required to provide a satisfactorily reconditioned lawn. Provide new topsoil as required to fill low spots and meet new finish grades. 3. Cultivate bare and compacted areas thoroughly to provide a satisfactory planting bed. 4. Remove diseased and unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury into soil. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations including oil drippings, stone, gravel and other loose building materials. 5. Where substantial lawn remains (but is thin), mow, rake, aerate if compacted, fil1 low spots, remove humps and cultivate soil, fertilize, and seed. Remove weeds before seeding or if extensive, apply selective chemical weed killers as required. Apply a seedbed mulch, if required, to maintain moist condition. 6. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new grass is established. . LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - 8 . E. Planting Ground Gover: 1. 2. Space plants as shown or scheduled. Dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots and backfill with planting soil. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. Water thoroughly after planting,-taking care not to cover crowns of plants with wet soils. Mulch areas between ground cover plants; place not less than 3" thick. 3. F. Miscel1aneous Landscape Work: 1. Install wood headers and edgings where shown. Anchor with wood stakes spaced not more than 3' o.c., and drive at least I" below top elevation of header or edging. Use 2 galvanized nails per stake to fasten headers and edging, and clinch point of ' each nail. 2. Install steel edging where shown. Anchor with wood stakes spaced not more than 3' o.c., and driven at least I" below top elevation of edging. 3. Place mulch beds where shown. Compact soil subgrades before placing mulch. a. Place 8-mil carbonated polyethylene plastic film over compacted subgrade prior to placing mulch. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. B. Maintain trees, shrubs and other plants until final acceptance but in no case less than 60 days after substantial completion of planting. . C. Maintain trees, shrubs and other plants by pruning, cultivating and weeding as required for healthy growth. ~estore planting saucers. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrUbs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. D. Maintain laWIis not less than the period stated below, and longer as required to establish an acceptable lawn. 1. Seeded lawns, not less than 60 days after substantial completion; 2. SQdded Itwns, not less than 30 days after substantial completion. E. Maintain lawns - byiwateririg, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, r~grading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of erodbd or bare areas. - - - 3.04 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscape~orkand'rriaterials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other coritracto~ and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace damaged landscape work as directed. . 95-052/12-95 LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - 9 3.05 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, Architect will, upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability. . B. Where inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Architect and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site. END OF SECTION 02480 . . 95-052/12-95 LANDSCAPE WORK 02480 - 10 . SECTION 02511 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL \.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. , 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes provisions for hot-mixed asphalt paving over prepared subbase. B. Prepared subbase is specified in another Division 2 section. C. Proof rolling of prepared subbase is included in this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit th'e folIowing in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. . B. Material Certificates signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. '\.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F (lOdeg C) and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (2 deg C) for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture. B. Construct hot-mixed asphalt surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air temperature is above 30 deg F (-1 deg C) and rising. C. Grade Control: . Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MA TERlALS A. General: Use locally available materials and gradations that exhibit a satisfactory record of previous installations. I. ' B. Coarse Aggregate; Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly cured crushed blast furnace slag, complying with ASTM D 692-88. . 95-052/12-95 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 1 c. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, properly cured blast furnace slag, gravel, or combinations thereof, complying with ASTM D 1073. . D. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration-graded material. E. Prime Coat: Cut-back asphalt type, ASTM D 2027; MC-30, MC-70 or MC-250. F. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt; ASTM D 977. G. Herbicide Treatment: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection Agency. Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. I. A vailable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: a. Ciba-Geigy Corp. b. Dow Chemical U.S.A. c. E.!. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Inc. d. FMC Corp. e. Thompson-Hayward Chemical Co. r. U.S. Borax and Chemical Corp. H. Lane Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed complying with AASHTO M 248, Type!. . I. Color: White. 2. Color: Yellow. I. Wheel Stops: 2500 psi (17.2 MPa) compressive strength precast, air-entrained concrete, approximately 6 inches (150 mm) high, 9 inches (225 mm) wide, and 84 inches (2130 mm) long. Provide chamfered comers and drainage slots on underside. 2.02 ASPHAL T-AGGREGA TE MIXTURE A. Provide plant-mixed, hot-laid asphalt-aggregate mixture complying with ASTM D 3515 and as recommended by local paving authorities to suit project conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before applying herbicide treatment or prime coat. B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. 95-052/12-95 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 2 . . C. Notify Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions.' Do -not begin paving work until deficient sUbb,ase areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. D. Herbicide Treatment: Apply chemical weed control agent in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommended dosages and application instructions. Apply to compacted, dry subbase prior to application of prime coat. E. Prime Coat: Apply at rate of 0.20 to 0.50 gallons per sq. yd. (0:9 to 2.3 liters per sq. m), over compacted subgrade. Apply material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile. F. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or Portland cement cOncrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into hot-mixed asphalt pavement. Distribute at rate of 0.05 to ,0.15 gaIlons per sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 liters per sq. m) of surface. G. Al10w to dry until at proper condition to receive paving. H. Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid smearing of adjoining concrete surfaces. Remove and clean damaged surfaces. 3.02 PLACING MIX A. General: Place hot-mixed asphalt mixture on prepared surface, spread, and strike off. Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Place areas inaccessible to equipment by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-section, and compacted thickness. . B. Paver Placing: Place in strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete base course for a section before placing surface course. C. Immediately correct surface irregularities in finish course behind paver. Remove excess material forming high spots with shovel or lute. D. Joints:. Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work, to ensure continuoUs bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of hot-mixed asphalt course. Cleari contact surfaces and. app ly' tack coat. 3.03 ROLLING A. General: Begin: rolliIi"g when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. . , B. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate cOmpactors in areas inaccessible to raIlers. . " , i . C. Breakdown Rolling: Acc'omplish breakdown or initial rolling iIDmediately foIlowing roIling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by:loosening and filling, if required, with hot material. . 95-052/12-95 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 3 D. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted. . E. finish Rolling: Perform fmish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained 95 percent laboratory density. F. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot hot-mixed asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.04 TRAFFIC AND LANE MARKINGS A. Cleaning: Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. B. Striping: Use chlorinated-rubber base traffic lane-marking paint, factory-mixed, quick- drying, and nonbleeding. C. Do not apply traffic and lane marking paint until layout and placement have been verified with Architect. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide minimum 12 to 15 mils (0.3 to 0.4 mm) dry thickness. . 3.05 WHEEL STOPS A. General: Secure wheel stops to hot-mixed asphalt surface with not less than two 3/4 inch (\ 9 mm) diameter galvanized steel dowels embedded in precast concrete at 1/3 points. Size length of dowel to penetrate at least 1/2 hot-mixed asphalt depth. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Testing in-place hot-mixed asphalt courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness will be done by Owner's testing laboratory. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Engineer. B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness tested in accordance with ASTM D 3549 will not be acceptable if exceeding following allowable variations: I. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (\3 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). C. Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each hot-mixed asphalt course for smoothness, using 10 feet (3 m) straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to 95-052/12-95 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 4 . . centerline of paved area. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness: 1. Base Course Surface: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Wearing Course Surface: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm). D. Check surface areas at intervals as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION 02511 . . 95-052/12-95 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 5 . SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior portland cement concrete paving for the following: I. Roadways. 2. Parking lots. 3. Curbs arid gutters. 4. Walkways. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for sub grade preparation, grading and subbase course. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete. , Division 7 Section "Paving Joint Sealants" for joint fillers and sealants within concrete I,'aving and at joints with adj acent construction. 2. . 3. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Engineer. C. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of ~aterials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circUmstances warrant adjustments. D. Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design tests. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE. A. Concrete Standards: Comply with provisions of the following standards, except where more stringent requirem~ntsare indicated. . 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - I 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. " ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." . 2. 3. B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materials evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. D. Field-Constructed Mockup: Cast mockup of size indicated or as required to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. I, When Engineer determines that mockup does not meet requirements, demolish and remove it from the site and cast another until the mockup is accepted. 2. Keep accepted mockup undisturbed during construction as a standard for judging completed paving. Undamaged mockup may be incorporated into the Work. 3, Demolish accepted mockup and remove from site when directed by Engineer. E, Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division I Section "Project Meetings" and the following: 1. Before installing portland cement concrete paving, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Engineer, consultants, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities to review requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days before conference. . 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 I FORMS A Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. I. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100-foot or less radius. B, Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-release agent with a maximum of 350 gIL volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2 . . B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775 with ASTM A 615, Grade 60 deformed steel bars. C. Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. I. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acCeptable to Architect. E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497. F. Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or clip-assembled steel bar mats, ASTM A 184. Use ASTM A 615, Grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs, H. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775 with ASTM A 615, Grade 60 plain steel bars. 1. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt joint assembly,to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. J. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. . I. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal rurmers where base material will not support chair legs, 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS. , A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. I. Use one 'brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. ' Fly Ash: ASTM C P 18, Type F. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4, and as follows. Provide aggregates from a single source. ~ : I. Maximum; Aggregate Size: 1-112 inches. 2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 3. LocaLaggfegates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect. D. Water: Potable. . 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 3 2.04 ADMIXTURES . A. Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D, High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. G. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.05 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. 2. 3. Waterproof paper. Polyethylene film. White burlap-polyethylene sheet. . C. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A or B, wax free. D. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L. E. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. F. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: a. Clear Cure; Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. b. Spartan-Cote; The Burke Co. c. All Resin; Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. d. Sealco 309; Cormix Construction Chemicals. e. Day-Chem Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corp. 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4 . . . 2. f. Diamond Clear; Euclid Chemical Co. g. #64 Resin Cure-Clear; Lambert Corp. h. L&M Cure R; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 1. Masterkure; Master Builders, Inc. J. ' 3100 Series; WR Meadows, Inc. k. Seal N Kure; Metalcrete Industries. I. . Kure-N-Seal; Sonneborn-Chemrex. m. 'Horn Clear Seal; TanunslAC. Horn. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: a. Clear Cure Water Base; Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. b. ' Spartan Cote WB; The Burke Co. c. w.E. Resin Cure; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. d. :Sealco VOC; Cormix Construction' Chemicals. e. Safe Cure and Seal (J-18); Dayton Superior Corp. f. 'Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co. . g. lAqua Kure-Clear; Lambert Corp. h. Dress & Seal #22 WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 1.,Masterkure 100W; Master Builders, Inc. J. 1100 Clear Series; w.R. Meadows, Inc. k. :Metcure; Metalcrete Industries. I. Kure-N-Seal WB; Sonneborn-Chemrex. m. Horncure 100; Tanuns/AC. Horn. Evaporation Control: a. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co. c. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc. e. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries. 3. 2.06 RELATED MATERIALS A Boiled Linseed Oil Mixture: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying with AASHTO M-233. B. Traffic Paint: Alkyd-resin ready-mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type S. I. Color: White. 2. Color: Yellow. 3. ' Color: Blue. . , C. Nonslip Aggregate, Finish: Fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as the abrasive aggregate for a..nonslip finish, with emery, aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric. oxide. Use material that is factory- graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. : D. Dry-Shake Color Hardener:' Packaged dry combination of materials consisting of portland cement, graded q~artZ aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture. . Use coloring pigments that are fmely ground nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturers' standards, unless indicated otherwise. . 95-052/12-95 PORTLANDCEMENTCONCRETEPAVTNG 02520 - 5 E. Bonding Agent: Acrylic or styrene butadiene. . F. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit requirements. G. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.07 CONCRETE MIX A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 1. Do not use the Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency. 2. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent of cement content by weight. B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: l. 2. 3. Compressive Strength (28-Day): 4000 psi. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.40. Slump Limit at Point of Placement: 3 inches. a. Slump limit for concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site- verified 2-to-3-inch slump concrete. . C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-112 percent: I. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2- inch maximum aggregate. D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 2.08 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94. I. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-112 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes, 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 6 . . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete, 3.02 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances: I. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT . A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement ofloose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace' splices .with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. E. Install fabricated qar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats. 3.04 JOINTS , A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless iridicated otherwise. , ' . 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVINGa02520 - 7 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless indicated otherwise. . B, Contraction Joints: Provide weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and fInishing each edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut l!8-inch-wide joints into hardened concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before development of random contraction cracks. 3. Inserts: Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strips into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with paving surface. Radius each joint edge with a jointer tool. Carefully remove strips or caps of two-piece assemblies after concrete has hardened. Clean groove of loose debris. C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless indicated otherwise. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving unless indicated. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. . 2. 3. 4. D. Expansion Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. I. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 25 feet, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 112 inch or more than 1 inch below fInished surface where joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface when no joint sealant is required, 3. Furnish joint fIllers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. E. Installation of joint fillers and sealants is specified in Division 7 Section "Paving Joint Sealants, " F. Insta1l dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 8 . : I; . 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items t6 be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcing before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on surfaces that are frozen. C. Moisten subbase 'to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and aligriment. D. Comply with reqUirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag conc~ete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. I. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. F. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R. . I. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. H. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a smooth surface pl!me before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb con~rete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. . I. Curbs and GutterS: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised rillx design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete. ,1. Slip-Form Pavers: ; When automatic machine placement is used for paving, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce paving to required thickness; lines, grades, fInish, and jointing as required for formed paving. I. Compact Subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations. . ~ . . 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 9 K. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength. . L. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. I. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. M. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot weather conditions exist. 1. Cool ingredients before rruxmg to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option, Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and sub grade just before placing concrete. Keep sub grade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. . 2, 3. 3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture. I. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform gritty texture finish. B. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface fInishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 114 inch. 3.07 SPECIAL FINISHES A. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate fInish to paving surfaces indicated. 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 10 . . 1. After completing float finish, uniformly spread 25 Ib of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone, and water to eXpose nonslip aggregate: 2. B. Dry-Shake Color Hardener Finish: Apply a dry-shake color hardener fmish to indicated paving surfaces as follows: 1. Uniformly apply dry-shake materials at a rate of 100 Ib per 100 sq. ft., unless a greater ~ount is recommended by material manufacturer. 2. Immediately following the first floating operation, uniformly distribute approximately 2/3 of the dry-shake material over the concrete surface with a mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. FolIow the floating operation with a setond shake application, uniformly distributing the remainder of the dry- shake material to ensure uniform color, and embed by power floating. 3. After fmal floating, apply a light hand-trowel finish followed by a broom fmish to concrete. Cure concrete with a curing compound recommended by the dry-shake material manufacturer. Apply the curing compound immediately after fmal finishing. 3.08 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing. . B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and dl\ring finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating. C. Begin curing afterfmishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods;-.Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture :Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the follo~g materials: a. .' Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover ~ncrete surfaces and edges with a 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. . , I 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for. curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped atileast 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any; holes or tears during curing period using cover' material and waterproof tape. '. ~ ' 3: Cui-ingC9mpound: ' Apply uniformly in ,continuous operation by. power spray or roller acCording to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy . 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - II rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. . E. Boiled Linseed Oil Treatment: Apply boiled linseed oil mixture no sooner than 28 days after placement to clean dry concrete surfaces free of oil, dirt, or other foreign material. Apply in 2 sprayed applications at rate of 40 sq. yd. per gallon for the fIrst application and 60 sq. yd. per gallon for the second application. Allow complete drying between applications. 3.09 TRAFFIC PAINT A. Traffic Paint: Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a 15-mi1 minimum wet film thickness. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A. The Owner will employ a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include the following: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete, c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength speclDlens. d, Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required. e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than fIve strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. . 2. B. T est results will be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 12 . . strength at 28 days, concrete mix' proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for 7-day, 14-day, and 28-day tests. C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. D. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to detennine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. . END OF SECTION 02520 . 95-052/12-95 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 13 . SECTION 02665 WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water systems piping for potable water service and fire protection service outside the, building. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 15 Sections for rITe protection systems inside buildiDg, ' 2. Division 15 Sections for water distribution systems inside building. C. . Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site and ready for installation. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS . A. Minimum Working Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, the following are minimum pressure requirements for water system piping. 1. UndergroUnd Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 2. Underground Piping, Downstream of Fire Department Connections: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data, inc1~ding pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models for the following: 1 I. Water meters. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Valves. i " 4. Fire hydrapts. 5. Fire depaJ1ment connections. 6. Yard hydrants. . 7. Identification materials and devices. . 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - I I C. Shop drawings for precast concrete pits. Include frames and covers. Include drains when indicated. . D, Shop drawings for cast-in-place concrete valve and meter pits. Include frames and covers. Include drains when indicated. E. Wiring diagrams for alarm devices. F. Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations and elevations. Include details of underground structures, connections, anchors, and reaction backing. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from water system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. G. Record drawings at Project closeout of installed water system piping and products according to Division I Section "Project Closeout." H. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3. I. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division I Section "Project Closeout." Include data for the following: I. Water meters. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Valves. 4. Fire hydrants, 5. Yard hydrants. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A Comply with requirements of utility supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. B. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fIre protection systems. Include materials, hose threads, installation, and testing. C. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable water piping and plumbing systems. Include materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. D. Comply with NFP A 24 "Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances" for materials, installations, tests, and flushing. E. Comply with NFP A 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated devices. F. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards. G. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defmed in "National Electrical Code," Article 100. 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 2 . . 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defmed in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. H. Product Options: Water systems specialties and accessories are based on specific types, manufacturers, and models indicated. ComponentS by other manufacturers but having equal performance characteristics may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions, operation, and other characteristics do not change design concept or intended performance as judged by Architect. The burden of proof of equality of products is on Contractor, Refer to Division I Section "Product Substitutions." 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, for shipping as follows: 1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. B. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, during storage: I. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew point temperature. Support valves off ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary. C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. . D. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. E. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside. F. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt, G. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located. B. Verify that water system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards. . 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 3 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING . A Coordinate cormection to water main with utility company. B. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of building fire protection systems piping. C. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of building water distribution systems piping. D. Coordinate with other utility work. E. Coordinate electrical requirements of actual equipment furnished with requirements specified in Division 16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 95-052/12-95 1. Drilling Machine Corporation Stops: a. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. b. Hays Div., Romac Industries. c. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. Bronze Corporation Stops and Valves: a. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. b. Hays Div., Romac Industries. c. AY. McDonald Mfg. Co. d. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. T apping Valves: a. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. c. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. d. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. e. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. Gate Valves: a. American Darling Valve Div., American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. c. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. d. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. e. Hammond Valve Corp. f. Kermedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. g. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. h. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. 1. Nibco, Inc. J. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. k. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. I. Waterous Co. . 2. 3. 4. WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 4 . . 5, Indicator Posts and Indicator Gate Valves: a. American Darling Valve Div., American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. c. . Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, ~nc. d. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. e. Nibco, Inc. f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. g. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. h. Waterous Co. 6. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: a. American Darling Valve Div., American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. c. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. d. ' Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. e. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. f. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. g. Waterous Co. 7. Wet-B~el Fire Hydrants: a. Clow Valve Co. Div., ofMcWane, Inc. b. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. 8. Water Meters: a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Carlon Meter Co., Inc. c. Hays Div., Romac Industries. d. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp. e. Kent Meters, Inc. . f. i Neptune Water Div., Schlumberger Industries, Inc. g. Sensus Technologies, Inc., BTR Co. h. : Water Specialties Corp. 9. Detector-Type Water Meters: a. ' Badger Meter, Inc. b. ; Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp. c. Neptune Water Div., Schlumberger Industries, Inc. d. Sensus Technologies, Inc. 10. Drains: a. , Ancon, Inc. b. , Jones Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. ,Josam Co. d. , Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc.' e. " Wade Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp.. f. Zum Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. 11. Detector'Check Valves: a. i Ariles Co., Inc. b. ; Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp. c. ; KerinedyValve Div., McWane, Inc. d. i Vikillg Corp. e. : Watts RegulatorCo. 12. Backflow Preventers: a. : AmesCo., Inc. b. .! Cia-Val Co. Div., Griswold Industries. . c. .; Conbraco Industries, Inc. . 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 5 13. d. Febco. e. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp. f. Watts Regulator Co. g. Wilkins Regulator Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. Sanitary- Type Yard Hydrants: a. Murdock, Inc. Post- Type Yard Hydrants: a. Ancon, Inc, b. Jones Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Josam Co. d. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co, Div., Smith Industries, Inc, e. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp. f. Woodford Mfg. Co. Div., WCM Industries, Inc. g. Zurn Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. Fire Department Connections: a. Badger-Powhatan, Figgie International Co. b. Croker Div., Fire-End and Croker Corp, c. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. d. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. e. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. g. Potter-Roemer Div., Smith Industries, Inc. h. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. i. Sierra Fire Equipment Co. Alarm Devices: a. Gamewell Co. b. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. c. Potter Electric Signal Co. d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. e. System Sensor Div., Pittway Corp, f. Victaulic Co. of America. g. Watts Regulator Co, Grooved Couplings for A WW A Ductile-Iron Piping: a. Gustin-Bacon Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid" Tyler Corp. b. Victaulic Co. of America. . . 14. 15. 16. 17. 2.02 PIPES AND TUBES A. Refer to Part 3 Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and tube materials specified below are used. B. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Classes 150,200, and 250. I. Lining: A WW A C 1 04, cement mortar, seal coated. 2. Gaskets, Glands, and Bolts and Nuts: A WW A C Ill. 3. Push-On-Joint- Type Pipe: A WW A C III, rubber gaskets. 4. Mechanical-Joint- Type Pipe: A WW A C III, rubber gaskets, ductile- or cast-iron glands, and steel bolts and nuts. C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L (ASTM B 88M, Types A and B), seamless water tube, annealed temper. 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 6 . . D. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC) Pipe: A WW A C900; Classes 150 and 200; with bell end and e1astomeric gasket, with plain end for cast-iron or ductile-iron fittings, or with plain end for PVC elastomeric gasket fittings. 1. 2. " I, Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pvc cto only." , Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. '1:' '" E. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: A WW A C90S, 200-psig (1380-kPa) rniIiimum working pressure, with beil end and elastomeric gasket for PVC elastomeric gasket fittings. , , 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pvc cto only." F. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." G. Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2662; SIDR15 and SIDRII.5. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." H. Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Tubing: A WW A C902 or ASTM D 2666; SDR13.5. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF -pw" or "NSF -pvc cto only." 1. , Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing: A WW A C901, PE Compound Numbers required; with DR 9 for 12S-psig (860-kPa) pressure rating and DR 7 for 160-psig (1100- kPa) pressure rating. . 1. Pipe Mar;king: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." 1. Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2239, PE Compound Numbers required; with SIDR IS for I 35-psig (930-kPa) pressure rating and SIDR 11.5 for 170-psig (1170-kPa) pressure rating; at 100 deg F (38 deg C). 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." 2.03 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Refer to Part 3 'Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and tube fitting materi~s specified below are used. , B. Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Pipe Fittings: A WW A CliO, ductile-iron or cast-iron, 250-psig (\ 725-kPa) minimum pressure rating; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact fittings, 350- psig (2400-kPa) pressure rating. ' ., 1. Lining: AWWA CI04, cement mortar. 2. Gaskets: A WW A C Ill, rubber. C. Ductile-Iron Pipe, Grooved-End Fittings:' ASTM A 47 malleable-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron, A WW?\-pipe-size, grooved-end fittings having cement lining or Food and Drug . 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 7 Administration (FDA)-approved interior coating, designed to accept A WW A C606 couplings, for A WW A-size grooved-end piping joints. . D. Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings: A WWA ClIO, 250-psig (I 725-kPa) minimum pressure rating, with A WW A C I 04 cement -mortar lining, E. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends conforming to AWWA ClIO or AWWA C153. Units have 2 gasketed ball-joint sections and I or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure and with FDA-approved epoxy interior coating, for offset and expansion indicated. F. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends conforming to AWWA CliO or AWWA C153. Units rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure, and with cement lining or FDA-approved epoxy interior coating, for up to 20 degrees (0.34 rad) deflection. G. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: 3-piece assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron bell-and-spigot end sections conforming to AWWA CliO or AWWA C153. Units rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure, and with cement lining or FDA-approved epoxy interior coating, for expansion indicated. H, Polyethylene Encasement: A WW A C 1 05, 8-mils (2 nun) minimum thickness, tube or sheet. I. Copper Tube Fittings: ASME BI6.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. J Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC) Pipe Couplings and Fittings: AWWA C900, with ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal gaskets, . K. Polyvinyl CWoride (pVC) Plastic, Schedule 80, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2467. \. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." L. Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC) Plastic, Schedule 40, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2466. I. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF -pw" or "NSF -pvc cto only." M. Polyvinyl CWoride (pVC) Pipe Fittings: Schedule 40 socket-type, solvent cement joint, or elastomeric gasketed joint. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. N. Cast-Brass Fittings for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Pipe: Flare, compression, or barbed, insert- type fittings; made to PB pipe and tube dimensions. 0, Molded Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket-type and butt- fusion type, made to PE pipe dimensions. 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 8 . . P. Cast-Brass Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe: Compression fittings or flare fittings, made to PE pipe dimensions. Q. Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2609, insert-type, with serrated end or threaded ends as required, and with corrosion-resistant bands or corrosion-resistant cnmp rmgs. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where joining materials specified below are used. , B. Ductiie-Iron Pipe and Ductile-Iron or Cast-Iron Fittings: The following materials apply: I. Push-On Joints: A WW A C III rubber gaskets and lubricant. 2. Mechanical Joints: A WW A C III ductile-iron or gray-iron glands, high-strength steel boltS and nuts, and rubber gaskets. 3. Flanged 'Joints: AWWA CI15 ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts. a. Gaskets: Rubber, flat face; 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick except where other thickness is indicated; and full-face or ring type except where other type is indicated. b. Flange Bolts and N~ts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other . material is indicated. C. Couplings for Grooved-End Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings: A WWA C606, consisting of ASTM A 536 ductile-iron housing having enamel fInish, with synthetic-rubber gasket having central-cavity, pressure-responsive design, with ASTM A 183 carbon-steel bolts and nuts to secure grooved piPe and fIttings and gasket suitable for hot water, except where otherwise indicated. I . , . D. Brazing Filler Metals: A WS A5.8, BCuP (copper-phosphorus) Series. E. Solder Filler: Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95; tin (approximately 95 percent), silver (approximately 4.5, percent), with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. ' F. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Alloy Sn94, or Alloy E; tin (approximately 95 percent), silveY; or copper (approximately 5 percent), with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. G. Primers for PVC P~ping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM F 656. H. Solvent Cement fo~PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM D 2564. ,1. Pipe Couplings: ~on-bodysleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined. I. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTMA 47, Grade 32510, or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts andNuts: AWWA Clll. . 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 9 5. 6. Finish: Enamel paint. Encasement: A WW A C 1 05, polyethylene film tube or sheet. . 1. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated. 2,05 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Flexible Pipe Connectors for Non-Ferrous Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-tube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends; brazed to hose. B. Flexible Pipe Connectors for Ferrous Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless- steel wire braid; with ASME B 1.20.1 threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B 16.5 steel pipe flanges; welded to hose. C. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and corrosion. 2.06 VALVES 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end types and matching piping system materials. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, designed for 250-psig (I 725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating material isolating dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to ASME BI.20.1, Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150-psig (l035-kPa) or 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum pressure to suit system pressures. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150-psig (1035-kPa) or 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel couplings having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves 3 Inches (ON 80) and Larger: AWWA C509, resilient seated; bronze stem, cast-iron or ductile-iron body and bonnet, stem nut, 200-psig (1380-kPa) working pressure, mechanical joint ends. B. Rising Stem Gate Valves, 3 Inches (ON 80) and Larger: AWWA C509, resilient seated; cast-iron or ductile-iron body and bonnet, OS&Y, bronze stem, 200-psig (1380-kPa) working pressure, flanged ends. 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 10 . . C. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves, 2 Inches (ON 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; body and screw bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with Class 125 threaded ends, solid wedge, nonrising copper-silicon all~y stem, brass packing gland, polytetrafluoroethylene (pTFE)-impregnated packing, and malleable-iron handwheel. D. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box having top section and cover with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches (124 mm) in diameter, and adjustable cast-iron extension oflength required for depth of bury of valve. I. Provide a steel tee-handle operating wrench with each valve box. Wrench shall have teeihandle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and socket- fitting valve-operating nut. E. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FM-approved, vertical type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of bury of valve. F. Curb Stops: Br~nze body, ground key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet to match service piping material. G. Service Boxes for Curb Stops: Cast-iron box with telescoping top section oflength required for depth of bury of valve. Include cover having lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base of size to fit over curb stop and barrel approximately 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter. I. Provide ,steel tee-handle shutoff rod with each service box. Shutoff rod shall have tee handle with I pointed end, stem of length to operate curb stop, and slotted end fitting curb stop head. . H. Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Complete assembly, including tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and bolts and nuts. Use sleeve and valve compatible with tapping machine. I, Tapping'Sleeve: Cast-iron or ductile-iron 2-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new 'branch connection, Sleeve may have mechanical- joint ends with rubber gaskets or sealing rings in sleeve body. Use sleeve that mates with size and type pipe material being tapped. Outlet flange shall be size required for branch connection. 2.07 WATER METERS . A. General: Provideiwater meter with registration in gallons (Iitres). B. ' Detector~Type Water Meter:' AWWA C703, UL-listed, FM-approved, main line, proportional type': 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure, with meter on bypass. I. Bypass Meter: A WW A C702, compound type, bronze case; size not less than one- half the nominal size of the main line meter. C. Detector-Type W~ter Meter: AWWA C703, UL-listed, FM-approved, main line turbine type, I 75-psig (1200-kPa) working pressure, with strainer, and meter on bypass. , 1. Bypas~ ~eter: AWWA C701, turbine type, bronze case; not less than 2-inch (50- mm) size. . 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - II D. Water Meter: A WW A C704, propeller type. . E. Water Meter: AWWA C710, displacement type, plastic main case. F. Remote Registration System: Utility company standard. Include meter modified with self- generating transmitter, low-voltage connecting wiring, totalizing device, and remote wall register. G. Meter Box: Cast-iron body, cast-iron cover having lettering "WATER METER," and base section of length to fit over service piping. Base section is open at bottom, slotted, and may be cast iron, polyvinyl cWoride (PVC), or piece of clay or other pipe. 2.08 PITS A. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). I. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Reinforcement: Steel conforming to the following: 1. Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615, Grade 400), deformed. c. Ladder: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), steel or polyethylene-encased steel steps. . D. Manhole: ASTM A 48, Class 35, gray-iron, 24-inch (61O-mm) minimum diameter traffic frame and cover, of size and weight indicated. E. Manhole: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron, 24-inch (610-mm) minimum diameter traffic, frame and cover, of size and weight indicated. ) F. Drain: ASME A112.21.1M, cast-iron area drain, of size indicated. Include body anchor flange, light-duty cast-iron grate, bottom outlet, and integral or field-installed bronze ball or clapper-type backwater valve. 2.09 FIRE HYDRANTS A. General: Cast-iron body, compression-type valve, opening against pressure and closing with pressure, 6-inch (ON 150) mechanical joint inlet, 150-psig (l035-kPa) working pressure. B. Outlet Threads: NFP A 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast-iron caps with steel chains. C. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) point to flat. D, Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to the left, or counterclockwise. 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 12 . . E. Finish: Red exterior alkyd gloss enamel paint. F. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: UL 246, FM-approved, two 2-1/2-inch (ON 65) and one 4-\12- inch (ON 115) outlets, 5-\l4-inch (133 mm) niain valve, drain valve, and 6-inch (ON 150) mechanical joint inlet. G. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: AWWA C502, two 2-\l2-inch (ON 65) and one 4-\l2-inch (ON 115) outlets, 5-l/4-inch (133 mm) main valve, drain valve, and 6-inch (DN 150) mechanical joint inlet. H. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: UL 246, FM-approved, two 2-1/2-inch (DN 65) and one 4-\12- inch (ON 115) oll:tlets, 6-inch (ON 150) threaded or flanged inlet, and base section with 6- inch (ON 150) mechanical joint inlet. I. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: AWWA C503, two 2-1/2-inch (ON 65) and one 4-I/2-inch (ON 115) outlets, 6-inch (ON 150) threaded or flanged inlet, and base section with 6-inch (ON 150) mechanical joint inlet. 2.10 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Exposed, SidewalJc Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body, with thread inlets according, to NFP A 1963 and matching local fire department hose threads, and threaded NPS bqttom outlet. Include lugged cap, gasket, and chain; lugged swivel connection and dr-;>p clapper for each hose connection inlet; 18-inch (460-mm)-high brass. sleeve; and round ~idewalk escutcheon plate. . 1. 2. 3. 4. Connections: Two 2-1/2-inch (DN 65) inlets and 6-inch (DN 150) outlet. Inlet Aligiunent: In line, horizontal. Finish InCluding Sleeve: Rough chrome plated. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." 2; II DETECTOR CHECK VALVES A. Detector Check Valves: UL 213, galvanized cast-iron body, bolted cover with air-bleed device for access ~to internal parts, and flanged ends; designed for 175 psig (1200-kPa) working pressure. Include I-piece bronze disc with bronze bushings, pivot, and replaceable seat. Include threaded bypass taps in the inlet and outlet for bypass meter connection. Set valve to allow Illinfrnal water flow through bypass meter when major water flow is required. I. Water Meter: A WW A C700, disc type, of size not less than one-fourth the size of detector c:heck valve. Include meter, bypass piping, gate valves, check valve, and connectiOI)S to detector check valve. ' 2.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. General: ASSE.Stlindard backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and , maximum pressure loss indicated. , 1. Working Pressure: 150 pSlg (1035 kPa) mtmmum except where indicated otherwise. ' , . 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 13 2. 3. 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with flanged ends. a, Interior Lining: FDA-approved epoxy coating for backflow preventers having cast-iron or steel body. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate when used in chrome-plated piping system. Strainer on inlet where strainer is indicated. . 4. 5. 6. B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventer: ASSE 1013, with OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve having ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous-pressure application. I. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum through middle third offlow range. C. Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1047, FM-approved or UL-listed, with OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include pressure-differential relief valve having ASME AI12.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves, test cocks, and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer, for continuous-pressure application. I. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum through middle third offlow range. 2.13 YARD HYDRANTS A. Yard Hydrants, Sanitary Type: Nonfreeze, post type, with nondraining chamber for storing water trapped downstream of inlet valve. Hydrants have I-inch (DN 25) inlet, integral or field-installed vacuum breaker with outlet conforming to ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose, brass or bronze casing, and other parts in contact with water, and are handle or key operated. Body of hydrant is of length required for installation of storage chamber below frost line. Furnish 2 keys for each key-operated hydrant. . 2.14 ANCHORAGES A. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506, steeL B. Rods: ASTM A 575, steel. C. Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197, malleable iron. D. Bolts: ASTM A 307, steeL E. Cast-Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron. F. Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). I. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed graveL 4. Water: Potable. 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 14 . . 2.15 ALARM DEVICES A. General: UL 753, FM-approved, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment. B. Water Flow Indicators: Vane-type waterflow detector, rated to 250 psi (1725 kPa); designed for horizontal or vertical installation; having 2 single pole, double throw (SPDT) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere 125 volts a.c. and 0.25 ampere 24 volts d.c.; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends a signal when cover is removed. C. Supervisory Switches: SPDT, designed to signal valve in other than full open position. D. Pressure Switches: SPOT, designed to signal increase in pressure. 2.16 IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." B. Metallic-Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK . A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING A. Extend water system piping and connect to water supply source and building water distribution and fire protection systems at outside face of the building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. I. Terminate water system piping at building wall until building water systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building water systems when those systems are installed. B. Water distribution systems and fire protection systems are specified in Division 15 Sections. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." C. Install restrained joints for buried piping within 60 inches (1500 mm) of building. Use restrained-joint pipe and fittings, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports at vertical and horizontal offsets. . 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 15 3.03 PIPING APPLICATIONS . A. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fittings products listed below. Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. Piping in pits and inside building may be joined with flanges or couplings, instead of joints indicated, for grooved-end A WW A-size piping. B. Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to following applications. I. 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: Copper tube, Type L (Type B), copper tube fittings, and soldered joints. 2. 2-1/2 Inches (65 DN) to 3-1/2 Inches (DN 90): Copper tube, Type L (Type B), copper tube fittings, and soldered joints. 3. 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) to 3-1/2 Inches (DN 90): Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (pVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40 PVC fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. 4 Inches (DN 100) to 8 Inches (DN 200): Class 200, ductile-iron pipe, ductile-iron or gray-iron fittings, and push-on or mechanical joints. 5. 10 Inches (DN 250) and Larger: Class 250, ductile-iron pipe, ductile-iron or gray- iron fittings, rubber gaskets, and push-on or mechanical joints. 3.04 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: I. Pit and Aboveground Installation, Valves 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: UL/FM, OS& Y gate valves. . 3.05 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Pipe and Fitting Joints: Cut-groove pipes. Assemble joints with grooved couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. B. Copper Tube and Fittings, Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to A WS "Brazing Manual," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." C. Copper Tube and Fittings, Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to A WS "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." D. AWWA Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Gasketed Joints: Use AWWA C900 joining materials. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions. E. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC) Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM D 2672 and ASTM D 2855. I. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM F 402 for safe handling when joining plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cements. 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 16 . . F. Polybutylene (PB) Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Construct joints with insert fittings according to fitting manufacfurer's written instructions. G. Polybutylene (PB) Piping and Brass-Fitting Joints: Construct joints with brass or bronze fittings according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. H. Polyethylene (PE) Pipe Heat-Fusion Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM D 3309 procedure for polybutylene piping heat-fusion joints and piping manufacturer's written instructions. I. Polyethylene (PE) Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Construct joints with insert fittings according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. J. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Construct joints using adapters that are compatible with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure. Refer to "Piping Systems - Common Requirements" Article for joining piping of dissimilar metals. 3.06 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS B. C. . D. E. F. G. A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. Install piping at indicated slope. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Install piping free of sags and bends. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. Install fittings for changes ip. direction and branch connections. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below. 1. Install Unions, in piping 2 inches (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having 2-inch (DN 50) or smaller threa9ed pipe Connection. ' 2. Install flanges, in piping 2-112 inches (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at fmal connection to each piece of equipment .having flanged pipe connection. 3. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals: 3.07 PIPING INSTALLATION '. 95-052/12-95 A. - Water Main Connection: Arrange for tap in water main, of size and in location indicated, .from water utility: WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 17 3.08 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A Anchorages: Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: . I. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron Piping: According to A WW A C600. 2, Gasketed-Joint, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: According to A WW A M23. 3, Fire Service Piping: According to NFP A 24. B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. 3.09 VALVE INSTALLATION A General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for 3-inch (80-mm) and larger buried installation. Use threaded- and flanged-end valves for installation in pits and inside building. Use nonrising stem UL/FM gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with ends compatible with piping, for 2-inch (50-nun) and smaller installation. B. AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves with stem pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. C.' UL/FM-Type Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. I. Install buried valves and valves in pits with stem pointing up and with vertical cast- iron indicator post, . D. Bronze Corporation Stops and Curb Stops: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install buried curb stops with head pointed up and with cast-iron curb box. 3.10 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION A A WW A- Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with A WW A M17. Install with gate valve and provision for. drainage as indicated, B. UL/FM- Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFP A 24. Install with gate valve and provision for drainage as indicated. 3.11 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS A Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's instructions and requirements. 3.12 PIT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A Construct pits of poured-in-place concrete or provide precast concrete pits of dimensions indicated, with manhole frame and cover, ladder, and drain. Include sleeves with waterproof mechanical sleeve seals for pipe entry and exit. 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 18 . . B. Connect area drain outlet to storm drain. Storm drainage is specified in Division 2 Section "Storm Sewerage. Ii 3.13 DETECTOR CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install detector check valves in pits for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter and check valve downstream from meter. B. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) minimum, portland-cement-mix concrete piers as indicated. 3.14 BACKFLOW PRE VENTER INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to plumbing and health department authorities having jurisdiction. B. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer. C. Do not install reduced-pressure-principle-type in pit. D. Support backflow preventers, valves, and piping on 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) nununum, portland-cement-mix concrete piers as indicated. 3.15 YARD HYDRANT INSTALLATION A. Install sanitary-type yard hydrants in pavement or with concrete anchor as indicated. . 3.16 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install fire department connections of types and features indicated in locations indicated. B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains and where indicated. 3.17 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with NFPA 26 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Buried valves with curb boxes do not require supervision. B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position. 1. Valves: Grind away a portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem depression, to OS& Y gate-valve yoke. 2. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post. C. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valve as follows: I. Valves: Install chains and padlocks on open OS& Y gate valves. 2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post. . 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 19 D. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrants. Install switches. E. Waterflow Indicators: Install in water service piping in pit. Select indicator having saddle and vane matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe. . F. Connect alarm devices to building fIre alarm system. Refer to Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for wiring and devices not specified in this Section. 3.18 IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape ,during back-filling of trench for underground water service piping. Locate 6 inches (150 mm) to 8 inches (200 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within above limits. . 3.20 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by that authority, use procedure described in A WW A C651 or as described below: a. Comply with NFP A 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. b. Fill system or part of system with waterlchlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve oft) system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. c. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with waterlchlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. d. Following allowed standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction: Repeat procedure if biological examination made by authority shows evidence of contamination. 95-052/12-95 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 20 . . B. . . 95-052/12-95 Prepare reports for purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION 02665 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 21 . SECTION 02700 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. ThIS Section includes sewerage and drainage systems outside the building. Systems include the following: I. Sanitary sewerage. 2. Storm drainage. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for. foundation drain connecting to storm drainage system. 2. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Systems" for building drains. . 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Drainage Piping: System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of storm drainage. B. Sewerage Piping: System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of sanitary sewage. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS , A. Gravity,Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure. 1.05 SUBMITIALS A. Genei-a1: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for the fol1owirig: I. Polymer-concrete,' channel drainage systems. 2. Stainless-stee!, trench drainage systems. 3. BackWater valves, cleanouts, and drains. 4. Storm-water disposill systems. . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 1 C. Shop drawings for precast concrete manholes and other structures. Include frames, covers, and grates. . D. Reports and calculations for design mixes for each class of cast-in-place concrete. E. Coordination drawings showing manholes and other structures, pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. 1. Sanitary sewerage. 2. Storm drainage. F. Inspection and test reports specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and storm drainage systems. B. Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and storm drainage systems. Include standards of water and other utilities where appropriate. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of system components and are based on specific manufacturer types indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions." . 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic structures in direct sunlight. B. Do not store plastic pipe or fittings in direct sunlight. C. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. D. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's rigging instructions. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide acceptable temporary utility services. 1. Notify Engineer not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 2 . . 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Architect's written permission. 1.09 SEQUENCING ,AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate sanitary sewerage system connections to Richmond County's sanitary sewer. 8.. Coordinate sanitary sewerage system connections to existing on-site sanitary sewer. C. Coordinate with interior building drainage systems. D. Coordinate with other utility work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering .' products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.02 PIPES AND FITIINGS A. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASlM A 74, service and extra-heavy classes, gray cast iron, for gasketed joints. .. 1. Gaskets: ASlM C 564, rubber, compression type, thickness to match class of pipe. B. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 301 or ASlM A 888, gray cast iron, for coupling joints. 1. Couplings: CISPI 310, corrugated, stainless-steel shield and clamp assembly, with ASlM C 564 rubber sealing sleeve. 2. Heavy-Dilty Couplings: ASlM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel housing and stainless-steel clamp assembly, with ASlM C 564 rubber sealing gasket. Include housings 3 inches(76 rom) wide in sizes 1-1/2 to 4 inches (40 to 100 rom) and 4 inches (102 mm) wide in sizes 5 to 10 inches (125 to 250mm). 3. Heavy-Duty Couplings: ASTM A48, cast-iron housing and stainless-steel bolt assembly, with ASlM C 564 rubber sealing gasket. C. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C 151, Class 150 minimum, for push-~n joints. 1. Standard-Pattern, Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Fittings: A WW A C 11 0, for push-on joints. 2. Compact-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A C 153, for push-on joints. 3. Pipe and Fitting Interior Coating: A WW A C 1 04, asphaltic-material seal coat, minimum'l-mil (0.025-mm) thickness. 4. Gaskets:. AwwA CIII, rubber. . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 3 D. Stainless-Steel Drainage Pipe and Fittings: Fabricated from ASTM A 240, Type 304, stainless steel. Include socket and spigot ends, for gasket joints. . 1. Gaskets for Sizes 4 to 6 Inches (100 to 150 mm): Lip seals, of shape molded to fit socket groove. Include plastic back-up ring. Use the following materials: a. Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) rubber for general applications, except where other materials are indicated. b. Nitrile rubber compound for fluids containing gasoline or oil. 2. Couplings for Sizes 8 to 12 Inches (200 to 300 mm): Stainless steel, mechanical type, with seal. Use the folIowing seal materials: a. Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) rubber for general applications, except where other materials are indicated. b. Nitrile rubber compound for fluids containing gasoline or oil. E. Corrugated-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 760 (ASTM A 760M), Type I, made from ASTM A 444 (ASTM A 444M), zinc-coated steel sheet for banded joints. I. Fittings: Fabricated to types indicated and according to same standards as pipe. 2. Connecting Bands: Standard couplings made for corrugated-steel pipe to form soiltight joints. F. Corrugated-Aluminum Pipe: ASTM B 745 (ASTM B 745M), Type I, made from ASTM B 744 CASTM B 744M), aluminum-alloy sheet for banded joints. 1. Fittings: Fabricated to types indicated and according to same standards as pipe. 2. Connecting Bands: Standard couplings made for corrugated-aluminum pipe to form soiltight joints. G. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and fittings: ASTM D 2751, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints. . 1. SDR 35 for 4 and 6 inches (100 and 150 mm). 2. SDR 42 for 8 to 12 inches (200 to 300 mm). 3. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 4. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. H. Corrugated, Polyethylene (PE) Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252 Interim, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. I. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252 Interim, corrugated, matching tube and fittings to form soiltight joints. 2. Silttight Couplings: Polyethylene (PE) sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material, that mates with tube and fittings to form silttight joints. I. Corrugated, Polyethylene (PE) Drainage Tubing: AASHTO M 252 Interim, Type S, with smooth waterway for gasketed joints. I. fittings: ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with socket ends, for gasketed joints. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 4 . 2. , Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals, that mates with tube and fittings to form watertight joints. . J. Corrugated, ~olyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294 Interim, Type S, withsmcioth waterway for' coupling joints. I. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings to form soiltight joints. 2. Silttight Couplings: Polyethylene (PE) sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material, that mates with pipe and fittings to form silttight joints. K. Corrugated, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe: AASHTO M 294 Interim, Type S, with smooth waterway for gasketed joints. 1. Fittings 12 and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride . (PVC) with socket ends, for gasketed joints. 2. Fittings 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): ASTM F 1336, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) wit~ socket ends, for gasketed joints. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals, that mates with pipe and fittings to form watertight joints. L. Corrugated, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294 Interim, TypeS, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. . \.. Couplings: Polyethylene (PE) sleeve with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals, that mates with pipe and fittings to form watertight joints. M. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Cellular-Core Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 891, Sewer and Drain Series, PS 50 minimum stiffness, for solvent~cemented joints. I. Fittings: ASTM D 2729 or ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe fittings. . 2. Primer: ASTM F 656. 3. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. N. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent- cemented or gasketed joints. I. . Primer: ASTM F 656. 2. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 3. Gaskets:ASTM~.f 4 77 ,elastomeri~ seal. ,0. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTMF 679, T-I wall thickness, bell and spigot for gasketed joints;' '\' Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seill. P. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Profile, Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794, open and closed profile, l?ell and spigot for gasketed joints. . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 5 I. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal to form watertight joints. . Q. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC), Ribbed Drain Pipe: AASHTO M 304M, bell and spigot, with smooth waterway for bell-gasketed joints. I. Fittings: AASHTO M 304M or ASTM F 794 for bell-gasketed joints. 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal to form soiltight joints. R. Nonreinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M), Class 2, for gasketed joints. I. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. S. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), Class III, Wall B, for gasketed joints. I. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2.03 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined, for nonpressure joints. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Sleeves for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 <ASTM C 443M), rubber. Sleeves for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber. Sleeves for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. Sleeves for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert. . B. Gasket-Type Pipe Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made to match outside diameter of smaller pipe and inside diameter or hub of adjoining larger pipe, for non pressure joints. I. Gaskets for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2. Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber. 3. Gaskets for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 4. Gaskets for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. C. Internal, Expansion-Type Pipe Couplings: Stainless-steel expansion band with ethylene- propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM), rubber-compound sealing sleeve, made to match inside diameter of pipes for nonpressure joints. Use nitrile rubber-compound sealing sleeve for fluids containing oil or gasoline. D. Pressure-Type Pipe Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, matching outside diameters of pipes to be joined, for pressure joints. Include polyethylene (PE) film encasement. I. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron with enamel paint finish. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010), or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: A WW A ClI 1. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 6 . . E. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with a combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends conforming to AWWA CliO or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball-joint sections and I or more gas~et.~d sleeve sections, rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure and FDA.approved epoxy interior coating for offset and expansion indicated. Include polyethylene (PE) film encasement. F. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends conforming to A WW A C II 0 or A WW A C 153. Include rating for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure, and cement lining or FDA-approved epoxy interior coating for up to 20 degrees (0.35 rad) deflection. Include polyethylene (P~) film encasement. G. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: 3-piece assembly of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections conforming to A WW A CliO or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure, and cement lining or FDA-approved epoxy interior coating for expansion indicated. Include polyethylene (PE) film encasement. 2.04 PIPE ENCASEMENT A. Include A WW A C105, polyethylene film tube and sheet, 8-mil (0.2-mm) thickness for the following: I. Ductile-iron piping. 2. Ductile-iron, special pipe fittings. . 2.05 MANHOLES A. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints. I. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: 4-inch (lOO-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat-slab-top type is indic~ted: Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 4. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 5. Grade Rings: Include 2 or;3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (152- to 229-mm) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and cover. . 6. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. -qast steps' or anchor ladder into base, riser, and top section sidewalls at 12-to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. 7. Steps: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M) individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 7 8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. . B. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 858, precast, reinforced concrete, designed according to ASTM C 857 for structural loading. Include depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints. I. Gaskets: Rubber. 2. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (152- to 229-mm) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and cover. 3. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into base, riser, and top section sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. 4. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. C. Brick Manholes: Brick and mortar, of depth indicated. 1. Base, Channel, and Bench: Concrete. a. Ballast: Increase thickness of or add concrete to base, as required to prevent floatation. Wall: ASTM C 32, Grade MS, manhole brick; 8-inch (200-mm) minimum thickness and an inside diameter of 48 inches (1220 mm) with tapered top for a 24-inch (610-mm) frame and cover. Include 12-inch (305-mm) minimum wall thickness for section of manhole deeper than 96 inches (2400 mm). a. Option: ASTM C 139, concrete masonry units may be used instead of brick. Mortar and Parging: ASTM C 270, Type S, using ASTM C 150, Type II, portland cement, 1/2-inch (13-mm) minimum thickness on exterior surface. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. . 2. 3. 4. D. Cast-in-Place Concrete Manholes: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top, designed according to ASTM C 857 for loading. Include depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 1. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. E. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty ductile iron. Include 24-inch (610-mm) inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4- 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 8 . . 2.06 CA TCH BASINS " -, ~.. .J~;.~'{ inch (lOO-mm) minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering, equivalent to the following, cast into cover: 1. Sanitary St;werage Piping Systems: SANITARY SEWER. 2. Storm Drainage Piping Systems: STORM SEWER. 3. Piping Systems Containing Sanitary Sewage: SANITARY SEWER. A. Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete; of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints. . 1. Base Section: 6-inch (l50-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (lOO-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a separate base slab or base section with integral floor. Riser Sections: 4-inch (lOO-mm) minimum thickness; 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. Top Section:' Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. 'Top of cone of size that matches grade rings: Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (152- to 229-nun) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate. Steps: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M) individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. . B. Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 858, precast, reinforced concrete, designed according to ASTM C" 857 for structural loading. Include depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints. I. Gaskets: Rubber. 2. Grade Riilgs: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (152- to 229-mm) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (61O-mm-) diameter frame and grate. 3. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage . off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into base, riser, and top section sidewalls_ at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. 4. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. C. Brick Catch 'Basin~: Brick and mortar, of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated. . 95-052/12-95 I. Base, Channel, and Bench: Concrete. 2. Wall: . ASTM C 32, Grade MS, manhole brick; 8-inch (200-mm) minimum thickness with tapered top for a 24-inch (610-mm) frame and cover. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 9 3. 4. a. Option: ASTM C 139, concrete masonry units may be used instead of brick. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type S, using ASTM C 150, Type II, portland cement. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. . D. Cast-in-Place Concrete Catch Basins: Construct ofreinforced-concrete, designed according to ASTM C 857 for structural loading. Include depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. I. Bottom, Walls, and Top: Reinforced concrete. 2. Channels and Benches: Concrete. 3. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. E. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty ductile iron, 24-inch (610- mm) inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4-inch (100-mm) minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter flat grate having small square or short-slotted drainage openings. 2.07 STORM-WATER INLETS . A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. D. Frames and Grates: Heavy-duty frames and grates according to utility standards. E. Curb Inlets: Vertical, curb-opening type, of materials and dimensions indicated. F. Gutter Inlets: Horizontal, gutter-opening type, of materials and dimensions indicated. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. G. Combination Inlets: Vertical, curb-opening and horizontal, gutter-opening type, of materials and dimensions indicated. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. H. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty ductile iron, frames and flat grates, of dimensions indicated. Include small square or short-slotted drainage openings in grates. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 10 . 2.08 CONCRETE . A. General:-Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following: I. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Structures: Portland-cement design mix, 4000 psi (27.6MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cement ratio. I. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 6151\1, Grade 400), deformed steel. C. Structure Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland-cement design !TIix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cement ratio. 1. Include channels and benches in sanitary sewerage and ~torm drainage manholes. a. ' Manhole Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of the vertical sides to 3/4 of the pipe diameter. Form: curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. I) . Invert Slope: ,1.2 inches (30 mm) through manhole. b. Manhole Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. I) Slope: I inch per foot (I: 12); 2) 'Slope: 0.5 inch per foot (I :24). Include channels and benches in storm drciinage catch basins. a. Catch Basin Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of the vertical sides to 3/4 of the pipe diameter. -Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. I) Invert Slope: 1.2 inches (30 mm) through catch basin. b. Catch Basin Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. i) Slope: 1 inch per foot (1: 12). . ,2. 2.09 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. General: Include' 'factory- or field-applied protective coatings to structures and appurtenances according to the following: B. Coating: 1- or 2-coat, 'coal-tar epoxy, 15-mil (0.381-mm) minimum thickness, except where otherwise indicated.' I. . Manholes: On exterior surface. 2. Brick Manholes: Over parging on exterior surface. ' 3. Manhole Friunes and Covers: On surfaces that win be exposed to sewer gases. 4. Catch Basins: 'Onexterior surface. 5. Storm-Water Inlets: On exterior surface. . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 11 2.10 POLYMER-CONCRETE CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. General: Modular system of precast, polymer-concrete channel sections, grates, and appurtenances, designed so that grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated. . B. Sloped-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: Include the following components: I. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4-inch (100-mm) inside width and deep, rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of 0.6 percent (1: 167) and outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension sections necessary for required depth. a. Frame: Include cast-iron or steel frame for grate. 2. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Medium Duty," with slots or perforations that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel. 3. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," with slots that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel. 4. Covers: Solid cast iron, where indicated. 5. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. C. Narrow- Width, Level-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: Include the following components: 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 5-inch (127-mm) inside width and 9-3/4-inch (248-mm) deep, rounded bottom with level invert, and 4-inch (100-mm) outlets in number and locations indicated. Grates with slots or perforations that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel. Covers: Solid cast iron, where indicated. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. . 2. 3. 4. D. Wide-Width, Level-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: Include the following components: I. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 8-inch (203-mm) inside width and 13-3/4-inch (350-mm) deep, rounded bottom with level invert, and outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. 2. Grates with slots or other openings that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Cast iron. 3. Covers: Solid cast iron, where indicated. 4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. E. Appurtenances: Precast, polymer-concrete units. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 12 . .. 1. Large Catch Basins: 24-by-12-inch (610-by-305-mm) polymer-concrete body, with outlets of number and sizes indicated. Include cast-iron slotted grate. a. - Frame: Include cast-iron or steel frame for grate. Small, Cat.ch Basins: 19 to 24 inches ~y approximately 6 inches (483 to 610 mm by approximately 150 mm) polymer-concrete body, with outlets of number and sizes indicated. Include cast-iron slotted grate. a. 'Frame: Include cast-iron or steel frame for grate. Oil Interceptors: Polymer-concrete body with interior baffle and 4 steel support charniels and two 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) thick steel-plate covers. a. Capacity: 200 gallons (757 L). b. Inlet and Outlet Size: 6 inches (150 mm). Sediment Interceptors: 27-inch- (686-mm-) square polymer-concrete body, with outlets of number and sizes indicated. Include 24-inch- (610-~-) square cast- iron frame and slotted grate. 2. 3. 4. F. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, except where otherwise indicated. G. Channel-Section, Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system manufacturer. 2.11 BACKWATER VALVES' A. Horizontal Backwater Valve Type: ASME A112.14.1, cast-iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub-and-spigot ends. . B. Combination' Horizontal Backwater Valve and Manual Gate Valve Type: ASME A1l2.14.1,cast-iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat, s,wing check valve, and hub- and-spigot ends. C. Terminal Backwater Valve Type: ASME AI12.14.1, cast-iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet. 2.12 CLEANOUTS A. Description: ASME Al 12.36.2M, round, cast-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and cOuntersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top- loading classifications aC,co~din~ to the following applications: I. Light Duty: In earth or grass, foot-traffic areas. 2. Medium Duty: In 'paved, foot-traffic areas. J. HeavY Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. , 4. Extra Heavy Duty: In roads. B. Sewer Pipe FItting and Riser toCleanout: ASTM A 74, serVice class, cast-iron soil pipe' arid fittings., . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 13 2.13 DRAINS A. Area Drains: ASME AI12.21.lM, round, cast-iron body with anchor flange and round, secured, cast-iron grate. Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of sizes indicated. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications: . I. Medium Duty: In paved, foot-traffic areas. 2. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. 2.14 OUTFALLS A. Construct headwall, apron, and tapered sides of cast-in-place, reinforced concrete. B. Riprap: Broken stone, irregular size and shape, weighing 15 to 50 pounds (7 to 23 kg) each. C. Energy Dissipators: Construction as indicated, from materials indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures. . I. Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.03 SEWERAGE PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Include watertight joints. B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. C. Pipe Size 4 to 6 Inches (100 to 150 mm): Hub-and-spigot, extra-heavy class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; compression-type gaskets; and gasketed joints. D. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast- iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 14 . . E. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), cellular-core plastic pipe; "ASTM D 3034, PVC, solvent-cement, sewer pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. F. Pipe Sizes 4 ahd 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): A~TMD 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. G. Pipe Sizes 8 and 10 Inches (200 and 250 mm): Hub-and-spigot, extra-heavy class, cast- iron soil pipe and fittings; compression-type gaskets; and gasketed joints. H. Pipe Sizes 8 and 10 Inches (200 .and 250 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast- iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. I. Pipe Sizes 8 and 10 Inches (200 and 250 mm): ASTM A 240, Type 304, stainless-steel drainage pipe and fittings; mechanical couplings; and coupled joints. Use ethylene- propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM), rubber-compound seal, except where otherwise indicated. Use nitrile-rubber-compound seal for wastes containing gasoline or oil. J. Pipe Sizes 8 and 10 Inches (200 and 250 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. K. Pipe Sizes 12 to 16 Inches (300 to 400 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast-iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. . L. Pipe Sizes 12 and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe; ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), socket-end fittings; gaskets; arid watertight, gasketed joints. M. Pipe Sizes 12 'and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe and fittings; couplings with seals; and watertight, coupled joints. N. Pipe Sizes 12 and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. O. Pipe Sizes 12 ,and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings; rubber. gaskets; and -gasketed joints. P. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, polyethylene (PE)'plastic pipe; ASTM F 1336 or ASTM D 3034 pattern, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), socket-end fittings; gaskets; and watertight, gasketed joints. Q. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe and fittings; couplings with seals; and watertight, coupled joints. . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 15 R. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): ASTM F 679, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. . S. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): ASTM F 794, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) profile sewer pipe; ASTM F 794, PVC profile fittings; elastomeric seals; and gasketed joints. T. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings; rubber gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3.04 DRAINAGE PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, except where watertight or silttight joints are indicated. B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the folIowing applications. C. Pipe Sizes 4 to 6 Inches (100 to 150 mm): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; couplings; and coupled joints. D. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast- iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. E. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Corrugated-steel pipe; corrugated-steel fittings; connecting bands; and soiltight, coupled joints. . F. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), cellular-core plastic pipe; ASTM D 3034, PVC, solvent-cemented, sewer pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. G. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (pVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. H. Pipe Sizes 4 to 6 Inches (100 to 150 mm): ASTM F 794, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) profile, gravity sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. I. Pipe Sizes 8 to 16 Inches (200 to 400 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast-iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. J. Pipe Sizes 8 to 15 Inches (200 to 375 mm): Corrugated-steel pipe; corrugated-steel fittings; connecting bands; and soiltight, coupled joints. K. Pipe Sizes 8 to 15 Inches (200 to 375 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. L. Pipe Sizes 18 to 36 Inches (450 to 900 mm): Corrugated-steel pipe; corrugated-steel fittings; connecting bands; and soiltight, coupled joints. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 16 . M. Pipe Sizes 18 to 36 Inches (450 to 900 mm): Corrugated-aluminum pipe; corrugated- aluminum fittings; 'connecting bands; and soiltight, coupled joints. . N. Pipe Sizes IS to 36 Inches (450 to 900 rom): Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings; rubber gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3.05 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where indicated and where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods. I. Use the following pipe couplings for nonpressure applications: a. Strait-pattern, sleeve type to join piping, of same size, with small difference in outside diameters. . . b. Increaser/reducer-pattern, sleeve type to join piping of different sizes. , c. Gasket type to join piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's outside diameter and larger piping's inside diameter permits installation. d. Internal-expansion type to join piping with same inside diameter. 2. 'Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main, pressure application joints. Include polyethylene (PE) encasement: B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use where indicated. Include polyethylene (PE) encasement. , 3.06 INST ALLA TION, GENERAL' . A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangem'ent of underground sewerage and drainage systems piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades' and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends. of piping .facing 'upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past eachjointas it is completed. C. Use manholes for changes in direction, except where fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Use proper size increasers; reducers, and couplings, where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are 'connected. ' Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow , is prohibited. E. Install gravity-flaw-systems piping at constant slope between points and elevations indicated. Install straight piping runs at constant slope, not less than that specified, where slope is not indicated.' F. Extend sewerage piping and.connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 17 G. Install sewerage piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 0.5 percent (1 :200) and 24-inch (667-mm) minimum cover, except where otherwise indicated. . H. Extend drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. I. Install drainage piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 0.5 percent (1 :200) and 24-inch (667-mm) minimum cover, except where otherwise indicated. J. Tunneling: Insta\1 pipe under streets or other obstructions, that cannot be disturbed, by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. 3.07 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. General: Join and insta\1 pipe and fittings according to the following. B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: With rubber compression gaskets according to CISPI "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Volume I. Use gaskets that match class of pipe and fittings. 1. Install polyethylene film encasement over cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA CI05. C. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: With CISPI-type couplings according to CISPI 310 and CISPI "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Volume I. 1. Install polyethylene film encasement over hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. . D. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: With heavy-duty-type couplings according to applicable provisions of CISPI 310, CISPI "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Volume I, and coupling manufacturer's written instructions. I. Insta\1 polyethylene film encasement over hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA CI05. E. Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Cast-Iron Fittings: With push-on-joint, rubber gaskets according to A WW A C600. I. Install polyethylene film encasement over ductile-iron pipe and ductile- and cast- iron fittings according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA CI05. F. Stainless-Steel Drainage Piping: According to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Stainless-Steel Drainage Piping: According to manufacturer's written instructions and ASME AI12.3.1. H. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with final finished surface. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 18 . . I. Corrugated-Steel Pipe: Join and install according to ASTM A 798. Use soiltight joints made with coupling bands and gaskets, except where other joints are indicated. J. Corrugated-Aluminum Pipe: Join and install according to ASTM B 788. Use soiltight joints made with coupling bands and gaskets; except where other joints are indicated. K. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: As follows: I. Join solvent-cement-joint pipe and fittings with solvent cement according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402. 2. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 2321. 3. Join profile sewer pipe and ribbed drain pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instruction. 4. Install according to ASTM D 2321. L. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA "Concrete Pipe Handbook." Use the following seals: I. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets. 2. Elliptical Pipe: ASTM C 877 (ASTM C 877M), Type I, sealing bands. 3. Arch Pipe: ASTM C 877 (ASTM C 877M), Type I, sealing bands. M. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, except where otherwise specified. . N. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit both systems' materials and dimensions. 3.08 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes, complete with accessories, as indicated. B. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet, where indicated. C. Set tops of frames ar!d covers. flush with finished surface wlJere manholes occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, except where otherwise indicated. D. Place precast concrete manhole, sections as indicated, and install according to ASTM ,C 891. 1. Provide rubber joint gasket complying with ASTM ,C 443 (ASTM C 443M), at joints of-sections. E.Construct brick manholes as indicated. F. Construct cast-in-place manholes as indicated.' . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 19 3.09 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION . A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3.10 STORM DRAINAGE INLET AND OUTFALL INSTALLATION A. Construct inlet head walIs, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated. B. Construct outlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated. C. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated. E. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated. F. Construct energy dissipators at outlets, as indicated. 3.11 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and as indicated. 3.12 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. . B. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions, ASME A 112.3.1, and as indicated. C. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with final finished surface. 3.13 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal units in piping where indicated. B. Install combination units in piping and in structures where indicated. C. Install terminal units on end of piping and in structures where indicated. Secure units to structure walls. 3.14 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for c1eanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so c1eanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pIpe. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 20 . . B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in a cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops I inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade. C. Set c1eanout fram~ and covers in concrete paving with tops flush with surface of paving. 3.15 DRAIN INSTALLATION. A. Install type drains in locations indicated. B. Embed drains in a 4-inch (IOO-mm) minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides. C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated. D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with surface of paving. 3.16 TAP CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so fmished work conforms as nearly as practical to requirements specified for new work. B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch (l50-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete. . C. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, sizes 4 to 20 inches (100 to 500 mm) by removing a section of existing pipe and installing a wye fitting into existing piping. Encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete. D. Make branch.connections from,side into existing pipiQg, sizes 24 inches (600 mm) or larger or to underground structures by cutting an opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or structure walI, encase entering c.onnection in 6 inches (I50 mm) of concrete for a minimum length of 12 inches (300 mm) to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. . 1. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7MPa), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use epoxy bonding compound as an interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials. E. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. . 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 21 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as the work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. . I. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and whenever work stops. 3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, to remove collected debris. B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of the Project. I. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visual between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of a ball or cylinder of a size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. C. Test new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired for leaks and defects. . I. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests, and their inspections by authorities having jurisdiction, with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate reports for each test. 5. Where authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests as follows: a. Sanitary Sewerage: Perform hydrostatic test. 1) Allowable leakage is a maximum of 50 gallons per inch (4.6 L per mm dimension) nominal pipe size, for every mile (kIn) of pipe, during a 24-hour period 2) Close openings in system and fill with water. 3) Purge air and refill with water. 4) Disconnect water supply. 5) Test and inspect joints for leaks. 6) Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to A WW A C600, Section 4 "Hydrostatic Testing." Use test pressure of at least 10 psig (69.0 kPa). b. Sanitary Sewerage: Perform air test according to UNI-B-6. 95-052/12-95 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 22 . . .. . 95-052/12-95 c. I) Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M). Storm Drainage: Perform hydrostatic test. I) Allowable leakage is.a maximum of 200 gallons per inch (18.4 L per mm dimension) nominal pipe size, for every mile (km) of pipe, during a 24-hour period. 2) Close openings in system and fill with water. 3) Purge air and refill with water. , 4) Disconnect water supply. 5) Test and inspect joints for leaks. 6) Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to A WW A C600, Section 4 "Hydrostatic Testing." Use test pressure of at least 5 psig (34.5 kPa). 7) Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 969 (ASTM C 969M). ' . 8) Option: Test concrete arch piping and elliptical pIpIng according to authorities having jurisdiction. Storm Drainage: Perform hydrostatic test. Close openings in system and fill with water to not less than 10-foot (3-m) head of water. Disconnect water supply. Water level must not drop for 15 minutes. Inspect joints for leaks. I) Option: Test concrete arch piping and elliptical piping according to authorities having jurisdiction. Storm Drainage: Perform air test according to UNI-B-6. 1) Option: Test round concrete piping, 24 inches (600 mm) and smaller, according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M). 2) Option: Test concrete ,arch piping and elliptical piping according 'to authorities having jurisdiction. d. e. END OF SECTION 02700 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 23 . SECTION 02711 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes foundation, subsoil drainage systems. B. This Section includes underslab, subsoil drainage systems. C. This Section includes foundation and underslab, subsoil drainage systems. D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Membrane Waterproofing." 3. Division 15 Section "Sewage and Sump Pumps" for building storm drain sump pumps. . 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of foundation drainage material required. C. Certification signed by Contractor and foundation drainage system Installer that installed materials conform to specified requirements and system was successfully checked and tested prior to covering with filtering and drainage fill 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Instal1er who has completed foundation drainage systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.05 COORDINA nON A. Coordinate foundation drainage system installation with excavating, trenching, and backfilling. B. Coordinate piping termination with storm drainage system. . 95-052/12-95 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 02711-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Drainage Conduits: a. A vanEDGE; Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. b. Form-A-Drain; Certain Teed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 2.02 PIPES AND FITTINGS A. General: Include pipes, fittings, couplings, and joint materials. B. Perforated, Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and- spigot ends, for loose joints. C. Joint Screening: I of the following coverings for each open joint: 1. Woven geotextile filter fabric, in I or more layers, for minimum total weight of 3 oz./sq. yd. (0.10 kg/sq. m). Include fabric covering for entire length of tile installation. 2.03 SLEEVES A. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated wall pipe with integral water stop, made for this application. . 2.04 SOIL MATERIALS A. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate, Size No. 57, with 100 percent passing 1-l/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 5 percent passing No.8 (2.36-mm) sieve. B. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural sand, with 100 percent passing l-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing No. 50 (O.3-mm) sieve. C. Matting: Geotextile filter fabric, in I or more layers, for minimum total weight of 6 oz./sq. yd. (0.20 kg/sq. m). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where foundation drainage systems are to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. . 3.02 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A. Systems with 4-Inch (DN 100) Piping: As follows: 95-052/12-95 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 02711 - 2 . . 1. Perforated. polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and- spigot joints. . 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of foundation drainage system piping. B. Install"piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing, solidly in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. I. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of I percent (1: 100) and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (1000 mm), except where otherwise indicated. 2. Provide recesses in excavation bottom to receive bells of pipe bell ends. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. C. Extend piping and connect to storm drainage/sump pump system, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. D. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1. Join ASTM D 3034 sewer pipe and fittings with elastomeric seal gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. Join ASTM D 2729 perforated. sewer pipe and fittings with loose, bell-and-spigot joints. Install according to ASTM D 2321. Install perforated pipe with perforations down. . 2. 3. 4. 3.04 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. Install sleeves in locations and at elevations indicated. 3.05 SOIL MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Filtering Material: Place supporting layer of filtering material-over compacted subgrade where drainage pipe is to be laid to depth indicated or, if not indicated,' to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). B. Drainage Fill: Place fill over drain piping after satisfactory testing and covering with filtering material. Cover piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on each side and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of fmish grade. Place fill material in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth, and compact each layer placed. I. Place ] layer Of synthetic drainage fabric, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm), over drainage fill ma~eria1. . '\ , 95-052/12-95 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 02711 - 3 C. Fill to Grade: Place impervious fill material over compacted drainage fill. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish elevations and slope away from building. . 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test drain piping with water or visually check piping to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. 1. Place additional filtering material to depth of 4 inches (100 mm) around sides and top of drains after testing. END OF SECTION 02711 . 95-052/12-95 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 02711 - 4 . . SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Galvanized-steel chain link fabric. 2. Galvanized-steel framework. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for filling and grading work. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete for post footings. 3. Division 16 Sections for electric power for electric gate operators. 1.03 SUBMITTALS . A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data in the form of manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and installation instructions for fence and gate posts, fabric, gates, and accessories. C. Shop drawings showing location of fence, gates, each post, and details of post installation, extension arms, gate swing, hardware, and accessories. D. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated gates. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has at least three years' experience and has completed at least five chain link fence projects with same material and of similar scope to that indicated for this Project with a successful construction record of in- service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fittings, and fastenings, from a single source. . 95-052/12-95 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - I 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS . A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the Drawings in relation to the property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRIC A. Selvage: Knuckled on bottom selvages. Top selvages to be twisted and barbed. B. Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: Fabricated in one-piece widths for fencing 12 feet and less in height to comply with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) "Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below: 1. Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch mesh, 0.148-inch diameter (9 gage). 2. Coating: ASTM A 817, Type 2, Class 2, zinc-coated (galvanized). 2.02 FRAMING A. Type I Round Posts: Standard weight (schedule 40) galvanized-steel pipe conforming to ASTM F 1083, according to heavy industrial requirements of ASTM F 669, Group lA, with minimum yield strength of25,000 psi, not less than 1.8 oz. ofzinc per sq. ft. Type A coating inside and outside according to ASTM F 1234, as detennined by ASTM A 90, and weights per foot as follows: . Actual Weight NPS OD (lb/ft) Size 1.315 1.68 I 1.660 2.27 1-1/4 1.900 2.72 1-1/2 2.375 3.65 2 2.875 5.79 2-1/2 3.500 7.58 3 4.000 9.11 3-1/2 6,625 8,97 6 8.625 28,55 8 B, All Rails: Manufacturer's longest lengths (17 to 21 feet) with swedged-end or expansion- type coupling, approximately 6 inches long for joining. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching top rail securely to each gate comer, pull, and end post. I. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. C. Steel posts for fabric heights over 6 feet: I. Round Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.375-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. 2. Round End, Comer, and Pull Posts: 2.875-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. 95-052/12-95 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 2 . . D. Swing Gate Posts: Furnish posts to support single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double-gate installation, according to ASTM F 900, sized as follows for steel and aluminum pipe posts: I. Steel posts for fabric height over 6 feet and gate leaf width: a. Up to and Including 6 Feet: 2.875-inch OD pipe weighing at least 4.64 lb per ft. b. Over 6 to 12 Feet: 4.000-inch aD pipe weighing at least 8.65 lb per ft. c. Over 12 to 18 Feet: 6.625-inch OD pipe weighing at least 1O.021b per ft. d. Over 18 to 24 Feet: 8.625 OD pipe weighing at least 27.121b per ft. 2.03 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Material: Comply with ASTM F 626. Mill-fInished aluminum or galvanized iron or steel to suit manufacturer's standards. I. Steel and Iron: Unless specified otherwise, hot-dip galvanize pressed steel or cast- iron fence fIttings and accessories with at least 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. as determined by ASTM A 90. B. Post and Line Caps: Provide weathertight closure cap for each post. Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top raiL C. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace, Use material specified below for brace, and truss to line posts with 3/8-inch-diameter rod and adjustable tightener. Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel, cast-iron or cast-aluminum cap for each end. . 1. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe, D. Bottom and Center Rail: Same material as top raiL Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel, for each end. E. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum length 2 inches less than the full height of fabric, a minimum cross section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch, and a minimum of 1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each comer and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into the post. F. Tension and Brace Bands: 314-inch-wide minimum hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum of 1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft. 1. Tension Bands: 0.074 inch thick (14 gage) minimum. 2. Brace Bands: 0.105 inch thick ( 12 gage) minimum. G. Tension Wire: O.I77-inch-diameter metallic-coated steel marcelled tension wire conforming to ASTM A 824 with fInish to match fabric. I. ' Coating Type II zinc in the following class as determined by ASTM A 90. a. Class 2, with a minimum coating weight of 1.20 oz. per sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface. ' . 95-052/12-95 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 3 H Tie Wires: 0.106-inch-diameter (12-gage) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80 oz. per sq. ft. of zinc coating according to ASTM A 641, Class 3 or 0.148-inch-diameter (9-gage) aluminum wire alloy 1350-H19 or equal, to match fabric wire, . 2.04 BARBED WIRE A. Barbed Wire Supporting Arms: Manufacturer's standard barbed Wire supporting arms conforming to ASTM F 626, metal and fInish to match fence framework, with provision for anchorage to posts and attaching three rows of barbed wire to each arm. Supporting arms may be either attached to posts or integral with post top weather cap and must be capable of withstanding 250-lb downward pull at outermost end. Provide following type: I. Vee-type with two arms at 45 degrees to vertical, one for each post. B. Steel Barbed Wire: Two-strand, 0.099-inch-diameter (12-l/2-gage) steel wire with 0.080- inch-diameter (14-gage), four-point barbs spaced not more than 5 inches o.c.; metallic-coated fInish to match fabric. 1. Galvanized Finish: Comply with ASTM A 121, chain link fence grade with Class 3 coating with not less than 0.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. as determined by ASTM A 90, 2.05 BARBED TAPE A. Barbed Tape: Continuous helical coils of barbed tape as defmed by ASTM F 1379. 1. Tape: ANSI 430 stainless steel hardened to Rockwell (30N) 40-45, 0.025 inch thick by I inch wide prior to fabrication with four needle-sharp barbs not less than 1.25 inch long in clusters on 4-inch centers and permanently cold-clenched to a minimum of 230 degrees around a core wire. Core Wire: O,098-inch-diameter high-tensile zinc-coated steel conforming to, ASTM A 764. Clips: 0.065-inch-thick by 0.375-inch-wide stainless clips capable of withstanding a minimum 150-lb pull load to limit extension of coil, resulting in a concertina effect when deployed. Size and Type: Double coil cencertina (24" inner diameter, 30" outer diameter). . 2. 3, 4. 2.06 CONCRETE A. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., I-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. B. Packaged Concrete Mix: Mix dry-packaged normal-weight concrete conforming to ASTM C 387 with clean water to obtain a 2- to 3-inch slump. 2.07 GATES A. Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from same material and finish as fence framework. Assemble gate frames by welding, Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper 95-052/12-95 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 4 . . gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members maximum of 8 feet apart unless otherwise indicated. I. Fabric: Same as for fence unless otherwise indicated. Secure fabric at vertical edge~ with tension bars and bands and to tbp and bottom of frame with tie wires. B. Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F 900. I. Steel: Gates up to 8 feet wide: a. Over 6 Feet High: Fabricate perimeter frames of 1.90-inch minimum OD Type I or II steel pipe or 2-inch-square galvanized-steel tubing weighing 2.52 Ib per sq. ft. 2. Gate Hardware: Provide galvanized hardware and accessories for each gate according to the following: a. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of~ges for each leaf over 6-foot nominal height. b. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of latch. c. Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of mushroom- type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fence to comply with ASTM F 567. Do not begin installation and erection before fmal grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted. I. Apply fabric toJail side of framework B. Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate (using post-hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in fum, undisturbed or compacted soil. I. Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below finish grade surface. C. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation, Space a maximum of 10 feet o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around 'posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. a. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2 inches above grade and trowel to a crown to shed water. . 95-052/12-95 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 5 D. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and at other posts terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. . E. Center Rails: Install center rails in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using rail ends and special offset fittings where necessary. F. Brace Assemblies: Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of comer and pull posts. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail and at two thirds fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. G. Fabric: Leave a maximum of approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released. H. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, comer, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c. I. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to secure fabric fumly to posts and rails. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. 1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and braces 24 inches o.c. 1. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts for added security. . K. Barbed Wire: Pull wire taut and install securely to extension arms and secure to end post or terminal arms according to manufacturer's instructions. L Barbed Tape: Install barbed tape in configurations indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations and fasten securely to prevent movement or displacement. 3.02 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. Install gates according to manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, and secure. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Gates: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic, readjust gates for optimum operating condition and safety, Lubricate operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 02831 95-052/12-95 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 6 . . . . SECTION 03011 CONCRETE TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Testing of concrete materials, proposed mix designs and resulting concrete. Testing Agency will be selected by the General Contractor and paid for by the General Contractor. Additional testing required because of deficiencies, or to verify the adequacy of a condition allegedly not built in accordance with Contract Documents, shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor under the direction of the Architect. 1.02 STANDARD A. Test in accordance with Chapters 16, 17, and 18 of ACI 30 I entitled "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings", except as otherwise indicated. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING AGENCY A. The Testing Agency shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329, entitled "Tentative Recommend Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete Steel as Used in Constructio'n". The Testing Agency shalI perform the following: I. Check concrete materials for compliance with specifications and report results along with recommendations to Architect. Sample concrete at job site and prepare compression test specimens, test for slump, air content, and unit weight as required by specifications. Place concrete test specimens in designated locations after casting. Transport test specimens to laboratory and perform compression tests according to specifications. Report results on field test data sheet to Architect/Engineer immediately of any,test specimens that do not meet design strength at 28 days or 70% of design strength at 7 days. Complete field test data sheet for each set of concrete test specimens. The completed data sheet shall show all information required bY' ACI specifications. Include: laboratory number, date, plant, truck number, time batched, time sampled, air temperature, concrete temperature, inspector, mix design number, required strength, unit weight, air content,' slump, location of placement, 7 day and 28 day strength. 2. 3. 4. 5. i .04 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. ' Testing Agency shall distribute copies of test report to: I. One (I) copy to Architect. 2. One (I) copy to Contractor. ,3. . One (I) copy to Concrete Supplier. 4. One (1) copy to Owner. 5. One (I) copy to Engineer. 95-052/12-95 CONCRETE TESTING 03011-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ITEMS PROVIDED BY TESTING AGENCY . A. Maintain supplies, apparatus, tools and devices at job site to obtain specimens and perform on-site tests as indicated. Provide not less than the following: I. Molds for compression test specimens. 2. Slump cones with rod for slump test. 3. Scale and unit wright measure. 4. Appropriate air meters. 5. Concrete thermometer. 2.02 ITEMS PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR A. Provide stable, lockable storage box thermostaticalIy controlled to maintain temperature between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F for storage of cylinders for first 24 hours after molding. Box shall be a minimum of 40 cu. ft. Locate box in a permanent lockable area of approximately 100 sq. ft. Limit access to laboratory personnel and Contractor's superintendent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 NOTIFICATION A. Notify Testing Agency not less than 24 hours in advance of placing concrete to enable agency to have technician available for conducting tests and obtaining specimens. 3.02 DESIGN MIXES . A. Verify proposed design mixes and report recommendations to Architect in accord with ACl 318, Chapter 4. 3.03 COMPRESSION TESTS A. Test specimens in accordance with all applicable ASTM standards. At the job site, prepare cylinders for testing and perform required tests on concrete. Four cylinders shall be made for each sample of concrete to be tested; one to be broken at 7 days for information and two at 28 days for strength compliance. Hold one cylinder for 56 days. For frequency, see 3.9. 3.04 CORE TESTS A. Core tests, Contractor's expense, shall be required whenever concrete fails to meet the "Acceptance of Concrete" criteria as described in Concrete Section. Cores shall be taken under the direction of the Architect. Criteria for acceptance of cores shalI be as described in ACI 318, Section 4.7.4.4. Additional core tests at Contractor's expense may be required by the Architect whenever other requirements of these specifications are not compiled with fully. 95-052/12-95 CONCRETE TESTING 03011-2 . . . . 3.05 LOAD TESTS A. Perform, at Contractor's expense, when core testing is inconclusive or impracticable. Evaluate load tests in accordance with ACI-318, 301. 3.06 TEST FOR AIR CONTENT A. Perform each time a set of cylinders prepared for compression testing. Test in accordance with ASTM C23l. 3.07 SLUMP TEST A. Perform each time a set of cylinders prepared for compression testing. Test in accordance with ASTM C143. 3.08 SHRINKAGE TEST A. Perform only if directed by the Architect. 3.09 FREQUENCY OF TESTING A. Take samples for strength tests for each class of concrete not less than once each placement, each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area, or the following: Class of Concrete A B Frequency of Testing 50 cu. yd. 50 cu. yd. 3.10 ADDITIONAL TESTING A. Perform testing of materials, other than concrete, to determine compliance with Contract Docu- ments when directed by the Architect. Contractor shall furnish samples and deliver them to Testing Agency's laboratory. END OF SECTION 03011 95-052/12-95 CONCRETE TESTING 03011-3 . . . SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART I GENERAL 1.0 I DESCRIPTION A. Related work specified elsewhere: I. Concrete Reinforcement 2. Cast-In-Place Concrete 3. Concrete Finishes B. Work specified in this Section includes concrete formwork, accessories, and form coating. 1.02 SUBMITI ALS A. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit copies of manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for manufactured products, including form sealer and release agent. B. Samples: Submit the following: I. 2. Form ties: Samples on each type Water stops: 12" lengths. 1.03 QUALITY CRITERIA: A. Industry Standards: I. American Concrete Institute, ACI-301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Build- ings. 2. American Concrete Institute, ACI-3l8, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 3. American Concrete Institute, ACI-347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Fonnwork. 4. American Concrete Institute, ACI-SP-15, Field Reference Manual. 5. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) Grading Rules. '6. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) Grading Rules. 7. American Plywood Association (APA) Grading Rules. B. Allowable Tolerances: . Construct formwork within tolerance requirements of ACI-347. Maximum deflection of form facing material between supports shall be limited to 0.0025 x span. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMING MATERIALS A. Lumber: For work unexposed in finished project: #2 Southern Yellow Pine. 95-052/12-95 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100-1 PART 3 B. Plywood: . I. For interior exposed concrete: MDO-EXT-APA or S-B Plyform EXT-APA. 2. For unexposed concrete: C-C EXT-APA. c. Metal or Plastic Forms: Smooth, undented, clean steel and new plastic forms may be used with Architect's approval, provided required texture can be achieved. D. Earth Forms: Forms for footings may be cut into earth, provided that earth is dry, stable, level and sound. E. Form Ties: Sreakback type with 5/8" removable vinyl sleeve of 1" diameter breakback cone type. F. Plywood Form Sealer: Colored polyurethane coating of type acceptable to plywood manufacturer, for sealing cut edges of plywood. G. Form Release Agent: Type as required to eliminate staining or causing surface imperfections in finishes. Use same brand form release agent for all forms. H. Water Stops: Extruded polyvinyl-chloride, minimum size 6" wide x 3/16" thickness with two 3/8" diameter bells, unless otherwise indicated. EXECUTION 3.01 FORM WORK CONSTRUCTION: 95-052/12-95 A. Construct form work to lines and elevations required to produce concrete surfaces in accordance with Contract Documents. . S. Construct forms to be removed without hammering or prying against concrete. C. Layout of joints in form work shall be in accordance with acceptable practice. Joints shall bear tightly on solid back-up. D. Build trap doors into back of vertical forms to facilitate cleaning, inspection and deposition of concrete. Box out for accessories, anchors, and openings as required. Secure items required to be built into concrete in forms. E. Clean forms of dirt, debris, concrete and foreign matter before each use or re-use. Examine forms prior to each re-use and replace those which developed defects affecting the strength, tightness or visual appearance. F. Immediately prior to placement of reinforcing, apply form release agent to forms in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rate of application shall be constant to prevent discoloration of concrete. Remove excess material immediately. G. Construct bulkheads with keys at separation of pours, except as otherwise noted on drawings. Locations of bulkheads shall be as indicated on approved shop drawings. CONCRETE FORM WORK 03100-2 . . . . 3.02 REMOV AL OF FORMS A. Contractor shalI assume fulI responsibility for removal of formwork and forms shalI be removed in such a manner as to insure complete safety of structure. B. Under ordinary weather conditions, wall forms and other vertical forms for concrete which do not span between definite supports may be removed after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. END OF SECTION 03100 95-052/12-95 CONCRETE FORM WORK 03100-3 . . . SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART I GENERAL 1.0 I DESCRIPTION A. Related work specified in other Sections includes: concrete form work and cast-in-place concrete. B. Work described in this Section includes reinforcement, metal and plastic accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar bending details, bar lists and placement drawings for all reinforcement. Indicate dimensions on placement drawings. I, Form of placement drawings, including schedules, details and notes, shall contain same information as contract drawings. 2. Show wall reinforcement in elevation. 3, Indicate locations of accessories, conduits, and piping to be embedded in concrete. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement in bundles with waterproof tags. Maintain tags attached until material IS incorporated into work. B. Deliver and handle materials to prevent damage to or weakening of reinforcement. C. Prevent accumulation of rust or debris on reinforcement during storing. Store off ground and under cover. 1.04 QUALITY CRITERIA A. Adhere to the following industry standards, latest edition, except as otherwise indicated. I. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standards: a. AC1301, Specifications for Structural Concrete.for Buildings. b. ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. c. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements' for Reinforced Concrete with supplements. 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice - Placing Reinforcing Bars. . 3. American Welding Society (A WS) A WS D12.1. 95052/11-95 03200-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS . 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Bars: Meeting ASTM A615, deformed type for #3 and larger bars. I. Ties and Stirrups: Grade 60, unless otherwise noted. 2. All other bars: Grade 60, unless otherwise noted. B. Welded Wire Fabric: Meeting ASTM A185, cold-drawn, resistance welded. C. Tie Wire: 16 gauge annealed steel wire. D. Accessories: I. Prefabricated accessories shall comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Class E at exposed surfaces and Class A unexposed. Legs of all accessories used in exposed concrete shall be solid plastic or plastic coated. 2. Accessories on earth: Footing and slab on ground reinforcement may be supported on solid concrete bricks. 3. Support bars: To maintain height for top reinforcement shall be #5 minimum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION . A. Examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the fmished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements imposed within specifications governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Architect's Review: Notify Architect at least 48 hours prior to placing of concrete to allow time for inspection of reinforcement. Place no concrete in forms without Architect's approval of reinforcement. 3.02 FABRlCATION & ERECTION A. Shop fabricate reinforcement to shape and dimensions indicated on approved placement drawings. Bent bars shall be bent cold. Fabricate in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318. B. Metal reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed, shall be relatively free from rust scale and other coatings reducing bond. Use no bars with kinks or bends not shown on placement drawings. C. Place metal reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315, ACI 318 and placement drawings. Secure in position in forms. Top longitudinal bars in this section may be temporarily removed at the request of the Architect. Minimum slab reinforcement support spacing shall be as recommended by CRSI. Do not weld items to reinforcing steel unless a written proposal is specifically approved in writing by Architect. . 95052/11-95 03200-2 . . . D. Protective concrete cover over reinforcement shall be as indicated on the drawings. E. When reinforcement splices are required for construction and are not shown on the drawings, the locations and lap lengths shall be approved in writing by the Architect. Splice in accordance with ACI 318. Mechanical compression splices will not be permitted unless prior written approval is obtained from Architect. Where welded splices are indicated, use full penetration butt welds in accordance with A WS specifications. Welded splices shall be inspected by an independent testing laboratory selected and paid by Contractor, with Architect's approval. Unless shown otherwise or as required by the Architect, lapped bars shall have class "B" laps where less than 50% of the bars are lapped within a required lap length, and class "C" laps where more than 50% of the bars are lapped within a required lap length. F. Install wire mesh reinforcing in sizes and locations indicated. Lap joints one wire spacing plus 2" and extend mesh to within I" of edges of slabs on grade. G. Conduit and Pipes: Concrete cover shall be equal to cover for reinforcing bars. Embedded conduit diameter shall not exceed 1/3 slab or wall thickness. Tie down low conduit on top of bottom reinforcing bars. Space no conduit less than three diameters apart and minimum I" separation from parallel reinforcing bars. Use no aluminum conduits or coupling in concrete. END OF SECTION 95052/11-95 03200-3 . SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART I GENERAL 1.0] DESCRIPTION A. Work includes: Work under this Section consists of providing reinforced and non-reinforced concrete as indicated on the drawings. ]. Materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance. 2. Exposed surfaces throughout project shall have the same texture and color for like locations. B. Related documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division One Sections of these Specifications, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Codes and standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section. ACI 301-R75, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". ACI 304-73, Reaffirmed ] 983, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". ACI 305R-77, "Hot Weather Concreting". ACI 306R-78, "Cold Weather Concreting". ACI 309R-82, "Identification and Control of Consolidation Related Surface Defects in Formed Concrete". ACI 315-80, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement". ACI 318-83, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". ASTM A82-79, "Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement". ASTM A6]5-82 (Sl), "Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". ASTM C3] -84, "Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field". ASTM C33-84, "Concrete Aggregates". ASTM C42-84a, "Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete". ASTM C78-84, "Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete". ASTM C94-84, "Ready-Mixed Concrete". ASTM C] 43-78; ."Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete". ASTM CI50-85, "Portland Cement". ASTM C17l-R80, "Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete". ASTMC]72, "Sampling". ASTM C]73-78, "Test Method For Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method". ASTM C]92'."Making and CUring Cylinder". ASTM C23 1-82, "Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method". ASTM C260-77, "Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete". 03300-1 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ASTM C309-8l, "Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete". ASTM C494-82, "Chemical Admixtures for Concrete". ASTM C61S, "Fly Ash". A WS-Dl.4-79, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforced Steel". CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". . A. General: Comply with the provisions of Section 01300. B. Manufacturers' data: Submit: I. Mix designs for each type and class of concrete. Submittal shall include independent lab tests verifying the design strength in accordance with ACl 318 Chapter 4. 2. Complete list of all items proposed for the work under this Section and sufficient data to demonstrate compliance with these specifications. 3, Complete description of proposed curing methods. 4. Concrete cylinder test reports. C. Shop drawings: Submit complete Shop Drawings of all materials proposed to be provided under this Section. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." Include: 1. 2. Bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement and assemblies. Special reinforcement required around openings throughout concrete structures. Location of all proposed construction joints, keying, and water stops. Locations of all openings, depressions, construction and control joints, trenches, sleeves, inserts, and other items affecting the reinforcement and placing of concrete. . 3. 4, D. Mill Certificates: Accompanying the Shop Drawings, submit steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile, and bend tests for reinforcing steeL E. Placement schedule: Submit schedule for all pours in project. Number each pour in schedule and cross reference schedule number to test report submittals indicating location for each pour. 1,04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Provide at least one person thoroughly familiar with specification requirements, completely trained, qualified to perform the work, who shall be present at all times on the project site directing the work. Provide additional skilled personnel to ensure installation in strict accordance with design Documents. B. Quality control: Sampling during placement shall be accomplished either by an employee of an independent Testing Laboratory or by an individual, approved by the ARCHITECT, qualified to perform operations as described herein. Testing shall be accomplished by an independent laboratory as described in Section 01400. 95052/11-95 1. Sampling and testing shall include the following: a. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge. 03300-2 . . . . 95052/l 1-95 2. b. Air content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method; for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C23l pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive test specimens. c. Concrete temperature: Record hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees f. and below, or when 80 degrees f. and above, and each time a set of strength test specimens are made. d. Compression test specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold, cure and store as directed by the Testing Laboratory. field test specimens: Samples of concrete mixtures shall be taken to determine the adequacy of control of materials, proportioning, consistency, mixing, and air content of the concrete. Sufficient quantities shall also be tested for curing strength as follows: a. Compression test cylinders: One (I) set of four cylinders shall be made from the same batch for each 50 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, for each type of concrete placed daily, and not less than four (4) cylinders for each day's operation or for each 4000 square feet of surface area places. field sampling reports: Forward to the ARCHITECT, on the same day sampling is performed, one Field Sample Report for each set of field test specimens made or a Daily Summary Report, listing each set of field test specimens, containing the following information. a. Project name and number b. Name of individual performing sampling c. Date d. Weather conditions e. for each of test specimens: 1 Time 2 Temperature l Air Content ~ Slump ~ Type and class of concrete Q Location of batch in structure 1 Specimen numbers 3. C. Allowable tolerances for concrete placement: I. Variation from level or grades specified or indicated; unless noted on plans: a. Slabs 1 In any 10. ft. length 1/4 inch 2 In any bay Or in any 20 ft. length and Maximum for the entire length 3/8 inch '2. Variation of the linear ~uilding lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls and partitions: 1 In any bay 1/4 inch , 2 In any 20 ft. length 3/8 inch l Maximum for the entire length 1/2 inch 3. Vatiationin the sizes and location of sleeves, floo'r openings, and wall openings 1/4 inch 4. Variation in the thickness of slabs 1/4 inch 03300-3 5. Footings, variations in: a. Dimensions in plan b. Misplacement of eccentricity: 2 percent of the footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than c, Thickness 1 Decrease 1 inch . 2 inches .2 Increase 6. Steps, variations in: a. Each flight 1 Rise .2 Run b. Consecutive steps 1 Riser .2 Tread 5% or max. 2 inches No limit 118 inch 114 inch 1116 inch 1/8 inch 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the ARCHITECTs approval at no additional cost. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS . A. Cold weather concreting: Equipment shall be provided for protection of the concrete during freezing near-freezing weather. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be used. Whenever the temperature is below 40 degrees F., all concrete placed in the forms shall have a temperature of between 70 and 80 degrees F., and means shall be provided for maintaining a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F., for three (3) days, or 50 degrees F, for five (5) days, or for more time to insure curing of the concrete. Work shall be in accordance with ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting." or B. Hot weather concreting: During hot weather when atmospheric temperature rises higher than 90 degrees F., attention shall be given to ingredients, production method, handling, placing, protection and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation in accordance with ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.0 I FORM WORK A. Design offormwork is the Contractor's responsibility. 2.02 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be produced at a central batching plant, mixed and delivered in the forms. . 95052/11-95 03300-4 . B. Concrete shall be class, weights, and strength as listed herein, shown m the drawings, and as otherwise directed and specified. C. Concrete class: Item Description Class Weight Minimum Strength Slump at 28 days Footings, walls A Normal 3000 psi 3-5 ans Topping on Weight Precast Slabs 145 PCF Pile caps, grade B Normal 4000 psi 3-5 beams and slab on grade D. Concrete materials: I, Portland cement: Meeting ASTM C 150, Type I or II, and using one brand of cement throughout project. 2. Fine aggregates: Conform to ASTM C 33, for normal weight. 3. Coarse aggregate: Conform to ASTM C 33, for normal weight. Maximum size shall be I" for slabs; 1-1/2" for reinforced footings; or not more than 1/5 the narrowest dimension between the sides of the forms or 3/4 the minimum clear distance between parallel reinforcing--whichever is smaller. . 2.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing bars: Comply with ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Steel wire: Comply with ASTM A 82, plain cold-drawn steel wire. C. Welded wire fabric: Comply with ASTM A 185. D. Supports for reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. I. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications, or concrete bricks. Do not use wood, brick, and other unacceptable materials. 2. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners. 3. Surfaces exposed-to-view, provide supports contacting forms with either hot-dipped galvanized or plastic protected legs. 2.04 CURING MA TERlAL A. Liquid curing and sealing compounds shall conform to ASTM C 309. See Acceptable Products: 1. Type: Clear high solids based, meeting ASTM C 309, Type 1. Gifford-Hill & Co., Inc. Sealco 8000. . 95052/11-95 03300-5 Guardian Chemical Co. Protex Industries, Inc. . B. Sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 171. C. Burlap Cloth made from jute or kenaf and weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd. for moist curing. Provide two layers. 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Other manufacturers for a particular material may be submitted for consideration to the Architect, provided products are of comparable design, quality and accompanied by satisfactory evidence as defmed in Section 01600. Materials described herein are based on manufacturer's product and industry standards in order to establish standards of design and quality. B. Provide Manufacturer technical field service during initial pours, at no cost to the Owner by a person experienced in the adjustment of concrete mixes for the particular admixtures being used, C. Air entraining admixtures: Conform to the requirements of ASTM C260 and shall contain no chloride. Submit data for approval. 1. Euclid Chemical Company: Air Mix Perma Air 2. Gifford-Hill: Air- Tite Amex 210 Air-Tite 60 (formulated for fly ash mixtures) 3. Monier: Relcrete Air 30 Relcrete Air 40 Septair . D. Water reducing admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A for normal setting or Type D for retarding admixture; contain no chloride, and free of organic acids, (or salts of organic acids) and compatible with air entraining admixture. Submit data for approval. I. Euclid Chemical Company: Eucon II (Type A, Mild Setting) Eucon HR 75 (Type A, Normal Setting) 2. Gifford-Hill, PSI. (Type A or D, Chloride free) 3. Monier, Relcrete L, N or T E. Retarding admixtures: Conform to ASTM C 494, Type B or Type D; contain no chloride and free of organic acids or salts; and compatible with air entraining admixture. Submit data for approval. I, Euclid Chemical Company, Eucon Retarder 75 (Type B or D) 2. Master Builders, Pozzolith 3. Silka 161 R (Type D) 95052/11-95 03300-6 . . . . F. All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the ARCHITECT's approval. 2.06 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE MIXTURES A. General: The concrete shall be proportioned by one of the following methods: Laboratory verification method or waterlcement ratio method. Proportioning shall be based on the requirements ofa plastic and workable mix within the slump range for class and strength as specified. B. Air content of freshly mixed concrete as determined by the method of ASTM C 173 shall be 5%. A field tolerance of I % plus or minus is acceptable. All concrete shall be air entrained except for footings. C. Water reducing admixture shall be used in all concrete to reduce the total water requirement per cubic yard of concrete without loss of workability or test strength. D. Retarding admixture shall be used to retard the setting time when anticipated ambient temperature exceeds 75 degrees F. during placing or fmishing operations. 2.07 BA TCHING AND MIXING A. Measure cement by weight on a scale separate from those used for other materials. Cement may be measured in bags of standard weight of 94 pounds; however, no fraction of a bag shall be used in any batch. B. Measure aggregates by weight. Batch weights shall be based on saturated surface dry materials corrected for the actual moisture condition of the aggregate. c. Measure water by volume or by weight by devices not subject to variation due to variable pressure in the water supply line. Measuring tanks shall be provided with means for checking their calibration. D. Devices for measuring quantities of cement, aggregates, water and admixtures shall be accurate within 1 % under operating conditions. E. Furnish delivery ticket for each batch of concrete before unloading at the site. Weights of fme and coarse aggregate, amount of cement, and total water as batches shall be printed on ticket by an automatic printing device. Delivery tickets shall, in addition, include the following: I. Name of batch plant. 2. Serial number of ticket. 3. Date and truck number. 4. Name of contractor. 5. Job name of location. 6. Class of concrete and slump. 7. Cubic yards of concrete. 8. Time loaded. 9. Amount water added at job: 10. Initials of Job Superintendent. F. Ready-mixed concrete shall be produced and delivered in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 94. 95052/11-95 03300-7 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION . A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which work of this Section is to be performed, and correct unsatisfactory conditions which would prevent proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Conduit Work I. Electrical conduits shall be buried in concrete slabs. Low conduit shall be wired to the upper side of bottom reinforcing, and top conduit shall be wired to the lower side of top steel. 2. Take care in placing concrete around gangs or parallel conduit. Where such conduits occur, they shall be separate by at least one inch (I n), concrete slab shall be thickened to maintain the same cross sectional concrete area. 3.02 REINFORCING PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Comply with the specified standards for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. Position, supports, and secure reinforcement against displacement by form work, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16 gauge wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh. Provide sufficient numbers of supports of the strength required to carry reinforcement. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2 inches beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Splices: Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact and tightly wire tie. 3.03 JOINTS A. Construction joints: 95052/1 1-95 I. Horizontal construction joints will not be permitted except as shown on the Drawings. 2. If construction joints necessary for the progress of the work are not shown on the Drawings, shown them in complete detail on Shop Drawings. . 03300-8 . 3. For slabs on grade, locate joints as indicated on the drawings, Provide keyways at least mid depth in all construction joints in walls, slabs, and between footings and walls. 4. B. Isolation joints in slabs on grade: Provide isolation jomts in slabs on grade at points of contact between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces where indicated. C. Control joints in slabs on grade: Provide control joints in slabs on grade to form panels or patterns as shown. Joints shall be constructed with keyed metal forms as indicated. Except where floor covering is required, construction and expansion joints in slabs shall be filled with joint sealant meeting the requirements of Section 07920. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General 1. Place concrete in compliance with practices and recommendations of ACI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Notify ARCHITECT 48 hours before placing concrete in any portion of the structure to permit inspection of the fonns and reinforcement. All embedded items of whatever nature shall be in place prior to inspection. B. Procedures Do not place any concrete which does not meet slump requirements for concrete specified. Deposit concrete continuously in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Perform concrete placing at such rate that concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its fmal location to avoid segregation due to rehandling and flowing. Do not subject concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation. Screed concrete which is to receive other construction to the proper level to avoid excessive skimming and grouting. Do not use concrete which becomes non plastic and unworkable, or does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by foreign materials. Remove rejected concrete from the site and dispose of it in an approved location. C. Placement schedule: Place concrete iri confonnance with the placement schedule to ensure an even distribution of loads throughout the entire structure. D. Concrete conveying: I. Handle concrete from the point of delivery and transfer to concrete conveying equipment, and to the locations of fmal deposit, as rapidly as practicable and by methods which will prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix materials. 2. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment, including chutes and tremies, free from hardened concrete, debris, water, and other deleterious ~aterials. . 95052/11-95 03300-9 3. Use chutes or tremies for placing concrete where a drop of more than 72 inches is required. Where free drop through tremies exceeds 18', use flow checking devices. 4. E. Placing concrete in forms: I. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches, avoiding inclined construction joints. 2. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 3. Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached the elevation of such spreaders. 4. Do not place concrete in supporting elements until the concrete previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic. F. Placing concrete slabs: I. Immediately before placing concrete, ensure that any required subgrade, waterproofmg, vapor barriers, bond breaks, and/or joint forms have been properly installed. Install wire mesh and/or steel reinforcement as indicated and specified, Deposit and consolidate concrete in a continuous operation, within the limits of the construction joints, until the placing of a panel or area is complete. Consolidate concrete during placement by use of Contractor approved equipment, thoroughly working concrete around the reinforcement and into comers. Consolidate concrete placed against bulkheads of slabs on grade, as specified for formed concrete. Consolidate concrete in remainder of slabs by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screed, or other methods acceptable to the ARCHITECT. Screed to correct level with straightedge to bring surface to the required fmish elevation with no coarse aggregate visible, Immediately following screeding fmish the surface to a true even plane using bullfloats or darbies. After concrete has stiffened suffi<;:iently to support one man's weight without imprint and the water sheen has disappeared, it shall be wood floated. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, immediately following wood floating, the surfaces shall be steel troweled to produce a smooth, dense surface free from blemishes including trowel marks. In lieu of hand fmishing, an approved power fmishing machine may be used in accordance with the directions of the machine manufacturer. A fmal hard steel troweling shall be done by hand. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface; do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to start of fmishing operations. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 3.05 HOT AND COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. See Job Conditions, paragraph 1.6 elsewhere herein. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 95052/11-95 I. Consolidate all concrete in forms in accordance with provisions of ACI 309. 03300-10 . . . 2. . 3. 4. 5. Consolidate each layer of concrete immediately after placing, by use of internal concrete vibrators supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete. . Maintain a frequency of not less than 10,000 vibrations per minute for internal vibrators. Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement. 8, Equipment: Provide adequate number of units and power source at all times. Maintain spare units on hand. C. Procedures: 3.07 CURING A. General: . 1, Limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation of aggregate. 2, Insert the vibrator so as to penetrate the lift immediately below the one being placed, and manipulated to blend the two lifts. 3. Use the vibrator to melt force the concrete as it is being placed, and use the vibrator to consolidate concrete masses. 4. In the case of wall construction, assign one vibrator and vibrator operator to blend the mix; assign at least one other vibrator and operator for consolidating the masses of concrete. 1. All concrete shall be cured by an approved method for the period of time given below. Type III cement Type I, II, IP of IS cement Type I or Type II cement blended with pozzolan 12 days Immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying extremes in temperatures, rapid temperature change, mechanical injury and injury from rain and flowing water. All materials and equipment needed for adequate curing and protection shall be available and accessible prior to placing concrete. No fIre or excessive heat shall be permitted near or in direct contact with the concrete at any time. Curing shall be accomplished by any of the following methods, or combination thereof, as approved by Contractor. 3 days 7 days 2. B. Moist curing: Concrete to be moist-cured shall be maintained continuously wet for the entire curing period. If water or curing ma~erials used, stains or discolors concrete surfaces which are to be permanently exposed, the concretesuifaces shall be cleaned. When wooden forms are left in place during curing, they shall be kept wet at all times. If the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall. be carried out as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Horizontal surfaces shall. be cured by covering with waterproof paper, polyethylene sheet, polyethylene-coated burlap or saturated burlap. C. Membrane curing: . 95052/11-95 I. Membrane curing shall not be used on surfaces that are to receive any subsequent treatment depending on adhesion or bonding to the concrete; except a styrene acrylate or chlorinated rubber compound meeting Class B requirements may be used for surfaces which are to be 03300-11 2. painted or are to receive bituminous roofmg or waterproofmg, or floors that are to receive adhesive applications of vinyl composition tile. Membrane curing compound shall not be used on surfaces that are maintained at curing temperatures with free steam. The curing compound shall be applied to formed surfaces immediately after the forms are removed and prior to any patching or other surface treatment except the cleaning of loose sand, mortar, and debris from the surface. The surfaces shall be thoroughly moistened with water and the curing compound shall be applied to slab surface as soon as the bleeding water has disappeared, with the tops of joints being temporarily sealed to prevent entry of the compound and to prevent moisture loss during the curing period. The compound shall be applied in a one-coat continuous operating, at a uniform coverage in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Concrete surfaces which have been subjected to rainfall within three hours after curing compound has been applied shall be recoated at the same coverage rate and method herein specified. On surfaces permanently exposed to view, the surface shall be shaded from direct rays of the sun for the duration of the curing period. Surfaces coated with curing compound shall be kept free of foot and vehicular traffic and from other sources of abrasion and contamination during the curing period. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.08 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough fonn fmish: I. Provide as cast rough form fmish to formed concrete surfaces that are to be concealed in the fmish work or by any other construction. Standard rough form fmish shall be the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with tie holes and defective area repaired and patched, and all fms and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off. 2. B. Smooth form fmish: I. Provide as-cast smooth form fmish for formed concrete surfaces that are to be exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a coating material other than cement plaster applied directly to the concrete. 2. Produce smooth form fmish by selecting form material to impart a smooth, hard, uniform texture and arranging them orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. 3. Repair and patch defective areas with all fms and other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Related unformed surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a smooth troweled fmish. 3.09 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch fmish: 95052/11-95 I. Apply scratch fmish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for terrazzo tile and other bonded applied cementitious-fmish flooring material. 03300-12 . . . . . . 2. After placing slabs, plane the surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 24" when tested with a straightedge. Slope unifonnly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen the surface before its fmal set by using a stiff broom, a brush, or a rake. 3. 4. B. Float fmish: I. Apply float fmish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel fmish and other fmishes as specified, and to slab surfaces which are to be covered with insulation, and as otherwise shown on the Drawings or in the schedules. 2. After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface further until ready for floating. 3. Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared and when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of a power-driven float, or both. 4. Consolidate the surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. 5. Check and levelthe surface plan to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in (10'0") when tested with a 10'-0" straightedge placed on the surface at not less than two difference angles. 6. Cut down high spots and fiUlow spots. 7. Uniformly slope to drains where required. 8. Immediately after leveling, refloat the surfaces to a smooth, uniform, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: I. Apply trowel fmish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and to slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, carpeting, paint or other thin-film fmish coating system. ' After floating, begin the fIrst trowel fmish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin fmal troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate the concrete surface by the fmal hand troweling operation, free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/S" in 10'0" when tested with a 10'_0" straightedge. Grind smooth those surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 2. 3. 4. D. Nonslip broom fmish: I. Apply nonslip broom fmish to exterior concrete paving, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in the schedules. 2: Immediately after trowel fmishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by brooming in the direction perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use a fIberbristle broom. E. Chem~cal hardener fmish: I. Apply chemical hardener fmish to exposed dry interior concrete floors. where required by the Drawings and the schedules. . 2. ApplY liquid chemical harde.ner after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. 3. Dilute the liquid hardener with water and apply three coats. First coat: 1/3strength Second coat: 1/2 strength 95052/11-95 03300-13 4. Third coat: 2/3 strength Evenly apply all coats and allow 24 hours drying time between coats. . 3.10 PROTECTION A. Areas shall be barricaded after the curing and sealing compound has been applied. As soon as the compound has dried, adequately cover floor surface to prevent staining, discoloration or physical damage which may be difficult to correct. Use scuff-proof non-staining building paper or polyethylene film, suitably weighted or ballasted with sand as necessary. B. Where other concrete structures are to be poured on to or adjacent to fmished surfaces, take all necessary precautions to prevent damage from erection of form work or staining from concrete laitance. C. Alert other trades to the need for special protection against rolling or sliding heavy loads across the surface, oil drippings from pipe threaders, spillage of paint, plaster and mortar. Ensure that the covering is not damaged or removed during the progress of the work. 3.11 QUESTIONABLE CONCRETE A. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of three (3) consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the required 28-day strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the required 28-day strength by more than 500 pounds per square inch. B. Failure to comply with the evaluation procedure shall constitute questionable concrete, and core tests shall be made at no cost to the Owner in accordance with ACI Building Code 318, Chapter 4, ASTM C 42, and as directed by the ARCHITECT. If core tests fail to demonstrate the strength required by the contract documents, load tests shall be made in accordance with Chapter 20 of the ACI Building Code 318. If concrete again fails to demonstrate strength required, the materials shall be removed and new materials provided. The Contractor shall pay all costs of the load test and all costs of corrective measures to make the work conform to the Contract Documents. . C. The term "Building Official" in ACI Building Code 3 I 8 shall be interpreted to mean the ARCHITECT. 3.12 CORRECTIVE WORK A. Any careless or improper application of curing compounds, variations in fmishing, curing, staining, marring or other damage from ensuring construction operations shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. B. Corrective work shall be performed in accordance with procedures and utilizing materials recommended by approved manufacturer. Corrective work shall produce a texture, color and fmish which will match adjacent accepted surface as approved by the ARCHITECT. END OF SECTION 95052/11-95 03300-14 . . SECTION 03345 CONCRETE FINISHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the product for curing, sealing, hardening and protection of exposed cast-in-pIace concrete. B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following: I. SIabs-on-grade. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 3 Section "cast-in-place concrete." 1.03 SUBMITTALS . A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division Specification Sections. B. Product Date: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: I. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications, test data and other data required to prove compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and StandardS: Comply with provisions of the code, specifications, and standards. B. .Use adequate numbers of skilled workman thoroughly trained, experienced and completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods specified herein as needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section. . 95-052/12-95 CONCRETE FINISHES 03345 - I PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 CONCRETE FINISHES A. The curing-sealing-hardening compound will be the Ashford Formula as manufactured by Curecrete Chemical Company, P.O. Box 551, Springville, Utah 84663, (901) 489-5663, or an approved equal with the following attributes: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PATCHING 1. A non-film forming chemical that penetrates into the concrete where it reacts with the alkali and lime, commonly called concrete salts. During this reaction it chemically combines with the salts melting them within the concrete into a gel which locks the pores of the concrete. This process densifies the concrete into a solid mass that does not allow penetration into the concrete surface. The performance criteria shall be established by tests conducted by recognized independent testing laboratories. a. Curing: Reduce moisture loss by a minimum of 90% during initial 24 hours. b. Abrasion: Taber C-17 wheel, minimum 30% increase in abrasion resistance. c. Bonding: ASTM-D3359, minimum 17% increase in epoxy adhesion. d. Hardening: ASTM-C-42, minimum 38% increase in compressive strength at 28 days. ASTM-C-805, minimum 13% increase impact resistance, Schmidt hammer test method. e. Permeabilitv: ASTM modified, 7 inch head, minimum leakage 0.0083 cclhr. f. Chemical Resistance: The manufacturer shall provide a chemical resistance guide listing test results by independent laboratories. . 2. 3. A. Concrete which is not formed as shown on the plans, or for any reason is out of alignment or level or shows a defective surface shall be considered as not conforming with the intent of these specifications and shall be removed from the job by the Contractor, at his expense, unless the Architect grants permission to patch the defective area, which shall be done in accordance with the following procedure. Permission to patch any such area shall not be considered a waiver of the Architect's right to require complete removal of the defective work if the patching does not, in his opinion, satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface. B. When patching is authorized by the Architect, it shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 37, "Patching" of the Architectural Concrete Specifications, published by the Portland Cement Association, current edition. 3.02 FINISHES ON FORMED SURFACE A. Upon completion of parching, surfaces of concrete shall be fmished as follows: 95-052/12-95 CONCRETE FINISHES 03345 - 2 . 3. Unexposed concrete shall be left rough. . Common Finish: a. Confme common finish to exposed. concrete surfaces in mechanical, electrical, and utility spaces, and areas shown or noted in finish schedule. b.Strip forms at earliest time permitted by provisions of "Concrete Section." Strip only those forms on areas which can be immediately fmished. c. Produce common fmish by filling smoothly all the holes and honeycomb areas and knocking off and evening up burrs. Smooth Rubbed Finish: a. . Provide smooth rubbed fmish on vertical interior concrete exposed in the finish work, as indicated on fmish schedule not to receive special textured concrete. b. Produce smooth rubbed finish as follows: Mix I part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fme sand with sufficient water to produce a grout having the consistency of thick paint. Wet the surface of the concrete sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from the grout and apply the grout with brushes or a spray gun uniformly, completely filling air bubbles and holes. Immediately after applying the grout, float the surface with a cork or other suitable float, scouring the wall vigorously. While the grout is still plastic, the surface shall refinished with a sponge rubber float removing all excess grout. This fmishing shall be done at the time when grout will not pull from holes or depressions. Next allow the surface to dry thoroughly, then rub it vigorously with dry burlap to completely remove any dried grout. There shall be no visible film or grout remaining after this rubbing. The entire cleaning operation for any area must be completed the day it is started. No grout shall be left on the wall overnight. After an area has been grout cleaned, if any slightly dark spots or streaks remain they shall be wiped off lightly with a fine abrasive hone without using water but the rubbing with the hone shall not be sufficient to change the texture of the concrete. This fmal operation shall be included as a part of the smooth rubbed finish. . 1. 2. . 3.03 UNFINISHED STRUCTURAL SLABS A. Treat surfaces of structural slabs, not fmished as walking surfaces or as support for resilient floor coverings as required by their intended use. 1. Screed surfaces intended to receive cement setting beds for other materials to true pl~es and scraped free of laitance or scum immediately thereafter, and roughen mechanically for bond as soon as they bear the weight of workmen. Scrub surfaces to receive setting beds before placing setting and broom a thin, neat cement grout onto the surface a short distance ahead of the fill. 3.04 MONOLITHIC CEMENT FINISH' A. Apply to the surface of concrete floor slabs as follows: . 1. Floors scheduled to receive resilient flooring, carpets, and all other floors, stairs, platforms or slabs scheduled or shown on the drawings to have steel troweled cement finish. 2. Screed floor slabs to an even surface by the use of straight edge grade to obtain floor level.within specified tolerances after initial deflection under dead load. This . 95-052/12-95 CONCRETE FINISHES 03345 - 3 means that slab is to be screeded at center span to a rise equal to specified camber of forms, i.e., +/- 0 at columns and + value at center span to attain floor slab level within the specified tolerances after removal offorms. Float concrete with a wood float in a manner which will compact it and produce a surface free from depressions or inequalities of any kind. Floors shall be level with a tolerance of 1/8" in ten feet and shall slope overall no more than 1/4" except where drains occur in which case the floors shall be pitched to the drains as indicated on the drawings. After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent fme materials from working to the top and allowed to stand until all water sheen has disappeared, steel trowel surface. Perform final troweling after the concrete is so hard that no mortar accumulates on the trowel and a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is drawn over the surface. The drying of the surface moisture before troweling must proceed naturally and must not be hastened by the dusting on of dry sand or cement. Perform patching required to bring slabs to specified tolerances using latex or epoxy modified Portland cement. . 3.05 SEALER A. Prepare the surface in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect. 1. On freshly fmished concrete surfaces, no additional surface preparation will be required. On areas where forms are recently removed, remove all form oil and breaking compound residue to assure penetration of the product into the surface. When applying near windows, mask the glass. A void contact with plant life, glass, aluminum and other finished surfaces. Where contact occurs, immediately wipe with a damp cloth or flush with water. A void contact with asphaltic concrete. . 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Apply the approved product to the designated surfaces in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended application procedures as approved by the Architect. 1. Application should be made immediately following the final concrete fmishing operation as soon as the concrete is fInn enough to work on. This will help prevent temperature and hairline cracking. 2. Application shall be made with a low pressure spray. All concrete surfaces shall be kept wet for 30-45 minutes. 3. After this period, when the treated surfaces become slippery under foot, lightly sprinkle the surfaces with water to aid penetration. 4. After the surface begins to dry once again, flush the entire surface with water to remove excess material, alkali or impurities. Squeegee the surfaces completely dry. 5. On broom fmished surfaces, no flushing is required but squeegee or broom the excess product from the surface after 30 to 40 minutes. C. 12.2.1.8 Unexposed Concrete: All concrete scheduled, noted or otherwise shown on thetplans to receive an applied finish floor material such as carpet, vinyl tile, etc. will receive a curing compound applied at a rate not to exceed 400 square feet per gallon and shall be one of the following: I. Eucosil as manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company. 2. Chem Hard as manufactured by Gifford Hill. 95-052/12-95 CONCRETE FINISHES 03345 - 4 . . . . 95-052/12-95 3. 4. Curetox as manufactured by Toch Brothers. Sonosil as manufactured by Sonnebom-Contech. END OF SECTION 03300 CONCRETE FINISHES 03345 - 5 . . . SECTION 03430 PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Concrete Work. B. Work included in this section: 1. Precast prestressed concrete Hollow Core Plank. 2. Precast prestressed cnocrete Double Tees 1.02 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. References: Some products and execution are specified in this Section by reference to published specifications or standards of the following (with respective abbreviations used). These referenced publications may be subject to special conditions and/or limitations where specified herein. American Concrete Institute (ACI) American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Prestressed Concrete Institute (PC!) B. Standard References: The current edition of the following standard references shall apply to the work of this Section as indicated. Suffixes indicating issue date are omitted from reference numerals elsewhere in this text. 1. PCI Standard 116-82, Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Products of Precast- Prestressed. 2. PCI Design Manual for Prestressed Concrete Products. 3. ASTM A615-82, Specifications for Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM A416-80, Specifications for Uncoated Seven-wire Stress-Relieved Strand for Prestressed Concrete. 5. Building Code Requirements, for Reinforced Concrete of the American Concrete Institute (ACI318-83). 1.03 QUAUFlCA TIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Standard: For purposes of designating type and quality for the work under this Section, Drawings, and Specifications are based on products manufactured or furnished by a member of the Prestressed Concrete Institute. 95052/11-95 03430-1 B. Welding: C. Erectors: 1.04 SUBMITTALS 2. Manufacturer: Plant, organization, and all manufacturing procedure shall comply with PCI Standard 103. Mixing Equipment: The batching plant and the necessary mixing equipment shall be at least equal to equipment specified and required by ASTM C94-83. "Specifications for Ready-Mix Concrete." Fabricator shall be a recognized prestressed concrete manufacturer whose design, fabrication and erection operations are supervised by a Georgia Registered Professional Engineer. 3. 4. 1. All shop welds related to anchors and accessories shall be performed by certified welders. 1. The erector shall be employed by the manufacturer and shall have completed projects of comparable size. A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval prior to manufacture of units. Shop drawings shall include the following: I. Complete details of design including size and location of reinforcement, manufacture and installation including location of all openings, inserts, and other accessories to be cast into, or fabricated in, the prestressed units. Show concrete strengths, unit dimensions and weights, concrete fmishes, and curing methods. Reinforcement details shall conform to all typical and special details shown on the Drawings. All connections and all bearing and anchorage details shall be shown on the shop drawings. All precast concrete units shall be properly identified by a specific mark, to appear on both shop drawings and manufactured units. All details and notes appearing on the drawings for reinforcement, manufacture and installation of the unit shall be shown on the shop drawings. Shop drawings shall bear the signature and seal of a professional engineer registered in the State of Georgia. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Transport of units shall be approved by the Manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of PCI Standards and in a manner to prevent significant stresses. B. Handling: Lifting devices shall be embedded in the members and the members shall be lifted and supported during transportation only at these support points. C. Storage: Contractor shall coordinate storage and receiving of units with erector. Units shall be stored in upright position that will prevent significant stresses. PART 2 PRODUCTS 95052/11-95 03430-2 . . . . . . 2.04 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be produced by the prestressed concrete Manufacturer at a central batching plant, or he shall have control over the batching of material used to insure proper quality. The concrete shall be mixed and delivered to the forms by an approved method. B. Concrete shall be light weight (128 pcf +/- 2%) and shall have an ultimate compressive strength at 28 days of 5000 psi, or otherwise as approved by the Architect. C. Concrete shall comply with Section 03300. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Strands: All strands shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 416-80 regular and/or 270K type. B. Reinforcing Steel: All reinforcing bars and/or welded steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall meet the standards of ASTM A615-82 for bars; and ASTM A 185-79 for mesh. 2.03 INSERTS AND PLATES A. Bearing Pads or Plates: Steel bearing plates and neoprane rubber pads (or pads of other specified material) of required size and design shall be furnished at each support point as shown on Drawings. All steel used in bearing plates, embedded plates, etc., shall comply with ASTM A36-80. B. Specified Cast-In Inserts: Specified cast-in attachments as required by other trades shall be furnished by trades involved. Contractor shall coordinate supply of units to prestressed Manufacturer. FORMING A. Form Oil: The form oil, or parting compound, shall be such that it will not impair the paintabiIity of the concrete surfaces. B. Forms: Form shall be steel to produce a smooth fmished product. Forms shall be so designed and aligned that they shall not restrict the longitudinal movement of the section when the prestressing force is transferred. 2.05 MANUFACTURE A. Method: The procedures and methods or manufacture shall be in accordance with PCI Standard 103. B. Sizes: The prestressed members shall be the size shown on the Drawings. C. Finish: All surfaces shall have a smooth, hard fmish. D. Exposed corners of the prestressed members shall be chamfered. E. Openings: Contractor shall be responsible for the inclusion of all openings, anchors, inserts and other accessories specified or shown on drawings. No openings shall be permitted to cut prestressing strands. Power-driven inserts and studs shall not be placed so as to interfere with the prestressing strands and shall be located at least 6" from concrete edges and corners to prevent spalling of the 95052/11-95 03430-3 concrete. Openings less than 6" in diameter shall be field cut only with the permission of Architect and in accordance with the written directions of the prestressed manufacturer. . F. Tolerances shall not exceed the following: 1. Cross-Sectional Dimension: a. Sections less than 12" - plus or minus 1/8". b. Sections 12" to 48" - plus or minus 1/4". 2. Overall Length - Plus or minus 1/8" per 10 feet ofIength, with a maximum length tolerance of plus or minus 3/4". 3. Deviation from Straight Line (Sweep) - 1/8" per 10 feet ofIength. 4. Deviation from Design Camber - plus or minus 1/16" per 10 feet of length. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACE Bearing surface shall be in place and approved before placement of units. 3.02 ERECTION A. All columns and beams shall be placed and connections made at all anchors as specified. B. Erection shall normally include the following in addition to those items listed hereinbefore: 1. Removal of lifting hooks or sleeves from members in which they would hamper other trades. Lifting devices removed from surface exposed in the fmished work shall be cut off below the fmished surface and the resultant hole shall be patched with bonding grout to match the adjoining surfaces. Welding shall be performed by certified welders. Welding shall be performed with proper safeguards to prevent the staining and smoking of the concrete surfaces by the welding operation. . 2. C. Leveling and plumbing of the prestressed concrete structure shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall erect the prestressed concrete structure true to line and grade. Before any work is done on the structure (including concrete slabs), he shall check the structure and require that any corrections necessary be made prior to his doing any work. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY A. Defects: Chipped, broken, cracked, warped, bent, honeycombed or other damaged units shall be rejected and replaced at no additional cost to the owner, unless the Architect grants permission to patch the defective units. B. Repairs: If permission to patch defective units is granted by the Architect, the patching shall be approved by the Architect. 3.04 CLEANING 95052/11-95 03430-4 . . . . 95052/11-95 A. Exposed Surfaces: Clean off all stains, mud, mortar or other materials that will alter appearance of fmishes. B. Top Surfaces: Broom clean for topping. END OF SECTION 03430-5 . SECTION 03520 INSULATING CONCRETE DECKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cast-in-place lightweight insulating concrete for roof decks. B. Related Section: Division 3 Section "Precast Prestressed Concrete" contains requirements that relate to this Section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Lightweight Insulating Concrete: Low-density concrete, with an oven-dry unit weight not exceeding 50 Ib/cu. ft. (800 kg/cu. m) placed with or without embedded rigid insulation, and classified as follows: . 1. Aggregate- Type Lightweight Concrete: Low-density concrete made with portland cement, water, air-entraining admixture, and either perlite or vermiculite mineral aggregates. 1.04 SUBMIIT ALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include mixing and application instructions for each type of lightweight insulating concrete. I. Include lightweight insulating concrete design designations of a qualified testing and -inspecting agericy evidencing compliance with requirements. C. Shop Drawings including plans, sections, and details showing roof slopes, insulation thicknesses, roof penetrations, roof perimeter terminations and curbs, control and expansion joints, and roof drains. D. Design mixes for each lightweight insulating concrete mix, including as-cast unit weight, oven-dry unit weight, and compressive strength. E. Material test reports from. a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance .with requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing of current materials: . 95-052/12-95 INSULA TING CONCRETE DECKS 03520 - 1 1. 2. 3. 4. Cement. Aggregates. Admixtures. Molded insulation. . F. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence lightweight insulating concrete's compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed lightweight insulating concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide lightweight insulating concrete identical to that tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. . D. Provide lightweight aggregates containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in EPA's 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original undamaged packages or acceptable bulk containers. B. Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage. C. Do not use cement that shows indications of moisture damage, caking, or other deterioration. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not place lightweight insulating concrete when ambient temperature is at or below 32 deg F (0 deg C). 95-052/12-95 INSULATING CONCRETE DECKS 03520 - 2 . . 1. When air temperature has fallen or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), heat water to a maximum 120 deg F (49 deg C) before mixing to attain lightweight concrete at point of placement with temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) minimum and 80 deg F (27 deg C) maximum. B. Do not place lightweight insulating concrete during rain or snow or on surfaces covered with standing water, snow, or ice. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. . Aggregate Lightweight Concrete: a. AirIite Processing Corporation of Florida. b. Carolina Perlite Corporation Inc. c. Grace: W.R. Grace & Co.; Construction Products Div. d. HarborIite Corporation. e. Mandoval Vermiculite Products Inc. f. Redco II. g. SiIbrico Corporation. h. Strong-Lite Products Corp. \. SR-2000 by Southeastern Roof Devices, Inc. . 2.02 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, Type II, or Type III. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. C. Mineral Aggregate: ASTM C 332, Group I, vermiculite.. D. Control Joint Filler: ASTM C 612, Class 2, glass-fiber type; compressing to one~half thickness under a load of ~5 psi (I72 kPa). E. Molded Polystyrene Insulation Board: ASTM C 578, Type I, 0.90-1b/cu. ft. (IS-kg/cu. m) minimum density. 1. Provide units. with keying slots of approximately 3 percent of board gross surface are.a. 2.03 DESIGN MIXES . . A. Prepare design. inixes for each type and strength of lightweight insulating concrete by either labOratory trial batch or field test data methods. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. I. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality-control testing. . 95-052/12-95 INSULA TING CONCRETE DECKS 03520 - 3 2. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of portland cement by weight. B. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement or cementitious material permitted by ACI 301. . 2.04 AGGREGATE LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE A. Design mix to produce lightweight insulating concrete with the following minimum physical properties using the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable mix. B. Vermiculite Aggregate Mix: As follows: I. As-Cast Unit Weight: 42 to 48 lb/cu. ft. (705 to 960 kg/cu. m) at point of placement, when tested according to ASTM C 138. 2. Oven-Dry Unit Weight: 30 to 35 lb/cu. ft. (350 to 450 kg/cu. m), when tested according to ASTM C 495. 3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 200 psi (860 kPa), when tested according to ASTM C 495. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MIXING AND PLACING A. Mix and place lightweight insulating concrete according to manufacturer's instructions, using equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mix and loss of air content. B. See Section 07527 for more information.. . 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency, acceptable to Architect, to take samples and conduct tests to evaluate lightweight insulating concrete. Do not use same testing service that provided initial mix designs. 1. Take samples according to ASTM C 172, except as modified by ASTM C 495. 2. Determine as-cast unit weight during each hour of placement, according to ASTM C 138. 3. Determine compressive strength and oven-dry unit weight according to ASTM C 495. Make a set of at least 6 molds for each day's placement, but not less than 1 set of molds for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of roof area. B. Report test results to Architect and lightweight insulating concrete producer within 24 hours of completion of each test. C. Additional Tests: Make additional tests when test results indicate as-cast unit weight, compressive strength, oven-dry unit weight, or other requirements have not been met. 1. Retest in-place lightweight insulating concrete according to ASTM C 513 for compressive strength and oven-dry unit weight. 95-052/12-95 INSULATING CONCRETE DECKS 03520 - 4 . 3.03 DEFECTIVE WORK . Refinish, or remove and replace, lightweight insulating concrete surfaces that are excessively scaled or too rough to receive roofing, according to current published requirements of roofing manufacturer. A. B. Remove and replace lightweight insulating concrete that fails to meet compressive strength and oven-dry unit weight requirements. END OF SECTION 03520 . . 95-052/12-95 INSULATING CONCRETE DECKS 03520 - 5 . SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELA TED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete unit masonry. 2. Brick unit masonry. 3. Reinforced unit masonry. 4. Insulation in masonry walls. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for exposed sheet-metal flashing installed in masonry. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for gutter and downspout for mockup. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joint in mockup. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for wall vents. 2. . 3. 4. . C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include. the following: 1. Steel lintels for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications. " 2. Steel shelf angles for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications. " . 3. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry specified in Division 6 Section . "Rough Carpentry." 4. Manufactured reg lets in masonry joints for metal flashing specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing. and Sheet Metal." 5. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 6. Hollow metal .frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section "Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS. A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following. installed compressive strengths (fm) at 28 days. . 1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows, based on net area: . 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 2. a. As indicated. For Brick Unit Masonry: As follows, based on gross area: a. As indicated. . 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. D. Samples for initial selection of the following: I. Colored-masonry mortar samples showing the full range of colors available. E. Samples for verification of the following: I. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. a. Include size-variation data for Type FBX and Type FBS brick, verifying that actual range of sizes for brick falls within ASTM C 216 dimension tolerances. Colored-masonry mortar samples for each color required showing the full range of colors expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on the Project. Label samples to indicate type and amount of colorant used. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color. Accessories embedded in the masonry. . 2. 3. 4. F. Material certificates for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material complies with requirements. I. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. 3. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 4. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified professional engineer to provide a survey and inspection of foundations for compliance with dimensional tolerances. Contractor to submit record copy of his findings to the Architect. 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 . B. . Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM C 1093, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required. E. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. F. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample,wall panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of materials and execution. Build mock ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. . . 95-05211 2-95 1. Locate mockups on site in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed . by Architect. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. a. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." b. Each type of exposed unit masonry construction. c. Typical exterior brick-veneer wall complete with cmu back-up, veneer ties, flashing, weep holes and control/expansion joints. d. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner indicated. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will . be constructed. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the compl.eted Work. . a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; . tooling of jointS; aesthetic qualities Of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. AcceptanCe of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically.approved by Architect in writing. c. . When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. 2. ... -'. 4. 5. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. . B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried condition. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E.' Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. . 2. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. D. Cold- Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard for cold- weather construction and the following: 1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. 2. Remove masonry damaged by freezing E. Hot-Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 . PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 MANUF ACTURERS A. A vailable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: . 1. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Blue Circle. b. Claussen Concrete. c. Metromont. d. Augusta Concrete Block Co. 2. Architectural Concrete Masonry Units: a. Blue Circle. b. Claussen Concrete. 3. Brick: a. Boral Brick, Inc. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime: a. Blue Circle. b. Glen-Gery Corporation. . c. Lafarge Corporation. d. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. e. Coosa Masonry Cements. f. Giant Cement Co. Mortar Pigments: a. Davis Colors. b. Lafarge Corporation. c. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors: a. AA Wire Products Co. b. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. c. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. d. .. National Wire Products Industries. 4. 5. 6. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY,UNITS A. General: Pr?vide shapes indicated and as. follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required. 1. Provide special sh~pes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, . bonding, and other special conditions. . '., B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: . 95-052/12-95 1. Unit Compressive. Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive. strength indicated below: a. - 190P'psi(l3.l MPa). UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 2.03 BRICK 2. 3. 4. 5. b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. Weight Classification: Lightweight. Aggregates: Do not use aggregates made from pumice, scoria, or tuff. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on Drawings: a. 4 inch (100 mm) nominal: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) actual. b. 6 inch (150 mm) nominal: 5-5/8 inch (143 mm) actual. c. 8 inch (200 mm) nominal: 7-5/8 inch (194 mm) actual. d. 10 inch (250 mm) nominal: 9-5/8 inch (244 mm) actual. e. 12 inch (300 mm) nominal: 11-5/8 inch (295 mm) actual. f. 16 inch (400 mm) nominal: 15-5/8 inch (397 mm) actual. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. . 6. A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required. B. 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. . 1. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at comers, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. C. Face Brick: ASTM C 216 and as follows: 95-052/12-95 1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average net-area compressive strength indicated below: a. Grade: SW. 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Between 5 and 20 g/30 sq. in. (g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 3. Type: FBS. 4. Size: Bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within tolerances specified in ASTM C 216: a. Utility: 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) thick by 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) high by 11-1/2 to 11-5/8 inches (292 to 295 mm) long. 5. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Color and Texture: Match Architect's samples. 7. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6 . . a. b. 10-200; Boral Brick Co. Or Architect approved equal prior to bid 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. I. For pigmented mortars, use premixed, colored masonry cements of formulation required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm), use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. F. Ready-Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this Article; co~bined with set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 1142. G. Water: Potable. . H. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Colored Masonry Cement: a. At locations of specified face brick, use the following: I) Brick Red By Coosa. 2) U.S. Crimson Red 48B by Blue Circle. b. At locations of "Renaissance" masonry units, use the following: 1) Coosa "S". 2) B.C. Magnolia Mix by Blue Circle. 2.05 REINFORCING STEEL A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 6I5M). a. Grade 60 (Grade 400). B. Welded-Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 2.06 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Gener,al: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon-steel wire, coating class as follows: . 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 a. ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class 1, for interior walls; and ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for exterior walls. . B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated comer and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: I. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm). C. For single-wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: 1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. D. For multiwythe masonry, provide type as follows: I. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. a. Number of Side Rods for Multiwythe Concrete Masonry: One side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) in width, plus 1 side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 ffim) or less in width. b. Provide integral drips on cross rods at cavity walls. Adjustable (2-piece) tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box- type cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of back-up wythe and with separate adjustable ties engaging the cross ties and extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. a. Use where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of back-up and where indicated. . 2. 2.07 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: As follows: I. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class 1 coating for wire ties and anchors in interior walls. 2. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). 2.08 RIGID ANCHORS A. General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows: I. 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 24 inches (600 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins. 2. As indicated. 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 8 . :: ::.~: '.'~ "t..: . 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: I. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated. B. Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Type: Expansion anchors. 2. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 3. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed bymasonry. 4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Concrete Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the loads imposed by masonry. 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: Manufacturer's standard product consisting of sheet copper of weight indicated below, coated with flexible asphalt. . 1. 2. Weight: 5 oz.lsq. ft. (1.5 kg/sq. m). Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. B. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: a. Cop-A-Cote; AFCO Products, Inc. b. Type ACC-Asphalt Bituminous Coated; Phoenix Building Products. c. Coated Copper Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Copperseal; York Manufacturing,. Inc. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade.l; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: . I. Neoprene. 2. Urethane. . 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 9 B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. . 1. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep Holes: Provide the following: 1. Wicking Material: Material as indicated below, in length required to produce 2- inch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity between wythes, or as detailed on the drawings: a. Cotton sash cord. b. Fibrous glass rope. 2.12 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. B. High Pressure Water: General Contractor to repair any damage to the masonry caused by this procedure. 2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES . A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with BIA M 1, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: 1. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: S. 2. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non load-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: N. C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 10 . .~'" . D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fme or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout. 1. 'Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 inches (50 mm) or more in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. . PART3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION!. GENERAL A. . Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. . . C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D.Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units.aS required to provide continuous pattem and to fit adjoining construction. Use full- size units without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before. placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Mix units, for exposed ,'unit masonry from several 'pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce u~iform blend of colors and textures. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES . . . A. Varia~ion from PlUmb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arrises, do not exceed 1/4. inch in 10 feet; nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. . For .external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and .other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 Inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or ffiinus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. B. . Variation from Lev'el: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills,- parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in . 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 11 40 feet or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/16 inch within width of a single unit. . C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet, nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. D. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary bed-joint thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from head-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from collar-joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch. 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. c. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. . 1. As indicated on Drawings. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. G. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 12 . . 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: I. With 'full mortar coverage on horizoiltal imd vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. 4; Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch (lO-mm) joints. B. Lay hollow.brick as follows: 1. Lay vertical-cell units with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed joints with full mortar coverage on face shells and webs. 2. Lay horizontal-cell units with full bed joints, unless otherwise indicated. Keep drainage channels, if any, free of mortar. Form head joints with sufficient mortar so excess will be squeezed out as units are placed in position. Butter both sides of units to be placed, or butter one side of unit in place and one side of unit to be placed. 3. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 1/4- to 3/8-inch (6- to 10-mm) joints. . C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. (See drawing for additional joint treatment.) D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MUL TIWYTHE MASONRY A. Use continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes. B. Corners: Provide interlocking' masonry unit bond in each course at comers, unless otherwise shown. 1. Provide continuity with horizontal-joint reinforcement at comers by using prefabricated "L" units in addition to masonry bonding. C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows: 1. Provide continuity with horizontal-joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units. . 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 13 3.07 CA VITIES/AIR SPACES . A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities flush. 1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with individual metal ties. Stagger alternate courses. 3.08 CAVITY-WALL AND MASONRY-CELL INSULATION A. On units of plastic board insulation, place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches (300 mm) o.c., both ways on inside face or attach to inside face with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confming obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. 3.09 HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. . C. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: I. Provide an open space not less than I inch (25 mm) in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 14 . " . . movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partitionniovement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Maintain joint free and clear of mortar. D. Build-in horizontal pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Locate horizontal pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer. 3.12 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. .Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. . 1. Provide built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.13 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in .masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions' to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. C. Install flashing as follows: 1. At masonry7veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through the veneer, up interior cmu back-up at least 8 inches (200 mm), and into joint a minimum 2". . 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 15 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. . 3. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Space weep holes 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 3. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. E. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. F. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into masonry. 3.14 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. . 2. B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Do not exceed a pour height 48" for coarse grout: 2. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over 48 inches in height. a. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 48 inches o.c. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following testing for field quality control. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 95-052/12-95 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 16 . . B. Testing Frequency: As required by the structural drawings. c. Evaluation of Quality-Control Tests: In the absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, . masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality-control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated. 3.16 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adj()ining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely .fill with mortar. Point-up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for compariso!,! purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Clean brick by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised, using the following masonry cleaner: a. Job-mixed detergent solution. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04200 . 95-052/12-95 uNIT MASONRY 04200 - 17 .. SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Not less than 5 years experience in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar scope. B. Steel Erector: Not less than 5 years experience in the erection of structural steel structures of similar magnitude to the proposed structure. 1.02 STANDARDS AND CODES A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 1. AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildinas". . _. 0 AISC "Code of Standard Practice". "Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints. AISC "Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards". 2. 3. . 4. B. American Welding Society: 1. A WS "Structural Welding Code". 2. A WS "Welding Symbols". 3. A WS "Gas Metal-Arc Welding with C02 Shielding". 4. AWS "Non-Destructive Testing Symbols". C. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. A6,.General Requirements for Delivery. 2. A325, H. S. Bolts. 1.03 ERECT10N TOLERANCES- A. Plumb, level and align individual pieces in accordance with the requirements of the "Code of Standard Practice" of the AISC. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accord with the Contract Conditions: . 95052/11-95 05120-1 1. Indicate all shop erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, bolts, welds and preparation required such as bevels, testing and backup bars. Indicate all welds, both shop and field, by A WS "Welding Symbols", A2.0, latest edition. . 2. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery of materials to be installed under other sections: 1. Coordinate delivery of embedded items with General Contractor. 2. Provide setting drawings for installation of embedded items to General Contractor. B. Storage and Materials: 1. Store structural steel members at the project site above ground on platforms, skids or other supports. 2. Store bolts and weld rod in original unbroken containers with labels intact. 3. Protect all items from corrosion affecting structural strength and use. 1.06 SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING AND PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall review the structural capacities of areas to be used for lifting devices, material delivery and storage and shall not exceed design loads without taking appropriate steps to compensate for the anticipated loads exceeding design loads. B. Any modifications, temporary or permanent, to the building's structural frame required to support erection equipment (including trucks, cranes and other devices) and its load shall be made by the Contractor at his own expense and as subject to review and directives of the ArchitectlEngineer. . C. Any redesign by the Contractor for his own convenience, if acceptable to the ArchitectlEngineer, is to be paid for by the Contractor. D. Place Contractor's lifting equipment in location approved by the General Contractor. E. The Contractor shall furnish and place any temporary guys, braces or falsework required to stabilize the structural steel during erection and it shall not be removed until the structure is fully erected and bolted or welded. F. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with authorized personnel making inspections of both shop and field operations. The Contractor will provide access to scaffolds and work platforms and any necessary manpower to assist in the inspection of welding and bolting. 1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Owner shall provide an independent testing laboratory to check structural steel erection for compliance with AISC Specifications including Part 6 of "Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Contractor shall coordinate erection and testing to facilitate construction. . 95052/11-95 05120-2 . B. Inspection will be required of a random selection of 10 percent of all high strength shop and field bolting. To be acceptable 95 percent of all bolts tested shall meet design tension, and no bolt shall test to less than 85 percent of design tension. If the bolting fails to meet this requirement, bolts shall be reworked by the Contractor and additional tests of 50 percent of all bolts shall be made until the above requirements are met. C. Where field welding has been used for structural connections, testing laboratory will perform visual inspections of minimum of 50 percent of welds. Should any welds fail, then 100 percent ~f welds shall be inspected. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MA TERIALS A. B. e. D. E. F. . G. H. StructUral Steel: ASTM A36. High-Strength Bolts: ASTM A325. Unfmished Bolts: ASTM A307. Structural Tubes: ASTM A500, Grade B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. Filler Metal: . E70 electrodes or equivalent. Electrodes shall be as recommended by th~ir manufacturers for the position and other conditions of actual use. Paint for shop coat. and touch-up field coat shall be combination of gray iron oxide and alkyd resin. Lintel angles and exposed steel to be galvanized in accordance with applicable ASTM specifications. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC, except as modified or noted in these specifications. B. Drill or punch holes at right angles to the surface of the metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. Remove burrs resulting from drilling operations. e. Apply one (1)' shop coat of paint after cleaning of all rust, scale, and foreign matter. Surfaces shall be dry and clean at time of paint application. 2.03 CONNECTIONS A. All connections shall conform to those shown on structural drawings or as approved by ArchitectlEngineer. . . 95052/11-95 05120~3 2.04 BOLTING . A. Use high strength bolts in bearing. B. Size bolts allowing full thread engagement. e. Enter bolts into holes without damaging the thread. D. Oversize and short-slotted holes are subject to approval by ArchitectlEngineer. If approved for use, standard hardened washers are required to provide adequate bearing area. Place washers on the exposed face of the oversized or short-slotted hole. E. Long-slotted holes are subject to approval by ArchitectlEngineer. 2.05 WELDING A. Prior to commencing welding, joint elements are to be bolted or tacked in intimate contact and adjusted to dimensions shown on drawings with allowance for any weld shrinkage. B. Shop splices not shown on drawings are subject to approval by ArchitectlEngineer. e. Welding shall be performed by welders currently qualified under A WS standard qualification procedures to perform the type of work required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION . A. Check alignment and elevations and locations of all anchor bolts. Report to ArchitectlEngineer all gross errors and proposed correcting methods prior to proceeding with corrections and base plate setting. B. Field correction of fabrication by flame cutting will only be permitted by written prior approval of the ArchitectlEngineer. e. Provide all temporary erection bracing. Be responsible for design and installation of all erection bracing and for its safe removal. D. Assemble structural steel frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated within the specific tolerances. E. Align and adjust accurately members forming parts of the complete frame before fastening. F. Splices permitted only where indicated. G. Remove all temporary erection material (lifting hitches, column erection lugs, temporary gussets for bracing or guy calbes, and related items). 95052/11-95 . 05120-4 . 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Connections shall comply with requirements specified in Part 2, Products. B. Remove run-off tabs and grind surfaces smooth where the tabs interfere with frreproofmg and architectural treatment. C. Do not use powder actuated fasteners for connections onto structural steel unless written permission is granted by the Architect. 3.03 PAINTING A. Immediately after erection, spot paint field connections and abraded places with the same paint used for shop coat. B. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before painting. Apply no paint in freezing weather. e. All touch-up painting to be by steel erector. See other parts of specifications for fmish painting. END OF SECTION . . 95052/11-95 05120-5 . PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and -Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following metal fabrications: . I. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Rough hardware. Ladders. Loose bearing and leveling plates. Loose steel lintels. Shelf and relieving angles. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following: a. Overhead doors. b. Suspended toilet partitions. c.Applications - where framing and supports are not specified in other sections. Miscellaneous steel trim, including the following: a. Steel angle comer guards. b. Edgings. Pipebollards. 7. . 8. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1.03 SUBMIITALS I. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural steel framing system components. A. General: _ Submit each item in thi~ Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for nonslip aggregates and nonslip aggregate surface finishes, prefabricated building columns; steel floor plate, paint products, and grout. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other. Sections. D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may. be requested by Architect. . 95-052/12-95 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. . F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of 5 years minimum, successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of A WS Dl.l "Structural Welding CodenSteel," A WS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--AIuminum," and A WS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed A WS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FERROUS METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786 (ASTM A 786M). D. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows: 1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. 2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A SOL a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot- dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight required by structural loads. 95-052/12-95 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 . . 1. 2. Primer finish, unless otherwise indicated. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. F. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010). G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. . Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27 (ASTM A 27M) cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A ~153. H. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to A WS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. 2.02 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified- alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TI-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. . B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized st~l, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20. 2.03 FASTENERS A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for eIectrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6), with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Machine Screws: ANSI BI8.6.3 (ANSI BJ8.6.7M). D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 (ANSI BI8.2.3.8M). E. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B 18.6.1. F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B 18.22.1 (ANSI B 18.22M). G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI BI8.21.1. . 95-052/12-95 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASlM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. . 1. Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASlM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 1. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as required. 2.04 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASlM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 2.05 CONCRETE FILL 1. Nonshrink, Metallic Grouts: a. Supreme Plus; Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Hi Mod Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. c. Embeco 885 and 636; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. d. Ferrolith G Redi-Mix and G-NC; Sonneborn Building Products-- ChemRex, Inc. e. Met-ox; The Spray-Cure Company. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts: a. B-6 Construction Grout; W. R. Bonsai Co. b. Diamond-Crete Grout; Concrete Service Materials Co. c. Supreme; Cormix Construction Chemicals. d. Sure-grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp. e. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. r Five Star Grout; Five Star Products. g. Vibropruf # 11; Lambert Corp. h. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. I. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. J. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows, Inc. k. Sonogrout 14; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc. I. Kemset; The Spray-Cure Company. . 2. A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast- in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless higher strengths are indicated. 2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. 95-052/12-95 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 . . Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. R Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. . C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to. prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. I. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C) ambient 180 deg F (100 ., deg C) material surfaces. D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces: G. Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with the following: I. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals; Obtain. fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so. that no roughness shows after finishing, and. contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. . 2. 3. 4. H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible.. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 1. . Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. . J. .. Shop Assembly: Preassemble :items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly: Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connectio!15 that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to. receive fmish hardware, screws, and simjlar items. L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may. accumulate. . 95-052/12-95 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 2.07 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish bent, or otherwise custom-fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 Sections. . B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections, and furnish steel washers elsewhere. 2.08 STEEL LADDERS A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI AI4.3. B. Siderails: As indicated on drawings. C. Bar Rungs: As indicated on drawings. D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. E. Support each ladder with welded or bolted steel brackets as indicated on drawings. F. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners, in the following locations: 1. Exterior locations. . 2.09 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of the required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication. 2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. c. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. 2.11 SHELF AND RELIEVING ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf and relieving angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 95-052/12-95 METAL F ABRICA nONS 05500 - 6 . . B. Galvanize shelf angles to be installed on exterior concrete framing. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. , Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry.. Fumish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. a. .. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of.steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by Sinches (200 mm) long. C. Fabricate support for suspended toilet partitions as follows: I. Beams: . .Continuous steel shapes of size required to limit deflection to L/360 between hangers, but use not less than C8 by 11.5 (C200 by 17. I) channels or another shape with equivalent structural properties. Hangers: Steel rods, l/2-inch (l3-mm) minimum diameter,. spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mln) o.c. Thread rods to receive anchor and stop nuts. Fit hangers with wedge-shaped washers for full bearing on sloping flanges of support beam. Braces and Angles: Steel angles of size required for rigid support of beam and for secure anchorage. 2. . 3. D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations: 1. Exterior locations. 2. Interior locations where indicated. 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. UnlesS otherwise in~icated, f~ricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter comers . and use concealed field splices wherever possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from each end, 6 inches (150 mm) from comers, and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize miscellarieous steel trim in' the following locations: 1. Exterior locations. 2. Interior locations where indicated. . 95-052/12-95 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7 2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL . A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designing finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process complying with the following requirements: 1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick or thicker. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone IB): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone lA): SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." e. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No.1" for shop painting. . 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with fmish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and concrete entry. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. 95-052/12-95 METAL F ABRICA TIONS 05500 - 8 . ,-; -" f,;:i: . B. Cutting, Fitting,. and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling,. and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formw6rk for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot- dip galvanized after"fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed. welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. 3.03 SEITING LOOSE PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve .bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. . B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink, metallic grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.04 INSTALLING SUPPORTS fOR TOILET PARTITIONS A. Anchor supports securely to and rigidly brace from overhead building structure. 3.05 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After boIlards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space betWeen bolIard and sleeve solidly withnonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. B. Fill bolIards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface. . 95-052/12-95 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 9 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." . B. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 . 95-052/12-95 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 10 . . SECTION 05810 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply. to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. . Floor expansion joint cover assemblies. 2. Wall" expansion joint cover assemblies. 3. . Ceiling expansion joint cover assemblies. 4. .Compression seals. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for cast-in anchorage and frames for expansion joints cover assemblies in concrete floors, parking decks, and walls. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for sheet metal roof and wall expansion joint systems. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for curb-type expansion joints. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants and preformed foam sealants without metal frames. Division 9 Sections_ for walls, partitions, ceilings, and floor finishes with expansion joints. 2. . 3. 4. 5. 1.03 SUBMIlT ALS A. General:. Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of expansion joint cover assembly specified, including .marlUfacturer's product specifications; installation instructions, details of construction relative to materials, dimensions. of individual components, profil~s, and finishes.. C. Shop drawings showing fabriCation and installation of expansion joint cover assembly including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joints, splices, and attachments to other upitsof Work. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufact~rer' s color charts, actual units, or sections of units showing-full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each exposed metal and ela.stomeric-material of expansion joint cover assembly indicated. . 95-052/12-95 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810 - 1 /, E. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of expansion joint cover assembly indicated; in sets for each finish, color, texture, and pattern specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. . 1. Install elastomeric material for joints samples to verify color selected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 1. Emseal Joint Systems, L TD 108 Milk Street Westborough, MA 01581 (508) 836-0280 2. MM Systems Corp. 4520 Elmdale Drive Tucker, GA 30084 (800) 241-3460 2.02 MA TERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209 <ASTM B 209M), alloy 6061- T6, sheet and plate. 1. Protect aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials with a protective coating. . B. Bronze: ASTM B 455, alloy C38500 for extrusions; alloy C28000 Muntz Metal for plates. C. Brass: UNS alloy C26000 for half hard sheet and coil. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 304 with 28 finish, unless indicated otherwise, for plates, sheet, and strips. E. Extruded Preformed Seals: Single or multicellular elastomeric profiles as classified under ASTM D 2000, designed with or without continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles. Formed to fit compatible frames, in color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. F. Preformed Sealant: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Use T, factory-formed and -bonded to metal frames or anchor members; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 1. Joints 2 Inches (50 mm) Wide and Less: Withstand plus or minus 35 percent movement of the joint width without failure. 2. Joints Greater Than 2 Inches (50 mm) to 4 Inches (100 mm) Wide: Withstand plus or minus 50 percent movement of the joint width without failure. 95-052/12-95 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810 - 2 . . G. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spac~rs, flexible moisture barrier and filler materials, drain tubes, lubricants, adhesive, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations. 2.03 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES A. General: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units comparable to those indicated or required to accommodate joint size, variations in adjacent surfaces, and dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue when tested according to ASTM E 1399. Furnish units in longest.practicable length~ to minimize number of end joints. Provide hairline mitered comers where joint changes directions or abuts other. materials. Include closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, comers, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover assemblies. B. Vapor Seal: Provide manufacturer's continuous, standard, flexible vinyl vapor seal under covers at all expansion joint locations. C. Metal Floor-to-Floor Joint Cover Assemblies: Provide continuous extruded metal frames of profile indiCated with seating surface and raised floor rim or exposed trim strip to accommodate flooring and concealed bolt and anchors embedded in concrete. Provide assemblies formed to receive cover plates of design indicated and to receive filler materials (if .any) between raised rim of frame and edge of plate. Furnish depth and configuration to suit type of construction and to produce a continuous. flush wearing surface with adjoining finish floor surface. . I. Partially Concealed Cover: Provide one frame on each side of joint, designed to accommodate manufacturer's floor cover plate and filler. a. Filler Insert: Furnish abrasive-resistant flexible gasket filler between edge of cover plate and raised rim of frame to accommodate required movement. Fixed Cover Plates: Attach one side of the cover plate to a frame or finished wearing surface, with other side resting on other frame or finished wearing surface to allow free movement. Floor Cover Plate Wearing Surfaces: Provide cover plates with the following type of wearing surfaces. a. . Fluted. 2'. 3. D. Floor-to-Wall Joints: Provide one frame on floor side of joint only. Provide wall side frame where required by manufacturer's design. I. Angle Cover. Plates: Attach angle cover plates for floor-to-wall joints to wall with countersunk, flat-head' exposed fasteners secured to drilled-in-place anchor shields, unless .otherwise indicated, at spacing recommended by joint cover manufacturer. . E. Wall, Ceiling, and Soffit Joint Cover Assemblies: Provide interior wall and ceiling . expansion joint cover assemblies of same design and appearance. Provide exterior wall and soffit expansion joint cover assemblies of same design and appearance. Provide wall expansion joint cover assemblies compatible with floor expansion joint cover assemblies design and appearance; . 95-052/12-95 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810 - 3 1. Fixed Metal Cover Plates: Provide a concealed, continuously anchored frame fastened to wall, ceiling, or soffit only on one side of joint. Extend cover to lap each side of joint and to permit free movement on one side. Attach cover to frame with cover in close contact with adjacent finish surfaces. Flexible Filler: Secure the approved flexible filler between frames to compress and expand with movement. . 2. F. Joint Cover Assemblies with Preformed Seals: Provide joint cover assemblies consisting of continuously anchored aluminum extrusions and continuous extruded preformed seals of profile indicated or required to suit types of installation conditions shown. furnish extrusions designed to be embedded in or attached to concrete with lugs. Vulcanize or heat-weld splices (if any) to ensure hermetic joint condition. G. Compression Seals: Preformed, elastomeric extrusions having internal baffle system in sizes and profiles shown or as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide lubricant and adhesive for installation recommended by the manufacturer. 2.04 METAL FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes to products in factory after fabrication. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces before shipment. B. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. 2. Mill finish: AA-M 1 0 (unspecified mill finish). Class 11, Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A31 [Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil (0.01 mm)]. . C. Stainless Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. 1. Bright, Cold-Rolled Unpolished Finish: AISI No. 2B finish. 2. Bright, Directional Polish: AISI No.3 finish. D. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for phases of Work, including preparing substrate, applying materials, and protecting installed units. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of expansion joint cover assemblies to be embedded in or anchored to concrete or to have recesses formed into edges of concrete slab for later placement and grouting-in of frames. 95-052/12-95 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810 - 4 . C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary to secure expansion joint cover assemblies to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in expansion shields for masonry and concrete where anchoring me~be~~ are not embedded in concrete'i Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and provide for secu.re attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies. . 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, arid .fitting required to install expansion joint covers. Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment and proper relationship to expansion joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels.. Allow adequate free movement for thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling. Set floor covers at elevations to be flush with adjacent finished floor materials. Locate wall, ceiling, roof, and soffit covers in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. Securely attach in place with required accessories. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) from each end and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) on center. B. Continuity: Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with a minimum number of end joints and align metal members mechanically using splice joints. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that will accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames. Adhere flexible filler materials (if any) to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer. e. Extruded Preforme~ Sea!s: Install seals complying with manufacturer's instructions and with minimum number of end joints. For straight sections .provide preformed seals in continual lengths: Vulcanize or heat-weld field splice joints in preformed seal material to provide watertight joints using procedures recommended by manufacturer. Apply . adhesive, epoxy, or lubricant-adhesive approved by manufacturer to both frame interfaces before installing preformed seal. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's instructions. . D. Elastomeric Sealant Joint Assemblies: Seal end joints within continuous runs and joints at transitions according to manufacturer's directions to provide a watertight installation. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Joints: FSS 200 and FSSE 200 by MM Systems. B. Interior Wall Joints: FSS 200 and FSSE 200 by MM Systems. C. Ceiling Joints: FSSE 200 by MM Systems. D. Exterior Wall Joints: Backerseal & Colorseal by Emseal Joint Systems. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areasjs complete. When protective covering. is removed; clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 05810 . 95-052/12-95 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810 - 5 SECTION 06100 . ROUGH CARPENTRY PART I - GENERAL 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GelleraI and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. . This Section includes the following: I. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 2. Sheathing. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items expos~d . to view and not specified in another Section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS . A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.04 SUBMITI ALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution arid; pressure process used, net amount of.preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. for waterborrie-t~eated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 3. For fire-retardant-treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to: bending stre~gth, stiflhess, and fastener-holding capacities of treated materials. C. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. . 95-052/12-95 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. . Single-Source Responsibility for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire- retardant-treated wood product from one source and by a single producer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. W ood- Preservative- Treated Materials: a. Baxter: 1. H. Baxter Co. b. Chemical Specialties, Inc. c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. d. Hickson Corp. e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. f. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, Interior Type A: a. Baxter: 1. H. Baxter Co. b. Chemical Specialties, Inc. c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. d. Hickson Corp. e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. Fire-Retardant- Treated Materials, Exterior Type: a. American Wood Treaters, Inc. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. . 2. 3. 2.02 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 95-052/12-95 1. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 . . C. Grade Stamps:. Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. D. Where nominal sizes are indicated,' provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. General:. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of A WPA C2 (lumber) and A WPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0:25 Ib/cu. ft. (4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: . 1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofmg, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2. 3. 4. C. - Pressure treat. wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m). D. . Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, appl~ field treatment complying with A WP A M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.04 FIRE-RET ARDANT- TREATED _MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated; comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant- treated wood with appropriiueclassification marking ofUL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. . Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide fire~retardant-treated wood acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which a current model code research or . 95-052/12-95 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 evaluation report exists that evidences compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood for application indicated. . B. Interior Type A: For interior locations, use chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation: 1. Bending strength, stiffuess, and fastener-holding capacities are not reduced below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions when tested by a qualified independent testing agency. 2. No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to treatment. 3. Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. C. Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations and where indicated. D. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. . C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No.3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. For board-size lumber, provide No.3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No.2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWP A of any species. 2.06 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-I05. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME BI8.6.1. 95-052/12-95 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4 . . E. Lag Bolts:ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M) F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563~ hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment. of other construction. D. Apply field treatment complying with A WPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: . 1. 2. 3. CABO .NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction." F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view. or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. G. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity. H. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. 3.02 WOOD NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other. work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level .of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before c~ncrete placement. . 95-052/12-95 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 C. Provide continuous wood blocking at all restrooms for bathroom accessory attachment. . 3.03 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. D. Firestop concealed spaces of framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. Where firestopping is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness lumber of same width as framing members. END OF SECTION 06100 . 95-052/12-95 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 6 . SECTION 06402 . INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART I - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings.andgeneral provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood cabinets (casework). 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. B. Related Sections: . The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing and for furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing interior woodwork. 2. Division 8 Section. "Flush Wood Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural woodwork standards. . 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectufal woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims,. and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork. installation. B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, headers, partition framing; and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified. in Division6 Section "Rough Carp.entry." 1.04 SUBMITf ALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 SpeCification Sections. . B. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. e. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations; large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. D. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. '. . . .95-052/1 2-95 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 I. 2. Shop-applied transparent finishes. Plastic laminates. . E. Samples for verification of the following: I. Wood-veneer-faced panel products, with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish one-half of face as specified. a. Step finish materials on sample to show and clearly define each coat. b. Provide separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 2. Laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattem, and surface fmish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 3. Comer pieces as follows: a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep. 4. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit for each type and finish. F. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified requirements. G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, finishing, and installing woodwork specified in this Section. C. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard: I. A WI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be 95-052/12-95 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 . . .;.: . ' . stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed,. wet-work is completed, and HV AC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. . Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings. 1.08 COORDINA nON A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS .. 2.01 MA TERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the A WI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of jnterior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply t.o product characteristics indicated: 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A2082. .2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 3. Hardwood Plywood and face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. B. Formaldehyde 'Emission Level for Medium-Density Fiberboard: requirements of NPA"9. Comply with e. fiberboard: . Medium-dertsity fiberboard made without formaldehyde and complying with ANSI A2082. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Medite II by Medite Corp. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwor~ quality standard. . 95-052/12-95 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Laminart. c. Nevamar Corp. d. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. . E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. 2.02 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this Section for cabinet hardware required for architectural cabinets. e. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard. D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A 156.18 for BHMA code number indicated. I. Satin Stainless Steel, Stainless-Steel Base: BHMA 630. 2.03 INST ALLA TION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. . B. Rough Carriages for Stairs: Comply with requirements of Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for structural framing lumber. Kiln dry to less than 15 percent moisture content. C. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B 18.6.1 for applicable requirements. I. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. D. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF- N-I05 for applicable requirements. E. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 95-052/12-95 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 . . 2.04 F ABRICA nON, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard and of the following grade: 1. Grade: Premium. B. . Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Comers of-cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick or less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Comers of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members and rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessarY for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,. trimming, and fitting. . E. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a . water-resistant coating. . 2.05 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets. B. A WI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. C. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: As indicated. 1. . Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 2.06 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard:. Comply with A WI Section 400 requirements for countertops. B. Type of Top: High-pressure.decorative laminate complying with the following: 1. Grade: GP-50, 0.p50-inch (I.270-mm) nominal thickness. . 95-052/12-95 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: a. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: 1) Solid colors. 2) Patterns. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. Core Material: Medium-density particleboard. Core Material at wet areas: Marine-grade plywood. Provide metal laminate per details. . 2. 4. 5. 6. 2.07 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. B. General: The entire fmish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section, regardless of whether shop applied or applied after installation. 1. Shop Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork. at the fabrication shop. Defer only final touch up, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. C. General: The priming and shop finishing (if any) of interior architectural woodwork required to be performed at the fabrication shop are specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork and for material and application requirements of prime coats for woodwork not specified to receive final finish in this Section. . D. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces of woodwork, including backs of trim, cabinets, paneling, and ornamental work and the underside of countertops. Apply 2 coats to back of paneling. Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate-clad woodwork do not require backprirning when surfaced with plastic laminate or thermoset decorative overlay. E. Wash coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed- grain wood before staining and finishing. F. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 1. Grade: Premium. 2. A WI Finish System TR-5: Catalyzed vinyl lacquer. 3. Staining: None required. 4. Sheen: Satin 30-50 gloss units. 95-052/12-95 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6 . . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARA TION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humiditY conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete ~ work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard:. Install woodwork to comply with WIC Section 26 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 118 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level (including tops): C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refmishcut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. . .E. cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide. unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as' indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 118 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-!l1m) sag, how, or other 'Variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. F: Tops:. Anchor securely.to base units and other support systems. Calk space between backsplash and wall with .specified sealant. 1. Install countertops wit~ no more than 118 inch in 96-inch (3 mID in 2400-mm) sag, bow,. or other variation from a straight line. G. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defe"ctivewoodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. . 95-052/12-95 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAI,. WOODWORK .06402 - 7 B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. c. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. .\ 3.04 PROTECTION A. Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 3.05 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Manufacturers and BHMA numbers are used below to designate hardware requirements, except as otherwise indicated. B. Cabinet Hinges: 1. Grass 1006 self closing, half overlay, semi-concealed. C. Pulls: Wire pulls, 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (62 mm) deep, and 5/16 inches (8 mm) in diameter, satin stainless steel finish. D. Catches: As follows: 1. Push-in Magnetic Catches: B03131. E. Shelf Rests: K & V #346 NP nickel plated. .; F. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, complying with BHMA A 156.9, Grade 1 and rated for the following loads: I. Box Drawer Slides: 100 Ibf (Grass 6036). G. Door Locks: K & V #986 NP nickel finish - locks keyed alike. H. Drawer Locks: Similar to door locks. I. Grommets for cable passage through countertops: 2 inch OD black, molded-plastic grommets with 1 3/4-inch hole and black plastic cap with slot for wire passage. END OF SECTION 06402 95-052/12-95 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 8 . ~ :~~; . \;. ., ," /; '0< .'.. ~.~~. :.J ;.~>y - . J,g . , ~~ . ;'. . !."~\ ~ .4 :..:..!'!4, ..~.~ ~.../ l.-.~ ,.. l:! . . . . " >,. -" -- ~)_ .~ "'J .: -:5--.. ~>. ".~z;t : _..-(... ~ r' \\ - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE 1.~-~ ~ ... l . I "4 ~. .. \lLi' "...... ~~.~~~ '; ':::-:~" <:. "......,.~. . ,,,:-,. c'. (' ~;> ~~ ~ ~ ',:,1 ~~;:":~~.'~!:.' ~o;' . . - "'f.' AUGUSTA/RICHMOND COUNTY DETENTION CENTER PHINIZY ROAD ." .. ". - .. ;, . . r- . - , ~ "':,.. '~.' I. ~" ,'t...,. . . I \.;'.r~.f.\.. - ~:.:', ":r: ~ f" : ; ~ .~ '.. .;....; '1._ i ,~'~: .':: :2~ .-:: 1;~r.' \" If . " , ( \ ;~<,t ,,~\. ~~ . ,. ,., f. ;i .~ .. . :'-,~'. ~ :~-: '_: ~ ~ . -....:~j~~~ . .\ ; I, RICHMOND COUNTY AUGUSTA, GEORGIA OWNER Augusta/Richmond County Consolidated Government '/ ;- x!. " ~ ..- :-;~ ~ (' . "of - .- ".", .~.\ .1 : A -; -... .... 1.:.)\ :.;~~;~~. '~.}.~i Sections: 07111 through 16915 Specification Book 2 of 2 . .:1"- i. . L . . r:-'. :~ :. >~ ~ -~:- ---- ~ ~ "'.-. " " '~:r:._-~' . "- .; -:",.,':;' - ~:, r:...." ." - -' ., " I _.,: -- -' - . - - 4 ..._" ,L'>".c_" .".,- ~ . ~~:" - , '.-"-} '..t I~:.- '_;~ r , ->- "-~ - ~'- .:~~~'.7-> ;, . ~ ',[1:. - " l~ ;~-'~.. -. ~ -;, , . ~.... ''';.-./.... .:~; ": ,...! . r ~ '":., ~ .. ~ ' ',.; ;".i;~ : :.~,: ~'\'; Prepared by: PRECISION PLANNING, INC. Planners;' :Engineers, Architects & Surveyors . 400 Pike Boulevard P. O. Box 2210 Lawrenceville, Georgia 30246 (770) 338-8000 - ~ f f'- - . .E.i-;. 4 't : - .. . " ., ~ ~ " ;" ~ --- . -~ ~f:~.1 . .. . , " "_. "./I- '- 3"- ~-)3'). - ~")t~ ~/ . \"'~-/~~.- - I.?"'-::-' ;~ "~ .~ '''t.- ~.,;. '. ,"0 . ~ . . I December, 1995 , ., .' ~ . t ; . ",',J '''"fj .'~ . .~7.: ~.~ ":- jJ . ,. '.~ . r _~;,.-.rr\ g U~ ~~ ~m ~ oQ m~ - 0 ~u ~~. .~ o . Aueusta/Richmond County Detention Center Phinizv Road Aueusta, Georeia TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION : TITLES PAGES BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: SECTION 00030 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS .................... 00030-1, to 00030-2 SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . .. OOlOO-Lto 00100-7 . SECTION 00101 - SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. . .. .. 00101-1 to 00101-2 SECTION 00200 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT (CSRA) .... 00200-1 to 00200-29 SECTION 00300 - BID FORM. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . : . . . 00300-1 to 00300-2 SECTION 00310 - PARTNERSHIP CERTIFICATE ...............:............. 00310-1 . SECTION 00320 - CORPORATE CERTIFICATE. ................... ... .... . .. 00320-1 SECTION 00321 - INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATE ................ .-:.. :.' . . . .. . . . . 00321-1 . SECTION 00410 - BID BOND.(AIA A310) .......................... 00410-1 to 00410-2 SECTION 00420 - CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATION STATEMENT (AlA A305) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. 00420-1 to 00420-7 SECTION 00430 - SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (G805) ................... 00430-1 to 00430-3 SECTION 00480 - NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00480-1 . SECTION 0048'1 - NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR ........... 00481-1 . II. CONTRACT FORMS:' . _ SECTION 00500 - AGREEMENT (A~OI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..; . . . . . . . 00500-1 to 00500-7 SECTION 00520 - CERTIFICATE OF COUNTY ATTORNEY .. . . . , . .. . . . . .' . . . . . . . 00520-1 . SECTION 00530 - NOTICE OF AWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 00530-1 to 00530-2 SECTION 00540 - NOTICE TO PROCEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 00540-1 SECTION 00610 - PERFORMANCE BOND &PAYMENT BOND (A312) .... 00610-1 to 00610-7 III. . CONTRACT CONDITIONS: . SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (AlA A201) ............. 00700-1 to 00700-25 SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS ........ 00800-1 to 00800-8 SECTION 00840 - ADMINISTRATIVE & PROCEDURAL ITEMS ........... 00840-1 to 00840-5 IV. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: DIVISION 1 . SECTION 01010 - SUM~ARYOF'WO~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 01010-1 to 01010-2 SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIO/'./S.FOR PAYMENT ................... 01027-1 to 01027-4 SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING .~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 01050-1 to 01050-3 SECTION 01095 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS .......: 01095-1 to 01095-3 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS ........,........:......... '.' . . . .01300-1 to 01300-8 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL .. . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 01400-1 to 01400-3 SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION fACILITIES AND . ... ., TEM~ORA~Y CONTROLS .:................, 01500-1 to 01500-9 SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ..............;.... 01600-1 to 01600-4 SECTION 01631 - SUBSTITUTIONS .. . . '.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01631-1 to 01631-3 SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOS~OUT ..............:......... 01700-1 to 01700-13 SECTION 0]740 - WARRANTIES ........ ... . . . . . . . . : . .'. . . . . . . .. . 01740-1 to 0]740-3 . 95-052/12-95 Table of Contents TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) . SECTION TITLES PAGES DIVISION 2 SECTION 021'10 - SITE CLEARING -..................:.... ......... .02110-1 to 02110-3 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . .. . . . . . . ... . . . ., 02200-1 to 02200-11 SECTION 02281 - TERMITE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . 02281-1 to 02281-2 SECTION 02480 - LANDSCAPE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 02480-1 to 02480-10 SECTION 02511 - HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING ...,............... 02511-1 to 02511-5 SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING . . . . . . . , .. 02520-1 to 02520-13 SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS ............................ 02665-1 .to 02665-21 SECTION 02700 - SEWERAGE AND -DRAINAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 02700-1 to 02700-23 SECTION 0271 I - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS ............... 02711-1 to 02711-4 SECTION -02831 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02831-1 to 02831-6 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03011 - CONCRETE TESTING. . . . . . . . . '.' . . . . . . .. . . . . , . . . 030II-l to 03011-3 . SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORM WORK ... ...................... 03100-1 to 03100-3 SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03200-1 to 03200-3 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 03300-1 to 03300-14 SECTION 03345 - CONCRETE FINISHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 03345-1 to 03345-5 SECTION 03430 - PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..03430-1 to 03430-5 SECTION 03520 - INSULATING CONCRETE DECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03520-1 to 03520-5 . DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 04200-1 to 04200-17 DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL. . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 05120-1 to 05120-5 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 05500-1 to 05500-10 . . SECTION 05810 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES. . . . . . . . . . . , 05810-1 to 05810-5 DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06100-1 to 06100-6 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .......... 06402-1 to 06402-8 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07111 - COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING ............. 07 II 1-1 to 071 II-6 SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING ......... .'. . . . . . . . . 07160-1 to 07160-3 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION ....................... 07210-1 to. 07210-5 SECTION 07241- EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS (PB) .... 07241-1 to 07241-9 SECTION 07242 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS (PM) .... 07242-1 to 07242-9 SECTION 07251 - SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING .................... 07251-1 to 07251-8 SECTION 07270 - FIRESTOPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 07270-1 to 07270-10 SECTION 07527 - SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING. . . . . . . . 07527-1 to 07527-9 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ............... 07620-1 to 07620-8 SECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES. . . . . . . . . . .. . . 07710-1 to 07710-4 SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES ........................... 07720-1 to 07720-5 95-052/12-95 II Table of Contents .. Table of Contents 1Il 95-052/12-95 . DIVISION 13 SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. . ... .. . ... . . . . . . . . .. 13122-1 to 13122-7. DIVISION 12 SECTION 12690 -FLOOR MATS & FRAMES ........................ 12690-1 to 12690-3 DIVISION 11 SECTION 11110 - COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT ... ... . . . . . . .. 11110-1 to 11110-4 SECTION 11160 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT ...........;........ 11160-1 to.11160-3 SECTION 11191 - SECURITY HOLLOW METAL ..................... 11191-1 to 11191-11 SECTION 11192 - SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING.................... 11192-1 to 11192..7 SECTION 11194 - DETENTION EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11194-1 to 11194-22 SECTION 11195 - SECURITY ACCESSORIES AND FURNITURE .' . .. . . . .. 11195- I to 11195-4 SECTION 11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT ..........'.......... 11400-1 to 11400-57 10170-1 to 10170-4 10350-1 to 10350-3 10425-1 to 10425-6 10522-1 to 10522-4 10800-1 to 10800-6 DIVISION 10 SECTION 10170 - SOLID PHENOLIC PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS. . SECTION 10350- FLAGPOLES .............;..................... SECTION 10425 - SIGNS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ;'. . .. . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES .. SECTION 10800 - TOIL~T AND BATH ACCESSORIES ............... DIVISION 9 SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ................. 09255-1 to 09255-14 SECTION 09300 - TILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~..... . : ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09300-1 to 09300-8 SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 09511-1 to 09511-7 SECTION 09521 - ACOU~TICAL WALL PANELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09521-1 to 09521-4 SECTION 09660- RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ~................... 09660-1 to 09660-6 SECTION 09678 - RESILIENT WALL BASE & AC.CESSORIES ............ 09678- I to 09678-4 SECTION 09680 - CARPET .. . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 09680-1 to 09680-7 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING .............................,..... 09900-1 to 09900-16 SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS ....:........................ 09950-lto 09950-4. . SECTION 07810 - PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS " ... . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 07810-1 to 07810"5 SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS. . . . . .. .'. . : . .'. . . . . . . . . .. . ... 07901-1 to 07901-10 DIVISION 8 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ................... 08110-1 to '08110-6 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS ... '. . . . . . ..; . .... . ... . . .. 08211-1 to 08211-6 SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS ....... .. ....:.. .... . 08331-1 to 08331-5 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND. .. STOREFRONTS ........................... 08410-1 to 08410-8 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE. . . . . . .. . . . .... . . . . . . . . . .. '. .. 08710-1 to 08710-11 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING ................................. 08.800-1 to 08800-1 0 SECTION 08920 -GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS .....,. '.' . . . . 08920-1 to 08920-8 PAGES ..-. .-/ .,. "' / ':i~eTION TITLES r;::;.""" ".~- TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) . " . Table of Contents IV 95-052/12-95 DIVISION 16 SECTION 16050 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16050-1 to 16050-5 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS ................................. 16110-1 to 16110-7 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS .............................. 16120-1 to 16120-4 SECTION 16130 - BOXES ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.. 16130-1 to 16130-5 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES ............................ 16140-1 to 16140-4 SECTION 16170 - MOTOR & EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS ................... 16170-1 SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS .......................... 16195-1 SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16420-1 SECTION 16425 - SERVICE SWITCHES & SWITCHBOARDS. . . . . . . . . . .. 16425-1 to 16425-5 SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16440-1 to 16440-2 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING ................................. 16450-1 to 16450-4 SECTION 16460 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS ..................... 16460-1 to 16460-2 . SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ............ 15010-1 to 15010-6 SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS ..................... 15140-1 to 15140-3 SECTION 15242 - VIBRATION ISOLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15242-1 SECTION 15260 - PIPING INSULATION .......................... 15260-1 to 15260-2 SECTION 15290 - DUCTWORK INSULATION ..................... 15290-1 to 15290-2 SECTION 15310 - FIRE PROTECTION PIPING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15310-1 to 15310-3 SECTION 15325 - SPRINKLER SYSTEMS .......................... 15325-1 to 15325-3 SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15410-1 to 154 I 0-5 SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES ...................... 15430-1 to 15430-3 SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES ........................ 15440-1 to 15440-8 SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT ....................... 15450-1 to 15450-2 SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15510-1 to 15510-3 SECTION 15515 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. 15515-1 to 15515-3 SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. 15540-1 to 15540-2 SECTION 15575 - BREACHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS ............ 15575-1 to 15575-2 SECTION 15650 - SECURITY COVER SYSTEM (SHROUD) FOR CONCEALMENT OF FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING . . .. 15650-1 to 15650-2 SECTION 15684 - CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS . . . . ... . . . . . . . . .. 15684-1 to 15684-10 SECTION 15835 - TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS ............... 15835-1 to 15835-2 SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS ................ 15855-1 to 15855-5 SECTION 15870 - POWER VENTILATORS ....................... 15870-1 to 15870-2 SECTION 15890 - DUCTWORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15890-1 to 15890-2 SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES ...................... 15910-1 to 15910-2 SECTION 15936 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ...................... 15936-1 to 15936-2 SECTION 15975 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS ............ 15975-1 to 15975-19 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING .......... 15990-1 to 15990-3 DIVISION 15. 14240-1 to 14240-9 DIVISION 14 SECTION 14240. - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PAGES SECTION TITLES . TECHNICAL SPECIFIQ1:t~:f0NS (Continued) . ~l ~. Table of Contents v 95-052/12-95 . . $ECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS .. .'... .. .. . . .0..... . ..... ... . ... 16470-1 to 16470-4 SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ..................... 16475-1 to 16475-4 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING ..................................... 16500-1 to 16500-2 SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE/COMPUTER/CATV RACEWAY SYSTEM -............................... 16740-1 SECTION 16744 - SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK ......... 16744-1 to 16744-13 SECTION 16745 - NURSE CALL SYSTEM. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16745-1 to 16745-4 SECTION 16747 - CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16747-1 to 16747-6 SECTION 16748 - LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM . . ..".. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16748-1 to 16748-8 SECTION 16749 - DOOR ANNUNCIATORS AND LOCK CONTROLS ..... 16749-1 to ]9749-11 SECTION 16760 - EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16760-1 to 16760-11 SECTION 16915 - LOW VOLTAGE RELAY SYSTEM ....... ...... ..... 16915-lt616915-4 PAGES SECTION TITLES . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING. 07]]]-1 95-052/12-95 . D. Samples, 3-by~6-inch (75-by-150-mm) minimum size, of each waterproofing material required for Project. . C. Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of waterproofing, including details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, tie-ins with adjoining construction, and other termination conditions: B. Product Data for each type of waterproofing specified, including manufacturer's printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties.- A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Provide waterproofmg that prevents the passage of liquid water under hydrostatic pressure and complies with requirements as demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency of manufacturer's cu.rrent sheet membrane. .. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.03 I. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete placement, curing, and finishing. 2. Division 5 Section "Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" for expansion-joint cover assemblies and installation. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashings. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for j?int sealant materials and installation. . B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Below-grade wall waterproofing. . 2. Waterproofing under basement slabs. A. This Section includes the following:- 1.02 . SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Suppleinentary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ].0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING SECTION 07111 . E. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under the "Quality Assurance" Article. . F. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of waterproofmg with requirements and other physical properties reported by manufacturer based on comprehensive testing of products according to current standard test methods within previous 5 years. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing by waterproofing manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's waterproofing. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain waterproofing materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing waterproofing. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Apply waterproofing within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. . 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials. 1.08 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by waterproofmg manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight during the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. 95-052/12-95 COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 2 . COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 3 95-052/12-95 . G. Metal Termination Bars: Alumipum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick, predriUed at 9-inch (225-mm) centers. . F. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and. adhesive tapes recommende~ by waterproofing manufacturer.. E. Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, 2-component, asphalt~modified coating. D. Liquid MeI11brane: Elastomeric, 2-component, liquid, cold fluid-applied, trowel grade or low viscosity as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for application. C.' Sheet Flashing: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet of same material, construction, and thickness as waterproofing sheet membrane. B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material for substrate. 1.. Fumish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities. having jurisdiction. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer fo.r intended use and compatible with waterproofing sheet membrane. A. . 2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS I. 65-mil- (I.6-mm-) tl)ick self-adhering sheet consisting of 53 to 56 mils (1.3 to 1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt Iaminatedto a heat-resistant, 9- .to 12-miI- (0.2- to 0.3- mni-) thick woven poIypropyIen~ geotextile with release liner on adhesive side. 2. Physical Properties: Provide waterproofing complying with the following: a. Tensile Strength,. Membr.ane: 250 Ibf (1112 N) minimum; ASTM D 882. b. Pliability: Unaffectedwhenbent 180 degiees over a 1!4-inch (6.4-mm) mandrel at-minus 15 deg F (minus 26 deg C); ASTM D 146. c. Puncture Resistance, Mesh:. 200 Ibf (890 N) minimum; ASTM E 154._ A. Heavy-Duty, Rubberized-Asphalt Composite Sheet: One of the following: 2.02 SELF-ADHERING COMPOSITE SHEET 1. Heavy-Duty, Rubberized.:Asphalt Composite Sheet: a. Bituthene5000; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. b. Mel-Dek; Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc. A. Products: Subject to complianc~ with requirements, provide one of-the follow!ng: _ 2.01 MANuFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS . I I. . COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 4 95-052/12-95 G. Outside Comers: Prepare and treat outside comers according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. F. Inside Comers: Prepare, prime, and treat inside comers according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. I. Install membrane strip and center over construction and control joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrate. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. 'C. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage affecting other construction. . Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean; dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. A. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION 1. Do not proceed with installation until after minimum concrete curing period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using waterproofing over substrate. A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Type VI, l.8-1b/cu. ft. (29-kglcu. m) minimum density and 40-1b/sq. in. (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength. . Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: 1 tl thick, rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as the blowing agents to comply with ASTM C 578 for type and other requirements indicated below: A. 2.04 INSULATION - PROTECTION BOARDS .j.-.'L _ ... " , . COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07] I 1 - 5 95-052/12-95 . A. Contractor will engage an independent testing agency to perform field inspections, sample and test materials being used, observe flood tests, and report whether tested Work conforms to or deviates from requirements.. : 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane using tape or adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions and before commencing subsequent construction operations. Minimize exposure of membrane. 3.04 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not meeting requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Plitch with sheet membrane extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions. . . F. Install sheet membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in adjacent waterproofing. E. Seal exposed edges of membrane terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or . . ending in reglets with mastic or sealant. Apply continuous sheet membrane over membrane strips bridging each type of joint to dimensions indicated or required by manufacturer. D. . 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures exceed 40 deg F (5 deg C), install manufacturer's standard rubberized-asphalt composite sheet. . 2. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and 5 deg C), install manufacturer's standard, low-temperature, rubberized- asphalt composite sheet. 3. On substrates to receive hot-mixed asphalt paving, install heavy-duty, rubberized- asphalt composite sheet. . C. Apply and firmly adhere sheet membrane over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-l/2-inch- (64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger. end laps to ensure watertight installation. B. Apply primer to substrate at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that wil!becovered by waterproofing membrane.in saine day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. . A. Install self-adhering composite sheet according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 SELF-ADHERING COMPOSITE SHEET APPLICATION Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at dtain~ and protrusions according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.: . H. . ]. Install strip of membrane 12 inches (300 mm) wide, centered over comer. i ~ . COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 6 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 07111 C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. B. Protect installed insulation from damage due to ultraviolet light exposure, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.06 PROTECTING AND CLEANING C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with requirements. I 1. After flood tests, repair leaks and make further repairs until waterproofing installation is watertight. . Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. B. il BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-1 95-052/12-95 . B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with dampproofing only when existing and forecasted weather con9itions will perinit work to be performed according to manufacturer's . ..- . ~ recommendations and warranty requirements. A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from one source and by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed bituminous dampproofmg similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Product data for each type of product spec.ified, including data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. for each dampproofing material specified. Include recommended method of application, recommended primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and recommended protection. course. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. ': . A. 1.03 SUBMITTALS B. Bituminous sheet waterproofing is specified in DiVIsion 7 Section "Sheet Membrane "Waterproofing. " 1. Hot-applied asphalt dampproofing: 2. Cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing. 3. Cold-applied, asphalt emulsion dampproofing. . A. This Section includes the following:." 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings arid general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07160 . . BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-2 95-052/12-95 D. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. C. Install separate flashings and comer protection stripping, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, where indicated to precede application of dampproofmg. Comply with details shown and with manufacturer's recommendations. Pay particular attention to requirements at building expansion joints, if any. B. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, with particular attention at construction joints. A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. 3.01 PREPARATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Primer: Asphalt primer complying with ASTM D 41, for asphalt-based dampproofing. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS . Spray Grade: Emulsified asphalt, prepared with mineral-colloid emulsifying agents without fibrous reinforcement, complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III. 1. B. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofmg: Asphalt-based emulsions recommended by the manufacturer for dampproofing use when applied according to the manufacturer's instructions. A. General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application. 2.02 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 1. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: a. ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div. b. Euclid Chemical Co. c. Kamak Chemical Corporation. d. Koppers Industries, Inc. e. Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: . 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-3 95-052/12-95 - . END OF SECTION 07160 A. General: Where indicated, install protection course of type indicated over compIeted-and- cured dampproofing treatment. Comply with dampproofing materials manufacturer's recommendations for method of support or attaching of protection materials. Support with spot application of trowel-grade mastic where not otherwise indicated. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE Protect exterior, below-grade dampproofing membrane from damage until backfill is completed. Remove overspray and spilled materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. A. . 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Spray Grade: Brush or spray apply it coat of asphalt emulsion dampproofing at a rate of 1.5 to 2.5 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.6 to 1 L/sq. m), depending on substrate texture, to produce a uniform, dry-film thickness of not less than 15 mils (0.4 mm). Apply in 2 coats, if necessary, to obtain required thickness, allowing time for complete drying between coats. 3.03 COLD-APPLIED, ASPHALT EMULSION DAMPPROOFING 1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of exterior concrete or masonry walls in contact with earth or other backfill and where space is enclosed on opposite side. 2. Exterior surface of inside WYthe of double-wythe, exterior masonry walls . above grade, to prevent water-vapor penetration through the wall. 3. Where indicated on the Drawings. B. Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces. A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated and where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory performance of work. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and mIgration onto other surfaces of work by masking or otherwise protecting adjoining work. E. . BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 95-052/12-95 . D. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of foam-plastic insulations with Standard . Building Code. . C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of inSulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for insulated drainage panels. . Division 7 Section "Composite Sheet Waterproofing" for insulation mstalled with waterproof mg. Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systerns--Class PB & PM" for insulation specified as part of these systems. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" forsafmg insulation. Division 7 Section "SBS-Modified 'BitumiD.ous Sheet Roofmg" for insulation specified as part of roofmg constrUction. Division 9 Section indicated below for insuIation installed as part of metal-framed wall and partition ass~blies: a. "Gypsum Board Assemblies." B. . Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Foundation and foundation protection boardS. 2. Cavity wall building insulation. 3. Sound attenuation batt insulation. 4. Safmg insulation. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMAR Y A. Drawings and general provisio~ of the Contract, including General arid Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections; apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 .. GENERAL BUll..DING INSULATION SECTION 07210 . . BUILDING. INSULA nON 07210 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board InsuIation (2") Cavity wall, (1 1/2") foundation, and (1 ") foundation protection boards: a. Amoco Foam Products Company. b. DiversiFoam Products. c. Dow Chemical Co. d. UC Industries, Inc.; Owens-Corning Co. 2. Glass-Fiber Insulation (Sound Attenuation Beams at Wall & Ceilings): a. Manville. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. d. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation. e. Schuller International, Inc. 3. Slag-WooI-/Rock-WooI-Fiber InsuIation (at all Fire Stop Sating Applications): a. Fibrex Inc. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products by one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS . Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 3. 2. 1. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTME 136. B. F ire-Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire- test-response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. . A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.04 r:. .,.-:t. . ., '\:" 'If -:,... ;1<.- .-. BUILDING INSULA nON 07210 - 3 95-052/12-95 . A. Slag" Wool-Fiber Board Sating Insulation: Semirigid boards designed for use as fire stop at openings between edge of slab and exterior walf panels, produced by combining slag-wool fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA and IB; nominal density of 4 Ib/cu. ft. (64 kg/cJl. m); passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteri~cs; thermal resistivity of 4 deg F:x'h"'x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x rn/W at 24 deg C). ' 2.03. SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES E. Wall Sound Attenuation Blankets: Semi-rigid (friction-fit) spun mineral fiber blanket without membrane covering; flamespread, smoke and fuel ratings ofIessthan 25 (UL-723); FS HH-I"521, Type I; type recommended by manufacturer for maximum sound attenuation; thicknesses as indicated or minimum 2". Batts shaIl be thermal fiber type for label fire walls. 1. Owens Corning - fiberglassbatts. 2. Manville - fiberglass batts. 3. CertainTeed - fiberglass batts. D. Ceiling Sound Attenuation shall be mineral substances such as rock, slag, or glass processed from a molten state into fibrous form.. Thickness shall be 3-1/2" nominal with R-Il thermal resistance. Insulation shall be unfaced. Approved manufacturers: Nominal density of 4 Ib/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m), Type IA and IB, thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in., at 75 deg F (27.7 K x rn/W at 24 deg C). . Fiber Color: . Regular color, unless otherwise indicated. 2. 1. . C. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining slag-wool or rock-wool fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612 for type and other requirements indicated below; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. L Type IV; 1.60-lb/cu. ft, (26-kgtcu. m) ininimum density, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of75 and 450, respectively: 3. Recycled Content: Not less. than. 50 percent blend of post consumer aDd recovered polystyrene resins. . B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent to comply with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated below: 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. A. General:, . Provide lnsuIating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. .'. INSULATING MATERIALS 2.02 Partek Insulations;Inc. USG Interiors, Inc.' b. c. . . BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 95-052/12-95 B. Protect below-grade waterproofmg on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to written instructions of insulation manufacturer. A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION, FOUNDATION PROTECTION BOARD & CA VITY WALL INSULATION D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. . INSTALLATION, GENERAL 3.03 A. Clean substrates of substances hannfuI to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing all projections that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Adhesive for Bonding InsuIation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates and as recommended by Manufacturer. 2.04 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS e. Sating Clips: Galvanized steel sating clips approved by manufacturer of safmg insulation for holding safmg insulation in place. . Caulking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of sating insulation for sealing joint between foil backing of safmg insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke. B. ..J-.. BUILDING INSULA nON 07210 - 5 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 07210 A. . General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. 3.08 PROTECTION A Install radiant barriers in locations indicated according to ASTM C 1158 and radiant barrier insulation manufacturer's written instructions. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF RADIANT BARRIERS Install sating insulation to fill gap between edge of concrete floor slab and back of exterior spandiel panels on safmg clips spaced as needed to support insulation, but not further apart than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. Cut sating insulation wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression fit and seal joint between insulation and edge of slab with caulking approved by safmg insulation manufacturer for this purpose. Leave no voids in completed installation. . A. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION D. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities fonned by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. C. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installatiQn with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION 3.05 . EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 1 95-052/12-95 . A. . General: Provide systems that comply with the following performance requirements: 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS D. System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish systems. C. System in this Section refers to Class PB exterior insulation and finish systems. B. Designation PB for class of exterior insulation and finish systems specified in this Section is based on the classification developed by the EIFS Industry Members Association (EIMA). A. Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior assemblies composed of an inner layer of board insulation and an outer layer composed of a glass-fiber-mesh-reinforced base coat applied directly to board insulation and a textured protective finish coat. These assemblies are applied to supporting substrates of construction indicated. 1.03 DEFINITIONS Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry substrates behind system. . Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for steel stud framing behind system. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood sheathing. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for requirements specified by reference in this Section for sealing joints in system with elastomeric joint sealants. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in system with elastomeric joint sealants. 5. . 3. 4. l. 2. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Applications over masonry surfaces. 2. Applications over plywood sheathing. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB . SECTION 07241 . . EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 2 . Accelerated Weathering Characteristics: Sample of size suitable for test equipment and consisting of l-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation system mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, shows no evidence of cracking, flaking, or deleterious effects after testing for 2,000 hours per Method 1 of ASTM G 23. Water Penetration: Sample, consisting of I-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7 -mm-) thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, shows no water penetration into the plane of the innermost face of the test specimen under 2.86 psf (137 Pa) of air pressure difference across the specimen during a 15-minute test period when tested per ASTM E 331. Water Resistance: Sample, consisting of l-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and fmish system mounted on I/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick board, cured for 28 days, shows no deleterious effects after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247. Salt-Spray Resistance: Sample, consisting of l-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, shows no deleterious effects after testing for 300 hours per ASTM B 117. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: Three samples, 4 by 8 by I inch (101.6 by 203.2 by 25.4 mm) in size, consisting of exterior insulation and finish system coated on all sides with base and finish coats including reinforcing fabric, cured for 28 days, show no visible change when subjected to 4 days' underwater soak followed by 60 cycles of altemating exposure for 2 hours to minus 10 deg C and 2 hours to plus 20 deg C. Mildew Resistance: Sample, consisting of finish coat applied to 2 by 2 inch (50.8 by 50.8 mm) clean glass substrate, cured for 28 days, shows no mildew growth when tested per MIL Standard 810C, Method 508. Abrasion Resistance: Sample, consisting of I-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board, cured for a minimum of 28 days, shows no evidence of cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 500 liters of sand when tested per ASTM D 968, Method A. Impact Resistance: Sample, consisting of l-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and fmish system when constructed, conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86, produces the following impact classification and range: a. High Impact Resistance: 90-150 inch-Ib (10.1-17 N-m). 95-052/12-95 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. B. Physical Properties of Class PB: Provide exterior insulation and finish systems whose physical properties and structural performance comply with the following requirements when tested per methods referenced. . Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind system, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish. 2. 1. 10. Negative Wind Load Performance: Sample assembly, 48 by 48 inches (1220 by 1220 mm) in size, consisting of studs, sheathing, and I-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system, shows capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330. a. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (56 deg C). Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 Ibf per sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inwards or outwards. Deflection: Limit deflection of framing members to less than 1/240 of the span of the member. 9. . 11. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each component of exterior insulation and finish systems specified. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between system and construction penetrating it, and attachments to construction behind system. D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts and small-scale samples consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of textural choices indicated. . E. Samples for verification in the form of 24-inch- (600-mm-) square panels for each finish, color, texture, and pattern specified. Prepare samples using same tools and techniques intended for actual work. 1. Incorporate within each sample a typical control joint filled with sealant of color indicated or selected. F. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under the "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and address of architects and owners, and other information specified. H. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence system's compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a 5 year minimum record of successful in-service performance. . 95-052/12-95 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 3 B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system. . C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a 10 year minimum record of successful in-service performance. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are identical to those tested with the following fire-test-response characteristics, as determined by testing per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 450 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. 3. Radiant Heat Exposure, Unrestricted Installation: Tolerable level of incident radiant heat energy of at least 3962 BTU (h x sq. ft.) (12.5 kW/sq. m) when tested according to BOCA National Building Code Section 1406.2. 4. Fire Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ASTM E 119 by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from one source and by a single manufacturer or by manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components. . 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels identifying products legible and intact. B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from the weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic, and other causes. 1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures are 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4 deg C) during installation of wet materials and until they have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant, but for not less than 24 hours after installation. B. Field Measurements: Check actual dimensions required for prefabricated panels by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final 95-052/12-95 EXTERIOR INSULA nON AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 4 . .".. ~.. ~1 ~ '1;:.' -." .,.. ~ :;',0 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 5 95-052/12-95 . E. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion 'of'polystyrene resin beads or;.gr~ules in a closed mold, complying with ASTM C 578 for Type I, approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including corner squareness, other dimensional tolerances, and the following: 1. Factory-mixed formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insulation to substrates of type indicated, as approved by system manufacturer. D. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use, compatible with substrate, and complying with the following requirements: C. . Primer-Sealer: System manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insl!lation. 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and textures for type of finish coat indicated. Three (3) colors required. B. Colors and Textures of Finish Coat: Comply with the following requirements: Compatibility: Provide adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing fabrics, base and finish coat materials, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer. A. . 2.02 MATERIALS 1. Damtite. 2. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 3. Parex Incorporated. 4. Senergy, Inc. 5. STO Industries. 6. Thoro System Products. 7. United States Gypsum Co. 8. Aggre-Flex by Master Wall Inc. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Class PB system by one of the following: 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of system with related units. of Work specified in other Sections . to ensure that wall assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are ~rotected against damage from the effects of weather, .age, corrosion, and other causes. COORDINA TION AND SCHEDULING 1.09 . shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. . . EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 6 95-052/12-95 A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard. 2.03 MIXING 1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated I-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and thickness of insulation as well, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating. 2. Drip Screed: Prefabricated I-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and thickness of insulation as well, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and extended to form a drip. 1. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with system manufacturer's requirements, manufactured from vinyl plastic and complying with ASTM C 1063. I. Water: Clean and potable. . Factory-mixed formulation of polymer emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. 1. H. Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: I. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer emulsion adhesive and inert fillers that is ready to use without the addition of other materials. G. Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: 1. Standard Reinforcing Fabric: 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 glsq. m). 2. Intermediate Reinforcing Fabric: 9.5 oz./sq. yd. (322 glsq. m). 3. Impact-Resistant Reinforcing Fabric: 15 oz./sq. yd. (508 g/sq. m). 4. Strip Reinforcing Fabric: 3.75 oz./sq. yd. (127 glsq. m). F. Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced, alkali-resistant open-weave glass-fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multiend strands with tensile strength of not less than 145 Ib (645 N) and 150 Ib (667 N) in warp and fill directions per ASTM D 5035, complying with ASTM D 578 and the following requirements for minimum weight: . Age insulation in block form prior to cutting and shipping by air drying for not less than 6 weeks or by another method approved by system manufacturer that produces equivalent results. Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm) and in thickness indicated but not less than that allowed by system manufacturer, nor more than 4 inches (102 mm). 2. 1. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 7 95-052/12-95 . 1. Apply adhesive to insulation by the notched trowel method in a manner that results in adhesive coating the entire surface of plywood sheathing once insulation is adhered to the sheathing, unless system manufacturer's instructions specify the use of primer-sealer in combination with the ribbon and dab method. 2. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period prescribed by system manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, prior to beginning rasping and sanding insulation or application of b.ase coat and reinforcing fabric. 3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally. Begin frrst course from drip screed and work upward. Work from perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels when possible. Apply a thin coat of adhesive to edges of insulation before inserting into trim accessories. 4. Stagg'er vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so that no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints at least 6 inches (150 mm) from comers of window and door openings. e. Adhesively attach insulation to comply with the following requirements: B.. Apply trim accessories at perimeter of system, at expansion Jomts, and elsewhere, as indicated. Use drip screed at bottom edge of system unless otherwise indicated. Use casing beads at other locations. Comply with manufacturer's current published instructions for installation of system as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. A. . 3.03 INSTALLATION 1. Apply primer-sealer over substrates where required by system manufacturer for improving adhesion or for protecting substrates from premature degradation. C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with system manufacturer's requirements to obtain . optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. B. Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent .infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates. A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work.. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for installation of system. Do not proceed with installation of system until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION . . EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 8 I. At decorative grooves (false joints), apply strip reinforcing at least 8 inches (200 mm) wide. 2. Embed strip reinforcing fabric in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing fabric. 95-052/12-95 F. Additional Reinforcing Fabric: Apply strip reinforcing fabric around openings extending 4 inches (100 mm) beyond perimeter. Apply additional 8 by 16 inch (200 by 400 mm) strip reinforcing fabric diagonally at comers of openings (re-entrant comers). Apply 8- inch- (200-mm-) wide strip reinforcing at both inside and outside comers unless base layer of fabric is lapped at least 4 inches (100 mm) on each side of comers. I. Intermediate reinforcing fabric unless otherwise indicated. E. Embed reinforcing fabric of type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with fabric continuous or lapped at comers and lapped or otherwise treated at joints to comply with system manufacturer's requirements. Completely embed fabric, applying additional base coat material if necessary, so that reinforcing fabric pattern is not visible. D. Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness specified by system manufacturer. . a. Offset joints of insulation at least 4 inches (100 mm) from joints in plywood sheathing. b. Offset joints of insulation at least 4 inches (100 mm) from decorative grooves (false joints). Interlock ends at internal and external comers. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards. If gaps occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert without use of adhesive. Cut insulation to fit openings, comers, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes conforming to details indicated. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Cut grooves, rabbets, and other features in outside face of insulation with high- speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that conform accurately to profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at features to less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind exterior insulation and finish systems. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within system and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated. Treat exposed edges of insulation board, including those forming substrates of sealed joints within system or between system and other work, by encapsulating with base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat, unless otherwise indicated. . 12. 11. 10. 9. 8. 7. 5. 6. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 9 95-052/12-95 . . END OF SECTION 07241 B. .Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer and system manufacturer that ensures system's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive system coatings. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION H. Apply finish coat over dry base coat in thickness required by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of texture and color matching approved sample: I. Intermediate reinforcing fabric. Double Layer Application: Where indicated, apply a second base coat and second layer of reinforcing fabric of weight indicated below, in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. G. . EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - I 95-052/12-95 . 1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions. . 2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies behind it or through th~m into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system 'A. General: Provide systems complying with the. following performance requirements: 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS D. System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish systems. C. 'System in this Section refers to Class PM exterior insulation and finish systems. B. Designation PM for class of exterior insulation and finish systems specified in this Section is based on the classification developed by the EIFS Industry Members Association (EIMA). A. Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior assemblies composed of an inner layer of board insulation and an outer layer composed of a glass-fiber-mesh-reinforced base coat applied directly to board insulation and a textured protective finish coat. These assemblies are applied to supporting substrates of construction indicated. DEFINITIONS 1.03 . 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for concrete substrates behind system. 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry substrates behind system. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in system with elastomeric joint sealants. B. . Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Applications over masonry surfaces. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELA TED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM SECTION 07242 . . EXTERIOR INSULA nON AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 2 . Accelerated Weathering Characteristics: Sample of size suitable for test equipment and consisting of l-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and fmish system, cured for 28 days, shows no evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, blistering, or deleterious effects after testing for 2,000 hours per ASTM G 23 Method 1 or ASTM G 53. Water Penetration: Sample, 24 by 48 inches (609.6 by 1219.2 mm) in size, consisting of l-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system, cured for 28 days, shows no evidence of visible leaks, no blistering, cracking, or wear of the finish coat when tested per FS TT-C-555 or ASTM E 331. Salt-Spray Resistance: Sample, minimum of 4 by 6 inches (101.6 by 152.4 mm) in size, consisting of I-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system, cured for 28 days, shows no deleterious effects after testing for 300 hours per ASTM B 117. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: Sample, 3 by 5 inches (76.2 by 127.0 mm) in size, consisting of l-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system coated on one side with base and finish coats including reinforcing fabric, cured for 28 days, shows no visible change and negligible weight gain when subjected to 50 cycles of 20 hours' freezing at 16 deg F (8.9 deg C) and 4 hours of thawing in water of 75 deg F (23.9 deg C), plus or minus 10 deg F (5.5 deg C) per ASTM C 67. Mildew Resistance: Sample, consisting of finish coat applied to 2-by-2-inch (50.8-by-50.8-mm) glass slides per manufacturer's instructions, cured for 28 days, shows no mildew growth when tested per MIL Standard 810e, Method 508. Abrasion Resistance: Sample, consisting of I-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system cured for 28 days, shows no evidence of cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 500 liters of sand when tested per ASTM D 968, Method A. Water Vapor Transmission of Coating: Sample, consisting of protective coating including base and finish coats plus reinforcing fabric, shows minimum permeability greater than that of insulation and a maximum of 7.5 perms (430 nglPa x s x sq. m) when tested per ASTM E 96, Water Method, Procedure B. Water Vapor Transmission of Insulation: Sample of I-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick insulation shows maximum permeability of 1 perm (57 nglPa x s x sq. m) when tested per ASTM E 96, Water Method, Procedure B. Impact Resistance: Sample, consisting of I-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation finish system when constructed, conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86, produces the following impact. classification and range: a. Ultra-High Impact Resistance: Over 150 inch-lb (17 N-m). Negative Wind Load Performance: Sample assembly, 48 by 48 inches (1220 by 1220 mm) in size, consisting of studs, sheathing, and l-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system, shows capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330. 95-052/12-95 10. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. B. Physical Properties of Class PM, Type A System: Provide exterior insulation and finish systems whose physical properties and structural performance comply with the following requirements when tested per methods referenced. . and assemblies behind system, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 3 95-052/12-95 . C. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are identical to those tested with the following fire-test-response characteristics, as determined by testing per ASTM test method, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. ~; '"." B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE H. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence system's compliance with building code in effect for Project. G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and address of arcf:1itects and owners, and other information specified. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under the "Quality Assurance" Article. F. . 1. Incorporate within each sample a typical control joint filled with sealant of color indicated or selected. E. Samples for verification in the form of 24-inch- (600-mm-) square panels for each finish, color, texture, .and pattern specified. Prepare samples using same tools and techniques intended for actual work. ] . Submit sealant manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available. D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts and small-scale samples consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of-textural choices indicated. C Shop drawings showing fabrication: and ins~allation of system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between system arid .construction penetrating it, and attachments to construction behind system. B. Product data for each component of exterior. insulation and finish systems specified. . A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. SUBMITTALS 1.05 . ~ . EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 4 95-052/12-95 A. Coordinate installation of system with related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes. 1.09 COORDINA TION AND SCHEDULING A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures are 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4 deg C) during installation of wet materials and until they have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant, but for not less than 24 hours after installation. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS I. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from the weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic, and other causes. . Deliver products in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels identifying products legible and intact. A. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. Locate mockups on site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturb~d condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Protect mockups from weather and from construction activities. Brace to resist design wind loads and provide waterproof coverings for construction materials not intended to be permanently exposed to the weather. b. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. E. Mockup: Prior to installing system, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for fmal unit of Work. . Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from one source and by a single manufacturer or by manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible withother system components. D. EXTERIOR INSULA nON AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 5 95-052/12-95 . 1. Factory-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, natural color; hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 206, Type S; ,.. F. Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: I. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, natural sand aggregate, alkaline-resistant chopped glass fibers, and dry polymer admixture to which only water is added at the job site. E. Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: I. 4.3 oz./sq. yd. (146 glsq. m). D. Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced, alkali-resistant open-weave glass- fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multiend strands with tensile strength of not less than 120 lb (535 N) and 140 lb (620 N) in warp and fill directions, respectively, per ASTM D 5035 and complying with ASTM D 578, and of the following minimum weight: Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm) and in thickness indicated but not less than that allowed by system manufacturer, nor more than 4 inches (102 mm). 1. . C. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high-density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for Type IV; approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including comer squareness and other dimensional tolerances. 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and textures for type of finish coat indicated. B. Provide color and texture of protective coating to comply with the following requirements: A. Compatibility: Provide board insulation, reinforcing fabric, base and finish coat materials, mechanical:anchors, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS 1. . Finestone- Impact-R-System (pebbletex Limestone Finish). A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Class PM system by one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 6 95-052/12-95 A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for installation of system. Do not proceed with installation of system until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard. 2.04 MIXING 1. Match finish coat color of system. . Sealant Color: Provide color of exposed sealants to comply with the following requirement: B. A. Sealant Product: Provide system manufacturer's recommended chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". 2.03 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 1. Control Joints: Prefabricated, I-piece type manufactured with expanded metal flanges, formed to provide double keying action with protective coating, extending only to face of insulation, with removable tape on plaster face and 1/4- inch (6.4-mm) joint sightline and bellows configuration as indicated below: a. Shallow Configuration: Bellows extends to face of insulation only. 2. Comer Bead: Prefabricated small-nosed comer bead with expanded metal flanges extending minimum of 2-7/8 inches (73 mm) from comer. 3. Casing Bead: Prefabricated I-piece type for attachment to surface of insulation or behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and, where attached behind insulation, thickness of insulation as well. H. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with system manufacturer's requirements, manufactured from zinc alloy. Coordinate depth of accessories with thickness of base and finish coats required. G. Acrylic-Based Finish Coat: System manufacturer's standard factory-mixed formulation of acrylic emulsion, colorfast mineral pigments, and fine aggregates. . natural sand aggregate complying with ASTM C 897; color-fast mineral pigments; and system manufacturer's standard polymer admixture. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 7 95-052/12-95 . C. Install expansion joints at locations indicated and as follows: Space fasteners as indicated below: a. Vertically: Not more than 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. nor more than 12 inches (305 mm) from bottom edge of starting course of insulation board. b. Horizontally: Not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally. Begin first course from a level base line and work upward. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so that no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints at least 6 inches (150 mm) from comers of window and door openings. a. Offset joints of insulation at least 4 inches (100 mm) from decorative grooves (false joints). Interlock ends at internal and external comers. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards. If gaps occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert without use of adhesive. Cut insulation to fit openings, comers, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes conforming to details indicated. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from surface of insulation, and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure, and smooth surface film created by extrusion process. Do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated or required by system manufacturer. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating. 9. 8. 7. 6. 4. 5. 3. 2. . I. B. Mechanically attach insulation to substrate by method complying with system manufacturer's current requirements. Initially install sufficient number of fasteners to hold insulation board in place prior to application of reinforcing fabric. Install additional fasteners after application of reinforcing fabric to comply with manufacturer's requirements and spacing indicated below. A. Comply with manufacturer's current published instructions for installation of system as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION B. Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates. A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work. PREPARATION . 3.02 . EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 8 95-052/12-95 1. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and system manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Apply primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. 3. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint. 4. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately after tooling joints without disturbing joint seal. 5. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and with EIMA "Joint Sealant Specifications for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Class PB and PM." 3.04 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS I. Apply [mish coat over cured base coat in thickness specified by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of texture and color matching approved sample. H. Trowel-apply base coat over and into reinforcing fabric in thickness specified by system manufacturer to produce a flush, uniform surface with fabric fully embedded and prepared to receive finish coat. . Cover insulation with reinforcing fabric and fasten through insulation to framing members, concrete, or masonry. G. F. Treat exposed edges of insulation to comply with system manufacturer's directions. 1. Comer beads and control joints may be attached to the insulation with threaded plastic fasteners when approved by the system manufacturer. E. Install trim accessories at locations indicated. Mechanically fasten accessories to framing members, concrete, or masonry. 1. At a maximum spacing of 12 feet (3.7 m) in any direction, with no panel exceeding 144 sq. ft. (13 sq. m) in area. 2. At locations so that no panel has a width to length ratio of more than 2-1/2 to 1. 3. Where panels formed by system change in size, extend joints fuIl width or height of protective coating. 4. Above and below door and window openings. D. Install control joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the foIlowing criteria and approved by the Architect: . Where expansion or control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind insulation. Where system abuts dissimilar materials. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges as weIl as between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulation of joint substrates with base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat. 2. 3. 1. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 9 95-052/12-95 . . END OF SEcnON 07242 -B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to InstaIIer and system manufacturer that ensures systems being without damage or deterioration" at time of Substantial Completion. A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and ,door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive system coatings. CLEANING AND PROTECTION 3.05 . SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251- 1 95-052/12-95 . 1. Where and what kinds of surface preparations are required before applying frreproofing. 2; Extent of sprayed-on fireproofing for each different construction and fire- resistance rating including the following: a. Applicable fire-resistive design designations of inspecting and testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies. 3. Treatment of fireproofing after its application. B. Shop drawings in form of structural framing plans indicating the following: 1. Certification by manufacturers that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). A. Product data for each sprayed-on firepro()fing product indicated. 1.04 SUBMIIT ALS A. Concealed sprayed-on fireproofing refers to applications where sprayed-on materials are. applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed. DEFINITIONS 1.03 . 1. Division 5 Section "StructuraI Steel" for surface conditions specified for structural steel receiving sprayed-on fireproofing. 2. New Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for through-penetration firestop systems. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field priming structural steel prior to applying sprayed-on fireproofing. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Concealed sprayed-on frreproofing. "A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, incl~ding General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL SPRA YED-ON FIREPROOFING SECTION 07251 . . SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 2 95-052/12-95 C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain sprayed-on fireproofing materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the sprayed-on frreproofmg manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its sprayed-on fireproofmg products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to fire-resistive designs listed in UL "Fire Resistance Directory," or in the comparable publication of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-resistive assemblies where sprayed-on fireproofing serves as direct-applied protection, tested per ASTM E 119. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As indicated for each sprayed-on fireproofing product required, tested per ASTM E 84. . Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed-on fireproofing products identical to those used in assemblies tested for the following fire-test-response characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify packages (bags) containing fireproofing with appropriate classification markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. A. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE F. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction showing that sprayed-on fireproofing products comply with building code in effect for Project. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. D. Product certificates from fireproofing manufacturers that each sprayed-on fireproofing product indicated for Project complies with specified requirements including those for fire- test-response characteristics and compatibility with adhesives, primers, and other surface coatings on substrates indicated to receive fireproofing. 1. By testing for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements specified in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" about coating materials. 2. By verifying that fireproofmg manufacturer has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with fireproofing based on its own laboratory testing or field expenence. . Test reports for primers and other coatings applied to structural steel from a qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Contractor indicating that primers and coatings proposed for application in shop or field are compatible with sprayed-on fireproofing. Instruct laboratory to determine compatibility as follows: C. SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 3 95-052/12-95 . 1. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent deterioration of sprayed-on fireproofing for interior applications due to exposure to unfavorable environmental conditions. 2. Avoid unnecessary exposure of~sprayed-on fireproofing to abrasion and other damage likely to occur durj!1g. construction operations subsequent to its application. A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed-on fIreproofing with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1.08 SEQUENCING B. Ventilation: Ventilate sprayed-on fireproofing by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation during and after application until fireproofing dries thoroughly. A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install sprayed-on fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperatures are 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling, unless temporary protection and heat is provided to maintain temperatures at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after applying sprayed-on fireproofing. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS Store sprayed-on fiTeproofmg materials inside, under cover, above ground, so they are kept dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard any materials that have deteriorated. c. . B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard any materials whose shelf life has expired. " A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; shelf life, if applicable; and fiTe-resistance ratings applicable to Project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. "Locate mockups on site in location or, if not indicated, directed by Architect. 2. Extent of Mockups: Approximately -100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of surface for each product indicated. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be erected. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. " 5. Obtain Architect's acceptance ofmockups before start of final unit of Work. " E. Field-Constructed Mockups: Prior to installing sprayed-on fireproofing, apply each product specified for exposed applications to demonstrate both aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. ~ Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for'final unit-of Work. Provide fireproofing products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section I, Polarized Light Microscopy. D. . . SPRA YED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 4 95-052/12-95 1. Bond Strength: 150 lbf per sq. ft. (7180 Pa) as determined per ASTM E 736 under the following conditions: a. Field test sprayed-on frreproofing that is applied to flanges of wide- flange structural steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fireproofing. b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving sprayed-on fireproofing are primed or otherwise painted, perform series of bond tests specified in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. c. Minimum sprayed-on fireproofing thickness tested in laboratory shall be 0.75 inch (19 mm). 2. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf per sq. in. (250 Pa) as determined in the laboratory per ASTM E 761. Minimum sprayed-on frreproofing thickness tested shall be 0.75 inch (19 mm) and the minimum dry density shall be as specified, but not less than 15 pcf (240 kg/cu. m). 3. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion as determined per ASTM E 937. 4. Deflection: No cracking, spaIIing, delamination or the like as determined per ASTM E 759. D. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated or higher values required to attain designated fife-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property listed below: . Material Composition: Sprayed-fiber fireproofing consisting of factory-mixed, dry formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state by pneumatic equipment and mixed with water at the spray nozzle to form a damp, as-applied product. c. 1. Sprayed-fiber fireproofing consisting of factory-mixed, dry formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state by pneumatic equipment and mixed with water at the spray nozzle to form a damp, as-applied product. B. Material Composition: Either composition indicated below: A. General: For concealed applications of sprayed-on fireproofing provide manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated in this article for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products. 2.01 CONCEALED SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING MATERIALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS . Do not apply fireproofing to metal roof decking substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofmg until fireproofing is installed. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, tested, and corrections have been made to any defective fireproofing. 6. 5. 4. 3. '4.-.",,,~,)o\ .,.. ..... t";-.'~ ~.: I.ri,':,'-~!o!i,_'..'r,di"_r_,"'.,~ SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 5 I. Pr<><Juct: Subject to compliance :~!1l1 requirements, provide Cafco Bond-Seal by Isolatek International Corp. . 95-052/12-95 . B. Sealer for Mineral-Fiber Fireproofing: Clear-drying, water-dispersible protective coating recommended by sprayed-fiber fireproofing manufacturer. A. General: Provide auxiliary fireproofing materials that are compatible with sprayed-on fireproofing products and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in the fire-resistive designs indicated. 2.02 AUXILIARY FIREPROOFING MATERIALS I. Sprayed-Fiber Fireproofing: a. Cafco Blaze-Shield, Isolatek International Corp. b. Cafco Deck-Shield, Isolatek International Corp. c. SprayDon Standard IN, Structural Coatings Inc. F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: E. A vailable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like as determined per ASTM E 760. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 gram per sq. ft. (0.27 glsq. m) in 24 hours as determined per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, the minimum sprayed-on fireproofmg thickness is 0.75 inch (19 inm), the maximurn dry density is 15 pcf (240 kg/cu. m), test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. Dry Density:. 15 pcf(240kg/cu. m) for average and individual densities regardless of density indicated in. referenced fire-resistive design, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 605 or Appendix A "Alternate Method for Density Determination" of A WCI Technical Manual 12-A. Thickness: Provide minUnum average thickness required for fire-resistive design indicated according to the foIIowing criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm), as determined per ASTM E 605. . a. Where the referenced flIe-resistive design lists a thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) or, greater, the minimum aIIowable individual sprayed-on fireproofing thickness is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch (6 mm). b. Where the referenced fire-resistive design lists a thickness of less than I inch (25 mm) but more than 0.375 inch (9mm), the minimum allowable individual sprayed-on fireproofing thickness is the greater of 0.375 inch (9 mm) or 75 percent of the design thickness. c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistive designs whose fire resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 pcf (240 kg/cu. m). Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread value of 10 and smoke- developed value of O. . 9. 8. 7. 6. . 5. . SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 6 95-052/12-95 C. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, install body of fireproof covering in a single course. B. Apply sprayed-on fireproofing that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 under "Test Reports" in "Submittals" article, with respect to rate of application, use of sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results. A. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to convey and spray on fireproofing materials; as applicable to the particular conditions of instaUation and as required to achieve fire- resistance ratings indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL B. Prime substrates where recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, except where compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing. . Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing, including oil, grease, roIling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill scale. A. 3.02 PREPARATION C. Do not proceed with installation of fireproofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Conduct tests according to sprayed-on fireproofing manufacturer's recommendations to verify that substrates are free of oil, rolling compounds, and other substances capable of interfering with bond where there is any doubt as to their presence. 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of oil, grease, roIling compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrate under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that wiIl interfere with applying the fireproofing. A. Examine substrates with Installer present to determine if they are in satisfactory condition to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the foIlowing: . EXAMINA TION 3.01 PART 3 - EXECUTION SPRA YED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 7 95-052/12-95 . B. Cure exposed cementitious fireproofing materials according to fireproofing manufacturer's . recommendations to prevent premature drying. A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material over-spray and fall-out from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. 3.05 CLEANING, REPAIR, AND PROTECTION F. Additional Testing: Where fireproofing is removed and replaced or repaired, additional testing will be performed to determine compliance with specified requirements. E. Apply additional fireproofing per manufacturer's directions where test results indicate that the thickness does not comply with specified requirements. D. Remove and replace fireproofing where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements for cohesion and adhesion or for density or both. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. Within each area, testing agency will randomly select one structural member of each type (primary beam, secondary beam, joist, truss, steel deck, and column) and test fireproofing as follows: a. For cohesion and adhesion per ASTM E 736. b. For thickness per ASTM E 605. c. Lower flanges and webs of beams, column webs, column flanges, and floor deck for density per ASTM E 605 or Appendix A "Alternate Method for Density Determination" of A WCI Technical Manual 12-A. d. When testing discovers fireproofing not in compliance with requirements, testing agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance. . l. B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing of completed fireproofing will take place in successive stages in areas of extept described below; dp not proceed with fireproofing of next area. until test results for previously completed.fireproofmg show compliance with requirements. .. A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Contractor will perform field quality-controltesting. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL E. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate it from the sprayed- on fireproofing over which it is applied.. Apply fireproofing materials by sprayed-on method to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended by manufacturer. . D. . SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 8 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 07251 E. Repair or replace work that has not been successfuIIy protected. D. Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other construction to minimize the need to cut or remove fireproofing. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and patch any areas where fireproofing was removed or damaged. . Protect fireproofing, according to advice of fireproofing manufacturer and InstaIIer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that fireproofmg will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. c. FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 1 95-052/12-95 . C. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire- resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. A. General: Provide firestopping systems that. are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for construction of openings in concrete slabs. 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for joint fillers for non-fire-resistive-rated masonry construction. 3. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for safing insulation and accessories. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive-rated joint sealants. 5. Division 15 Sections specifying ducts and piping penetrations. 6. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 7. Reference to Life Safety sheets for apIIications schedule. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: B. . 1. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor and roof construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts,' conduits, and other penetrating items. 2. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated waIIs and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 3. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 4. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. A. This Section includes frrestopping for the foIIowing: 1.02 . SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and. Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART I - GENERAL FIRESTOPPING . SECTION 07270 . FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 2 95-052/12-95 F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. E. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating items. . Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for each through-penetration frrestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. c. 1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants. B. Product data for each type of product specified. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division Specification Sections. 1.04 SUBMITTALS E. For frrestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25 and smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by instaIling floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. . For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. D. : .~~:... ~ " FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 3 95-052/12-95 . E. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Sul:lpart'F, Appendix A, Section I, "Polarized Light Microscopy." D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced InstaIIer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the frrestopping'manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect's prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Firestopping tests are performed by a qual~fied testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and foIIow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Through-penetration firest~p' systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa) is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch (20 mm) below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the foIIowing requirements: a. Through-penetration frrestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory," by Warnock Hersey, or by apother qualified testing and inspecting agency. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response characteristics per ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa), as measured 0.78 inch (20 mm) from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements: . a. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency. . 3. 2. 1. A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the foIIowing requirements and those spc;:cified under the "System Performance Requirements" article: . QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.05 . FIRES TOPPING 07270 - 4 95-052/12-95 I. Permanent forming/damminglbacking materials including the following: a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. b. Ceramic fiber. c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. d. Fire-rated form board. e. Joint fillers for joint sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items: A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the frrestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. . FIRES TOPPING, GENERAL 2.01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per frrestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fIrestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. A. Deliver frrestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classifIcation marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multi component materials. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING . Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. F. .".' FIRES TOPPING 07270 - 5 95-052/12-95 . L. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, single-component, synthetic-polymer-based sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling)' t'Onnulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumpingl gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. K. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, non shrinking foam. I. PiIIowslBags: Re-usable, heat-expanding pillowslbags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases fiIIed with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire- retardant additives. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fiIIers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogenous mortar. H. . G. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water at Project site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E 136, with flame- spread and smoke-developed ratings of zero per ASTM E 84. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side. E. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. D. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation. C. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex . formulation. B. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant: Single-component formulation of ceramic fibers and inorganic binders. A. - Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Cl?ating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating, and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating. 2.02 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRES TOP SYSTEMS Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply with system performance and other requirements. C. . surfaces requiring a nonslumpingl gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop . system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. M. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: a. FireMaster Bulk and FireMaster Mastic, Thermal Ceramics. 2. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant: a. Metacaulk 525, The RectorSeal Corporation. 3. Endothermic, Latex Sealant: a. Fyre-Shield, Tremco Inc. 4. Endothermic, Latex Compounds: a. Flame-Safe FS500/600 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp. b. Flame-Safe FS900/FST900 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp. 5. Intumescent Latex Sealant: a. Metacaulk 950, The RectorSeal Corporation. b. Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. 6. Intumescent Putty: a. Pensil 500 Intumescent Putty, General Electric Co. b. Flame-Safe FSPIOOO Putty, International Protective Coatings Corp. c. Fire Barrier Moldable Putty, 3M Fire Protection Products. 7. Intumescent Wrap Strips: a. Dow Coming Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap Strip 2002, Dow Coming Corp. b. CS2420 Intumescent Wrap, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, 3M Fire Protection Products. . 8. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: a. USG Firecode Compound, United States Gypsum Co. 9. Mortar: a. K-2 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. Novasit K-I0 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc. c. KBS-Mortar Seal, International Protective Coatings Corp. 10. Pillows/Bags: a. Firestop Pillows, Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. KBS Sealbags, International Protective Coatings Corp. 11. Silicone Foams: a. Dow Coming Fire Stop Foam 2001, Dow Coming Corp. b. Pensil 200 Foam, General Electric Co. 12. Silicone Sealants: a Dow Coming Firestop Sealant 2000, Dow Coming Corp. b. Dow Coming Firestop Sealant SL 2003, Dow Coming Corp. c. Pensil 100 Firestop Sealant, General Electric Co. d. CS240 Firestop Sealant, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. Metacaulk 835, The RectorSeal Corporation. f. Metacaulk 880, The RectorSeal Corporation. g. Fyre-Sil, Tremco Inc. h. Fyre-Sil S/L, Tremco Inc. 13. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealants: a. Biostop 500 Intumescent Firestop Caulk, Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. Fire Barrier CP 25N/S Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. FIRESTOPPING . 95-052/12-95 07270 - 6 FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 7 95-052/12-95 . 1. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing, Silicone Sealant: a. Dow Coming 790, Dow Coming Corp. b. Dow Coming 795, Dow Coming Corp. c. Silpruf, General Electric Co. d. Ultraglaze, General Electric Co. e. 864, Pecora Corp. 2. Mu!~icomponent, Nonsag, Ure~~e Sealant: a.' Vulkem 922, Mameco'lnteinational Inc. F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: E. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated: a. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent movement. MuIticomponent, Npnsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure- related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. D. . 1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following percentage changes in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated: a. 100 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression for a total of 150 percent movement. C. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS;. Class -25; exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) o. 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Sealant Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard:' Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-r~sistive joint sealants. FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 2.03 . c. Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. . FIRES TOPPING 07270 - 8 95-052/12-95 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 3.02 PREPARATION . Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. 2.04 MIXING . b. Dynflex, Pecora Corp. c. Dynatred, Pecora Corp. d. Dynatrol II, Pecora Corp. e. Sikaflex 2cn NS, Sika Corp. f. Sonolastic NP 2, Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. g. Dymeric, Tremco Inc. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: a. Isoflex 880 GB, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc. b. Isoflex 881, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc. c. Vulkem 921, Mameco International Inc. d. Sikaflex--15LM, Sika Corp. 3. ':4" .,' FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 9 95-052/12-95 . A. Clean off excess fiII materials and se'alants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. 3.05 CLEANING D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately at;ter sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that' discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. C. InstaII sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capa~ility. InstaII sealants at the same time joint fillers are instaIIed. B. InstaII joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of instaIIed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part I, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. . . A. 3.04 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS 1. Completely fill voids. and cavities fonned by openings, fonning materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. C. Install' fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: B. _ Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration frrestop systems. After installingfi}l materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer's' instaIIation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION. FlRESTOPS 3.03 . . FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 10 . END OF SECTION 07270 . . Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce frrestopping complying with specified requirements. 95-052/12-95 B. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - I 95~052/l2-95 . 1. Roofing system shall comply with FM Class 1-90 for wind-uplift resistance. B. FM'Listing: Provide modified bitumen sheet roofing system and component materials that have been evaluated by Factory Mutual System. for fire spread, wind uplift, and. hail damage and that are listed in "Factory Mutual Approval Guide" for Class 1 construction. A. General: Install modified bituminous sheet roofing to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather, without failure. 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS B. Thermal Resistance (R-value) is the reciprocal of thermal conductance (C-value) which is . the rate of heat flow through a material of the thickness indicated. Thermal resistance (R- value) is expressed by the temperature di~ference in degrees F (Kelvins) between the two exposed faces required to cause 1 Btu to flow through 1 sq. ft. (1 watt to flow through I sq. m) per hour at the mean temperature indicated. A. Roofmg Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definitions of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS . Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for treated wood nailers, curbs, and wood cants. Division 7 Section "Flashing and:Sheet Metal" for metal counter flashings. . Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties and Accessories" for prefabricated curb units. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Systems" for roof drains. .4. 2. 3. . 1. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Modified bituminous sheet with -mineral granule surfacing. 2. Roof insulation. 3. . Roofing asphalt. 4. Temporary roofing. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary . Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections; apply to this Section.. 1.01 RELA TED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING SEcnON 07527 . . SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 2 95-052/12-95 C. Preapplication Roofing Conference: Approximately 2 weeks before scheduled commencement of modified bitumen sheet roofing instaIIation and associated work, meet at Project site with Installer, instaIIer of each component of associated work, instaIIers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofmg work, instaIIers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing that must precede or foIIow roofing work (including mechanical work if any), Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, test agencies, and governing authorities. I. InstaIIer's Field. Supervision: Require InstaIIer to maintain a fuII-time supervisor/foreman on job site during times that modified bituminous sheet roofing work is in progress and who is experienced in installation of roofing systems similar to type and scope required for this Project. B. InstaIIer Qualifications: Engage an experienced InstaIIer (Roofer) who is certified by modified bituminous sheet roofing system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's roofing materials. . A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain primary products, including each type of roofing sheet, bitumen, membrane flashings, and vapor retarder (if any), from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.06 D. Installer Certification: Submit written certification from manufacturer of modified bituminous sheet roofing system certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer to install specified roofing system. Provide copy of certification to Architect before award of roofing work. 1. 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) square samples of each color modified, bituminous, mineral-surface cap sheets to be exposed as finished roof surface. C. Samples of the following: 1. For asphalt bitumen, provide label on each container or certification with each load of bulk bitumen, indicating flash point (FP), finished blowing temperature (FBT), softening point (SP), and equiviscous temperature (EVn. B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.05 SUBMITTALS . Provide roof-covering materials bearing FM approval marking on bundle, package, or container, indicating that material has been subjected to FM's examination and follow-up inspection service. 2. . 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including but not necessarily limited to the following: a. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Review roofmg system requirements (drawings, specifications, and other contract documents). c. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. d. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures. e. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing (if not a mandatory requirement). Record (Contractor) discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference. 2. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle roofmg sheets in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place to ensure no possibility of significant moisture pickup. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surface. B. . c. Do not leave unused felts and other sheet materials on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather or other moisture sources. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck. 1.08 PROJECT CONDInONS A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit unit of Work to be installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of modified bituminous sheet roofing with related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that roof assemblies, including roof accessories, flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion, and adjacent construction activity. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit executed copy of roofing manufacturer's standard Limited Service Warranty agreement including flashing endorsement, signed by an authorized representative of modified bitumen sheet roofing system manufacturer, on form that was published with product literature as of date of Contract Documents, for the following period of time: . 95-052/12-95 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 3 1. 15 years after date of Substantial Completion. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF INSULA nON A. Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Meeting the requirements of ASTM C 578-87a Type 1 EPS. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cellofoam. b. W.R. Grace, Insulperm. c. Thermosafe d. ACCU-R 2.02 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING SYSTEM A. Modified Bituminous Sheet, General: I. Base Bid: a. Firestone L-MS34-M. 2. Other Manufacturers: a. GAF-Ruberoid b. Nord Bitumi - M-AF-1519. c. Architect approved equal prior to Bid. 2.03 MEMBRANE (4-plys) . A. Base sheet: Firestone MB - Mechanically attached. B. Middle Ply: Firestone SBS Premium base sheet - hot mopped to previous ply. C. Top Ply: Firestone SBS Glass membrane - hot mopped to previous ply. D. Base Ply Flashing: 1. Description: Flashing membrane - Firestone SBS (polyester reinforced) membrane. 2. Components: Reinforcement shall be polyester. Elastomeric asphalt shall be a mix of selected bitumen and SBS polymer. 2.04 FASTENERS Note: Contact manufacturer's technical department for minimum fastener securement for various deck types and required pullout testing. A. Wood: Roofmg nails of galvanized steel, long enough to penetrate the wood by at least 3/4 inch on flashings and parapet walls. B. Masonry 95-052/12-95 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 4 . SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFlNG 07527 - 5 95-052/12-95 . A. Asphalt shall be certified in full compliance with the requirements of Type Ill, or Type . IV listed in Table 1, ASTM D-312. Each container, or bulk, shipping ticket shall indicate the equiviscous temperature (EVT), the fmi~red blowing temperature (FBT), and the flash point. 2.08 ASPHALT , I. Primer shall meet ASTM D41. 2. Primer shall be applied on all dissimilar materials except insulation. 3. Description: Black bituminous liquid. 4. Composition: Asphalt and volatile solvents. A. f,\sphalt Primer 2.07 PRIMER C. Cant strips and preformed edge strips shall be Perlite or approved noncombustible material forming 3 112 inch x 45 degree cant strips and I 5/8 inch.x 18 inch tapered edge strip to receive roofing sheet courses and lift edge above main roofing surface. Material is to be prefabricated by manufacturers who will provide setting drawings to installer. B. . A. Gussets and crickets shall be built-up of approved rigid insulating material such as the basic insulating material, Perlite, or other approved insulating material suitable for fabricating to meet the job conditions. In no case shall gussets and . crickets slope less than 1/2"/ft., as required by field condition; maximum thickness shall be 3/4". 2.06' GUSSETS, CRICKETS AND CANTS 1. Blocking shall be not less than Construction Grade, Southern Pine. A. All nailers ana blocking material to be free of de~ay or checks, and pressure treated wi~h water-borne preservatives for aboveground use, A WPB LP-2. Minimum size 2X6, or, to match insulation thickness X 6" nominal. 2.05 WOOD BLOCKING I. The same brand fastener;is tobe.used throughout the work. 2. Number .('}f fasteners'. and layout.. .will be as recommended by the membrane/insulation manufacturer:and as per FM Approval Guide for 1-90 wind uplift. . 3. Length of fastener shall be determined 9Y the thickness of the decking and any fill, and will vary with the thickness of the insulation. Fasteners shall be of appropriate length to achieve a minimum of I inch penetration. Lightweight Concrete D. Steel C. . . SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 6 95-052/12-95 E. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen according to EVT Method as recommended by NRCA. Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid-holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (plus 25 deg F (14 deg C), at point of application) more than 1 hour prior to time of application. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature, EVT, and fire-safe handling temperature of bitumen either by information from manufacturer or by suitable tests. Do not exceed recommended temperature limits during bitumen heating. Do not heat bitumen to a temperature higher than 25 deg F (14 deg C) below flash point. Discard bitumen that has been held at temperature exceeding D. Coordinate installing roofing system components so that insulation and roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed overnight. Provide cut offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed ply sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. Remove cut offs immediately before resuming work. C. Insurance/Code Compliance: Where required, install and test modified bitumen sheet roofing system to comply with governing regulations and specified insurance requirements. B. Protect other work from spillage of modified bitumen roofing materials, and prevent liquid materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of modified bituminous sheet roofing system work. . Cooperate with inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing modified bitumen sheet roofing system. A. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS I. Test concrete substrate for excessive moisture by pouring I pint (0.5 L) of hot bitumen at 400 deg F (204 deg C) or EVT on deck at start of each day's work and at start of each roof area or plane. Do not proceed with roofing work if test sample foams or can be easily and cleanly stripped after cooling--then substrate is too wet. A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive modified bitumen sheet roofing system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION C. Pitch Pockets: construct and install metal pitch pocket as per details assuring minimum 2 inch clearance around penetrations and fully welded or hemmed seams. B. Traffic Topping: shall be the same as top ply. . Expansion Joint Covers: see Section 077 10. A. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS .";-_<';' ". C._ ;;,' ,.. ~~- :.\....~ :':~;, "~-:-.~ ~,-:t ~ I;. I SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 7 95-052/12-95 . D. Base Sheet: Install one lapped course of base sheet. Attach to substrate as recommended by Roofing Manufacturer. C. Cant StripS/Tapered Edge Strips: Install preformed 45-degree cant strips at junctures of modified bituminous sheet roofing system membrane with vertical surface. Provide preformed, tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. 8.' Nailing, General: Comply with governing regulations, insurance requirements, roofing materials manufacturer's recommendations, and recognized industry standards, but n~t less than one nail per 1.5 sq. ft. (0.14 sq. m) of roofing area. A. Shingling Plies: Install membrane with ply sheets shingled uniformly to achieve required number of membrane plies throughout. Shingle in. proper direction to shed water on each large area ofroofing,where slope is significant (over 1/2 inch per foot (1 :25)). 3.04 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION E. Insulation shall have minimum R-IO Value over entire surface of roof. D. If cured deck is exposed to rainfall before membrane has been installed, a period of 24 hours (after last rainfall) must elapse oefore proceeding with membrane installation. A minimum of-2" of lightweight concrete shall be placed over the insulation board and screeded to an even surface to receive the roofing memb~ane. C. . B. Insulation board shall be placed in the slurry with joints staggered' in a brick-like pattern. All boards shall be tightly butted together and placed in a manner that provides full contact of slurry to board, causing the slurry to enter the keying openings of the insulation board. A. General: Comply with insulation ,manufacturer's instructions and' re~ommendations for the handling, installation, and bonding or anchorage of ins.ula~jonto substrate. 3.03 INSTALLING INSULATION H. Cutoffs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete . ' work, including ply sheets and an)'tnstilation. Provide temporary covering of two plies .of No. 15 roofmg felt set in full moppings of hot bitumen; remove at beginning of next day's work. . G. . Substrate Joint Penetrations: Prevent bitumen from penetrating substrate joints, entering 'building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. Where mopping is applied directly to substrate, tape substrate joints or, where steep asphalt is used, hold asphalt back} inches (50 mm) from both sides of the joint. . . fmished blowing temperature (FBT) for more than 3 hours. Keep kettle lid closed except when adding bitumen. F. Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping, apply bitumen at the rate of 15-30 lb of asphalt per roof square (1.22 kg of asphalt per sq. m). . SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 8 95-052/12-95 A. Protect roofing during remainder of construction period. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing and prepare a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage found. 3.07 PROTECTING ROOFING 1. Color Change: Provide cap sheet of color contrasting with roofing surface as selected by Architect from available sources. A. Cap Sheet Walkways: In pathways and widths as indicated, install a cap sheet course, set in a minimum mopping of same bitumen use in ply-sheet courses. Confine mopping to surface under cap sheets. Cut sheets in 10 feet (3 m) maximum lengths, and install by mop-and-flop method where possible, with butt joints. 3.06 ROOF WALKWAYS E. Counter-Flashings: Counter-flashings, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work to be coordinated with modified bitumen roofing work are specified in other Sections. . Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim that adjoins roofing. Do not seal or bond membrane or modified bituminous flashing or stripping to metal flanges over 36 inches (900 mm) in length. D. C. Roof Drains: Set 30 x 30 inch (750 x 750 mm) lead flashing sheet in bed of roofing cement on completed modified bituminous roofmg sheet. Cover lead sheet with modified bituminous stripping, with stripping extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) beyond edge of lead flashing onto roof membrane. Clamp roof membrane, lead flashing, and stripping into roof drain clamping ring. B. Install modified bituminous stripping where metal flanges are set on roofing. Install one ply of modified bituminous stripping in a continuous mopping of Type III asphalt and extend stripping a minimum of 6 inches (I 50 mm) out onto the roof membrane. A. Install modified bituminous flashing at cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof. Install one ply ,of flashing sheet material by mopping substrate and back of flashing sheet with Type III asphalt and embedding flashing solidly against substrate. Extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) onto modified bituminous sheet roofing. 3.05 MEMBRANE FLASHING AND STRIPPING F. Set-On Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set on modified bituminous sheet roofing, set metal flanges in a bed of roofing cement and seal penetration of membrane with bead of roofing cement to prevent flow of bitumen from membrane. . Interply Sheets: Install the number and type(s) of ply sheets, lapped amount indicated to form a continuous, uniform membrane with continuous bitumen moppings between sheets so that ply sheets do not touch. E. L .t_-, SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 9 .' END OF SECTION 07527 Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time of above inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. 95-052/ I 2-95 . . B. . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - I 95-052/12-95 . C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details. .. B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.04 . SUBMITTALS 1. Wind Zone 2: Wind pressures of 31 to 45 psf (1.48 to 2.15 kPa). B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges'tocomply with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone: A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Division 4 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified as part of masonry work. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants. , Division 7 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofmg accessories installed integral with roofing membrane as part of roofing-system work. 3. 4. . 2. 1. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Roof-drainage systems. 2. Exposed trim, gravel stops, 'and fasciae. 3. Metal flashing. 4. Reglets. A.This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1.02 ' SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. , 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS, PART 1 - GENERAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 . / I . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 95-052/12-95 A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS . Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Construct mockups for the following type of sheet metal flashing and trim: a. Gutters and downspouts. b. Conductor heads. c. Scuppers. d. Exposed trim, gravel stops. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 5. 6. 3. 4. 2. 1. B. Mockups: Prior to installing sheet metal flashing and trim, construct mockups indicated to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. A. InstaIIer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1. 8-inch- (200-mm-) square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. . Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the fuII range of variations expected. D. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Q7620 - 3 95-052/12-95 . C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and. containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for IS-mil (O.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. . B. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. ' 'A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES 1. Fry Reglet Corporation. E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.6 mm) thick. D. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before countertlashing to prevent wind uplift of the countertlashing lower edge. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. (See drawings for type of reglet.) . C. B. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials. ,(See drawings for type of reglet.) . A. ' General: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing " indicated. 2.02 REG LETS ,B. ' Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526,G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275), commercial quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275), lock-forming quality, .hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch (1:0 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Anodized Aluminum Sheet ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5005-HI4, with a minimum thickness of 0.050 inch (1.2 mm). A. Aluminum: AUoy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher fortype of use and fmish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below: 2.0 1 METALS . PART 2 - PRODUCTS . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4 95-052/12-95 F. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet- type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. . A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. F ABRICA TION, GENERAL 2.04 K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 1. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for instaIlation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. I. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick black polyethylene film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154. H. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square (0.244 kg/sq. m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, Type I, Style 1 b. G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." . Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. D. " ..' SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5 95-052/12-95 . H. Roof-Drain /Pipe Penetrations Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick. G.Conductor Heads: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. F. Downspouts: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0516 inch (1.3 mm) thick. (Phosphate Treated.) E. Gutters with Girth 26 to 30 Inches (660 to 760 mm): Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick. (Phosphate Treated.) -D. Gutters with Girth 21 to 25 Inches (530 to 640 mm): Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick. (Phosphate Treated.) Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches (4 I 0 to 510 mm): Fabricate from the following material: C. . 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. (Phosphate Treated.) B. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches (380 mm): Fabricate from'the following material: A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. 2.05 SHEET METAL FABRICAnONS 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. J. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from. same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. I. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. H. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. -' . Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. G. . . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 6 95-052/12-95 B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-C22A41 (Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1. . General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations. A. 2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES N. Roof Expansion-Joint Cover: See Section 07710. M. Equipment Support Flashing: Roofing Manufacturer's Standard Material (See Section 07710). 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. (Phosphate Treated.) L. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material: I. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch (0.8 mm) thick. K. Countertlashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick. J. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick. . Scuppers: Fabricate from the following material: I. 1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft. (1.6 mm thick), hard tempered. . l, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 7 95-052/12-95 . J. . Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof'in the most efficient manner>' cOordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep- sloped roofs with roofing installation. I. Install reglets to receive countertlashing according to the drawings. I. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. 2. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofmg cement where required for waterproof performance. H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and, seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. . Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant . F. 1. Do not solder the following metals: a. Aluminum. b. Coil-coated galvanized steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely, Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edgesofsheets to he.soldered to a width of l-li2 iriches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work; E. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (6 I 0 mm) of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed withinjoints). D. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal. flaShings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. C. hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. . . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 8 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 07620 B. Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. L. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing instaIIation with roofing and instaIIation of items penetrating roof. InstaII flashing as foIIows: . Equipment Flashing: Coordinate equipment flashing installation with roofing installation. K. MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIAL TIES 07710 - 1 95-052/12-95 . 1. Coping: 8 inches (200 mm) long. D. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish'required, prepared on samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. Provide samples of not less than the following sizes: C. Shop drawings indicating layout, joining, profiles, accessories, anchorages, flashing connections, and relationship to supporting structure and to adjoining roof and wall construction. B. Product data including manufacturer's technical data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each product specified. Include data substantiating that materials and performance comply with requirements. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. SUBMIITALS 1.03 . 1. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for the following Work: a. Metal flashing and counter flashing. b. Scuppers, gutters, and downspouts. 2. Roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane are specified in roofing system Sections as roofing work. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Aluminum coping. 2. Elastic bellows-type roof expansion joint cover. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, 'including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES SECTION 07710 . . MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Thickness of Coping: 0.063 inch (1.6 rom). 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Rapid-Loc Coping; Atas Aluminum Corp. b. Splice-Lock Coping Cover System; Cheney Flashing Co. c. Permasnap Coping; W. P. Hickman Co. d. Snap-Lok Coping; MM Systems Corp. e. Pac-Loc Coping; Petersen Aluminum Corp. A. Interlocking Multi-Part Coping System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of coping formed from aluminum sheet to profile and of thickness indicated, minimum nominal 0.0276-inch (0.7-mm) thick, zinc-coated steel anchor plate or cleat located at coping joint, and formed aluminum gutter chair or gutter/splice plate or compression pad/gutter; with prefabricated inside and outside comers, miters welded before finishing; without exposed fasteners. 2.03 ALUMINUM COPING C. Foam Rubber Seal: Manufacturer's standard foam. B. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. . Concealed Fasteners: Same metal as item fastened or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. A. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated but with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) for 5005-HI5. 2.01 MA TERlALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Coordinate work of this Section with adjoining work for proper sequencing of each instaIIation to ensure best possible weather resistance and protection of inaterials and finishes against damage. 1.05 JOB CONDInONS B. Industry Standards: Provide products which comply with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," except as otherwise indicated. 1. Accepted by Factory Mutual for Zone 2 use indicated. . A. Insurance Requirements: Provide fascia systems complying with Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-49 "Perimeter Flashing" requirements in either of the following categories and wind zones. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.04 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIAL TIES 07710 - 3 .' .-", 95-052/12-95 . B. Class II Clear Anodized Finish: AA-C22A31 (medium matte etched finish with minimum O.4-mii (0.01 mm) thick anodic coating). A. General: Comply with AMP 501 "Finishes for Aluminum" and AMP 505 "Applied Coatings" for fmish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. For components which are assembled or welded in factory, apply finish after fabrication is completed. 2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES B. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate running lengths to allow controlled expansion not only for movement of metal components in relationship to one another but also to adjoining dissimilar materials, including flashing and roofing membrane materials, in a manner sufficient to prevent water leakage, deformation or damage. General: Provide items designed and fal?ricated to fit applications indicated and to perform optimally with respect to weather resistance, water tightness, durability, strength, and uniform appearance. A. . 2.05 F ABRICA TION 1. Elastic Sheet: EPDM, 60 mils (1.5 mm). 2. Elastic Sheet Width: 5 to 6 inches (1251'0 150 rom) between flanges. 3. Metal Flanges: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, minimum O.0149-inch (OA-mm) thickness. _ 4. Mortar Flanges: Where flanges are indicated for embedment in concrete or mortar, provide manufacturer's standard perforated mortar flanges. 5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Expansion Joint Shields; Celotex Corp. b. Expand-O-Flash; Manville Sales Corp. c. Rufseal; MM Systems Corp. d. Pate Expansion Joint Cover; The Pate Co. B. Metal-Flanged Elastic-Sheet Joint System: Provide units consisting of exposed elastic sheet over foam bellows, securely anchored'at both edges to 3 to 4 inch (75 to 100 mm) ~ide sheet metal nailing flanges, either plain or angle-formed to fit curbs as required. Bellows insulated from below with adhesively-applied, closed-cell, flexible, rubber or , plastic insulation notIess than 5/16 inch (8 mm) thick, adhered to elastic sheet. A. General: Provide units fabricated specifically for required applications (roof to roof, roof to wall, curb mounted). Provide prefabricated comer units, joint intersection units, splicing units, adhesives, coatings, and other .' components as recommended by joint unit manufacturer for a complete iIistalhition. ' ELASTIC, BELLOWS-TYPE EXPANSION JOINT COVERS . 2.04 . MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710.4 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 07710 B. Protection: Provide protective measures as required to ensure that work of this Section will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. A. Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch-up damaged metal coatings. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are installed in contact with dissimilar metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation as recommended by aluminum producer. A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instalIation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive work of this Section, with vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, flashing, and wall construction; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor products included in this Section securely to structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as welI as inward and outward loading pressures. . INSTALLATION 3.01 PART 3 - EXECUTION ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 1 95-052/12-95 . D. Coordinatioll Drawings: Submit coordipation drawings for items interfacing with or supporting mechanical or electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, or conduit. Indicate C. Shop drawings showing fabrication ,and installation of each roof accessory specified including fully dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. Also show layout, anchorage details, rough-in requirements, and conditions on the roof or for other accessories. B. Product data for each type of product specified. Submit manufacturer's detailed technical ,product data, installation instructions and recommendations, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division Specification Sections. Division 5 Sections for ladders and support framing. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof deck and nailers. Division 7 Section for roofing types and roofing accessories included as part of roofing Work. Division 7 Section "Roof Expansion Assemblies", for roof expansion joint covers. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for fascia, coping, gravel stops, and roof expansion joint covers. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for metal flashing, valIeys, gutters, and downspouts. New Division 7 Section "Plastic Unit Skylights" for smalI individual skylights. Division 8 Section "Plastic Glazing" for plastic glazing materials. Division 15 Section "Power Ventilators" for power roof ventilators. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 7. 8. 9. 6. 4. 5. . 1. 2. 3. B. Related Sections: The folIowing Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Prefabricated curb and equipment support units. 2. Roof hatches. A. This Section includes the following: . I .02 SUMMARY . A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELA TED DOCUMENTS ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 07720 PART 1 - GENERAL . . ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Polycarbonate: Thermoformable, monolithic polycarbonate sheets manufactured by the extrusion process, burglar-resistance rated per UL 972 with average impact strength of 16 ft-lb/inch (850 J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A (Izod). D. Plastic Sheets: Except where additional thickness is required for light transmittances, provide glazing plastic sheet thickness required for 40-lbt/sq. ft. (1.9 kPa) external loading and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95 kPa) internal loading pressures as recommended by the manufacturer for the size and shape indicated. C. Commercial-Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M) with G90 (Z275) coating complying with ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M). B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) alloy 6063-T52 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements. Mill finish, unless indicated otherwise. A. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) for Alclad alloy 3005H25 or alloy and temper required to suit forming operations with mill finish, unless indicated otherwise. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL . Prefabricated Curb and Equipment Support Units: a. Curbs, Inc. b. Custom Curb, Inc. c. The Pate Co. d. Roof Products and Systems Corp. e. ThyCurb Div.lThyBar Corp. Roof Hatches: a. BiIco Co. b. MiIcor, Inc. c. Wasco Products, Inc. 2. 1. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap-flashing to coordinate with type of roofmg indicated. 2. NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installation of units. 3. NFPA 204M for smoke-and-heat vent design constraints, operation, and location. A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE . dimensions and locations of items provided under this Section, together with relationships and methods of attachment to adjacent construction and to mechanical or electrical items. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 3 95-052/12-95 . }- A. General: Comply with loading and strength requirements as indicated where units support other work. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or shop drawings of equipment to be supported. 2.04 PREFABRICATED CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS C. Class I, Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-C22A41 (Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil (0.02 mm)) complying with AAMA 607.1. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system for designating aluminum finishes established by the Aluminum Association: , A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations on applying and designating finishes. 2.03 FINISHES M. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, and, A. . L. K. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. 1. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for IS-mil (0.4 mm) dry film thickness per coating. I. . Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl chloride, or block design of sponge neoprene. . 1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteneFs affords access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads. H. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as-recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. G. Security Grilles: See Division 15 Specifications. F. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for above-ground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) thick. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated. E. . . ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 4 95-052/12-95 . Non Security Scuttle (3' 0" x 2' _6") Furnish and install where indicated on plans metal roof scuttle Type GS, as manufactured by The BiIco Company. Insulation shall be glass fiber 1" (25.4 mm) in thickness, fully covered and protected by a metal liner. Cover shall be equipped with a clear acrylic dome and have provisions for the removal of condensation. Curb shaH be 24" in height. It shaH be formed with a 3 1/2" flange with holes provided for securing to the roof deck. Curb shall be equipped with an integral metal cap flashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, full welded at the comers for weathertightness. Capflashing shall e equipped with the Bilclip flashing system, including stamped tabs and Pak-Rope. Insulation on the exterior of the curb shall be rigid fiberboard 1" in thickness. Scuttle shall be completely assembled with heavy pintle hinges, positive snap latch with turn handles and padlock hasps inside and outside and a mechanically retained thermoplastic rubber gasket. compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes shall be provided for smooth, easy and controlled door operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. Operation shaH not be affected by temperature. Cover shall be equipped with an automatic hold-open arm complete with red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release and one-hand control of the cover to its closed and latched position. All hardware shaH be zinc plated and chromate sealed and factory finish shall be aluminum. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of five years. Manufacturer standard safety post shall be included. 1. B. Type: Single-leaf personnel access. A. General: Fabricate units to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9 kPa) external loading and 20- lbf/sq. ft. (0.95 kPa) internal loading pressure. Frame with 9-inch (225 mm) high, integral-curb, double-wall construction with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) insulation, cant strips and cap flashing (roofing countertlashing), with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints. Provide double-wall cover (lid) construction with 1 inch insulation core. Provide gasketing and equip corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold-open devices, interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles. 2.05 ROOF HATCHES . Fabricate of structural-quality, hot-dip galvanized or galvalume sheet steel, factory-primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints. Provide complete with cant strips and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs, coordinate with thickness of insulation and roof flashing as indicated, tapered as necessary to compensate for roof deck slopes of 1/4 inch per foot (1 :48) and less. Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units of minimum 0.0747-inch (1.9-mm) thick metal, and to minimum height of 24 inches or as noted on the drawings. 3. 2. 1. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 5 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 07720 A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Operational Units: Test operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. E. . D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as countertlashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. C. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal. B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in 'contact with incomp~tible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other pef!Tlanent separation. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing and flashing, as required, to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supportingstruct\JraI substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses, as well as inward and outward loading pressures. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION . PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS 07810 - I 95-052/12-95 . 1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F (343 deg C) or greater when tested per ASTM D 1929 on plastic sheets in the thickness intended for use. A. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide plastic sheets identical to those tested for the following fire-test-response characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify plastic sheets with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE D. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units or a representative section of each type of skylight indicated for each color, texture, shape, and sizes specified. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of skylights, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. B. Product data for each type of skylight specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, finishes, and glazing light transmission and thermal characteristics. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of Contraci and Division 1 Specification Sections. A. . 1.03 SUBMITTALS C. Refer to roofing system Sections for roofing accessories to be built into the roofing system to accommodate Work of this Section. 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood curbs and nailers. 2. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs, and roof hatches. 3. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet. Metal" for metal flashing for skylights. B. 'Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: A, This Section iI?-cludes plastic unit skylights. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this, Section. . ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS . SECTION 07810 . PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS 07810 - 2 95-052/12-95 A. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) for Alclad alloy 3005-H25 or alloy and temper required to suit forming operations and finish requirements. Mill finish unless indicated otherwise. 2.02 MATERIALS 1. Exarc Skylights, Inc. 2. HiIIsdale Industries, Inc. 3. Naturalite/EPI Skylight Systems. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 1. Warranty Period for Acrylic: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion against yeIlowing. 2. Warranty Period for Polycarbonate: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion against breakage. Plastic Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace work that has or develops defects in the plastic. "Defects" is defined as abnormal aging or deterioration. c. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Skylight Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace work that exhibits defects in materials or workmanship and guaranteeing weathertight and leak-free performance. "Defects" is defined as uncontroIled leakage of water and abnormal aging or deterioration. A. General: Warranties specified in this Section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.05 WARRANTY . Smoke density of 75 or less when tested per ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets in the thickness intended for use. Relative-Burning Characteristics: As follows, when tested per ASTM D 635: a. Acrylic: Burning rate of 2.5 inches (64 mm) per minute or less when tested on plastic glazing indicated below with a nominal thickness of 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) or the thickness intended for use. b. Polycarbonate: Burning extent of 1 inch (25 mm) or less when tested on plastic glazing indicated below with a nominal thickness of 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) or the thickness intended for use. 3. 2. PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS 07810 - 3 95-052/12-95 . B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system for designating aluminum finishes established by the Aluminum Association. A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" recommendations for application and designations of finishes. 2.03 FINISHES J. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos-fibrated, asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. I. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces. ASTM C 920; TypeS; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. H. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers; compounded for 15-mil (0.4 mm) dry film thickness per coating. G. . 1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads. F. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. E. Security Grilles: As indicated on plans. D. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber board of thicknesses indicated. 1. Acrylic: ASTM D 4802; thennoformable, cast or continuous-cast acrylic (methacrylate), Category C-1 or C-2, Type UV A (formulated with .ultraviolet absorber), with Finish 1 (smooth or polished), unles~ otherwise indicated. 2. Polycarbonate: Thermoformable,.monoIithic polycarbonate sheets manufactured by the extrusion process, UV resistant, burglar resistance rated per UL 972 with average .impact strength of 12 to 16 ft-lb/inch (638 to 850 J/m) of width when tested according toASTM D 256, Test Method A (Izod). C. Plastic Sheets: Monolithic, formable, transparent (colorless and tinted) or translucent (white) sheets with good weather and impact resistance. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) alloy 6063-T52 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements. Mill finish unless indicated otherwise. B. . . PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS 07810 - 4 95-052/12-95 A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive skylight units. Coordinate with installation of vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing, and flashing as required to assure that each element of the work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as weIl as inward and outward loading pressures. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION . Sheet Thicknesses: Provide glazing plastic sheet thickness required for 40 Ibf/sq. ft. (1.9 kPa) positive (external) loading and 20 Ibf/sq. ft. (0.95 kPa) negative or uplift (internal) loading as recommended by the skylight manufacturer for unit size and shape. Profile: Pyramid, 30 degree slope, over dome, 25 % rise. a. Outer Glazing Color; Colorless, transparent acrylic, 92 percent visible light transmittance. b. Inner Glazing Color: Colorless, transparent acrylic, 92 percent visible light transmittance. ' Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard glazing system of EPDM or neoprene, closed-ceIl sponge neoprene, or EPDM, or of partially vulcanized butyl tape or liquid-applied elastomeric sealant. 3. 2. 1. F. Glazing: Thermoformed acrylic. E. Shape and Size: As indicated. D. Thermal Break: Fabricate skylight units with thermal barrier separating interior metal framing from materials exposed to outside temperature. C. Condensation Control: Fabricate skylight units with integral internal gutters and nonclogging weeps to coIlect and dispose of condensation. 1. Height: 24 inches (600 mm) above roofing. B. Curb: Self-flashing, self-supporting double-wall, formed or extruded (or combination) aluminum curb, minimum 0.040-inch (1.0- mm) wall thickness, enclosing minimum 1- inch (25-mm) glass-fiber board (or equivalent) insulation and with minimum 3-inch (75- mm) roof flanges, with welded or sealed mechanical joints at comers. A. General: Factory-assembled unit consisting of plastic glazing (pyramid over dome), extruded aluminum glazing retainer, gasketing, inner frame designed to mount on separate curb, and self-contained flashing. 2.04 PLASTIC SKYLIGHT UNITS . Class I, Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-C22A41 (Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil (0.02 mm)) complying with AAMA 607.1. C. PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS 07810 - 5 95-052/12-95 . , " . END OF SECTION 07810 B. Clean and polish plastic skylight units, inside and out, not more than 5 days prior to date of substantial completion. A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION E. Operational Units: Test~operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of the skylight, install to provide an adequate waterproof overlap with roofmg or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be. left open. for ventilation. C. Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide another permanent separation. B. . JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - I 95-052/12-95 . 1. Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PB" for sealing system joints. 2. Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PM" for sealing system joints. 3. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for sealing joints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. e. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. e. Joints on underside of precast and planks. f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. g. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. h. Other joints as indicated. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. 3. . 2. 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces andnontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below: A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings arid general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification -Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 0790 I . . JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. C. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants for compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated below: B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE E. Field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrate acceptable adhesion to joint substrates. D. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. . Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division Specification Sections. 1.04 SUBMITTALS B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates. A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS . Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for through-penetration firestopping systems. Division 8 "Glass and Glazing" for sealants used in glazing. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panels" for sealing edge moldings at perimeter of acoustical ceilings. Division 9 Section "Tile" for sealing tile joints. 8. 7. 4. 5. 6. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 3 I. Joints in field-constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are i~dicated to receive elastom.~ric:joint sealants specified in this Section. 95-052/12-95 . E. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution: Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Conduct field tests for each application .indicated below: a.. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below: a. Install joint sealants in 60 inches (1500 mm) joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to the other followed by 2 vertical cuts approximately 2 inches (50 mm) long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2-inch (50-mm) cuts. Place a mark I inch (25 mm) from top of 2-inch (50-mm) piece. c. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch (50-mm) piece of sealant just above I-inch (25-mm) mark; pull firmly down at a 90-degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 6. 5. . 4. .., -'. 1. 2. D. Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: Submit not less than 9 pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the Work.,. Inv,estigate materials- failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain joint sealan't manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers. Testing will ,not be required when joint sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint preparation data required above that are acceptable to Architect and are bas~d on previous' testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. . 2. 3. 4. 5. . JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 4 95-052/12-95 A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 2 I nor more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. . SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 1.08 C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. I. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 3. When joint substrates are wet. A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. . Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. A. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 5 95-052/12-95 . I. Acoustical Sealant: a. "SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant," United States Gypsum Co. b. "AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant," Pecora Corp. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. "BA-98," Pecora Corp. b. "Tremco Acoustical Se~lant," Tremco, Inc. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. B. p' I. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90. A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 2.04 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: a. "AC-20," Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. c. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc. Silicone-Emulsion Sealant: a. "Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant," Dow Corning Corp. 2. . 1. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. l B. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product. complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint movement of not. more ~han 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. A. Gene~al: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, non sag, mildew-resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage ch?1ge in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 2.03 LA TEX JOINT SEALANTS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet. B. . . JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 6 95-052/12-95 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with instaIlation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. . Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. B. A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from and field tests. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 1. Open-cell polyurethane foam. 2. Closed-ceIl polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state. 3. Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf (40 kg/cu. m) and tensile strength of 35 psi (240 kPa) per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than 0.02 glcc per ASTM C 1083. 4. Any material indicated above. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: . A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstammg; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. JOINT SEALANT BACKING 2.05 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 7 95-052/12-95 . E. Installation Qf Sealants: Install sealants by pr~)Ven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. A. . 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint 'sealant manufacturer based on preconstruct ion joint 'sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methodno produce a clean" sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond' with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Remove laitanceand foim release agents from concrete. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glaZed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. 4. 3. 2. . . JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 8 95-052/12-95 A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and instaIIations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. . PROTECTION 3.05 A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to JOints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.04 CLEANING G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with sealant manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials, and tools that produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. . joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are instaIIed. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 9 95-052/1 2-95 . . 1. W. R. Meadows, Dualthane. 2. Pecora, Dynaltrol 11. 3. Tremco, Dymeric Plus. G. Products: I. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, and brick. F. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. E. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). D. Class: 25. C. Grade: NS (nonsag). B. Type: M (multi component). A. Base Polymer: Urethane. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT - NON-SECURITY AREAS . . JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 10 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 0790 I I. Pecora, DynaPoxy EP- I 200. F. Products: E, Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M. D. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). C. Grade: NS (nonsag). B. Type: M (multicomponent). . Base Polymer: Urethane. A. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT - SECURITY AREAS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 10 - I 95-052/12-95 . E. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding li~itations of labeled assem'blies, submit certification of a testing agency 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and instaUation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and instaUation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. SUBMITTALS 1.03 . Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into and grouting frames in masonry construction. Division 8 Section "Custom Steel Doors and Frames" for doors manufactured according to the Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association's standards, Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for hollow-core and solid-core wood doors instaUed in steel frames. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in steel doors and sidelights. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames. 4. 5. 6. .., .). 2. 1. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions' of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELA TED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08110 . . STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 95-052/12-95 I. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Ceco Door Products. b. Curries Co. c. Habersham Meta] Products. d. Fenestra Corp. e. Kewanee Corp. f. Mesker Door, Inc. g. Peachtree Doors. h. Stee1craft. i. D & D Specialties, Inc. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS . Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (] OO-mm-) high wood blocking. A void using non vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. c. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished doors and frames. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E ] 52, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. ] .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE . acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 95-052/12-95 . 1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SOl standards: a. Vertical steel stiffeners with insulation. 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80. A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. 2.04 F ASRICA TION D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry." C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. B. . I. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped comers, continuously welded construction for exterior applications and knocked down for field assembly at interior applications. 2. Fabricate frames for interior openings over from 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel sheet. 3. Form exterior frames from 0.0785-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet. A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, according to ANSI/SDl 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 FRAMES B. Door Louvers: Provide louvers accord ing to SDI l11C for interior doors where indicated, with blades or baffles formed of 0.0239-inch- (0.6-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet set into minimum 0.0359-inch- (0.9-mm-) thick steel frame. . 1. Interior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet faces. 2. Exterior Doors: 'Grade III, extra heavy"duty, Model 2A, seamless design, minimum 0.0785-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick galvariized steel sheet faces. A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: DOORS 2.02 . . STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 95-052/12-95 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors: 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. K. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359-inch- (0.9-mm-) thick steel or 0.040-inch- (l-mm-) thick aluminum. J. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." I. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. . Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SOl 107 and ANSI A 115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. H. G. Thennal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. 1. At exterior locations and where indicated. E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SOl 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances: Comply with SOl 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." . Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold-rolled steel sheet. B. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 I 10 - 5 95-052/12-95 . I. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry removable yoke. 2. In lTletal-stud partitions, instalL at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SOl 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.! acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. B. . A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP I to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling). 2.07 STEEL SHEET FINISHES I. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS IT-P-641, Type II. A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces withnonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of.the type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areaS, and apply galvanizing repair-paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780. B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air-dried pri~er specified below immediately' after cleaning and pretreatment. 2.06' GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. FINISHES, GENERAL 2.05 . . STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 08110 B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105. . Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SOl 100. c. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 95-052/12-95 . 1. Comer sections of doors approximately 12 inches (300 mm) square with door faces and edgings representing the typical range of color and grain for each E. Samples for verification in the form and size indicated below: 1. Faces of factory-finished doors with transparent finish. Show the full range of colors available for stained finishes. D. Samples for initial selection in the form of color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the following: 1. For factory-machined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings. C. Shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for veneer matching and factory finishing and other pertinent data. B. Product data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers, and factory-finishing specifications. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. A. . 1.03 SUBMIITALS I. Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware". B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Solid core doors with wood veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing of flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 4. Louvers for flush wood doors. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 . . FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 95-052/12-95 B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by manufacturer, InstaIIer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.07 WARRANTY I. A WI quality standard Section 100-S-11 "Relative Humidity and Moisture Content. " A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to Project's geographical location: . PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.06 B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers as designated on shop drawings, using temporary, removable, or concealed markings. A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors that comply with NFPA 80; are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152; and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. A WI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements. A. Quality Standard: Comply with the foIIowing standard: 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE . species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 95-052/12-95 . 1. Faces and Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-fire-rated doors in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire-resistance rating indicated. B. Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the foIIowing requirements: I. Faces: White Maple, rotary cut. 2. Grade: Premium. 3. Construction: 7 plies. 4. Core: Particleboard core. 5. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneermg. . A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the foIIowing requirements: 2.03 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS Faces: White ash, plain sliced. Grade: Premium. Construction: 7 plies. Core: Particleboard core. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneermg. Hardwood stiles & rails. 1. 2. 3. . 4. 5. 6. A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: " 2.02 EXTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS I. Solid Core Doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b. Buell Door Co. c. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. d. Fenestra Corporation; e. Weyerhauser Co. A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, pro~ide doors by one of the following: 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS a. Solid Core Exterior Doors: Two years. b. Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. Warranty shall be in effect during the foIIowing period of time after date of Substantial Completion. . 1. . FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 95-052/12-95 A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing. 2.07 FACTORY FINISHING C. Exterior Doors: Treat exterior doors at factory with water repellent after manufacturing has been completed. I. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. I. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting. a. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-resistance-rated doors. 2. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings, DHI A 115- W series standards, and hardware templates. a. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory machining. A. Fabricate flush wood doors to comply with following requirements: . F ABRICA TION 2.06 1. See HV AC drawings for location of louvers. 2. Natural Aluminum: Extruded aluminum with natural-anodized finish complying with AA-C22A3I, Class II. (Use at wood doors.) A. Metal Louvers: Size, type, and profile shown and fabricated from the following: 2.05 LOUVERS B. Pairs and Sets: Provide pair matching and set matching for pairs of doors and for doors hung in adjacent sets. I. Book matching. A. Within Door Faces: Provide doors with the following veneer matching: 2.04 VENEER MATCHING a. 5-inch (125-mm) top rail blocking. b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom rail blocking. c. 5-by-I8-inch (125-by-450-mm) lock blocks. d. 5-inch (l25-mm) midrail blocking. . Blocking: Provide composite blocking designed to maintain fire resistance of door but with improved screw-holding capability of same thickness as core and with minimum dimensions as follows: 3. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5 95-052/12-95 . D. I:actory-finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site. 1. fitting Clearances for Non-fire-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, 1/16 inch (1.6 rom) per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80. 3. Bevel non-flre-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 4. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. C. Job-fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or , permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. I. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to requirements of NfPA 80, Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality ~tandard and as indicated. B. . A. Hardware: for installation see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 3.02 INSTALLATION B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ]. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. ' 2. Reject doors with defects.' A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION \. Grade: Premium. 2. finish: A WI System TR-4 conversiol1 varnish. 3. Effect: filled finish. 4.. Sheen: Satin. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect, and sheen. c. . Finish wood doors at factory. B. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION . A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECnON 08211 . 95-052/12-95 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 6 . OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 1 95-052/12-95 . E. Samples of ventilated service door with specified finish. D. UL label certification for oversized fire-rated doors and frames that each assembly has been constructed with materials and methods -equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. C. Shop drawings for special components and installations that are not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data sheets. 1. Provide operating instructions -and maintenance information. 2. Provide information describing fire-release system including electrical rough-in instructions. B. Product data, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead coiling door. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections. SUBMITTALS 1.03 . D. Electrical connections, and fire alarm requirements and accessories are specified In Division 16. C. Provide complete operating door assemblies including door curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanism, hardware, operators, and installation accessories. I. Overhead coiling ventilated service doors. B. Types of overhead coiling doors include the following: A. This Section includes overhead coiling metal doors., 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL OVERHEAD COILING DOORS SECTION 08331 . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Furnish each overhead coiling door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components. 1. Furnish overhead coiling door units by one manufacturer for entire Project. B. Insert and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry to install units. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions to install anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1. See concrete and masonry Sections of these specifications regarding installation of inserts and anchorage devices. C. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce overhead coiling doors to withstand a 20-psf (950 Pa) (85-mph (135 km/hr)) wind-loading pressure. D. Automatic Closing: Provide automatic closing device and governor, operating when activated by temperature rise and melting of 160 deg F (71 deg C) fusible link. Construct governor unit to be inoperative during normal door operations. Design release mechanism to reset easily. E. Provide manufacturer's standard UL-labeled smoke detectors and electromechanical door- holder-release devices where indicated (refer to electrical). PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Atlas RoIl-lite Overhead Doors/Div. of MASCO. 2. Ceco/Windsor Door--Div. of the Ceco Corp. 3. The Cookson Co. 4. Cornell Iron Works Inc. 5. North American. 6. *Overhead Door Corporation, Dallas, TX (Model 610 FN) *Basis of Design 2.02 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION - VENTILATED DOORS A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand required wind loading, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material gauge recommended by door manufacturer for size and type of door required, and as follows: 95-052/12-95 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 0833] - 2 . ~ ..:,..,.... ~ oft OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 0833 I - 3 95-052/12-95 . D. Operator Type: Furnish wall-or bracket~mounted operator units consisting of electric motor, worm-gear drive from motor to reduction gear box, chain or worm-gear drive from reduction box to a gear wheel mounted on' counterbalance shaft, and disconnect-release C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary_ operator. B. Provide hand-operated disconnect. Mount ~isconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include an interlock device to' automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. A. General: Furnish electric operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by grille manufacturer, complete with electric motor and factory-pre-wired motor , controls, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, remote-control stations, and control devices. 2.05 ELECTRICAL MOTOR OPERATIONS A. At all ventilated service doors n~ manual operation device shall be provided. 2.04 MANUAL DOOR OPERA TORS General: Shop-clean and prime ferrous metal surfaces, exposed and unexposed, except tightly joined and lubricated surfaces and galvanized metal, with door manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer. Use prim"er that is compatible with finish painting.' Steel door curtain slats: ShaU be flat profile ventilated with perforated slats. Perforated holes shaU be 1/16" diameter. Structural quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets (18 gauge) complying with ASTM A 446, Grade A, with G90 (ASTM A446M, Grade A with Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M). , Endlocks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets. Provide locks on alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. Bottom Bar: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 xl-I /2 x 1/8 inch (38 x 38 x 3 mm) thick, galvanized. Curtain jamb guides: Guides shall be three (3) structural steel angles with a minimum thickness of 3/16", galvanized after fabrication. Provide slot bolt .holes for track adjustment. Guides shall be equipped with wind lock bars as required to meet the minimum design windload indicated. Brackets: Shall be cold-rolled steel galvanized plates to support the counterbalance, curtain and hood. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing with a minimum of.3/8 inch (10 mm) bolts at not more than 30 inches (750 mm) D.C., unless closer spacing recommended by door manufacturer. Extend wall angles above door opening head to support coil brackets, unless otherwise indicated. Place anchor bolts on interior wall guides so they" are concealed when door is in closed position. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain and a continuous bar for holding wind locks. A. . 2.03 PRIME PAINTING 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. . for manual operation. Provide motor and drive assembly of horsepower and design as determined by manufacturer for size of unit required. . E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, constant-duty, Class A, insulated electric motors with overload protection, sized to move grille in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3 foot per second (0.2 m/s) nor more than 1 foot per second (0.3 mls). Doors shall be able to withstand a standard maximum of up to 125 operation cycles per day. 1. Coordinate wlTlng requirements and current characteristics of motors with building electrical system. Refer to electrical drawings. 2. Provide open-drip proof type motor, and controller with NEMA Type 4 enclosure. 3. Provide motor and hood cover with NEMA Type 4 enclosure. F. Remote Control Station: Control shall be equipped with a NEMA 4 motor controller, complete with over current protection and a NEMA 4 push-button station marked "open- close-stop." See Electrical drawings for controls location. 1. Provide exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof, NEMA Type 4 enclosure, key operated. G. Reverse Control: Shall be heavy-duty electrically and mechanically interlocked. Door shall also have automatic reverse capabilities for cycle interruption (i.e.; contact with vehicle). H. Mounting: . I. Shall be as shown on the drawings. Provide additional hardware as needed. 2. If width exceeds maximum as allowed by the manufacturer for mounting method specified, Contractor shall select an alternate mounting method acceptable to the manufacturer and provide all parts and hardware and mounting plates secured to the wall and/or ceiling to install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Height of doors above floor when door in open position shall not be lowered regardless of mounting type used except for amount necessary for installation only. 2.06 DOOR SIZES A. All exterior gates: 16'-0"w x 16'-0"h (Total of 4). B. Dock Door: 8'-0"w x 8'-0"w (Total of 1). 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS AT VENTILATED SERVICE DOORS A. All door (gate) sizes shall be field verified by Contractor. B. Limit switches shall be provided to accommodate lock systems graphics - refer to electrical section. C. Contacts for door operation to be 120 volt - refer to electrical section. 95-052/12-95 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 4 . OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 5 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 08331 . Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to door opelfltion, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures for resetting closing devices after activation. c. I. Test door closing when activated by smoke-detector fire-release system. Reset door-closing mechanism "after successful test (refer to electrical). B. ' After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion. 1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80. A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION Provide positive locking solenoid for each side of door in conjunction with electric operator. Refer to electrical drawings. E. . Voltage shall be 480, 3 phase. D. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1 95-052/12-95 . C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and 'storefront systems that comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated. 1. The system shaH be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg C) without'buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, stress on glass, or other detrimental effects. B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems to provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors snail function normally over the specified temperature range. A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated., 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS- Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront, including entrances specified to be factory glazed, ,are included in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing." Lock cylinders are included in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware." Curtain wall is included in Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain WalL" 2. 3. . 1. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this ~ection: 1. Exterior entrance doors. ~- , 2. Vestibule doors matching entrance doors. 3. Transoms. 4. Sidelights. 5. Frames for entrances. 6. Storefront-type framing system. A. This SeCtion includes the following,types of aluminum entrance and storefront work: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions .of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION>~0841 0 . . ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Product. data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. b. Data on fmishing, hardware and accessories., c. " Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. 2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. b. Elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1 :50) scale. c. Detail sections of typical composite members. d. Anchors and reinforcement. A. General:' Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.04 SUBMITI ALS G. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal-break" construction, provide units tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503 showing condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45. . Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled water penetration (excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft. (299 Pa). F. E. Air ,Infiltration: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront framing system with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. (0.3 Lis x sq. m) of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an , inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf (75 Pa). 1. Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure required to measure deflection of framing members normal to the plane of the wall shall be equivalent to the wind load specified above. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear span, when subjected to uniform load deflection test. 2. Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressures required to measure deflection parallel to the plane of the wall shall be equal to 1.5 times the wind pressures specified above. Deflection of any member carrying its full dead load shall not exceed an amount that will reduce glass bite below 75 percent of the design dimension and shall not reduce the edge clearance between the member and the fIxed panel, glass or other fixed member above to less than 1/8 inch (3 mm). .The clearance between the member and an operable door or window shall be at least 1/16 inch (1.6mm). D. Structural Performance: Conduct tests for structural performance in accordance with ASTM E 330. At the conclusion of the tests there shall be no glass breakage or permanent damage to fasteners, anchors, hardware or actuating mechanism. Framing members shall have no permanent deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear span. . Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies capable of withstanding wind pressures of 20 psf (958 Pa) inward and 20 psf (958 Pa) outward acting normal to the plane of the wall. 1. '..;"",.r-;' ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3 95-052/12-95 . A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide entrance and storefront systems manufactured by one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. . Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage. " B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry . location away from uncured masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air. Deliver -aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original , protective packaging. A. . 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING C. Design Criteria: The drawings indiCate the size, profile, and dimensional requireme-nts of aluminum entrance and storefront work required and are based on the specific .types and models indicated. Aluminum . entrance and storefront by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in di~ensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. the burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from one source and from a single manufacturer. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an. experienced, Installer who has completed installations of aluminum storefront and entrances similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE e. Hardware mounting heights. f. Provisions for expan.sion and contraction. g. Glazing details. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples of each specified color and finish on 12-inch (300-mm) long sections of extrusions or formed shapes. Where normal color variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units' in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of color variations. 3: . . ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 4 95-052/12-95 A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include subframes and 2.04 COMPONENTS A. 'General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items. 2.03 HARDWARE H. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon. woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2. G. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287. . F. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123. . Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not .feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. E. D. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (0.5-mm) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026- inch (0.7-mm) thick minimum extruded aluminum of aHoy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches (3.2 mm) thick, reinforce the" interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed- in spIined grommet nuts. C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. B. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. A. Aluminum Members: AHoy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM, B 211 (ASTM B 211 M) for aluminum bars, rods and wire. 2.02 MATERIALS . Kawneer Company, Inc. VistawaH Architectural Products. Special-lite Inc. 1. 2. 3. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 5 95-052/12-95 . D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity. '1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface. C. 'Welding: Comply with A WS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish. 1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes. 2. Do not driB and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble , components only as necessary for shipmenland installation. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate storefront framing system with an integrally concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members to eliminate direct metal-to-metal contact. Use manufacturer's standard construction that has been in use for similar projects for period of not less than 3 years. . 1. A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions .required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. 2.05 F ABRICA nON , 1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels~ without disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored ,for nonremoval. 2. Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch (44-mm) thick doors of design indicated. a. Wide stile (over 4 inches (102 mm) wide). B. Stile-arid-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts. 1. MulIion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric glazing: Mullions and horizontals shaH be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior. other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams. ' . . ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 6 95-052/12-95 3.02 INSTALLATION 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. A. Examine substrates and supports, with the InstaIIer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect instaIIation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct. unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the instaIIation. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION D. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, non specular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil (0.018 mm)) complying with AAMA 607.1. C. finish aluminum entrance and storefront to match other adjacent glazed aluminum curtain wall components. Refer to "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall" Section for finish requirements. . Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to. application and designations of finishes. 2.06 FINISHES 1. Provide EPDM or vinyl-blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 2. At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shaII not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal., F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members~ . Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. E. · ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS '08410 - 7 95-052/12-95 . A. Clean the completed system, inside and o~t? prc?mptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage' to coatings. . . . 3.04 CLEANING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure. 3.03 ADJUSTING G. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and .other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. F. Set sill "members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaSkets. E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware items. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and tem"plate requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant coating. Paint wood and siniilar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed to the elements or 'otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint. Seal joints between the materials with sealant. 4. . 2. 3. 1. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 1. Variation from Plane: ' Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 8.7 m) of length or 1/4 inch (6 mm) in any total length. 2. Offset from Alignment: The "maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members_ abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 ihc:h (1.5 mm). - 3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements , shall not exceed 1/8 'inch (3mm). 4. Offset at Comers: The maximum out-of-plane offset of framing at comers shall not exceed 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). C." Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the following tolerances: Set tinits plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, , or panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. B. . Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. A. . ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410,- 8 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 08410 ,A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction - period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration; other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. 3.05 PROTECTION . Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section- for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. B. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-1 95-052/12-95 . BHMA 1301~1982 Materials and Finishes. ANSI All7.1-1991 Specification for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. ADA Accessibility Guidelines for .Buildings and Facilities 3. . ' 1. 2 A. Standards: 1.04 REFERENCES D. The access control system and related equipment shall be installed by qualified, skilled , technicians experienced in the installation of such systems, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and all applicable codes and standards. C. Hardware furnished shall comply with the requirements of the Standards and Codes listed in 1.04 of this Section. B. The person responsible for scheduling, detailing, ordering and coordinating hardware for this project shall ,be an experienced hardware consultant. Consultant membership in the Door and Hardware Institute is acceptable as indication of required experience. The company furnishing hardware under this Section shall be regularly engaged in the sale and distribution of Finish Hardware for commercial projects. A. . 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE E. Division 16000 Electrical D. Section 11194 Detention Equipment C. Section 08610 Wood Doors B. Section 08200 Entrances and Storefroht, A. Section 08100 Metal Doors and F~ames 1.02 RELATED WORK B.Furnishing and installing access control systemS. A. Furnishing hardware for interior and exterior doors. 1.01 WORK INCLUDED PART 1 - GENERAL FINISH' HARDWARE SECTION 08710 . .. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-2 95-052/12-95 B. Locked storage space complete with shelving, for unpacked crates and sorting out hardware shall be furnished. The space shall be maintained clean and dry for protection of hardware. A. Hardware shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturers' original packages. Ea9h item shall be clearly marked with the opening number and hardware heading to identify correct location. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING G. After approval of hardware schedule, furnish templates to other trades who have hardware applied to their products. All templates shall be clearly marked as to their respectiv~ heading number and shall give full information with regard to installation, fasteners, dimensions and other pertinent details affecting their installation and operation. F. Submittals for the access control system shall also include complete electrical information, wiring diagrams, and operating and maintenance instructions. E. Furnish as part of the submittal six copies of catalog cuts of all products. . Submit a sample of each item of hardware that differs from the Specification. If requested; supply a sample of each hardware item required, to be retained by the Architect for comparison with the hardware furnished on the project. Samples will be returned in time for identification D. C. Schedule and detail each floor separately. On doors of different sizes or where hinges, closers, or locks are different, a separate heading shall be used. No labeled openings shall be combined with non-labeled openings. Note each Specification hardware set in each schedule heading. B. Submittal shall include manufacturer's name, type, finish and location for each item. Title page shall indicate Project, Architect, Owner, and Contractor and shall include address and phone number ~f each. There shall also be included a table of contents, glossary of terins, abbreviations, and symbols used in the Hardware Schedule. Also include a cross reference of all product numbers, used within the Schedule that deviate from those specified. Column 1 shall state specified item and manufacturer and Column 2 shall state prior approved substitute item and its manufacturer. A. Within 30 days of award of purchase order, submit to the Architect for review a complete vertical format hardware specification in accor~ance with these Specifications. Furnish six copies of complete submittal. 1.05 SUBMITTALS . 1. ANSl/NFPA 101-1991 Life Safety Code 2. Standard Building Code-1991 Edition Codes: B. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-3 95-052/12-95 . ,1. SpeCified Manufacturer-LCN" Closers series 4011/4111/ 4210/4510 2. Characteristics: a. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength c~t iron cylinder. F. Door closers -I. Specified Manufacturer-Schlage L9000 series, 03A trim. 2. Approved manufacturers~ Corbin/Russwin, Sargent 3. All mortise locksets shall have 3/4" throw latchbolts; & 1 n throw deadbolt where scheduled, and shall have solid cast or forged through-bolted trim and wrought rose.' E. Locksets, latches, deadbolts 1. Specified Manufacturer-Stanley 2. Approved Manufacturers~Hager, Lawrence 3. All ball bearing hinges shall be equipped with non-rising pins. Furnish non removable pins on all outswing exterior doors and where noted "NRP" in the Hardware Sets. Size hinges in accordance with specified manufacturer's published recommendations. Hinges D. . C. All items of a particular hardware category, Le.locksets, closers, hinges, shall be of the same manufacturer. B. - Approved Manufacturers designate manufacturers whose products may be acceptable on the Project if in the opinion of the Architect the products meet the intent of the specification in terms of design, function, material, and quality of workmanship. A. A Specified Manufacturer is shown for each hardware item to establish a standard of quality and minimum functional requirements. The product numbers of these manufacturers are found in the Hardware Sets. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS PARTS 2 - PRODUCTS A. All hardware items shall be guaranteed for aperiod of one year from final acceptance, : with exception of door closers, which~shall carry a ten year warranty. 1.08 . WARRANTY B. ' Hardware shall be ordered so that it will be available on time for job requirements. A. Coordinate hardware with related trades such as entrance, steel and wood doors, frames, millwork, electrical, etc. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 1.07 . . FINISH HARDWARE 08710-4 95-052/12-95 1. Specified Manufacturer -Rockwood I. Silencers 1. Specified Manufacturer-National Guard Products 2. Approved Manufacturers-Reese, Zero, H. Weatherstrip, thresholds, soundseal 1. Specified Manufacturer-Rockwood Manufacturing 2. Approved Manufacturers-Glynn Johnson, Ives 3. ' Kickplates, mop plates, and armor plates shall be furnished 10",4", and 36" high respectively, and 2" less than door width when applied to the push side . of the door and 1" less than door width when applied to the puIl side of the door or to pairs of doors. G. Pushes, puIls, stops, trim, flush bolts . Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer ' adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F (49 degrees q to -30 degrees F (-35 degrees C). Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non- critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed and back check. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms ( and forearms for parallel arm closers) and where specified shall have a cast-in solid stop on the closer shoe ("cush"). Where door travel on outswing doors must be limited, use "cush" type closers. Auxiliary stops are not required when cush type closers are used. AIl closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. All closers (overhead, surface and concealed) shall be of one manufacturer and carry manufacturer's ten year warranty Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped. provide adjustable units complying with ADA and ANSI A-117.1 provisions for door opening force. Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans. Doors swinging into exit corridors, shall provide for corridor clear width as required by code. Where possible, mount closers inside rooms. Powder coating finish to be certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing by ETL, an independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification. Where specified, security closers (Series 4210 and 4510) shall have heavy duty forged steel arms with special joints to prevent disassembly. All covers shall be one-piece drawn metal and utilize a four point mounting. All exposed fasteners shall have hex-lobular drive with a security pin. . . 1. h. g. f. e. d. c. b. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-5 95-052/12~95 Unless othenyise shown in the Hardw~~; Sets finishes shall be as follows: Hinges-On wood doors- 652 (US26D), Dull Chrome Plated steel. Hinges-On metal doors 600 (USP), Primed for paint. . A. 2.03 MATERIAL AND FINISHES D. Final keying requirements shall be coordinated with the Owner and Architect. C. Supply key requirements as follows: Three (3) Masterkeys and (2) Change keys for each lock cylinder. Keys shall be delivered directly to the Owner or his designated representative. B. All locksets shall be subject to a Construction Masterkey System during the construction period. A total of six (6) construction masterkeys shall be furnished. Construction Masterkey System shall be voided at the project completion at the direction of the architect ' A. Key to existing key system. Stamp all keys and key blanks with "Do Not Duplicate". 2.02 KEYING O. Fasteners: Provide pin-center hexalobal "Torx" security fasteners for all hardware items. Specified Manufacturer -Folger Adam. 1. . N. Security Mortise Locksets 1. Specified Manufacturer - Locknetics Security Engineering. 2. Approved Manufacturer - Von Duprin. M. Access Control Equipment 1. Specified Manufacturer - Select Products 2. Approved Manufacturer ~ M~kar, Stanley 3. Continuous hinges shall be templat~. L. Continuous Aluminum Gear Hinges 1. Specified Manufacturer - Telkee 2. Supply Aristocrat Series CLSA:A WCI50-S x 2-PP/I0 key cabinet. K. Key Cabinet J. Door Position Switches and Bolt Mo?itoring Switches 1. Specified Manufacturers - Folger Adain, Detex 2. . Approved Manufacturer - Von'Duprin' Approved Manufacturer-Glynn Johnson, Ives Supply three silencers for single opening and two silencers for double openings. 2. 3. . . FINISH HARDWARE 08710-6 95-052/12-95 A. Provide training for owner's personnel on the programming, use and maintenance of the access control system. 3.04 TRAINING E. After installation of all hardware and before acceptance of the building, check each locked door against key schedule to make certain that correct locks and cylinders are on proper doors. For any incorrectly located cylinder,. tag and have relocated to proper location. D. If doors are field painted or finished, hardware shall be protected. C. After installation of hardware and before the building is accepted, inspect the installation and certify that the hardware is correctly installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. . Coordinate with "Contract Closeout" Section. B. Hardware shall be adjusted for correct operation. A. 3.03 ADJUSTING D. The hands of doors shall be shown in the hardware schedule. C. Degree of opening for doors with overhead holders, closers, etc. shall be included in hardware schedule for approval. B. A schedule of mounting heights for all items of hardware shall be included in hardware schedule for approval. A. All Hardware shall be installed by carpenter mechanics, skilled in the application of institutional grade hardware. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Condition of opening size shall be verified as door frames being plumb and of correct tolerance to receive doors and hardware. 3.01 INSPECTION PART 3 - EXECUTION . Locksets-630 (US32D), Satin stainless steel. Door closers-Powder coated to match adjacent hardware. Other items-630 (US32D) or 626 (US26D), if not available. FINISH HARDWARE 08710- 7 95-052/12-95 . F179 L9040 406 '1112 PAIR HINGES 1 PRIVACY SET 1 WALL BUMPER EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-5' F179 L9070 GJ 450 SERIES 402 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 LOCKSET 1 OVERHEAD HOLDER 1 WALL BUMPER EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-4 F179 L9050 402 1112 PAIR HINGES I ' LOCKSET 1 WALL BUMPER . EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-3 F179 , L9070 402 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 LOCKSET 1 W ALL BUMPER EACH pOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-2 FBB179 ' , L9070 4011 (4111-CUSH @ OUTSWING DOORS) 1000 402 (@ INSWING DOORS) - OR 481 KICK PLATE WALL BUMPER FLOOR STOP 1112 PAIR HINGES 1 LOCKSET 1 CLOSER EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-l . 3.05 HARDWARE SETS: . . . FINISH HARDWARE 08710-8 95-052/12-95 FBB168 X NRP 11/2 PAIR HINGES EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING_~ BH-l1 FBB179 L9080 . 4011 (4111-CUSH @OUTSWINGING DOORS) 1000 > 402 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 LOCKSET 1 CLOSER 1 KICK PLATE, 1 WALL BUMPER. EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING it BH-1O F179 555 X 571 L9070 402 PAIR HINGES SET FLUSHBOL TS LOCKSET W ALL BUMPERS 3 1 1 2 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-9 FBB179 L9070 4011-H 1000 402 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 LOCKSET 1 CLOSER 1 KICK PLATE 1 W ALL BUMPER EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-8 F179 590 106 402 PAIR HINGES ROLLER LATCHES PULLS W ALL BUMPERS 3 2 2 2 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-7 FBB 179 L9040 4111-CUSH-DEL 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 PRIV ACY SET 1 CLOSER EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING It BH-6 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-9 FBB 179 L9070 4111~H-CUSH 1000 426 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 ' LOCKSET 1 CLOSER 1 KICK PLATE 1 THRESHOLD EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-14 BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. . SLll ' AR 4710 X LEVER AS REQUIRED 157 X STB X TYPE 12 1461 ' 481 CONTINUOUS HINGE LOCKSET CYLINDER PULLS CLOSER FLOOR STOP EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-13 COORDINATE SECURITY HARDWARE WITH SECURITY AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. SL24HD 671 392 510 X DCM X ATD X SBP2 780 EPT 1024 CIP 4111~CUSH 513 BY DOOR MANUFACTURER BY DOOR MANUFACTURER BY DOOR MANUFACTURER CONTINUOUS HINGE. EXIT DEVICE ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCK POWER SUPPLY TOUCH ENTRY READER POWER TRANSFER COMPUTER PACK CLOSER THRESHOLD SET DOOR SEALS DOOR BOTTOM SEALS ASTRAGAL SET EACH TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-12 COORDINATE SECURITY HARDWARE WITH SECURITY AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. L9080 310-2 3/4 X LCBM 4011 (4111-CUSH @ OUTSWINGING DOORS) .1000 402 LOCKSET ELECTRIC STRIKE CLOSER KICK PLATE WALL BUMPER 95-052/12-95 . NOTES: 1 1 1 2 ,1 1 ' NOTES: . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 NOTES: . . . . FINISH HARDWARE 08710-10 FBB168 L9456 95-052/12-95 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 LOCKSET . EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-_t8 COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF CLOSER/HOLDER/DETECTOR WITH FIRE SYSTEM. FBB 168 1842 X 1880 1600 L9010 4040SED X 4040SEC X PULL SIDE MOUNT X TRANSFORMER 1000 402 FBB 168 555 X 572 L9456 4111-H-CUSH GJ70HD 1000 MS2049F (@ 232) 426 130SA 200SA 125SA FBB179 L9456 4111-CUSH 1000 2525 l30SA 200SA NOTES: KICK PLATES WALL BUMPERS 2 2 PAIR HINGES SET AUTOMATIC FLUSHBOLTS COORDINATOR. PASSAGE SET SET SENTRONIC DOOR CLOSERS 3 1 1 1 1 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: HEADING it BH-17 PAIR HINGES SET FLUSHBOL TS LOCKSET CLOSER OVERHEAD HOLDER KICK PLATES DOOR POSITION SWITCHES THRESHOLD SET DOOR SEALS DOOR BOTTOM SEALS ASTRA GAL SET 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-16 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 LOCKSET 1 CLOSER 1 KICK PLATE 1 SET DOOR SEALS EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-15 SET DOOR SEALS DOOR BOTTOM SEAL FINISH HARDWARE 08710-11 END OF SECTION 08710 BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. DOOR POSITION SWITCH EACH OVERHEAD TO HAVE: HEADING #BH-22 FBB 199 L9070 4011-DEL 1000 402 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 LOCKSET 1 CLOSER 1 ARMOR PLATE 1 W ALL BUMPER EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING #BH-21 FBB168 L9070 4511-DEL (4211-SCH @ OUTSWING DOORS) 1000 481 11/2 PAIR HINGES 1 LOCKSET 1 CLOSER 1 ARMOR PLATE 1 FLOOR STOP EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING #BH-20 COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF HOLDERS WITH FIRE SYSTEM. FBB 168 9827 EO 4210 . SEM 850 1000 X 16" BFRC 12 BFLG 16 PAIR HINGES EXIT DEVICES CLOSERS SENTRONIC DOOR HOLDERS ARMOR PLATES ROD COVERS LATCH GUARDS EACH PAiR TO HAVE: HEADING # BH-19 4111-CUSH 1000 426 l30SA 200SA MS2049F CLOSER KICK PLATE THRESHOLD SET DOOR SEALS DOOR BOTTOM SEAL DOOR POSITION SWITCH 95-052/12-95 . NOTES: . NOTES: 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 . GLAZING 08800 - 1 95-052/12-95 . D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directi~ns. C. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage and practices for maintaining . and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard. B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. 1.03 DEFINITIONS Division 8, Standard Steel Door and Frames. Division 9, Alurninwn Entrances & Storefront.. Division 10, Toilet and Bath Accessories - Mirrors. Division 11, Security Hollow Metal Doors, Door Frames and Frames. 1. 2. 3. 4. . B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Mirrors. 2. Vision lites. 3. Wire Glass. 4. Entrances and other doors. 5. Storefront construction. . A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by referenCe to this Section: 1.02 SUMMARY A.. Drawings and general provisions of the .Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL GLAZING . SECTION 08800' . GLAZING 08800 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent D. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. C. Samples for verification purposes of l2-inch (300 mm) square samples of each type of glass indicated and 12-inch (300 mm) long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.05 SUBMITTALS 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 F deg (67 C deg), ambient; 180 F deg (100 C deg), material surfaces. . Normal thermal movement results from the following maximwn change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. C. 1. Minimwn glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is 6 mm. 2. Tinted and heat-absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are the same throughout Project. 3. Minimwn glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat-treated glass, are selected so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following: a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimwn thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300. For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria: . A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.04 ,,' J :':;,.J.~"".'.:::~ 1 . .' . .r'..~ .'.,,~, -". .. 4), '.i. .,;- "4. ". :' . ;'71 l,.~ . GLAZING 08800 - 3 95-052/12-95 . ~ ~: . I. Insulating Glass Certification CoUncil (IGCC). 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALl). 3. National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL). E. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: D. Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for Window Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per ASTM E 163, labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agen<;:y acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per ASTM E 152, labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency. acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI 297.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual." LSGA Publications: "LSGA Design Guide. " SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines'" and TB-300l "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 1. 2. 3. . A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section . or in referenced standards. 1.06. QUALITY ASSURANCE Maintenance data. for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. H. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. G. Compatibility test report from manufactllrer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for' (;ompatioility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. F. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to. sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. E. a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. . . GLAZING 08800 - 4 95-052/12-95 C. Manufacturer's Warranty on Laminated Glass: Submit written warranty signed by insulating glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those laminated glass units that deteriorate as defmed in the "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Coated Glass Products: Submit written warranty signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o,b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Docwnents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Docwnents. 1.09 WARRANTY . Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg F (4 deg C). 1. A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING H. Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. 1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. 3. Laminated glass of each (ASTM C 1172) kind indicated. 4. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. G. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: . Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a 5 year minimwn record of successful in-service performance. F. GLAZING 08800 - 5 95-052/12-95 . A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8 (glazing); 6.4 rom thick; ofform and mesh pattern indicated below: .'.< ~~ -. \ 2.04 WIRED GLASS 1. AFG Industries, Inc. .1. Ford Motor Company Glass Division. 3: Guardian Industries Corp. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. B. '. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide heat-treated glass by one of the following companies. 1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. A.. Un~oated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class I (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below. 2.03 'HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller-hearth) process,. at manufacturer's option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks. A: . 2.02 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL 1... Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated; A. Float Glass: ASTM Cl036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below, and Qualityq3 (glazing select). 2.01 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. D. Manufacturer's Warranty on lIisulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreei?gto ~sh replacements for insulating glass units , that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.e.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty -period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. . . 1. Warranty Period: ManUfacturer's st~dard but not less than 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. . . GLAZING 08800 - 6 95-052/12-95 1. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod: a. PTI 303 Glazing Tape (with shim), Protective Treatments, Inc. b. Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco, Inc. c. PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc. d. Preshimmed Extra-seal Glazing Tape, Pecora Corp. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. AAMA 804.1. A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 2.06 GLAZING TAPES . For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units. Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is designated or required. U-values are expressed as Btu/hr x sq. ft. x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 3. 2. 1. A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated. 2.05 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS 1. Polished Wired Glass: a. Ashai Glass Co. b. Central Glass Co., Ltd. c. Nippon Sheet Glass Ltd. d. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd. e. Guardian Industries, Corp. f. Libby-Owens Ford Company. g. PPG Industries, Inc. h. AFG Industries, Inc. i. Ford Motor Company Glass Division. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wired glass by one of the following companies. . Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows: a. Mesh ml (diamond). 1. .," ..~.~': GLAZING :08800 - 7 95-052/12-95 . A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: r;--.. .J EXAMINATION 3.01 PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to' glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. 2.09 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS 1. Miracle Adhesives Company; Type M, Black Magic. 2. Palmer Products Corp; Mirro-Mastic. 3. Architect approved equal. 1. Acceptable Products (Mirror Adhesive) H. Mirror Clips: Knape and Vogt #277 bottom clip and #278 top clip, chrome plated; space at 2'-0" o.c. maximwn along top and bottom edge of unframed mirrors; minimwn two each per mirror. Provide toggle bolts for attachment to walls. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used iri test assembly to obtain fIre-resistive rating. G. . F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding, nonoutgassing, strips of closed-cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side- walking). D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glilSs lites in place for installation indicated. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and, with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS Gaskets: As manufactured by Store Front Manufacturers. A. . GLAZING GASKETS 2.07 . GLAZING 08800 - 8 95-052/12-95 1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. G. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (1250 mm) (length plus height) as follows: F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant -substrate testing. . Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass comers. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. 2. 1. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimwn edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not fIrmly bonded to substrates. 3.02 PREPARATION B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. . Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at comers. Presence and functioning of weep system. Minimum required face or edge clearances. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. 2. 3. 4. 1. . GLAZING 08800 - 9 C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops, B. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation, 95-052/12-95 . H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.05 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press :firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening '0th adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. A. B. C. . D. E. F. G. 3.04 TAPE GLAZING K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. . J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movemen~. 1. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. H. Provide edge blocking to comply with require.ri1ents of referenced glazing publications, . unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Provide lI8-inch (3 mm) minimwn bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than fmal compressed thickness of tape. 2. . . GLAZING 08800 - 10 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 08800 E. Wash glass on-both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. . Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. B. A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 3.08 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 3.07 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. . A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimwn sealant performance. SEALANT GLAZING (WET) 3.06 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 1 95-052/12-95 . D. . System is reglazable from the interior, except spandrel glazing or panels are reglazable from the exterior. C. . Glazing is physically and thermally isolated from framing members. a. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits. b. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing units. 1. Withstands loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure. Failure includes the following: B. General: Provide glazed alurninwncurtain wall system that has the following capabilities based on preconstruction testing: A General: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall syste!ll that has the following capabilities based on testing manufacturer's standard units in asse~blies similar to those indicated for this Project: 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Division 7 Section. "Building Insulation" for insulation materials and firesafing field installed in conjunction with glazed alurninwn curtain wall system. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants installed as part of glazed alurninwn curtain wall system. Division 8 Section "Alurninwn Entrances and Storefronts." Division 8 Section "Glazing." Division 1 0 Section "Louvers and Vents." 3. 4. 5. . 2. 1. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Glazed alurninwn curtain wall, stick system installation. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of. the Contract, m'cluding General and. Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 08920 . . GLAZED ALillv1INUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 2 95-052/12-95 L. Structural Support Movement: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall system that accommodates structural movements including, but not limited to, sway, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. K. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall system, including anchorage, that accommodates thermal movements of system and supporting elements resulting from the following maximwn change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, noise or vibration, and other detrimental effects. 1. Water Penetration: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall system that does not evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimwn differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design pressure as defmed by ASCE 7, "Minimwn Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. (479 Pa). 1. Air Infiltration: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall system with permanent resistance to air leakage through system of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 Lis/sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (299 Pa). . Live Loads: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall system, including anchorage, that accommodates supporting structure's deflection from unifonnly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation. H. G. Dead Loads: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load. Provide a minimwn lI8-inch (3. 1 8-mm) clearance between members and top of fixed panels, glazing, or other fixed part immediately below, Provide a minimwn 1/16- inch (1.59-mm) clearance between members and operable windows and doors. F. Seismic Loads: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or ASCE 7, "Minimwn Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," Section 9, "Earthquake Loads," whichever are more stringent. 1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1 /17 5 of clear span or 3/4 inches (19 mm), whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/360 of clear span, 3/4 inches (19 mm) maximwn, where plaster or gypsum board surfaces are subject to bending. . Wind Loads: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimwn Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are more stringent. E. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS , '" 08920 - 3 ~: 95-052/12-95 . A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted ~riteria 2.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE G. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of glazed alurninwn curtain wall system with requirements based on comprehensive testing of manufacturer's current system. F. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.. 1. Joinery. 2. Anchorage. 3. Glazing. E. Cutaway Sample of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of system, made from l2-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing detwls of the following: D, Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. . C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of glazed alurninwn curtain wall system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. B. Product Data for each product specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profIles, and finishes. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 2.02 SUBMITTALS O. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide _glazed alurninwn curtain wall system, inch,lding anchorage, that accommodates dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. N. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall system with an average U-value of not more than 0.66 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.75 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.1. M. Condensation Resistance: Provide glazed alurninwn curtain wall'system with condensation- resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 55 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1. . . GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 4 95-052/12-95 1. Kawneer Wall 1- (2 1/2 x 7 1/2) Screw Spline A. System 3.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 3 - PRODUCTS 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 2.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. . Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of glazed aluminum curtain wall system and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." E. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of glazed alurninwn curtain wall system from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare or supervise the preparation of data for glazed alurninwn curtain wall systems, including drawings, testing program development, test-result interpretation, and comprehensive engineering analysis that shows systems' compliance with specified requirements. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing glazed aluminum curtain wall systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of glazed alurninwn curtain wall systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. . conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 5 95-052/12-95 . 2. Concealed Back Sheets: Aluminwn or galvanized steel in manufacturer's standard thickness. 3. Stabilizer Sheets: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick tempered hardboard. a. Texture: Smooth. 1. Face Sheets: 0.024-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness finished to match system framing. A. Insulated Spandrel Panels: Manufacturer's standard laminated aluminum-faced panels of thickness indicated, flat with no deviations in plane exceeding 1/16 inch in 24 inches (1.5 mm in 600 mm) or 1/8 inch (3 mm) over entire panel. 3.03 COMPONENTS Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. Glazing sealants and fillers as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. . E. F. G. H. F iresafmg materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." Sealants and joint fillers for joints within glazed aluminwn curtain wall system as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Framing system gaskets and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type. C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers; in hardness recommended by manufacturer. B. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Sliapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. .4. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: A WS A5.l O. A. Alwninwn: Alloy and temper ~ecommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with the require~ents of standards indicated below. 3.02' MATERIALS 1. YKK AP America Inc. B. 'Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: . . GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 6 95-052/12-95 G. Frame Units: Factory assemble frame units according to Shop Drawings to greatest extent possible. Rigidly secure nornnovement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise F. Metal Protection: Where aluminwn will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminwn will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. E. Glazing Pockets: Provide minimwn clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual." D. Fabricate components to drain water passing jomts, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. . A. General: Fabricate glazed aluminwn curtain wall system according to Shop Drawings. Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. FABRlCATION 3.04 D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements. C. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type recommended by manufacturer. 2. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads finished to match framing members, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Finish exposed portions to match glazed aluminwn curtain wall. . Core: Rigid, closed-cell, polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with an aged thermal- resistivity value of 7.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (50 K x m/W at 24 deg C). Edge Configuration: Sealed. 5. 4. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 7 95-052/12-95 . E. Anchorage: After system components are positioned, fix connections to building structure as indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Install framing members plwnb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminwn will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminwn will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing glazed aluminwn curtain wall system. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to drain water to the exterior to produce a permanently weatherproof system, 4.02 INSTALLATION Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of glazed aluminwn curtain wall system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or accommodations acceptable to Architect have been made. . A. 4.01 EXAMINATION PART 4 - EXECUTION C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, mediwn matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminwn Association for designating aluminwn finishes. A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 3.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES 1. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing,"unless otherwise indicated. indicated. Assemble components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. . . GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 8 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 08920 A. Provide [mal protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure glazed aluminwn curtain wall system is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 4.03 PROTECTION . Plwnb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 rom in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m). Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3 rom in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m). Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm); where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 2 inches (50.8 mm), limit offset to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) Location: Limit variation from plane or location shown on Shop Drawings to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 rom) over total length. 4. 1. 2. 3. 1. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminwn curtain wall system to comply with the following maximwn tolerances: 1. Install fjresafmg in locations indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," unless otherwise indicated. H. Install sealant according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated. G. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced standard and Shop Drawings, unless otherwise indicated. Weld in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. . Provide separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 1. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 1 95-052\12-95 . A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. 1.05 SUBMITTALS B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings indicated. A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.04 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. . Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.03 DEFINITIONS Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel framing. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping systems and tlre-resistance- rated joint sealants. Division 9 Section "Gypswn Sheathing" for installations over steel framing. Division 9 Section "Tile" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. 3, 4. . 1. 2. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Nonload-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board assemblies. attached to steel framing. 3. Glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backing board installed with gypsum board assemblies. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Cpntract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS. PART 1 - GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES . SECTION 09255 . GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 2 95-052\ 12-95 1. Construct mockups to illustrate the following applications: a. Wall surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes. b. Ceiling surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes. 2. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. a. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. b. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. c. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship, d. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. e. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 1) Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. . Mockups: Prior to finishing gypswn board assemblies, construct mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects of finishes as well as qualities of materials and execution. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place unit of Work. E. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements: C. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypswn board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. A. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. . QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.06 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 3 95-052\12-95 . (' .; 1. Firestop Type C; Georgia-Pacific Corp. 2. Fire-Shield G; National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. 3. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core; United States Gypsum Co. B. . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Marino/Ware (formerly Marino Industries Corp.). b. National Gypswn Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. c. Unimast, Inc. 2. Grid Suspension Assemblies: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corp. c. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Georgia-Pacific Corp. b. Louisiana-Pacific c National Gypswn Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. d. United States Gypswn Co. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. . 2.0 I MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). Do not' exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. . A. Environmental Conditions, General: . Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations;whichever are more stringent. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS . . B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight; surfacec.ontamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and oth~r causes. Neatly stackgypswn panelsflat.toprevent sagging. A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier; DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.07 . . GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 4 95-052\12-95 I. Thickness: 0,0329 inch (0.84 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating. 3. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, 2 90) hot-dip galvanized coating for framing for exterior soffits and ceiling suspension members in areas within 10 feet (3 m) of exterior walls. 1. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: As indicated. 3. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating, 4. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot-dip galvanized coating for framing for exterior soffits and ceiling suspension members in areas within 10 feet (3 m) of exterior walls. H. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: . Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep, 475 Ib/1000 feet (70 kg/lOO m), unless otherwise indicated. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep, 300 IbllOOO feet (45 kg/lOO m), unless otherwise indicated. Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated. Finish: ASTM A 653, G 60 (ASTM A 653M, 2 180) hot-dip galvanized coating for framing for exterior soffits and where indicated. 4. 3. 2. 1. G. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16-inch- (11.1-mm-) wide flanges, and as follows: F. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. D. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 64lM), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0,162- inch (4.l-mm) diameter. C. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 64lM), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. B. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. . A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated, STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 5 95-052\12-95 . ,...;.1' .':" 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 3. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces. 4. Type: Proprietary type as required for specific fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 5. Edges: Tapered. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. Widths: Provide gypswn board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm). A. General: Provide gypswn board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end-to-end butt joints in each area'indicated to receive gypswn board application. 2.04 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistailce, holding power, and other properties ,required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. 1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm). Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: D. . C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's top runner complying with the requirements of ASTM C 645 and with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges. 1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm) as follows: a. For head runner, sill runner, jamb, and cripple studs at door and other openings. 2. Depth: As indicated. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimuID thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Protective Coating: ~anufactUrer' s standard corrosion-resistant coating. 2: Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 _ (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot-dip galvanized coating for framing members attached to and within 10 fee~ (3 m) of exterior walls. . A. General: Provide steel framing members cOll).plying with the following requirements: 2.03 STEE~ FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network. 1. . . GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 6 95-052\ 12-95 B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. 2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 1, Comerbead on outside comers, unless otherwise indicated. 2. One-piece control joint formed from rolled zinc with V -shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. 3. Shapes as indicated. B. Accessories for Exterior Installations: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints formed from steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc complying with ASTM C 1047, in shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047. . Material: Formed metal, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. I designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Comerbead on outside comers, unless otherwise indicated. b. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. c. Shapes as indicated. 2. 1. A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES 1. Type & Thickness: Fiberbond VHI (Very High Impact) Fiber - Reinforced gypsum wall panels, 5/8" thick unless otherwise indicated. 2. Products: As manufactured by Louisiana-Pacific. E. High Impact Security Ceiling: ASTM E84, of type and thickness indicated below: 1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: II2 inch (12.7 mm), unless otherwise indicated. D. Exterior Gypswn Soffit Board: ASTM C 931, with manufacturer's standard edges, of type and thickness indicated below: 1. Type: Type X where indicated or required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Manufacturer's standard. 3, Thickness: As indicated. . Gypsum Board Base Layer(s) for Multilayer Applications: Gypsum wallboard, ASTM C 36, and as follows: c. 6. Thickness: As indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 7 95-052\ 12-95 . 1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing). B. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypswn board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands. b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. c. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. BA-98; Pecora Corp. b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc. 2. 1. . C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. I. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission thiough perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 2.07 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT 1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. b, Topping compound'formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. c. All-purpose. compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypswn Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. C. . . GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 8 95-052\12-95 1. Install hangers plwnb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 3.04 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated. 1) Attach jamb studs at openings to tracks using manufacturer's standard stud clip. 1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor. a. Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. . Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings, C. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypswn board manufacturer or, if none available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum Construction Handbook." B. A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. . EXAMINATION 3.01 PART 3 - EXECUTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 9 95-052\ 12-95 . A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 3.05 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS G. For exterior soffits, install cross-bracing and .additional framing to resist wind uplift according to details on Drawings. F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track, E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-furring or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. C. Install suspended steel framing components in siZes and at spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard. Wire Hangers: 48 in~hes (1219 mm) o.c. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 1. 2. 3. 4. . B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. . Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members'~and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. .. Secure wire hangers by looping and. wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and. appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts,. eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to. deteriorate or otherwise fail. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in- place hanger inserts that extend through forms. Do not attach hangers. to steel deck tabs. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. Do riot connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 6. 7. 8. 5. 4. .., -'. . 2. . GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 10 95-052\ 12-95 C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. B. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. A. Gypswn Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-2l6. 3.06 APPL YING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL H. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. }, Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. . Frame door openings to comply with GA-2l9, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. G. F. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated. D. Terminate partition framing above suspended ceilings where indicated. 1. For STC-rated and fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. . Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wall. 1. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 11 95-052\12-95 . A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsu'm:wallboard panels as follows: 3.07 GYPSUM,BOARD APPLICATION METHODS 1. Space screws a maximwn of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. K. Where STC-rated gypswn board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to l2.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and ~butting structural surfaces with acoustica(sealant. Except where concealed application is i.ndicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. ... .). . 2. 1. 1. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases that are braced internally. . . H. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsUm panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. . G. . Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to . open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. E. . Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gyps~m board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not pl~ce tapered edges against cut edges or e~ds. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of. partitions. Avoidjoirits otherthan'control-joints at comers of framed openings where possible. . Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/ 16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. . . GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 12 95-052\12-95 D. Install control joints at locations indicated. 1. Install LC-bead where gypswn panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. 3. Install U-bead where indicated. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypswn panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. B. Install cornerbead at external comers. A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. 3.08 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES 1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. . Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered over supports. E. 1. Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. I. Fasten with screws. D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Apply base layers of gypsum panels and face layer to base layers as follows: C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypswn board indicated for base layers prior to applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply gypsum wallboard face layers in same sequence. Offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, Apply base layers at right angles to framing members, unless otherwise indicated. . On ceilings, apply gypswn panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. On partitions/walls, apply gypswn panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless parallel application is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Use maximum-length panels to minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. On Z-furring members, apply gypswn panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 3. 2. 1. '-,; ...-'.' ". GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 13 95-052\12-95 . I. Finish water-r~sistant gypswn backing bo~d forming base for ceramic tile to comply with ASTM C 840 and gypswn board manufac'turer's directions for treatment of joints behind tile, 1. Painting exterior gypsum soffit board after finish coat has dried is specified in another Division 9 Section. H. . Finish exterior gypswn soffit board using setting-type joint compounds to prefill joints and embed tape, and for first, fill (second), and fmish (third) coats, with the last coat being a sandable product. Smooth each coat before joint compound hardens to minimize need for sanding. Sand between coats and after fmish coat. G. . For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a . surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. Where Level 5 gypswn board fmish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), arid finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; and apply a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. For skim coat, use joint compound specified for third coat, or a product specially formulated for this purpose and acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges and ready for decoration. F. . E. Use one of the following joint compound combinations as applicable to the finish levels specified: 2. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Level 5 for gypsum board surfaces where indicated. I. Level 1 for ceiling p'lenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound- rated assemblies. D. , Levels of Gypswn Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-2l4. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories' as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of'comerbead, edge trim, controljoints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3.09 . . GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 14 95-052\12-95 END OF SECTION 09255 . B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. 3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 1. Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and the time when the Project, or part of the Project, will be ready for an above-ceiling observation. 2. Prior to notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings: a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. c. Installation of air duct systems. d. Installation of air devices. e. Installation of mechanical system control air tubing. f. Installation of ceiling support framing. . A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation prior to installation of gypsum board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypswn board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.10 TILE 09300 - 1 95-052/12-95 . E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. 1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with Architect. C. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. B. Product data for each type of product specified. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections. SUBMITTALS 1.03 . 1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Glazed ceramic mosaic tile. 3. Unglazed quarry tile. 4. Stone thresholds. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provision~ of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions .and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL TILE . SECTION 09300 . TILE 09300 - 2 95-052/12-95 1, Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. . Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. A. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A 13 7.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING D. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings". C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate, . A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.04 TILE 09300 - 3 J. " 1. Composition: Porcelain. 95-052/12-95 . A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following requirements: E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated. 2.02 TILE PRODUCTS D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. 1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. . A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.l "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. 2.0 I PRODUCTS, GENERAL b. United States Ceramic Tile Co. Unglazed Quarry Tile: a. Universal Ceramics, Inc.- Sunset Red Dry-Set Mortars and Grouts: a. Custoxn BUilding Products b. C-CureChemical Co. c. Laticrete-International Inc. . Latex-Emulsion-Based Latex-Portland Cement Mortars: a. Custom Building Products b. C-Cure Chemical Co. c. Laticrete International Inc. Commercial Portland Cement Grouts: . a. Custom Building Products b. C-Cure Chemical Co. Acrylic Emulsions for Latex-Portland Cement Grouts: a. Custom Building Products b. C-Cure Chemical Co. c. Laticrete International Inc, 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. . . TILE 09300 - 4 95-052/12-95 1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), or polyethylene sheeting ASTM D 4397,4.0 mils thick. 2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches - WO.3 by WO.3 (16 ASW gage or 0.0625 inch diameter); comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimwn wire size. A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI Al08.l and as specified below. 2.04 SETTING MATERIALS 1. Provide white, honed marble complying with MIA Group "A" requirements for soundness. B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior use and for abrasion resistance where exposed to foot traffic, a minimwn hardness of 10 per ASTM C 241. A. General: Provide stone that is uniform in color and fInish, fabricated to sizes and profIles indicated or required to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining fmished floor surfaces. 2.03 STONE THRESHOLDS . Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved. b. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Straight. c. Base for 2 x 2 tiles to be 2 x 2 with bullnose top. d. Base for Quarry tile to be 6" with bullnose top. e. Internal Comers: Field-butted square corners, except use coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes. f. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor fmishes of different thickness, tapered to provide a reduction in thickness from 1/2 inch to 1/4 inch across nominal 4 INCH dimension (to be used in kitchn area). 2. 1. C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements: 1. Wearing Surface: Nonabrasive. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 6 inches by 6 inches. 3. Nominal Thickness: 3/8 inch. 4. Face: Plain. B. Unglazed Quarry Tile: Provide square-edged flat tile complying with the following requirements: . Nominal Facial Dimensions: 2 inches by 2 inches. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 2. 3. 4. TILE 09300 - 5 95-052/12-95 . A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be.. installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing' equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimwn performance characteristics for application indicated. 2.06 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT Prepackaged dry grout mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. a. Dry Polymer Additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. b. Dry Grout Mixture: Commercial portland cement specified or supplied by latex additive manufacturer. . 1) Application: Use commercial portland cement grout combined with latex additive for grouting joints in floor tile unless otherwise indicated. 2. . 1. A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6, color as indicated, composition as follows: 2,05 GROUTING MATERIALS 1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiablepowder to which only water is added at job ,site. a. Dry Polymer Additive: Manufacturer's standard, 2. Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer. a. Latex Type: . Manufacturer's standard, C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI All8A, composition as follows: B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al18.l. Latex additive (water emulsion) described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with job-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed. a. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard. 3. . . TILE 09300 - 6 95-052/12-95 G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers. " F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, fInish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. . Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fIxtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.02 PREPARATION B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. . Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 2. 1. TILE 09300 - 7 95-052/12-95 .. . 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy coverip.g during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. C. Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted' by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plwnbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A 1 08.1, a. Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar on cured bed, ANSI A108.5. b. Concrete Subfloor, Interior: TCA Fl12 (bonded). c. Grout: Latex-portlandcement. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al08.5. 2. . 1. B. Quarry Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting-bed method, TCA installation method related to type of subfloor construction, and grout type: . - 1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al08.l a. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste or dust coat on plastic bed or the following thin-setmorta,r on cUred bed, ANSI A108.5, at Contractor's option: l) Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Concrete Slibfloors, Exterior: TCA FI0l (bonded). c. Concrete Subfloors, Interior TCA Fl12 (bonded). d. Grout: Dry-set. e, Grout: Latex-portland cement. 2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. A.. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install .tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methOds related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types: 3.04 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI Al 08.1 O. 1. . . TILE 09300 - 8 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 09300 D. Before [mal inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. . Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. 2. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 95-052/12-95 . A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE F. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that show compliance of acoustical panel ceilings' and components with the building code in effect for the Project. E.. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency that are based on its testing of current products for compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with requirements. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1. 6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2. Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below. Where fmishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. . C. B. Product data for each type of product specified. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. This Section includes ceilings composed of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELA TED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 09511 . . ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed, A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HV AC equipment, fire-suppression system components (if any), and partition assemblies (if any). 1.07 COORDINATION A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatheIproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS . Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. c. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work, C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1. Fire-response tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Qualified testing and inspecting agencies include Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey, or another agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services. 2. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. . Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: B. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-3 95-052/12-95 . A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed fj:om prepainted or electrolytic zins:~cq~ed, cold-rolled steel sheet, with prefinished l5/16-iri'ch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 2.04 NON-FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED, DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS E. . Impact Clips: Install in all security areas and where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system design to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels. 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 64lM), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table I, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attachment of hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing agency. . 1. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. 2.03 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Acoustical Panel Ceiling Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section, 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-4 95-052/12-95 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: I. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. 2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 3.03 INSTALLATION . Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. A void using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. B. A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension Systems: a. Prelude 15/16" Exposed Tee System (w/730l m.r.); Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: . Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type, as standard with manufacturer. Cap Material and Finish: Aluminum sheet with white painted finish. 3. 1. 2. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0951 I - 5 95-052/12-95 . A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.04 CLEANING Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. In the manner indicated on reflected ceiling plans. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. Install impact clips in areas indicated. 3. 2. 1. . E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.18 rom in 3.66 m). Miter comers accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. C. Install edge moldings and trim of-type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to 'conceal edges of acoustical panels. supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimwn of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not more than 8 .inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 5. 4. . . ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 95-052/12-95 . 1. Armasheild Fire Guard #821 by Armstrong. D, Panel Products: C. Suspension System Type: Provide suspension system that complies with requirements in Part 2 ''Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated, Direct-Hung Suspension Systems" wide-face, capped, double-web, steel ,suspension system. 1. Pattern: As specified by product designation below. 2. Type: Wet formed mineral fiber with white polymeric membrane. 3. Color: White. 4. Light Reflectance Coefficient: LR 0.75. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient: .55-.65. 6. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: 40-44. 7. Edge Detail: Square. 8. Thickness: 3/4 inch (J 9 mm). 9. Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm). B. Acoustical Panel Characteristics: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for characteristics described below: A. Acoustical Panel Ceiling Designation: APC-l . PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 7 95-052/12-95 . . END OF SECTION 09511 1. Classic Minaboard #758 by Armstrong. D. Panel Products: C. Suspension System Type: Provide suspension system that complies with requirements in Part 2 ''Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated, Direct-Hung Suspension Systems" wide-face, capped, double-web, steel suspension system. 1. Pattern: As specified by product designation below. 2. Type: Wet formed mineral fiber. 3. Color: White. 4. Light Reflectance Coefficient: LR 0.75. 5: Noise Reduction Coefficient: .50-.60. 6. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: 35-39. 7. Edge Detail: Square. 8. Thickness: 5/8 inch (19 mm). 9. Size: 24 by 48 inches. B. Acoustical Panel Characteristics: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for characteristics described below: A. Acoustical Panel Ceiling Designation: APC-2 . PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 1 95-052/12-95 . B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with surface-burning characteristics as indicated below, as determined by testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical to those required in this Section, per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying the Work. . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of acoustical wall panels certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. E. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, evidencing that acoustical wall panels comply with requirements specified for frre-test-response characteristics and sound absorption performance. Samples for initial selection in l2-inch- (300-mm-) square' units of each type of acoustical wall panel required and in each color, texture, and pattern indicated or selected for facing materials. Include representative samples of installation devices and accessories. . . D. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of acoustical wall panels including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction. . C. B. Product data for each type of acoustical wall panel specified. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1. Back-mounted acoustical wall panels. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS SECTION 09521 . . ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 2 95-052/12-95 A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated; attach facing materials to cores to produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from waves in fabric weave, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive or other foreign matter. 2.01 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS, GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace components of acoustical wall panel system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Docwnents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.07 WARRANTY . Field Measurements: Check actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. A. Environmental Conditions: Do not begin installation until spaces for acoustical wall panels have been enclosed and maintained at approximately the same humidity and temperature conditions as planned for occupancy. Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by panel manufacturer. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect acoustical wall panels from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until wet-work, such as concrete and plaster, has been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING C. Single-Source Responsibility for Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain each type of acoustical wall panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. . acoustical wall panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 3 a. Standard AcousTech Wall Panel; A VL Systems, Inc. b. Solutions 600; Capaul Corporation. c. Respond ACT; Conwed. d. VC-80; Forbo Industries, Inc. e. Sonic Panel I; Lamvin, Inc. f. Colorsonix 1800 Series; Metal Building Interior Products Co. g. RAP-lO Standard Acoustic Wal1 Panel; Rampart Partitions Inc. h. AFG700 Panel; Stretch Wall Products, Inc. 1. Back-Mounted, Edge-Reinforced Acoustical Wall Panels: 95-052/12-95 . B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Core Density: 6-7 lb/cu. ft. (96-112 kg/cu. m). Thickness and NRC: Nominal overall panel thickness of 1 inch (and NRC of not less than 0.80 for Type A (ABPMA No.4) mounting. Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard abuse-resistant woven polyester fabric over glass-fiber scrim. Panel Size: 4' x 4' Edge Detail: Square. Comer Detail: Square. Mounting Provision: Support base angle . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A. Back-Mounted, Edge-Reinforced Acoustical Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front, edges, and back border of molded glass fiberboard core; with edges chemically hardened to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage; and complying with the following requirements: 2.02 BACK-MOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated, D. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's ~tandard material is indicated, provide acoustical wall panels faced with manufacturer's material complying with the following requirements: C. Sound Absorption Performance:. Provide acoustical wall panels with minimum noise reduction coefficients (NRC) indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM C 423 for mounting type specified under individual product requirements. B. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Overall height and width of panels: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Fabricate back-mounted panels in factory to exact sizes required to fit wall surfaces based on field measurements of completed substrates indicated to receive acoustical wall panels. . 1. . ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 4 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 09521 B, Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner acceptable to the Architect, prior to the time of Substantial Completion. A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensures that acoustical wall panels are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 3.04 PROTECTION . Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from acoustical wall panel installation, upon completion of the Work, and leave areas of installation in a neat and clean condition. B. Clean panels with fabric facing, upon completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign materials from the facing, using a dry brush, a vacuum, or both. A. 3.03 CLEANING C. Remove and replace panels that are damaged and are unacceptable to Architect. 1. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 2. Variation of Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). B. Construction Tolerances: As follows: A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. Comply with panel manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of panels using type of mounting accessories indicated or, if none indicated, as recommended by manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical wall panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. . 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 1 95-052/12-95 . A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE E. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. D. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient floor tile indicated. 1. Certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). Product data for each type of product specified. B. . A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles are specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." 1. . Vinyl composition floor tile. 2. Resilient granite tile. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and generaL provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SECTION 09660 . . RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 2 95-052/12-95 A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following vinyl composition floor tiles: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each class, wearing surface, color, pattern and size of resilient floor tile installed. A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. . Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. A. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING C, Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. B. Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. A. Maintain a minimwn temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C), 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). . A. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.05 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 3 B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: A. General: Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with tile manufacturer's requirements and those speCified in this Section. 95-052/12-95 . 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of tiles, and in. maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. Subfloor Filler: Type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated. . Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement- based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. . A. B. C. D, E. 2.04 INST ALLA TION ACCESSORIES B, Resilitne Granite Tile: Square edged 12 x 12 inch size (nom.) 1/8 inch thick: Design and color as selected by architect. A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-3l2, Type IV, Composition 1; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick; design and color as selected by Architect. 2.02 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS 1. Fritz Industries, Inc. (Fritz Tile-Granite Tile GT3000 Series) 1. Armstrong, Standard Excelon 2. Kentile 3. GAF 4. Azrock 5. Tarkett 6. Mannington B. Products: Resilient Granite Tile . . RESILIENT TILE fLOORING 09660 - 4 95-052/12-95 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. 2. Lay tiles in basket weave pattern with grain direction alternating between reversed in adjacent tiles, 3. Lay tiles in pattern with respect to location of colors, patterns, and sizes as indicated on Drawings. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so nwnbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. B. Layout tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. A, General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile installation included in Project. 3.03 INSTALLATION E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. . Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. D. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drwn sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive tile. 3.02 PREPARATION C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. . Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by tile manufacturer. finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. 3. 2, I. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 5 95-052/12-95 . a. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to tile manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 1. Apply protective floor polish to tile surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. I. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers. 2, Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil. A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing tile installation: CLEANING AND PROTECTION 3.04 . K. Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer. J. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 1. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation. H. Install tiles on covers, for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on sub floor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device, F. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of fmished tile floor, install tile before these items are installed. D. . . RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 6 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 09660 1, Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation prior to cleaning. 2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning. C. Clean tiles not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer. . Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. 2. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 1 95-052/12-95 . A. Deliver prod!l~ to Project site in original m1ll1ufac1urer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacrurer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Single-Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE E. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. . D. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each different color and pattern of product specified. C. Samples for initial selection purposes of manufacturer's standard sample sets in form of pieces cut from each type of product specified showing full range of colors and patterns available. Product data for each type of product specified. B. . A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring." B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Resilient wall base. A. . This Section includes the following: . 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES . SECTION 09678 . RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 2 95-052/12-95 B. Base Accessories: Premolded end stops and external comers, of same material, size, and color as base. A. Base: Vinyl; 4 inch (100 mm) high; 1/8 inch thick; coved; 4 foot sections of vinyl base will not be accepted. At external comers use premolded units and at exposed wall ends use premolded units. 2.02 RESILIENT WALL BASE 1. Vinyl wall base. 2. Flexco rubber base (Use at Public Lobby area with Fritztile.) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS I. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear meters) for each 500 linear feet (150 linear meters) or fraction thereof of each different type and color of resilient wall base installed. . Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents. A. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section. B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as that of the space where they are to be installed. A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive products specified in this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. . Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). B. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 3 95-052/12-95 . B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. A. General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's installation directions. 3.03 INSTALLATION E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. . Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drwn sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. c. . B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturers directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrates indicated to receive products indicated. 3,02 PREPARATION A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION C. Adhesives: Water-resistanttyp_e recommended by manufacturer to. suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. B. Trowelable Underlayments and !latching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement- based formulation provided or approved by. flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 2.03 . . RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 4 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 09678 1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation, prior to cleaning. 2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning. C. Clean products specified in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products using method recommended by manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to resilient accessories that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. . Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved. B. 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil. A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed. . On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. Install inside and exterior comers before installing straight pieces. Form inside comers on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an inverted V -shaped notch in toe of wal1 base at the point where comer is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. Form outside comers on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back of base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the thickness of wal1 base. 4. 2. 3. 1. CARPET 09680 - 1 95-052/12-95 . D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts or Samples of materials showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of carpet indicated. 1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 2. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 3. Seam locations, types, and methods. 4. Type of subfloor. 5. Type of installation. 6. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Shop Drawings showing colwnns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate the following: B. Product Data for each type of carpet material, carpet cushion, and installation accessory specified. Submit manufacturer's printed data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics. Submit methods of installation for each type of substrate. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. A. . 1.03 SUBMIIT ALS 1. Division 3 Sections for curing compounds and other concrete treatments compatibility with carpet. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for materials and installation. 3. Division 9 Section "Carpet Tile" for materials and installation. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: A. This Section includes carpet, carpet cushion, and installation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL CARPET . SECTION 09680 . CARPET 09680 - 2 95-052/12-95 C. Store materials on-site in original undamaged packages, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, with continuous blocking off ground. B. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and Handling. " 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. C. Carpet Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet with the following fire-test- response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet from one source and by a single manufacturer. . Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board (FCIB) or who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB certification program requirements. A. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Methods for maintaining carpet including manufacturer's recommended frequency for maintaining carpet. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. Include cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures. G. Maintenance data for carpet and cushion to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: F. Schedule of carpet using same room designations indicated on Drawings. 1. l2-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. l2-inch (300-mm) Samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. . Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material type, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and carpet schedule. Submit the following: E. CARPET 09680 - 3 95-052/12-95 . 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. A. Concrete-Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by the following: 2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each carpet Product Data sheet at end of this Section. 2.01 CARPET PART 2 - PRODUCTS I. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full-width units equal to 5 percent of amount installed. A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. EXTRA MATERIALS 1.08 . B. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the' Contract Documents. 1.07 WARRANTY D. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. C. Subt)oor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 Ib/lOOO sq, ft./24 hours (14.6 kgll000 sq. m/24 hours) when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2J, with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F (12.7 deg C). B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near. those indicated for final occupancy. A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions." PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.06 . . CARPET 09680 - 4 95-052/12-95 A. Direct Glue-Down Installation: Comply with eRI 104, Section 8: "Direct Glue-Down." 3.03 INSTALLATION 1. Carpet manufacturer. E. Concrete-Subfloor Preparation: Apply concrete-slab primer, according to manufacturer's directions, where recommended by the following: D. Broom or vacuwn clean subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subfloors for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone. 1. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), noncumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions. . General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. A. 3.02 PREPARATION 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified in this Section and those of the following: A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. I. Carpet manufacturer. . Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the following: C. CARPET 09680 - 5 95-052/12-95 . B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation." 3.05 PROTECTION Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. Remove protruding yams from carpet surface. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. 2. 3. . 1. A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation. 3.04 CLEANING H. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, . alcoves, and similar openings. E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind <?r seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. .D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of finished carpet floor,. install carpet before installation of these items. C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam .locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11: "Stretch-in Utilizing Tackless Strip." . B. . CARPET 09680 - 6 95-052/12-95 . Products: J&J Industries - Crosshatch. I. H, Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for carpet specified. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. Tuft Bind: Not less than 10 Ibf (44.5 N) per ASTM D 1335. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646. Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing: Not less than 2,5 lbf/inch (11.1 N/25.4 mm) per ASTM D 3936. ... -'. 4. 2. 1. G. Performance Characteristics: As follows: F. Total Weight: 32 oz. for finished carpet. E. Pile Height: .250 inch for finished carpet per ASTM D 418. D. Gauge: Patterned 1/8 inch. C. Face Construction: Level-loop pile. B. Fiber Content: 100% J&J Commercialon Nylon. A. Carpet Designation: CD-l (Field carpet) . PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - CARPET CARPET 09680 - 7 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 09680 1. Products: J&J Industries - Masterpoint CG. H. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for carpet specified. , Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq, cm per ASTM E 648. Tuft Bind: Not less than 10 Ibf (44.5 N) per ASTMD 1335. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 Ibf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646. Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing: Not less than 2.5 Ibf/inch (11.1 N/25.4 mm) per ASTM D 3936. - Static Resistance: Not less than 500,000 ohms, nor more' than 20,000 megohms, measured according to the test method for conductive flooring specified in Chapter 12 of NFP A -99. Static Generation: Less thM 1.8 kv at 20 percent relative humiditY, pe AA TCC- 134 using step and scuff tests with neolite and chrome-tanned leather soles. 6. . 5. 2. 3. 4. 1. G. Performance Characteristics: As fOllOWS: F. Total Weight: 28 oz. for finished carpet. E. Pile Height: .187 inch for finished carpet per ASTM D 418. D. Gauge: Patterned 1/10 inch. C. Face Construction: Level-loop pile. B. Fiber Content: 100% J&J Commercialon Nylon. A. Carpet Designation: CD-2 PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - CARPET . PAINTING 09900 - 1 95-052/12-95 . 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Acoustical wall panels. b. Elevator entrance doors and frames. c. Elevator equipment.. ' d. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. e. Light fixtures: . f. ' Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. . d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. . f. Duct shafts. g. Elevator shafts. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, [mished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including. color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. . B. 1 ~ Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL PAINTING . SECTION 09900 .. PAINTING 09900 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers, 1.04 SUBMIIT ALS 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. . 2. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. A. General: Standard coating terms defmed in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. . DEFINITIONS 1.03 1. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for traffic-marking paint. 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 4. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board. 6. Division 9 Section "Special. Coatings" for industrial paints and maintenance and special coatings. 7. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings. 8. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively. D. Related Sections include the following: . Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b.. Stainless steel. . .operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. 4. 3. PAINTING 09900 - 3 95-052/12-95 . 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and healt~ hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. . B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimwn ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification'or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. . 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and'label, and the following information: 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. . A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an ~xperienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this'Project with a . record of successful in-service performance. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Provide stepped Samples,' defining each "separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. . . Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location arid application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only.: a. Concrete.Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (l00-by-200-mm) samples of masonry,' with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. b. Painted WOod: Pr(jvide two l2-inch- (300-mm-) square samples of each color and material on hardboard. c. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4~inch- (1 OO-mm-) square samples .of flat metal and two 8:-inch- (200-mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. ,c. Samples for Verification: OJ each color "and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. B. . . PAINTING 09900 - 4 95-052/12-95 A. Material Compatibility: . Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL 1. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden). 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 4. Porter Paints (porter). 5. Duron B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 1 gal. of each material and color applied. A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). . Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). A. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS PAINTING 09900,- 5 95-052/12-95 . 1. Provide barrier coats .over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. . Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,. grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as ~uired to remove glaze. Ifhargeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. C.Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. I. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces~ B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the b~nd of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. - 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall. items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already. installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. A. . 3.02 PREPARATION 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish . materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. A. Examine' substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which p~inting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 -EXECUTION . C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. . B. . PAINTING 09900 - 6 95-052/12-95 E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a. clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. . a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content. of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are suffiCiently alkaline to cause the fmish paint to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. When transparent fmish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleanmg methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements ofSSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged, Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non petroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. . 5. 4. 3. :~', ::',.;i~~,:~: :::::~, .~ ':'.L"f~.~,~~'~~~~.=~:~:~.' PAINTING 09900 - 7 95-052/12-95 . C. Application Procedures: Apply paints:~~d coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. .1. The number of coats and the film thickness required cu:e the same regardless of application method. 00 not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the mCi!lufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according . to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. . 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch up painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry filtri thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.. . 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thwnb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to sUrfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration: . Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimentai to fomi"ation of a durable paint film. . Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. The term "exposed surfaces'! includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required; to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. Paint surfaces behind trio'vable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before. the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible . through registers or grilles. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms; and side edges the same as exterior faces. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 10. . 8. 9. 7. 6. 5. 3; 4. l. 2. A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. . fmish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.03 . APPLICATION . . . ~ PAINTING 09900 - 8 95-052/12-95 A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. . Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface. imperfections. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 1. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 1. Exposed conduit and fittings. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: Exposed piping, pipe hangers, and supports (exterior and interior). . Exposed ductwork. Accessory items. .., ~. 1. 2. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. 2. 1. ....r PAINTING 09900 - 9 95~052/12-95 . A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco, and brick masonry surfaces: 3.07 .' EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore . damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in . PDCA PI. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by' painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing,. and repainting, as approved by Architect. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. Cleanup:. At the end of each workday,. remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used: ..Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. The testing agency will perform' appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by. the Owner: a. Quantitative material-analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity; i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. 1. Color retention, m. Alkali and mildew resistance. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. . If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint,' the 2 coatings are incompatible., 3.06 PROTECTION A. . 3.05 CLEANING 3. 2. 1. . . PAINTING 09900 - 10 95-052/12-95 1. Flat, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following fmish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. . 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry mill thickness of not less than 4.0 mils (0.102 mm). 1) Devoe: 52902 Bloxfil 200 InteriorlExterior Latex Block Filler. 2) Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler Latex Interior- Exterior. 3) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173. 4) Porter: #9203 Quick Fil Latex Block Filler _ b, First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils (0.061 mm). 1) Devoe: 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint. 2) Glidden: 3525 Series Spred House Masonry & Stucco Finish. 3) Moore: MoorLife Latex House Paint #105. 4) Porter: #519 Acrylic Flat Exterior B. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete masonry units: . Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, exterior, acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 1) Devoe: 1502 Wonder-Shield Exterior Latex House Paint Primer. 2) Glidden: Primer not required over this substrate. 3) Moore: Primer not required over this substrate. 4) Porter: #6015 Interlock First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils (0.061 mm). 1) Devoe: l5XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint. 3525 Series Spred House Masonry & Stucco Finish. MoorLife Latex House Paint #105. #519 Acrylic Flat Exterior Finish Moore: Porter: 3) 4) Glidden: 2) b. 1. PAINTING 09900'- 11 '.' 95-052/12-9~ . 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finisli:2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive, acrylic- or alkyd-based, metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for use over aluminum, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). E. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces: Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized me~al primer. a. Primer: Galvanized - metal primer applied at spreading. rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 8502/8520 Mirrolac-WB InteriorlExterior Waterborne Flat DTM Primer and Finish. 5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red. IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155. 4) Porter: #215 Rust Screen Primer First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) Devoe:. l7XX Wonder-Shield Semi-Gloss Exterior Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint. 6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House & Trim Paint. MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint #096. #915 Advantage 900 Semi Gloss Moore: Porter: 3) 4) Glidden: 2) b. Moore: 3) Glidden: 2) . 1. D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). I) Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red. 3) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. 4) Porter: #286 Fast Drying Metal Primer First and Second Coats: . Flat, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.4 mils (0.086 mm). I) Devoe: 564XX De-Vo-Ko Exterior Alkyd Flat House Paint. . 10690 Series Spred Velvet Flat Oil House Paint. Moore's PentaFlex Flat House Paint #114. Not Available Moore: Porter: 3) 4) Glidden: 2) b. Glidden: 2) a. . . PAINTING 09900 - 12 95-052/12-95 . Semigloss Epoxy Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils (0.13 mm). 1) Devoe: 52902 Bloxfil 200 InteriorlExterior Latex Block Filler. 2) Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler, Latex Interior- Exterior. 3) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173. 4) Porter: #9203 Quick Fil Latex Block Filler b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm). 1) Duron: Duron DuraClad LS Ploymide Expoxy 93- 06X. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filier applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils (0.13 mm). 1) Devoe: 52902 Bloxfil 200 InteriorlExterior Latex Block Filler. 2) Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler, Latex Interior- Exterior. . 3) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173. 4) Porter: #9203 Quick Fil Latex Block Filler 2. 1. A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block units: 3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE . 8502/8520 Mirrolac- WB InteriorlExterior Waterborne Flat DTM Primer and Finish. 6950 Lifemaster Pro Direct-to-Metal Acrylic Coating. 3) Moore: Primer not required. 4) Porter: #296 Rust Inhibitive Primer First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 rom). 1) Devoe: l7XX Wonder-Shield Semi-Gloss Exterior Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint. 6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House & Trim Paint. MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint #096. #6030 Acrylic Semi Gloss House Paint Moore: Porter: 3) 4) Glidden: 2) b. Glidden: 2) Devoe: 1) Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer (ceiling areas). a. Primer: Latex-based; interior primer applied at spreading rate recommend~ by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than '1.2 Illils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer-Sealer. 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer-Sealer. Regal First Coat Interior Latex. Primer & Underbody #216. 4) Porter: #767 Painters Friend Primer Sealer First and Second Coats: Flat; acrylic-latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils (0.064 mm). 1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint. 4000 Series Spred Ultra Flat Latex Wall and Trim Paint. 3) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. 4) Porter: #689 Hi Hide Flat Latex Wall Paint Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer (walls). a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer-Sealer. 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer-Sealer. Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody #216. 4) Porter: #1129 Blankit Primer First and Second Coats: . Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071mm). 1) Devoe: PAINTING 09900 - 13 3~XX Wonder-Tones Interior Latex Eggsqell Enamel. 4100 Series Spred Ultra Eggshell Latex Wall & Trim Paint. Moore's Regal AquaVelvet #319. " .' 95-052i12-95 . Moore: 3) Glidden: 2) b. Glidden: Moore: 2) 3) 2. '. Glidden: 2) . b. Glidden: Moore: 2) 3) 1. B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior. enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) Devoe: 39XX Wonder-Tones Semi-Gloss Interior Latex Enamel. 2) . Glidden: 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) Moore: . Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel #333. 4) Porter: #105 Latex SemiGloss Enamel . b. . PAINTING 09900 - 14 1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer. a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at .spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total 'dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 1) Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 2) Glidden: 5207 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, White. 3) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. 4) Porter: #286 Fast Drying Metal Primer b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd-enamel finish coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended' by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 95-052/12-95 F. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: . Natural-Finish Woodwork: See Division 6 "Interior Woodwork." Stained Woodwork: See Division 6 "Interior Woodwork." 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater. a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime All-Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor Barrier. 2) Glidden: UH 400 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Interior Enamel Undercoater. 3) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4) Porter: #1129 Blankit Primer b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). I) Devoe: 39XX Wonder-Tones Semi-Gloss Interior Latex Enamel. 2) Glidden: 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel #333. 4) Porter: #109 Latex Semi Gloss Enamel . Woodwork: Provide the following paint fmish systems over new, interior wood surfaces: #1119 Silken Touch Velvet Porter: 4) E. D. C. '-"- ~ -: '. .. ",- _..~'t. .-,.... '" ;..~..... PAINTING 09900 - 15 95-052/12-95 . 1. Provide the following finish systems: a. Surface Preparation: Brush-off blast or mechanically abrade. Large voids, bug-holes and other cavities should be filled with TNEMEC Series 63- 1500 Filler and Surfacer. b. Body Coat: Apply TNEMEC Series 222- Color Deco~ Tread at a minim~m of 118 inch. Requires two broadcast applications at 1/16 inch each. H. Concrete Floor at Showers (identified as Industrial Coating on drawing): Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 'finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer. 2) Glidden: 5207 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, ., White~ 3) Moore: lronCllid Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155. 4) Porter: . #215 Rust Screen Primer b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) Devoe: 39XX Wonder-Tones Semi-Gloss Interior . Latex Enamel. 2) Glidden: 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel #333. 4) Porter: #105 Latex Semi Gloss Enamel . I. G. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide .th'e following finish systems over zinc-coated metal: 26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) Moore: .,. Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. - 4) Porter:. #129 Alkyd Satin Enamel Finish Coat:. Odorless,' semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate reco~ended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of riot less than. 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 1) Deyoe: . '26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. . Satin Impervo #235. #129 Alkyd Satin Enamel Moore: Porter: . 3) 4) Glidden: 2) c. Glidden: 2) Devoe: 1) . . PAINTING 09900 - 16 . END OF SECTION 09900 . Finish Coat: Apply TNEMEC Series 284 Deco-Clear at a dry film thickness of 8.0-10.0 mils. One coat will leave a skid resistant finish. Please review the Broadcast Flooring Installation and Application Guide prior to starting any work. Install a cant cove base at aU walls and curbs per the procedure in this guide. 95-052/12-95 d. c. WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 1 95-052/12-95 . H. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. G. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. . F. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings. 1. Wall Covering Material: Full-width sample, not less than 36 inches (914 mm) 10ng, from dye lot used for the Work. Samples for verification in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full r:ange of colors, textures, and patterns available. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type. Indicate seams and . termination points. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.03 . SUBMITTALS 1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming wall surfaces. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Vinyl wall covering. 1.. '"' A. This Section includes th~ following: 1,02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS, PART 1 - GENERAL WALL COVERINGS SECTION 09950 . . WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 2 95-052/12-95 A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each wall covering Product Data sheet at end of this Section, 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Rolls of Wall Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. . EXTRA MATERIALS 1.06 C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles (160 lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally 9.ry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions ar~ and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface- burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE . WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 3 C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer. A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. 95-052/12-95 . 3.04 CLEANING Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Install seams vertical and plwnb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75 mm) from inside corners. No horizontal seams. Match pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above finish floor. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. Cut wall covering panels in roll nwnber sequence. Change run nwnbers at partition breaks and corners only. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. A. . B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL E. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. D: Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell fInishes with fine sandpaper. . 1. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 2. Prime new gypswn board with primer recommended by wall covering. manufacturer. C. Prepare substrates ~o achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, . cracks, and defects. B. Clean substrates of substances 'that could impair wall covering's bond, mcluding mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt,: A. Comply with manufacturer's writtenmstructions for surface preparation. PREPARATION 3.02 . . WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 4 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 09950 G. Products: "Generations" vinyl wall covering by Arton. 1-800-647-3633. F. Stain-Resistant Coating: Manufacturer's Standard E. Backing Material: Osnaburg D. Width: 54 inches C. Total Weight: 2002/sq.yd. (glsq. m). Total weight does not include performance coatings. B. Vinyl Wall Covering Standard: FS CCC-W-408A and CFFA-W-lOI-A, Type II, Mediwn Duty. A. Vinyl Wall Covering Designation: Architect to select patterns from manufacturer's standards. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - VINYL WALL COVERING . 10170-1 95-052/12-95 . A. Comply with requirements of Section regarding submittals. 1.05 SUBMlTI' ALS Manufacturers: 1. Model IlUIDhers for compartments manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. are listed to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, workmanship and appearance. Other manufacturers may, be submitted for evaluation by the architect by following the conditions of the ~bstitutions' clause. Unless approval is obtained 10 days prior to the bid date, all bids sball be based on the standard of quality. The architect shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability of all products submitted for substitution. 2. , Compartments shall be the products of a single manufacturer. QUALITY ASSURANCE Southern Building Code. Fair Housing Amendments Act of 1988, A~~",<:<:ihili~ (;II,c!",lin",<:, Federal Register Volume 56, Number 44. ADA, Al'rP.<:<:ihility r",Vl",lin",<: for Rnilclin <: "M . . . 144, Rules and Regulations. g F"~I"h~, Federal Register Volume 56, Number ANSI Al17- 1986 .~pp.("nr.H~mn" lilT IV'H'<lr'l; nlll"""C~ ~.". .~. ......, en. tn "M rr""hl", hy Phy"i~"l1y H"Mi""ppM penple' , NAnnngl ,..1f'e .-rnn'!L"':nnn ~s.SCXUU1(nl 1\11 I 11M "~I.r-::IJ" ._.~ I -rT' Cba.pters 5, 6, 8-30. REFERENCES (including but not limited to) Toilet room accessories. Support for floor anchored compartments. Wall b~cking required to secure mounting btickets. RelatedSections: U rina.l Screens Toilet compartments Work Included: PART 1 GENERAL , SECTION 10170 SOLID PHENOUC PLASTIC TOn.ET COMPARTMENTS . . 10170-2 95-052/12-95 Stiles, Panels, Doors, Screens, and Benches: 1. Solid phenolic material with high pressure matte finish melamine surfaces fused to core. Edges shalI be black. Brown edges shalI not be acceptable. a. Color and pattern as selected by architect from Bobrick standard colors. COMPONENTS / MATERIALS Urinal Screens shalI be: Floor Anchored 1081 Duraline Series Toilet Compartments shall~: Overhead Braced 1082 Duraline Series CONFIGURATIONS A. 2.02 B. A. 2.01 PART 2 PRODUCTS B. Furnish one year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets. A. Furnish 10 year limited warranty for panels, doors and stiles against breakage, corroSIOn, delamination, and defects in factory workmanship. . WARRANTY Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage, or wetting. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. PRODUCT DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Samples: 1. Furnisb.'scale model of compartmeot.s, including stile, shoe, door, door hardware, divider panel, aDd mounting brackets. 2. Furnish sections showing stile anchoring and leveling devices, concealed threaded inserts, panel and stile constroction and edge construction. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide required number of copies of all shop drawings, 2. Show fabrication and erection of compartment assemblies, to extent not fully descnbed by manufacturer's data sheets. 3. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes. 4. Provide location drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for attachment of compartments. . Manufacturer's Data: 1. Provide required number copies of: a. Product data sheets. b. Installation instructions. c. Replacement parts information. 1.07 C. B,. , A. 1.06 D.. C. B. 10170-3 95-052/12-95 . J. Floor to ceiling post: 1 1/4" (32mm) square, IS-gauge (1.2mm), type 304 stainless steel, with satin finish. I. Headrail (Overhead braced): Extruded anodized aluminum with satin finish. H. Stile shoe: One piece, 4" (102mm) high, type 304, 22-gauge:.(0.Smm) stainless steel with satin finish. Top shall have 900 return to stile. G. Leveling device: 3/S" x 1 "{IOmm x25mm) steel bar shall be chromate treated and double zinc plated; bolted to base of solid phenolic stile. F. Mounting Brackets: Stainless steel mounting brackets shall be mounted inside compartment. Mounting brackets exposed on the exterior of the compartment will not be acceptable. Wall mounted uriDiU screen brackets shall be ll-gauge (3mm) doubletbickness. E. Coat Hook: stainless steel coat hook shall project no more than 1 1/S" (29mm) from face of door and shall be secured by theft resistant one-way stainless steel screws. Three stainless steel hinges shall have self-lubricating Dupont "Delrin" cams to ensure noise-free operation. Cam shall be adjustable in the field to permit door to be fully closed or partially open when compartment is unoccupied. Hinges shall be attached to door and stile by theft resistant one-way stainless steel machine screws into factory installed metalinserts. Fasteners secured directly into the core are not acceptable. Metal to metal connection shall withstand a direct pull of over 1000 lbs per screw. .' Sliding door latch shall be 16-gauge (L6mm). ,Sliding door latch shall require less thaJi5 lb force to operate. Twisting latch operation will not be acceptable. . . Latch track shall be attached to doOr by theft resistant one-way stainless steel machine screws into factory installed metal inserts. . Latch haixlle shall have robber bumper to act as dpor stop. Latch shall allow door to be lifted.over II-gauge (3mm) keeper for emergency access. Metal to metal connection shall withstandil.direct pull of over 1000 lbs perscrew. 4. 3. . 2. Hinges 1. D. 4. 5. 6. 3. Latch '1. 2. C. B. Hardware 1. All hardware to be IS-S, type 304 stainIess steel with satin finish. 2. All hardware shall be concealed inside compartments 'with the exception of out-swinging doors. .3. To include vandal resistant one-way mounting screws throughout, specify Part no: 1-370. 4. Hardware of chrome plated "Zamac" isunacceptable. For 10S0 Duraline Series: solid phenolic material shall meet Natiooal Fire Protection Association Class B, Uniform Building Code Class II, ASTM E-84 Fire Resist.aD.ce Standards: flame spread 69, smoke density 93. Finish Thickness: a. Stiles and doors shall be 3/4" (19mm). b. Panels and benches shall be Ih" (13mm). 3. . 2. . 10170-4 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION D. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings. . Set hinges on out-swinging doors to hold unlatched doors in closed position. C. Set hinges on in-swiDging doors to hold doors open approximately 15 degrees from closed position when unlatched. B. Adjust hardware for proper operation after installation. A.. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING: 3.03 1. Install compartments rigidly, straight, plumb, and level and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Installation methods shall conforD?- to manufacturer's recommendations for backing and proper support. 3. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish. 4. Maintain uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors. General: A. ERECTION: 3.02 Do not begin installation of compartments until conditions are satisfactory. C. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of compartments. B. Check areas scheduled to receive compartments for correct dimensions, pJumbness of walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets. A. . INSPECTION: 3.01 PART 3 EXECUTION FLAGPOLES 10350 -1 95-052/12-95 . B. Deliver flagpoles and accessories completely identified for installation procedure. Handle and store flagpoles to prevent damage or soiling. A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy Kraft paper or other weather-tight wrapping and . prepare for shipment in hard fiber tube or other protective container. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, provide snug-fitting, precision joints with self-aligning, internal splicing sleeve arrangement for weather-tight, hairline field joints. C. .' B. Design Criteria: Provide flagpoles and installations constructed to withstand a 90 mph (145 km/h) wind velocity minimwn when flying flag of appropriate size. Use heavy pipe sizes if required for flagpole type and height shown. A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE D. Samples of each finished metal for flagpoles and accessories as requested by Architect. Shop drawings of flagpoles and bases, showing general layout, jointing, grounding method, and anchoring and supporting systems. C. . B. Product data and installation instructions for each type of flagpole required. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1. Wall-Mounted, Vertical Flagpoles: a. Aluminwn. A. This Section includes: 1.02 . SUMMARY A. Drawings and general prOVISIons of. Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 ~ GENERAL FLAGPOLES . SECTION 10350 . FLAGPOLES 10350 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. 0,075 inch (1.9 rom) spun aluminwn finished to match pole shaft. A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, size as indicated or, if not indicated, to match pole butt diameter. 2.05 FITTINGS 1. Natural clear anodized fInish complying with AA-C22A4l, Class I (0.7 mil (0.018 mm)). B. Aluminum: Finish designations prefIxed by "AA" conform to the Aluminwn Association system for designating aluminwn finishes. Provide fme, directional, mediwn satin polish (AA-M32), finished as follows: A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations offmishes. 2.04 SHAFT FINISH 1. Furnish units for vertical mounting. . Wall-Mounted Poles: Provide manufacturer's standard cast metal mounting units of same material and fmish as flagpole. Furnish unit complete with through-wall anchorages and mounting plates, as recommended by manufacturer, to suit size of flagpole and type of installation. A. 2.03 FLAGPOLE MOUNTING 1. Provide cone-tapered aluminwn flagpoles. (Buttls Diameter 6" min.) A. Aluminwn Flagpoles: Fabricate from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241, alloy 6063-T6, having a minimwn wall thickness of 3/16 inch (4.6 mm), tensile strength not less than 30,000 psi (207 MPa), and a yield point of 25,000 psi (172 MPa). Heat-treat and age-harden after fabrication. 2.02 FLAGPOLE TYPES 1. Aabec Pole Div., Morgan-Francis Co. 2. American Flagpole Div. of Kearney-National, Inc. 3. Baartol Co., Inc. 4. Concord Industries, Inc. 5. EMC Div., Eder Manufacturing Corp. 6. Eder Flag Manufacturing Co., Inc. 7. Pole-Tech, Inc. A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS . PART 2 - PRODUCTS FLAGPOLES 10350 - 3 95-052/12-95 . . END OF SECTION 10350 1. Provide positive lightning ground for each flagpole installation. A. General: Prepare and install flagpoles where shown and in compliance with accepted shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 3.01 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Chromiwn-plated bronze. E. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two swivel snaps per halyard, as follows: 1. Polypropylene, braided, white. 2. Size: 5/16 inch (No. 10) (8 mm). D. Halyards: Provide two continuous halyards for each flagpole, as follows: C. Cleats: Two 9 inch (225 mm) cast metal cleats with fasteners, finished to match pole shaft. Truck: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, revolving, double-track assembly of cast metal fInished to match pole shaft. B. . SIGNS 10425 - I 95-052/12-95 . 1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. 2. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and nwnbers. 3. Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other .components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. .R Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. A General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Division 2 Section "Site Improvements" for roadway signs and traffic signals. Division 14 Section "Electric Traction Elevators" for elevator door jamb markings. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illwninated exit signs. See Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for illwninated letters. 5. 6. . 4. I. 2. 3. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Dimensional letters and nwnbers. 2. Cast metal plaques. A.' This Section includes the following types of signs: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions. of the Contract, including General and_ Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification, Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL SIGNS . SECTION 10425 . SIGNS 10425 - 2 95-052/12-95 A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on [mal shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS D. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. C. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a single manufacturer. B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures and electrical components for illuminated signs that are labeled and listed by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards. . Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. A. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture: a. Aluminwn: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6-inch-long sections of extrusions and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate, showing the full range of colors available. 2. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements indicated: a. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide a sample panel not less than 8-1/2 inches by II inches for each material, color, texture, and pattern required. On each panel include a representative sample of the graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and colors and finishes of letters, nwnbers, and other graphic devices. b. Aluminwn: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6-inch-long sections of extrusions and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate. Where [mishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. c. Dimensional Letters: Provide full-size representative samples of each dimensional letter type required, showing letter style, color, and material [mish and method of attachment. . Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. D. SIGNS 10425 - 3 95-052/12-95 . G. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel F. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting swface. E. Vinyl Film: Provide opaque nonreflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior as well as interior applications. D. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and fmish indicated. C. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide aluminum extrusions of alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the type of use and fmish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063- T5. B. Aluminum Sheet: Provide aluminum sheet of alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the type of use and fmish indicated; and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-HI5. A Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following general types: MATERIALS 2.02 . - I. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters: a. Andco Industries Corp. b. AR.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. ASI Sign Systems, hic. d. Gemini, Inc.' . e. Matthews International Corp. f. Metal Arts. . g. Metallic Arts, Inc. 2. Manufacturers of Cast Plaques: a. Andco Industries Corp. b. AR.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company; Inc. c. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. d. Matthews International Corp. e. Metal Arts. f. Metallic Arts, Inc. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: . A Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.0 I MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . SIGNS 10425 - 4 95-052/12-95 I. Class II Clear Anodized Fine Satin Finish: AA-M31 C21A31 (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Chemical Finish: Fine matte etched finish; Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil). 2. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-M4xCI2C42Rlx (Mechanical Finish: Manufacturer's standard, other nondirectional textured; Chemical Finish: Chemical conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel in compliance with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. C. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications recommendations. A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. 2.05 FINISHES . Metal: Aluminum. Border Style: Double raised line border. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard pebble texture. I. 2. 3. A. Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and fmish and with requirements shown for thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand-tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished finish. Refer to the "Finishes" Article for other finish requirements. 2.04 CAST METAL PLAQUES I. Metal: Aluminum. A. Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 2.03 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS H. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and background colors, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for the application intended. . or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. SIGNS 10425 - 5 95-052/12-95 . '0.:, 12" high - letters reading "Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center." 8" high -letters reading "Employee Parking." 8" high - letters reading "Visitor Parking." Provide directional Arrows as shown on AI.2 Pylon Signage'. (2) sets of 8" letters reading "Service Entrance." (2) sets of8" letters reading "Public Entrance." (2) sets of 8" letters reading "Augusta/Richmond County Detention Center." The Contractor shall furnish and install quality Cast Aluminum letters, Style to be #512 Condensed Ribbon. . A. Building Exterior Signage 3.03 SCHEDULE OF SIGNAGE A After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Concealed Mounting: Mount the plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on the back of the plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement. I. . C. Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended by the manufacturer for the type of wall surface indicated. 1. Projected Mounting: Mount letters (I12") from the wall surface indicated. B. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. I. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manUfacturer's instructions. . 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION Organic Coating: Thermosetting-modified acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. I) Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard .colors. a. . . SIGNS 10425 - 6 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 10425 Contractor shall furnish acrylic signage per code requirements. E. Areas of Refuge Contractor shall furnish BF690M&W series Tactile signage by Rockwood Manufacturing. D. Restroom Doors The Contractor shall furnish and install computer produced, precision cut, pre-spaced (rear adhesive) vinyl letters with three (3) characters on each door. Height of letters/numbers to be 12" H. Exact language to be employed to be determined during shop drawing review. C. Cell Doors, Holding Cell Doors, Medical Exam Room Doors, Commissary and Law Library. Contractor shall furnish - Exact information to be provided by Architect during shop drawings - See Drawings for more information. B. Building Plaque . Mounting method to be PM-l (projected mount with collars and threaded studs set in adhesive), projected I12" from surface of building. Letters to be prefmished as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - I 95-052/12-95 . C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher. B. Coordination: Verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate Contract. A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE D. Samples for verification purposes in full-size wiits of each type of cabinet fmish indicated, and in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of cabinet finish indicated or exposed to view. Product data for cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials. B. . A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 3. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets. A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract; including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 10522 . . FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard flush, hollow aluminum door construction. E. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. D. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with comers mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions: 1. Fire extinguisher. B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following: A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 2.04 CABINETS . Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets. I. A. Brackets: Designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish. 2.03 MOUNTING BRACKETS B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and fmishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, that comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1. 1.1. Industries. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 3. Potter-Roemer, Inc. 4. Samson Metal Products, Inc. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: . 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 3 95-052/12-95 . B. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation. A. Examine rough-in for hose vales, hose racks, and cabinets to verify locations of piping connections prior to cabinet installation. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION B. Class II Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil). A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2.06 ALUMINUM CABINET FINISHES B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying temporary strippable protective covering prior to shipping. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. A. . 2.05 FINISHES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL 1. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with carn-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg. 1. Duo Panel: Float glass, 1/8 inch thick. H. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design. G. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with FIRE EXTINGUISHER in red letter decals applied to wall surface. Use letter size, style, and location as selected by Architect. I. Application Process: Silk screen. F. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to door. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Stainless Steel: Manufacturer's standard door construction, fabricated from austenitic stainless steel complying with ASTM A 167, for AISI Type 302/304 alloy. Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind FT, Class as follows: a. Class 1 (clear): 3. . 2. . FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 4 95-052/12.95 . END OF SECTION 10522 1. Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and plumb. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. . INSTALLA TION 3.02 C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-1 A. Submittals shall provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. 95-052/12-95 . 1.05 SUBMITI ALS H. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. ANSI/ASTM AI23 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. ANSI A 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. . A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.04 REFERENCES B. Section 08800, Glazing - Wall mirrors. A. In wall framing and plates and above ceiling framing for support of accessories. B. Installation of backing plate reinforcement. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Installation of concealed anchor devices. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION B. Attachment hardware. A Toilet, bath, and washroom accessories. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES PART I - GENERAL TOILET AND SA TH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800 . . TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-2 95-052/12-95 D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts and other devices of same materials as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. C. Mirror Glass: See Section 08800, Glazing. B. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A366, 20-gauge minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No.4 finish, 22 gauge minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 MATERIALS B. Accessories shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Accessories with tumbler locks shall be keyed alike with the exception of coin boxes in vending equipment. . Model numbers for toilet room accessories manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. are listed to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, workmanship and appearance. Other manufacturers may be submitted for evaluation by the Architect by following the conditions of the substitutions clause. Unless approval is obtained 10 days prior to the bid date, all bids shall be based on the standard of quality. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability of all products submitted for substitution. A. 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING B. Operation of accessories shall comply with guidelines set forth by the American Disabilities Act, Title III. Documentation and samples to be provided to architect upon request. A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI A 117.1. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All accessories shall be keyed alike. . KEYING 1.06 B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-3 95-052/12-95 . B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing labels and protective coating. A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, and as per ANSI I I7.1. 3.03 INSTALLATION C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. B. . A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in. 3.02 PREP ARA TION B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 EXECUTION C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Fabricate units of all welded construction with mitered comers. Hinge doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed. B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. A. General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not permitted. Unobtrusive labels on surfaces not exposed to view are acceptable. Where locks are required for a particular type of toilet accessory, provide same keying throughout project. FABRICATION 2.03 . . TOILET AND 8A TH ACCESSORIES 10800-4 95-052/12-95 SHELF WITH MOP & BROOM HOLDERS (2 @ ROOM D033) 8-224 X36" 8-312360 X36" 8-312360 X42" B-4112 8-3944 8-2888 B-290 24"X36" EACH TO HAVE: JANITOR CLOSETS: A061, 8061, C061, D024, D033, E063, E074, E080 SECURITY GRAB BAR SECURITY GRA8 BAR EACH TO HAVE: ALL H.C. CELLS & CELLS D007 & D009 SOAP DISPENSER PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER & WASTE RECEPTACLE TOILET PAPER DISPENSER MIRROR EACH TO HAVE: TOILETS A044, B044, C044, 0023, D030, 0040, D043, D044, D045, E051, E068, E096 . 8-822 8-3944 8-2888 8-290 36"X36" 8-211 8-6107 204-2 204-1 B-4380 8-4112 8-3944 8-2888 86806X36" 8-6806X42" 8-290 24"X36" . SOAP DISPENSER PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER & WASTE RECEPTACLE TOILET PAPER DISPENSER MIRROR ROBE HOOK SHOWER CURTAIN ROD SHOWER CURTAIN SHOWER CURTAIN HOOKS SOAP DISH EACH TO HAVE: TOILET & SHOWER: E099 SOAP DISPENSER PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER & WASTE RECEPTACLE TOILET PAPER DISPENSER GRAB 8AR GRA8 BAR MIRROR EACH TO HAVE: H/C TOILETS: E075, EI04, EI05 3.05 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE 1 1 I 1 1 I I 7 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-5 95-052/12-95 . 8312360X30" B312360X56" SECURITY GRAB BARS SECURITY GRAB BAR 2 1 EACH TO HAVE: H.C. GANG SECURITY SHOWERS: A049, A050, A051, A052, B049, B050, B051, B052, C049, COSO, C051, C052 B-212 B-270 (3 EA. @ WOMEN'S #E059) CONTURA GRAB BAR GRAB BAR MIRRORS COA T HOOK (ON REAR OF DOOR TO ALL COMPARTMENTS) NAPKIN DISPOSAL B-41 12 B-3944 B-2888 (3 EA. @ WOMEN'S #E059) B-6806 X36" B-6806 X42" B-290 24"X36" SOAP DISPENSERS PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER/WASTE RECEPTACLE TOILET PAPER DISPENSER 2 I I . EACH TO HAVE: TOILETS: E059, E060 B-4112 B-3944 SOAP DISPENSER PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER/WASTE RECEPTACLE EACH TO HAVE: SEARCH: DOl7 B-822 8-262 I SOAP DISPENSER (2 @ D006) PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER (2 @ 0006) EACH TO HAVE: EXAM ROOMS: A060, B060, C060, EOn, E078, E079 DA Y ROOM: D006 B-822 B-3944 SOAP DISPENSER PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER/WASTE RECEPTACLE EACH TO HAVE: . BREAKROOM: Ell1 . TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-6 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 10800 B312360X36" SECURITY GRAB BARS 2 . EACH TO HAVE: H.C. SECURITY SHOWERS: A045, A056, B045, B056, C045, C056, D007, D009, EOOI, EOI2, E028 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11110-1 95-052/12-95 . 1. At the start of operation of equipment, Contractor shall devote a minimum of two (2) hours, showing authorized personnel the operation and adjusting of equipment supplied. Contractor shall supply the Architect with an affidavit, signed by the Owner's Representative and laundry manager, that this service was rendered and performed. G. Performance: 1. Building Contractor shall furnish all water lines and other necessary work as specified in Mechanical Sections, including final connections to equipment. 2. Building Contractor shall furnish all electrical supply lines and other work as specified in Electrical Sections, as well as making fmal connections to equipment. 3. Building Contractor shall furnish all ducts to exhaust fan as specified in (HY AC) Mechanical Sections, including those specified in this section of Specifications. 4. Building Contractor shall furnish all faucets, special switches, valves, traps, labor and materials to make final connection to equipment. Interface: F. . Contractor shall be responsible in seeing that the equipment can be entered through openings before doors and walls are finished. E. D. Conflict in plans and specifications where changes, alterations, additions, or deductions are necessary, or where exceptions are taken by the Contractor with regard to sizes, locations, and other details shown on plans, shall be reported for decision by the Architect. c. This typed Specification will be closely correlated with the Drawings and Schedule. Each complements the other and cross reference will be necessary to fulfill the requirements of the Specifications, all 'information shown on Drawings and listed in schedules shall be incorporated as part of the written Specifications. B. The work included in this section consists of furnishing labor, materials and services . necessary for providing and completing all commercial laundry equipment. A. The extent of the Laundry.Equipment is shown on the drawings, equipment schedule, and specification of this .Section of Contract documents. . 1.01 DESCRIPTION PART I - GENERAL COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT . SECTION 11110 . COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11110 - 2 95-052/12-95 B. Submit to Architect for review, the following: A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 of Contract Documents Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1. The drawings indicate the desired basic arrangement of the equipment; minor deviation therefrom may be substituted for approval provided basic requirements are met and no major rearrangement of services to the equipment is required to affect the proposed alteration. Such deviations shall be made without expense to the Owner. H. Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory operation of the assembled equipment. Tests of the installed equipment shall be required. Defects or deficiencies noted as a result of tests shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall consult the mechanical and electrical drawings and their accompanying specifications to determine additional requirements of the work, and shall cooperate with all traces to insure a completely satisfactory installation. G. Each piece of equipment shall be furnished with small metal permanent name plates giving manufacturer's name, address, model number and serial number. Electrical equipment shall have plates giving electrical characteristics. . Verify at the site all measurements indicated on the drawings and establish correctly all lines, levels and positions for all equipment. Verify rough-in locations before slabs are poured. F. E. Equipment must be listed and approved when applicable for U.L., F.M., C.S.A., and A.G.A., and A.S.M.E. requirements and comply with codes and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical to insure proper size and locations of mechanical, plumbing and electrical services. C. Safety devices required to comply with the aforementioned regulations shall be furnished, regardless of whether or not specifically specified or called for in the following technical divisions of the equipment list schedule. B. Permits and Certificates: All laws, codes, ordinances and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn and specified shall be complied with by the Contractor and he shall give all notices required. Any work upon which an inspection certificate by local authorities, and/or any governing body is required, such inspection certificate or certificates shall be obtained by the Contractor and shall be paid by him. Certificates of acceptance or of completion as required and issued by the State, Municipal, or other authorities shall be procured by the Contractor and delivered to the Owner. . A Installer Qualifications: Vendor shall maintain within 100 mile radius, a factory trained service representative and spare parts in inventory for equipment specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.02 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11110 - 3 ., 95-052/12-95 . 1. Speed Queen* 2. Uni Mac 3. Architect approved equal. *Basis of Design A. Manufacturers: 2.01 WASHER PART 2 - PRODUCTS A Provide manufacturer's standard and extended warranties against defects in materials, finished and workmanship. Include copy of warranty in "Maintenance Manual" as part of closeout documents. 1.05 WARRANTY All items of equipment shall be delivered and set in place in the building during normal working hours unless otherwise specified. Delivery and erection shall be complete in every detail in accordance with the drawings and specifications, ready to receive the final connections by applicable mechanical and electrical trades. Coordinate any power and wiring requirements with electrical drawings. D. . C. Equipment must be protected at all times against damage or injury, and shall be thoroughly cleaned, tested, oiled, and adjusted prior to Architect's final acceptance. B. Handle and store products according to manufacturer's recommendations and in a manner to prevent damage, deterioration and contamination. A. Deliver products to the job site with protective covering or packaging with manufacturer and product names clearly designated. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS C. Triplicate copies of all installation, operating and maintenance instructions to be submitted for closeout documents. Six (6) sets of drawings containing the equipment layout, plumbing, electrical and ventilation connection plans on a scale of not less than 1/4" - 1'0". These are to include the correct ciiIDensional and physical requirements of each connection point for the commercial laundry equipment only. Six (6) sets of brochures which contain manufacturer's literature on each item along with a typewritten list of model numbers, specifications, accessories, sizes, mechanical and electrical connections. Materials contained in these brochures shall be arranged in order. of ITEM NUMBER as specified herein and each brochure shall be complete and include all items. 2. I. . . COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11110-4 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 11110 I. Four (4) dryers are required. 2. Four (4) washers are required. C. Quantity of Equipment . Instant Electronic Ignition. Automatic Back Draft Damper. 900 cIeanout Lint Trap. As manufactured by Speed Queen, Model #STDI20CG. Manual controls. 208/240V /60/3ph. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Dryer, 120 pound capacity, gas fired unit equipped as follows: I. Speed Queen* 2. Uni Mac 3. Architect approved equal prior to bid. *Basis of Design A. Manufacturers 2.02 DRYER 1. Microprocessor control with pre-set automatic wash programs suited for correctional facilities. 2. Automatic chemical supply injection system. 3. As manufactured by Speed Queen, Model SC80SN3. 4. 208/240V/60/3ph (4.5 hp. motor). . Hard Mount WasherlExtractor 80 pound capacity stainless steel ("Touch 30") equipped as follows: B. LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 1 95-052/12-95 . A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized representative of the loading dock equipment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of the type of equipment required for this Project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE D. Maintenance data for loading dock equipment to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. Include name, address, and telephone number of the manufacturer's nearest authorized service representative. 1. Provide location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of loading dock equipment. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale details showing layout and types of equipment required. Show anchorages and accessory items. B. Product data for each type of loading dock equipment specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. . A. 1.03 SUBMIITALS 1. Concrete work for dock levelers is specified in Division 3. 2. Curb angles at the edge of the loading dock are specified in Division 5. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Dock bumpers. A. This Section includes the following types of loading dock equipment: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT SECTION 11160 . . LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Coordinate delivery of anchoring devices to Project site to avoid delaying progress. A. General: Coordinate installation of loading dock equipment indicated to be attached to or recessed into concrete or masonry, and furnish anchoring devices with templates, diagrams, and instructions for their installation. 3.01 PREPARATION PART 3 - EXECUTION B. Anchorage Devices: Provide anchor bolts, nuts, washers, bolts, sleeves, cast-in-plate and other anchorage devices as required to fasten bumpers securely in place and suit installation type indicated. Furnish anchorage components that are hot-dip galvanized. . Laminated Tread Bumpers: Provide laminated-tread dock bumper units of 6" x 10" x 14" fabricated from multiple plies cut from fabric-reinforced rubber tires to a uniform thickness of 6 inches. Laminate plies under pressure on 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter steel supporting rods that are welded and bolted to 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick structural steel angle closures with predrilIed anchor holes. Size angles to provide not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of tread plies extending beyond the face of the closure angles. A. 2.02 DOCK BUMPERS a. Blue Giant Equipment Corp. b. Durable Mat Company. c. Pawling Corporation. d. The McGuire Co., Inc. e. Pawling Rubber Corporation. 1. Manufacturers of Bumpers: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each loading dock equipment component, (dock bumpers), as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary accessories, fittings and anchorages. . Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing loading dock equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that has a record of successful in- service performance. B. LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 3 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 11160 Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." Schedule training with the Owner, through the Architect, with at least 7 day's advanced notice. 4. . 3. 2. 1. A. Start-Up Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative of the manufacturer to provide start-up service and to demonstrate and train the Owner's maintenance personnel. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION B. After installation, restore marred, abraded surfaces to the original condition. A. Make necessary adjustments for safe, efficient operation of loading dock equipment. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN B. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock buinpers to the structure in a manner that complies with requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, and position relative to top of platform and anchorage. A. General: Comply with manufacturer's detailed instructions for installing loading dock equipment. INSTALLATION 3.02 . SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11191-1 95-052/12-95 . I. ASTM A 366-85 Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled Sheet, Commercial Qual ity. 2. ASTM A 526/A 526M-85 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dipped Process, Commercial Quality. 3. ASTM A 569-85 Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality 4. ASTM A 570-88 Specification for Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet, Structural Quality. 5. ASTM B 117-85 Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing 6. ASTM D 1735-87 Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Fog Apparatus. A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS Security Hardware Security Glass and Glazing Electronic Security Painting Sealants & Caulking Louvers Metal Panels Security Mesh 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3. I. 2. . D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: C. This section includes security hollow metal doors, security hollow metal frames for doors and related openings including' but 'not limited to: transoms, side lites, security accessories, louvers, metal panels, view windows, cell windows and other windows called out on the drawings or in the schedule as Security Hollow Metal. It includes: furnishing and supervising installation of all items designated Security Hollow Metal; ~rnishing only, and timely delivery to the location designated, all embed anchors and other shapes indicated on the drawings and/or called for in this section to firmly anchor all work to the concrete or masonry. I. Door Schedule 2. Window Schedule B. Applicable schedules included in the drawings: . A. Extent of security hollow metal doors and'frames is shown on the drawings and schedules. 1.01 DESCRIPTION PART 1 - GENERAL SECURITY HOLLOW METAL SECTION 11191 . . SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11191-2 95-052/12-95 I. Name and location of project, date of occupance and contract value. 2. Name, address and telephone numbers of the Owner's operations supervisor, Owner's maintenance supervisor, Architect, and General Contractor. Specific references regarding manufacturers ability to coordinate with Security Hardware installation are required. 3. Manufacturer shall provide documentation of labeling ability as required on specified assemblies. 4. Manufacturer shall provide documentation of any and all pending litigation as well as an audited fmancial statement for the most recently completed fiscal year. 5. Manufacturer shall provide actual samples as well as any other information requested by the Architect. H. Security Hollow Metal Manufacturers shall have at least 5 years of experience and 3 jobs of equal complexity which have been completed and occupied within the last 5 years. References shall include, but not be limited to, the following: G. All frames shall be installed in strict accordance with tolerances for plumbness, squareness, alignment, and twist as defined in NAAMM Hollow Metal Manual, 1987. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing quality control of the installation. . Equivalent Construction: Where fire-rated door assemblies call for equivalent construction, manufacturer shall provide specific documentation of why each door assembly does not meet labeling criteria as well as documentation describing equivalent construction and certification that doors called for have been provided with equivalent construction. F. E. Refer to NAAMM HMMA 863-90 for manufacturing tolerances to be maintained In production of doors and frames. D. All welding requires complete penetration and fusion. Refer to welding standards as defined in A WS D1.3-85 and RWMA, Resistance Welding Manual, 1989. C. Welders shall be currently qualified under A WS 82.1-84 to perform the type of work required. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire-rated door and frame assemblies that comply with NFP A 80 and have been tested, listed, and labeled in accordance with ASTM E 152 by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Where fITe-rated door assemblies are indicated or required but do not meet the criteria for labeling, manufacturer shall provide specific documentation of why each door assembly does not meet labeling criteria in the shop drawing submittal. A. Provide security hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE . ASTM E 152-81 a Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies NFPA 80 Standard For Fire Doors and Windows NAAMM, HMMA, Hollow Metal Manual 7. 8. 9. SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11191-3 Door Tests: The manufacturer shall submit an engineering report by an independent testing laboratory, performed in the last 2 years, certifying the following minimum performance of a typical flush prison door with no cut outs. (The test report shall contain specifications and details of the construction of the tested door.) a. Test "A" - Static Load: Under centrally applied load of 14,000 pounds (660 Ibs. per square foot) at quarter points the maximum permitted deflection of 0.58" with a rebound of 0.015" after release of load. b. Test "B" - Rack Test: The door shall be held in a stationary cantilever position no more than 6" from the top. The lower comer on the edge shall be supported by a stand whose cOlltact surface is no more than 6" x 6" square. Under a concentrated load of 7,500 Ibs. on the unsupported comer'ofthe door the maximum deflection shall not exceed 3.5" without failure of any welds, buckling of channels, or'stiffeners through the door. Removable Glazing Stop Test: The manufacturer shall submit an engineering report by an independent testing laboratory. performed in the last two years, certifying the successful completion of the following performance test for removable security glazing stops: a. A rectangular view window test frame shall be constructed with a glass opening size of 28 x 33 C:t I"). The frame shall be constructed of commercial quality steel meeting ASTM standard A366 or A570, 12 gauge maxImum. b. A steel plate of 3/8" minimum thickness shall be glazed in place using the specified glass stop method. See Paragraph 2.2K of this Section. c. The test frame assembly shall then be rigidly fixed in the horizontal position with the removable glass stop on the lower side. d. A target on the to side of the 3/8" plate shall be marked in one comer no more than 6" away from the stops. e. An impact dart capable of developing a minimum 400 ft. lbs. of impact energy to the plate shall be. positioned to strike the target. 95-052/12-95 . 2. . c. Testing Data: I. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings before fabrication showing erection construction and requirements not fully described by manufacturer's.data. Include plans and elevations : at not less than 3/8" to 1 '-0" scale and details at not less than 3~' to I '-0" scale. Indicate required anchorage and accessory items, field dimensions and finishes. Shop drawings shall include a transversf< and longitudinal section through the door showing reinforcing, etc. Shop drawings fo~ doors and frames shall come from the same manufacturer. Provide a schedule listing the location in the building of each door and frame using indicated reference numbers for' details and openings shown in the contract documents. The shop drawings shall alsocQntain. "labeling" and "equivalent" construction data as outlined in 1.3, B and C of this section. A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's material and fabrication specification and installation instructions modified to reflect project requirements and job conditions. Include instructions for handling, !itorage, and protection of each product. SUBMIIT ALS . 1.04 . SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11191-4 95-052/12-95 B. Doors and frames shall have their wrappings or coverings removed upon delivery to the building site. A. Delivery security hollow metal doors, frames, and related items cartoned for protection. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE C. The security hollow metal door and frame manufacturer shall coordinate installation with the Miscellaneous Metals, Security Hardware, Security Glass and Glazing, Security Screens, and Electronic Security sections. B. Jamb face dimensions on details are nominal. It is the manufacturer's responsibility to coordinate and provide adequate jamb capacity to accommodate hardware. It is the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate and incorporate the frame opening dimension into the construction. A. A representative of the manufacturer shall be available for a minimum of two (2) pre- construction coordination meetings to be scheduled by the Architect. The representative shall be prepared to answer questions regarding the Coordination of upcoming work and shop drawings. 1.05 COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK . Ten (10) impact blows of 400 ft. Ibs. minimum each shall be delivered to the target. The removable stop shall remain undamaged, and the 3/8" plate shall remain fIrmly in place. There shall be no more than one (1) broken fastener in the assembly after impact testing. Notify Architect immediately if more than one (1) fastener fails. The test report shall consist of details of the test assembly and photographs of the testing apparatus. The test assembly shall be retained at the manufacturer's facility for possible future inspection. Mill Certification: Submit mill certification on all materials used to fabricate items specified. finish Reports: Submit certified engineering reports on tests that have been performed on the primer finish used on this project. Report shall certify that the results of these tests meet or exceed minimum performance requirements described and shall include photographs of tested samples. Test shall be performed on small plugs of material representing each type of base metal primed. Test samples shall be retained at the manufacturer's facility for possible future inspection. a. Salt Spray Test: After exposure to salt spray testing in accordance with ASTM B 117-85 for 150 hours, sample shall achieve a rating of size 6, few blisters, in accordance with ASTM D 714-87. Rust creepage from a scribed line shall not exceed 1/8" as tested per ASTM D 1654-79a. Water Fog Test: After exposure to water fog testing in accordance with ASTM D 1735-87 for 200 hours, sample shall achieve a rating of 7 in accordance with ASTM D 610. Tape Adhesion Test: Sample shall be submitted to tape adhesion testing and shall achieve a classification 4B in accordance with ASTM D 3359- 87. . c. b. 4. 3. a "'. f. SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11191-5 95-052/12-95 . B. Exterior and Interior Conditions: Frames for exterior openings shall be made of commercial grade steel conforming to ASTM A366. Frames for interior openings shall be either commercial grade cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366 or commercial A. Construction: Frames shall be combination type with integral trim fabricated of cold rolled, or hot rolled, pickled and oiled steel sheets with clean, smooth surfaces. Joints shall be fully welded unit type construction with contact edges closed tight and welds on exposed surfaces depressed smooth and flush. Fabricate molded members straight arid true, with comer joints well formed and in true alignment and fastenings concealed where practicable. finish work shall be strong, rigid, neat in appearance, and free of defects. All exterior frames, frames at showers, and any other frames specifically designated in the schedule shall be galvanized. Frames specified as galvanized shall be zinc coated carbon steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A526, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 2.02 SECURITY HOLLOW METAL fRAMES B. See Submittal Section 0 I 300 and Quality Assurance criteria of this section for requirements of other manufacturers requesting approval. No Manufacturer will be approved as equal until the Architect has met with a Company Representative, visually inspected a local project and verified all references. Habersham Metal Products Co., Cornelia, GA. Trussbilt Inc., St. Paul, MN Forderer, San Francisco, CA Chief Industries, NE Architect Approved Equal, prior to bid date. 4. 5. 3. . 1. 2. A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide security hollow metal doors and frames by one of the following: 2.0 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS H. Provide, by means of wood strips, a space of at least 1/4" between all units to permit air circulation. G. Place no more than 5 single opening frames or 3 multi-opening frames in a grolfp. F. Do not store flat. Store doors and frames in an upright position with heads upper most. E. Place all materials on planking or blocking, at least 4." off of the ground, 2" off of a paved area or floor slab. D. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to promptly clean and touch up with a rest . inhibitive primer any scratches or minor disfigurement caused in shopping or handling provided refinished items are equal in. all respects .to new work and acceptable to the architect, otherwise remove and replace damaged items as directed. Store all materials in a dry covered area. No materials will be stored directly on the ground. c. . . SECURITY HOLLOW METAL III 91-6 95-052/12-95 I. Jamb anchors: Shall be adjustable anchors of the strap and stirrup type made from the same gauge steel as frame. Strap shall be no less than 2" x 10" in size, corrugated and/or perforated. The number of anchors provided on each jamb shall be as follows: a. Frames up to 7'6" height - 4 b. Frames from 7'6" to 8'0" height - 5 c. Frames over 8'0" height - I @ 16" O.c. I. Anchors in Masonry: H. Floor Anchors: Shall be formed of not less than 12 gauge steel and shall be securely welded at the bottom of each jamb. Where required, adjustable floor anchors extending down to below the fmish floor and providing not less than 2" height adjustment shall be provided. G. Lock, Push Button, Keeper Provisions and Any Other Cutouts: Shall be in accordance with the recommendation of the hardware manufacturer. Reinforcements shall be not less than 7 gauge steel. All cutouts and reinforcements shall be protected with pressed steel mortar guards on the inside of the frame. . Hinge Reinforcing: For mortise butts, provide a minimum 7 gauge x I 1/2" X 10" long reinforcing plate, offset at each hinge location and factory drilled and tapped. A 12 gauge by I 1/2" x I 1/2" X 2" long angle reinforcement shall be welded in place between the center of the reinforcement and the inside trim face of the frame to prevent deformation of the hinge reinforcement under door load. A mortar guard shall be welded in place on the back of the reinforcement, and filled with a urethane foam to prevent grout from entering the screw holes prior to hardware installation. F. E. Reinforcing: Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for templated mortised hardware in accordance with the approved hardware schedules and templates provided by the subcontractor for that section. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates completely drilled and tapped for installation in the field. D. Fabrication: Frames shall be shipped as a complete unit where possible. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in smaller sections and designed for splicing in the field. Factory prepared splices shall be field assembled and welded. Exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth. C. Frames for Multiple or Special Openings: Shall have mullion and/or rail members which are closed tubular shapes, having no visible seams or joints on the faces. All joints between faces of abutting members shall be securely welded and finished smooth. Jambs, head, and sill shall be firmly secured to walls and fully grouted. Mullions shall be fully grouted or provided with additional reinforcing as required when grouting is not feasible. . grade hot rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM A569. Metal thickness for all frames shall be 12 gauge minimum. Frames shall have fully mitered joints, including stops, and shall be continuously welded (stitch welded is not equal) inside the miter across the full depth and width of the frame. Jambs, head, and sill shall be firmly secured to walls and fully grouted. Mullions shall be fully grouted or provided with additional reinforcing as required when grouting is not feasible. SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11191-7 95-052/12-95 . Q. Intercom, Pushbuttons and Other Device Cut-outs: Devices shall be recessed in all frames where they are shown on the frame elevations or called out in the schedule. Face plates shall be secured with 1/4-20 torx type security screws. Device shall be protected in a mortar box which also prevents access to lock or locking devices. Conduit shall be separate from any locking or other monitoring device conduit. Templates shall be provided by the Electronic Security Contractor. P. Security Expended Metal: Shall be provided as called for on the drawings. Expanded metal shall be carbon steel with size and gauge (ASM 1.0-16F by Amico Security Mesh) I. 71 lbs. per square foot. Methods of Attachment: Welding to steel studs and track. Weld Security Mesh with 1I8" x 1I2" Ig. min. fillet welded to steel studs at 8" o.c. Edge welds must be within 2" of edge. Pan head type self drilling screws with at least a #8 shank, long enough to penetrate through steel supports at least 1/4 inch. (Torx type heads.) End joints of Security Mesh must be butted and occur over studs. Side Joints must be butted and wire tied at mid point between supports. For maximum strength and ease of installation, L WD of sheet should be placed horizontally. Underwriters Laboratories Fire Rated Assemblies will not be jeopardized by using ASM in the fire rated assembly. (UlL Subject File #1857.) O. Steel Plate Panels: Shall be 3/16" plate steel provided in frames as called for on the drawings. Steel plate shall be glazed into the opening in the same manner as security glazing and stitch welded one inch at 12" on center behind the removable glazing stop. Provide Foam Strips at frames where weatherstripping is required. N. . M. Electrical Conduit: Shall be provided in each frame to accommodate requirements of Security Hardware Sets, Electronic Security items, intercom, and/or other items as shown on the drawings or in the schedules. L. Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfection. shall be removed. Exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth. Frames shall be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion and shall be coated on all accessible surfaces with a rust inhibitive primer which meets or exceeds ASTM B 117, and ASTM D 1735, and which is fully cured prior to shipment. K. Removable Security Glazing Stops: In addition to meeting performance test requirements, the removable glazing stop shall consist of a 10 gauge angle securely fastened to the fame using machine screws 1/4-28 or 1I4~20, Grade #8, 6 inches on center, a minimum of 3 inches from the comers. All exposed screw heads shall be round, pan, or oval, torx drive, center reject type. The finished glass stop shall be tight fitting and mitered at the corner joints. Mortar guards covering the glazing stop screws shall be installed on all masonry grouted frames. There shall be a minimum I" glass engagement. J. Stiffeners: All frames shall be provided with steel spreader angles, temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs, one on each side of the opening to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. The steel spreaders shall be removed by the contractor prior to setting frames. Loose "T" anchors: Shall be provided at 16" o.c. at the heads of all masonry openings greater than 4'-0". "T" anchors shall be made from the same gauge steel as frame and shall be perforated to engage rebar in masonry lintels. 2. . . SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11191-8 95-052/12-95 F. Closer Channel: The top end channel shall be fitted with an additional flush closing channel of not less than 16 gauge. The flush closing channel shall be welded in place at the comers and at the center. Installation of the closer channel using screws, security or otherwise, shall be deemed unacceptable. The end channel and flush closer channel shall be installed so that they are permanent and non-removable. E. Edges: Vertical door edges shall be beveled 118" in 2" and shall be reinforced by a continuous steel channel, not less than 10 gauge, extending the full length of the door welded not more than 3" on center inside the door faces. Top and bottom door edges shall be closed with continuous recessed 1 0 gauge channels extending the full width of the door and welded 3" on center maximum to both faces and continuously welded to the vertical door edge channels to form a single perimeter frame inside the door. D. Construction: Doors shall have mild steel face sheets continuously welded on edges and finished smooth so that there are no visible seams. The door shall be stiffened by continuous vertical formed steel sections which, upon assembly, shall span the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. The stiffener shall be 16 gauge minimum, spaced so that the vertical interior webs shall be no more than 4" o.c. and securely fastened to both face sheets by spotwelds spaced a maximum of 3" o.c. vertically. Spaces between stiffeners shall be filled with fiberglass or mineral rock wool batt type material. See drawings for door section. . Appearance: All doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage, wind or buckle. All bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius based on the gauge of metal used. C. B. Door Faces: Shall be of commercial quality leveled cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366 or hot rolled pickled and oiled steel conforming to ASTM A569 and shall be free of scale, pitting or other surface defects. 1. All doors shall be custom made full flush design, internally reinforced, sound deadened and insulated. Doors shall receive security hardware of the types and sizes shown on the approved shop drawings and schedules. 2. Door thickness shall be 2" unless otherwise indicated on the schedule. Manufacturer shall coordinate frame dimensions with the thickness of the doors. A. Doors: Shall be of type and size as scheduled, fabricated of cold rolled, pickled and oiled stretcher leveled steel sheets with clean, smooth surfaces. Metal thickness for door face plates shall be 14 gauge minimum. Phosphate treat metal prior to painting. Finished work shall be rigid, neat in appearance, and free of defects. Form molded members shall be straight and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed and in true alignment. Welded joints on exposed surfaces shall be dressed smooth, to be invisible. All exterior doors, and other doors specifically designated in the schedule are to be galvanized. Doors specified as galvanized shall be zinc coated carbon steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A526, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 2.03 SECURITY HOLLOW METAL DOORS . Tool Resisting Bar at Typical Cell Windows: Shall be provided at mullions as indicated on the drawings and shall comply with ASTM A 627-88. R. ,.;... SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11191-9 95-052/12-95 . A. The contractor shall submit in writing verification that the frames are set plumb and true prior to erection of masonry walls and then again following wall construction. The security hardware installer will submit verification that frames are in tolerance prior to installation ~of hardware. The frames"'and doors will not be accepted unless the verifications have been properly submitted and reviewed by the Architect for contract 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Upon direction of the Architect, the Contractor may destroy a randomly selected security hollow metal door or panel by sawing it in half. Should examination disclose door construction at variance with the specifications, the door manufacturer shall, upon direction of the Architect, replace all doors shipped to the project as of the date of inspection with doors conforming to the specifications. Under conditions of non- conformity, the door manufacturer shall pay for the destroyed door and related labor. Should examination prove that the door was constructed in conformance with specifications, the Owner will pay to replace the destroyed door and related labor. 3.01 FIELD TESTING PART 3 - EXECUTION Integral Recessed Flush Pull: Shall be similar in shape to the recessed flush pull specified under the SECURITY HARDWARE section, but shall be of the same material as the door and shall be provided, reinforced, and preinstalled by the door manufacturer. Provide at all cells except where handicap accessible and at all holding cells. . L. K. Food Pass: The food pass shall have a 4-1/2" x 15" clear opening. Opening shall be formed from 12 gauge channels welded to door face sheets. Channel legs shall be extended at least one inch behind face sheet (top and bottom) on the shutter side for added rigidity. Provide reinforcement for food pass lock and hinges. Provide shutter. The shutter shall be 10 gauge plate reinforced with 10 gauge backup plate and shall lap the opening 1/2" on the sides and the bottom and 3/4" at the top. Provide a combination lock bolt keeper and pull. See drawings for detail. J. Provide Foam Strips at doors where weatherstripping is required. I. Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface blemishes shall be filled and sanded as required to make both faces and both vertical edges smooth and free' of irregularities. After appropriate preparation, all exposed surfaces shall receive 2 shop coats of a rust inhibitive primer which meets or exceeds ASTM B117 and ASTM D1735, and which is fully cured prior to 'shipment. H. Removable Security Glazing Stops: Shall comply with all requirements of this section. Hardware Installation: Door edges shall be mortised and accurately cut, reinforced, drilled and tapped to receive templated mortised hardware in accordance with the approved hardware schedule and the hardware manufacturer's recommendations for the proper installation of all hardware and accessories. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, the manufacturer shall provide reinforcement plates only, drilling and tapping shall be done in the field by the hardware installer. G. . . SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11191-10 95-052/12-95 F. The security hollow metal manufacturer shall coordinate with the security hardware manufacturer to insure proper operation of door, frame and lock function. E. Jambs, head, and sill of frames shall be firmly secured to walls and fully grouted. Mullions shall be fully grouted or provided with additional reinforcing as required when grouting is not feasible. D. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide hinge shims and make adjustments as necessary to provide clearances as required. Methods of adjustment shall be as recommended and defined by NAAMM, HMMA, Hollow Metal Manual. I. Between doors and frame, at head and jambs: 1/8" 2. At door sills, where no threshold is used: 3/8" maximum above finished floor. Undercut all cell doors I". 3. At door sills, where threshold is used: 3/4" maximum above finished floor. 4. Between meeting edges of pairs of doors: 1/8" 5. Finished floor is defmed as the top surface of the floor, except at resilient tile or carpet, when it is the top of the concrete slab. Where the carpet is more than 1/2" thick, allow 1/4" clearance. C. Edge clearances shall be provided as follows: . Top: 5" from top of door to top of hinge Bottom: 10" from finished floor to bottom of hinge Intermediate: centered between top and bottom hinges On dutch doors: 5" from top of door to top of hinge, 10" from finished floor to bottom of bottom hinge,S" from split line to top and bottom respectively of lower and upper intermediate hinges. Unit and integral type locks and latches: 38" to centerline of knob from finished floor. Deadlocks: 60" to centerline of cylinder from finished floor. Panic hardware: 38" to centerline of cross bar from finished floor. Door pulls: 42" to center of grip from finished floor. Push-pull bars: 42" to centerline of bar from finished floor. Arm pulls: 48" to centerline of plate from finished floor. Roller latches: 45" to centerline of latch from finished floor. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3. 2. c. d. b. Hinges: a. I. B. The location of hardware on doors and frames shall be as follows: Plumbness, squareness, alignment, and twist methods of measurements are defined In NAAMM, HMMA, Hollow Metal Manual, #880. I. Plumbness: :t 1/16" 2. Squareness: :t 1/16" 3. Alignment: :t 1/16" 4. Twist: :t 1/16" . compliance. The contractor shall install frames in strict accordance with the following tolerances: SECURITY HOLLOW METAL 11] 91-11 95-052/12-95 . . END OF SECTION 11191 B. Final Adjustn1ents: Check and readjust operating security hardware items, leaving security hollow metal doors and frames undamaged and. in complete and proper operating condition. . A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Refer to the Painting Section for prime coat touch-up. ADJUST AND CLEAN 3.03 . SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING ] 1192-1 95-052/12-95 . C. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) ANSI Z 26.1 1983 Safety Code for Safety Glazing Materials (Test #], #2, #3, #4, #17, and #2]) . ANSI Z 97.1 Safety Performance and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C 1036 Flat Glass ASTM 0 635 Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self- Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position ASTM D 790 Test Method for Flexura] Properties ASTM D 1003 Haze and Luminous Transmittance of Transparent Plastics ASTM D 1044 Resistance of Transparent Plastics to Surface Abrasion ASTM D 1929 Ignition Properties of Plastics ASTM E 163 Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies A. Federal Specifications (FS) FS TI-S-001543A Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) APPLICABLE PUBLICA TlONS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1.02 . D. Related Documents shall include drawings and general provisions of the Contract, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specifications Sections. 1. Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2. Hollow Metal Windows C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Door Schedule 2. Window Schedule B. Applicable Schedules included in the drawings. A. Design a glazing system and furnish. all labor, material, tools, and equipment necessary to complete all security glass and glazing work as shown on the drawings, schedules, and as specified herein. 1.01 DESCRIPTION PART 1 - GENERAL SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING SECTION 11192 . . SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING 11192-2 95-052/12-95 D. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1, testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. C. Glazing System: Design a glazing system, including recommendation of glazing stop placement, with provisions for a I" edge engagement of glass, minimum edge and face clearances and adequate sealant thicknesses with reasonable tolerances. Comply with recommendations of the FGMA "Glazing Manual" and "Glazing Sealing Systems Manual" except where more stringent requirements are called for by manufacturers or these specifications. Refer to FGMA for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined. I. General Contractor shall provide written warranty by manufacturer of mar resistant laminated polycarbonate agreeing to supply replacement product, FOB point of manufacture, freight allowed to project site, in the event of material failure due to manufacturing defect. Defect shall be defined as edge separation, delamination, breakage or coating failure. Warranty coverage shall extend for a period of at least 5 years on all polycarbonate. 2. Submit manufacturer's signed warranty on all other glass products in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. B. Manufacturers warranty on laminated or monolithic polycarbonates: . Minimum of 5 years experience manufacturing specified item. Minimum of 5 years successful installation on a existing correction facility. I. 2. A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE I. Products will not exhibit abrasion haze, of more than 15% according to ANSI Z26.1. Taber Abrader test No. 17 for 100 cycles having a 500 gram load. 2. No extraordinary procedures shall be required for window cleaning. Manufacturers recommendations shall be followed. H. Maintenance serviceability test, all types: G. Bullet resistant products shall be tested, and listed by Underwriters Labs No. 752, or NIJ Level IIA, whichever is applicable and certified to by the manufacturer of the security glazing. F. Comply with H.P. White Test TP-OI00.00 or WMFL containment test level I, II, or III which ever is applicable and certified to by the manufacturer of the security glazing. E. Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI) - Report Number 8788 Class CC- 1 Approved Plastic. . Glazing Manual Glazing Sealing Systems Manual FGMA 1990 FGMA 1990 Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA): D. SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING " 192-3 95-052/12-95 . I. Insulgard Corporation (770) 591-1976 (Contact Rick Trundt) 2. Safegard Security .', Types: Gl, G2, G3, G4 G5, G12 A. Subject to compliance with requirements, product shall be supplied by one of the following or pre-bid approved "or equals". Refer to Architectural drawings for locations. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Provide 40% extra glazing stock for type G5 glazing. A. Manufacturer shall provide extra glazing stock for each type and size of laminated compositional sheet listed below: 1.06 EXTRA GLAZING STOCK Material shall be provided based on field verification of openings to receive glass. C. Deliver glazing to the site in a suitable container that will protect glazing material from weather damage. B. Glazing material shall be supplied to the project site with strippable water resistant masking paper on both surfaces. Masking paper shall remain on glazing material during installation period (except for surface in contact with setting materials). Remove masking from all lites exposed to direct sunlight. . Protection: A. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: B. Literature: Submit six (6) copies of the most recent literature and cleaning instructions and any other documentation deemed necessary to demonstrate compliance to the specification. A. Samples: Two (2) samples 12" square of each type of security glazing product shall be submitted for architect's approval. 1.04 SUBMIIT ALS: F. Single Source Responsibility: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type of glass and glazing product indicated, and for visually related areas. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience manufacturing each type of glass and glazing product and have installations of same in.place for at least three years. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide wire glass products that are identical to those tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. . . SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING 11192-4 95-052/12-95 G2. Medium Secure Mirrored Containment Glazing: 7/8" nominal, replaceable glass unit, 30 min. WMFL rated. Insulgard 375M or equal. a. 1/4" LOF Mirrorplane b. 1/4" Airspace c. 3/8" Laminated Mar Resistant Polycarbonate Gl. Medium Secure Bullet Resistant Glazing: 7/8" nominal, replaceable glass unit N.I.J. Level IIA, .9mm rated, Insulgard IC-Ill.5 or pre-bid approved equal. a. 1/4" Laminated Glass b. 1/4" Airspace c. 3/8" Laminated Mar Resistant Polycarbonate 2.03 SECURITY GLAZING COMPOSITIONS - (See Architectural Drawings for locations) Laminated tempered glass shall be manufactured according to ASTM C 104B, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Class I, (Clear), Kind FT (Fully Tempered). Interlayer is to be .045" Pvb. C. Laminated Tempered Glass: . Replaceable glass units shall be assembled with the above described polycarbonate products and glass materials as listed in the "compositions" below. The core material shall be separated from the glass by a 1/4" non rigid edge system which will allow the glass to be replaced if broken. Units are not "insulated" windows as defined by FGMA or related ASTM test procedures. B. Replaceable Glass Units: Laminated, monolithic or replaceable unit material shall be extruded polycarbonate sheet, UV stabilized and using a layer of LR resin when laminated. Thickness will vary according to manufacturers requirements to meet specified compositions. Polycarbonate laminates shall have flexural strength not less than 13000 psi; (ASTMM 0-790), and 1800F allowable continuous service temperature. Polycarbonate materials will have a CC- I flammability rating certified to by an independent testing lab and conform to BOCA building code requirements. A. Polycarbonate: 2.02 SECURITY GLAZING TYPES: 1. Laminated Glass Corporation 2. HGP Industries 3. Globe Amerada 4. Scieracin Glass Corp. Types: E & F . Commercial Plastics & Supply Viracon 4. 3. SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING 11192-5 95-052/12-95 . 1. Silicone Sealants shall be single component elastomeric silicone which complies with FS TT-S-001543, Class A, nonsag, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use G for high modulus silicone, General Electric Silglaze or equal. 2. Gl~g Type shall be pre-form~~P81yisobutylene butyl sealant, Tremco 440 or equal. ' . C. Materials: I. Install using sealants of proven compatibility with the various surfaces in which they will come in contact with, including all submitted silicones, setting blocks, glazing tape, and edge block materials. 2. Provide sealants of the color specified, or from manufacturer's standard as chosen by the architect. B. Compatibility: 1. Provide products and materials of the type indicated and approved for use with the specified security glass polycarbonate products. 2. Comply with recommendations of the manufacturers of each type of glazing material for the storage, installation and finishing of respective products. A. General: GLAZING SEALANTS-MATERIALS (Polycarbonates) 2.04 . G 12. Medium Secure Mirrored Containment Glazing: 7/8" nominal, replaceable glass unit, 30 min. WMFL rated. Insulgard 375M or equal. a. 1/4" Wire Glass b. 1/4" Airspace c. 3/8" Laminated Mar Resistant Polycarbonate G6. Low Secure Laminated Tempered Glass: 1/2" nominal, no rating. a. 1/4" Tempered Glass b. .050 PVB Interlayer c. 1/4" Tempered Glass G5. Minimum Secure Containment Glazing: 1/2" nominal, monolithic bronze HPwhite Level I material. Lexan MR 5 or equal. a. 1/2" Bronze Mar Resistant Polycarbonate G4. Medium Secure Containment Air Gap Unit: 7/8" nominal replaceable glass unit, tempered glass, WMFL 30 min. rated. Insulgard 375T or equal. a. 1/4" Tempered.Glass . b. 1/4" Airspace c. 3/8" Laminated Mar Resistant Polycarbonate Medium Secure Containment Glazing: 1/2" nominal, laminated polycarbonate, WMFL 30 min. rated. Lexgard MR-5 or equal. a. 1/4" Mar Resistant Polycarbonate b. .030 LR Resin Interlayer c. 1/4" Mar Resistant Polycarbonate G3. . . SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING 11192-6 95-052/12-95 I. Polycarbonate installation and fabrication shall comply with the written recommendations of the polycarbonate manufacturer. Copies of aforementioned recommendations shall be furnished to the architect. 2. Install all polycarbonates as late as possible in the construction of the facility. Masking should be removed approximately 1-2" from the edges so as to allow the glazing tapelsilicone to come in contact with the polycarbonate. 3. All polycarbonate lites exposed to direct sunlight shall have the masking entirely removed, then securely covered with polyethylene taped to the frames. Failure to remove the masking at this time may result in adhesion of the masking preventing later removal. 4. Silicone cap beads shall be required on ALL exterior glazing tape and all lights, (interior or exterior), where inmates have direct contact with the window. 5. While cleaning of the security glazing is not a requirement of this section, it shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to coordinate information on cleaning, masking, etc. between the glazing manufacturer, glazier, painting contractor and any other subsequent trades. D. Installation: . Hollow metal and other related framing shall be cleaned immediately prior to the installation of the security glazing. Confirm sizes of all glass/glazing; the use of field measurements for ordering purposes form the glass/glazing manufacturer shall be at the discretion of the glazier. It shall however, be the responsibility of the glazier to assure the proper delivery and sizing of all materials. Polycarbonate glazing edge engagements shall generally be I ", unless otherwise approved by the architect and confirmed by the manufacturer. Expansion allowances for polycarbonate shall generally be 1/16" per 12", per 1000 F change in temperature or as approved by the architect per manufacturers recommendations. 4. 3. 2. I. C. Preparation: I. Glazier shall be required to inspect hollow metal frames for compliance to specifications and tolerances. Written documentation of any and all defects such as size, squareness, edge clearance, weep holes and other condition which the glazier indicates will prevent him from satisfactorily installing the glazing shall be provided to the architect prior to the glazier's commencement of installation. All such listed conditions shall be resolved before work is begun. B. Inspection: A. The term "glass" in this article refers to all of the glass types scheduled. 3.01 GENERAL PART 3 - EXECUTION . Setting blocks shall be neoprene or EPDM (70 to 90 durometer) 3" to 4" long. Edge Blocks shall be neoprene, EPDM or silicone, (40-50 durometers) and of a size and space as to prevent lateral movement. ,., -'. 4. SECURITY GLASS & GLAZING 11192-7 .!' END OF SECTION 11192 Polycarbonate materials shall be cleaned using a mild detergent such as Formula 409 and lukewarm water. Use a clean cloth or sponge, rinse well with clean water. Paint splashes can be removed using VM&P Naphtha, isopropyl alcohol or butyl cellosolve. Do not use butyl cellosolve in direct sunlight. DO NOT use abrasives, paint scrapers, razor blades, or squeegees on polycarbonate. Benzene, gasoline, acetone or carbon tetrachloride should not be used on either polycarbonate or mar-resistant polycarbonate. Cleaning instruction coordination shall be the responsibility of the general contractor. The glazier manufacturer, painter and other trades shall be informed of all cleaning instructions. Clean security glazing not more than 5 days prior to final scheduled inspection. All glazing, broken, scratched, cracked or damaged for whatever reason shall be replaced by the general contractor. 1. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbit, located one quarter of glass width from each comer~ but with edge nearest comer not closer than 6" from corner unless otherwise required: Set blocks in thin course of sealant. 2. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 inches, except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8' minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed tape thickness. 3. Setting blocks, edge blocks, silicone cap beads, glazing tapeslfi Iler rod installation shall comply with FGMA (Flat Glass Marketing Association) 1990 Edition standards. 4. Tapes and gaskets are to be installed slightly protruded so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. Exposed sealants shall form a wash away from the glazing. 95-052/12-95 . I. 2. 3. . 4. 5. F. Cleaning: Glazing: . E. DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-1 95-052/12-95 . 1. Provide detailed drawings of equipment showing construction methods, type and gauge of metal, hardware, and fittings; with plan: elevation, and cross sections. as required. 2. Show service roughing-in connections, characteristics, and wiring diagrams for control systems. A. Shop drawings: Submit in accordance with DIVISION I, Section 01300-SUBMITTALS. American National Standards Institute American Standard Testing Materials American Welding Society Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association Door and Hardware Institute National Electrical Code Fire Doors, Windows Life Safety Code Underwriters Laboratories 1.03 SUBMITTALS ANSI: ASTM: AWS: BHMA: DHI: NFPA-70: NFPA-80: NFPA-101: UL: Hardware for fence gates installed by 02830 Fences and Gates. 1.02 REFERENCES: The following organizations have standards which are referenced in this section: 1. . C. Products furnished under this section, but installed by other section: 1. 02830 Fences and Gates 2. 04200 Unit Masonry - embedding of products 3. 08100 Metal Doors and Frames 4. 08660 Security Windows 5. 08710 Finish Hardware 6. 09900 Painting 7. 16000 Electrical B. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Detention ,Hardware and Accessories. 2. Exterior Gate Locks A. Summary of work includes providing the following products, labor, and services for the installation of detention equipment specifiedhereininc1uding items necessary for a complete operating installation. ' DETENTION EQUIPMENT SECTION 11194 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES PART 1 - GENERAL . . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-2 95-052/12-95 H. Maintenance Manuals: Furnish three (3) copies of maintenance manuals covering all of the detention equipment for this project. Include the current name, address, and phone G. Substitutions and Equivalents: Any product submitted as a substitution or equivalent shall fulfill the requirements of the specifications and have passed the same testing agency (ANSI, UL, ASTM, etc.) as referenced with the product, and include with the package an itemized list showing manufacturer, model number, sizes, finishes, and any differences from the specified products. Also include a sample with a written list showing the names, locations for which similar products have been installed. List shall be submitted 14 days prior to bid and be approved 7 days prior to bid. It is the Architect's and Owner's option to accept or reject any substitution to the equipment specified. No substitution will be allowed after the bid date. F. Keying Schedule for Paracentric Keys: Submit a proposal keying schedule indicating doors to room or sections keyed alike. E. Keying Schedule for Pin Tumbler Locks: Submit a complete keying schedule prepared in accordance with the Door and Hardware Institute's manual "Keying Procedures, Systems and Nomenclature". Coordinate keying with the Architect and the Owner. . Samples: If requested by the Architect and prior to final ordering of finish hardware, submit one sample of each type of exposed detention hardware unit with required finish for Architect's approval. D. C. Total Submittal Package: Include with the detention hardware schedule, product data, samples (if required by Architect), shop drawings, templates, and other descriptive data for proper coordination purposes. I . Submit fmal detention hardware schedule signed by an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is certified by the Door and Hardware Institute. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. Organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening; and include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 2. Submit schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e. g., door and frame metal work which is critical to the construction schedule). B. Detention Hardware Schedule: . For concrete or masonry embedded items, provide to the appropriate trade the setting drawings and templates showing anchorage. 3. ..... DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-3 95-052/12-95 . C. Approved manufacturer list. Submit evidence of ten (l 0) years prior experience in the installation of equipment. Provide a list of all employees in supervision capacity stating their area of responsibility and their years of experience in that capacity. Submit a list of 5 jobs comparable in size and construction that you built in the last 5 years. Include job name, person to contact and phone number, and the contract amount. Submit a list of 5 jobs comparable in size and construction that have been in continuous operation for over 5 years. Include job name, person to contact and phone number, and the contract amount. Provide an audited financial statement for the most recently completed fiscal year. Submit a listing of all jobs in which Supplier-Erector is presently and has been involved in litigation and the status thereof. Submit a current letter from the detention hardware manufacturer that the Erector is a factory trained fully authorized distributor and installer of their complete line of products. Submit a letter of intent to test each detention door as described under subparagraph heading "Detention Door Testing". Provide a letter from your surety agent stating the bidder has the bonding capacity for this job, and that bonding will be allocated to this project if the bidder is successful. Any bidder who fails to submit the above, or submits misrepresented or incomplete information shall be disqualified. B. Non-pre-qualified Supplier-Erectors who intend to submit a bid on the work specified in this section shall provide to the Architect the following information 14 days prior to the bid date and shall be approved by addendum 7 days prior to the bid date. Verbal approval will not be given. I. Detention Equipment Service, Inc. - ~oca Raton, FL 2. Grayco Detention Equipment - Myrtle Beach, SC 3. U.S. Security - Montgomery, AL A. Pre-qualified Supplier-Erectors are as follows: 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE . Wiring Diagrams: Complete wiring diagrams for all electric locks shall be prepared and provided by the detention hardware manufacturer, and include lock functions, monitoring requirements, color coded conductor locations, and conductor connections. J. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to the door and frame manufacturer to insure proper preparation for the installation of hardware. Check approved shop drawings to confirm adequate provisions 'have been made for the proper installation of items. 1. number of the detention equipment Supplier, Erector, maintenance instructions and parts list for each type of hardware. . . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-4 1. Welder Qualifications: Employ only welders and tackers who are qualified by American Welding Society's testing procedure. 95-052/12-95 F. Field Welding 1. The work shall conform to applicable sections of the Life Safety Code NFP A- 101, and the National Electric code NFPA-70. 2. Fire-rated openings shall comply with NFPA Standard number 80. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories for these openings. E. Code Compliance: The work of this section shall comply with the latest requirements of the federal, stat, and local codes or ordinances, and other agencies having jurisdiction. In the event of conflict, the more stringent requirements shall apply. . The manufacturer of detention equipment shall have a minimum of fifteen (15) years successful experience in the design and manufacture of the type of detention equipment required for this project. To insure future availability of repair parts, the manufacturer shall warrant that replacement parts will be available for twenty (20) years from the date of original purchase. Manufacturer shall actively maintain a stock of repair parts, and publish repair parts and maintenance manuals for all items specified herein. A local representative of the manufacturer specially trained in the operation and design, and with a thorough knowledge of the products, shall be available for consultation on the project. The manufacturer shall submit proof of product liability insurance. Submit proof of a quality assurance program equal to or exceeding the requirements of Military Standard 105D testing to an AQL level of 1.5 percent. All engineering functions of the manufacturer shall be under the direction of a registered professional engineer. ULl034 is used to establish the quality, construction, and operation of electric locks. Each manufacturer shall submit proof of compliance and listing under UL Standard 1034 Burglary-Resistant Electric Locking Mechanisms. UL437 is used to establish the quality, construction, and pick-resistance of pin tumbler cylinders. Manufacturer shall submit proof of compliance an listing under UL Standard 437 Key Locks Manufacturer shall submit proof that keying records are permanently maintained on electronic media and hard copy records. 9. 8. 7. 6. 4. 5. 3. 2. 1. D. Non-approved manufacturers who wish to bid on the work in this section shall provide evidence of the following to the architect 14 days prior to bid date. . Manufacturers listed a approved to bid, are required to provide proof of compliance for all items listed under paragraph D below. Manufactures will not be added to this list unless qualification evidence is provided to and approved by the architect. Approved manufacturers will be added by addendum 7 days prior to bid date. List of approved Detention Equipment Manufacturers: a. Folger Adam Company, Lemont, IL Refer to 08710 for manufacturers of miscellaneous hardware. 5. 3. 4. 2. 1. 'f DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-5 1. Protect stored items from diversion, destruction, theft, and damage. 2. Stor~d items shall be marked f~r use on the project. 3. StoN~d items shall be available 'fo"r"inspection by Architect and Owner. 4. Copies of bill of sale for stored items shall be submitted to Architect and Owner. 95-052/12-95 . D. Off-site Storage: In the event that off-site storage is required the following requirements apply: C. Key Delivery: Keys shall be sent direct to the person and address as directed by the Owner, via direct mail with restricted delivery, and return receipt requested. 1. Hardware received, but not installed shall be placed in secured storage. Control handling to prevent losses and delays before and after installation. 2. Immediately upon delivery, inspect components and assemblies for damage; remove from the site any damaged items. B. Storage and Protection: Mark or tag each item of hardware, with identification related to final h~rdware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. Wrap and crate finished components and assemblies to prevent damage to finished items. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper time and location (shop or project site) for installation. Deliver pertinent items requiring to be built-in to the General Contractor or dates in accordance with construction progress to prevent any delay. Determine and coordinate the openings for delivery and installation of equipment. I. 2. 3. . 4. 5. A. Packing and Delivery 1.06 DELIVER, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. Furnish, install and test security hardware and detention equipment as follows in 3.08 "Hardware Schedule," in compliance with Section 3 - Execution. 2. Provide security hardware and detention equipment submittals as found in 1.03 "Submittal." Coordinate all work with security hollow metal and security glazing. 3. Required participation at two '(2) submittal meetings to be scheduled by the . architect. Participants shall include hardware supplier, supplier-erector, hollow metal manufacturer (security and non~security), architect; architect's hardware consultant and general contractor. G. Responsibilities/scope of work for supplier-erectors are as follows: Quality: Repairing of defective welds by adding new material over the defects will not be permitted. Welds: Shall be of neat and clean appearance, and deep penetration in accordance with A WS. Joints shall be tight and true with members ground where necessary to assure a correct fit. 3. . 2. . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-6 95-052/12-95 E. At the owners option, provide continuing emergency service at a fixed rate per day, beyond the warranty period. D. Provide emergency service during the 12 month warranty period, should a major break down occur. Response time shall be within a 24 hour period. C. Preventative Maintenance: Supplier-Erector to include in his bid without additional cost to the owner, 4 service and inspection trips during the 12 month warranty period. Equipment shall be inspected for function, adjustment and lubrication. Necessary adjustments and lubrication shall be made and a written account provided to the owner. Schedule the fIrst visit 2 months after operational turn-over. The remaining trips will be equally spaced three months apart. B. Manufacturer of detention hardware shall warrant that replacement parts shall be available for locking mechanisms for a minimum of twenty (20) years from the date of purchase of original equipment. A. Warrant the material and workmanship on this project for a period of one (1) year after acceptance by Owner as specified in Division I - General Requirements. . WARRANTY AND SERVICE 1.08 1. Refer to Division I Section (01000) for specific scheduling requirements. 2. The work of this section shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Architect and Owner to insure that all detention restrictions, rules, regulations, and security measures will be maintained through out the course of the work. B. Scheduling: 1. Coordinate the work of this section with other work, and the progress schedule. 2. Provide items of proper design for use on this project as indicated and in accordance with the approved hardware schedule, door schedule, and control schedule, regardless of omissions or conflicts specified or indicated. 3. Coordinate the delivery and location of items to meet the progress schedule. 4. To the manufacturers of related equipment and trades effected by the work of this section, provide copies of the approved hardware schedule and drawings of other work to confirm adequate provisions have been made for the proper location and installation of detention equipment. A. Coordination: 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS . Certificates of property insurance for stored items protecting against damage and theft while in storage, certifying said coverage, and indicating the nature, quantity, and exact location of stored items shall be submitted to Architect and the owner. A waiver of lien shall be provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6. 5. DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-7 95-052/12-95 . A. Materials shall be new, designed specifically for detention applications and bolted or welded together. Basic detention materials shall be steel plate or sheet. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Provide products of a single manufacturer, who complies with Part One of this section. Approval of manufacturer shall not relieve the manufacturer of the responsibility to comply with the specifications. 2.02 MANUFACTURER 1. The manufacturer shall maintain permanent key identification records, on electronic media and hard copy, in locked fire proof files, for security and future key replacement. 2. Manufacturer to guarantee restricted replacement of keys. Replacement keys will only be cut by the factory with written authorization from the institution. C. Registration of Keying: 1. Security is the essence of this section. Unless otherwise required by code, electrically operated hardware shall remain secured in the event of power failure. Normal operation will require electrical energy to operate. Emergency operation shall be by key or other mechanical means. Security mode: B. . 1. Electric locks shall comply with UL standard 1034 for Burglary -Resistant Electric Locking Mechanisms. 2. Pin tumbler cylinders shall comply with UL Standard 437 Key Locks. A. Damage Prevention and Locking Security: 2.01 PRODUCT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. Parts shall be packed in suitable containers clearly labeled. Deliver and store maintenance/spare parts material.where directed. by Owner. 6 each 2 each 100 each 2 each a. Electric limit switches b. Electric lock motor assembly c. Torx tamper-resistant screws d. Torx Tool Sets Ouantitv SQare Parts 1. Furnish the Owner with the following maintenancelspare parts: A. Spare Parts: MAINTENANCE 1.09 . . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-8 95-052/12-95 1. Level 1 cylinders to have six pin tumblers and spindle type drivers with false picking grooves. 2. Manufacturer shall provide written certification that keying is free from unwanted interchange, and is not assigned to other institutions in close proximity. 3. Hardened inserts shall be placed to resist drilling of the tumblers. C. Security levels: 1. Key cylinders as directed by the approved keying schedule. Master and grandmaster cylinders as directed. 2. Combinations must be computer generated and guaranteed free from unwanted interchange. 3. Combinations must be new, unique, and unused for this project. B. Keying restrictions: Provide Maxi-Mogul cylinders for institutional locks and key switches. Provide tumblers that interact with each other to lock the cylinder. Provide for multiple cylinder grooves and master key sections for grooves. . A. 2.04 190 MAXI-MOGUL PIN TUMBLER CYLINDER 1. Mogul pin tumbler cylinder shall be two inch diameter brass with stainless steel balls, tumblers, and springs. Manufacturer shall provide written certification that keying is free from unwanted interchange, and is not assigned to other institutions in close proximity. Cylinders to comply with UtA37, and be labeled by a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory. D. Key Cylinders and Tumbler Sets: Mogul keys for pin tumbler locks are to be stamped from CDA-78200 hard- temper alloy, with a hardness of 85 on the Rockwell B scale. Furnish three keys for each grand-master, master, and change key combination. Stamp all keys as directed by the approved keying schedule. Steel primed for painting Satin chromium plated brass Satin stainless steel Galvanized (Outdoors) 600 (USP) 626 (US26D) 630 (US32D) FINISH ANSI/BHMA . 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Keys: 1. 2. Material finish shall comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 "Materials and Finishes Standard". Material finish for this project shall be: B. DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-9 95-052/12-95 . 1. Case and Cover: 10 Gauge steel. 2. Bolt: Investment cast stainless steel with hardened inserts, 1 inch throw deadlatch or deadbolt. 3. Bolt opening in case shall not allow access to internal mechanism. 4. Deadlock Lever: Stainless steel, adjustable for variations in door gap. 5. Roller Bolt: Investment cast stainless steel with stainless steel roller. 6. Operating Lever: Stainless steel to operate with solenoid, motor, deadlatch or deadbolt. 7. Strike: Investment cast stainless steel attached with screws in two directions. 8. Solenoid: 115V AC continuous duty with stainless steel guides. 9. Motor 115V AC Permanently lubricated fractional HP with thermal overload and positive brake. UL listed. 10 . Springs: Stainless steel. 11. Cylinder: Mogul with stainless steel balls and tumblers. C. Material: 120E Lock - Solenoid operated deadlatch with latchback. 120M Lock - Motor operated deadlatch with latchback. 120MI Lock - Motor operated deadlatch with latchback and interlock switch. 120MC Lock - Two position motor operated deadlatch with latchback. 120ED Lock - Solenoid retracted deadbolt with relock by key. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. . B. Lock Functions: A. Folger Adam jamb mounted 120 series medium security electric lock set shall include lock, plug connector, strike, and mogul cylinder for mechanical release. 2.05 JAMB MOUNTED PIN TUMBLER ELECTRIC LOCK FOR SWINGING DOORS F. Finish: See hardware schedule. 1. Manufacturer to provide certificate off conformance to specification prior to bid. 2. Cylinders with builders hardware size components are not acceptable. E. Performance: 1. Two inch diameter cylinder body, two inches long with key cylinder - Brass CDA36000. 2. Cam and retainers - Brass, CDA260 half hard or spring temper. 3. Tumbler springs - 304" stainless steel, full hard spring temper. 4. Cylinder balls -Carpenter No. 10 stainless steel .156 inch diameter. 5. Plug tumblers - 303 stainless steel - .156 inch diameter 6. Change tumblers - 303 stainless steel - .156 inch diameter. 7. Interacting tumblers- Brass CDA36000 - .156 inch diameter. 8. Key size - JI/2 x 3% inches, of CDA78200hard temper alloy.. Material : D. . . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-10 1. Material: a. Case - Malleable iron casting b. Cover - Cold fmished steel, 1,4 inch thick. c. Deadbolt - Cold finished steel, Electro-galvanized, * inch thick, % inch throw. 95-052/12-95 B. Folger Adam 10 series deadlock for access panels. A. General: Lever tumbler locks shall operate with paracentric key. Key all lever tumbler locks into one keying system. Key locks alike in groups or key differently to the approved keying schedule. Master keying is not permitted for lever tumbler locks. Include lock mounting, escutcheons, strike and mounting screws for a complete application. Use break off head security screws on lock mounting and strike. Use Torx tamper resistant screws on cylinder escutcheons. 2.07 MECHANICAL LEVER TUMBLER LOCKS 1. Locks shall comply with ULlOB Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Class A-3 hour rating 2. Cylinder shall comply with ULA37 Key Locks. C. Performance: . Case and cover - 12 gauge wrought steel, zinc chromate plated. Armored front - 10 gauge steel Faceplate - Satin stainless steel. Strike - Stainless steel, satin finish, 4% x 11,4 x .090 inch thick. Latchbolt - Stainless steel one-piece, 11/16" x 1 1/4",3/4" inch throw. Deadbolts - Stainless steel with hardened roller inserts, 11/16" x 1 112", I" throw. Internal parts and springs - Stainless steel or zinc chromatic steel. Lever set - "LTE" design solid stainless steel "U" shaped lever and heavy plate and track assembly. Maxi-Mogul cylinder - Refer to 2.04. 9. 7. 8. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Material: A. Folger Adam series D9300 security mortise lock set shall include lock, Maxi-Mogul Cylinder, strike, lever set, track, escutcheon and mounting screws. All exposed screws shall be Torx tamper resistant. 2.06 MORTISE PIN TUMBLER LOCK SET FOR SWINGING DOORS. . 1. Locks shall comply with UL 1034 Burglary Resistant Electric Locking Mechanisms. 2. Deadlatch model -1, shall comply with UL lOB Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Class A-3 Hour Rating. 3. Cylinder shall comply with UL 437 Key Locks. 4. Design locks to operate one million operations with minimal wear to parts. Performance: D. DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-11 95-052/12-95 . A. Folger Adam concealed door position switch.523, complete with switch body, mortise track, plug connector and arm. All exposed- screws shall be Torx tamper resistant. 2.08 DOOR POSITION SWITCH 1. Material: a. Case - Malleable iron casting. b. Cover - Cold finished steel, 'l4 inch thick. c. Latchbolt - Brass casting, 7/16 inch throw. d. Cylinder - Refer to 2.04 2. Performance: a. Key operated latch. Key removable in the latched position. b. Galvanize case, cover and lock mounting for use on exterior or shower doors. 3. Accessory: 17-4FP combination keeper-pull fabricated for food pass doors. D. Folger Adam 17M latch for food passes and shutters. Material : a. Case - Malleable .iron casting. b. Cover - Cold finished steel, 3/8 inch thick. c. Latchbolt - Cold finished steel, electro-galvanized, 1h inch thick with two 1/4 inch diameter hardened steel roller pins, 3/4 inch throw. d. Deadlock slide - Cold finished steel, electro-galvanized, with fence and deadlock cam. e. Cylinder - Investment cast, silicon brass alloy, for key one side (62) or key both sides (66). Performance: a. Lock shall comply with ULlOB Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Class A - 3 Hour Rating. b. Unlocks with a half turn of the key. Deadlocks with a full turn of the key in the opposite direction. Key removable in the locked and deadlocked positions. Accessories: a. Lock mountings - HM for hollow metal doors b. 60-4DB Strike - 3/16 inch steel with dust box to protect bolt, and mounting screws. 3. . 2. C. Folger Adam 60 series maximum security latch and key operated deadlock. 1. d. Cylinder - Investment cast, silicon brass alloy, for key one side (12) or key both sides (16). Performance: Comply with UL437 Key Locks a. Key operated deadlock. Key removable in the locked. and unlocked positions. b. Galvanize case, cover and lock mounting for use on exterior or shower doors. Accessories: a. Lock mountings - HM for hollow metal doors, P for plate doors. b. 10 4C strike -3/16 inch steel with dust box to protect bolt, and mounting screws. 3. 2. . . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-12 95-052/12-95 1. Material: a. Hinge leaves - Investment cast stainless steel, 3/16 inch thick by 41/2 inch high with integral cast stud. b. Hinge pin - Stainless steel 9/16 inch diameter with % inch diameter stainless ball and hardened steel races. 2. Performance: a. Hinges to be full mortise type with hospital tip, and have a fully concealed non-removable pin. Hinge pins held in place with set screws are not acceptable. A. Provide three 41hICS institutional hinges for detention hollow metal doors not larger than three feet wide by seven feet high. Supply one additional hinge for wider and taller doors. Attach each hinge with eight number 'A" x 20 flat head Torx tamper resistant screws. 2.10 HINGES 1. Size 5 x 4 x 1 inch deep. 2. Material: Stainless steel plate, with US32D finish. B. Folger Adam number 4 flush pull with four 1A inch Torx oval head tamper resistant screws. . Size 8% inches long with 51,4 inch hand hold and 11/2 inch finger clearance to door. Material: Manganese bronze, with US26D finish 2. 1. A. Folger Adam number 2 door pull with two % inch Torx oral head tamper resistant screws. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE a. Track - Aluminum, natural. b. Case and arm - Primed for paint. . Material a. Solid cold rolled steel case. b. 5/16 inch thick cold rolled steel arm. c. Extruded aluminum alloy track. d. Low friction track slider. e. Switch UL listed, SPDT contacts, 10 Amp rated. f. Field plug connector. Features: a. Body - Mortise into the 2 inch frame header. b. Track - Mortise into top edge of door. Self concealing with low friction slider. Swing - Allow a full 180 degree door swing. Switch adjustment - Preset at factory. Open signal - Factory adjust to send an open signal when the door moves 3/8 inch away from the stop. Allow for a fine adjustment without disassembly. f. Finish: 3. e. c. d. 2. 1. .(0;.".:' DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-13 95-052/12-95 . 1. Surface Mounted Door Closer: See plans for door swings. Where door could swing a full 1800, closer shall accommodate 1820 swing. Where door could swing only 900, closer shall accommodate 920 swing. Closer shall be provided with solid forged arm permanently connected. Closer shall be provided with fully drawn metal cover (no seams) attached with F.H. torx type security screws. Where doors with parallel arm closers would hit a wall or some other surface, provide a cast-in solid stop on the closer shoe. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. LCN Closers Series 451O/421O/421O-CUSH 2. Concealed Door Closers: All regulating screws shall be accessible through a heavy duty 3/8" steel mounting plate only when finish plates are removed. Installation of the finish plate shall fully conceal all adjustment mechanisms. Door' closer shall have an extra heavy duty, forged steel concealed arm. The low friction track roller shall be attached to the arm by a threaded mounting. Closer shall have a metal track designed to prevent jamming and to eject foreign Closers: All Closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder tested by an independent testing laboratory to exceed ten million (10,000,000) operating cycles. Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 1200 (400C) to-300F (-35oC). Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced. opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed and back check. All closers shall be by one manufacturer and carry a manufacturer's ten year warranty. All closers shall be furnished with F.H. .lOrx type security screws. All closers shall have a standard powder coated finish which is capable of surpassing 100 hours of salt spray testing. . A. 2.11 SECURITY DOOR CLOSERS. - 1. Material: a. Hinge leafs - Malleable iron, % inch thick by 3 inches high. b. Hinge pin- 1/2 inch diameter steel, case hardened. 2. Performance: a. Machine blind hole in female leaf for press-fit of hinge pin. Pin lObe non-removable. b. Provide food pass hinges with integral cast bracket to limit swing to 90 degrees. Door with food pass to act as shelf when opened. c. Finish: In general hinges shall be primed for paint. Galvanize hinges for exterior use and damp locations. B. Provide two three inch detention hinges for food pass door. Supply four 3fa inch flat head security screws with break~off head for attaching each hinge. Design hinges to pass the HMMMA"863-88 Guide Specifications for Detention Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. Integral cast studs on both leaves shall interlock with the hinge reinforcing to hold door closed in the event the screws are sheared off. Comply with ULlOB Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Class A-3 Hour Rating. Finish: In general-hinges shall be primed for paint. e. d. c. . b. . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-14 1. Fabricate housings from 7 gauge and covers from 10 gauge mild steel. Secure covers to housing with Torx tamper resistant screws. Baffle all openings leaving no more then 1/4 inch clearance. 95-052/12-95 D. All components must be new and of high quality. Manufacturer to document evidence of testing to over 500,000 operations. I. In the event of a power failure, each door may be unlocked with a paracentric key. The lock shall be mounted within the column. The door may then be moved manually to an open position with not less than 20 Ibs. of pressure on the door. Operator shall lock when manually moved to the open or closed positions. 2. During normal operation same key used for manual operation shall operate door electrically. This feature may be canceled at the electric control console. 3. Projecting lugs will not be permitted on the door. C. Provide each operator with a front door receiver and release column. . Unlock and open or close a 3'0" door in not more than eight seconds. Should power failure leave door in mid-travel, it may be manually opened or closed by applying not less than 20 pounds pressure on the door. Electrically reverse the direction of movement of door. Interlock sallyport or vestibule doors (0 where only one door can electrically be opened at a time. Normal force exerted by a corridor door in travel is 55 lbs. This pressure must be adjustable to suit door size and weight. Lock doors at the top and bottom in the open and closed positions. Locking points to be concealed within the rear vertical lock column. Front locking is not acceptable. Design mechanism to carry a maximum door weight of 450 pounds. Motors shall be sized specifically for corridor doors, and a minimum of 1/10 horse power. Operators that use cell door sized motors, are not acceptable. Any operator that locks the door in mid-travel, or exhibits a free-wheeling condition at any time, is not acceptable. 9. 7. 8. 6. 5. 3. 4. 1. 2. B. Corridor door functions: A. Provide each corridor door operator with remote electric locking, unlocking and motorized movement, with provisions for electric and mechanical key release in the front column. Each door operator shall include housing and cover, motor and chain drive assembly, vertical lock column with concealed 2-point rear locking, hanger, door rollers, track, terminal blocks, limit switches, and incidental parts for a complete system. 2.12 CORRIDOR SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR WITH MIE RELEASE FA-D5B . objects placed in the track. Where scheduled "DPS", closers shall have a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) door position switch (DPS), rated at 125/250V, 10.1 amp resistive load to interface with security system. A three wire connector harness with 12" 18 AWG leads shall be provided. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. LCN Closers Series 2210DPS DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-15 95-052/12-95 . A. Examine and inspect all surface, anchors and grounds that are to receive materials, assemblies, and equipment specified herein. Report all unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect. " Folger Adam 120E 120M D9300 10 60 17M 523 2 4 4 1/2 ICS 3FP D5B 190 Maxi-Mogul 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION Southern Steel 10120AE 10 120AM 10500 1010 1060 1017M 240CPS 212 214 204FMSS 203FP 3165L Mogul Cylinder Cross reference chart: 1. . A. Southern Steel, San Antonia, TX 2.16 OTHER APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. All hardware shall be attached with pin-centered hexa-Iobal "torx" type fasteners. A. Provide door seals as indicated by National Guard Products, Memphis, TN. 2.15 SECURITY FASTENERS 2.14 WEATHERSTRIPPING, THRESHOLDS A. .Provide kickplates, stops, wall bumpers as indicated in the security hardware schedule by Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Rockwood,PA Fabricate front and rear columns from 7 gauge mild steel. Fabricate their covers from 10 gauge mild steel. Secure the rear locking column cover from within the housing. Secure front column cover with security screws. Hanger, guide and guide angle to be 1/4 inch steel. Turn door rollers from solid 3 3/4 inch diameter steel with 3/8 inch deep groove to engage with I/zinch solid.cold drawn track. -Provide anti-friction sealed ball bearings with hardenc::d races and grease shields. Attach with high alloy treated steel roller studs: Provide eccentric bushing adjustment to level the doors. . 2.13 DOOR TRIM 3. 4. 2. . . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-16 95-052/12-95 E. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for the installation complying with templates or detail drawings and project conditions. D. During installation, protect adjacent surfaces and detention equipment from damage. Work shall be free from scratches, dents, permanent discolorations and other defects; remove and replace damaged parts, surfaces with imperfections, or damaged during installation or thereafter before time of final project acceptance. C. Install in alignment, free from warp, twist or distortion plumb, level and true. Comply with reviewed shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for both handling and installation of the products for particular conditions of installation in each case, except where more stringent requirements are indicated or specified, or where project conditions require extra precautions of provisions for satisfactory performance of work. where printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding. B. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels and being visually parallel. A. Do not install products which are observed to be defective. . INST ALLA nON 3.03 G. Check "roughing-in" and field dimensions prior to beginning work. F. Coordinate with other trades for proper location of roughing-in services and service connections specified elsewhere. E. Distribute all items to installation locations immediately prior to installation, complying with all applicable product handling requirements. Coordinate timing of distribution. D. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of all products. Coordinate delivery of such products to project site. C. A certain location and arrangement of anchorage required to accommodate work; coordinate with other trades where necessary to make provisions for installation of all products. Coordinate delivery of such products to project site. B. Protect adjacent surfaces while installing products against damage, stains. Prepare same to provide correct installation of Detention Equipment. A. Prior to installation, meet at project site for purpose of reviewing products and installation methods selected, procedures to be followed in performing the work and coordination. . PREPARATION 3.02 B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-17 95-052/12-95 . C. During installation, maintain storage and work area, and installation locations, in neat, orderly, broom clean condition. B. Remove all non-permanent labels, non-permanent protective coatings and identifying marks, and thoroughly clean all surfaces, remove foreign materials prior to inspections intended to set date of substantial completion. Clean concealed work similarly, prior to enclosure. A. Comply with Division 1 requirements. 3.05 CLEANING C. Work shall be free from scratches, dents, permanent discoloration and other defects; remove and replace damaged parts, surfaces with imperfections, or damaged during installation or thereafter before time of final project acceptance. Prior to touch-up painting, remove objectionable foreign material from metal surfaces including connections. Touch-up welds, bolted connections, and all abradedldamaged areas with shop applied finish of metal primer paint. B. Adjust and lubricate moving parts to operate smoothly an quietly, without binding. When connections to electrical power are made, test all electrically operating or sensing items and adjust as required to provide proper functions. A. . 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND TOUCH-UPS J. Owner Furnished Items: Any items indicated or specified as Owner Furnished detention equipment shall be installed under this section. I. Handling: Where drawings show direction of swing or hand of each door leaf, furnish andlor install each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as indicated. H. Install sealants and/or epoxy grout around frame edges as indicated conforming to Division 3 and Division 7 requirements. G. Field welding or other field attachment of metal assemblies to embedded anchorages shall be accomplished by Supplier-Erector. Where metal assemblies are to be set into concrete or concrete unit masonry, brace such assemblies. Where adjustable anchors are required, furnish anchors to concrete unit masonry for setting. Concrete unit masonry trade will also grout these frames, including intermediate mullions of tubular elements (provide . grouting and curing instructions). Where: aSsemblies are to have non-adjustable anchors, or expansion anchors-, or. where anchorage must be pre-set prior to setting' frames in substrates, anchorage attachment to assemblies shall be by Supplier-Erector. Comply with A WS code for welding procedures, including appearance and quality of welds made, .and methods used in correcting welding work. Where surfaces are to be exposed to view, grind welds smooth; finish holes, defects and other imperfections so surfaces will be smooth when pai~ted. Partially welded metal to metal joints exposed shall be filled with metal body putty and ground smooth prior to painting. F. . _J . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-18 95-052/12-95 NOTES: DOORS @ SALL YPORTS INTERLOCK. 2210DPS 1000 402 950S (@ SALLY PORT DOORS) FA 41/z-ICS FA-126-M-I-01-M 1 96 FA-2 HINGES LOCKSET PUSH PULL DOOR CLOSERI POSITION SWITCH KICK PLATE WALL BUMPER THRESHOLD EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # S-l PHINIZY ROAD FACILITY B. Provide the following: . Prior to bidding, any discrepancies between the Drawings and Specifications requiring clarification or change shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for appropriate action. The Supplier-Erector shall compare and verify his hardware schedule while in preparation with the Contract Drawings and include other finish hardware items (suitable, and equivalent quality) necessary to complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. 1. A. The quantities of hardware listed in this schedule are correct, subject to the following: 3.08 HARDWARE SCHEDULE B. Include graphic and narrative descriptions of all equipment defining parts and their assembly; function; trouble-shooting situations and repair options; repair, maintenance, replacement, and adjustment instructions. A. Provide operating/maintenance manuals and instructions for detention equipment products provided; also comply with Division 1 requirements. Include complete listing of spare parts (with re-order part numbers and re-order procedures), a list of contact persons (including addresses, phone numbers) for both routine and emergency advice, and a schedule for all maintenance activities required for each appropriate item provided. 3.07 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MATERIALS B. Deliver to location(s) as directed by the Architect in properly packed cartons, and obtain receipt when delivered. . A. Provide the quantities of extra maintenance/spare parts as specified in Part One of this section. MAINTENANCEISPARE PARTS 3.06 . HEADING # S-2 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HINGES FA-41/2 ICS LOCKSET FA-66-HM X 60-4DB PULL FA-2 (OUTSIDE ONLY) CLOSER 4510 (4210 CUSH @ OUTSWING DOORS) SHUTTER LOCK FA-17-M1 X 17-4F (@ OBSERVATION DOOR) WALL BUMPER HEADING # S-3 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 11/2 PAIR HINGES FA-41/2 ICS 1 LOCKSET FA-122E-1-01-Ml 1 DOOR CLOSER/ POSITION SWITCH 2210 DPS 1 PULL (OUTSIDE) FA-2 1 PULL (INSIDE) FA-4 1 WALL BUMPER 402 1 FOOD PASS LOCK FA-17M-M1 X 17-4F (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) 2 FOOD PASS HINGES FA-3P (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) HEADING # S-4 . EACH DOOR TO HAVE: llh PAIR HINGES FA-41/2 ICS 1 LOCKSET F A-122M-I-01-M 1 1 DOOR POSITION SWITCH 534 1 PULL (OUTSIDE) FA-2 1 PULL (INSIDE) FA-4 1 WALL BUMPER 402 1 FOOD PASS LOCK FA-17M-Ml X 17-4F (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) 2 FOOD PASS HINGES FA-3P (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) HEADING # S-5 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: llh PAIR HINGES FA-4I/2 ICS 1 LOCKSET FA-122E-I-0I-MI I PULL (OUTSIDE) FA-2 1 PULL (INSIDE) FA-2 1 CLOSERIDOOR POSITION SWITCH 2210DPS I WALL BUMPER 402 I FOOD PASS LOCK FA-l:ZM~Ml X 17-4F (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 95-052/12-95 11194-19 I J . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-20 HINGES FA-4V2 ICS LOCKSET FA-66-HM X 60-4DB (X GALV. @ EXTERIOR DOORS) I CLOSER 4510 (4210 CUSH @ OUTSWINGING DOORS) 1 WALL BUMPER 402 1 SET DOOR SEALS 130SA (@ EXTERIOR DOORS) 1 THRESHOLD 426 (@ EXTERIOR DOORS) 1 DOOR BOTTOM SEAL 202SA (@ EXTERIOR DOORS) EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # S-9 DOORS INTERLOCK NOTE: SIZE DOOR SEALS AND DOOR BOTTOM SEALS TO DOOR MANUFACTURERS DETAILS. 1 LOCKING DEVICE FA-D5B X EXTENDED DOOR BOTTOMS 2 PULLS FA-4 1 THRESHOLD 426 (@ EXTERIOR DOORS) 1 SET DOOR SEALS _6_A SERIES (@ EXTERIOR DOORS) 1 DOOR BOTTOM SEAL 6 A SERIES (@ EXTERIOR DOORS) . EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # S-8 2210DPS 402 950S 130SA HINGES LOCKSET PUSH PULL CLOSER/DOOR POSITION SWITCH W ALL BUMPER THRESHOLD SET DOOR SEALS FA-41/2 ICS FA-126ED-3-04-M1(X GALV 96 FA-2 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: HEADING # S-7 FA-3FS FA-12 X P PAIR HINGES LOCKSET EACH CHASE DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # S-6 . SHUTTER LOCK' FA-17M-Ml X 17-4F (@ OBSERVATION DOOR) FOOD PASS HINGES FA-3P (@ FOOD PASS DOORS) 95-052/12-95 1 2 DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-21 HINGES FA-4 112 ICS ELECTRIC HINGE FA-4 112 EH SET HEAD & FOOT BOOTS FA 105AM X 105FBR X 105-4BL LOCKSET F A66 X HM X 60-4BL . EACH PAIR TO HAVE: HEADING #S-14 NOTES: BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY GATE MANUFACTURER. 126ED-3-04-M1 X GALV. 421O-CUSH X SRI X SPECIAL PLATE F A-4 1f2 ICS 126E-I-01-Ml X GALV. 96 FA-2 2210 DPS 950S 130SA SLllHD 590 94P X 94L 2210DPS 950S FA-4112 ICS 126ED-3-04-Ml LTE-D9301 LOCKSET CLOSER EACH GATE TO HAVE: HEADING #S-13 HINGES LOCKSET PUSH PULL CLOSER THRESHOLD SET DOOR SEALS EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING #5-12 CONTINUOUS HINGE ROLLER LATCH PULL SET W ALL BUMPER EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # S-11 HINGES LOCKSET . PASSAGE SET CLOSERIDOOR POSITION SWITCH THRESHOLD EACH DOOR TO HAVE: HEADING # S-1O 95-052/12-95 . 1 1 I 1 1 1 . 1 1 1 . . DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11194-22 . . END OF SECTION 11194 FA-534 4510 X ST 402 DOOR POSITION SWITCHES CLOSER W ALL BUMPERS 95-052/12-95 1 2 2 SECURITY ACCESSORIES AND FURNITURE 11195-1 95.-052/12-95 . B. Note anchor locations in shop drawing submittal. A. Manufacturer and installer shall be available for a Security Coordination Meeting to be held at the job site and scheduled by the Contractor. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING C. All welding will be examined for complete penetration and fusion. Welds must remove parent metal when tested to failure. Refer to welding standards defined in A WS D 1.1-85. B. Security Furniture Manufacturer shall employ welders currently qualified under A WS B2.1-84 to perform type of work required. A. The security furniture manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in this type of work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. American Welding Society (A WS) A WS D 1.1-85 Structural Welding Code A WS B2.1-84 Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1.03 . A. Submit shop drawings on each item listed above in a bound folder. These may be manufacturers catalogue cuts; however, they shall include mounting details and hardware. Any templates required for fabrication of opening required to install equipment shall be included in the shop drawing submittal. When this booklet is submitted it shall have a title cover listing job name, specification section name and number, Contractor's name, and date. Submit six copies for approval. 1.02 SUBMITTALS 1. Unit Masonry 2. Painting B. Related work specified elsewhere: A. Furnish and install all security accessories as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.01 DESCRIPTION PART 1 - GENERAL SECURITY ACCESSORIES & FURNITURE SECTION 11195 . . SECURITY ACCESSORIES AND FURNITURE 11195-2 95-052/12-95 10" x 14" chrome plated steel mirror. Catalog #4088. Note: Mirrors to be securely fastened to wall with tamper resistant screws using #BBBPA and mounting back plate. Mount at 5'-4" in men's cells and 4'-9" in women's cells. Mount (2) mirrors in accessible cells. (One to be mounted at 40" AFF.) C. Mirror (2) Heavy duty steel wall mounted bunks. Catalog #BBWM32. Note: Bunks to be welded to plate embeds. Provide (1) #DR2424I 0 storage drawer for each bunk in the facility. B. Wall Mounted Bunk: Four person heavy-duty pedestal table with 10 gauge stainless steel top. Catalog #SBB514SS. Note: Table to be securely fastened to floor. A. Dayroom Table: . DESCRIPTION OF ACCESSORIES 2.02 1. KLN Steel Products, San Antonio, TX 2. Southern Steel, San Antonio, TX 3. Jails, Minster, OH 4. WilIo, Inc., Decatur, AL 5. Habersham Metal Products, Cornelia, GA 6. Georgia Correctional Industries, Tucker, GA 7. N .M. Industries, Atlanta, GA B. Acceptable Manufacturers pursuant to the quality established by the specified product. Manufacturer's products listed below must meet or exceed the specifications of the selected product. 1. Bob Barker Company, Inc., Fuquay, NC (800) 334-9880 A. Specified Manufacturer: 2.0 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS D. Wrap, label, crate and protect fmished items against damage in transit or on job to insure there is no deterioration or damage prior to, during, or after installation. . Security Furniture, mounting hardware, and mounting instructions shall be shipped together cartoned for protection. c. SECURITY ACCESSORIES AND FURNITURE 11195-3 95-052/12-95 . Security shower curtain and rod - TSC62 & BBROD36 (40"W). Provide all materials necessary for a complete installation. M. Shower Curtain and Rod "Plexi-View" acrylic convex mirror #A-30. 1. Convex Mirror Four compartment gun locker - GL4C. Provide 2" x 2" angle frame for recessed mounting. Recess locker and frame at Public Lobby. K. Gun Locker Willo swing stools - #673 with 24" arm extension. Provide weld plate for wall attachment. J. Swinging Stools Stainless steel safety hook with recessed mounting wings. Catalog #BB525. Mount at 5'-4" AFF. Clothes Hook 1. 16 gauge V ALffEC open shelving 36"W x 24"D x 75"H, Catalog #ZVT429. Paint fmish to be Dove Gray. See manufacture's specifications for hardware and installation instructions. ." Shelving H. Heavy-duty TV bracket, wall mounted with swivel arm and tilting TV tray. Catalog #043-531-02 as manufactured by Bob Barker Co., Inc. or approved equal. Note: TV bracket to be securely fastened to wall. (Bracket is pre finished) Mount at 6' -8" AFF. G. TV Bracket Heavy-duty desk with stainless steel. seats and 10 gauge stainless steel. top. Catalog #10680. Note: Desks shall be securely fastened to floor with tamper resistant bolts. F. Desks Stationary stools. Catalog #SBB517. Note: Stools shall be secUrely fastened to floor with tamper resistant bolts. E. Stools Storage shelf with collapsible clothes hooks. Catalog #BB519. Note: Shelf to be securely fastened to wall with tamper resistant screws and painted with epoxy paint by Contractor, mounted at 5'-0" AFF. Storage Shelf with Clothes Hooks D. . . SECURITY ACCESSORIES AND FURNITURE 11195-4 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 11195 . A. Upon completion, remove all trash and debris resulting from work in this section. 3.02 CLEAN UP B. All items bolted to concrete shall be secured with Hilti HV A Adhesive Anchor System (1/2" x 4-1/4" embedment minimum). Bolt heads to be tack welded to prevent removal. A. Install the security accessories in accordance with the drawings and the manufacturer's written instructions. Exact location of items shall be as indicated. Installation shall be coordinated with the security hollow metal manufacturer and security glazing manufacturer. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION B. All primed surfaces requiring paint shall be epoxy painted per Section 09900. . A. All steel detention equipment herein specified, except stainless steel, chrome plated, and aluminum items, shall be primed with one shop coat of red oxide metallic primer before shipment from factory. FINISHING 2.02 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPl\.1ENT ] 1400'- ] 95-052/12-95 . B. Submit each alternate giving the following: Item #, Manufacturer, Model # and cost plus freight. List accessories to be provided as indicated in the prime specification. Furnish a cut sheet for each alternate showing accessories as specified. A Submit request for approval of substitution in writing ten (10) days prior to bid for approval. Verbal approval not allowed. Approved substitutions are printed in Architects addendum. 1.04 SUBSTITUTION D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish two (2) manuals containing instructions, warranties and part lists of bought out items under this section. Bound manuals in hard binders. Furnish a list of local service agencies for specified equipment. C. Product Data: Submit seven (7) sets each of complete brochures, cuts and technical data of manufactured items. Furnish brochures bound with cut sheets in numerical order. B. Shop Drawings: Draw to a scale of not less than %" equal to I '-0" and show special fabricated items such as worktables, sinks, dishtables, etc. Provide one (1) Mylar sepia and one (1) blue print. Connection Point Drawings: Draw to scale of not less than y." equals 1'-0". Show points of connection for equipment finnished. Dimension and label connection points as to requirements of connections. Provide one (1) Mylar sepia and orie (1) blue print. A . 1.03 SUBMITTAL DATA D. Furnish safety devices required to comply With the aforementioned regulations. C. Certificates of acceptance or of completion as required and issued by the State, Municipal, or other authorities are procured by the food service equipment contractor. B. Furnish accessories with equipment needed to comply with governing codes. A. Permits and Certificates: Comply with laws, codes, ordinances and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn and speCified and give the required notices. Obtain and pay for work requiring an inspection certificate by local authorities and/or any governing body. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Work covered in this division of the specifications includes supplying the equipment and fabricated items specified and itemized in this division: Deliver equipment, set in place and make it ready for final connections by other trades. 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-2 95-052/12-95 A Comply with current state, city and county building and health codes. 1.08 CODES B. Compressor: Provide an additional four (4) years parts warranty. A Warrant parts and labor of kitchen equipment supplied under this section for one year from time of fmal acceptance. When manufacturers warranty is for a greater period of time it takes precedence. 1.07 WARRANTY F. Demonstrations: Demonstrate the use, care and maintenance of the equipment supplied to the proper personnel at such time as designated by the Architect. E. The mechanical and electrical drawings and their accompanying specifications determine related requirements of the work. Cooperation is required of the contractor with other trades to insure a complete satisfactory installation. Contractor verifies electrical and mechanical plans with manufacturers supplied information. . The contractor is responsible for the satisfactory operation of the assembled equipment. Initial start-up of installed equipment is required. Correct defects or deficiencies noted to the satisfaction of the Architect. D. C. Requirements: The drawings indicate the desired basic arrangement and dimensions of the equipment. Minor deviations may be substituted for approval provided basic requirements are met and no major rearrangements of services to the equipment is required to effect the proposed alteration. Deviations made will be at no expense to the Owner. Submit proposed or anticipated deviations in drafted or written form to the Architect for approval. B. It is the responsibility of the contractor to insure that the equipment can be entered through openings in the building before doors and walls are finished. A Plans: The plans indicate the location of the equipment and slight changes due to the varying dimension of equipment and wall construction will be permitted with approval in writing by the Architect. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS C. Schedule delivery of equipment with contractor. B. Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with self adhesive protective paper of a type recommended by the metal manufacturer. Do not remove until equipment is installed and ready for cleaning and start-up. . A Protect metal finishes from damage during shipping, storage, handling, installation and construction of other work in the same spaces. Wrap and crate each item of equipment as needed for protection from damage. PRODUCT HANDLING 1.05 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 3 95-052/12-95 . K. Manufacture pieces of equipment in compliance with Standards Numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8, where applicable, of National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratories and carry the NSF Seal of Approval. 1. Applicable Specifications: Manufacture special fabrication items such as sinks, worktables, counters, etc. in compliance with Standard No.2 of the National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratory and carry the NSF Seal of Approval. 1. Unless otherwise specified, furnish material that is not lighter than twenty (20) gauge. H. Gauges: Use the same standards set forth by the U. S. standards for sheet metal for specified galvanized, aluminum and stainless steel metals. G. When stainless steel sheets have grain running in different directions joint sheets and run welds and finishes in such a manner as to make the sheets appear as one continuous product. Use electric arc or oxyacetylene gas for welding. Use a rod of the same material for welding and fully penetrate the entire length of the joint so it is flat without buckles, voids or imperfections. Ground welds flush with adjacent surfaces conditioned to eliminate low spots and polished to match adjacent metal. Use extreme care to avoid overheating or undercutting causing buckling or discoloration. Deburr edges of materials to eliminate danger when cleaning. Rewelded, grind and polished shear cuts or bends which tend to open the surface of the metal. Grind and file edges so there are not be any sharp edges and/or corners. . F. E. Finish for galvanized steel is two coats ofHammertone Gray paint. D. Provide copper-bearing galvanized steel as manufactured by ARMCO. Provide copper-bearing . steel for galvanized angles or channels as specified for galvanized steel sheets. Protect fabricated edges of galvanized steel sheets or angles by a special metallization process to give fabricated edges and surfaces equal protection to the finished surfaces. 14 Gauge - Not less than 0.075 inch 16 Gauge - Not less than 0.063 inch 18 Gauge - Not less than 0.050 inch 20 Gauge - Not less than 0.038 inch * * * * . C. Use stainless steel sheets with a mill finish of not less than commercial #4 on the exposed side and not less than #2 on the unexposed side. Stretch and level stainless steel with a tlllcknessof- . B. Use stainless steel made of austenitic steel alloy, 8% nickel, 18% chromium, not more than 0.2% of any other alloying elements and mUst meet the requirements for type 302 and type 304 stainless steel. Type 430 stainiess steel (straight chrome, no nickel) is not acceptable. A Provide new materials of the best quality and without flaw. 2.01 MATERIALS . PART 2 - PRODUCTS . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-4 95-052/12-95 1. These specifications are intended to cover the installation of the refrigeration equipment i.e.: condensing unit, coils and other fittings, devices and accessories required to complete the refrigeration system as shown or called for on the refrigeration plans and schedules of the food service drawings. The omission from these specifications or from the refrigeration plans and schedules of express reference to any parts necessary for the complete installation is not to be construed as releasing the Contractor from responsibility for furnishing such parts. 2. The Contractor furnishes (if not supplied by the Equipment Contractor) and installs any necessary refrigerant piping, fittings, solenoid valve, thermostatic expansion valve (if supplied loose), room thermostat, refrigerant oil, insulation and fittings and accessories to make complete installation unless otherwise specified, together with labor required to complete the installation and perform the service covered by the specification. The Contractor is responsible for unloading, assembling and installing the condensing unit, coils, and other refrigeration equipment unless otherwise specified. The Contractor also arranges for the removal of crating and packing materials and leaves the uncrating area and the equipment area clean and neat. B. Scope of Work . "Contractor" means the refrigeration installing contractor. "Owner" is (insert owner's name). "Manufacturer" means the company or companies which will supply various equipment such as fixtures, condensing units, evaporators, etc. "Equipment Dealer" is company purchasing the equipment. "Others" means other than the refrigeration contractor, i.e. plumbing, electrical or general contractor. 4. 5. I. 2. 3. A. Definition of Terms 2.02 REMOTE REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS I. Gas equipment bears label for current standard ANSI Z83 as certified by American Gas Association (AGA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Electronic Testing Laboratories (ETL). N. Furnish gas burning equipment for operation with the type of gas supplied and approved by the American Gas Association. Conform installation of equipment to the standards as set forth by the American Gas Association. Furnish gas equipment with safety pilot and one hundred percent (I 00%) safety cut -off protections. M. Provide electrically heated and motor driven fixtures with the current shown on the electrical plans. Mount motor starters, switches and controls for these items of equipment. 1. Electrical equipment bears label for current standard ANSI UL 197 as certified by American Gas Association (AGA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Electronic Testing Laboratories (ETL). . Conform electrical equipment to the standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Provide enclosed case type equipment control switches that are conveniently located and comply with electrical codes. L. FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 5 95-052/12-95 . 1. Tubing is installed in a neat workmanlike manner with horizontal suction line runs sloped ~" per 10 feet towards the compressor. Lines are supported at intervals of 8 feet and suitably anchored. Use hydrazorb cushion type clamps to prevent line chafing. 2. Where a vertical riser of more than 4 feet occurs in the suction line a suitable P-trap is installed at the bottom of the riser. Vertical risers of more than 20 feet are trapped every 10 feet and the line size adjusted. "LD" trap horizontal runs over 30 feet every 15 feet. 3. Liquid and suction lines are of the size recommended by the ManufactUrer as shown in the installation manual. So as to avoid excessive pressure drops in the liquid line and to insure adequate velocities in. the suction line for proper oil return to the compressor under minimum load conditions at the lowest saturated suction pressure. 4. Solder joints are brazed with a suitable high temperature silver solder alloy containing not less than 15% silver. Use a solder with at least 35% silver content ~m %,pper to steel, copper to br~,.b~~s to steel or steel to steel joints. During the . - F. Refrigeration Piping Installation Unless otherwise specified, refrigeration piping is refrigeration grade type L or type K hard drawn degreased sealed copper tubing. Extreme care should be taken to insure that refrigeration piping remains clean and dry. It is kept sealed except when cutting or fabricating. Each length is inspected and swabbed with a cloth soaked in refrigeration oil if any dirt, fillings or visible moisture are present. Sweat type fittings are wrought copper or forged brass. Elbows and return bends are the long radius type. If flare fittings are required they are the frost proof type (except on connections not subject to condensation) and constructed of forged brass. Solder joints are preferred and used wherever practical. 3. . 2. 1. E. Refrigerant Piping Materials I. Refrigerants used are R.22, R-502, R134a or R404 as specified in the item specification. NOTE: Do not use R134a outdoors. 2. Deliver the refrigerant to the job site in the original container. D. Refrigerants 1. Provide proper clearance for adequate airflow around condensing unit. 2. When condensing unit is located more than 70' from coil consult manufacturer for compressor resizing and/or line sizing. . C. Compressor Location No additional payment over and above the contract price will be made unless the Contractor received a written order by the Owner or his representative for the addition. The refrigeration equipment supplied by the Equipment Dealer for the Owner is as .. follows: See equipment items for specific systems description. . Refer to installation and-maintenance manuals supplied with equipment for line size refrigerant charts and tables. 5: 4. 3. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 6 95-052/12-95 1. Expansion valve, solenoid valve and room thermostat are provided installed on standard single coil systems. If supplied loose for item specification then: a. Mount the valve on the distributor inside of the coil cabinet. Locate the expansion valve bulb on a horizontal length of suction line between the unit and the suction line P-trap. Never locate bulb on the vertical riser. Make sure there is a tight contact between the bulb and the suction line and insulate the bulb with the suction line. b. Install the liquid line solenoid valve in the liquid line close to the coils, but before the liquid line tees to the evaporators, for convenience of the electrical connection. Precautions are taken to avoid overheating the valve during the brazing process. 1. Component Installation and Adjustment . All electrical is supplied by Others (Electrical Contractor). Contractor is responsible for condensing unit/evaporator coil interconnecting control wiring connections made. Wires are supplied and pulled to a single connection point under the direction of the Contractor. Contractor supplies and installs drain line heater. Contractor verifies that the power supply, voltage, frequency and phase coincide with the condensing unit and coil data plate. Check wiring against manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Field wiring is in accordance with the National Electrical Code and/or other local codes that may apply. 3. 4. 1. 2. H. Electrical 1. Unless otherwise specified the evaporator condensate drain line is the responsibility of the Contractor. This will include the piping, insulation and drain line heater installation. 2. Drain lines are of hard copper tubing. Slope lines adequately, to drain by gravity, any water accmnulated from condensing, defrosting or cleaning operations. Plumbing connections are made in accordance with local plumbing codes. Condensate lines from the refrigerated fixture are trapped and run to an open drain. Never connect them directly to the sewer system. Install a threaded union in the most accessible location near the evaporator for ease of removal and cleaning. Install drain line so that it does not interfere with door opening or the stacking of shelves. The freezer drain line is wrapped with a self regulating type heat tape and insulated to prevent condensate build-up and freezing. G. Evaporator Drain Line . brazing operation an inert gas such as dry nitrogen is bled through the piping at very low pressure to prevent oxidation and scaling. Limit the amount of soldering paste or flux to the minimum required to prevent contamination of the solder joint internally. Flux only the male portion of the connection never the female. After brazing remove surplus flux with a damp cloth. After the final leak test refrigerant lines exposed to high ambient conditions are insulated to reduce heat pick-up and prevent the formation of flash gas in the liquid line. The suction line is insulated with %" wall closed cell type insulation such as Halstead or Armstrong "Armaflex" or equal. The insulation fits the tubing snugly and is applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 6. 5. FOODSER~CEEQUWMENT 11400-7 I. The compressors and condensing units will normally be delivered to the job with sufficient oil for the average installation. Check the compressor for proper oil level and if necessary add sufficient oil to bring the level to the center of the crankcase sight glass. Use only the refrigeration oil recommended by the compressor manufacturer. Oil is delivered to the job in factory sealed, unopened containers. 2. Check electrical connections. Be sure they are tight. 3. Remove upper mounting nuts on the compressor feet. a. Remove the shipping spacers and install the neoprene washers onto the compressor feet. Replace the upper mounting nuts and washers allowing 1/16" space between the mounting nut and the neoprene spacer. . When the refrigeration connections have been completed test the system at not more than 150 psi with refrigerant an9 dry nitrogen. (Comply with local codes if different test pressures are required). Sufficient refrigerant is charged into the system to raise the pressure to 35 psi and dry nitrogen added to obtain the desired test pressure. Leak testing is performed. with an electronic leak detector unless permission is granted by Owner that a halide torch may.be used. Refrigeration piping is not acceptable unless it is gas tight. Final test pressure is maintained for a minimum period of 12 hours and inspected by the General Contractor. The system is evacuated with a vacuum pump, specifically manufactured for vacuum duty, having a capability of pulling a vacuwn of 50 microns or less. Evacuation of the system is never done by the use of the refrigeration compressor. The pump is connected to both the low and high side evacuation valves with copper tube or high vacuum hoses. (Yo. J.D. minimum).. The compressor service valves should remain closed. A high vacuum gauge capable of registering pressure in microns is attached to the system for pressure readings. To check system pressure a hand valve can be closed to isolate the system and check the pressure. Evacuate the system to an absolute pressure of 1500 microns. Break the vacuum to 2 psi with the refrigerant used in the systeIIi. Repeat the evacuation process again breaking the vacuum with the refrigerant. Install a drier of the required size in the liquid line, open the compressor suction and discharge valves and evacuate to an absolute pressure not exceeding 500 microns. Leave the vacuum pump running for not less.than 2 hours without interruption. Raise the system pressure to 2 psi.with refrigerant and remove the vacuum pwnp. Refrigerant is charged from the original drums.through a combination filter-drier. Charge the system by means of a charging access fitting in the liquid line. Weigh the refrigerant drum so that an accurate record is kept of the weight of refrigerant put in the system. If refrigerant is added to the system through the suction side of the compressor charge in vapor form only. The receiver size on the condensing units is listed in the installation bulletin. Long liquid line runs might require an additional amount of refrigerant added. . The Contractor is required to reclaim and recover any excess refrigerants not used in the charging of the systems. No refrigerant is discharged into the atmosphere. 95-052/12-95 . K. Start-up 5. 4. . 3. 2. J. Testing, Evacuation and Charging I. Install room thermostat behind its evaporator with the sensing bulb in the return air stream. Where there are two or more evaporators in a single room install the thermostat at the evaporator closest to the main door. c. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-8 95-052/12-95 C. Verify the finished ceiling height and clear height to structure to ensure that the range hood and equipment will fit correctly and meet codes for the manufacturers recommended height from the finished floor. If there is a discrepancy notify the Architect in writing. If the Architect B. Verify electrical, plumbing, gas and ventilation requirements of manufacturers listed on the specification and plans. The food service equipment contractor is responsible for changes that are required and for coordination of changes with the general contractor. A Furnish itemized bids using the following categories: Item #, Quantity, Description, Manufacturer, Model # and Unit Cost which includes shipping, overhead, profit and required handling. 2.03 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS . The Contractor is responsible for the proper adjustment of controls in the system. After the system has been charged and has operated for a minimum of two hours at normal operating conditions without any indication of malfunction allow it to operate on its automatic controls. A thorough recheck of the system operation and components is made within 24 hours. Check the compressor discharge and suction pressures. If they are not within system design limits determine why and take corrective action. Check thermostatic expansion valve for proper operation. The superheat of the expansion valve using the pressure/temperature method is between 60 F and 80 F. Using suitable instruments carefully check line voltage and amperage at the compressor terminals. Voltage must be within 10% of that indicated on the unit nameplate. If high or low voltage is indicated notify the power company and the General Contractor. If amperage draw is excessive immediately determine the cause and take corrective action. On three phase motor compressors check to see that a balanced load is drawn by each phase. Observe the compressor oil level. Add oil if necessary to bring level to center of sight glass. Check defrost controls (time clock at condensing unit, defrost termination switch and fan delay switch at evaporator) for initiation and termination setting and length of defrost period. Check crankcase heater operation. FILL OUT WIRING DIAGRAMS, INSTRUCTION BULLETINS, ETC. AT- T ACHED TO THE CONDENSING UNITS FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. 8. 9. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 1. 2. 1. Operation and Check-out . b. Failure to do this may result in a vibration eliminator failure and a loss of refrigerant. Check the low pressure control for cut-in and cut-out points, oil pressure control, safety controls and other controls and adjust if necessary. Check fan motors on air cooled condensers, evaporators, etc. for proper rotation. Check fan motor mounts and blades for proper alignment and tightness. After the compressor is started continue charging until system has sufficient refrigerant for proper operation. Observe system pressures during charging and initial operation. Do not overcharge. Remember that bubbles in the sight glass may be caused by a restriction as well as a shortage of refrigerant. Do not leave the unit unattended until the system has reached operating condition. 7. 6. 5. 4. FOODSER~CEEQU~N.ffiNT I 1400 - 9 95-052/I2-95 . a. Type 304 stainless steel construction including underbracing. b. 10" high backsplash. 3. Furnish with the following: a. Fully welded construction. 2. Construct table as indicated in section 11400. 1. Fabricate one (1) receiving table 5'-0" x 2'-6" x 2-10". Item 2 - Receiving Table a. Mars Air Doors b. Dynaforce Corporation 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. a. Electrical- .73 kw, V. hp, 7.5 amps, 120V/60/I0 3. Service requirements: Mount at door. Mounted and installed by electrical contractor. Control wiring run by electrical contractor from microswitch to fan motors. c. . a. b. 2. Furnish a microswitch. 1. Furnish one (1) heavy duty fly fan, The Aristocrat, Model # ASR-I-48AA, as manufactured by Berner International Corporation. Item 1 - Fly Fan 2.04 EQUIPMENT LIST I. Ace Fabrication 2. Atlanta Kitchen Equipment 3. Southern Equipment Fabricators;. -Inc. 4. Sta-Fab The following fabricators are approved for this specification. F. When there is a discrepancy in the pl~ and specifications notify the Architect/Consultant in writing for 'clarifications. Owner is not responsible for additional cost differences to make corrections when clarification is not obtained. E. Furnish a certificate of verification for each piece of equipment specified with type 316 stainless steel. D. is not notified, prior to the hood being constructed, the contractor is financially responsible for any changes that must be made. . . FOODSER~CEEQUWNffiNT 11400 - 10 95-052/12-95 1. Furnish twenty-two (22) dunnage racks as manufactured by InterMetro Industries Corporation. Item 5 - Dunnage Rack a. Amco Corporation b. Nexel 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. 3. Zinc protoxy finish. 120 ea. 2148BR shelf 1) Twenty-two (22) three tier units. 2) Eight (8) five tier units. 86P post Three-sided chrome channel frame I) CF45N3C (21 x 48) 2) For three tier units above dunnage racks. c. 22 ea. b. 106 ea. a. . Furnish as follows: 2. Furnish one hundred six (106) dry storage shelves as manufactured by InterMetro Industries Corporation. 1. Item 4 - Dry Storage Shelving a. Fairbanks Morse b. Pelouze Scale Company 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. 1000 pound capacity. b. Factory set up and calibration. c. 5" heavy duty wheels. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) portable platform receiving scale, Model # 854F-100P, as manufactured by Detecto Scales. Item 3 - Receiving Scale . Crossbracing on sides and rear. 1) Omit front crossbracing. Splash mount cantilevered overshelf. Four (4) 5" heavy duty swivel casters. 1) Two with brakes. d. e. c. FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 11 95-052/12-95 . a. Solenoid valve. b. Room thermostat. c. R-22 Expansion valve sized per manufacturers recommendation. 4. Furnish evaporator coil with standard factory accessories and the following options preassembled with unit. a. Liquid line filter drier, sight glass and shut-offvalves. b. Suction line filter. c. Time clock. d. . . Heat contactor (30 coils only) e. Fused rainlite disconnect switch mounted and wired. 3. Furnish condenser with standard factory accessories and the following options preassembled with unit. Balanced R-22 fully hermetic system. With accessories that are required for correct operation as recommended by manufacturer. Preassembled remote system. System to operate at +550 F temperature. System to operate at +450 F suction temperature (SST). e. c. d. a. b. . 2. Furnish system as follows: I. Furnish one (1) trash room coil, Model # CK17 AF and one (1) trash room condenser, Model # AK9433EC, as supplied by American Panel Corporation. Item 6 - Trash Room Coil and Condensing Unit NOTE: Wire mat not required when support bar spacing is 4W' or less. a. Amco Corporation b. Nexel . 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: . 44 ea. 44 ea. a. Model # MHP53C (24" x 36") b. Removable wire mat c. Three sided frame. 1) Place no higher than 6" from floor. d. Legs - a maximum of 14" high including casters. e. 5" heavy duty casters. 1) Swivel 2) Swivel/brake f Chrome finish.. 22 ea. 22 ea. 22 ea. Furnish as follows: 2. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-12 95-052/I2-95 3. Panel Construction: Furnish panels in 11 W', 23" and 46" widths that are interchangeable for fast easy assembly. Furnish panels consisting of interior and exterior metal pans precisely formed with metal dies and checked with gauges of uniformity. Furnish the finish as described a. Meet National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) requirements and have an NSF seal. 2. Recess floor for the walk-in cooler/freezer to a depth as recommended by the walk-in manufacturer so walk-in floor is y." higher than the finished kitchen floor. This is the responsibility of the General Contractor. 1. Furnish one (I) walk-in coolerlfreezer as manufactured by American Panel Corporation. The walk-in cooler/freezer is 39'-9" wide x 14'-6" deep x 8'-6" high. Divide unit into three (3) separate coolers and one (I) freezer as shown on plan. Item 7 - Walk-In Cooler/Freezer a. RDI b. Correct Temp 9. Alternates by manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable. . a. Electrical - I) Coil- 2.1 amps, 120V/60/I0 2) Condenser - 1/3 hp, 12.4 amps, 120V/60/10 Service requirements: 8. a. Coil & Condensing Unit - Twelve (12) months parts and one (I) year labor. b. Compressor - Extended four (4) year full replacement. 7 . Warranties: a. Refrigeration piping is sized correctly in accordance with ASHRAE guidelines. b. Units have run at least 96 hours once cooler has reached the specified temperature and maintained that temperature. c. System contains a full refrigerant charge. d. Manufacturers checklist provided in installation manual is completed and made part of complete operations manual. 6. Furnish a certificate verifying that the cooler condenser and cooler coil have been correctly installed per manufacturers recommendations and: NOTE: When condensing unit is located more than 70' from coil consult manufac- turer for compressor resizing and/or line sizing. NOTE: When locating condensing unit provide proper clearance for adequate airflow around condensing unit. a. Verify location with architectural plans. . Locate condensing unit outside and equip with low ambient winter controls including, crankcase heater and heavy gauge galvalume weather hood. 5. c. FOODSER~CEEQUWMENT 11400 - 13 Floor Panels: Construction of floor panels is similar to oth~r panels but made to withstand uniformly ,distributed floor loads up to and including 600 pounds per square foot. Panel Fasteners: Walk-In panels are joined together with cam-lockjoining devices. Do not exceed distances of 46" betWeen locks. Each locking "device consists of a cam-action hooked lockiz:tg arm (ieplaceable type) placed in one panel and a steel rod precisely positioned 'in the adjoiDing panel, so that by rotating the locking arm the hook engages over the rod lII1d with cain-action draws the panels tightly together. House both locking arm and steel rods in steel pockets set in the insUlation with 2" steel straps for added strength. Actuate locks from inside the walk-in enabling sections to be erected tight against a wall. Provide stainless steel press fit caps to close wrench holes. Insulation: Provide rigid urethane insulation "Foamed-In-Place". with a thermal . conductivity factor (K) of 0.135 and a (U) factor' of 0.033 and an (R) factor of 30. Use a4" thick panel for tests. Use R141b (anEPA approved HCFC) as blowing agent so the panels will remain stable in a operating temperature range of minus 900 F (- 670 C) to plus 2500 F (+1210 C). Furnish panels with a LOW FLAME SPREAD RATING of 25 or less with a certifying Underwriters Laboratories label on every panel and/or a Class 1 Building .rating by Factory Mutual. . Walk-In Door Section: Provide an entrance d9Qr opening of 36" x 78" in a 46" or a 69" wide panel. Furnish an in-fitting flush-mounted type door with 4" thick' insulation. Provide the finish specified in this walk-in cooler/freezer specification. Construct the door panel to include a heavy "U" channel type reinforcoo steel frame of not less than 14 gauge thickness around the entire perimeter of the door op'ening to prevent racking and twisting. , Door Gaskets: Mount a thermoplastic gasket with a magnetic steel cove on both side and top edges of the door. Provide the bottom edge of the door with an adjustable rubber wiper gasket The magnetic force forms a positive air-tight seal when the door is closed. Furnish gaskets resistant to oil, fats, water and sunlight and of the replaceable type. Anti-Sweat Heaters: Provide walk-in freezer door with two sets of heaters to prevent condensation and frost formation. Conceal one set of heaters behind the metal edge of the door jamb on all four sides. Conceal the second set .of heaters beneath the exterior edges of the walk-in door and around the entire door perimeter. Furnish a sill plate that is flush with floor to cover anti-sweat heaters. Lighting: Provide each door panel with an incandescent vapor proof light on the interior. Mount an operating toggle switch and pilot light on the exterior. Furnish interconnected wiring in rigid conduit. Provide an iIJIet box for 120V 160/10. ProVide the thaw cooler and dairy cooler compartments each with one (1) ceiling mounted fluorescent light and the cooler and freezer compartments each with two (2) ceiling mounted fluorescent lights that are field mounted and wired to the door toggle switch by the electrical contractor. Provide each light with a vapor proof cover. Fluorescent lights are two (2) tube 48" light. Provide lights with a ballast that operates in minus 200 temperature. in this walk-in coolerlfreezer specification. Use rigid urethane insulation that is "Foamed In Place" to bind tenaciously to the interior and exterior metal skins for a rigid strong wall. Make panels without any wood or metal structural members, with 100% of each panel (excluding metal skins) being urethane insulation. Panel edges must have tongues and grooves "Foamed In Place" to assure air-tight vapor-proof joints. Fit a flexible gasket on the interior and exterior of each panel along every tongue edge to' provide an air tight seal at eachjoint. 95-052/12-95 . h. g. f. e. . d. c. b. a. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-14 a. The installed walk-in and related accessories, supplied as an original part of the installed walk-in, are warranted free from defects in material or workmanship. Replace any part of the equipment which proves to be defective within the period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance by owner. The warranty does not apply to equipment which has been subjected to any accident, alteration, abuse or misuse. 95-052/12-95 10. Warranty: 9. Provide two (2) sets of vinyl bumper strips around exposed exterior of walk-in. Place strips approximately 12" and 36" AFF or as recommended by walk-in manufacturer. 8. Provide matching trim to seal the walk-in to the building walls and ceiling. 7. Pressure Relief Port: Provide a Klein, Model # 2786, pressure relief port in each freezer. No ping-pong ball type ports will be accepted. The pressure relief port is wired by the electrical contractorfor 120 V 160/10. 6. Partition: Provide insulated metal clad panels to form separate compartments within the walk- in. A non-conductor strip must be built into panels at the joints where partitions butt to prevent transfer of heat from one compartment to another. Furnish construction, insulation and finish as specified in this walk-in cooler/freezer specification. . Exterior panels, 22 gauge pebble grain aluminum. Interior panels, galvanized with baked white polyester finish on walls and ceiling. Interior floor, 14 gauge galvanized steel. 1) Safety walk strips, 6" wide, in aisles, minimum three per aisle on 10" centers. 2) At each entrance door floor section furnish a double layer of 14 gauge galvanized metal. Doors and door panels, 22 gauge pebble grain aluminum. Furnish 36" x 42", 1fa" thick, aluminum diamond plate inset on both sides of each door and on the full width of each door panel. At top of each door furnish automatic door closer. a. Door Hinges: Provide door with three hinges, self-closing type, spring-loaded type, with stainless steel pin and nylon cam-type bearing. b. Door Latch: Design the latch to easily open the door by breaking the magnetic force of the door gasket. Provide each door with Best 7 pin replaceable core dead bolts, ship with construction core, re-keyed by General Contractor/Owner after completion. Include an inside safety release to prevent anyone from being locked inside the walk- m. f. d. e. a. b. c. 5. Finish: 4. Hardware: Provide with a polished satin aluminum or chrome plated finish. . Door Swings: Hinged right. Structural Support: Furnish exterior structural supports using an exterior load spreading device as needed when recommended by the walk-in manufacturer. NOTE: Interior colwnns are not acceptable. J. 1. '.' FOODSER~CEEQUWMENT 11400 - 15 95-052/12-95 . a. Verify location with architectural plans. 5. Locate condensing unit outside and equip with low ambient winter controls including, crankcase heater and heavy gauge galvalume weather hood. a. Solenoid valve. b. Room thermostat. c. R-22 Expansion valve sized per manufacturers recommendation. 4. Furnish evaporator coil with standard factory accessories and the following options preassembled with unit. a. LiqUid line filter drier, sight glass and shut-off valves. b. Suction line filter. c. Time clock. d. Heat contactor (30 coils only) e. Fused rainlite disconnect switch mounted and wired. 3. Furnish condenser with standard factory accessories and the following options preassembled with unit. . Balanced R-22 fully hermetic system. With accessories that are required for correct operation as recommended by manufacturer. Preassembled remote system. System to operate at +350 F temperature. System to operate at +250 F suction temperature (SST). c. d. e. . a. b. 2. Furnish system as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) thaw cooler coil, Model # ADT 0701 and one (1) thaw cooler condenser, Model # F3AM-A 077, as supplied by American Panel Corporation. Item 8 - Thaw Cooler Coil and Condensing Unit a. Elliott-Williams Company, Inc. b. Harford Systems Inc. 13. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. a. Electrical- 120V/60/I0 b. Plumbing - FD 12. Service requirements: a. Units have run at least 96 hours once the cooler/freezer has reached the desired temperature and has maintained that temperature. b. Use type RTV silicon. Furnish a certificate verifying that the walk-in cooler/freezer has been correctly installed as follows. 11. . --~ . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 16 95-052/12-95 a. Liquid line filter drier, sight glass and shut-off valves. b. Suction line f1lter. c. Time clock. 3. Furnish condenser with standard factory accessories and the following options preassembled with unit. a. Balanced R-22 fully hermetic system. b. With accessories that are required for correct operation as recommended by manufacturer. c. Preassembled remote system. d. System to operate at +350 F temperature. e. System to operate at +250 F suction temperature (SST). 2. Furnish system as follows: 1. Furnish one (I) dairy cooler coil, Model # ADT 1041 and one (I) dairy cooler condenser, Model # F3AM-A102, as supplied by American Panel Corporation. Item 9 - Dairy Cooler Coil and Condensing Unit a. RDI b. Correct Temp . Alternates by manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable. 9. a. Electrical - 1) Coil- 2.2 amps, 120V/60/10 2) Condenser - 31. hp, 8.7 amps, 208V/60/10 8. Service requirements: a. Coil & Condensing Unit - Twelve (12) months parts and one (I) year labor. b. Compressor - Extended four (4) year full replacement. 7. Warranties: a. Refrigeration piping is sized correctly in accordance with ASHRAE guidelines. b. Units have run at least 96 hours once cooler has reached the specified temperature and maintained that temperature. c. System contains a full refiigerant charge. d. Manufacturers checklist provided in installation manual is completed and made part of complete operations manual. 6. Furnish a certificate verifYing that the cooler condenser and cooler coil have been correctly installed per manufacturers recommendations and: When condensing unit is located more than 70' from coil consult manufac- turer for compressor resizing and/or line sizing. NOTE: . When locating condensing unit provide proper clearance for adequate airflow around condensing unit. NOTE: FOODSER~CEEQUWMENT 11400 - 17 95-052/12-95 . 1. Furnish one (1) cooler coil, Model # ADT 1041 and one (1) cooler condenser, Model # F3AM- AlO2, as supplied by American Panel Corporation. Item 10 - Cooler Coil and Condensing Unit a. RDI b. Correct Temp 9. Alternates by manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable. a. Electrical- 1) Coil- 2.2 amps, 120V/60/I0 2) Condenser - 1 hp, 9.3 amps, 208V/60/30 8. Service requirements: a. Coil & Condensing Unit - Twelve (12) months parts and one (1) year labor. b. Compressor - Extended four (4) year full replacement. 7 . Warranties: Refrigeration piping is sized correctly in accordance with ASHRAE guidelines. Units have run at least 96 hours once cooler has reached the specified temperature and maintained that temperature. System contains a full refrigerant charge. Manufacturers checklist provided in installation manual is completed and made part of complete operations manual. c. d. . a. b. 6. Furnish a certificate verifying that the cooler condenser and cooler coil have been correctly installed per manufacturers recommendations and: NOTE: When condensing unit is located more than 70' from coil consult manufac- turer for compressor resizing and/or line sizing. NOTE: When locating condensing unit provide proper clearance for adequate airflow around condensing unit. a. Verify location with architectural plans. 5. Locate condensing unit outside and equip with low ambient winter controls including, crankcase heater and heavy gauge galvalume weather hood. a. Solenoid valve. b. Room thermostat. c. R-22 Expansion valve sized per manufacturers recommendation. 4. Furnish evaporator coil with standard factory accessories and the following options preassembled with unit. Heat contactor (30 coils only) Fused rainlite disconnect switch mounted and wired. d. e. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 18 95-052/l2-95 a. Coil & Condensing Unit - Twelve (12) months parts and one (1) year labor. b. Compressor - Extended four (4) year full replacement. 7. Warranties: a. Refrigeration piping is sized correctly in accordance with ASHRAE guidelines. b. Units have run at least 96 hours once cooler has reached the specified temperature and maintained that temperature. c. System contains a full refrigerant charge. d. Manufacturers checklist provided in installation manual is completed and made part of complete operations manual. 6. Furnish a certificate verifying that the cooler condenser and cooler coil have been correctly installed per manufacturers recommendations and: When condensing unit is located more than 70' from coil consult manufac- turer for compressor resizing and/or line sizing. NOTE: When locating condensing unit provide proper clearance for adequate airflow around condensing unit. NOTE: . a. Verify location with architectural plans. Locate condensing unit outside and equip with low ambient winter controls including, crankcase heater and heavy gauge galvalume weather hood. 5. a. Solenoid valve. b. Room thermostat. c. R-22 Expansion valve sized per manufacturers recommendation. 4. Furnish evaporator coil with standard factory accessories and the following options preassembled with unit. a. Liquid line filter drier, sight glass and shut-off valves. b. Suction line filter. c. Time clock. d. Heat contactor (30 coils only) e. Fused rainlite disconnect switch mOWlted and wired. 3. Furnish condenser with standard factory accessories and the following options preassembled with unit. as recommended by a. Balanced R-22 fully hermetic system. b. With accessories that are required for correct operation manufacturer. c. Preassembled remote system. d. System to operate at +350F temperature. e. System to operate at +250 F suction temperature (SST). . Furnish system as follows: 2. FOODSER~CEEQUWNffiNT 11400 - 19 95-052/12-95 . When locating condensing unit provide. proper clearance for adequate airflow around condensing unit. . NOTE: 5. Locate condensing unit outside and equip with low ambient winter controls including, crankcase heater and heavy gauge galvalume weather hood. . .! .. . i 1 - a. Vefify location with architectural plans. a. Liquid'line solenoid valve. b. Room thermostat. . c. One (1) R -404 expansion valve sized per manufacturers recommendation. d. Heat exchanger. . e. Drainline heater. 4. Furnish evaporator coil with standard. factory accessories and the following options, preassembled with unit. Liquid line filter drier, sight glass and shut-off valves. Suction line filter and suction line vibration eliminator Heater contactor (30 coils only), terminal block, time clock. Suction line accumulator (3~ HP+ only). Head pressure valve and crankcase heater. Defrost relay. Fused rainlite disconnect switch mounted andwired. a. b. c. _ d. e. f. g. . 3. Furnish condenser with standard factory accessories and the following options preassembled with unit. a. Balanced R-404 fully hermetic system. b. With accessories that are required for correct operation as recommended by manufacturer. c. Preassembled remote system. d. . System to operate at _100 F temperature. e. System to operate at -200 F suction temperature (SST). 2. Furnish system as follows: I. .FI.U1lish one (1) freezer coil, Model # LE~ 1201 and one (1) freezer condenser, Model # VJAF- . 035H, as supplied by American Panel Corporation. . Item 11 - Freezer Coil and Condensing Unit. RDI Correct Temp a. b. 9.' Alternates by manufacturers complying with.the above specifications are acceptable. a. Electrical - 1) Coil- 2.2 amps, 120V/60/10 2) Condenser - J hp,9.3 amps, 208V/60/30 Service requirements: 8. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-20 95-052/12-95 1. Furnish thirty-one (31) units of 16 gauge fixed, all welded, aluminum channel shelves, Model # AFCS, as manufactured by KelMax Equipment. Item 13 - Walk-In Shelving a. Install on Item 7, one (1) at each door. b. Double door model. 1) . Door opening size 36" x 78" c. Two (2) L brackets. d. Two (2) stainless steel gravity hinges with the foll~wing: 1 ) . Stainless steel rod and offset arm. - 2) Stainless steel roller ball bearings. 3) Stainless steel springs. 4) Stainless steel fasteners. e. Vertical adjustment for proper door fit. f. Vinyl material .08 inches thick. 2. Furnish each as follows: 1. Fwnish four (4) Clear Vu stripless swinging door, Model # SS 3678, as manufactured by CCI Industries, Inc. Item 12 - Swinging Door . RDI Correct Temp a. b. 9. Alternates by manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable. a. Electrical - 1) . Coil- 3.7/13.4 amps, 208V/60/10 2) Condenser - 3Y2 hp, 22.7 amps, 208V/60/30 8. Service requirements: a. Coil & Condensing Unit - Twelve (12) months parts and one (I) year labor. b. Compressor - Extended four (4) year full replacement. 7. Warranties: a. Refrigeration piping is sized correctly in accordance with ASHRAE guidelines. b. Units have run at least 96 hours once freezer has reached the specified temperature and maintained that temperature. c. System contains a full refrigerant charge. d. Manufacturers checklist provided in installation manual is completed and made part of complete operations manual. . 6. Furnish a certificate verifying that the freezer condenser and freezer coil have been correctly installed per manufacturers recommendations and: . When condensing unit is located more than 70' from coil consult manufac- turer for compressor resizing and/or line sizing. NOTE: . 2. Furnish units as follows: a. Walk-In Thaw Cooler: 1) AFCS36203/60/MHD unit. lea. a) Three tier unit. b) Unit height 60".. . c) Place unde~ walk~~ thaw cooler coil. 2) AFCS36203n2/MHD unit. 1 ea. a) Three tier unit. b) Unit height 72". 3) AFCS60203n2/MHD ~t. 2 ea. a) Three tier unit. b) Unit height 72". 4) MHD heavy duty mobile ~ts. 4 ea. a) 6 x 2 poly olefing. b) Two (2) swivel casters each unit. c) Two (2) stationary with brakes each unit. b. Walk-In Dairy Cooler: - I) AFCS36203/601MHD unit.- 1 ea. a) . Three tier unit. b) Unit height 60". c) Place under walk-in dairy ~ler coil. 2) AFCS36203n2/MHD unit 2 ea. a) Three tier unit. b) Unit height 72". 3) AFCS60203n2/MHD unit 4 ea. a) Three tier unit. . b) Unit height 72". 4) MHD heavy duty mobile kits. 7 ea. a) 6 x 2 poly olefmg. b) Two (2) swivel casters each unit. c) Two (2) stationary with brakes each unit. c. Walk-In Cooler: 1) AFCS36204n2/MHI) unit 2 ea. a) Four tier unit. . b) Unit height 72". 2) AFCS60203/60/MHD unit 2 ea. a) Three tier unit. b) Unit height 60". c) Place under walk-in cooler coil. 3) AFCS60204n2/MHD unit 4 ea. a) Four tier unit. b) Unit height 72". 4) MHD heavy duty mobile .kits. 8 ea. a) 6 x 2 poly olefing. b) Two (2) swivel casters each unit. c) Two (2) stationary with brakes each unit. d. Walk-In Freezer: 1) AFCS362043n2/MHD "unit 2 ea. a) Three tier unit. b) Unit height 72". . FOODSER~CEEQUWMENT 95-052/l2-95 11400 - 21 . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 22 95-052/12-95 a. Electrical- 12 amps, 208V/60/10 b. Plumbing - ~rf cw, 3J." waste 3. Service requirements: a. Water cooled. b. Stainless steel evaporator plate. c. Stainless steel exterior. d. 660 pound capacity bin, Model B-900SC. 1) Noncorrosive bin liner. 2) Bin width 52". . 3) Stainless steel exterior. 2. Furnish as follows: a. 1100 pound capacity. 1. Furnish one (1) ice maker, Model # KM-1200SWE, as manufactured by Hoshizaki America Inc. . Item 15 - Ice Maker Item 14 - Not Used a. New Age Industrial Corporation, Inc. b. ServoliftJEastern Corporation 5. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable. 4. Lifetime warranty against rust and corrosion. a. Channels, 4" E style channel welded horizontal on approximately 2" centers. b. Load capacity 1600 pounds. , c. Shelves welded to uprights. 3. Construction: . AFCS60203/60/MHD unit 2 ea. a) Three tier unit. b) Unit height 60". c) Place under walk-in freezer coil AFCS60203n2/MHD unit 8 ea. a) Three tier unit. b) Unit height 72". MHD heavy duty mobile kits. 12 ea. a) 6 x 2 poly olefing. - b) Two (2) swivel casters each unit. c) . Two (2) stationary casters with brakes each unit. 4) 3) 2) FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT ~. 11400 - 23 95-052/12-95 . a. Type 304 stainless steel-construction including underbracing. 1) Omit front crossbiacing. . b. Front and sides with maririe edge. c. 10" high backsplash. 3. Furnish as follows: a Fullywelded construction. 2. Construct sink as indicated in section 11400. a. 8'-0" x 2'-6" x 3'-0". I. Fabricate one (1) vegetable preparation sink size and shape as shown on plan. Item 17 -Vegetable Preparation Sink a. Introdel, Inc.. b. Everpure, Inc. 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. Verify correct mineral content with local water company in order to furnish correct filter. 3. . a. Connect to water line ofItem 15. b. NSF approved. c. One (1) prefilter. I) NSF Standard 42, particulate reduction, Class IV. d; Two (2) filters: . 1) NSF Standard 42, particuiate reduction, Class II. 2) Reduce particles down toone micron in size. 3) Carbon block 4) Scale/corrosiori inhibition. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) replaceable cartndgeJilter System One, Model # 2-S, as manufactured by CUNO, Inc. Item 16 - Water Filter a. Crystal Tips b. Scotsman Industries 5. Alternates by the following manufacturers -complying with the above specification are acceptable. Furnish a certificate from an authorized factory service agency stating that the ice maker has been correctly installed, started and producing the maximum quantity of ice as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 24 95-052/12-95 a. ~odelARSS b. Automatic reversing. 3. Furnish control panel as follows: a. Mount on Item 17. b. Stainless steel construction. c. Collar adaptor with safety baffie and stopper. 1) 6~n sink collar d. Solenoid valve, ~", with flow control. e. Fixed nozzle, W'. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) disposer, ~odel # 150-SA6, as manufactured by The Salvajor Company. Item 19 - Disposer a. Chicago Faucet Company b. Dormont ~anufacturing Company 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. . Plwnbing - W' cw, ~n hw a. 3. Service requirements: a. Mount on Item 17. b. B-WH-6 wrist action handles. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (I) faucet, Model # B-231-CC, as manufactured by T & S Brass & Bronze Works, Inc. Item 18 - Faucet a. Plwnbing - 2" waste 4. Service requirements: . Two sink compartments. I) Compartment size - 24" x 27W' x 14". 2) Basket drains. Drainboards on right and left sides, size as shown on plan. One (I) 12" wide overshelves as shown on plan. 1) Place bottom of overshelf 24" above backsplash. a) Allow enough height for disposer control panel. Mounting bracket on backsplash for disposer control panel with stainless steel chase to run wiring. 1 ) Build chase so wires are not exposed. g. e. f. d. FOODSER~CEEQUIPMENT 11400 - 25 95-052/12-95 Type 304 stainless steel construction. Gooseneck splash mount faucet, Model K-59. Basket drain. P-trap, Model # K-27. . a. b. c. d. . ,,",:. 2. Furnish each as follows: I. Furnish two (2) hand sinks, Model # 7-PS"90, as manufactured by Advance Food SerVice Equipment Inc. Mount as shown on plan. Item 21 - Hand Sink a. Chicago Faucet Company b. Fisher ManufacturingCompany 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the abov~ specifications are acceptable: a. Pluinbing - W'cw, ~. hw 3. Service requirements for each: 1 - open style hose reel, Model # B-1403. I - shutoff valve, Model # RK-2. I - concealed body mixing valve, Model # B-1035. I - constant pressure vacuum breaker, Model # B-964. 2 - in-line check valves, Model # B-CVV-~. e. a. b. c. d. 2. Include the following for each: I. Furnish two (2) hose reels as manufactured by T & S Brass & Bronze Works, Inc. Item 20 - Hose Reel a. In-Sink-Erator Inc. b. Masters Disposers, Inc. 5. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above speCifications are acceptable: . a. Electrical- 1 ~ hp, 208V/60/30 b. Plumbing -~" cw, 2" waste. 4. Service requirements: Stainless steel NEMA 4 enclosure. Push button operation. Time delay relay, 45 seconds. Line disconnect. . Safety interlocking handle. Mount on stainless steel bracket with chase furnished with Item 17. 1) Run wiring through stainless steel chase. e. f. g. e. c. d. . . ( . . FOODSER~CEEQUWMENT 11400 - 26 95-052/12-95 a. Semi-automatic. b. Removable double interlocked carriage. c. Stainless steel carriage with home position start. d. Permanently mounted ring guard. e. No-volt release. f. Lift lever. g. Steel pusher. h. Two speed automatic carriage. i. Direct drive all-gear transmission. j. Stainless steel knife. k. Knife sharpener. 1. Stainless steel knife guard. m. Positive angle feed carriage. n. Feed grip. o. Adjustable stainless steel fence. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) slicer, Model # 1912, as manufactured by Hobart Corporation. Item 23 - Slicer . Type 304, 14 gauge, stainless steel construction including underbracing. Undershelf. Stainless steel legs and gussets. Four (4) casters. 1) Two with brakes. c. d. a. b. 3. Furnish as follows: a. Fully welded construction. 2. Fabricate table as indicated in section 11400. a. 6'-0" x 2'-6" x 3'-0" 1. Fabricate two (2) worktables as shown on plan. Item 22 - Worktable a. Eagle Spec Master b. Seco Products 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. a. Plumbing - Yz" cw, Y:z" hw, I Yz" waste 3. Service requirements for each: . Towel dispenser. Foot pedals. e. f. FOODSER~CEEQUWMENT 11400-27 a. Berkel Inc. b. Blakeslee 95-052/12-95 . . 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are' acceptable: a. Electrical- 1 hp, 120V/60/10 3. Service requirements: Stainless steel bowl. Bowl cover. Two stainless steel knives. No. 12 attachment hub. Dicer. Speed. drive. Chopper end. 9" vegetable slicer. I) Ba9k case. 2) Hopper front. 3) Tubular front. 4) Plates: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Cord and plug. Adjustable slice plate 5/8" to very thin. 3/32" Shredder plate. 3/16" Shredder plate. 5/16" Shredder plate. 1/2" ,Shredder plate. Grater plate. Plate holder assembly. 1. . a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. Furnish as follows: I. Furnish one (1) buffalo chopper, Model # 84186, as manufactured by Hobart Corporation. Item 24 - Buffalo Chopper a. Berkel b. Blakeslee 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical- Y:1hp, 120V/60/10 3. Service requirements: Stainless steel gauge plate. Cord and cap. p. q. . . FOODSER~CEEQUWMENT 11400-28 95-052/12-95 a. Fully welded construction. 2. Construct sink as indicated in section 11400. a. 14' x 2'~6" x 3' 1. Fabricate one (1) pot and pan sink size and shape as shown on plan. Item 27 - Pot and Pan Sink a. Amco Corporation b. Nexel 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. 3. Furnish shelving unit four (4) tiers high. 2 ea. 2 ea. 2448BR shelf 86UP post Swivel casters 1) 5M Resilient 2) 5MB Wheel Brake a. b. c. . .4 ea. 4 ea. 2. Furnish as follows: I. Furnish one (1) soiled pot and pan rack as manufactured by InterMetro Industries Corporation. Item 26 - Soiled Pot and Pan Rack a. Chicago Faucet Company b. Dormont Manufacturing Company 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Plumbing - W' cw, W' hw 3. Service requirements: a. B-I07-C3510-flo spray head. b. B-I09-18 wall bracket. c. Mount on Item 27. 2. Furnish as follows: . 1. Furnish one (1) pre-rinse spray unit, Model # B-133-CC, as manufactured by T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Item 25 - Pre-Rinse Spray FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-29 95-052/12-95 . a. Mount on Item 27 in left hand drainboard.. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) disposer, Model # 150-CA~18, as manufactured by The Salvajor Company. Item 29 - Disposer a. Chicago Faucet Company b. Dormont Manufacturing Company .4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Plumbing - %" cw, %" hw 3. Service requirements for each: a. 12" swing faucet. b. High water volume delivery. c. Mount on Item 27. Furnish each as follows: 2. . Furnish two (2) faucets, Model # B-290, as manufactured by T & S Brass & Bronze Works, Inc. . I. Item 28 - Faucet a. Plumbing - 2" waste 4. Service requirements: a. Type 304 stainless steel construction including underbracing. b. Four (4) sink compartments. 1) Each sink compartment 24" x 27~" xIS". 2) Basket drains. c.. Drainboards on right and left sides s~e and shape as shown.on plan. 1) Cut-out in left draIDboard for disposer cone, Item'29. d. Omit front crossbracing. e. One (1) pot rack 18" wide by'length as shown on plan. 1) Consisting of three (3):1 " square tubes. 2) Position 30" above working surface, 3). Over four sinks and right drainboard. . f. Stainless steel legs and adjUstable bullet feet. g. . . Stainless steel backsplash. " . h. Mounting bracket on backsplash f?r disposer cOntrol panel with stainless steel chase to run wiring. 1) Build chase so wires are not exposed. Furnish as follows: 3. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 30 95-052/12-95 a. Arnco Corporation b. Nexel 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. 3. Furnish each shelving unit four (4) tiers high. 12 ea. 12 ea. 2448BR shelf 86UP post Swivel casters 1 ) 5M Resilient 2) 5MB Wheel Brake c. 6 ea. 6 ea. a. b. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish three (3) soiled pot and pan racks as manufactured by InterMetro Industries Corporation. . Item 30 - Pot and Pan Rack a. In-Sink-Erator Inc. b. Masters Disposers, Inc. 5. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical- 1 Y:z hp, 208V/60/30 b. Plumbing - Y:z" cw, 2" waste 4. Service requirements: a. ModelPURSS b. Automatic reversing. c. Stainless steel NEMA 4 enclosure. d. Push button operation. e. Time delay relay, 45 seconds. f. Line disconnect. g. SafetJy interlocking handle. e. Mount on stainless steel bracket with chase furnish with Item 27. 1 ) Run wiring through stainless steel chase. 3. Furnish control panel as follows: . Stainless steel construction. 18' cone. Solenoid valve, Y:z", with flow control. Fixed nozzle, Y:z". e. c. d. b. FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 31 95-052/12-95 . a." Size - 20'-0" x 11 '_0" x 2'_6". 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) range hood, Model # RG-BDL-MAW-58, as manufactured by Gaylord Industries, Inc. Item 33 - Range Hood a. Type 304, 14 gauge, stainless steel construction including underbracing. b. Undershelf. c. Stainless steel legs and gussets. d. Four (4) casterS. 1) Two with brakes. 3. Furnish each as follows: a. Fully welded construction. 2. Fabricate table as indicated in section 11400. a. 7'-0" x 2'-6" x 3'-0" 1. Fabricate six (6) worktables as shown on plan. Item 32 - Worktable . a. ServoliftlEastem Corporation b. New Age Industrial Corporation, Inc. 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Aluminum construction. 1) Fully welded. . 2) Over all sizeapproxirnately 28" x 60" b.' 5" poly urethane wheels. . 1) Two with brakes. c. Non adjustable shelves.. 1) 2~" guide spacing for inSulated trays. a) Verify tray size before ordering. 2) 4 tiers. 3) 160 trays per unit, double deep. 3) . 50 slope to front. 4) Top shelf with fully welded aluminum cover. 2. Furnish each as follows: 1. Furnish five (5) tray drying racks, Model # ATR-60/4 modified, as manufactured by KelMax Equipment. Item 31 - Tray Drying Rack. .. . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-32 a. Operate from the building sprinkler system. b. Mount in Item 33. 95-052/12-95 2. Furnish system as follows: 1. Furnish one (I) fire protection system, Model # QUA-6, as manufactured by Gaylord Industries, Inc. Item 34 - Fire Protection System a. Southern Equipment Company b. K-Tech 6. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Exhaust duct size - four (4) @ 10" x 20" each@2500 CFM each@ 1.33 SP b. Make-up air duct size - eight (8) @ 12" x 15" each @ 1000 CFM each @ .15 SP c. Electrical- Low wattage, 120V/60/10 (for hood lights) d. Plumbing - (2) %" hw, (2) I W' waste 5. Service requirements: . Verify results with hood manufacturers requirements at entrance of exhaust chamber and duct collar of hood. a. 4. Furnish a certificate from the general contractor of a certified air test balance report by an independent test and balance company. Balance the exhausted air and make-up air in accordance with NFP A 96 and manufacturers specified recommendations. 3. Conform hood to state and local codes. Also NFP A 96. . 18 gauge, 300 type, stainless steel construction. Remote timed water wash cycle. Front perforated for make-up air return. Eight (8) four foot fluorescent lights flush mounted in the hood. 1) Four (4) each side. Remote control panel. 1) Specified with fire protection system, Item 34. One (I) off/on switch. 1) Mount on hood. Wiring in insulated rigid conduit. Include an exhaust collarlfire damper assembly in each ventilator section. Fire damper electrically activated by a fenwall type thermostat detector mounted at collar and spring loaded through a damper control box mounted on the side of the exhaust collar. NOTE: Do not use a fusible link type actuator. Wire exhaust fan motor control circuit through a micro-switch within the damper control box whereby the exhaust fan is shut-down upon damper closure. Include damper control arm or plunger, linked to damper control box, for testing and resetting offrre damper. Matching trim between hood and finished ceiling as required. m. I. k. J. 1. g. h. f. e. b. c. d. FOODSER~CEEQU~MENT 11400-33 Sprinkler contractor installs system and furnishes a certificate of compliance that the system complies with NFP A-13, UL and local fire marshal codes. Furnish a certificate of compliance from the hood manufacturer that the hood and fire protection system complies with UL and NFPA-13 and NFPA-96. Southern Equipment Company K- Tech 95-052/12-95 . NOTE: NOTE: a. b. 5. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical- 20 amps, 120V/60/10 b. Plumbing - I" cw, 1 \1." cw 4. Service requirements: Control cabinet UL listed under the classification of "Attachments to Sprinkler Systems". Hand valve with electrical switch. Pressure gauge. Pressure switch. Flow switch. Normal operation light. Non-operational indicator light. Fire alert alarm (audible & visual): Lighted fuel shut -off reset button. One minute time delay relay. Pre-wired and pre-piped within control panel. a. b. . c. d. e. f. g. h. 1. J. k. 3. Furnish a stainless steel combination control panel to service Item 33 and Item 34, Model # GPC-4000 S/2-RP-.075, as follows: Quartzoid bulb sprinkler heads. 1) One spare sprinkler head for each tYPe of head supplied. a) Extra heads stored in control panel. Factory pre-pipe piping within the ventilator, with the exception of nozzle drops for high broilers and salamanders, with'exposedfittings. 1) Piping, nozzles and chrome plated or chrome sleeved materials for deck nozzles furnished loose as supplied by the ventilator manufacturer. Piping from uninterrupted water supply as for building sprinkler system. . Sprinkler contractor nms piping to control panel and from control panel to ventilator. Nozzles field installed by sprinkler contractor in accordance with manufacturers technical manual. Ventilator equipped with by pass,test valve for testing of system. Gas shut-off valve installed in SY,stem. Water flow pressure at the control cabinet a minimum of 40 PSI and a maximum of 175 PSI. 1) If flow pressure is greater than 175 PSI furnish an approved a pressure reducing valve that is installed by the sPrinkler contractor. An authorized representative field inspects and certifies the system upon completion of installation. k. J. 1. 'e. f. g. h. d. c. . . FOODSER~CEEQU~MENT 11400 - 34 a. 90 pound capacity. b. Direct draining of fryers into unit. 95-052/12-95 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) shortening disposal unit, Model # SDU90, as manufactured by The Frymaster Corporation. Item 38 - Shortening Disposal Unit a. Southern Equipment Company b. K-Tech 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical - 1) UDS System - 450 amps, 120V/208V/60/30, 5 wire 2) HoodIFire Protection Control Panel - 20 amps, 120V/60/10 b. Gas - 1 Y:z" looped manifold, 1,000,000 BTU c. Plumbing - W' cw, 0/,0" hw, 3" waste 3. Service requirements: . Island mounted with size and length as required. 304 stainless steel construction. 450 amp shunt trip circuit breaker. 15 branch circuit breakers. Quick disconnectS for gas and water connections. 1) AGA approvals. 2) NSF approvals. 3) Gas disconnects with 900 swivel. Adjustable restrainers for gas cooking equipment. Cord and plugs as required. 1 minute time delay to keep the gas solenoid energized. Kill switch to cut off gas and electricity immediately. Ground fault interruption. J. 1. f. g. h. e. a. b. c. d. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (I) utility distribution system, Model # DBIM-20, as manufactured by Gaylord East. Item 37 - Utility Distribution System 1. Specified in mechanical section. Item 36 - Make-Up Air Fan and Curb . I. Specified in mechanical section. Item 35 - Exhaust Fan and Curb FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400-35 a. Pitco b. Keating of Chicago, Inc. 95-052112-95 . 5. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifi,cations are acceptable: a. Electrical- 1) Filter. System -'h hp,9 amps, 120V/60110 2) Each Fryer - 2 amps, 120V/60110 . b. Gas - Each Fryer - %" manifold; 150,000 BTU 1) Provide separate connection for each fryer. 4. Service requirements: Position on left of battery. Stainless steel door and cabinet. Stainless steel cnunh catcher. Perforated scoop-type dwnp pan. Filter cover. Filter b~h. Cleanout rod. One box of filter paper. One box of powder. 1. e. f g. h. a. b. c. d. . 3. One (1) full size filter magic system for three fryers. a~ 80 pound capacity. b. Stainless steel pot and door.' c. Enamel sides. d. Melt cycle. . e. Gas pressure regulator. f. Two twin baskets. g. Flue deflector. h, Sediment tray, full pot. i. Stainless steel cover, full pot. a. Single frame for thfee fryers and filter system. . 2. Fwnish each fryer as follows: 1. Furnish three (3) deep fat fryers, Model # FM3CFEM-SD, as manufactured by The Frymaster Corporation. Item 39 - Deep Fat Fryer Heavy duty manual pwnp. 8" wheels. No lifting required for operation. e. . c. d. . FOODSERVICEEQUlP1\.1ENT 11400-36 95-052112-95 a. IMC-Teddy Food Service Corporation b. Southern Equipment Fabricators, Inc. 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Length 12'. 1 ) Verify length before ordering. b. Install in front ofItems 40 and Item 42. c. Trough of stainless steel construction. d. Trough with a stainless steel drain with a removable stainless steel scrap basket. e. Pitch trough to drain. f Drain grating of 304 stainless steel and fully welded construction or fiberglass non- skid. 2. Fwnish as follows. a. One (1) subway style floor grate, Model # SFB-21. b. One (1) in-floor drain trough, Model # FT-21. 1. Fwnish one (1) floor grate with trough as manufactured by ServoliftlEastern Corporation. . Item 41 - Floor Grate WlTrough a. Market Forge Industries b. Groen 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical- 18 kw, 50 amps, 208V/60/30 b. Plwnbing - W' cw, Y2 hw 3. Service Requirement for each: a. Open base on legs. b. 40 gallon capacity. c. Power tilt. d. Stainless steel construction. e. Adjustable thermostat. f. Spring assist cover with adjustable vent. g. Food strainer. h. Pan carrier. i. Double panty skillet filler with 60" long hose, Model DKF -So 2. Fwnish each as follows: . 1. Furnish two (2) tilting skillets, Model # SEL-40- T, as manufactured by Cleveland Range Company. Item 40 - Tilting Skillet "--- FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400'037 95-052/12-95 . a. Aluminwn insulated, double walled, cabinet. b. Universal angles. c. Thermometer. d. 5" heavy duty swivel casters 1) Two with brakes. e. Dual purpose heating assembly: 1) Damper for hwnidity control. 2) Thermostat. 3) Proofing and heating capability. 4) Blower fan. 5) Stainless steel water pan. 6) 10 hour timer. 7) Louvered air tunnel. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) hot food cabinet, Model # INSA-UA 12-HPT, as manufactured by EPCO. Item 43 - Hot Food Cabinet Market Forge Industries Groen a. b. . 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: . a. Electrical- 14.8 kw, 41 amps,208V/60/30 b. Plumbing - Y2" cw, W' hw. 3. Service Requirement: a. Delete double pantry faucet and mounting bracket. b. . Double panty kettle filler with 60" long hose, Model # DKF-K. . c. Type 304 stainless steel. construction. .'. 1) Interior liner - 316 stainless steel. 2) Three legs with adjustable flanged feet - d. Spring assisted cover. e. Tilting mechanism. . f. Line stainer. . g. Tangent draw-off valve with a diameter of 2':. h. Safety low-water power cut-off. 2. .Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) tilting kettle, Model # KEL-40- T, as manufactured by Cleveland Range Company. . Item 42 - Tilting Kettle . . FOOD SERVICE EQUlP1\.1ENT 11400-38 a. Electrical for each section - 18.4 kw, 52 amps, 208V/60/30 b. Plmnbing for combi section - %" cw, 2" waste 95-0521l2-95 3. Service requirements: . Two section unit. 1) Top section combination oven/steamer. 2) Bottom section convection oven. Stainless steel front and sides. Stainless steel doors with tempered viewing window. 1) Right hinged. Almninized rear panel. Stainless steel top. Polished stainless steel interior, each section. Drain, each section. Condensate door trough and self-draining drip pan on combi section. Five (5) stainless steel wire pan racks, each section. Both sections capable of accepting 18"x26" and 12"x20" pans. Water pressure regulator, combi section. Timer, each section. Hose and spray assembly, use with each section. Side shield for control compartment protection on combi section. Stainless steel 6" legs. Two speed motor, convection oven section. Four function selection switch for combi section. Solid state digital control panel for convection oven section. 1) Cook and hold. 2) Fan delay/pulse plus. 3) Two speed fan. Low profile casters. 1) Two with brakes. Restraining cable. Start-up inspection service by factory authorized service agent. t. u. s. p. q. r. e. f g. h. 1. J. k I. m. n. o. d. c. b. a. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) combination oven/steamer on a convection oven, Model # BC-CCNE, as manufactured by Blodgett Combi. Item 44 - Combination Oven/Steamer on a Convection Oven a. Cres Cor b. ServoliftlEastern Corporation 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: . a. Electrical- 1.4 kw, 120V/60110 1) Three wire cord. Service requirements: 3. FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400-39 .... 95-052112-95 . a. Stainless steel exterior. b. Solid stainless steel doors. c. Insulated top, back sides and bottom. d. Porcelainized steel interior. e. 60 minute timer. f Stainless steel blower wheel. 1) Two speed fan motor. g.Infinite setting solid state thermostat with temperature control. h. Flue vent rear of each section. i. Five racks. j. Solid state digital control panel with cook and hold, fan delay/pulse plus with digital display. 1) Modular slide out front control panel. k. Bake oven lamps. 1. Gas pressure regulator. m. Electronic ignition control system. 2. Furnish each compartment as follows. a. Two (2) full size compartments. b. 6" stainless steel legs. Furnish one (1) convection oven, Model # ST -300 Double, as manufactured by Blodgett Oven Company. 1. . Xtem 46 - Convection Oven a. Introdel, Inc.. b. Everpure, Inc. 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. 3. . Verify correct mineral content with local water company in orc:ler to furnish correct filter. a. Connect to water line of Item 44, combi oven section. b. NSF approved. c. One (1) prefilter. 1) NSF Standard 42, particulate reduction, Class IV. d. One (1) filter. 1) NSF Standard 42, particulate reduction, Class It 2) Reduce particles down to one micron in size. 3) Carbon block 4) Scale/corrosion inhibition; . . 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) replaceable cartridge filter System One, Model # 1-S, as manufactured by CUNO, Inc. Item 45 - Water Filter . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400 - 40 95-0521l2-95 a. Stainless steel construction. b. 5 pan capacity, 12" x 20" x 2Y2". c. 60 minute timer. 2. Furnish each compartment as follows: a. Two compartments. b. 6" stainless steel adjustable legs. 1. Furnish one (1) convection steamer, Model # 24-CEA-10, as manufactured by Cleveland Range Company. Item 48 - Convection Steamer a. Wolf Range b. Southbend Company 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Gas - 1 \I." manifold, 120,000 BTU 3. Service requirements: . Four 30k star burners. 1) Automatic burner ignition. Standard porcelainized oven base. 1) Automatic burner ignition. 2) One (1) oven rack. Flue riser with stainless steel single deck overshelf. Stainless steel front. Chrome steel legs. Gas pressure regulator. e. f. c. d. b. a. 2. Furnish as follows. 1. Furnish one (1) four burner range, Model # 44-40R as manufactured by Garland Commercial Industries Inc. Item 47 - Four Burner Range a. Southbend b. Lang Manufacturing Company 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: . a. Electrical - one (1) Y2 hp each section, 10 amps each section, 120V/60110 each section b. Gas - one (1) %" manifold each section, 38,000 BTU each section Service requirements: 3. FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400-41 a. 12 gallon kettle. 95-0521l2-95 . 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) trunion kettle, Model # KET-12-T, as manufactured by Cleveland Range Company. Item 50 - Trunion Kettle a. . Introdel, Inc.. b. Everpure, Inc. 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. 3. VerifY correct mineral content with local water company in order to furnish correct filter. Connect to water line of Item 48. NSF approved. One (1) prefilter. 1) NSF Standard 42, particulate reduction, Class IV. One (1) filter. 1) NSF Standard 42, particulate reduction, Class It 2) Reduce particles down to one micron in size. 3) Carbon block 4) Scale/corrosion inhibition. d. c. . a. b. 2. Furnish as follows: I. Furnish one (1) replaceable cartridge filter System One, Model # I-S, as manufactured by CUNO, Inc. Item 49 - Water Filter a. Market Forge Company b. Groen 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical- 32 kw, 92 amps, 208V/60/3(2) b. Plwnbing - (2) Y2" cw, 1 Yo" waste 3. Service requirements: Compensating thermostat. Low water safety cut-off. Steam generator overflow protection. Door shut-off switch. Electric steam generator. 6" stainless steel adjustable legs. 1. d. e. f. g. h. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400 - 42 95-0521l2-95 1. Furnish one (I) 60 quart mixer, Model# H-600T, as manufactured by Hobart Corporation. Item 53 - Mixer a. Type 304, 14 gauge, stainless steel construction including underbracing. b. Undershelf. c. Stainless steel legs and gussets. d. Four (4) casters. I) Two with brakes. 3. Furnish as follows: a. Fully welded construction. 2. Fabricate table as indicated in section 11400. a. 6'-0" x 2'-6" x 3'-0" 1. Fabricate one (I) worktable as shown on plan. . Item 52 - Worktable Item 51 - Not Used a. Market Forge b. Groen 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical- 9.8 kw, 27.3 amps, 208V/60/30 b. Plwnbing - Y2" cw, Y2" cw 3. Service requirements: . Stainless steel construction. I) Interior liner - 316 stainless steel. Low water cut-off. Manual tilting. Lift off cover. Hot and cold water faucet with swing spout, Model # DPK. Equipment stand, Model # SID-28. 1) Stainless steel construction. 2) Removable drain drawer. 3) Splash shield. 4) Pan support. 5) Flexible drain hose. 6) Adjustable feet. a) Rear feet flanged to bolt to floor. e. f. g. c. d. b "!:t .-'1. , .~. FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 43 95-052112-95 . a. Type 304 stainless steel construction including underbracing. b. 5" high riser on sides and rear. I) Fully enclose. c. 10" wide spice shelf over top of table. d. Omit front cross rail. . e. Integral inverted rolled rim on front to form flour trough. 3. Furnish as follows: a. Fully welded construction. 2. Construct baker's table as indicated in section 11400. 1. Fabricate one (I) baker's table 1'_0" x 2'-10" x 3'-0". Item 54 - Baker's Table a. Welbilt Varimixer b. Berkel Inc. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: 4. . a. Electrical- 2 hp, 5.8 amps, 208V/60/30 3. Service requirements: a. 60 quart: I) Stainless steel bowl in lieu of tinned bowl. 2) Standard "B" flat beater. 3) Stainless steel"D" wire loop whip. 4) ED dough arm; . 5) Automatic bowl scrapper. 6) Bowl truck. 7) Bowl tru~k adapter. b. 30 quart: I) Stainless steel bowl. - 2) Bowl adapter, . 3) Standard "B" beater, 4) Stainless steel "D" wire whip. 5) ED dough hook. 6) Automatic bowl scrapper. c. Stainless Steel bowl guard. 1) In closed position for mixer to operate. d. Magnetic starter. e. Timer. f. # 12 attachment hub. Furnish with the following accessories. 2. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400-44 95-0521l2-95 4. Fabricate end of dishtable, that turns into dishwasher, as recommended by the dishwasher manufacturer. . Type 304 stainless steel construction including underbracing. Scrap trough as shown on plan. I) 12" wide. 2) Two (2) gushers. One at end of trough and one in center wall of trough. a) Cut-otfvalve for each gusher. 3) Silver saver at scrap trough where it enters pre-rinse sink. 21" X 21" X 7" pre-rinse sink with rack guide. Rack overshelf, size and shape as shown on plan. 1) 24" above table top. 2) Weep holes at corners. 6" neoprene scrap block where shown on plan. 1 ) Verify location and coordinate to allow for proper clearance of trash can. Mounting bracket on backsplash for disposer control panel. 1) Stainless steel chase to run wiring. a) Build so there are no exposed wires. Tray unload ledge at front edge of table as shown on plan. I) 12" wide. 2) W' above the table surface. g. f e. c. d. a. b. a. Fully welded construction. 3. Furnish as follows: 2. Construct table as indicated in section 11400. 1. Fabricate one (I) soiled dishtable size and shape as shown on plan. Item 56 - Soiled Dishtable a. Win-Holt Equipment b. Interplastic Corporation 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Polyethylene bin. 1) 27 gallon capacity. b. Heavy duty casters. 2. Furnish each as follows: . 1. Furnish three (3) ingredient bins, Model # IB27, as manufactured by Cambro Manufacturing Company. Item 55 - Ingredient Bin FOODSERVICEEQUIP1\.1ENT 11400-45 95-052112-95 . a. Electrical- 3 hp, 208V/60/30 4. Service requirements: a. ModelARSS b. Automatic reversing. c. Stainless steel NEMA 4 enclosure. d. Push button operation. e. Time delay relay, 45 seconds. f. Line disconnect. g. Safety interlocking handle. h. Mount on stainless steel bracket with chase specified with Item 56. I) Run wiring through stainless steel chase. 3. Furnish control panel, Model ARSS, as follows: Mount on Item 56. Polished aluminum exterior housing. Replaceable cutting plate. U ndercutters. Water cooled motor. 1) Built-in manual reset. Collar adaptor with safety baffle and stopper. I) 6W' sink collar Adjustable leg. g. f. c. d. e. a. b. . 2. Furnish disposer as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) disposer, Model # 300-SA-6, as manufactured by The Salvajor Company. Item 58 - Disposer a. Chicago Faucet Company b. Dormont Manufacturing Company 4. Alternates by the following' manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Plumbing ~ W' cw, Y2" hw 3. Service requirements: I a. B-107-C3510-flo spray head. b. B-109-18 wall bracket. c. Mount on Item 56. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (l) pre-rinse spray unit, Model # B-133-CC, as manufactured by T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Item 57 - Pre-Rinse Spray . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400 - 46 a. Champion Industries b. Blakeslee 95-052112-95 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical- 15 kw, 3\1. hp, 59.4 amps, 208V/60/30 I) One (I) electrical connection for tank heat and motors. b. Plwnbing - %" hw, 2" waste I) One (I) water connection for both fill and final rinse. 3. Service requirements: . Stainless steel frame, legs and feet. Stainless steel front. Stainless steel top mounted control panel. Auto fill. One (1 ) water connection for both fill and final rinse. Positive low water cut off. Door shut-off switch. Final rinse saver. Energy sentinel. Limit switch at end of clean dishtable. Upper and lower wash arms in both pre-wash tank and wash tank. Vent hood with locking damper at discharge end of machine. One electrical connection for tank heat and motors. External mechanism for opening and closing dishwasher drains or lever system at door opening of tank. Dishwasher serviceable from front of machine only. Direction offeed as shown on plan. Corner scrapper on load side with exhaust duct and locking damper. Low temp final rinse. I. Chemical sanitizing. Racks. 1) 2) Ten (10) peg. Two (6) combination. s. o. p. q. r. J. k. 1. m. n. 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. Furnish with the following: 1. Furnish one (I) dishwasher, Model # CCS 66A, as manufactured by Hobart Corporation. Item 59 - Dishwasher a. In-Sink-Erator Inc. b. Masters Disposers, Inc. . Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: b. Plumbing - Y2" cw, 2" waste 5. FOODSERVICEEQUIP1\.1ENT 11400 - 47 95-052112-95 . a. Fully welded construction. 2. Construct table as indicated in section 11400. 1. Fabricate one (1) clean dishtable. Item 63 - Clean Dishtable a. Introdel, Inc.. b. Everpure, Inc. 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. 3. Verify correct mineral content with local water company in order to furnish correct filter. Connect to water line ofItem 59. NSF approved. One (1) prefilter. 1) NSF Standard 42, particulate reduction, Class IV. Three (3) filter. 1) NSF Standard 42, particulate reduction, Class II. 2) Reduce particles down to one micron in size. 3) Carbon block 4) Scale/corrosion inhibition. d. c. a. b. . 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) replaceable cartridge filter System One, Model # loS, as manufactured by CUNO, Inc. Item 62 - Water Filter Item 61 - Not Used a. Exhaust Duct Size - Two (2) 4" x 16" x 60" each @ 600 CFM Total @ .25 SP. I) VerifY length and width with dishwasher manufacturer. 3. . Service requirements a. Type 304 16 gauge stainless steel. b. Fit end over vent hood duct collar as recommended by dishwasher manufacturer. c. Mount on Item 59. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Fabricate two (2) dishwasher exhaust ducts. Item 60 - Dishwasher Exhaust Duct When dishwasher other than the prime is furnished notifY general contractor in writing if electrical requirements are different. NOTE: . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400-48 95-0521l2-95 a. Type 304 stainless steel construction. b. Stainless steel enclosure panels with access doors. c. Conveyor with variable speed drive. d. Automatic belt tensioning device. e. Y2" wide polyurethane bands riding on continuous removable NOLU-S low-friction runners. f. 5" polyurethane casters with brakes. g. 10' cord and twist-lock plug. 2. Furnish as follows: a. 12' long. 1. Furnish one (1) tray make-up conveyor, Model # SDB-EV-IO-P, as manufactured by Traycon Manufacturing Company. Item 67 - Tray Make-Up Conveyor Item 66 - Not Used a. Seco . Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: 3. a. Welded stainless steel construction. b. Slotted shelves. c. Push pull handle. d. Non-marking bwnpers. e. Casters: 1) Two (2) 5" swivel casters. 2) Two (2) 8" fixed wheels. f. Sixty (60) tray capacity. 2. Furnish each as follows: 1. Furnish ten (l0) tray delivery carts, Model # J05A, as manufactured by Aladdin Synergetics, Inc. Item 65 - Tray Delivery Cart Item 64 - Not Used . a. Type 304 stainless steel construction including underbracing. b. Size and shape as shown on plan. c. Fabricate end of dishtable, that turns into dishwasher, as recommended by the dishwasher manufacturer. d. Pipe base undershelfT-O" from left end of dishtable. e. Limit switch at end of table. Furnish as follows: 3. FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400-49 a. The Delfield Company b. Precision Industries (L TD), Inc. 95-0521l2-95 . 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical - 3.6 kw, 17.3 amps, 208V/601l0 3. Service requirements: a. Four (4) wet/dry hot food wells. 1 ) Manifold drains. b. Food protector. c. Workshelf. d. Casters. 1) Two with brakes. e. Counter height 36". f. 14 gauge stainless steel construction. 2. Furnish with the following accessories. Furnish one (1) hot food counter, Model # 501-4, as manufactured by ServoliftlEastern Corporation. 1. . Item 68 - Hot Food Counter a. Southern Equipment Company b. ServoliftlEastern Corporation 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: . a. Electrical - 3.6 kw, Y2 hp, (2) 113 convenience receptacle, 21.5 amps, 120V /208V /601l0 b. Plumbing - '12" cw, W' hw, 1 Y2" waste, FD 3. Service requirements: Stainless steel enclosed electrical raceway. I) Weather proof electrical receptacles. 2) Dedicated circuit breakers. 3) Color cOded terminal blocks. Electrical power and control circuits conform with JIC standards and NEC standards formachine tools. Integral table limit switch furnished to shut off drive if tray moves past the established end point of conveyor. Control panel. I) NEMA 4X construction. . 2) Mount below table level at end of belt. Unit NSF certified and UL listed. . h. 1. J. k. 1. . FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400 - 50 95-052112-95 1. Furnish one (1) beverage counter, Model # 500-2, as manufactured by ServoliftlEastern Corporation. Item 71- Beverage Counter a. The Delfield Company b. Precision Industries (LID), Inc. 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. 14 gauge stainless steel construction. b. Height 36". c. Workshelf d. Casters. 1) Two with brakes. 2. Furnish as follows. 1. Furnish one (1) flat top counter, Model # 500-2, as manufactured by ServoliftlEastern Corporation. . Item 70- Flat Top Counter a. The Delfield Company b. Precision Industries (LID), Inc. 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical - 1/5 hp, 4.2 amps, 120V /60110 3. Service requirements: a. 14 gauge stainless steel construction. b. Stainless steel cold pan. 1) 4" deep. 2) 5Q3;"" x 20". 3) Stainless steel drain with shut-off valve. 4) Self contained refrigeration. c. Work shelf. d. Food protector. e. Casters. 1) Two with brakes. 2. Furnish as follows. . 1. Furnish one (1) cold food counter, Model # 502-2R, as manufactured by ServoliftlEastem Corporation. Item 69 - Cold Food Counter FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400 - 51 95-052112-95 . a. ~Iectrical- 4 kw, (2) Y2 hp, I20V/20~V/60110 4. Service requirements: 2) Individual controls for each well. 3) I kw each well. h. Mechanically cooled cold pan size and shape as shown on plan. I) 60" x 20" 2) Size to hold 12" x 20" pans. 1. Food protector over hot food wells. j. Double deck display shelf over cold pan with adjustable sneeze guard. k. Refrigerated base under cold pan. I) Locate compressors under hot food wells. 1. In front on coffee urn and ice tea urn a 36" x 4" stainless steel drip trough. Type 304 stainless steel construction including underbracing. 6" stainless steel legs and gussets. Stainless steel adjustable stainless steel bullet feet. Skirt on front on cafeteria side. Plastic laminate on front. a) Color selected by Architect. Three bar stainless steel tray rail. Four (4) wet/dry hot food wells where shown on plan. I) Manifold drains. f. g. e. c. d. . a. b. 3. Fabricate as follows: a. Fully welded construction. 2. Construct table as indicated in section 11400. a. Size and shape as shown on plan. I. Fabricated one (1) serving counter. Item 72 - Serving Counter a. The Delfield Company b. Precision Industries (LTD), Inc. 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: . a. 14 gauge stainless steel construction. b. Height 36". c. Workshelf d. Casters. 1) Two with brakes. Furnish as follows. 2. . . FOODSERVICEEQUlP1\.1ENT 11400-52 a. Bunn-O-Matic Corporation b. Cecilware Corporation 95-052/12-95 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical- 15 kw, 42 amps, 208V/60/30 b. Plwnbing - Y2" cw 3. Service requirements: . Type 304 stainless steel construction. Fully automatic, twin unit. 6 gallons each coffee liner. Dual wall fiberglass insulated. Automatic air agitation with plug-in type top coffee gage fittings. Automatic refill. Stainless steel brew basket for paper filters. Positive low water cut-off. By-pass on spray arm. Variable sprayover rate. Plug-in timer. Electro polished liners. Two (2) year parts and labor warranty. c. d. e. f. g. h. 1. J. k. 1. m. a. b. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) coffee maker, Model # 8106, as manufactured by American Metal Ware Company. Item 74 - Coffee Maker a. Bunn-O-Matic Corporation b. Cecilware Corporation 3. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Type 304 stainless steel construction. b. 7" faucet clearance. c. Portable. d. Ten gallon unit. 2. Furnish as follows: . 1. Furnish one (1) ice tea dispenser, Model # 510, as manufactured by American Metal Ware Company. Item 73 - Ice Tea Dispenser FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-53 95-052/12-95 . a. Electrical- 1 hp, 3.8 amps, 208V/60/30 3. Service requirements: a. Stainless steel construction. b. 4 minute timer. c. Peeler unit. d. Abrasive disc. e. Plastic molded hopper cover. f. Disposer stand. 1) Stainless steel legs. 2) Four (4) bolt-down adjustable leveling feet. 3) Solenoid water control valve. 4) , Air-gap type inlet. 1. Furnish one (1) potato peeler, Model # 6460T, as manufactured by Hobart Corporation. 2. Furnish as follows: Item 76 - Potato Peeler Plumbing - 2" waste. a. . 4. Service requirements: a. Type 304, 14 gauge, stainless steel construction including underbracing, b. 12" wide overshelf as shown on plan. c. Open base, omit front cross bracing. d. One (1) 24" x 27" x 14" deep sink where shown on plan. I) Welded and ground smooth to top of table. 2) Basket drain. e. Stainless steel legs and gussets. f. Adjustable stainless steel bullet feet. g. 10" backsplash. h. Mounting bracket on backsplash for disposer control paneL 1) Stainless steel chase to run wiring. a) Build so there are no exposed wires. 3. Furnish as follows: a. Fully welded construction. 2. Fabricate table as indicated in section 11400. a. 6'-0" x 2'-6" x 3'-0" 1. Fabricate one (I) worktable as shown on plan. Item 75 - Worktable . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 54 95-052/12-95 a. Mount on Item 75. b. B- WH-6 wrist action handles. 2. Furnish as follows: 1. Furnish one (1) faucet, Model # B-231-CC, as manufactured by T & S Brass & Bronze Works, Inc. Item 78 - Faucet a. In-Sink-Erator Inc. b. Masters Disposers, Inc. 5. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: a. Electrical- Y2 hp, 208V/60/30 b. Plwnbing - W' cw, 2" waste 4. Service requirements: . ModelARSS Automatic reversing. Stainless steel NEMA 4 enclosure. Push button operation. Time delay relay, 45 seconds. Line disconnect. Safety interlocking handle. Mount on stainless steel bracket with chase specified with Item 75. I) Run wiring through stainless steel chase. e. f. g. h. a. b. c. d. 3. Furnish control panel as follows: a. Mount on Item 76. b. Stainless steel construction. c. Collar adaptor with safety baffle and stopper. I) 6Y2" sink collar d. Solenoid valve, W' with flow control. e. Fixed nozzle, Y2" 2. Furnish as follows: I. Furnish one (1) disposer, Model # 50-SA6, as manufactured by The Salvajor Company. Item 77 - Disposer a. Blakeslee b. Berkel . Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specifications are acceptable: 4. FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400-55 95-0521l2-95 . A. Metal Tops for Tables: Size tops as specified herein. Construct tops from 14 gauge (.075) type 304 stainless steel that is polished on exposed surfaces. Construct exposed edges with a square break. Break the front and sides 900 down for I Y2" and back 450 for Y2". Construct backsplash as indicated in Section 11400. Furnish a 4" "Z" bar as shown on plan and indicated in Section 11400. Reinforce tops with 14 gauge (.075) stainless steel angle channels, I" x 5" xl", running from front to back on 39" centers. Reinforce tops with extra channels where extra equipment is supported on table. Weld frames to tops. Secure legs, bodies, etc. to frames so no bolts or rivets extend through working tops. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Set, level and make equipment ready for final connections by other trades. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION a. Introdel, Inc.. b. Everpure, Inc. 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. Verify correct mineral content with local water company in order to furnish correct filter. 3. . a. Connect to water line ofItem 74:. b.' NSF approved: c. One (1) prefilter. I) NSF Standard 42, particulate reduction, Class IV. d. Two (2) filters. 1) NSF Standard 42, particulate reduction, Class II. 2) Reduce particles down to one micron in size. 3) Carbon block 4) Scale/corrosion inhibition. 2. Furnish as follows: . 1. Furnish one (1) replaceable cartridge filter System One, Model # 2-S, as manufactured by CUNO, Inc. Item 79 - Water Filter a. Chicago Faucet Company b. Dormont ManufacturingCompany 4. Alternates by the following manufacturers complying with the above specification are acceptable. a. Plwnbing - Y2" cw, Y2" hw Service requirements: 3. . . FOOD SERVICE EQUIP1\.1ENT 11400-56 95-0521l2-95 1. Sleeves: Where legs, standards, pipes and/or pipe chases come through a work area or table top construct with 3" high stainless steel sleeves with the periphery welded and polished to match adjacent services. Stainless steel flag brackets mounted to wall surfaces are not allowed. NOTE: H. Overshelves: Size overshelves the width and length as shown on the plans and construct from 16 gauge (.063) polished type 304 stainless steel with front and sides to break square at a 900 turn down for 1 Y2" and break 450 for Y2". Turn rear of overshelfup with an NSF approved coved corner for 2" and be hem. Bolt overshelfto stainless steel flag brackets. Fully weld flag bracket to I \I." square type 304 stainless steel standards. Extend standards through stainless steel sleeves as indicated in Section 11400. Make standards removable and attach to frame work of table. Do not extend standards to the outside area of said worktable or sink under any circwnstances. . Cabinet Bases: Construct cabinet base frames of 1 Y2" x I Y2" X '18" stainless steel angles with joints welded and braced with 14 gauge (.075) type 304 stainless steel sheet metal gussets. Cover frames at back and ends with continuous sheets of 20 gauge (.038) type 304 stainless steel folded into opening in the front. Provide cabinets with two shelves unless otherwise specified. Construct shelves in sections of 18 gauge (.050) type 304 stainless steel turned down I1f2" around edges and under. Make shelves removable and place in stainless steel angle frames. Construct sliding doors from a single piece of 18 gauge (.050) polished type 304 stainless steel flanged in back forming a single pan type door. Weld corners and polish. Operate doors on 2" ball-bearing rollers welded to back of door and operating on stainless steel NSF approved sanitary track. Fit doors with flush type stainless steel pulls. G. F. Casters: Provide casters with 5" high assembly, roller bearing construction, swivel type with non-marking rubber tread with two casters in each set having locking type brakes. E. Drawers: Construct drawers to hold a 20" x 20" x 5" deep molded plastic insert as manufac- tured by U.S. Rubber Company. Operate frame and drawer slides on stainless steel ball bearing wheels in stainless steel channels secured to sides of housing. Construct front of drawer with an 18 gauge (.050) type 304 stainless steel die-stamped face. Arrange drawer assembly so that it can be pulled full length without tilting and have a manual operated release latch so it can be removed for cleaning. Construct drawer assembly as a positive closing type. D. Dishtables: Provide size and shape as listed and shown on plans. Provide tops of the same material and gauge as for "Metal Tops for Tables" except flange ends that work against dishwasher down into dishwasher and secure as recommended by dishwasher manufacturer. Turn exposed free edges up 3" with a 900 square break for 2" to front and turn down 900 on a square break for 1 Y2" and back Y2" on a I 00 angle. Provide backsplash as indicated in Section 11400. Furnish a 4" "Z" bar as shown on plan and as indicated in Section 11400. Design table tops so that water will drain properly into dishwasher or trough. c. "Z" Bars: Construct "Z" bar of 20 gauge (.038) type 304 stainless steel. Bolt "Z" bar to wall with stainless steel molly bolts. Seal "Z" bar to backsplash and wall with clear sealant. Construct "Z" bar the same length as equipment it is to cover. Extend "Z" bar around corner for 3" and join to next section of "Z" bar with a bolted field joint. . Backsplash: Flange edges, that work against a wall, up 8" and back 2" on a 450 angle, for a height of 10", then turn up 2" on a 450 angle running parallel to wall for a total height of 12". Enclose backsplash at exposed ends. B. FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-57 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 11400 M. Detail Requirements: Construct horizontal corners on a minimwn of \I." radius and vertical corners on a minimwn of 11." radius. Sinks: Size sinks as specified with one, two, three or four compartments. Construct sink compartments 14" deep inside and 35" high to work top unless otherwise specified. Construct bodies of sinks from 14 gauge (.075) polished type 304 stainless steel. Weld and polish joints to match outside finish. Construct sinks with an integral backsplash as indicated in Section 11400 and punched to receive faucets. Furnish a 4" "Z" bar as shown on plan and as indicated in Section 11400. Turn exposed edges up 3" with a 900 square break for 2" to front and break square 900 down for I W' and break backto sink at a 100 angle for Y2". Provide a 2" brass chrome plated lever handle waste in each sink compartment secured in the bottom so no rivet or bolt heads will show. Furnish waste Model # 1700-1020-1000 by Standard-Keil. Furnish a support bracket for lever handle wastes. Construct sink bottoms with a slope from outside corners to drains. Mount sinks on specified type 304 stainless steel legs. Provide each leg with a stainless steel bullet adjustable foot. Securely fasten legs through a 14 gauge (.075) type 304 stainless steel gusset welded to the bottom of the sink, one at each outside corner. Provide bracing from front to rear and between rear of sink legs. Omit front cross rails. Size insert sinks as specified and of the same construction as required herein for other sinks except do not provide backsplash or legs. In case of metal top tables, weld sinks into table top and grind weld smooth and polish. . 1. K. Gussets, Legs and Feet: Legs and cross rails constructed of 1 Y2" O.D., 16 gauge, stainless steel square tubing. Make tables 36" high unless otherwise specified. Fit legs with a 3" stainless steel adjustable bullet foot enclosed at bottom. Securely fasten top of legs into stainless steel gussets and weld to reinforcing channels extending across to the opposite leg. Spot weld this channel to underside of the metal table top. Brace legs all around, 10" above the floor, by I Y2" square stainless steel tubular pipe that is welded to each leg, polished and ground smooth. When undershelf is specified use as bracing. Use NSF approved stainless steel square type gussets with set screws. Make counter legs 8" high with stainless steel adjustable bullet feet. Undershelves: Construct undershelves of 16 gauge type 304 stainless steel with front turned down square 900 for I Y2". Turn rear and sides up 4" and hem. Fully weld shelves to legs and grind smooth. Place undershelves 10" above fInished floor. Where undershelf is longer than 4'-0" run a I" x 3" x I" stainless steel channel down the center of the shelf for support. 1. . FLOOR MATS AND fRAMES 12690 - 1 95-052/12-95 . A. field Measurements: Check actual framed openings for mats by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid a delay of the Work. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS E. Maintenance data in the form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and maintaining floor mats. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of floor mat and frame materials, showing full range of colors, textures, finishes, and patterns available, for each type of floor mat and frame indicated. C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of floor mat and frames, full-scale sections of typical installations, details of patterns or designs, anchors, and accessories. B. Product data for each type of floor mat and frame specified, including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions, details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. SUBMITI ALS 1.03 . C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include frames for floor mats to be set in concrete floor slabs. I. Division 3 Sections for concrete work, including forming, placing, and finishing concrete floor slabs and grouting frames into recess. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Frames to be set in concrete floors to receive recessed floor mats. 2. Recessed floor mats of the following type: A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental)' Conditions and Division' 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 I RELA TED DOCUMENTS PART I - GENERAL FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES SECTION 12690 . . FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12690 - 2 95-052/12-95 I. Tapered Flexible Molding: Tapered vinyl carpet edge moldings with flanges fused to back of mat. a. Provide moldings at all 4 edges with mitered corners. C. Carpet-Type Mats: Level-cut-pile nylon carpet bonded to 1/8- to I14-inch-thick flexible vinyl backing to form mats 3/8- or 7/16-inch-thick with nonraveling edges. I. Extruded Alwninum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063- T5. Coat surface of frame that will contact cementitious material with zinc chromate paint or manufacturer's standard protective coating. 2. Provide edge members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and with pieces spliced together by means of straight connecting pins. B. Recessed Mat Frames: Size and style to fit floor mat type matching approved sample, for permanent recessed installation in floor, complete with corner pins or reinforcing and installation anchorages. . General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials, including metals and metal fmishes indicated or specified. Where not indicated, provide colors, patterns, and profiles selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. A. 2.02 MATERIALS 1. Carpet-Type Mats: a. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. b. Construction Specialties, Inc. - (PMll375M *Basis of Design) c. Metalines, Div. of Balco, Inc. d. Rol-Dek 11 (EM-550) - Bache Architectural Products. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Provide oversized recesses in concrete work to receive frames. Defer frame installation until building enclosure is complete and related interior finish work is in progress. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mats and frames from one source of a single manufacturer. . QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.05 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12690 - 3 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 12690 B. Defer installation of floor mats until time of Substantial Completion for Project. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses, and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near time of Substantial Completion. . A. 3.02 PROTECTION 1. Where frame is embedded in grout, install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure attachment. A. Install recessed frames and mats complying with manufacturer's instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Shop-fabricate units of floor mat work to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where not indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed manufacturer's maximUm size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter comer joints in framing elements' with hairline joints or provide prefabricated comer units without joints. Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication. FABRICATION 2.03 . METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - I 95-052/12-95 . C. Structural Framing and Roof: Design primary and secondary structural members and exterior covering materials for applicable loads and combinations of loads in accordance with the Metal Building Manufacturers Association's (MBMA) "Design Practices ManuaL" 1. Basic design loads include live load, wind load, and seismic load, in addition to the dead load. B. Design Loads: Basic design loads, are indicated on the drawings. I. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA's "Design Practices Manual." A. General: Engineer, design, fabricate and erect the pre-engineered metal building system to withstand loads from winds, gravity, structural movement including movement thermally induced, and to resist in-service use conditions that the building will experience, including exposure to the weather, without failure. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Concrete floor and foundations and installation of anchor bolts are specified in Division 3 Section "Concrete Work." Sealants and calking are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." 2. . 1. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: . 1. Roof system consists of the manufacturer's standard standing-seam insulated roof. 2. Manufacturer's standard building components and accessories may be used, provided components, accessories, and complete structure conform to design indicated and specified requirements. A. This Section includes a single-story, single-span, rigid-frame-type pre-engineered metal building of the nominal length, width, eave height, .and roof pitch indicated. 1.02 . SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS PART I - GENERAL METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS SECTION 13122 . . METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - 2 95-052112-95 F. Professional engineer's certificate prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located, verifying that the structural framing and covering panels meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Installer certificates signed by metal building manufacturer written certification certifying that the installer complies with requirements included under the "Quality Assurance" Article. D. Samples for verification purposes of roofing panels. Provide sample panels 12 inch (300 mm) long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, battens, fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories. . Structural Framing: Furnish complete erection drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Include details showing fabrication and assembly of the metal building system. Show anchor bolts settings and sidewall, endwall, and roof framing. Include transverse cross-sections. Roofing Panels: Provide layouts of panels on roof, details of edge conditions, joints, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Include transverse cross-sections. Building Accessory Components: Provide details of metal building accessory components to clearly indicate methods of installation including the following: a. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide layouts at 1/4 inch per foot (1 :50) scale. Provide details of gutters, downspouts, and other sheet metal accessories at not less than 1-II2 inch per foot (1: 10) scale showing profiles, methods of joining, and anchorages. 3. 2. 1. C. Shop drawings for metal building structural framing system, roofing and siding panels, and other metal building system components and accessories that are not fully detailed or dimensioned in manufacturer's product data. B. Product data consisting of metal building system manufacturer's product information for building components and accessories. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.04 SUBMITI ALS . Structural Steel: Comply with the American Institute of Steel Construction's (AISC) "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" for design requirements and allowable stresses. Welded Connections: Comply with the American Welding Society's (A WS) "Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" for welding procedures. 2. 1. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - 3 95-052/12-95 . B. Steel Tubing or Pipe: Comply with ASTM A 500 Grade B, ASTM A 501, or ASTM A 53. A. Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Shapes: Comply with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) or ASTM A 529 (ASTM A 529M). 2.02 MATERIALS I. Butler Manufacturing Co. 2. Ceco Buildings Division. 3. Kirby Building Systems, Inc. 4. Varco-Pruden Buildings. 5. Whirlwind Steel Buildings, Inc. A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide metal building systems provided by one of the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS . C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accwnulations wilI drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering. panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. A. Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation damage. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING B. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of the pre-engineered metal building system. ,Metal build.ing systems having equal performance characteristics with deviations from indicated dimensions and profiles may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance. The burden of proof for equality is on the proposer. A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain the metal building system components, including structural framing, wall and roof covering, and accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.05 . . METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - 4 95-052/12-95 D. Bolts: Provide shop-painted bolts except when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofmg and siding panels. Provide zinc-plated or cadmium-plated bolts when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofmg and siding panels. C. Wind Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing using 1/2 inch (13 rom) diameter threaded steel rods; comply with ASTM A 36/ A36M or ASTM A 572/ A572M, Grade D. Locate interior end bay bracing only where indicated. 1. Roof Purlins, Sidewall and Endwall Girts: "C"-or "Z"-shaped sections fabricated from 16 gage (1.5 mm) shop-painted roll-formed steel. Purl in spacers shall be fabricated from 14 gage (2.0 rom) cold-formed galvanized steel sections. 2. Eave Struts: Unequal flange "C"-shaped sections formed to provide adequate backup for both wall and roof panels. Fabricate from 16 gage (1.5 rom) shop- painted roll-formed steel. 3. Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8 x 1-5/8 inch (41 x 41 mm) angles fabricated from 16 gage (1.5 rom) shop-painted roll-formed steel. B. Secondary Framing: Provide the following secondary framing members: . Provide length of span and spacing of frames indicated. Slight variations in length of span and frame spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard. Provide rigid frames at endwalls where indicated. 2. 1. A. Rigid Frames: Fabricate from hot-rolled structural steel shapes. Provide factory-welded, shop-painted, built-up "I-beam"-shape or open-web-type frames consisting of tapered or parallel flange beams and tapered columns. Furnish frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. 2.03 STRUCTURAL FRAMING 1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead-free, universal primer, selected by the manufacturer for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field- applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. Comply with FS TI-P-645. F. Paint and Coating Materials: Comply with performance requirements of the federal specifications indicated. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, compliance with compositional requirements of federal specifications indicated is not required. E. Bolts for Structural Framing: Comply with ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) as necessary for design loads and connection details. D. Structural Quality Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A 446 with G90 (ASTM A 446M with Z275) coating complying with ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M). Grade to suit manufacturer's standards. . Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M) or ASTM A 569. C. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122-5 95-052/12-95 . A. General: Provide coated steel sheet metal accessories with coated steel roofing and siding panels. 2.05 SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES F. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone rubber sealant as recommended by the building manufacturer. E. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive 100 percent solids grey polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber, self-extinguishing flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of . roofing and siding sheets. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary .to ensure weathertight construction. 1. Flashings. 2. Closers. 3. Fillers. 4. Ridge covers. Accessories: Provide the following sheet metal accessories factory-formed of the same material in the same finish as roof and wall panels: C. . 1. Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of panels. 2. Use alwninwn or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application and galvanized or cadmium-plated fasteners for interior applications. 3. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer. 4. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roofing or siding sheets by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end- welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. A. Lap-Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-formed lap-seam roof panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to roof purlins using exposed fasteners and sealants. Form panels of 26 gage (0.55mm), Grade C, zinc-coated steel sheets. Roof panels by Ceco - MAP - Galvalume Finish. 2.04 ROOFING PANELS I. Prime structural' steel primary and secondary framing members with the manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer: Shop Painting: Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow procedures of SSPC-SP3 for power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP7 for brush-off blast cleaning, and SSPC-SPI for solvent cleaning. E. . . METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - 6 95-052/12-95 1. Movement-resisting frames may be used in lieu of sidewall rod bracing, to suit manufacturer's standards. C. Bracing: Provide diagonal rod or angle bracing in roof and sidewalls as indicated. B. Purlins and Girts: Provide rake or gable purl ins with tight-fitting closure channels and fascias. Locate and space wall girts to suit door and window arrangements and heights. Secure purlins and girts to structural framing and hold rigidly to a straight line by sag rods. A. Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level base plates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use a non shrinking grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than 7 days after placement. 3.01 ERECTION PART 3 - EXECUTION . I. Shop Connections: Provide power riveted, bolted, or welded shop connections. 2. Field Connections: Provide bolted field connections. Structural Framing: Shop-fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with base plates, bearing plates, and other plates required for erection, welded in place. Provide holes for anchoring or connections shop-drilled or punched to template dimensions. B. 1. Fabricate components in such a manner that once assembled, they may be disassembled, repackaged, and reassembled with a minimum amount of labor. 2. Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. A. General: Design prefabricated components and necessary field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and disassembly. 2.06 FABRICATION C. Downspouts: Form in 10 feet (3 m) long sections, complete with elbows and offsets. Join sections with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inch (1500 mm) on center in between. Paint finish to match steel frame. . Gutters: Form in 96 inch (2400 mm) long sections, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Size in accordance with SMACNA. Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide expansion-type slip joint at center of runs. Fmnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches (900 mm) on center, constructed of same metal as gutters. Provide bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish to match roof rake. B. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - 7 95-052112-95 e. END OF SECTION 13122 Cleaning and Touch-Up: Clean component surfaces of matter that could preclude paint bond. Touch up abrasions, marks, skips, or other defects to shop-primed surfaces with same type material as shop primer. D. . C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Install gutters, downspouts, ventilators, louvers, and other sheet metal accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting. Adjust operating mechanism for precise operation. 1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to clean, dry surface of the weather side of fastenings on end laps, and on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels and elsewhere as needed to make roof sheets weatherproof to driving rains. B. Roof Sheets: Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of ribbed or fluted roof sheets and between roof sheets and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. .2. Provide weathersea1 under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. A. General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.. Protect factory finishes from damage. 3,02 ROOFING Where diaphragm strength of roof or wall covering is adequate to resist wind forces, rod or angle bracing will not be required. 2. . HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 1 95-052/12-95 . B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; A. Hydraulic Elevators: Elevators in which cars are hoisted either directly or indirectly by action of a hydraulic plunger and cylinder Gack); with other components of the Work, including fluid storage tank, pump, piping, valves, car enclosures, hoistway entrances, operation systems, signal equipment, guide rails, electrical wiring, roping (roped hydraulic applications), buffers, and devices for operations, safety, security, required performance at rated speed and capacity, and for complete elevator installation. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation to accommodate plunger~cylinder assembly. Where indicated, furnish well casing and coordinate delivery with related excavation work. . Division 3 Section "Cast-in~Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening guide-rail brackets. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for attachment plates, angle brackets, divider beams, and other steel framing for supporting guide-rail brackets. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for hot-rolled steel subs ills and entrance frames. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting of hoistway entrances. Division 9 Sections for finish flooring in elevator cars. Division 16 Sections for electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches, standby power source, and transfer switch. Division 16 Sections for security card access equipment used to restrict elevator use. 1.03 DEFINITIONS' 10. 7. 8. 9. 6. 5. 4. . 3. 2. 1. I. Hydraulic passenger elevators. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements ~hatrelate to this Section: A. This Section includes the following: 1.02 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I' Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS SECTION 14240 . PART 1 - GENERAL . . HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 2 95-052/12-95 1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. B. Standard Elevator Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within the specified warranty period. A. General Warranty: The elevator warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Docwnents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.06 WARRANTY 1. ASME A 17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators," referred to as the "Code:" a. Seismic Zone: Comply with code requirements for seismic risk zone 2. B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with the applicable provisions of the following: A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the elevator manufacturer or an experienced Installer approved by the elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. . QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.05 E. Inspection and acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by governing authorities for normal, unrestricted elevator use. D. Maintenance manuals for each different hydraulic elevator, including operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's information at project closeout as specified in Division 1. C. Shop Drawings for each elevator showing plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, coordination with building structure, and relationships with other construction. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximwn dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and locations of signals. Include maximum and average power demands. B. Product Data for each elevator including capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, controls, finishes, and similar information. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.04 SUBMIITALS . unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 3 95-052/12-95 . C. Power Supply: 480 V, 60 Hz, 3 pliase.(30 H.P.) I. Hydraulic Machines: Single-acting, under-the-car, hydraulic plunger-cylinder units. 2. Pump Unit: Positive displacement pump. (Manufacturers Standard) B. Hydraulic Machines and Elevator Equipment: Provide hydraulic plunger-cylinder units of type indicated below, with electric pwn~tank-control system equipment in machine room as indicated. A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherWise indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system. 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS I. Dover Elevator Corp. 2. Montgomery Elevator Co. 3. Otis Elevator Co. 4. U.S. Elevator. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hydraulic elevators by one of the following: . B. . A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering hydraulic elevators that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS B. Continuing Maintenance ServiCe: . Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the fonn of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. I. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during nohnal working hours. a. Response Time: .2 hours or less. . A.Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Suhstantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. MAINTENANCE SERVICE 1.07 . . HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 4 95-052/12-95 I. Illuminated hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate of acrylic or other permanent translucent plastic. A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of elevators complying with requirements indicated below. 2.05 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT I. Standby power operation, where scheduled. A. General: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for passenger elevators, except where otherwise indicated. 2.04 AUXILIARY OPERATIONS B. Single Elevator-Passenger: Provide "Selective-Collective Automatic Operation" as defined in ASME A17.1. A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator or group of elevators of the type of operation indicated. 2.03 OPERA nON SYSTEMS . Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. 1. I. Fittings for pVC Pipe: ASTM D 2466. 2. Solvent Cement for PVC Pipe and Fittings: . ASTM D 2564. H. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. No-Ox-Id R-R #61 lOA; Diversified Enterprises. b. Union-Gard 160; Pacific Standard Chemical Co. G. Corrosion Protective Filler: A solventless, petroleum-based compound specifically formulated for filling the space between hydraulic cylinders and casings. Filler is heavier than water, electrically nonconductive, and has a pliable waxlike consistency, but becomes fluid when heated to 150 deg F (66 deg C). F. Cylinder Casings: Protective casings 2 inches (50 mm) larger than cylinders made from Schedule 80 PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785,. with bottoms of caSings sealed with end caps complying with ASTM D 2467 and attached with solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564.. E. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Specification Section. . Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide isolation couplings to prevent sound/vibration transmissions from power unit. D. .:, ..... 1->:;: ~"j '01' HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 5 95-052/i2-95 . A. Infrared ~y: Provide safety device with a uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor- . controlled infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause the doors to stop and reopen. 2.06 DOOR SAFETY DEVICES I; Provide units projecting from faceplates for ease of angular viewing. 2. Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise shown. Mount at minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above fmished floor. 3. With each lantem, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. a. . At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on each car. G. Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illwninated arrows, but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Match materials, finishes, and mounting method of hall push-button stations. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate designed for mounting on wall with body of units recessed in wall: I-button stations with direction indication at terminal landings. F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide I hall push-button station at each landing for each elevator. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. 1. . E. Car Position Indicator: For passenger elevator cars, provide either illuminated-signal type, digital-display type, or segmented type, located above the car door or above the car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. D. Telephone: Provide rough-in for telephone handset in each car, contained in flush- mounted cabinet and complete with identification and instructions for use. C. Emergency Communication . System: -- Provide hands-free audio and visual 2-way emergency communication between each car and a 24-hour monitoring service. System automatically dials preprogrammed number. of monitoring service and identifies elevator location to monitoring service. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet complete with identification, instructions for use, and battery back-up power supply, and complies with ADA regulations. . . B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacnirer's standard semirecessed car control station in . each car. Include call buttons for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls required for specified Car operation. Provide operating device symbols as required by the "Code." Mark other buttons and switches with manufacturer's standard identification for requiTed use or function. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, if not otherwise indicated. Except for buttons and illuminated. elements, fabricate signal equipment with exposed surfaces as follows: a. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. b. . Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. 2. . . HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 6 95-052/12-95 A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present; for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of elevator work. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Satin Stainless-Steel Panels: Flush construction, fabricated from ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, with No. 4 satin finish. 2. Alwninmn Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thickness, mill finish. 3. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for grouting door sills and similar applications. . General: . Provide manufacturer's standard hollow-metal, sliding, d60r-and-frame hoistway. entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Match car doors for size, number of panels, and door movement. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. A. 2.08 PASSENGER HOISTWA Y ENTRANCES 1. Satin Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304, with No.4 satin finish. 2.. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 3. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 4. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements. 5. Handrails: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless-steel handrails on side walls and back wall, unless otherwise indicated. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections indicated for each car enclosure surface; provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: I. Floor finish of elevator cab shall match Lobby Fllor fmish. A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard car enclosures of the selections indicated. Include ventilation, lighting, access doors, doors, power door operators, sills (thresholds), trim, accessories, and wall and ceiling fmishes. Provide manufacturer's standard flush- panel horizontal-sliding doors of type indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard protective edge trim system for door and wall panels; except as otherwise indicated. . PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES 2.07 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 7 95-052/12-95 . B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction' in advance of dates and times tests are !o qe performed on elevators. -- A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of elevator installation, and before pennitting use (either temporary or pennanent)of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by the "Code" and by governing regulations and agencies. .3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL K. Set sills flush with finished floor surfa~e 'at landings. Fill space under sills solidly with . nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. J. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6mm), up or down, regardless of load and direction of . travel. ' 1. Alignment: Coordinate installatjon of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills . and frames until car. is' operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension. at each landing. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, if any, as recommended by . manufacturers. H. . G. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Whf:re not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent cement fittings. F. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby, ,eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. E. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work' with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure dimensional coordination of the Work. D. Welded Construction: Provide welded c:onnections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required' for subsequent remov!ll or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement. of worn parts. Comply with A WS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of 'Yelding operators. C. Install plunger-cylinder Units plumb arid accurately centered for elevator car position and travel; anchor securely in place, supported at the pit floor. B. '. Excavation for Jack: Drill excavation ill each elevator pit to accommodate installation of plunger-cylinder units; comply with' applicable requirements of Division 2 Section . "Earthwork.~' A. _ Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. INSTALLATION 3.02 . . HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 8 95-052/i2-95 1. Type: Under-the-car'single cylinder. 2. Rated Load: 4500 Ib (2043 kg). 3. Rated Speed: 110 ft.lmin. 4. Operation System: Single Car - DMC -I 5. Auxiliary Features: As follows: a. Electronic door sensing device. b. Handicapped signal & control package. c. Tactile markings. 6. Car Enclosures: As follows: a. Inside Dimensions: As follows: 1) Width: 68 inches (1727 mm). 2) Depth: 93-l/2 inches (2375 mm). 3) Height: 88 inches (2235 mm). A. . Elevator at Lobby (Basis of Design is Dover Model Continental 45) 3.06 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATOR SCHEDULE B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to elevator manufacturer and Ihstaller, that ensure elevators are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. . . _ Pr2vide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer for .elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original 'equipment. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices; signs, or other procedures to protect elevators. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit,. or provi4e new units as required. 2. 1.' A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless cars are provided with temponiry enclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from damage. 3.05 PROTECTION. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and just prior to date of Substantial Completion. Determme that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. . A. Instruct Owner's perSonnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operatIonal failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. DEMONSTRATION 3.04 I. .-., ." 1.. '~~~-~..::;~~,'''' ,:..r. ~...~ :;.__ HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 9 '-7~ END OF SECTION 14240 b. Front Walls: Stainless steel with integral car door frames. c. Side and Rear Walls: Stainless steel.' d. Door Faces (Interior): Stainless steel. e. Ceiling: Luminous.ceiling. f. Handrails at side and rear walls. g. Floor prepared to receive resilient tile (specified in Division.9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring"). Hoistway Entrances: As follows: a. Size: 48 by 84 inches (1219 by.2134 mm). b. Type: 2-speed side slide. c. Frames: Stainless steel. d. Doors: Stainless steel. Additional Requirements: As follows: a: Provide local code inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with stainless-steel frame. . b. Provide protective blanket hooks in each car and one complete set of full-height blankets. 95-052/12-95 . . 8. 7. . . BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 1 95-052/11-95 L04 COORDINATION A. Related Requirements: Refer to Division 1. B. General: Coordinate and order progress of mechanical work to conform to work under other divisions. Complete entire installation as soon as condition of building permits. C. Drawings: . 1) Drawings indicate general design and arrangement of ductwork, pipe lines, equipment, systems, etc. Information shoWn is diagranullatic in character and does not necessarily indicate every required offset, fitting, etc. Do IlOt scal~ drawings for dimensions; however, for pwpose of clearness and legIbility, size and location of equipment and ductwork is . drawn to scale wherever possible.' Drawings indiCate required size and determination of pipes/ducts and sUggest proper routes to conform to structure, to avoid obstructions, and to preserve clearance. Install piping and ductwork in such a manner as to conform to existing structure and to avoid existing obstructions. 2) Refer to architectural drawings for dimensions, finish, levels, and locations. Locate ceiling mounted items such as diffusers and registers/grilles as indicated on reflected ceiling plans where such items are indicated thereon. 3) Refer to electrical drawings for voltage characteristics supplied to mechanical equipment Electrical connections to motors, starters, controllers, and resistance heaters match wiring covered under Division 16, Electrical, or indicated on electrical drawings, i.e., 3 wire, 4 wire, etc. D. Ductwork: As ducts are larger and less flexible relative to other elements of mechanical and electrical work (as pipes and conduits), ductS have right of way. E. Discrepancies: Examine all specification divisions and drawings covering work other than mechanical. If any' discrepancies are observed between work of this division and work of other divisions, report such discrepancies to Architect in writing for decision or direction. . 1.03 RELAlED WORK A. All sections of Division 15 - Mechanical . 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. TIlls Section covers general terms including but not limited to references, regulations, procedures, materials and installation data applicable to all.sections of Division 15 - Mechanical. B. Provide all labor, materials, nec~ssary equipment and services necessary for completely furnished and operational mechanical systems as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, except as for times specifically indicated as "NIe I1EMS". -Provide all minor incidental items such as offsets, fittings, etc., required as part of work even though not specified or indicated. C. Description of Systems: Work of Division 15 includes but is not limited to: 1) Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning System. 2) Plumbing System . 3) Fire protection D. Provide all motor controllers, starters and disconnects necessary for the operation of all equipment specified in Division 15. PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions,' Special Instructions to Contractor, Construction Sequence, and General Requirements (Division 1) apply to the work in this section. "E. Where mention of data referenced in paragraph A above is included or repeated in this Section, redundancy is for emphasis only. In the case where any discrepancy exists, the more strict requirement shall prevail. SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS . BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 2 95-052/11-95 . 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Carefully handle and protect products to prevent damage before, during, and after installation. Replace damaged or defective items. C. Ductwork, piping, mechanical rooms, and controls, drafted shop drnwings submitted after equipment shop drnwings have been reviewed. Duct shop drnwings submitted at 1/4" = 1'..()" scale. Mechanical room drnwings and piping drnwings submitted at 1/2" = 1'-0" scale. D. Support submittals by descriptive material, catalogs, cuts, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by manufacturer to show conformance to specification and drnwing requirements; model numbers alone not acceptable. Include published installation recommendations and requirements. Mark each submittal with drnwing number or specification requirements. Mark each submittal with drnwing or specification section, article, and paragraph nmnber which pertains to item. Failure to comply with above format considered cause for rejection. E. For products requiring electrical connections, supply equipment selected to operate on electrical system characteristics provided under Division 16 work. . . 1.05 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable' governmental and utility codes, regulations, or requirements. B. Perform work in accordance and conformity with, but not limited to, requirements of below listed publications unless more stringent requirements are specified. C. Publications: 1) General: a National Electrical Code - NFPA Standard 70, edition specified in Division 16. b. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Approved Materials List Materials and apparatus of a type that have been tested and listed by UL shall be manufactured under their reinspection service and bear UL label. c. Standard Building Code, 1991 edition. d. Life Safety Code - NFP A 101, most recent edition. e. Energy Conservation - Comply with requirements of Georgia State Energy Code, 1992 edition. 2) Plumbing: a. Georgia State Plumbing Code, 1992 edition. b. Standard Gas Code, 1991 edition. c. American National Standard Specifications for Making Building and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People, ANSI A1l7.1. d. Flammable Liquids Code - NFPA Standard 14 3) Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: a.' Standard Mechanical Code, 1991 Edition. b. Standard Gas Code, 1991 edition. c. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems - NFPA Standard 90A, most recent edition. d. Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration - ANSI Standard 89.1. D. Permits: Obtain permits and inspections for installation of mechanical work and pay charges incidental thereto. Deliver to Architect all certificates of inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 SUHMITIALS A. Submit shop drnwings and product data to Architect as required by various sections of Division 15 in accordance with Division 1. B. Equipment shop drnwings to be bound into single three ring shop drnwing binder of sufficient size to hold all original equipment submittals and any required resubmittals. Where 4" ring binder will not contain all shop drnwings, two (2) binders may be submitted as a set. Equipment shop drnwings submitted ready for insertion into project binder and complete with identification tabs identifying items and referencing applicable specification sections or numbers. . '.' _:; ~-J';~ ;!;Ji--t.--: BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 3 95-052/11-95 C. Requirement Contents: 1) Provide index with tab dividers for' each major eqUipment section to facilitate locating infofmation on specific piece of equipment Identify data within each section, article, and paragraph number, or both as applicable. 2) Include as minimum data: a. Alphabetical list of system components, with name, address and 24 hour telephone number of installing f~ and organization responsible for serVicing during warranty period. '. b. Operating instructions for Complete System Including: 1. Emergency procedUres for fIre or failure of major equipmeIit, 2. Major start, operation andshutdown procedures. c. Maintenance Instructions Includirig: 1. Valve tags and other identified equipment lists. 2. Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment. . . 3. Necessary cleaning, replacement or adjustment schedule. d. Produce Data on Each Piece of Equipment Including: 1. Installation Instructions. . 2. Drawings and specifications. .3. Parts lists. . " : 4. Complete wiring and temperature control diagrams (as-built). 5. Marked or changed. prints locating concealed parts and variations from original system design. . e.Schematic floor diagramS indicating component parts including valves of system Number valves in accordance with valve schedule as required. . 1.09 OPERATING AND MAINIENANCE DATA A: General: Comply with requirementS of Division 1 B. Submission: Submit minimum of two typed copies bound in hard cover 3-ring loose leaf notebooks of Operating and Maintenance Manual, 8-112 "x 11" page size to Architect for approval prior to scheduling any systems demonstration. Identify manuals with label under clear plastic shield on cover showing name of project., Architect., and Contractor plus date of contract documents. . 1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Comply with requirements of Divisiori 1: B. Record Infonnation: Label each docmnent "Record Docmnent". Mark information with contrasting color using ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Record following information on Drawings as minimum requirement: 1) Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction. 2) Field changes of dimension and detail. . 3) Changes referenced by change order or fIe!d order nmnber. 4.) Details not on original contact drawings. . D. Record following information on Specifications as minimum requirement: 1) Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2) Changes referenced by change order or fIeld order nmnber. _ 3) Other matters not originally specified. E. Shop Drawings: Maintain shop drawings as record docmnentsrecording changes made after review as covered for drawings above. . B. Store all materials and equipment off ground .and under cover, protected from damage. Store packed products in manufacturer's unopened containers. fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color. . C. Make timely arrangement for introduction mto building of large items too large to pass through fInished openings. . BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 4 95-052/11-95 . 2.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Division 1. B. Pressure vessels (except direct fued units) constructed and inspected in accordance with ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels for working pressure specified and bear appropriate ASME approval stamp. C. Equipment drives, couplings, pulleys, and other rotating parts equipped with guards to provide safe operating conditions. Comply with requirements of ANSI pamphlet 315-1. D. Materials and devices used in fabrication and construction of various parts of equipment included in mechanical work provided in accordance with standards of. AS1M, ASME, UL, NEMA, and AMCA where such standards apply. PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 CATALOGED PRODUCTS A. General: Refer to Division I for infonnation relating to substitutions. B. Materials and Equipment: Cataloged products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials or equipment and manufacturer's latest design that complies with specification requirements. Duplicate items that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use at least 2 years. C. Uniformity: Provide products of single manufacturer where two or more items of same class of equipment are required. Component parts of equipment need not be products of original product manufacturer. D. Identification: Provide each item of equipment with manufacturer's name , address, model number, and serial number on nameplate securely affIxed in conspicuous place; nameplate of distributing agent not acceptable. . 1.12 ABBREVIAlED LANGUAGE A. Abbreviations: Refer to Article 1.11 above. B Specification Language Explanation: These specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "in conformity therewith", "shall be", "as noted on the drawings", "a", "the", are intentional. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference in same manner as they are when "NOTE" occurs on drawings. Supply words "shall be" or "shall" by inference when colon is used with sentences or phrases. Supply words "on the drawings" by inference when "as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases. 1.11 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. References: 1) For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements specified or required by applicable codes. 2) Date of standard is that in effect at bid date, or date of Owner/Contractor Agreement when there are no bids, except when specific date is specified or when standard is part of an applicable code which includes edition date. 3) When required by individual standards section, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at job site during work until substantial completion. . 1.10 WARRANfY A. General: Comply with requirements of Division 1. Architect will establish date on which warranty . becomes effective. B. Equipment Performance Warrant each product to deliver capacities specified, scheduled, or indicated. f. "As Built" control system drawings. ',1 . .'. . ..(~1't"'-~.":,2~: <\'. ". -'- . ....- , ......~.:...... '-. '. ~ .-0; . BASICMECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 5 95"o5i/11-95 G. Noise and Vibration: When in operation, systems to be free from noise and vibration. Loose items secured and items such as duct dampers locked into position to prevent "rattling". 3.03 CLEARANCE AND ACCESS A. Install piping, ductwork, equipment, etc., so as to maintain maximum head room and clearances. . Piping and ductwork not to interfere with operation of or accessibility of doors; not encroach on . aisles, passageways, or access area to equipment; and not interfere with servicing or removal of equipment B. Equipment requiring service located and installed t9 permit access for servicing without damage to building structure, finishes, or other equipment -'. C, Where valves, dampers, and other devices are installed in furred spaces, provide flush type access panels to access. Lay-in acoustical type ceilings do not require manufactured access panels. Tag valves, dampers, and equipment as requiring access panels so that access panel locations may be adjusted as necessary to achieve proper access. . ~ PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS> . A. Install products in compliance with reCommeridations of manufacturer. Manufacturers or their authorized representative provide services and supervision to insure compliance. Conflict between manufacturer's recommendations and other contract requirements shall be referred to Architect in writing for decision or direction. B. Requirements of several acceptable manufacturers for specified item may vary as to installation, detail, location, number 'of connections, dimension,. weight, etc. Provide drawings, services, materials, and labor for installation and functioning of item furnished. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Refer to Division 1. B. Preparation: Base fmal installation of materials and equipment on actual dimensions and conditions at project. Field measure for materiais or equipment requiring exact fit e. Workmanship: Perform work in accordance with good commercial practice. Good appearance of finished work is of equal importance with itS mechanical efficiency. D: Protection: Close ends of pipe and ductwork driringconstruction to prevent entry of foreign material. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical. damage before, during and after installation. Protect fixtures and equipment against damage during and after installation. . E. Codes, Regulations, and Requirements: Installation to comply with applicable governmental or utility codes, regulations or requirementS. Coordinate timing of inspections by authorities having juriSdiction. . F. Approved Substitutes: Be responsible for modification in space requirements, configurations, performance, changes in bases, supports, structural members and openings in structure, and other apparatus or work under another division of work that may be affected by their use. . E. Where equipment is specified by catalog nmnber, such nmnbers are used for descriptive pwposes and equipment shall comply with additional requirements of specifications or with referenced . regulations and standards. F. Provide similar equipment, apparatus, valves, etc. of same manufacturer and type. whenever possible. G. Valves, gauges, thermometers, switches; control devices, etc. .furnished as standard part of any piece of equipment may conform to that original equipment manufacturer's standard. H. If any product requires special tool, key, or deviCe for assembly, adjustment setting, or. maintenance, provide same with product. . 1. Provide products conforming to applicable governmental or utility codes, ~gulations, or requirements. . BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 6 95-052111-95 . . END OF SECTION . 3.04 CLEANING AND PAINTING A. Comply with requirements of Division 1. B. Clean exposed surfaces of piping, hangers, ducts and other exposed items of grease, dirt or other foreign material. At completion of work remove rubbish and debris resulting from operations and leave equipment spaces clean and ready for use. e. Repaint factory-painted equipment that has been scratched or marred to match original color and texture D. Equipment hangers, supports and uninsulated black steel pipe exposed to sight inside building which are not provided with factory applied prime coat, ftnished with fteld applied prime coat In addition., such items in finished spaces also provided with two coats of ftnish paint in color to match adjacent surfaces. E. Supports, uninsulated black steel pipe, and steel pipe supports exposed to sight outside building which are not provided with factory prime coat, finished with field applied prime coat and two coats of an asphaltic base aluminum paint. Pipes requiring insulation and located outside building provided with a fteld applied prime coat before installing insulation. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140 - 1 95-052/11-95 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel, 'adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. . . . C. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp; adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.' . H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizesto 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or Steel support I. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and' Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support 1. Copper Pipe Support:'Carbon steel ring,.adjustable, copper plated. . K. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180 degree segmenJ:S,!Jlinimum 12 inches long atpipe support L. Shield for InsuJ.ated piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering protective saddles. M. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non-conducting . saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness. N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. . "- 1.04 REFERENCES . 1. ANSIIAS1\.1E B31.1 Power Piping 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. . 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. B. Section 15290 - Ductwork Insulation. C. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. D. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment E. Section 15850 - Blower Coils . F. Section 15855 - Air Handling Units with Coils G. Section 15870 - Power Ventilators H. Section 15890 - Ductwork PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK' INCLUDED A. .pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. . . C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Furnish sleeves for placement into formwork. SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS . SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140 - 2 95-052/11-95 . PART 3 .EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. D. Where concrete slabs form fmished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 2.08 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. . 2.07 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes 1brough Non-frre Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes 1brough Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofmg: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel or wood. F. Stuffmg Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combusuble. G. Caulk: Non hardening acrylic sealant 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate cwbs of galvanized steel. . 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustnient, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 5 Ib/sq ft sheet lead for waterproofing; one Ib/sq ft sheet lead for soundproof mg. C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet compatible with roofmg. D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140 - 3 95-052/11-95 END OF SECTION . 3.04 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate. . C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. E. Provide sleeves at all slab penetrations. 3.03 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or wateIproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. . Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimmn above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimmn clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in a.ccordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control. F: Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. FleXIble sheet flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight . B. Install hangers to provide minimmn 1/2 inch spa~ebetween finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-112 inch minimmn vertical adjustment E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 3/8" 5'-0" and at Joints 3/8" 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 7/8" 1" 3/8" 6'.6" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 14'-0" 20'-0" 6'-0" 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 1-112 to 2 inch 2-1/2 to 3 inch 4 to 6 inch 8 to 12 inch 14 inch and Over PVC (All Sizes) C.!. Bell and Spigot (or No-Hub) HANGER DIAMETER MAX. HANGER SPACING PIPE SIZE 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: . VIBRATION ISOLATION 15242 - 1 95-052/11-95 . END OF SECTION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install vibration isolators for motor driven equipment. B. Provide spring isolators on piping connecte~ to isolated equipment as follows: Up to 4 inch diameter, fIrst three points of support; 5 to 8 inch diameter, fIrst four points of support; 10 inch diameter and over, fIrst six points of support Static deflection of fIrst point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Provide pairs of neoprene side snubbers or restraining springs where side torque or throst may develop. B. Color code spring mounts. C. Select springs to operate at 2/3 maximum compression strain, with 114 inch nbbed neoprene pads. . 2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Closed spring hanger with acoustic washer. . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vibration Mountings and Controls. B. Mason Industries. C. Peabody. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. 1.05 SUBMITTALS . A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE - Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition. 1.02 RELAlEDWORK A. Section 15450 - Plmnbing Equipment B. Section 15870 - Power Ventilators PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Vibratiqn isolation: SECTION .15242 VIBRATION ISOLATION . PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 1 95-052/11-95 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved. . 2.02 INSULATION A. Type A: Owens Corning- Heavy density Fiberglass pipe insulation with factory applied all-service jacket (ASJ) and Doublesure (Trademark of Morgan Adhesives Company) two<omponent adhesive closure system, rated for a maximmn service temperature of 850F. For large pipe sizes where SSL-II is not available, the single adhesive SSL closure may be substituted. Circwnference joints shall be sealed by butt strips having a two-component sealing system. Stapling shall not be . required to complete the closure. B. Type B: Armstrong AP Annaflex fleXible elastomeric pipe insulation. Seal joints and seams with Armstrong 520 adhesive. For outdoor installations, use Armstrong Armaflex finish. C. Type C: Foamglass by Pittsburgh Corning with Pittwrap jacketing (pittwrap CW will notbe accepted). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Armstrong. 2. Certainteed. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf. 5. Owens Corning. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with three years minimum experience. B. Materials: Flarne spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating of 25/50/50 in accordance with ASlME84, NFPA 255 orUL 723. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. SubnUi manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. . 1.02 RELAlED WORK A Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping 1.03 REFERENCES, A. ANSIIASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. . B. AS1M E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. NFPA 255 - Surface Bu.rnip.g Characteristics' of Building Materials. D. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ./ . PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION . PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 2 95-052111-95 . END OF SECTION . A A A A A A C B A 1/2 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 2 1/2 1 Domestic Hot Water Supply Domestic Hot Water Supply Domestic Hot Water Recirc Domestic Cold Water Chilled Water Chilled Water . Chilled Water below ground Cold Condensate Drains Piping Exposed to Freezing thru 1 above 1 all all thru 1 above 1 all all all TYPE THICKNESS INCHES INSULATION PIPE SIZE INCHES PIPING TYPE INSULATION 3.03 SCHEDULE 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. C. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, fleXible connections, and expansion joints. E. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations. F. Provide an insert, not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on piping 2 inches diameter or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. G. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. . DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 1 95-052/11-95 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below ambient temperature. C. Exterior Insulation (Type A) Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or.tape to match jacket. . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials after ductwork has been tested and approved. B. Clean surfaces for adhesives. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Type A: Fiberglass all service duct wrap, light density glaSs fiber insulation in roll form, faced with a reinforced foil/kraft laminate, meeting the requirements of ASlM C 553. B. Type B: Fiberglass Aeroflex duct liner, resilient fibrous glass in blanket form, with a fIre-resistant coating to bond the fIbers of the airstream surface, meeting the requirements of ASlM C 1071 and complying with National Fire Protection Association Standard NFP A 90A. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Owens Coming B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. Certainteed. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Knauf. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. . 1.05SUBMITIALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 150 10. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions'of Section 15010. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSIJAStM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt InSulation. 1.04 QUALfIY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation application with three years minimum experience. . B. Materials: UL listed; flame spreadlfuelcontributedlsmoke developed rating of 25/50/50 in accordance with AS1M E84, NFP A 255 or UL 723. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15890 - Ductwork. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork insulation. B.Insulationjackets.' SECTION 15290 DUCTWORK INSULATION . DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 2 95-052111-95 . . END OF SECTION 2 A Supply Ducts in Mech Rm Supply Plenum Return Ducts in Mech Rm Return Plenum Exhaust Ducts (within 10 feet of exterior openings) Make-up Air Ducts 1 I 1 I 2 B B B B A INSULATION lliICKNESS INCHES INSULATION TYPE DUCTWORK TYPE 3.03 SCHEDULE . 2. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. D. Liner (Type B) Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical fasteners on 15 inch centers maximum on top and side of ductwork with dimension exceeding 20 inches. Seal and smooth joints. Do not use nail-type fasteners. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 2. Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase ductwork to allow for insulation thickness. E. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 - 1 95-052/11-95 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sprinkler Systems: Perform work to NFPA 13. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Perform to ASME Code. C. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. . 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Maintenance Instructions: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. 1.04 SUBMITI ALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. . B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSIIASMEBI6.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25,125,250, and 800. B.ANSIIASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300. C. ANSI/ASMEBI6.4 - CastIronThreaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250. D. ANSIIASMEBI6.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. E. ANSIi ASME B 16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket:-welding and Threaded. F. ANSIIASME B36.1O - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. G. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. H. ANSIIASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. r. ANSII ASTM A47 - Malleable Iron Castings. . J. ANSIIASTMB32 - Solder Metal. K. ANSII A WW A C 11 0 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings. L ANSI! A WW A CIS 1 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. M. ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. N. ASTM A 795 - Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. O. A WS DI0.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. P. NFP A 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Q. NFPA 14 - Standpipe and Hose Systems. R. NFP A 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. . 1.02 RELAlED SECTIONS A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. . B. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation. C. Section 15325 - Sprinkler Systems. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler. SECTION 15310 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING . FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 - 2 95-052/11-95 . 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.07 DRAINVALVES A. Bronze compression stop with hose thread nipple and cap. 2.06 CHECK VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 2.05 BALL VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffmg box ring, lever handle, and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, or gear drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged. 2.04 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. . 2.03 GATE VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, double wedge or disc, welded or threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, double wedge, flanged or grooved ends. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLER PIPING, BURIED A. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSIIA WW A C151. 1. Fittings: ANSIIAWWA CllO, standard thickness. 2. Joints: ANSIIAWWA Clll, rubber gasket. 2.02 SPRINKLER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A. In all cells, Day Room, POD area and Mechanical Room. 1. Steel Pipe: ANSIIASME B36.1O; Schedule 40 black. a. Malleable Iron Fittings: Screwed type. b. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. B. In all administrative areas. 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A795; Schedule 10 galvanized. a Malleable Iron Fittings: Screwed type. b. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. . B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labelling in place. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 - 3 95-052/11-95 . . END OF SECTION 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install piping in accordance with NFP A 13 for sprinkler systems. B. Route piping in orderly manner; plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not mterfere with use of space and other work. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and con~ction without s.tressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain atlow points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of . pipe level. G. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories. for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of. zinc rich primer to welding. H. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. 1. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve flIe.resistance equivalent to fIre separati9n required. . J. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. . K. Install vcilves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to installation. L. Provide gate valves for shut-{)ff or isolating service. M. Provide drain valves at main shut-{)ffvalves, low points of piping and apparatus. . SPRINKLER SYS1EMS 15325 - 1 95-052/11-95 1.09 QUALI1Y ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFP A 13. B. Equipment and Co~ponents: Bear UL label or marking. . 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, Record Drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Record actual locations of sprinkler heads and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. 1.05 APPROVAL . A. BEFORE ANY WORK BEGINS THE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT DETAll..ED SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE FIRE MARSHALL FOR APPROVAL. THERE SHALL' BE NO WORK DONE UNTil.., THE FIRE MARSHALL APPROVES THE SHOP DRAWINGS. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit uIider provisions of Section 15010. B. Preliminary ShOp Drawings: Prior to detailed submission, submit preliminaIy layout offlnished ceiling areas indicating only head locations coordinated with ceiling installation. C. Shop Drawings: Certifjed hydraulic calculations, detailed. pipe and head layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. . D. Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads,. valves, and specialties, including ~ufacturers catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. E. Submit shop drawings, product data and hydraulic calculations to Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect. . 1.04 SYS1EMDESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete automatic Sprinkleisystem that will provide' coverage for the entire building. Provide all labor, material, engineering and services necessary for a fully ~ctional automatic sprinkler system. B. Provide system to NFPA 13 coverage and occupancy requirements. C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply. D. Interface system with building fIre and smoke alann system. E. Provide fIre department connections as indicated. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFP A 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS . A. Section15242 - Vibration Isolation. B. Section 15410 - Plmnbing Piping. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system. B. System design, installation, and certification.' SECTION 15325 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS . SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 2 95-052/11-95 . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work. 2.03 PIPING SPECIAL TIES A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate electrically and hydraulically operated alarms, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim. . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLER HEADS - STANDARD A. Suspended Ceiling: 1. Type: Standard pendant type with matching escutcheon plate. 2. Head Finish: White. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: White. 4. Fusible Link: Fusible link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. B. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Standard upright type with guard. 2. Head Finish: Brass. 3. Fusible Link: Fusible link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Sidewall Type: 1. Type: Standard horizontal sidewall type with matching screw on escutcheon plate and guard. 2. Head Finish: White. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: White. 4. Fusible Link: Fusible link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head. 2.02 SPRINKLER HEADS - INSTITUTIONAL A. Provide Institutional type sprinkler heads in Day Room., Cell areas and all high security areas: 1. Institutional Sprinkler: Star model PH-2 style A or approved equal. 2. Horizontal Institutional Sprinkler: Star Model PH-5 (standard coverage) or Central Omega HEC-12EC (extended coverage). 3. Head Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Stainless Steel. 5. Fusible Link: Fusible link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. 6. Provide institutional sprinkler head wrench. 1.12 EX1RA MA 1ERIALS A. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFP A 13. B. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type. 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction, Fire Marshall and Owner's fIre insurance underwriter. . 1.10 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three years experience. B. Design sprinkler system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Georgia or equivalent contractor with fIre sprinkler certificate. SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 3 95-052/11-95 END OF SECTION 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to.other.work. C. Place piping in concealed spaces above fInished ceilings. D. Center heads in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. E. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed. sprinkler head cover plates do .not receive fIeld paint fInish. ..' F. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. G. Hydrostatically test entire system. H. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshall. . . . PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 1 95-052111-95 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING AND BELOW FLOOR SLAB A Schedule 40 PVC Pipe. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with solvent cement . 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Deliver and store in shipping containers with labelling in place. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Perform Work in accordance with the Standard Plmnbing code. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.04 SUBMITIALS A Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog infonnation. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.02 RELA1ED'SECTIONS A Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. C. Section 15430 - Plmnbing Specialties. D. Section 15440 - Plmnbing Fixtures. E. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment 1.03 REFERENCES A ASME B16.18 - Cast Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings. B. ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings C. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. D. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. E. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. F. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. G. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (pVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. H. ASTM D2665 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (pVC) Drain, Waste and Vent. 1. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. J: A WS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. K. A WW A C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. . !!'!to PART 1 GENERALO 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves.' C. SanitaIy sewer piping system. . D. Domestic water piping system. SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING . PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 2 95-052/11-95 . 2.09 GLOBE VALVES (DOMESTIC WATER) A. Manufacturers: 2.08 GA1E VALVES (DOMESTIC WATER SYS1EM) A. Manufacturers: 1. Milwaukee US 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane b. Grinnell c. Nibco d. Stockham B. Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stern, handwheel, inside screw, double wedge or disc, solder ends. 2.07 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. . 2.04 W A 1ER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE. A. Copper Tubing: AS1M B88, Type L hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or AS1\.1E B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: AS1M B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.05 GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUll...DING A. Steel Pipe: ASlM AS3 or A120, Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type, with A WW A C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2. Joints: ANSI B31, welded. 2.06 GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE AND ON ROOF. A. Above Grade 1. Steel Pipe: AS1M A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. 2. Fittings: ASME B 16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 3. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31. B.OnRoof 1. Galvanized Steel Pipe, Schedule 40. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31. 2.03 W A 1ER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BlJTI..,DING AND BELOW FLOOR SLAB A. Copper Tubing: AS1M B88, Type K soft copper. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze or AS1M B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze . 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE. A. In return air plenums. 1. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. a. Fittings: Cast iron. b. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. B. Areas other than return air plenums. 1. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe. a. Fittings: PVc. b. Joints: Solvent weld with solvent cement. PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 3 95-052/11-95 tl 2.16 AIR CHAMBERS A. Air C~bers shall be 12" in length and one pipe size larger than the pipe on which it is installed. All air chambers shall be installed in the vertical position. Air chambers shall not be used for shock absorbing purposes unless specifically called for on the drawings. . 2.13 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.141RAPS A. Provide oriall equipment and drains connected to sanitaIy system, B. Traps, 'other than those furnished as a part of plumbing fIxtures, shall be of the same material and size as pipe into which they discharge, unless specified otherwise hereinafter. Where not underground traps shall be provided with cleanout plugs on the bottom. Traps for floor and hub drains shall be deep seal type. C. All floor drain, hub drain and condensate drain traps shall have trap primer connections. Provide inline trap primer valve off of nearest domestic cold water line and pipe to trap. 2.15 'FLASHING A. Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 4 pound sheet lead. The flashing shall extend not less than 8" from the vent pipe in all directions and shall be turned down into the pipes a minimum of 1". Vents shall extend a minimum of 12" above the roof. B. Floor drains, hub drains and roof drains in coflstruction having membrane flashing shall b.e flashed and made watertight at the floor with 4 pound sheet lead. Extend flashing one foot around perimeters and clamp into drains. 2.12 WA1ER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts 223SB. 2. Approved substitute B. 2 Inches and less: Bronze body, stainless steel parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, single union, threaded ends. . 2.11 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. 2.10 CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Milwaukee 508 . 2.' Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane b. Grinnell c. Nibco d. Stockham B. Bronze body, bronze trim,. renewable composition disc, solder ends. 1. Crane 1310 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Grinnell b. Milwaukee c. Nibco d. Stockham B. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem,handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder ends. . PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 4 95-052/11-95 . 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mgIL residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distnbution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. C. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. D. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Horizontal soil and waste piping to be sloped to 1/4" per foot for sizes 2" and smaller and 118" per foot for sizes 3" and larger. Maintain gradients. B. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. . 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 1. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. 1. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. K. Establish elevations of buried water piping outside the building to ensure that there is a minimum of three feet of cover. 1. There shall be no joints in water pipe installed below floor slab. M. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. . B. Air chambers shall be installed on the hot and cold water branch lines to all fixtures. Fixtures in a battery of fixtures will not require individual air chambers, if an air chamber is installed on the supply line after or at the last fixture. PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 5 95-052/11-95 . . END OF SECTION F. If fInal disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with A WW A C651. . PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1 95-052/11-95 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. C1eanouts shall be provided where shown on the drawings and shall be the same size as the pipe on which the cleanout is installed. B. Cleanouts in vertical piping shall be roughed with centerline not more than l' 6" above the fInished floor, but high enough to clear the baseboard. C. Exterior Areas: Cast iron ferrule and countersunk bronze plug, 1. R. Smith 4400. Where not in paved areas, cleanout shall be set in 12" x 12" x 6" deep poured.concrete pad set flush with grade. D. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Cast iron, extra heavy cleanout tee with countersunk bronze plug tapped for machine screw, shallow stainless steel face-of-wall access cover, and vandalproof securing screw, 1. R. Smith 4472. E. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Cast iron with gasket seal threaded plug for easy removal, adjustable round nickle bronze top recessed for tile with securing screw; J. R. Smith 4151. F. Manufacturers: Approved substitute 1. Josam . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR DRAINS (FD) A. Toilet Rooms: 1. R. Smith 2005-A6-B-P. B. Kitchen: 1. R. Smith 3040-P C. Mechanical Rooms: 1. R. Smith 2220-P. D. Day Room: 1. R. Smith 2140-B-P-U (Vandal proof top). F. Manufacturers: Approved substitute 1. Josam 2. Wade 3.Zum G. All floor drain, hub drain and condensate drain traps shall have trap primer connections. Provide inline trap primer v~ve off of nearest domestic cold water line and pipe to trap. H. All floor drains in security areas shall vandal resistant screws. . PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor drains and Floor Sinks. B.' Cleanouts. C. Wall Hydrants. D. Trap Primers. E. Trench Drain. F. Mixing Valve. G. Grease Trap. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. B. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. C. Section 15450 - Plmnbing Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. B. ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. C. ANSI A1l2.21.l - Floor Drains. 1.04 SUBMITIALS A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES . PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 2 95-052111-95 . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting and forming of floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 2.07 GREASE TRAP A. Construction: Precast concrete for fully recessed installation, with non-skid epoxy coated steel cover with gasket. See drawing detail. B. Unit Rating: 3,000 gal capacity. 2.08 FLOOR SINKS (FS) A. 1. R. Smith 3100-94-P. B. Accessories: 1. Check valve on inlets. 2. Volume control shut-offvalve on outlet. 3. Stem thermometer on outlet. 4. Strainer stop checks on inlets. . 2.06 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Symmons ModeI5-1000. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Powers. 2.05 lRENCH DRAINS A. Trench drains shall be PolyDrain or approved equal with ductile iron grate. 2.04 TRAP PRIMERS A. Automatic type, bronze body with integral vacuum breaker, strainer and union ends, Precision Plumbing Company Model No. P-2. B. Manufacturers: Approved substitute 1. Josarn 2. J. R. Smith 3. Zurn 2.03 WALL HYDRANTS (WH) A. Manufacturers: 1. 1. R. Smith Model 5609. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Josarn Model 71550. b. Wade Model W-8605. c. Zurn Model Z-1315. B. Wall Hydrant: ANSIIASSE 1019; 3/4" in size, non-freeze (except in interior areas not subject to freezing), self-draining type with hose thread spout and removable key with Model 8A vacuum breaker manufactured by Watts. . 2. Wade 3. Zurn PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 3 95-052/11-95 . . END OF SECTION 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to fInished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanoutsin concrete flush with grade. . 15440 - 1 95-052/11-95 1. Manufacturer: Olsonite Model 95SS. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. C. Seat . 2.01 WATER CLOSET (P-1) . A. Bowl 1. Manufacturer: American Standard Model 2234.015. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane b. Eljer c. Kohler 3. ANSIIASME A1l2.19.2; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl with elongated rim, 14 inch height, 1-1/2 inch top spud, china bolt caps, 1.5 gallon flush. B. Flush Valve 1. Manufacturer: Sloan Model III YB. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a Delany. b.Zum. 3. ASME A1l2.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop and vacumn breaker; maximum 1.5 gallons per flush. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.06 FIELD 1\.1EASUREMENTS A. Uniformity: Provide fIxtures of a single manufacturer where two or more fIxtures of the same material type of required. Component parts of fIxtures need not be products of original product manufacturer. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Include fIxture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. . 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalogue illustrations of fIxtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and fInishes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. t03 REFERENCES A. ANSI! ASME Al12.19.2 - Vitreous China Plmnbing Fixtures: B. ANSI!ARl 1010 - Drinking-Fountains and Self-Contained, Mechanically-Refrigerated Drinking- Water Coolers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. B. Section 15430 -' Plumbing Specialties. C. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES . A. Water closets. B. Lavatories. C. Sinks. D. SelVice sinks. SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES . 15440 - 2 95-052/11-95 . 1. Manufacturer: Olsonite Model 95SS. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Bemisor. b. Beneke. c. Church. d. Sperzel. 3. Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, less cover, complete with self-sustaining hinge. C. Seat . 1. Manufacturer: Olsonite Model 95SS. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Bemisor b. Beneke c. Church d. Sperzel 3. Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, less cover, complete with self-sustaining hinge. 2.03 WAlER CLOSET (P-1H) A. Bowl 1. Manufacturer: American Standard Model 3043.102. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane b. Eljer c. Kohler 3. ANSIIASME A1l2.19.2; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl with elongated rim, 18 inch height, 1-112 inch top spud, china bolt caps, 1.5 gallons per flush. B. Flush Valve 1. Manufacturer: Sloan Model III YB. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Delany. b. Zurn. 3. ASME A1l2.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 1.5 gallons per flush. B. Seat . a. Bemisor. b. Beneke. c. Church. d. Sperzel. 3. Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, less cover, complete with self-sustaining hinge. 2.02 WAlER CLOSET (P-IA) A. Bowl 1. Manufacturer: American Standard Model 2174.139. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a Crane b. Eljer c. Kohler 3. ANSIIASME A1l2.19.2; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china, 15 inches high, close-coupled closet combination with elongated rim, vitreous china closet tank with fittings and lever flushing valve, bolt caps, 1.6 gallons per flush. 15440 - 3 95-052/11-95 2.06 URINAL (P-3) A Urinal 1. Manufacturer: American Standard Model 6541.132. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane b. Eljer c. Kohler . B. Trim 1. Manufacturer: American Standard Model 2385.400. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. American Standard. b. Crane c. Chicago d. Speakman e. Symmons f. T & S Brass 3. ASME A1l2.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean out plug ll9-d escutcheon. C. Insulation 1. Manufacturer: Truebro Modell02-W. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a Approved equal. 3. AD.A 4.19.4, fully molded, white, handicap lavatory P-trap and angle valve insulation. 2.05 LAVATORY (P-2H) A Basin 1. Manufacturer: American Standard Model 0355.012. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane b. Eljer c. Kohler 3. ANSIIASME A1l2.19.2; 20 x 18 inches, wall hung, white, vitreous china lavatory. Hang at handicap height. . 2.04 LAVATORY (P-2) A Basin 1. Manufacturer: AIp.ericanStandard Model 0355.012. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane b. Eljer c, Kohler 3: ANSIIASME A1l2.19.2; 20 x 18 inches, wall hung, white, vitreous china lavatory. B. Trim 1. Manufacturer: American Standard Model 2385.400. 2:0ther acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a American Standard. b. Crane c. Chicago d. Speakman e. Symmons f. T & S Brass 3. ASME A1l2.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean out plug and escutcheon. . 15440 - 4 95-052111-95 . 2.09 SINK (p-6) A. Bowl 1. Manufacturer: Just SL-2122-A-GR. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. American Standard b. Crane c. Eljer d. Kohler 3. Countertop, 21 x 22 inches, single bowl, 18 gauge stainless steel sink. B. Trim 1. Manufacturer: Chicago ModeI201-GN8A-E3-369. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a American Standard. b. Crane c. Chicago d. Speakman e. Symmons f. T & S Brass . 2.08 SINK (P-5) A. Bowl 1. Manufacturer: Just SBL-1613-A-GR. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Elkay 3. Countertop, 16 x 13 inches, single bowl, 18 gauge stainless steel sink. B. Trim 1. Manufacturer: Chicago Model 895. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. American Standard. b. Crane c. Chicago d.Speakman e. Symmons f. T & S Brass 3. ASME A1l2.18.1; chrome plated brass supply, chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-Qut plug and arm with escutcheon and stainless steel cup strainer. 2.07 SHOWER FITTING HANDICAP (P4) A. Trim 1. Manufacturer: Symmons Model 96-500-B24-X. 2. ASME A1l2.18.1; concealed shower supply with pressure balanced mixing valves, hand/wall shower arm with flexible metal hose and 24" slide bar for hand shower. Provide cast iron floor drain with bronze cover. . 3. ANSIIASME A1l2.19.2; vitreous china, wall hung siphon jet urinal, integral trap, removable stainless steel strainer, 1-1/4 inch top spud, steel supporting hanger. Hang rim at maximum 17" AFF. B. Flush Valve 1. Manufacturer: Sloan Model 180-1.5 YB. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Delany. b. Zurn. 3. ASME A1l2.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 1.5 gallons per flush. 15440 - 5 95-052/11-95 . 1. Manufacturer: Acorn Model 14 1 8-1-BP-4-FV-PC-M-PH-SW-VGl (see plumbing drawings for toilet orientation). 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Acorn b. Bradley c. Metcraft 2.12 SECURI1Y WATER CLOSETILAVATORY (PP-l) A. Unit 1. Manufacturer: Acorn Model 1670-l-BP-3-FA. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Acorn b. Bradley c. Metcraft B. Front access drinking fountain shall be fabricated from seamless, 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Exposed surfaces shall have satin polished finish. Unit shall have Air-Trol self-closing security valve, bubbler, removable p-trap and fasreners. 2.11 DRINKING FOUNTAIN (P-8) A. Unit B. Trim 1. Manufacturer: a; Faucet: Chicago Model 3'05- VB with rough fInish. b. Hose and wall hook: Williams ModeIT-35. c. Trap: American Standard Model 7798.176. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. American Standard. b. Crane c. Chicago d. Speakman e. Symmons f. T &)S Brass 3. ASME A1l2.18.1 exposed wall type supply with lever handles, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges, hose clamp, mop hanger. . 2.10 SERVICE SINK (P-7) A. Bowl 1. Manufacturer: American Standard Model 7692.049. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane b. Eljer c. Kohler 3. ANSIIASME A1l2.19.l; 22 x 18 x 10 mch deep, acid resisting porcelain enamelled (inside only) cast iron roll-rim sink, with 9 inch high back, stainless steel rim guard, . concealed hanger, chrome plated strainer, cast iron P-trilp with adjustable floor flange. 3. ASME A1l2.18.1; chrome plated brass supply, chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon and stainless steel cup strainer. . 15440 - 6 95-052/11-95 . 1. Manufacturer: AcornModeI1741-HCP-RD. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Acorn b. Bradley 2.16 HANDICAPPED SECURITY SHOWER (PP-3H) A. Unit 1. Manufacturer: Acorn ModeI1741-3-M-RD-SW. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Acorn b. Bradley c. Metcraft B. Shower panel shall be fabricated from seamless, 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Exposed surfaces shall have satin polished finish. Unit shall have Air-Trol single temperature security valve, 60 second metering valve, recessed soap dish and wall sleeve. Provide 1. R. Smith 20 lO-U -B-6 cast iron floor drain with nickel bronze grate, sediment bucket and vandal proof securing screws (see drawing for number of floor drains required at each shower). C. Tempering valve: Powers Model 420 or approved equal. 2.15 SECURITY SHOWER (PP-3) A. Unit . 1. Manufacturer: Acorn ModeI1650-FA-I-BP-4-M-LW1. e 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Acorn b. Bradley c. Metcraft 3. Sink unit shall be 20" wide, seamless welded, 14 gage, type 304 stainless steel. Exposed surfaces shall have satin polished finish. Unit shall be factory piped and tested with off- floor wall outlet, penal bubblerlfiller, Air-Trol H & C security valves, 60 second metering valve, pinned cleanout plug, hand basin, and required pipe fittings. 2.14 HANDICAPPED SECURITY SINK (PP-2H) A. Unit 2.13 HANDICAPPED SECURITY WALL HUNG WA1ER CLOSET (PP-IH) A. Unit 1. Manufacturer: Acorn Model 1675-ADA-W-1-PC-FVT. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Acorn b. Bradley c. Metcraft 3. Toilet shall be 14" wide, seamless welded, 14 gage, type 304 stainless steel mounted at handicapped height. Exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Unit shall be factory piped and tested with off-floor wall outlet, pinned cleanout plug, flush valve, wall sleeve, blowout jet toilet with elongated bowl, integral seat and through the wall type flush valve. Toilet trap shall pass a 2-5/8" diameter ball and be fully enclosed. . 3. Combination lavatoryltoilet unit shall be 18" wide, seamless welded, 14 gage, type 304 stainless steel. Exposed surfaces shall have satin polished finish. Unit shall be factory piped and tested with off-floor wall outlet, penal bubbler/filler, Air-Trol H & C security valves, 60 second metering valve, pinned cleanout plug, flush valve, recessed toilet paper holder, wall sleeve, ventilation grille in cabinet, blowout jet toilet with elongated bowl and integral seat, hand basin, tooth brush holder, 6 point anchor system and 4" high backsplash and required pipe fittings. Toilet trap shall pass a 2-5/8" diameter ball and be fully enclosed. 4. See drawings for orientation of units. 15440 - 7 95-052/11-95 3.05 CLEANING A. At completion clean plmnbing fIxtures and equipment . 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fIxtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. . Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fIxtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. D. Install components level and plumb. E. Install and secure fIxtures in place with wall supports and bolts. F. Seal fIxtures to wall and floor surfaces with non-hardening sealant, color to match fixture. G. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended to hold fIxture in place. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install each fIxture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fIXture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fIxture rough- in schedule for particular fIxtures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. VerifY that walls and floor fInishes are prepared and ready for installation of fIxtures. B. VerifY that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 1. 1.Manufacturer: Acorn Model 8156. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Acorn b. Bradley c. Metcraft 2.18 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER (EWC) A. Fountain 1. Manufacturer: Elkay Model LISE-8-G. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a Halsey Taylor. b. Haws. c. Oasis. 3. ANSIIARI 1010; handicapped mounted electric water cooler with stainless steel top, vinyl on steel body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with flexible stream guard, automatic stream regulator, mounting bracket, refrigerated with integral air cooled condenser. . 2.17 RECESSED HOT AND COLD W A 1ER HOSE BOX (RHB). A. Unit c. Metcraft B. Handicapped wall shower panel shall be fabricated from seamless, 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Exposed surfaces shall have satin polished fInish. Unit shall have a fIxed shower head, a hand shower with flexible metal hose, positive shut-off quick-disconnect and mounting bracket. Unit shall have two Air-Trol single temperature security valves, two 60 second metering valves and recessed soap dish. Provide 1. R. Smith 201O-U-B-6Cast iron floor drain with nickel bronze grate, sediment bucket and vandal proof securing screws. C. Tempering valve: Powers Model 420 or approved equal. . 15440 - 8 95-052/11-95 . 3.07 FIXTURE ROUGH-IN SCHEDULE Hot Water Cold Water Waste Vent Lavatory: 1/2 inch 1/2 inch * * Service Sink: 1/2 inch 1/2 inch * * Sink: 1/2 inch 1/2 inch * * Water Closet 1/2 inch * * (Tank Type): Water Closet 1 inch * * (Flush Valve): . END OF SECTION . 3.06 FIXTURE HEIGHTS A. Install fIxtures to heights above fInished floor as indicated. B. Water-Closet 1. Standard 14 inches to top of bowl rim. 2. Handicapped 18 inches to top of seat. 3. Juvenile 10 inches to top of seat C. Lavatory 1. Standard 31 inches to top of basin rim. 2. Handicapped 32 inches to top of basin rim. 3. Juvenile 24 inches to top of basin rim. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15450 - 1 95-052/11-95 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide three year manufacturers warranty under provisions of Section 15010. . 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NSF, ANSIINFPA 70, and ANSI/UL 1453 requirements for water heaters. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Perform Work in accordance with Standard Plumbing Code. B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model nmnber, and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 3. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). D. Ensure pmnps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. . 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSIIASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. B. ANSI/UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters. C.ANSI/NFP A 70 - National Electrical Code. l.04SUBMITfALS A. Product Data: 1. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent construction. 3. Submit certified pmnp curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. . B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.. Water Heater . B. Circulating Pmnp 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. B. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties. SECTION 15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT . PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15450 - 2 95-052/11-95 . END OF SECTION 3.02 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve on discharge. C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to NSF and UL requirements. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system. B. Performance: 1. Flow: 27 gpm at 15 feet lift. 2. Motor: 4/10 hp, 115 volt, single phase, 60 Hz. . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (DWH) A. Manufacturers: 1. See drawing schedule. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a Lochinvar b. State c. Reem d. Rudd 2.02 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMP A. See drawing schedule. 2.03 SEWAGE EJECTOR (GP-l - Grinder Pump) A. Manufacturers: 1. Myers Model SR1830 packaged simplex sewage system 18x30. Simplex pump system complete with one (1) 4/10 HP grinder pump, 18"x 30" polyethylene basin, steel cover, inlet hub, full swing 2" check valve, automatic ejector with wide-angle mercury switch and 20' power cord. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Approved equal. HYDRONIC PIPING 15510 - 1 95-052/11-95 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CHILLED WATER PIPING, BURIED A. Steel Pip~: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40, black with ANSIJA WW A CI05 polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: ANSIJAWSDl.l, welded. 3. Casing: Two (2) inch thick Foarnglass by Pittsburgh Coming with Pittwrap jacketing (pittwrap CW will not be accepted). . 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010. C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labelling in place. 1.06 SUBMITI ALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. C. Include welders certification of compliance with ANSIJ ASME SEC 9. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSIJASME B31.9. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Weldlng Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSIJASME SEC 9. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSIJASME SEC 9. . 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSIJASME -Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B.ANSIIASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C. ANSIIASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. D. ANSIJASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings -DWV. E. ANSIJASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. F. ANSIJA WS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. G. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. H. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. , ~ PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Chilled water piping system. 1.02 RELATED WORK , A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation. C. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. D. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties. SECTION 15510 HYDRONIC PIPING . HYDRONIC PIPING 15510 - 2 95-052/11-95 . 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Route piping in orderly manner, plmnb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings. F. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. . 2.06 GLOBE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, with backseating capacity. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stern, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. 2.07 SPRING LOADED CHECK VAL YES A. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or flanged ends. 2.08 RELIEF VAL YES A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. 2.05 GAlE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non- rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, double wedge or disc. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, wedge. . 2.02 CHILLED W A 1ER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Contractor may use steel pipe or copper tubing. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40, black. 1. Fittings: ANSIIASTMB16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Screwed for pipe 2 inch and under; ANSIIA WS D 1.1 welded for pipe over 2 inch. C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSIIASME B16.23 cast brass or ANSIIASMEB16.29 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: ANSIIA WS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. 2.03 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSII AS1\.1E B 16.23 cast brass, or ANSII AS1\.1E B 16.29 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95T A. 2.04 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene bonded to asbestos. HYDRONlC PIPING 15510 - 3 95-052/11-95 . . END OF SECTION 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pIpe. C. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. D. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. E.-Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of condenser water pumps. F: Provide 3/4 inch gate drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, baSes of vertical risers, and at equipment Pipe to nearest drain: . G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. 1. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. . HYDRONIC SPECIAL TIES 15515-1 95-052111-95 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION TANKS A. Construction: Closed, welded steeL tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI! ASME Code; 125 psi rating; cleaned, prime coated, and supplied with steel support saddles; with tappings for installation of accessories. B. Gage Glass Set: Brass compression stops, guard, and 3/4 inch glass, maximum 24 inches length, . long enough to cover tank for 2 inches above bottom to 2 inches below top. C. Quick Connect Air Inlet: Automotive tire valve type, manual air vent, tank drain, and pressure relief valve. D. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double check back flow preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacumn breaker, and valved by-pass. . 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Include installation instruction, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list 1.06 SUBMITIALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and fInishes. Include product description, model and dimensions. D. Submit inspection certificates for pressure vessels. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. . 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI!ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of tanks. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSIIASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code. ~: 1.02 RELA1ED WORK A. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Expansion tanks. B. Air vents. C. Air separators. D. Strainers. E. Pump suction fIttings. F. Relief valves. SECTION 15515 HYDRONIC SPECIAL TIES . HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515 - 2 95-052/11-95 . 2.08 FLOW METERS A. Orifice principle by-pass circuit with direct reading gage, soldered or flanged piping connections for 125 psig working pressure, with shut off valves, and drain and vent connections. B. Cast iron, wafer type, orifice insert flow meter for 250 psig working pressure, with read-out valves equipped with integral check valves with gasketed caps. C. Cahbrated, plug type balance valve with precision machined orifice, readout valves equipped with integral check valves and gasketed caps, calibrated nameplate and indicating pointer. 2.07 FLOW CONIROLS A. Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet. B. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimmn pressure 3.5 psig. C. Control Mechanism: Stainless steel or nickel plated brass piston or regulator cup, operating against stainless steel helical or wave formed spring. D. Accessories: In-line strainer on inlet and ball valve on outlet. 2.06 FLOW INDICATORS A. Brass construction, threaded for insertion into piping system, packless, with paddle with removable segments, vapor proof electrical compartment with switches. . 2.05 PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS A. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 inch and larger, rated for 175 psig working pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings, disposable fme mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and pennanent magnet located in flow stream and removable for cleaning. B. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side. 2.04 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.03 AIR SEPARATORS A. Dip Tube Fitting: For 125 psig operating pressure; to prevent free air collected from rising into system. B. In-line Air Separators: Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch and larger; tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI!ASME Code; for 125 psig operating pressure. C. Air Elimination Valve: Bronze, float operated, for 125 psig operating pressure. D. Combination Air SeparatorslStrainers: Steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI! ASME Code, for 125 psig operating pressure, with galvanized steel integral strainer with 3/16 inch perforations, tangential inlet and outlet connections, and internal stainless steel air collector tube. . 2.02 AIR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. B. Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve. HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515 - 3 95-052/11-95 . END OF SECTION PART 3 EXECUTION. 3.01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended perfonnance. B. Support tanks inside building from building structure. C. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes. D. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated. E. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest drain. F. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pmnp and connect to expansion tank. G. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection. H. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps. Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems. I. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports. J. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and expansion tanks. K. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment. 1. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain. . M. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual vent areas. . 2.09 RELIEF VAL YES A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled. D. Cast iron or bronze, globe style, balance valve with handwheel with vernier type ring setting and memory stop. . HVACPUMPS 15540 - 1 95-052/11-95 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENfS A. Balance: Rotating parts, statically and dynamically. B. Construction: To permit servicing without breaking piping or motor connections. C. Pump Motors: Operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise. D. Pump Connections: Flanged. 2.02 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, radially or horizontally split casing, for 175 psig maximmn working pressure. B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge. C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft. D. Bearings: Perman~ntly lubricated roller or ball bearings. E. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve. F. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. G. Drive: FleXIble coupling with coupling guard. H. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim on 4" concrete housekeeping pad. . 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list. . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manilfacture, assembly, and field performance of pumps with minimmn three years e""perience. B. Alignment: Base mounted pmnps shall be aligned by qualified millwright and alignment certified. 1.05SUBMITIALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Submit certified pmnp curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSIIUL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps. 1.02 RELA1ED WORK A. Section 15242- Vibration Isolation. B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. C. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. . D. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Base mounted pmnps. SECTION 15540 HV AC PUMPS . HV AC PUMPS 15540 - 2 95-052/11-95 . . END OF SECTION . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by manufacturer. C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. D. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. E. Provide line sized shut-offvalve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve and balancing valve on pump discharge. F. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. G. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floordrains. H. Lubricate pumps before start-up. 1. Install base mounted pumps on concrete base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place. J. Qualified millwright shall check., align, and certify base mounted pumps prior to start-up. BREACHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15575 - 1 95-052111-95 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TYPEB DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTS A. Fabricate inner pipe of sheet aluminum, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steeL tested in compliance with UL 441. B. Provide accessories each bearing factory applied UL label. 1. Ventilated Roof Thimble: Consists of roof penetration, vent flashing with spacers and storm collar. 2. Exit Cone: Consists of inner cone, and outer jacket, to increase stack exit velocity 1.5 times. 3. Stack Cap: Consists of conical rainshield with inverted cone for partial rain protection with low flow resistance. . 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIRE1\.1ENTS A. Conform to applicable ANSI Z223.1 code for installation of natural gas burning appliances and equipment. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with minimmn three years documented experience. 1.06SUBMITIALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 15010. B. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIRE1\.1ENTS A. Factory built vents and chimneys used for venting natural draft appliances shall comply with NFPA 211 and be UL listed and labelled. . 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Vent: That portion of a venting system designed to convey flue gases directly outdoors from a vent connector or from an appliance when a vent connector is not used. B. Vent Connector: That part of a venting system that conducts the flue gases from the flue collar of an appliance to a chimney or vent, and may include a draft control device. . 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z223.1 (NFP A 54) - The National Fuel Gas Code. B. ASHRAE - Handbook, Equipment VolUme, Chapter "Chimney, Gas, Vent, and Fireplace Systems. " C. SMACNA - HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. D. UL 441 - Standard for Gas Vents. E. UL 641 - Standard for Low Temperature Venting Systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment: Water heating equipment. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured chimneys for gas fIred equipment. B. Manufactured double wall chimneys for fuel fired equipment. SECTION 15575 BREACHING, CIllMNEYS, AND STACKS . BREACHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15575 - 2 95-052/11-95 . . END OF SECTION Type B Galvanized Domestic Water Heater CHIMNEY/ST ACK BREACHING 3.02 SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with recommendations of ASHRAE - Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter "Chimney, Gas, Vent, and Fireplace Systems", and ANSI Z223.1 (NFPA 54). C. Install BREACHING with minimum of joints. Align accurately at connections, with internal surfaces smooth. D. Support BREACHING from building structure, rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors to hold to shape and prevent buckling. Support vertical BREACHING, chimneys, and stacks at 12 foot spacing, to adjacent structural surfaces, or at floor penetrations. Refer to SMACNA HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for equivalent duct support configuration and size. E. Pitch BREACHING with positive slope up from fuel-fIred equipment to chimney or stack. F. For Type B double wall gas vents, maintain UL listed minimum clearances from combustibles. Assemble pipe and accessories as required for complete installation. G. Provide minimum length of breaching to connect appliance to chimney. Provide Type B chimney continuously from appliances. SECURITY COVER SYS1EM (SHROUD) FOR CONCEALMENT OF FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING 95-052/11-95 15650 - 1 . 2.02 MA 1ERIAL A. A factory fabricated steel cover support system with concealed surface mounted attachment clamps, in dimensions as shown on the drawings for concealment of fIre sprinkler piping. B. Support! Attachment Devices 1. Spring steel shield clips of the size recommended by manufacturer, for securement of the cover. Clips shall be produced from heavy gauge zinc plated spring steel. Each clip must be demonstrated as being able to resist a force of 250 lbs uplift at the free end. Test results shall be available upon request C. Piping Cover 1. The piping cover shall be smooth in appearance and shall be made of 18 gauge Paintgrip galvanized steel (treated for painting) meeting the requirements for ASlM- A527 G90-U Commercial Quality steel. The cover shall have a snap-lock interfacing with the clamps spaced at maximum 16" centers such that once assembled, it is rendered virtually irremovable with the use of ordinary tools. 2. Cover manufacturer shall be staffed with a licensed engineer having a minimum of fIve years experience with such systems. 3. The cover shall be sized in accordance with requirements to accommodate the specific pipe size ~ specified by the project engineer and to accommodate the specific sprinkler device specified by the project engineer. . 4. L-Design and/or U-Design shroud cover (standard 5 ft. sections) for sidewall and/or pendant installations. PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. InIEx Systems, Inc. 602 Spring Ridge Drive Kennesaw,Geor~a30144 (800) 483-8201 B. Grice Engineering, Inc. 23 North Main Street Janesville, Wisconsin 53545 (608) 757-1335 C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. . 1.04 JOB CONDmONS A. Coordinate installation piping coverlsupport system with all other trades. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15325 - Sprinkler Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and product data. PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRlPTION A. The piping shroud system must be a concealed fastener snap-lock assembly which, once assembled, renders the cover essentially irremovable with the use of ordinary tools. SECTION 15650 SECURITY COVER SYSTEM (SHROUD) FOR CONCEALMENT OF FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING . SECURITY COVER SYSTEM (SHROUD) FOR CONCEALMENT OF FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING 95-052/11-95 15650 - 2 . END OF SECTION . PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of system shall be in strict accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions. I. The sprinkler contractorlengineer must deternrine the piping and sprinkler layout., including sprinkler head locations and pipe support locations (based on pipe manufacturer's specs). Indicated areas on drawings where cover system is to be used. 2. Select appropriate fasteners for the substrate encountered to adequately secure the pipe and cover system. 3. To insure that the cover is linear and snug-fitting when installed, it is imperative that its support devices are anchored squarely and fmnly against the structural surf~ce in a straight line. 4. All penetrations to the soffit/cover system must be field cut to prevent misalignment with intended protrusion. The exceptions to this are that access doors will be factory furnished and installed and perforations if required for ventilation purposes will be factory perforated. 5. Guidelines for installation of modular soffit/cover system shall be supplied by the manufacturer of said system and the installing contractor shall adhere to the manufacturer's guidelines. 6. Manufacturer shall supply on-site installation instruction by a qualified installation instructor for a minimmn of one day for the project start-up. 7. The completed installation shall be visibly searched for voids between the interfacing of the cover and construction surface. Voids shall be sealed with one of the following security sealants: a. Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod gel b. Sikadur 23 Low-Mod gel c. Foilfast rigid epoxy . 5. Cover joints shall be overlapped/interlocking integral joints with provision for securement utilizing stainless steel rivets. Rivet spacing shall be at no greater than 2.0 inch intervals along the joint and positioned at a distance no greater than 1.0 inch from the end of the overlapping section. 6. Cover design shall include a "groove" at the interfacing of the cover and the construction surface to facilitate the application of sealant/adhesive compounds and enhance the security of such compounds from dislodging. D. Accessories 1. The system shall include tamp0r-resistant end caps, prefabricated corners, wall flanges, couplings and other items which may be necessary to complete the system, and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. The system shall include a spacer ring at the point of each sprinkler outlet to preclude intentional "gapping" between the escutcheon and the cover. CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684 - 1 95-052/11-95 . 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSV ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. B. ANSVASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. C. ANSVASME SEC 8 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. D. ANSIIUL 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners. E. ARI 550 - Centrifugal or Rotary Water - Chilling Packages. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loading, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate equipment, piping and connections, valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves required for complete system. B. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, sPecialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Submit performance data indicating energy input versus cooling load output from 10 to 100 percent of full load. E. Submit stability data with constant entering condenser water temperature down to 10 % load F. Submit product data indicating impeller speed (RPM), number of bearings, type of bearings, high speed impeller shaft, low speed compressor shaft, sound level per ARI 575- 87 (dB), number of stages, number of sets of inlet guide vanes, amount of refrigerant charge (lbs.), and amount of oil required (lbs.). 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation data. B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, controls, and accessories. Include trouble- shooting guide. C. Submit maintenance data. . 1.02 RELAlED SECTIONS A.' Section 15252 - Vibration Isolation. B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation C. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. D. Section 15540 - HV AC Pumps. E. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Chiller package. B. Charge of refrigerant and oil. C. Controls and control connections. D. Chilled water connections. E. CondenSer water connections. F. Starters. G. Electrical power connections. SECTION 15684 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS . CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684 - 2 95-052/11-95 . a. P.c.P. = [Measured KW - (Measured Tons x Allowable KWrron*)] x $2000/KW 2. POWER CONSUMPTION TEST: The power consumption penalty for all load points shall be based upon the tolerances set forth in ARI 550-92. The power consumption penalty (P.C.P.) will be calculated based upon the following formula: a. Allowable capacity = [(1 - tolerance) x design capacity]; tolerance per ARI 550-92, Section 5.4. . 1.06 VERIFICATION OF CAPACITY AND EFFICIENCY A. The chiller (one of each size) shall be factory performance tested with the proposed alternative refrigerant under full load conditions in an ARI certified test facility. The manufacturer shall supply a certified test report to confirm performance as specified. Proper ARI certification documents for the test loop shall be made available upon request from the manufacturer for inspection. The performance test shall be conducted in accordance with ARI Standard 550-92 procedures and tolerances. Stable operation at a minimum load of 10% shall be demonstrated during the factory performance test with constant entering condenser water temperature. The machine shall be modified to include hot gas bypass if the minimum load cannot be demonstrated. B. All proposals for chiller performance must include an ARI approved selection method for the specified refrigerants. Verification of date and version of computer program selection or catalog is available through the Vice President, Engineering, ARI (703) 524-8800. C. The performance test shall be run with clean tubes in accordance with ARI 550-92 to include the following: 1. A downward temperature adjustment per Section A7.3 shall be made to the design leaving evaporator water temperature to adjust from the design fouling to the clean tube condition. 2. An upward temperature adjustment per Section A7.3 shall be made to the design entering condenser water temperature to adjust from the design fouling to the clean tube condition. 3. There shall be no exceptions to conducting the performance test with clean tubes and with temperature adjustments in (I) and (2). The manufacturer shall clean tubes, if necessary, prior to test to obtain a test fouling factor of .0000 hr. sq. ft. F/BTU. D. The factory test instrumentation shall be per ARI Standard 550, and the calibration of all instrumentation shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly NBS). E. The owner or his representative shall be notified 14 days in advance to witness the factory performance test. If the owner or his representative desires to witness the performance test, all travel expenses will be the owner's responsibility. F. A certified test report of all data shall be submitted to the Architect prior to completion of the project. The factory certified test report shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer's company. Preprinted certification will not be acceptable; certification shall be in the original. G. The equipment will be accepted if the test procedures and results are in conformance with ARI Standard 550-92. If the equipment fails to perform within allowable tolerances, the manufacturer will be allowed to make necessary revisions to his equipment and retest as required. The manufacturer shall assume all expenses incurred by the owner or his representative to witness the retest. In the event that these revisions do not achieve submitted performance, the following penalties will be imposed: I. CAPACITY TEST: For each ton below the allowable capacity as set forth in ARI 550- 92 of the design capacity, one thousand dollars per ton will be deducted from the contract price. . :-t..... .,' CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684 - 3 95-052/11-95 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ARI Standard 550-92 code for rating and testing of centrifugal and rotary chillers. . 4. The Owner or his representative must be present to witness the test. 5. The Owner Qr his representative must witness the test after attenuation to confirm that the submitted values are met. The manufacturer will assume all expenses incurred by the Owner or his representative to witness the retest. B. Sound Pressure Test - The chiller (one of each size) shall have a sound test conducted at the factory prior to shipment to confirm the Sound Pressure Levels submitted in Section 3.01.A above. All data must be measured and presented in strict accordance with ARI Standard 575-87. 1. The sound data points shall be measured simultaneously during the verification of capacity and efficiency as outlined in Section 1.06. 2. In the event that a chiller does not meet the submitted dBA sound pressure level, the manufacturer must, at his expense, provide sufficient attenuation to the machine to meet the submitted value. This attenuation shall be applied in such a manner that it does not hinder the operation or routine maintenance procedures of the chiller. 3. If the unit cannot be modified to meet the submitted SPL levels, sufficient funds will be deducted from the purchase order to cover materials and labor for job site attenuation to bring the sound levels to an acceptable level. 1.08 SOUND A. SOUND DATA - The Centrifugal Chiller Sound Pressure Level (SPL), in decibels (dB), with a reference pressure of 20 micropascals, shall not exceed the values listed in "a" below. All ratings shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 575-87, "Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within Equipment Rooms". 1. No reduction of entering condenser water or raising of leaving chilled water temperatures will be allowed in the SPL's. Making such a temperature adjustments does not represent the loudest operating condition the chiller will experience while on the job, and could mask sound problems that would otherwise occur. A minimum of 75 % of the sound data points along the length of the machine shall be taken, and established as the minimum percentage of total possible points used to determine sound levels. a. Table % Load 100 50 25 dB, A Weighted 80 82 84 . 1.07 REFRIGERANT 1. Refrigerants which are acceptable are those with an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) of 0.02 or less, and a Global Warming Potential (GWP based on C02 = J) of 550 or less: . a. HCFC-123,' HFC-134a 2. An original copy of an ARI certified computerized selection shall also be provided to display the performance of the machine with the applicable' alternative refrigerant. Capacity and efficiency are to meet the scheduled performance. 3. TOTAL PERFORMANCE PENALTY:. The total performarice penalty will be the sum of CAPACITY PENALTY AND .POWER CONSUMPTION PENALTY, times the number of typical chillers, regardless if tested. H. Equipment manufacturer shall not invoice for the centrifugal chillers(s) until successful completion of the performance test or acceptance of penalty deduction from the contract. * Allowable KWlTon = [(1 + tolerance) x design KW/Ton); tolerance per ARI 550-92, Section 5.4. . CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684 - 4 95-052/11-95 . 2.02 COMPRESSOR AND MOTOR A. The compressor shall be centrifugal with multiple-stages. B. Low pressure refrigerant machines shall be provided when available. C. Manufacturers of single stage compressors shall indicate the percent load at which hot gas is required to flow into the evaporator while maintaining constant design water temperatures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUMMARY A. The contractor shall furnish and install centrifugal water chillers as shown and scheduled in the plans. The units shall be installed in accordance with this specification and produce the specified tonnage per the scheduled data in accordance with ARI 550-92. The unit shall bear the ARI certification label as applicable. B. Approved manufacturers: 1. Carrier 2. Trane 3. York . 1.11 WARRANTY A. CompressorlMotor Warranty shall be provided based upon the RPM of the compressor as follows: 1. Compressor RPM Warranty Term a. 0-5000 - 1 year from start-up b. 5001-10000 - 5 years from start-up c. 10,001 and above - 5 years from start-up plus annual oil analysis. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete chiller package as manufactured and delivered to site including materials and labor. C. Refrigerant Warranty: For machines operating at pressures greater than 30 psig refrigerant side pressures shall include a 1 year refrigerant warranty. 1.10 HANDLING AND EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place until installation. C. Equipment Room Requirements 1. Follow minimum standards for refrigeration systems as required by BSRI ASHRAE Standard 15-1992 paying special attention to requirements for air monitoring, ventilation, self-contained breathing apparatus, for leak detection and insuring the safety of chiller plant operating personnel. 2. Install local exhaust at relief valve discharge headers and purge units. Route exhaust to the outside of the building and away from all air intakes. 3. Install a refrigerant monitor that can be calibrated for appropriate refrigerant, capable of detecting concentrations of 10 ppm for low level leak detection and for insuring the safety of operators. 4. Install suitable alarms that activate well below the Acceptable Exposure Level (AEL) of the refrigerant and alert persons inside and outside of the equipment room that a leak condition exists. . B. Conform to ANSIIUL 465 for construction of Centrifugal chillers and provide UL label. C. Conform to ANSIIASME SECTION VIII Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for construction and testing of centrifugal chillers as applicable. D. Conform to BSR/ASHRAE STANDARD 15-1992 code for construction and operation of centrifugal chillers. E. Unit shall bear the ARI Certification Label for Centrifugal/Rotary Water-Cooled Chillers as applicable. CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684 - 5 95-052111-95 . 2.04 PURGE SYSTEM A. The manufacturers of low pressure machines. must provide a separate compressor type purge system. B. The purge shall operate independently of the chiller and can be operated while the machine circulation water pump is shutdown. No external water cooling source is to be required. C. Any excess purge requirement will enable an alarm indication light at the' chiller unit control panel, a contact closure at the purge shall be provided for remote alarm annunciation, and a diagnostic (with date and time of occurrence) shall be stored in the chlller unit control panel's diagnostic summary. . D. The unit indication shall include: 1. Purge operating mode (ON, OFF, AUTO, AUTO ADAPTIVE) 2. Purge operating status (ON, OFF, AUTO, AUTO ADAPTIVE) 3. Elapsed time meter for total pumpout tiine and total run time (monitors amount of leak rate). 4. Indication of #1 and #2 as an integral part of the chiller control panel unit mounted Operator Interface Clear Language Display, and: a. Purge suction temperature b. Purge liquid temperature c. Purge pumpout rate (minutes/24 hours) d. Time to next purge (minutes) e. 30 day purge pumpout average (minutes/day) f. Last 5 purge cycles pumpout average run time, interval from shutdown to 3 hours after shutdown(minutes/day) 5. Binary output to indicate purge shutdown due to excessive operation. . 2.03 EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER A. The evaporator and condenser shaIl be built in accordance with BSRlASHRAE 15-1992 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. The water piping connections shall be victaulic. B. Evaporator and condenser tubes shall be internally enhanced. D. Adjustable or float type refrigerant metering devices and thermal expansion valves shall be inspected and adjusted by the manufacturer at the end of each y~ar for the first five years of operation to assure equivalent reliability and maintenance to a fixed orifice system. A. written report shall be forwarded to the owner each year to confirm completion. E. Units with multi-stage compressors shall incorporate an interstage flash vessel "economizer" in the refrigerant cycle. All units with single stage compressors shall have the condensers circuited for:a minimum of 10 degrees of liquid subcooling and be provided with a thermometer well to monitor the amount of subcooling. F. Supply and return head water boxes shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psig and shall be subjected to a factory hydrostatic pressure test of 225 psig. Provide drain and vent connections in water boxes. G. Factory insulation will be 3/4" insulation and cover all low temperature surfaces to include the evaporator, water boxes, and suction elbow. Economizer and motor cooling lines are insulated with 3/8" and II2" insulation respectively. D. Chiller should be able to unload to 10 % of design tonnage with constant entering water temperature. The machine shall be modified to include hot gas bypass if 10% load cannot be met. E. Compressor assembly shall be run-tested at.the factory. Vibration shall not exceed 1.0 mil peak to peak. F. The motor shall be hermetic and eithe! suction or liquid refrigerant cooled. Hot gas motor ~ooling is not acceptable. .. . CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684 - 6 95-052/11-95 . 2.07 CONTROLS A. The chiller(s) shall be controlled by a stand-alone Direct Digital Control (DDC) System. A dedicated chiller control panel is to be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer. The panel shall be microprocessor-based, with factory packaging and testing of all required control components for reliable equipment operation. B. The chiller control panel shall provide control of chiller operation and monitoring of chiller modules, sensors, actuators, relays and switches. The panel shall be a complete system for stand-alone chiller control and includes controls to safely and efficiently operate the chiller. C. Safeties - The chiller control panel shall monitor such safeties as motor starting and running time between compressorlmotor starts, low chilled water temperature, low evaporator refrigerant temperature, high condenser refrigerant pressure, evaporator and condenser water flow status, low oil pressure, low oil temperature, high oil temperature, high motor winding temperatures, sensor faults, and proper operation of unit controls. 1. To monitor bearing temperatures, all of the compressor motor bearings, (including high speed, low speed, and thrust bearings) shall have factory installed temperature sensors installed in the oil return lines of each motor bearing. If any oil temperature reaches or exceeds a set value, the chiller control panel shall shut down the chiller, display the diagnostic, and light the front panel alarm LED. 2. The chiller control panel shall incorporate advanced motor protection to safeguard the motor throughout the starting and running cycles from the adverse affects of: a. Phase Loss b. phase imbalance and severe phase imbalance c. phase reversal and loss of phase reversal d. protection . 2.06 REFRIGERANT MONITOR A. Acceptable Models: 1. Trane Model RMWC 2. Mine Safety Appliances, Model "Chillgard IR" B. Alternate Monitors: 1. Alternate sensors shall be approved prior to bid and meet the following criteria: a. Monitor shall be compound specific with a measurement and display range 0- 1000 ppm. b. The monitor must be calibrated for the specified refrigerant. c. The display accuracy shall be + 1- 1 ppm. d. Three factory-set alarm levels shall be provided, each with a front panel light and a latching binary contact closure for the control of remote devices. e. An analog output corresponding to the unit display is required for connection to a BAS or other recording equipment. f. A means to automatically re-zero the instrument must be included. g. Regular maintenance of the unit shall be limited to recalibration once per year and monthly confirmation of clean air source for recalibration. h. Ambient temperature operating range shall be 40 to 105 F. . E. At standard room operating conditions and with a condensing refrigerant temperature > 80 degrees F, the purge shall be rated for no more than .8 lb. of refrigerant per 1 lb. non- condensable. The purge efficiency must not deteriorate over time. (This is for the standard Purifier Purge) 2.05 PUMP-OUT SYSTEM A. Units operating with refrigerant having positive pressure at 75 F (CFC-12, HCFC-22, CFC- 114, HFC-134a, CFC-500, etc.) shall have the capability of storing the entire refrigerant charge in the condenser or shall provide a pump-out system for each machine complete with transfer pump, condensing unit and tank constructed in accordance with ASME Code for unfired pressure vessels bearing the National Board stamp. B. Pump-out systems shall be supplied and warranted by the chiller manufacturer. CENTRIFUGAL WATER CIDLLERS 15684 - 7 95-052/11-95 e. over/under voltage f. motor overload g. motor overload protection incorrectly set h. momentary power loss protection with auto restart consisting of three-phase current sensing devices that monitor the status of the current i. starter contactor fault protection j. starter transition failure . 3. Alternately, the advanced motor protection system can be furnished in the starter. D. The chiller control panel shall be capable of displaying system data in the following formats (and be capable of alternating between these modes on-line): I. English or Metric units 2. Numerical data as whole numbers or one. digit right of decimal E. The chiller control panel is to be provided with a starts counter and running time counter. F. The front of the chiller control panel shall be capable of displaying the following in clear language, without the use of codes, look-up tables, or gauges: 1. Entering and leaving evaporator water temperature 2. Entering and leaving condenser water temperature 3. Compressor Motor Winding Temperature 1,2,3 4. Saturated evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperature 5. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant pressure 6. Purge compressor suction temperature 7. Oil Temperature 8. Oil Tank pressure 9. Oil pump discharge pressure 10. Differential oil pressure 11. Compressor motor starts and running hours 12. Compressor motor current, by phase 13. Compressor motor percent RLA 14. Purge pumpout rate 15. Purge pumpout time last or current cycle 16. Total Purge pumpout time 17. Total Purge run time 18. Chilled water set point and set point source 19. Electrical current limit set point and set point source 20. Current chiller operating mode 21. Equipment room refrigerant monitor ppm levels 22. Chiller diagnostics including a time and date of occurrence (minimum' 20 historical diagnostics stored in non-volatile chiller panel memory) 23. Bearing Oil Temperatures 24. Discharge Temperature (compressor) G. The chiller control panel shall provide evaporator freeze protection and low limit control. This control shall be used to avoid low evaporator refrigerant temperature trip- outs during critical periods of chiller operation. The control shall take progressively more aggressive load limiting action in response to the severitY of the rate of change and the actual value of the evaporator refrigerant temperature. A clear language diagnostic message, reflecting the operating status, shall be automatically displayed at the front panel whenever this control is in effect, and if the condition exists for more than 20 minutes, a limit warning alarm relay shall energiie to indicate that the condition has persisted. H. The chiller control panel shall provide individual relay outputs to startlstop the chilled water pump and condenser water pump. The condenser water pump relay output can be used to enable the cooling tower temperature controls. 1. The chiller control panel shall provide a relay output that shall energize whenever the compressor is running. . . . CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684 - 8 95-052/11-95 . 2.08 STARTERS (LOW VOLTAGE) A. Motor starter shall be a unit mounted Star-Delta Closed Transition and shall have a NEMA lA gasketed enclosure. Enclosure shall be constructed of 12 gauge steel minimum with the exception of doors which shall be 14 gauge steel minimum. Unit mounted enclosures shall have ventilating louvers. Gasketing shall be 2" width minimum. Each door or enclosure more than 48" high shall have 3 point vault type latches with pad lockable handles. B. Motor starters shall include incoming line provisions for the number and size cables shown on the drawings. Incoming line lugs shall be copper mechanical type. Connection directly to the contactors is not permissible. All components shall be mounted to a removable steel panel of 14 gauge minimum. . J. The chiller control panel shall provide an alarm relay output that shall energize whenever a fault requiring manual reset is detected by the panel. K. The chiller control panel shall provide a relay output to initiate system changeover to free cooling. The relay shall be energized upon initiation of free cooling at the chiller control panel. L. The chiller control panel shall provide a relay output that shall energize whenever the chiller is operating at maximum capacity. M. The chiller control panel shall provide a head relief request relay output to indicate that the chiller is in condenser limit mode and thereby requesting condenser water temperature relief. N. The chiller control panel shall provide an analog output signal that shall indicate the Compressor Motor Percent RLA. O. The chiller control panel shall provide an analog output signal that shall indicate the Condenser Refrigerant Pressure. P. The chiller control panel shall provide a relay output to signal to the BAS system that ice making is in operation. Q. The chiller control panel shall provide condenser limit control to include a pressure transducer and interconnecting piping and wiring. This control sIiall be used to avoid high condenser refrigerant pressure tripouts during critical periods of chiller operation. The control shall take progressively more aggressive load limiting action in response to the severity of the rate of change and actual value of the condenser refrigerant pressure. A clear language diagnostic message, reflecting the operating status, shall be automatically displayed at the front panel whenever this control is in effect, and if the condition exists for more than 20 minutes, a limit warning alarm relay shall energize to indicate that the condition has persisted. R. The chiller control panel shall receive the leaving chilled water temperature set point in the form of a 4- 20mA or 2-10 vdc signal from a remote source (i.e. generic building automation system). S. The chiller control panel shall receive the electrical current limit set point in the form of a 4- 20mA or 2-10 vdc signal from a remote source (i.e. generic building automation system). T. The chiller control panel shall be capable of displaying the equipment room refrigerant level concentration in parts-per-million (ppm). U. The chiller control panel shall be capable of providing variable interval timers for short cycling protection. The variable timers shall adjust to the critical chiller operating parameters and the time between successive attempted starts of the compressor motor. Fixed start-to- start short cycling protection timers are not acceptable. V. The chiller control panel shall be capable of independently invoking password protection of the entire display and keypad, operator settings (e.g. chilled water set point), machine configuration settings, and service start-up settings. W. The above specified items are required as a minimum. The contractor may select which items are covered by the equipment supplier and which are covered by the controls contractor. A combined submittal will be required where the contractor will identify which items are covered by each supplier. . CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 15684 - 9 95-052/11-95 . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide for connection to electrical service. Include for connection of oil pump to separately fused circuit. C. Provide for connection of electrical wiring between starter and chiller control panel, oil pump, and purge unit. D. Furnish and install necessary auxiliary water piping for oil cooling units and purge condensers. E. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning. F. Provide piping from chiller rupture disc to outdoors. Size as recommended by manufacturer. G. The chiller Will be located on a concrete pad. Manufacturer shall provide vibration isolation in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook, 1987, HV AC Systems and Applications, Chapter 52 Table 27. C. Contactors shall be sized properly to the chiller full load and locked rotor currents. Contactors shall have double break main contacts with weld resistant silver cadmium faces. Auxiliary interlocks that interface with the control panel shall be low resistance having palladium silver contacts. D. Each motor starter shall include a 3 KV A control- power transformer with fused primary and secondary. Current transformers of the proper size, ratio and burden capacity shall be provided to provide a signal to the control p~el and optional devices. Control relays shall be provided within the motor starter to interface wi.th the control panel. E. Power wiring within the starter shall be type MTW copper stranded 90 degree C. Power wire bends shall show no evidence of nicHng or insulation degradation. Control wire shail be type MTW copper stranded 90 degree C 14 gauge minimum. F. Starter shall include an advanced motor protection system incorporating electronic three phase overloads and current transformers. This electronic motor protection system shall monitor and protect against the following conditions: . 1. Three phase overload protection 2. Overload protection during start-up 3: Phase imbalance 4. Phase loss 5. Phase reversal 6. Low voltage 7. Distribution fault protection consisting of three- phase, current sensing devices that monitor the status of the current. Distribution faults of 1-1/2 electrical cycle duration shall be detected and the compressor motor shall be disconnected within six electrical cycles. G. Alternately the advanced motor protection system can be furnished in the chiller control panel. H. The starter shall be able to operate in temperatures up to 120 degrees F. I. All field supplied wires, bus bars, and fittings shall be copper only. J. The following optional starter options shall be provided: 1. Circuit Breaker - Unit mounted starter shall contain a circuit breaker capable of breaking currents up to its interruption capacity of 33,143 amperes. Operating handle and trip indicator shall be located in the door. This handle shall be capable of being padlocked. 2. Ammeters - Three ammeters shall be provided, one per phase. Ammeters shall be calibrated so the inrush current can be indicated. 3. Voltmeters - Three voltmeters shall be provided, each reading a phase to phase voltage. 4. U;L. approval. . . CENTRIFUGAL WATER CIDLLERS 15684 - 10 95-052/11-95 . . END OF SECTION . 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer without additional charge to start the unites). Representatives shall provide leak testing, evacuation, dehydration, and charging of the unites). Chiller manufacturers shall maintain service capabilities no more than 50 miles from the jobsite. B. A start-up log shall be furnished by the manufacturer to document the chiller's start-up date and shall be signed by the owner or his authorized representative prior to commissioning the chillers. C. The manufacturer shall furnish complete submittal wiring diagrams of the centrifugal chiller(s) and starter(s). TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 15835 - 1 95-052/11-95 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BLOWER COILS A. Manufacturers. 1. CARRIER 2. TRANE 3. YORK B. Coils: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into evenly C. spaced aluminum fins tested to 450 psig and 200 degrees F. Coils shall be capable of being rotated in the field for left hand or right hand connection. Provide drain pan under cooling coil with drain connections on both sides. D. Coil Tubes: Construct tubes of minimum II2 inch O.D. E. copper and construct fins of aluminum. F. Cabinet: Units shall be completely factory assembled, manufactured of corrosion protected screwed steel. G. Insulation: Interior surface of unit casing acoustically H. and thermally lined with a minimum of I-inch, glass fiber with high density facing. Insulation shall be UL listed and meet NFP A-90A and UL 181 requirements. . 1.07 HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. B. Protect units on site from damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place until installation. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable ANSIINFP A 70 code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINlENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include manufacturers descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data. . 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data sheets indicating cross section of cabinets, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication. B. Submit product data indicating typical catalog of information incluping arrangements. C. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements, specifically indicating deviations from indicated products. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15510 -HydronicPiping. B. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. B. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors, C. UL - Units must be [UL] listed as an assembly. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Blower Coils SECTION 15835 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS . TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 15835 - 2 95-052/11-95 . END OF SECTION . 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean work. B. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets. C. Install new f1lters. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. . 1. Fans: Single centrifugal forward curved wheel, dynamically balanced and belt driven. Arranged for draw through application. Blow through is not acceptable due to condensate carryover. Dual wheels are not acceptable due to center bearing being inaccessible for repair or replacement 1. Factory Piping Package: Provide complete factory installed and leak tested under water at 450 psig. Piping package shall include control valve 3 way modulating with balance fitting, and either ball valves on both the supply and return lines or a ball valve on the supply line and a manual circuit setter on the return line. K. Filter: Easily removable one inch thick throwaway f1lter for both room air and outside air. Separate f1lters for outside air and room air are not acceptable. L. Controls: Controls shall be furnished by control contractor and field mounted M. Fresh Air/Return Air Dampers: Dual blade with compressible seal, capable of varying proportion of mixed air from 100 percent room air to 100 percent outside air. AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS 15855 - 1 95-052/11-95 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010. Units shall ship fully assembled [on factory- installed base rails/mounting legs] up to practical shipping and rigging limitations. Units not shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate location and orientation in direction of airflow. Each section shall have lifting lugs or shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement of section. B. Deliver units to site with fan motors, sheaves, and belts completely assmbled and mounted in units. Mount motors as specified in Article 2.04 Paragraph F and Article 2.05 Paragraph A. C. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010. . 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, belt tension adjustments, and wiring diagrams. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues complete catalog data on total product offering. B. Constant Volume Air Handling Units: Certify air volume, static pressure, fan speed, brake horsepower and selection procedures in accordance With ARI 430. If air handling units are not certified in accordance with ARI 430, contractor shall be responsible for expenses associated with testing of units after installation to verify capacities of fanes). Any costs incurred to adjust fans to meet scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor. C. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 41O~87. 1.05 SUBMITIALS A. Submit as-built drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. As-built drawings shall show total unit configuration in direction of airflow, unit dimensions, and field duct connection details C. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, coil petformance, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, filter media, filter sizes, and filter quantities. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. . 1.03 REFERENCES A. ARI 430 - Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units. B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. C. ANSI! AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. D. SMACNA - HV AC Duct Construction Standards. E. ARl410 - Standard for Forced Circulation Air-Copling and Air-Heating Coils. F. ANSI!UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units. G. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Method for Sound Testing of Fans. H. AMCA 301 - Method for Publishing Sound Ratingsfor Air Moving Devices. 1. ASHRAE 68 - Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for Fans. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15290 - Duct Work Insulation. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Air Handling Units. SECTION 15855 AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS . AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS 15855 - 2 95-052/11-95 . . 2.03 CASING A. Construct casings of minimum 16 gauge G90-u galvanized steel structural frames and minimum 2 inch thick double wall panels. Construct double wall panels of minimum 18 gauge G90-u galvanized steel exterior panels and minimum 20 gauge G90-U galvanized steel interior panels. In order to properly clean the interior of the air handler of microbial growth and other debris, the casings shall be constructed such that structural frames are free standing and double wall panels are non-load bearing. Contractor shall be responsible to provide connection flanges and all other framework that is needed on unit to ensure that removal of double wall panels shall not affect structural integrity of unit. B. Construct casing sections located upstream of supply fan for operation at 4 inches water gage negative static pressure and casing sections located downstream of supply fan for operation at 6 inches water gage positive static pressure. Seal joints between casing sections with closed- cell foam gasketing for leak seal and thermal and acoustical break. C. Panels shall be fully removable to allow for a proper way to thorougWy clean panels of microbial growth and to access internal parts. Secure panels to structural frames with zincchromated plated screws. D. Casings not constructed of G90-U galvanized steel, casings with welds on exterior surfaces, or casings with welds on interior surfaces that have burned through to exterior surfaces shall be chemically cleaned, coated with rust inhibiting primer, and finished width rust inhibiting enamel in order to prevent premature corrosion and microbial growth. 2.02 GENERAL A. Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for expenses that occur due to exceptions made. B. Fabricate blow-thru type air handling units with fan sections, heater section, coil sections, access sections and filter/mixing boxes. C. Factory fabricate air handling units of sizes, capacities, and configurations as scheduled on drawings. D. Provide factory installed base rails/mounting legs to support all sections of units. Construct base rails/mounting legs of minimum 10 gauge galvanized steel channels or I-beams. Base rails/mounting legs shall have enough height to ensure proper trapping of condensate of all air handling units. Contractor shall provide 6 inch thick housekeeping pad under the air handling unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Trane Company; Model: IAQ Modular Climate Changer B. Carrier; Model: 39NX C. YORK; Model: Airpak D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. . D. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS 15855 - 3 95-052/11-95 2.05 MOTORS AND DRIVES A. Factory install all motors on slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension. . 2.04 FANS A. Provide supply fan section with double width, double inlet centrifugal fan designed and suitable for class of service indicated in the unit schedule. Fan shaft to be properly sized and protectively .coated with lubricating oil. Fan shafts shall be solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. Fans shall be statically and dynamically tested as an assembly at the required RPM to meet design specifications. Key fan wheels to fan shaft to prevent slipping. B. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated pillow-block ball bearings selected for L-50 200,000 hour average life per ANSI! AFBMA 9. Extend grease lubrication fittings to drive side of unit with plastic tubes and zerk fittings rigidly attached to casing. C. Mount fans on minimum 16 gauge steel isolation bases. Internally mount motors on same isolation bases and internally isolate fans with 2 inch housed spring isolators. Install flexible canvas ducts between fan and casings to ensure proper isolation and prevent vibration and noise from being transmitted through the unit and ductwork. Flexible canvas ducts shall comply with NFP A 90A. If no flexible canvas duct is provided, then the entire unit shall be externally isolated from the supply duct work and piping by contractor. D. Fan sections shall have full height, double wall, hinged, removable access doors on both sides for inspection and maintenance of internal components. Construct doors in accordance with Article 2.03 Paragraph E. and provide marine lights inside fan sections. Construct marine lights of sealed glass fixtures with wire guards to keep electrical sockets dry and protect fixtures from damage. E. Fan sections of 16,000 cfm or more shall have totally enclosed belt guards to prevent irtiury to mechanics who enter fan sections. Construct belt guards of galvanized expanded metal to allow viewing of belt tension. Belt guards shall have removable front and top panels and tach holes opposite fan and motor shafts. F. Statically and dy~cally balance fan section ~serp.blies. Fan section assemblies include fan wheels, shafts, bearings, drives, belts, isolation bases and isolators. Allow isolators to free float when performing fan balance. Measure vibration at each fan shaft bearing in horizontal, vertical and axial directions. Balance at design RPM's as scheduled on drawings. . E. Casing shall have removable access panels or doors as scheduled on drawings. Construct access doors of minimum 18 gauge G90-U galvai1ized steel exterior panels and minimum 22 gauge G90-U galvanized steel interior panels. Provide automotive style neoprene gasketing around full perimeter of access doors to prevent air leakage. Provide "ventlock" style non- corrosive alloy latches operable from the inside or outside of unit. If access doors. do not open against unit operating pressure, provide safety latches that allow access doors to partially open after first handle movement and fully open after second handle movement. Insulate access doors with 2 inch thick 3 pound per cubic foot density ma:tt faced fiber glass insulation. F. Insulate casing sections with 2 inch thick 3epbund per cubic foot density matt faced fiber glass insulation. Provide double wall casing construction and encase insulation between exterior and interior casing panels such that no insulaJ:i,on is exposed to airstream. Foil facing on insulation is not acceptable'as alternate to double wall construction. Insulate all structural channels connected to casing panels and cover openings in structural channels with galvanized steel. Insulation shall comply with NFP A 9OA. G. Provide sealed double wall drain pans constructed of minimum 18 gauge G90-U-galvanized steel exterior pans and interior pans. Encase manUfacturer's standard insulation between exterior and interior. walls. Drain pans shall be sloped in 2 planes;. cross break interior pans and pitch toward drain connections to ensure complete condensate drainage. Drain pan shall be coated with a anti-microbial agent that prevents microbes from growing on the drain pan. Units with cooling coils shall have drain pans under complete cooling coil section. All drain pan connections will be to the side of the unit to enable proper trapping. . I J AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS 15855 - 4 95-052/11-95 . 2.09 HEATING SECTION A. Heating section shall be natural gas, indirect fired and shall be completely factory assembled to form an integral part of the unit. The heating section shall be ETL or UL approved. B. Burner shall be forced draft, industrial type capable of efficient firing over its entire operating range without producing excessive CO, C02 or NOx. Burner shall be fitted with a combustion air damper assembly for control of fuel to air ratio through its modulating range. Burner modulating range shall be 0 % to 100 %. Combustion air damper and modulating gas valve shall be linked internally through a control linkage that is factory preset. Burner shall have low-fire start interlock. C. Combustion blower shall be centrifugal type, direct drive, capable of delivering the proper amount of combustion air to the burner nozzle. Blower motor shall have internal thermal overload protection. An air proving switch shall be factory mounted to interlock burner operation with gas train controls to prevent burner operation when combustion air fan is shut down. D. Heat exchanger shall be drum and tube, two pass design. All heat transfer surfaces shall be constructed of 409 stainless steel; primary and secondary tubes shall be 14 gauge. 2.08 DAMPERS A. Provide internally mounted outside air and return air dampers. Dampers shall be Ruskin CD60 double skin airfoil design or equivalent. Construct damper blades of minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel and damper frames of minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel. Provide opposed blade action with metal compressible jamb seals and extruded vinyl blade edge seals. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings. Damper blade lengths shall not exceed 60 inches. Leakage rate shall not exceed 8 CFM/square foot at one inch water gage and 12 CFM/square foot at 4 inches water gage. . 2.07 FILTERS A. Provide factory fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casings. Filter sections shall have filter guides and full height, double wall, hinged, removable access doors for filter removal. Construct doors in accordance with Article 2.03 Paragraph E. Filter sections shall flange to other unit components. Provide filter blockoffs as required to prevent air bypass around filters. B. Provide 2 inch angled filter sections in mixing box with maximum face velocity of 500 feet per minute with pleated media filters. Filters shall be coated with a anti-microbial coating to prevent microbes from growing in the filters. Filters shall be removable from both side(s) of filter/mixing sections. 2.06 COILS A. Coils shall be manufactured by the same company as the supplier of the air handling unit. Install coils such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casings. B. Construct coils of configuration plate fins and seamless tubes. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to tubes by means of mechanical expansion of tubes. Do not use soldering or tinning in bonding process. C. Construct coil casings of minimum 16 gauge [galvanized steel] [stainless steel] with formed end supports and top and bottom channels. if two or more coils are stacked in unit, install intermediate drain channels between coils to drain condensate to main drain pans without flooding lower coils or passing condensate through airstream. D. Water Cooling Coils 1. Clearly label supply and return headers on outside of units such that direction of coil water-flow is counter to direction of unit air-flow. 2. Coils shall be proof tested to 300 psig and leak tested to 200 psig air pressure under water. 3. Construct headers of round copper pipe or cast iron. 4. Construct tubes of 1/2 inch O.D. copper and construct fins of aluminum. . B. Fan Motors shall be heavy duty, open drip-proof. C. V-Belt Drive shall be constant pitch rated at 1.5 times the motor nameplate. AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS 15855 - 5 95-052/11-95 . . END OF SECTION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. InStall ir1 accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install unit on spring vibration isolators. E. Gas train shall meet UL/FM approval and shall include a modulating gas valve, automatic gas valve with pressure regulator, redundant automatic gas valve, main gas shutoff cock with pressure tap and second shutoff cock, pilot solenoid, pilot gas pressure regulator and pilot solenoid valve. . POWER VENTll.,A TORS 15870 - 1 95-052/11-95 2.02 ROOF EXHAUSTERS A Centrifugal or Axial Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screen; square base to suit roof cUrb with continuous curb gaskets; secured with cadmium plated bolts and.screws and motor starter. B. Roof CUrb: 8 inch high self-flashing with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strip, one inch insulation, curb bottom and factory installed door nailer strip. C. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor. D. Backdraft Damper: Gravity activated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with nylon bearings. E. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjUstable pitch motor sheave selected so required RPM is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. F. Smoke exhaust fans shall be up"'blast type equal to Penn Hi-Ex. . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acme. B. Carnes. C. Greenheck. D. Penn. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Provide product data on cabinet fans and supply fans. C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound RatingSeal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. B. AMCA210 - LaboiatOIY Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 300 - Test Code-for Sound Rating AirMoving Devices. D. AMCA 30 1 - Method of Publishing Sound Rafugs for Air Moving Devices. E. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.02 RELA 1ED WORK A Section 15890 - Ductwork. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED. A Roof exhaUsters. B. Wall exhausters. C. Cabinet exhaust fans: D. Motor Starters. SECTION 15870 POWER VENTILATORS . POWER VENTILATORS 15870 - 2 95-052/l1-95 . END OF SECTION . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.05 OPERATING CONTROLS A. Interlock toilet exhaust fan with light switch in toilet 2.04 CABINET EXHAUST FANS A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven, with galvanized steel housing, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge and motor starter. B. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor. C. Grille: Molded white plastic or aluminum with baked white enamel fInish. D. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fIt shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required RPM is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. . 2.03 WALL EXHAUSTERS A. Centrifugal or Axial Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven, with spun aluminum housing; resiliently mounted motor, II2 inch mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screen; secured with cadmium plated bolts and screws and motor starter. B. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor. C. Backdraft Damper: Gravity activated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with nylon bearings. D. Sheaves: For V-belt drives, provide cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required RPM is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. DUCTWORK 15890 - 1 95-052/11-95 2.02 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE ~dbopks, except as indicated. Proyide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MA1ERIALS A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. C. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed by seamless aluminum pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23 K value at 75 degrees F. D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. E. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fIre resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. F. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: II2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm; 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less. than 2,500 fpm and 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFP A 90A, NFP A 90B and NFP A 96 standards. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. . 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15250 - Duct Insulation. B. Section 1595-052/11-95 Air inlets and Outlets. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE - Handbook 1981 Fundamentals; Chapter 33 -Duct Design. . . B. ASHRAE - Handbook 1983 Equipment; Chapter 1- Duct Construction. C. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. D. AS1M. A 525 - General Requirements fot Steel Sheet; Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. . E. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot- Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. F. NFP A 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. G. NFP A 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. H. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. PART 1 GENERAL. 1.0 I WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ducts. SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK . DUCTWORK 15890 - 2 95-052/11-95 . END OF SECTION 3.02 ADmSTING AND CLEANING A Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary fIlters, or bypass during cleaning. . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. C. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. D. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system . B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. C. Construct Ts, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than l-II2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area., split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. F. Connect fleXible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 1 95-052/11-95 2.03 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFP A 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. . 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -FIREDAMPERS. A. Air Balance, Inc. B. Louvers & Dampers Inc. C. Nailor Industries, Inc. D. Ruskin. E. Safe Air, Inc. F. National Controlled Air. G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS. A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. . B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. C. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inch. D. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. E. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. F. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. G. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. . 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air. Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B.SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive links for Fire-Protection Service. D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers, duct access doors and duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010, for fIre dampers. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation. B. Section 15890 - Ductwork. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Volume control dampers. B. Fire dampers. C. Air turning devices. D. Smoke Detectors. SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES . DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 2 95-052/11-95 . END OF SECTION . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. C. Provide fIre dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fIre rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. D. Demonstrate re-setting of fIre dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. E. Install smoke detectors on fans of 2,000 CFM or greater. The smoke detector shall stop the fan when smoke is detected. 2.05 AIR TUNING DEVICES A. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Carnes. B. Krueger. C. Titus. D. Anemostat. E. Metal Air. F. HV AC Industries. G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. . B. Fabricate ceiling frrestop flaps of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch ceramic fiber on top side with locking clip. C. Fabricate ceiling dampers of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and light weight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket closure. D. Fabricate curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for low pressure ducts up to 12 inches in height. E. Fabricate multiple blade frre dampers with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 118 x II2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. F. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 212 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for combination fIrelbalancing dampers. .~. , AIR OUTLErS AND INLETS 15936 1 95-052/11-95 2.04 SECURlIT GRILLES A. See drawing details and schedules. . 2.03 CEILING GRID EXHAUST GRILLES A. Fixed grilles of II2 x II2 x II2 inch louvers. 2.02 SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS A Square, stamped, muIticore type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattem B. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel fInish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.0 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CEILING DIFFUSERS A Carnes. B. J & J Manufacturing Co. C. Krueger D. Titus. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. 1.06 SUBMIrr ALS A Submit product data under provisions of Section 15Q1O. B. Provide product data for items required for this project. C. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise level. D. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, fInish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A. . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual. . B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. C. ANSI/NFP A 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. D. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets. E. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. F. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 15890 - Ductwork. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A DiffuserS. B. Diffuser boots. C; Registers/grilles. D. Door Grilles. E. Louvers. SECTION 15936 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS . AIR OUlLETS AND INLETS 15936 2 95-052/11-95 . . END OF SECTION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. 2.06 LOUVERS A. Louvers shall be Ruskin ELF-375 or approved equal. . 2.05 DOOR GRILLES - ACCEPTABLE MAUNF ACTURERS A. A. Carnes. B. J & J Manufacturing Co. C. Krueger D. Titus. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. F. Door grilles shall be equal to Titus Model 33RL. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 1 95-052111-95 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 150 10. B. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. . 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk data conductors. 2. List of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 3. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. 4. System configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. 5. Descriptive data and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software. C. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include for all manufactured components. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRlPTION A. GeneralPrbduct Description: . I. The building automation system (BAS) shall integrate multiple building functions including equipment supervision and control, alarm management,. energy management and historical data collection. 2. The building automation system shall consist of the following: a Stand-Alone DDC Controllers b. Stand-Alone Application Specific Controllers (ASC's) c. Portable Operator's Terminal . 3. The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, DDC Controllers, Application Specific Controllers and Operator Devices. 4. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC Controller shall operate independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/O and data collection. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. 5. DDC Controllers shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands and alarm reports directly to, any other DDC Controller or combination of controllers on the network without dependence upon a central processing device~ DDC Controllers shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations without dependence upon a central processing device. . 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. . Furnish and install a complete electric/electronic system as specified herein. B. The System provided shall be fully compatible with the existing Landis & Gyr Powers System 600 installed in the Richmond County Law Enforcement.Complex. Hard",are, Software and Firmware shall be fully iriteractive. . PART 1 GENERAL . 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Control eqUipment. B. Software. SECTION 15975 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS . " . . .. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYS1EMS 15975 - 2 95-052/11-95 1.13 GUARANTEE: A. After completion of the installation, adjust all sensors, control valves, motors and other equipment provided under this contract with trained personnel in the direct employ of the manufacturer. He shall place them in complete operating condition subject to the approval of the owner and instruct the operating personnel for a minimum of two days (each day shall consist of 8 hours on site) in the operation of the control system. B. The control system as specified herein shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service for a period of one year from date of acceptance by the Owner. Any equipment proven to be defective in workmanship or materials during the guarantee period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge to the Owner. 1.12 CLEANING: A. The Contractor shall maintain the site reasonably clean and free of excessive debris and leftover materials at all times. All trash and debris shall be hauled from the job site for disposal. Prior to testing and adjusting, equipment shall be clean and free of any construction debris and litter. 1.11 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. During Construction: All equipment shall be covered and protected against water, dirt and chemical or me~hanical injury. All equipment and materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prior to Final Inspection: All materials and equipment shall be cleaned. Chipped or scraped paint shall be retouched to match. All dents and sags in equipment casings shall be straightened. 1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: A. Three bound and indexed Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be prepared by the Contractor and be submitted to operating personnel. B. Each manual shall contain the following information, data and drawings: 1. List of contents. Insert under front cover. 2. Copy of approved submittals, shop drawings and control diagrams. 3. Installation, operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment 4. Manufacturer's list of renewal parts for each item of equipment with recommended stock items and quantities indicated. 1.09 CUTTING AND PATCmNG: A. None needed nor specified. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS: A. The assembly erection, testing, or adjusting of equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions shipped with the equipment, and specified herein. 1.08 SPACE CONDITIONS: A. All apparatus shall fit into the available spaces in the building and must be introduced into the building so as not to cause damage to the structure. 1.06 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. General: Where requirements of these specifications exceed specified codes and ordinances, conform to these specifications. Materials and equipment included in Underwriters Label Service shall bear that label. Electrical equipment shall be UL Approved and installed. B. Air Conditioning: Conform to Georgia State Fire Code, NFPA 90-A, NFPA 90-B and NFPA 101. C. Electrical: Local and National Electrical Codes. C. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. D. Include data specified in "Submittals" in ftnal "Record Documents" form. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYS1EMS 15975 - 3 95-052/11-95 2.02 NETWORKING COMMUNICATIONS A. The design of the BAS shall network operator workstations and stand-alone DDC Controllers. The network architecture shall consist of two levels, a high performance peer-to-peer network and DDC Controller specific local area networks. : _ )- B. Access to system data sb;n not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the building automation system. The hardware configuration of the BAS network shall be totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs. C. Peer-to-Peer Network Level: . PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Landis & Gyr Powers, Inc. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. None. 1.16 PROTECTION OF SOFIW ARE RIGHTS A. Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2. Limiting copying. 3. Preserving confidentiality. 4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party. 1.14 CONTROL VOLTAGE: A. 120 volt or less control is required and may be accomplished either by individual control transformers or us~ of internal panel transformer where available. Where panel transformers are utilized, circuits shall be increased as necessary. In either, fuses shall be provided in each ungrounded primary leg. . 1.15 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and equipment shall be the cataloged products of Landis & Gyr Powers, Inc. B. Install sy~em using competent wor1ap.en who are fully trained in the installation and proper operation of the BAS and control system. Workmen shall be the employees of the manufacturer of the BAS and control system. - C. SIngle source responsibility of supplier shall be the complete installation and proper operation of . the BAS and control. system and shall include debugging and proper calibration of each component in the entire sYstem. . D. All. electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 15, Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled. E. BAS shall comply with UL 916 PAZX and 864 UDTZ and be so listed at the time of bid. F. Design and build all system components to be fault-tolerant. . 1. Satisfactory operation without damage at 110% and 85% of rated voltage and at plus 3 Hertz variation in line frequency. 2. Static, transient and short-circuit protection on all inputs and outputs. 3. Protect communication lines against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. 4. Network-connected devices to be A. C. coupled or equivalent so that any single device failure will not disrupt or halt network communication. 5. All real time clocks and data fIle RAM to be battery-backed for a: minimum 72 hours and include local and system low battery indication. 6. It must be possible to receive and print out alarms at a central location even when the workstation at that location is non-operational or taken out of service for periodic maintenance. . ~. . 1. Operator workstations and DDC Controllers shall directly reside on a network such that communications may be executed directly between DDC Controllers, directly between workstations and between DDC Controllers and workstations on a peer-to-peer basis. 2. Systems that operate via polled response or other types of protocols that rely on a central processor, me server, or similar device to manage panel-to-panel communications may be considered only if a similar device is provided as a standby. Upon a failure or malfunction of the primary central processor, the standby shall automatically, without any operator intervention, assume all BAS network management activities. 3. All operator devices either network resident or connected via dial-up modems shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the peer-to-peer network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment No hardware or software limits shall be imposed on the number of devices with global access to the network data. 4. Network design shall include the following provisions: a. Provide high-speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from multiple controllers and upload/download efficiency between network devices. System performance shall insure that an alarm occurring at any DDC Controllers displayed at workstations and/or alarm printers within 5 seconds. b. Support of any combination of DDC Controllers and operator work-stations directly connected to the peer-to-peer network. A minimum of 32 devices shall be supported on a single network. c. Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost. d. Error detection, correction and retransmission to guarantee data integrity. e. Synchronization of real-time clocks, to include automatic daylight savings time updating between all DDC Controllers shall be provided. D. DDC Controller Local Area Network (LAN): 1. This level communication shall support a family of application specific controllers and shall communicate bi-directionally with the peer-to-peer network through DDC Controllers for transmission of global data. 2. Application specific controllers shall be arranged on the LAN's in a functional relationship manner with DDC Controllers. For example, a V A V terminal unit controller shall be on a LAN from the DDC Controller that is controlling its corresponding AHU. 3. A maximum of 32 application specific controllers may be configured on individual DDC Controller LAN's to insure adequate global data and alarm response times. E. Telecommunication Capability: 1. Auto-diallauto-answer communications shall be provided to allow DDC Controllers to communicate with remote operator stations and/or remote terminals on an intermittent basis via telephone lines, as indicated in the sequence of operations. 2. Auto-dial DDC Controllers shall automatically place calls to workstations to report alarms or other significant events. a DDC Controllers shall be able to store a minimum of 10 phone numbers of at least 20 digits. Retry a single primary number at a fIxed interval until successful. b. The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no answers" and incomplete data transfers. Provide as a minimum 3 secondary numbers when communications cannot be established with the primary device. 3. Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform all control functions, all report functions and all database generation and modification functions as described for workstations connected via the network. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls from remote DDC Controllers. The fact that communications are taking place with remote DDC Controllers over telephone lines shall be completely transparent to an operator. DIRECT DIGITAL CONIROL SYS1EMS 15975 - 4 . . . 95-052/11-95 PIRECTDIGITAL CONIROL SYS1EMS .. . 15975 - 5 95-052/11-95 . a An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selection of any facility by its logical name. The workstation dial-up program shall store the phone numbers of each remote site, so the user shall not be required to remember or manually dial telephone numbers: . b. A PC workstation may serve as an operator device on a network, as well as a dial- up workstation for multiple auto-dial DDC Controllers or networks. Alarm and data me transfers handled via dial-up trans- actions shall not interfere with network activity, nor shall network activity keep the workstation from handling incoming calls. . 4. Dial-up communication shall make use of Hayes compatIble moderns and voice-grade telephone lines. Provide moderns rate at 9600 baud. - 5. System shall be fully capable of full communication, at a software level, with the system instilled in Richmond County Law Complex. 2.03 DDC CONIROLLER A. Stand-alone Controllers shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of 16 bits. They shall also be multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with .plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list B. Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory, a minimum of 1 megabyte, to support its own operating system and databases, including: 1. Control processes 2. Energy management applications 3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level alarm for each point in the system 4. Historical/trend data for points specified 5. Maintenance support applications 6. Custom processes 7. Operator I/O 8. Dial-up communications 9. Manual override monitoring C. Each DDC Controller shall support: 1. Monitoring of the following types of inputs, without the addition of equipment outside the DDC Controller cabinet: a. Analog inputs 1. 4-20 rnA 2.0-10 Vdc 3. Thermistors 4. 1000 ohm RID's b. Digital inputs 1. Dry contact closure 2. Pulse Accumulator 3. Voltage Sensing 2. Direct control of pneumatic and electronic actuators and control devices. Each DDC Controller shall be capable of providing the following control outputs without the addition of equipment outside the DDC Controller cabinet: a Digital outputs (contact closure) 1. Contact closure (motor starters, sizes 1-4) b. Analog outputs 1. 0-20 psi 2. 4-20 rnA 3. 0-10 Vdc . . . . . DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 6 95-052/11-95 2.04 DDC CONTROLLER RESIDENT SOFfW ARE PEA TURES A. General: 1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification shall be provided. 2. The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of DDC Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. B. Control Software Description: 1. The DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms: a. Two-position control b. Proportional control D. Each DDC Controller shall have a minimum of 10 per cent spare capacity for future point connection. The type of spares shall be in the same proportion as the implemented I/O functions of the pane~ but in no case shall there be less than two spares of each implemented I/O type. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/out termination module and wmng. a. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at least 25% of the memory available for future use. E. DDC Controllers shall provide at least two RS-232C serial date communication ports for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, moderns and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC Controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected moderns, printers or terminals. F. As indicated in the point I/O schedule, the operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC Controller via local, point discrete, on-board hand/off/auto operator override switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel processor is operational or not 1. Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC Controllers key accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized override. 2. DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC Controllers shall also collect override activity information for reports. G. DDC Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device. Graduated intensity LED's or analog indication of value shall also be provided for each analog output Status indication shall be visible without opening the panel door. H. Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication. I. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standards 587-1980. J. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all DDC Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. 1. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. 2. Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS-232C port, via telephone line dial-in or from a network workstation PC. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 7 95-052/11-95 c. Proportional. plus integral control d. Proportional, integral, plus derivative control 2. Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within anyone-hour period. 3. The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads. . . 4. Upon the resumption of normaLpower, each DDC Controller shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operations. C. DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all the following energy management routines: 1. Time-of-ruiy scheduling 2. Calendar-based scheduling 3:Holiday scheduling 4. Temporary schedule overrides 5. Start':Stop Time Optimization 6. Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover 7. Night setback control 8. Enthalpy switchover (economizer) 9. Peak demand limiting 10. Temperature-compensated duty cycling 11. Fan speed/CFM control 12. Heating/cooling interlock 13. Cold deck reset 14. Hot deck reset. 15. Hot water reset. 16. Chilled water reset. 17. Condenser water reset 18. Chiller sequencing. D. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention and shall be flexible enough to allow user custornization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as descnbed in the Sequence of Operations. E. DDC Controllers shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defmed by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines. 1. It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process: a . Any system measured point data or status . b. Any calculated data c. Any resi.1lts from other processes d. User-defmed constants e.. Arithmetic functions (+, -, *, /, square root, exp, etc.) f. Boolean logic operators (and/or, exclusive or, etc.) g. On-d.elay/off-d.elay/one-shot timers. 2. Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following: a Time interval b. Time-of-day c. Date d. Other processes e. Time programming f. Events (e.g., point alarms) 3. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC Controllers on the network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC Controllers on the network. - .. '~'t- I~;. --;--;.',.;- . . . . . . DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 8 95-052/11-95 4. Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager. 5. The custom control programming feature shall be documented via English language descriptors. F. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator devices. Each DDC Controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and ftltering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC Controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other panels on the network. 1. All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description and the time and date of occurrence. 2. The user shall be able to defme the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided for each point Point priority levels shall be combined with user defInable destination categories (pC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to provide full flexibility in defIning the handling of system alarms. Each DDC Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. 3. Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defmed list of operator devices or PCs. 4. In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. a. Each DDC Controller shall be capable of storing a hbrary of at least 50 alarm messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the Controller. 5. In dial-up applications, operator-selected alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator device. G. A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically sample, store and display system data for points as specified in the I/O summary. 1. DDC Controllers shall store point history data for selected analog and digital inputs and outputs: a. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point, regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in each DDC Controllers point group. Two methods of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre-defmed time interval or upon a pre-defmed change of value. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 7 days shall be provided. Each DDC Controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 10,000 data samples. 2. Trend data shall be stored at the DDC Controllers and uploaded to the workstation when retrieval is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user-defmed interval, manual command or when the trend buffers are full. All trend data shall be available for use in 3rd party personal computer applications. H. DDC Controllers shall automatically accumulate and store run-time hours for digital input and output points as specified in the point I/O summary. 1. The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 2. The user shall have the ability to defme a warning limit for run-time totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. I. DDC Controllers shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly or monthly basis for user-selected analog and digital pulse input type points as specified in the point I/O summary. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 9 95-052/11-95 1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units (e.g., KWH, gallons, BTU, tons, etc.). 2. The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit Unique, user specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.' . 1. DDC Controllers shall have the ability to count events: such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly or monthly basis for points as specified in the point I/O summary: 1. The event totalization feature shall be ablefo store the records associated with a minimum of 9,999.9 events before reset. . _ 2. The user shall have the ~ility to defme a warnirig limit Unique, user specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached... 2.05 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC) '. . A. EachDDC. Controller shall be able to ex1end' its perforlnance and capacity through the use' of remote application specific controllers (ASCs). .. . B. Each ASC shall operate as a stand-alone controller capable of performing its specified control . responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, realtime digital control processor. Provide the following types of ASCs as a minimum: 1. Central System Controllers 2. Terminal Equipment Controllers C. Central System Controllers: 1. Provide for control of central HV AC systems and equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Rooftop units b. Packaged air handling units c. Build-up air handling systems d. Chilled and condenser water systems e. Stearn and hot water systems 2. Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. Provide a hand/off/automatic switch for each digital output for. manual override capability. Switches shall be mounted either within the controller's key-accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized overrides. In addition, each switch position shall be supervised in order to inform the system that automatic control has been overridden. As a minimum. 50% of the point inputs and outputs shall be of the Universal type, allowing for additional system flexibility. In lieu of Universal inputs and outputs, provide a minimum of 50% spare points of each type via additional point tennination boar~ or controllers. . 3. Each controller shall support its own real-time operating.system. Provide a time clock with battery backup to allow fot stand-alone operation in the event communication with its DDC Controller is lost and to insure protection during power outages. 4. Provide each central system controller with sufficient memory to accommodate point databases, operating programs, local alarming and local trending. All databases and programs shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM or a minimum of 72-hour battery backup shall be provided. All programs shall be field-custornized to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements. Central ,System controllers utilizing pre-packaged or canned programs shall not be acceptable. As an alternative, provide DDC Controllers for all central equipment in order to meet custom control strategy requirements. 5. Programming.gf ~yntral system controllers shall u$e the same language and code as used by DDC Controllers to maximize system flexibility and ease of use. Should the system. controller utilize a different control language, provide a DDC Controller to meet the specified functionality. . . . . . . DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 10 95-052/11-95 6. Local alarming and trending capabilities shall be provided for convenient troubleshooting and system diagnostics. Alarm limits and trend data information shall be user-defmable for any point. 7. Each controller shall have connection provisions for a portable operator's terminal. This tool shall allow the user to display, generate or modify all point databases and operating programs. All new values and programs may then be restored to EEPROM via the progranuning tool. 8. Provide a portable interface terminal to allow for direct-user access to the controller. a. The terminal shall provide the user with the following functionality as a minimum: I. View and set date and time 2. Modify and override time-of-day schedules 3. View points and alarms 4. Monitor points 5. Command and modify setpoints b. The terminal shall use full English language and shall prompt the user for responses, thus eliminating the need to remember code commands. Provide a minimum of two levels of password protection to prevent unauthorized access to the controller. D. Terminal Equipment Controllers: 1. Provide for control of each piece of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: a Fan Coil Units (pCD'S) 2. Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. As a minimum, 50% of the point outputs (except for unit ventilator controllers) shall be of the Universal type; that is, the outputs may be utilized either as modulating or two-state, allowing for additional system fleXibility. In lieu of Universal outputs, provide a minimum of 50% spare outputs of each type via additional point termination boards or controllers. Analog outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V floating control, allowing for interface to a variety of modulating actuators. Terminal equipment controllers utilizing proprietary control signals and actuators shall not be acceptable. As an alternative, provide DDC Controllers or other ASCs with industry standard outputs for control of all terminal equipment. 3. Each controller performing space temperature control shall be provided with a matching room temperature sensor. a. The sensor may be either RID or thermistor type providing the following minimum performance requirements are met: 1. Accuracy: + 1 degree F 2. Operating Range: 35 degrees to 115 F 3. Set Point Adjustment Range: 55 degrees to 95 F 4. Set Point Modes: Independent Heating, Cooling, Night Setback-Heating, Night Setback-Cooling 5. Calibration Adjustments: None required 6. Installation: Up to 100 ft. from Controller b. Each room temperature sensor shall include a terminal jack integral to the sensor assembly. The terminal jack shall be used to connect a portable operator's terminal to control and monitor all hardware and software points associated with the controller. In lieu of an internal jack, provide a separate terminal jack mounted on a stainless steel wall plate adjacent to the sensor to facilitate direct access to the controller via the terminal. c. Each room sensor shall also include the following auxiliary devices: 1. Setpoint Adjustment Dial 2. Temperature Indicmor 3. Override Switch DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 -11 95-052/11-95 2.06 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S 1ERMINAL (pOT) A. Provide one (1) portable operator terminal with a minimum LCD display of 80 characters by 25 lines and a full-featured keyboard. The POT shall be handheld and plug directly into individual distributed control panels as described below. Provide a user-friendly, English language-prompted interface for quick access to system information, not codes requiring look-up charts. B. Functionality of the portable operator's terminal connected at any DDC Controller: 1. Access all DDC Controllers on the network. 2. Backup and/or restore DDC Controller data bases for all systein panels, not just the DnC Controller connected to. 3. Display all point, selected point and alarm point summaries. 4. Display tren~~ ~d totalization information. ~.-;, f I 5. Add, modify and/or delete any existing or new system point. 6. Command, change setpoint, enable/disable any system point. 7. Program and load custom control sequences as well as standard energy management programs. . d. The setpoint adjustment dial shall allow for modification of the temperature by the occupant. Setpoint adjustment may be locked out, overridden or limited as to time or temperature through software by an authorized operator at the central workstation, DDC controller, or via the portable operator's terminal. In lieu of an integral adjustment dial, provide a separate dial mounted on a stainless steel wall plate adjacent to the sensor to perform the specified functionality. e. The temperature indicator shall be a bi~metal or mercury thermometer and shall be . visible without removing the sensor cover. In lieu of integral indication, provide a separate thermometer or digital readout on a stainless steel wall plate adjacent to the sensor for local temperatUre indication. - . f. An override switch shall initiate override of the night. setback mode to normal . (day) operation when activated by the occupant. The override function may.be locked out, overridden or limited as to the time through software by an authorized operator at the central workstation, DDe Controller or via the portable operator's terminal.. In lieu of an integral switch, provide a separate momentary contact switch mounted ona stainless steel wall plate adjacent to the sensor to perform the specified functionality. _ 4. Each controller shall perform its primary control function independent of other DDC Controller LAN communication, or if LAN cornrnunication is interrupted. Reversion to a fail-safe mode of operation during LAN interruption is not acceptable. The controller shall receive its real-time data from the DDC Controller time clock to insure LAN continuity. Each controller shall include algorithms incorporating proportional, integral and derivative (Pill) gains for all applications. All Pill gains and biases shall be field-adjustable by the user via terminals as specified herein. This functionality shall allow for tighter control of space conditions and shall facilitate optimal occupant comfort and energy savings. Controllers that incorporate proportional and integral (PI) control algorithms only shall not be acceptable. 5. Provide each terminal equipment controller with sufficient memory to accorrnnodate point databases, operating programs, local alarming and local trending. All databases and programs shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM, EPROM and PROM, or minimum of 72-hour battery backup shall be provided. The controllers shall be able to return to full normal operation without user intervention after a power failure of unlimited duration. Provide uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs) of sufficient capacities for all terminal controllers that do not meet this protection requirement. Operating programs shall be field-selectable for specific applications. In additio~ specific applications may be modified to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements, allowing for additional system flexibility. Controllers that require factoI)' changes of all applications are not acceptable. . . DIRECT DIGITAL CONIROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 12 95-052/11-95 . 2.08 WORKSTATION OPERATOR INfERFACE A. Basic Interface Description . 2.07 OPERATOR'S 1ERMINALS A. The system shall be fully compatible with the existing operator's station software and hardware now installed in Riclunond County Law Complex. B. Provide a printer at the workstation location for recording alarms, operator transactions and systems reports, meeting the following minimum requirements: 1. 132 colurnnl160 character per second print speed. 2. 9 x 9 DOT matrix character structure switchable to 9 x 18 DOT matrix for letter quality output. 3. Compressed mode option for 220 characters per line. 4. Software selectable under, emphasized, double strike and expanded (double width) character capability . 5. Adjustable line spacing of 6 or 8 lines per inch. 6. Adjustable tractor for 5 inch to 15 inch paper widths. 7. 96 ASCII upper and lower case character set. C. Additional Work Station 1. Provide one (1) Digital DECpc 433dx with 245 MB disk a. 33 Mhz 80486 Processor b. 8-MB of memory c. 2-Serial Ports, I-Parallel Port d. 1-245 MB IDE Hard Disc Drive e. 1-3.5" (1.44 MB) Diskett Drive f. I-Enhanced 10 I-key keyboard with mouse g. 1-14" SVGA Color Monitor h. 6 prong surge protector i. 4 socket surge protector j. MS-DOS Software k Windows Software I. Insite Software 2. Provide one modern a. 300 thru 9600 Baud b. Automatic Answer c. FCC/DOC Approved d. End to End compatible with Bell 103 and 212A Protocols e. Full Duplex on 2 wire switched network . C. Functionality of the portable operator's terminal connected to any application specific controller: 1. Provide connection capability at either the ASC or a related room sensor to access controller information. 2. Provide status, setup and control reports. 3. Modify, select and store controller data base. 4. Command, change setpoint, enable/disable any controller point. D. If the same portable operator's terminal cannot be used for both DDC Controllers and Application Specific Controllers, provide separate POTs to accomplish the above functional requirements. 1. Provide one (1) of each type portable operator's terminals as specified in A above. 2. Provide as a minimum, a POT connection in each mechanical room capable of accessing entire system information. E. Connection of a POT to a distributed control processor shall not interrupt nor interfere with normal network operation in any way, prevent alarms from being transmitted or preclude centrally-initiated commands and system modification. F. Portable operator terminal access to controller shall be password-controlled. ..0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 13 1. Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, English language point identification and industry standard PC application software. The software shall provide, as a minimum, the following functionality: a Graphical viewing and control of environment b. Scheduling and override of building operations c. Collection and analysis of historical data d. DefInition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays e. Editing, programming, storage and downloading of controller databases. 2. Provide a graphical user interface which shall minimize the use of a typewriter style keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device and "point and click" approach to menu selection. Users shall be able to' start and stop equipment or change setpoints from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device. a. Provide functionality such that all operations can also be performed using the keyboard as a backup interface device: b. Provide additional capability .that allows at least 10 special function keys to perform often-used operations. 3. The software shall provide a multi-tasking type enviro~ent that allows the user to .~._. _ .,. several applications simultaneously. The mouse shall be used to quickly select and switch .. between multiple applications. TIlls shall be accomplished through the use of Microsoft Windows or similar industry standard software that supports concurrent viewing and controlling of systems operations. a. Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed simultaneously, and in any combination, via user-sized windows: 1. Dynamic color graphics and graphic control 2. Alarm management coordinated with section 2.04 E 3. Time-of -day scheduling 4. Trend data defInition and presentation 5. Graphic defInition 6. Graphic construction b. If the software is unable to display several different types of displays at the same time, the BAS contractor shall provide at least two operator workstations. 4..Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation contro~ display and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. a. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported: _ I. Levell View all applications, but perform no database modifications 2. Level 2 Custodial privileges plus the abilitY to acknowledge alarms 3. Level 3 All privileges except system configuration 4. Level 4 All configuration privileges except passwords 5. Level 5 All privileges b. A minimum of 50 unique passwords, including user initials, shall be supported. c. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for respective passwords. .. Menu selections displayed shall be limited to only those items defmed for the access level of the password used to log-on. d. The system shall automatically generate a report of log-onllog-off time and system activity for each user. e. User-defmable, automatic log-off timers of from 5 to 60 minutes sha1l be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line. 5. Software shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following: a Start-up or shutdown selected equipniene b. Adjust setpoints c. Add/modify/delete time programming d. Enable/disable process execution 95-052/11-95 . . . . . . DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 14 95-052/11-95 B. Scheduling 1. Provide a graphical spreadsheet-type format for simplification of time-of-day scheduling and overrides of building operations. Provide the following spreadsheet graphic types as a nummum: a. Weekly schedules b. Zone schedules c. Monthly calendars 2. Weekly schedules shall be provided for each building zone or piece of equipment with a specific occupancy schedule. Each schedule shall include columns for each day of the week as well as holiday and special day columns for alternate scheduling on user-defmed days. Equipment scheduling shall be accomplished by simply inserting occupancy and vacancy times into appropriate information blocks on the graphic. In addition, temporary overrides and associated times may be inserted into blocks for modified operating schedules. After overrides have been executed, the original schedule will automatically be restored. 3. Zone schedules shall be provided for each building zone as previously descnbed. Each schedule shall include all cornmandable points residing within the zone. Each point may have a unique schedule of operation relative to the zone's occupancy schedule, allowing for sequential starting and control of equipment within the zone. Scheduling and rescheduling of points may be accomplished easily via the zone schedule graphic. 4. Monthly calendars for a 24-month period shall be provided which allow for simplified scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and special days shall be user-selected with the pointing device and shall automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defmed on the weekly schedules. C. Collection and Analysis of Historical Data e. Lock/unlock alarm reporting for points f. Enable/disable totalization for points g. Enable/disable trending for points h. Override Pill loop setpoints i. Enter temporary override schedules j. Defme holiday schedules k. Change time/date 1. Automatic daylight savings time adjustments m. Enter/modify analog alarm limits n. Enter/modify analog warning limits o. View limits p. Enable/disable demand limiting for each meter q. Enable/disable duty cycle for each load 6. Reports shall be generated and directed to either CRT displays, printers or disk. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:a. A general listing of all points in the network b. List of all points currently in alarm c. List of all points currently in override status d. List of all disabled points e. List of all points currently locked out f. DDC Controller trend overflow warning g. List all weekly schedules h. List of holiday programming i. List of limits and deadbands 1. Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user-selected group or groups or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the building automation system Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of the hardware controller to obtain system information. 1. Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any system point may be trended automatically at time-based intervals or changes of value, both of which shall be user- defInable. Trend data may be stored on hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting. 2. Trend data report graphics shall be provided to. allow the user to view all trended point data Reports may be customized to include individual points or pre-defined groups of at least 6 points. Provide additional functionality to allow any trended data to be transferred easily. to ail off-the-shelf spreadsheet package such as Lotus 1-2-3. This shall allow the user to perform custom calculations su~h as energy usage, equipment efficiency and energy costs and shall allow for generation of these reports on high-quality plots, graphs and charts. D. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays I. Color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided by the BAS contractor as indicated in the point I/O SUIIl1Ila1Y of this specification to optimize system performance aDalysis. and speed alarm recognition. Each Graphic will be built and placed in operation prior to ~ system checkout 2. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection or teXt-based commands. 3. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention. 4. The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at a time to analyze total building operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress. 5. Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify or delete system graphic displays. a. The BAS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g., fans, cooling coils, fIlters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g., constant volume- terminal reheat, V A V, etc.) and electrical symbols. b. The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following: I. Defme symbols 2. Position and size symbols 3. Defme background screens 4. Defme connecting lines and curves 5. Locate, orient and size descriptive text 6. Defme and display colors for all elements 7. Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other displays c. Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout or any other logical grouping of points which aide the operator in the analysis of the facility. 1. To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point data from multipleDDC Controllers including Application Specific Controllers used for DDC equipment or VA V terminal unit control. E. System Configuration and DefInition 1. All temperature and equipment control strategies;and energy management routines shall be defInable by the operator. System defInition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control. 2. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions: DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 15 95-052/11-95 . . . . . . DIRECT DIGITAL CON1ROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 16 95-052/11-95 .ft!. a. Add/delete/modify stand-alone DDC Controller panels b. Add/delete/modify operator workstations c. Add/delete/modify application specific controllers d. Add/delete/modify points of any type and all associated point parameters and tuning constants e. Add/delete/modify alarm reporting defInition for points f. Add/delete/modify control loops g. Add/delete/modify energy management applications h. Add/delete/modify time and calendar-based programming i. Add/delete/modify totalization for points j. Add/delete/modify historical data trending for points k. Add/delete/modify custom control processes 1. Add/delete/modify any and all graphic displays, symbols and crossreference to point data m. Add/delete/modify dial-up telecommunication defInition n. Add/delete/modify all operator passwords o. Add/delete/modify alarm messages 3. DefInition of operator device characteristics, DDC Controllers individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed using instructive prompting software. a. Libraries of standard application modules such as temperature, humidity and static pressure control may be used as "building blocks" in defIning or creating new control sequences. In addition, the user shall have the capability to easily increase and archive new modules and control sequences as desired via a word processing type format Provide a library of standard forms to facilitate defInition of point characteristics. Forms shall be self-prompting and incorporate a fIll-in- the-blank approach for defInition of all parameters. The system shall immediately detect an improper entry and automatically display an error message explaining the nature of the mistake. b. If programming must be done with the PC workstation off-line, the BAS contractor shall provide at least 2 operator workstations. c. Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single DDC Controllers, but shall be able to include data from any and all other network panels to allow the development of network-wide control strategies. Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one process as the input to any number of other processes (cascading). d. Provide the capability to backup and store all system databases on the workstation hard disk. In addition, all database changes shall be performed while the workstation is on-line without disrupting other system operations. Changes shall be automatically recorded and downloaded to the appropriate DDC Controller. Similarly, changes made at the DDC Controllers shall be automatically uploaded to the workstation, ensuring system continuity. The user shall also have the option to selectively download changes as desired. e. Provide context-sensitive help menus to provide instructions appropriate with operations and applications currently being performed. F. Additional Workstation Software 1. Provide automatic dial-up communications for buildings as specified. Automatic dial-up communications shall include the following features as minimum: a. Dial-Out 1. Manual dial-out from the workstation to remote networks shall be accomplishable using only a mouse to select and request the desired remote connection. 2. Operator selected alarms shall automatically Dial-Out to designated beeper numbers to report alarms during off hours. ~ ' DIRECT DIGITAL CON1ROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 17 95-052/11-95 2.15 CONDUCTORS: A. Greater than or equal to 50 volts: Refer to Section. 16100 for requirements. B. Below 50 volts: Minimum size for fudividual conductors is A WG No. 18. Minimum conductor sizes for multi-conductor cables is A WG No. 22. Low voltage conductors are allowed to be run in . above ceiling space - and in walls except where space if defmed as a plenum such as above furred ceilings. In plenums, (including mechanical rooms) conductors s~ be run in raceway per NE~ . Article 300-22 or shall be covered with Teflon FEP insulation approved for plenum applications. All other wiring (e.g., wiring run outside or exposed) shall be run in conduit. C. Taps and Joints: Mechanically and electrically sound. D. Color Code: All low voltage control conductors shall be color coded by factory. E. Conductor Insulation: "lFFN", unless noted otherwise. F. Manufacturers: Som~approved manufacturers are ~c9nda, Belden, Brand Rex, Continental, General Cable, Phelps Dodge, Simplex and Triangle. . 2.16 NAMEPLATES: A. General: Provide for all equipment, remote bulk thermostats, panel mounted controls, damper operators, etc., in mechanical rooms. . 2.14 RACEWAY: . A. All control wiring shall be installed in conduits an,d surface raceways unless noted otherWise and shall be provided and installed under this section. PlenUm rated cables shall be allowed, run in a workman like manner. 2.12 CONTROL AIR SUPPLY. A. A new 15 HP Duplex Air Compressor shall be installed with new Air Dryer and Pressure Reducing Station. The existiIig Air Compressor shall be piped in series as an Emergency Backup Unit . 2.13 CONTROL COMPONENTS: A. Control Cabinets: Control cabinets shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel or aluminum and shall consist of a one-p~ece rectangular or square ring, a sub-panel and door. Unless otherwise specified, all controllers, gauge and other equipment furnished as part ()f the Control system which are not required to be mounted on mechanical equipment shall be cabinet mounted. All devices specified or noted to be mounted on front of the panel shall be flush mounted on the hinged door. All wiring connections shall be made inside the cabinet. All electrical devices shall be wired to a numbered terminal strip. No field wiring shall be required within the cabinet except to the terminal strip. . 2.09 FIELD DEVICES A. All devices and equipment shall be approved fodns~tion in the State of Georgia B. Temperature Sensors . C. Humidity"Sensors 2.10 EXISTING SYSTEM INFORMATION A. Use of existing System Point Data to perform Sequences shall be achieved whenever possible to . prevent duplication of Points (i.e.: outside airtemperature and outside air % RH). 2.11 VALVE AND DAMPER OPERATION A. Operator shall be Pneumatic b. Dial-In 1. Alarms shall automatically dial into the workstation for display at the terminal and for hard copy printout at the associated event printer. 2. Alarms. shall,.. at the operator's option, dial into a stand-alone model printer to provide for' .real~time alairnprintouts even when the workstation is off-line.(such'aswhen it is being used to run operator- selected 3rd party software): . . 3. Trend data shall be schedules for automatic updating to the workstation at operator-selected. times. The operator shall also have the option of manually collecting trend data at any time. : . . . . . DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYS1EMS 15975 - 18 95-052/11-95 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 16. D. Kitchen Freezers 1. Freezer Temperature to be monitored and reported to the DDC Controller. E. Domestic Water System 1. The Hot Water Supply and Return Temperature shall be monitored and reported to the DDC Controller. 2. The Hot Water Pump shall be Started and Stopped by the DDC Controller. Pump Status shall be by a Differential Pressure Switch and reported to the DDC Controller. 2.17 SEQUENCE OF CONTROLS A. Constant Volume Air Handling Units 1. The AHU Supply Fan shall be started thru its' Safeties (Fire Alarm Panel, Smoke Detectors, Freeze Stats, etc.) by the DDC Controller. Fan Status shall be by a Differential Pressure Switch reporting to the DDC Controller. 2. With the System Fan energized the Minimum Outside Air Damper will open 100%. 3. The Return Air Temperature Set Point will be maintained thru the DDC Controller by modulating the Cooling Coil Valve, Heating Unit Gas Valve or Electric Heat, Maximum Outside Air and Return Air Dampers. 4. The Supply Air Temperature shall be monitored and reported to the DDC Controller. 5. The Filter Status shall be monitored by a Differential Pressure Switch and reported to the DDC Controller. B. Smoke Exhaust Fans, Smoke Dampers and Air Handling Units. 1. The Smoke Exhaust Fans, Smoke Dampers and Air Handling Units shall be controlled by the DDC Controller. The Smoke Exhaust Fans, Smoke Dampers and Air Handling Units shall be controlled such that any sequence or combination of fan startlstop or damper open/shut operations shall be possible. 2. The Smoke Dampers shall be controlled thru the DDC Controller. Each Set of Smoke Dampers shall have a Status/Test Panel. This panel shall allow the operator to push a Test Button and have the Smoke Dampers open. An Air Gauge on the panel face shall show the Control Air Supply Pressure to the panel, and another show the Control Air Pressure to the Smoke Dampers. C. Smoke Control Function 1. Upon activation of the fIre alarm zone in a cell block or building zone the following shall occur. a In spaces with an alarm condition. 1. Open Smoke Dampers on associated Smoke Exhaust Fans, Start associated Smoke Exhaust Fans. 2. Open Air Handling Unit outside air dampers 100% and close return air dampers 100%. 3. Close chilled water valves and turn off heating system above 50 deg F outside air temperature. At outside air temperatures between 50 deg F and 38 Deg F modulate heating system to 50% capacity. At outside air temperatures below 38 Deg F modulate heating system to 100% capacity . b. In spaces adjacent to the alarm condition. 1. Air Handling Units shall moudlate to 100% outdoor air and control system shall modulate to maintain space temperature. B. Designation: The name of each device and usage shall be etched in 1/4" maximwn, 1/8" minimum height letters and mounted on or adjacent to device cover. C. Type: White core black bakelite secured with epoxy glue, unless otherwise noted: DIRECT DIGITAL CON1ROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 19 95-052/11-95 . .;' END OF SECTION 3.03 COMPLETION OF WORK A. Demonstration: With the automation and control system expansion fully installed and operating, the Contractor shall demonstrate the ability to communicate by phone modern with the system. Contractor shall demonstrate all capabilities detailed tinder "Remote Communications". B. Inspection:. At the. completion of work and after a Sllccessful demonstration as detailed above, a job site inspection shall be made and the entire system shall be shown to be in specified working condition. The following shall be available during the inspection: 1. Contractor representative. 2. Mechanic with hand tools. 3. Complete specifications and drawings with all addenda and revisions. 4. Operator terminal and software for checkout. 3.04 OWNER TRAINING A. During Construction Cycle 1. Provide for one (1) operator a complete 5 day training program. a. System 600 Personal Computers b. Insight for Personal Computers c. Monitoring and Control at the PIC and Field Panel Levels of operation B. During Last Quarter of Warranty Period 1. Provide for one (1) operator a complete two (2) day training program. a. System 600 Insight for Building Managers-#5-1 06 b. Insight for Energy Management and Building Operation . 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 15010. B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation. . TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 1 95-052/11-95 1.05 REPORT FORMS A. Forms shall include the following information: 1. Title Page: a Company name b. Company address c. Company telephone number d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor 2. Instrument List: a Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 3. Air Handling Units: a Location b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Air flow, specified and actual e. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual f. FanRPM g. Cooling mode data: a. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual b. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual c. Leaving air DB temperature, actual d. Leaving air WB temperature, actual h. Heating mode data: a. Entering air temperature, design and actual b. Leaving air temperature, actual . . 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to fInal acceptance of Project Provide fInal copies to Architect for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE - 1984 Systems Handbook: Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15850 - Blower Coils _ B. Section 15855 - Air Handling Units with Coils C. Section 15623 - Split Systems. . D. Section 15890 - Ductwork. E. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories F. Section 15936 Air Outlets and Inlets. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, a:iJ.d balancing of air systems. B. Measurement offmaI operating condition ofHV AC systems. SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING . JESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 2 95-052/11-95 . 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed condition. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. E. At fInal inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.02 PREPARATION A Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return and exhaust systems from fIgures indicated. . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Before corrunencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment 4. Final fIlters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to fInal fIlters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Correct fan rotation. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Coil fms have been cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage has been minimized. B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Architect. C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system balance. D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed. E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. . 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 15010. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 3 95-052/11-95 . END OF SECTION . 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. . B. Make air qUantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distrIbution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. . F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. . G. Provide system schematic with required and aCtual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of fllters. L Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for. design conditions. 1. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take m~ments and balance at extreme conditions. L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries. . . ELECTRICAL GENERAL 16050-1 95-052/12-95 . A. "Provide" means to furnish and install. 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A The following abbreviations are used throughout Division 16 specifications: 1. AFF: Above Finished Floor .. .2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute 3. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 4. HV AC: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 5. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 6. IES: Illuminating Engineering Society 7. ITL: Independent Testing Laboratories 8. NEC: National Electrical Code 9. NECA: National Electrical Contractor Association 10. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association 11. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association 12. NIC: Not in contract 13. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.02 ABBREVIATIONS: Related Documents: 1. Electrical, "E-", drawings 2. All working drawings included in the contract documents. 3. Specifications of the following divisions/sections: a. Division I: General Requirements b. Division 3: . Concrete c. Section 07270: Firestopping d. Division 11: Equipment e. Division 15: Mechanical . B. A Description: 1. Provide all materials, tools, and labor for a complete electrical installation as shown on the contract documents and indicated iri~he specifications. 2. Procure all permits and licenses. . 3. Coordinate the electrical installation with the following: a. Architect b. Contractors of other trades. c. Local Electrical and Building Inspectors, or the authority having jurisdiction. d. Local Utility companies serving the project. 1.01 SUMMARY: PART 1- GENERAL ELECTRICAL GENERAL . SECTION 16050 . . ELECTRICAL GENERAL 16050-2 95-052/12-95 A. Cover fixtures, equipment and apparatus for protection against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage before and during construction. 3.02 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS: A. Prior to submitting bid, visit site and become familiar with the existing conditions relating to Division 16 work. 3.01 VISIT TO SITE: PART 3 - EXECUTION A 3/4"x size indicated on the drawings, AID grade, paint two coats gray enamel. 2.04 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS: A Refer to Division 3 specifications. 2.03 CONCRETE: A. Refer to Section 01630. 2.02 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS: . Provide equipment, products and materials shown on the drawings, as specified in the specifications or added by addendum. A 2.01 MATERIALS: PART 2 - PRODUCTS B. Organize and execute work so that finished appearance is neat; mechanical, plumb when vertical and level when horizontal. A. Use materials that are new and, where UL or ITL has established standards, listed and/or labeled. 1.05 ST ANDARDS FOR MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: A. Comply with the following codes and published standards which are applicable to the electrical installation of this project: 1. NFP A 70 - National Electrical Code, 1993 edition 2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code, 1988 edition 3. Standard Building Code, 1991 edition 4. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Directory ( "green book" ) 5. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical General Information ( "white book" ) 6. NFPA 72 . 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS: ELECTRICAL GENERAL 16050-3 95-052/12-95 . D. Include with the electrical distribution equipment submittal a plan view of each electrical room. Use 1/2" = I' scale and show the submitted equipment laid out in each room. Label each piece of equipment and indicate the required maintenance clearance by a dashed line. C. Obtain shop drawing review by engineer before purchase of any equipment requiring shop drawing submittals. B. Refer to respective sections for submittal instructions where instructions have been prescribed. \ Submit as prescribed in section 01300 shop drawings and/or product data for the electrical equipment and materials listed.below. Check for compliance with contract documents and certify compliance by affixing Electrical Contractor's "Approved" stamp and signature. 1. Shop drawings and product data: a Switchgear, Distribution Panelboards, and Panelboards b. Life Safety System ( fire alarm ) c. Remote Control Switching System d. Security Communications Network e. Locking Control System f. Closed Circuit Video SyStem g. Nurse Call System h. Emergency Generator 2. Product data only: a Conduits, Couplings, Connectors, and Fittings b. Wiring Devices and Coverplates ( receptacles, switches, wallbox dimmers) c. Fuses and Circuit Breakers d. Junction Boxes, Outlet Boxes, and Floor Boxes e. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps f. Disconnect Switches, Motor Starters, and Motor Switches g. Wire and Cable h. Time Clocks, Relays, Contactors, and Photocells . A. 3.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTALS: A Prior to rough-in of any materials, coordinate with subcontractors the physical clearances for and sequencing of Division 16 work as.it interfaces with and relates to architectural, structural, plumbing and HV AC systems. 3.03 COORDINATION: Restore the original finish, including shop coat, of fixtures, apparatus or equipment that has been damaged prior to substantial completion. c. . Keep all conduit and other openings protected against entry of foreign matter. B. . ELECTRICAL GENERAL 16050-4 95-052/12-95 C. Restore removed or opened equipment to its installed or closed position after the job observation. B. Remove any covers, trims or wiring devices and open all cabinets, disconnect switches or other equipment served electrically and designated by the Architect or his representative. A. During all job observations, provide an electrician with tools and volt/ammeter to accompany Architect and/or his representative. 3.08 JOB OBSERVATION ASSISTANCE: A. At the time of the substantial completion job observation, perform a test of all light fixtures, electrical systems, equipment, machinery and appliances, in the presence of the Architect or his representative, which demonstrates that all of Division 16 systems are operational. 3.07 OPERATIONAL TEST . Use a three ring binder for operating instructions with a separate thumb-tab in each section for each system or major item. Include in the instructions start-up, operation sequence, control, shut-down, safety features and seasonal adjustments. c. B. Use a separate three ring binder for each maintenance manual and include wiring diagrams, maintenance instructions, parts list, maintenance tools list, manufacturer's and nearest dealer's name, addresses and telephone numbers. Organize into sections with index thumb-tab markers. A. Submit the following maintenance manuals and operating instructions to the Architect as prescribed in Section 01700: 1. Life Safety System ( fire alarm ) 2. Remote Control Switching System 3. Security Communications Network 4. Locking Control System 5. Closed Circuit Video System 3.06 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: A. Submit the following certifications and test reports to the Architect in the format and at the time prescribed in Section 01410: 1. Certifications: a. Life Safety System b. Emergency Generator 2. Test Reports: a. Megger test for all feeders and Service Entrance conductors. . 3.05 CERTIFICATION AND TEST REPORTS: ELECTRICAL GENERAL 16050-5 95-052/12-95 . . END OF SECTION 16050 A. Record on one set of electrical drawings all changes, deviations and underground conduits. Transfer same to a reproducible sepia and deliver same to architect as per Section 01720. 3.10 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: A. At substantial job completion job observation, instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation, sequencing, maintenance and safety/emergency provisions of the electrical systems. 3.09 OWNER INSTRUCTION AND ASSISTANCE: . RACEWAYS 16110-1 95-052/12-95 . C: Joint Compound: 1. Anti-seize lubricant with rust and corrosion inhibitors and colloidal copper 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Thomas & Betts B. Couplings and Connectors: 1. Couplings: a. Hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized ferrous steel, threaded 2. Connectors: a. Steel or malleable iron, threaded with throat bushing, lock nuts and, where prescribed, grounding lugs. 3. Erickson: a. Malleable iron, concrete tight 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Appleton b. Crouse Hinds c. Steel City d. Thomas & Betts A. Conduit: 1. Rigid ferrous steel pipe, hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized with smooth interior. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Allied b. Triangle c. Wheatland . 2.01 RIGID STEEL AND INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT: PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets 1.02 SUBMITTALS: B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General A. Description: 1. Provide continuous conduit systems - beginning at the service point, to all distribution equipment and to every _ outlet and piece of electrical equipment . with conduits, couplers, supports, hangers, - fittings, bushings and accessories: 1.01 . SUMMARY: PART 1 - GENERAL RACEWAYS . SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 16110-2 95-052/12-95 . D. Joint Cement: 1. PVC solvent C. Expansion Fittings: 1. Schedule 40 PVC with grommeted inner cylinder and outer sleeve B. Couplings and Connectors: 1. Couplings: Schedule 40 PVC 2. Connectors: Schedule 40 PVC with lock nuts A. Conduit: 1. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl chloride (pVC), resistant to crushing, moisture, low temprature, and corrosive agents in standard trade sizes. 2.03 RlDGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: C. Expansion Fittings: 1. Steel with three cap nuts, phenolic bushing, packing ring, metallic copper grounding ring and copper bonding jumper. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Crouse Hinds "XJ" b. O.Z. Gedney" AX" or "DX" c. Appleton "XJ" . B. Couplings and Connectors: 1. Couplings: a. Steel, compression type, installed where exposed to moisture b. Steel, setscrew type, when installed indoors 2. Connectors: a. Steel, compression type with nylon insulated bushings, locknuts, and where prescribed, grounding lugs, installed where exposed to moisture. b. Steel, setscrew type with nylon insulated bushings, locknuts, and where prescribed, grounding lugs, installed indoors. A. Conduit: 1. Thin wall ferrous steel tubing, hot-dipped galvanized, smooth interior, square and reamed ends 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Allied b. Wheatland c. Triangle 2.02 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING . D. Expansion Fittings: 1. Steel with three cap nuts, phenolic bushing, packing ring, metallic copper grounding ring and copper bonding jumper. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Crouse Hinds "XJ" b. O.Z. Gedney" AX" or "DX" c. Appleton "XJ" RACEWAYS 16110-3 95-052/12-95 B. Thruwall Seals: 1. Malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized sleeve and sealing ring with pressure rings and sealing grommets 2. Acceptable Products: a. O.Z. Gedney "FSK" and "WSK" b. Spring City "WEP" or "WDP" c. Thunderline Link Seal . A. Fire Rated Seals: 1. Flanged three hour fire and smoke stop. 2. Acceptable Products: a. O.Z. Gedney "CFSF" 2.06 SEALS: B. Fittings: 1. Threaded corrosion-resistant steel or malleable iron with insulated throat bushing and lock nuts. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Appleton b. O.Z. Gedney c. Thomas & Betts A. Conduit: 1. Galvanized steel single strip, interlocked, smooth inside and out. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. AFC b. Alflex c. General Cable . 2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: B. Fittings: 1. Threaded corrosion-resistant steel or rrulIleable iron with insulated throat bushing, liquid.tight, locknuts and external ground lugs. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Appleton b. O.Z. Gedney c. Thomas & Betts A. Conduit: 1. Galvanized steel single strip, interlocked, smooth inside and out, with liquid-tight flexible polyvinyl chloride outer jacket. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Carlon b. Wheatland c. Allied 2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT: E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carlon 2. Cantex 3. Wbeatland . RACEWAYS 16110-4 95-052/12-95 . B. Conduits 3/4" and smaller: 1. Method a. When single conduit: Attach directly to building structure or suspend with 1/4" rod. b. When multiple parallel and adjacent conduits and: 1) When horizontal at structure: Attach directly to structure or to support framing attached to structure. 2) When horizontally suspended: Attach to support framing, suspended from building structure. 3) When vertical: Attach to support framing attached to building structure, wall structure or suspended from building structure. A. Intervals: Maximum 10 feet on center and within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. 3.02 CONDUIT SUPPORT E. Provide Flexible Metal Conduit for: 1. Final connection link (minimum of 12", maximum of 36" ) to: a. Motors b. Transformers c. Mechanical equipment 2. Connections between junction boxes and accessible recessed lighting fixtures. . D. Provide Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit for final connecting link (minimum of 12", maximum of 36") to the following: 1. Plumbing equipment 2. Kitchen equipment 3. Exterior Mechanical equipment C. Provide Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit for service ground, in slab on grade, in direct contact with earth, exposed in corrosive environments above 10'-0" above floor, or service entrance when encased in concrete. B. Provide Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) for interior power circuits, branch circuits and system circuits in walls, elevated concrete slabs ( those not on grade), plenums, attics or exposed above 10' -0", where not exposed to moisture. A. Provide Rigid Metal Conduit or Intermediate Metallic Conduit for service entrance, feeders, in slab on grade, areas where exposed to moisture, exposed on exterior surfaces, and exposed interior from floor to 10' -0" or where exposed to physical abuse. 3.01 APPLICATIONS: PART 3 - EXECUTION . C. Explosion Proof Conduit Seals: 1. Malleable Iron, liquidtight construction, w/ drain fittings and filled with sealing compound. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Appleton b. Crouse Hinds RACEWAYS 16110-5 95-052/12-95 Provide insulated bushings at each end of every conduit run. C. D. E. F. . G. Use benders designed for the size and type of conduit. .Limit each bend.to 90 degrees or less with a radius 10 times conduit diameter or greater for telephone system and 6 times conduit diameter or greater for all other systems. Extend homeruns from outlets shown to panel designated. Do not combine homerunS. Install exposed conduit parallel with or perpendicular to building walls at greatest height possible. Paint exposed conduit two coats of color directed by Architect. Conceal all conduit except where shown to be exposed. Install conduit concealed above a lay-in ceiling with clearance to allow easy removal of ceiling panels. B. Provide 1/2" minimum size conduit. A. For conduit layout follow, generally, the diagrammatic layout shown on plans. Provide offsets and routing changes to avoid structural, architectural or equipment elements. 3.03 INSTALLATION: D. Framing:. 1. Attachment, suspension and bearing members capable of supporting 300 % of load. C. For 1" or larger: 1. Method: a. When single conduit: Attach directly to building structure or suspend with . threaded rod. b. When multiple parallel and adjacent conduits: Attach to support framing attached to building structure, wall structure or suspended,frombuilding structure. 2. Conduit attachment: a. When single conduit: Bolted clamp b. When on support framing: Two section bolted conduit clamp 3. Structural steel attachment: Beam clamps with bolts or bolted directly to steel. 4. Concrete attachment: Provide preset insert prior to concrete pour or coordinate drill locations with Architect. When drilling provide expansion anchors. In either case, maintain design support of 300% or greater of load. 5. Wood attachment: Wood screws or bolted with design support of 300% or greater of load. . 2. Conduit attachment: a. When direct to structure or single conduit suspended: Spring steel friction, spring steel latching or clamped with bolts or screws. b. When on support framing: Two section bolted conduit clamp. 3. Structural steel attachment a. When single conduit: Spring steel friction, clamp with bolt or bolted b. When hanger rod: Clamp with bolt or bolted 4. Concrete attachment: Steel preformed conduit clamp. Attach clamp with expansion anchor installed in drilled hole or with powedastening anchor designed to meet concrete specification. In either case; maintain design support of 300 % or greater of load. . . 5. Wood attachment: Wood screws or bolted with design support of 300%or greater of load. . RACEWAYS 16110-6 95-052/12-95 . Y. Coordinate conduit supports in precast or cast-in-place concrete prior to pour. X. In mechanical equipment rooms where a piece of equipment is located more than 2 feet away from walls or columns, serve equipment from underfloor or provide a vertical conduit, minimum 1", attached to floor and ceiling with conductors entering and exiting conduit through conduit bodies. W. Provide a nylon pullcord in all empty conduits. V. Blowout and swab all conduit clear of trash and water prior to pulling wire. U. Where liquids are present, form drip loops in liquid-tight flexible conduit to prevent liquid from running into connections. T. Provide an explosion-proof seal in each conduit run where it enters and leaves a hazardous location. S. Provide a fire rated seal on each conduit that penetrates any floor or fire rated partition. Match seal rating to floor or partition rating. . R. Provide an expansion fitting in each conduit crossing a building expansion joint and locate the fitting at the joint. Also provide expansion fittings in building conduits exceeding 100 feet at intervals of 100 feet. Q. Provide a thruwall waterproof seal on each conduit that penetrates a wall at a below grade level. P. Seal all conduits which extend from the interior to the exterior of the building to prevent the circulation of air. O. Provide grounding wedge lugs or locknuts designed to bite metal on conduit connectors to panel cabinet or pullboxes. N. Provide ground lugs on all conduit connectors to service equipment enclosures. M. Maintain grounding of metallic raceways with clean and tight connections. Provide grounding conductor in all conduits. L. Install conduit above water and steam piping where possible. K. Install conduit no greater than 1" trade size in concrete slabs. Route conduit between top and bottom reinforcing steel and space parallel runs a minimum of 3" apart. J. Close all conduit ends during construction with plastic conduit plugs. I. Provide an Erickson type coupling where two segments of a conduit run must be joined and neither can be rotated. . H. Provide joint compound on rigid steel conduit and intermediate metallic conduit joints. RACEWAYS 16110-7 95-052/12-95 . . END OF SECTION OF 16110 C. When under interior slab on grade seal vapor barrier around conduit penetration. B. Encase conduit in 3" concrete envelope where it passes under driveways, roadways or entrances to parking lots. A. Where exterior of building bury conduit a minimum of 30" below finished grade. 3.04 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION . CONDUCTORS 16120-1 95-052/12-95 . THHN, THWN XHHW C. Insulation - 600 Volts: 1. No.6 and smaller: 2. No.4 and larger: Solid Stranded B. Configuration: 1. No. 10 and smaller: 2. No. 8 and larger: A. Copper Conductors: 1. Soft drawn annealed copper, 98 % conductivity, without weld, splice or joint throughout its length; uniform in cross section without flaws, scales, or other imperfections with THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Anaconda b. Phelps Dodge c. Pirelli Cable d. Senator e. Southwire f. Triangle . 2.01 CONDUCTORS: PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. 1.02 SUBMIITALS: B.. ReJated Sections: . 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16420: Service Entrance A. Description: 1. Provide continuous color coded conductors ~eginning at service point to distribution equipment and to each outlet and each pi.ece of electrical energy consuming equipment. 1.01 SUMMARY: PART 1 - GENERAL CONDUCTORS . SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS 16120-2 95-052/12-95 . C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP 2. Burndy 3. Ideal 4. llsco 5. Panduit 6. 3M 7. Thomas & Betts B. No.8 and Larger: 1. Set-screw or bolted type: Metal connectors for joining copper to copper, with bolts or set-screws to apply pressure to conductors. Insulate with nylon or plastic cover or with electrical tape. 2. Pressure type: Metal connectors for joining copper to copper with power operated crimping tool. Insulate with nylon or plastic cover or with electrical tape. . A. No. 10 and smaller: 1. Crimp type: Cylindrically shaped conductor sleeve for crimping copper conductors. Insulated with nylon or plastic cover. 2. Twist on: Inner spiral spring or threads for holding and making electrical contact between copper conductors and with outer long skirted insulated cover of nylon or plastic. 2.03 SPLICE AND TAP MATERIALS: B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brady 2. 3M 3. Plymouth 4. Thomas & Betts A. Vinyl 3/4" wide with uniform color and adhesive backing. 2.02 COLOR CODING TAPE: E. Jacket Markings: 1. Voltage 2. Insulation type 3. Conductor Size 4. Conductor type . Uniform colored jacket Black D. Jacket Color: 1. No. 8 and smaller: 2. No.6 and larger: . 2.04 CONDUCTOR TERMINALS: A. Copper conductors: High conductivity copper terminal designed to hold conductor and make electrical contact by bolt, setscrew or power crimp and with spade to match equipment receiving conductor. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Burndy 2. Ideal 3. Ilsco 4. Panduit 5. Thomas & Betts 2.05 CONDUCTOR HARNESS: A. Plastic or nylon self-locking straps (commonly refered to as zip-ties or tie-wraps). B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Panduit 2. Thomas & Betts 2.06 WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT: A. Lubricating, insulating and chemically neutral to conductors, conductor insulation and conduits. . B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenlee 2. Ideal 3. Polywater 2.07 ELECTRICAL TAPE: A. Vinyl plastic; moisture tight, resistant to ultraviolet radiation, alkalies, acids and corrosion; chemically neutral to conductors and conductor insulation; fire retardant; and single thickness dielectric strength equal to or greater than 1O,000V. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Scotch/3M 2. Plymouth PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install the number of copper conductors indicated, with a minimum of two (2) power conductors and on ground conductor being installed in each conduit not prescribed to be empty. B. Minimum Conductor Size: No. 12 . C. Complete installation of raceway run prior to pulling conductors. 95-052/12-95 CONDUCTORS 16120-3 D. Install insulated bushings in conduit fittings prior to pulling conductors. . E. Use wire pulling lubricants to reduce stress on conductors. Pull all conductors of a run together. Use pulling methods which do not damage the raceway or conductors. F. Color Coding: 1. No.8 and smaller: Uniform colored jacket ~th respective color below. 2. No.6 and larger: Two wraps of tape applied within 6" of each conductor end with respective color below. 3. Conductor Color Code: 208Y /120V 480Y /277V 240D/120V Phase A Black Brown Black PhaseB Red Orange Blue PhaseC Blue Yellow Orange (208V) Neutral White Gray White Ground Green Isolated Ground Green w/ White Stripe 4. For Different Voltages in Same Enclosure: Use a colored stripe (not green) on one neutral to differentiate between systems. Keep stripe color consistent throughout project. G. At outlets leave a minimum of 12" of conductor ends at each fixture outlet, device outlet and equipment outlet box. H. Conductor Terminals: 1. Single: Use terminals on conductors no. 8 and larger where equipment receiving conductors do not have conductor lugs with set-screw(s) 2. Multiple: Install terminals on conductors where more than one conductor is connected to a single lug. . I. Route conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers and terminal cabinets parallel to or at right angle to the enclosure's sides and tops. Group and harness conductors in those enclosures using conductor harness straps. J. Prior to energizing conductor, megger test conductors for continuity and shorts. Correct deficiencies prior to energizing. K. Tighten all bolted connections in and to mechanical lugs to torque rating specified per manufacturers recommendations. L. Tighten all conductors with mechanical connections, torqued in accordance with the conductor and/or connector manufacturers markings as well as the values referenced in the following publications: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Directory (Green Book). 2. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical General Information (White Book). END OF SECTION 16120 . 95-052/12-95 CONDUCTORS 16120-4 ".. ".,~ . BOXES 16130-1 95-052/12-95 B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Raco 4. Steel City . A. Galvanized steel for encasing in concrete with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for mounding devices and/or coverplates. 2.02 CONCRETE BOXES: C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Raco 3. Steel City 4. American Electric 3"H x 2"W x 2"D 3"H x 2"W (per gang) x 2"D 4"W x 1-l/2"D 4" Square x 1-1/2"D B. Minimum Sizes: 1. Single Device: 2. Gang Device: 3. Octagonal: 4. Square: A. Galvanized steel, UL listed for application with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for mounting devices and/or coverplates. 2.01 INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES AND EXTENSIONS: . PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. 1.02 SUBMITTALS. C. Standards: 1. Underwriters Labratories labeled and listed for application specified. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General. A. Description: 1. Provide electrical boxes or, where prescribed, conduit bodies for devices,"outlets, splice connection points, raceway junction and conductor pulling points complete With supports, covers and accessories. 1.01 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL BOXES . SECTION 16130 BOXES 16130-2 95-052/12-95 . B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carlon 2. Queen City 3. Raco A. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl cloride 2.07 PLASTIC BOXES A. As specified on the drawings for particular application. 2.06 FLOOR BOXES: C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Hoffman 4. Killark B. Damp or Wet Locations: Cast malleable iron with corrosion-resistant finish, NEMA 3R, threaded conduit entries, neoprene coverplate gasket, and coverplate held by stainless steel bolts. . A. Dry Locations: Galvanized sheet steel, NEMA 1, welded seams and cover held by stainless steel screws or bolts. 2.05 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES: B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Raco 4. Steel City A. Cast malleable iron, cadmium/zinc plated finish, NEMA 3R, threaded conduit entries, neoprene coverplates gasket and threaded holes for mounting devices and/or coverplates. 2.04 CAST BOXES: B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Raco 3. Steel City 4. Crouse Hinds A. Galvanized steel for mounting in masonry walls with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for mounding devices and/or coverplates. . 2.03 MASONRY BOXES: BOXES 16130-3 95-052/12-95 A. Junction boxes or conduit bodies where junction is exposed . 3.03 JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES (conduits larger than. 1 "): C. Integrally Mounted Boxes: Boxes which are an integral part of an equipment assembly from the manufacture~ and are UL listed for the application may be used in lieuof the boxes prescribed above. B. Hazardous Locations: Hazardous area box A. For lighting fixtures, equipment connections, pullboxes for conduit 1" and smaller, and junction boxes for conduits 1" and smaller. 1. Recessed Interior Box: a. For .construction other than concrete or masonry, use octagonal or square interior outlet box. b. For concrete: Concrete box c. For masonry: Concrete box or square interior box with masonry extension. 2.. Box Above an Accessible Ceiling: Octagonal or square interior outlet box. 3. Exposed Interior Box: . a. Above 7' -0" : Octagonal or square interior outlet box or conduit body. b. 7' -0" and below: Cast box or conduit body.. 4. Exterior Box: a. When recessed in vertical element or ceiling: 1) For concrete: Concrete box 2) For masonry: Concrete box or square interior box with masonry extension. 3) For construction other than concrete or masonry, provide square interior box. b. Flush mounted in ground: Cast junction box c. Exposed: Cast box or conduit body. . 3.02 GENERAL APPLICATIONS A. B()xes for switches, receptacles, dimmers (designed for device box mounting) and . future devices: 1. For dry Locations: a. When recessed: 1) For construction other than concrete or masonry, use interior outlet box. 2) For concrete: Concrete box 3) For masonry: Masonry box or square int~rior outlet box with masonry extension. b. When surface: Cast box 2. For Damp or Wet Locations: a. When recessed: 1) For concrete: Concrete box. 2) For masonry: Masonry box or square interior outlet box.with masonry extension. b. When surface: Cast box 3. For hazardous Areas: Hazardous area boxes 3.01 DEVICE, APPLICATIONS PART 3 - EXECUTION . BOXES 16130-4 95-052/12-95 . N. Cover unused conduit openings with plastic covers for sheet steel boxes and threaded plugs for cast boxes. M. For devices, utilize boxes designed to support the device independently of coverplate and so install. L. Utilize box size (capacity) based upon NEC. K. Match configuration to application. J. Provide plaster rings for all boxes set in plaster walls or ceilings. I. Limit masonry cuts from outlet boxes so that coverplate covers the cut. H. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so that covers are accessible and removable. G. Space wall switch outlets with first gang box 4" from door trim on the installed strike side. F. Where outlets at different levels are shown adjacent, install them on the same verticailine. E. The contractor may, with Architect's approval, slightly vary an outlet's mounting height so that the box's top or bottom occurs at a masonry joint. D. Where the mounting height of a wall outlet is not shown, mount at height directed by Architect. Mounting heights are from finished floor to box centerline. . C. Where an outlet occurs in an architectural feature, center the outlet in same. B. Install boxes plumb when vertical, level when horizontal and flush adjacent surface when recessed. A. Outlet locations indicated on the plans are approximate. Coordinate and determine the exact location at the building. The architect reserves the right to shift the exact location of any outlet 10 feet before it is permanently installed. 3.07 INSTALLATION: . A. General: Support each box from the building structure independently of conduit as follows, utilizing a support system capable of carrying 300 % of load. 1. Surface: a. Structural Steel: Bolted directly to steel member or bolted to spring clip which is clipped to steel member. b. Concrete: Power driven fastener or bolt to expansion anchor set in drilled hole. c. Wood: Screw or bolt to wood. 2. Suspended: Bolted to engineered spring clip which is clipped to suspended ceiling system. 3. Recessed: a. Concrete: Set in concrete prior to pour. b. Masonry: Set or cut into masonry during masonry errection. Grout in around box. c. Drywall: Attach directly to stud or joist by screw or bolt; or directly to a galvanized steel support which is attached directly at each end to stud or joist by screw or bolt. d. Earth: Compact earth around box 3.04 SUPPORT: BOXES 16130-5 95-052/12-95 . . END OF SECTION 16130 O. Prior to pulling conductors or installing devices, clean boxes of dirt~ debris and water. P. Cover all boxes and secure with screws or bolts. Q. Install pull boxes to limit pulling distance and/or pulling bends. . WIRING DEVICES 16140-1 95-052/12-95 B. Duplex - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with ground screw, NEMA 5-20R. 1. Hubbell # 5362. . A. Duplex -15A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with ground screw, NEMA 5-15R. 1. Hubbell # 52~2. 2.01 RECEPTACLES: B. Acceptable Manufacturers of Wall box Dimmer Switches: 1. Lutron, Nova Series. 2. Lightolier, Neptune Momentium Series. A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Switches, Receptacles, and Coverplates: 1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured .by Hubbell Incorporated, Wiring Device Division; referred to as Hubbell. 2. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as.modified below, are acceptable for use, subject to prior approval of proposed producpist. a. Arrow-Hart . b. Bryant c. Leviton d. Pass and SeymorlLegrand e. Slater 3. Manufacturers product numbers listed below do not include color selection. Refer to Section 16140, 2.06 for device colors 2.01 MANUFACTURER . PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. 1.02 SUBMITTALS C. Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled. 2. NEMA (configurations as listed) B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16130: Boxes A. Description: 1. Provide switches, receptacles, dimmers and other strap mounted wiring devices as shown on the drawings. . 1.01 SUMMARY PART 1- GENERAL . WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16140 . WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 95-052/12-95 . F. Key Operated Double Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained contacts, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1222. E. Key Operated Single Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained contacts, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1221. D. Four Way Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet operating toggle, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1204. C. Three Way Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet operating toggle, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1203. B. Double Pole Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet operating toggle, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1202. A. Single Pole Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet operating toggle, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1201. . 2.03 SWITCHES I. Duplex Isolated Ground Surge Suppression - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with insulated/isolated ground screw, blue face, light & alarm, NEMA 5-20R. 1. Hubbell # IG5352S. H. Single Isolated Ground Twist Lock - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with insulated/isolated ground screw, NEMA L5-20R. 1. Hubbell # IG2301A. G. Duplex Isolated Ground Twist Lock - 15A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with insulated/isolated ground screw, NEMA L5-15R. 1. Hubbell # IG4700. F. Duplex Twist Lock - 15A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with ground screw, NEMA L5-15R. 1. Hubbell # 4700. E. Duplex Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, pigtail wiring, thru wiring to protect 4 receptacles downstream, test and reset buttons, NEMA 5-20R. 1. Hubbell # GF5362. D. Duplex Isolated Ground - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with insulated/ isolated ground screw, NEMA 5-20R. 1. Hubbell # IG5362. . C. Single - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with ground screw, NEMA 5-20R. 1. Hubbell # 5361. ,. WIRING DEVICES 16140-3 95-052/12-95 C. Devices installed in floor boxes or surface mounted boxes shall be gray. B. Isolated ground devices shall be orange with stainless steel coverplates. . A. When the wiring 4~vice is flush mounted, the. devices shall be gray with stainless steel coverplates. 2.06 DEVICE AND COVERPLA TE COLOR/FINISH D. Weatherproof: 1. Gasketed, hinged with spring loaded closers, secured with corrosion-resistant screws and UL listed for wet location. C. Surface Mounted: 1. Corrosion-resistant steel, rounded comers and'edges, stainless steel screws, single or multiple gang as indicated on the drawings. Openings to match device(s) and . construction to match box. B. Plastic Coverplates: 1. Smooth finish nylon, oversize (3-1/8" x 4-7/8" , single gang), in configurations up to six (6) gang as indicated on the drawings, screws to match finish, and opemngs . to match device. A. Stainless Steel Coverplates: 1. Smooth stainless steel, brushed finish, oversize ( 3-118" x 4-7/8" , single gang ), in configurations up to six (6) gang as indicated on the drawings, screws to match finish, and openings to match device. . 2.05 COVERPLATES: A. Preset slide switch type, voltage compensated with built-in filters to minimize audio and radio frequency interfaces. . Each dimmer shall.be power matched to the circuit it controls, using units rated 600W, 1000W, 1500W, and 2000W. Low voltage. incandescent lighting loads dimmed by manual wall dimmers specifically designed for use with low voltage transformers. Switchplates shall cover the entire face of the dimmer and shall correspond in material and color with other device coverplates in same area. 2.04 WALLBOX DIMMER SWITCHES J. 277 Volt Pilot Light Switch: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt, maintained contacts, single pole single throw, sidelback wiring, red handle illuminated when circuit is energized. 1. Hubbell # 1221PL7. I. 120 Volt Pilot Light Switch: 20 AmpeJe, 120 Volt, maintained contacts, single pole single throw, sidelback wiring., red handle illuminated when circuit is energized. 1. Hubbell # 1221PL c. H. Key Operated Four Way P91e Sing1e"Throw:. 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained contacts, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1224. G. Key Operated Three Way Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 27TVolt AC , maintained contacts, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1223.. . . WIRING DEVICES 16140-4 95-052/12-95 . . END OF SECTION 16140 E. Coordinate location of devices with other trades and architectural features. Do not locate devices on two different finishes such as half on wall title and half on painted surface. D. Where more than one device is indicated at a location, the devices shall be mounted in combined sectional gang boxes and covered with a single plate. C. Install devices vertically, unless otherwise noted, with SPST switches having up as "ON" and receptacles having ground pin at bottom. B. Install devices after conductors are pulled and painting is completed. A. Install the type device indicated by symbol or legend at the location shown on the plans. 3.01 INSTALLATION: PART 3 - EXECUTION . D. Isolated ground surge suppression devices shall be blue with stainless steel coverplates engraved "Computer Only". MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 16170-1 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16170 D. Coordinate overcl!ITent device rating with namep~ate of motor or equipment which it protects. C. Label each disconnect switch and starter with name of equipment it serves. B. Install and connect individually mounted starters provided by other subcontractors. A. Coordinate all rough-in and final power wiring and equipment connection with other subcontractors. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Control wiring, (i.e., HV AC controls, remote pushbutton stations, thermostats, etc.), is excluded except where specifically prescribed in Division 16 documents. 2.03 CONTROL AND INTERLOCK WIRING: A. Motors, mechanical equipment, kitchen equipment, etc., provided under other divisions. MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT: 2.02 . A. Provided under other divisions except where specifically prescribed in Division 16 documents. 2.01 STARTERS: PART 2 - PRODUCTS B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16440: Disconnect Switcbes 2. Section 16475: Overcurrent Protection 3. Section 16050: Electrical General A. Description: 1. Provide power wiring to each motor, all mechanical equipment, all kitchen equipment, and all miscellaneous equipment included in the contract documents. Power wiring is the system of conductors from the energy source to the equipment that conducts the electrical energy which does work or provides heat. 2. Provide a disconnect switch, fused where prescribed, for each motor or piece of equipment. 1.01 SUMMARY: PART 1 - GENERAL MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS SECTION 16170 . ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS 16195-1 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16195 C. Label all junction box l;overs with the circuit num~~r installed in the box with a permanent marker. B. Type in the branch breaker load information onto the manufacturers panel directory. Mark all spares in pencil. Install in plastic sleeve on inside of panel cover door. A. Securely mount each nameplate to its respective equipment with screws or epoxy type cement. Double sided foam core type tape is not acceptable. 1. 0 1 Installation: PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Panel board Manufacturers Directory in plastic sleeve on inside of panel cover door. 2.01 Panelboard Directory: C. Lettering: 1. Main Service Disconnect - 1/2" high letters. 2. All others - 1/4" high letters. B. 120 Volt, 208 Volt, and 240 Volt - Bakelite Label, black face, white core. . A. 277 Volt and 480 Volt equipment - Bakelite Label, red face, white core. 1.01 Nameplates: PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Sample of Nameplate 1.02 Submittals: A. Description: 1. Identify the following electrical equipment with a nameplate or directory indicating load served or equipment name: a. Switchboard, Main and all Branches b. Transformers c. Panelboards, Main and Branch Breakers d. Disconnect Switches and Motor Starters e. Contactors, Time Switches, and Relays 1.01 Summary: PART 1- GENERAL ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION . SECTION 16195 SERVICE ENTRANCE 16420-1 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 16420 . D. Coordinate connection requirements of service entrance conductors to utility company transformer. C. Obtain requirements for installation of utility company's transformers and primary cabling. Provide conduits, concrete pads, elbows, Etc. as required by utility company. B. Provide metering as indicated on the drawings. Obtain and comply with utility company metering requirements. A. Obtain electrical service from local utility serving this area. 3.02 Utility Company Coordination B. Concrete encase duct bank per NFPA 70, Article 310. A. Provide service entrance conductors and conduit duct bank as indicated on the drawings. ~.;r 3.01 Installation PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Provide Transient Voltage Surge Suppression on Service Entrance conductors. 1. Single stage parallel hybrid design transient voltage source suppressor. a. Line to ground protection . - . b. U.L. Listed and tested to U.L. 1499, ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 c. Maximum surge current per phase (8 x 20us) 100,000 amps/phase d. Withstand 1,000 sequential category C, Bl~wave impulses e. Status alarm monitor 2. Acceptable Products a. TYCOR International Corp. - PPY Series 250 b. or equal by LEA DYNA TECH . Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor 2.01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS B. Related Sections L Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16110: Raceways 3. Section 16120: Wire and Cables 1. 0 1 Summary A. Description. 1: Provide electrical service entrance as shown on the drawings and specifications. 2. Provide transient voltage source suppression for the service entrance. 3. Electrical service shall be277/480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire wye connected~ PART 1- GENERAL SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION 16420 . SERVICE SWITCHES AND SWITCHBOARDS 16425-1 95-052/12-95 . 2.01 Manufacturer: . A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Square D Company referred to as Square D. 2. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below, are acceptable for use, subject to prior approval of proposed product list. . a. General Electric b. Siemens/ITE c. Westinghouse PART 2 - PRODUCTS Shop Drawings: 1. Dimensional Data a. Top View b. Floor plan w/conduit openings c. Side view d. Front elevation 2. Power/distribution Schematic 3. Ground Fault Protection Schematic 4. Lighting Arrestor/Surge capacitor Schematic 5. Meter Panel Layout . B. 1. 02 Submittals: A. Manufacturers Products Data Sheets C. Standards: ,~ 1. Underwriters Laboratories #891 2. Nema #PB2 3. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16475: Overcurrent Protection 1. 0 1 Su.mxruiry: A. Description: . . 1. :Provide a sectional, totally free-standing, indoor, steel enclosed, dead front switchboard.as specified herein and scheduled on the drawings. PART 1 - GENERAL SERVICE SWITCHES AND SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 16425 . . SERVICE SWITCHES AND SWITCHBOARDS 16425-2 95-052/12-95 H. Arrangement of phases, phase A - B - C, left to right, top to bottom, and front to rear. G. When one switchboard has more than one group of service entrance conductors (busway or cable), provide a 12 gauge steel barrier full height and full depth of the switchboard to separate and isolate each group of service entrance conductors. F. In each service entrance section, provide a removable disconnecting link in the neutral (ground) bus, and a removable links shall be front accessible where rear accessibility is not maintained. Coordinate location of ground and neutrailinks with all applicable ground fault sensor requirements. E. Provide a 50 % ground bus full length, securely bolted to each frame with sectionaiizing links at shipping section boundaries. D. The switchboard shall be rated for 480/277 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire service, and UL listed for service entrance. . Each switchboard, as a complete unit, shall be given a single short circuit current rating by the manufacturer. Such ratings shall be established by the actual tests by the manufacturer, in accordance with UL specifications, on equipment constructed similarly to the subject switchboard. c. B. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 for temperature rise. Through bus shall be extruded aluminum plated by the ALST AN 70 or 80 process. The through bus shall have an ampacity is shown in plans and shall be rated to withstand a short circuit current rating of 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. The through bus supports, connections and joints are to be bolted together with hex-head bolts and Belleville washers to minimize maintenance requirements. A. The switchboard shall be dead front with front accessibility required. The switchboard frame shall be 90 inch. high of formed code gauge steel rigidly welded and bolted together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation. Steel base channels shall be bolted to the frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and floor mounting. Each switchboard section shall have an open bottom and an individually removable top plate for installation and termination of conduit. The switchboard enclosure shall be painted on all exterior and interior surfaces. The paint finish shall be a medium light gray, ANSI #49, applied by the electro-deposition process over an iron phosphate pre-treatment. All front covers shall be screwed on and removable and all doors shall be hinged with removable hinge pins. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly indicated on shop drawings. . 2.02 Switchboard: SERVICE SWITCHES AND SWITCHBOARDS 16425-3 95-052/12-95 . ';,' A. The branch fusible switches shall be quick-make, quick-break and shall be group mounted in panel-type construction. Switches of 30-800 amperes shall have plug-on line side connections and shall have built in fuse pullers (30-100A units). Each switch is to be contained in a separate steel enclosure. The enclosure will employ a hinged cover for access to the fuses which will be interlocked with the operating handle to prevent opening the cover when the switch is in the "ON" position. This interlock shall be constructed so that it can be released with a standard electrician' s tool for testing fuses without interrupting service. The units shall have padlocking provisions in the "OFF" position and the operating handle position shall give positive switch position indication, i.e.: red for "ON" and black for "OFF". . 2.03 Main Service Switch: A. The main service switch or switches shall be. fusible, circuit breakers are not allowed for use as the main service device. B. Main service switch 800 amperes and larger: 1. Provide bolted pressure contact type switches with ratings as shown on the drawings. Pressure contacts are to be made by firmly bolting blades to both top and bottom stationary contacts. The switches shall have quick-break Kinematic-Action mechanisms, inter-phase barriers and arcing equipment. Switches shall be manually operated and have an electric trip mechanism which is piloted by the output of ground fault sensing circuitry. Power for the electric trip circuit shall be obtained from a control transformer connected from phase to phase on the line side of the switch. The electric trip coil shall be designed to operate at 55 % of rated voltage. In accordance with UL Standard 977, switches shall have an interrupting rating of 12 times the continuous rating. The operating mechanism shall immediately be in condition to open the switch. Switches shall be BOLT-LaC as manufactured by Square D Company. 2. Provide blown fuse protection for electrically tripped bolted pressure contact switches. 3. Secure the fuses for bolted pressure contact switches with thru-bolts,nuts, and washers. The fuses shall remain in a fixed position whether the switch is in the "open" or closed" position. . C. Main service switches less than 800 amperes shall be standard type fusible switches rated as service entrance device. 2.04 Branch Fusible Switches: . SERVICE SWITCHES AND SWITCHBOARDS 16425-4 95-052/12-95 D. A testing/monitoring system which uses the test winding of the current sensor to simulate a ground fault condition shall be supplied. This test system shall be UL listed to comply with the National Electrical Code requirements for performance testing. 1. Components shall be supplied which allow testing of the ground fault system with or without tripping the circuit interrupting device. System operation as a result of a ground fault shall be confirmed by lighting a red indicating lamp. C. The ground fault relay shall be designed to provide instantaneous operation when a ground fault of sufficient magnitude occurs within the relay's zone of protection, and by zone selective interlocking to provide a restrained time delay operation when the fault occurs downstream but outside the relay's zone of protection. The relay shall be solid state construction for maximum reliability and shall require 120 volt power for operation of the relay as well as the associated circuit interrupting device. Current settings for the ground fault pickup point shall be field adjustable continuously from 100 thru 1200 amperes. A calibrated dial shall be provided for setting the ground fault pickup point. The restrained time delay for each zone shall be field adjustable. . A current sensor shall be provided which is of sufficient size to properly encircle all phase and neutral conductors of the circuit to be monitored. The current sensor shall be coordinated with the input required by the ground fault relay. The current sensor shall include a test winding which allows the complete system , including the current sensor, ground fault relay, and circuit interrupting device, to be tested under simulated ground fault conditions. The frame of the current sensor shall be constructed so that one leg can be removed to prevent disturbing cables or bussing during installation or removal of the sensor. B. A. A ground fault protection system shall be included when indicated in the switchboard schedule or when required by code. It shall consist of a current sensor, relaying device, test with and without tripping device, and an appropriately sized molded case circuit breaker or fusible bolted pressure contact switch. Components shall be designed to operate in conjunction with each other, and the system shall be UL listed. Installation of the equipment shall in all respects be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.06 Ground Fault Protection: B. The compartment shall be barriered and covered with a hinged door with sealing provisions. A voltmeter, ammeter, power factor meter and watthour meter shall be mounted in the door and supplied with current and potential transformers and instrument transfer switches where required. All front plated used for mounting meters, instrument transfer switches or other front mounted devices shall be hinged with all wiring installed. A. When indicated on the drawings, provide a current transformer compartment, located in the service entrance section of the switchboard for metering. . Metering Compartment: 2.05 SERVICE SWITCHES AND SWITCHBOARDS 16425-5 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16425 . Securely strap all conductors in switchboard allowing for sufficient bending radius as specified in NFPA 70. D. Tighten all conductors With mechanical connections, torqued in accordance with the conductor and/or connector manufacturers markings as well as the values referenced in the following publications: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Directory (Green Book). 2. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical General Information (WhiteBook). C. Tighten all bolted connections in and to switchboard to torque rating specified per manufacturers recommendations. B. Install switchboard on 3 inch high concrete housekeeping pad. Secure switchboard to floor and/or walls with anchors approved for the material in which they are installed. A. 3.01 Installation: PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Provide a transient voltage surge suppressor with disconnect switch and audible alarm. Mount unit as close to the switchboard as possible in a separate enclosure. Unit shall . be as specified in section 16420 of this specification. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor: 2.07 . DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-1 95-052/12-95 C. Switches shall be quick-make, quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Provisions for padlocking the switch in the "OFF" position with at least three locks shall be provided. Switches shall have a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door when the handle is in the "ON" position, and to prevent closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. The handle position shall indicate whether the switch is "ON" or "OFF". . B. All switches shall have blades which are fully visible in the "OFF" position when the switch door is open. All current carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. Switches shall have removable arc suppressors where necessary to permit easy access to line side lugs. Lugs shall be front removable and UL listed for 60 degrees Cor 75 degrees C, aluminum or copper wires. A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty (NEMA Type HD) and Underwriters Laboratories Listed. 1.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Acceptable Manufacturers as Follows: 1. General Electric 2. Siemens/ITE 3. Square D 4. Westinghouse 1.01 MANUFACTURERS . PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. 1.02 SUBMITI ALS B. Related Sections 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 01300: Submittals 3. Section 16170: Motor and Equipment Connections 4. Section 16475: Overcurrent Protection A. Description 1. Provide disconnect switches in configurations as indicated on the drawings complete with . enclosures and accessories. . 1.01 SUMMARY. PART 1 - GENERAL DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16440 . DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-2 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16440 . B. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and/or structural surfaces. Coordinate mounting of disconnects to roof top mechanical equipment with supplier/installer. A. Install disconnect switch adjacent to equipment it serves or as located on the plans. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION E. Switches shall be horsepower rated for ac and/or dc as indicated by the plans. All fusible switches rated 100 thru 600 amperes at 240 volts and 30 thru 600 amperes at 600 volts shall have a UL approved method of field conversion from standard Class H fuse spacing to Class J fuse spacing. The switch also must accept Class R fuses and have provisions for field installation of a UL listed rejection feature to reject all fuses except Class R. The UL listed short circuit rating of the switches shall be 200,000 rIDS symmetrical amperes when Class R or Class J fuses are used with the appropriate rejection scheme. The UL listed short circuit rating of the switch, when equipped with Class H fuses, shall be 10,000 rIDS symmetrical amperes. 800 and 1200 ampere switches shall have provisions for Class L fuses and shall have a UL listed short circuit rating of 200,000 rIDS symmetrical amperes. . D. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless specified as NEMA 3R on the plans. Covers on NEMA 1 enclosures shall be attached with pin type hinges, NEMA 3R covers shall be securable in the open position. NEMA 3R enclosures for switches thru 200 amperes shall have provisions for interchangeable bolt-on hubs. Hubs shall be as indicated on the plans. NEMA 3R enclosures shall be manufactured from galvanized steel. Enclosures shall have a gray baked enamel finish, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel. GROUNDING 16450-1 95-052/12-95 . B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Burndy 2. Ilsco 3. Thomas & Betts 4. O.Z. Gedney A. Bronze, U.L. listed, with configuration to match application. 2.03 GROUND CLAMPS: B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Cad weld A. Provide exothermic copper welds with materials and configuration to match application. 2.02 EXOTHERMIC WELDS: Provide ten (10) feet long, 5/8 inch diameter copperc1ad steel ground rods. A. . 2.01 DRIVEN GROUND RODS: PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets 1.02 SUBMm ALS: B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. SeCtion 16110: Raceways 3. Section 16120: Conductors A. Description: 1. Provide a grounding system. for the main building service and each separately derived system originating at the respective grounding electrode(s) and radiating to every electrical power controlling and coDSUIDing device in the system. 1.01 SUMMARY: PART 1 - GENERAL GROUNDING SECTION 16450 . . GROUNDING 16450-2 95-052/12-95 B. Exothermic weld the grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode. A. Install a stranded bare copper conductor sized according to NEC between the local grounding electrode and the separately derived system grounded conductor. 3.05 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR: A. Select a local grounding electrode described by the National Electrical Code and make connection to a point permanently visible. 3.04 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM GROUNDING ELECTRODE: B. Exothermic weld the connection to the ground rod and ground bus. A. Install a 3/0 bare stranded copper conductor from the closest driven ground rod to the service switchboard ground bus. . 3.03 MAIN SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR: B. Exothermic weld each bonding connection both cable to cable and cable to grounding electrode. A. Install a 3/0 bare stranded copper conductor between each grounding electrode and its closest grounding electrode neighbor so that all electrodes are bonded together. 3.02 MAIN SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODES BONDING CONDUCTORS: D. Sprinkler Water Pipe: Select a connection point on the sprinkler water pipe as close as possible to the point it enters the building and that will also remain exposed. C. Domestic Water Pipe: Select a connection point on the domestic water pipe as close as possible to the point it enters the building and that will also remain exposed. B. Building Steel: Select a connection point on the building steel as close as possible to the domestic water service entrance that will also remain exposed. A. Driven Ground Rods: Install two driven ground rods minimum 10 feet apart, located outside of building, and as close as possible to the service switchboard but a minimum of 36" from the building foundation. Locate in non-paved area where feasible. Install so as to maintain accessibility to top of rod. Provide each with box with removable cover for inspecting ground rod connection. Install box so that top is flush with finished grade. 3.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING ELECTRODES: . PART 3 - EXECUTION GROUNDING 16450-3 95-052/12-95 . D. Wiring Devices: At both switches and receptacles, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding screw on the device. C. Branch circuit and feeder conduits: Install a green insulated grounding conductor, as shown on the plans, in each branch circuit and feeder conduit. B. Install a separate copper equipment grounding conductor between the respective ground buses of the following: 1. Service Switchboard and each Panel board 2. Service Switchboard and each Transformer 3. Transformer and each Panel board 4. Panelboard and each Sub-panelboard A. Roof Top HV AC Units: Install an equipment grounding conductor from the respective switchboard or panelboard ground bus to the unit disconnect switch and from disconnect switch to equipment ground lug or to housing in absence of ground lug. 3.08 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: All steel conduits entering the main switch shall have a threaded conduit insulated type "BLG" grounding busing bonded together and to the ground bus with a No.4 bare stranded copper conductor. . B. A. General: Utilize metallic conduit and equipment enclosures for continuous equipment grounding conductor where available. Where non-metallic conduit or enclosures are used, install a separate insulated copper conductor, color coded green, from respective switchboard or panelboard ground bus to controller and/or device. 3.07 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR: D. Telephone Service: Provide a No.6 bare stranded copper conductor bonded to the nearest exposed point on the grounding electrode system or the grounding electrode conductor to the telephone service backboard and leave six (6) feet slack at the backboard. C. Non-metallic Domestic Water Insulated Coupling: Install bond across insulated coupling with 3/0 stranded bare copper of sufficient length to accommodate removal of coupling. Exothermic weld both connections to water pipe. B. Domestic Water Meter: Install bond across water meter with 3/0 stranded bare copper conductors of sufficient length to accommodate removal of meter. Exothermic weld both connections to water pipe. A. Roof Structure: Bond roof structure steel at its nearest accessible point to the building steel connection point with a 3/0 bare stranded copper conductor. Exothermic weld both connections. 3.06 ADDITIONAL BONDS: . J . GROUNDING 16450-4 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16450 A. All grounding electrode conductors, equipment grounding conductors and bonds where not internal to equipment enclosures shall be installed in conduit to within 6" of terminating clamp or exothermic weld. 3.10 CONDUITS: A. Route equipment grounding conductor with respective feeder, power wiring and branch circuit conductors. . 3.09 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ROUTING: TRANSFORMERS 16460-1 95-052/12-95 . E. Lugs to match conductors. D. Voltage: 480V delta to 208Y/l20V. C. Provide 6 - 2 1/2 taps, - 4 below and 2 above. B. Insulation system U.L. rated 220 degrees Celsius having an average rise by resistance of 150 degrees Celsius in a maximum ambient of 40 degrees Celsius average 30 degrees Celsius for 24 hours. Maximum terminal compartment ri~e shall be 5 degrees Celsius. A. Provide three phase transformers enclosed in open, ventilated, drip-proof enclosures, self-bracing with removable front and rear cover panels. VENTILATED TRANSFORMERS: 2.03 . A. Steel with a gray enamel finish. 2.02 ENCLOSURE: A. Dead front construction, U.L. listed and labeled and conforming to NEMA and ANSI standards. 2.01 GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS General Electric ITE Square D Westinghouse 1.02 MANUFACTURERS: A. Provide dry type transformers complete with enclosures, primary lugs, secondary lugs, and taps. 1.01 DESCRIPTION: PART 1 - GENERAL DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS . SECTION 16460 . TRANSFORMERS 16460-2 . 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 16460 D. Provide under each floor mounted transformer a 3 1/2" concrete housekeeping pad. . C. Provide a nameplate on each transformer. B. Provide lugs to match primary and secondary conductors prescribed. A. Set taps to yield a secondary voltage of 120V to 125V. 3.01 INSTALLATION: PART 3 - EXECUTION PANELBOARDS 16470-1 95-052/12-95 . 2. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below, are acceptable for use, subject to prior approval of proposed product list. a. General Electric . b. Siemens/ITE c. Westinghouse A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Square D Company referred to as Square D. 2.01 Manufacturer: PART 2 - PRODUCTS Shop Drawings 1. Dimensional Data a. Enclosure Size b. Gutter Space c. Cover and Trim 2. Bussing Size 3. Lug Configuration and Ratings 4. Branch Breakers 5. Main Breakers . B. . A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets 1.02 Submittals: C. ,Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories #67 2. Underwriters Laboratories #489 3. Underwriters Laboratories #50 4. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16475: Overcurrent Protection A. Description: 1. Provide panelboards complete with enclosure, circuit breakers, spaces, trims, covers, locks and accessories in configurations, as indicated on the diawings~ 1.01 Summary: PART 1- GENERAL PANELBOARDS SECTION 16470 . . PANELBOARDS 16470-2 95-052/12-95 2. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with. UL Standard 489 and shall be rated 600 volts ac maximum with continuous current ratings as noted on the plans. Interrupting ratings shall be as schedule with a maximum of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 600 volts ac. Single pole, 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers intended to switch fluorescent lighting loads on a regular basis shall carry the SWD marking. A. Circuit Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers shall be Square D type EHB (bolt-on) thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers. Breakers shall be 1, 2, or 3-pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multipole circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" positions. Circuit breakers shall be able to be installed in the panelboard without requiring additional mounting hardware. 2.04 480Y/277 Volt Panelboards: 2. Panelboard bussing shall be copper or tin plated aluminum. . Panel board bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. Bus structure shall be insulated. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or phase sequence type and shall accept either plug-on (NQO) or bolt-on (NQOB) circuit breakers. All current carrying parts of the bus structure shall be plated. 1. B. Bussing Assembly and Temperature Rise 2. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 489 and shall be rated 240 volts ac maximum with continuous current ratings as noted on the plans. Interrupting ratings shall be as schedule with a maximum of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 volts ac. Single pole, 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers intended to switch fluorescent lighting loads on a regular basis shall carry the SWD marking. 1. Circuit breakers shall be Square D type QOB (bolt-on) thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers. Breakers shall be 1, 2, or 3-pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multipole circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" positions. Circuit breakers shall be able to be installed in the panel board without requiring additional mounting hardware. A. Circuit Breakers: 2.03 208Y/120 Volt Panelboards: A. Panelboards shall be of dead front construction, equipped with thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers of frame size and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. . 2.02 General: PANELBOARDS 16470-3 95-052/12-95 . A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label. When used as service entrance device, panel boards shall be listed for use as service equipment. 2.07 UL Listing Each panel board, as a complete unit, shall have a short current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panel board schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted in the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified panel board short circuit or greater. Testing of panel board overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panel boards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. . A. 2.06 Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating A. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet, 20" wide and 5 3/4" deep. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 67 for panel boards. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Each front shall include a door and have a flush, cylinder tumbler-type lock with catch and spring-loaded stainless steel door pull. All panel board locks shall be keyed alike. Pronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clainps which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted with completely concealed steel binges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. 600A panelboard fronts shall have exposed trim clamps. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. 2.05 Cabinets and Fronts: Bussing Assembly and Temperature Rise 1. Panel board bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panel board schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. Bus structure shall be insulated. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or phase sequence tyPe and shall accept either plug-on (NQO) or bolt-on (NQOB) circuit breakers. All current carrying parts of the bus structure shall be plated. 2. Panel board bussing shall be copper or tin plated aluminum. B. . . PANELBOARDS 16470-4 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16470 F. When panel boards are shown as feed-thru shall have an 8" bottom and side gutters. E. Where panelboards exceed 42 poles, provide multiple sections with equal size enclosures with 4" diameter openings with bushings between abutting enclosures. D. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and/or structural surfaces. C. For flush mounted panelboards. provide a minimum of three spare 3/4" conduits stubbed out into ceiling space. B. Key all locks alike and give owner two key per panelboard. A. Mount panel board flush or surface as prescribed with top 6' -6" A. F. F. 3.01 Installation: . PART 3 - EXECUTION OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 16475-1 95-052/12-95 . B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Circuit Breakers 1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Square D Company, referred to as Square D. 2. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below, are acceptable for use, subject to prior approval of proposed product list. a. General Electric b. Siemens/ITE c. Westinghouse 3. Circuit breakers shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard or enclosure in which they are installed. A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Fuses: 1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Cooper Industries, Bussmann Division, referred to as Bussmann. 2. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below, are acceptable for use, subject to prior approval of proposed product list. a. Gould ShaWIDut 3. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. Manufacturers: 2.01 . PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Product Data 1. Manufacturers: Product Data Sheets 2. Time - Current Characteristic Curves (Average Melt) 3. Current Limitation Curves 1.02 Submittals: B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16440: Disconnect Switches 3. Section 16170: Motors and Equipment Connections 4. Section 16470: Panel boards . A. Provide fuseS and circuit breakers of ampere rating and U.L. . Classification as indicated on the drawings. 1.01 Summary: PART 1 - GENERAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SECTION 16475 . OVERCURRENTPROTECTION 16475-2 95-052/12-95 . A. Description: 1. Circuit breakers shall be Square D FA, KA, LA, NH, PA and/or PC one, two or three pole molded case circuit breakers rated 15 through 2500 amperes, 120V.ac, 240V.ac, 277V.ac, 480V.ac, as specified on the drawings. Breakers shall have an interrupting rating to match the panel in which they are installed or as indicated on the drawings. All circuit breakers shall be UL and CSA listed, IEC 157-1 rated, meet NEMA Standard ABI-1975 and Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN, when applicable. Breakers covered under this specification may be installed in panelboards, switchboards, individual enclosures, motor control centers, combination motor starters or I-LINE busway plug-in units. 2.03 Molded Case Circuit Breakers: . B. Spares: 1. Upon completion of the building, the electrical contractor shall provide the Owner with spare fuses as shown below: a. 10 % (minimum of 3) of each type and rating installed fuses shall be supplied as spares. 2. BUSSMANN spare fuse cabinet - Catalog No. SFC shall be provided to store the above spares. The spare fuse cabinet (SFC) shall include a supply of "LOW-PEAK YELLOW" NOTICE labels. . A. Mains, Feeders and Branch Circuits: 1. Circuits 601 to 6000 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK time-delay fuses KRP-CCamp)SP. Fuses shall employ "0" rings as positive seals between the end bells and the glass melamine fuse barrel. Fuse links shall be pure silver (99.9% pure) to limit the short circuit current let-through values to low levels and comply with NEC Sections requiring component protection. The terminals shall be peened. Fuses shall be time-delay and shall hold 500 % of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current in .01 seconds or less and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. with an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class L. Fuses shall be "LOW -PEAK YELLOW" in color. 2. Circuits 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK dual-element fuses LPN-RK, LPS-RK, or LPJ. All dual-element fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. Fuses shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element having a 284 degree Fahrenheit melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuit clearing chamber. The fuse shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds (30A, 250V Class RKl case size shall be a minimum of 8 seconds at 500 % of rated current) and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc with an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. The fuses shall be Time-Delay UL Class RKl or J to maintain the engineered protection of the system components. Fuses shall be "LOW-PEAK YELLOW" in color. 2.02 Fuses: ~I--" ~ ; (.- -.... OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 16475-3 95-052/12-95 . D. Current and Energy Limitation: 1. On high level fault currents, the I-LIMITER circuit breaker shall peak current and let thru energy and provide a voltage transient-free interruption at near unity power factor. 'On fault currents below the threshold of limitation, the I-LIMITER circuit breaker shall provide conventional overload and short circuit protection. C. Terminals: 1. The current limiting circuit breakers shall have removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical type or compression type lugs. B. Construction: 1. Current limiting circuit breakers shall be supplied in molded case construction. The circuit breaker section shall have an overcenter, trip-free toggle-type mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action. A push-to-trip button shall be . provided on the cover for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall have permanent trip units containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. The thermal trip element shall be calibrated for 40 degrees C. ambient temperature. the breaker shall have reverse connection capability and be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. A. Description: 1. Current limiting circuit breakers from Square D shall be I-LIMITER IF (20-100 amperes), IK (110-250 amperes) and shall be rated at (240V.ac) (480V.ac) with an interrupting rating of 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes. IL current limiting circuit breakers (300-400 amperes) shall be rated (240V.ac) (480V.ac) with an interrupting rating of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes. All I-LIMITER circuit breakers shall meet UL requirements as current limiting circuit breakers, be CSA listed, IEC 157-1 rated, meet NEMA Standard ABI-1975 and Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN. . 2.04 Current Limiting C~rcuit Breakers: C. Terminations: 1. Circuit breakers shall have.removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical type or compression type lugs. B. Construction: 1. Molded case circuit breakers shall have overcenter toggle-type mechanisms, providing quick-make, quick-break action. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Each circuit breaker shall have trip indication by handle position and shall be trip-free. Two and three pole breakers shall be common trip. Each 'circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermai and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Circuit breakers with frame sizes greater than 100 amperes shall have variable . magnetic trip elements which are set by a single adjustment (to assure uniform tripping characteristics in eachpoIe). A push-to-trip button shall be provided on the cover for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. the circuit breaker shall . have reverse connection capability and be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. . OVERCURRENTPROTECTION 16475-4 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16475 . B. Terminate wiring into circuit breaker lug. Tighten lug to torque level as marked on the lug. A. Install circuit breakers in panelboards, loadcenters, switchboards, distribution panelboards, and enclosures as shown on the drawings. 3.02 Installation - Circuit Breakers C. Install "LOW-PEAK YELLOW" NOTICE labels to alert the end user of the engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment. They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the drawings, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. These labels are available with the spare fuse cabinet (SPC) and are also available upon request from Bussmann. B. Fuses shall not be installed in the switch until equipment is ready to be energized. A. Install fuses in all switches shown on the plans which require fuses. 3.01 Installation: PART 3 - EXECUTION . E. Series Connected Ratings: 1. Combinations for series connected interrupting ratings shall be recognized by Underwriters Laboratories and shall appear in the Recognized Component Directory under the "Circuit Breakers -Series Connected" product category DKSY2. Current limiting circuit breakers shall allow the use of branch circuit breakers with lower interrupting capacities on systems capable of delivering fault currents up to 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480V.ac and 100,000 rms . symmetrical amperes at 600V.ac. LIGHTING 16500-1 95-052/12-95 . A. High Pressure Sodium: Core and coil or constant power autotransformer, high power factor (92% minimum) starting current less than operating, 5% lamp power variation on 10% line potential variation~ 180 degree Celsius Class H insulation, -20 degree Fahrenheit starting temperature. - 2.03 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLAST: A. Electronic: Solid state electronic, Class P, Class A sound rating, CBM certified ,90 degree Celsius, capable of operating one to four lamps. 1. Acceptable manufacturers as follows: a. Advance b. Motorola c. Magnatec 2.02 FLUORESCENT BALLAST: 2.01 LIGHT FIXTURES: As prescribed in lighting fixture schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS C. ITL certified photometric reports. B. Shop Drawings for Custom Fixtures. A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. . 1.02 SUBMITTALS: C. Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories labeled and listed. 2. CBM Approved 3. ANSI C82.2 4. 1992 National Energy Conservation Act. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General. A. Description: 1. Provide.lighting fixtures as prescribed in the lighting fixture schedule complete with housing, junction boxes, ballas.ts, lamp sockets, lamps, lenses, baffles and trims installed With support from building structure. Verbal description of fixture in schedule will take precedence over manufacturer number. 1.01 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL LIGHTING . SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-2 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16500 G. Provide electrician with equipment and tools to execute aiming and adjustment instruction. F. Aim and adjust all fixtures with lamp position, tilt, shutters, rotation or other types of adjustment during installation. The Architect or his representative will determine the final aiming and adjustment of such fixtures during the substantial completion job visit. Fixtures serving areas where daylighting dominates will be adjusted after sunset. E. For each recessed fixture, provide a trim to match the type ceiling (plaster, grid, exposed panel, etc.) in which it is being installed. D. For recessed single incandescent, provide #10 AWG steel hanging wire from building structure to fixture; minimum of 2 separate supports per fixture. . C. For recessed H.I.D. and fluorescent fixtures recessed in a suspended ceiling, provide 2 #10 awg. wire supports from building structure to fixture. Provide a minimum of two supports for each chassis spaced a maximum of 4 feet on center and located on diagional comers of yhe fixture. Provide tie down clips to secure fixture to the ceiling grid. B. For pendant or suspended fixtures mounted to suspended ceilings provide 1/4" steel rods above the suspended ceiling from building structure to fixture. Provide a minimum of two supports for each chassis and spaced a maximum of 4 feet on center. A. Support: 1. Support each fixture from the building structure. 2. Support in a manner that ensures the fixture weight being equally distributed from each support and the fixture remaining in a level position. 3. Provide support systems capable of carrying 300 % of load imposed. 3.01 INSTALLATION: PART 3 - EXECUTION C. Manufacturers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: a. Advance b. General Electric c. Universal d. Jefferson . B. Metal Halide Lamp: Core and coil or constant autotransformer lead-peaked, high power factor (90% minimum), starting current less than operating, 10% lamp power variation on 10% line potential variation, 180 degree Celsius Class H insulation, -20 degree Fahrenheit starting temperature. TELEPHONE / COMPUTER / CATV RACEWAYS 16740-1 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16740 F. Boxes shall be a 4" square recessed outlet box with a reducing flange to a single gang front. E. Mount wall outlets vertical and if shown adjacent to a receptacle, mount with 1 " separation between coverplates. D. Mount telephone backboard with bottom 1 "-0" A.F.F. C. Provide a pull-cord in each conduit for the entire length. See notes on the plans for tbe routing and sizing. B. Provide 3/4" conduit from single outlet and 1" conduit where homerun serves two outlets with 3/4" between outlet. A. Coordinate telephone and catv service entrances with utility companies. 3.01 INSTALLATION: PART 3 - EXECUTION Refer to individual related sections for information on products. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS D. Cable television and computer outlets, when indicated shall be the same as telephone outlets. Electrical General Raceways Boxes Grounding. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: 2. Section 16110: 3. Section 16130: 4. Section 16450: C. B. Work Excluded: System cable, switches, coverplates and instruments. A. Description: 1. Provide a complete raceway system including but not limited to conduits, wood backboard, outlet boxes, and pull strings, beginning with the service entrance conduit and te~nating at each system outlet. 1.01 SUMMARY: PART 1- GENERAL TELEPHONE / COMPUTER / CATV RACEWAY SYSTEM SECTION 16740 . SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-1 95-052/12-95 . B. The voice communications network shall be an integrated system consisting of the intercommunications, monitoring, and paging functions. A. It is intended that the overall voice communications network shall be a global switching network. Decentralized control capability shall, however, be maintained. That is, each local control area shall have in dependent control, yet all local control areas shall be included in a central communications network providing inter-control area communications and transfer of control between specified control areas. 1.03 System Operation The system shall include, but not be limited to the following elements: 1. Central switching exchange. 2. Power supplies, amplifiers and control panels. 3. Equipment enclosures. 4. Intercom stations. 5. Audio components, microphones and speakers. 6. Remote switching panels. 7. Software and firmware as required to provide a complete functioning system. 8. Wiring and raceway. 9. Installation, testing and certification, and education labor. A. . 1.02 Materials and Services A. Provide a voice security commwiicatioDs network. The system and components shall be supplied by one manufacturer. 1. The system shall include all required hardware, raceways,. interconnecting wiring and software to accomplish the requirements of this specification and the contract drawings, whether itemized or not. 2. All equipment furnished shall b~ new and products of a single manufacturer. 3. In the interest of job coordination, the contractor shall contract with a single source for supplying job materials,. services and programming, including final inspection/test services. 4. All references to model numbers and other pertinent information. herein is intended to establish the standards of performance, quality and appearance and is based upon equipment designed and manufactured by Rauland-Borg Corp. Other manufacturers of similar equipment must submit for review and acceptance 10 days prior to bid and be listed in a prebid addendum. 1.01 General Requirements PART 1- GENERAL SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SECTION 16744 . . SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-2 95-052/12-95 2. The central control room officer shall have the ability, using the master control station, to make paging announcements to selected zones or all zones within the entire facility. Paging in a given local control area shall not interfere with paging in any other local control area. Paging from the central control room shall take precedence over local paging, and intercom usage. Upon completion of the central control room page, local paging or intercom will be restored. 1. The local control room officer shall have the ability, using the master control station, to make paging announcements to selected zones or to all zones within the local area. A minimum of eight zones of paging shall be available in each local area. Paging in a given local control area shall not interfere with paging in any other local control area. D. Public Address System 3. Master control stations equipped with a speaker/microphone shall perform the above functions using the speaker/microphone. It shall be possible using such stations to monitor selected stations without clicks, pops, beeps, or control room background noise alerting the person being monitored. . 2. To initiate a call to an intercom remote station, the control room officer shall lift the handset from the cradle and dial the architectural number associated with that station. Communications will automatically be established when the number is dialed. Operation will be hands free at the remote station. Replacing the telephone handset in its cradle will terminate the communications and reset the call. d. Where station is associated with a cctv camera, an interface shall be provided between the intercom system and the CCTV system which will allow the control room officer to have both audio and video contact with the person requesting passage. c. Voice communications between the control room and the intercom remote station shall be established and controlled by the control room officer. Replacing the telephone handset in its cradle will terminate the communications and reset the call. b. Calls placed at intercom remote stations shall be indicated on the digital display of the master control station located in the assigned local control room. Calls shall be indicated on the assigned master control station only. Systems which do not segregate calls in this manner shall not be considered acceptable. a. Intercom remote stations shall be located as indicated on the drawings. Station is equipped with a call-in switch, and shall allow a person to initiate an intercom call to the local control room. . 1. Intercommunications to/from intercom remote stations The functions to be included in each Local Communications Net work include: C. SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-3 95-052/12-95 . " I.The calls normally directed to a local control room may be transferred to the central control room. All calls intended for the local master control station shall be automatically redirected to the master control station located in the central control room. This function shall be controlled by switches located in the control room which is to take control. H. Control Room Transfer I.An administrative telephone shall be provided in the office of selected administrators. This telephone shall enable the administrator to communicate with other administrators, to communicate with central control or any local control room, and to make public address announcements. These telephones shall be standard DTMF devices. G. Administrator's Telephones 4.The system shall support conference calling between three control rooms simultaneously. . 3.Any telephone equipped with a dial pad shall have the capability of direct dialing any other telephone. 2. Telephonic communications between local control rooms shall be supported. 2. Telephonic communications shall be supported between all local control rooms and the central control room. 1. Internal Security Telephone System F.The functions to be included in-the central communications network include: 3.The security monitoring system shall be integrated with the primary intercommunications system but shall be an independent system. Use of the security monitoring system shall not interfere with the use of the primary intercommunications system. . 2. The officer may select one or more stations for monitoring using a dedicated switch in the lock system panel. A monitor control panel shall be inclu~ed in the control room lock system control console. 1. The security monitoring system shall allow the control room officer to audibly monitor cells or other designated selected speakers in the local area. Cell speakers shall be in a sound disturbance alarm system and shall also be included in the security monitoring. Sound disturbance shall sound a tone and light an LED in the lock system panel indicating the initiating cell. E. Security Monitoring System . . SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-4 95-052/12-95 A. The contractor must have successfully installed systems of the same type and design as specified, or have a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having the required manufacturers' training and experience. 1.04 Qualifications of the Installer I. Cell block control stations consist of a DTMF station and a manual intercom "monitor". 2. DTMF control stations in local control rooms are used only to communicate with the other control rooms, central control and make a "page" over corridor speakers. 3. Control stations in cell blocks for communications with the cells are of the "manual" type using the Icotech panel arrangement. digital readout is not applicable for these stations. Each of these control stations are "stand alone" type and control cannot be transferred to another station. 4. Central control would be a DTMF instrument with the digital display. L. Pod Control Rooms Additional Information on Functions . I.Provide switches, designated as panic alarm directly the local control room to sound an alarm on the master intercom telephone, indicating the need for help. There will be no ability to monitor these areas except by this function. K. Panic Alarm I.In an emergency, the handset of any master control station may be removed from its cradle. After a predetermined period of time, an indication shall be made on all other master control stations that an emergency situation exists, where the problem is and the number of the telephone associated with that area. Any master control station shall be able to dial that number and communicate with that telephone, regardless of whether or not the telephone has been returned to its cradle. Also any master station may enter an emergency number or press the designated switch on the lock system panel to sound an emergency alarm in Main Control and immediately connect that station, hands free, to be able to communicate with Main Control. J. Riot Alarm Function 3.This function shall be entered directly into the system, and shall not require the head count information to be transmitted verbally to another person. 2. The central control room may retrieve the total of the local areas and may review the counts of the local areas. . I.Corrections officers in each local area may enter head count information for his area using the touchpad of the master control station. I. Inmate Count Function SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-5 95-052/12-95 . A. The equipment racks shall include equipment to provide all system features and functions as indicated herein. Unless otherwise noted, all equipment racks shall be standard vertical structures. 2.1 Equipment Racks PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3. A copy of the system certification and final tests results, as called out in Part 3 of this section of specifications shall be included in this manual. 2. The manual shall be legible and easily read with large drawings folded and contained in pockets. Included in the manual shall be circuit drawings, wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment and a control sequence describing start up instructions. Included shall be installation instructions, maintenance instructions, safety precautions, test procedures, performance data, and software documentation. Maintenance Manuals: A complete operation and maintenance manual with two sets of installation drawings shall be submitted prior to the final inspection. 1. The following information shall be inscribed on the cover: a. "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" b. Building location. c. The name, address and phone number of the contractor, system manufacturer and system subcontractor. d. The name and phone number of the fire department required to respond to alarms at the project location. . B. A. Shop Drawings:The contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal: 1. Complete manufacturer's catalog data including physical dimensions, finish and mounting requirements. Submit panel configurations and interconnection units and all other data as required to make an informed"jtidgment regarding product suitability. At a minimum, data shall be submitted on the following: a. Communications console. b. Power supplies. c. Equipment enClosures, d. Intercom and console stations. e. Wire and cable. 2. Data on security enclosures for all devices inside the hard-line. 3. Data describing more. than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate the type the contractor intends to provide.for a given application. 4. Complete drawings covering.die following shall be submitted by the contractor for the proposed system: a. Floor plans showing all initiating, and control devices. Raceways shall be shown, marked for size, conductor count with type and size. b. Wiring diagrams showing points of connection and terminals used for all electrical connections to the system devices and panels. Submittal Requirements 1.05 . . SECURITY COMMUNICA nONS NETWORK 16744-6 95-052/12-95 K. From central control, it shall be possible to distribute separate and distinct alarm signals throughout the facility using the public address speakers. This function shall be activated by dialing a code number on the master control station. J. Queuing shall be provided by the switching exchange on all two-way voice-amplified communications channels. A call waiting for a channel that is in use shall be automatically connected to the called station when the channel becomes available. I. The intercom amplifier shall be a Rauland-Borg model TC4160. H. The intercom amplifier shall have a built-in automatic volume compressor to eliminate the need for volume controls. G. Each intercom amplifier shall be capable of delivering an audio output of at least twelve (12) watts RMS. The output noise level shall be no less than 50db below rated output and the frequency response shall provide for maximum intelligibility. Unless otherwise noted, Talk/Listen switching between the control room officer and intercom speakers shall be voice controlled for automatic operation. Systems requiring a talk/listen switch will not be accepted. F. The central switching exchange shall provide a dedicated intercom amplifier for each control area, with capacity for additional amplifiers, which shall be integral to the switching exchange and shall be all solid state, bi-directional, voice controlled amplifiers. . E. The central switching exchange shall be a Rauland-Borg model TC5 Telecenter. D. The central switching exchange shall provide an RS-232C serial data port for the connection of on-site or off-site diagnostics by distributor or manufacturer personnel. C. The central switching exchange shall have a minimum of thirty-two (32) simultaneous conversation paths available for use by system telephones. B. The central switching exchange shall utilize standard dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) coding in order to utilize standard push-button telephones. A. The central switching exchange shall consist of modular, plug-in printed circuit boards, utilizing NMOS microprocessor and memory technology and solid state sensing and logic circuitry. The exchange shall lend itself to modular expansion to a total capacity of not less than 500 lines. 2.2 Central Switching Exchange D. Provide blank panels as necessary to fill unused panel space. C. Free-standing racks shall be Rauland-Borg model RPll00 series. Wall racks shall be RauIand-Borg model SWC 1100 series. . B. The equipment rack assemblies shall provide adequate panel mounting space, with at least 25 % spare rack space included. The racks shall be constructed of at least 16 gauge steel, heavily reinforced for maximum strength and durability. The racks are to be provided with hinged and key-locking front and rear doors. Multiple, properly cut, rolled and brushed access holes for internal wiring shall also be provided in each rack assembly. SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-7 95-052/12-95 . G. TYPE B - Master stations shall be desk mounted DTMF telephone unit. The station shall include a telephone style touchpad, and a telephone handset(Rauland-Borg model TC4204). F. TYPE A - Master stations shall be a desk mounted unit equipped with a handset, and a standard telephone style touchpad with a LCD digital display (Rauland-Borg model TC4204/TC4221). E. Master control stations equipped with a digital readout shall be capable of answering the first call in the call display by pressing a single button. 4. It shall be possible to display, in groups of four, all calls present in the system. 3. The last call answered shall be displayed and held in the screen. 2. It shall be possible to display at least three intercom call-in's simultaneously. I. Call-ins shall be displayed in the order received. Higher priority calls shall be automatically inserted ahead of normal calls. D. Master control stations equipped with a digital readout shall display call-in's from intercom remote stations. The following features shall be provided with the digital readout. . C. Distinctive ringing shall be provided which will allow the officer to distinguish between a call from another master control station and a call from an intercom remote station. Ringing shall be standard 90 volt telephony signaling. B. Master control stations shall be standard, DTMF telephone instruments, configured as described below. Master control stations will allow the corrections officer to receive incoming calls from intercom remote stations. The corrections officer may also use the telephone to make outgoing intercom calls, public address announcements and communicate with other control rooms and administrators. A.Master control stations shall be equipped and wired as required to effect the functions described herein. Master control stations shall be located as indicated in the drawings. 2.3 Master Control Stations N. The system shall be user programmable. Information such as station numbers and page zone assignments as well as information to customize the system to the. installation shall be kept in non-volatile memory. Systems' which require a battery to maintain programming in formation are not acceptable. M. An interface shall be provided between the intercommunications system and the CCTV system. When a calI-from a door intercom station is answered, a signal shall be provided to the CCTV system which shall cause the associated camera to be armed and displayed on the control room video monitor. This system shall be controlled by the switching exchange. rDtercom remote stations to be included in this interface shall be as shown on the drawings; L. Designated administrative telephones may make paging announcements into a selected paging zone( zone page), into an entire paging area (area page) or into all zones in all areas simultaneously (all page). . . SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-8 95-052/12-95 ImV (74dB SPL @ 1 meter, 2W tap) Mic Signal Output: 89dB (400Hz to 4kHz, +/- 3dB @ 25V, 2W) SPL Output: 25 Volt line matching transformer tapped at 1/4, 1/2, 1,2 and 4 watts. Transformer: 3" Dynamic impregnated-cone speaker. Waterproof and puncture resistant construction. 2.50 z. ceramic magnet. 8 ohm voice coil impedance. Speaker/Microphone: TYPE A - Intercom station shall be flush mounted and shall be vandal-proof in design and construction, Rauland-Borg model HSSI4. The station shall be fabricated from 11 gauge carbon steel plate, with a heavy zinc undercoat and baked powdered epoxy finish. The station shall provide a speaker-microphone which shall be protected against tampering as well as damage caused by flame or liquid. The station shall be equipped with a momentary push-button type call-in switch. Tamper-proof mounting hardware shall be provided. The unit shall be mounted on wall, 56" AFF, unless shown under Division 8 drawings as being mounted in door frame. Coordinate with Division 8 Contractor for proper mounting and configuration at station back box. C. . Exterior speakers or high moisture area speakers shall be Misco FC8WP-4T25. General cone speakers shall be Rauland-Borg model US0215 or approved equal. Transformer: 25VJ70V line matching; taps: 5/16,5/8, 1-1/4,2-1/2,5 watts Flux Density: 9000 Gauss Voice Coil Diameter: 1" (2.5 cm) Voice Coil Impedance: 8 ohms Magnet: 10 ounces (283 gr), ceramic Sensitivity: 96dB @ 1 meter with 1 watt input Power Rating: 15 watts RMS 60 Hz to 16,000 Hz Frequency Range: 8" (20.32 cm) dual-cone permanent magnet Speaker Type: B. Except where noted otherwise, general cone speakers shall conform to the following specifications: . A. Intercom remote stations shall be located as shown on the drawings. 2.4 Intercom Remote Stations SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-9 95-052/12-95 . Baffle to be a Rauland-Borg model ACCI008. Provide flush or surface mount as required. ACC1108 or ACC Type Surface. ACCII09 rails to be furnished for lift out ceilings. Backbox: 10 3/4" (27.3 em) square; 3/4" (1.9 cm) deep. Baffle Size: Baffle Material: Self-aging aluminum alloy face backed with a heavy-gauge cold rolled stainless steel screen. Baffle Finish: Textured baked white enamel. Speaker Type: General cone speaker -- Speaker to be a Rauland-Borg model US0215. TYPE C - Intercom station shall consist of a flush, ceiling/wall mounted, 8" speaker/microphone. The speaker shall be flush or surface mounted with backbox as required for the ceiling or wall. Speaker baffle shall be vandal proof, constructed of cast aluminum alloy with a tensile strength of over 44,000 P.S.I. and shall be backed by a cold rolled stainless steel perforated screen. The baffle shall be secured with tamper proof screws. F. . One gang flush mounted electrical box. Backbox: 33/8" (8.57 cm) wide; 5 1/2" (13.97 cm) high; 2 1/4" (5.71 cm) deep. Overall Dimensions: 11 gauge stainless steel brushed finish. Faceplate: Type B intercom stations may be associated with any other type of intercom remote stations. When used in conjunction with such stations, the station shall serve as the call-in switch and the associated station shall serve as the audio station. Call Switch Type: Momentary, SPST, normally open. E. TYPE B - Intercom station shall be a flush mounted call-in switch station and shall be vandal-proof in design and construction, Rauland-Borg model HSS3. It shall be protected externally by an 11 gauge, stainless steel coverplate with brushed finish. The station shall be equipped with a momentary push-button type call-in switch. The word "CALL" shall be engraved beneath the switch. Tamper-proof mOullting hardware shall be provided. Three gang flush mounted electrical box. Backbox: 71/2" (19.05 cm) wide; 5 1/2" (13.97 cm) high; 2 1/4" (5.71 cm) deep. Overall Dimensions: II gauge carbon steel with baked powdered epoxy finish. Faceplate: . Momentary, SPST, normally open. Call-In Switch: . SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-10 95-052/12-95 B. Power amplifiers shall not be loaded in excess of 80 % of rated power output. Each amplifier shall be sized to provide at least two watts (RMS) of audio power for every paging speaker connected to it as well as a minimum of ten watts (RMS) of audio power for every paging horn connected to it. A. A separate power amplifier shall be provided for each of the local control areas. 2.5 Paging Power Amplifiers Speaker Model JC5WP-4T25. Transformer: 25V Line matching; taps: 1/4, 1/2 , 1, 2, and 4 watts Coil Diameter: 3/4" (2.5 cm) Coil Impedance: 8 ohms Magnet: 10 ounces, ceramic Sensitivity: 95dB @ 1 meter with 1 watt input Power Rating: 30 watts peak . 120 Hz to 8,000 Hz Frequency: Speaker Type: 4" moisture resistant I. TYPE F - Intercom station shall be a speaker station and shall be mounted in the light fixture of the cell. Coordinate with the security lighting contractor for placement and mounting of the speaker. H. TYPE E - Intercom station shall be a dual call-in type station. The station shall be identical to the TYPE A intercom station except that the station shall incorporate two call-in switches. The two switches may be used to place call-in's to separate master control stations. The designation of the master control station being called shall be engraved beneath the switch. Baffle shall be Rauland ACCl004. Provide flush or surface mount as required. ACC1102 for surface mount and ACC1100 for flush mount. Provide ACC1104 furnished for lift out ceilings. Backbox: 12 1/2" square; 5/16 deep. Baffle Size: Baffle Material: Heavy duty CRS with subplate. Baffle Finish: Textured baked white epoxy. . TYPE D - Intercom station for non secure areas shall consist of a flush, ceiling/wall mounted, 8" speaker/microphone. The speaker shall be flush or surface mounted with backbox as required for the ceiling or wall. Speaker baffle shall be constructed of heavy gauge CRS steel with white epoxy finish. It shall be square and be provided with subplate for mounting speaker and backbox. Speaker Type: General cone speaker -- Speaker to be a Rauland-Borg model US0215. G. SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-11 95-052/12-95 . B. A dedicated switch shall be provided in the control room lock system console which shall allow the officer to select which cells or other speakers are to be monitored. Where these same speakers are to be used as part of the sound disturbance alarm system, the "IC" position of the switch panel shall be used to enable the monitor function. 2. A press-to-talk button shall be provided to allow the officer to talk to the cell currently being monitored. 1. The monitor panel shall provide a built-in automatic level control. No volume control shall be required. The monitor panel shall be a RauIand-Borg model MCC300. A. The security monitoring system shall allow the watch officer to listen to each cell over a dedicated monitor panel to be provided in the control room lock system panel. 2.6 Security Monitoring System Amplifiers to be RauIand-Borg FAX Series. UL 1480 approved UL Listing: . Thermal cut-off, electronic overload circuit, AC line fuse Circuit Protection: Slo-Blo AC Line Fuse: Voltage Outputs: 25V CT, 25V, 44.7V, 70.7V Power "on" LED, Protection LED La-cut on-off switch Controls and Indicators: Level Control r. 20 K-ohms nominal, switchable, unbalanced or transformer isolated balanced Input Impedance: 0.3 volt for rated power Input Sensitivity: Better than 2db from full load to no load Regulation: 80 db below rated output Hum and Noise: -3, + 1 db, 60 Hz to 15,000 Hz Less than 2 % @RPO, 60 Hz to 15,000Hz Total Harmonic Distortion: Frequency Response: All Power Amplifiers shall meet the following specifications: c. . . SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-12 95-052/12-95 B. The supervising agent of the manufacturer shall provide a completed test results form for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. . The contractor must contract with a manufacturers authorized agent or installation firm to test and certify the system meets all provisions of the specifications and that the system is fully functional. A service technician authorized by the manufacturer of the communications equipment shall supervise and participate during all of the following checks, adjustments, and tests of the system. I. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 2. Check presence and audibility of sound at all devices. 3. Check installation, and operation of all devices. 4. Each condition that the system is required to perform should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal and the correct activation of the control points. 5. The manufacturer's manual should also be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying the controls performance by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar incoming signals. A. 3.02 Test: A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and outlet boxes, and shall furnish and install all equipment and wiring in accordance with applicable local, state, and national codes, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications. The contractor may contract with a manufacturers authorized equipment installer for any portion of the installation, but is ultimately responsible for the complete installation. 3.01 Installation: PART 3 - EXECUTION . Corridor Speaker Cable................. WP292 Substation Cable....................... WP357 Cell Station Cable..................... WP357 Control Console Cable...... WP357 /WP260/WP438 Microphone Cable................. WP292/WP357 2.7 CABLE REQUIREMENTS SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK 16744-13 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16744 A. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment to the Owner for a period of one (I) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. B. The contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. C. Copies of these warranties, along with phone numbers and addresses of the manufacturer, contractor, and supervising agent shall be included. 3.07 Warranty: C. All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes,. panel boards and similar appurtenances. B. Prior to commencement and after completion of work, notify authorities having jurisdiction. A. Permits necessary for installation of the work shall be obtained prior to the commencement of work. . 3.06 Permits and Approvals: B. Provide two four hour sessions of on-site instructions, with a complete and functioning system, for the designated owner representatives from the system manufacturer's authorized agent. This agent shall 'have a full working knowledge of this installed system and be fully prepared to present this information to the Owner to their satisfaction. "Hands-on" demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. A. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide,a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the Owner for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. 3.05 Instruction: A. At the final inspection, a trained representative shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.04 Final Inspection: B. The contractor shall note in his system drawings, the type and locations of these protection devices as well as all wiring information. A. The contractor shall provide all necessary transient protection on the AC power feed and on all station lines leaving or entering the building. ' 3.03 Protection: . NURSE CALL SYSTEM 16745-1 95-052/12-95 . Shop Drawings: The contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal: A. 1.05 Submittal Requirements A. The contractor must have successfully installed systems of the same type and design as specified, or have a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having the required manufacturers' training and experience. 1.04 Qualifications of the Installer C. Provide call cancellation button on nurse call station. B. Provide nurse call stations where shown on the drawings which will sound a tone and light an indicating lamp at the control stations master panel. A. It is intended that each local control area shall have independent operation. 1.03 System Operation The system shall include, but not be limited to the following elements: 1. Power supplies, and control panels. 2. Equipment enclosures. 3. Nurse call stations. 4. Wiring and raceway. 5. Installation; testing and certification, and education labor. . A. 1.02 Materials and Services A. Provide a desk mounted nurse call system. The system and components shall be supplied by one manufacturer. . - . . 1. The system shall include all required hardware, raceways, interconnecting wiring and software to accomplish the requirements of this specification and the contract drawings, whether itemized or not. 2. All equipment furnished shall be new and products of a single manufacturer. 3, .In the interest of job coordination, the contractor shall contract with a single source for supplying job materials, services and final inspection/test services. 4. All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish the standards of performance, quality and appearance and is based upon equipment supplied by Richardson Associates (404-875-0083). Other manufacturers of similar equipment must submit for review and acceptance 10 days prior to bid and be listed in a pre bid addendum. 1.01 General Requirements PART 1 - GENERAL NURSE CALL SYSTEM SECTION 16745 . . NURSE CALL SYSTEM 16745-2 95-052/12-95 It shall be a high security wall mounted device which activate a normal call, sounding a tone and lighting the associated annunciator lamp. A. 2.2 Nurse Call Station B. Provide the necessary control modules and power supply for proper system operation. A. It shall be desk mounted and provide tone loudness control, lamp test switch and a minimum of fifteen annunciators. 2.1 Control Panel PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3. A copy of the system certification and final tests results, as called out in Part 3 of this section of specifications shall be included in this manual. 2. The manual shall be legible and easily read with large drawings folded and contained in pockets. Included in the manual shall be circuit drawings, wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment and a control sequence describing start up instructions. Included shall be installation instructions, maintenance instructions, safety precautions, test procedures, performance data, and documentation. . Maintenance Manuals: A complete operation and maintenance manual with two sets of installation drawings shall be submitted prior to the final inspection. 1. The following information shall be inscribed on the cover: a. "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" b. Building location. c. The name, address and phone number of the contractor, system manufacturer and system subcontractor. d. The name and phone number of the fire department required to respond to alarms at the project location. B. . Complete manufacturer's catalog data including physical dimensions, finish and mounting requirements. Submit panel configurations and interconnection units and all other data as required to make an informed judgment regarding product suitability. At a minimum, data shall be submitted on the following: a. Control panel. b. Power supplies. c. Equipment enclosures. d. Nurse call stations. e. Wire and cable. Data on security enclosures for all devices inside the hardline. Data describing more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate the type the contractor intends to provide for a given application. Complete drawings covering the following shall be submitted by the contractor for the proposed system: a. Floor plans showing all initiating, and control devices. Raceways shall be shown, marked for size, conductor count with type and size. b. Wiring diagrams showing points of connection and terminals used for all electrical connections to the system devices and panels. 4. 2. 3. 1. NURSE CALL SYSTEM 16745-3 95-052/12-95 . A. At the final inspection, a trained representative shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.04 Final Inspection: B. The contractor shall note in his system drawings, the type and locations of these protection devices as well as all wiring information. A. The contractor shall provide transient protection on the AC power feed. 3.03 Protection: B. The supervising agent of the manufacturer shall provide a completed test results form for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. The contractor must contract with a manufacturers authorized agent or installation firm to test and certify the system meets all provisions of the specifications and that the system is fully functional. A service technician authorized by the manufacturer of the communications equipment shall supervise and participate during all of the following checks, adjustments, and tests of the system. 1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 2. Check presence of audibility of signal at the control panel. 3. Check installation, and operation of all devices. 4. Each condition that the system is required to perform should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal and the correct activation of the control points. 5. The manufacturer's manual should also be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying the controls performance by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar incoming signals. . A. 3.02 Test: A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and outlet boxes, and shall furnish and install all equipment and wiring in accordance with applicable local, state, and national codes, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications. The contractor may contract with a manufacturers authorized equipment installer for any portion of the installation, but is ultimately responsible for the complete installation. 3.01 Installation: PART 3 - EXECUTION A. The cable shall be Penn # 357. 2.3 Cable It shall have a call placed lamp, call button and call cancel button. It shall be constructed of 11 gauge stainless steel and measure 6" x 6" . Provide a special backbox as required. B. . . NURSE CALL SYSTEM 16745-4 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 16745 . A. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment to the Owner for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. B. The contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. C. Copies of these warranties, along with phone numbers and addresses of the manufacturer, contractor, and supervising agent shall be included. 3.07 Warranty: C. All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panelboards and similar appurtenances. B. Prior to commencement and after completion of work, notify authorities having jurisdiction. A. Permits necessary for installation of the work shall be obtained prior to the commencement of work. 3.06 Permits and Approvals: B. Provide one two hour session of on-site instructions, with a complete and functioning system, for the designated owner representatives from the system manufacturer's authorized agent. This agent shall have a full working knowledge of this installed system and be fully prepared to present this information to the Owner to their satisfaction. "Hands-on" demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. A. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the Owner for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. . 3.05 Instruction: CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM 16747-1 95-052/12-95 . All Closed Circuit Video Equipment required by the plans and specifications shall be connected to provide the following characteristics: 1. The output from each camera shall be connected to a designated video multiplexer. The multiplexed output from this multiplexer shall be connected to a video recorder and the Allegiant Microprocessor Input Control Module. The looping outputs on the multiplexer shall be connected tq the inputs on the quad multivision picture processors arid to the Allegiant Microprocessor Input Control Module. The quad display outputs from subject processors shall be connected to the Allegiant Microprocessor Input Control Module. A OPERATION: 1.02 Equipment must be furnished by an installer/supplier with a minimum of five years experience in the installation of similar type systems. The contractor is fully responsible for the installation of the equipment and to assure that this installation meets the intent of this specification and must be shown to be correct and acceptable to the engineer. Any items found not acceptable will be' corrected immediately by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. Any proposed substitutions shall comply in all respects with the requirements of this document and shall be submitted for approval ten (10) days prior to the bid opening date. Pre-bid proposal submittal shall be specific to this project and include drawings showing all devices and required wiring, catalog cuts of all proposed system components, detailed system operation description, proof of installers qualifications. name and address of at least three similar systenis previously installed by alternate supplier, and list of all exceptions, variances and substitutions. D. All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish, the standards of performance, quality and appearance. The acceptable manufacturer of the equipment as listed is Burle. . c. B. The Closed Circuit Video System shall consist essentially ot: but not be limited to, the following - major components. interconnected toform.a complete system: I.' Remote color cameras including lens, housings, mounting brackets, surge suppressors. fiber optic interface equipment, power supplies and associated equipment as detailed in the equipment schedule (enclosed and/or listed onthe plans). 2. Color Video Monitors 3. Color multiplex digital picture processor. 4. Color digital picture processors. 5. Microprocessor based video switcher/controI system. 6. High resolution super VHS time lapse video recorder(s). 7. System wiring for power, video and controls. A The work include under this section of the specifications consists of the installation of a complete Closed Circuit Video System.' Provide all labor, materials, equipment and supervision to install, calibrate, adjust and checkout the total system 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM SECTION 16747 . . CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM 16747-2 . CAMERAS: 1. Provide 1/2" fonnat high resolution Color CcD Cameras in all locations requiring fixed cameras as shown on the plans. Each fixed Camera shall provide a minimum horizontal resolution of 460 lines utilizing a 1/2" IT Color CCD Pickup Element with a scanning area of 7. 95mm (H) by 66.45mm (Y). Each Camera shall provide internallline synchronization system with video signal to noise ratio of 48dB, minimum scene illumination of 1.5 Lux, built-in automatic gain control circuit and electronic shutter speeds of 1/60 to 1/10,000. Each Camera shall be provided with BNC 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohm Video Output, Y/c S- VHS Video Output and Auto Iris Connector. All cameras shall operate 24V AC, 60Hz power source with a maximum of 8 Watts power consumption. Cameras shall be designed to operate in temperatures from -lOoC to 500 C with humidity of 30% to 90%. 2. All fixed cameras shall be equipped with Pentax Auto Iris fixed focal length Lenses. Specific focal length and aperture of lenses utilized for each camera location shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation of the system and reviewed prior to acceptance of the system by the owner. At the discretion of the Owner's Representative, the system supplier shall replace at no charge any and all lenses found to provide unsatisfactory field of view. 3. Provide integral modular Autodome Units with 1/3" fonnat color camera, 10: 1 auto-iris auto-focus zoom lens, variable and high speed 3600 panltilt and intelligent integral receiver/driver at all locations requiring panltiltlzoom capability. 4. All fixed exterior cameras shall be equipped with type Tc9340-2 Environmental Enclosures with heater, blower and sunshield, and type WM2000 Mounts, type AH2000 Adjustable Heads and type PA102 Pole Adapters (as required). DESCRIPTION . The outputs from each camera and the connections to the video multiplexers shall be coordinated with the engineer prior to bid. This is required to assure that all parties are completely familiar with all aspects of this system. A block wiring diagram shall be produced by the equipment supplier prior to the coordination for review ofthe engineer. This diagram must be produced by all parties wishing to be acceptable as a supplier/installer of this equipment. Individual outputs from the Allegiant Microprocessor Output Control Modules shall be provided and connected to each system monitor. This shall allow the operators of the system to view the outputs of any of the system multiplexers, any of the system quad picture processors and any single camera on any of the system monitors while continuously record all cameras on the two primary system video recorders. A video multiplexer and a video recorder shall be utilized with the video monitor located in the equipment rack for playback of previously recorded tapes and as backup in the event one of the multiplexers or recorders should fail. Outputs (normally open dry contacts) from the intercom system shall be connected to the Allegiant Microprocessor Alarm Inputs. This shall cause the specific cameras designated for each intercom station input to be automatically displayed on the designated monitors and recorded on a video recorder. Camera and monitor designation for each intercom input shall be field programmable. Full function Allegiant Keyboard (with joystick control) shall be provided at each monitor location. 95-052/12-95 A. 2.01 PART 2 - EQUIPMENT 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM 16747 -3 ,:=', COLOR QUAD COLOR DIGITAL PICTURE PROCESSORS: 1. Provide a minimum offour (4) type MV75 Multivision Color Digital Picture Processors. Processors shall be interconnected with cameras and other control equipment to provide operation as previously described. Processors shall be rack mounted in the cCTV Equipment Rack located in Equipment Room E085 in area 'E'. MULTIPLEXERS: 1. Provide three (4) type MV96 Multivision Plus Color Record/Display Multiplexers with rack mounting kits. Each Multiplexer shall be capable of providing full duplex record/display of up to sixteen (16) camera inputs. Multiplexers shall utilize dynamic time division multiplexing allocating recording time for each camera input based on activity detection. Each multiplexer shall also provide user programmable motion sensing for each camera input on a 16 high by 12 vertical grid. On-screen displays shall be provided by date, time, video loss detection and 10 character camera titles. VIDEO REcORDER(S): 1. Provide six (6) S-VHS High Resolution Time Lapse Video Recorder(s) as shown on the plans. All system video recorders shall be front loading, accept 1/2" S- VHS cassette tape, and be capable of record and playback at the following operator selectable speeds: 2, 12,24,48, 72, 120, 168,240,360,480,600 and 720 hours and include a I-shot mode. To ensure proper record operation, the unit shall provide Record Check capability. 2. Each recorder shall have a seven day programmable timer which shall be capable of starting and stopping the recording for any two selectable periods for each day of the week. The recorders. shall automatically clean the video heads when a cassette tape is inserted, ejected, or rewound in the recycle record mode. 3. A minimum of twenty-four (24) blank high grade tapes shall be provided for each VCR All video recorders shall be rack mounted in the cCTV Equipment Rack located in Equipment Room E085 in area 'E'. MONITORS: 1. Provide High Resolution 20" Color CCTV Monitors with mounts capable of connection to the overhead rack as shown on the plans. Each Monitor shall provide a minimum of 400 horizontal lines resolution utilizing 20" diagonal 900 deflection display tube with integral implosion protection: Each Monitor shall provide two (2) BNc Video Inputs, two (2) Y/C 7-pin S-VHSVideo Inputs, one (1) EIAJ 8-pin VCR connector, and two (2) RCA phono audio input jacks. Monitor Cabinet shall be black finished steel with plastic front. All exterior cameras equipped with pan/tilt/zoom shall be mounted in integral environmentally rated dome housings and wall or pole mounts (as shown on the plans). Fiber optic cable shall be utilized for connection of all exterior cameras to the system monitor and control. equipment. Ali fiber optic. cable terminations shall be performed by Technicians certified by the fiber optic cable manufacturer. All interior cameras shall be equipped with high security camera enclosures. Equipment supplier shall. submit' enclosures for each camera location for approval by the Engineer prior to the project.bid.date. All camera c.1ble and wiring shall ternUnate in the cCTV Equipment Rack located in Equipment Room E085 in area 'E'. 95-052/12-95 . E. D. . c. B. 8. 7. 6. . 5. . B. All camera housings and support brackets shall be securely attached to mounting surfaces. Use lead shields on solid masonry, wood screws on wood and machine bolts on structural steel and lighting poles. All anchoring devices shall be rated to support not less than five times the total equipment weight. CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM 95-052/12-95 16747-4 A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and outlet boxes, and shall furnish and install all equipment and wiring in accordance with applicable local, state, and national codes, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications. The contractor may contract with a manufacturers authorized equipment installer for any portion of the installation, but is ultimately responsible for the complete installation. 3.01 Installation: PART 3 - EXECUTION . CABLE: 1. Provide type RG59/U Coaxial Cable as required for all interior video connections. Coaxial Cable shall have minimum #20 solid bare copper center conductor with 95% bare copper braid. All cable shall be installed in conduit. 2. Provide minimum two conductor #16 copper cable for camera and remote equipment 24V Ac power. Power cable not in conduit shall be plenum rated. 3. Provide West Penn Outdoor Loose Tube Fiber Optic Cable for all exterior video connections. A minimum of two (2) fibers shall be provided for each fixed exterior camera and a minimum offour (4) fibers shall be provided for each exterior camera equipped with panltilt/zoom. H. POWER SUPPLIES: 1. Provide type AL248UL Power Supplies as required to power all cameras and remote equipment requiring 24V AC power. G. . MICROPROCESSOR SWITCHER/CONTROL SYSTEM: 1. Provide a Burle type Tc8600 Allegiant Microprocessor Based Video Switcher/Control System with features and operation as described herein. System shall include, but not be limited to, the following components: a. TC8601 Series Equipment Bay b. TC8610 Equipment Rack c. TC8610 Microprocessor Module d. Tc8805 Power Supplies e. Tc8620 Video Input Modules f. Tc8834 Video Output Modules g. TC8808 Video Interconnect Panels h. TC8553 Keyboards with type Tc8557HL Cables and type Tc8557HR Hook-Up Kits 1. TC8540C Alarm Interface Units j. TC8659 PC Software Package k. Gateway (IBM PC Compatible) 486DX2/66rvtHz Computer (with rack mounting kit) with a minimum of 4MB RAM, 120MB Hard Disk, 3.5" and 5.25" disk drives, 14" Super VGA (non-interlaced) Color Monitor, Microsoft Mouse, DOS 6.22, one serial port and one parallel port 2. Allegiant System and all previously listed components shall be rack mounted in a Lowell type L68 Cabinet with textured black powder coat finish. F. ,- - CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM 16747-5 95-052/12-95 . A. Permits necessary for installation of the work shall be obtained prior to the commencement of work B. Prior to commencement and after completion of work, notify authorities having jurisdiction. C. All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to materi~ type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outIetandjunction boxes, circuits and similar appurtenances. 3.05 Permits and Approvals: B. Provide two four hour sessions of on-site instructions, with a complete and functioning system, for the designated owner representatives from the system manufacturer's authorized agent. This agent shall have a full working knowledge of this installed system and be fully prepared to present this information to the Owner to their satisfaction. "Hands-on" demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. A. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the Owner for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. 3.04 Instruction: A. At the final inspection, a trained representative shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.03 Final Inspection: . B. The supervising agent of the manufacturer shall provide a completed test results form for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. A. The contractor must contract with a manufacturers authorized agent or installation firm to test and certify the system meets all provisions of the specifications and that the system is fully functional. A service technician authorized by the manufacturer of the ccTV equipment shall - supervise and participate during all of the following checks, adjustments, and tests of the system. 1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 2. Check function of monitors and mutiplex switchers. 3. Check function of video recorders and playback features.. 4. Verify that the em~rgency transfer system and system shut down actuates properlY_ 5. Verify that any control location may receive and control any camera. 6. Check interfaces with all other systems'and'the proper function of those interfaces. 7. Check installation, and operation of all cameras. 8. Each condition and function that the system is required to perform should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the monitors and the correct activation of the control points. 9. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying the controls performance by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar. Test: 3.02 . J . CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM 16747-6 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16747 . A. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment to the Owner for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. B. The contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. C. Copies of these warranties, along with phone numbers and addresses of the manufacturer, contractor, and supervising agent shall be included. 3.06 Warranty: LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-1 95-052/12-95 . A. The system shall include, but not be limited to the following elements: 1. Fire Alarm Control Panels (FAcP). 2. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers. 3. Equipment enclosures. 4. Addressable manual stations, heat detectors and smoke detectors. 5. Audible and visual evacuation signals. 6. Remote Alphanumeric Annunciators. 7. Software and firmware as required to provide a complete functioning system. 8. Wiring and raceway. 9. Installation, testing and certification, and education labor. 1.02 Materials and Services Provide a microprocessor based addressable fire alarm system. The system and components shall be supplied by one manufactUrer. 1. The system shall include all required hardware, raceways, interconnecting wiring and software to accomplish the requirements of this specification and the contract drawings, whether itemized or not. 2. All equipment furnished shall be new and products of a single manufacturer. 3. In the interest of job coordination, the contractor shall contract with a single source for supplying job materials, services and programming, including final inspection/test services. 4. All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish the standards of performance, quality and appearance and is based upon equipment designed and manufactured by Edwards System Technology (EST). A supplier for this equipment is Major Electronics @ 770-509-3820 - (Mike Monroe). Notifier AM2020 System, subject to full compliance with the plans and specifications, shall be acceptable. Other manufacturers of similar equipment must submit for review and acceptance 10 days prior to bid and be listed in a prebid addendum. . A. 1.01 General Requirements PART 1 - GENERAL LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM SECTION 16748 . . LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-2 95-052/12-95 A. The contractor must have successfully installed fire alarm systems of the same type and design as specified, or have a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having the required manufacturers' training and experience. ' 1.05 Qualifications of the Installer A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. The latest version of each listed publication shall be used as a guide unless the authority having jurisdiction has adopted an earlier version. 1. Factory Mutual (FM) a. FM AG Approval Guide 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFP A 70 National Electrical Code. b. NFP A 72 National Fire Alarm Code. c. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. 3. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) a. Appropriate UL Standards. 4. Local, State and National Building Codes as adopted by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 Codes and References . C. Actuation of any carbon monoxide detector shall immediately cause the following actions to be initiated: 1. Identify the specific device activated and location on the display at the fire alarm control panel and at the remote annunciators. 2. Cause the system supervisory LED to flash at the fire alarm control panel. 3. Cause audible trouble signals to sound at the fire alarm control panel and at the remote annunciators. 4. Send a signal to the HV Ac system to turn on the vehicular sally port exhaust fans. B. Operation of the alarm acknowledge switch at the fire alarm control panel shall permit the silencing of the alarm signals during the alarm condition. The silencing of the alarm signals shall not prevent the resounding of the alarm devices should a subsequent alarm condition occur. A. Actuation of any fire alarm initiating device shall immediately cause the following actions to be initiated: 1. Identify the type of alarm, specific device and location on the backlit LCD display at the fire alarm control panel and at the remote annunciators. 2. Cause the system alarm LED to flash at the fire alarm control panel. 3. Cause audible alarm signals to sound. 4. Cause all visual alarm signals to flash. 5. Activate signals to shut down designated air handling units. 6. Activate the digital communicator to report the type of alarm and location to a remote monitoring station (required telephone line and charges for central station monitoring shall be the responsibility of the building owner). 7. Activate signals to the door lock control equipment to cause designated door locks to release. . System Operation 1.03 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-3 95-052/12-95 . 3. A copy of the system certification and final tests results, as called out in Part 3 of this section of specifications shall be included in this manual. 2. The manual shall be legible and easily read with large drawings folded and contained in pockets. Included in the manual shall be circuit drawings, wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment and a control sequence 'describing start up instructions. Included shall be installation instructions, maintenance instructions, safety precautions, test procedures, performance data, and software documentation. B. Maintenance Manuals: A complete operation and maintenance manual with two sets of installation drawings shall be submitted prior to the final inspection. 1. The following infortDation shall be inscribed on the cover: a. "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" b. Building location. c. The name, address and phone number of the contractor, system manufacturer and system subcontractor. d. The name and phone number of the fire department required to respond to alarms at the project location. . A. Shop Drawings:The contractor shall include the, following infortDation in the equipment submittal: 1. Complete manufacturer's catalog data including supervisory power usage, alarm power usage, physicaldiqiensions, finish and mounting requirements. Submit panel configuration and - interconnection of modules and all other' ~ta as required to make an informed judgement , regarding product suitability. At a minimu,m,.data shall be submitted on the following: a. Fire alarm control panel. b. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers. c. Equipment enclosures. d.Addressable interface and control modules. e. Wire and cable. 2. Power calculations. a. Battery capacity calculations. b. Supervisory power requirements for all equipment. c. Alarm power requirements f9r all equipment. - 3. Data describing more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate the type the contractor intends to provide for a- given application. 4. Complete drawings covering the following shall be submitted by the contractor for the proposed system: a. Floor plans showing all initiating, end of line, supervisory , indicating appliances, and output control devices. Raceways shall be shown, marked for size, conductor count with type and size. b. Wiring.diagrams'showing points of connection and terminals used foral.! electrical connections to the system devices and panels. ' , 1.06 Submittal Requirements . . LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-4 95-052/12-95 . B. Controllers shall differentiate between long term drift above the prealarm threshold (maintenance alert, indicative of the need for cleaning) and a fast rise above the prealarm threshold (indicative of a smoldering fire). The Maintenance Alert shall be annunciated as an alert on the LCD only and shall not be confused as a Trouble or an Alarm. The unit shall contain a real time clock, tactile feel keypad (16 keys) with 19 functions, (2) buttons for scrolling data on the LCD, (4) front panel switches for Reset, Alarm and Trouble Silence and Drill/All Call, and (5) LED's for Normal, Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Test/Program. C. During the normal state, the Normal LED (green) shall flash, the first line of the LCD shall display the time (HH:MM:SS) as well as the number of active points (" AP") and the number of disabled points ("DP") in the system. When the control panel goes into the alarm condition the (green) Normal LED extinguishes and the (red) Alarm LED shall light, the buzzer pulsates and the LCD indicates the time, the number of messages waiting, the type of alarm, the Alarm zone or device number, ~d the time that the Alarm occurred. The second line is dedicated to the user specified message. To acknowledge the alarm, the operator shall press the NET / AcK button, and the buzzer will silence providing there is not an additional alarm waiting. If there are additional alarms waiting the operator shall acknowledge all pending alarms before the buzzer will silence. To silence the audible devices the operator shall press the Alarm Silence button. A new alarm shall cause the audible devices to resound. To reset the network the operator shall press the Reset button. D. During a Trouble condition, the amber Trouble LED shall light, the Normal LED shall go out, and the Buzzer shall pulsate. The display shall indicate "Superv. Open" and the zone or device number. The operator shall silence the Buzzer by acknowledging all messages and pressing the Trouble Silence button. During the Supervisory condition the amber Supervisory LED shall light, the Normal LED shall go out, and the Buzzer shall pulsate. The LCD shall indicate ("Superv. Short") and the zone number. The operator shall silence the Buzzer by acknowledging all messages and pressing the Trouble Silence button. E. Each Master and Slave Controller shall support any two (2) of the following traditional or intelligent option cards simultaneously in any combination: ZB8-2; ZB8-5; ZB8-8; ZA4-2; ZAS-l; ZAS-2; ZBO-8; ZR8-2. The controller shall support and control any combination up to (52) additional true networked control modules type CM2N, cM2ND or polled cM2, IRC-l, Audio Control Panel, and serial annunciators and switches. Each controller shall contain a RS-232 printer/programming port for programming locally via an IBM PC or down loading through modems from a remote PC. When operational each controller shall be capable of supporting a printer through the RS-232 port and be capable of message routing. The Network Master shall have the following additional features without any changes in hardware or firmware: 1. Regenerative Network programming. 2. Logic Statements. 3. Time Controls. 4. Sequences. 5. Actions. 6. Weekday/Holiday Schedules. 7. Analog Value Reporting of all analog sensors and traditional zones. 8. Maintenance Reporting By Intelligent Sensor. A. The fire alarm control panel shall be an Intelligent Response Controller (IRC-3 type CMIN or type RMDP-IN Network Master). The master and slave controllers shall be modular. The master controller shall have an 80 character back lit Alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with two (2) 40 character lines. 2.01 Fire Alarm Control Panel . PART 2 - PRODUCTS ~ ;' ~ ~'1- - I ;i;.~; LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-5 95-052/12-95 . 9. Sensitivity Setting by Sensor (within UL Limits) of addressable detectors. 10. Sensitivity Setting changed by. time (Day/Night Mode). 11. Alarm Verification by point or zone (0 to 60 seconds). 12. Print a history of Sensors Activating the Verification Cycle. 13. On demand system condition printouts (status). ' 14. Up to 99 priorities for any event driven relay/output. 'IS. Enabling and Disabling of any system device or function. 16. Ground Fault Detection on all system devices arid inputs. F., .Provide PS8A and type APS8A P()wer Supplies as required to power all system devices and provide a minimum of 25 % reserve power. The Fire Alarm System power supplies snail be inherently power limited ,with built in transient protection. .5 Vdc and 24 Vdc power shall be generated from 120 Vac primary power for ancillary devices" indicating devices and internal control panel functions. Groimd fault detection circuitry shall be integral to the supply and report any internal fault conditions to the Fire' Alarm System. High efficiency switch mode technology shall be used to reduce battery requirements and heat generation. The power supplies shall be capable of charging up to 60 Ampere Hour, sealed Lead-acid Batteries. A battery saver feature shall be employed to prevent battery damage due to excessive deep discharge. Power supply terminals shall be capable ofterminating 14 AWG wire: G. Provide type ZAS-2 Analog Addressable Device Interface Modulesas required for system operation as described herein. The communication format between the ZAS-2 and the devices shall be 100% digital. Communication to must incorporate BROADCAST POLLING and DIRECT ADDRESS SEARCH. Wire the ZAS-2 loop controller circuit as Class A (Style 4) or Class B (Style 7) without twisted or shielded wire. Wire branch circuits (T-Taps) from Class B circuits. The system controller through the ZAS-2 shall provide the sensitivity and alarm verification of individual detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically set the sensitivity of individual detectors during day and night periods. It shall be possible for the ZAS-2 to address all devices connected to it without having to set switches at the individual devices. It shall be possible to obtain a mapping report of all devices connected to the circuit for confirmation of wiring. The map shall show physical wiring of T -Taps, device types, and the panel addresses of devices connected to the circuit. The ZAS-2 shall be capable of reporting unexpected additional device addresses, missing device addresses and changes to the wiring in the data circuit. A specific trouble will be reported for any off normal non-alarm condition. The ZAS-2 circuit controller shall be able to report device serial number, device address, device type, date of manufacture, hours of operation, last maintenance date, current detector sensitivity values and the extent of environmental compensation, original detector sensitivity values upon manufacture, number of recorded alarms and troubles, analog pattern at the time of the last alarm and any of 32 possible trouble codes for each device connected to the ZAS-2 circuit. Should a ZAS-2 CPU fail to communicate with the devices connected to it for more than four seconds the circuit shall go into stand-alone mode. The circuit shall act like a conventional alarm receiving circuit in stand-alone mode. H. Provide type UIO-12 Universal I/O Modules as required to supervise and control alarm indicating circuits and auxiliary output circuits. Each remote monitoring and control module shall be a multi-function module with twelve (12) circuits in a single enclosure. The modules shall be low current and microprocessor controlled. Each circuit of the remote monitoring module shall be capable of being configured as a Style B Initiating Device Circuit, Style Y Indicating Appliance Circuit, or control circuit configured as supervised or dry contact, non supervised. Each output circuit shall have a riser input and may individually be configured for 24 Vdc devices, audio circuits, or firefighter telephone circuits. The module shall prevent power from being applied to a shorted circuit. All off-normal circ.uit status conditions shall be reported to the system controller. Intercept the existing alarm indicating cirtuits and auxiliary control circuits, install terminal strips and extent wiring to UIO-12 Modules. I. Provide type CAB Wall Mount Enclosures as required. The control panel enclosures shall be UL and ULc listed, surface or semi-flush mounted. . . . LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-6 95-052/12-95 C. Horn Strobe Units and Strobe Units mounted within the designated areas (inside "Hard Line") shall be equipped with red vandal resistant wire guards. B. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans type 202-7A-OOl Strobe Visual Alarm Signals. Each strobe shall provide 75 candela light output at a flash rate of one flash per second. A. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans type 792-7 A-006 combination Horn Strobe Alarm Signals. Each unit shall provide 75 candela light output at a flash rate of one flash per second. Each horns shall provide a sound pressure output of 92 dBA average (103 dBA peak) at 24 VDc. 2.05 Alarm Signals: A. Sprinkler flow and valve supervisory switches shall be furnished and installed by the sprinkler contractor. This contractor shall furnish type SIGA-WTM Addressable Input Modules to monitor each sprinkler flow and each sprinkler valve supervisory switch and connect these devices to the fire alarm system. 2.04 Sprinkler Flow and Valve Supervisory Switches: . A. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans type SIGA-IPHS Intelligent 4D Multisensor Detectors with type SIGA-SB Bases. Each detector shall integrate three sensing technologies (ionization, photoelectric and heat) within one device. Each detector shall incorporate non-volatile memory, automatic device mapping, electronic addressing environmental compensation and integral Dllcroprocessor. B. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans for duct mounted locations type SIGA-DMP Duct Detector Mounting Plates with type SIGA-IPHS Intelligent 4D Multisensors and type SIGA-RB Detector Mounting Bases with integral relay. Intelligent 4D Multisensors shall be suitable for air velocities up to 5,000 feet per minute. C. Detectors mounted in designated areas (inside "Hard Line") shall be equipped with type 2000 (or equal) Vandal Resistant Guards. Guards shall be painted (prior to instaIlation) by the General Contractor to match the surrounding ceiling or wall structure. D. If multi sensor detectors are not used, a smoke detector and a heat detector shall be installed at each detector location. 2.03 Smoke Detectors: A. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans type SIGA-270 Addressable Manual Stations. Manual Stations shall be constructed of die-cast zinc and finished with red epoxy powder coat paiI;lt. The integral microprocessor in each station shall provide self-diagnostics and history log, automatic device mapping, and stand-alone operation. Mount stations on a 4" square box with single gang nng. 2.02 Manual Stations: . Provide sealed maintenance free lead acid batteries to provide backup power as required to provide a minimum of sixty (60) hours system operation in the standby mode with a minimum of ten (10) minutes sounding of all alarm signals at the end of the sixty hour period. System batteries shall be mounted in the equipment enclosures or in a separate battery enclosure. J. LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-7 95-052/12-95 . B. The supervising agent of the manufacturer shall provide a completed test results form for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. A. The contractor must contract with a manufacturers authorized agent or installation firm to test and certify the system meets all provisions of the specifications and that the system is fully functional. A service technician authorized by the manufacturer'of the fire alarm equipment shall supervise and participate during all of the following checks, 'adjustments, and tests of the system. 1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 2. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 3. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 4. Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 5. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 6. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. 7. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all addressable smoke detectors using the Walk Test. 8. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points. 9. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying the controls performance by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar. . 3.02 Test: A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and outlet boxes, and shall' furnish and install all equipment and wiring in accordance with applicable local, state, and national codes, the manufacturer's'recommendations, these plans and specifications. The contractor may contract with a manufacturers authorized equipment installer for any portion of the installation, but is ultimately responsible for the complete 'installation. 3.01 Installation: PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Provide a type D2071 Dual Line FireA,larm Communicator Panel with power supply/battery charger and batteries. Required phone lines and phone jacks shall be the reSponsibility of the owner. 2.08 Remote Communicator: A. Provide where shown on the plans type CMDN-C Remote Alphanumeric Display/Annunciators with control switches and enable/disable key switch. Each annunciator shall incorporate a back-lit Alphanumeric display with four lines of 10 characters each. Each annunciator shall be 7" wide by 8" high and designed for flush mounting in a type 200032 flush box. 2.07 Remote Annunciators: . . LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-8 95-052/12-95 End of Section 16748 . A. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment to the Owner for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. B. The contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. e. Copies of these warranties, along with phone numbers and addresses of the manufacturer, contractor, and supervising agent shall be included. 3.06 Warranty: A. Permits necessary for installation of the work shall be obtained prior to the commencement of work. B. Prior to commencement and after completion of work, notify authorities having jurisdiction. e. All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panelboards and similar appurtenances. 3.05 Permits and Approvals: A. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the Owner for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. B. Provide two four hour sessions of on-site instructions, with a complete and functioning system, for the designated owner representatives from the system manufacturer's authorized agent. This agent shall have a full working knowledge of this installed system and be fully prepared to present this information to the Owner to their satisfaction. "Hands-on" demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. 3.04 Instruction: A. At the final inspection, a trained representative shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. . 3.03 Final Inspection: DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-1 95-052/12-95 . F. Sample of each type of switch to be utilized in the panels. E. Elementary control diagram of control panel. D. Detailed full scale drawings of the panels and samples of the materials from which the graphic panel shall be constructed. C. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams. B. Include copies of supplier's published component data sheets and product warranties. A. Provide manufacturer's roughing-in diagrams, product specifications and instructions for installation, operation and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: 3. Door lock equip. cabinet with control logic, relays and power supplys, as required for each area and pod. Graphic door annunciator and lock control panels for Pod Control areas. 2. . 1. Graphic door annunciator and lock control panel for Main Control area "D". B. The work covered by this Section of the Specifications shall include all labor, equipment, materials and services to furnish and install a complete and functional graphic door annunciation and lock control system. The system shall be "stand alone". It shall in no way be an integral part of any other system on this project such as Fire Alarm, Intercom, Closed Circuit Television, etc. Any interface or interconnection to any other system shall ONLY be accomplished through relay contact closures, both to and from the Door Annunciator and Lock Control system. All operations shall be as herein described and as shown on the drawings. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following: A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment, and services to complete and coordinate all electrical work with the architect, suppliers, subcontractors, and inspectors, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both except as for items specifically indicated as "NIC ITEMS". 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: PART 1 - GENERAL DOOR ANNUNCIATORS AND LOCK CONTROLS SECTION 16749 . . DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-2 95-052/12-95 A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and pay all fees in connection with the testing of the door annunciator and lock control system. All system devices shall be tested for their correct operation. All tests carried out shall meet the requirement of the local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 TESTING: B. All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panel boards and similar appurtenances. A. Permits necessary for installation of the work shall be obtained prior to the commencement of work. All permit costs and inspections fees shall be included as part of the required work. 1.04 'PERMITS AND APPROVALS: 3. A copy of the system certification and fina1 tests results, as called out in Part 3 of this section of specifications shall be included in this manual. . The manual shall be legible and easily read with large drawings folded and contained in pockets. Included in the manual shall be circuit drawings, wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment and a control sequence describing start up instructions. Included shall be installation instructions, maintenance instructions, safety precautions, test procedures, performance data, and software documentation. 2. A. Maintenance Manuals: A complete operation and maintenance manual with two sets of installation drawings shall be submitted prior to the final inspection. 1. The following information shall be inscribed on the cover: a. "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" b. Building location. c. The name, address and phone number of the contractor, system manufacturer and system subcontractor. d. The name and phone number of the fire department required to respond to alarms at the project location. 1.03 MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Provide description of operation of system similar to that provided in this specification, to include any and all exceptions, variances, or substitutions listed at the time of bid. Any such exceptions, variances or substitutions which were not listed at the time of bid and are identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment. H. Provide list of all types of equipment and components provided. . Detailed drawings of the lock control graphic panel and specifications on the power supply. G. DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-3 95-052/12-95 . A. Equipment descriptions are intended to indicate type and quality of design and material, as well as operating features. The numbers in this section are those of Icotech, Inc., P.O. Box 186, Marbury, Alabama 36051, (phone 205-569-2233) and shall be the quality and type of materials supplied. Other manufacturers will be considered only by complete submittal as described under paragraph 1.02 of this section ten (10) days prior to bid and listed in a prebid addendum. 1.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: D. "The undersigned, having been engaged as the Electrical Contractor on the (NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE PROJECT) confirms that the door annunciator and lock control system was installed in accordance with the wiring.diagranis, instructions and directions provided to us by the manufacturer. .. Upon completion of the installation of the system equipment, the electrical contractor shall provide to the architect a signed written statement, substantially in form as follows: C. . B. The contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (I) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. A. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment to the Owner for a' period of one (1) year from the'date of final acceptance of the system. 1.08 WARRANTY: A. The Contractor shall coordinate work in this Section with all related trades and work and/or equipment provided in other Sections and related to the doorannimciator and lock control system. ' , 1.07 RELATED WORK: B. Store cartons inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable waterproof wrapping. A. Deliver each piece of equipment in durable shipping cartons. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required'to prevent damage and eliminate dirt and moisture. PRODUCT HANDLING: 1.06 . . DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-4 95-052/12-95 . Door Unlock with Interlock When the "UNLOCK" switch is pressed for any typical door, if the yellow interlock indicator is not illumiruued, the door shall momentarily unlock for one second. If during the unlock period the door has not been opened, then the lock shall relock, attempting to secure the door. When the door is unlocked, the lock bolt retracts to allow the door to be opened. When opened the lock bolt extends. When the door is closed the door automatically locks shut. If the yellow interlock LED is illuminated, the INTERLOCK OVERIDE switch must be pressed and held pressed while also pressing the unlock switch. Activation of the switch is annunciated by a tactile "snap action" and an audible beep. There shall be a dual color red & green LED indicator for each door (at the graphic location of the door and above the switch for the door) to indicate the status of the door. The LED shall illuminate green when the door is closed and locked (secure). The LED shall illuminate red anytime the door is open or unlocked (unsecure). There shall also be yellow LED indicators for each interlocked door, both at the graphic location of the door and above the switch for the door to indicate the interlocked status of the door. All yellow LED I S in an interlock group shall illuminate when any door in the group is unsecure. See interlock overide function description for additional operational information. c. B. Door Unlock When the "UNLOCK" switch is pressed for any typical door, the door shall momentarily unlock for one second. If during the unlock period the door has not been opened, then the lock shall relock, attempting to secure the door. When the door is unlocked, the lock bolt retracts to allow the door to be opened. When opened the lock bolt extends. When the door is closed the door automatically locks shut. Activation of the switch is annunciated by a tactile "snap action" and an audible beep. There shall be a dual color red & green LED indicator for each door (at the graphic location of the door and above the switch for the door) to indicate the status of the door. The LED shall illuminate green when the door is closed and locked (secure). The LED shall illuminate red anytime the door is open or unlocked (unsecure). A. The system shall consist of graphic door annunciator and lock control (DALCP) panels connected to a common door lock equipment cabinet (DLEC). DALCP's shall be installed in Main Control room and each Pod control room and shall annunciate and control the doors designated on the plans to be controlled from that room. The door annunciator and lock control panels shall provide discrete momentary snap action pushbutton switchs and LED lamps for each door lock (or group of door locks), lighting circuit, television outlet, dayroom telephone, intercom station, c.c.t.v. camera, etc. as designated on the plans or indicated by the specifications. The operation of the various functions shall be as described below . SYSTEM OPERATION: 1.10 DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-5 95-052/12-95 . G. Fire Emergency Release When a contact closure is received from the fire alarm system the specified group of doors shall unlock and stay unlocked. All affected door red LED lamps shall flash and a beeping tone shall sound. Three red LED lamps labeled "FIRE EMERGENCY RELEASE" shall flash indicating that the fire alarm system has uniocked the "Fire Release" doors. When the fire alarm system/device is reset, the normal door operation shall resume, the flashing doorunsecure indicators shall glow steady and the flashing fire emergency release indicators shall extinguish. The door unsecure LED's shall go back to normal operation when the door is secured. F. Monitored Only Door Status There shall be a dual color red & green LED indicator for each door (at the graphic location of the door to indicate the status of the door. The LED shall illuminate green when the door is closed and locked (secure). The LED shall illuminate red anytime the door is open or unlocked (unsecure) . Interlock Override The door interlock system interconnects a group of locks to prevent electrically unlocking more than one door at a time. Yellow LED's are located at each door within the graphic panel in the interlock group and at the control switches. All yellow LED's of an interlock group shall be illuminated when anyone door within the group is unsecure. The interlock override switch, when activated, shall allow the opening or unlocking of any or all other locks or doors in an interlock group when one or more doors in the group is unlocked. Wbilethe override function is enabled (switch is pressed and held pressed), a pulsating audible tone shall be sounded and the three yellow LED's above the overide switch shall flash. 'Also, the yellow interlock indicators located at each switch and at each door within the graphic shall momentarily extinguish. When override has been accomplished, the audible tone shall cease. .The yellow LED's for all doors in the interlock group shall remain illuminated until all doors in the group are secured. Activation of the switch is annunciated by a tactile "snap action" and an audible beep. . E. Raise - Stop - Lower Switches (Roll-Up Doors) Momentarily activating the raise switch applies power to the door allowing the device to open if , the yellow interlock indicator is not illuminated. Momentarily activating the stop switch' immediately removes power and'stops the door from further travel in either the open or close direction, Momentarily activating the lower switch applies power in the opposite direction to the device, thus allowing the device to close'. The door must be stopped before it's direction of travel can be reversed. If the yellow interlock LED is'illuminated, the INTERLOCK OVERIDE switch must be pressed and held pressed while also pressing the unlock switch. Activation of the switches is annunciated by a tactile "snap action", and an audible beep. There shall be a dual color red & green LED indicator for each door (at the graphic location of the door and above the "RAISE" switch for the door) to indicate the status qf the door. The LED shall illuminate green when the dgor is closed and locked (secure). The LED shall illuminate red anytime the door isopen'or unlocked (unsecure). In addition to dual red and green ,LED, there shall be a yellow-LED indictor.for each door in an interlock group at the graphic location and above the "LOWER?' switch ~or the door. All 'ye!low LED's in an interlock group shall illuminate when any door in the group is unsecure. See interlock overide function description for additional operational information. D . . DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-6 95-052/12-95 N. ccTV Cameras CcTV cameras shall be represented on the control panels by colored camera symbols. A triangular end shall point in the direction of view. Each camera is further identified with it's number adjacent to the CCTV camera symbol location. Where a camera is equipped with Pan- Tilt-Zoom capability, an arc with arrows at each end shall be located across the camera symbol to indicate the camera is so equipped. Refer to the CCTV system plans and specifications for location, quantity and direction of view. M. Lamp Test Activating the lamp test switch shall illuminate all LED's on the graphic control panel simultaneously. Releasing the lamp test switch shall return all LED' s to their initial state. Activation of the switch is annunciated by a tactile "snap action" and an audible beep. . Inmate Dayroom Pay Telephone Control The pay telephones in each day room area space shall be controlIed by line remote relays controlIed by on/off switches on the graphic control panels. Pressing the on/off switch once shall turn on the telephone and illuminate the green LEDs (at the graphic location of the device and above the switch for the device). Pressing the on/off switch again shall turn off the telephone and extinguish the LEDs. Activation of the switch is annunciated by a tactile "snap action" and an audible beep. K. J. Television Receptacle Control The 120 volt television receptacle in each jail area space shall be switched by line voltage relays controlled by on/off switches on the graphic control panels. Pressing the on/off switch once shall turn on the recepticles and illuminate the green LEDs (at the graphic location of the device and above the switch for the device). Pressing the on/off switch again shall turn off the recepticles and extinguish the LEDs. Activation of the switch is annunciated by a tactile "snap action" and an audible beep. I. Lighting And Power Control Lighting circuits, as shown on the plans, shall be switched by 277 V Ac relays controlled by on/off switches on the graphic control panels. Pressing the on/off switch once shall turn on the lights and illuminate the green LEDs (at the graphic location of the device and above the switch for the device). Pressing the on/off switch again shall turn off the lights and extinguish the LEDs. Activation of the switch is annunciated by a tactile "snap action" and an audible beep. . Intercom System Switches And LEDs Switches and LED lamps shall be provided to control and annunciate various functions of the Cell Intercom and Monitoring System and the Door Control Intercom System. Switches and LEDs shall be of the type described herein. LED lamp color shall be high intensity blue. There shall be a blue LED indicator for each device at the graphic location of the device and above the switch for the device. Refer to the Intercom system plans and specifications and coordinate closely with the intercom system contractor for location, function and quantity of switches and LEDs. H. DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-7 95-052/12-95 . . C. Any, every and all types of software driven equipment are expressly and unequivocally prohibited from use for any, every and all parts of the Door Locking Control System on this project. No exceptions will be allowed to this requirement by direction of the owner. B. . Temporary panel and control. electronics shall be designed and built in accordance with all criterion set forth herein for the permanent Door Control equipment. All materials, equipment, acc;essories, devices and other facilities and appurtenances covered by these specifications or noted on the contract drawings and on the. contractor's approved working drawings and installation specifications shall be new, best suited for its intended use and shall conform to applicable and recognized standards for their use. A. 2.01 MATERIALS: PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-8 and The graphic panels shall be sized in accordance with standard EIA turret dimensions and mounted on the control room tops as shown on the plans. Coordinate overall size, location and mounting with supplier of millwork other trades. . The control switches shall be detention grade, Icotech, inc. type 280-01O-056x series. Switches shall be single pole, single throw, momentary snap action pushbutton type. Switches shall have a full, black anodized, metal housing with a built in protective bezel surrounding the actuator to prevent accidental actuation of the switch. The switch shall be completely sealed against dust and moisture and shall be suited to drive the low level, optically isolated logic inputs of the door logic card. Different color actuators shall be provided for each different type function (locking, lighting, intercom, etc.). Switches shall be surface mounted (through the Lexan@ overlay) and held in place with a retaining washer and nut on the rear of the panel. Wiring to the switch shall be with quick connect, push-on terminals. Provide logic as necessary to translate the momentary switch closure into the type signal required for any specified function or operation of each type lock. Control switches shall be mounted in rows and clearly identified. A minimum of one switch shall be provide for each door lock, lighting circuit, intercom station, etc. shown on the plans. 2. LED's shall be provided at the switches as well as the graphic positions for each annunciated item. The annunciator LED's shall be industrial grade, designed to operate from 12 VDC power source. The LED's shall be mounted in the aluminum plate behind the Lexan@ film. LED's shall not be surface mounted. LED's shall not protrude through the Lexan@ surface of the panel. A minimum of two LEDs shall be provided for each device. Door LED's shall be controlled by the auxiliary contacts on the door locks and door position switches through the door logic circuit board. (door locks and door position switches furnished under another division of these specifications). ~ I 1. Each DALCP panel shall be constructed of a 3/16" aluminum, plate covered with 15 mil non-glare Lexan@ film rear screen printed with all information as shown on the drawings. The graphic film display of the area to be controlled and monitored as described in control panel schedules shall be photographically reproduced to a scale suitable to accommodate standard turret dimensions and annunciation requirements. The cell areas shall be color coded to match the Architects selected colors in those areas. The control panels shall be mounted on the cabinet tops furnished by the General Contractor (see turret paragraph below). The control panel shall be sloped approximately 35 degrees from the horizontal. The control panels shall be complete with a 3/4" frame all around with a continuous piano hinge at the top. Panel shall be secured to the console with Medeco@ locks in each of the lower corners. . GRAPHIC DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROL PANELS: 95-052/12-95 4. 3. D. DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-9 Door lock control equipment shall be installed in the equipment room below the control rooms. The DLEC shall provide all control circuits required for monitoring door control and other switches on the graphic panels, control outputs for 120 V Ac door locks, 12 VDc power supply and terminal strips for all interconnecting wiring. DLEc equipment shall be mounted in one or more wall mounted NEMA 1 enclosures with key lockable hinged door and removable back plate. All logic, relays, terminals, power supplies and associated components shall be located in the DLEC(s). Provide adequate size and quantity of wall mounted NEMA-l enclosures so that no DLEc is crowded. Mount all components on removable back plates. Provide for adequate ventilation as necessary. The layout of the cabinet shall be such that low voltage and/or low signal (12VDc, intercom, telephone, etc.) are kept separated adequately to prevent any interference between signals and so as to meet all local, state, and federil wiring codes. All connections to field devices shall be made to captive wire clamp type terminal strips rated for at least 50 % more current than the load supplied. Terminal strips shall be rated for a minimum of 15A. All auxiliary relays shall be plug-in type. 1. C. DOOR LOCK EQUIPMENT CABINET: 7. Detailed full scale drawings of the graphic panels and samples of the materials to be used to construct the panels shall be submitted for approval prior to manufacturer and installation. Panels shall be supplied and manufactured by Icotech, Inc., P.O. Box 186, MarburY, Alabama, 36051 (phone 205-569- 2233). Equipment shall be installed by the electrical and/or electronic systems sub-contractor. 6. The DALcP's shall be connected to the DLEC with multi...conductor cables and quick connect multi~onductor connectors. Quick connect tnulti-conductor connectors shall be located on both ends of the interconnecting cables. The Desk Turrets shall be sloped at 35 degrees off horizontal. They shall be constructed of 16 gauge cold rolled steel with solid sides and fixed panel mounting angles in all' openings and have .281 diameter holes spaced in EIA standard pattern. Finish shall match desk cabinets with color selected by the architect. Turrets shall be supplied with open bottom and be securely attached to millwork surface for secure mounting over access openings for wire and cables. The turret back panel shall be loUvered. Front opening shall be fitted with panel mounting frame. Frame shall be attached to the turret with a continuous hinge adhe top of the opening. Frame and hinge shall be an integral.part of the turret assembly and be factory finished to match the.turret. Graphic panels shall be rear mounted into the frame. 5. 95-052/12-95 . . . . DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-10 2. Provide one set of three pod mylar panel covers in a protective tube. 1. Provide minimum of twenty (20) spare fuses of each type utilized and a minimum of ten percent spare of each electrical component (door cards, relays, switches, LED's, etc.) of each type utilized in the door annunciator and lock control system. Spare parts shall be stored in the DLEc in the equipment room. This supplier shall not be responsible for providing spare door locks or door status switches. D. SPARE PARTS: . Detailed drawings of the door lock panel, elementary control diagram, description of system operation and samples of the materials to be used to construct the panel shall be submitted for approval prior to manufacturer and installation. Panel shall be supplied and manufactured by Icotech, Inc., P.O. Box 186, Marbury, Alabama, 36051 (phone 205-569-2233). Equipment shall be installed by the electrical and/or electronic systems sub-contractor. 3. . The Door Control System shall be configured using individual "door control cards." The card shall not be developed for this project. Provide a list of other projects where this product has been installed and operating successfully for at least 5 years. Each door shall have its own plug-in card. Only one door shall be controlled by anyone card. All inputs and outputs for a single door shall be located on the card. All inputs to the card shall be optically isolated. 120 V AC switching and fusing to the lock shall be located on the card. Replacing the door card shall replace all electronic components incidental to the individual control of the door. Every door card shall be identical. Each door card shall be "configured" for the type and function of door being controlled by setting on card "dip" switches. Any card shall be capable of being removed from any location in the system and re-used in any other location in the system by only adjusting the "dip" switches (if even that is necessary). Field wiring from the door shall be connected directly to the door card through the use of a pluggable connector. The card shall be easily removed and replaced without the necessity of tools. DLEC control circuits shall have contact outputs rated for a minimum of 20 amps at 120 V Ac which shall provide power and control of designated 120 V AC door locks. All control outputs shall be individually fused. All wiring from the door locks, status switches, DALCP panels and power circuits shall terminate on labeled track mounted terminal blocks (rated for 30 amps) with captive screw solderless electro tinned tubular connectors with 10-32 screw terminals. 2. 95-052/12-95 DOOR ANNUNCIATOR AND LOCK CONTROLS 16749-11 95-052/12-95 . END OF SECTION 16749 A. The contractor shall provide the services of trained manufacturer's employee for a period of eight (8) hours [two (2) four (4) hour sessions], during normal business hours, to instruct the Owner's designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the entire system. 3.02 DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING: B. For a period of one year from the date of final acceptance, the system shall be under full guarantee (at no cost to the owner for materials or labor). Service technicians and replacement components for the system specified shall be provide by service representatives. During the one year warrantee period replacement components and labor shall be readily available during normal business hours, Monday through Friday excluding holidays. Emergency service provided at times other than as stipulated above, shall be available at additional cost to the owner. A. System supplier must be available for acceptance testing. Reports of any field testing during installation shall be forwarded to the Architect and Engineer. 3.03 TESTS: The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of a manufacturer's employee. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all of the functions as specified. . A. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: C. All penetrations of floor slabs and fire walls shall be fire stopped in accordance with local fire codes. All wiring shall be color coded throughout, to National Electrical Code standards. B. Wiring that extends from the electronic control relay terminal strips to the locks, lights, etc. shall be class 1, 2, or 3 as defined by Article 725 of the National Electric Code. All conductors shall be a minimum number 14 THHN or THWN, 600 volt rated, and shall be installed in raceways and equipment enclosures with other conductors, within limitations defined by . Article 725 of the National Electric Code. . .A. The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with approved manufacturer's wiring.diagrams. The contractor shall fumishall conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for the complete installation; All wiring shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer, approved by the local authority having jurisdiction and shall be installed in dedicated conduit throughout. There shall be no splices in wiring between the DLEc and the door lockS and switche.s. . 3.01 INSTALLATION: PART 3 - EXECUTION . EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16760-1 Provide complete "As-Built" Documents. 5. Provide copies of installation and service certification upon completion. 4. Provide copies of published product warranties. 3. Wiring diagrams shall be point-to-point type prepared specifically prepared for this project. Typical wiring diagramS will not be accepted, 2. Wiring diagrams indicating all system components, number and size of required conductors, interconnecting components and conduit size required to house conductors. 1. Specification data sheets on each individual system component. Shop Drawings:The contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal: . SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: 6. Full tank of fuel. 5. Rechargeable battery system. Remote generator monitor panel. (Locate in MainControl). 3. Automatic transfer switch and controller. 2. Above ground fuel tank and fuel transfer system. 1. Skid mounted generator with weatherproof housing. . " The work covered by this Section of the Specifications shall include all labor, equipment, . materials and services to furnish and,install.a complete and functional diesel emergency generatoring system. It shall be remote monitored and also provide all operations as herein described and as shown on the drawings. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following: Provide all labor, materials, Iiecessary equipment, fees, licenses, and services to complete and coordinate all electrical work withth"e architect, suppliers, subcontractors, inspectors, and utility . authorities,. as indicated on the drawi.ngs; as specified herein or both. . WORK INCLUDED: 95-052/12-95 6. 4. . A. 1.02 . B. A. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR SECTION 16760 . B. Maintenance Manuals: A complete operation and maintenance manual with two sets of . installation drawings shall be submitted prior to the final inspection. 1. The following information shall be inscribed on the cover: a. "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" b. Building location. c. The name, address and phone number of the contractor, system manufacturer and system subcontractor. 2. The manual shall be legible and easily read with large drawings folded and contained in pockets. Included in the manual shall be circuit drawings, wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment and a control sequence describing start up instructions. Included shall be installation instructions, maintenance instructions, safety precautions, and system documentation. 3. A copy of the system certification and final tests results, as called out in Part 3 of this section of specifications shall be included in this manual. 1.03 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS: A. All equipment shall be U.L. listed for its intended use. B. National Electrical Code C. NFP A 110 Level One D. Standard Building Code. . E. Applicable Local and National Codes, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.04 PERMITS AND APPROVALS: A. Permits necessary for installation of the work shall be obtained prior to the commencement of work. All permit costs and inspections fees shall be included as part of the required work. B. Prior to commencement and after completion of work, notify authorities having jurisdiction. C. All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panel boards and similar appurtenances. 1.05 TESTING: A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and pay all fees in connection with the testing of the system. All system devices shall be tested for their correct operation. All tests carried out shall meet the requirement of the local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Deliver each piece of equipment in durable shipping crates. Maintain crates through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent damage and eliminate dirt and moisture. . EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 95-052/12-95 16760-2 A. The lubrication oil pump shall be a positive' dISplacement type that is integral with the engine and gear driven from the engine gear train. EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 95-052/12-95 16760-3 LUBRICATION SYSTEM The engine shall be a stationary, liquid cooled, 1800 rpm, four-cycle design, vertical in-line or V-type, with Wet exhaust manifolds. It shall have cylinders with minimum displacement of 50.3 liters. ENGINE The following articles and paragraphs are intended to define a power generation system of proven type arid design, of current production, and with all components commercially available. MATERIALS: . 2.02 A. 2.02 A. 2.01 PART TWO - PRODUCTS The equipment shall be supplied by a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of emergency generators of the type required. Equipment descriptions are intended to indicate type and quality of design and material, as well as operating features. Acceptable manufacturers and suppliers of the listed equipment are cummings/Onan, Caterpillar, and Detroit Diesel. Other manufacturers will be considered only by complete submittal ten (10) days prior to bid and listed in a prebid addendum. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Upon completion of the installation of the system equipment, the electrical contractor shall - provide to the architect a signed written statement, substantially in form as follows: "The undersigned, having been engaged as the Electrical Contractor on the (NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE PROJECT) confirms that the emergency generator system equipment was installed in accordance with the instructions and directions provided to us by the manufacturer. " The contractor shall guarantee all equipment to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee the new system equipment to the Owner for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. WARRANTY: The Contractor shall coordinate work in this-Section with all related trades. Work and/or equipment provided in other Sections and related this system. RELATED WORK: Store equipment protected from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. A. . 1.09 . B. 1.07 A. 1.08 A. B. C. . EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16760-4 The cooling system shall tolerate at least 172.4 kPa (25 PSI) static head. Coolant temperature shall be internally regulated to disconnect external cooling systems until operating temperature is achieved. The cooling pump shall be driven by the engine. Auxiliary coolant pumps required for heat exchangers or separate circuit aftercooling shall also be engine driven. The engine jacket water cooling system shall be a closed circuit design with provision for filling, expansion, and deaeration. COOLING SYSTEM The governor shall be mechanical with hydraulic assist as required. It shall maintain 3 % or less speed droop from no load to full rated load. Steady state speed regulation shall be +/- 0.33%. The governor shall be equipped with a vernier control and positive locking to allow manual speed adjustment. GOVERNOR, HYDRA-MECHANICAL . Flexible fuel lines between engine and fuel supply shall be installed to isolate vibration. FUEL LINES The nozzles shall inject fuel directly into the cylinder in the optimum spray pattern for efficient combustion. The injection pumps shall be driven from the camshaft and simultaneously controlled by a rack and pinion assembly that is hydraulically actuated by signals from the engine governor. The pumps shall be of a variable displacement type to alter the volume of fuel delivered to the spray nozzles according to load demand. The transfer pump shall deliver fuel under low pressure to individual injection pumps - one for each cylinder. The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. It shall consist of fuel filter, transfer pump, injection pumps, lines, and nozzles. DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM . The system shall incorporate full flow filtration with bypass valve to continue lubrication in the event of filter clogging. The bypass valve must be integral with the engine filter base or receptacle. Systems where bypass valves are located in the replaceable oil filter are not acceptable. Pistons shall be oil cooled by continuous jet spray to the underside or inside of the crown and piston pin. 95-052/12-95 C. B. A. 2.06 A. 2.05 A. 2.04 D. c. B. A. 2.03 B. EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16760-5 Batteries s~l be located as close to the starting motor as practical, away from spark sources, and permit easy inSpection and maintenance. . Sizing shall consider specific application requirements of engine oil viscosity, ambient starting temperature, control voltage, overcharging and vibration. Batteries for starting and control shall be selected and supplied by the generator set manufacturer. They shall be a heavy duty SLI lead acid type with thru-partition connectors, and housed in a hard rubber or polypropylene case with provision for venting. Starting batteries shall be rated 24 volt DC with a minimum of 135 ampere-hour and 630 CCA. BA TIERIES Jacket water heater shall be provided to maintain coolant temperature of 320 C (900F) while the engine is idle. Heater shall accept 120 or 240 volt AC single phase power and include adjustable thermostat. JACKET WATER HEATER A corrosion resistant or coated steel battery rack shall be provided for mounting. Required cables will be furnished and sized to satisfy circuit requirements. The system shall be capable of starting a properly equipped engine within 10 seconds at ambient temperatures greater than 220C (700F). Batteries shall be maintenance free, lead acid type mounted near the starting motor. The engine starting system shall include 24 volt DC starting motor, starter relay, and automatic reset circuit breaker to protect against butt engagement. ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM The silencer shall provide extreme noise attenuation (25-30 dBa reduction) for environments with low background noise and slight noise emissions would be objectionable. SILENCER-CRITICAL The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion gases quickly and silently with minimum restriction. System including silencer shall be designed for minimum restriction, and in no case shall backpressure exceed 6:7kPa. (27 inches water) EXHAUST SYSTEM Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the atmosphere through a close " coupled radiator. The generator set shall be installed in an enclosure and have a 50 % antifreeze/coolant mixture. The radiator shall cool thejacket water while the engine is operating at full site capability and 0.12 kPa external air restriction. Additional restriction affecting air flow shall not limit the radiator's capability to adequately cool at maximum site temperature. The generator and radiator shall be rated to operate at a minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees C. or 122 degrees F. RADIATOR, ENGINE MOUNTED 95-052/12-95 . C. B. A. 2.12 A. 2.11 2.09 A. 2.10 A. ~ B. C. A. 2.08 A. 2.07 . . EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16760-6 General - ConVault Aboveground Tanks - listed under U.L. Subject 2985, U.L.C. 142.23 and 142.5 for insulated aboveground tanks. Tank shall have a capacity of 5200 gallons. FUEL TANK The regulator shall be suitable for mounting within or external to the generator assembly, and have provision for remote voltage level control. As installed, the voltage regulator shall meet the applicable sections of the following standards: Canadian Standards Association (CSA) International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) . The regulator shall be a totally solid state design which includes electronic voltage buildup and overcurrent protection. It shall incorporate 1: 1 volts per Hertz characteristics with the regulated voltage a linear function proportional to frequency over a 30 to 70 Hz range. The automatic voltage regulator shall maintain generator output voltage by controlling the current applied to the exciter field of the generator. VOLTAGE REGULATOR 480YJ277 Salient Pole 1100 kW 1375 KV A 130 oC Model SR4 Frame 444 Synchronous Number of leads - 12 Insulation class H Voltage connection Construction Rated power Rated kva Heat rise The 1100 KW generator shall be designed, manufactured and identified according to the following specification: GENERATOR . Battery warranty shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer. 95-052/12-95 A. 2.15 c. B. A. 2.14 A. 2.13 D. EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16760-7 The controls, protection, and monitoring systems of the generator set and its operation shall be the responsibility of the generator set manllfacturer. All subsystem components, interfaces, and logic shall be compatible with engine mounted devices. . CONTROLS, PROTECTION, AND MONITORING The enclosure shall offer protection as specified by OSHA from all moving parts of the engine, generator and generator coupling. It shall be constructed to allow full access to the engine for maintenance without exposing personnel to any moving machinery. Radiator and radiator fan assembly shall be totally enclosed with lockable door over the radiator cap. The radiator shall be sized to accommodate any resulting air flow restrictions. Provision shall be made for a duct flange or perforated metal grill to protect the radiator core. Louvers shall allow sufficient air flow to allow full load operation of the generator set. The louvers shall be twisted to deflect water and direct noise downward. The enclosure shall satisfy IEC IP22 requirements for drip proof construction acceptable for outside installation when doors are in place. The enclosure shall be fitted to the generator set base and isolated from engine vibration. Corners shall be formed and welded to assure strength and rigidity. Sheet metal of 2.0 mm minimum thickness shall have no burrs or sharp edges. Inside and outside surfaces shall be finished with a baked high performance enamel. Exposed fasteners. shall be minimized with all hardware zinc plated. .. ENCLOSURE-STANDBY PACKAGE, WEATHERPROOF Execution - Tanks shall be installed on a reinforced concrete base slab designed to support the fully loaded tank. Protective bollards shall be installed on sides exposed to vehicles. 4. Secondary. Containment shall be accompished with an impervious barrier of 30 mil high density polyethene to contain leaks from the primary tank. A leak detection access tube shall be located between the inner tank and secondary barrier. In the event of a leak, a positive space shall be available to pennit leaked fluid to flow to the detection tube. 5. Overfill/Spill Containment- The tank system shall include a minimum 5-15 gallon, powder coated external or internal U.L. listed overfill/spill containment surrounding the fill pipe: 6. Exterion Finish shall be coated concrete. 7. Support legs - Vaults shall have concrete support legs to provide visual inspection capability. 1. The P~ tank shall be rectangul~ in shape and have continous welds on all sides, inside as well as outside, shall be minimum 0.125 inch thick carbon steel and shall be warranteed from the manufacturer for 20 years. 2. .Concre~e Encasement shall be 6 inches thick with a minimum design strength of 3,000 psi. 3. Fire Resistance shall be designed and tested to provide 2-hour fire rating for the primary tank. Products 95-052/12-95 . A. 2.17 D. C. 2.16 A. . B. C. B. . . EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERA TOR 16760-8 95-052/12-95 2.18 CONTROLS-GENERATOR SET MOUNTED . A. The control panel shall be shock mounted on the generator and have the capability to face either side or the rear of the generator. The 24 volt DC system shall incorporate energize to run logic and include: 1. Generator voltage level rheostat and ammeter/voltmeter phase selector switch shall be mounted on the panel door. 2. The engine start-stop switch shall be door mounted and include positions for off/reset, run and start. 3. If the generator set should shut down, a single red light shall signal operational faults of high water temperature, low oil pressure, and overspeed. 4. Monitoring devices shall include AC voltmeter, AC ammeter, ammeter/voltmeter phase select switch, frequency meter, electric hourmeter, oil pressure gauge, and water temperature gauge. 5. ISO red emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided, and all controls, annunciation, and monitors labeled with ISO symbols. B. A lockable door shall be included which is bottom hinged to allow full panel exposure when open. 2.19 CYCLE CRANKING . A. A cycle crank timer shall provide five 10 second cranking periods separated by 10 second rest periods. 2.20 ENGINE COOLDOWN A. A cool down timer shall provide an adjustable 0-30 minute engine running period before shutdown after removal of load. 2.21 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A. NFPA-110 requirements for remote annunciation shall be satisfied by a remote mounted electro-mechanical panel which includes red and yellow indicating lights and silencable alarm horn for low oil pressure shutdown, low coolant temperature alarm, high coolant temperature shutdown, overcrank, overspeed shutdown, low fuel level alarm , battery charger malfunction (via charger switch), generator on load. 2.22 CIRCUIT BREAKER-GENERA TOR SET MOUNTED A. The 2000 ampere frame main line circuit breaker shall have a trip setting of 2000 amperes and be mounted and connected in a guarded dripproof enclosure meeting NEMA 1, IP 22 and IEC 144. EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16760-9 95-052/12-95 . 1 - Light duty auxiliary contacts for use in handling added pilot lights, and single pole double throw switch with each breaker. 1 - Engine start contact, close to run, voltage free Green - normal Red - emergency White - mode switch in OFF position 1 - Three pilot lights in face of enclosure indicating source to which the A TS is connected: 1 - Four position mode selector switch in the face of the enclosure, marked test, auto, off, and engine start. 1 - Time delay, emergency to normal, adjustable 0 to 30 minutes, set at 10 minutes. 1 - Time delay, engine starting, adjustable 0 to 50 seconds, set at 3 seconds. 1 - Voltage and frequency monitoring of one phase of emergency source. 1 - Voltage monitoring of each phase of normal source (full protection). 1 - High instantaneous trip in both breakers (under 1200 amperes). 1 - Manual transfer capability of transferring under load. 1 - Operating transfer switch consisting of switch assembly, transfer mechanism, and intelligence panel. 1 - Solderless connectors for normal source cables, emergency source cables, load cables, and solid neutral bar. 1 - Sheet steel NEMA 1 enclosure with hinged, key lockable door. The automatk transfer switch shall be four pole, 600 volt AC, 2000 ampere fully rated enclosed. switch which complies to_NEMAICS2-447, NFPA 70: NFPA 99, NFPA no, and UL 1008. It shall incorporate solid state programmable logic, be assembled and tested, and include: AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH The charger shall include an AC ammeter and voltmeter, a failure malfunction alarm switch to connect to the remote monitor panel. A dual rate 10 ampere battery charger shall be provided which shall accept 120 volt AC single . phase input to provide 24 volt DC output. It shallbe fused on the AC input and DC output, and incorporate current limiting "circuitry to l,lvoidthe need for a crank: disconnect relay. An AC voltage power switch shall be mounted on the .face o(the charger and shielded from accidental sWitching. " . BATTERY CHARGER It A. 2.24 B. A. 2.23 . . EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16760-10 95-052/12-95 A. At the final inspection, a trained representative shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.03 Final Inspection: B. The supervising agent of the manufacturer shall provide a completed test results form for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. . A. The contractor must contract with a manufacturers authorized agent or installation firm to test and certify the system meets all provisions of the specifications and that the system is fully functional. A service technician authorized by the manufacturer of the generator equipment shall supervise and participate during all of the following checks, adjustments, and tests of the system. 1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 2. Crank: and run generator under load conditions. 3. Allow generator to automatically sense a power failure situation, crank engine, transfer to load conditions, and restore itself to normal power. 4. Test and set cool down period to factory specifications. 5. Check condition of tank, fuel supply, and fuel related equipment for proper installation and operation. 6. Check proper tie down equipment to factory standards. 7. Check installation, supervision, and operation of remote annunciator. 8. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the remote annunciator. 9. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying the controls, performance, and monitoring. 3.02 Test: A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and outlet boxes, and shall furnish and install all equipment and wiring in accordance with applicable local, state, and national codes, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications. The contractor may contract with a manufacturers authorized equipment installer for any portion of the installation, but is ultimately responsible for the complete installation. 3.01 Installation: PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 - Software consisting of: dimensional drawing, layout drawing, electrical schematic, and parts list. . 1 - Internal cabling, terminal boards, fuses, fuse blocks, nameplates, and miscellaneous hardware as needed. EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16760-11 95-052/12-95 . End of Section 16760 A. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment to the Owner for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. B. The contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date -of final acceptance of the system. C. Copies of these warranties, along with phone numbers and addresses of the manufacturer, contractor, and supervising agent shall be included. D. During the warrantee period, a complete system inspection and test shall be performed twice; once at five (5) months after acceptance and once at eleven (11) months after acceptance. Any component failures shall be remedied to the satisfaction of the Owner. . 3.06 Warranty: A. Permits necessary for installation of the. work shall be obtained prior to the commencement of work. B. Prior to commencement and after completion of work, notify authorities having jurisdiction. C. All applicable portions of the National ElectriCal Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and qwi1ity, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panelboards and similar appurtenances. 3.05 Permits and Approvals: A. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the Owner for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. B. Provide two four hour sessions of on-site instructions, with a complete and functioning system, for the designated owner representatives from the system manufacturer's authorized agent. This agent shall have a full working knowledge of this installed system and be fully prepared to present this information to the Owner to their satisfaction. "Hands-on" demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. 3.04 Instruction: . LOW VOLT AGE RELAY SYSTEM 16915-1 95-052/12-95 . A.Operation of switches, for the lighting, on the lock system graphics control panel shall control the designated relays and light the corresponding LED's on the control panel to indicate only the 'on' status. Take special care to. understand the wiring necessary for the operation of the emergency and non-emergency relays, and the contactors required to turn off the non-emergency relays. The contractor is responsible to obtain a signal from the emergency system to assure that those lights indicated to not operate with the generator on line, are turned off and can not operate until the power is restored to normal. 1.03 System Operation 6. Installation, testing and certification, and education labor. 5. Wiring and raceway. 4. Interconnection with the graphics panels as required to provide a complete functioning system. 3. Relays. 2. Power supplies. Relay enclosure Panels. 1. . A. The system shall include, but not be limited to the following elements: 1.02 Materials and Services 3. All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish the standards of performance, quality and appearance and is based upon equipment manufactured by ILC Enercon, Lithonia 'Switchkeeper' series shall also be acceptable. Other manufacturers of similar equipment must submit for review and acceptance 10 days prior to bid and be listed in a prebid addendum. 2. All equipment furnished shall be new and products of a single manufacturer. 1. The system shall include all required hardware, raceways, interconnecting wiring and relays to accomplish the requirements of this specification and the contract drawings, whether itemized or not. A. Provide a factory hardwired low voltage. control relay system. The system and components shall be supplied by one manufacturer. 1.01 General Requirements PART 1 - GENERAL LOW VOLTAGE RELAY SYSTEM SECTION 16915 . . A copy of the system certification and final tests results, as called out in Part 3 of this section of specifications shall be included in this manual. LOW VOLT AGE RELAY SYSTEM 16915-2 95-052/12-95 3. 2. The manual shall be legible and easily read with large drawings folded and contained in pockets. Included in the manual shall be circuit drawings, wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment and a control sequence describing start up instructions. Included shall be installation instructions, maintenance instructions, safety precautions, and system documentation. 1. The following information shall be inscribed on the cover: a. "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" b. Building location. c. The name, address and phone number of the contractor, system manufacturer and system subcontractor. B. Maintenance Manuals: A complete operation and maintenance manual with two sets of installation drawings shall be submitted prior to the final inspection. 6. Provide complete "As-Built" Documents. 5. Provide copies of installation and service certification upon completion. 4. Provide copies of published product warranties. .1 Wiring diagrams shall be point-to-point type prepared specifically prepared for this project. Typical wiring diagrams will not be accepted. 3. 2. Wiring diagrams indicating all system components, number and size of required conductors, interconnecting components and conduit size required to house conductors. 1. Specification data sheets on each individual system component. A. Shop Drawings:The contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal: 1.05 Submittal Requirements A. The contractor must execute close coordination between this system and the locking control and graphics system. 1.04 Coordination D. Operation of the relays for the televisions in the dayrooms shall connect or disconnect the TV's and provide a signal to light the corresponding LED's on the graphics control panel to indicate 'on/off status. C. Operation of the relays for the telephones in the day rooms shall connect or disconnect the phones and provide a signal to light the corresponding LED's on the graphics control panel to indicate 'on/off status. . Dimmer control for the incandescent fixtures in the control rooms controlled by the coorresponding switch on the graphics control panel. B. LOW VOLT AGE RELAY SYSTEM 16915-3 95-052/12-95 . B. . Dimmer shall have a c~pacity of 2000 watts minimum. A.. Provide a remote controlled solid state dimmer mounted in the same cabinet or a separate cabinet, controlled with the switches shown on the graphics panels. 2.03 REMOTE CONTROLLED DIMMER All relays, interface modules, contact interface modules and pilot light transformers shall be completely factory assembled and wired into a relay panel. Relay panels shall be UL listed enclosures with hinged cover and internal mounting bracket for transformer relays and accessories. The enclosure shall also provide barrier between high and Class 2 low voltage in compliance with NEC standards and a code required barrier or separate enclosures for emergency panel connected relays and non-emergency connected enclosures. All field wiring connections shall be to labelled terminal blocks iil both high and low voltage panel sections. Complete assembly shall be factory assembled, tested and guaranteed to perform according to the approved system drawings and project specifications. The contractor shall coordinate the enclosures for the contactors required by the drawings details; to be a similar enclosure unit for consistency in the project. . A. 2.02 RELAY PANEL ENCLOSURES A. '. The relay shall be a mechanic~ly held, magnetic latching relay. Relay systems requiring external control transformers or systems without capability to operate all relays simultaneously or relays which are electrically held, shall not be acceptable. Load contacts will be rated 20 amps ~ ballast, tungsten and general use at 120 or 277 Vac and 1 horsepower at 120 Vac. Where required, .isolated low voltage auxiliary contacts shall be rated 30 Vac/dc, 1 amp. Auxiliary contacts shall close concurrently with the line voltage contacts and serve to signal relay status through pilot devices or other monitors of load status. Control of the rated line voltage circuit requires that half-wave rectifier (diode) be momentarily connected to the two 15 . Vac control leads, allowing.inomentaryDC current pulse to establish a magnetic field and lines of flux required to latch the relay. . The direction of the DC current pulse, i.e. electrical direction of the diode, determines the polarity of the magnetic field and whether the transformer . relay contacts are left open (unlatched)'or closed (latched). Relay circuits shall be 15 Vacopen circuit and 200 ma: short circuit inaximum.Relays for the telephone control shall be approved by the telephone company for this use. These telephone relays shall be multipole units to operate all associated contacts at one time. RELAYS 2.01 . PART 2 - PRODUCTS . LOW VOLT AGE RELAY SYSTEM 16915-4 95-052/12-95 END OF SECTION 16915 A. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment to the Owner for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. B. The contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. C. Copies of these warranties, along with phone numbers and addresses of the manufacturer, and . contractor, shall be included. 3.05 Warranty: . Permits necessary for installation of the work shall be obtained prior to the commencement of work. All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panelboards and similar appurtenances. B. A. 3.04 Permits and Approvals: A. The Contractor shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the Owner for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. B. Provide two one hour sessions of on-site instructions, with a complete and functioning system, for the designated owner representatives. The instructor shall have a full working knowledge of this installed system and be fully prepared to present this information to the Owner to their satisfaction. "Hands-on" demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system functions shall be provided. 3.03 Instruction: A. At the final inspection, the contractor shall be able to demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.02 Final Inspection: A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and outlet boxes, and shall furnish and install all equipment and wiring in accordance with applicable local, state, and national codes, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications.n . Installation: 3.01 PART 3 - EXECUTION l..:' " '...._4 . u Z ........ ~ ~ z ....... z j ~ z o ~ 00 ...... u ~ ~ ~ i I .1 ".,,. .....'.. " ( z. ...0' ,.-. eO, - .'>. w. a:. I ,. CL-- a'. c 11-' co J [I. .1 I J .. .... . , . I ~:~ l './ J ~.~ ...~ ..:~\ i~- 'L_... -<( .-: .: ,., ~I ---. ., ;-\ f-' . I .' .. ;r'l J I .. ,-.~" ~ .',} :.:- . "L\ ~ Y :J~ 'i , ;: ,~ c. -';' ~.~, ~~ > 5 J'.~ ~ ~ ,...-. ;'. :~ :?{.~ - Jt ~.. '...., _... . .....\. ~ ' ~ -1 l-:', ,':'o'~;"'; ~~~. ~:,(. "] a- u. W -:a O. a: Ai ~ ~ .~ 0 6)- ,0) ~ ~ ~ ~ dd ~ tn ~ '.'to) 0 . '() ,^ f'. C>> '-W'.I' ~ ..q-. ~ N~ ~O^ () tt)x ~ <~ - """" ... " .~ 0 ~ s ~ 0 ~ ~ t:5 ~ 1.1 0 ~ ~ "0 (:: ~o ~ 0 ~ ON...Jex) CON> I. '" ,Wex) ~(IJ lJJ X U .tt). ~OZrt) Q.. aJ.W ^ jo d ~ ~ n o..<c" .... V a... -1 '-' > ~ ::3< ...... ~~ C)~ ~o ~ ~~, -< o. ~ ~~ >cOO ~~ .....~ Z:;:> $'<d ~ '-C. 1 U' ~. l ') '\ ..t..., --..~ ; ~_-, i:: I '... ~~. , ,- 'j ,7',' ';.' \~ ' ,1'-' rr. ;.- ~'~ '-to (:., i.t-= , . :~~~~~~. , ;\ .-... ;-~.~ ;~~. ~-~:: . ~ -. :.... .l- ,: i \- "'-- ,- :; " , ~~ ~~ z~ ,,~Z <o~ .e-. u u 00 ~QZ ~zo .~.o~. <~~ ~~ UE-- ~~ P::~ ~ z ...... ~z ~j ~. ~ ~ ~ 00 ! ~ z a:: ~ j ~ ~ ~ .~ - ~ o z Q It) CD t:!1' ~. ~I'~ -< - '~ 8 Q ~. I,~ "'- - - - .~ - I - ,. ..~ "'y '-4 : ;- ' " ... l., , ! 1:,'- . .... ....... ,{ . \ ~2 {.~~ ..... ( l~ ~'r L ;:~ ' . ~ ,,' ~ ~~; ::~ .... .,. --' ~> Q ~ / f I J ; J / , i 01 'l::t-I . I C\il CO! I I i / I I / I I I I , " -.... " ~"') rv' C3 ~ (() f'\.-. 0) 08 ~C'r: (j~ 4.. "? 0""> ~ f::!Q S .~< J--.~ V)~ '- o BENCHMARK: TOP OF #4 REBAR FD ELEV.;:;178.81 NGVD 1929 UIO GRAPIDC SCALE DO tOO "=\ \ ) DENOTES UMITS OF HEAVY DUTY PAVBiENT ALL OlliER P A vaAENT SHAlL BE UGHT DUTY UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. IRON PIN FOUND 1/2'" REBAR PIN SET LAND LOT LAND LOT LINE PROPERTY LINE CEN TERUNE BUilDING L1N.[ RIGHT-QF-WAY SANITARY SEWER EASEMENT DRAINAGE EASEMENT MANHOLE CA TCH BASIN JUNCTION BOX HEADWALL DROP INLET POWER/UTILITY POLE FIRE HYDRANT INVERT ELEVATION FlNISHED' FLOOR ELEVATION BACK OF CURB EDGE Of PAVEMENT SANITARY SE'A'ER LINE/PIPE STORM SEWER UNE!PtPE FENCE LINE FLOOD HAZARD ZONE LINE NOW OR FORMERLY. tt. ) ( IN PUT 1nch - 50 20 IPF z IPS == LL = LLL :;;; 1E == ~ == ~ :;;: R/W = SSE ~ DE;;:; o MH :;;; D'Cl CB = o JB :::: '-' H W ;;;; Q] Dt == o PP == v FH = IE == FFE ;;:; SOC ~ EP == -s- == ----..- - ---- -x-x-x- ::;;;; vvooo.,_ N/F ::;;;; 1 Q 't- SAME CONSTRUCTION /4S UGHT DUlY PAVEMENT WITHOUT ASPHALT TOPPING. f, ) / tI' \ ~ j ~/ :~ ~o ~ >::J~~ 0 }/ o .:~..".~ ~\ \~\ .~); ...// / --..-/ ,'~ GENERAL SITE PLAN NOTES 1. NO CERllACATE OF OCCUPANCY WILL BE ISSUED UNTIL ALL SITE IMPROVEMENTS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. 2. AU. DI~ENSIONS ARE TO EDGE OF PA\edENT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. THE LOCATIONS OF ALL BUILDINGS FRON PROPERlY UNES AND OTHER BUILDINGS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE HEIGHT AND AREA UMtTATlONS OF TABLE 400 AND THE FIRE RESISTIVE REQUIRaAENTS OF TABLE 600 OF THE 1994 EDmON OF THE STANDARD BUILDING CODE BASED ON OCCUPANCY GROUP CLASSIFlCAllONS AND TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION. 4. FOR ALL SIDEWAlKS. RAt.jPS. AND SIDEWALK PlANTERS, SEE ARCH. DRAWINGS. 5. BOUNDARY lNF~"ON PER SURVEY FOR R1CHf\40ND COUNTY BOARD OF CO~M1SSIONERS BY W. R. TOOLE ENGINEERS. INC. DATED APRIL 27, 1995. 6. ALL RADII SHALL BE 5' UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. SEE ARCHITECTURAL PlANS FOR BUILDING DIMENSIONS AND DETAILS. 8. THIS SITE DOES NOT UE Wf1liIN A 100 YEAR Ft.OOD . PLAIN AS DELINEATED ON F.l.R.U. COU~UNf1Y PANEL 130158-oo70B DATED 2/4/87. ;,; 120 SPACES ;;;; 4 SP~ 124 SPACES l.4J 2 ::J G(o~G\~ S' ~ ,t- Ot I' wc"-'- \f2"!> ~ ..;.1\.(") .ll\ :;). ~\ p...~ ,..,r' 1{ 19' 19' - TOTAL - REGULAR SPACES AT 9' x HANDICAP SPACES AT 9' x ~,,\ ,~: \:, \,~ "';' -\ " \- -------.-. ~~--- -- t o I -- 10 R INTERSECTION OF LOOP DRIVE WIll1 $fA 20+05.34 ACCESS ROAD 1 50' BENCHMARK: TOP OF #5 REBAR FD ELEV.=171.43 NGVD 1929 / ~o, o / I / .' END-' ,/ ACCESS ROAD #2 $fA 18+98.97 AT FACE OF TURN DOwN SIDEWALK ~ ~~C1 48' R o~~ ~~ o~ o ./ / I ./ / '-- I / I ./ I i/' '-, L ~', , ' 6)\\ R 7+99.45 o / \ o -~ >. -,-\ PC PT = l _ __ t G't-Ol?-G\ ~ Sl ~ II:- 0 n -RCO- *.0 .ll-\))' ,~ (\~'i-- ,,^r:--? iT .0"'/ 6'0"/ 6P/ 5P/ 5':;\,/ 6')\\/ 6')'0/ '\ . . '\ \, \- " '-> '\ / " 200' PT = CONe, CURB 6T 70. 33 J WHEEL CONCa CURB OT 70.65 '-'. CONCa (TYP. ) R 500' .? 1> .: !] ROAD 1/2 5+ 2808 I I I ~ // ACCfSs - Go r -'Sf"', . \ ' \ J._' ~r) ...... .. i; . .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .... _.' .._u.. . ._.. __ _'.._ _ ~lIJIo!.~...."'...lII>...w.~ .... .' . . """ EX. DIRT ROAD TO BE . . -. '-""""_"~~._~.~~.~.~~"O"lr"'." .~W... ......... ABANDONED AND GRASSED :.,'4' >"')- ____4_..-__.______ _____ __ _._--.__ -_____ PC .... r- 952.71' ~, v C';.J. 3+53.30 EDGE OF PAVEMENT 6 ~\\ d~ .... '.. .<... l' [" j .... " (--) 1'-1 . ." v~ ~(;, C'"c - "'. , !'!i1Vli &\\ ~n .\,.. I.. d~n ri : \ I \ I o \ \ \ \. I ~, o /D- $)\"\' / $.p / PT . o -_.~----_. -+ -. -. N .- J '-r, c- .,) R 1 000' ROAD --. .--- o ? .- R PYLON SIGN "c" ~ SEE ARCH. DWGS EDGE OF PAva4ENT R "-- 40' R 5 < ~ PYLON SIGN .. 0" N ~ SEE ARCH. DWGS BENCHMARK: TOP OF #5 REBAR FD ELEV.=159.86 NGVD 1929 \ $)~/ (.'0,,/ $J~/ A J')"/ /'I I II U 0... 't ACCESS $)~ dj\\ c.:; >I T1 ,-1 1- - I ~ -, d~(\ d~("\ ~f\ ~ a t ~ o n LO ~ ,0 r---- z r---- Q) ...- ~ .- - +-- I . I ' i I ,-, ~- , .... UJ 5 L41 o Q ~ ~ :{$/ 0.:/ If! lji ""/ i :.,. - I \ .: .,. ..' ~ I I I " 1 .. I ,,,-, . ! _.' .-.J>. ~"f I ' o : +-~.-r--r-- - o .' o i;: ;';'( ;: ~ i . , (1. ' : h' . !liJ i 3 I ~~ , o 1/):, > ~ , ~ 01 \") " -0 .).. 0 1\,:'. ~ . i ~ \") ; r----. Z II \.'.~. -.:: . -, l_ :t: ...~ \ ir. ,1/ \f:/ ft 01 i \ (~ fLU ~~z ~'~e ofrl Q::(/) "U IJ o Q) LO \..D UJ ..-- t ..... , \ r---d~n }--OHP t-~\\-- r-~o- R 11'-- TO EOP r~. I ~-. en ;; ~ ~ , -' 1'- 20' (~ .. Z ~ ~ \ ~S l~fj OUJ Q:: CL - ~ " ~ ~ o CO Q < o ~ ~ N t--4 Z t--4 =r= ~ t.; -.1 l; 1.1 , . : ' ~; 1<.' ~, , , , l; .1 , ' r' I' , I ~ 1 f; ,j ~,~ , , t .'1 ~ ' rj f'i : ~ f ~ r~ 1,'.( ~~ r~ ! .' ,.J '- fi " f~ " ,j L) ;', \ . t ,-, .,.. . ~ ~j UJ i.~ --: ,.-) l); ~~ ~ !;,:c ;: ~ 1_ LL..l ~. ~ _ I,t f ~ [; . . ~. ; f" ',1 I, , , I' .' r I ~ ~ ~1 r; ~ , ~S r, rl '" IJ '" \' ,'i , W h t.) t1 ['1 ~1 I; i: ; \1 1 J l1 ~~ . l , 1 i; ~: : I' " '"'\ ~'1 r~ " " I' I; I ~ I; " :; ~ : t ~ t 4 ,', " I"~ r : , ' ri ,) t; ,i ,', f: t," [: ~.j ~ .1 , ' f' ,i ~'l t! l, r ~ I.J '_1 I~ "'f , 1 \ . ,'] !.i. IJ ~~ t~ f- ~ ~~ ~..! t- :~ ~1 <~ r: \1. . ,,,- ,-~ ~' ~ " , ~ ~ i ~ .,". ~~ ~ ~ ~ 1 1\ r ~~ t,; t. :, ~ ~; ;: :.. I; f' [1 \' ): ! ~ ' )' r~ I t; f' 'i I; ; ~ ~ .i ! . ~ i , 1 .' II f' , . .j I' ,\ \ \ [; I' f'; : ~ r' ,1 " I , ; ,'j , ' , ~ ,., [,; ,., [ ~ 1 f1 " J ~~ , ~, ~ i\; l: !J ~. ~ I' l ~ I. ~ ;,t Ii I ~ l ~ I." I N U t I ,1 I' l ~ r~ .... \\. r,1 1 ; \'\ f',~ ,I i: n ~ 1 f: , I I, Ii , , 1 I Ii '.J ,. , " ...._, ,"\) Tj' II " f "', tl,l \,' ~. L. f. - L( I ':.' ':;J Ii '.L 1- u~ t--j <1 ~ ,-- l..__L' 1...J C' 1- Z ..:l. r fj"; .;: \ II " n._ I'. - .- . . 1 ~ >C~ E-t~ ZE-t ,::; Z <O~ ~UU 00 ~.~Z ~ZO :::> 0 ~ <~~ =~ UE-t ~~ ~~ 'I- 'U ,III ...,. o a: A. A. 2 C' I- eI) -' .:I ','- ~~ , :~ :/ ~L" ~, :? ';ir:. J~: ;j~~ ~~~.i ~~..;,'. :~~';'~~ ~ ~,~ ~ ~' ::3< t-t ...... uc <~ ~.o ~ ~o o '" ~~ ~oo N~ ~c.; z~ ......< == ~ . u Z ~ ~ ~ Z ....... Z Z j ~ Z o ...... 00 ...... u ~ ~ ~ ~ Q ~ ~. ~ ~ ~ ~ N ~. OJ fI) " .... 0 (.) eoI' Q) v"-"'" := "'I""' ~ 0",........ e fl")X ~ <Lt ...... '-" , " f 0 O!: Ql ct: 0 ~ < w > " ~ LJJ 0 ~ -IOWO ~.;;." o=> ~ ::1 ~ -..' N5 I aJN IW'\ ... 4JWY ~~ W x (..) f"'") ~ozrt) a..mLU~ a 0 .~o ~ 00<f'. ~ V'~...JC I ~ ~;, " ;. \.. ) , . .. ' ,,'/ ,;' ........ . - \. ~ ~ - .-. - -" "- 78---_ \ ~ \ ~ /,' ./ u- -~ 7 \ I ~ 114 RF / ,. / ,- - " U:i '\. .- " .I / / ~L. \ / n'P. SECllON GRASSED OITa-1. / I I ~1 J /~' ....-~, ~ ...:I""" - \ Q <:c I /0' 3:1 , HYDROSEED,SLOPES OR GREATER- - ,.- ~ ~.....\ ~ ~ / ... -,.- \ JCO\ W ~ ~ .'-. ..... co :l7a r... ~ _ ,,-. nit... - ~ ~co> ~5A .' \. -~ ,,~ f 4' ~ ~, / /' / / /" CO !3( ~ ~ ~.' ~ I >,. \~. 17 5 ~ c)\ '" 1\"\ · . " .' Q CONCRETI: PADS · ~!<. II ~O~R ~CHEN EQUIPto.{ " FO CH. DWGS DETAILS', \. \ ---.-:. \ ; \ ",,\ \ "- 1~ 'f 1 '\ ...... \ ...... / \ / --" / \ A' '0 -< /' \ ,/' ".,__f / ,.,~ ./, I -'- . / --_./ +- /G , ..... ~~ ill . Xi Xl' -..:. _/' /' i------/ --~ . J I ,...~ I ~-j AJ ~ -- .....--- --- -> -... 0) 1 27 ... 1\ . /CO\. '\1Y '<:>' ~. ... co ~ 74.2 7 ~/ TT " I:::~ --- -; ,- ...;-- / >6' "- ~1 - /' / " " ~~---- -- -~ , '.... " " ,(S I\.^,~,,^' . ~"'~ \ -~ " e-,0- ./.. ~ 76. ..... ....... ..... i /.// I I I ~ C' I J /CO\ ~ / ... I / / CO 21 - / ~ , ; / I -- i .~) ,/ / I , o I / .1. CO 20 ) " , \ I ~~ <,/ " o IHW\ \!Y / / ....... o \ \ \ \ \ H -, . I i / / I ~ e r --, ~ Z D :> ,-, o ~ :.- > z ( , ~:-~ ,. R /' I ,,,,,' IHW\ \!V '8J '8< , PROPOSED TOPSOil STORAGE AREA () 1 ... '" ,.... c: ~ / l o \ . '6', u '80 / ')' ,J \ ~ '$9 .), '" \ ,1:, :. I iimrn IlIlil!\1 . d~1l ~1I &)i\ IIi &)11 d~n d~~ 0,'" d~1I :~ c., ~ ~ ' \ ~ ~ I <] i- e' !e /~ D') \\ / D') \\ / LP. ~. , HW 31 ~.. IE 157.0 . ,. DITCH .- " _E ~ .:; 'Sa \ \ \ " \ ~ , I ._..... rtP. SECllON , '""'- z < ~ ~ ~ Z ~ ~ < ~ ~ -0 BENCHMARK: TOP OF #4 REBAR FD ELEV.=178.81 NGVD 1929 ~ ~ " / -' > ''2,~.:. \. - -:- \ lj(..... ",;. ~ ~ ~-\ ~. '-'),!~--- -~. .. ~ S '6 ----- - ,; 78 -- .- :.'~::- ~ f:..I!/:j 9 \ --,. - - . ~--- ,.~...,. - . - AREA \ \ 1 , ! l '8.,. , \ /'11 8 GRJ\SSED ~ ~ 1et SCALE 1'"'- 8 NOT TO 1 . -1 " 1\ i )'"'1 0) ,.5' ~ Ii ..... lJ..I 'J; ("1 T SCALE 100 GRAPHIC ZlO 20 o ~ ~~ Gt. o\< G\ p.., S '\ ~ "it.. Or; "I'~C<'\.. \1'2) ~ . dp...? it'))' ,,\ p..""" ''0' .<c ~'.~~ \,,~;,-I\~- '->. _..,.....,.... '.t:' ..' ..t..... z o - (I.) - > 1&1 Jla: -...- 11 I I- III III .Z CO ....... . ~ li ~ ::i ~ ~ ~,~ ~ ~ e ~ :i a ~ w ::) 0:: ~ G: _ ffi m :i ::,) Z ~ G: - ~ ~ 10 ;::. I ~ I ~, " ~ ~ ... - - -- z o F= 0. 5 CJ) LL1 C - o z - ~ o ft. ) ( IN JUT 1=b - DO 1 (0 8 SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURE SEWER STRUCTURE STORN 'Y ~'a4'\ ':;) \ )'.> o )'~ '9 , \ / '-- . \- \~~... ~ ~ ~ ~ 0' . \. \ \ .', - ~ - \...- '---.:. .. - ------- ~ ~ t J f ~ ~ \: - AT ALl EARlliYCRK OPERAllONS SiAll. COWPL Y \llH REQUlREUENTS ex: OSHA CONSTRUC11ON STANDARDS. PART 1926. SUBPART p. EXCAVAll~ lRENQiING. AND SHceNG. AND SUBPART O. WOTOR \9Ua.ES. YEaiANl2ED EQUIPNENT, AND NARINE OPERAll~ AND SHAll. BE C(H)UClED IN A WANNER ACCEPTABlE 10 aGNEf.R. All. MATERiALS 9iAU. ~SlST a: CLEAN saL. FREE (F CRGANlC CR DEl.E18WJS WA1'E2AL.S. ROQ(S. CR BRacEN PtECfS (f' CON~ L.AR<a 11iAN 1HREE INQiES IN SI2E. OR a: ANY OlliER FCR8~ CBElS lHA T COlJU) IWPEDE 1liE a>>4PACllON RESULTS. f1U. WAltRlALS 9iAU... BE SPREAD E'et..Y IN HCftZC*TAI.. LA'1fRS (f' NOT ,WaI: THAN 8 lNaifS IN LOOSE urn O\ER 1HE FULL WOlli a: Fll AND COUPACTfJ), TO LEAST 951 UAmAJU DRY lDSIlY BY srANDARO PROCTOR COUPAC1J(Jtl1ES'f ASlltI. 0698. WAXIWW OJT OR FUl. SUFES IS ~IV. Gt4DE TO PROW)[ POSll1'vE DRAlNACi: AWAY FR<Ii BUlLDlNGS INTO ~ INlETS. SEE GEOTEaiNlCAL ENQNEIR F~ RECOUUENDAll~ ~G PRCFER Pl.AtBf:NT AND ~AC1lON a:- S1RUC1URAL AU.. SllE IS NOT IN A FlOOO PLAIN PER F J.R.W. COt.IIUNllY P ANa NO. 130158.00708 EfFECll\E DAlE 2/4/87. 12. 13. 14. 15- 16. 17. 18. /' j\. /~~ '~ 176.2I H. . ~~., I 0 " r/.'\~ "- #/ ~\ o 0,,) \ ., ' - . Cj \ . '" ):;. ',,; ',') \ ~l ' . 0/'--:...., \ /' ~...'::..:~. .. l_ ~ ~] .~ i,"! J-' 1-:"1 / ,") ,- "- ~:: i > ~ ~j '~~ -'\.' ,. / :..~ ..,., ~) J _. o .1 \ ---f'/ \ \..- ,- I:. GRASsED DITC~ (TYP.) , , co \.. 7 ( ---- ?" /CO\. ~r ~ \- ',>- ( >- J "",J -..; 0:. \ on, \ -' ' /~,;.. ~ ' . : / . I. / '. / / I. ' ca&AL. GRAIlNG NOltS 1HE SlE aJiSSTS OF 50.009 ACHS. llilS PRCPERlY IS ZCIe) AGRlCUlllJRAL. AND ITS PURPOSE IS ADULT ~na. F ACUlY. AU.. ~S1RUCn~ WAlmlALS AND PROCEDURES 9iALl ~FORN TO 1liE RlQiNOND COONlY AND GEORQA DEPARMNT OF TRANSPORTA11OO SfOOARDS. ALL RAOO ARE 5.0 FEET UNLESS OTHERWSE NOlED. SPOT B..EVAn~ Pif. PA\9iENT GRADES UNL.ESS OlliER.SE NOlED. COOSlRUCnON Sf AlONG AND f1E..D ENQNEERlNG WLL BE OM: UNDER lliE aRECT SJPER\CSlC* OF 1HE REQS1ERED LAND SUR\€YCfi. LICENSED IN 1HE STATE a: GEORQA. lHE CONlRACTCR Wl1 INQ.UDE 1liE COS1S CF lHlS \\tee IN 1HE PRICE F~ OlliER ilEUS. SEE ARQiITEClURAL PlANS ~ BU~G flOOR RAN OODSI~S. BUILDING EN1R~CE AND SIDEWALK LOCAllONS. LOADING DOO<S. AND ARQiIlEClURAL DETAILS. ANY ~NG S1TE lYPRO\8DlS DANAGED DURING CONSTRUC~ SHAll BE REPlACED BY lliE ~1RACTCfi AT HIS EXPEHSE. CONlRACTOR TO NOllfY RlQiY(M) COUNlY INSPEC~ AT LEAST 24 HOURS PRIM TO 8EQNNING EAQi PHASE (f' COOS1RUC11~. llPOGRAPHlC INFa&iAll~ SHO\fi IS TAKEN FROW A; SUR\EY PREPARED BY W. R. TOCl.E ENCHERS. tHe.. DAltD APRI 27, 1995- <X*TOUR INlIRVALS ARE 1 FOOT. 1- 2- 3- 4. S. 6. 7. a 9. 10. 11. FD 0BENCHMARK: TOP OF #5 REBAR ELEV.=171.43 NGVD 1929 __ _ Gt..Ot<.G\~ S"i ~ II:. Or "ct.\.. W2) ') ~\)~, ?~ ,,\~~ \'^~? "" . \~ . 2' . S OS)\ LIMITS OF CONSTRl'CTJON FOR ntlS PROJECT \ ~ _. ,) I. 1{9~1::r- / / / I " or ,- }> .t: .T "l .~ l' ' ) .'.. II +_ i I 1.0 . ~ ')1 I ' - 1" rJ LJ U~ C2 .... 0- BENCHMARK: TOP OF #5 REBAR ELEV.= 159.86 NGVD 1929 FD ~\ ~ ~ -~r--~- / / ,/ / /, // / .... ,,-..#1':. ....,#..11' ~0 .., d :u "' '---J ~ ~ , ...~ (/) f'"j -d~l\ ' 0 ~ . . \ c: ~ I I I -~---~ I " . c: ..... ~ ;u 1,< . \ I ~ : : f'; z: . / A. :E C I- ct) I- (.) III' .., o a: a. - () III c:a '- '1. " y z~ o 8~z oo~< oZ~ ~o~ ~u >- ~ ~< ...... ....... uC!J <~ ~o r.l ~c; -< o '" ~~ >c.r:n. N~ ~c; Z~ ......< == ~ >- m ~ UJ o '. " r" , . ~ ;:I) 0 ~ 0) ~ ~ OJ ~ ~ ~ (I) ".....,. ~ 0 CJ co"- e>> VI' == N'-' ~ 0" Co) t'")X ~ <(~ - ........, " " ~ Q ~ ~ cr 0 ~ <( W > " ~ W 0 ~ 5o~g ~ o('i-!(X) CDN51 "' wCX) ~(I) l.L.J X 0 rt) ~OZI') Q:CDUJ ~ od~g ~ 0 .<1' ~ V a.. ...J '-' ':\ ... ^" ( -. ~~ ~~ Z~ ,,::; z <O~ ~UU 00 ~~Z ,-,ZO ~O~ <~~ ~Z U~ ~E-4 ~~ ~ r J , ..' - :- .. it . U Z ...... ~ ~ Z ~ Z z :s ~ z o ~ 00 ...-..c U ~ ~ P-c ...' , . ~ ~ BENCHMARK: TOP OF #4 REBAR FD ELEV,=178.81 NGVO 1929 50 I I FEt'T 50 .; - --- -~ ~ ,.::;", ", - ' -",~.,/.-' ~<,~':;V' ~'P' TYP. SECllON GRASSEJ> DITCH ~o: )., , 1 . A. ;\ <- .. o . / -:.~ . ; .:;: .-, ~. L:"11 3 .... ~o l~ 3 I Ie! I " SCALE - .~ ..... 1 * NOT TO l o i. ( I I I I o I I I I I ~r o j . .\.. \ /~... /./ // /' ,. ,/ _/ .-' ~~ ,- .. - \. "-, -~-... / ./ ./ \ ;' / ,/ / 7' ., :.:.> " d~n~ ,fi\ o)~/ ./ .p/ /6 $:F'/ / /tp( .,)0/ ~ //1.) tP~ ~)\~/ ; ~..~/" /" . cf: \. . b /' - .L \'\-- \ . .) '" ... \ \ ....IIP.. iii .. W " . lW . .;; ... ~.~..~v~~~~~~w~.~.~~~_~~.., ~ d~n d:)1l ~ 1~1 .' \ \ ~, Vc:o ~ 040 ~, VG),J 1 DITCH /'1 8 d:JrI III &11 d:)(\ $)~ 01 d:)n ,. c:: . .~ ~ . I ' ... ,- ' r. . / I),' -'-, )..> TYP. SEcnON GRASSED . NOT TO 10' SCALE $':P $)0/ / ,j'P 0:)11 z --..j ~ 0)\/ ~/~ ~:] 6~,,/$P / ::" /0)"/ "'0..-/1 '/ 1 ---.- o:Jn \ "'0 " " II :1 _ I '" \ i' 1 : r t I ; ~.l 1'1 . "I r :t' I I ' ~ ; " " i I ;. '" " :r I T--- :r , r-d:Jn \ r---OHP co o \a r-d')\\-- r--d~O----- ~ o > t:j co o ~ ~ ~ ~ z ~ N ~ ~ '" ~ I) " ~ i j'j : : ! 1 : 1 , , ~'- t iJ 11 f' t~ , ; I' , ~ r . . I ~ I: ~ ,~ I' i: I' re; . , , I . ; , I' :1 . ' t< " f. I . . r ~ , , ~ : ... .1 I I' ,-' f: ! ~ I. I I .\ I; t: ,I .~ I ~. ,1 1,) l~ ~ I; ;; , , :> 1 ~ I'; I'~ " ~ I f~ 1 1 I ., I', I, ,i " .1.1 .~ " I' ".\ r"~ ~i , , , ~ ~ :- H "J I. . , ~..~ : J 1'\ .' " ~ I I; i. j I; ~ 'i ....1 .~ .' .- \" J ~1 _4 iT ~~ .... :7 'i I ..... i...o,' z o - UJ - > 1&1 II: r~\.. {1t {~ j' -? ~ C. <. ~ ~. 0::: ~ : ~ ~ LU ::) ~ ~ c;: _ It) ~Ii ~ ;0- C'\I "'- - ... :z o ~ Q.. 5 C/) lJJ o - o z ~ -< o CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE I ACTIVITY I MONTHS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 CLEARING & GRUBSING E/C INSTALLATION & MAINT. I I EARTHWORK (CUT & FilL) I GRASSlNG (LIMIT EXPOSURE TO I I 14 DAYS) t UTILITY INSTALLATiON CONSTRUCTION FINISH fiNAL GRADiNG STABiLIZATION G ( O'?- G\ p... "!o at SIp... I ( 0'1: G i--I< c<.'- if? 0 J /0 (') .11\';;). \" C'i ~'" ~~\ 'If OWNER/DEVELOPER OF COMMISSIONERS t-. III III Z en ffi .CD ~ ~ z ~ G: GRASSING SCHEDULE (h YDROSEEDING RATES) RICHMOND COUNTY BOARD 605 CITY/COUNTY BLDG. AUGUSTA, GA 3091 1 (706) 821-2400 MR. DERRICK B. CAVE, P.E PRECISION PLANNING, INC. 400 PIKE BOULEV,4RD LAVvRENCEVILLE, GA 30246 (770) 338-8000 ENG INEER FO BENCH~fARK: TOP OF #5 REBAR ELEV.;;::171.43 NGVD 1929 o --\---------------- ~---- ?~ \ ~ ?~ ' --------------~----"-----------/~ ---\ :,J> ~ -4 ~ 0\ >> ~ ~ PYLON SIGN .. B" SEE ARCh. OWGS { ~ -...... N o --j ." I I I t l l' 1\ : '\. :;~ "'~ '" l....~ t; " ~ ~ i' '( II I 1 I f! ~' ~ t-:; , I ~ '~ " : ~ l,:' . . ~ t,U? GI p... "/0 ..J - ,f)) '\ ? i\~C~\.-~'" I 01 C '\ i"- It- 0'1: '/0 J . '\)) ('PO}, \.~f\? 11' z ---.j lrl\--> -.p- O --" o. _ - \.0 v.: ---J \.0 . ~ l' I FERTIUZER (L8S /ACRE) I SPECIES RA TE /1000 SF OA rES UME Nz PzOz KzOz HULLED BERMUDA 2 LBS 10/1 - 3/1 1 TON/ACRE 60 - 90 120 - 180 120 - 180 UNHULLED BERt..4UDA 2 L8S. 2/15 - 6/15 I 1 TON/ACRE 60 - 90 120 - 180 120- 180 FESCUE 5 ~ 10 LBS. 9/1 - U /1 1 1 TON / ACRE 60 - 90 120 - lao 1 20 ~ 180 ~ (FOR TEMPORAR"I') SPECIES RA TE /1000 S.f. DA TES LIME N2 PZ02 I KZOz wtNTER R'YE 1.5 - 2 lBS. S/1-11!1. ~/1-8/1 1 TON/ACRE: 60 - 90 120 - 180 1 20 - 180 - .WEEPING lOVEGRASS 2-3 LaS 3/1 - 8/1 1 TON I ACRE: . 6D - 90 120 -180 i 120 - 18C ~ --- ... -:"--- .H YOROSEED ON ALL ~: 1 (rt V) SLOPES. ~ 11.11'\; "I"C'L70~~ ""'d~I\"'/lT1!.~ (..J;::: ~ 24-HOUR CONTACT MR. JIM \'VALL, COUNTY ATIORNEY RICHMOND COUNTY BOARD OF COMMISSIONERS 605 CITY/COUNTY BLDG. AUGUSTA, GA 30911 (706) 821-2400 / \ I II :\ j. I I I I / I f ..' J"', I' i-' t j.i " .,,- .j..... - II DEEP STRAW OR HA\( -,,5 TONS/ACRE WOOD WAS1E, BARK. SA\~UST-2-3. (APPROX. 6_9 TONS/ACRE) . W1TH. ED us OM c E , , . . ONLY CONTROL EROSION/SEDIMENT FOR SHEET THIS o BENCHMARK: TOP OF #5 REBAR FO ELEV.~159.86 NGVD 1929 . , \ ," - \ " .... ~ ~ . ~ 4';" , ",' ., .... ~ .: '.< ~ , . ~. 10.,.,..1 " , - ,. , , ~ -. - -.. .... '. ').. 1-:':: , ...._1." " . ' C' l'-~ ~ : ... ~ I .- .... ~. :"1 l- I. ROW OF AN010RED STRAW BALES TO BE PRIOR TO ROUGH GRADtNG NOTE: SINGLE PLACED DROPPED, WASHED OR TRACKED FROU ROADWAYS ARE TO BE REMO\lm NOTE: ALL t\4 A TERIALS SPILLED, VEHICLES ON SITE ONTO 22- D.O. T. APPROVED FABRIC SECURED TO SlEEL POST (1.3 LB/FT l\iIN.) ---"1 c. ~ ('r \VHERE . . ADDITIONAL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES \VILL BE EMPLOYED DETERMINED NECESSARY BY ACTUAL SITE CONDIT10NS. PROVISIONS TO PREVENT THE EROSION OF SOIL FROM SITE SHALL BE , AS A MINIMUM, IN CONFORMANCE VVITH THE REGULATIONS OF THE COUNTY EROStON AND SEDIMENTATION ORDINANCE AND THE RICHMOND COUN1Y CODE OF LA\VS DEALlNG \t\lITH EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION. '/\ --J NOTE: HAYBALE CHECK DAMS SHOULD NOT BE USED \\t1ERE DRAINAGE AAEA EXCEEDS 5 ACRES. 2 RE-BARS, STEEL PICKETS OR 2.x2- STAKES 1'-6- TO 2' -0- IN GROUND. A. :E .C I- fI) PRIOR TO ANY OTHER CONSTRUCTION, A STABILlZED CONSTRUCTlON EXIT SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED AT EACH POINT OF ENTRY TO, OR EXIT FROM, THE SITE. 3\ J ANGLE FlRST STAKE TOWARD PREVlOUSl. Y LAID BALE ~ ~ ~ ~ fR rIJ ~ cfc5 ~ . "'" :s 0 t) CO" C>> .q-I' ~ N~ .c: 0" (.) f-I")x ~ ~~ - ........, , " ~ 0 ~ .~ a:: 8 ~ ~ '-' ~ w 0 ~ 5o~8 ~ ON-lCX) !DN>I , wco ~~ lJJ .x o. r'1 ~oztt') a:mw" ~ 0 ~~~ ~ oq<c1' ~ q- a.. -1 '-' . u Z ........ 11'\ ~ Z ~ Z z ::s ~ z o ......c 00 ...... u ~ ~ ~ THE CONSTRUCTION EXIT SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN A CONDITION VVHICH VVILL PREVENT THE TRACKING AND/OR FLOW OF MUD ONTO PUBLIC RIGHTS-OF- 'vVAY. THIS MAY REQUiRE PERIODIC TOP DRESSING WITH STONE, AS CONDITlONS DEMAND, AND THE REPAIR AND/OR CLEANING OUT OF ANY STRUCTURES USED TRAP SEDlMENT. ALL MATERIALS SPILLED) ,TRACKED) DROPPED, OR \VASHEO FROM A VEHICLE OR SITE ONTO A PUBLIC .ROADWAY OR INTO A STORM DRAIN MUST BE REMOVED IMMEDiATELY. 4) I~BED HA YBALES 4. INTO GROUND llES j , v IN AND PACT BACKFlLL EROSION CONTROL NOTES \ j " c ~ o ~ o c 50.0' ~IN. ~. GEOlEX11LE UNOERUNER 11-,1\ II - =111 III=- '111 III ill II I A,,_III III III III 111- f I _ III III III 111- II' I III 111 IlL III i ll~ ~ III III III 111==111 ==111=-1 I 1- ~Tn~ . v .I .- . co .I .- 01 I! .. ! .- PAVED SURFACE O.e. 6' ~AX. F AeRlC WTH VtO~ WRE RElNFORCWENT ...~...._~-~--~-~/ TRENCH PRIOR TO COMMENCING LAND DISTURBANCE ACTIVITY, THE liMITS OF LAND DISTURBANCE SHALL BE CLEARLY AND ACCURATELY MARKED VVITH STAKES, RIBBONS, OR OTHER APPROPRIATE MEANS. THE LOCATION I~'ND EXTENT OF ALL AUTHORIZED LAND DlSTURBANCE ACTIVITY SHALL BE MARKED FOR THE DURATION OF THE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY. NO LAND DJSTURBANCE SHALL OCCUR OUTSIDE OF THE APPROVED LiMITS INDICATED ON THE APPROVED PLANS. ~\ ".:Jj VdDll-t VARIES TO f1T CHANNEL SWALE L ~RE OR NYlON BOUND BALES PLACED ON THE CONTOUR ST ABlUZED STONE PAD MIN. THICKNESS - 6- WDTH ;:;: FULL ~DTH OF VEHICULAR ACCEss. 20't\4INI~U~ 3' LONG, N~. 2-x2-, 2- DIA. \\OOD POST OR STEEL POST W/ ~IN. \\EIGHT ;;;: 0.15 Ib:s/ft. SPACED AT 6'-0- SIDE VIEW . v ..I .- . co .I .- . co ..t .- ELEVA 11 ON FRONT @ DI A. COARSE AGGREGATE 1/2- TO .3 /2- 1 STONE SIZE ;;;: N.S.A R-2 e 8 SECllON DIA. /2- 1 TO .3 /2- 1 1 PR0V10E PERIODIC TOP DRESSING ~TH STONE AS NECESSARY MINlt-tU~ O~ OF 18- IS TO BE PRO\1DED AT AU. SPUCE JOINTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE CONSTRUCTION EXlTS, ALL PERIMETER EROSION CONTROL DEVICES SHALL BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO ANY OTHER CONSTRUCTION. 6) 2 SHEET 1 of -- (fj) PLANNING. HAYBALE CHECK DAM - APP. (fj) SION PLANIeIG. IN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH iNSTALL, AND MAINTAIN ALL NECESSARY SIGNS, BARRICADES, LABOR AND EQUIPMENT SO AS TO MAINTAIN THE SAFE AND ADEOUATE FLO\V OF TRAFFIC WHILE ROADvV,-\Y AND/OR UTILITY IMPROVEMENTS WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHTS-OF-WAY ARE BEING MADE. 7\ J NO. JOB NO. ALE THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SITE WILL INITIATE WITH THE INSTALL';TION OF EROSION CONTROL MEASURES SUFFlC1ENT TO CONTROL SEDIMENT DEPOSITS AND EROSION. ALL SEDIMENT CONTROL VV1LL BE MAINTAINED UNTIL ALL UPSTREAM GROUND \VITHIN THE CONSTRUCTION AREA HAS BEEN COMPLETELY STABILlZED \VlTH PERMANENT VEGETATION AND ALL ROADS/ORI\/E~VAYS HAVE BEEN PAVED. EROSION CONTROL DEVICES SHALL BE INSTALLED IMMEDiATELY AFtER GROUND DISTURBANCE OCCURS. THE LOCATION OF SOME OF THE EROSION CONTROL DEVICES MAY HAVE TO BE ALTERED FROM THAT SHO~VN ON THE APPROVED PLANS IF DRAINAGE PATTERNS DURING CONSTRUCTION ARE DlFFERENT FROM THE FINAL PROPOSED PATTERNS. tT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO ACCOMPliSH EROSION CONTROL FOR ALL DRAINAGE P/~TTERNS CREATED AT VARIOUS STAGES DURING CONSTRUCT!ON. ANY DiFFiCULTY IN CONTROLLING EROSION DURING ANY PHASE OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE ENGiNEER 1f'v1MEDIATELY. \ ) \ ) 8 9 510. DETAIL NO. EC02 STAKED AND ENTRENCHED STRAW BAlES DATE BRACES TO BE USED \\1111 THOSE SECTIONS OF SlLTAllON BARRiER lNTERCEPllNG CONCENTRATED flOW BY CONSTRUCTION EXIT NO. JOB Fu:NO: NO. .X)8 NO. ALE DESCRIPll ON DATE BY REV. sm. DEl AIL NO. EC07 I . eX) N DATE BY 1: 1 SLOPE hiAXlMUM (fj) ON ~G. IN, C" TYP E " - . APP. APP. APP. CKD.. SILT FENCE DESCRIPl10N t-CIN. DAlE TOE FAeRie iN 2- ~IN. BY REV. STD. DETAIL NO. EC22 DATE BY DESCRIPllON DATE BY REV. ALL SlLT BARRIERS MUST BE PLACED AS ACCESS IS OBTAINED DURING CLEARING. NO GRAD:NG SHALL BE DONE UNTIL SILT BARRIER INSTl.,LLATION HAS BEEN COMPLETED. 0) -t 0' DRAiN AGE STRUCl1JRE ,. I- (.) W -J o a: a. ..... >- E-t ~< =.-..c C)t.; <Q:: ~O ~ ~~ o ." ~~ 00 >.~ ~c.; Z~ ......< == ~ ~~ ~~ Z~ ,,5~ <UU ~ OOQZ :::> Z 0 '-' 0 ....-c ~~~ < t:I:: ~ U~ t--l~ ~~ CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAl"N ALL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES UNTIL PERMANENT VEGETATION HAS BEEN ESTABLISHED. CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN OUT ALL SEDIMENT PONDS "VHEN REQUiRED BY THE PROJECT ENGINEER AND/OR THE RICHMOND COUNTY INSPECTOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT ALL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES AT THE END OF EACH vVORKING DAY TO ENSURE MEASURES ARE FUNCTIONING PROPERLY. \ J FLOW OF SEOU.4ENT LADEN RUNOFF x s THE CONTRACTOR S,'ALL REMOVE ACCUMULATED SILT \A.'HEN SAlO SILT VJITHIN 12" or THE TOP OF THE SILT FENCE BARRIER UTILIZED FOR EROSION CONTROL. '/' .....) x .. FAILURE TO INSTAll OPERATE AND/OR MAINTAIN ALL EROSION CON,TROL MEASURES WILL RE !LT IN ALL CONSTRUCTION BEING STOPPED ON'THE JOB SITE UNTIL SUvr-l MEASURES ARE CORRECTED BACK TO RICHMOND COUNTY STANDARDS. 3) 4- CQt4P ACTED SOIL TO PRE\€NT PIPING z ~ . o I N NOTE; OVERLAP SPUCE JOINTS 18- ~INIMUM VVORK AND MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO THE AND SPECIFICAT10NS 'OF RICHMOND COUNTY, GEORGIA ALL CONSTRUCTION MiNiMUM ST,-\NDARDS jl \ '"1"J A COpy OF THE APPROVED LAND DISTURBANCE PLANS AND PERMIT SHALL BE PRESENT ON THE JOB SITE \tVHENEVER LAND OtSTURBANCE ACTIVITY IS !N PROGRESS. 5) SECllON @ BE DRESSED AND ALL SE\VER EASEMENTS AND DISTURBED AREAS SHALL GRASSED SO AS TO CONTROL EROSlON. " J o SHEET 2 of 2 (fj) ON P\.ANNINo.. HAYBALE CHECK DAM @ ~ asaoN PUNNING. INC. NON. 2"x4"QR 3" Olj WOOD POST T'l'P1:J X SECllON 12' ~lN - J X STOR~ DRAIN AGE STRUCTURE ) z :E N .- ~Lx PLAN SEDIMENT TRAP ~ ......' :..., t) CD ~ >- m ~ o a: ~ .., :>0- m i < ~ o en ~ ~OO Zo= OZ< ~ E-c OO~~ oO~ ~~ ~.~~ ZZ 0< u ALL OPEN SWALES MUST BE GRASSED , AND RIP-RAP MUST BE PLACED AS REOUIRED TO CONTROL EROSION. A MINIMUM OF 4.5 SQ. YOS. OF 50 LB. STONES SHALL BE PLACED AT ALL DO\VNSTREAM HEADWALLS. THE PLACEMENT OF RIP-RAP AT THE DO\~/NSTREAM HEAOVVALL SH/~LL BE IMMEDIATELY UPON THE INSTALLATION OF PIPES AND DRAINAGE DITCHES. OF TOE DO\VNSTREAM BE PLACED AT THE SlL T FENCE BARRIERS SHALL ALL CUT AND FILL SLOPES. t\ I ) 8) JOB NO. STD. DETAIL NO. EC03 NO. AlE DATE BY APP. APP. APP. CKO. DESCRIPllON DATE BY REV. NO. STD. DETAIl NO. EC25 JOB NO. AlE APP. APP. APP. CKD. DESCRIPllON DATE BY REV. A 't' ANY DISTURBED AREAS LEFT EXPOSED FOR A PERIOD GREATER THAN DAYS SHALL BE STABILIZED vVITH TEMPORARY SEEDING. \ I 9 SILT BARRIERS TO BE PLACED AS SHOWN AND/OR AS DIRECTED BY THE PROJECT ENGINEER AND/OR RICHMOND COUNTY INSPECTOR. \ ) 20 ..,---\ / , /- ~--=-==-.:..=.-=-=:~-_.-..:._- - / ~ ;<- --1' / /, . '. \/ / . , , // 1\ 1\ // , I II I ", z o - CI) - ..> IU II: .. ffi m ~ ':j " Z ~ G: ~ ti ~ z en ~ 9 o:z CD F= 0 ~ g,. ~ ~ t:: 51:~1 a CJ) UJ::) ~ ~ .ff"oll - o z NOTIFY THE NSPECTOR 24 HOURS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION ALL GRADED AREAS, SLOPES, ETc. WHICH DRAIN TOWARD. THE EROSION " CHECK SHALL BE GRASSED AND STABILIZED IMMEDIATELY AFTER GRADING. 2-xS- TREATED TIMBER W/ 1/4-1/2- GAP /---'-\ / I ~_._----. . / //1----- .-----::.-:..::::-::~.~~~\ . // ! \ r' /" ! 1\ ~ ~ . ~ t HINGE llt\4BER STRAP TREATED \ J 2.x6- 60 ~IN 2 .3-5-STONE AROUND BARRIER FACE t.tIN HEADWALL J STORM DRAIN PIPE \ t o L >1 ~ · t 6- _ ~IN. DUMPED STONE ~AX. 1201 ~IN. 50# PLAN (HEADWALL . .1- 'W" , ',W. z. ..." -;. ... .:..;f c>> II) CD t::1~ISI~ < " ~ '" o .... _ _ - L 6.xS" lREAlED POST 1X GRADE LA - LENG1l1 OF HEAD WALL APRON (SEE CONSTRUCllON DETAILS). < LA STONE FlL lER NO. 57 STONE C~PACTED OR NOR~AL EARlli GA.DOT SPECtFlCA llONS, SECllON 603 GA.DOT SPEClFlCA llONS. SECTION 603 24 INCHES PER 18 INCHES PER - - TYPE 1 TYPE .3 * STOR~ PIPE @ SECllON (0 NOTES: 1) STONE SHALL BE QUARRY-RUN WAl'ERIAL. COWPOSED OF SOUND. OURABL.E. DENSE. GRADeD AND SPECIF1CAU.. y SEl.ECTfD AND PLACED Tt) ~T EROSION. AU. STC*E SHALL BE 1WE 3 UNlESS NOTED OlliERWSE. 2) REFER TO NANUAL.. FOR EROSl~ A: SEDlNENT CONTROl. IN GEORGlA (LATEST EDtTION). APPENDIX C FOR COWPl.E1E RlP-RAP SIZING AND PlA~ENT. (fj) DSION ~ (fj) PLANNING. OUTLET PROTECTION APP. APP. APP. CKD. NO. STD. DETAIL NO. EC17 JOB NO. ALE DATE BY DESCRlPllON DATE BY REV. NO. sm. DETAIL No.. EC30 -m NO. FILE DATE BY RIP RAP PLACEMENT - APP. - APP. APP. CKD. (fj) PLANNING. AlE NO. DESCRIPllON DATE BY REV. NO. STD. DETAIl. NO. EC40 TYPE FENCE A B C TENSILE STRENGTH (Lbs.~{n) (1) WAAP-120 WARP-120 WARP-120 (ASTM 0-4032) FILL - 100 ALL - 100 FlLL - 100 ELONGATION (: ~ax.) 40 40 40 (ASThA 0-4632) AOS (APPARENT OPENING SIZE) fJ30 130 130 FLOW RATE (Galj\cin/Sq. Ft.) (GOT-87) 25 25 25 ULTA\1OLET STABIUTY (2) (AS'N 0-4632 AFTER 300 HOURS 80 80 80 YE.A 1l1ERING l~ ACCORDANCE Vt1TH ASnA 0-4355 ._- . . BURSllNG SlRENGTH (PSI Min.) (AS'Tht 0-3786 DIAPHRAGN BURSTING 175 175 175 STRENGTH TESTER) MINIMUM F ABRle \\1111 (In) 36 22 36 (1) MINI~U~ ROli. A \imAGE OF SPEC MENS. (2) PERCENT CD REQUIRED INIllAL TENSILE STRENGlH. SIL T FENCE SPECIFICATIONS (fj) APP. PLANNING. INC. ., APP. , APP. FIlE NO. JOB NO. CKD. ~ESlGN STD. DETAIL NO. REV. BY DATE DESCRIPTION BY DATE EC23 JOB DATE BY DESCRIPllON DAlE BY REV. ~: , ";..,'.1 .. " I- () W -:a o ~ Q. z o - CI) - > 1&1 .11: AU. EARlliWORK ~.ON SHAL1.. PLY RBiENIS CONSTRUCl1OH srN4DARDS~ PART i. SUBP~ p. EXCAVATIONS. SHCHNG AND SUBPART O. tilTQR lClfS. WECHANIZED' EQUlPWENTI 0PfRAllONS. AND SHAL1.. BE CONDU D IN A NANNER .uEPTABlE 1 A MlNJWUM HORlZONTN.. SEPARATION 10' SHAL1.. BE WAlNfAlNED 8E1 Ut6 ~D ~ARY SEWERS. AN l YlNIWN vtR11CAL. SEPARA1101 WAlNTAlNED AT CROSSINGS. ~ )SSlNG A WATERUNE OR SE\ER JOIN1S SHALL BE PtJCED IS fAR AWAY AS POSSIBlE FROW 11iE OlliE PEDESTRJAN AND ux:AL. \ellCUlAR TRAFf'C uusr BE WAINf,4HJ) If II STED BY 11iOSE AGENCIES USTf.D N!JJVE. SAFElY OE.\1CES NID ~ WIll. BE PRQW)EO BY THE CONTIOCTOR AT HIS EXPOOE.WRl11EN PERWlSSON TO a.DSE 1HE CONSTRUC11ON K<EA TO TRAFFIC NUST BE OBT,6HD FROW THE APPROPRIATE GO\€RNYENT ~CY PRIOR ro 1liE ClOSING. IF lliE CONTIOCTOR ~ Nf( EXIS11NG U11Ul1ES DUR!NG CONSIRUCTlON. HE SHALL. AfHlS OWN EXPENSE. RfPlJCE. OR REPAIR THE U1lU11ES TO lli8R ORIGINAl. CONOOlON ~ QUNJlY. /.S APPRCMD.BY THE RESIDENT PRWECT OBSERVER ~D REPRESENTA11VE OF lliEAPPROPRlATE Ul1U1Y COWPANY. 'THE CONTRACTOR 'WIlL BE SOlaY RESPONSIBLE FOR CONTACTING 1U. /tft-tL~ tD UllUTlES p~ TO SUIIIfmNG HIS BID IN ORDER TO ~E THE EXTENT TO WHICH UDUlY RS.:OrATIOH'S ~D/OR ADJUS1liOO \W.L AFFECT THE SCHfDWNG. OF WORK FOR THE PROJECT. .SOME UllJ1Y FJaUllES WAY NEED TO BE ADJUSTED CONCURRENItY wmt THE . CONTIOCTOR'S ~ >>W..E SOWE \WlRK WAY BE REQUIRED' -AR(U U11lJ1Y FAClL.J1'5 1liAT WIll ~N IN PLACE. IT IS UNlERSTOOD AND N.;REED 'T lliE CON1RACTOR Yt1U. RECEI\{ NO ADOO1ONAL. COImn.'c.".l~FOR IN( OBA~ )R lN~ ~ BY 1liE lJ11U1Y' ACJlf CON1RACTOR is TO tal ALL ux:AL. U1UJ1Y Q RfGUlAllONS IN AM READJUSIliOO OR REl.OCA11ON OF EXIS11NG S WHEN . CONSTRUC1 I' 1fOOL\6 THE RatOVN... OF FENCE. ruot...ES. SIl ORNE. TEWP ~ FIXED STRUCllJRES; 11iE (X)NTRAC{OR AT..:~: PROWlE fO ~ SERv1CE OR ~ TO TtiE ) I IW SHALL : SUCH ~ v.m; ~ III.lR OR BElTER W ~ ~nCAl RECltD BY 1liE ~I ~A1M: .STAl.1.ATlON. GENERAl UTIUlY NOTES 1. lHE CONTRICTOR SHAL1.. 001 INCl' Ul1U1Y OWNER PlAN ,OF OPERATION IN lliE MEA ~ UlUll1ES. R TO ~QNG WORK. lliE CON1RACTOR SHALl. COO [ UTIUlY I ) NID REQUEST 'I1iEW TO PROPERlY lOCATE 1liElR RESPECTNI Y ON 1liE m. 11iJS N011ACATION SHALl BE GM:N Af LEASr 1liREE E S DAYS PRli I COYIIENCEWENT OF OPfRAllONS AROUND THE U11UlY. UNLfSS OlliERWlSE NOTEI IY OWNERS TO RESET. RELAY. OR RE'JDJUST, AU. PUBUC AND ~A1E U11l CONFUCl1NG PROPOSED lNPROvatENT. 1HE CONTRACTOR WIll. BE RE ) TO COOPERATE t1TH 1ME OWNERS OF LOCAl.. UTUJl1ES IN 1liE AWUSll )f lliBR FN1J1lES YH:RE lliEY INTERFERE v.m; CONStRUCTION. THE CO )R 1li1S iORK WlU. BE AT M CON'f"fW:TOIfS EXPOOE. CONTRACTOR SHALl \mf AT10N AND El.EVAllON OF AU. U1U.Il1ES PRIOR TO EXCAVA110N OR DENOUllON. ADDOlONAL. unUTIES YAY NOT BE SHOWN ON THESE ~s. 11iE ElGNfIR ASSUNES NO RESPONSIBlUlY FOR lOCA11ONS SH~ ,tU WJtRIAL.S AND lNSTN..L\11ON SHAll BE IN CCWP~CE \mH THE R1CHiK)N[) COUN1Y PU8UC U1lUl1ES REQUIRaiENrS. YtNlWUW CCMR FOR AlL WAfER UNES SHAL1.. BE .a INCHES. ARE HYDRANTS AND NAlNS SHALl. BE INSfAUED AND UNDER ~ ~ BEfORE Nf( COWBlJS11BlE CONSTRUCTION IS sr~. ;U WATER NAINS UNDER PA'klJ Mf)S 51 I BE DUCTILE IRON ARE HYDRANTS SHALl. BE LOCAJED NO Q; ER THAN 50 FEET 1l1E BU1UlNG ARE DEPARTUENT CONNECllCK CONTRACTOR TO tuOO'AIN Aa:fSS FOR a- fNCY 'tfJiIClES ~ AND TO ALl BUIlDINGS UNDER CONSfRUC1lON I.E.. IN :s OF RAIN OR Wl )S SHAll BE ABlE TO ~ A FIRE TRUQ( BY BEING ED OR HA\'ING A I 0 STONE BASE'. Efe. ~ LOCA11~ AND WAIN SIZES ARE ~.. ON PlANS. SEE ARCHITEC1\JRAL PlANS fOR L.OrAION \AlA' SEWER ~. UNES WI1liIN PROPOSED BUU..OINGS. HVDRAN:TS ARE TO BE INS SO lliAT ARE OEP. CONNECIlONS FIaS lliE '. lliAT ISO lESS THAN 1t OR YORE 11iAN 3r: RN1SHED \" . ,,,,,4 ) . . .,..~......, ." ., ., . \ '-, ... .. I~:'_, . - .. - .' - .. -I · ,. (.). a:a a 0: 0.:: LtJ W m m ::f ~ "::) .::> z z m ~ ~ CL: A. :I c I- a) .. .I, III ..I 1->- t-ma: I- ~'. ~ .-0::.., WO W -I Z co i t ~ \ . . ,. .. . :"::-1 .... ;.". . ~ ; :.~ ~: . - ., ~~ .~::.~ ..1~ -, /~'I ,"" 40 E'" ,.' :-: ,) :. : ~~ ,} .~~j " .... " . Ci' (......, .. "" ,- . ~ E-c ~< ~..... ~~ ~~ ~o ~ ~t,; o .- ~&S :>-cOO N::> ~~ Z::J ......< = ~ )0- m e S o ~ ~ g ~ m fIJ ~ cid ~ tI) '"' ~ 0 Co) CO'" C>> q.-f' == N'-' .c: (:) " e fI'i'x ~ <~ - ........" ... c:> ~ 0 ~ C>> O! 0 ~ <: w ~ > " ~ lLJ 0 ~ S.owg. ~ 0 N ::ioo CDN51 "" ' wCXl ~ Wxu~ ot ?!:oz~ ~ a.. OJ w.~ B 0 '. ~ 0 ~ o.q <: ~ """ ~ 0... ...J '-" <.. .~ l ., "., .. 1.-. ,. '. , ' '. ~. " .i' ~ ti ~ '''1 (/) D::: 0 11 z ~ as ~ o ~ 0::: ':::i ~ f{! e (j o ~ B ;~ ~ lI! 3~C 8 G: ~ ){ "~ ~~ ~~ Z~ ,,~Z <O~ ~UU 00. . :::> ~ z ~ZO ~OIl--4 <~~ =~ UE-c ~~ ~~ ,. . , lc ~ . z j ~ ~ ~ ...... ~ t--t ~ ~ ;, . U Z ...... &1\ ~ Z ........ Z Z j P-c Z o ...... r:n t--I U ~ ~ P-c - ~ '" DETAIL .' z o F= ~ ~ w c - o z - I=! < o BENCH~{ARK: TOP OF #4 REBAR FD ELEV>=178.81 NGVD 1929 (C) WHERE ThE PARKING PLACE IS ON PRIVATE PROPERTY, !S CONSTRUCTED SOLELY FROM CONCREn:, WAS USED BY THE PUBLIC OR FINISHED PRIOR TO JANUARY 1. 1987. AND. WHICH IS DESIGNATED BY HAVING IMPRINTED AND MAINTAiNED IN REFl.ECT:VE PAINT UPON SUCH PlACE THE WORDS "TOW AWAY ZONE." AND "HANDICAPPED PARKING ONLY" OR THE WORDS "TOW AWAY ZONE" AND THE UNIVERSAL SYMBOL OF ACCE$S18IUTY, THAT DESIGNATION St-IALL BE DEEMED TO MEET THE REQU(REMENTS OF SUBPARAGRAPH (A) OF THIS PARAGRAPH UNTIL SUCH TIME AS THAT CONCRETE LOT IS RENOVATED. REPAiRED. OR REMODELED, AT WHICH TIME A SIGN SHALL BE ERECTED WHICH SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF SUBPARAGRAPH (A) Of THIS PARAGRAPH. /.!i ~ oV; .\) .J;.. , . ~- (..I) "'-.;. ~ '-..I ~ 0 ::!'~ . S ,::,::{ ~ ' GO - . '"'1j ~C) ~.rrj J!JO _:.0 ~C) CNi;: '- ~ 50 IBT ---- AITACH THIS S1GN FOR VAN ACCESSIBlE PARKING SPACE(S) .. HANDiCAPPED PARKING PLACE" MEANS ANY AREA ON PUBUC OR PRIVATE PROPERTY WHICH HAS BEEN DESIGNATED AS RESERVED FOR USE BY HANDICAPPED PERSONS AS FOLLOWS: (A) BY A BLUE METAL REFLECTIVE SIGN WHICH IS AT LEAST 12 INCHES iN WIDTH AND 18 INCHES IN LENGTH AND IS ERECTED AS SUCH HEIGHT OR MANNER THAT IT WILL NOT BE OBSCURED BY A VEHICLE PARKED IN THE APACE AND BEARING THE FOLLOwiNG WORDS; :PERMlT. ~AAK1NG ONLY", "TOW WAY ZONE"'. AND "MAXIMUM FINE $500.00". THE WARNINGS REQUIRED IN IS SUBPARAGRAPh SHAlL BE PRINTED ~N WHITE LffiERS NOT LESS THAN ," IN hEIGHT ON THREE SEPARATE LINES AND CENTERED ON THE SiGN, THE . SIGN SMAlL ALSO BEAR THE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL FOR ACCESSIBILITY '~ENTERED BETWEEN THE SECOND AND THIRD WARNINGS. THE SIGN REQUIRED tY THIS SUBPARAGRAPH SHALL BE THE OFFICIAL AUTHORiZED SiGN FOR iANDICAPPED PARKING PLACE DESIGNATION IN THIS STATE. B) WHERE THE PARKING PlACE IS DESIGNATED BEFO,RE JANUARY 01. 1988. ~y A SIGN OR SIGNS BEARING THE WORDS .. TOW AWAY ZONE" AND HANDICAPPED PARKING ONLY" OR THE WORDS '"TOW AWAY ZONr' AND THE Nl\/ERSAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSiBILITY, THAT DESIGNATION SHALL BE EEMED TO MEET THE REQU1REMENTS OF SUBPARAGRAPH (A) OF THIS ARAGRAPH UNTIL SUCH TIME AS THE SIGN OF SIGNS ARE REPLACED FOR .THER REASONS. AT WHICH TIME ANY NEW SIGN ERECTED SHALL COMPLY ULLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS Of SUBPARAGRAPH (A) OF THIS PARAGRAPH OR o IN ~ z ~ . IX) - x- MlN. T PARKlNG ONLY TOW-AWAY ZONE $500.00 'J, FT, FROM GRADE MAXIMUM , I :5 ~ ~Q5 (J VAN ~: ~CCESSI8LE e~ ,0 1 ..CD o r-: ---I.- SIGN TO BE MOUNTED 7.0 TO BOlTOM OF SIGN H.4.NDICAP SIGN NOT TO SCAlE & FINE . , . ..:,.;;,,/' .<, ,q:.r"~"~~~' rJ~ LETTERlNG; WN. 1. HIGH (LETTERSNG & S'rW3OLiN \\titTE) REFlECTIVE: BLUE BACKGROUND ~~% ;':'h.~ , . .'>.....',,..,if' ,~ ~:l~~~~{tJ ~ 14. 15. 16. 17. 13. /0 _ G(OB-G\~ c.'I po. 'It.. Or ,,6-\. jil." J ...J '''\~") ? ~ (\ ~'f... 'W\~? ~ · o o o I I I I I o o (2) 3000 GAL. GREASE TRAPS / 4:t~0 ~o// o~Q Aoc~~~ //: ~Q~ o ~~~ c~~ ~ / ~<vQ;- /.5) ~Q ~~ ~ o ~~ c~<() /1.'1\ cell '!GiA JIU LUK I . US FIRST.! UTILmES PROTECTION CENTER ,~ 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. /....//' /" . 20. EMERGENCY (ACCESS ROAD ~ T,~[ EXIST/NG UTI/LinES S/--IOWN ON Tt-t'/S PLAN WE,RE OBTAINED Ic-RO/vt VAF?/OU5 UT/L T'r C'Olv1PAN/t~S, VAF?/OUS GOVEF?N/v1E/v'TAL AGENCIES. AND ABOVE i~-;';?OU/"./O OBSERVA TlO/\!. T,~E: S0RVE'(OR A,VD/OR ENGiNEER ,A.,I,AKE NC' CLA/A1 TO Td[ CO/v1P~E:TENc5S OF TH/S ;NFOF?,UA TlON. Tl-IE SiZE, LOCA nOl'v', OR ADo/nO/VAL UTiLiT/ES /v!AY BE UNCOVERED UPOlV EXCA VA no,V.:JPiOR TO BEGiNNING AN'! EA'!?Th' DI5TUF?BI/VG ACTiVITIES, THE UTiLiT) PROTECTiON SERViCE FOR THIS AF?EA IVfUST BE l\lOTlF/ED. I.~ ,'" II -- o ~ ~~l I o I I I FD \//, / f ,. I L./ L.' CA L L. ~o~~ _______ o~t.--- ~o~t. ------- ..... '-___0 o BEt\CHMARK: TOP OF "5 REBAR ELEV. -= 171.43 NCVD 1929 "'~ .....,. / o /1 ~ "/~ ~ , , ..... , .....,. ft :/ ~" .,., .'x.. x 10" TEE .' --- ~/ v , ....., , !;J '0 ~~~ ~~ ~ ~ '. ,;y' /. ,:y~ //? ~. c /~ ' / Jy~.~.. '" , ..: .' (. . ". ......., '..... IJ, , ", '~ ~sfS) _ GPS ~/- ,.,(\/ /v.... //" \~l Ope)\ ~ .J - . - ,~'I -) P r:--F\::'\:_'- ~ ~ OHE $)\' /'/ $)\'/ -~// .6'0\ // /' $)\' cp/ 8)\,///0 c~- /I?\ I \ \ ... l I " "\ \ , . i \ " " ... o~ ~\ ~ '\ ~' ~ ~ J OHE c'\ p., '\t_ .J ( \ f:-). '-.iI f>-S) , \ t ~ '- ......., "-", ~, \" \~ \ \ ~./J ;-" /'-...~ ~, I '~/ I .........."..' I ..- OHE ,-' ,- " ,---// ~/ ._-~ ~ / ~ L ~ FOe ()ot~ 6)) DOUBLE' CHECK ,. ..eo.... tit II> lit W lttIiI>i 4i; .. w " .. '" ... '" .. ...~...w~~..~.~. ~~~...~.~~ww~~~.~~~.~w~.~~.w.~ " .... OHE , '" " /~, /~: ' ' //~" '-.... // /A,' ~. ". ~~, .,'..... ') -~O) -0 ......, ,,~ 1. ~ -.- d~ \) .----~/._._-- // ---~ \., --'- OHE ': ~ ^!\! 1 )) .-......~' d~n pp ~' '" .- SCALE ~. ~Ir '.. 1.'1 /~ -...../' ../ OHE OHE OHE OVERHEAD POWER AND TELEPHONE ~n ~ U40~ VG),) ------ , )<. . "- ',/' " X. / ' >:..~ ' 'I'.' d~i"\ ct)1I d:J1\ ,...~~~.':. d~n , .1 \ ~ ~, .n.. / .;)')\\ . / sP /,/ 6')\"" " "', " ..... /....--- 1/ &. ~~ ~) " x " ..... \ISo " -.: \ / ) I) I', ;> f "" ' ~ r' :' \ \ ,:' '. .... 1 ' \ ...... \ " .... , '\ .... . . ,,' / / ., '" ./( '. l ", /< '" '-" " / " ! ' ,/'c:., " ' .' c . / ' ' /", ... " . '... " .1 0" i TEE \ \ ~ , w " ~,. , \ '\..... '. ....., "- .... " ',,- FIRE \ '~ . , I_I...: :> z " .-/ j'_j ",/8P.-/ v.; /,r 0_ ~'0/ ~ $J\'/ < -c/ 1) / c" " OHE 0" P(LON SIGi\ .. 8" SEE ARCH. owes & - ~YLO[\l SiCN }tI < SEE ARCH. DW(;S d~1I d:)(\ RELOCATE EX. FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY PP TAP BY LOCAL UTIU1Y COMPANY ~ ~ \ d~i'\ z ~\-: .~ o --' o . ~ (.Q G-l ......\ rD_ - ~ "\J 1) I ' ,-.... (X) t-= I wCJ) W. t-t:J C>o z: -w c..w Cl...CJ) ~'- w b~ ~~ ~ ..-~ r-o = ~ Z ~ N ~ ~ o > t:j c:c o \oe ~ " ~ -~ d' OJ (J1 <..D o / / ( p\A I 1 \ J I 1 I I \ \ I I I ; ~ -"'.' ',1 l - .....-- ..- SEE DETAILS FOR TAP REQUIREMENTS t---d')1l t--OHP c:c o ~ l-d:)i"\-- r--drlO- ~ " ~ ; ! , ~~ . ' I; l ~?' ~... " ,~ , l; ,.' " :: , . , j \ . , ~ ~ " " '.\ ~ ' i fEX\, ~, . ~ I" ...... -, . , ~ -' .. Cc , . '" -' -: .... I- W W Z CO .. 12. -1 i LAW 1 , Sill,-r- lA/'r,...- /M!t.. vvluc- /8 /. /1 \ ') QJ 7 /f , L)L') L UL - "T IT'S THE EXISTING UllUTY LINES SHOWN ARE APPROXIft.CA TE LOCATIONS ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING UllUTY UNE LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. ANY DEVIATIONS FROM THE DESIGN LOCATIONS SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE PROJECT ENGINEER PR10R TO CONSTRUCllON. DAMAGE TO EXISTING UTILITY UNES RESUL llNG FROM CONTRACTOR NEGUGENCE SHALL BE REPAIRED AT CONTRACTOR EXPENSE. o BENCH!\{ARK: TOP OF #5 REBAR FO ELEV. = 159.86 NGVD 1929 A. :E C' 1-. (I) Ie '" ; \' ~ '" - ~ (:2) a al 0) ~ fJ5 C/J ~ dd ~ C'n " ow 0 () (0" ~ q-I' ~ N'-' ..c.: 0" C,) t"')x ~ <~ - ......., ... " ~ 0 ~ ~ ~ 0 ~ <{ w s: > " .~ w 0 ~...J ... 0 ~ ::)o::to ~ 0 c::i ..J CX) CDN51 ... wOO ~~ WXOr'1 ~OZrt) 0... CD W """"" S 0 ;~o ~ oC!<~ ..... v a.. ..J ~ ~ ~, " . . U Z ...... ~ C-' Z ........ Z Z j P-c Z o ~ 00 ..... U ~ ~ P-c I . pve % j- '--, i I t I ! 1 I l I I j I I : ...-:- t i : .- I I : . f , IN' , i l' 1 i 1 ~ t i to-- --- '---, i .:, , I , f --J I f ; W;! i .; j . >,; ; Z!: , - l j ! i ; it: : ')00 1.-- --- ~-l-. -------...;. 4- iN: i u1 I g I C'ii 1 . l o~ I ~ , ' 01"'-- , 100 ~ i.,,- 0'- '0 . . Il~ ~o I 0) CD (.0 ~ _ fN u::> . t . l"")1 + r-.... - 01 + 1"---.. ~ I + I l~I'O .- lJf r-0; I W r<)~O I I' N!'- ..-- N'~ ----+~~----------n ..- . 1 !<( . 011- - 0'....... ~ ::> _ll- = ulif) C:: Z II- - Z Ql(/) ( -: U:Ul U::: _ I . ' " I : I j , I ! I ' . ! I: , I ' i I I : ! 190 - --T-:1 \ I I : -- .----- T..--;.----- I r I : i , 180 ---' .--------t------i-. --.-----1 I [ : I I I ;. I I : , : I I . ! .------ -r---, , I \ I I i , I 4& LF 1 2' 170 f-- ~---- -.---.-+.-.----J @ 1.00 LF 12" p~c. 38 L~ 12>> ~vc I I ' @ 1.00 %1 @i1.0C % I , ! : \ t . ; , I ! I i I , DA TUJf ELEV : : ! 165.00 -I TORM PROFILE 1 ! CALE: HORlZ. 1" = 50 I V'ERT. 1'1 = 5' L O+QO 4 PVC % 12' 00 -- lr - -----T-r----. -l-~---- ------;---,-1 --..-----rT------n , I ' . , ' 'I I. 'I " : l() '(0 bJ 'I I LO i! ,~ I i 0 ~ \P I 1"-; I u~ ;1 0 I 0 ' ill. I ~. or--; ~ , ,I 0 , 0 l"-- 0 ...- - 1"") I . . l "< t: . ...-- 1"1"'-- or---- l"-- ~ l" 0 r-.... Ii 1"; P.' C? p r::. ,- I ~ 0;'-- ....; r;--. ~ 0 l"-- I r-.... 0 ..-- I 0 f'. l?i ill. ...- P ,_ 100 to i . 0 l"-- -; ~ 0 ..- '0 u). t- 0 .- .~tt'-f--~----J'"d"-"tD--+---~+l":=J-. -.- , ...- . (0- -: -----r- I_+l"-.:=I-- -4!Lf) . ~ I ... ~- W r-...... ~ (,01, W ~ ....., j.,-, cJ>1 W I, 1O . '.'J i l{) T \ - Z 0 NIN"-I ~:,:) OJ T I"'-- --.I :N ~ ,.... a T I'-- -J I ~"'">:> NIN i-I ~_ ,. r; .:; ::: ~ 0 N ~ ..- W 1 I . l"l1 ~ .- W Ot--~7' 1....'_.. O~~C> N I II . :O~2> I" . u 0 cr:: ~ 9 ;:: ~ ::> ~ U V1 ii: ~ I < ~ >:> Ol~ ~ > :() V) iX ~ o!~ ~ '> , u,\./) {Y" ~ ~ : 9 I- - 7' Z () Ul a:: ~, n1r,., ('v Z , I :- . () (/) et: ~ __ ~j ~ '-1fV J u- - I , " It I: It; : ! H -- I; ..- -.--- t:---h-.---.--~ ._- ---M----.-1i II 1 1 i ~ I : 1 I ' I I I I I ; ! ; : I I; I : II : I! I; : I ----.. -1:-. ----l-----II.- - -:-- r-- ~ - - --- ---n---- -- --- I I ; I I I j' : i :' ; , I; : t il ; , I I ; I " I~. - .. ------..--- '_jl--~. -- . -li--.--~,..---.-.11- ---t- -- --. + '--r1 -- --------.l!' II ':: , I' . I : : : I' '. ' I I I '. ' I ' I i I I I: i I :,'1 I ~ I I I :! 1: I! I <I .-- , : --- -- - _.....__4__...__.~ l--.----~--- - --4l------,. ----------.---.-- i I , I 'I , . 4A 'F 1 I : 1 "t L T I, I , ,; ,-: j I I I -A -~^ --:." ...o:.,!}...... ,'rr\ -:.,'-7-U. ----.- iu-r-T---r----- .----- --\l1----..-----t= . ,oj @L1 1-~~-- ~ :..ll..- W '/ '0 l' :i ......' \! Ii: ' 40 I F 1~" \P\ IC " R~P . / I, ! L 4-, V I, % . , / / i ;@1 .00 ~ :1. j; (0 tl 43 RCP~ I \ 40 LF 1Sr RCP: ;) . % - ~- .... ---- - ;.------f--. ----- ..--;-----@..-\3~-5tJ-.-%- ;.-----.--~ ~3 LF 1 5" RCP ---1 ! I II ~ t @ 0.50 % I :!! I 'Ii , 1" , :1 H ! i ~ ! d ] f<) OJ ..~ U")O 01'--- ~ l~>--' ~ - -'-1~L:"~t=-:- 11"' l"-- ~ n,.....;~~O (" . 1"~2--"~' -If-' - ---- ....... O(j!~~~ I --- t-+ I 0 I I 1 , I I I - -.-tl.. .- ~ . - ..- I . '-r: .. I I ...,~-- F 15' .O~o- L @- --r 15' 50 .% ~\3 LF , @ 0 ....,.- - _._~_.- ! -O-Cj' '"'\- .. -+. I -+ @ R (~ \-, o "-- ~ 8' - LF -- A A ~'-t ~oo ,- \.D m <..0 ,o~ I:=> c ~: -{...:-~- ClOW : ' :? <~. .::; : 1- .:::' .J- ,Ii ~ 90 Q'\ vU 7r..' ,j DA TUJI ELEV --- loG 00 . r g' - ~ , I-r) I I (' ~ 1'-- I OJ0)~ I k~ U--). I .-1 T ('--... .--.1 I u) '.-' ~ ! ('-.; ...-- LL IV! J ~I . --=;.: . I,r) () I- ...... :> 1 ,=:) r-- U,uJ:i ~ 1"'~:=> ,- I <i\..D u; I '-I +- l"-- --.J I ('. (', .- W ... I I :...:r ....-;- . I Ol~ ~ -> I UllFI CL ~ r. - . .'- .. I .---1 I I ! I ! , I 9 36 u::; '7:, P\~ 00: '\ i 2' @ ply'C % -- t \ :-t . (~iJ r .- - ~~- I . ('~ , ,".J r....... In (JJ ...-- i l..O ~,-.; . ~I'= ~ d -J -< ~- h '-)'1- - "> uivl:l:. Z t - I I I i 1- I I i I I ! u:: @ 6:1 ----1 r-- - 1r. ~ ' '-t---t ~- . r--- /~~--- / -~ ---.- --- 1-f;-:-!} @ f"' P\: .J' I\:" "". 9CI o o o ('--... o .- '0 0, T ..,j .-0 w I - ~:~.._> Ill) ~ ~ PRO FILE 3+00 = 50 = 5' SE\\TER 1 1 1" H 0 RIZ VERT 2+00 31'0 f<lvf SC ALE T-rJ() 1 I -- ----- - I.) () c I~R() FILJF-= ---I (' -t ' . 50 5' - S i~\VEI~ 1 HORlZ VERT -- DC) SC ALE srro Rl\if 60 I i I I , I I I ,--, .- I~.'~ c 7U 80 D.~ T L~ivf ELE V ~_.~- 155 00 PVl~ % o o ..... J 0('--... ,CD u; .- 'v> . I ,CD . OJ. T I"'-- --.I .-' C'-..J .-- w 1; O!~L> U'VJ 0:.:: ~ ~ ~; :LF 1 ')' '-t ~ I .... @ 1.00 ~-35 --[F r2~-i PVC @ 1 00 % 1 :2" PVC 00 % -. ~t I . ... -- .- - . -i' -. .---.- - I") I CD ('~. L(J C~ I I C~ 01'--' 01"'-- ,- L{) ~ , ill l.() ~ l"""J ~ 11.4) c.D . (,01 T r-....--.I ~. ' + 1'-- ~ ,- (",. ~ W ,-1('-.],-- w l-r.:r: ";;;':..- :'1]<-~:: OIl- ~::::; Olr-- ~ ....... . 'j"l .'"V...... ".,. '"\ .-V Z U V u..... _ L) v I LL _ I I : j , I - -j ---. i.- - I i I I , , I I I 1 I ! , I I I -- "1-' -.' --;-.,-- I : I I I I r J 40 LF @ -- PROFILl:~ ~ t-- u.++. ~ i -..,- ('4) I ~ I ~~ i'- 1..-- u I .-- G) '<T : u;1 T l"-- ...J ...--.-.-4J -11- - .._.;.. 1<1.. ~...... Ol--~./ UIV1 Q ~ I I 'i I I I I -;- I bT f % / - .. . - ...-1-----+.- : / 1 2" !1>ve-1 , 00 % ~ .- ----,..- - --- .q CD 0...... .- UI ,- CD cD ~~;~d -~,<(-~; t--- uU!O::::~ '- -'1"- I I -I-. 00 LF @ I o\.t.fU-\-2~---P'Y~-- @ '\ I ---<--..-. 20 1--- ~ ---I- i -<- , ~~~ 1 200 0~ o o 1 l"-- :0 ...-- '0 l"-';+ .....i .-:OW I i------ -c.< . >11-> I\/) ~ ~/ / 70ffi= DA TUJ! ELEV --- 160. 00 80 90 \JIJ = 50 - , - ...... - v '> ~T S E\\;E R 1 1" HORIZ \TERT. S TO R!v1 SC ALE: +- 00 L 0+00 .- +00 4,00 1- i Ig .., o II: A. ~ E-c :3< ~ ...... U~ <~ ~O ~ ~.~ o ~ ~~ ~OO N:::> ......~ Z~ ......< := ~ ~~ E--t~ ZE--t ~Z ~uEj rn ::>~Z c.;ZO :::>O~ <~E--t ~Z U~ ~E--t ~~ ~ pve % 1')' 00 - z o - ca:" - > 1&1 II: >- m () a III lU~a ..I I- - >- I-m(.) i. CD I-~.- w.Q ... W :r: _ - CI)~() 3 m 1a5 a ~ rn ~~ ~= O~ E--tO rn~ ~ --- -. I t I - - .- -----1- I i I PVC~ I %: , : ---t------ I i 1 ; I - ~ -":----.f-- / t I I , I / I I / , I I : / I , -l :' 12" .00 ~ ~ % 1 2'~ pve 00' % I 4.;3 LF -- _.~--~..;..._- -.- I@ 0.5P --r- ---..---- --::-:---:-,~, "-"i-'" - - I : I I i .,.. ! -"'---' --'-- RCP @ 6 LF @ ! i .+-- h.' It ~: i LF ..- I t- 1-. I I I 1'-- i ('~ 0 I . r.-) 0) . '~ o~ (,D --.-t- ~.. _. I c-..J , .lD l-g-~ ~ ~ 11' ".- 7' ___1 I ~-, ~ '-,' ...;:-, ll~;~?? Ull.I\:n:: ?;- ~ r / I I I !/ I 'j ft= I ~ 1-- -- - , 1:36 / -----~ ..,. f~CP % 1 3' O.~)O I I i I I'" r~ '..\. I)> ,--;; ([I II"'I r-- CC- I'D I........ ,- >- i1"-~ T-i r) Ill) ~ ,-~I J.1. ..- ,.- uJ ~-~ ~ :' ~ '~'i'/' Q:. Z Z : - t I i I 7'-3 U- (gl _~~'AL'lf C' J N' I '..;F~ujJNU -----~~--.-L % 50 o ex!:::, ILl\: i~ .............. ~l) RCF"' /-- / I ~- . ' Lj" .:. L ~ -- !- . 1 I , I I I j i ~ \ , I ::' I ,i ~.~:~ , I . .L , 1'1' r") -- , Ill) r,' 1 -t ~_: ....J "C:~119 L~ i~~~; W li' 'Y Z I .- I 1 I ~' 1 - I --.;..1 p L R /~ LF. .24' 0) () 50 'jij I I 1 ! I I I I "I "-j I I '.L \ I U-' lu. ~(I ~' L'~. , , -;- ---' ~,w '~-I'J , I " -- ..... > >1--7'" J= :_n~ I I I I I I i I -,~, / .fLit r1 - ~ "u ---' . PIJC % ,,' I ,~ CJ ~'J I' o '~-= ,u;C1 r"-\ ...0"'- '-) -;- [', =-, lj,):"~ ~ '':'."1 I" r~.~~> I 'Il 0.::. ~ 1 o , 1 I i I , ! I ! i , I t I I I I I I I ! I 1 I i I I I --~ \-~f ~_ L . :@ 1 2" PVC 00 % r f', . -r ' CA::, I 1'-...."'-- I o.~ li-j I ~ ,~, I ,,~, ,.'.' , '4 l.J., _ '.. 'I o(.~('--... I 'oc.<r" If<) 0 1'" ,-- In (:) r-- ,- IUJ ,:.Q .- l-- ,01 ~ ~ l- <: + r--- z;? ml-T'r--- z ;, UJ1G..- - 'v' L;) 0 ~ _: -' ~'Lt-~ -. ~. -li'~',; :.. ~ .- 011- ~?---- ul~ ~ :.:' ....> 0!vJ 0.::. ~ ~ ulv1 Q.:. ~ ~ I I I I ' I ! I I 1 I . I I , , r --- i I I I I ! i I I i I , t 1 I I , I ; I ...... , -- LJ @ - 4 \. PVC % - - 1 ~i ... 09 F L @ ~O() \.t~ ) ~..cl () .- o CD r', 'Ou;"'-- ,'1"- ('--... u;,o.- ~ I. :r::~2->- 2 I.;i C2 ;:; ,,,- ! ~j S3 \ I 1 '" "" ':-30 80 1:2 PVc 00 % o o r \=:)1'- t'- 0 ...-- UC~W !' ~T ~ ~ \.~:r- -- W '-61< L:> .1--7 UlnO:::~ 45 LF @ PVC % 1 ~' 00 I I '~ ".- LF @ - I ~ 4"J I . I C" J i 011'-- 1(',0 r- IOJ ..r:. 1 CO, w,. 1'---' 1"- ('--... ~ c,~IO ...-- ~ -. .1~",,>' ~-- 011- ""- > Ulf)(2Z I - I I I i ! I l' I I __-4_ 4~ , I .-. T '1 Lt 200,-- I - - CiY r- -- I f"> f<) ~ I I I'--- l"-- ~ o .--: ,--:.. r....... ,0 () l"-- 1'-... ~ 10 <.0 ...-- ~ l-- 1"1 T 1'-- ~ ('-.I 0 ~ ~ ~ 0 I -J-l<i'~'::"-: -:--.'~'''''- -- ...L.t----..->>> 2(J)iXzZZ ! ~ --- I ~ I .-...r I ' \... I C\('--... r-O~ <I~~' . j-......ITi'.....J C'~I ,=:) Ir- W ti. ~-- OI~2> ullf) E2 Z I ' - I I I ! I I I . 't- - ~ I ' I I I I i I I 1--- I I I I. ..-l ~ pvc % -- 70 ~ 1 ')" "'1 00 .;. gO 80 1 1 LF @ " '-t- 12' 00 I --',-' i --" - \ I , , '--4'--------- - I , , r I ----..- ..l-- .,. 6\.:; - PROFILE--i hORIZ [" - -, I VEl~T I" __- _?O I _ :::> I I __ I __--------.J -1'- 00 r---' I I STO R~1 I I i SCALE L___ o+-nl~ DA TU},1 ELEV ----- 165. 00 -----l PRO r'Il~E [ I I HORIZ. 1" = 50' ; VERT. 1" = 5' I _ t 1-1-00 ! -------- STORI\1 SC ALE (J--t--- 0 0 DA TU.W ELEV ------ 165. 00 SEv'lER PROFILE SCALE: = 50 = 5' 1 1" HO RIZ VERT. -- ~1TO R~\ f ~ 1\/.4, r 1 I I L___ 0+ DO DA. TUJJ" 1!-LEV 155 00 ~ ~ a: ~ : ~ ~ I.&J ~ tr. ~ c: _ ti en z o ~ is << ~ ~ ~ CD ~I~I~ '" ~ "- - - ..- ... 2 o t= CL 5 en w c - o z - ~ < o 8+00 7+00 6+00 SECTION / I I i I 1 _~_________.J -r-' --~ . _.- -.-.--- -1- ~ - ._-~ . :.'. .:. ~---"T---;:r-'---'._-- "~-T--"--r-'---;--l-r--~--_d'-" 1.l 0 1 : 0 CO I l~ (D: I .- i I l{) :: 0 , I. I,. . I I Il~ uJ ~ I 0] 0 I m -: 0.- : 0 ~ 0 I........~ : 0 l"-) ! _ ~ 0~ 0 I 0) l'"' i ()) ~ ---: l"-- ~ ~ " I ~ l"-- : 0 I'--- I ' , ~.- . ..- I ...,.- .-- . OJ r-1 0 ~ II'-- u,",> I..... Ul ..,... .- Ul I 1m (J,) CC ~ j~ I.D ~ UJ . . N I"'-- I: M. WI"'-- ;. ~ I'--- " I~ f'-. 0 r-..... ;u; I"'-- . 1" Ul '1'- l-- IT ..-.. ~ 1+..- -'.' T .-....J I 01'" ~ -' J.,. ~ -' ",,' + ~ -' + ~=:: I I ~ r---.1t'.D:, W cnli.D U;J V> I"'-- W I ...- r---. w ..-10') W ~-:cc w ~i~~~~: ::---- 8R~~- ----8i,'J.~-~u..-- 811~ ~~--~ --8fll~ ~ ~ ~811G ~ ~- --~~ ~ ~ -"-1.- _ I t""""'- \ - --;\r ^ -v . Z Z I Ii: i ",,-v'LL -- I I ! i: ii' I ' I ' i I ,: O! I: I : I :: , i I.... 1 I ' I , , I " 'I' i 1 iaJO I I I "I : I ; I " "'" !'. I ,I. ; 1 ! r "1-I~-~-"----'rr---' .d--i ---.-~--- -l------r--;, ------TT--.---~.; I 0' i I ! \ Ii' I '1'-. , ,I" ; I ~.- ~ 'I I;, I : f 'I \0 u.: L.W . I,. I ,~ :' , ; i ! I ; i . I ~. . , I, \ I I - ~~> I ; : I : I I I. , I UI-i_ , ' I I I ., : I (...JU10:::~ ' I : I, ::. I: I I I ! , i I J: 'I ''+- ; i --, r --I~---'-- ----.~-_...:--._--.-T------.--.----.r--.-----.-l ! -----1 I I, I I I 1 ' I ' , I I I I I' I \ I \ I , I I; . : I I I I I I: _ I, I ~~~: ~,' ~ I - , .,.... ..... -to .-,.- --------. i----.~ --- - .---- -------'( --- - ..--.-.. ----- , , \ , i , : \ I , I : i ; : I' \ ~ . ~p LF ; , f . II @ 1 .- - - ---"- ----;----.----.---- -~'.. ---- --~~. . t I I , : 41 I - 1 ":J1j PV""' \ ,~r .:1 i t...- o 1-rT\ 1 0 11' i 07 , · 7 I ,- 1 ",," I p','^ ~ . "". /0 : "1' d' .:.. l vt...- :: t I ~ t : ; @ 1.00: % i ; I t i , ;1 - .-~.~..-...-...... ". --..---. -~--.._~.------.-----i--.-.-..--.--.-~ i 40 LF i1 2" PVC; 1 ! ; t I : @ 1 ;00 % i i ~ . 1 I ! Ii: , I . ; I . I : 1 . \ : t ; ! I j f l I , ---.~r-.---------- ---.~._-~---~--.....--------- --1--{ ; ; 1 I I I ~ ! ; I I I , ~ ~ t , ' , , I I . ! ~ f . I I i .. I PVC ...J % ; i ~3 LF : @ I I -.---- .----.,- ---- I i BE PER SPECIFICA TION - - ~ ~ 5+00 ........ SHALL .... PiPE - N (j TE ALL P VC 2700 \,0) -.... 4+00 ..... & " --- .3 -, (jO 1";JU T-01=; ffi m ::.IS ::) Z ~ G: ~ - I- W W :c (I) I C8 ~.,,~ .~ . - '-. I I ..... A. :E C t- .(1) .- ., ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ (/l ~ ~ 0 Q (0'" C>> .q-.I' ~ N""'"' ..:: 0" (.) ~X ~ <~ - "-'" , " ~ 0 ~ c.l ~ 0 ~ ~ tS ~ lIJ 0 ~ -JOWO ~ ~ ...JO ~ 0'- -.J ex) (D~>I "' . lJJ lX) ~g) lUX () .~ ~"O Z t") a:::cnw~ ~ 0 .~O .s oq<(~ ~v.o.. -..J '-' . U Z' ~ ",. ~ Z ....... Z Z j ~ Z o ...... en ....... u ~ ~ ~ I ~I. o I~I 0 eL' < n ~, o~ ~~o.- LJ ~J c.c; ,~ ., f"-. .-I 1.1 I C'-; ~ I I ~: U-J ~!<t~> L) G 0:-':: Z 'I - 1 .1 -i I I I i I ..,. ! T -1--- -.--....- i I ' ~ I .0.) I '.D i ,(J') -T -\1-~W- iLlJ 1'--, ~ Iv) L;-; . 11 r< .--J ~iO~W ~)! ~ ~. .::-~ -,JVl Q::::' Z I '-,1 !- - -- ---r-- sO I 0') O~ . 0; l..D , /r-- ~ ~CO ~ l~ OJ 10'- /' !O -i '-1- / 1+1"--7~ I 010.- ~O · A 11,..-1- .. ~ I~L>> 8~ ~-~-~.~ I . . ... ,'1 t- (.) IU ...." o a: a. :" >c E-c ::1< ...... t-C Q~ <~ r:.cO ~ ~.c; < o 4ft ~~ >[g s:::'~ Z~ ~< =, ~ ~P:: E-t~ ZE-c ~Z ~~ E-tUU en ~.~z c.;z8 ~OE-c <~z =~ UE-t ~~ ~Q I 1 DIP % ..,.--. ---- :2 :=1 LF: 4" @ 2.00 --:"- 70 , I II _~_J ---+- SEWER PROFILES +00 2+00 .:;. 50 -- ..:.;.' - J 1 1" HO RIZ VERT. ,-- SANITARY L_ SCALE Ut- 00 DATUJf ELEV 180. 00 () lEI C ).. 1:11' fa ~ ~ ~cn ~~ <~ ~~ ~~ Zo <~ OO~, : --l 1 - I ~ --"------ll~ 0 I"-- : I"jO'- . 1+0 . I ~ f'.. .-J II'- .- W .1 lJ< "5 . UII- ~ > ; ()If)et:~ -~~_._- ---l :. I \ I I i .~---- .-..- -.-- '. i t T"- I I - --- , ~-_. i ,I t 'I i il I t I I; 01' 'I <Xl 0 _. _ . _ m . - 1'- i ' OerY -- -I" _ ~ r--- Ii) ~- .. - ' 0) ,,~ "'._ _ _ ,...-...0 W I~S". i) \ W ,Ii.'"' 0 '-' -- ' : c ~ ',.. J"'-- ____-I-- tT~ t- 'TeD- ,,0 r--- z =- : ~ " --' ' '--'I '._ ~_ _ ,._) W.-- I: I- -' -~ I -<' ' I' ~''-< -- . . - <:: ~Ic:: ;:;= :; >' 0 f- ~ > -r'.;"; '- Z '-< V, .C-- :z: ,. - ,_ I ~- I ' . ~- i ,I' I ' . I ' 'I i ' !I - .. ! . ' ! I -1' -~~~-= ) - I I 90 ('J 0.; ('j ~~ t I~"~--~: r'l C() '-D .- ''"1'" ,~ : 0 f- I ~ 1'-, =:J '-.-ill)) ~ ~ 0 --,._! <:( ,,- . ~II- ~ > > ..,c:lv10:::: Z Z ! - i I I ! : z o - (I) - > w a: 11. ) .lE ,m ~ ::) ~ ~ G: ~ ~ a:: ~ ~ I.IJ 0::' 5: l;j (I) z o ~ 25 ~ z o t= 0- @ W C - o z ----y---- i i \ --- --'-----'\._- I I \ I t ! I I - -----r.-~--- ; I I ---.- ---' --- I I I I~ I I 1__ t I t 80 --~~~------, tl; i 00 % ---.---.."""" - --t----.- I I I i I ~, I v> i --- '-1VC-s.Q... , l('~ 0 .---,--- - I + ill 1 Ii"') I........J i 01'-- .-- W i II i q~~> I UUlQ:~ --,---- +- ; i , I ! i (''4 I l"j I o~ I..~ ,......, ,,---, ,.....f ........--- 1'-0 ~ .-- I -t- \.0 ('~ " ......i L..-!'-- .- \..oJ 11<....- . Oil-- ~ > C)lcn iX ~ I --+ I I i I 90 1---' , -:.-:--,. - :-. - - .. --.-- - - 1- : v, l '-0 \ i 0 I moo:) I (j): 0 o c',,; \.0' I . \ .. t I 01 I or- ~"I"--~ 01.0 i ; ~r----- jo OJ CD o.D ~ ~ ,- \ ~(i) o.J .- C? -i .-- .-- I- ' ~f' ~ . !l';'- u) . ;-I"--zz~: +,,~ 1 .;-r'--.....J 0.- _ _ 0 ! _ 0.-- W I I -:>\.--.- W I ----------- -~.- - .-- -~--------- J JJ -. < ~ ___' _____;. ___' I 0 .q: ~ ~ ' .- ---0'< 2 -----:. ...... I- ~ ../ - /; l-- _ -- (I-- - -- ~ v'1 a:;: ~ ~ ~ U1(f) Ct: ~ U;01 a:= ~ - I : I :! I I ; \ I , I -"---'---, I I \[12 '-CF t @ \ \ I .~ PVC % ..~.~ - - 6": Oc 55 LF @ '\ I -.---......,..-. I PVC % i~ \ C. \=- 6" I ;1.00 i -"\---.--- 3 @ '\ I I I pve % ~ \ L r 9" @ \ aD I --, 1 -' '- - % . ~2 ':) .,,-~ ...--- -- ---{]~~----- --~-- -- I I 1 I - - i I r- I 1'_ 1"') I 0 ~J:~; ; .=> o.L ~- 10 oj ,- r- 11 (.-, Z =-~ ffir:u::"-C I: _ ~ i~ ~ > -, LI'JI 0::. ~ ~ I I I t ! n------- - -T-- -- I -----1--..- - ;- p~;C ,-.' :' LF 93 i I I t 1 ; I I" I 1-- '-.0 I CD Ii) I ,-, L;r) Ll" In t7: LlJ ,- lo~ ..- I eJ t--- - l-t--- \:1) .=J 'flt"i .- ~ 0 I..-.-"'<C- . . -,--~...... )0 ---- --.. -'- t- - .'" .:> Llvl Cl ~ ;; I I .J I ! ,. -- ~. 80 r----- <-L1 (() C~ Q0JliJ o .,- - (~ III (()- ~o.-~ 11< ~___. xlt-- - .---> W(jlCL~ 70 --1- I \ ~ < o ,,;"C~4 --:lJ'~--- i 6' "-~ ,r... , ~~, -1 '7 \..~.:1/1 I ~ \.00 % \ ,~ _ a6 ,. ' ,,.. .) -" i : ' "" - ' ' I ' -- ------ ---T~-'~------ : ' ! -~-----' I --1-------1 i . 1 , ! : i , . .. . ' " -' . :: t , ' , I , ] 70 ~--- -----i'- - - , l l I -"t-- - . CD (() ,0 I-..m~ [1.0 OJ ,- Inu~ . 11- !'-; -..-J ~~~:w II<~ . 8~~~~ : _ -+ . _.0 l':'- ;~o...:- IlDc6 ,+1'---- ~ L i'- .- L...J I, - o<t:L> . t---7 U (j) et: "-- I - I 4- i I ! i -~--.... --- i 1 I .J.-____.._ , .... --<- -...- -. ..-- - I I I J I; I I 11 H 60 SEW. PROFILE SCALE: HORIZ, 1" "'" ~. VERT- 1" '"" S' SAN. DATl.J:W ELEV 16D. 00 SE"W~R PROFILES - 50 = 5' 1 1 " HORIZ. VERT SANIT ARY SCALE: DATU.V ELEV 15D. 00 i~ ~ ~.vI -- III W :C. eI) ,. ...-,~~. 1 d. .- +00 0+00 4+00 3+00 2+00 ;-00 () +00 9 + \10 r, ., _J \ 2,+ ;+00 6;-00 - ~) -t- CO 4--r00 3+00 2+00 100 :. " "" ,,: " , .. . n..: , . z o - CI) - > LU a: .; t- W W Z en I- CJ W -:a o a: A. Ai :E C' I- en - .. - ' " 0:: W m :t ::;) Z ~ G: . '-~ ..... \, ,;;:.: . . .~: r' ~_... '\-.; r' ,t.-, 1 L'l"- .',' -- 1 , " I l~ j :';. ..~, .--- \~... ...--:" ." j" .- .' '\ '\ .' .,.," , ;' - ... \ .. ~' ':. ,1 ,"--'. -..:.~ ,'" '..: ' . , --;1,.. ~ ,T / > ~ ~< ~~ t)c; <~' .~o .~ ~a o ~ ~~ :>tOO t'J:::> ......c:.; z~ tl-C< == ~ .- o en en Ln t N N co """*' o co........ ~t' N'-" 0,..... tt)x <( ,<( L&... ,,"""'" C ~ ~ 8 ~ Co w' ,.0' .....JOWo =>.-::i(X) ON:> I CD~WfX) UJXUflt) ~OZ~ a.. CD w " oo~R <:) · < 'f'. ~a.....J,-" - ~ ,"' t.. ,) y '--,- "~r " C,8 - '" - z o t--4 ~CI1 U~. ~~ ~< ~~ rn~ Z~ o U (0 ~~ Ul - , s OJ - ,- .- N ~ ~~ ~~ Z~ ~~ <uU E-t.. rn~Z ~Zo "'o~ ~~~ <=~ U~ a-c~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ fIJ dd '" ~ (,) C>> ~ ~ e ~ ~ C>> .~ Z ~ ~ s a-: ..~~ .. ..0;....; . . , . " .~. . I , I . <' " . u Z t--C. ~ ~ z ~ z z j ~ z o ....... 00 ....... u ~ ~ P-. \.>, (j) , OJ , N ... . $ w 5 w 0:: -! ~ ...., 0: <( ~ W 0:: c:: I I ... ! , If 1 I ( \ z o F c... 5 en w o - o z ~ < o ~ ~ I( .~ ..;: , }' i ~ \ .V .\ \, ~,. ~ I!' \ .. J;; ) \, ~:' j~" (' ~: " ~ <: ~, ~ .. .. ~ \ t' .,) ? ,; ., ~ of S < 1 ~:. .. J \ ~ ~ j , , ~ . \ \ <' , \ l. \ \ , \ . ~ ./ \ ~ \ \ ~~ ~~, \ ~ ~. t '. jl \ \ ~" \. . i , i ) , < . f \ < ~ ~ ~ { t J \ I ~~ . ~,..~..,. { ." : ~... ,. ~ ,'I .", . . . ".' . ,.,.... ..,)..\' ~ -l :DUo;: . SID.. DErAIL NO. 508 ", ~. ~..-,..., ,,~ j ," ~~ i - ~ t A \....' I 5' TYPiCAl ~ ) ~ 1 I I , 1/2- CHAMFER f I j,;r ~,.t." 14 GAGE COPPER I II 1 DETECTION Wi7E 1 Z" bAlN. , ti r It . A ~ ...L 6 MI"\X. { i I I I ,l..,i/ ~- } I I' '1 COMPACTED ~ II ~~~~D I ~I I l BACKFILL ~.~ ~ I I ). .8' / ,~~ALVE BOX 6' ....J III ' I ~ \l) ! fGATE I , I J VALVE tl l r M J, TEE ~ ~ .,:~Ji~ I --...::~ 1/')" . \" /........,'-- r~n '\. ,j -I'ml ~ .... .... : f(/h0," IlIl::\. 11" 1111 l" .... . \.\-: )~ 1111 - '- III I -1m __ JC "[ "C~;.~.. If" 1" DRI BAR (24" lONG) ~~ :- ..' - ---,uu ". _ !E= = ~IIUUU'~"f..--;;;?--::-H ~ II FLU TH TOP \ " "~1 IN liP l':::::m- , 6;~ I I \ I ,~IFII = ,-!Ip:::Jt8' \CI/,y,,-~ ~ _~; _\. 3/4- HOLE FOR PIN ! l .. ,.:..:::n ~!l 111~ 1l=l1J::" + ~ \f' 7' LONG - 3000 PSI I PIPE DIA VARIE~ 1/ 5 C,F.-#57 STONE --' L3/4" ~ l' I ~ ~ o 1 2" \~I'! THRUST BLOCK r ~01 \ \ / ~ Q) ANCHORING TO BE PROVlDED BY ! ~ 2-3/'+"~ nE RODS TO BE 2 - ft4 DEFORMED STElL BARS .~ GAL\1NIZED OR 8111JMINOUS 5' LONG;, COA TED 1 A - A ,\, _ 11' :: - BUMPER ,........\.... FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY ~.Irlfo . . :: . . . '.:,.t ::.>:..:.,,<.'1IIIl. APP. FIE NO. 1 JOB NO.. APP. FU NO. , --- NO. ~ I ~ ~l bEsGl\ S1O. OD'M.. NO. .~ OESQ . S1O. DETAL NO. DE5CRlPnOH BY DAlE PP27.~ REV. BY DAlE DE:SaPllON BY DAlE W10 ~ , . , ... ~, - ~ . =; \0 I \- .';.,'t.' ~~ FLANGED i APPING VALVE ~~ i ~ / MECHANiCAl ::. TAPPING SlEEVE , / _ tv_ ~NT '\ EXISTING WATER II / ", 'Y ~ 1- MAIN 'j J an L ," ./ I~ ' -/ '~- {- ~ ~ n I I } , 1~111- I d 'tl' I I'. lr- 2:R T I 1/4' /,~ i \... I ml 1111 .-"7rf ~ r I jp I I h I ' / F ~ ~~ ,,/ i . - - . . \\ ! r I! ~ I~ [I'R f ....-- 4' TnT///' / / / ~ l ~ II!, I :-'. .' l.~ ~,~ _ H J \. ~ 11 i_Ii I .. I" "".~. ~lli-.Lu 1 ... .~~ ~ ~ .. ~ l!.~L ~ ~ . !~, 1-11[- ~ ~" · ~'I" .'. .. · .. . ...1 J .-111- I I I I,j. -j ~ I . .. . .. :ll' )- I- I 6' i 1 8' . ! :=111 liE. .: ' .... · '.: .,: ,!' I Iii 'I I I-I' 1- . . .' l' I. -I '1- \' . - ,- .. . ... .. ... i . .;J;;L'. ' -II-I \! _ I _ 41 .. .. -. i .. - I-l .. '. -I ' '- - .. .. .. · "'I .../ - I - ~, A " - - _. ... ___ I - - o.'+l -illiTillTllJ.J. , ~- _ ,_ I ,---:,. , .:...:....:- '~ ~"'Jd~Ll- { -=:111:=111==111==1 11==1 [1==111:=111==1 f 1:=1 I l-t-\l 1==1 11= t i 1==111=:III=j' ll==! 1 1:=1 1 I==:I 1 '=:1 II+=J I I~ I 11==11 - 1,~1 t 1- ~I 1- 1 1- 1~1 '-I'"7-:-t I ===+1 \ i~1 - i -:\ i I III \ II IIi 1 \ !==I 1 1==[ ll==,t 11==1 I lA-II \- NOTES ~. -. I 1- ". / I 1: DIMENSIONS iOWN ARE FOR RIChMO~D COUNTY. CONTRACTOR IS Te ~ ' l VERIFY LOC REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTlo.I\: \ 2200P5i CONCRETE BLOCKING BEHIND / ! FOR WORK ST A TE HIGHWAYS REFER TO CA. DOT DETAIL 90328 "" AND UNDER TAPPtNG SLEEVE AND VALVE: i / 2. EXPANSION JOINTS REQUIRED AT ALL STRUCTURES, CURB RETURNS ,.' f AND PLACED E~RY MAXIMUM 50' O.C t .. MIL POL Yt:THYLENE WRAPPER I ::.,. CONCRETE STRENGTh \ BETWEEN PIPING & CONCRETE . GA. DOT - 2200p3i (CLASS "6") ." CON TRACTOR IS TO vERIFY LOCAL REQUIREMENTS :: \.' ~ .. 24- CURB & GU=R .. .. ~~ TAPPING SlEEVE AND =~ALVE ..:."';J~~~1 AW. FILE NO. .1 D tG APP. A.E MO. I ~ NO.. I ~ -.......!. I. aco. f ( \oftW. i ,~ I . ~ SID. DD'M. lID. ~' . ~'1 - lv""y~ f L b'U. Dt.-rMo,. ~ --'I I-~- REV. BY DATE ~1l~ BY DAlE PP20 '- r REV. t BY I DAtE I ~1lON BY DAlE W20 - (1) OPEN PICKHOlE 2" RECESSED LETTERIt\:G .~ ~. I _ ~RAI~O 'bU~ 'MTh WR,ACf /. n n / ~/~ 11/')"-1 f- >, I // . ~ .//: II .. I I l \. RUBBERIZED BOOT, 11 / // In- -~-, SEAL AND CLAMP IZ~, ~ 'I ~ 0 I r ~11---r ....../ \ II' I r EXISTING TABLES Sf1AI i/./I ,~O g 10 0 I ~ { I / BE MODiFIED AS REOU l !?/~ 0 0 '~q 10 0 0 ~ {.' I j i I I !/ ' f ~V......----:: j: I I ~~!\111".:J, ,r-l.~:!-~l II I' Ii.. ~.~ -- , " '. ~"- '-- It, I " \ /~~ f:;/ I ~ ' I 1- " 'I : I ! l'l 1 I ~.. 0 0 goo O. l~' / .LJ.J.' \.'> ~~'T SE\\t:R I AVID' SEwER ~~".. . 0 ~ 0 o. . ,f)/<l ~ ~lil/~. '~c....J...../ END MANHOLE 1l.ET /' ,"", 0 CD'D 0 /, 'A "I // f I") -\ ~~ /~/ t ~~/ I \. n ~I --..:::: / -"--.l /1 .:.".:'.".' I~FlG' BELL MOU 111 I I ~~/ I I l. ," 90 BEND N ~ -1 ~ 2\j/-;- SAN. SEWER I I ~ -S I. ;;0 -'/8" I 1- 7/S" "l..! INLET r....--i=. I o . I 1f (!lil 1'- ; l\.() II 1.1 t ~'i ~} /~ J -~A. r ~ 1\' RuBBERiZED BOOT. I ---.-1-.6.- t.AIN. ,I ~ , I SEAL AND CLAMP ~ ~ r t I ~ I I; ! ~'0 I _ "r~ I , - I I I ~ i ! t I ,. i I I i-- ;;.. i I I ~ I I . 1 ! f--- 28 1/8" I I ~ \ r-- 36" I! MID MA!\:HOLE R COMPONENT NO'S ~-RAME; 1370-0002. LID, 164~-HO-i ~ \ MA TERIAL: CAST GRA)' iRON ASTM A4B, CLASS 3~ FINISH UNPAINTE.D . ~ _ _ _ A NOTE: EXISTING MAi'lHOLES SHALL BE CORED 'f\t:IGHT 382 L8S PER SE SHEl::. T .) OF '1- FOR SAN SEWER INSTALLAllON (j) f SANI'TARY SEWER TAP .... -~..- - -.. ." ",) ~ , · , APP. FIl.I: NO. I _WW wn AP'P. I CiD: SID. ~ HI. SOl REV. BY DA'IE BY DATE "- ~ ~ ~ -~ "fiP v 0fSCRIP11ON JIll>>., - ---"" DATE BY LONG STANDARD MANHOLE - APP. - APP. APP. aCD. -6" 2'-0' 7' _. 0" -6"~--2 I ~ ~ ~ ~ F.'ODS ELEV A TIOt\: DESCRlPl10N /2" 2 DAlE DATe: l:: .J ,.," BY REV. - & BY I ~r ====:d REV. I UIW I'I-li'SSIAf"li' " 1:11l PSI :>011 Prll........... e ZOOO ~f' I !~l A I a UI~h:..>c~o 2'-10. ...'-0" C'-'Y ""'"\l' ,,'-t>' C'-l' 4'-0' \'-il' 3'-b' \0' tI' c.' .' .:'4' .:0' :\'-v'l :l'-v.1 )"-0'1 \1I' \'-0:" 4'-0' i 4'-0' I ;;:'-'1' I ~ 10' I'-t>' 4'-IJ' I 4'-;)' I "'-6' I I I I 14' I-b' )'-0' I 3'-6' C-J'I It' Ill' e' (,. 4' NOTES 1 ThE WATER LINE MUST 5E LOWERED IN ORDER TO HAVE FIVE FEET (S') OF COVER A T ThE BEND, TEE. REDUCER OR PLUG AT ALL LOCATIONS 'MiERE THESE FI TllNGS MAY BE UTILIZED THE CONTF\'ACTOR HAS '!HE OPTION TO USE RESTRAIt\:ED JOINTS IN LIEU or OR IN ADDiTION TO CONCRETE BLOCKING AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 0266~ OF THE SPECIFICA TIONS. SHEET 4 0 FU NO. I .lCl8 NO. SID. ~M. NO. W01 INC 4 ===rJCl8 - S1D.. ~ NO. "'"SQ1. jU-NQ; fJCl8~ S1D.. DE.TAL NC. - so 20 fU~JCl8 lIO. SID. ~ NO. PP22 ~.A...-.-. 'v ...J ""'-. ~ of"'") j~wzV'\ .~>:'\ 0 '"' 4~ ::-v.:(W~ C;~ Vl -J -1 U C L.' uJ W (l. Z w O)t:J~W~~ OcrVlO4:W ......U'--'<Wa;: O:Z:2Lr~U wou'-'u~ t--Uo::W ' U.....lO......::;:-:::U ~;t~5jc ::i 58..:/) o.xO::~"'o Va O::T.Q. ......Owt--x ~g~~~w o g: (/) :>"> ~ t- C4.0~ L...J 0 U n:: 00::" 0 tioC:w G:"':CNOL... "IU':: OO........L.....:i W('z..:-.-~.:( d~~L...1W~6 z1v"lVliDiD ; I ~ - - -1 -- - ---- ___. BER 500T, .... .-- ()I L 6: CLAMP /'. /~1.k: (TW) , .. / :-- \ /"'.../ , '" / / / \ / ;/ ;/ I \ I .. / I I \ ! / \ i i ./ I S 1 E.P~ 12" \ 1\ rTl ~ I ~ '15TONEI \ (,; 'I ~'J W : BASE I \'~\ ~ 11\ // / \ ", \ I AO I / \ \,,'~ "-. I 'I \~: / \ ........ "~I / ~ --- / \ '........"..r / _______ :. I II I '- i ! , '- l L ---; __ -- '..::-t::- -- -- 0 CLASS "c I DE INvERT PL..AN VIEW OF OJ I (; o ~ ~ o '? ~ t-- ({) ...... o a 4: l? o ...... :i ~ o ~ o \,) -1(- TA6LES ARE TO BE GEt\:TLY SLOPED AND TRO~ELED FROM MANHOLE WALL TO INVERT WALL MEIGHT AND COr-;STRUCTEO OF AGGREGA 1'[ -MIX CEMEN T WITH S~OOTH VENEER FINISH. SHEET .... ~. , . . , ~ '-....q ~ v ~'l l..... ........ ,.., '-... ----.. '-... '-.-........ ~ I 1--...-......----0, ,. I ~ 0 ~ n '-', ~ ~ It'-?\ .1 I 1 I I I I o~.~.~.~.~.~ c-.. ". ; I' ;:- ~::::.~ ~':. ....- j _ __ _ r- ......-.4 wi I.,) 10' , ,-...... (~ I ~ 0 ,.., OJ ('1 I' ,..... w ~ c:: I _ i . I . I . I . I . I . I . 1 -~ '" ('~ l'l r-"') ,.., ~ ~ '-', , w ' := I i .0 li ~ J: \:. (:n a:-. Lj)~Lj)~O)~ I I ;211.1- 1.1.1.1,1.1.1'0** o I v ~ Lj, w I' 0.) ~ I !~! , ~I I · . ., I : i r __" .. ;.. v) , ~ L.J I' ~ I"') I' 0 z I ...... ~ I ! I I _I _1.1 **1 o I I'~ .~ -~ '~ N '" 1"') 1 U1 I I ; z ., < ' I , I. o. · - - . I ~I 100~1"')(j,rr)0)1'0 i ~! G 1.1.1.1.1.1.1_,**1 I I ~ N r-. ,-./ I"') I"') ~ I ~ . ~:. i.';' L: ~ ~ , ! a:. ,..... .. ') 'tl.) C" Q) <'. I).) 0Cl 0 I ~ I U I I I I I I I I II' ~ H......' i-r, "'1 ~~.~ 'L.) i.., .Lj)....:J i "... ~ j;' ~ ..-" 1. '" I "'1 ,-" ~ ~ ,.., I' 0 " "II CD I I II I I I I 7\"~ ,',.. ',,, ,..... ~-.... n 'r, -.q , . 5. L 1- I II " 0 I ; 'I ~ \J '? ~. ~ l~. ~ 'I ~~ I I ... , ''''1 ',.rJ -n -v .v in 'Lj') U::. '1'- ! I L,I : -..' (l) 0 'J I I .:(w ~ 1 w 0 -<t ~ 1'-. C" l{) 0 w ' ~311' ..,. ,- V> 0 V ,"'; I.:i 0) I I 4:C-G I ~ l'l n '<t ~ Q) ~ .- ~ I , 01 I I ~G:IJI' 0 , , , , , , t I (7)_C'L 'X) ~ ~. 0....' GO OCJ q 0 I ~ac::j ~ ,..... N n,.., '<t ~ Lj) wI w-<C! If)w ~ 0 o. 0 .., 0 o. . 1 ..: ():' "" 0) 0) L.' W (Q li) , '" U) -<( I'-- 0) 0) ,.., f'- co co ^ 7\" I ~~''l,'"'' I 1 I , ~r~ ! I ~ I h t * ~ , ..-.!..- I '~ol 'tp BY I DATE 4- BY lOAm OR DATE ~L:l[ 11 1/ '" DLGl<C1: llL,..D ,'-'1' 1 ':'-'7' I 2'-'" I 1'-0' 1'-t>'!2'-JA ! 2'-3'11'-0' 1-4' ,:'-0' 2'-0' 1'-0- 1'-3' I 1'-9' I i'-9' 11'-0' 1'-2' 11'-b' I"~' II'--i)' 1"-2' I i'-b' 11';" 11'-0' I I I 1'-0' : 1-)' 11-~' \'-0' 0'-10,11 -v' k-v. 11'--j)' ~,-o.II'-v' 11'-v' i 1l"-7'! i.-o.1 .-1)' ! j"-O' 1 2;;: ilL' OC~( IIL"'D 2'-0' I :;'-t),l J -".1 2'-b I'-Ill' ~'-v' I :;'-0' 11 -'I' ~ ;>-'r 12'-'" ~ - - -~.. 2'-6" DAlE 1'-]" \'-0' 1'-0' 1~ -' 1'-0' 1'-0' 1'-0' 1 ...... d \ ~.3 MANHOLE I Lwlt Pror'l<1.unr " I~ 1':;1 I "ow f'r"~~......." - 2000 p,,~- ~~.T I S\I. A I - HEADER CURB fl. APP. APP. am. BY TYPE ~-,,-" ,,>3' 2'-0' 1'-0/ ...... 1'-) 1'- BY MIN MIN Mlt\: MIN THRUST BLOCKING - APP. APP. AW. Q(D. "" STANDARD MANHOLE - APP. APP. AW. Q(t). - ~ DfS(2P~ PRECAST HEADWALL - APP. /IPP. /IPP, Q(D. <,'-] ;:'-0' 1'-9' i'-b' I'-~ \'-0 6 b' 10 12 ..... \'-4 1'-2' 1'-0" 0'-10' 1l'-9' 0"-7 DESCRSPllON - ~ h 4" 6" ,s" 10' T t I t r r r t t T l <'4' .?O.. II>' ~ I..' 14' 10::- \0' S' ... 4' .:. 20' W' It>' 14' 12' 10' ll' b' 4' Un.- Pnissurft . 1:-0 PSi 1 :;011 f'r.U........ " 2il1l0 1'''''' I I ~ B I c I D1 'JQ OCGk1:( lIl.NL ::=:=J 24' I 7'-0,1 7'~ 4'-t.1 i.'\)' I ';:--1' 3'-'1'1 i~' \'-1\' I.' 1.-.... i4' \'-7' 1(:...... 1'-4' 10' 1'-3' 6' I' -0' ,,' .' 4::' Dt:CIl<<:t: 110. D ~..' ~' 16' It>' i '-7' 1+' 1'-::'- Ii::' \'-J' IG' 1'-3' 1"-'1' 8' 0' 41 1'--\)'" 1 I f I \-,1 ~/. / /t':/j S' -- I // /Y 1fJ TYPE ... CURB TYPE 1 :2 j 4 ~ l CONCRETE - -,p:-NQ. .Jf"~ DAlE DATf ----- NOTE ;-' BY BY B~ r .C'I'I\ ~ ~ SOl REV. REV. 2 REV. CClAT If3\ Q SHEET 3 or 4 (j) 1IItJ\I..11. ~ SHEET 1 OF -+ (jj) ... "\J. . lea. INQ, 2 or 2 - tiE ." ~ I" l. ..1 2 +f~ l.a~..tl.1 4.1 f · 1 ~.~ ~~.I I .... ..~". . .11 I "- 1-8/2 -1-B/2 ~ I I 8 SECTION FU NO. I ~-NO. ~r JOIINQ; STD. ~ NO. PP35 :==IJCl8 NO. STO. ~ NO. PP06 . \\" _.--~- I - - .-.------ I . COURSE? 0> . ~ . '_ _ BRICk (1;; "'AX) I /\ 13'-0" CONt. ' I ..- ---------I~ ~CC,Et\:TRIC l PRECAST - II ~ONE 1- CONCRETE - -. ,rr----- _ _ _ ' REINFORCED PER M - - -- - . 1 AS1M C-478 I I I<=F I /1 I ~\'TER1ICHT J01NT'_~T I S~E SPECIFICATION:' ==f== I ,," THRU 4' SECTION:' I I I 1 ~ ThAS REOUIRED '1 _ I ;- - - - ~ - I N01E ALL JOINTS TO - ~- , r -, ~Olh IN~IDE MANHOL~ )~~S '-~2':-1'-1-;'! [12" 0 C I ~HODU(~~~'S~DE ShALL ~.OT bE --........I! ~__ ....N CTACGERED 1=F' 48' DIA 1 -> 5 "I I I I]: RUb8[R,ZED 500T. h - ~ - --: -: - - ffll ~'L AND ClAMP~I! SLOPE. 1 I I A 'OR"-'] P,R FOOT , BACKFILL AS REQUIRED ,OR .J~ ~~ I 13"-0.. CLASS '.C PIPE MATERIAL~~, 1,3" ttll COt\:CRETE ~ 2200 pSI 1'''M1N.~ I I ,__,__ .~. -) .' . 1 ~~ ~I -" MIN qONl b....'::i( ( TyP C D_ "-~iB . ~ . r ~ ~ OR "F' W/PRIME LANE 15' SHOULDER I MAINTAIN CROSS SLOPE \ ...., ' -\ OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, \MlN.) , ~ I 1 ============~===_=J I ILl I APPLlCA5LE i , ~\: ....: ....... .~~ TtI==i!!==ll!==!I~I: \1 -l~~if ---1 =111==111==111==1 t ". =111==111==111==111==11 -I I_I - - 1 . -I -- -- - I- Ii. 111- Iii III=-' I \- '1==11 1- "-=11 1 -II 1- , I 1:- -i 1____ SLA5 AT ASPhALT PVMT POL YURETHANE '----SELf -LEVELING II SEALANT ~ . r 3" ~I-- 1/';" x 1" DEEP ( .. . .. . .~.. . 6" r. ~.' . · 4. tl. " T~III~II'I~1 ~1~111~1 i 1~111=111~111~1 ~ l~~ -- I. III III III llFIll 1m m- I m 1 nl= -III -IU, 111==111-\1 111111 III lil==i -111- CONSTRUCTI()(\ JOINT ff3 REBAR-2..... lO~~G TO 6E PLACED EVERY AT 24" C. TO C 30' "E SU8GRADE TO BE COMPACTED TO 95% OF MAXIMUM THEORETICAL DENSITY ~AASHTO T-99 - WPE TYPE "5 BASE - PAGE 1 A I I ~ EXISTING r I 5 ( \ ) I REDUCER - IF ~ ASPHAi... T TOPPING ASPH AL T BINDER - GRADED AGGREGATE DAlE FOR "\ DAlE DAlE PAV(MEt\: DAlE MATCH EXISTlt\:G PAVEMENT SECTION PHINIZY ROAD C? z t= If)' X W t-- ~~ t5~ 0-<( wjQ. WIDENING SECTION - AW. AW. AW. Q(D. BY BY BY BY ............ ---A. 8" 11/ PAVEMENT - AW. NJP. AP'P . QeD. 1I--,,,~1 - STANDARD MANHOLE - APP. AW. APP. .O<D. ~ PL ANS THRUST BLOCKING - ~. NlP. AW. CKD. JOINT CGNSTkUCTlON VARIES-SEE PLAN '') I ~ ~~ .Y 8. DESCRSPllOH y-: ~ DATE CESCRlPllOH ~~ I DAlE ~l1ON {- SOl \ i-='R AME & COVER \ I ) ~' GROUND .......... FINISH ___ GRADE CESCRlPllON ~ SECTION /A\ o \\10 TH CONCRETE DAlE TYPICAL ~ ------- DAlE BY ~ BY BY REV. IlL[ m ~NO. E'r.... 510.. ~. REV. SHEET :2 of 4 (j) PLJII..'a. ~ OF :2 11l.rNO; I JOII NQ; SID. ~ NO. PP35 ....:..pu: NO. I JOII-_ S1D. I!J:..AI.. NO.. W01 fU lIO. jJOB lIO. S1D. ~ NO. PP03 BUILDING EXPANSION JOI~T : / l ...ATERIAL ~ r ~~. V ," \' . ... " .4.~..... . . v t)" ... ... ... . I / Iflll;1 II;; lll~ II~ffi~mWrlill*lli~ill~r=: III-=IU. II p 11-' I q IllnT ml, lilT 11~t:=-/ -11'- SLA8 AT BUILDING TOPPIf'.;C 0'-0" SO ""'--CAST IRON ~ ROUND .1/ COVER & 50X I'INISHED I //1 GRADE .~ I '.11- :W 1 = -- =111~ill--~,. ..!~.' r-----.3000 PSI. ~n III ,111'11==1 i 1=11 !--i ~ I I. I. I CONCRETE 1-11-1 -'~111-0ol ,. ,.. - "I-II -111- I i 1 I ! ---I SEWER MAIN H ~~ Q -- ---- CURD AND GU HER - SEE PLAN FOR SIZE \ AND LOCATION EXPANSiON JOI~~T :---l I-I il=. I MATERIAL ~ (. . . 1:=111 I , , ) I 1==/1 1= -( . ..4 ..... ~-I "...... ']11- .JJ-- 6" . ... . . " " -111-1 ) . .. 44. .41.... . .. <II 1-1- .il'I~-IIII""ll,I"-1 ~1: IlT~m~millllllllllllll=1 ~ 11- ,-I - 11- . ,- - -I 1-, - -111-111-111-1. 1-111-111-'[1-\11-111- -.: == I == 1=:11 I I = ==1 ==1 ,==, == 1= J II=--' I 1----.:1 11- 11-' ' -I I 1==111- -I I ~ -- SLA6 10,1' CONC ASPHAL T '-< / WYE _____ 2" TYPE .r \ ~ _____ TACK COAT r/0/(f/G~ I O. 0 0 0 - 3" GRADO) AGGREl;;ATI:: SASE r\ " " " " Em" fl !~ III ,III. II - C~PACTt:D SUbGRADE ['--I I I-I 1 I-I I I-I I I (95~ STAI'illA.RD PROCTOR) CLEAN OUT ~ ~ (A ) '~ , HORIZOf'\ TAL BEND - PAG[ PLAN ~B---l I .~ c /2 I 1.6/"..I~U' ~. i. .. . 1 L, II]n~'~4. l I ~ ~1 - () ~'\:~ Lx. '. .' ~ ':? '",; . 4 '-.. I TEE "f DA~ Y1 DATE - DA1t OR - DATE BY ELEVA TION BY PAVEMENT ,.pp . /rtPP. APP. CKD. PAVEMENT - 1tPP. ~. AW. Q(D. - THRUST BLOCKING - APP. APP. APP. Q(O. CURS BEND - - DESCRlPll~ ~llON ~~ VERTICAL UGHT DUTY CONCRETE ( 13 C UNDISTURBED SOIL (TYP) DA1t: BY~~ tDAlE 2/3 DATE BY BY BY A:E' NC.~a--NO. ~ni'~ OA 1E SD15 REV, REV. REV. REV. SHE~ ~ (j) . III ~..I~ AIn... (j) - III \I,.. _jCONCRETE SLAB W/CAST IRON MANHOLE FRAME &, NEENAH R-6041-A OR EQUAL (SEE OPTIONS) B A TYPICAL PEDESTAL (b"xe" BRier.: ". T' ,. -, & MORTAR, b"~ CONCRETE CYUNDER ~ . j 4 EACH ~ORTAPED IN ~." . PRECAST CONCRETE TOP SECTION -= II=- - , TO BE USED ~/MANHOLE OR _ -= . II GRA IT INLET OPENING , . ~ PRECAST klSER r I \_________ (IF t\:ECESSAR1) ~: ,,4""_ "\ 1 M~STIC_MA:ER~~L ,.," MIN I ~ I 1 MINO . I REQUIRED J.\ I t.J.\CH JOit\:T ~ , . I l I,' . I .. I OR MORTARED JOIN T ~ ::1 I". STANDARD , I I 4S" DIAMETER ~ ::1 I , .. J BASE ~EC1l0N r.ol . "1 . 1 --~~=::o :; 0 :; 0 :;'0 :f 0 ~ 0 :;~rrt Tt~m,-rrT~~II. ~~T~ 1 6" STOt\:E BASE ct SECTIOfi VJEW JUNCTION BOX &. DROP lNLET t\:OTES: 1. SUBGRADE TO BE COMPACTED TO 95% MAX DRY DENSITY PER STANDARD PROCTOR 2. ALL COf\oCRETE SHALL BE CLASS B 3. WHEN 60" & 72" BASE SECTIONS ARE REQUIRED. AN ADAPTER SECTION SHALL 5E USED IN CONJUNCTION WITh ThE STANDARD CONE 4. CONCRETE TOP CO\tfR THiCKNESS""o"-VEHICULAR TRAFFIC AREAS ==:J JOII-NO; SID. Q[LAI.. NO.. W01 X\---1~. :~I- , I'.......' __ t--..? 't-- --*\ r 6/2 _S.. : I Ll'~l ,) x A ~~ I '.. --"--1 -llnl \ ) _I 'I 'I~ t, I I" ~ "1 i 6(2 ~{~} 1- D --1 ... liTNO. I Jll8 -- $'I). ~ NO. PP30 fUlIO.TJlBlIO. S1D. ~ NO. PP01 2 ~-~OTCh DU"MMY ---1 ! r i I.." 1FT.. 0RvOVE - 1 DEEP ~ I -1'~.~ --:---. -,. ~. -. --:--. -. ____ . [Ill1 =fm. I - rrf - -nl ' m-- -~llT -~ll--~ll- ., 1 :2 4" I 1L 1 --i --- t3" I . CONCRETE 'f'IALI< W1TH 6X6XW1.4XW1.4 W.W.F ~"DTH VARIES ETe \ _____ 1 1/'2" TYPE "E" A$PHAL T TOPPI"'G / / ./. ./ ~~ TAO<: COAT ~ \5 "-. \) \.<0-"-. ,,\ . ;:" - TYPE "u" BINOlR \ .. PRIME COA T :-'\ 0 0" () ." 0 ~ - 0" GRAOCD AGCRE(,A TE BAse. 111==111 " 1.....11. , '--111' "ill I --- COMPACTED SUbGl':A()[ 1-1TI~ITi'-1iI-1iI (9~~ ST"ND;\RO PROCTOR) CUR5S I I A ! , TO BE CLASS "C PREMOLDED EXPAt\:S:Ot\: JOINTS AT BUILDINGS, DRIVEWAYS, EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL TO BE PLACED EvERY :so LF DAlE PLACE DUMMY GROOVES 5' 0 C lONGITUDINALLY ALONG SIDEWAL~ DAlE DAlE ~vv - - REV. BY DATE ~11<* ~. ~~~I' Will~ UND1STUR5ED SOIL (TYP j~~~ -t =-=1 [ 1;:-' 11--. i 1=:111 ~ \ II 9 II t ""\ 11--=-1 I I I . ~---.. I 4" ............ I B/:'!~' ~ ....'-..~- , I 1 I I J' " '." " t ~ G-)- B 'h': .Mwl -- d- t .. " J AJ ! B /1 :: .J . o. ...../- - /. ----14:" ./ I l' m. ' . ".=1 II. I ' l/'\ ~~ ;::::UJ:=-lli~ l ! JIII~.Il. '11Il~ I' I 1 nl. j II~ll-' I - , D ---, _TiI:=1 _ffi-iTi-- ~ UNBALANCED TEE OR PLUG l f ( / I J BY .., BY PLAN BY BY PAVEMENT APP. Af'P . AW. oeD. NLET fl. /ttPP . AW. Q(O. " SIDEWALK-CURB TEE - PLAN THRUST BLOCKING APP. NlP. APP. acD. ..........,.... PRECAST DROP 0fSC2P~ OESCRSPllOH 0ESCRlP11'* DUTY HEAVY aJ DAlf: DAlE DAlE NO -:t: 1) CONCRETE 2 /2' j /2 . BY BY BY b 4- REV. REV. REV. \ . I i ~ I i r " ~ ,~ .'"' .. Ai :I C -t- en ,.~.),' \ . la' 1.11 ~-~ ,', ; I ;....... of. ~ ~ . -- l I" ..'~ - , ; " ..... .~_.: . _ r y....:\ . . .. ",,-' ,'\ - i..... . .) ~ .', .1_ ., ; J~- ,~ " '. ~-: .; t, 'v - l" . ,. . (,-' ..t (} '~\ ~ t ~~ ~':; ..l ~., -),; :!' i - l.."<. . ,'~ :~~; ;~~ 2 ~ \.~ \. '.- .' ;-., '..- ',"...' #~. ,:-~' :;>. ~~ ; ~~: 4;':' ,J ~.~ c~ . c :.~ : )--- ,# ~, ~ .. ~ . '. -~ ~ r ;'~ ,~'" '- ~~. ~:~ ~. '." :: ( ~': -.. ... ta':" ....- (~~ ~ >~ ~ ~-/ : . '.. , . < ,:.. BUILDING .. f'LANGED CHECK VALVE ClJ]V NDDEl. F -5380 DR DR APPROVED EQUAL FUNCiED BEND 1/. . oousu: QiEQ( aFP FROt4 UNE T\tO WIt. Y SlAWESE ARE DEPT. CONNECTION POTTER-ROE.l4R. 1He. 5760 SERIES OR APP'D EQUAL.. .. ~ ~ 0 al 0) ~ ~ ~ ct, ~ ~ f4 " ~ 0 (.) (Ol"- e>> ~" == N~ ~ 0" ~ ~X ~ <~ - ........., , " ~ 0 ~ ~ ~ 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ W 0 ~ ...J 0 L.J 0 r~, 5.-::i ~ .--.. m~5 I , L&.JCX) ~(I) LU X (.) f"") ~ozr'") . Q:a:l W j oo~R "',. 0 · <( f' ..... V a... ....J '-" . U Z ...... '" ~ Z ........ Z Z j ~ Z o ~ r:n ...... u ~ ~ ~ TO AT PRECAST HOlE OR flEU) CORE / ( , J SPACE. ~1H WAlERPROOF' YAS11C PRECAST ~ CON~ VAULT DIP -4. --- - TO BUU..DtNG Fl.ANGED 1/4 BEND BY.. Fl.ANGED TEE FROW ARE UN[ 6- ~ E CHEO< BACKFl.OW PRE\ENlER (SPEC. SECnON 2685) l i f l ( I " . ~ ) I ,1 > l \ ~& Jl1 1 I II,ll :=111: = "\ I I ::i - - =ill= 18~; - \==111 II -< 0 ~ =111-1: ~ I~ ::i 0 I-I I 1"'1. LLY ~z j = l5~ ~ :1. 11= TAWPED < us . ~ =1 BAa<FlU. m~ ~ ill -'1= OF SEl.ECT - - --- WA1ERIAL. I L~ =lIGRANUlAR -r1 u; WAlERAL. = 'i 111'''111'''111')11: rr~ t.fA TfRIAL 1-111:=11 1==1 11=1 11:=1 Il!::l :111--111==111==111-111-111= (4- WIN.) ROCK OR EAR'Oi tr IN 'fRENa; BOTTOt.f ROCK ~CH 2:' PlANT W1X ASPHAL. T PeR SPEQACA 110N SECn~ 02:5~ TACK COAT PER SPEaACA nON SEC110N 02575' '. , . ,.' - " , . '::,-.::; 1\"::':1 ' 1=:' 1- '::'::11 .--:!: i 1_.I1--I~.' !- n.. ....-'-~.fJJ.. T ~~I. '-. ,.,IJ,n!.' ;;,::1 '1::::1,,(;: 'l.i:'-::i :-,'; 11-.\ I t::: i I !,,-::lll-..::j :1_'11.1- 111:::'111~-:-:'11 J:'JTi':-:'TP~.::'nL IL~!I:-..:1~~' BILCO AWWlNUW SlNQ..E WODEl. J-4AC HATCH OR EQUAL NOTE: SEE SPEQACA11~S SEC110N 02200(EXCAVAllON. BAOOllUNG AND COUPAC11ON F~ U1UJ11ES) ~ BEDDING WEl'HOOS AND BElXXNG NAlfRIALS. La.. B (IN.) (FT.) 1. 18 3.:50 21 3.70 2. 24 4.00 27 4. 71 3. JO 5.00 35 5.:58 42 6.25 4. 48 6.83 B-WAXlNUW WDlH OF 5. TRf.)IQ; AT POtNT 1Z' ABO\E: TOP Of PIPE. BACKFlL1.. AS PER SPEOF1CA 110N SEcnON 222Q BAOO1U. TO BE PlACED IN TRENCH AT 4--12- LA ~ AND T AWPED PRCFERL. Y. nPE Ul BEDDING EQUALS 'NPE IV BEDDING Fm GRANULAR WA lERlAL.. ~ PIPE 'lRENCH PARALL.a.S ROADWAY AND IS UNDfRNEAlM PROPOSED ROADWAY. THE 12- a=- BAO<F1u.. SHALl. BE C2JSHER RUN. ALL 1RENOi CONSTRUC11ON TO BE PERFcatED IN ACCORDANCE W11i ~A REGUlAllONS. ALL PIPE BEDDING SHALl. CONFORW TO ~A DEPT. a: lRANSPORA 110N STANDARDS AND SPEaReA 11ONS. tl >> \! >> II )J fI) ~..~ -_ I _____ FU 'NO. ... NO. SID. DETAIL NO. 5001 STORM DRAIN PIPE BEDDING - JV:1P . APP. APP. Q(1). fI) ......... .. ~~ :i58"NO. PAVEMENT CUT REPAIR - ~. JVlP . ~. Q<D. DESCRIP~ BY tDATE REV. DAlE BY DESCRlP110N DAlE REV. I BY GROUND DATE BY DEPARTMENT N. T.S. FIRE :;0 I'f\...4 ~ -I ~ RE \\IRE EACH 3 S1RANDS BARBED (WAX. ) Ui DETEC11~ VIIRE CAS REQUIRED) SEE SPEClACA l10N SEC110N 2660. + 24- sa BEDDING TO SPRING Of PIPE I- (.) 1&1 .., o ~ a. ~ '~< ~~ .....c;.; Q~ ~O ~ ~c.; o '" ~~ ~OO N~ ......C; Z~ ~< = ~ ~~ e-.~ Ze-. ~Z <O~ e-.UU 00 ~~Z c.;ZO ~Ot-4 <~e-. ~Z. ==~ Ue-. ~.~ ~.~ t 5'-0- ! t 4'-'- ~ , --J--r- I-- 10- J 8'-3- 1'-5- 1'-~ 1- 3'-1- -L ~-1. t t .. 8'-3- 10'(lW) -~'T1~'C' I ~,~~:JJ.'ljJ.." r~::':'irr~c: 'r_lI;]l~~IT J,-:>-, '']' W.-l~''11~ ~1CJ61iL~Tf';~f D=~I~~~~'T1~ "jT"dT~'JI'"t:.:!lTi': NlODLE RAIl(TYP) 7 GAUGE TENSION WRE ~ ,. ~ S1 ... TYPICAl BRAaNG ARRANGEWENT FOR FENCE PANEl. ADJACENT TO GATE. END. PUll. OR cc.~ POST. PANEL Vtm1li SHAll NOT BE LESS 1l1AN FENCE HElGHT. a..ASS "8- BEDDING SANITARY SEWER AND WATER UNE NOTE: SEE SPEOflCA11ONS SECllON 02200(EXCAVAl1ON. BACKFlWNG AND CONPACnON FOR UnUllES) FOR BEDDlNG tEniOOS AND BEDDING WATERlAL.S. SECURITY FEN N.T.S. , E AND PEDESTRIAN GATE ,'-S' (j) "-..M.... R.E NO- ~ NO. BEDDING DETAIL APP. APP. ~- a<D. PAVEMENT ARROWS N. T.S. S1D.~ NO. PL40 DATE BY DESCaP110N DA 1t: BY REV. ~ .; .', '''''''''i.o. z o - CI) - > w a: , I- .:11I W' Z en ffi m ~ => z ~ c;: h z o ~ e-.OO U~ :::>~ ~< e-..E-t oo~ ZQ o U .s w ~ a: j <( 1: (.() ex: ~. w ~ G: Lf') 0) " co "- N - z o F= Q.. 5 fJ) w c - o z ~ < o RECESSED BOX) 4-'-4" NOTE: DIT AILS NOT SHOWN HERE WILL BE SI~Il.AA TO THOSE AT FAR LfFf FOR NORMAL CATCH BASINS. REINF, STANDARD CATCH BASINS fOR' USE WITH CURB (6- OR 8"HT.) &: CU11'ER (IN SAGS OR LOW ~1'S) Rt:\I. & Re:oR. ~ AS SHOWN AUG., t 982 R~,& N~ RETR. ~. 1'0340' .. PLAN - IZ' - - - - ~ '---'"'-- NOTE: ELOOool - TYPICAl TREATUENT FOR SKEWED PiPES ARE: CIRCUlAR PRECAST UNI1'S; PRECAST SWtvu. SECTIONS; PIPE ELBOWS OR INCREASm BOX SIZES TO ACC'OWWOOAIT THE ~EWS. SEE SEPARATE STANOAACS FOR PRECAST AlTERNATES. DEPARTMEN.T OF TRANSPORTATIO STATE .OF GEORGIA NOTE: RECESSED BOX TO BE USED ONLY WHERE SPECIFIED. SHAllOW LONG. PI1JE OR UNDERGROUND OBSTRUC11ON lYPICA1.. HZ DET All 4'-4" ..",' 2'-10tj2. FOUR DlAGONAl BARS 11/t> Cl. TYP. CL. ON LOCATION OF BOX FRONT vARIED INOIVIOOAll y TO FOR ! s T l-t 2"n FOR CONC. SLAB '- l FACE ; ~lw ~z J : ~_-+:J - I f ~ t &; W2 TO BE SHOWN IN THE PLANS SEcnON A-A (WITH RECESSED oox) NO SCAU OF REINFORCED CONCRETE W1 ... 2T OR W1+1 mN: CA TCH BASIN (WITH PROTRUDED BACK CATCH 6AS1N WITH LARGE: lONGITUDINAl PIPE OR 4-' -4" W 1 + 1 2- MjNI~U'" A HZ . ~T NOTE: i1'j; DIAM. CONC. PEOCSTAl (NIN. OF 1W0) L - Wt 1- 4'-~ ,5-:5BARS 0 S' '-o~ ~ I- f{ st' MIN. -t .H" (NPlCAl ~ ~) ~.. :~ ~ ~:1 MtN. SLOPE F'ACE Of TOP SLAB TO HAVE . SAME BAITER AOJOlN~NC CURB T~ I SCAU:: 1-.1'-0- '-a. toE- WINIWUU DIFFERENCE IN ElEVATION FROM PAVEMENT EDC( TO FLOW UN( Of OUTLET PIPE. 3/(' S1W. L.AllD WI If. TYPICAL ~IN DIMENSIONS ~T fIfE Slf ~. H W OR Wl it~io :5/4~tlJi~ ~/4: I \~t 12" 4'-4" ~'-o" ~'-s I 1 j \~.. "-7' Y-o" ':J'-r: ur .'-10" 'y-Q"' .Y-s" ~: 1 ~ 20- ,'-6" J'-o" 0'_0- , SCAlE' 1 s 1 -0 5" I W . t 30" 0'-2" ~'-7" 5'-0. NOrE: "'H STEPS USfED lN~ :sr: 6'-10" 4'-0' 5'-7" ClASS "A" GA DOT. LA8ORATCRY'S -... ''', _ CONe. WAl.l.S OUAUAt:O PROOUCTS UST t> -l 42" 7 - 4 5 -3 ~ -11 (NOT RElNF.) ~Y eE SUBSTITUTED, I 48" 6'-0. 6'-0- 6'-f;. . I r AlL CATCW BA.SlNS WlU HAIlE STEPS OR - ~ . .'. '. S Uij)Offi BARS N~ & LOCATION TO BE ~"8'-0" 6'-6" 7-0., ..., ~ " .... AS DIRECTED BY THE ENQN(Qt 60. 9'-2'" 7'-4. 7'-7" ---- l NOTE NON-R8NF~DEi~\.. r DETAIL OF LADDER BARS THE ~IN. H 4 ~IN. AE GIVEN IN ABOVE BASiN 1 NO ov '-7~ e _ TABLE ARE BASED UPON TYPICAl.. OUTSIDE CONSTRUCnON At. TERN A T.(S W _ D~ OF CONC. PiPE AND ~y BE VARiED If CONQlTIONS PERUIT WITH VARIEO Dl"EN~ONS WorE; OETAlLS NOT SHOWN ABOVE FOR CONSTRUCTION SPEOflm IN THE PlANS OR DiRECTED BY THE AlTERNATES WILL BE SIW'lAR TO eRlCK ENGiNEER. W. & W. o.MEN.SIONS 00 NOT HAVE TO CATCH ~ OETAA.S. &: .fQUAL. OF /2" --3/4' 1 j ~ / C.I CO~ "JjI... . ~~Ltlr' L,....... ""'~/I" . . BAm:R SI ir-~~-,r 1/'Y' ELE A ON ELEVATION _ .. ~ SCALE: I" -1 '-0" t--'11 7 /8~. --1 1-1 3- Y 3" 7~ L':: }E I In' I I . Ti J/."--1 t-r- H /4'-t-i /4. WI A :1/16. I) SECTION H-H SCALE: :: ....1.-0.. ~ 3/4"\ 71 /..... J ~D'/2" 5/8:1 SE ~ (FOR LOI '!J14" f') I I CA TCH BASIN ON RADII -j t-1/Z" R SECTION G-G ~lS' 4(1", . Jo' ~~r.- /\.. ~. BRICK / ^ '-- --.,.. _ - / /' '\.-'\.- -;- NOTE: "" . /, DO NOT LOCATE CATCH < (' BASIN ON RAOU If _ ~ OTHER AlTERNATES L \. \. ARE FEASlSLE. I" \. DETAILS NOT SHOWN - , - HERE ARE SIWllAR I TO THOSE FOR NOR~ CATCH BASiNS,PAYMENT j,) FOR CATCH ~N . - INClUOCS AlL L-- QUANTITIES FROM c:..:....- PT. 1 ,TO PT. Z. .r~ 14". FOR OfT All Ii ..,. F-F ~ CL SEE SEPARATE STD. ~ FOR PRECAST AlTERNATES j ADAPTERS (STD. 1040) 1 PRE WILL BE REOUlRED ~ BOX WITH CiRCULAR. AND/OR BUILT-IN-PlACE CONSTR.11 J MAY BE USED IN COMBINATIONS. MORTAR NT W OR Vi (~.) s ... o 8" 8- r I ' I ~ ~ .1h t S ~t o r- T"" ,- 16" L- _ DEPTH UMITS FOR INCREASING "j ~ 1/2" OPENING 7\ It' OPC\IUNG BATIER SAWE /IS CUR6- < 1 "R;- .. :6': · BOTTOM SLAB ...... TERIAl S NON-REINF. CONCRETE OR BRICK CONC. RE1NF. Wl #4 BARS \ 2" O.C, BOTH WAYS 2" Cl. FRO~ SlAB TOP INSlOE FACE OF FRONT WAlL TO BE I-- AlIGNED WITH BACK OF CURB LINE 12FT. MIN BATTtR 5.WE AS CURS 4' '/Z' OPENING FOR ~ CURB 1/'L OPENING FOR a CURB AVM'T EDeE H I I '. -F TO 4'-0" OVER 4'-0 I CONe- CUR"I~ ~I 'i1 ~ I 1 ~ C~IR. JOINT 41/7' 6ARS 4' LONe TIE SCAlE: 112'" -1 '-0" CUR6 HT. jo TO 6" GU'111R llilCKNESS -0. 6"J RIGHT) 1/7' EXPAA. JT, SAtoIE "'iN, THlCKNCSS &; COM:RETE Iolj)( A5 ADJOiNING GUTIU< . .. /2"- :3' -0. ~NI"UM TRAN~nON SCALE; BiG WAlNTA.lN lIlORNAl GRAOC " - P'N. E\Xi( '-- F NOTE: 12'-8" (MIN.)-PAYMENT FOR CATCH BASIN INCLUDES ALL QUANTITIES BElWEEN THESE LINES EXCEPT ADDITIONAL DEPTH FOR BASIN (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN PLANS) PLAN MIN ~~ ~+ ~ .I~ I I~ RONF'. ~ AT 4'-4- RU6&D 6UIlOER'S PAPER DETAILS 4'-4. NOTE: NOR"'AL SlOPE OF CONCRETE APRON TO BE INCREASED BY 4" TO 8" WHERE .H. PER...ITS AND LONGITUDINAL PIPE IS LOWERED FOR OTHER REASON:..=:J ~- SCALE: 1/2" - l' -0. NOTE: PIPE SIZES. NUMBER, AlJGN...ENT. AND INVERT SHOWN ARE ILLUSTRATIVE. SEE PLANS FOR SPECIFICS. INVERTS TO BE FORMED WITH GROUT OR CONCRETE AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER OR AS SHOWN IN THE PLANS. DETAIL OF REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB - - 4'-4. OR IN1 .... 2T 4-'-4" 4'- N:' t-fJ1t: ALL BARS INIUN V\OV E LE VA TI ON t ARt SPACED AT 0' O.C. NOTE: FOR DETAIL OF REINFORCING STEEL IN fOP PORTION Of SLAB. SEE PART PlAN AT TOP RIGHT. NOTE; TOP SlAB MAYBE CAST IN PlACE OR PRECAST IF' CAST IN PlACE, IS TO BE PLACED BETWEEN THE CATCH BASIN AND TOP SLAB. SEE 24-" CA TCH BASIN UJNGITUDlNAl PIPE OVER + molU"" .. ' - o. SECTION 1- 4'-4" ;-CURB Hf.+2" HAS BASIN 4'-4" CATCH ~r (IF t ...... 'r-. I },--O' "'NI~U~ TRAN SinON CONSTR CQII;C . ~I. CON~1R JOINT H ..: \ \ <,' '. / /' .....,. \ ,/ . . ~ 1 (' I , , )I / ( ; , /} .- -// '\ / \, " l '~ 4'-0" NOTE' ALL JOINTS SHALL BE FLANGED. . REFER TO PLANS FOR SIZE. '-- _-......-.......~~. 5'-0" ..., '\ '--- . " ~. 6- DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLOW PRE'v€NTER (SEE SPEClF1CA nON SECTION 2665) W PREVENTER DET ALS '''. .~ .& RISING STEM GA TE VALVE .,."'~.._... A --............-.. -- 4'-0" on . COUPLER . I Sect CQMPAC11QN AS PER SPECFlCA liON SEC1I~ 02220 ,...'.... ~...::. -..,..,.--- 6- DETECTOR TYPE METER PROPORllONAL TYPE WATER METER AND --v---- ~ ~: 0.5. Y. VALVE DRAIN AREA SlLCO AL.UWINUW SINGLE NOOEl. J-4AC HATCH OR EQUAL Elevation IJA N. T. S. ,.1a- I ,.;-- ....._~I._._~ ~ .~,. ~ -'~"',~-'-'~ '. BYPASS .: . . .--, . . ,. " . " , '~:. ; , J'"" \ f' ,} ,', ~ ~ -'-. .' .. . . , VAL VE N.R.S. .....' /*/ ~ ,/ ,,1 1- .I I t I ~ I l I ,:' 6'-0" :' I ~ \ f .. t I \ f .' l ; . ~ ; .,~ " { } ~ : \ , \ f , . ..Lr ~.-G . .,1 .::. ;,~i~:~' ~ ": LO. WINIWW caJSHED S1tlNE ---~-_.--, \ //' --- --r-----;--- / , ' // -... \ / / I .,;," J:) .~ / ~~'~) Fl -I I - , .' ~ . -- -.- " .. . ,~ :,: -" . ' c - ...: .- ~..: ... 'j'" . . , '~ J ~ "~ I' " , ~ .' ~~: ~ C ."~ '." r# i- ~ '...,': ~. "1 , .' -. ".... .... . ~ ~ ~ ,. .\> '~' . - J;' J . ". -'j - ( , _. ... " ". \ 1 L " . ;. . > r. "NP. SECllON GRASSED DlTOf 11' 3 I 4. I . NOT TO SCALE . ~ '" / / /' /' ,/' ,/ // / J I~-..- ~ 1'1 \J Iz '-< 0"101(1 -' ~ '11'= CD ---J ~ :::: ~ Iv 01 t,- ~m ~I. . ~I al I -1"1- - C --1" L-..J :u . ,'" (/) ::v :r _ ~ e ~ .' -d:)II~~ d")i\--- ~ ,- o :1' r '"'Q . .... '- -1 ..... / 6-:J" // -. ,,/ 6)\',' 6)0// ,../ .5)\\/' /- .-/' ,6)' / ~.} ,,//'-' 6)\/ :_ I" ;: / ' . / . ~~ . n /u ~ : .~. ~ /. ./\, I . I . . . . . /Q,,~ -.[ 1 /y ,,: ~UGP --.;J ~ " ~ d --d~i\--------d:)n ~ l.~~ ...... Vc;o i I ! t ~ :- d~~ D'.:' oon- 8 -1 ~ // ,/ 0::':111 ,. 6)" /,/ ,c\' /0-' ,/ d:l\\_---d:)\\--SJn-~-d:)iI ,:p(\ // /" .jy" // cpr' // ,.,\"\" /",-, ~ '\ z .~ o 1',.,) U., I..N o .1 ,'--.i' / s /v - "1)/ I LJ q / I - "1) lJ - ~- l---d~)I\ r---CiHP CO o \a ~ " ~ I' ,; ~' ~ t,' r a. '~ 41(, I-- CO ; I I I I c l- t) W ..., o lie G.! I ~ ~ 0 <>> 0) ~. ~ CtJ C\l ~ ~ (I) """'"' -+ool 0 Co) cot' Q,l ~" ~ ('\l ......., ~ O~ (,) rt')X t... ~. ~ <<(l1... --~ t4 ~. ~. 0 0:= ~ ~ 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ W 0 ~ ...J 'WO ~ ::) 0 ...J 0 .~ 0 N .J CX) CD~51 41> wCO ~ lJJ X (.) ti) ~ ~ 0 2..(-1) ~ Q.:.m w "" a 0 .~o ~ oq~~ ....... 'lit 0.. ....J '-' ~.~ ~~. :>t z~ t: ,,~z == ~ o.~ uc <uU ~~ ~ ~ oo~ Z ~c ~zo 0 .. ~oE:: ~~ ~~ z ~~ <t:I:~ ~c u~ ~~ ...... ~ ::=-< ~~ ~ . u z. ~ ~ ~ z ...... z z j ~ z o ..... 00 ~ u ~ ~ ~ '.~-- \ ..T.....,....~ #.:., ,,', .....,.... .....R ~':' -- UlO4 FD I .. fGII' i't' I .. ... ~ t:7::'--."- ldnlo.-.~~ ..... .11"""- .. .... --- PROlEC'N: 1REE fENCING La. v.~ ~ t........, _,,.... '1'>-1...... '. A.#-'. ~'~'..."'''lIo-f_-.# ;t L.SCia BENCH~fARK: TOP OF #4 REBAR ELEV.=178.81 NGVO 1929 .. r "'. IMlI ... I '" ..,wi ~ .. A ..... or". ____ ....... "=-=~Jl!I- --... ...... I~......... .. ......~ 11IO....... JIJO__~__._____r. ...... ......-...... ... "t/1 ~J3- ..-- RAft' ~-_ _....... .__ -'l-"',MX - , -,-' J ,- G ,/~ / ." CO" , / " () \<;<' /~ ~"~.,~ / / / / .// ( "- '" ~ '"" <:. '-, '. " ...... '- '-, / [iJ \ ~ rBnl W 1.650 SQ.FT. PlNESTRAW MULCH ~ '" - -- . . - --.:=-: . - ---. . ~ IRil ~ ~ I ~i I N.T I ~i I ~~ 6 ~ 00 I Plc\ IUl LlJL.U TYP. SEcnON GRASSED DITCH /11 8 ~ 10. . NOT TO SCALE y~ .. - ~ 90 Sq.ft. ANN~ ~ SIGN 1Ril. l.!QJ , . r Ii I! 1\ I ; I I , il i ~ , I \ fj+ "'- ':~J;-- -~ 'J' J") (Jl (....[> I-=> / I ~ / 1 r d':)I'\ --- r--,~H0--- ~ ~ 1 : ~ z ~ N ~ ~ o > e" ,. ., ~ ' , I .......' ';;,:if \1'" Vi \I' .- , . ,~;;;~,",~;,~~;S.;i.~~-::f~~;;!Z~ .. . ,.~~~~~,~\~ ~~~~~~.~~~~,::~;"':~~ -z, ',.;~~~.;.:.o1':i/1OI' -",...",,;~ ....."<.:."....'..-..~ ~i.\~~A"" "~' . '~::' ~-~;;~ ~~ '~;J~1 ~.- o'?.C\ f>. 10 \.)~ ,'i~ ") ? I"S~.. ct. \.- ft...) or; t\~~ (T1 S\~\( /0 ,,0 l' ~,}.. \~,...' " ..., SEED 6.8 AC. .' -.' .'''''. -. l ).. cg () ~ CD ~~~ I I- - ~~~ ...~c WO W :Ie CO >- . ; > e1 a I o I Z 0' - en - > w, a:i ~ ~ <: . uZ ooj 2~ j r z o f= Q. a3 en w .c - o z ALL -.. .._-~-~~~~;.~ .- 80 . . .....~." .. .. .. ... , oil .. '" ... lit' "" .- '- '.. w . ...~~~.~~~~~w~.w~. .~........v.~~o~~~v~~~~~~y__~~W~ - ..- '11 ~ ~ ~ 1',_. " i;;-~ .- : 1 - ~,. .d1' i. ..0 " '. , "~. ~ ~ .' / ~. .,// Ir<.... k ....... .'~. ,,' #' . I ~ .,~ 0.1 . . ...../. /..:: . "'" _ ,.~ ~..,l . ~. 2.28 AC I' ; SEED ~ 0 tt- ^'_. .:.C / I " '. J Hi ~ . I- I .,,: . . I . . ~. - . .. - .. \ ~. ...:...:",.-,.( \ \ '\ ~ . ~ I .' , 0 .... ' . " ' . I \ t i ",_, ,,"',I "', ~ ..' II , "~'G . ~,:~j j . ~)j ,I'. /0/'# " ". /' " --~~~O'" ,./../ /"'~f~ all/'' / /a , / /. h.... /.% / . II Lj."'/ /~?f/ ,~.. /.~oft / ,...j . / / /' //.// /' /~ " >,~ ~~y ;; '/ .k /~.:_~ ~ ~ ~ . - .~ ~~-- .. ~ .>~- ...---~.~ ,,- -= ~~ ~" ~"~ . ' -o-~ . ~..---:;:.~~ --"" - ~ /~_/- ' ... -'--=-- ~-~ .' ~ .. _'~ c -.-.- -..-, - ...---~ . . . :::::.--- . . ' AC. SEED _/ /~.-.-~ ~ ,~., ... _ _'__ ~.-:;;:;;;:.-"~ ______"~ c ~, .. ~-:=..:~--,,-.::=-- ~~-- . .-" __ --=:. /"__ ~nC\ __ ,: .-"_ .',0\ '-1" "" -- ...--"-- ~- ~ -.. . ' _ ' , _ 7- #~, \" uurrs OF / FORTHISCONSTRUC11ON / PROJECT / ./ ---- ~--- --- . - ..... .. . ~ o REMARK MUL TI-STEM MUL l1-STEM.PlNK FULL SPACING AS SHOYJN AS SHOYJN 1St o.c. 10' o.c. 81 o. c. 20' o.c. 6' o.c. 3' O.C-.. 4' o.c. .3' o.c. 3' o.c. 3' o.c. / / / / / // L/~ BENCH~fARK:____ TOP OF ~5 REBAR FO. ELEV=171.4,) NI~VD i '~29 ~r-\~ 7e> C-t- O\-<:.U ' - ~ ,,'-1' \ t p.FCC\. ,;-.....) J C~t ~\ j) ,y/ ~ '\ ,t\ '\ C /(i J . '" ") " '\ p."'- \"v.\- - "~r=' ~~ '~ ......., "-"""""''',,-- ~ BENCH~fARK: TOP OF #5 REBAR FD ELE V. = 159 36 NGVO 1929 l . \ '\ ;!~ :0 \.,I) , ! I'~ ~." '~ \ , tit \~ J I --;;. ---J L... o o~ ,,~l ....0 ~ " I,' I'. .~ ..... WEED AND GRA,S.S-. FREE ).... . ~ .' .~... . ", "'~ ~. . . '" ~ '. . 11 . I . ..... 'I- W w,. z. en z o - CI) - > IU' g: I- () W -:a o II: G. .S1 c I- 'CO ~ ] . ~,"" <... \'~ . c:: " I: ... \L ,"":,, ffi m ::i :) Z ~ CL: ,""l " l...~J . ,. ,~"I\ ~ 'J< 1- 2_: ~t' 5 _. ...~ v';' ;'..- -," /' -, l:~ .~". 1 .hi ...... ,~~ /, ' \ ~ ;~ .~ - V ~~. ~~.)" ':~; _.~ ;;. ". ..: .,',: .J ..:;.~ ::z :,-~ (:~~ ~:~~ . .,' ..;.. --i-- >c E-c I-C< ~~ t-4~ u~ ~o ~ ~~ o .- ~E:! 00 ><< ~' ~~ z~ ..-c< = ~ I .- ~ ~ ~ i m fIJ ~ ~ ~ en " oot..a 0 Q CD~ ~ .q-.I'- == ~, """ .c 0" (,) tt)X ... <( ~ <u.. - ""--' --. " ~ 0 ~ C>> ~ 0 ~ < 4l, ~ > ~ ~ L&.J 0 ~..J "0 ~ ::,)o~o ~ 0 .~ =.l CX) m~>1 .~ U.J ex) ~ lJJ X 0 fill") ~ ~OZr") s:; O:.CDW'" i 0 .~o ~ 00<:" D-. V 0.:' ~ C \ ~ \ c ,. .~ , . .,.... '. ....1 . ,/ , ~i I. ~ _ ~. , -" 1- ' j~:) ..'.... "", '-, I ' ...jt '....... ,/ . \: .)"" I.. _ c;.' . , t ~ r ,,~ - - ~ It) .n ~"\ ~ ~ aa CO <:- <I~I~IS -:s Q~N'~ ... - - C-11 ~ C5 ~ ~ 11 ~ 0:: Q e&: Q1 ~.~.~ J <-: \~, ,,(: '"- -..; t-~ ;:. ./t L \~.~ ~ 4~. ;:'4 ..;.. _ ~ i:r: ~~ ;i, ~'. , . , I ~ --... ..... .".~ ~ ,;,' C:." !:, f: ~t :~.; ~~.. " ':':1' ,l: -..~ i - >e~ E-t~ zE-t ,~z o~ <uu ~~Z pZO ~O~ ~~~ <tI:Z u~ t-4E-t ~~ ~ Z o ~ E-tZ ~j ~~ ~ ~ ~ . U Z ...... ~ ~ Z ....... Z Z j ~ Z o ....... 00 ....... U ~ ~ ~ ti z o ~ 25 0:: ~ . I '(~ ~J. : :..< ) -' z o F ~ ~ LaJ o - o z u .~ ~ ' , . ( ~ i '" 3: Q . a:: I W W ~ t- ,/ >- N - Z - :r: a.. ,/ N LO o LO en ,/' . . lJJ t60 ~ OATE ~ ~c. .~ '"Jl NO S1O. Q{! Al. 100. ~ '-"C~~ ...... -. .. .... - GRAPHIC SCALE - ~ LOCATE "HERE RAIN CAN fALL DrRf:CTL Y INTO DEVICE. '-'IRE ANI}- CONNECTIONS BY IRRIGllHION CONr~/4CT01<, f.:XTE~IOR BlJILDmG 'WALL VALVE BOX OR PIT; I SIZE AS NECESSARY I --- OOUBLECHECK BACKfLO'w' PRE: VENTER GATE VALVE IN b' VAL.Vi BOX - USE VALVE BOX ~ESSORE ReDUCING VALVE EXTENSION W N(C[SSA I ~lOlOl:liIll ~ c; I EXISflNG-1 'WATER MAIN <OR METER) Jr--cONTROLlER -KEY lOCK ~~leo VAJ.: PO\JER ~ GROUl@ CONNECTIONS ~aNDUIT -oE-$CH. 80 CONDUIT BY ~, IRRIGATION l;CNTRACTOR , INISHED fLOOR . ...... ~ '..' ", ur DIRECT BURIAL "'IRE Ta ELECTRIC VALV~ (JHIUT, tDch - 60 ft. ROUND, PlAS TIC rr=: SCK. SO NIPPLE V'~,' r-SCM. all UNI<lN ~~~.oc ~ 0A1i: /1M' ;w - ~ W'1lY lOA1i: ~~ ~A_- ~-~ ELECTRtC VAlVE /tSIf> . ~ - ~ RSYllMTE \ /tSIf> . ""iii> ;w iiiQ~ BY TO MAIN 'WATER LINE 'APP. -;;;;: ~ ~ )f;&IQ, - ::J Of .57 POR DRAINAGe CONTROLLER RAIN SHUT -OFF DEVICE CIQ VALVE 1 ALL PIPE TO BE pve, SOL VENT W'ElD, CLASS 200 FOR MAINUNE, CLASS 160 FOR LATERALS) MINJMUM DEPTH FOR MAIN-18', MINIMUM FOR LATERALS-12". ALL PIPE LOCA 1'(D UNDER PAVING TO BE: ENCLOSED IN PVC SLEEVE AT LEAST T\JO NOMINAL SIZE:S lARGER TH~ \JA TER LINE. - 3/4' QCV VALVES TO BE INSTALLED FOR ~'rNTERIZING SYSTEM \JITH AiR COMPRESSOR, $[E IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER NOTES "AND INSTRUCTIONS. 2 CU. FT. GRAVEL --- --"l ~ . CONTROL 8. CDHM~ '-'IRE C(JNNECnON~ JUNCTION BOXES BRASS GATE 0C:s.:lilIi0 110H ELECTRICAL CONDUIT TO RAIN SENSOR (BY ELECTRrc~~ CONTRACTOR) ...; llaCIlPMIIi DISCRETION} ~ oe>aclP1\Oll El L, ~ CONDUIT FLOOR BY OTHER 'WALL MOUNT \JAlL MOUNT TO &: AWROXlMA ITL Y 5' ABOvE Fl~ I o r ~ NIBCC tn1l3 NON-RISING STEM GATE VALVE (or fi'q IRRIGATION HOOK-UP O'w'NERS BOX. L TO '-CONTROLLER RAIN SENSOR RISER. UNOCR ~ BE TORO AS IDENTIFIED AT VALVE l.D. TORo 252-26-06 IN 10' VALVE BOX. 16 STAHON, LOCATED AT [)An: f t OAT[ t OA 1'[ 8'1' 8Y Ii'l' WE'oI. 1iElI. !lEV. ~.~ ~. 0An: o~ o~ ) o / o / IiY ~. SPRINKLERS TO VAL YES TO BE CONTRLlER TO BE TORO XF-41~ PRIMARY POW'ER BY OTHERS. DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLO~ PRE VENTER [2' DOUBLECHECK OR TO CODE) VAL VE [BRASS] TYPE ON ZONE TO LINE VAL VE VALVE '-SPRINKLER PRESSURE REDUCING ('w'A TTS 2' BRASS) QUICK COUPLING SIZE SIZED SOLENOID o o o o V:LV~ VALVE ..D. ~ GPM 5 70C -12P-12 o VAL VE NOTESI 1. ALL 2. ALL 3. 3/4' ---- ~-------- -------- ~/ 8-- --- _____ 3/" ---- -,-.,- -- ---- t;:;J --- --7'""<;--- j' ------- . \:::1 _ ____ I' --__ S 700 e--------8--.':.'/4' ---------- ~~ - --- e --- ---" 6 - -- -- ----- ----.. -?-'-\-- $ ---- ~ ---- ---- -- -. ~-~ --- '_--':-1/4:--- --.-. - - ---. -- .- -~-- ---- -- --- -- ,,- !-. -- -----t:i ---'C'!' ----- --- - ---- . .-- .. -- ,." 4'- '. --\:::! - -~- ---- --- --- ---- !.-;-__ N-" !, ---- · /2' -- - __ --- -- ' ------- , __ N--- .i." -- ,-! '2'----\::1 '- ----- .......' __ 2'"'c.... < 'J., 2---- 8 \::7 ---- ...... ,", -- ,--- ...... - -.. .. ____ c:::::,-- 3. ' ...... .... ---S:.;)~- '-/ --~'- ...... .... '-- --- --... /~, ___ ~ I . / ,I ' ----E2~ ,,/ ^t$ ____ ,:::s I - .... -~ . ~ .. ___ r;ol ,- .. - ~ ' .. ___ e n' I .' .... t"\. _ v! '," '-J _' ,..' ^ 0 2'7'-- I ,.... A \' L ,I ~, .. ~\ , '& ...-~' ~ ;y " ...... '" ~, ~ <.. " .... ;j , 5' .... /. ,b ,.... ~ S70G ~~~ ~ ,0 ~~~ .iA'\ ;> ,~ ",' ~ L'- ".-i\ " ~'" ,// ~ ~".j) " .- \"" ,-" " /' '- '; , / " ,'// ' ~' / 2 ~ / /. ~ ," ;I~/ ~ ~ ,,' ~.//0/.i '" "" ' '," "'" v' ~ / ",,11 ,,' " " ~ " .' ',' ,/ ' 0'" , '-,'. '. '- '- .,x.. .. ;j '0:' \~" ~~"",," ' '"", 'y...... "'" " "-:', /X " / ' V"... '- ' ;X., /.....' ' ' , " ," . ,^,' "", .X/"/, .... '-,> .. "-... . /\, '" . ' .'(51 " ,,,..' . ~ " '. ' j" ' . , / ~ .... ' " ' ^ ' "- .... ,/ '. ", ' X " .... .. ' ' , ' " " . .. ./. ' ' 'vA " 0 ..) ". ' .... " ' .... <... " ;>., .... ' . , ,^, " , " " .. '01 /' ' ' .. . ' '. , ,/, , ,./ .... <.. ' , " . / .. ",,", ~./ ~ .. ~ .' ~.. .. 'I ' ~ " ttis,,'/.- '.......' Y. ~ .. " <) ~o.~ .... ' A^, · ~OO ~ ~\ ~~ ;j I e ~ 0 j , I ;j ,I I IV X ..-1 I YT-- V' _ . I H-l - , /.' ," I I - 1"-/ v, ' I I' ; ;. ~ " ttr----' ~ 'L I I I I ~ .. tp , , 0' . , ' ..,. ffi ,,~j~ /. \ ' f " ' ' "V'_ ' I ..Yo ' $ '\ ' ," , ~ , / .. . ,,'tr) - ',/1, ~v .... ' ,,1/' '- 1 W '.. ,,;,,/ " : '''1. ...... \.. o~ I t"i ~~t , ..' 1 ,. . , ..' - " \ / . .. .'h bH ' I' . .. IT" I '-1-, '\ \ . '" , .. "I ' ' ' , .. "-v. ,-;' ,.'. .1. EB.. ,.-'" I . . ..' -' ' - " "',1' .....'" \P. \' v. < '_ ' ~ _ ' ' , 0 '. ,.' .>' ^'" ~" , I')" L\ .'L ' \,\. / , ~ :Q) '-..::,">/ .,.... W ~/ ' '0 ."1\" z' /1', ' IT' .... ,c,./ / W " f" / - ' .. ,^,' "- / ,. 7 ..,' ,,' I ' l~ ~..~ frnl- " '''"' /~. _ ~ .. 8' - ~ .700 .. 8' .., ,,,- , "'7 " p"'''' .. 0 00 0 ' '~~ /,\ .. z .,' m' , _--~ / ,':;t # ~ ' .. /...., ' .. I ,,]~ 7 6 ' ! .... " " ..' - ;I .. 2'" , ...... -------e, $ -12 ;' 'I. ~ /. I .... 3/4' L\ '-: "" _----1- ~ O' I' ........ lIeD m-' iC-"_$3.:--LLE;" ~~ " f; 6 i /, "- ., . c I '-' .... i 0 S700 / v.', -:" .. .) .. ' I , I 4:; ,~ / .. r1\ '-V " / .... '+J I' , t , . , , , , . I I .: ~I I\J I ,i: ,~I I "" I I ...... I I 1'1 I ~I 3700 : I m~ · ~ ,f , ,~/ I 5 1M ,J",CI-\ -.../ J ./ =-=.l ,,- \L"}I(- I ~ I ,,/ " n' " & / p' ./ V , / - ......_' 0 ./~~.~.. ----- )./...... . _---- /C.' .. ,,--- / ,.\1 .. --------- ----~ .. _---- 4' // \:::2 S 7 Cll ------- \:;:._/-c, 2'_------.---- ,'.,/ /- V ~____?""_,-~-1=~4. ~\' ----...- " - /-/- --1 -- '. . - -- / V _,,__,,1... . 4 -...--- ~~~/A'S3----- ---- {:j U --._.,-,,____ ,-1,,"- b ------ ---/-- ':7 ------ ..,~'----- ---.~ 8 _. __.' __""____ 0' ,--'J ]:.-:.--.....-// n ~ Q ---FF~~Y:~/ ___v ". ~ ~ -- ------. .-, _// ,-Y/--" H/4' __'--'______ r-. \ /-/- ---- 1-1/2' __t::::L--;-----B- /" _~~'-/-</ " ---------- S700 ,-1/':' -------d ' . ~ /------ ':;' ///......- 31' ------ m" L, 2' ________I:::i- --_/-~/ .- -- " " _ ____-- __.J/C'. _ ,,4' _---" 2 · " ' <:r _---- 3 '- ______ ...__-..................... 2' S 700 - ~ ~ ELECTRIC 5, 4. GATE 3 S70G ~ EB l'-.J 4 s (jj) _.~~ ~...04,=.a- ~ 1 570Z-1~P-12 ~l_ ~ SHRUB SPRAY ~PRINKLERS NG) KEY (PRESSURE COMPENSAT OAR: A 8Y AJIt) . AJIt) . AiiP: Q\D. CIRCLE CIRCLE ARC CIRCLE QUARTER HEAD ASSEMBLIES STRIP CIRCLE CIRCLE THIRD tHIRDS STRIP STRIP T([' QUARTER SERIES ~Ol<O SUPER 700 ~ J/4' X V~ ~Tl(, U.l f1]IllOl:iTCli~ ./ USE (4) STREET EllS ,: ~ (1) SCk. 60 N(PPLE 700 CENTER THREE ./ PVC COMBINATION it' OR ELL HALF SIDE FULL T\lO END ONE SUPER ~ 570 EB '" \:::/ @ @ qj) @ () IS> <D TURF $PRINKLE~S TDRO TORO EB ~ V SPRINKLER 570Z:1 CA11: 8'1' 1lt:\I. \~ 0\ . Sf: QA' s ((i) ~1"'C .~ ~ ~lt> OC'I'A1L NO _._._._._._._._._._.~._._._.~._._._._.-._._.-._.- .....l Mo\DI :;uI>PL Y L~:; m la: IN:> TALl U) I" ~'~,... ~ \11TH " ~ .......... ACTl)IiO(:; " IHH.....L...now ' , ~CIf'IC...T1 ' ',,' 1 ,~ . , " ",'/ ',',"/! '\fl ',' fj T1[ II lWSI: .:0> UJOP ~, · llll IllL \I1k1~ ...T ~s OF Illl(EC11iJlti ~... TO( nw. .....L Ii'l.ASI1C i>IPING m IlL :jQ', l*TlI: "'u L~ ...Hell ~ll IJoo TI(O;L"ML'" AS ......L CONNI:C11IJNS ~V( IlUll ?tlJ1Jk MAllL 10/11<[:; ~ GI<ADE DAn: O"'1i: M1P AJif> AJIt) . .:lID. Say HIGH IMPACT, 10' ROUND, PLASnC VALVE BOX~., EXISTING 1 /; 'WIRE TO /1 CONTROLLE ) ~, MIN(MUM OF 24' STRAIGHT RUN OF PVC BEFORE TEE DR "" ELL - USE PVC SUP- . \2 CU, FT, OF .57 FIX ON lATERAL SID[ GRAVEL FOR DRAINAGE OF VALVE VALVE r.w, r-;;w ~ ~ ~Ii'l' ~ VOLT ~. TRENCHING PROCEDURES SOLENOID lA TCIth. ~, OfSCllWtIOIo OCliOllP'I\OOi HAL'" UHL LA T[R..... .....D 1o/\jo'INU ~.1 ~I L...TeRAL WLRING 010' - ~LIL TUIiINr,- Ie ELECTR reAL CAlI: TYP I([II.t ilY SECTION-J O"'1\: r IiY 1([\1 \~ 0)")\''2\ s 1-1/4' --~--------z:s, -- v_ \.. } I ~_ _ _____ __8--------6- _ ___ __ - d __ -__ __ _Q_ _ _ _ --__8__ _ _ _ _ _ H ;,{ _ ~ 3/4' 31" I' [' 1-[/" - I .......... N --1 ~. -(19./- l' - r--<.,- . \:J , -r-<\ . - \:J_ 0- BENCHMARK: TOP OF #5 REBAR FD ELEV.=159.86 NGVD 1929 3/4 -T"\- Q 2-1/2' 3/4' 8--------B- ffi-f-~---- ~ ()1 ;0 ..." z ~\- .~ o -" o. - CD V. -J 1:.0_ . ~ o ..... ..." ~ < --i> U1 Q) (J1 ill o \ I j I I I c ~ j"'Y} =--, --:-1 rli ~ " ~ c:c o '-It ~ o > ~ ~ ::t ~ Z ~ N ~ '''''''''AiIr:~. ;:....l", '_ -:..1 ...,~~ . >ON .' " . I I I. "A I I . I A. :I c I- (I) o ":- z.' 5 ZW .....</l - ~ .........J c: '^ .. - z 'c l:J .." ~ c.l..)- .:::> 0 (/)J:~~~<~~o~~o l- ~ 0 Z:r oV'l _~ (r, I- '~::>(Ij ...--.- 3;z~Q. .~l-0~~ Z ~-z o)-~>-wo~o :J 'ww zwow",zwi=' o(j')~<5_::::(.)~O-Cl.< c~~V) ,l-3~~)..~U)o o~o:: (:). u. 'wZz ':-~~ zo w :)'~.u..:- ;ZOv1.J:Z-l-. O~~<.....~. ' c~z~ w~*,-,-"5C) 1=0- ~cv ~G:~oZ': ,-,OwL4.l <i...tJ..... ~t-o::'\ (.)::p. 0;: "'" e::: -J w -J 0 - ~ @Q.,~~Q,.~8z>-~~~~ t-~ ~ a:: Z(l';O~.....: v. e:: r:~. C < 0... ei ~ =: c c... z ~z~wwz 1-1" OO....-<~'^a:: O:::<:~cz "w-.., zo"""-~",,. Vt-:- .:l.. ...; - 0:;;: <: Jo., <: LJ ~'=. o~~~~u...i-~ 0 U):e~5c..w OZW~0 we:: u:. :::l-r4-l<Q::Ow :::w~L>-:L....i-OZCf'lr. UJC:~ r-c.. 0 vl co Z -< ::::J ..- :l: L... c... u ~ \SQ z ~ l4') Z ~ 0) Z t.; Q) < ~ .- ...J V\ t::'":\ Q ..... ~~~ vC:: i/) -' (3 ~ w . a:: c.. .... " I I I I I I I I ~I ~ o a: a. I I I I ~ o ~ 0 ~ en ~ 0) ~ l,{) \/J ~ N ~ a:; ,'" ".-.-.. ~ 0 Q \01' ~ vl' ~ N"'-" ..c:: 01"""" c..J l'"lx ~ <{ ~ <:u... ... 0 "'-' ~ 0 er:: ~ ct: 0 ~ ~ ~ t:: > 0 .~ uJ 0 ~ ....JOWO ~ :J ...J 0 ~ ON~a: OJN>i .. wro ~ WX()l") ~ ~OZt'0 ~ a..CDW E 0 .~R ;;-- 0 q 4: f'. ~ vQ..-.J............ ~< ...J.. O~ ~O ~ ~o< ~~ ~6 .....0 ~< ~ . U Z ........ ~ ~ Z ~ Z Z < ~ rl ~ o ~ UJ. ~ U rT~ ~ 0... ~. I I ~ I \ Section · Stair ecAi..E 1 i~11 . 11-"" \". . " . Z 0) (). z. 11': ~I ........ J} ~ 2 ~ ~ . n'\ ~;::" CLEAR ~ ~- " I 1-'-- ~ I r----- ~ -< I t- .-" '" -... ~ " - ~ ~TE:::.- I~TE~EDIA:E ?- (j) o z ~ < t- \S) ~ G 'll ~ '- ~i 01 . COI'\CREiE P...ANK WI HA~ ~ I,"j,) (') z. LL -< t- <1) ~ () 1\1 'i ~ . ("0 ~E.":"DES sr~D A/'.;CHQR PAI"T) ________- -- ------- ---- ~ ~ w-,A'-'f:... 5iRlN6:R ----- 5PEC5. E01'TO\"1 ~;... TOP '<AI:'" I II: OL.:'-l''''~TER 511:::1.. HA\lDRAIL wITh I" X ~/I~" :>TEEi.. BRACKET u.Ei...DE::) AT EA.Ch ~ST 5TAtR ::;,TE=-. Si:E 5T;:=E'~ T c:>Pf=>i N6 c:.ROu.,. ~O:...lD MET ~ CMA~E;" ~/ SEE S~~- " 5TEE:... :n" DiA"'1ETER PAfNT) II DiAMETER R.AiL (PAINT) :" C'IAMETER (PAiNT) CONCRETE stair I ! I 1 I . : I I I I I I I I I i : ! ! r-+ 1 I I ' I ! I I I I . nJI~1I , I 1.1 1_.~. ----- g-- I ' t. ~ Section · 5CALE 112 Ii . I' -e" " j / :~ . " " . - ,-" ....... r , " ~ . ,," rrPi ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ j ~ 1 ~ j ~ < ~ '" < -< ~ "- ~ -< < ~ "- -< -< ~ "- -< j ~ ~ ~ 3 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ < ~ ~~~ I J I I , " ~ i I I I I" DIAl"1ETER STEEL I I !'<All.... (PAI!\:T i I , I I ; I c- I I C~ I ' '-. . I -:.. , t I I r . , -' /11: I CONCRETE TQPFiING - \ I I ; I iJ 'j l;:iI 'j rl/ ; I ,,, ~'AM-~~= ~'T'"~-. I' -------, - 1- :: It:." :;" t:;::... ----p","''T'") / " ' ~1I" / : ~ ' r:.__ ,..- ':;"_.1 ID , ~ t".;J~ I "'^"_ ~ ~ MET A~ CHANI'\E~ L;,;/ SEE STR..lCTU~:... - ( ~ >- ID ~ (/) ~ c I I I I 1 ~~ ~W ZF ,~Z ~OW ~UU ~~z y~ZO ~O~ ~~~ ~W UF ~W ~t:) ~ ~ II; es ~ '...... ~ ILl ..a J- -- l- I- W' W ::c (I) ~:2 ~~ ~.~ VJ ~~ l/::" DiA~ETER STEE~ TOP ~IL PAINT.) I'"J ~ :'i ::) o z w o o '" - r') ,-., ,...., w ~ a::: C\l -< ~ W I Z W en h.. en :E 1<(" W :E '"j -.J :::> C\I G: Z LOo w o < :d u I.i... A7.2 ~ ~ -< -< ....... w w I V') Q m C::: o u- o w :) (/) (/) ~ ~ liw: I~IZ ~~l!J~ ~T ~ POSTS :" ::;'IA""1ETER STEEL o C, MAX.-(PAtNT} ~--- , I I I I 1 1 : I ; i ~ ! I I '~ I I i I i"""" --- ) ! j I I " ~ w 5 w a::: < ~ ~ '" ~ w ~ c=. z o i= 0- 0:: () (/) w o - c z ~ , a :NTERMEDIATE SEE SPECS. hEAOE5 STUD Ai'\C"';OR PA(!'\T) l\;OTE: 5A"'1E AS G~AR:DRA!L AT DETENTION AREA, B\JT vERTiCALS t..RE 01 ~'_"" o.c. 1/2 BOTTOM RAIl.. ---- CONCRETE PLA.'\lf( e Stair Section (I ecAU: -0' ~ I ,-q {' . '- ) . ~ I ",\ '..... , , -< -< < ~ ~ ) ~ ~ -< i '" , ~ , ~ ~ -< J " -< -< ~ ~ , ~ ~ .( -< ~ ~ -< ~ i '" ,I " -< ~ -< ~ < i "- -< ~ " , J .... ) '" ~ ~ ~ -< -< -< 1 -< " ~ -< -< ~ ~ -< ~ ~ ~ ~ " " ,- y ~ " Q I Il) ! t I I i l' i i I I - I ~ I - ~: C:"IF A1'.Gl....E A; ::~ 5Tf<\r-..6ER ~ ~y WELD TO 5TR:~R ~ A'C~ -~ TO S,-AB W, 'I E)I."PA.,\;51~. A~CMORS ~ '...'. - SEE STRJeTUR.A1- !:)RAwlN6S I' I ~~ :1/ , I 11/ _,' J> I ,. FI"l~ ~QOli< I r t I I I I I i f f r I 1 I j 1 I I I , II 1 I I " . I I, 1 ~ IL ' I I ~. ~ II 1 ~ II : ~l, I I I ~ II I i ! i 1 I i I I I \ I I x- I I I I ~_ i L--_ I I t-..~ I I I i I I t I ~ I I l I \ I .... ~ "'" . ~ /~ " ------------~~-'" " 'I __________________~_ ~ I I ~_....__....___..... i i I i I -....: ,-... : I ""-; I I ! I I . : i ; I I I I ~ : I ~~Il ~~: I ~ "": ~~ ~ ,; / Stair ~ /// ~ Section fa - -".. ..--..----- ta" STEE~ C.-uAf<D~;:' w/ ....ANORA!:... SEE DETA:L 3/Al2 (PA:J'.;T> RET'~~ ~A'DRAIL "0 POST AT peTOF' A"\D 5OTT~ Ot= Rut\; PROViDE! :n" D~A"'1ETEk STEEL POS TAT TOP Al'oO :3OTT 0"1 or= ST~IN6ER (PAiNT) ---- t r~ F ~- ~~ // ~/ / / AT -~ "~ META... CN~~;" STRI"6ER T- :'.,s=r l') 'T'",~ l"-"CT '" 1"""""'; A lo..."'.:;:: . ~....-- .,.",. ...... ~ -'",......,~,Ao...,~ :.." FLOOR -( P":' :l\.lT ' .. BROv~ l=!'r'-..!5HE:: COt'-\CRETEP- Fi~.... il'-\ ST::;E:" ~5T~~ , PAl"''' , C....iP ~"'6~E I.\JE....SlEC TO So...;5TR:;AD AI'o\C '~";~i~ER A EACH SiDE _(P~I1'\~ C~C~TE PLA1\.1<: -_-.-/ POSTS TOPPIN6 GR~"" SOLiD -- 1" ~1A."1;:TER STEEL ~C" oe, MAXIML.M CONCRETE t ! t t ~ '> ~ l ~ > t t , ~ '> > ~ ~ '> t }- ~ ! ~ t ! t > t ~ '> ! t > ~ ~ 7- ( STEEL GUAi<DRAIL ~I HA~RAI~ 5CE DETA!~ 3/Ai1 (F'AIl'\T> ~ ~ t ~ i I ~ , 1",- '" I 1"'-.. ~ : i ~~ II I~ , ,I ~" 11 ~"" ~' II. .:I~'-....~, ' !,' ! ", ~ i ,I : I ~ ! t, ' II I~ . ii' I I I!" ! :' Iii" I' I I I I I I I I: I' 1 :.' . I I J . " I ! I; i I : I r I ~!!i; j~! -+'1 I ; ....... -' ! ' l i. I : I I : I i i t : ! i I , ~ i I I I : I I I I I , I I ! i I I I' I I: I i l !! r-~:l . ~ i : ~ ~ ~ ~I~: . ~I : ~ , Ii i~ I I I ,I ;~ I ' 1 i I I I I I ! ! I~i!il -, i! : i \ i I I ! : I I 1 I i! i i .1 ~ I . I I'll ! ! ~-- -- I ~ :; ~ If l 1---- ,I I. Iii 11 ' I -~------'-----'... I I I I ~, I ' , ______ I; .,...- L i I' STEEL PIO<ETS---------i i '; ~11~i i i Q/ ~,. OC ; Ii! ~x: ! I ! : '---r---- I I I : , ...-----r : I ii' :, ...........--" . .; : I ~. I I I I. _/ : I I' '-. ! ; I-~ I I .~I I I_I/~." .INTC~;::DI.".,-;: ':'Tt=E ~ : . I 1 I :. I '"' I --.f',i I.... ,...............,.1.... ~ t I 1 I I POSTS Q; 3'-0' OC I I!: 'i! ~i I I I ~l I I 1:--" M-T AI ~ ......"-.-' 'IT - Ar-~ -,..,. : I t:. -.... 1....-...._'\1,:::.:... w H Mt::_~:::.:.....' ~ I \..ofD -- -_. I I ! I I t.NC,..;Oii< : P ".,-'T , SEE S TR.;Cf(..RA.- \ l' i i I SEE SPEC5 -\ i I! i ). \ : I: I ~ \ \ '. '; ': T \' I ' I I I ~ / ! I I ~ ! II I i I I: : \ I, I 1 , !, 11-- - ~~ .' ~ : \ I: ~'I! I I , I,' ",-'" I 1 I ,,,:::: 1 I I "": I i I _ I I . ill ~ i i. 1 I V1 '~ I ~ ~ r ~ ~ Ii! ,~ ! ~ 1 I [ I . I i i I . I ! ; 11 'I I <I : - i ~ I - I ~I I , ! 0" ! I I I L_._ I I I I 1 / I ~ . Q i _ I I I ~ ~I I ~ I C~....!F A~~E AT EACM ~TR1~R ~ ,r- I.l.EL:? TO 5TRI~R AND A.'CHOR i[,/ T~.?~~ w/~EXPAN5~~,Al'\~~ I % - ~t: oTRL...... TURAL ORAuJl1\\~~ /t! ;1 r 11 / 'I' ---........, - " r 1 i I 1 i I " " -- - -- r--:::----- l ' --- . : I I I I V ~ STEE.... 61.o~RDRAII.. UJ/ ,..,A~RA 5E:E DE rAil. 3/A i~ (PAI",r) RE'UR'. ~Ai';,CR,:..,~ TO POST A. T ~oP A"-;S 8CTTO~ 0.= ~i'" PRC'/tDE: I I/~'. Di,4,"1E'T'"ER STEEL - PO::': AT TOP Al'\D BC:T~ Of STRINGE~ - ,PA:"'T) - ~ I ~'\ '\., ! I ~i "', I \ I i 1 I i ---~ I I I I META:... C~AN~E,- WIT..., hEADED S1'.;D\ I ANC....~ " PAI~T ) SEE 5TRUCTt..RA~ \! - -E Co..e>;::::C- I ~c V\- _ ::, -----; , \ \ \: \ : \1 ~ ~ I , I ' \l.) " " " ~ I I I I _J I -, FLOOR FINIS..; I ! I , I I I I ~ I I I I i I 1 I , 1 I I I I ~ ~ ~ c.......--- r----~ ! , I : I '----1 I ) ~l ~ I I C~CRE'n= TOPPI~ CliP A"'ULE WE~:>ED TO-- SU5TREAD A'D SiRINGER AT EAC,., SiDE -. PAINT) ~ f. Stair // // / Section .. Exit --- ecAl.-f: I 1/2" Ii I' -~.. SOLID COl\CRETE PL. AJ~K MET ~ C...,A'l'..;EL 5iRlI'OER ~LD TO MET~ CHA~L AT F~OOR -\PAIt-...'T) Bfi<OOM FINiSt-iED CONCRE:E FILL.. i~ STEEL SUBTREA.D (P":':'Il\;T) c;..ROW T ~ ~ ~ t ~ ! >- ! ~ ~ t ~ ). ~ ~ ~ ~ > t ~ ~ \. ~ ). ~ ~ ~ ~ > > t > '> t ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ > ~ t ~ ~ ~ " " -< -< -< ~ ~ -< -< ~ -< -< -< , , ~ , ~ ~ "" ~ -< -< ~ I '" -< , ~ ') ..... , '" ~ , -< -< -< '" " .I '"\ -< -< < -< -< -< " -< -< .( -< '" ~ '" ~ -< ~ -< -< ~ -< -< ~ -< " -< '" -< -< -< -< .( ~ "' ~ -< -< -< " ~ J "' ~ " < .~ , q]~\. rv"V"'t \ ~,. -i I f.------l I i I I I i I . .. /I i I' 11 ' ~ i I I ; I I I I I I ~lJ \ N. I . I I ' . I ' i i ! I I ! I ; i I ,,+-. I I' : I Y : ! I J ' I I I I · I I I I ! t ! ! I f I I I ~ 1 II i ~ I i ~! I i ..~ --..,'1 -.--a i ---1 I r I ~~ ~ L-1 ~ i - ~ I ~ i REn;~ HAlWRAli.. TO POST t..T TOP A"W COTTOM OF ~ stair ----~ I ~, . -" ~ . ~ (\\ ~ ~ Section · .;;.,,0 .. I i= ~,.......... II // -"'.. I' II /2" I I I \ I ~vIOE \ l,t2" DIAMETER 5TEEL I posr AT TOP AND 6OTTOM OF \' S'T'Ri"6ER - (FAINT) I i I I I I I I I I i I t 1-112i1 I"TER"1EDIA TE STEE~ I P06TS G> ~'-~" O.C. I I I METAL C+-iANN:L wlTi-t P-iEADED STUD ' A"CHOR (P":"i!~T) :seE 5TRUCil.oi~ I I I I SEE 5FEC5 I I eROOM FI"'I~ CO!'.CRETE- FILL l~ STEEL e..J5TREAD (FAI"'T) C~IP AN~LE ~i..DED TO---- ~~AD A.."'D SiR:~E~ AT E~ t;1~E -\PA~NT) METAL CHAN~E:... 5TRiN6ER LJEl..!? TO l"":ET Ai... CMANI~:... AT F~OOR -(PAit\.i) CONCRETE TOFPIt\l6 UROUr 5O~:D ! t ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ " :;;TEEL GUARDRAIL WI HANDRAIL SEE DETAI~ 3/Al~ (PAif'\T) fii<ETU~ H~RAIL TO POST AT TOP AND BOTTOM OF RJI\ I i I f r I i I I ~ I I I I lJ i I I I : I 'I i i I : I I I I I i II'! I i I I I I I I I I I 'I . I I 'I I 11 I: . I i! I i I ! I I I I ill I I I I I ' I I 1~lt ,.1 I I :. i, I! I ~ I I! I "::::~I I '~~ I ~ I I t I i i I : t I I ! I , i I I ; II ; i I i I Ii ! It I II I ' . I i ~I G I I l--fIl, . I I I , : I I I I , ; i I "- I, ! I : ......... I I I I I~. ~!l 'II ; ii' , i I : .ill!~'l: ' I Ii, I I. I , I , I..... :1 ' " I I . " II i: II IN II i I I! !" l i I. II : I i I ! 11 I ! I I I: I I I I ~ I I i' ! !! I! I I I : i I! 'i,~ 1 I t.:. I I I I IT' I I :, I I 'I I 'I I I I I 1 Ii: I I "I : I! : i I I I I. II ~ I I ! I I I I i I. r- - - _-..-.~~. I t I II ! I ' ,,~ ! I I I "-': I, '! ~~. '" ~ I I G.. ~. t ~: ! ~ : ::;:J I ----l ~C1j ~ I ~ I ~ I ~I ~ I I " " \ I , '>,., I 1 -~ I j I I I I f I ! ! I I I ~V\DE I laH DIA"'1ETER STEE~ POST AT TOP A~ 6OTTCt1 OF 5rRI~R . (PAI"T) STEEi.... I" 5TEE:... P;CKETS- ., :;" OC. I-II::" I~TER'1EDiATE P05T5 C) .)'-0" oe. ~ ", ~ . \''\ " & I .... " I t , I I 1 I ! I I i I I 1 I I I I ' I I I II ~ I I I ~11 " ~ I ' ":::: I & ~ I I - ":::: ' I I ""'.IP "!Io.../'"-L- A,. ,- ,,/' - ~RI"'./'-ER ~ I r- --.... ~ ,\,,;0 ::: ,..... t: ,.........H :;': I ' ~ ;..-- H"-': ~~D TO STRINGER A'D A1\;CHO~ 1 "0 S~A5 U;/ :::XPANSIC^. A.'CHORS I ~ . -5EE 5:~CT -.JRA~ DRA;.JIN65 ~ II ill' 11,/- FINISH F~OOR ! .; III ; I J I I A I t I t I I 1 I i i I I i / -11 ~ I \'4 ~~ I f I I Stair " // · Exterior Section - ecAl.E I \/2". _"Ill METAL ChANNEL lJtTj-., t-iEADSD ST~C' ~ ANCf.1OR (FAINT) SEE ST~TURA~ \ ~ FI~I~D CONCRETE - FILL l~ STEEL ~eTl<EAD (FA!\'.;1' ) CL tp A'JUl..E WELDED TO ex.;BT~AD AND ~TRI~ER Ai EACf.4 SIDE -(PAINT) ~~ CON~TE PLA'X MET Ai.. CM~~ ~Tf<tNUER UJEi-D TO MET Ai.... o..A"iNEL A T FLOOR -( PAINT) CONCfiiCETE TOPPING c;.ROWT SOL I D o >- ~ z w.... ;6: ~ <e5 5~::1ow50~ (/):ru..~w<~a:l ~(J')O ~~on:~~~o~<~t- ~~V)Ll.~>->l-~oa:~ ~vi~w s.iw.~>-ws2~a. ~ ozw5~:rC,,)~o ex: 8Q~VJ ci'~ o~t- &: ~ 5 ~ Q ....~~z~ ~~~~!<J~ ~~~....~o~<~~~s~ uO w<UJ~cr""0~O~ jn:w~--I~OOowl-C,,)2 o::Q..Q:<Q.."o2:>-o.".~w< ~~:~~<[o:~~~3a: 8@~~o~~~~~i~~ 4.Jl-o..~w~~~~I-4:<cn ~~~~~~1->-8~~s8 ~~~bit3b2~~~~E~ o ~ I c)~ If) :z ~ 0)~e1 01 < ~ - ..J (I) @~~ Q ...I (/) 7J C3 ~ W ~ q -....J CT- J S' 8' 01 c.. ~ < t- (I) ~ ~ 0 o Q) ~ ~ ~ I ~ N ~ N CI) ro ~ ';' C"r.I 0 ~ (!)~ ~ .q-'--./ "'toW N...-,. .~ 0 X ...: f'0<t ~ <r~ ~ 0 ~ n:: ~ 0 0 ~ 0:: W Q) < C) ~ > ..0 .~ W W 0 ~ -.JO-JO ~ ::)~~QJ ~ ON> I iIS rnNWN ~ Uw ~ WXzO) ~ Y::ow E Q.. a:: a:: ~ d Oo?;O ......" 0 .~ ~ Q.. ~ a.. -J ,"-" I . U Z ~ ~ C-' Z ...... Z Z ~ ~ 0.... Z o ~ U) ~ U ~ ~ 0.... YES PROVI~ r3~2~~GE OF @ SUCTI~CH PUMP ~ d 12' qJ - "'~ TYPE B VENT J i oJ T 0 ROOF CAP / 10' . I P-5 P'--6 GU?- _ G~-2tJ~~;C _, T I O' , , . P _ 3 ' 2, / " .0 ! 6' . - -- - -- T I , I : I : SF- 1 SO '- - - - - - 12" P-2 :=Yo I ~ - [ '---< - UNiT MOUNTED ST ARTED WITH ~ CIRCUIT BREAKER 01 1\ P-4 EXP ANSON TANK ~ FJ \ CONDENSER WA TER BYPASS 011 '" ~ 41~ TYPE B VENT TO ROOF CAP t J T SI m I L 8' ~ ?- 7 0' --1 / c: 40X 16 LOUVER W\M,O.D BOTTOM E' S- AFF INTERLOCKED W /SF-17D f J v " '0 12X6 LOUVER BOTTOM ~ 12' AFF 8'0 DueTED ON TO TYPE F GRILLE 3 KEF KEF / o 20Xl0 EXHAUST DUCT SECTION 01 36X36 CA LOUVERS TOP OF TOP LOUVER ~ & BELOW PlANK BOTTOM OF BOTTOM LOUVER ~ S' AFF EF- I 3D (lip ,~...I 0< EUri- ~" 20X ~ -=~ 24X24 UP TO iJ PENN AIRETTE REBAR @ ROOF PENE CONTROL AIR COMP \ \.0 . ")- I.... D.~. ~ 90CF~VUC~DN .,. .(7 EF-9D C -200 ~ ~ '\ 211 2'0 TYPE B VENT TO ROOF CAP AIR SEPARA TOR AUTOMA TION SYSTEiv\ PANEL Cl-EJw\ICAL FEED T AI\!K ~ 'qJ I J 10' CHILLED WA TER TO/FROM F ACILlTY ! -1 GUH-3 ~ 5',;>) TYPE B VENT ~ TO ROOF CAP 411~ TYPE B VENT TO ROOF CAP \ 2X6 LOUVER BOTTOM ~ IZ'ABOVE RECEIVING DOCK FLOOR AHU-2DI ROUTE CONDENSA TE DRAIN TO HD IN CEIUNG I SEE SHEET P2.4 SlEEVE W/TYPE L GRILLES ~ o r 0 1 ~UH-I ~ 10' , p '_...' EF - I 40 TO ROOF CAP I I i EF-12D , ~ UNDERCUT DOOR 3/4M ) j t ! , 2X15~ KEH-j TYP ~' _ '_____~ _---, ..-- ,. ---- ~!Xl ~ I I , I I I I : : ~ : I I I I I I ___..J ~----:~~KE-F--:----' _ ,t-KEF : I _ I I I ~ I to--- I~ L__ I 1 _.!Xl _ _ ~ 22X22 KSF r+1 I ,-; 1 2XI5 12XI5 12Xl5 22X22 UP TO KSF - - I . ~--_:_-~ ~ I -... 20X 16 ~ 22X22 UP TO KSF t , , SECTION PLAN SUPPL Y DUCT i I I I 1 J t I / I 4.~ TYPE B VENT TO ROOF CAP - 61- C-I 611 \. ~ ) , I I \ i '-_/ SF-17D 10110 TO PENN DON\EX TYPE: DRA 'vVEA THER CAP TYP OF FIVE(5) 2411 ROOF CURB MAU-2 CONTROL PANEL \ 6ill'TO ROOF CAP , ~ 6-240 - ---------- MAU-\ CONTROL PANEL C~ KITCHEN EXHAUST HOOD DUCTWORK NO 5C:ALE o ~ ~ x < . ~ ~I \2'''\,. i ~ ~y:D ~I 0- · x~ q' ~~ - < \ . EF-1OD .. O'~ ~ \. B-3oo ~ ~ ~ - ~ ", 3/4' ~ 10'~'~. "'V 1'1 ' , . - - , - ~ " " , '''" . '''11 ? " , , 'r,...... ~ - ", ",) ! IE I ., '.A . " 'l"', ' SLAB,'" flL TER '" 6'0 UDE~~' ~ ,,-,,,0 W/GRILLE. X .... _ SEE · -,~" i " 'EN Q'" N~~ '. ~/~ IC'. E ~~2f~NZ'LL ~ ~O',;>)A ~_ ~ /+' """ 1 ~-J I ! ~ I> v; , . " ....'" , - ). " \ ~ I . v(.t b _..., . -,-- i 2' 0" SC _ 1 I 8.~1 I- o w .., o a:: Q. .- ~ ~< ~t-4 ......" UQ:: <0 ~~ ~'-' < ~ 0< e::~ ~oo N::J ~~ Z~ 53< Q.. ~~ ~~ ~~ ,~Z <O~ ~UU S~Z ~ZO ~oE= <~Z ~~ U~ ~~ ~~ REBAR ~ ROOF OPENING aXIs DUCTED ON EDH - PROVIDE SECURITY ACCESS PANEL 12Xl2 LOUVER R/ A DUCT TIGHT TO CEILING MOUNT BELO""-' R/ A DUCT 30 CFM TO 4110 EXHAUST EF-5D E :12V SEF - 15 D-70 G lZ1 .@ ...... ~ FD 61~t t \lJ~~-2 90 , I / ~ D-70 F SC-l 36X10 o TRANSFER / GRILLE 1/ W/REBAR , C::=J._. 12] G 8110 81~ 61)2) SA-280 C-200 ~ I,Q ~ " 0110 &, .(7 F LS;J 86)2) B-0 8-300 010 8'~ o l....) i ffi ~ \ [Zl C-150 ~... ..ti7 - I 50 ~ C-l E '&~ OJ , - r-----, o h' ...aH. rQ5IT] 2OX36 PENN ~") ~: AIRETTE Vv/24' ~ I), ROOF CURB I ~ - - - _ ~ ~ REBAR ~ ROOF PENE I L- 20X36 I ' _~I 811~ TO '.' ' ; ROOF CAP Q 0 \U \0 l() \.() I I j J , I I , ! I :II \O~ ! ~( ---u J ^ " " ... "\ At-i)-4D HANG 'T iG'oo-\ TO P..,;..~ 3~ r;!~ I("i' ;1 L::f'.J J ~ &;J './ ~ ---/ -------------------------, , , , ,,, ~ '__~.:..1 '", 'I ~ J " " // ',// L. ~ '" E -0 co ~ CD o w :::a;;: o ~ u ~ Q) :2 S -<:t' 0-: o ~ m ~ V> w c LIJ ..J I- - l- t- w w ::r: (f) I C CI - Q. '- CO o 0'- eLL .- ,,+'u _COca 3.!:> mLL:r: EF-6D 6i1 ~ DUCTED DN 30 CFM 4'0 EXHAUST MA TCH LINE AREA D -....~~~~ ~A TCH U\lE AREA E ;. '1. " ." /' 1 ) ~ 30 CFM TO 4'0 EXHAUST TO (. o ..~ "'0' "'l'J ''--'" (/I..,: 58-I l/1 '-~'. ( I ,- \ / to ,__ .~ 5&16 h- ' 'AR~ " RES I N'-" I I r'lOOF OPENI~. i i 0 01l11Z) IZ) ,; 810 K ~i.. l:::J 6-240 )' ,.- \j.'. ~'/"' ~o &'0 , ; T US 50F SX4 GRlLLE 60 CFAA. DC .. UP TO ;~OOR MOUNTED GRtL, :?O X 36 ,~~ ..., I , I ; ! ! I ! . I I ! i ! I : ~ I u I ~ [') L;.; o a::- n.. '< ~I~ --r :t ulu I- t- ~ ~ :: I :: ~ I I I ..... --... ~~ -- --... I 24X24 LOUVER w \V/M.O.D 81 ~ BOTTOM @S' AFF ~I~ ~I---' T T o 0 I- I-- ~ 1< ~ ~ ", I-LSJ- - - I I I I I I I I E I AA ^ U-") I I ,\\1""'\ .... I I ~: I I o ~ L."') I J EXPOSED SPtRAL DUCT\\lORK PAINT TO MA TCH CEILlNGI EF-15D ,/- "-, .I I I I I I / '-; / 4 i I i f I I f \ REBAR ~ ROOF PENETR,,; TION \ ' \ ~': ....- EF-16D 'l U I ~ 8.~ 6 UP TITUS 50~- 12X4 GRILLE:..: 'N\SLEF ,IF ABOVE Du0R ~------: I , I I I I : MAU-l: I I I I I I I I I I I A -420 '-0 X o CD ~50 o ~12'~; x.~' l~ 0._ , .. A~O I ;->0.-.......) I U , .' 6X!~ -- -..... '" ~- - 30X24 KEh-1 ~ 21)l} 411~ Z'~ -:0) KEF . ........ A - 4 50 ~ 20X16\ 1211~ . .._ _.L __ _ . ....- 22X22 UP ~ TO KSF 4 22X A-500 A-500 I 2' ~ DN 121 \2) DN ~ 18X14 []JJSJ A 500 22X22 UP~ - TO KSF KSF 20X 16 ~ ! 20X I 6 1 ~ -~ .'''T- ;- KEF 102] E E A-480 A - 480 ~l ld \ O. UP TO 2ND LEVEL - ~ \S. - ~ \5;. 21~ " :=; I I I I I I I -~ 0.. ~ ~ i I~ ~ A -500 2OX10 TYP- A-450 24X24 ~ TYP - REBAR €' I RooF-TYP l 1210 24X24 TYPE SA UP TO SEF-13 NOTE; SEE DETAILS 2/1'.1\2,4 & 3/;\\2,4 (( EUH- I dJ " A - 4 50 ~ -\ \.-/ Rr 0: EF-ID ~ 4c~ 6"ttJ TO 6'>lS~ ROOF CAP , EF-2D 20XI2 E I 10',;>) W/BD' . TO ROOF CAP AHU-j D: ROUTE CONDENSA TE DRAIN TO riD IN CEILING SEE SHEET P2.4 C-210 8110 ~ C-210 ~ 'oJ 8'~ - - 0' X o C-2iO ~,~ - " r ...... '- ~ 0' EF-7D 611~ DUCTED DN r- q '-.../ 30 CFM TO 4'0 EXHAUST it t1 PtPtNG TOle 1411 Q:' w OJ ~ W .....l _G: ~ w > w 0 0::: CD ---l 0.:: .-l 0 4: , or u.. U1 0 Q:: W Z <( (/) 0 ~ <: en w~ w..> ~. w w ~ 0::: 0::: - 1") - - - ...") 1..., W VI 0> VI '- ......... ......... OJ ro U) o c Z ~ :::::- N ~ 0 0 ---,-.-. ~ w co ~ ~ z ~ G: o <( u ~ ~ ~ ~ - z Q to- fb IX U i./) w o - o z - w r-- <( o ~ 5 I ro ~~i 1 I 1'1'2.5 OOJ P2.14 M'2.l~ I P2.18 P2.5 ~5 P2~ FP2.~ . I uru ~.4 M2A .... M2.~ P2.4 P2.13 I [Q P2.l2 ~ P2.l1 (( - FP23 ~ ~.8 ..,;: I JE I ~::~ 10) ~... ~., M23 M2.8 P2.3 P2.8 :::I ::I i'122 i'12.l P22 F2.1 I l&] F2.1~ A P2.lS R=>2 .I I F=P2b 1"12.1 t12b P:?.1 P2b WlRE MESH COMBUSTIBLE MA TERtAL "" " Floor Plan Hvac 22 GAUGE SHEET MET AL IN MIN, CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLE MA TERIAL M!NERAL WOOL SA TTS First - ~ Buildinq ~ -------~~-- - --- SCALE: 1/8";: 0'1 .' . I- W W :r (,I) M2.4 I -=!1 EBL JOB NORTH KEYPLAN @GREASE DUCT ENCLOSURE DET AIL NO SCALE .~. 11 l I .... a.. ~ <( l- (/) f f f f i i t Ul L ~ 0\ . I . I- o UJ ..., o 'CC a.. I o >- cr Zw I- ~ ~ z ~5 5~jowl-oQ ~:rL...~wi~m~~~o zsoo=.,I(I)WOI-<_t- Wz(/)o.~ >t-oU~z ->-1- >-z w~a:l""\ ::::.: . W .wo>-"") W::.:: .,.t .." ~ .-: (., 1:' W 0 a. I- uZ~O~~(.)I~>- ....: 8Q~(/)ci.~I-a.....J~~o .,I-O::"u.;zoowa:::~""w~ --Ol-x -I-o~ -I-c.. Q~(Ill-20~..;(~~~~o l-n~ wU l-k..~cz vC UJ~w~n::O() OZ ~Ct:wcr--lcrcc WI- 2 a:::~~~o.."OZ:>-o..::>w< ~~~C)Z<(cra:::Z(j)~3~ Z I-zQ c...~<(I-"'" ~ o8~~~. ~~ ~<~O~ Ul-<(Wv~ O:r::'Z$2 wl-Quwa:::~:iI....I-~<((/'j V)~Z58:w 8:Zw~O wQ::"-C: J:t->- 4"C::'Ow J:w~W~I-O:Z(/)I~14~ l-Q..OCllOOZ<C::)I-Iu...o.. j I ! t J \ , ;1 f r : I L i f ~ t . ~ E '"tJ CO ~ t:< ...J~ .....a Up:: ~o ~ ~'-' -< ~ 0< Ct:~ ~cn N~ ~c.; Z~ ~< == ~ i.r w gg ::) Z w Ue: ~ W w :r (/j GQ S g ~ ~ ~ ! ~ N ~ N V) a) ~ ~ ~ 0 ~ c.o~ Q,) ~'-"'" ~ N,,---... .~ 0 X ~ 1'04: ~ ~ ~~ ~ c..') ci ~ ~ 0 0 ~ Q:::' w ~ <t c) {;; > -0 .~ W W 0 ~ (W -.J 0 -.J 0 ~ :J ~ro ~ ON> I ~ ffiNwN ~ wxoU) Q.) Y: 0 Z; (J) ~ Qm~-;, ~ 0 .~o .g oq~~ Q.,. ~ 0... .--J '-....../ - .-... - ~ w oq-~ ~ O\::J ~ ~ Z ::E CX) W ~ \0 ~ ~~ u >- en o w o ~ u )0- m ~ < 0:: a >- m z S? V) w a W -I I- - l- I- W w :I: en M9.4 ~ ~ ~ ~ Z Z ~ ~~U O<~ UdZ ~~~ ZZ~ O~~ ~OU ~~~ ~ 0 ~ ("1:- r- ,. ~ Z .~ r:rl ~ ~~~ - . AI' . U Z ~ -'\ o Z t--( Z Z < ~ 0.. Z o ....... rn ~. u ~ 0:: 0.. " co - - . .... G) C (.) . > :I: d ~ . 60 uJ:Z~ mZ~ O'}z ...... ~ 0~~ ~~~ ~ j w ~ ~ u) 0) '- $? '- N Z i) CiJ > w 0::: IV) z o t= Q Q () VI w o o z W I- <: o ~ I ~ MAIN AIR SUPPLY CENTRAL PLANT TO DISTRIBUTION THROUGH-OUT BUiLDING. PRESSURE GAUGE DUAL PRV'S ram Condenser Water Chemical Feed Unit NO SCALE GL.08E VALVE BY-PASS AUTOMA TIC DRAIN TRAP EXTEND TO FLOOR DRAIN ram Dia CHtLLED WA TER PUMP THERMOMETER Chilled/Condenser Water Pum SCHEMATiC ONLY \ ~ GAUGE ~- ~HECK -1- VALVE i f I I I I DRAIN GATE VALVE ~~- Air Com~essor Control Dia ----- SCHEMA TIC ONLY GATE VALVE PRESSURE GAUGE 314M j I I I ~ :) f- W 0:: ~ I I I I l I I I I I I I I I I c::::::::::i ~ ~ PUMP ~ STRAINER ~ REFRIGERA TED AIR DRYER 105 CFM, 1/5 HP n GATE VAVLE 4. THICK HOUSEKEEPING PAD ['Ii !: I y! II ! DUPLEX AIR COMPRESSOR 80 GAL. MIN. RECEiVER TANK. 2 HP COMPRESSOR (Mu\J.), PROVIDE AL TERNA T OR AIR INT AKE FILTER, MUFFLER, AND NEOPRENE AND CORK ISOLA TORS, AGtT A TOR R8JEF VALVE AND PIPING - 50 GALLON TANK ___ 112M TO CONDENSER WA TER PIPING - , ..-r---: I , I I COOlING T O\VER L_ ~ r , .. '~ SUPPLY "0 : 1- THERMOST M MOTOR OPERA TED DiVERTING BUTTERFL Y VAL VES --, I COOLING TOWER iCVVR I / I T 7 I " ~cJ I I I , I Feed and Auto. Bleed Water S stem DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE S\A~TCH TO PROVE FLOW' SOLENOID BLEED VALVE I I U , , t \ CONTROL UN:T \ \VALL MOUNT I I I L-- CY\'S I CONDENSER / WATER PUMP I I / , I -9 I J~IU I I ~J I r---, i CONDENSER WA TER PUI\\P DIFFERENT~AL PRESSUR[: SWITCH TO PROVE FLOW LE':'-D/LAG SVVlTCH FOR CHILLER SELECTION TO OPEN SIGHT DRAIN r- VENT TO AT MCSF'HERE ThRU WALL A T A MIN. IOI-OM ABOVE GRADE, SUPPORT P!PE SO Tf-iERE IS NO LOAD ON BURSTING DISC FLEXIBLE CONNECTION, 12M LONG FULL SIZE CON.'\lECTION ON CKlLER BUT IN NO CASE LESS THAN 2'. DIRT LEG \V\TH SCREWED CA.P, 6M LONG 6- MINIl\\UM CHiLLER UNIT D ~ IL u CL,O::: ~I~ -:tlo ~f- q:;lo b-:ii- 27 LlJ "- ocr z2 Ow ua:: , :2 Schematic-Proportiona S stem For Condenser - ChiLLER NO CHLLER NO SECONDARY PUMP SECONDARY PUMP i P SYSTEM Dia TO SYSTEM "~ ef FROM Ii PRIMARY PUMP \\ C ~filJH CH \\W I CH I 0-------1 t y, -Ic~ l~ l~ ~F-ilJ I ~i ~ --- / J-- -- CHRD Re n/ I I , ~ /1 [II ~ I~ ~ I er Contro -----i erant ~CHR /~ ~l-.-J \-.-J TIMER-WALL MOUNT INJECT DOWNSTREAM FROM CONDUCTIVITY CELL PUMP ON CHEMICAL FEED UNIT WA TER-METER-CONTRACTOR ASSEMBL y, INSTALL 4' OM ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. LEA VING WA TER THERMOSTAT TO CO\lTROL CHILLER INLET VANES - SCHEMA T!C ONL 1 Refri SCH8'1ATIC ONLY MASTER RETURN WATER THERMOST A T FOR STAGING OF CH1LLER OPERA TION i II Ch -- 1 0- ~ c( l- (/) o >- ffi Zw ...A: 'J: ~.J cr~..Jo 1-8~ V>~k-*w~~~ot-~o ~3:oo::~~~o~<(f!J1- ~~(J)o.:~ >I-(.)O~z ~vf~t.JO~g>-~~~~ oz~5~1- ~~>-z< . o Q ::'> Vl cS "erO t- a.. -' l.oJ ~ <.) zt~~z~ ~o:~r-lt~_ s~~I-~o~<~~i~~ ()o w<tB~o;:O() 8~ ~~~~a:~S~ ~~ ~ ~~ .oz<~tr~e,~3o: z I-zQw ~<t-t- 08o:<~S1~z~<(;:;:o~ ()l-<:wv~ ct:oJ:,.zs;.? I- Cl.-g We: ~::t~ t- ~ < (/) ~~~~~~1->-8~~~S I-~~~~~~~~~~~~ - I <3 ~ - ~0 g ~ 0) ~ ~ O)Z ~ 4: 00: ~ \::::/ ~ i ~ ~ w ~ I iI,) s ~ ~ ~ ~ I ~ ~ Ci:} co ~ ~ ~ 0 ";..,) (Q~ ~ ~'-" ...... N,,-..... ..~ 0 x ~ n<! ~ u... ~ <('-" ~ C) ... ~ ~ 0 0 ~ 0:::: w Q.j < (.') ~ > ...0 .~ W W 0 ~ ~ --l 0 -.-J 0 ~ :J ---l co ~ ON> I .. CDNWN co U<.O ~ ~oxzm ~ - w E a.. CD CY -:; d oo~o ~ O'""'-V ~ ~ 0... ..-J ~ .- ~ ~< ...J.-...c ~c..? ~~ t- ~~ 0 Q~ L1J < ~ ..., 0< 0 ~~ a: >c ....,.J 0.. N::J ....c.~ ~~ JI I Q.. ~~ ~~ Z~ ,~Z <~~ ~UO r#j ~~Z OZ~ ~oE: <~Z ~~ U~ ~~ ~~ . U Z ~ ~ ~ Z ...... Z Z < ~ ~ Z o ~ r.n ...... u ~ 0:: ~ VTR~ ~. ... l2' VTR VTR ilL FD I . I I \ , -'- \ \ \ \ 21 SEE 1 /P2.4 FOR CONTlNUA TION .J\~ r")~ "'" y .. ~"\~ tj; LAVl ~~. 4-~ 31 I JjL I I . I I i ,..,. ,- I I I I I i I I . I I , 1 I JiL I I I I I 2M : I I I I I I I I I I I , I I I I . 1 I we L-31 FD VO~ _ ,,'" llo o~' , " - \ I' ~;p.'\~ : ' _ 9:-.'c. ~'\~" I .... ...~ca 12D ........ ",'" I ...,' I ...... I ",'" I ...... ... I ......... I ,,'" I ...... I ........'" I I , I I I LAV : a~ we I -3. po. , .... , ........ . .... ,")11 .... ,- .... I I I I I I I 1 I I ~ I I \NC I I ll~ )1 I I , , I I I I I 2': I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 21 LAV EWC FD SEE l/P2.4 FOR CONTNUA TION ~ ('0 S' / //:) ~rtvu ~ -t I:: ~ ?fa OJ? ~ <if" ')to ... P?- FD ~. r 21 VTR ~ ..... pp- ." -- ~ P-2t-1 VTR~ F~ -r21 "' .I FD 7- :/ -nFD - ,: 4. 2' VTR . 2!! VTR "I ... FD---i I y4' -- "^I FDl I I I f I 1 FD~ 4 \ ~ r-4U , PP-l ~ VTR FD - VTR ) "- '\ , "- J ir--.. .......... 0/ /" ~ NOTE: SEE Kll ("':HEN DRA\\'INGS ~ '2 i - K2.6 At\':D St-iEET P9. I >- ')K FURTHER L;'..:.FORN\A TION - P-2 VTR ~" . I A' P-7. ,/21 1 . .~. 2'1' '\ ~.~ p_0 -( , L :\_1 "" > 3" ' r-. '\ L1 '\ ...j , , o 2" P- FD viE-NT ;::D . / I I ~ I ~ I: -3"- ! r"":"-'-- 2' v T R I'" I j I : ~. I > \ ~ 1: -3'~FD _ '1M \ I I : .... \0 -I.... - -: I I I I FD : ~:--?- ; 1/ -~ ~TR l P-9 J;L I ) ! / T -1 ""'I I -:) Leo I ! F~ I '-' . 31 ~_: PROV(OE hUB DRAlf\. ? VTR...~ r ABOVE CEILING ~'JR ~ CONDENSATE 41 1. - P-2 I '. I. 1 P;2 P-I I 4=0 J.-2l -. ---------- ---- - . I : -- --FD-; I . 31 .. I 3- I 41 I I. 'Ii VTR ..., I I I .... 4"", ~~3' ~~, ! I 0 -3'~i a- 3' 3' ----rr ~j '" FS F~ .' 4. / 4- i'~ 3. .... ~' : 3" 4. , ~. ..' 'jl - v hD ~, ,~ I :----=tc-c co..~t -- 11 - FS HD t' - - 31 1 Alo ... HD ~ - 3'----1 31 I 3' I . FD 4' t=[l rs 1---'- ~ . ... / 3' AU ... A ... I~'I - .:) , '-' *,' /.... t AI ... f- J1 ,,~ 41 , co FD. 4' A ... ~"+~ FD I 4' ( I I /"MASTER TRAP I CO'\c~C~~ I I : : ...r;l 4' VTR : : ) .Y.L 2" VTR I - - - - .. - -; I I ) ------..--_/ PROVIDE OFFSET ABOVE / CEILING TO CLEAR PARAPET 2' r FS ( 2' I f FS J, .J';L 2' VTR - I;) 1/ _, I I FS ,1 P-2 ; ~. p- .... .... .. D023 DRAINS FOR CONDENSA TE PROVIDE HUB DRAIN ABOVE CEILING FOR CONDENSA TE - Q Restroom co co - VENT 3000 GAL GREASE TRAP 3000 GAL GREASE TRAP NO SCAl F 0\ P2.4 I I I ! co co CO / / 4"'b ~ 1/2' ~ BAR LIFTING HANDLE, TYP, OF (4} Restroom D043 & D044 NO SCAI ;:: 30l \ \ Restroom D045 - NO ~l t= I -~ I L ~~\ I: ~ /1 I . I I I I I I I I , I I I I I I I I I 1 LAV~ 21 ~VC ~ L-3. ~ )( )( y l 2IVTR) " " " " , " 2'V . -/ 3'~ L'VTRFOR / I DiSPOSER. ~ ' 4 - : I I .... ~ o dJ - ..., L ~ 0' , m W ~ \.) L...- X U >- a: z S ..;f, e:= c >- CD Z ~ vi ~ W ...I I- - t- I- w w J: (fJ t c ca - Q. '- cg~ 0'- C cu. - - ...Q .,,+'t: _co&:: -L:J ::J__ mu.a.. ~ l:;:J, > w er: ,.., '7' Q t-- C- ~ U (/) Lw o - o z .::. . .. ... '. ... ~, , 1 I I _, LFD PP-j 4,' ~ _-1..-~: l' .. -I , -~-- - -- --. MA TCH Lll\E AREA D ~~.,....~~ ,.. .. '.'. . ",I, ~:~~ L~~)< A~.E , . p~"-- . ....;~ Fe.) I -\,/ 2'VTR ) FD / / / / ALL FLOOR DRAINS SHALL BE 3M, ALL VENTS FOR FLOOR DRAINS SHALL BE 2~ SEE P2,S FOR CONTINUA TIO[\; 148 DFU, P-2 r41 ~ P-2 AI ... FD v 2U TIE-IN VENTS FOR ONE VTR 38 '" . P-2 ~3'~ p-j' 4'1b co " -'/f'"~ .- Plumbing - -. --- ----- Plan - - -~----- --- -- - - ;-4 T ~ Floor _. ...- First - - ---- -.... - r-41 i -e Buildin D - - - - --- ~--- ..--- --, ----'-_.- -- SCALE: 1/8" :;; 11 - ~ co_\. 3/8' CHECKERED STEEL COVER PlA TES GRADE ~ ~.,~ ~ --- ~~~~ ~~~ ~~ ~SlEEVE AND CAULK ~ WA TERTIGHT ~ ~4' CAST IRON OUTLET .., [ '., )( ~ ~rIT r 8,2 OPEN LEVEL" \ PLAN VIEW 61 - [)lA. BAR FL lJ[) . /21 r OPEN ,2M L T J a::: w en ~ U~ - - -- 0:: w en ~ :::) Z w d u- o <t U a:: w ~ ~~! ---- P2.4 ~ .:Ji ........ ~ ........ '" o l0 0". ........ Q) o ;:. o ..'I VI ........ Q) o " ,...... W t-- <: o l() q' ~~ . .. [JQ] ~.4 :::t :::I ,~ ~, .. - . "!' ... ." -, . . . i - dtj' rb~ .1 ..- ~ 6~ t- - APPL Y (2) COA TS OF RED LEAD PAINT TO ALL SURFACES OF STEEL COVER PlA TE AND Af\.IGLES, 61 GRADE 41 CAST ~ IRON INlET.- SlEEVE A NO CAUlK WA TERTIGHT. pp- =r ) Ie ul< 8 ~ a.. < ~I~ 010 t- t- ~I~ ~ I I 41 I ~ 7 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r~~~~~~~~ I SEE P2.5 FOR ~, ~ CONTU\'lJA TION , ~Iw SEEP2.5FOR, 5 ~ CONTiNUA TION I I rLU o u~ , I- I-UJ < < Q::: ~ I~~ ,. ~ '___J " " " ',/ HiNGES (4} M2.4 .... H2. ~ P2.4 P2.l3 rn P:2. ..!.I2 ~ P2.ll . l FP23 I \.l",.. I Ff'>:!b I i123 r12.8 P23 P2.8 b . (T) 3/811 0 REINFQRING RODS RUN 121 Q,CI BOTH WAYS IN WALLS AND BOTTOM. 1 I l'12.5 rnJ' P2.14 r-12.1~ F2.l. e P2.5 FP:25 F2.~ R=>2.S ~ 1 .:: [ IB311 ~::~ I I n"\ I FP2_ ~ i=P2.1 i'121 1'12 .l P22 P2.1 T .:: ~ P2.l~ I ~ P2.15 Dl FP2.1 ~b M2.1 M2b F2.l P2b ELEV A TION it Grease Trap~eta NO 5C.ALE '---'I I- W W :r: (/) EB JOB NORTH KEY PLAN ...